JP7829878B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machines (commonly referred to as "pachislo machines").

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a function (a "complete function") that detects when the amount of prize currency a player has received has exceeded the amount of currency consumed during gameplay, and then stops the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-191364

However, since the effects performed during gameplay are selected by lottery from a predefined set of effects, there was a risk that effects that did not suit the player's preferences or did not align with the player's wishes may be performed, potentially leading to a decrease in the enjoyment of the game .

This invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game .

A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A means for executing a performance that can perform a first specific performance and a second specific performance,
An effect setting means that can change and set the ratio at which the first specific effect is executed and the ratio at which the second specific effect is executed by the effect execution means,
A setting operation means that allows operations to be performed to execute the change settings by the aforementioned performance setting means,
In a situation where the rate at which the first specific performance is executed is changed by the performance setting means, a setting information disclosure means provides a display that makes it possible to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is executed has been changed,
In a situation where the execution rate of the first specific performance is changed by the performance setting means, the setting information ambiguity means displays an ambiguous indication that allows the user to understand that there is a performance whose execution rate has been changed by the performance setting means, without explicitly indicating which performance the execution rate of has been changed by the performance setting means.
A warning display means that displays a warning when a predetermined abnormality occurs,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned setting information ambiguation means enables the display of the ambiguous display in an area that does not overlap with the pattern.
The display that allows us to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is performed has been changed is provided on a display device that displays the changing symbols by the symbol display means during the symbol change in which the symbols are changing, and the symbols displayed on the display device during the symbol change are displayed in a visible state.
The warning display means displays the warning display in a position that does not overlap with a display that allows the user to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is executed during the pattern change when the pattern is changing has been changed.
When the rate at which the second specific performance is executed is changed by the performance setting means, the motion performance in which the movable body moves is more likely to be executed, and when a specific condition is met in the state in which the rate at which the second specific performance is executed is changed, the motion performance is executed.
It has a special setting operation means that allows for setting changes different from the settings changed by the aforementioned performance setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the change settings made by the special setting operation means can be performed both during the symbol change when the symbols are changing and during the symbol change standby when the symbols are not changing.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the above problems can be solved and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed .

This is a front view of a pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the design. This is a right-side view of a pachinko machine. This is a plan view of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a front view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the back. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front, with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the front after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the rear after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a front view showing an example of a game board. This is a perspective view of the game board from the front right. This is a perspective view of the game board from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from the back. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, showing its main components separated and viewed from the rear. This is a front view of the game board, showing the front components and front unit cut approximately in the center in the front-to-back direction within the game area. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of a pachinko machine. This diagram shows the configuration within the main control MPU. This diagram shows the configuration of the arithmetic circuit within the main control MPU. This diagram shows the configuration of a serial communication circuit. This is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. This flowchart shows the continuation of the initialization process shown in Figure 21. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt handling. This is a flowchart showing an example of the calculation and display process for the bonus item ratio. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the calculation and display process for the bonus item ratio. This figure shows an example of the arrangement of programs (code) and data stored in the ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. This diagram shows the structure of the data stored in the area used for calculating the payout ratio. This is a diagram showing the configuration of the bonus item ratio indicator. This diagram shows the configuration of the driver circuit. This is a timing diagram of the data input to the driver circuit. This figure shows an example of the main control board's implementation. This diagram shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the bonus ratio indicator. This is a diagram showing the load register selection table. This is a diagram showing the character generator decode table. This is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit. This figure shows an example of how the payout ratio is displayed. This figure shows an example of how the payout ratio is displayed. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of a pachinko machine. This flowchart shows an example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows an example of the base calculation and display process. This figure shows an example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. This figure shows another example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. This figure shows another example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. This figure shows another example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. This figure shows another example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation area update process. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This diagram shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. This is a front view showing another example of a game board. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation area update process. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the peripheral control unit is powered on. A flowchart showing an example of V-blank interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing. This flowchart shows an example of the display selection process. This figure shows an example of a display selection table. This figure shows an example of a display selection table. This figure shows an example of a display selection table. This figure shows an example of a display selection table. This figure shows an example of a display selection table. This figure shows an example of a display screen. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the base calculation and display process. This flowchart shows an example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows another example of the process for updating the base calculation area. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt handling. This is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation process 1. This is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation process 2. This flowchart shows another example of base calculation process 1. This flowchart shows another example of base calculation process 2. This flowchart shows another example of timer interrupt handling. This is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation process 3. This is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation process 4. This flowchart shows an example of the base display process. This flowchart shows another example of base calculation process 3. This flowchart shows another example of base calculation process 4. This flowchart shows another example of the base display process. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of a pachinko machine. This diagram shows the arrangement of the frame-side ball ejection sensors. This diagram shows the arrangement of the frame-side ball ejection sensors. This diagram shows an example of the connection between the ball ejection sensor and the main control board. This is a front view showing an example of a game board. This diagram shows the configuration of the main control input circuit. This figure shows an example of the main control board's implementation. This figure shows an example of the main control board's implementation. This figure shows an example of the main control board's implementation. This diagram shows an example configuration of the main control I/O port. This diagram shows an example configuration of the main control I/O port. Figure 97 is a timing diagram showing an example configuration of the main control I/O port. This diagram shows the changes in the state (interval) involved in calculating the base value. This figure shows examples of characters displayed on the base indicator. This is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. This flowchart shows the continuation of the initialization process shown in Figure 101. This diagram shows the configuration of the base calculation area. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt handling. This flowchart shows an example of the base calculation process. Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the base calculation process. This flowchart shows an example of the base display data generation process. This flowchart shows a modified example of the base calculation process. This diagram shows the base calculation when the game state changes. This diagram shows the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311, specifically the memory area configuration. This figure shows an example of a program for timer interrupt handling and base calculation handling. This figure shows an example of a program for timer interrupt handling and base calculation handling. This figure shows an example of the arrangement of programs (code) and data stored in the ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. This figure shows an example of game history recorded in a gaming machine. This figure shows an example of an error screen. This figure shows an example of an error signal. The figure shows an example of an error. The figure shows an example of an error. The figure shows an example of an error. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the peripheral control unit is powered on. This figure shows an example of a table for setting conditions for recording game history. This is a diagram showing an example of a game history. This is a block diagram showing the peripheral control board and its surrounding components. This is a diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM. This figure shows a modified example of the game history recording conditions setting table. This is a diagram showing a modified example of a game history. This is a diagram showing a modified example of a game history. This is a diagram showing a modified example of a game history. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of a pachinko machine that has a settings unit. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine with a settings section, seen from the rear with the doors open. Figure 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 130, with the doors closed, as seen from the rear. This is a diagram showing the setting section of a pachinko machine, as shown in Figure 130. This is a diagram showing a modified version of the settings section. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of a pachinko machine that has a settings unit. This is a rear view of a game board with a settings section. Figure 135 is a rear view perspective of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown. This is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. This flowchart shows an example of the settings change process and the settings display process. This flowchart shows an example of the settings change process and the settings display process. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for controlling special symbols and special electric features. This is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for waiting for special symbol changes. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for setting special symbol variation patterns. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for determining the selection of a variation pattern. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is normal and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is normal and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the deviation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is in a time-saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is in a time-saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. This figure shows an example of the main control board's implementation. This figure shows another example of the main control board's implementation. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A' in Figure 151(B). This figure shows another example of the main control board's implementation. This is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt handling. This flowchart shows an example of the configuration confirmation process. This is a timing diagram for security signals. This flowchart shows another example of the initialization process, 4942. This flowchart shows another example of the configuration confirmation process. This is another example of a variation pattern table. This is an example of a final reserved color table. This is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1, when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in Figure 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table in Figure 161. This is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3, when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in Figure 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table in Figure 161. This is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5, when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in Figure 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table in Figure 161. This is an example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a dialogue presentation table. This is another example of a preview presentation table. This is an example of a setting suggestion presentation table. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the general outline of the setting suggestion effect. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a setting hint effect used as a pre-announcement effect. (A) is an example of a performance restriction table when the settings are being checked, and (B) is an example of a performance restriction table when an error occurs. This is an example of a table showing the restrictions on the new prize-winning animations. This is an example of processing table 1. This is an example of processing table 2. This is an example of processing table 3. This is an example of processing table 4. This is an example of processing table 5. This is an example of a processing table 6. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the performance display process in Example 1. This is a diagram showing the notification method in alternative example 1. This is a diagram showing the notification priority in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the main processing on the primary control side in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the RAM initialization process in case of an error in another example (Example 1). This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the setup process for Example 1. This is a flowchart of the setting display process for Example 1. This is a flowchart of the power-on setup process in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the random number update process 2 in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 1. This is a flowchart of the switch input processing 1 in alternative example 1. Figure 198(A) shows an example configuration of the switch entry information data table in Alternative Example 1, and Figure 198(B) shows an example configuration of the switch input level/edge data area in Alternative Example 1. Figure 199(A) shows another configuration example of the switch entry information data table in Alternative Example 1, and Figure 199(B) shows another configuration example of the switch input level/edge data area in Alternative Example 1. This is a flowchart of the setting change/confirmation process in Example 1. Figure 201(A) shows an example configuration of the switch input port 2 in Alternative Example 1, and Figure 201(B) shows an example configuration of the setting state management area in Alternative Example 1. Figure 202(A) shows an example configuration of the power-on operation command in Another Example 1, Figure 202(B) shows an example configuration of the power-on status command in Another Example 1, Figure 202(C) shows an example configuration of the power-on restore destination command in Another Example 1, and Figure 202(D) shows an example configuration of the setting value command in Another Example 1. This diagram shows the command transmission order for Example 1. This diagram shows the state transitions of the setting state management area in Example 1. This is a time chart showing the start and end of the settings change mode in Example 1. This is a time chart showing the start and end of the settings confirmation mode in Example 1. This is a time chart showing the start and end of the settings change mode in Example 1. This is a time chart showing the start and end of the settings change mode in Example 1. This is a time chart showing the start and end of the settings change mode in Example 1. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot determination threshold table in Example 1. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot determination threshold table in Example 1. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot determination threshold table in Example 1. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in another example 2. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in another example 2. This is a flowchart of the setting value verification process in Example 2. This is a flowchart for the RAM check process outside the game area when the power is turned on, as in another example 2. This is a flowchart for handling RAM abnormalities outside the game area in another example (Example 2). This is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the used area in another example 2. This is a flowchart of the power-on setup process in another example, 2. Figure 220(A) shows an example configuration of the setting state management area in Another Example 2, Figure 220(B) shows an example configuration of the power-on operation command in Another Example 2, and Figure 220(C) shows an example configuration of the power-on state command in Another Example 2. This is a flowchart of the main processing on the primary control side in alternative example 2. This is a flowchart of the power-off process in another example 2. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt handling in alternative example 2. This is a flowchart of the setup process for Example 2. This is a flowchart of the setting display process for another example 2. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 3. This is a flowchart of the power-on process in Example 3. This is a flowchart of the main processing on the primary control side in alternative example 3. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change process in Example 3. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay in Example 3. This is a flowchart of the main processing on the primary control side in alternative example 4. This is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change process in Example 4. This is a disassembled perspective view of the front unit of the game board, showing the center mechanism and the front display unit as viewed from the front. This is a front view showing the front display unit with the first image illuminated. This is a front view showing the display unit with the second image illuminated. This is a diagram showing the structure of a light guide plate. This diagram shows the structure of the reflective section provided on the light guide plate. This diagram shows the structure of the reflective section provided on the light guide plate. This is a diagram showing the structure of a light guide plate. This diagram shows examples of images projected onto a light guide plate. This diagram shows examples of images projected onto a light guide plate. This diagram shows examples of images projected onto a light guide plate. This is a diagram showing the structure of a light guide plate. This diagram shows examples of images projected onto a light guide plate. This diagram illustrates how a pattern is displayed in a two-dimensional view by a light guide plate. This diagram illustrates how a pattern is displayed in a two-dimensional view by a light guide plate. This diagram illustrates how a stereoscopic image is displayed using a light guide plate. This diagram illustrates how a stereoscopic image is displayed using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This figure shows an example of a visual display using a light guide plate. This is a circuit diagram of the synchronous serial interface surrounding the main control board. This is a circuit diagram showing the connection between a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit and an LED. This diagram shows the arrangement of the main control MPU and peripheral components on the main control board. This diagram shows the port arrangement in the main control MPU. This diagram shows the timing of data output and acquisition using synchronous serial signals. This figure shows an alternative arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. This figure shows an alternative arrangement of the main control board in the main control board box. This is a perspective view of slot machines. This is a perspective view of a slot machine with the front panel open. This is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operating components installed in a slot machine. This figure shows the memory area provided by ROM, RAM, etc., in this embodiment, and details of the ROM area. This figure shows the details of the RAM area in this embodiment. This diagram shows the structure of the data stored in the area used for calculating the payout ratio. This figure shows the details of the parameter information setting area in this embodiment. This flowchart explains the procedure for the system reset startup process that is performed when a slot machine is reset. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for periodic processing. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the information signal N output. This is a flowchart of the initialization process in alternative example 5. This flowchart shows the continuation of the initialization process in alternative example 5 of Figure 274. This is a flowchart for the timer interrupt processing in alternative example 5. This diagram illustrates an example of prize information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. This diagram illustrates an example of a table that defines the number of prize balls awarded for each winning slot. This diagram shows an example of including the number of prize balls in the prize information. (A) shows the case where the number of prizes is tallied for each general prize slot, and (B) shows the case where the number of prizes is tallied by aggregating the general prize slots. This figure shows an example of how award information is memorized in order of awards received. This diagram shows an example of game information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board, where (A) is an example of winning information and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. This figure shows another example of game information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. This diagram illustrates the communication between the main control board and the ball information control board during the startup of a gaming machine. This figure shows a scenario in communication between the main control board and the ball information control board where there is no response from the ball information control board to a notification from the main control board. This figure shows another example of a situation in communication between the main control board and the ball information control board where the ball information control board does not respond to a notification from the main control board. This figure shows an example of a memory area allocated to the main control's built-in RAM in game control. This figure shows an example of a data area included in the input information storage area, where (A) is the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and (B) is the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). This flowchart shows an example of a switch input processing procedure for acquiring information detected by sensors and other devices installed in a gaming machine. This is a flowchart explaining the procedure for opening the grand prize slot. This is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball enters the grand prize slot. This is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball enters the second starting gate. This is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball enters the probability variation area (V-AT area). This diagram illustrates the outline of the bit transfer procedure. This figure shows an example of the structure of instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction. This figure shows an example of the types of bit transfer instructions. This figure shows an example flowchart of a process that uses the bit transfer instruction "RBT". This figure shows an example of a program corresponding to a flowchart (Figure 296) of a process using the bit transfer instruction "RBT". This is an example of a flowchart that subroutines the index creation process, where (A) is the process of the caller of the index creation process, and (B) is the subroutine-based index creation process. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a table structure. This diagram illustrates the detailed procedure for bit transfer instructions, specifically illustrating the case of reading a single piece of data from a referenced table. This diagram illustrates the detailed procedure for bit transfer instructions, specifically showing how to read data sequentially from a referenced table. This diagram illustrates bit transfer instructions for data larger than one byte; (A) shows the reference table, and (B) illustrates the procedure. This diagram illustrates an example of the application of bit transfer instructions. (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between variation patterns and their corresponding ranges, (B) is program code showing a variation pattern table, and (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of the pre-compression and post-compression tables for the variation pattern table corresponding to (B). This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern. This figure shows an example of a program for selecting a variation pattern. This figure shows an example of an address map illustrating the configuration of the memory area of the main control board of a gaming machine. This figure shows an example of a program implementation of a processing address table, which stores the addresses of processing (subroutines). This figure shows an example of program code that defines an index to identify the processing stored at an address in the processing address table. This diagram illustrates the operation when the INVD instruction is executed. This diagram illustrates the procedure for identifying the process to be called by the INVD instruction. This figure shows an example program for port reading (PORT_RD). This figure shows an example program for the data setting process (DAT_SET). This figure shows an example program for the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). This figure shows an example program for the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). This figure shows an example program for a 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL). This figure shows example programs for the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET). This figure shows an example program for output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1). This figure shows an example program for output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2). This figure shows an example program for output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET). This figure shows an example program for the variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). This figure shows an example program for the fraud notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET). This figure shows an example program for data retrieval processing (HLA_SRCH). This figure shows an example program for the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL). This figure shows an example program for SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA). This diagram shows excerpts from a program that calls processing using the INVS instruction. (A) is an excerpt of the program that calls the solenoid drive processing and motor drive processing, (B) is an example program (partial) of the solenoid drive processing, and (C) is an example program (partial) of the motor drive processing. This is a diagram illustrating the procedure for the INVI instruction. This diagram shows an example of a PSW (Psychiatric Social Worker), with (A) representing the PSW's structure and (B) providing a description of each component. This diagram shows an example program illustrating the arrangement of processes called by the INVI instruction. (A) shows an example program for the area where the process is read from, and (B) shows an example program for the actual process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing using various processing call commands. This flowchart shows the procedure for processing when the game stops during timer interrupt processing. This is an example of program code for handling the game stoppage process in timer interrupt handling. This figure shows an example of a memory map of the program/data area within the ROM region of the main control board of a gaming machine. This figure shows an example of program code for the variable pattern selection process (Hp_select). This figure shows an example of an implementation diagram of the main control board of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a block diagram of the configuration for performing SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the operating modes of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the configuration of various registers for setting up SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), and (C) is prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3). This is a time chart showing the state of the gaming machine of this embodiment from the time it is initialized until it can start SPI communication. This diagram illustrates the configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) in this embodiment. This is a circuit diagram focusing on the configuration for receiving signals via SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows an example of a switch input processing procedure for acquiring information detected by sensors and the like in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the program code for the switch input processing in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 342. This is an example of program code for the setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) used when starting to receive input signals via SPI communication in this embodiment. This is an example of program code for the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) used when initializing the SPI communication circuit of this embodiment. This figure illustrates an example of SPI switch input information data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the area for storing level data and edge data in this embodiment. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for the SPI double-reading process (TWICE_SPI) in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the program code for the SPI double-reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 348. This flowchart shows the procedure for creating level edge data according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the program code for the level edge data creation process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 350. This is a time chart showing the process from the start of the switch input processing in this embodiment to the completion of data transmission via SPI communication, in chronological order. This is a time chart showing the process in the switch input processing of this embodiment, from the completion of data transmission via SPI communication to the start of the switch input processing with the next timer interrupt, in chronological order. This flowchart shows the procedure for the game-play-ready processing performed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the program code for the game-playing process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 354. This diagram shows an example of a circuit diagram extracted from the configuration of the gaming machine of this embodiment, showing the input of signals from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the firing stop switch (firing stop button) to the main control MPU. This flowchart shows the procedure for the switch-related control processing in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the data structure of the history area creation data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the history area creation data in this embodiment. This diagram shows the configuration of the data area, which stores the signals input to the main control MPU 1311 in this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for creating history monitoring switch data in this embodiment. This is an example of program code for the history monitoring switch data creation process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 361. This diagram illustrates the process for creating the history monitoring switch data in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the switch history command transmission determination data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of switch history command transmission determination data corresponding to the input edge data of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining whether to send a switch history command in this embodiment. This is an example of the program code for the switch history command transmission determination process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 367. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the internal function registers of the main control MPU in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the random clock error history area creation data stored in the internal function register of the main control MPU of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment to an internal function register (random clock error). This diagram illustrates the data structure of the switch pass command data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of switch pass command data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of switch address data in this embodiment. This figure shows another example of the switch pass command data in this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for sending a switch pass command in this embodiment. This is an example of program code for the switch pass command transmission process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 376. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining a safety switch malfunction in this embodiment. This is an example of the program code for the safe switch abnormality detection process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 378. This block diagram shows an example of the connection configuration of connection lines that supply power to various circuit boards that control the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an operation for performing the setting function of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a flowchart of the power-on processing for the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for the power-on startup confirmation process in this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining whether the RAM was cleared in this embodiment. This is an example of program code for the RAM clear determination process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 384. This flowchart shows the procedure for verifying the set values in this embodiment. This is an example of program code for the setting value verification process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 386. This is an example of program code corresponding to the definition of the memory area related to the power-off flag in this embodiment. This is an example of program code corresponding to the definition of setting values related to the settings of the gaming machine in this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining the setting operation in this embodiment. This is an example of the program code for the setting operation determination process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 390. This flowchart shows the procedure for detecting open circuit and short circuit abnormalities in this embodiment. This timing chart illustrates the control system in the event of an unauthorized action in which the power supply is interrupted by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board of this embodiment, and then the power supply is restored after the wiring is reconnected, followed by the execution of a setting confirmation operation. This timing chart illustrates the control system in the event that an unauthorized action is performed, such as disconnecting a wire connected to the main control board of this embodiment, interrupting the power supply, and then reconnecting the wire to resume power supply and perform a setting change operation. This timing chart illustrates the control process when the wiring connected to the main control board of this embodiment is disconnected, but the power supply is not interrupted, and the wiring is reconnected, and the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned back on to resume gameplay. This timing chart illustrates the control process in the gaming machine of this embodiment when a wire connected to the main control board is disconnected and then reconnected while a minor error occurs. This is a timing chart illustrating the control for transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This timing chart illustrates an example of control when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on after performing the first operation. This timing chart illustrates an example of control when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on after performing the second operation. This figure shows an example of a command transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of screen transitions when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the screen transitions at the end of the time-saving state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram shows a modified example of the game board of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a ball counting slot located on the game board 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a cross-sectional view of an example of a ball counting input unit arranged in a modified version of the game board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram shows the movement path of game balls when the ball counting and ball entry unit of a modified embodiment is in the ball entry permission state, where (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view and (B) is a cross-sectional view. This diagram shows the movement path of game balls when the ball counting and ball entry unit of a modified embodiment is in a state where ball entry is not permitted, where (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view and (B) is a cross-sectional view. This is a timing chart showing the change in the time-saving transition count in a modified version of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a timing chart for a modified version of the gaming machine of this embodiment in which the second starting prize entry point functions as a ball counting entry point. This flowchart illustrates the procedure for determining whether or not to transition to a different game state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for the state transition process in this embodiment. This figure shows an example of state transition data in this embodiment. This figure shows an example configuration of the work area for storing state transition data in this embodiment. This figure shows a modified example of the state transition data in this embodiment. This is a timing chart illustrating the control for transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the arrangement of values stored in the memory area provided by the main control RAM of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the operation of the RAM clear switch and the memory area that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the initial interval transition setting data for big wins that is set when a player wins a special lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment and transitions to a big win state. This figure shows an example of the setting data for closing the big prize slot when the big prize slot is closed during a jackpot game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a sample module for the gaming machine of this embodiment that performs initial settings based on the jackpot closure setting data. This figure shows an example program for the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) of this embodiment. This is a sample module for the gaming machine of this embodiment that performs initial setup using a conventional procedure based on the jackpot closure setting data. This figure shows an example of a setting state management area and a value set in the setting state management area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a table for selecting initialization setting data when initializing the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a time chart showing the output timing of external output signals related to the time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a modified example of a time chart showing the output timing of external output signals related to the time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a control configuration diagram for the peripheral control board. This is an example of a memory map of the storage area accessed by the VDP. This diagram illustrates the allocation of memory space provided by the production data ROM. This flowchart shows the processes executed when the peripheral control board is powered on. This figure shows an example of the configuration of modules and the like used in the performance control by the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the general control of the performance during the first half of the variation pattern "10H03H" (normal variation for 12 seconds). This figure shows an example of a function in the performance control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram explains the mechanism of 3D display using the lenticular method, with (A) showing the area visible to the left eye (L) and (B) showing the area visible to the right eye (R). This figure shows an example of a lenticular image in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the arrangement of images stored in the image data area; (A) shows the overall arrangement of the image data area, and (B) shows the detailed arrangement of the area where 3D images are stored. This diagram illustrates the arrangement of layers on which images are drawn for display on the performance display device of the gaming machine in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the procedure for writing an image to be displayed on the display device of the gaming machine of this embodiment to the frame buffer. This diagram illustrates the procedure for generating a 3D display image (lenticular image) by combining a 2D image (such as a background image) that has been side-by-side with a 3D image in which the left-eye image and the right-eye image are placed side-by-side. This diagram illustrates the procedure for creating image data for 3D display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating the first method for generating side-by-side images. This diagram illustrates a second method for generating side-by-side images. This diagram illustrates a third method for generating side-by-side images. This diagram illustrates the procedure for compositing a full-screen image from side-by-side images. This figure shows an example of a layer structure when there is only one 3D layer. This is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure shown in Figure 444. This figure shows an example of a layer structure when there are multiple 3D layers. This is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure shown in Figure 446. This figure shows an example of the screen for the performance selection mode of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the procedure for using images for 3D display effects in the 2D display effect mode of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for using images for 3D display effects in the 2D display effect mode shown in Figure 449. This figure shows an example of an error notification screen that is displayed when an error occurs during the execution of a 3D display effect. This timing chart shows the state of each component when the power supply to the main control board is interrupted during 3D display. This figure shows an example of screen transitions that occur when the power supply to the main control board is interrupted during a 3D display effect. This timing chart shows the state of each component when the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted during a 3D display animation while the game is in a jackpot state. This figure shows an example of screen transitions that occur when the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted during a 3D display animation while the game is in a jackpot state. This figure shows an example of a structure for storing frame data to generate a video. This graph shows the relationship between the interval at which a reference frame of data is placed and the amount of data. This figure shows an example of the arrangement of areas for displaying images. This diagram illustrates the images corresponding to each region. The upper section shows the images corresponding to each region, and the lower section shows the displayed image resulting from drawing all the images corresponding to all regions. This is a table showing the configuration information for each area. This diagram explains the relationships between each layer. This diagram illustrates the first step in generating a video. This diagram illustrates the required decoding buffer capacity when generating a video using the first procedure. This figure shows an example of the spacing of reference frame data when generating a video in the second step. This diagram illustrates the second step in generating the video. This diagram illustrates the required decoding buffer capacity when generating a video using the second procedure. This diagram illustrates the required decoding buffer capacity when generating a video by combining the first and second procedures. This figure shows an example of image management information. This is a block diagram showing an excerpt of the configuration for testing external RAM. This figure shows an example of a command for checking external RAM. This diagram illustrates the registers configured to perform an external RAM test using a RAM diagnostic circuit. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for checking external RAM (glitch margin check) in the boot program. This flowchart shows the procedure for testing (read/write testing) external RAM in a peripheral control program. This flowchart shows the procedure for the external RAM inspection process (glitch margin check and R/W test) that is performed after power-on. This diagram illustrates the types of winning combinations in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the random number generation used for determining a win in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is pattern 1 and (B) is pattern 2. This flowchart shows the procedure for detecting fraudulent activity in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for detecting fraudulent activity at the jackpot in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for setting up fraud detection in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram shows the timing chart when a first win is achieved in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram shows the timing chart for when a second win occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment before the number of consecutive first wins reaches the upper limit. This diagram shows the timing chart for when a second win occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a timing chart explaining the operation of a gaming machine that maintains its game state when a minor win is achieved, specifically when a game ball passes through a particular area upon winning a minor win. This timing chart explains the timing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) when a minor win is achieved. The chart shows the case when the game ball does not pass through a specific area when a minor win is achieved. This timing chart explains the timing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state when a minor win is achieved. The chart shows the case when a game ball passes through a specific area after a minor win is achieved. This timing chart shows an improved timing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state when a minor win is achieved, specifically illustrating the case when a game ball passes through a specific area when a minor win is achieved. This timing chart explains the behavior of a gaming machine in which, upon winning a minor prize, the game transitions to a non-shortened time state, and after the special game state resulting from the minor prize ends, a special game state resulting from a major prize begins, when a game ball passes through a specific area upon winning a minor prize. This diagram illustrates the types of variation pattern tables that are set when the special symbols of the gaming machine of this embodiment are displayed in a variation pattern. This figure shows an example of a pattern in which a variable pattern table is selected based on the remaining number of times until the maximum number of consecutive time-saving states can occur. This figure shows an example of the type of random number and the range of random values obtained when a game ball enters the starting slot. This diagram shows an example of the range in which the special lottery results for each setting of the gaming machine will result in a jackpot. This flowchart shows the procedure for controlling special symbols and special electric features in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for waiting for special symbol variations in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for setting special symbols and flags in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining special symbols in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the means for determining the lottery results. (A) is a table for determining the result of the special symbol 2 variation display (special lottery) when the game machine is set to 6 in a high-probability state. (B) is a table for determining the result of the special symbol 2 variation display (special lottery) when the game machine is set to 1 in a high-probability state. (C) is a table for determining the result of the special symbol 1 variation display (special lottery) when the game machine is set to 6 in a high-probability state. (D) is a table for determining the result of the special symbol 2 variation display (special lottery) when the game machine is set to 6 in a low-probability state. (E) is a table for determining the result of the special symbol 2 variation display (special lottery) when the game machine is set to 1 in a low-probability state. This diagram illustrates the process by which some bits of the random number used for determining a jackpot are changed due to factors such as noise, resulting in a value outside the normal range. This figure shows an example of data used for determining special symbols; (A) shows the case of special symbol 1, and (B) shows the case of special symbol 2. This diagram explains the types of symbols that correspond to the special symbol random numbers, with (A) showing the case of special symbol 1 and (B) showing the case of special symbol 2. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for setting special symbol variation patterns. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for determining the selection of a variation pattern. This figure shows an example of reach variation pattern selection data. This diagram illustrates the comparative values used to operate the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. This figure shows an example of a table illustrating the relationship between commands and remaining quantities. This is a timing chart explaining the process of releasing the game suspension using the first game suspension release method. This is a timing chart explaining the process of releasing the game suspension using the second game suspension release method. This timing chart shows an example of a control mechanism that resets the game when the power is turned back on when the door is opened. This timing chart shows an example of a control system that does not resume gameplay by restarting the power supply when the door is closed. This timing chart shows an example of a control system that performs a setting change while opening the door after the game has stopped. This timing chart shows an example of a control system where the door is opened while the settings are changed after the game stops, and then the door is closed after the game machine is started up again. This timing chart shows an example of a control system that performs a setting change while closing the door after the game has stopped. This timing chart shows an example of a control system that performs a settings check while opening the door after the game has stopped. This timing chart shows an example of a control system that performs a settings check while closing the door after the game has stopped. This timing chart shows an example of a control system where opening the door is used as a condition for releasing the game stop and for initiating a setting change. This figure shows an example configuration for performing a bell-ringing effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a front view (surface view of the door frame) of a pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the present invention. This diagram shows a disc unit including the control panel. (A) is a front view of the disc unit in its normal state, (B) is a front view of the disc unit when the pressing control panel is in the raised position, and (C) is a front view of the disc unit when the central pressing control panel of the pressing control panel is pressed. This diagram shows the initial position of the control panel; (A) is a plan view, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken from a plane including the center. This diagram shows the raised position of the control panel; (A) is a plan view, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken from a plane including the center. This diagram illustrates the operation of the rotary control unit when the pressing control unit is lifted. (A) shows the state in which the pressing control unit is lifted, and (B) shows the state in which the rotary control unit has rotated due to the lifting of the pressing control unit. This diagram shows an example of the screen transitions that occur when one worshipper successfully rings the bell once. This diagram shows an example of the screen transitions that occur when a worshipper attempts to ring the bell once and fails. This diagram illustrates the rotation amount of the rotating control unit and the movement of the bell in a bell-ringing performance, where (A) is the "strong" intensity, (B) is the "medium" intensity, (C) is the "weak" intensity, and (D) is the case where the bell fails to ring because the intensity is below a predetermined level. This diagram shows an example of screen transitions when the intensity of the bell-ringing is specified in a bell-ringing animation where each worshipper rings the bell once. This diagram shows an example of the screen transitions in a bell-ringing animation where multiple worshippers successively ring the bell. This figure shows an example configuration for executing the bell-ringing point effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram explains the settings for point-based effects. This diagram illustrates the progression of points earned from the start of the point-earning event. This figure shows an example of screen transitions for point-based presentations. This diagram shows an example of a pre-announcement animation that is executed based on the total points earned through point-based animations. (A) shows the case when the total points are 0, (B) shows the case when the total points are 20, and (C) shows the case when the total points are 50. This figure shows an example of the intensity of bell-ringing based on the attributes of the worshippers. This diagram illustrates the progression of points earned from the start of the point-scoring event when the intensity of bell-ringing is specified based on the attributes of the worshippers. This flowchart shows the first half of the procedure for processing when the power is turned on to the payout control unit. This flowchart shows the latter half of the procedure for processing when the power is turned on to the payout control unit. This flowchart shows the procedure for the prize ball control process. This flowchart shows an example of the procedure for updating the reference value counter. This flowchart shows the procedure for RAM clear determination processing corresponding to the initialization of a reference value (comparison value) based on a game stop error flag. This figure shows an example of advance notification for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (complete function). This figure shows an example of notification of the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. This figure shows an example of screen transitions when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated after the jackpot game state ends. This figure shows an example of screen transitions when the pre-notification conditions and activation conditions are met during a jackpot game state, and the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated after the jackpot game state ends. This diagram shows an example of a screen displaying a malfunction in a gaming machine while the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is being performed. (A) shows the state when the malfunction occurs, and (B) shows the state after the machine has recovered due to power interruption and re-powering. This flowchart shows the procedure for power-on processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The diagrams show an overview of the memory area layout. (A) is a schematic diagram of the memory area layout, (B) is a dump list when the starting address outside the game area is "5060h", and (C) is a dump list when the starting address outside the game area is "5065h". This flowchart shows the procedure for processing at the start of a game. This flowchart shows the procedure for processing when setting up the game to start. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting up excessive prize ball suppression. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining when to stop the game. This figure shows an example of program code for determining when to stop a game. This diagram illustrates whether or not the mechanism for suppressing excessive prize balls, corresponding to the progress of the game, can be activated. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for handling timer interrupts. This flowchart shows the procedure for the game-play-ready processing performed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. This flowchart outlines the procedure for the performance display monitoring process executed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for suppressing excessive prize balls. This figure shows an example of a target switch information data table. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for adding the reference value. This flowchart shows the procedure for subtracting the reference value. This diagram illustrates an example of how to skip a specific animation sequence after a reach occurs by operating a control device during that sequence. This is a timing chart corresponding to the performance example shown in Figure 558. This diagram illustrates another example of how to skip a specific animation sequence after a reach has occurred by operating a control device during that sequence. This is a timing chart corresponding to the example performance shown in Figure 560. This figure shows an example where a prompt to take action is displayed after a reach occurs, and the animation changes depending on whether or not an action is taken. This is a timing chart corresponding to the example performance shown in Figure 562. This figure shows an example of a penalty animation that is executed when an input is not received in a configuration that requires operation by a single means of operation. This is a timing chart corresponding to the example performance shown in Figure 564. This diagram shows an example of a performance animation that executes a penalty animation when an operation input is not accepted in a configuration that requires operation of multiple types of operation means. This is a timing chart corresponding to the example performance shown in Figure 566. This figure shows an example of a performance (first half) that includes configurations requiring the operation of a single type of operating means and the operation of multiple types of operating means. This figure shows an example of a performance (second half) that includes configurations requiring the operation of a single type of operating means and the operation of multiple types of operating means. These are timing charts corresponding to the performance examples shown in Figures 568 and 569. This figure shows an example of the relationship between the pattern variation and the visual effects. This diagram shows an example of the screen layout for a long jump event. This diagram shows an example of character movements for a long jump performance. This figure shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the expectation level of a character in a long jump performance. This diagram shows an example of the layer configuration for the long jump animation. This figure shows an example of information used to define the layers when displaying images in a long jump animation. This diagram illustrates the layer arrangement (display hierarchy) in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of image data stored in an image ROM. This diagram illustrates the procedure for combining layers and creating a display screen. This diagram shows an example of a screen transition where the layer on which an object is displayed does not change from the time the object is shown until it is hidden. This diagram illustrates the layer switching timing for the effects shown in Figure 580. This figure shows an example of a screen transition in an animation where the layer on which an object is displayed changes from the time the object is shown until it is hidden. Figure 582 is a diagram illustrating the timing of layer switching in the effects shown. This diagram illustrates a performance pattern in which a special effect is executed after transitioning to a specific state. This diagram shows the screen transitions when an effect is executed across the display of multiple changing patterns. This diagram illustrates the probability of a character appearing when the zodiac sign appearance animation is performed. This diagram illustrates the procedure for displaying the performance change menu screen in the gaming machine of this embodiment. (A) shows the state before displaying the performance change menu screen, (B) shows the state with the performance change menu screen displayed, (C) shows the state after closing the performance change menu screen after setting the favorite zodiac sign as a performance setting, and (D) shows the state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state in (C), and the performance change menu screen can be displayed. This is the seasonal settings screen. This is the settings screen for your favorite zodiac sign. This is a screen for adjusting the brightness of a liquid crystal display. This diagram illustrates the means for changing the display settings during the change in the pattern. This diagram illustrates the procedure for setting a new season while the pattern is changing. This diagram illustrates the procedure for setting a new favorite zodiac sign while the pattern is changing. This diagram illustrates an example of setting a new zodiac sign during the display of the changing symbols when the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. This is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 594, explaining when your favorite zodiac sign is selected. This diagram illustrates an example where, in a normal reach occurring and the resulting symbol change is a miss, a new favorite zodiac sign is set during the display of the symbol change. This is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 596, explaining when your favorite zodiac sign is selected. This diagram illustrates an example where, in a situation where an SP Reach occurs and the resulting symbol change is a miss, a new favorite zodiac sign is set during the display of the symbol change. This is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 598, explaining when your favorite zodiac sign is selected. This diagram illustrates an example (first half) of setting a new zodiac sign during the display of changing symbols when an SP reach occurs and the result of the symbol change display is a jackpot. This diagram illustrates an example (second half) of setting a new zodiac sign during the display of changing symbols when an SP reach occurs and the result of the symbol change display is a jackpot. This is a timing chart corresponding to Figures 599 and 600, explaining the timing at which your favorite zodiac sign is set. This diagram shows an example where a full-tray error was displayed while the animation settings were being adjusted during the display of changing patterns. (A) shows the animation during seasonal setting, and (B) shows the animation during favorite zodiac sign setting. This diagram shows luminous objects arranged around the visual effects screen. This figure shows an example of a presentation (first presentation pattern) for the appearance of the rat (Nezumi) in the Chinese zodiac. This diagram illustrates another example (second presentation pattern) of the appearance of the rat (mouse) zodiac sign. (A) is a list of cheeses collected by the rat (mouse) character, and (B) and (C) are the execution screens of the mini-game presentation. (B) shows the case when the rat (mouse) is not set as the favorite zodiac sign, and (C) shows the case when the rat (mouse) is set as the favorite zodiac sign. This is an example of a special animation that is performed when the points earned reach a predetermined value during the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) in the Chinese zodiac. (A) shows the state where a big win has been announced, and (B) shows the state where the middle reel stops after the announcement. This diagram shows an example of a presentation for the appearance of the Year of the Sheep (未) in the Chinese zodiac. This diagram shows an example of the points that can be earned when the Year of the Sheep (未) appears in the zodiac event. This diagram shows the screen transitions during the appearance animation for the Year of the Sheep (未) in the Chinese zodiac. This is an example of a special animation that is triggered when the points earned reach a predetermined achievement value during the appearance of the Year of the Sheep (Hitsuji) in the Chinese zodiac. This figure shows an example of a lighting pattern used in a performance where a light-emitting part provided on the pressing part of a pressing operation unit is illuminated. This diagram shows an example of how the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign appears when the boar is not set as the player's preferred zodiac sign. This diagram shows an example of the display of the results of the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac appearance animation when the boar (Inoshishi) is not set as the preferred zodiac sign. (A) shows the case where the mini-game fails, and (B) shows the case where the mini-game succeeds. This diagram shows an example of the appearance animation for the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign when the boar (Inoshishi) is set as the preferred zodiac sign. This diagram shows an example of the display of the results of the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac appearance animation when the boar (Inoshishi) is set as the preferred zodiac sign. (A) shows the case where the mini-game fails, and (B) shows the case where the mini-game succeeds. This diagram shows an example of the points that can be earned in the challenge sequence during the appearance of the Tiger (Tora) zodiac sign. This diagram shows the scene before the start of the challenge sequence for the appearance of the Tiger (Tora) zodiac sign. This diagram shows what happens when the challenge sequence fails during the appearance of the Tiger (Tora) zodiac sign. This diagram shows the result of successfully completing the challenge sequence during the appearance of the Tiger (Tora) zodiac sign. This diagram shows an example of the screen transitions for the appearance of the Snake and Dragon zodiac signs when neither the Snake nor the Dragon is set as the player's preferred zodiac sign. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between the points earned and the luminescence patterns of the glowing objects during the appearance of the zodiac signs Snake and Dragon as your favorite zodiac signs. This diagram illustrates the evolutionary animations used in the appearance of the zodiac signs Snake and Dragon. This diagram shows the points corresponding to the types of eggs when the Snake (巳) and Dragon (辰) are not set as the preferred zodiac signs. This figure shows an example of the hatching result display for the appearance of the Snake (巳) and Dragon (辰) zodiac signs when the Snake (巳) is set as the preferred zodiac sign. This diagram illustrates an example of changing the season setting while the appearance of the monkey (Saru) zodiac sign is in progress. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the storage area provided by the ROM 1313 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the memory area provided by the RAM 1312 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This diagram illustrates access to the transmission area 8721 and the reception area 8722. This figure shows an example of the configuration of a computing device for configuring the memory area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This figure shows an alternative configuration of the arithmetic unit for configuring the memory area in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is alternative configuration 1 which has multiple storage means, and (B) is alternative configuration 2 which has multiple CPU cores and multiple storage means. This figure shows an example of the module configuration of the complete function execution means. This flowchart shows the procedure for power-on processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for determining the start of a game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for timer interrupt processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for setting operations in this embodiment. This flowchart shows the procedure for setting confirmation/change processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for a gaming machine that does not have setting-related functions. This flowchart shows the procedure for initializing the complete function in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is the program code for the complete function initialization setting process in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for completing the function. This is the program code for completing the function. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the complete function control process. This is the program code for the complete function control process. This flowchart shows the procedure for calculating the MY value. This is the program code for calculating the MY value. This figure shows an example of an out-of-bounds switch information data table. This figure shows an example of the structure of the input information. This flowchart shows the procedure for calculating the operation judgment value. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for sending a complete function command. This is the program code for sending the complete function command. This figure shows an example of a screen displaying the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated. This figure shows an example of a screen displaying a notification that the Complete Function has been activated after receiving a command to announce its activation while in a winning game state. This figure shows an example of the screen when the complete function is activated. This is a flowchart of the MY value subtraction process, where MY value is not subtracted if MY value is 0. This is a flowchart for the MY value subtraction process, which involves separately counting the value to be subtracted from the MY value. This is a timing chart for when a minor abnormality A occurs during normal gameplay (while special symbols are changing), and the complete function is activated. This is a timing chart for when a minor anomaly A occurs during a jackpot game, and the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value that activates the complete function. This is a timing chart for when a severe anomaly B occurs while the complete function is activated. This is a timing chart for when the frame opens during normal gameplay (while special symbols are changing) and the complete function is activated while the frame is open. This is a timing chart for when the door opens during normal gameplay (while special symbols are changing) and the complete function is activated while the door is open. This is a diagram illustrating the frame components of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a timing chart for when the first frame component detaches during normal gameplay (while special symbols are changing) or while the complete function is activated. This is a timing chart for when the second frame component detaches during normal gameplay (while special symbols are changing) or while the complete function is activated. This diagram illustrates the light emission patterns of light-emitting elements installed in gaming machines. This is a front view of the modified pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of a modified pachinko machine. This diagram illustrates the control system in the modified pachinko machine when the power is turned on after the complete function has been activated. This diagram illustrates whether other operations can be performed during the execution of each operation: launching, counting, and lending. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the firing operation and the counting operation in the modified pachinko machine. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the firing operation and the counting operation when the complete function is activated in the modified pachinko machine.

A pachinko machine 1, which is one embodiment of the present invention, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 9. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Figure 3 is a top view of the pachinko machine, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Figure 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front, and Figure 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the rear. Figure 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front with the door frame 3 open from the main frame and the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Figure 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front, disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main frame 4, and outer frame 2, and Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine from the rear, disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main frame 4, and outer frame 2.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) in a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed to close the front of the outer frame 2, a main body frame 4 that can be opened and closed to support the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, having a game area 5a where the player puts the game balls.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the fascia member 50 in a front view and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back; a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls; a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100; a left side unit 400 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100; a right side unit 450 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100; and an upper tray attached to the lower right front of the door frame base unit 100, penetrating the tray unit 200. The system includes a handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to launch game balls stored in 201 into the game area of the game board 5; a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear of the door frame base unit 100 to receive game balls that miss the game area and discharge them into the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200; a ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear of the door frame base unit 100 to send game balls from the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680; a glass unit 560 attached to the rear of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through-hole 111; and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear of the glass unit 560.

The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5; upper hinge member 620 and lower hinge member 640 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 60 and lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, respectively, and rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 140 and lower hinge member 150 on the door frame 3, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view; and a lower front part attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600. The system includes a ball launching device 680 for launching game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 mounted on the right side of the main frame base in a front view for locking the space between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit 800 mounted on the rear side along the upper and left edges of the main frame base 600 in a front view for dispensing game balls towards the player, a circuit board unit 900 mounted on the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear cover 980 that is detachably mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600 and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

Inside the back cover 980 is a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a prize ratio indicator. The prize ratio indicator 1317 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED. A liquid crystal display may also be used to constitute the prize ratio indicator 1317. Alternatively, the prize ratio indicator 1317 may be provided on the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Furthermore, instead of providing a separate display device for showing the payout ratio, the payout ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244. In this case, if the payout ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, or 244, the payout ratio can be notified to the player, allowing the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine.

The payout ratio, as explained later, can be calculated as the number of balls won through payouts divided by the total number of balls won. For example, a pachinko machine with a high payout ratio (e.g., 90%) is considered to be performing well because it awards many prize balls through big wins. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low payout ratio (e.g., 10%) is considered to be performing poorly because it has fewer big wins and fewer prize balls awarded during big wins. Therefore, players can choose a pachinko machine to play by considering the payout ratio.

As a way to inform the player of the payout ratio, the payout ratio value may be displayed on the main LCD display device 1600. For example, if the payout ratio is 70% or higher, the value may be displayed in red and the frame lamp may light up or flash red; if it is between 69% and 30%, the value may be displayed in green and the frame lamp may light up or flash green. The payout ratio value should be displayed in a way that does not cause confusion with the decorative symbols. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbols when they are not changing, or the size of the number indicating the payout ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbols. The display method may be divided into several stages.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative symbols displayed on the main LCD display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the prize payout ratio to inform the player of the prize payout ratio. For example, if the prize payout ratio is 70% or higher, the decorative symbols may be displayed in red and the frame lamp may light up or flash red; if it is between 69% and 30%, the decorative symbols may be displayed in green and the frame lamp may light up or flash green. The display patterns may be divided into any number of stages.

Furthermore, the information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. In this case, the display method described above may be changed, and the information may be displayed along with other information, not just the payout ratio. This other information may include the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called winning streaks), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Furthermore, not only the bonus payout ratio, but also the consecutive bonus payout ratio and base value, as described later, may be displayed in the manner described above. The bonus payout ratio, consecutive bonus payout ratio, and base value may each be displayed in different ways.

As shown in Figure 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320, which is sealed in a way that prevents it from being opened without damage once closed. The components arranged on the printed circuit board are visible from the outside. Furthermore, if, for example, the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back of the pachinko machine 1, and the payout ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can also be seen from the back of the pachinko machine 1. By enclosing the payout ratio indicator 1317 within the main control board box 1320, unauthorized modification of the payout ratio indicator 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 appear less lucrative can be prevented, and the accurate lucrative potential of the pachinko machine 1 can be displayed.

Furthermore, if the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, the payout ratio indicator 1317 may be made visible from the back of the pachinko machine 1 by drilling a hole in the back cover 980 at the location of the payout ratio indicator 1317, or by making the area around the payout ratio indicator 1317 transparent.

Furthermore, even if the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the location of the payout ratio indicator 1317 may be made flat, or the back cover 980 may be made thinner, to make the payout ratio indicator 1317 easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

On the lower rear of the pachinko machine 1, there is an outlet that collects the game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out-out opening 1111 and the winning openings 2001, 2005, and 2006, and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The game balls discharged from the outlet are supplied to the ball tank 802 via the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects the game balls being discharged from the outlet.

As shown in Figure 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that it is a switch for operating the display of the bonus ratio. It is desirable to provide the display switch 1318 near the bonus ratio display unit 1317, but it may be provided on other boards (e.g., the performance control board 4700, the power supply unit 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200, as long as it is in an easily accessible location, rather than on the main control unit 1300. It may also be provided on the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Furthermore, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By positioning the display switch 1318 in a location where it cannot be operated by the player, accidental operation by the player can be prevented.

The main frame 4's payout unit 800 includes an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801 and extending to the left and right, open upwards, for storing game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown), a tank rail 803 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extending to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view, a ball guide unit 820 attached to the rear side of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls from the tank rail 803 downwards in a meandering manner, and a payout control board unit 9 attached to the bottom of the ball guide unit 820 and detachably attached to the payout unit base 801, which dispenses the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820. The system comprises: a dispensing device 830 that dispenses game balls one by one based on instructions from a dispensing control board 951 (see Figure 17) housed in unit 50; an upper full-tank ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 that guides the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 downwards and releases the game balls from either a normal discharge port or a full-tank discharge port depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200; and a lower full-tank ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801, which has a normal guide path that guides game balls released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 forward and leads them from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and a full-tank guide path that guides game balls released from the full-tank discharge port forward and leads them from the front end to the full-tank ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3.

The main frame 4's circuit board unit 900 comprises: a circuit board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600; a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600, on the left side of the circuit board unit base 910 in a front view, and containing a low-frequency speaker 921; a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the rear side of the circuit board unit base 910 in a front view, containing a power supply board; an interface control board box 940 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920, containing an interface control board; and a payout control board unit 950 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940, containing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that demarcate the outer perimeter of the game area 5a into which the game balls are played and guide the game balls launched from the ball launching device 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a; a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcating the rear end of the game area 5a; and a box-shaped component attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and open upwards. The system comprises a circuit board holder 1200, a main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear side of the circuit board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 for controlling the gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, a front unit (not shown) mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and having multiple prize slots capable of receiving game balls played into the game area 5a, and a rear unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the circuit board holder 1200.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, with game balls stored in the upper tray 201, when a player rotates the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 launches the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. When the game balls launched into the game area 5a are received into a prize entry point (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed into the upper tray 201 by the dispensing device 830, according to the prize entry point. This dispensing of game balls enhances the player's enjoyment, allowing them to launch the game balls from the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a and thus enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 10 to 16. Figure 10 is a front view of the game board. Figure 11 is a perspective view of the game board from the front right, Figure 12 is a perspective view of the game board from the front left, and Figure 13 is a perspective view of the game board from the rear. Furthermore, Figure 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. In addition, Figure 16 is a front view of the front components and front unit of the game board, cut approximately in the center in the front-to-back direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. The game board 5 also comprises a front component 1000 that demarcates the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcating the rear end of the game area 5a; a circuit board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100; and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200, which has a main control board 1310 (see Figure 17) that controls the game content performed by driving game balls into the game area 5a. Multiple obstacle pins that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the area within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

Furthermore, the game board 5 includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100; a main liquid crystal display device 1600 positioned in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying predetermined performance images; a front unit 2000 mounted on the front of the game panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is mounted on the rear side of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 comprises a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a back unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize slots 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined location within the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second start slot 2004 that can receive game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and a first large prize slot 2005 and a second large prize slot 2006 that can receive game balls according to the result of a first special lottery drawn when a game ball is received into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004. The second major prize slot 2006 consists of two major prize slots: the second upper major prize slot 2006a and the second lower major prize slot 2006b, both located in a single flow path for the game balls (see Figure 16).

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises a start-up unit 2100 mounted directly above the out-out opening 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and having a first start-up opening 2002 and a first large prize-winning opening 2005; a lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view and having three general prize-winning openings 2001; an upper side unit 2300 mounted above the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 mounted approximately in the center of the game area 5a and having one general prize-winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, and a second large prize-winning opening 2006.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, with an open front and a square opening 3010a in its rear wall; a plurality of general prize slot sensors 3015 positioned in predetermined locations within the back box 3010 to detect game balls received into the general prize slot 2001 of the front unit 2000; and a locking mechanism attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It comprises unit 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the rightmost front end of the back box 3010 for discharging game balls received into the general prize entry opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the center mechanism 2500, and a lower right ball passage unit 3035 attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the back box 3010 for discharging game balls received into the second large prize entry opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center mechanism 2500.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010, a performance drive board 3043 housed within the performance drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side of the panel relay board 3044.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back left-center decorative unit 3050 mounted at the front end of the back box 3010, slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front; a back lower rear movable display unit 3100 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, near the rear wall of the back box 3010; a back upper left movable display unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, on the left side when viewed from the front; a back left movable display unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010 when viewed from the front; a back upper-center movable display unit 3400 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, extending from the center in the horizontal direction to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a back lower front movable display unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, in front of the back lower rear movable display unit 3100.

[2-1. Pre-component components]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has an outer shape that is approximately square when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that is approximately circular and penetrates in the front-to-back direction, with the inner circumference of the inner shape defining the outer perimeter of the game area 5a. This front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end slightly to the left of the center in the front view, passing over the upper end of the center in the front view and extending to the upper right diagonally; an inner rail 1002 that is positioned inside the front component 1000, approximately along the outer rail 1001, and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonally; and an out-guide section 1003 that is formed at the lowest point of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a right-lower rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out-guiding section 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right edge of the front component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the right-lower rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with its upper part curving inward from the front component 1000; and a stopper 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and which comes into contact with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

Furthermore, the aforementioned component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatable only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

A launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting game balls launched into the game area 5a is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and entered the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may also be installed at a position within the game area where game balls are guaranteed to pass. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be standardized across multiple models, facilitating inspections at the manufacturing site and after installation in the hall.

Furthermore, the launch ball sensor 1020, located upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of rails 1001 and 1002, detects out-of-bounds balls before the prize-winning ball sensor detects a winning entry. That is, since it detects out-of-bounds balls followed by prize balls, it does not detect prize balls resulting from balls not counted as out-of-bounds, allowing for accurate calculation of the base value.

[2-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 comprises a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin, the outer circumference of which is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and to which the back unit 3000 is attached. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out opening 1111 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, the panel plate 1110 has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back for attaching the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear. Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has multiple mounting holes and positioning holes formed on its rear surface for attaching the rear unit 3000.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out opening 1111 of the panel plate 1110 opens behind the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, game balls that have flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear out opening 1111 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1111.

[2-3. Circuit board holder]
Next, the circuit board holder 1200 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 15. The circuit board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally elongated box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined to become lower towards the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, the circuit board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000, which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, from below. As a result, it can receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1111, and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 (see Figure 14) formed on the bottom surface.

[2-4. Main Control Board Unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 15 and Figure 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably mounted on the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the circuit board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, opening it again requires destroying that sealing mechanism, leaving a trace of the opening and closing. Therefore, by examining these traces, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, thus enhancing the deterrent against unauthorized activity against the main control board 1310.

[2-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 12. As shown in the figures, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, this function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 1). Based on control signals from the main control board 1310, this function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs to display the game status, normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, consists of a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the game status, a normal symbol indicator that displays a normal symbol by controlling the blinking of two LEDs based on the normal lottery result drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and then displays these two LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of hold symbols, which is the number of normal symbol displays related to the passage of a game ball through the gate section 2003 for which the start condition for displaying the display has not yet been met, a first special symbol indicator that displays a first special symbol by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn when a game ball is received into the first start opening 2002 (occurrence of start prize), and displays these eight LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first special lottery result, and the reception of a game ball into the first start opening 2002 The machine primarily comprises: a first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved symbols, which is the number of variable symbols for which the conditions for starting the variable symbol display have not yet been met; a second special symbol indicator that displays the second special symbol by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start prize), and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second special lottery result; a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved symbols, which is the number of variable symbols for which the conditions for starting the variable symbol display have not yet been met, related to the acceptance of a game ball into the second start port 2004; and a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening and closing patterns of the first large prize port 2005 and the second large prize port 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "jackpot" or the like. Furthermore, some of the displays in the function display unit 1400 (for example, the first special pattern display) may be configured using 7-segment LEDs.

This function display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, symbols, etc., by appropriately lighting, extinguishing, and flashing the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral Control Units]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Figures 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light effects, sound effects, and movable effects, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect images (see Figure 17).

[2-7. Main LCD Display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010, approximately in the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center component 2500. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED backlight, and can display still images and videos.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 comprises two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side in a front view. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 by inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the left inner circumferential surface of the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting section of the back box 3010 (described later), then moving the right fixing piece 1602 forward, inserting the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[2-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 10 to 12 and Figures 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and its rear end passing through the opening 1112 and protruding backward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of this embodiment includes a plurality of general prize slots 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open and capable of receiving game balls at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is installed at a predetermined location within the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second start slot 2004 that can receive game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a first large prize slot 2005 and a second large prize slot 2006 that can receive game balls according to either the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn when a game ball is received into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004.

The multiple (four in this case) general prize entry points 2001 are located three at the bottom of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is located near the upper right when viewed from the front within the game area 5a. The first start entry point 2002 is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the out entry point 1111. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right when viewed from the front within the game area 5a, approximately directly below the stopper section 1006. The second start entry point 2004 is located slightly to the right when viewed from the front, directly below the gate section 2003. Of the multiple general prize entry points 2001 mentioned above, the general prize entry point 2001 located near the upper right when viewed from the front within the game area 5a is located directly above the second start entry point 2004. The first large prize entry point 2005 is located between the first start entry point 2002 and the out entry point 1111. The second major prize gate, 2006, is located to the right of the first starting gate, 2002, when viewed from the front, and is positioned above the first major prize gate, 2005.

As shown in Figure 16, the second large prize opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 is composed of a second upper large prize opening 2006a and a second lower large prize opening 2006b, which are arranged along a single flow path through which the game balls circulate. The second upper large prize opening 2006a is located near the lower right of the front view within the game area 5a, while the second lower large prize opening 2006b is located below and to the left of the second upper large prize opening 2006a in the front view.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises a start-up unit 2100 mounted directly above the out-out opening 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and having a first start-up opening 2002 and a first large prize-winning opening 2005; a lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view and having three general prize-winning openings 2001; an upper side unit 2300 mounted above the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 mounted approximately in the center of the game area 5a and having one general prize-winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, and a second large prize-winning opening 2006.

[2-8a. Starter Unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is located within the game area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first large prize port 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 comprises a flat unit base 2101 mounted on the front of the panel board 1110, having a rectangular first large prize opening 2005 that extends left and right and penetrates from front to back; a ball receiving section 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper part of the unit base 2101, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, above the first large prize opening 2005, forming the first starting port 2002; a ball guiding section 2103 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2101 for guiding game balls received in the first starting port 2002 downwards; a first starting port sensor 2104 mounted on the ball guiding section 2103 for detecting game balls received in the first starting port 2002; and a first attacker unit 2110 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2101 to close the first large prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 includes a box-shaped unit case 2111 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first large prize opening 2005 from the rear, with its front end open forward to approximately the same size as the first large prize opening 2005; a horizontally elongated rectangular, flat first large prize opening door member 2112 whose lower edge is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so as to be able to open and close the first large prize opening 2005; and a first attacker solenoid mounted inside the unit case 2111 that drives the opening and closing of the first large prize opening door member 2112. The unit comprises an id 2113, a first large prize slot sensor 2114 mounted inside the unit case 2111 for detecting game balls received into the first large prize slot 2005, a start slot unit relay board 2115 mounted on the top surface of the unit case 2111 for relaying the connection between the first start slot sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first large prize slot sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, and a start slot unit decoration board (not shown) mounted on the bottom of the unit case 2111 for illuminating the first large prize slot 2005.

The ball receiving section 2102, which forms the first starting opening 2002, opens upwards and is sized to accept only one game ball at a time. The first large prize opening 2005, which penetrates the unit base 2101, opens forward and is sized to accept multiple game balls at once (for example, 4 to 6 balls).

The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that opens upward. Game balls received in the first starting port 2002 are guided downward by the ball guidance portion 2103 at the rear of the unit base 2101, detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In this embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided. The main control board 1310 determines that a game ball has been received in the first starting port 2002 when both first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range. This allows for the detection of fraudulent activity, such as the insertion of an unauthorized tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101. The first large prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is inserted from the rear into the first large prize opening 2005, which is open in the unit base 2101, thereby closing the first large prize opening 2005. In its upright position, with the first large prize opening 2005 closed, the left and right ends of the lower edge of the first large prize opening door member 2112 are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. By rotating the upper edge forward and downward, the first large prize opening 2005 can be changed from a closed state to an open state.

The first large prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in its normal state (when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), closing the first large prize opening 2005. When the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first large prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that its upper edge moves forward and downward, resulting in a position where the upper edge is slightly above the lower edge. In other words, the first large prize opening door member 2112 becomes inclined so that it rises higher from the lower edge of the first large prize opening 2005 towards the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first large prize opening 2005 and contacts the first large prize opening door member 2112, the inclination of the first large prize opening door member 2112 changes the direction of the game ball's flow from downward to backward, allowing it to be received by the first large prize opening 2005 and enter the unit case 2111. The game ball received by the first large prize opening 2005 is then detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2114 and discharged downward from the bottom surface of the unit case 2111.

[3. Control Configuration]
Next, the control configuration for various aspects of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 17. Figure 17 is a block diagram that schematically shows the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main frame 4, with each component responsible for a specific control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various display devices during gameplay based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of display images on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, etc., based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM 1313 for storing various processing programs and commands, and a RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data; a main control I/O port 1314 as an input/output device (I/O device); a main control input circuit 1315 to receive detection signals from various detection switches; a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids; and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1311. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also incorporates a watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 detects game balls received into the first start opening 2002 using a first start opening sensor 2104, a second start opening sensor 2551 detects game balls received into the second start opening 2004, a general prize opening sensor 3015 detects game balls received into the general prize opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, and detects game balls received into the first large prize opening 2005. Detection signals from the first large prize slot sensor 2114, the second upper large prize slot sensor 2554 and the second lower large prize slot sensor 2557 (which detect game balls received in the second upper large prize slot 2006a and second lower large prize slot 2006b), the ball ejection sensor 3060, the ball launch sensor 1020, and the magnetic detection sensor (which detects unauthorized magnetism within the game area 5a) are each input via the main control I/O port 1314.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs control signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the start solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker solenoid 2553, and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556. It also outputs drive signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the first special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the first special symbol memory indicator, the second special symbol memory indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal symbol memory indicator, the game status indicator, the round indicator, etc., of the function display unit 1400.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large prize port sensor 2114, the second upper large prize port sensor 2554, and the second lower large prize port sensor 2557 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general prize port sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and also frequently pass through the gate section 2003, resulting in frequent detection of game balls by the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. For this reason, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547 use proximity switches with high durability and a long lifespan. Furthermore, when a favorable game state occurs (such as a "jackpot" game), the first and second large prize slots 2005 and 2006 open (or enlarge), allowing game balls to enter frequently. Therefore, the first large prize slot sensor 2114, the second upper large prize slot sensor 2554, and the second lower large prize slot sensor 2557 also frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first large prize slot sensor 2114, the second upper large prize slot sensor 2554, and the second lower large prize slot sensor 2557 also utilize highly durable, long-life proximity switches. In contrast, the general prize slot 2001, where game balls do not enter frequently, does not receive frequent detection by the general prize slot sensor 3015. Therefore, the general prize slot sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc., and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1, via the main control I/O port 1314 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, it formats these commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 receives various voltages from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. This power supply board, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1311 to store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing, even when the power supply is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated upon power-up. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors the decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951, etc.

A payout ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310 in a position visible from the back of the pachinko machine 1. The payout ratio indicator 1317 displays the payout ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 is preferably a momentary push-button switch, but other types of switches may also be used. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the payout ratio is displayed on the payout ratio indicator 1317. Alternatively, the payout ratio indicator 1317 may always display the payout ratio, and the displayed content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

Figure 18 shows the configuration within the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, verification block 13119, unique information 13120, arithmetic circuit 13121, and reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores the data necessary for program execution.

The main control MPU 1311 is equipped with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuits 13112 provide random numbers for determining the results of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the content of the variable display game's presentation. The random number generation circuits 13112 are so-called hardware random number generation means that output random numbers updated at the timing of the clock period (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hardware random numbers generated by the random number generation circuits 13112 are used for the lottery of special symbol wins, the lottery of winning symbols in the special symbol variable display game, and the lottery of normal symbol wins.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to game performance control and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. The serial communication circuit 13114 also transmits and receives various game-related information (game information) and various commands related to the payout of game balls to the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the payout ratio to the payout ratio indicator 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to Figure 20.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time control functions. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a processing address table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. The external bus interface 13117 can input and output I/O requests (IORQ), reads (RD), writes (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7).

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (e.g., 32 MHz). The clock circuit 13118 also divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it externally via the CLKO terminal. For example, it may output a clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see Figure 28) of the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

The verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is a unique ID for the main control MPU 1311 and is written to the chip in a rewritable manner during manufacturing.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides arithmetic functions that do not rely on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. These arithmetic functions are permanently written to the chip during manufacturing.

The reset circuit 13122 includes an unauthorized access prevention circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. The unauthorized access prevention circuit, when the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside of the designated addresses in ROM 1313, assumes it is an access by an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer period has elapsed, resetting the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 based on a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

Figure 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides program-independent arithmetic functions for calculation results and includes a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (multiplier and multiplicand) into a product using a multiplication function and outputs the result.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores multipliers and multiplicands of 16 bits or less in multiplication input registers A 131212 and B 131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, multiplies the two values, and stores the result in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 retrieves the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (e.g., 1 clock cycle). The CPU 13111 can store values in the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213, and after a predetermined number of clock cycles have elapsed, it can refer to the multiplication result register 131214 to retrieve the multiplication result.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (e.g., 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (e.g., 32 bits), outputting a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that transforms the input values (divisor and dividend) into a quotient and remainder using a division function and outputs them.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in division input register A 131216 and a divisor of 32 bits or less in division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values have been stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored values at a predetermined timing, stores the quotient (the result of dividing the dividend by the divisor) in division result register A 131218, and the remainder in division result register B 131219. Furthermore, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Furthermore, the division circuit 131215 may, at the timing of the start command input, read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not need to be erased at the time of reading. Also, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be able to overwrite values even if they already contain values (without clearing the stored values).

The CPU 13111 obtains the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed within a predetermined time (e.g., 32 clock cycles). After storing values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clock cycles have elapsed, the CPU 13111 can access the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively, to obtain the quotient and remainder.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as described later, division is required to calculate the base value. Since the division performed by the CPU 13111 involves multiple multiplications and subtractions, it takes a considerable amount of time. Therefore, it is difficult to perform the base calculation process for each timer interrupt, making it difficult to display the base value without delay. In contrast, by using the arithmetic circuit 13121 to perform the division, the time required for base value calculation can be reduced, allowing the base value to be calculated multiple times in a single timer interrupt (see Figures 75 and 80). Furthermore, from the time values are written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until the calculation result is read from the division result register A131218, the CPU 13111 is not occupied by the division process, allowing it to perform other operations and efficiently execute the base calculation process during timer interrupts.

Figure 20 shows the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission/reception circuits, each of which transmits and receives one channel of data to and from a predetermined device. Note that Figure 20 only illustrates the data transmission circuit; the explanation of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel implemented) is omitted.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the serial communication circuit 13114 uses three channels as described above: channel 0 for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 for communication with the payout control board 951, and channel 2 for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the prize ratio indicator 1317. Channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmit data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmit shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmit trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141, and then in the transmit data register 3142. The transmit data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO with a predetermined capacity (e.g., 64 bytes). The transmit data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmit shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal from the clock signal supplied by the clock circuit 13118, for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits the data according to the transmission clock signal.

Command status register 3145 is a register referenced to check the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmit trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold for controlling the amount of data that triggers an interrupt in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO. The baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, transmit trigger setting level register 3147, and baud rate register 3148 are initially set for each of the four channels in step S28 of Figure 21.

The following explains these settings in detail. The communication setting register sets the communication format for each channel. Specifically, it sets whether or not to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether to use parity, and whether to use even or odd parity). For example, channel 0, used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, and channel 1, used for communication with the payout control board 951, are set to 1xxx1010B, meaning FIFO mode, 1 stop bit, and even parity. Channel 2, used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the prize ratio display 1317, is set to 1xxx1000B, meaning FIFO mode, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

In FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Furthermore, since gaming machines operate in noisy environments, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data at high speed outside the main control board 1310.

Since the bonus ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less susceptible to noise compared to communication with other boards via communication wires. Furthermore, because the amount of data transmitted and received is small, a low communication speed is sufficient, and the need for parity is minimal. Additionally, a ground pattern can be provided along the signal transmission pattern between the bonus ratio indicator 1317's driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, on the left, right, and/or thickness-adjacent layers of the signal lines on the surface or inner layers of the printed circuit board). The shielding effect of the ground pattern reduces noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmit trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that triggers an interrupt in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO. Specifically, if the amount of transmit data stored in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO is less than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit in the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By checking this bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether there is space available in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO and to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO.

Furthermore, the relevant bit in the status register can be used to determine if there is an abnormality in the transmit FIFO. For example, even if no data is written to the transmit data register 3142's FIFO for a predetermined period, if the relevant bit in the status register is not set, it can be determined that no data is being transmitted from the transmit data register 3142's FIFO, since there is no free slot in the transmit data register 3142's FIFO, and error handling (e.g., error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0, used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, is set to 19200 bps; channel 1, used for communication with the payout control board 951, is set to 1200 bps; and channel 2, used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio indicator 1317, is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because, inside the gaming machine, game balls are rolling around, and the electronic circuits of the gaming machine are in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, data for controlling the number of balls dispensed, which directly relates to the profit given to the player, is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed to ensure reliable transmission. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits a large amount of data and is not related to the number of balls dispensed, so it transmits data at a high rate. The peripheral control board 1510 also verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it determines that it is abnormal, it either stops operating the peripheral control board 1510 or performs abnormal processing (e.g., communication error notification) and requests retransmission of the command. If the retransmitted command is determined to be normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. For this reason, data can be transmitted at a high rate when communicating with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, lowering the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 may allow the player to perceive a delay between the entry of a prize into the starting slot and the start of the symbol variation, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game.

The communication between the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio display 1317 and the driver circuit 13171 may be at a high rate (19200 bps, the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or a low rate (1200 bps, the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Alternatively, the communication between the driver circuit 13171 and the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio display 1317 may use a rate between the high rate (19200 bps, the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and the low rate (1200 bps, the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). This is because increasing the data transmission rate may cause malfunctions in other circuits due to switching noise from the transistors in the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an anomaly occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is resent with each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. If the resent command is normal, the display content of the bonus ratio indicator 1317 returns to normal, so there is no need to set the transmission rate to an extremely low speed.

The command status register 3145 is a register referenced to check the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example:
Bit 7: SnTC This flag indicates that transmission is complete; 0 indicates transmission in progress, and 1 indicates transmission is complete. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode without using FIFO), this flag indicates that the data to be transmitted is empty; 0 indicates that the data has not yet been transferred to the transmit shift register, and 1 indicates that the data has been transferred to the transmit shift register. That is, it is set when data has been transferred from the transmit data register 3142 to the transmit shift register 3144, and the transmit data register 3142 no longer contains any data to be transmitted.

In SnTFTL FIFO mode, this flag indicates the transmit FIFO trigger level. A value of 0 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is equal to or greater than the trigger level, while a value of 1 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is less than the trigger level. In other words, it is set when the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmit trigger level setting register. Therefore, when communicating in FIFO mode, after confirming that this bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed at 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This bit is used to clear the transmit buffer and breakcode transmission, empty the transmit data, or set the transmit FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written externally. For example, to forcibly clear the contents of the buffer, set this bit to 1. More specifically, it is used when a command has been written to the FIFO, but for some reason (e.g., an error occurs) the transmission of the written command is canceled. Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmit shift register is not cleared.

In the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but it outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio indicator 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114, not from the clock circuit 13118. Each transmitting and receiving circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may have at least one channel capable of synchronous communication by configuration, and separate serial communication circuits for asynchronous and synchronous communication may be provided.

Although not shown in the diagram, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating the data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Dispensing Control Board]
Returning to Figure 17, let's continue the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The payout control board 951, which controls the payout of game balls, etc., is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error clearing switch for clearing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the ball tank 802, tank rail 803, ball guidance unit 820, and payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing Control Unit]
The dispensing control unit 952, which performs various dispensing controls on the dispensing control board 951, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, and RAM for temporarily storing data; a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device; an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally; a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830; and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. In addition to receiving operation signals (detection signals) for the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 535, as well as detection signals from the ball depletion detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840.

The detection signals from the bulb failure detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and then to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Furthermore, detection signals from the door frame release switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame release switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and then to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

Furthermore, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the dispensing control input circuit and then input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O to drive the payout motor 834, outputs a signal to the error LED indicator to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, transmits commands to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls actually dispensed to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by players by knowing the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784. Alternatively, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the dispensing control board 951.

The error LED indicator is a segment display that shows the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, shapes, etc. The error LED indicator displays and notifies the following: For example, when the shape "-" is displayed, it indicates that the system is "normal"; when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951); when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "bulb out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 827); when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "bulb jam" (specifically, that the payout blades and game balls are jammed in the payout passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout blades to rotate, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840); and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the signal from the payout detection sensor 842 Based on the detection signal, the system notifies that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842. When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that there is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it notifies that the system is "full" (specifically, that the system is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 535). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that the system is "CR disconnected" (meaning that an electrical connection has been disconnected anywhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it notifies that the system is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been dispensed has reached a predetermined number).

The ball dispensing request signal from the ball dispensing button and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be dispensed according to the ball dispensing request signal to the payout control board 951 via serial communication. This signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls dispensed and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance on the display unit. This signal is input to the display unit and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch Control Unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillator circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching game balls toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillator circuit so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, the contact detection sensor 509, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504, and the stop button, which detects whether the player wishes to forcibly stop the launch of the game balls, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. Furthermore, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle operation sensor 507, which electrically adjusts the force with which the game balls are launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

The launch solenoid drive circuit, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 682, triggered by the input of a launch reference pulse, to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle lever 504. Meanwhile, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit, triggered by the input of a ball feed reference pulse, outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551, thereby receiving one game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball feed unit 540. When the input of the ball feed reference pulse ends, the output of the constant current is stopped, sending the received game ball to the ball launching device 680. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant.

Furthermore, the power supply board that supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951 is equipped with a capacitor as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. This capacitor allows the dispensing control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 during power-off processing, even when the power supply is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral Control Board]
As shown in Figure 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511.

[3-3a. Peripheral Control Unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board-side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the performance drive board 3043 to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board-side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decorative drive board to the performance drive board 3043 to output drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided on the game board 5, and also transmits vibration devices 24 provided on the door frame 3 The system transmits door-side drive data, consisting of drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the door-side drive motor 272 and door-side light-emitting data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3, from the serial I/O port for the frame decorative drive substrate to the door frame 3. It also transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Furthermore, it outputs control signals (sound commands) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors, which detect the positions of various performance units installed on the game board 5, are input to the peripheral control MPU via the performance drive board 3043 mounted on the rear of the back box. Furthermore, detection signals from the touch panel 246 and performance button press sensor 258 of the performance operation unit 220 installed on the door frame 3 are also input to the peripheral control MPU.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is functioning normally, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and controls the playback of music and sound effects corresponding to various effects from speakers 921, etc., installed in the door frame 3 and main body frame 4. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520, which houses the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, by sending acoustic signals (e.g., 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals, etc.) as sound information to multiple speakers on the door frame 3 and the bass speaker 921 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 is equipped with an external WDT (watchdog timer), not just the internal WDT built into the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU uses both the internal and external WDTs to diagnose whether its system is malfunctioning.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 are performed via serial input/output ports, and in this embodiment, the bitrate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side illumination/flashing commands, game board side illumination/flashing commands, movable body drive commands, and display commands output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 mounted on the rear of the back box are performed via multiple different serial input/output ports, and in this embodiment, the bitrate is set to 250 kbps.

This performance drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received door frame-side lighting/flashing command to the LEDs on each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, or outputs a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received game board-side lighting/flashing command to the LEDs on each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Furthermore, the performance drive board 3043 outputs drive signals based on the received drive commands to the vibration device 242 and the lower right door drive motor 272 located in the door frame 3, as well as to the various drive motors located in the game board 5.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit will be explained with reference to Figure 60. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 17 performs the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit as shown in Figure 60. When this power-on processing for the peripheral control unit begins, the performance control program performs an initial setup process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setup process, the performance control program performs a process to initialize the peripheral control MPU itself, a process to determine whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process to set the wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process to initialize itself, but the time required for this initialization process is on the order of microseconds (μs), so the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupts are enabled, and can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game performances and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, which are output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the program acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC control unit. This information is then set in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit, and as the current time information in the time information storage unit.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, which will be described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when it is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit's V-blank signal interrupt processing, which will be executed later, triggered by the input of a V-blank signal indicating that the system is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU. In step S1006, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting it to a value of 0.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1 (step S1008). If the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not valued at 1 (i.e., valued at 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1. By repeating this determination, the program enters a waiting state until the peripheral control unit can perform its regular processing.

In step S1008, when the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit is executing steady-state processing, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is first set to value 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit is executing steady-state processing, and to value 0 when the peripheral control unit has completed its execution.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). This 1ms interrupt timer activation process activates the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process (described later). It also initializes the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting its value to 1, which counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer has been activated and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated during the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the performance control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the performance control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in Figure 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the performance control program performs a performance operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, based on various information acquired from detection signals from various detection switches on the performance operation unit 220 (as described later in the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit), such as the operation of the operation button 220C, the program monitors whether the operation button 220C has been operated and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the operation status of the operation button 220C in the game performance.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the built-in VDP outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame), generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source-integrated VDP during the display data creation process described later, to the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame-side decorative board 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame-side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects, which were set in the built-in VDP sound source during the sound data creation process described later, to the speaker 921. In addition to music and sound effects, it also outputs sound data such as notification sounds and alert sounds to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, the program updates a pointer to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data in the time-series arrangement of screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data, should be output to the sound source's built-in VDP.

Furthermore, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which of the time-series arranged light emission data points, which constitute the schedule data for generating light emission patterns, should be used for each type of LED's light emission pattern.

Furthermore, the scheduler update process updates the pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the built-in VDP (Virtual Display Panel) of the sound generation schedule data, which is arranged chronologically.

Furthermore, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data point, starting from the first, should be output from the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, which are arranged in a time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, which were received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands categorized into predetermined notification displays, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set for the abnormality display modes necessary for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and sets them in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notifications are issued in order of priority, as pre-registered, and the system automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications once the first abnormality is resolved. This allows for simultaneous monitoring of multiple abnormalities without losing information that an abnormality has occurred if another abnormality occurs after one abnormality has occurred but before it is resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the aforementioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified as status indicators, such as an error clear navigation command (second error clear command), the program controls the performance in a manner different from the normal performance mode associated with the performance operation. For example, it visually warns the outside using the game board side decorative board 3053 (performance device), the door frame side decorative board 233 (performance device), and lamps (performance device), or audibly warns the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, if a malicious player attempts to input an error clear navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch on the payout control board 951 while the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 will issue a warning to the outside, thus deterring fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that could affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit, which were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the time information (hours, minutes, seconds) stored in the time information storage unit, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information (year, month, day) stored in the calendar information storage unit is updated.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the performance control program extracts and creates game board-side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in a time series to constitute the schedule data for generating the light emission patterns. This data is used to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs on various decorative boards installed on the game board 5. The SL-DAT is then set in the peripheral control RAM. Additionally, door-side light emission data STL-DAT is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs on various decorative boards installed on the door frame 3. The STL-DAT is then set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the performance control program extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer (which is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020) from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs it to the sound source-integrated VDP. When the sound source-integrated VDP receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU, it extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board-side decoration board 3053 and the door frame-side decoration board 233 on its built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the performance control program extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in a time-series format constituting the sound generation schedule data, from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs it to the built-in sound source VDP. When the built-in sound source VDP receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU, it extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the LCD and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source to incorporate the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally connected peripheral control RAM to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively, and also copies the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM and the externally connected peripheral control MPU to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively, for backup.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). This WDT clear process outputs a clear signal to both the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the value of the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting the value to 0, and repeatedly performs the determination in step S1008 until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed, and the program returns to step S1006. Thus, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from steps S1009 to S1038 is called "peripheral control unit steady-state processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing begins in step S1009 when the performance control program sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is in progress. Then, in step S1010, it performs the 1ms interrupt timer activation process, followed by the processes in steps S1012, S1014, ..., and S1036. Finally, in step S1038, it completes by setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0, indicating that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is complete. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed in step S1008 when the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1. As mentioned above, this V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt process, which will be executed later, triggered by the input of a V-blank signal from the sound source's built-in VDP indicating that the system is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame-side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, we will describe the peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt processing, which is executed when a V-blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU, is input from the sound source-integrated VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Figure 61. When this peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt processing begins, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0 (step S1045), as shown in Figure 61. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 of the peripheral control power-on processing in Figure 60 is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control steady-state processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not valued at 0 (i.e., valued at 1) in step S1045, meaning that the peripheral control unit is currently performing steady-state processing, this routine terminates. On the other hand, if the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0 in step S1045, meaning that the peripheral control unit has completed its steady-state processing, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to value 1 (step S1050), and this routine terminates. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to perform steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit. It is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit is performing steady-state processing and to value 0 when it is not.

Next, we will explain the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 60. When this peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is less than 33, as shown in Figure 62 (step S1100). As described above, this number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 60, and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame-side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed repeatedly every approximately 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, the peripheral control unit's 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and then the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt.

In step S1100, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not less than 33, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing starts, this routine terminates immediately. If the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, in this embodiment, although the priority of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is set higher than that of the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing. Then, upon the generation of the V-blank signal, the 1ms interrupt timer is reactivated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing. Afterward, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing begins again due to the occurrence of the first 1ms timer interrupt.

On the other hand, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN in step S1100 is less than 33, the value of 1 is added to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (incremented, step S1102). This addition of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN increases the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing routine is executed in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 60, by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, various motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, based on the drive data of the motors and solenoids, which are arranged in a time-series configuration within the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and peripheral control RAM. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time-series configuration, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5. This determines the creation of history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.), which is then set in the peripheral control RAM. From this history information of detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, the original position and movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

Following step S1106, the performance operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 220. This creates history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of operation button 220C), and sets it in the peripheral control RAM. The operation status of operation button 220C can be obtained from this history information of detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, the drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side display receiver IC on the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As mentioned above, the LOCKN signal is output by the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 on the door frame side decorative board 233 when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine terminates. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are also copied to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively, for backup.

Thus, in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance described in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 60, various processing related to the performance described in steps S1012 to S1032 is executed within a period of approximately 33.3ms as the progress of the performance. In the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN in step S1100 is not less than 33, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts, the routine terminates immediately. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd interrupt is forcibly canceled. After the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing due to the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts anew due to the first 1ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing and the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. Therefore, the progress of the performance can be reliably synchronized.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the LCD on the game board-side decorative board 3053 and the door frame-side decorative board 233. The interval may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU and the sound source-integrated VDP are mounted. In this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is the signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit's V-blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V-blank signal is output changes slightly, the time lag caused by this slight change in the V-blank signal output interval can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt.

[3-4. Liquid Crystal Display Control Unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 on the peripheral control board 1510, which controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-mounted liquid crystal display device 244, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the top-mounted liquid crystal display device 244, an image ROM (performance data ROM) that stores various data of the screens displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-mounted liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM (performance data ROM) is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU incorporates parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, and upper-tray LCD display 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to indicate this. Furthermore, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and triggers an interrupt process every 16ms when this execution signal stops.

The display control ROM stores various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-mounted liquid crystal display device 244, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to that control data (display commands). The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which screens are drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-mounted liquid crystal display device 244. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is composed of non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM (performance data ROM) are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM, arranged in chronological order. This non-resident area transfer data pre-defines the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM (animation data ROM) to the non-resident area of the image RAM, according to the progress of the schedule data, so that the screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display 1600, sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be displayed in advance.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the corresponding schedule data. Then, it extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data, which is arranged chronologically in the schedule data, one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on this input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and the upper-tray liquid crystal display 244. The VDP then outputs this generated drawing data to the main liquid crystal display 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and the upper-tray liquid crystal display 244. Furthermore, when the main liquid crystal display 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display 3114, or the upper-tray liquid crystal display 244 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to indicate this. The VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer method" involves storing drawing data for one line of the main liquid crystal display 1600, sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and upper-tray liquid crystal display 244 in a line buffer, and then outputting this line of drawing data to the main liquid crystal display 1600, sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and upper-tray liquid crystal display 244.

The image ROM (animation data ROM) stores a very large amount of sprite data, resulting in a large capacity. As the capacity of the image ROM increases—that is, as the number of sprites to be drawn on the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, and upper-tray LCD display 244 increases—the access speed of the image ROM becomes significant, affecting the drawing speed on the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, and upper-tray LCD display 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a faster access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

To explain "sprites" here, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unified unit on the main LCD display 1600 or the upper LCD display 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, and upper LCD display 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." Therefore, when displaying multiple people on the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, or upper LCD display 244, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the main LCD display 1600, sub-LCD display 3114, and upper LCD display 244 after their positions on the screen and their hierarchical relationships when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is composed of multiple rectangular areas, each 64 pixels wide and 64 pixels high. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using a single sprite character, while larger sprites, such as those of people, can be represented using a total of six sprite characters, for example, arranged in a 2x3 grid. Even larger sprites, like backgrounds, can be represented using even more sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-dish liquid crystal display device 244 are driven by a main scan, which sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan, which repeatedly performs the main scan in a direction intersecting that direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top-dish liquid crystal display device 244 receive drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, they output to each pixel of one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, as a main scan. Once the output for one line is complete, the main liquid crystal display 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and the upper-tray liquid crystal display 244 move to the line directly below as a sub-scan. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the main liquid crystal display 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display 3114, and the upper-tray liquid crystal display 244 sequentially output to each pixel of one line, viewed from left to right as seen from the front, based on this next line's drawing data.

[4. Game Details]
Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained, mainly with reference to Figures 10, 16, and 17. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. This causes the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to pass through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 and be driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, thus starting the game with the game balls. The game balls driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either to the left or right of the center mechanism 2500, depending on the force with which they are driven. The force with which the game balls are driven can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504. The more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the balls are driven, and it is possible to continuously drive up to 100 game balls per minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle pins (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement. When the game balls come into contact with the obstacle pins, their flow velocity is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game balls, allowing players to enjoy these movements. In addition to the obstacle pins, windmills (not shown) that rotate upon contact with the game balls are also provided at appropriate positions within the game area 5a.

When a game ball is driven into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the area to the left of the highest point on the outer surface of the front perimeter wall 2512 of the center mechanism 2500, and flows down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500, while abutting against multiple obstacle pins (not shown). Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520, which opens on the outer surface of the front perimeter wall 2512 of the center mechanism 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522 (which opens within the frame of the center mechanism 2500), and the guide path 2523.

The game balls supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 and are released backward from either the central guide unit 2531 in the center of the left-right direction, or the side guide units 2532 located to its left or right. Once the game balls are released into the game area 5a from the central guide unit 2531 of the stage 2530, they are received into the first start opening 2002 with a high probability, as the central guide unit 2531 is located directly above the first start opening 2002. Upon receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

The game balls rolling on the stage 2530 are released into the game area 5a from the side guide unit 2532 and flow down toward the starter unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starter opening 2002 or the open first large prize opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100.

Incidentally, if a game ball that flows down to the left of the center mechanism 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved towards the center in the left-right direction by the shelf section 2302 on the upper side unit 2300, and may be received by the general prize entry opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002 on the lower side unit 2200. When a game ball is received by the general prize entry opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball driven into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a enters (is driven into) the area to the right of the highest point on the outer surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right-hand game area 2540. Although not shown in the illustration, multiple obstacle pins are planted within this upper right circulation space 2541, and the game ball flows through it while colliding with these obstacle pins, changing its direction of flow in various ways. This upper right circulation space 3541 is equipped with a gate portion 2003 at the top and a general prize entry opening 2001 and a second start opening 2004 at the bottom, which is normally closed by a second start opening door member 2549.

The game balls that flow down through the upper right circulation space 2541 enter the lower right circulation space 2543 via the right circulation passage 2542 downstream. The game balls that enter this lower right circulation space 2543 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a, which has its upper surface forming the bottom surface of the second upper large prize opening door member 2552 and the second lower large prize opening door member 2555 that close the second upper large prize opening 2006a and the second lower large prize opening 2006b, which are arranged side by side as the second large prize opening 2006, and are released into the game area 5a from the left end of the lowered release plate section 2559 on the left side in a front view. The downstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a (discharge plate section 2559) is open so that the game balls are directed toward the first large prize opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100. When the first large prize opening 2005 is open, if game balls are released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, there is a high probability that the game balls will be received by the first large prize opening 2005.

The game balls flowing through the right-hand flow passage 2542 and the lower-right flow space 2543 flow downwards while their flow speed is suppressed by multiple deceleration ribs 2546. Very rarely, a game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b, which branches off near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, within the lower-right flow space 2543. Game balls that enter the discharge passage 2543b are not returned to the game area 5a but are discharged outside the game board 5 through the second out opening 2543c.

When a game ball that has been hit to the right enters the upper right circulation space 2541 and passes through the gate section 2003, it is detected by the gate sensor 2547. The main control board 1310 then obtains a random number from among random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range, and performs a normal lottery by comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined normal win determination table. If the time-saving control described later is not being executed, and the result of this normal lottery is a "normal win," the second start opening door member 2549 rotates once in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, opening the second start opening 2004, and allowing game balls to be received into the second start opening 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, if the time-saving control is being executed, the normal lottery determines whether the result is a "normal win" and whether it is a "first normal win," "second normal win," or "third normal win." Then, when time-saving control is in operation, if the result of the normal lottery is "first normal win," "second normal win," or "third normal win," the second start-up door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise in a front view to open the second start-up opening 2004, allowing game balls to be received into the second start-up opening 2004 for a predetermined period of time. After that, it rotates counterclockwise in a front view to close the second start-up opening 2004, making it impossible to receive game balls into the second start-up opening 2004. This opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (five times in this example). Furthermore, if the result of the regular lottery is "First Regular Win," the periods for each of the five times the second start gate 2004 is made ready to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," and "0.3 seconds." If the result of the regular lottery is "Second Regular Win," the periods for each of the five times the second start gate 2004 is made ready to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," and "1.1 seconds." The time intervals for each of the five rounds during which the second start port 2004 is ready to receive game balls are set to "0.28 seconds" and "0.3 seconds," respectively, when the result of the regular lottery is a "third regular win." The "second regular win" and "third regular win" are more advantageous to the player than the "first regular win" (because it is easier to receive game balls into the second start port 2004). Furthermore, once game balls are received into the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the normal symbol display on the function display unit 1400 displays the variation of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time is set between the start of the variation display and the display of the normal symbols stopping (until the normal lottery result is indicated) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). At the second start opening 2004, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates to open after the normal variation time has elapsed. During the execution of the time-saving control described later, control is performed to shorten the normal variation time compared to the normal state (when time-saving control is not being executed). Furthermore, the opening time for rotating the second start opening door member 2549 to open the second start opening 2004 may be changed according to the game state. For example, when time-saving control is not being executed, the opening time of the second start opening 2004 may be changed to a longer time compared to when time-saving control is being executed.

Furthermore, if a new game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 between the time a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the time the normal symbol display on the normal symbol indicator stops (until the normal lottery result is indicated), the normal symbol indicator cannot start displaying the new normal symbol. Therefore, the start of the normal symbol display is suspended until the previous normal symbol display has finished (until the indication of the normal lottery result has finished). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the start of the normal symbol display is suspended until it is possible to start displaying the normal symbol. The main control board 1310 can store up to four normal random numbers; any numbers beyond that are discarded without being stored, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses the increase in the burden on the game hall due to the accumulation of stored numbers.

In this embodiment, when a game ball received into the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 obtains a first special random number from among first special random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range. By comparing this obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, a lottery is held to determine a first special lottery result that generates a favorable game state for the player (for example, "jackpot," "minor win," etc.). Based on the lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first special lottery result (the first special symbol is displayed in a variation state, and then the stopped symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result is displayed), thereby indicating the first special lottery result to the player. Furthermore, the first special lottery result, which is drawn when a game ball is received into the first starting port 2002, has the following possibilities: "miss," "minor win," "2R jackpot," "8R jackpot," and "10R jackpot." By comparing the acquired first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these the result is. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability improvement control (high probability state (also called a probability variation state): in this example, a probability of winning a jackpot of about 1 in 44) which improves the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) compared to the normal state (low probability state: in this example, a probability of winning a jackpot of about 1 in 395) after a jackpot game (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), whether or not to execute a time reduction control (time reduction state) which shortens the variation time compared to normal if at least the first special lottery result is a miss (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot), and the period for which the time reduction control is executed (number of time reductions: number of variations of special symbols (first special striking symbols and second special symbols)). The probability of winning a "minor win" is always constant, regardless of the game state (approximately 1 in 300 in this example).

Furthermore, when a game ball received into the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2551, the main control board 1310 obtains a second special random number from among the second special random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range, and by comparing this obtained second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, a lottery is held to determine a second special lottery result that generates a favorable game state for the player (for example, "jackpot," "minor win," etc.). Then, based on the lottery result for the second special lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second special lottery result (the second special symbol is displayed in a variation, and then the stopped symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result is displayed), thereby indicating the second special lottery result to the player. Furthermore, the second special lottery result, which is drawn when a game ball is received into the second starting gate 2004, has the following possibilities: "Miss," "2R Jackpot," "4R Jackpot," "5R Jackpot," "6R Jackpot," "7R Jackpot," "8R Jackpot," and "16R Jackpot." By comparing the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these the result is. Moreover, after a jackpot game, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than normal (low probability state: in this example, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1 in 395). The system also determines whether to implement a probability-enhancing control (high probability state, also called a probability-increasing state: in this example, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1 in 44) to improve the probability of winning (probability of winning), whether to implement a time-saving control (time-saving state) that shortens the reel spin time compared to normal if at least the second special lottery result is a loss, and whether to implement a time-saving jackpot or not, as well as the duration of the time-saving control (number of time-saving spins: the number of spins for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol)).

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) obtained by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the eight LEDs of the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator and second special symbol indicator) will be displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the special lottery result, and thereafter, either the first major prize opening 2005 or the second major prize opening 2006 will be in a predetermined opening and closing pattern that allows for the acceptance of game balls. When the first and second large prize slots 2005 and 2006 are open, and game balls are received into them, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 dispense a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 11 balls if game balls are received into the first large prize slot 2005, or 15 balls if game balls are received into the second large prize slot 2006) from the payout device 830 into the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing game balls to be received into the first and second large prize slots 2005 and 2006 when they are open to receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be dispensed, providing enjoyment for the players.

If the special lottery result is a "minor win" or a "2R big win," the first large prize slot 2005 will open to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) and then close, repeating this opening and closing pattern multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", or "16R jackpot", then after the first jackpot 2005 or the second jackpot 2006 is open to accept game balls, if a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) have been accepted into the first jackpot 2005 or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have been accepted into the second jackpot 2006, then an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes it impossible to accept game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it's a "4R jackpot," it repeats for 4 rounds; if it's a "5R jackpot," it repeats for 5 rounds; and if it's a "16R jackpot," it repeats for 16 rounds, creating a favorable game state for the player. Furthermore, in the opening and closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "minor win" or a "2R jackpot" (an opening and closing pattern in which the first large prize slot 2005 is open for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to accept game balls before closing), it is practically difficult to get game balls into the first large prize slot 2005. In contrast, the opening and closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", or "16R jackpot" (an opening and closing pattern that closes the first or second large prize slot 2005 to an unacceptable state after a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed since the opening was opened to accept game balls, or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) have been accepted into the first large prize slot 2005 or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have been accepted into the second large prize slot 2006) makes it easy to get game balls into the first or second large prize slot 2005. Furthermore, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", or "16R jackpot", then the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern is executed to close the opening/closing state to prevent the acceptance of game balls will be effectively reduced if either of the following conditions is met: after the first or second large prize slot 2005 or second large prize slot 2006 is open to accept game balls, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) have been accepted into the first large prize slot 2005 or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have been accepted into the second large prize slot 2006. The special lottery result may also be a general one, and if either of the following conditions is met as a special lottery result, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the first large prize slot 2005 or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second large prize slot 2006, the system may be configured to execute multiple rounds, including an opening/closing pattern that puts the slot into a closed state where game balls cannot be accepted, and an opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "minor win" or a "2R big win" (an opening/closing pattern in which the first large prize slot 2005 is in an open state where game balls can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) before closing). For example, if a special lottery result is set as an "8R jackpot that effectively becomes 4R," and either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 7) are accepted into the first large prize slot 2005 or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are accepted into the second large prize slot 2006, then an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to accept game balls is repeated four times. After that, an opening and closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "minor win" or a "2R jackpot" (an opening and closing pattern in which the first large prize slot 2005 is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) before closing) is repeated four times.

In this embodiment, the second large prize slot 2006 is composed of a second upper large prize slot 2006a and a second lower large prize slot 2006b, which are arranged side by side. When a "jackpot" is achieved using the second large prize slot 2006, for example, in the first round (R1), the second upper large prize slot 2006a opens to accept game balls. When the conditions for acceptance are met, it closes, and during the interval until acceptance becomes possible again, the second lower large prize slot 2006b opens to accept game balls, starting the next round (R2). When the second lower large prize slot 2006b becomes unacceptable, the interval period has elapsed, so the second upper large prize slot 2006a is opened again to accept game balls. The second upper large prize slot 2006a and the second lower large prize slot 2006b are then opened and closed alternately until a predetermined number of rounds have been completed. As a result, within the second attacker passage 2543a, during a "jackpot," either the second upper prize slot 2006a or the second lower prize slot 2006b is in a state where it can accept game balls. Therefore, if a player shoots to the right in this state and sends game balls into the second attacker passage 2543a, those game balls will always be accepted into the second prize slot 2006, eliminating the loss of game balls and allowing players to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for some of the multiple types of jackpots described above, whether or not the above-mentioned time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game ends is determined differently depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in a non-time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is not being executed) and the probability-enhancing control is not executed after the jackpot game, then the time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed), then the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Also, if the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in a non-time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is not being executed) and the probability-enhancing control is not executed after the jackpot game, then the time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed), then the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Furthermore, in a low-probability, non-time-saving state (a state where neither probability-enhancing control nor time-saving control is being executed: also called the normal state), if the results of the first and second special lotteries are 2R probability-changing jackpots that trigger probability-enhancing control after the jackpot game, then time-saving control will not be executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, in a state where probability-enhancing control is being executed or time-saving control is being executed, i.e., in a state other than the normal state, if the results of the first and second special lotteries are 2R probability-changing jackpots that trigger probability-enhancing control after the jackpot game, then time-saving control will be executed after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol variation, which is executed by the first special symbol display unit upon receipt of a game ball into the first start port 2002, and the display of the second special symbol variation, which is executed by the second special symbol display unit upon receipt of a game ball into the second start port 2004, are not executed simultaneously; only one of them is executed at a time. Therefore, if a new game ball is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 between the time a game ball is received into the first start port 2002 and the time the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator stops (until the first special lottery result is indicated), and between the time a game ball is received into the second start port 2004 and the time the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol indicator stops (until the second special lottery result is indicated), the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator cannot start displaying the first or second special symbol again. For this reason, the start of the display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the display of the previous special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has finished (until the indication of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is complete). Specifically, the system stores a first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of a game ball received into the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and a second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of a game ball received into the second start port 2004 by the second start port sensor 2551. The system then holds off on displaying the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the system is ready to begin displaying the special symbols. The main control board 1310 can store up to four first and four second special random numbers, and any numbers exceeding this limit are discarded even if game balls are received into the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004. This prevents an increase in the burden on the arcade due to an accumulation of stored numbers. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is configured to prioritize the processing of the second special random number, rather than the first, which is stored in the board. In other words, regardless of the timing of ball reception into the first and second start ports 2002 and 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the second special symbol's variation display is held in abeyance, the variation display of the second special symbol will take precedence over that of the first special symbol.

The indication of the special lottery result is provided by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 directly controls the indication of the special lottery result via the main control board 1310. The indication of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 involves repeatedly switching the eight LEDs constituting the special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) on and off for a predetermined time, and then stopping in a predetermined lighting pattern. The combination of LEDs lit at this time indicates the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the main LCD display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern commands, judgment result notification commands, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery results are suggested by the visual effects. Specifically, in the main LCD display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol sequences consisting of multiple different symbols are displayed in multiple columns (for example, three columns of left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol). The variation display of each decorative symbol sequence begins, and then the symbols are sequentially stopped (in this example, the symbols are stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol). Finally, when all the decorative symbol sequences are stopped, the lottery results of special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted from the combination of symbols that were stopped are suggested to the player. In other words, based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when a winning combination is achieved, a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. After multiple rows of decorative symbols change, an image is displayed that stops to indicate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). Furthermore, since the decorative symbols displayed on the main LCD display 1600 are larger and easier to see than the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display unit, players generally focus their attention on the decorative symbols displayed on the main LCD display 1600.

Furthermore, the time indicated by the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicated by the main LCD display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern sequence changes until the confirmed image is displayed) are different, with the function display unit 1400 having a shorter time setting.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a visual effect image on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to indicate the special lottery result, can appropriately use the decorative elements of the center mechanism 2500, the rear left-center decorative unit 3050, the rear lower-rear movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper-left movable effect unit 3200, the rear left movable effect unit 3300, the rear upper-center movable effect unit 3400, and the rear lower-front movable effect unit 3500, etc., to perform lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., depending on the special lottery result. This allows the player to be entertained through various effects, and helps to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processes of the main control board]
Next, we will describe the processes executed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, we will describe the system/user reset process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on, and the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined period (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer activated by the system/user reset process.

[5-1. Initialization Process]
Figures 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure for the initialization process of the main control board in an embodiment of the present invention.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization by executing the main control program. Once the initialization process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled mode, making it possible to write to RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, it outputs "00H" to the RAM protect register to indicate write permission.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, it first writes "03H" to the watchdog timer control register, indicating the mode setting, and then writes "03H" again to indicate the watchdog timer activation. Finally, it clears and resets the watchdog timer (step S14).

Next, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage between power-on and the predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while the process waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If a predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (such as the peripheral control board 1510) to start up has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch has been operated, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, excluding the work area for calculating the payout ratio (payout ratio calculation area 13128), is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is set when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after normal processing, such as in the case of a power outage (see step S56 in Figure 22).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the area 13128 for calculating the bonus ratio) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power outage is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the area 13128 for calculating the payout ratio) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, a check code is used to determine if the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio (bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128) is functioning correctly (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the bonus payout ratio calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the bonus payout ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

Furthermore, when one or more backup areas are provided in the area 13128 for calculating the payout ratio, the main area should first be checked using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1, 2, and N should be checked in that order, and the data from the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. Afterward, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained.

Regarding the area for calculating the payout ratio, the data in the payout ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased at predetermined intervals, separate from the result of the check code judgment when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the data in the payout ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased after a predetermined amount of operation (for example, after a predetermined number of balls launched, after a predetermined number of winning balls, after a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, after a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games resulting in a jackpot, etc.).

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine erases data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 under different conditions for each type of data (game control data 13132 and prize ratio calculation/display data 13136). That is, operating the RAM clear switch erases the backed-up game control data 13132, but not the backed-up prize ratio calculation/display data 13136. If the prize ratio calculation/display data 13136 could be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the prize ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 could be erased at any time. Therefore, by preventing the backed-up prize ratio calculation/display data 13136 from being erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is possible to prevent the erasure of the prize ratio calculation/display data 13136 by a game hall employee, thus preventing the concealment of an abnormal prize ratio. This allows for easy detection of game machines that have been modified to have a high or low prize ratio.

When the RAM work area is powered back on or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) performs initial settings for various setting registers (step S28). In the initial settings of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are enabled. Furthermore, the serial communication port and test signal output port are initialized. The hardware random number generation circuit is started. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114, used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the prize ratio indicator 1317, is configured. Finally, after the serial communication circuit 13114 starts operating, the driver circuit 13171 for the prize ratio indicator 1317 is initialized.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process to set a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. The power-on command is generated by setting the power-on state reference command as the reference command data and adding the command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated.

The commands used when the power is turned on include the power-on state buffer command and the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number command. The power-on state buffer command notifies the game state upon power recovery after a power outage, and indicates the probability of winning the special lottery and the operation pattern of the regular electric mechanism. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number command notifies the execution status of the special symbol fluctuation display.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 authorizes the execution of interrupt processing, including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setup of the pachinko machine 1 is completed through the processes from power-on to step S34 (initial setup means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal (step S36) and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON or OFF (step S38). If the power outage warning signal is NOT ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), i.e., the random number update process is executed (step S40). The random number update process in step S46 primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winning outcomes in special and regular lotteries. Note that the random number update process for determining winning outcomes in special and regular lotteries is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until a power outage warning signal is detected, and these processes are designated as the main control side's main processes (normal means after initial setup).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power outage processing (power outage setting means). This power outage processing backs up data necessary to restore the system to its state before the power outage. Specifically, it first prohibits the execution of interrupt processing (step S42). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later, preventing writing to the main control's built-in RAM 1312 and protecting against overwriting of game information. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of devices controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, it sets the power outage clear signal OFF bit data for the solenoid, power outage clear, and ACK output ports. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, it is sufficient to clear only the output ports used to control solenoids and motors that consume a lot of power. Clearing these output ports reduces power consumption during the time until the main board-side power outage processing is completed, ensuring that the main board-side power outage processing is completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the backed-up work area was properly preserved (step S46). Furthermore, the result of the checksum calculation is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Next, a check code (e.g., a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio (bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated during the bonus payout ratio calculation and display process, rather than during the main board power-off processing.

Next, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Next, the data from the main area of the workpiece for calculating the bonus item ratio (bonus item ratio calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. Backup may be performed as appropriate during the bonus item ratio calculation and display process (for example, each time the data is updated), rather than during the main board power-off processing.

In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the bonus payout ratio, along with the calculated (or predetermined) check code, in a backup area, the data for calculating the bonus payout ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off, allowing for the calculation of the bonus payout ratio over long periods of operation.

Furthermore, a value indicating successful backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, writing to RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer Interrupt Handling]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt processing is performed repeatedly at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in Figures 21 and 22. Figure 23 is a flowchart of an example of the timer interrupt processing.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first setting the RBS (Register Bank Selection Flag) in the program status word to 1, and then switching the registers (step S70). In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched and used each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the main control MPU 1311's various input ports are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls entering prize slots such as general prize slots, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detect fraudulent activity using magnets, and the payout control ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout command transmitted during prize ball control processing has been successfully received are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. Furthermore, in the switch input processing, detection signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060 and the ball launch sensor 1020 are read to count the number of balls that have been ejected.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In this timer update process, for example, it manages the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process, and also manages the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the payout control board 951 has received the payout ACK signal that indicates that the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) have been successfully received. Specifically, when the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variable time, and the result of this subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update process 1 (step S78). Random number update process 1 updates the random numbers for determining jackpots, jackpot symbols, and minor jackpot symbols. In addition to these random numbers, it also updates the random numbers for determining the initial values of jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning/losing random number update process in step S40 of the system/user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed based on the read input information is calculated, and this is written to the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, based on the calculation result of the prize ball count, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created, and a self-check command is created to confirm the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the prize ratio calculation area 13128 (see Figure 26) of the main control's built-in RAM 1312 (step S81). The processing in step S81 can be skipped if there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, thereby reducing the load on the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The dispensing control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command) categorized by the dispensing control program. Meanwhile, as will be described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception processing, when various commands are successfully received as dispensing serial data, information to inform the dispensing control board 951 of this is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. The main control MPU 1311 also formats the commands successfully received as dispensing serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.) and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area mentioned above. Furthermore, during the prize ball dispensing process, the number of prize balls dispensed is recorded in a memory area (see Figure 27) determined by the game state in the prize ratio calculation area 13128.

The process for updating the area for calculating the bonus payout ratio (step S81) can be executed in any order, as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the bonus payout ratio calculation and display process (step S89).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). The fraud detection process checks for abnormal conditions related to prize balls. For example, if the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the count switch detects that game balls have entered the large prize winning slots 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot state, the main control program creates a prize winning abnormality display command, which is classified as an abnormal condition and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, it determines whether the random value for the jackpot matches the winning judgment value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM. Furthermore, it determines whether to transition to a probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. If the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are met, the game then transitions to the probability variation state; however, if the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are not met, the game transitions to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) where the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher compared to the normal game state (low probability state).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the control process for normal symbols and normal electric prizes (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric prize control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 was input to the input terminal. If a detection signal was input to the input terminal, a random number for determining a normal symbol win is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, based on the lottery result from the normal lottery, it is determined whether or not to open or close the second start gate door member 2549. If the decision is made to open or close the door, the second start gate door member 2549 opens (or expands), allowing game balls to be accepted into the start gate 2004, thus transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, it calls the prize ratio calculation and display process (Figures 24 and 25) and calculates the prize ratio by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the prize ratio calculation area 13128. Then, it displays the calculated prize ratio on the prize ratio display unit 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the prize ratio calculation and display process in the timer interrupt processing and calculating the prize ratio, the prize ratio (the gambling potential of the pachinko machine 1) based on the most recent data can be confirmed.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the main frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has opened from the outer frame 2, the payout ratio may be displayed. Also, if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main frame release switch (not shown) has detected that the main frame 4 has opened from the outer frame 2, the payout ratio may be displayed on the payout ratio indicator 1317. Since the display switch 1318 is located on the back side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is activated, the main frame 4 is usually open and the game has stopped. Calculating the payout ratio at the time the game has stopped in this way reduces the CPU load by avoiding the consumption of CPU resources through division and subtraction calculations during gameplay.

Details of the calculation and display process for the bonus payout ratio will be described later in Figures 24 and 25. Specific examples of how the bonus payout ratio is displayed will also be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (bonus payout ratio, continuous bonus payout ratio, cumulative total, and total cumulative total) may be calculated, or only the values displayed may be calculated each time the display switch 1318 is operated. Alternatively, the bonus payout ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated bonus payout ratio may be displayed on the bonus payout ratio display unit 1317.

Furthermore, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the process of updating the area for calculating the payout ratio (step S81) and the process of calculating and displaying the payout ratio (step S89) are still executed. By executing these processes, regardless of whether fraud has been detected or not, the payout ratio can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). During the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are successfully received from the output terminals of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1311 based on output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When a jackpot is in play, drive signals are output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening/closing members 2107 of the jackpot winning holes 2005 and 2006. In addition, drive signals are output to the start-up solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start-up opening (second start-up opening door member 2549). Furthermore, various game-related information signals (game information) such as probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output signals, and start-up winning information output signals, as well as security signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Furthermore, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-of-bounds balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out-of-bounds balls (e.g., 10 balls).

Furthermore, the output data setting process sets the test signals to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1. These test signals include, for example, signals indicating the game state and signals indicating the stopping patterns of normal and special symbols (information signal output means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in this routine's timer interrupt processing. The main frequency serial data is structured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main frequency serial data consists of a status indicating the command type (1 byte, 8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect (1 byte, 8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values. This sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting the watchdog timer clear register WCL to a predetermined value clears the register. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns to) the register bank. Once these processes are complete, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the system returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 performs calculation processing for the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus payout ratio in the timer interrupt processing. However, the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also perform calculation processing for the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus payout ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to display the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus payout ratio, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus payout ratio.

[5-3. Calculation and display of bonus item ratios]
Figures 24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the prize ratio calculation and display process. The prize ratio calculation and display process is performed by the main control MPU 1311. Alternatively, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may perform the prize ratio calculation and display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the prize ratio, the calculated prize ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated prize ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the game's presentation may be changed. Specifically, if the prize ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold (a threshold smaller than the standard value), the preview presentation may be changed to a preview presentation that is more exciting than the normal preview presentation.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140). It is then determined whether the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is considered normal. Therefore, the bonus ratio calculation process is executed to calculate the bonus ratio and the consecutive bonus ratio from the data in the main area and store them in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of bonus balls won by the total number of balls won, and the consecutive bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive bonus balls won by the total number of balls won. The decimal part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and consecutive bonus ratio should be truncated or rounded. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

Furthermore, in step S156, each time the bonus ratio and/or continuous bonus ratio in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 are updated, the updated values may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits used to store the number of acquired balls is large and the number of bits available for calculation by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the acquired ball count may be omitted when calculating the payout ratio. For example, if the storage area for the acquired ball count is 32 bits, it can store values from 0 to 4,294,967,295. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and capable of 8 or 16-bit calculations, it is preferable to extract the 16 bits from the most significant bit (value 1) of the acquired ball count stored in 32 bits, store them in a 16-bit calculation register, and perform the division. Furthermore, if the acquired ball count is less than or equal to the maximum number of bits available for calculation (the maximum value of 16 bits, which is 32767), the lower 16 bits should be extracted and used for the calculation.

Furthermore, by dividing the total number of balls obtained by 100 (rounding down the decimal part) and using this as the dividend to calculate the payout ratio, calculations involving decimals can be avoided.

Furthermore, the upper limit for the bonus payout ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculated bonus payout ratio is 100 or higher, it may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is abnormal, and an attempt is made to calculate the bonus ratio from the data in backup area 1. Specifically, a check code is calculated from backup area 1 of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and it is determined whether the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the data in backup area 1 is normal, so the data in backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148), the bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and consecutive bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the data in backup area 1 is abnormal, and an attempt is made to calculate the bonus ratio from the data in backup area 2. Specifically, a check code is calculated from backup area 2 of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and it is determined whether the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the data in backup area 1 is normal, so the data in backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154), the bonus ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the bonus ratio and consecutive bonus ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there are other backup areas, similarly, the system will determine if the data in those backup areas is normal, and calculate the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio from the data in the normal backup areas.

If the data in the main area and all backup areas is abnormal, the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio (bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized, and the abnormality is reported (step S158).

Next, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason for calculating the check code during the bonus ratio calculation and display process is that if the system is reset during the power outage processing on the main board side, the power outage flag and checksum are not calculated, causing the data backed up in RAM 1312 to be initialized during the initialization process. However, by periodically calculating and storing the check code during the bonus ratio calculation and display process, the data in the bonus ratio calculation work area (bonus ratio calculation area 13128) can be retained without being erased even when the pachinko machine's power is restored.

Next, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is odd, the data in the main area is copied to backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area allocation counter value is even, the data in the main area is copied to backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the destination for copying the data from the main area based on the backup area allocation counter value, and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written to multiple backup areas.

Furthermore, if you have three or more backup areas, you can allocate the backup areas to which data is written based on the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Next, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display unit 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated bonus ratio type and the calculated value, the conversion table (not shown) is referenced to obtain the data to be displayed in each digit of the bonus ratio display unit 1317, and the obtained data is sent to the bonus ratio display unit 1317's driver circuit 13171. For example, if the bonus ratio type is bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus payout ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus payout ratio calculation and display process reads the data on the number of balls won from the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128 (i.e., the bonus payout ratio calculation work area shown in Figure 27), but it cannot write data to the memory area related to the number of balls won in the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128. In other words, as will be described later, if the processes in steps S156 and S172 are configured in a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the memory area related to the number of balls won in the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128, but it can write data to the memory areas for the calculated bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio.

As explained above, in the calculation and display process of the bonus payout ratio, the data used to calculate the bonus payout ratio is copied to a backup area. Therefore, in the event that the normal power-off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or other reason, the data used to calculate the bonus payout ratio can be protected.

Furthermore, since the processes in steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is advisable to configure them in one or more common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check codes in the main area and the backup area are correct should be configured separately on the non-common side, apart from the common program module. This is because the data checking and backup methods differ for each machine model. However, if the data checking and backup methods are standardized across machine models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Memory Area Configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in ROM 1313 will be described. Figure 26(A) shows an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

ROM 1313 includes areas for storing game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, prize ratio calculation/display code 13135, and prize ratio calculation/display data 13136. In this embodiment, the ROM 1313 is allocated a game control area (first memory area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132; a debug (inspection function) area (second memory area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) code 13133 and debug (inspection function) data 13134; and a prize ratio calculation area (third memory area) for storing programs used for calculating prize ratios, such as prize ratio calculation/display code 13135 and prize ratio calculation/display data 13136.

A free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the starting address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, allowing for easy distinction between the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area when displayed in dump list format. Similarly, a free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the starting address of the prize ratio calculation/display code 13135, allowing for easy distinction between the debug (inspection function) area and the prize ratio calculation area when displayed in dump list format. The values stored in the free areas should be fixed values, and preferably values different from or less frequently used in the game and debug areas. Furthermore, the values stored in the free areas may be instructions that the CPU does nothing with, such as No Operation codes. This allows for easy distinction between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the prize ratio calculation area when displayed in dump list format.

Furthermore, instead of separating the debug (inspection function) area from the prize ratio calculation area, the prize ratio calculation/display code 13135 and prize ratio calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area. In other words, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguishable. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the prize ratio calculation area (prize ratio calculation/display code 13135 and prize ratio calculation/display data 13136), which is a process not directly related to the control of game progress, is placed separately from the game control area, thus avoiding the risk that a malfunction (bug, etc.) in the prize ratio calculation/display code 13135 could affect game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to gameplay. For example, it stores code 13133 for outputting various function inspection signals used only during debugging of the pachinko machine 1, other than gameplay control. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the prize ratio calculation area stores programs for calculating prize ratios, which are not directly related to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. While the game control code 13131 can read from and write to the RAM 1312 as needed, the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 is configured so that only reading is possible from the debug (test function) code, and writing to this area is not possible. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (test function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is executing, but the system is configured so that the debug (test function) code cannot call and execute the game control code 13131. This increases the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the changes to the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum.

Furthermore, the bonus ratio calculation and display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation and display code 13135 is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. The bonus ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area), as shown in the figure. In this way, by designing the bonus ratio calculation and display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the inspection of the bonus ratio calculation and display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed separately, reducing the effort required to inspect the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the bonus ratio calculation and display code 13135 can be used across multiple models, regardless of the specific model.

Figure 26(B) shows the details of the prize ratio calculation area 13128. The prize ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the prize ratio calculation results are stored, as well as backup areas 1 and 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. Each area is assigned a check code to detect data errors. The check code may be the checksum of the data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code may be set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set each time the data in the main area is updated in the prize ratio calculation and display process, or set in the main control side power outage processing (steps S50 to S54 in Figure 22). In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code may be initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value may be set in the main control side power outage processing (step S50 in Figure 20). The check code may also be used in conjunction with the power outage flag. In other words, if a predetermined value is set for the main area's check code, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Alternatively, if a predetermined value is set for the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check codes for each area are correct (i.e., the data in each area is normal).

Furthermore, if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the system may determine whether the backup area is normal and, if the backup area is determined to be normal, copy the data from that backup area to the main area (step S24 in Figure 21). Also, during the main control side power failure processing, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in Figure 22). Additionally, during the bonus ratio calculation and display processing, each time the values in the main area are updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in Figure 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1, and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the higher digits of the address.

Figure 27 shows the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. The data for the number of balls acquired in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and read in the bonus ratio calculation processing of the bonus ratio calculation and display processing (step S156 in Figure 24). In this way, by having the bonus ratio calculation and display processing read the data for the number of balls acquired from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt processing (game control program) writes the data for the number of balls acquired to the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, the game control program and the program that executes the bonus ratio calculation and display processing can be completely separated, and the program for bonus ratio calculation and display processing can be common even for game machines with different specifications.

Furthermore, the prize ratio calculation process (step S156 in Figure 24) of the prize ratio calculation and display process writes the calculated prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio to the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio storage area in the prize ratio calculation area 13128. The calculated prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio data is read during the prize ratio display process (step S170 in Figure 25) of the prize ratio calculation and display process when displaying the prize ratio. The game control program does not access the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio storage area in the prize ratio calculation area 13128.

Figure 27(A) shows the simplest work area structure. The work area structure shown in Figure 27(A) stores the number of balls won by special features, the number of consecutive balls won by special features, the total number of balls won, the special feature ratio, and the consecutive special feature ratio. The number of balls won by special features is the number of balls awarded for winning into a special feature in operation (for example, the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 that are open, or the second start slot 2004 with the second start slot door member 2549 open). The number of consecutive balls won by special features is the number of balls awarded for winning into special features that are in continuous operation (for example, during a jackpot streak with the prize slots open). The total number of balls won is the total number of balls paid out to the player. The special feature ratio can be calculated as the number of balls won by special features ÷ the total number of balls won. The consecutive special feature ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive balls won by special features ÷ the total number of balls won. The number of balls obtained through special events, the number of consecutive balls obtained through special events, and the total number of balls obtained are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing. The special event ratio and the consecutive special event ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing.

In the work area structure shown in Figure 27(A), the number of balls won with special features, the number of consecutive balls won with special features, and the total number of balls won correspond to the cumulative total in Figure 27(B), which will be described later. Each of these is stored in a 3 or 4-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 or 42,949,672,950 in decimal. Since this data is not erased unless an error occurs, a large memory area is provided to store data for a long period. Furthermore, the special feature ratio and the consecutive special feature ratio are stored in a 1-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal.

Figure 27(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. The work area structure shown in Figure 27(B) stores the number of balls won by special prizes, the number of other balls won, the number of consecutive special prizes won, the total number of balls won, the special prize ratio, and the consecutive special prize ratio. Each data storage area is composed of a ring buffer with n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the total number of balls won reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and the data is stored in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may also be moved when data other than the total number of balls won (such as the number of balls won by special prizes, the number of balls launched, the number of winning balls, the number of games with special symbol variation display, and the number of jackpots in games with special symbol variation display) reaches a predetermined number.

Note that the write and read pointers for the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data sequences move every predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves along with the write pointer. The read pointer points to the memory location immediately preceding the write pointer. This is because the payout ratio is calculated using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n memory areas of the ring buffer. The cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio are calculated from the cumulative values of each data. When the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in that cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The total cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio calculated from these cumulative values are calculated from the total cumulative values of each data. Even when the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in that cleared area.

In the work area structure shown in Figure 27(B), the number of balls won through special features, the number of balls won through consecutive special features, the special feature ratio, and the consecutive special feature ratio are the same as described in Figure 27(A). The number of other balls won is the number of balls won through entries other than special features (non-opening/closing prize slots, such as the general prize slot 2001). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls dispensed to the player; when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The number of balls won through special features, the number of other balls won, the number of balls won through consecutive special features, and the total number of balls won are updated in the memory area where the write pointer is located in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing. The special feature ratio and the consecutive special feature ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing.

Figure 27(C) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. The work area structure shown in Figure 27(C) can acquire more detailed data than that shown in Figure 27(B), and stores the number of balls won by ordinary electric prizes, the number of balls won by special electric prizes, the number of balls won by the start gate, the number of balls won by other prize gates, the number of balls won by consecutive prizes, the total number of balls won, the prize ratio, and the consecutive prize ratio. Furthermore, the storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the total number of balls won reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and the data is stored in the first storage area. Furthermore, the write pointer may be moved when data other than the total number of balls acquired (such as the number of balls acquired by special electric mechanisms, the number of balls launched, the number of winning balls, the number of games in which special symbols change, and the number of jackpots in games in which special symbols change) reaches a predetermined number.

The cumulative sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n memory areas of the ring buffer. The cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio are calculated from the cumulative values of each data. When the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio are calculated from the cumulative values of each data. Even when the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in Figures 27(B) and (C), the number of balls acquired by special prizes, other balls acquired, consecutive special prizes acquired, total number of balls acquired, normal electric special prizes acquired, special electric special prizes acquired, start gate acquired, and other prize gate acquired are each stored in a 2-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 65535 in decimal. The cumulative totals of the number of balls acquired by special prizes, other balls acquired, consecutive special prizes acquired, total number of balls acquired, normal electric special prizes acquired, special electric special prizes acquired, start gate acquired, and other prize gate acquired are each stored in a 3-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6,000 prize balls × n (60,000 prize balls if n=10), a large memory area is provided. The cumulative totals for the number of balls won from special features, other balls won, consecutive special feature wins, total number of balls won, special feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio, normal electric feature wins, special electric feature wins, start-up gate wins, and other winning gate wins are each stored in a 3 or 4-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 or 42,949,672,950 in decimal. Since the cumulative totals are not erased unless data errors occur, a larger memory area is provided to store data for longer periods. Furthermore, the cumulative and total cumulative totals for the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio are each stored in a 1-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal.

In the structure of the work area shown in Figure 27(C), the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of special features, and the ratio of consecutive special features are the same as those explained in Figure 27(B). Other acquired balls are the number of prize balls acquired by entering non-special features (non-opening prize slots). The number of balls acquired by the normal electric special feature is the number of prize balls acquired by entering the normal electric special feature (second start slot 2004 with the second start slot door member 2549 open) which is operating as a result of the lottery using normal symbols. The number of balls acquired by the special electric special feature is the number of prize balls acquired by entering the special electric special feature (for example, the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 which are open) which is operating as a result of the lottery using special symbols. The number of balls acquired by the start slot is the number of prize balls acquired by entering the start slot (first start slot 2002). The number of balls won from other prize slots refers to the number of balls won from winning slots (general prize slot 2001) that do not involve special features (i.e., do not activate) and do not trigger the lottery for special symbols. The number of balls won from normal electric features, special electric features, start slots, other prize slots, consecutive features, and total balls won are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing by updating the data in the memory area where the write pointer is located. The feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing.

In the data structure shown in Figure 27(A), if a stored value is determined to be abnormal, the data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. However, the data is not deleted for any other reason. Therefore, the data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly). Similarly, the total cumulative values in Figures 25(B) and 25(C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, if the data in the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated bonus payout ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the bonus payout ratio is over 100%, the calculated bonus payout ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation, or the number of bonus balls won is greater than the total number of balls won), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128 may also be deleted. Additionally, if the data in the bonus payout ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated bonus payout ratio is an abnormal value, an alert indicating the abnormality may be issued. Furthermore, the data in the backup area may be checked using a check code, and after replicating the normal data from the backup area to the main area, the bonus payout ratio may be recalculated.

[7. Configuration of the bonus item ratio display]
Figure 28 shows the configuration of the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

The bonus ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and multiple 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LEDs 13172 consist of four digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed together in a single package, but they may also be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transmits data to be displayed on the bonus ratio indicator 1317 and signals to set the operating status of the bonus ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transmits signals indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transmits a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment illumination signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment illumination signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals to illuminate each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 corresponds to the signal transmitted by the segment illumination signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Note that the direction of the signals (currents) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is anode common type or cathode common type; the diagram shows an example of an anode common type.

A resistor 13174, which determines the current value flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172, is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of resistor 13174, the luminous brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

Figure 29 shows the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, an 8x4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2x8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty cycle control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 receives serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16 bits of data, and sends it as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operating mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see Figure 35), the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the operating mode and the corresponding register (see Figure 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data for detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches the data at the timing of the LOAD signal, sending D15 to D8 to each control unit (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty cycle control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, and standby mode control unit 3184), and sending D7 to D0 to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 acquires the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising edge of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16 bits of data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising edge of the LOAD signal and latches the data. Then, it sends D15 to D8 to the respective control units (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty cycle control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, and standby mode control unit 3184). Furthermore, at the falling edge of the LOAD signal, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15-D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 to store the display data (8 bits from D7-D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see Figure 33), if D15-D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173A so that data register 0, i.e., Digit-A, stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided in a number equal to the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (number of display digits). It acquires and holds data for display on each 7-segment LED according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The 8-bit data latch 3173 then sends the held data to the 8x4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects data sent from each 8-bit data latch 3173A to D at predetermined display timings for each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses a character generator decoding table (see Figure 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data to illuminate each segment. The generated data is input to the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176, referring to the decoding settings, selects data from the decoder 3175 if the decoder is in use mode, and selects data from the 8x4 data selector 3174 if the decoder is not in use mode. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses data from the 2x8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for illuminating each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As mentioned above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives the sink current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current sink timing of terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3, thereby determining which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of illuminated digits from 1 to 4 digits through external settings. Specifically, by inputting data where D15-D8 are 00100001B and D7-D0 are xxxx0011B, the setting to use all 4 digits is written to the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Note that × indicates that either H or L data is acceptable, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty cycle control unit 3182 controls the duty cycle when the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty cycle via external settings, thereby controlling the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty cycle control unit 3182 controls the duty cycle by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, a duty cycle setting of 0/16 to 15/16 is written to the duty register of the duty cycle control unit 3182.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. Specifically, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 based on external settings. Specifically, inputting data where D15-D8 are 00100001B and D7-D0 are 0001xxxxB writes the decoder usage setting to the decode register, while inputting data where D7-D0 are 0000xxxxB writes the NO DECODER setting (decoder not used). When the decoder is set to be used, the data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2x8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175. When the decoder is not set to be used, the 2x8 data selector 3176 controls the data selector 3174 to select data from the 8x4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the setting of the standby mode and the setting of data clearing. In other words, the driver circuit 13171 can transition to standby mode via external settings. Specifically, by inputting data where D15-D12 are set to 0100B and D3-D0 are set to 0000B, the system can be set to standby mode. In standby mode, the current settings are maintained, and the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off to suppress the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171.

Furthermore, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all internally held data through external settings. Specifically, by inputting data where D15-D12 are set to 0100B and D3-D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches is cleared and initialized.

The oscillator 3185 generates the clock used within the driver circuit 13171.

Figure 31 shows an example of the main control board 1310's implementation. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown with solid lines, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown with dotted lines.

Figure 31(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of implementation example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and is designed to house the main control board 1310 in a sealed manner, making it impossible to open without damaging it once closed. The surface of the box has the model number of the main control board 1310 indicated (by a sticker, engraving, printing, etc.) and an tamper-evident seal. The tamper-evident seal records the history of when the seal on the main control board 1310 was broken.

Figure 31(B) shows implementation example 1, where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In implementation example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. It is preferable that the main control MPU 1311 be mounted so that its longitudinal direction is the same as that of the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is positioned in a location where it can be externally verified that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 is positioned so that it can be easily externally verified that no inappropriate modifications have been made, by not placing any components around it.

The prize ratio indicator 1317 is positioned on the main control board 1310 in a location visible from the outside. The orientation of the numbers displayed on the prize ratio indicator 1317 should be the same as the orientation of the model number display on the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display on the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, it is preferable to mount the prize ratio indicator 1317 so that its longitudinal direction aligns with the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311. If the main control board 1310 is mounted in the gaming machine in a horizontal orientation, it is preferable to mount the prize ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that their longitudinal directions align with the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a game machine in a vertical orientation, it is preferable to mount the payout ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that their longitudinal directions are 90 degrees from the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, connectors CN1 and CN2, which are used to draw signal lines from the main control board 1310, should be mounted at the ends of the main control board 1310 along its long sides (in the diagram, this is the upper end along the upper long side, but it could also be the lower end along the lower long side or the ends along the left or right sides) so that their long sides are aligned with the prize ratio indicator 1317. In other words, it is desirable that connectors CN1 and CN2 be positioned so that the wiring (harness) connected to them does not overlap with the prize ratio indicator 1317 and obstruct its visibility.

Furthermore, the model number display on the main control board box 1320 and the tamper-evident seal affixed to the main control board box 1320 are positioned so as not to overlap with either the main control MPU or the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

By implementing the payout ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model numbers of the payout ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 are displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility. This allows for verification of the payout ratio and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified, both during the manufacturing process and after installation in the gaming facility, without requiring awkward postures.

In another implementation example shown in Figure 31(C), the orientation of the model number display on the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display on the bonus ratio indicator 1317 are the same. However, the orientation of the model number displays on circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 (e.g., ICs) differs from that of the model number display on the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display on the bonus ratio indicator 1317. Furthermore, circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be positioned to overlap with the model number display on the main control board box 1320 and the tamper-evident seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are of lower importance when inspecting for unauthorized modifications, and therefore there is little significance in having them oriented the same way on the main control board 1310.

Figure 32 shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

As shown in Figure 32(A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 of the bonus ratio indicator 1317 may become unstable due to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to place the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close together as possible.

For example, as shown in the diagram, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (length L2 of the wiring 13173) is arranged to be shorter than the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio display 1317 (length L1 of the wiring 13191). That is, L1 is greater than L2.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, components are not placed around the main control MPU 1311, as indicated by the dotted line, to allow for easy external verification that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Therefore, while the wiring length L1 will be of a certain length, L2 will be kept as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in a single package or in separate packages; in either case, they are implemented so that L1 is greater than L2.

Figure 32(B) shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the bonus ratio indicator 1317 in another implementation example, and Figure 32(C) is a cross-sectional view of the printed circuit board in the implementation example shown in Figure 32(B).

As shown in Figure 32(B), ground patterns 13192 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13191 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the bonus ratio indicator 1317. Furthermore, on the printed circuit board, a restricted area 13196 is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13191, where no signal patterns are provided. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13197 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and inner layer of the printed circuit board within the restricted area 13196.

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13193 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 is arranged to avoid the restricted area 13196 (i.e., so that signal line 13193 and signal line 13191 do not intersect). Also, the signal line 13194 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged to pass through to the back surface or inner layer via a through-hole 13195. In this case as well, signal line 13194 is arranged to avoid the restricted area 13196 (i.e., so that signal line 13194 and signal line 13191 do not intersect).

Furthermore, to prevent unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board with patterns on both the front and back surfaces and no inner layers. However, the aforementioned mounting example can also be applied to multilayer boards (such as 4-layer or 6-layer boards) that have inner layers.

Figure 33 shows the load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table used to determine which register will store the data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 in this embodiment has seven registers. The duty cycle register is used by the duty cycle control unit 3182 to set the duty cycle for illuminating the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, if D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty cycle and is written to the duty cycle register of the duty cycle control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, i.e., whether or not to decode and the number of display digits. The decode register and the digit count register may be configured as a single register. For example, if D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting whether or not to decode or data for setting the number of display digits, and is written to the decode register of the data selector control unit 3183 or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data registers are used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, and the data to be displayed on each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set there. For example, if D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is the data to light up the 7-segment LED and is written to the data registers within the 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

The duty cycle, decoding status, and display digit count, which are set in the register described above, do not need to be set each time the payout ratio is displayed; they only need to be set once. Therefore, they are set as initial settings in step S28 of Figure 21. However, if the settings are set only once as initial settings, there is a possibility that the settings may change due to noise or other influences after the initial setup. Therefore, they may be reset under predetermined conditions (for example, each time the opening of the main frame 4 is detected, or each time the switch button is pressed). This ensures that the correct display can always be achieved even if the settings are changed due to noise.

Figure 34 shows a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering font styles. Furthermore, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 correspond to the displayed numbers, so the calculation results can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

Furthermore, the illumination of the decimal points on each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

Figure 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and Figure 36 is a diagram showing an example of the display of the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 in this embodiment is equipped with five states: initial state, data input state, LED lit state (0000), LED lit state (lighting according to input data), and LED lit state (all lights on).

To control these five states, there are mode setting commands for Blank, Normal Operation, Register Write, All Lights On, and Standby. The Blank command shuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. The Normal Operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after each setting is complete. If the Normal Operation command is entered without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 will display the number 0 in all digits. The Register Write command sets the number of digits to be used, the duty cycle, whether to use or not to use the decoder, and inputs display data. D11 to D8 select the register to write data to, and D7 to D0 input the contents to be set in the register (see Figure 33). The All Lights On command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, lighting up all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The Standby command is divided into two types depending on the parameters: the Standby command which transitions to the standby state, and the Clear command which transitions to the initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and driver 3179, and cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, thereby reducing the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. The clear command, on the other hand, clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and also turns off the display.

Furthermore, since a blank command is also a type of display command, in this specification, "display" includes all states of the 7-segment LED being lit, some segments being lit, and all segments being off.

Refer to Figure 36 to explain the display examples for each of the states described above.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setup of the driver circuit 13171 is not yet complete or the display data has not been set. Therefore, it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and as shown in Figure 36(A), all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are off. Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is closed and gameplay is possible, the payout ratio display 1317 is not visible. Therefore, it is advisable to set the machine to standby mode, turning off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

Then, after setting control data in the various control registers of the driver circuit 13171 and completing the initial setup, when display data is input, a predetermined display is shown on the 7-segment LED 13172. This predetermined display may include displaying "-" on all digits or lighting up all segments, as shown in Figure 36(B). It is preferable to use this predetermined display to confirm the normal operation of the bonus ratio indicator 1317.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined indicator on all digits to confirm that the bonus ratio indicator 1317 is functioning correctly. For example, as shown in Figure 36(B), "-" may be displayed on all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lights up (lighting according to the input data). Specifically, it enters a bonus ratio display state, with the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 displaying a code indicating the display content, and the right two digits displaying the bonus ratio value. In the example shown in Figure 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the bonus ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed bonus ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is advisable to display a way to identify this. For example, all digits (or numbers) could be blinked, or the decimal point could be lit or blinked.

Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 changes. That is, a different type of bonus ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the left two digits display a code indicating the display content, and the right two digits display the numerical value of the bonus ratio. In the example shown in Figure 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the bonus ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, as described above, it is advisable to display a message that identifies the displayed bonus ratio as an abnormal value outside the specified range. More specific examples of bonus ratio displays will be described later using Figure 37.

When the main frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display confirming the normal operation of the prize ratio indicator 1317 is shown (Figure 36(E)). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This state of not displaying the prize ratio is the same as after the initial setup is complete, but it may be a different state, as long as it is distinguishable from the display of the prize ratio.

Figure 36(E) shows an example of a display when there is a malfunction in the bonus ratio indicator 1317 or the main control MPU 1311, and the bonus ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit, blinking, or have different displays for each digit. Furthermore, the malfunction display may differ from that shown; it only needs to be distinguishable from a normal bonus ratio display to indicate that the bonus ratio cannot be displayed.

Furthermore, in any state, inputting a "light all" command will illuminate all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. Also, in any state, inputting a "blank" or "standby" command will extinguish all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 while retaining the data. Finally, inputting a "clear data" command in any state will clear all data held in the registers and latches, illuminate all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172, and return to the initial state.

[8. Display of the ratio of special features]
Next, we will explain how to calculate and display the bonus payout ratio.

As mentioned above, the bonus payout ratio is displayed on the bonus payout ratio indicator 1317 located on the main control board 1310. As also mentioned above, the bonus payout ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, with the lower two digits displaying the bonus payout ratio value and the upper two digits displaying the type of value.

Alternatively, the bonus ratio display 1317 may be configured using a two-digit seven-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the bonus ratio value and the type of that value.

The display method for the bonus payout ratio may vary depending on the comparison result between the bonus payout ratio and a predetermined standard value. For example, if the bonus payout ratio exceeds the predetermined standard value, the value may be displayed by flashing or changing color (e.g., green under normal conditions, red when exceeding the standard). By changing the display method based on the comparison result with the standard value, it becomes easy to recognize that the bonus payout ratio is abnormal.

The bonus ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the bonus ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a single LED lamp, the comparison result between the bonus ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different ways. For example, if the bonus ratio is less than the reference value, it is displayed in green; if the bonus ratio is greater than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Alternatively, if the bonus ratio is less than the reference value, it is displayed as a steady light; if the bonus ratio is greater than the reference threshold, it is displayed as blinking.

When the bonus ratio indicator 1317 is composed of multiple (for example, 10) LED lamps, the bonus ratio is displayed with each LED lamp representing 10%. For example, if the bonus ratio is 70% or more but less than 80%, seven LEDs are lit. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be used depending on the display content (bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio, recent data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

Furthermore, if the total number of balls won is less than 6000, the data collection period for the prize balls may be short, and the value of the prize payout ratio may not have converged. Therefore, a different display method (display color, flashing, etc.) may be used. It is desirable that the display method when the total number of balls won is less than the threshold be different from the display method when it exceeds the aforementioned standard value.

The bonus payout ratio display 1317 may switch between displaying recent data, medium-term data, and long-term data. The recent data display shows the bonus payout ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written, as shown in Figures 27(B) and 27(C). The medium-term data display shows the bonus payout ratio calculated using the cumulative value, as shown in Figures 27(B) and 27(C). The long-term data display shows the bonus payout ratio calculated using the total cumulative value, as shown in Figures 27(B) and 27(C).

The prize ratio display unit 1317 may also be used in conjunction with the function display unit 1400. Normally, the function display unit 1400 displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310. However, when the main frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has opened from the outer frame 2, the main control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the prize ratio. While the function display unit 1400 switches its display due to the opening of the main frame 4, the game should continue. By continuing the game, when the main frame 4 closes, the display can quickly switch from the prize ratio display to the game status display. For example, if the main frame 4 opens during a special symbol variation display game, the prize ratio is displayed. However, if the main frame 4 closes before the variation time has elapsed, the variation display for the remaining time can be shown. Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the same time that the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even when the function display unit 1400 displays the payout ratio, it can be configured so as not to cause any discomfort to the player.

The prize ratio indicator 1317 may display something other than the prize ratio. For example, it may display the number of prizes won per type of prize slot per unit time, or the number of prize balls paid out. The unit time can be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, or 10 hours.

The payout ratio display 1317 may also display the base rate. The base rate is the payout rate during normal play, excluding special prizes (jackpots), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of launched balls (number of out balls) is detected by the launched ball sensor 1020. As mentioned above, the launched ball sensor 1020 is installed near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball launching device to the game area 5a (see Figures 10 and 16). The number of out balls may also be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060. As mentioned above, the discharged ball sensor 3060 is installed at the discharge port that discharges game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see Figure 4). Furthermore, an out-port ball sensor 1021 (see Figure 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111 located at the bottom of the game area 5a. The number of out balls may be detected by summing the number of game balls detected by the out-port ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start-port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various prize-winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. Additionally, a launch-supply ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul balls). The number of out balls (number of launched balls) may be detected by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 as detected by the launch-supply ball sensor.

The number of outs can be counted using one of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the ball ejection sensor 3060 or the ball launch sensor 1020 shown in the diagram.

Furthermore, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls dispensed. Alternatively, the base can be defined as the payout rate for each game state (normal gameplay, electric support, probability variation, time reduction), and calculated as the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. By displaying the base on the prize ratio display unit 1317, deviations from the design value of the payout performance during operation can be checked on the spot for each game machine. Also, since payout performance can be checked without using a hall computer, inspections of each game machine become easier during on-site inspections of amusement facilities.

The bonus ratio display unit 1317 may also display information regarding other prize wins and prize balls on the base (such as the number of wins in the general prize slot 2001 and the number of prize balls awarded for those wins, the number of wins in the starting slot 2002 and the number of prize balls awarded for those wins, and the number of wins in the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 and the number of prize balls awarded for those wins).

The bonus ratio indicator 1317 may either always display the bonus ratio, or it may display the bonus ratio only when the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push-button switch, is pressed, the display of the bonus ratio begins, and after a predetermined time, the display is turned off. Furthermore, if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main frame 4 has been detected as being released from the outer frame 2, the bonus ratio indicator 1317 may display the bonus ratio. In other words, unless the main frame is released, the bonus ratio indicator 1317 will not display the bonus ratio even if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Furthermore, the display content may be changed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in Figure 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which represents the cumulative prize ratio, is displayed in the first two digits, and the prize ratio for a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 60,000 balls) is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated again, the display in the first two digits may switch to A6, which represents the cumulative continuous prize ratio, and the continuous prize ratio for a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 60,000 balls) may be displayed in the last two digits (Figure 37(B)). In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which represents the prize ratio (6,000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the prize ratio based on the most recent data is displayed in the last two digits (most recent data display) (Figure 37(C)). If the display switch 1318 is operated again, the upper two digits of the display will switch to y6, which represents the prize ratio (cumulative), and the lower two digits may display the prize ratio relative to a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 60,000 balls) (mid-term data display) (Figure 37(D)).

The indicator switch 1318 does not necessarily have to be provided as a separate switch; it may also be used in conjunction with the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, when operated at power-on, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch, and when operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1, it functions as an indicator switch 1318. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the indicator switch 1318 into a single switch, the number of switches operated by the amusement hall staff becomes one, reducing the likelihood of errors by inexperienced staff.

As described above, this embodiment allows for the accurate calculation of the payout ratio of a gaming machine in operation and the confirmation of its gambling potential.

Furthermore, the payout data is stored as payout ratio calculation/display data 13136, and if the check code is abnormal, the payout ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted, thus preventing the display of incorrect payout ratios.

Furthermore, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the payout ratio is erased under conditions different from those for erasing the game progress data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, accurate payout data is retained, and the payout ratio can be calculated accurately.

Furthermore, since the RAM clear switch operation does not erase the payout ratio calculation and display data 13136, it is impossible for a game arcade staff member to accidentally erase the payout ratio calculation and display data 13136. Therefore, the system is configured to prevent accidental deletion of this data by a game arcade staff member. Additionally, since game arcades cannot intentionally erase the payout ratio calculation and display data, the reliability of the displayed payout ratio is increased, and the concealment of high payout ratios is prevented.

[9. Displaying the Base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base price]
Up to this point, we have described an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the bonus payout ratio. Next, we will describe an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value. In this example, we will mainly describe a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value, but it is also possible to calculate and display the bonus payout ratio along with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as mentioned above, when a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002, second starting gate 2004), a random number lottery is held, and a special symbol variation display game is executed. The variation patterns (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game include relatively short variation patterns (normal variation patterns of about 10 seconds, shortened variation patterns of about 2 to 5 seconds that are often selected when there are many reserved balls) and relatively long variation patterns (variation patterns such as super reach that exceed 1 minute). When calculating the base value in a pachinko machine, since notifying the base value is less urgent than notifying an error, it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variation display game switches to the next variation display game. However, if the variation display time is long, it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when predetermined conditions are met (for example, when the number of out balls (number of balls launched) or the number of prize balls (number of balls paid out) changes), without waiting for the end of one special symbol variation display game. Therefore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, when predetermined conditions are met during gameplay (for example, even during a special symbol variation display game), the base value is calculated and displayed (for example, when the number of balls fired or the number of prize balls paid out changes). Next, the specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs this operation will be described.

Figure 38 is a block diagram showing the surrounding configuration of the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1, which calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 38 has a configuration almost identical to the pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 17, but the component represented by reference numeral 1317 is a base indicator rather than a payout ratio indicator. The base indicator 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in Figures 4 and 28, or a 7-segment LED with a different number of digits (e.g., 2 digits).

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of balls out during the timer interrupt processing (Figure 23) performed by the main control MPU 1311, specifically in the area update processing for calculating the prize ratio (step S81), and calculates and displays the base value in the prize ratio calculation and display processing (step S89). In the following explanation, the "area update processing for calculating the prize ratio" in step S81 of Figure 23 will be read as the "base calculation area update processing," and the "prize ratio calculation and display processing" in step S89 will be read as the "base calculation and display processing." Furthermore, the "area for calculating the prize ratio 13128" shown in Figure 26 will be read as the "base calculation area 13128," the "prize ratio calculation and display code 13135" will be read as the "base calculation and display code 13135," and the "prize ratio calculation and display data 13136" will be read as the "base calculation and display data 13136."

Figure 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 39 directly updates the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) (step S814), and directly updates the total number of balls that have been played out using the number of balls that have been played out (step S822), in order to calculate the base value each time a timer interrupt occurs.

First, it is determined whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S810). Being in a special prize state means that the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 are open, and the player can win many prize balls during this time. This may include the opening and ending times of the jackpot game. If the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 repeatedly open and close during a single jackpot, the time between the closing of the large prize slots and their next opening (closing interval) may also be included. In other words, "special prize state" in step S810 means the time when the condition device is activated, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbols in the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all time during the right-hand shooting instruction.

Furthermore, in the case of starting gates 2002 and 2004, the periods during time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode may be included in the special prize period. Furthermore, in game states other than time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode, the period from the opening of starting gate 2004 to a predetermined time after its closing (for example, the few seconds required for a ball that entered the starting gate to be detected as an out ball) may be included in the special prize period.

The electrically operated mechanisms provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize period for the large prize openings 2005 and 2006 is the period when the condition device is in operation (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol in the special symbol variation display game until the end of the ending), and the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize period, so normal (so-called jackpot) entries into the large prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for the start opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) which has an opening and closing member, the number of prize balls and prize balls that enter the opening other than during the special prize period (when the probability is low or when the time is not shortened) are used in the calculation of the base value. In other words, among the electrically operated mechanisms, some mechanisms (large prize slots 2005 and 2006) do not use the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls awarded in the calculation of the base value, regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded). Other mechanisms (start slot 2004) switch whether or not the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls awarded are used in the calculation of the base value depending on the game state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded). Not using the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls awarded in the calculation of the base value means not counting the awarded balls that have been dispensed as "in" (the number of awarded balls other than those awarded during a special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value), and also not creating edge information to dispense prize balls based on the entry signal, even if an entry signal is input.

Furthermore, the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 may open even when the conditional device is not activated (as a so-called minor win). Generally, minor wins occur during the time-saving mode, and because the opening is short-lived, the probability of game balls entering is low, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, minor wins may occur outside of the special prize mode (during normal play), and the slots may be opened only for the time when the probability of game balls entering is high. In this case, the game balls that enter the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 during minor wins occurring outside of the special prize mode, as well as the prize balls awarded, may be used in the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of minor wins occurring outside of the special prize mode. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the base value standard, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of balls that have been played. On the other hand, if the game state is not during a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information is obtained in the prize ball control process (step S80) (step S811). The number of prize balls obtained in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls whose payout has been decided. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that has already been created. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that has already been sent. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and has received an acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Furthermore, it may also be the number of prize balls that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and has received a report of payout completion from the payout control board 951 (number of prize balls that have been paid out). This variation will be explained using Figures 41 to 44.

Then, the number of prize balls acquired is added to the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is updated (step S814). Note that if there are no prize balls, the process of checking for prize balls and updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Also, even if a game ball enters the starting slots 2002 and 2004, but the reserve limit is reached and the entry into the starting slot is not reserved, prize balls are still dispensed, and the total number of prize balls is updated. Furthermore, in game states where no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters a prize slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated as a result of that entry, and the number of prize balls acquired is 0, so the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see Figure 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 39, the total number of prize balls used in calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Subsequently, the number of outs is acquired (step S818), and the total number of outs is updated by adding the acquired number of outs to the total number of outs (step S822). As mentioned above, the number of outs is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020 and the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc. In the switch input processing of step S74, the detection signals from these sensors are read, and if a detection signal is received from a sensor, the number of outs = 1 is acquired. The total number of outs is recorded in the total number of outs storage area (see Figure 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in Figure 39, the total number of outs used in calculating the base value is updated each time an out is detected. In this way, the base calculation processing is executed for each timer interrupt processing to update the total number of outs, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display processing (Figure 40). Therefore, the base value can be displayed without delay, and it is possible to determine without delay whether the base is normal or abnormal.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (Figure 46) described later, it is possible to determine if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Additionally, as shown in steps S824 to S825, it is possible to determine if the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 performs the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also perform the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the base value, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the base value.

Furthermore, even if information on both balls entering and leaving prize slots is obtained in a single timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later), and the number of balls left out is added to the total number of balls left out (or the balls left out buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, even if information on balls entering multiple prize slots is obtained in a single timer interrupt process, the sum of the number of prize balls from multiple entries is added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if entries are detected in a prize slot sensor with 5 prize balls and another prize slot sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer).

Furthermore, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer) only when a game ball launch is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to wins detected within a predetermined time from the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer). Alternatively, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 may be detected, and only the number of prize balls related to wins detected while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (and even further, until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) may be added to the total number of prize balls or prize ball buffer. Additionally, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer) when the player is operating the launch handle. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winning, detected within a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the time when the palm or fingers are detected touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500, may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer). This prevents the inaccurate display of prize balls due to abnormalities or fraudulent activity, such as detecting prize balls when no game balls have been launched. Furthermore, using the contact detection sensor 509 eliminates the need to install a separate sensor to detect game ball launches, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and out balls during the special prize round. However, even during the special prize round, the number of prize balls from entries into the general prize slot and the start slot may be counted, and the number of out balls may be counted while excluding the number of balls that entered the large prize slot, in order to calculate the base value.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 40, the base value is calculated each time (each timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation and display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Note that if the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of outs, and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), it is not necessary to calculate the base value. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ total number of outs by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits in the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated as a percentage to the ones place, with no decimal places. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated as a percentage to two decimal places. In other words, dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100 yields a base value as a percentage to two decimal places.

Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the 32-clock wait time between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 may either wait without performing any processing or perform other processing. For example, the random number used to determine whether a jackpot is won or lost may be updated during the time between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hardware random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock period (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the hardware random number is also updated during this wait time.

In other words, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, other processes related to the game can be executed in parallel even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is performing base arithmetic processing. These other processes related to the game include, at a minimum, processing to update the random numbers used to determine wins and losses. Furthermore, during the arithmetic (division) processing in the arithmetic circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the game result are updated at least once.

Furthermore, if the total number of outs is 0, calculating the base value will result in an error return value from the calculation circuit 13121, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 will not be updated.

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall staff of the base value. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, or it may notify of an abnormality in the base value. An abnormality in the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value exceeds a predetermined tolerance range from the design value (normal value). Furthermore, multiple tolerance ranges may be set, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the base value.

There are various methods for notifying the base value, and one or more of the methods described below may be used. For example, the base value may be notified continuously or at predetermined intervals using a base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. Notifying the player of the base value allows the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. In this case, the display method described in the section on the payout ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value should be displayed as a percentage on the aforementioned indicator or display device. The decimal value may be rounded down, rounded to the nearest whole number, or rounded up. Display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc., may display up to one decimal place for more detailed information.

When displaying a base value on the base indicator 1317, which is composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data into predetermined registers provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base indicator 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the registers of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in Figures 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 generates data specifying the digits to be displayed in D15 to D8 using "data n setting," and the display content in D7 to D0, and writes this data to the shift register 3171.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is advisable to set a predetermined reference value (e.g., 50%) for the base value and change the display mode when it exceeds this reference value. For example, the numerical value may be displayed by flashing or changing its color (e.g., green under normal circumstances, and red when exceeding the reference value). In addition, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value may be divided into multiple stages such as 30% or more, 25% or more but less than 30%, 20% or more but less than 25%, 15% or more but less than 20%, 10% or more but less than 15%, and less than 10%, and the light emission color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, and yellow. Also, at each stage, when the base value is low, self-deprecating comments such as "Doing well," "Things are going downhill," "Isn't this bad?", or "In a way, that's amazing" may be displayed. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is occurring. For this reason, it is desirable to display a warning in the form of red or other color. Furthermore, the display method may be identical or similar to that of a weak error that does not interrupt the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of the display, lamp, or sound is the same.

Furthermore, the system may use various lamps, LCD displays, and sounds to indicate the range of the base value (whether it is high or low, abnormal or normal, etc.). Also, if the base value cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there are no previously calculated base values, a base notification command may be generated to display "Base Notification Unavailable" on the LCD display. By transmitting this notification command to the sub-board, the base status can be notified by the performance device controlled by the sub-board, allowing for a wider variety of notifications than the main board and reducing the load on the main board. Additionally, by notifying "Base Display Unavailable" when nothing is displayed on the base indicator 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a malfunction of the base indicator 1317 and the absence of a base value to display. Furthermore, by displaying an abnormal base value on the LCD display, the abnormality can be detected without having to look at the back of the game board where the base indicator 1317 is located.

The function display unit 1400 may also function as the base display unit 1317. In this case, it is preferable to continuously provide notifications using a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) on the function display unit 1400. Alternatively, notifications may be provided at predetermined timings (for example, when the main unit frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not running, or when the special symbol variation display game has finished).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming arcade. In this case, the base information should be output at predetermined timings (after a predetermined number of prize balls, after a predetermined number of balls out), as described in the base calculation and display process (Figures 47, 49, etc.) later.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high or low) indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold. Alternatively, a signal of a length indicating the approximate calculated base value may be output (for example, a 30-millisecond pulse if the base value is between 30% and 40%). Furthermore, a number of consecutive pulses indicating the approximate calculated base value may be output (for example, three consecutive pulses if the base value is between 30% and 40%).

Note that even if the base value is not updated, a base notification command may be generated, or it may not be generated if the base value is not updated. The display of the base value will continue even if a base notification command is not generated.

Furthermore, as will be described later in Figure 56, it may be possible to determine if the calculated base value is abnormal, generate a base notification command to alert players and hall employees of the abnormal base value, and notify them of the base abnormality.

Furthermore, whether or not to inform the player of the base value may be determined based on the game state (game situation). This is because constantly informing the player of the base value could distract them from the special symbol variation display game, which is the primary enjoyment of pachinko machines, potentially causing their attention to become scattered.

Furthermore, the presentation of the special symbol variation display game, currently running or to be run in the future, may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, multiple display selection tables can be prepared, and the presentation can be selected from different display selection tables (see Figures 64-68) depending on the base value.

Furthermore, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). Therefore, when the base value exceeds or falls below the threshold during the special symbol variation display game, the game's presentation may be changed. The presentation may change in the same manner when the base value exceeds the predetermined threshold and rises, and when it falls, or it may change in a different manner.

Figure 41 shows an example of the timing for updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. As shown in Figure 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation and display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the entry of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each entry point in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and updates the prize ball buffer in the base calculation area update processing (step S81). Afterward, it updates the base value in the base ratio calculation and display processing (step S89) and sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

The payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in memory and then sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, the payout control board 951 dispenses the prize balls according to the payout command and notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing. The number of undispensed prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by either the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. If the payout control board 951 backs up the number of undispensed prize balls, it needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it does not need to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing. On the other hand, if the main control board 1310 backs up the number of undispensed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing, but it does not need to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during gameplay, allowing the machine's status to be known in real time. Therefore, abnormalities in the machine can be detected early. For example, if the machine determines that the base value is abnormal when it is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during a single special symbol variation display game. Even if the base value fluctuates above or below the predetermined threshold and is determined to be abnormal, the game is not stopped, and the base value calculation process continues regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, special symbol variation display games include short-term games such as normal variations and long-term games such as reach variations. If the conditions for calculating the base value are met multiple times between the start and end of a single special symbol variation display game, it is preferable to calculate the base value each time, update it, and display it accordingly. This is because restricting the calculation of the base value during a special symbol variation display game (for example, calculating and updating the base value only once at the end of the variation display) could lead to prolonged omissions of changes in the base value, potentially causing inconvenience to the hall management due to the failure to output necessary information at the appropriate time.

Furthermore, if the launched game ball does not enter the starting slot or the general prize slot, the base value decreases. In this state, the player is at a disadvantage, so additional effects may be added to the LCD display (for example, effects related to wins and losses unrelated to changes in the base value, or specific effects that appear in conjunction with changes in the base value), or high-probability bonus effects (high-probability bonus effects unrelated to changes in the base value, such as next-episode bonus effects, or high-probability bonus effects that appear in conjunction with changes in the base value (for example, displaying the base value in rainbow colors)). This reduces the discomfort players feel from not entering the starting slot and general prize slot, and provides motivation for them to continue playing.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls enter the starting slot or general prize slots (more than the average number of past prize entries), the base value increases. In this state, even if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the player receives more game balls than usual, thus reducing their disappointment. The animations in the variable display game can be changed to animations that lower the expectation level.

[9-2. Variations in the timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, Figures 42 to 44 will be used to explain the variations in the timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value. The outline of the timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value in each variation is as follows.
- Figure 41: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value → Send the payout command - Figure 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value - Figure 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value - Figure 44: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Confirm command reception → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value - Figure 45: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Notify payout completion → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value Note that the variations in Figures 41 to 44 above can be applied not only to the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 39 and the base calculation/display process shown in Figure 40, but also to any of the base calculation area update processes and base calculation/display processes described later.

In the procedure shown in Figure 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in Figure 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the indicated position, and the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89) is executed after the output data setting process (step S90).

In other words, the main control MPU 1311 detects the entry of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each entry point in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and updates the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later) in the base calculation area update processing (step S81). Then, in the output data setting processing (step S90), it sends a payout command to the payout control board 951, and updates the base value in the base ratio calculation and display processing (step S89).

The payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in memory and then sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, after dispensing the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing. As mentioned above, depending on whether the undispensed prize balls from the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) are backed up on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, either the payout command reception confirmation or the completion of ball dispensing may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in Figure 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in Figure 23, the output data setting process (step S90) is followed by the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89).

In other words, the main control MPU 1311 detects the entry of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls predetermined for each entry point in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90). Subsequently, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball buffer) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation and display processing (step S89). Note that the prize ball buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to a created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted), rather than the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

The payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in memory and then sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, after dispensing the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing. As mentioned above, depending on whether the undispensed prize balls from the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) are backed up on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, either the payout command reception confirmation or the completion of ball dispensing may be omitted.

Furthermore, the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives command confirmation and ball dispensing completion notification from the dispensing control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the dispensing control board 951 and the operating speed of the dispensing device 830; therefore, the order of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in Figure 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in Figure 23, after receiving confirmation of receipt of the payout command from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89) are executed.

In other words, the main control MPU 1311 detects the entry of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each entry point in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

The dispensing control board 951 stores the received dispensing command in its memory and then transmits a confirmation of receipt of the dispensing command to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives confirmation of a payout command from the payout control board 951, it updates the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later) with the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation was received in the base calculation area update process (step S81), and then updates the base value in the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 dispenses the prize balls according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. Note that in the procedure shown in Figure 44, the payout control board 951 backs up the data of the number of undisbursed prize balls to prevent loss in the event of a power outage. Therefore, while confirmation of command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, the notification of ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in Figure 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in Figure 23, after receiving a ball dispensing completion notification from the dispensing control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89) are executed.

In other words, the main control MPU 1311 detects the entry of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each entry point in the prize ball control processing (step S80), and sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

The payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in its memory and then sends a confirmation of payout command reception to the main control board 1310. Then, after dispensing the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball dispensing.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives a ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, it updates the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later) with the number of prize balls that have been paid out in the base calculation area update process (step S81), and then updates the base value in the base ratio calculation and display process (step S89).

Furthermore, in the procedure shown in Figure 44, the main control board 1310 backs up the data of unpaid prize balls to prevent loss during a power outage. Therefore, while notification of completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the parameters used to calculate the base value, such as the number of prize balls and the number of balls dispensed, when predetermined conditions are met. For example, in the processes shown in Figures 41 and 42, the number of prize balls is updated when the prize entry sensor detects the entry of a game ball during the switch input process (step S74). Also, in the process shown in Figure 43, the number of prize balls is updated when a payout command is sent. Furthermore, in the process shown in Figure 44, the number of prize balls is updated upon confirmation of receipt of the payout command. Finally, in the process shown in Figure 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls won during a special prize cannot be accurately counted due to a discrepancy between the timing of determining whether the game state is in a special prize state and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. This problem becomes particularly significant when there is a long time between a ball entering the prize slot and the update of the prize ball count. Therefore, a flag is assigned to balls entering during a special prize state, and this flag is carried over to the prize ball count, payout command, reception confirmation, and payout completion notification. This flag is then used to determine whether a ball is a prize during a special prize state at each stage. In this way, even if there is a long time between a ball entering the prize slot and the update of the prize ball count, the number of prize balls won during a special prize state can be accurately counted and updated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the number of prize balls and the number of balls that are dispensed are updated at these triggers, and the base value is calculated and displayed. In other words, since the base value can be determined within the gaming machine itself, the time required for pin adjustments in the manufacturing and inspection processes can be reduced, allowing for more efficient manufacturing of gaming machines.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the machine runs out of balls and cannot dispense prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 maintains the number of undispensed balls.

If the main control board 1310 maintains the number of unpaid balls, when the prize-winning slot sensor detects a game ball entering a prize slot during the switch input processing (step S74), the number of prize balls corresponding to the detected prize slot is added to the number of unpaid balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of unpaid balls, but it is not required. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball buffer or total prize ball count for calculating the base value each time the number of prize balls to be paid is calculated. Alternatively, the prize ball count may be updated after the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, if the payout control board 951 maintains the number of unpaid balls, when the prize-winning slot sensor detects a game ball entering a prize slot during the switch input processing (step S74), it sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 for the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize-winning slot where the prize was detected. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the payout command is sent, and the number of unpaid balls is maintained by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball buffer or total prize ball count for calculating the base value each time a payout command is sent.

Furthermore, when the payout control board 951 receives a payout command, it may update the number of prize balls used to calculate the base value. A predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of prize balls, but it is not required. Alternatively, the number of prize balls used to calculate the base value may be updated each time prize balls are actually dispensed. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls used to calculate the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Furthermore, as will be described later in Figure 47, steps S891 and S892 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins (e.g., 10 times) or at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 5 seconds), without comparing the prize ball buffer value with the threshold Th1.

As explained above, the number of prize balls used to calculate the base value can be updated at various times. The base value may be calculated immediately upon updating the number of prize balls and displayed in real time on the base indicator 1317, or it may be calculated and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, using Figures 46 to 51, we will explain the variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89). The general timing of the base value calculation in each variation is as follows.
- Figures 39 and 40: Base value is calculated each time the timer interrupt cycle occurs. - Figures 46 and 47: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. - Figures 48 and 49: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of balls that are out. - Figures 50 and 51: Base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of balls that are out reaches a predetermined number.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 46 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball buffer (step S813) in order to calculate the base value when the number of prize balls meets predetermined conditions. Note that in Figure 46, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above (Figure 39), and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game is in a special prize state, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of balls out. On the other hand, if the game is not in a special prize state, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information is obtained in the prize ball control process (step S80) (step S811).

Next, it is determined whether there are any prize balls, that is, whether the number of prize balls acquired is 1 or more (step S812). If there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the prize ball count. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the number of acquired prize balls is added to the prize ball count buffer (step S813). Note that each time a prize ball is added to the prize ball count buffer, the prize ball count may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement arcade, or the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer when the number of prize balls exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1 (described later). Here, the prize ball count buffer is an area provided in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls that the pachinko machine 1 will pay out.

Next, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is when a large number of prize balls are obtained during a predetermined time outside of the special prize period (for example, a number of prize balls equivalent to more than 10 entries per minute, considering the number of prize balls obtained from the general prize entry and start entry slots). Note that multiple tolerance levels may be set, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the standard value of the number of prize balls. Also, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, in step S813, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer; instead, the number of prize balls added to the prize ball buffer in step S813 may be subtracted.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall staff that there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. There are various ways to notify of the abnormality, and one or more of the methods described below may be used. For example, the abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, etc. Alternatively, the abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. Also, if the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and notified by the notification means described above (sound, lamps, LEDs, liquid crystal display devices, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may be used in the calculation of the base value. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 and all data in the peripheral control unit 1511's RAM, even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, it starts the game after confirming operation in the initial state. Another way to stop the game is to temporarily stop the game (for example, by stopping the display of special symbols), and then resume the game after the error notification stops and the system returns to its original state. For this reason, even if the power outage monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in power supply voltage, it outputs a power outage detection signal, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. Then, after the error notification ends, it restores the data in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 from the backup area and resumes the game. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 remains in its current state and waits for a command from the main control board 1310, so the interrupted game resumes when the main control board 1310 resumes operation. However, since 100 game balls (i.e., out balls) are launched into the game area 5a, and there is a possibility that all game balls will enter the general prize winning slots or starting slots, the manner in which an anomaly in the number of prize balls is notified should be less urgent and milder than that of a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). For example, a lower volume or lower brightness than a normal error notification is desirable. The display time should also be the same as a normal error, or even shorter. In some cases, the notification time can be set to 0 seconds, meaning no notification is necessary.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time begins.

Subsequently, the number of outs is obtained (step S818), and the total number of outs is updated by adding the obtained number of outs to the total number of outs (step S822).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball anomaly notification, which was started in step S817, has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball anomaly notification timer has timed out, a prize ball anomaly notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball anomaly notification is stopped (step S825). Note that in step S824, the end of the notification was determined by the timer's duration for anomaly notification, but the end of the notification could also be determined by notifying of anomalies for a predetermined number of balls launched. Alternatively, the anomaly notification may continue until confirmed by a hall employee.

In the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 46, step S985 determines whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. However, it is also possible to determine whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (i.e., whether there is an abnormality in the base value) by comparing it with the number of balls that have been out after obtaining the number of balls that have been out. For example, this could occur if the number of prize balls counted exceeds the number of balls that have been out within a predetermined time, or if, considering the number of prize balls from the general prize entry point or the starting point, a high percentage (e.g., 50% or more) of balls have been out.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 47, the base value is updated when the number of prize balls meets predetermined conditions. Note that in Figure 47, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation and display process described above (Figure 40), and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball buffer value can be compared with the threshold Th1, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball storage area (specifically, the prize ball storage area can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of balls out is 128 or greater). Alternatively, the determination result obtained by comparing the prize ball count and the threshold Th1 in the base calculation area update process (Figure 46) can be recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation and display process (Figure 47), the determination of whether the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1 can be made based on this flag.

Furthermore, if the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation and display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the prize ball count is left (the fractional part obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball buffer is left in the prize ball buffer), the other part is stored in memory (the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count), and the process used to calculate the base value is executed. Specifically, if the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball buffer value is 99, and 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general prize slot, the prize ball buffer value becomes 104, but 100 are moved to the total prize ball count and used to calculate the base value, and the remaining 4 are left in the prize ball buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls remaining in the prize ball buffer is used to calculate the base value the next time the prize ball buffer value exceeds the threshold Th1. While this explanation uses a threshold of 100 balls, other values such as 1000 balls are also acceptable. However, setting a threshold Th1 so large that the base is not calculated even when a jackpot is won could delay the detection of fraud. Therefore, it is best to set the threshold Th1 to be less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in a single jackpot (or less than or equal to the minimum number of prize balls for each jackpot if there are multiple types of jackpots, e.g., 4-round and 8-round jackpots). Furthermore, from the perspective of early detection of fraud, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, a threshold Th1 of 10 balls instead of 100 balls is preferable because it allows for more frequent updates of the base value.

Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins (e.g., 10 times) without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1. Alternatively, steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (e.g., 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1. This predetermined time interval may be measured using a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or by the output of the RTC (Real-Time Clock).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation and display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined), so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Furthermore, in cases where the total number of outs is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value does not need to be calculated, and the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be updated. For example, if the total number of outs is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value will be 100% or more, and the number of prize balls obtained is equal to or greater than the number of balls launched (outs). Since this is not a normal game state, it is not necessary to store values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, and the base value does not need to be calculated. Also, if the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, an abnormality in the base value may be determined using 1500% as a threshold. Since the theoretical upper limit of the base value for a pachinko machine with a maximum payout of 15 balls per winning slot is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the machine can be determined to be abnormal. In this case, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, nor is it necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, the threshold for determining an abnormal base value may be any other value. A normal base value range (e.g., 30% to 50%) for the normal operation of a pachinko machine can be defined. If the value falls outside this normal range, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218, and the base value display may not be updated.

The above explains the cases in which the base value may not be displayed. However, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it may be displayed.

Note that the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out are cumulative values from the time the pachinko machine 1 starts operation, as will be explained later in Figure 52. However, the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out may be initialized at the same time (for example, after a predetermined number of prize balls and after a predetermined number of balls out).

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment checks whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time a prize ball is obtained, thus enabling early detection of fraudulent activity. This is because, during normal gameplay, a significant number of game balls (for example, 50% of the launched balls) do not enter the general prize entry points 2001 or the starter entry points 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the machine detects and notifies of any abnormalities in the entry of prize balls into the always-open prize entry points (general prize entry points 2001 and starter entry points 2002 and 2004).

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls meets predetermined conditions, allowing for the accurate display of the base value at the appropriate time.

In the examples shown in Figures 46 and 47, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. This reduces the computational load (e.g., the load on the main control MPU 1311) compared to calculating the base value for each prize ball. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command is generated to announce the calculated base value; however, until then, the previous base value is announced.

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 48 records the number of outs in the outs buffer (step S819) in order to calculate the base value when the number of outs meets predetermined conditions. Note that in Figure 48, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are any prize balls (step S812). If, as a result of the determination in step S812, there are prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). In other words, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 48, the total number of prize balls used in calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, the system determines if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for award ball abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

Subsequently, the number of outs is obtained (step S818). The obtained number of outs is added to the outs buffer (step S819).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball abnormality notification has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters the starting slot and it is determined that a pre-announcement effect will occur, and the display mode of the reserve indicator is shown in a different manner than usual (such as flashing display or red reserve), the player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-announced reserve to be a jackpot, but if the special symbol variation display game is a miss, the player will be disappointed. Even in such cases, calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, as in this embodiment, can reduce the disappointment of the player as described above. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing of prize ball generation, so the base value that has increased due to the prize balls entering the starting slot is reported. In other words, even if it is determined that a pre-announcement effect will be executed when a ball enters the starting slot, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the starting slot does not reach the predetermined number mentioned above (for example, threshold Th1 = 100 balls), the base value is not updated. In other words, the base value displayed to the player does not change. However, since prize balls were awarded, the base value should increase (due to the display digit limit, only the lower digits may change, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the aforementioned pre-announcement animation is unsuccessful, the player will assume that the base value will increase later (i.e., that things are going well), thus preventing a decline in enjoyment. In other words, even if it is determined that a pre-announcement animation should be performed, the base value will not be updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1). Furthermore, if it is determined that a pre-announcement animation should be performed and the prize ball buffer value has reached a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number again.

Furthermore, the player may be given the option to delay or immediately calculate the base value. For example, this could be selected via the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Alternatively, the timing of the base value calculation could be determined by a lottery. Also, if a pre-announcement effect is decided upon, an effect that notifies the player of the delay in base value calculation should be executed. Note that if the reserve memory for the special symbol variation display game reaches its limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if a ball enters the start slot. Even in this case, prize balls are dispensed upon entry into the start slot, and these prize balls are counted and used in the base value calculation. Note that in the event of a specific error, if a ball enters the start slot or general prize slot but is treated as if no entry occurred and no prize balls are dispensed, the number of prize balls is not counted, and the base value is not updated as a result of that entry.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 49, the base value is updated when the number of outs meets a predetermined condition. Note that in Figure 49, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation and display process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the outs buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of outs can be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of outs (specifically, the storage area for the number of outs can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of outs is 128 or greater). Alternatively, the determination result obtained by comparing the number of outs with the threshold Th2 in the base calculation area update process (Figure 48) can be recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation and display process (Figure 49), the determination of whether the number of outs is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2 can be made based on this flag.

Furthermore, if the out-ball buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation and display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of outs (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out count buffer (step S900). Alternatively, steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined intervals (e.g., 1 minute) without comparing the out count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

Subsequently, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of balls lost (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (e.g., 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of balls lost is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of balls lost is 0, calculating the base value will result in an error return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Note that the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out are cumulative values from the time the pachinko machine 1 starts operation. However, the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out may be initialized at the same time (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of balls out).

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall staff of the base value. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value in a specific animation, or notify of an abnormal base value.

As explained above, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of balls fired (out balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate time. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prioritizes entertainment value.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize is awarded (e.g., prize ball detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion). This is because checking whether predetermined conditions are met (for example, whether there are out balls corresponding to the prize balls) when adding the number of prize balls may prevent the base value from being calculated correctly. For example, even if a launch does not occur for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball may get stuck on the nails arranged in the game area, causing a ball jam (grape) condition, and the ball may enter the prize slot later. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of whether there are out balls or not.

If both the number of outs and the outs buffer value are less than threshold Th2, the system may display that the outs buffer value is a fractional value less than threshold Th2, or it may display the outs buffer value.

In the examples shown in Figures 48 and 49, the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number. This reduces the computational load (e.g., the load on the main control MPU 1311) compared to calculating the base value each time an out ball is detected. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command is generated to announce the calculated base value; however, until then, the previous base value is announced.

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 50 calculates the base value when either the number of prize balls or the number of balls out meets a predetermined condition. This is achieved by recording the number of prize balls in the prize ball buffer and the number of balls out in the balls out buffer. In Figure 50, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, determine if the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, obtain the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state (step S811), and determine if there are any prize balls (step S812). If there are prize balls, add the obtained number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer (step S813).

Then, the system determines if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for award ball abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

Subsequently, the number of outs is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of outs is added to the outs buffer (step S819).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball abnormality notification has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825).

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 51, the base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. Note that in Figure 51, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation and display process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th1, threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the number of balls that have been hit is added to the total number of balls that have been hit (step S893), and the number of balls that have been hit is set to 0 (step S894). Alternatively, steps S891 to S894 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1.

Next, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the outs buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of outs, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the outs buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th2, the prize ball buffer value is added to the total prize balls (step S897), and the prize ball buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, threshold Th2 is added to the total number of outs (step S899), and threshold Th2 is subtracted from the outs buffer (step S900).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall staff of the base value. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, or it may notify of an abnormality in the base value. Note that a base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or it may not be generated even after the base value is calculated.

In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 51, the base value is calculated each time, even if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or total number of outs is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Figure 52 shows the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data for the total number of prize balls and total number of balls out in the base calculation area 13128 is written by the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process (Figures 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, 51, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and read out in the base calculation/display process (Figures 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). Similarly, the data for the prize ball buffer and balls out buffer in the base calculation area 13128 is written by the base calculation area update process (Figures 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and read out in the base calculation/display process (Figures 47, 49, 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), allowing for the commonization of the program for calculating and displaying the prize ratio even across gaming machines with different specifications.

Figure 52(A) shows an example of the simplest work area structure. In the work area structure shown in Figure 52(A), the following are stored: prize ball buffer, total prize balls, out balls buffer, winning balls buffer, specific winning balls buffer, total out balls, and base. The prize ball buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls dispensed to the player outside of special prize rounds and is used to calculate the base when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). The total prize balls are the total number of prize balls dispensed to the player outside of special prize rounds. The out balls buffer is the number of game balls launched by the player outside of special prize rounds and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). The winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that entered the general winning slots and start slots. The specific winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that entered specific general winning slots and start slots. The winning ball buffer is used when counting the number of balls that pass through the out-out slot (Figures 55 and 56). The specific winning ball buffer is used when correcting the number of balls that enter a specific general winning slot (Figures 71 and 72). The total number of balls that are out is the total number of balls launched by the player, excluding those during special prize rounds. The base is calculated as total winning balls ÷ total balls that are out × 100, and is expressed as a percentage. This calculation is performed in step S903 of the base calculation and display process.

In the work area structure shown in Figure 52(A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out correspond to the cumulative total areas in Figure 52(B), which will be described later. Each is a 3 or 4-byte storage area capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 or 42,949,672,950 in decimal. Since this data is not erased unless an error occurs, a large storage area is provided to accommodate long-term data storage. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the cumulative total of the bases in Figure 52(B), which will be described later, and can store values up to 255 in decimal. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded as a decimal may also be allocated.

Figure 52(B) shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. In the work area structure shown in Figure 52(B), the following are stored: prize ball buffer, total prize balls, out balls buffer, winning balls buffer, specific winning balls buffer, total out balls, and base. Each data item is the same as described in Figure 52(A). The storage areas for total prize balls and total out balls are composed of a ring buffer with n storage areas (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls) for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls, or every predetermined time). When the number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and the data is stored in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may also be moved when data other than the number of prize balls (such as the number of out balls or predetermined time) reaches a predetermined number.

The write and read pointers for the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data sequences move every predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves along with the write pointer. The read pointer points to the memory location immediately preceding the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the most recent data (6000 prize balls).

The cumulative total of prize balls and total outs is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n memory areas of the ring buffer. The base cumulative value is calculated from the cumulative total of prize balls and total outs. When the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is recalculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past. The base total cumulative value calculated from this cumulative value is calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even when the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data in the cleared area.

In the work area structure shown in Figure 52(B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out in the ring buffer each occupy a 2-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large memory area is provided. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out each occupy a 3 or 4-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is not erased unless a data error occurs, an even larger memory area is provided to store data for a long period. Furthermore, the cumulative base value and the cumulative total each occupy a 1-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded as a decimal may also be allocated.

In the data structure shown in Figure 52(A), the stored data is not erased, so the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be erased at predetermined intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly). Similarly, the total cumulative amount in Figure 52(B) may be erased at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may also be deleted. Additionally, a notification may be issued indicating that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Furthermore, a check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, and after replicating the normal data from the backup area to the main area, the base value may be recalculated.

[9-4. Displaying Base Values]
As mentioned above, the calculated base value may be displayed while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is on. However, when the main frame 4 is closed and the machine is in a playable state, the base display 1317 cannot be seen, so the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation and display process (step S89) are still performed.

Furthermore, the base indicator 1317 may either always display the base value or display the base value only when the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, pressing the display switch 1318, which is a push-button switch, starts the display of the base value, and after a predetermined time, the display is turned off. Note that if the display switch 1318 is operated while the main frame 4 has been detected as being released from the outer frame 2, the base indicator 1317 may display the base value. In other words, unless the main frame 4 is released, the base indicator 1317 will not display the bonus ratio even if the display switch 1318 is operated.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined indicator on all digits to confirm that the base indicator 1317 is functioning correctly. For example, as shown in Figure 36(B), "-" may be displayed on all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

When the main frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display confirming the normal operation of the base indicator 1317 is shown (Figure 36(E)). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state is the same as after the initial setup is complete (Figure 36(B)), but it may be a different state, as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display unit 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. Normally, the function display unit 1400 displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310. However, when the main frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has opened from the outer frame 2, the main control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched due to the opening of the main frame 4, the game should continue. By continuing the game, when the main frame 4 closes, the display can quickly switch from the base display to the game status display. For example, if the main frame 4 opens during a special symbol variation display game, the base value is displayed. However, if the main frame 4 closes before the variation time has elapsed, the variation display for the remaining time can be shown. Since the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400 are synchronized with the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols stop at the same time that the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even when the function display unit 1400 displays a base value, it can be configured so as not to cause any discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, even when the main frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (the payout ratio in the embodiment described above) may be displayed on the base indicator (payout ratio indicator) 1317. This allows the base value (payout ratio) to be checked without opening the main frame 4, thus suppressing a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Also, it eliminates the need to determine whether the main frame 4 is open or closed. In addition, in island-style setups where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, opening the main frame 4 of one pachinko machine allows the back of the pachinko machine on the opposite side to be seen. In such gaming machines, opening the main frame 4 of one pachinko machine allows the base (payout ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back-to-back to be checked. Furthermore, when displaying the base value even when the main frame 4 is closed, it is preferable to display the base value in a form that is recognizable to the player (for example, on a display device that shows the effects of a special symbol variation display game or on a display device attached to the frame). This is because the base value can be used as a barometer of the pachinko machine's condition and is worth checking for the player. When the main control board 1310 calculates the base value, a signal to display the base value should be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the dispensing control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal to display the base value should be transmitted from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, the signal to display the base value may be transmitted via a relay board.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the light intensity (brightness) of the base indicator 1317 is not changed even when switching to energy-saving mode. This is because reducing the light intensity of the base indicator 1317 during energy-saving mode would make it difficult to check the base value using the base indicator 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside of opening hours.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the gaming machine enters a standby state after a predetermined time has elapsed following the consumption of the reserved memory for the special symbol variation display game when no game balls enter any of the winning slots. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continues to output the background music that is output during so-called normal variation. Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, it transitions to a demo state. In the demo state, a video that shows the motif of the gaming machine is played, or an explanation of the gaming machine is given. Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the demo state, it transitions to an energy-saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy-saving mode). In the energy-saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the light intensity of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, the power consumption of the display devices controlled by the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400 and base display unit 1317) is small compared to the total power consumption of the pachinko machine, so it is not necessary to reduce the light intensity of these display devices. Furthermore, if the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, players attempting to play on an empty machine can easily see the results of the previous draw.

Furthermore, even if no game balls enter the starting slot or general prize slot, if game balls are launched towards the game area and out-of-bounds balls are detected, the displayed base value may be recalculated and updated. Even if the number of out-of-bounds balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will be eager for revenge.

For such players, the enjoyment of the game can be revived by informing them of the game status using the function display unit 1400, which also serves as the base indicator 1317. In other words, even when switching to demo mode or energy-saving mode, the display mode of the indicator showing the base value should maintain the brightness from before switching to demo mode or energy-saving mode, or increase the brightness, so that players can clearly see the base value.

While the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the indicator displaying the base value has been described above, from the perspective of reducing energy consumption, the light intensity of the indicator displaying the base value may also be decreased or turned off. For example, when a predetermined operation (such as the operation of an operating means provided on the gaming machine, like the firing stop button to forcibly stop firing, the operation button to change the displayed effects, the RAM clear button to clear the contents of the RAM, or the power supply adjustment button to switch the power supply to the gaming machine) is detected during energy-saving mode, the light intensity of the indicator displaying the base value may be reduced. Furthermore, not only during energy-saving mode, when the aforementioned predetermined operation is performed, the light intensity of both the lamps that reduce power consumption during energy-saving mode and the indicator displaying the base value may be reduced or turned off.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both lamps, etc., and the display that shows the base value, the light intensity of lamps, etc., that reduce power consumption during energy-saving mode may be reduced or turned off before the display that shows the base value. In this case, reducing the light intensity of lamps, etc., which have a higher power consumption, first will have the effect of significantly reducing power consumption. Alternatively, the light intensity of the display that shows the base value may be reduced or turned off before the lamps, etc. In this case, the effect of maintaining the visual appeal of the gaming machine even in energy-saving mode will be achieved. Furthermore, the light intensity of lamps, etc., that reduce power consumption and the display that shows the base value may be reduced or turned off simultaneously during energy-saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased, resulting in a high energy-saving effect. Note that the order of time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of internal processing timing and the order as seen from the player's perspective.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be set to multiple levels, and the display mode may be changed for each level. Specifically, the displayed base value may be divided into multiple levels such as 30% or more, 25% or more but less than 30%, 20% or more but less than 25%, 15% or more but less than 20%, 10% or more but less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display unit for the base value may be composed of multicolor LEDs, and the emitted color may be changed for each level, such as white, blue, and yellow. Alternatively, the display unit for the base value may be composed of a liquid crystal display device, and self-deprecating comments such as "Doing well," "Things are going downhill," "Isn't this bad?", or "That's amazing in a way" may be displayed when the base value is low. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display unit for the base value, the aforementioned comments may be added to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 that displays the decorative pattern.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the outfield]
Next, Figures 53 to 56 will be used to explain further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89). In the processes explained in Figures 54 to 56, the number of balls that go in is used to calculate the number of balls that go out, and the base value is calculated. The general timing of the base value calculation in each variation is as follows.
- Figures 54 and 40: Base value is calculated each time the timer interrupt cycle is activated. - Figures 55 and 56: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls that are out. Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls that are out is omitted, it can be achieved by combining Figures 54 to 56.

If out-of-bounds balls are detected by the out-of-bounds ball sensor 1021 located near the out-of-bounds opening 1111, there is a problem in that the number of out-of-bounds balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because game balls launched towards the game area 5a exit the game area 5a via the general prize-winning opening 2001, the start-up opening 2002, and the large prize-winning openings 2005 and 2006, in addition to the out-of-bounds opening 1111. Therefore, the out-of-bounds ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched towards the game area 5a. To address this, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the number of out-of-bounds balls is accurately calculated using the number of prize-winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds opening, thereby accurately calculating the base value.

Figure 53 is a front view showing another example of a game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine in this embodiment has a structure that is generally the same as the game board shown in Figure 10, but it is equipped with an out-port ball sensor 1021 located at the bottom of the game area 5a that detects the number of game balls (number of balls passing through the out-port) that exit the game area 5a after passing through the out-port 1111. The out-port ball sensor 1021 should be installed in a position where the player can see it through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port ball sensor 1021 in a position where the player can see it through the out-port 1111, the player can be made aware that the balls are being counted, that is, that the base is being calculated.

Furthermore, the ball sensor 1021 passing through the out-of-out

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the number of prize balls entering the game in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the outlet for each timer interrupt cycle. Note that in Figure 54, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 54, the total number of prize balls used in calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. Note that the process of determining whether there are prize balls and updating the total number of prize balls if there are no prize balls may be skipped.

Subsequently, the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area is obtained (step S818), and the number of balls that entered the winning area is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area and the number of balls that entered the winning area is added to the total number of balls that went out (step S822). In other words, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 54, the total number of balls that went out or entered the winning area is updated each time an out-of-bounds ball or a winning ball is detected.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (Figure 46) described above, it is possible to determine if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Additionally, as shown in steps S824 to S825 of Figure 46, it is possible to determine if the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and total number of outs in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 54, the base value can be calculated using the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 40.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 55 calculates the base value when either the number of prize balls or the number of balls that go out meets a predetermined condition. This is achieved by recording the number of prize balls in the prize ball buffer, the number of balls passing through the out-out slot in the out-ball buffer, and the number of prize balls that enter the slot in the prize ball buffer. In Figure 55, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, determine if the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, obtain the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state (step S811), and determine if there are any prize balls (step S812). If there are prize balls, add the obtained number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer (step S813).

Then, the system determines if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for award ball abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

Next, the number of balls passing through the out-out gate is obtained (step S818), and this number is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819). Then, the number of balls that enter the winning slot is obtained (step S820), and this number is added to the winning ball count buffer (step S821).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball abnormality notification has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out-out gate and the number of balls entering the winning slot is added to a single memory area (total number of balls out). In the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 55, the acquired number of balls passing through the out-out gate and the number of balls entering the winning slot are added to separate memory areas (number of balls out buffer, number of balls entering buffer). Thus, the number of balls passing through the out-out gate and the number of balls entering the winning slot may be recorded in a single memory area or in separate memory areas.

Furthermore, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out-port and the number of balls entering the winning slot are recorded in separate memory areas, the number of balls out increases by 1 when a ball enters the winning slot. Therefore, the counting of balls passing through the out-port and the counting of balls entering the winning slot are performed simultaneously (within a single timer interrupt process). However, the base value is calculated after updating both the out-ball buffer and the winning-ball buffer. In this case, if it is not possible to update both the out-ball buffer and the winning-ball buffer within a single timer interrupt process, it is preferable to pre-determine whether to prioritize counting the number of balls passing through the out-port or the number of balls entering the winning slot, rather than deciding this by random selection. Prioritizing the processing related to winning balls over other processes allows for faster execution of the winning ball payout process, but this should be decided appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 56, the base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. Note that in Figure 56, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation and display process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th1, threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the number of balls out is added to the total number of balls out (step S893), and the number of balls out is set to 0 (step S894). Alternatively, steps S891 to S894 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals, without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1.

Next, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area stored in the out-of-bounds buffer and the number of balls entering the winning area stored in the winning-ball buffer is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area and the number of balls entering the winning area is the number of game balls that flowed into the game area and is the number of out-of-bounds balls. If the calculated number of out-of-bounds balls is less than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-of-bounds balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-of-bounds balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the value of the winning-ball buffer is added to the total number of winning-balls (step S897), and the winning-ball buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-of-bounds balls (step S899), the winning-ball buffer is set to 0, the value of the winning-ball buffer is added to the out-of-bounds buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). Alternatively, steps S896 to S901 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals, without comparing the number of outs (outs buffer value + winning balls buffer value) with threshold Th2.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 56, the base value is calculated each time, even if the total number of balls won or the total number of balls out are not updated. That is, if the total number of balls won and the total number of balls out are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same. On the other hand, if the total number of balls won or the total number of balls out is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As explained above, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the number of balls that enter the winning slot is added to the number of balls that pass through the out slot to calculate the number of balls that enter the winning slot. Therefore, the number of balls that enter the winning slot can be accurately counted, and the base value can be accurately calculated. Furthermore, by checking the base value during the manufacturing and inspection processes of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning slot switch, the base indicator 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are functioning correctly.

[9-6. Notification of Base Anomalies]
The process described above generates a command to notify the calculated base value. Next, we will explain the process of determining if there is an anomaly in the base value and notifying the system of such an anomaly.
- Figure 57: Calculate the base value each time the timer interrupt cycle is activated. - Figure 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls that are out. Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls that are out is omitted, it can be achieved by combining Figures 57 and 58.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 57, the base value is calculated each time (each timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation and display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormal base value occurs, for example, when the calculated base value is significantly larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) by a predetermined tolerance range. Note that multiple tolerance ranges may be set, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall staff. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation and display process ends. The method for notifying of a base abnormality can be the same as the base notification method described above.

For example, one or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, an abnormality in the base value may be notified using a base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, or 244. Notifying the player of an abnormal base value allows the player to confirm the malfunction of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may also be displayed as a percentage on the aforementioned indicators or displays to notify the player of the abnormal base value. Note that decimal values may be rounded down, rounded to the nearest whole number, or rounded up. Display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, or 244, may display values to one decimal place for more detailed information.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is advisable to change the display mode if the base value is abnormal. For example, the numerical value could be displayed by blinking or changing its color (e.g., green for normal conditions, red for abnormal conditions). Additionally, the display mode of the base value could be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value could be divided into multiple stages, such as 30% or more, 25% or more but less than 30%, 20% or more but less than 25%, 15% or more but less than 20%, 10% or more but less than 15%, and less than 10%, with the emitted light color changing to white, blue, and yellow for each stage.

Furthermore, the system may use various lamps, LCD displays, and sounds to indicate the range of the base value (whether it is high or low, abnormal or normal, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may also indicate an abnormal base value. Additionally, information about the base value abnormality may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming facility.

Furthermore, the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 57 is best used in combination with a base calculation area update process, such as those shown in Figures 50 and 55, which updates the total number of prize balls and total number of out balls when predetermined conditions are met.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 58, the base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. Note that in Figure 58, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation and display process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th1, threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the number of balls that have been hit is added to the total number of balls that have been hit (step S893), and the number of balls that have been hit is set to 0 (step S894). Alternatively, steps S891 to S894 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1.

Next, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the outs buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of outs, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the outs buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th2, the prize ball buffer value is added to the total prize balls (step S897), and the prize ball buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, threshold Th2 is added to the total number of outs (step S899), and threshold Th2 is subtracted from the outs buffer (step S900).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormal base value occurs, for example, when the calculated base value is significantly larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) by a predetermined tolerance range. Note that multiple tolerance ranges may be set, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall staff. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation and display process is terminated.

In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 58, the base value is calculated each time, even if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or total number of outs is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Furthermore, the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 58 is best used in combination with a base calculation area update process that directly updates the total number of prize balls and total number of outs using the acquired number of prize balls and number of outs, as shown in Figures 39 and 54.

As explained above, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the system notifies of the abnormality. This allows players to know the status of the machine, and hall employees to be aware of the possibility of fraudulent operation on the machine. Furthermore, it can detect and notify abnormalities in the machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection methods.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, we will describe an example of a gaming machine that notifies users of changes in the calculated base value.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally fluctuates. Since the base value represents the machine's performance, players are concerned not only with the base value itself but also with changes in it. Therefore, notification of changes in the base value to players is desirable. If a display indicating fluctuations in the base value appears, players can play with greater peace of mind.

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of past base values. Note that in Figure 59, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the previously described base calculation and display process, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th1, threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the number of balls that have been hit is added to the total number of balls that have been hit (step S893), and the number of balls that have been hit is set to 0 (step S894). Alternatively, steps S891 to S894 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1.

Next, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the outs buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of outs, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the outs buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th2, the prize ball buffer value is added to the total prize balls (step S897), and the prize ball buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, threshold Th2 is added to the total number of outs (step S899), and threshold Th2 is subtracted from the outs buffer (step S900).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed out (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not time to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed out, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value at predetermined intervals (e.g., 10 minutes). Each time the base value management timer times up, the current base value is stored in the base history. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. The base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 as a single entry or multiple entries. When multiple base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, 10 base values per predetermined time. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of balls out may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, n prize balls and total balls out per predetermined time, and the base value may be calculated as needed.

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (Figure 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the most recent past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value (step S10301). If the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it refers to the base decrease duration measurement timer and determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base decrease (step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base decrease, it selects a performance table indicating that the base decrease is ongoing (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the base decrease, it selects a performance table indicating that the base decrease is continuing (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decline duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table for base rise is selected (step S10306).

In the display selection process described above, step S10301 determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, it is also possible to determine whether the current base value is greater than, equal to, or less than the base history value by comparing the two. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Figures 64 to 68 show examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the presentation of the special symbol variation display game based on a random number selected upon winning a prize in the starting slot (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). Display selection table 1, shown in Figures 64 to 66, is selected when the base value is rising or when there is no change in the base value. Display selection tables 2 and 3, shown in Figures 67 and 68, are selected when the base value is falling. In particular, display selection table 3, shown in Figure 68, is selected after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to fall.

Each display selection table includes the following items: performance number, performance content, variation time, remarks, and distribution. The performance number is an identifier that uniquely identifies the performance selected in the display selection table. The performance content is the name of the performance. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbols by the performance begins until it ends. The remarks are information written by the designer to help them understand the overview of the performance. The distribution is the probability that the performance will be selected, defined by a numerator with a denominator of 65536.

The display selection table 1 (miss) shown in Figure 64 is selected when the jackpot lottery result is a miss and the base value is increasing or unchanged. The display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in Figure 65 is selected when the jackpot lottery result is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a probability variation state and the base value is increasing or unchanged. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in Figure 66 is selected when the jackpot lottery result is a probability variation jackpot that leads to a probability variation state and the base value is increasing or unchanged.

The display selection table 2 shown in Figure 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. The display selection table 3 shown in Figure 68 is selected if the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the diagram, display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects where the symbols do not change, and freeze effects are selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect was selected.

Furthermore, if the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decline, you may use the display selection table 3 to select an effect and switch to the selected effect.

Furthermore, whether or not to display a specific animation that notifies the player of changes in the base value may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because constantly notifying the player of changes in the base value could distract them from the animations in the special symbol variation display game, which is the primary enjoyment of pachinko machines, potentially causing their attention to be diverted.

For example, during the execution of a special symbol variation display game (a game situation where the result of the jackpot lottery is not yet displayed), the special symbol variation display game's effects should be prioritized. When the symbols are not varying, specific effects (effects that serve as an indicator of the base value change) should be displayed when the base value increases or decreases.

The specific animation should be displayed at a predetermined time when the special symbol variation display game is not running. This is because displaying the animation immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends would prolong the player's tension and lead to fatigue. If a game ball enters the starting slot while the specific animation is displayed, the animation should stop and the special symbol variation display game should begin. This is because the entry into the starting slot triggers a jackpot lottery and initiates the special symbol variation display game, making it better to keep the player focused on the special symbol variation display game.

The specific animation should be displayed even when the number of prize balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1), or when the number of out balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Alternatively, the animation may be displayed according to the lottery results, or it may be made to always be executed if the same conditions are met.

Furthermore, this specific animation should not be displayed when the base value is increasing, but only when it is decreasing. This is because informing players of a base value increase can raise their expectations, and if the base value does not increase to the level they expected, the gap between their expectations and reality may lead to disappointment. On the other hand, informing players of a base value decrease may motivate some players to increase their fighting spirit in order to raise the base value.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display selection table was changed depending on whether the base value was decreasing or not (increasing, steady). However, it is also possible to define the display selection table separately for three states: decreasing, steady, and increasing, and notify the player when the base value is increasing. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (i.e., whether the historical base value is equal to the current base value) by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Furthermore, this specific animation may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside of the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

Furthermore, if no game ball enters the starting slot and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value will normally decrease. Also, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen will be displayed on the main LCD display device 1600.

Figure 69 shows an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine in this embodiment.

Figure 69(A) shows an example of a normal reach, where the left and right symbols stop at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. Figure 69(B) shows an example of a special reach 1, where the left and right symbols displayed in the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the game. Figure 69(C) shows an example of a special reach 2, where the left and right symbols displayed in the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the game.

Figure 69(D) shows an example of the freeze effect 1 display, where the stopped decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the screen, and a display indicating the decrease in the base value is shown in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbols (for example, the lower right of the screen). Figure 69(E) shows an example of the freeze effect 2 display, where the stopped decorative symbols are displayed in the center of the screen, and a display indicating the continuation of the decrease in the base value is shown in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbols (for example, the bottom of the screen). In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value can be in any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the decorative symbols. For example, it could be a pop-up display in the center of the display screen.

The above describes an example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, but the lighting pattern of the decorative lamps may be changed. Furthermore, instead of displaying the upward or downward trend of the base value, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The displayed change in base value may be based on a comparison between the base value calculated in the time interval prior to a predetermined time and the base value calculated in the current time interval, or on a comparison between the total cumulative base values calculated prior to a predetermined time and the total cumulative base values of the most recent time.

[9-8. Base calculation considering specific general prize winning slots]
Next, we will explain the process for accurately calculating the base value, taking into account winning prizes in specific general prize categories.

In pachinko machines, players adjust the strength of their ball launches to aim for specific winning slots (for example, the large winning slots 2005 and 2006 when they are open) that are more likely to receive a prize during a jackpot. Even during a jackpot, there are variations in gameplay, such as aiming for the large winning slot 2005 by launching the balls at the same points as in normal play, or aiming for the large winning slot 2006 by using the maximum launch strength, known as right-hand play. Among these variations, the game board is sometimes designed with starting slots and general winning slots located downstream of the large winning slots to collect balls that spill out.

Here, we will explain in detail the downstream (lower) part of a pachinko machine where the player shoots to the right during a jackpot. During a jackpot, the player shoots to the right to get the game balls into the open large prize slot. Most of the game balls launched towards the game area enter the open large prize slot 2006. As mentioned above, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, as shown in Figures 10 and 16, a general prize slot 2001 is provided to the right of the large prize slot 2005. When a game ball shot to the right does not enter the open large prize slot 2006, it enters this general prize slot 2001. In other words, the general prize slot 2001 to the right of the large prize slot 2005 only enters when a game ball shot to the right does not enter the open large prize slot 2006.

The base value represents the number of prize balls dispensed when 100 game balls are launched towards the game area 5a, specifically those that enter the starting gate and general prize gates (i.e., the ratio of prize balls dispensed to the 100 balls that were "out"). Therefore, if game balls that entered the game area but have a low probability of entering the starting gate and general prize gates (and are more likely to enter the large prize gate) are counted in the number of launched balls (out), the calculated base value is expected to deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general prize slot 2001 to the right of the main prize slot 2005 is defined as a specific general prize slot, and the number of balls that entered this specific general prize slot during the special prize period is excluded from the total number of balls that went out to calculate the base value.

The following is an overview of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of a gaming machine that calculates the base value considering specific general prize winning slots.
- Figures 70 and 40: Base value is calculated each time the timer interrupt cycle is activated. - Figures 71 and 72: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls out. Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of balls out is omitted, it can be achieved by combining Figures 70 to 72.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 70 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls out, and the number of specific prize balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls out corrected by the number of prize balls entering a specific general prize slot at each timer interrupt cycle. Note that in Figure 70, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 70, the total number of prize balls used in calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. Note that the process of determining whether there are prize balls and updating the total number of prize balls if there are no prize balls may be skipped.

Subsequently, the number of balls that went out is obtained (step S818), and the number of balls that entered a specific general prize-winning slot (specific prize-winning ball count) is obtained (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific prize-winning ball count from the number of balls that went out is added to the total number of balls that went out (step S822). In other words, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 70, the total number of balls that went out, used in the calculation of the base value, is updated each time a ball goes out or a ball enters a prize-winning slot.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (Figure 46) described above, it is possible to determine if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Additionally, as shown in steps S824 to S825 of Figure 46, it is possible to determine if the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and total number of outs using the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 70, the base value can be calculated using the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 40.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 71 calculates the base value when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls meet predetermined conditions. This is achieved by recording the number of prize balls in the prize ball buffer and the number of out balls in the out ball buffer. In Figure 71, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, determine if the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, obtain the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state (step S811), and determine if there are any prize balls (step S812). If there are prize balls, add the obtained number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer (step S813).

Then, the system determines if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for award ball abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

Next, the number of balls that went out is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of balls that went out is added to the number of balls that went out buffer (step S819). Then, the number of balls that entered the winning slot is obtained, and it is determined whether the winning slot for the obtained number of balls entered is a specific general winning slot, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning slot is obtained (step S820). Then, the obtained number of balls that entered the specific general winning slot is added to the specific number of balls that entered buffer (step S823).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball abnormality notification has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825).

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation and display process (step S89). In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 72, the base value is calculated considering the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball buffer. Note that in Figure 72, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the previously described base calculation and display process, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is equal to or greater than threshold Th1, threshold Th1 is added to the total number of prize balls (step S891), and threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball buffer (step S892). Then, the number of balls that have been hit is added to the total number of balls that have been hit (step S893), and the number of balls that have been hit is set to 0 (step S894). Alternatively, steps S891 to S894 may be executed after a predetermined number of wins or at predetermined intervals without comparing the prize ball buffer value with threshold Th1.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area (stored in the out-of-bounds buffer) and the number of balls entering the winning area (stored in the winning-ball buffer) is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out-of-bounds area and the number of balls entering the winning area is the number of game balls that flowed into the game area, and this is the number of out-of-bounds balls. If the calculated number of out-of-bounds balls is less than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-of-bounds balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-of-bounds balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the value of the winning-ball buffer is added to the total number of winning-balls (step S897), and the winning-ball buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning-balls is subtracted from the total number of out-of-bounds balls, and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning-ball buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the number of out-of-bounds balls (step S900).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S902). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation and display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of outs (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clock cycles have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of outs is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it does not need to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormal base value occurs, for example, when the calculated base value is significantly larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) by a predetermined tolerance range. Note that multiple tolerance ranges may be set, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall staff. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation and display process is terminated.

In the base calculation and display process shown in Figure 72, the base value is calculated each time, even if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and total number of outs are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same. If the total number of prize balls or total number of outs is updated, the base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated when either the total number of prize balls or total number of outs is updated, or when both are updated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that entered the game area but have a low probability of entering the start gate and general prize gate. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate a base value with little deviation from the actual base value.

Furthermore, while the example described a pachinko machine where the player shoots to the right during a jackpot and a general prize pocket 2001 is located downstream of the large prize pocket 2006, the invention described in this embodiment can also be applied to pachinko machines where the player aims for the large prize pocket 2005 with normal shooting during a jackpot, or to gaming machines where a start pocket or general prize pocket is located downstream of the large prize pocket 2005.

Furthermore, the game area 5a is equipped with large prize slots 2005 and 2006 that normally do not accept game balls, but which can accept game balls depending on the jackpot lottery result. Prize balls awarded for entering these large prize slots 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the period from when a game ball enters the starting slots 2002 and 2004 and the special symbol variation display game begins, until the special symbols are determined and the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 open (jackpot opening), to when the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 close and the next special symbol variation display game begins (jackpot ending), is considered the special prize period, and any detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of prize balls and out balls during the special prize period can be counted without determining whether it is the special prize period in step S810 as shown in Figure 39. Furthermore, if the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 repeatedly open and close during a single jackpot, the time between the closing and reopening of the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 (the closing interval) may be included in the special prize period. That is, the special prize period refers to the period during which the conditional device is active, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbols in the special symbol variation display game until the end of the ending sequence. It may also include all the time during the right-hand shooting instruction. Additionally, for the start slots 2002 and 2004, the time during time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode may be included in the special prize period. Furthermore, in game states other than time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode, the time from the opening of the start slot 2004 to a predetermined time after its closing (for example, the few seconds required for a ball that entered the start slot to be detected as an out ball) may be included in the special prize period.

Furthermore, the game area 5a is equipped with a second start opening 2004, which normally does not accept game balls but becomes capable of accepting them depending on the result of the regular symbol lottery. The prize balls awarded for entering this second start opening 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the period from when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the regular symbol lottery is conducted, the start of the regular symbol variation display game, and the opening of the gate after the regular symbol is determined (opening), to when the second start opening 2004 closes and the next regular symbol variation display game begins (ending), is considered the special prize period, and any detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. Note that if the second start opening 2004 repeatedly opens and closes depending on the result of the regular symbol lottery, the time between the closing of the second start opening 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize period. In this way, not only during the time-saving period, but all prize balls entering the second start opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and out balls outside of special prize periods (jackpot, time-saving mode, etc.) without having to determine in step S810 (as shown in Figure 39) whether a special prize is being awarded.

This method allows for the accurate exclusion of outs and prize balls while the player is hitting to the right, enabling the precise calculation of the base value.

Furthermore, some pachinko machines recommend playing with the left hand when not in a jackpot or time-saving mode (the so-called normal state), and playing with the right hand when in a jackpot or time-saving mode. Such machines are equipped with a general prize entry point 2001 and a first start entry point 2002 for left-handed play, and a general prize entry point 2001 and a second start entry point 2004 for right-handed play. In such machines, the number and arrangement of prize entry points and the position of the pins differ depending on the left and center of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when playing left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when playing right-handed). In other words, the base value for left-handed play and the base value for right-handed play are different.

The base value of a pachinko machine is set assuming that the player will be shooting left-handed in normal circumstances. However, for the reasons mentioned above, if the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed shooting (for example, if the base value for right-handed shooting in normal circumstances is designed to be lower than that for left-handed shooting), then when the player shoots right-handed in normal circumstances, the lower base value will be calculated.

Pachinko parlors will consider a low base value to be abnormal and inspect it, or they will determine that the machine has poor payout performance. Even with a pachinko machine judged to have poor payout performance (lower than the expected base), the parlor will assume the player is playing left-handed and adjust the starting and general prize entry points to increase the ball entry rate during left-handed play. They will then adjust any abnormal pins to raise the base value. When a machine is adjusted in this way and the player plays left-handed, many prize balls can be obtained even under normal conditions. In other words, players can receive many draws for a small amount of money. Therefore, even if the base value during left-handed play is the same as what the parlor expected, the parlor might mistakenly adjust the starting and general prize entry points to increase the ball entry rate during left-handed play. Because parlors can suffer losses due to such malicious intent from players, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for both left-handed and right-handed play.

By the way, in pachinko machines where the player shoots to the right during the shortened play time, the second start port 2004, which opens and closes depending on the game state, and the gate section 2003, which conducts a normal symbol lottery to open the second start port 2004, are located in the area where the game ball rolls during right-hand play. Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 during right-hand play in the normal state, even if a normal symbol lottery is conducted, the probability of winning a normal symbol is made extremely low to prevent the second start port 2004 from opening. Alternatively, even if a normal symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second start port 2004 is shortened, making it difficult to win a prize in the second start port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value under normal conditions with right-handed play, it would be necessary to increase the rate at which balls enter the second starting opening 2004. However, since the second starting opening 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting opening 2002, increasing the rate at which balls enter the second starting opening 2004 would pressure the hall's profits. Therefore, when counting the game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 under normal conditions and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate a base value corrected using the number of balls that passed through the gate section 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 under normal conditions is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls shot towards the game area 5a) as a specific winning number. Reducing the number of out balls allows for a higher base calculation value. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing should be determined appropriately based on the design values (performance) of the game machine.

Furthermore, by monitoring the passage of the gate section 2003, if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 (conditions may be set, such as when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3 balls) pass through the gate section 2003 without entering the starting slot), the number of out balls counted during a predetermined time or number of shots after (or before/after) passing through the gate section 2003 does not need to be used in the calculation of the base value. This allows for a more accurate calculation of the base value. Upon detecting passage through the gate section 2003, instead of actively informing the player that it will not be reflected in the base value calculation result, a display or voice message such as "Please return to left-handed play" may be output. Also, upon detecting passage through the gate section 2003, the hall may be notified that right-handed play is in progress. For example, a specific lamp may be illuminated, its illumination pattern changed, or an output indicating right-handed play may be sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming area.

As explained above, by excluding the number of balls passing through the gate section 2003 located on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game balls roll when played to the right) from the number of balls that go out, the base value for right-handed play under normal conditions can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, fluctuations in the calculated base value due to the player's playing style can be prevented.

[9-9. Initialization of Base Values]
Considering the role of the base value in confirming the operating status of pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be retained for a long period of time. Furthermore, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. For this reason, the base calculation and display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the erasure conditions for the data related to the progress of the game that is backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. This allows for the retention of accurate prize ball count data and the calculation of accurate payout ratios.

Specifically, while the base calculation and display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch (first operation), all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased by a second operation, which involves cutting off the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and cutting off the power to the pachinko machine 1. The second operation may be implemented by providing a single switch, or by having an employee of the amusement parlor disconnect the connector of the backup power line supplied to the main control board 1310 to cut off the power to the pachinko machine 1.

In other words, two operations are provided to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, while the second operation erases all data, including the calculated base value and data related to the progress of the game.

By configuring it in this way, the base calculation and display data 13136 cannot be erased due to accidental operation by the arcade staff, thereby increasing the reliability of the displayed prize ratio and preventing the concealment of a high prize ratio.

[9-10. Base calculation considering abnormal prize winnings]
Figures 73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process that takes into account award-winning anomalies.

In pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, abnormalities in ball entry may also be detected. For example, if a ball is entered when the large prize entry openings 2005 and 2006 are not open due to a jackpot being determined in a special symbol variation display game, or when a ball is entered when the start opening 2004 is not open due to a win being determined in a normal symbol variation display game, this constitutes an abnormal ball entry. In other words, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, mainly when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, an abnormal ball entry is an abnormal operation detected from the number of balls entered, mainly when a ball is entered in a state where entry is impossible, or when a large number of balls are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the balls that enter the game due to this anomaly are counted as out balls, it is desirable to correct for this and accurately calculate the base. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process that considers the anomaly, the total number of out balls is corrected by subtracting the number of balls that entered the game due to the detected anomaly.

Normally, balls only enter the large prize slots 2005 and 2006, and the starting slot 2004 during the special prize round. Therefore, balls entering these slots are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and there is no need to consider any abnormal entries.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 73, similar to the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 39, directly updates the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) (step S814), and directly updates the total number of balls that have been played out using the number of balls that have been played out (step S822), in order to calculate the base value each time a timer interrupt occurs. Note that in Figure 73, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, determine whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of balls that have been played. On the other hand, if the game state is not during a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information is obtained in the prize ball control process (step S80) (step S811). The number of prize balls obtained in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls whose payout has been decided. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that has already been created. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that has already been sent. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and has received an acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951. Furthermore, it may also be the number of prize balls that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and has received a report of payout completion from the payout control board 951 (number of prize balls that have been paid out). This variation has already been explained using Figures 41 to 44.

Then, the number of prize balls acquired is added to the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is updated (step S814). Note that if there are no prize balls, the process of checking for prize balls and updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Also, even if a game ball enters the starting slots 2002 and 2004, but the reserve limit is reached and the entry into the starting slot is not reserved, prize balls are still dispensed, and the total number of prize balls is updated. Furthermore, in game states where no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters a prize slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated as a result of that entry, and the number of prize balls acquired is 0, so the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see Figure 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 73, the total number of prize balls used in calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Next, the number of balls that went out is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether an abnormal entry has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the entry that was determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827). Specifically, as mentioned above, if an entry into the large entry slots 2005 and 2006 is detected outside of the special prize period (when the condition device is activated) that occurs when a jackpot is derived in the special symbol variation display game, or if an entry into the start slot 2004 is detected when it is not open due to a win being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined to be an abnormal entry.

A prize-winning abnormality may be determined when one prize-winning ball exhibiting abnormalities is detected, or when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls exhibiting abnormalities are detected. Furthermore, a prize-winning abnormality may be determined when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls exhibiting abnormalities are detected consecutively, or when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls exhibiting abnormalities are detected within a predetermined time period.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As mentioned above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020 and the ejected ball sensor 3060, and is acquired by reading the detection signals from these sensors in the switch input processing of step S74. At this time, the acquired number of out balls minus the number of winning balls resulting from the winning error may be added to the total number of out balls, or the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and then the number of winning balls resulting from the winning error may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see Figure 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in Figure 73, the total number of out balls used in the calculation of the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt, updating the total number of outs. The base value is then calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40). Therefore, the base value can be displayed without delay, and it is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (Figure 74) described later, it is possible to determine if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Additionally, as shown in steps S824 to S825, it is possible to determine if the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 performs the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also perform the base value calculation process. In this case, the main control board 1310 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the base value, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the base value.

Furthermore, even if information on both balls entering and leaving prize slots is obtained in a single timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later), and the number of balls left out is added to the total number of balls left out (or the balls left out buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, even if information on balls entering multiple prize slots is obtained in a single timer interrupt process, the sum of the number of prize balls from multiple entries is added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer in the embodiment described later). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if entries are detected in a prize slot sensor with 5 prize balls and another prize slot sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball buffer).

Furthermore, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer) only when the launch of a game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to wins detected within a predetermined time from the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer). Alternatively, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 may be detected, and only the number of prize balls related to wins detected while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (and even further, until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) may be added to the total number of prize balls or prize ball buffer. Additionally, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer) only when the player is operating the launch handle. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winning, detected within a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or finger is detected touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500, may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball buffer). This prevents the inaccurate display of prize balls due to abnormalities or fraudulent activity, such as detecting prize balls when no game balls have been launched. In this case, using the contact detection sensor 509 eliminates the need to install a new sensor to detect game ball launches, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in Figure 74 records the number of outs in the outs buffer (step S819) in order to calculate the base value when the number of outs meets predetermined conditions. Note that in Figure 74, the same step numbers are used for the same parts as in the base calculation area update process described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game is in a special prize state (step S810). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. Then, the number of prize balls for states other than special prize state is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are any prize balls (step S812). If, as a result of the determination in step S812, there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). In other words, in the base calculation area update process shown in Figure 74, the total number of prize balls used in the calculation of the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

Next, the number of outs is obtained (step S818). The obtained number of outs is added to the outs buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a prize-winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the prize-winning abnormality is obtained (step S827).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball abnormality notification has timed out (step S824). If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in Figures 73 and 74, the number of out balls was corrected for all winning balls affected by the winning anomaly. However, it is not necessary to correct out balls for winning balls affected by a specific type of winning anomaly, while not correcting out balls for winning balls affected by other specific types of winning anomalies. For example, depending on the type of winning ball affected by the winning anomaly, a prize ball may or may not be paid out for that winning ball. Whether or not a prize ball is paid out for this winning anomaly should be determined for each winning slot. In this case, for winning anomalies where no prize ball is paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as total out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for winning anomalies where a prize ball is paid out, the winning balls should be counted as total out balls, and the paid prize balls should also be counted as total prize balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Note that even for winning anomalies where a prize ball is paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as total out balls, and the paid prize balls should not be counted as total prize balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, if a gaming machine malfunctions and maintenance is performed (such as clearing a ball jam), a hall employee may manually insert game balls into the starting slot to compensate the player for any losses. In this case, prize balls are paid out for balls entering the starting slot. Although this entry into the starting slot is detected as an entry anomaly, prize balls are paid out. When prize balls are paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to classify it as an entry anomaly. In this case, prize balls should be paid out at the entry slots that are reflected in the base value calculation (starting slots 2002 and 2004) and an entry anomaly should not be classified, while prize balls should not be paid out at the other entry slots (large entry slots 2005 and 2006) and an entry anomaly should be classified. The entry slots that are classified as entry anomalies are those that pay out fewer prize balls for winning than the entry slots that are not classified as entry anomalies (starting slots pay out 3 prize balls, large entry slots pay out 15 prize balls). Therefore, while abnormal entries are detected at the main prize slot, failing to detect abnormal entries at the start slot does not create a significant security vulnerability from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activity. Thus, detecting abnormal entries prevents discrepancies between the number of balls that are out and the number of balls awarded. In particular, by correcting the number of balls that are out using the number of balls awarded for abnormal entries that do not result in any awards, the number of balls awarded and the number of balls that caused the awards can be made consistent.

As mentioned earlier, it is possible to detect abnormalities in winning combinations at various winning slots, but we will now explain a specific implementation example for a pachinko machine.

First, the general prize slot 2001 may not be used to detect abnormalities in prize entries, and instead, abnormalities in prize entries may be detected using other prize slots (large prize slots 2005, 2006, start slots 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult for multiple game balls to enter the general prize slots simultaneously, this improves the security resistance of the game machine against fraudulent activity, while also allowing players to be compensated for their winnings by having balls enter the general prize slots 2001 (a total of 4), which are more numerous than the large prize slots 2005, 2006 and start slots 2002 (a total of 3), which are electrically operated opening and closing mechanisms. Furthermore, since the general prize slots 2001 are easily identifiable by hall employees, maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and operations for compensating for winnings are simplified. The reason why hall staff can easily identify the general prize slot 2001 is that it is often grouped together (or separated into different areas) within the game area, and its decorative components (appearance) differ from those of the electric prize mechanisms (large prize slots 2005, 2006, start slots 2002, 2004). Furthermore, if the number of prize balls awarded for each ball entering a general prize slot is small, it improves the security resistance of the game machine against fraudulent activity. Note that the system may not only detect abnormal entries in a specific general prize slot (for example, the leftmost one), but may also detect abnormal entries in other general prize slots.

Furthermore, it is acceptable to not detect abnormalities in the large prize slots 2005 and 2006, which award a large number of balls, but to detect them in the other prize slots (general prize slots 2001, start slots 2002, and 2004, which award fewer balls). Since the large prize slots award a large number of balls per ball, the base value changes significantly even with a small number of balls entering. Therefore, it is convenient to easily check for changes in the base value during pachinko machine inspections. It is also acceptable to not detect abnormalities in only a specific large prize slot (for example, large prize slot 2005, which makes it easy to insert game balls by hand), but to detect abnormalities in other large prize slots (for example, 2006).

Furthermore, the system may not detect abnormal ball entry at starting gates 2002 and 2004, but instead detect abnormal entry at other winning gates (general winning gate 2001, large winning gates 2005 and 2006). Since the starting gates award fewer balls per winning ball than the large winning gates, this improves the security resistance of the gaming machine against cheating while still guaranteeing ball payouts to the player. It is also possible to not detect abnormal entry at only specific starting gates (for example, starting gate 2002 located in the center of the game board is easily identifiable), but to detect abnormal entry at other starting gates 2004.

Furthermore, in the case of large prize slots and starting slots, if the opening/closing mechanism of the prize slot is in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, if the opening/closing mechanism is easy for hall staff to operate, a prize entry abnormality may not be detected. However, if the opening/closing mechanism of the prize slot is in a position not visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, if the opening/closing mechanism is difficult for hall staff to operate, a prize entry abnormality may be detected. For example, in a prize slot where the opening/closing mechanism, which is vertically positioned in the closed state, tilts to an oblique position to pick up the game ball (a so-called electric tulip), it is easy for hall staff to operate. On the other hand, in a prize slot where the prize slot is blocked by a flat plate-like member in the closed state, and the entrance to the prize slot opens when this flat plate-like member retracts (a so-called tongue tulip), it is difficult for hall staff to operate. By doing so, the security level is relaxed only for prize slots used to compensate players for their winnings, making it easier for hall staff to understand and improving the security resistance of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the system may also notify the system of detected prize-winning anomalies. The method for notifying prize-winning anomalies can be the same as the method for notifying prize-winning ball count anomalies described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as an LCD, lighting or flashing decorative lamps on the game board or frame, outputting voice, sound effects, or warning sounds). However, the notification for prize-winning anomalies should be less stringent than the notifications for other anomalies. Specifically, the notification time should be shorter, the text indicating the anomaly should be smaller, the lamp should not light up when an anomaly is notified, and the anomaly notification sound should be quieter (suppressed) than the notification sounds for other anomalies.

Furthermore, in the notification of abnormal prize winnings, it is advisable to provide notification for a predetermined period after detecting an abnormality. Even if further abnormalities are detected during this predetermined period, the notification should not be extended, but rather terminated at the initially set predetermined time, or the notification method should be changed. In this way, if abnormal prize winnings occur continuously for a predetermined period (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine, rather than that it is due to fraudulent activity by the player. Therefore, by providing notification of abnormal prize winnings only for a predetermined period and then ceasing notification thereafter, it is possible to avoid interfering with the hall's maintenance work on the gaming machine and improve work efficiency. Additionally, by changing the notification method after the predetermined period, it is possible to avoid interfering with the maintenance work on the gaming machine and to confirm that the work is continuing correctly. Specifically, it is advisable to continue notification using display devices or lamps, but to stop (or reduce the volume of) the audible notification.

In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correction means that corrects the number of balls that go out based on the number of balls that enter the game. This correction means divides multiple entry points into multiple types (start entry point, major entry point). For the first type of entry point, it corrects the number of balls that go out based on balls that enter outside of the period when a predetermined condition is met (special prize). For the second type of entry point, it does not correct the number of balls that go out based on balls that enter outside of the period when a predetermined condition is met (special prize). This prevents discrepancies in the number of balls that occur when compensating players due to maintenance of the gaming machine, as described above, and allows for accurate calculation of the number of balls that go out. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to adjust the base value as part of the adjustment (maintenance). This allows for the calculation and display of an accurate base value.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of abnormal prize entries and exceptional handling of such detection (cases where no abnormality is detected). However, since game balls determined to have abnormal entries are not prize balls obtained during gameplay and are likely to be used for maintenance of the pachinko machine (base value adjustment), it is preferable that prize balls determined to have abnormal entries are not reflected in the number of balls that go out and are not used in the calculation of the base value.

Furthermore, the system may notify the system of any prize-winning anomalies detected during the base calculation area update process shown in Figures 73 and 74. For example, in the timer interrupt processing's fraud detection process (step S84), a prize-winning anomaly is identified as an abnormal state, and a prize-winning anomaly display command is created and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). This prize-winning anomaly notification may occur when one prize-winning ball is detected, or when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls are detected. Alternatively, the system may notify the system when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls are detected consecutively, or when a predetermined number of prize-winning balls are detected within a predetermined time.

Furthermore, the notification of an abnormal prize entry may terminate after a predetermined time has elapsed, or it may terminate when the prize entry slot opens again (the conditional device is activated).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to notify the winner of any prize-winning incident.

[9-11. Base value calculation process utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division operation to calculate the base value, so the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes, unlike when the CPU 13111 performs the division by program. The base calculation process described so far did not take advantage of this characteristic.

Specifically, in relation to the calculation of the base value, the timer interrupt processing (Figure 23) described above reads detection signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060 and the ball launch sensor 1020 in the switch input processing (step S74) to count the number of balls that have been ejected. Then, in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed is calculated. Subsequently, in the base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of balls ejected in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

Subsequently, in the base calculation and display process (step S89), the base value is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base indicator 1317.

Since timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, and a predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt, it was difficult to include time-consuming processes in the timer interrupt processing, i.e., to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt processing, given the slow division processing performed by the program. However, by performing the division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for base value calculation can be reduced, allowing for multiple base value calculations in a single timer interrupt processing and enabling the display of the base value without delay.

Furthermore, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the time values are written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until the calculation result is read from the division result register A131218. In other words, the 32 clock cycle wait time from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, allowing other processing to be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor and the output timing of the quotient are separate, the degree of flexibility in the base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing is improved.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that utilizes the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 75 is the same as the timer interrupt processing described above (Figure 23), except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98). Therefore, a detailed explanation of the same processing is omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from the sensor that detects winning balls, detection signals from the switch that detects fraudulent activity, and detection signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060 and the ball launch sensor 1020 are read to count the number of balls that have been ejected.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation process 1 (step S97). In base calculation process 1, the total number of outs is updated using the number of outs counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to Figures 76 and 78.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed based on the read input information is calculated, and this number is written to the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created based on the calculation result of the prize ball count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation process 2 (step S98). In base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of base calculation process 2 will be described later using Figures 77 and 79.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82), the fraud detection process (step S84), the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process (step S86), and the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process (step S88). Following this, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting the predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL clears the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns to) the register bank. Once the above processes are complete, the timer interrupt process ends and returns to the process before the interrupt.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9701). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the balls that are out are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is updated by adding the obtained number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705). Note that if the number of out balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out balls is 0, base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. This reduces the load on the main control MPU 1311 without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of balls out is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of balls out is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of balls out is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of balls out is stored in the division input register B131217 (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of balls out) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

Subsequently, similar to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or an anomaly in the base value) is notified to the player or hall staff. When the base value is notified by the display devices (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) or speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the base notification command is a display command or sound output command to the peripheral control unit 1511. Furthermore, when notification is made by the base indicator 1317 or function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is a drive signal to the LED elements. Specifically, when the 7-segment LEDs are driven by a driver, the drive signal containing the character code set in the driver (character generator within the driver) is the base notification command. Also, when the 7-segment LEDs are driven directly, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 determines whether the game state is in the special prize phase (step S9801). The criteria for determining whether the game is in the special prize phase are the same as those explained in Figure 39.

As a result, if the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not during a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the total number of prize balls is updated by adding the obtained number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of prize balls is 0, base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (e.g., 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217 (step S9812). Note that if the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Furthermore, if the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of outs) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

The base calculation process shown in Figures 76 and 77 is executed after each timer interrupt, allowing for the calculation and display of the base value without delay. Alternatively, base calculation processes 1 and 2 may be executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute, a period longer than the timer interrupt cycle) instead of after each timer interrupt. By not executing the base calculation and display process after each timer interrupt, the computational load required for base value calculation (e.g., the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to calculating the base value after each timer interrupt.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be explained using Figures 78 and 79. The base calculation process shown in Figures 78 and 79 calculates the base value for each predetermined number of outs and each predetermined number of prize balls.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9701). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the balls that are out are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the number of out balls is updated in the out ball buffer to add the obtained number of out balls (step S9703). Note that if the number of out balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out balls is 0, base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. This reduces the load on the main control MPU 1311 without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of outs is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the outs buffer value can be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the outs storage area (specifically, the outs storage area can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of outs is 128 or greater).

Furthermore, if the out-ball buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, so base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out count buffer value is greater than or equal to threshold Th2, the total number of outs is updated by adding the out count buffer value to the total number of outs (step S9705), and the out count buffer is set to 0 (step S9706).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of balls out is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of balls out is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of balls out is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of balls out is stored in the division input register B131217 (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of balls out) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9801). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the obtained number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S9803). If there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball buffer is updated to add the obtained number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), informing the player and hall staff that there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. There are various methods for notifying of the abnormality, and one or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of Figure 46 can be employed.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls refers to situations such as when a large number of prize balls are obtained during a designated time outside of the special prize period (for example, a number of prize balls equivalent to more than 10 entries per minute, considering the number of prize balls obtained from the general prize slots and starting slots). Furthermore, multiple tolerance levels may be established, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the standard value of the number of prize balls.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time begins.

Next, it is determined whether the number of balls stored in the ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the ball count buffer value can be compared with the threshold Th1, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the ball count storage area (specifically, the ball count storage area can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of balls out is 128 or greater).

Furthermore, if the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated by adding the prize ball buffer value to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball buffer is set to 0 (step S9810).

Furthermore, the number of prize balls may be output to the hall computer installed in the amusement arcade from the external terminal board 784 each time an amount is added to the prize ball buffer, or the threshold Th1 may be output to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784 when the number of prize balls exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1 (described later). Here, the prize ball buffer is an area provided in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of balls out is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of balls out is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of balls out is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of balls out is stored in the division input register B131217 (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clock cycles) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of balls out) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

Subsequently, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and hall staff.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball anomaly notification, which was started in step S9807, has timed out (step S9815). If the prize ball anomaly notification timer has timed out, a prize ball anomaly notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball anomaly notification is stopped (step S9816). Note that in step S9815, the end of the notification was determined by the time of the timer for notifying of prize ball anomalies for a predetermined period; however, the end of the notification may also be determined by notifying of prize ball anomalies for a predetermined number of balls launched. Alternatively, the anomaly notification may continue until confirmed by a hall employee.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 80 is the same as the previously described timer interrupt processing (Figures 23 and 75), except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). Therefore, a detailed explanation of these identical processes is omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, detection signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060 and the ball launch sensor 1020 are read to count the number of balls that have been ejected.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of outs is updated using the number of outs counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written to the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later using Figures 81 and 84.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed based on the read input information is calculated, and this number is written to the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created based on the calculation result of the prize ball count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written to the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later using Figures 82 and 85.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following: frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control processing (step S88).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and performs base display processing to generate a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting the watchdog timer clear register WCL to a predetermined value clears the register. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns to) the register bank. Once these processes are complete, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the system returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in Figure 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 onwards from the base calculation process 1 shown in Figure 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9701). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the balls that are out are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is updated by adding the obtained number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705). Note that if the number of out balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out balls is 0, base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. This reduces the load on the main control MPU 1311 without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

Figure 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in Figure 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 onwards from the base calculation process 2 shown in Figure 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9801). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the total number of prize balls is updated by adding the obtained number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of prize balls is 0, base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. This reduces the load on the main control MPU 1311 without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Alternatively, instead of storing the total number of balls out in the division input register B131217 in step S9708 of Figure 81, the total number of prize balls multiplied by a predetermined number (e.g., 100) may be stored in the division input register A131216 in step S9812 of Figure 82, and the total number of balls out may be stored in the division input register B131217.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of balls out) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). Then, it generates a base notification command (step S8902) to notify the players and hall staff of the base value.

The base calculation process shown in Figures 81 and 82, and the base display process shown in Figure 83, are executed after each timer interrupt, allowing for the calculation and display of the base value without delay. Alternatively, base calculation process 1 and base calculation process 2 may be executed at predetermined intervals (e.g., every minute) instead of after each timer interrupt.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be explained using Figures 84 and 85. The base calculation process shown in Figures 84 and 85 calculates the base value for each predetermined number of outs and each predetermined number of prize balls.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in Figure 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 onwards from the base calculation process 1 shown in Figure 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9701). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the balls that are out are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the number of out balls buffer is updated to add the obtained number of out balls to the out ball count buffer (step S9703). Note that if the number of out balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out balls is 0, base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. This reduces the load on the main control MPU 1311 without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the number of outs stored in the outs buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of outs is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the outs buffer value can be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the outs storage area (specifically, the outs storage area can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of outs is 128 or greater).

Furthermore, if the out-ball buffer value is less than threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, so base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out count buffer value is greater than or equal to threshold Th2, the total number of outs is updated by adding the out count buffer value to the total number of outs (step S9705), and the out count buffer is set to 0 (step S9706).

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the total number of outs is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in Figure 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 onwards from the base calculation process 2 shown in Figure 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is in a special prize state (step S9801). The criteria for determining whether it is in a special prize state are the same as those explained in Figure 39. If the game state is in a special prize state, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the game state is not in a special prize state, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the obtained number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S9803). If there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball buffer is updated to add the obtained number of prize balls to the prize ball buffer (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), informing the player and hall staff that there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. There are various methods for notifying of the abnormality, and one or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of Figure 46 can be employed.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls awarded refers to situations such as when a large number of prize balls are awarded during a designated time outside of the special prize period (for example, more than 10 prize balls per minute, considering the number of prize balls awarded at the general prize slots and starting slots). Furthermore, multiple tolerance levels may be established, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation from the standard value for the number of prize balls awarded.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time begins.

Next, it is determined whether the number of balls stored in the ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the ball count buffer value can be compared with the threshold Th1, or the determination can be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the ball count storage area (specifically, the ball count storage area can be configured with 8 bits, and if the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of balls out is 128 or greater).

Furthermore, if the prize ball buffer value is less than threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base is not calculated, and base calculation process 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball buffer value is greater than or equal to the threshold Th1, the total prize ball count is updated by adding the prize ball buffer value to the total prize ball count (step S9809), and the prize ball buffer is set to 0 (step S9810).

Furthermore, the number of prize balls may be output to the hall computer installed in the amusement arcade from the external terminal board 784 each time an amount is added to the prize ball buffer, or the threshold Th1 may be output to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784 when the number of prize balls exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1 (described later). Here, the prize ball buffer is an area provided in the main control's built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1.

Next, it is determined whether the total number of outs is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of outs is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of outs is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Alternatively, instead of storing the total number of balls out in the division input register B131217 in step S9708 of Figure 84, the total number of prize balls multiplied by a predetermined number (e.g., 100) may be stored in the division input register A131216 in step S9812 of Figure 85, and the total number of balls out may be stored in the division input register B131217.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of balls out) from the division result register A131218 and sets it as the base value (step S8901). Then, it generates a base notification command (step S8902) to notify the players and hall staff of the base value.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the timer for prize ball anomaly notification, which was started in step S9807 of base calculation process 4, has timed out (step S8903). If the prize ball anomaly notification timer has timed out, a prize ball anomaly notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball anomaly notification is stopped (step S8904). Note that in step S8903, the end of the notification was determined by the time of the timer for notifying of prize ball anomalies for a predetermined period; however, the end of the notification may also be determined by notifying of prize ball anomalies for a predetermined number of balls launched. Alternatively, the anomaly notification may continue until confirmed by a hall employee.

As shown in Figures 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the input values (divisor and dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at a timing when the division result can be read from the arithmetic circuit 13121, before the timer interrupt processing is completed (before the timer interrupt cycle has elapsed and the next timer interrupt processing has started). Specifically, the timing for writing the input values (divisor and dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is preferably in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or before the control processing of special symbols and normal symbols (steps S86 and S88).

Furthermore, the decision to perform the calculation of the base value may be determined based on the number of game balls (prize balls) awarded to the player. In other words, the calculation of the base value may be switched based on the number of prize balls awarded for each winning slot. For example, the prize balls awarded for the winning slot that awards the maximum number of prize balls per winning ball do not need to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, if there are three types of prize game media (prize balls dispensed for each prize ball) awarded when a prize game medium enters a designated prize slot in the game area, namely 1, 3, or 5 balls, then it is not necessary to use the maximum of 5 prize balls and the corresponding number of balls dispensed in the calculation of the base value. This is because using prize entries with a large number of prize balls in the base value calculation would result in large fluctuations in the calculated base value. Even if the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded (rounded up, rounded down, etc.) by processing means, the displayed value may change frequently. In such cases, it becomes difficult for the pachinko parlor to determine whether the machine is performing as intended (for example, whether it is performing according to the set payout rate).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls (one) and the corresponding number of outs in the calculation of the base value. This is because, since the change in the base value due to a small number of prize balls is small, even if the single prize ball is not used in the calculation, the displayed base value may not change when the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded (rounded up, rounded down, etc.). Therefore, processing that does not contribute to the change in display can be omitted.

Furthermore, while we explained the cases of the maximum and minimum number of prize balls, it is not necessary to use the intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used in the calculation of the base value, averaging the maximum and minimum will show the number of prize balls and out balls that represent the overall operation of the pachinko machine, allowing for the determination of an appropriate base value.

Although this explanation uses three types of prize payout patterns, other patterns such as five or seven types are also acceptable.

Furthermore, if a specific type of prize ball entry (such as the minimum value of 1, the intermediate value of 3, or the maximum value of 5) is not used in the base value calculation, then all other entries in the game state at the time the prize ball entry was detected do not need to be used in the base value calculation. For example, if an entry into a prize slot awarding 5 prize balls is not used in the base value calculation, then in the game state where an entry into that slot is detected, entries into that slot and other prize slots will not be used in the base value calculation until the end of that game state. Similarly, entries into that slot and other prize slots after the start of that game state will not be used in the base value calculation retroactively.

Furthermore, if the game state in which the winning combination was detected occurs again, the winning combinations from that point onward do not need to be used in the calculation of the base value. Similarly, winning combinations from the point in which the winning combination was detected until the game state transitions to another game state do not need to be used in the calculation of the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of delays in determining whether the pachinko machine is functioning correctly (for example, whether it is performing according to the set payout rate) by not using the number of winning balls and out-balls in game states where the calculated base value changes significantly.

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls awarded varies depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum, or intermediate) number of prize balls awarded for a single winning ball does not need to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, we will explain the specific process of not using the number of prize balls and the number of balls out in the calculation of the base value, depending on the number of game balls (prize balls) mentioned above.

In the switch input processing (step S74), when detection signals from each prize entry sensor are input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the prize in the base value calculation. For prizes determined not to be used in the base value calculation, the total number of prize balls and total number of out balls for base value calculation are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 75, in base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the base value calculation is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and in base calculation process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the base value calculation is set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Furthermore, if all detected prizes are not used in the base value calculation, base calculation process 1 (step S97) and base calculation process 2 (step S98) in Figure 75 do not need to be executed.

Furthermore, in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 80, in base calculation processing 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the base value calculation should be set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls. Similarly, in base calculation processing 4 (step S94), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the base value calculation should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Also, if all detected winning balls are not used in the base value calculation, base calculation processing 3 (step S93), base calculation processing 4 (step S94), and base display processing (step S95) in Figure 80 do not need to be executed.

The method for excluding winning balls that are determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls may be the same as the method for correcting out balls due to abnormal winning, as explained in Figures 73 and 74.

In this case, since the determination of whether to use the detected winning balls in the base value calculation is made based on the number of winning balls, it is not necessary to determine whether it is a special prize in base calculation process 1 (step S97), base calculation process 2 (step S98), base calculation process 3 (step S93), and base calculation process 4 (step S94).

In this way, by excluding the number of balls that go out and the number of balls that win a prize from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping any steps, making it easy to verify that the process is being executed accurately, especially during the development phase. Furthermore, by not executing the process to calculate the base value and not updating it, the processing load on the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, allowing other processes (such as the lottery process and the process of determining the variation pattern) to be executed accurately.

In other words, even if the highest prize is awarded to a player among several prizes with varying degrees of advantage, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value remains unchanged as a result of awarding that prize. Furthermore, the calculated base value remains unchanged until at least the game state in which the highest prize was awarded has ended.

[9-12. Another configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Figure 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in this embodiment.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 17, the ball discharge sensor 3060 consists of a game board-side ball discharge sensor 3060A provided on the game board 5 and a frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B provided on the main frame 4. Note that either the game board-side ball discharge sensor 3060A or the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As mentioned above, the board-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is an out-port ball passing sensor 1021 that detects game balls passing through the out-port 1111 located at the bottom of the game area 5a (see Figure 53). The output signal of the board-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later using Figure 92. In this case, the total number of game balls ejected is the sum of the number of game balls detected by the out-port ball passing sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start-port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various prize-winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557.

As described above, the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B is installed at the discharge port that discharges game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see Figure 4). The output signal of the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main frame 4 and the game board 5.

If both the control panel-side ball discharge sensor 3060A and the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the control panel-side ball discharge sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B may be compared, and an error may be reported if a difference of a predetermined amount or more occurs between the two counting results. Alternatively, an error may be reported if a difference of a predetermined amount or more occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time period.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the display switch 1318 is not a mandatory component. As described later, the display content of the base display unit 1317 (provisional section display and confirmed section display) is switched at predetermined time intervals (see Figure 99). However, the display switch 1318 can be used to display the base value or switch the display content.

Aside from the configurations mentioned above, the control configuration of the pachinko machine is the same as that shown in Figure 17.

Figures 88 and 89 show the arrangement of the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B.

Figure 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out-of-bounds balls are aligned in a single line in a ball channel 960 provided in the main frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and out-of-bounds balls are counted by a single frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B. Game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out-of-bounds opening 1111, general prize opening 2001, and major prize openings 2005 and 2006. The main frame 4 is provided with a ball channel 960 that directs the discharged game balls downwards to the right side in a front view, aligning them in a single line. The frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in a single line.

Figure 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out-balls, aligned in a ball channel 960 provided on the back of the game board, flow down in two lines and are counted by multiple discharge ball sensors 3060. Game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out-out opening 1111, general prize-winning opening 2001, start-up openings 2002 and 2004, and major prize-winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main frame 4 is provided with a ball channel 960 that directs the discharged game balls down from the left and right sides towards the center and aligns them in two lines. Each of the two frame-side discharge ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in their respective lines.

The frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B is installed in the position shown in Figures 53, 88, and 89, but it may also be configured to be detachable from the main frame 4 by being integrated with the ball flow path 960 as a unit. Alternatively, the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B may also be configured to be detachable from the main frame 4.

Figure 90 shows an example of the connection between the ball ejection sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the control panel-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is connected to connector 13101 on the main control board 1310 via an intermediate board, and the output signal of the control panel-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B is connected to connector 13102 on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output wire of the panel-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is connected is preferably located on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output wire of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B is connected is preferably located on the lower side of the main control board 1310.

The connector 13101 to which the output wire of the control panel-side ball discharge sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output wire of the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately. However, as shown by the dashed line, the output wires of the control panel-side ball discharge sensor 3060A and the frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B may be connected to a single connector (for example, 13102).

Furthermore, the output line of the board-side ball ejection sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B may be connected directly to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (e.g., a floating connector) connecting the game board 5 and the main frame 4.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine in this embodiment is equipped with multiple magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signals from the magnetic detection sensors 1030 are input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later using Figure 92.

Figure 91 is a front view showing an example of a game board 5, and in particular, it shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects unauthorized magnetism within the game area 5a and is installed near the sensors that detect winnings in the various prize winning slots 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (at the positions marked with stars in the figure). The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is shown by the dashed line on the game board 5, and there is some overlap.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the out-out port 1111. This is to prevent the calculation of an incorrect base value. Specifically, if a player brings a magnet close to the out-out port 1111 and activates the ball discharge sensor 3060, the number of balls discharged will be counted higher than the actual number, lowering the base value. Therefore, amusement parlors may perform maintenance on the pachinko machine 1 to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine where maintenance has been performed based on an incorrect base value, the normal payout will increase, allowing players to play under more favorable conditions than usual and win more balls. To calculate an accurate base value and prevent such incorrect ball payouts, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided near the out-out port 1111. Furthermore, it is advisable to provide magnetic detection sensors 1030 in other locations where the ball discharge sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 located near the outlet 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030, as shown in the figure. This is because, as shown in Figure 89, when detecting out-of-bounds balls with multiple ball ejection sensors 3060, the magnetic field should be detected over a sufficient range to cover all multiple ball ejection sensors 3060. Furthermore, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 located near the outlet 1111 may include other prize-winning openings (for example, the large prize-winning opening 2005 located above the outlet 1111).

Figure 92 shows the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 receives output signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060, prize entry sensor (general prize entry sensor 3015, first start entry sensor 2104, second start entry sensor 2551, first large prize entry sensor 2114, second upper large prize entry sensor 2554, second lower large prize entry sensor 2557, etc.), and magnetic detection sensor 1030, and inputs them to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (e.g., debouncing). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signals to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signals from each sensor are input to one of the A1-A8 terminals of the interface circuit 1331. The signals, after level conversion and shaping by the interface circuit 1331, are output from the Y1-Y8 terminals and input to one of the A1-A8 terminals of the buffer circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1-Y8 terminals to the data bus when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 from the main control MPU 1311 are input. This allows the detection results from each sensor to be received by the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs to terminals A1 to A8. When the input signal to each terminal falls below a predetermined threshold (e.g., 4V) or above a predetermined threshold (e.g., power supply voltage - 0.1V), it detects a break in the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit in the switch. If the input to any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, it outputs an abnormality signal E and, regardless of the input signals to terminals A1 to A8, outputs signals from terminals Y1 to Y8 indicating that each sensor is OFF. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined threshold (e.g., 12V - 20%) and an abnormality in the power supply is detected, it outputs an abnormality signal E and, regardless of the input signals to terminals A1 to A8, outputs signals from terminals Y1 to Y8 indicating that each sensor is OFF. In other words, even if an ON-level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for that input will be OFF. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the sensor's output is invalid). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process the input signal based on whether the switch power supply has decreased, reducing the processing load. Furthermore, it allows the output signals Y1 to Y8 to output signals at a level that turns each sensor OFF, regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to A8.

As described later, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value when it detects an abnormal signal (see Figure 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives signals from sensors used in the base value calculation (number of balls dispensed, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used in the base value calculation (such as the gate sensor 2547). The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal if any of the input signals become abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not performed, and the display content of the base indicator 1317 remains unchanged.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors signals from sensors used in base value calculation and signals from sensors not used in base value calculation. If either signal becomes abnormal, it outputs an abnormality signal to stop the base calculation.

Figures 93, 94, and 95 show examples of the main control board 1310's implementation. Figure 93(A) shows an example where the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, while Figure 93(B) shows an example where the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to a single driver circuit 1334. Figure 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display unit 1317, and the main control board 1310. Figure 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, Figure 95(B) is a bottom view, and Figure 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in Figures 93(A) and (B), the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in Figure 93(A), the display data for the function display unit 1400 and the display data for the base display unit 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and input to different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output to the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 from different driver circuits 1334.

In the example shown in Figure 93(B), the display data from the function display unit 1400 and the display data from the base display unit 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and input into a single latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from a single driver circuit 1334 to both the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317.

In the examples shown in Figures 93(A) and (B), the main control MPU 1311 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336. It is preferable to arrange the signal lines that output display data from the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 so that they do not intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and the clock signal.

Connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the control panel-side ball ejection sensor 3060A is connected, and it is preferable to provide it on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Connector 13101 receives output lines not only from the control panel-side ball ejection sensor 3060A, but also from other prize-winning sensor 3015, 2104, etc., and from the magnetic detection sensor 1030. Connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side ball ejection sensor 3060B is connected, and it is preferable to provide it on the lower side of the main control board 1310. The signals from the ball ejection sensor 3060 input to connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332.

Figure 94 shows the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310, located between the main control MPU 1311 and the base indicator 1317. Figure 94 is a view of the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side. Solid lines represent the patterns on the back side, dashed lines represent the patterns on the component side, and dotted lines represent components mounted on the component side of the printed circuit board. Note that the ground pattern and power supply pattern are omitted from the illustration.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and connected to the cathode-side segment terminals of each digit of the 7-segment LED on the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334).

Furthermore, some of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to latch 1 (1333) and connected via driver 1 (1334) to the common terminal on the anode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display unit 1317.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, latch circuit 2 (1333) receives data from data lines (D1 to D8) to control the blinking of each segment when the chip select signal CS2 from the main control MPU 1311 is input. Latch circuit 1 (1333) receives data from data lines (D1 to D4) to control the blinking of each digit when the chip select signal CS3 from the main control MPU 1311 is input.

The main control MPU 1311 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuits 1333 clear the latched data in response to the reset signal.

The data lines (D1-D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display unit 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal. Similarly, although not shown in the diagram, the data lines (D1-D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the base indicator 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting. Therefore, pulse signals are transmitted on the data lines between the main control MPU 1311 and the base indicator 1317, and the level of these data lines changes frequently. In particular, a large current necessary to drive the LED elements flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base indicator 1317. For this reason, the data lines between the main control MPU 1311 and the base indicator 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base indicator 1317) become a source of noise. Furthermore, if the data lines between the main control MPU 1311 and the base indicator 1317 intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal, noise can be superimposed on the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal, potentially causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. This signal line crossing can also occur at intersections of wiring patterns on the front and back surfaces of a printed circuit board, or at intersections of wiring patterns between inner and surface layers (front and back surfaces).

Specifically, if a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a time when it should not normally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during gameplay, potentially causing the game to stop or the game state to be erased. Furthermore, if the game state is erased at a time when it should not normally occur, the normal power-off processing will not be executed, resulting in a reset. This will clear the data stored in the RAM 1312, potentially causing a jackpot to end, a variable display game to terminate prematurely, or the hold data in special symbol variable display games or normal symbol variable display games to be erased.

The main control board box 1320 has varying heights, with some areas being lower and others higher, depending on the height of the components mounted on the main control board 1310 and any interference with other components during assembly. For example, as shown in Figure 95, the main control MPU 1311 is tall, so the area where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted is higher in the main control board box 1320. The area to the left of the mounting location of the main control MPU 1311 is higher in the main control board box 1320, allowing for the mounting of relatively tall components such as electrolytic capacitors. On the other hand, the area to the right of the mounting location of the main control MPU 1311 is lower in the main control board box 1320, allowing for the mounting of shorter components such as ICs (tall components cannot be placed there). The areas of the main control board box 1320 that are higher and can accommodate tall components are indicated by hatching. Furthermore, in the area where connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 should be formed at a height equal to or less than the surface through which the mating connectors are inserted and removed (preferably at the same height as the board surface) to prevent interference with the insertion and removal of cables (connectors) connecting to other boards.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 to match the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of installing unauthorized components (circuits) on the main control board.

In Figure 95, the base indicator 1317 is placed in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, for maintenance purposes, it is preferable to place the base indicator 1317 in a position where it is difficult for players to see the display content even when the main frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to check the presence or absence of game balls in the supply tank), if players can see the display content of the base indicator 1317, they may often not correctly understand how to read the display on the base indicator 1317. Therefore, players may ask for an explanation of the display content of the base indicator 1317. To prevent such complications, it is preferable to place the base indicator 1317 in a position where it is difficult for players to see the display content. Furthermore, placing the base indicator 1317 in this way can reduce inquiries from players. In other words, the base indicator 1317 displays a base value for a maximum of 52,000 balls played, but this may differ from the base value for a short period of play by the player, potentially leading to complaints about the payout rate. Positioning the base indicator 1317 in this way can reduce complaints from players. The same applies to the aforementioned payout ratio indicator 1317; it is best to position the payout ratio indicator 1317 in a location where the player's display is difficult to see.

As shown in the diagram, the base display unit (7-segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in the low-height area of the main control board box 1320.

Figure 96 shows the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in Figure 93(A), it is a circuit diagram illustrating an example where the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. In this embodiment, an example is described where the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are composed of light-emitting diodes (LEDs), but they may also be composed of lamps (bulbs) or other light-emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is positioned between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display unit 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display unit 1317 or function display unit 1400.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and then outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 captures bus data input to terminals D1 to D8 at the rising edge of the clock signal CK, and outputs it to the driver circuit 1334 via terminals Q1 to Q8, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates switching transistors according to signals input to terminals I1 to I8, changing the voltages at terminals O1 to O8, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display unit 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, to illuminate the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display unit 1317, at the rising edge of CS1, the bus data D1 to D8, which have been captured by latch 2 (1333), are output by driver 2 (1334) as segment data (LOW when illuminated). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display unit 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising edge of CS0, the bus data D1 to D4, which have been captured by latch 1 (1333), are output by driver 1 (1334) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising edge of CS0, COM1 output from driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display unit 1317 is driven.

Furthermore, to illuminate the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, at the rising edge of CS2, the driver 3 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D8, which has been captured by the latch 3 (1333), as segment data (LOW for illumination). The driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). Specifically, at the rising edge of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4, which has been captured by the latch 4 (1333), as common data (HIGH for driving). More precisely, at the rising edge of CS3, if bus data D1 is HIGH, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, both the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 use a common anode 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, current flows from driver 1 to driver 2 through the 7-segment LED. Consequently, when the segment is lit, the output of drivers 1 and 4 is VCC (+12V), while the output of drivers 2 and 3 is GND (0V).

Note that while latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus directly to terminals Q1 to Q8, latches 1 and 4 (1333) may also have a decoder function and output a signal from any of terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data acquired from the data bus.

Next, as shown in Figures 93(A) and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be explained.

The segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to the base display unit 1317 and the common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to the base display unit 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. In other words, since both the common data and segment data are sent to the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data for the base display unit 1317 and the display data for the function display unit 1400 are output in a single timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt handler, common data is output to select the next digit (LED group), and segment data is output at the same time as the common data output to control the illumination of each LED.

The display data for the base display unit 1317 and the display data for the function display unit 1400 are generated by separate processes within the timer interrupt processing and output at different timings within the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs the display data for the base display unit 1317 by executing the base calculation/display code 13135, which is outside the game control domain. Meanwhile, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs the display data for the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 within the game control domain. These data are generated by separate programs (codes) and output at different timings.

Next, we will describe a variation in the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334.

The segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to the base display unit 1317 and the common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to the base display unit 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process that outputs the data to be sent to the base display unit 1317 should be executed at a different timing than the timer interrupt process that outputs the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and should be executed immediately afterward.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312. However, to prevent common signals from being transmitted at the same time, it is advisable to use control data common to both codes to control the transmission timing of the common signals so that they do not overlap. For example, a common counter is provided that is used in common by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135. For instance, a common signal can be output to the function display unit 1400 when the common counter is between 0 and 3, and to the base display unit 1317 when the common counter is between 4 and 7.

The process for outputting the common signal and the process for outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in a single subroutine. The game control code 13131, which executes the process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and the base calculation/display code 13135, which executes the process for outputting data to be sent to the base display unit 1317, should call these subroutines at timings defined in each program to output signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317. In this case, the output of data to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to the base display unit 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed within a single timer interrupt process, these subroutines are called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in Figures 93(A) and 96, connecting the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 to different driver circuits 1334 suppresses the impact of noise introduced from the display unit (function display unit 1400) located outside the main control board 1310 on the display unit (base display unit 1317) and the circuits of the main control board 1310.

Figure 97 shows the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in Figure 93(B), this is a circuit diagram illustrating an example where the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. The main control I/O port 1314 is positioned between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display unit 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display unit 1317 or function display unit 1400.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the differences from the configuration example shown in Figure 96 will be explained below.

In the example shown in Figure 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base indicator 1317 is the same as in the example shown in Figure 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is shared with the base indicator 1317.

To illuminate the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, at the rising edge of CS2, the bus data D1 to D8, which has been captured by latch 3 (1333), is output by driver 3 (1334) as segment data (LOW when illuminated). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). Specifically, at the rising edge of CS0, the bus data D1 to D4, which has been captured by latch 1 (1333), is output by driver 1 (1334) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by sharing the driver circuit between the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit size can be reduced. Reducing the number of components lowers the failure rate, allows for a smaller board size, and facilitates miniaturization of the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320). In pachinko machines, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (a printed circuit board with three or more layers), but rather a two-layer board with patterns only on the front and back surfaces. Therefore, even if components can be physically placed on the two-layer main control board 1310, there is insufficient space to route wiring patterns, making the board larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Thus, miniaturization through a reduction in the number of components is crucial.

Figure 98 is a timing diagram for an example configuration of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in Figure 97. In Figure 98, the dotted lines perpendicular to the time axis indicate the boundaries of timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

Within the timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333), selected by CS0, receives D1-D4 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) outputs common data (HIGH when driven) corresponding to the digit indicated by D1-D4.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data for the segment to be lit on the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333), selected by CS2, receives D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS2. The driver 3 (1334) outputs the segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8, illuminating the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data for the segment to be lit on the base indicator 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333), selected by CS1, receives D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS1. The driver 2 (1334) outputs the segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8, illuminating the 7-segment LED on the base indicator 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. This clears the digit selection data set in latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in latches 2 and 3 (1333), causing the 7-segment LED to turn off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the process described above to output the digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share a common driver circuit on the common side, outputting segment data in time division, and using the common common data, the LED elements of the base display unit 1317 and the function display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in Figures 93(B) and 97, the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334. This reduces the circuit size of the main control board 1310 and facilitates component mounting on the main control board 1310, where high-density mounting (e.g., the use of multilayer boards or close placement of components) is not possible.

Furthermore, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 using common data within a single timer interrupt process, segment data is output to the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 at different timings during the period in which the common data is output. Therefore, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 can be controlled by a common common data line, while both can be displayed and controlled within a single timer interrupt process.

In the case shown in Figure 98, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data for the base display unit 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising edge timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising edge timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data for the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 becomes longer than the display time of the base display unit 1317. This is to increase the illumination time of the LEDs in the function display unit 1400, which is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in one cycle and increase the brightness, thereby preventing a decrease in visibility due to direct illumination by the hall's lighting. Also, since the base display unit 1317 is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, which is darker than the front side, even if the LEDs are made to emit light at low brightness, the impact on the visibility of the base display unit 1317 is small. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a first LED and a second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311, and the luminescence of the first LED is set to be higher than that of the second LED.

Alternatively, the display data for the base display unit 1317 may be output first, followed by the display data for the function display unit 1400, making the display time of the base display unit 1317 longer than the display time of the function display unit 1400.

Figure 99 shows the changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

In this embodiment, the base display unit 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 displays a provisional interval display and a confirmed interval display, switching between them at predetermined time intervals (e.g., 5 seconds). The provisional interval display shows the base value of the currently measured interval. Specifically, the upper two digits display "bA." to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the lower two digits display the currently measured base value A as a two-digit percentage. If the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed; if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed; and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even though the base display unit 1317 has only two display digits, it can display whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

Furthermore, in the provisional interval display, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000), the top two digits (or all four digits) will flash (for example, with a cycle of 0.6 seconds, alternating between 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. Conversely, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (e.g., 6000), the top two digits will light up, indicating that the accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, the upper two digits are illuminated with "bb." to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the lower two digits are illuminated with the base value of the previous interval (the final value of the lower two digits of the previous period, which is base value B) as a two-digit percentage. If the integer part of the percentage of base value B is 99, "99" is displayed; if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed; and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even though the base indicator 1317 has only two display digits, it is possible to display whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

Note that in the first section, the previous section was a test section, so the base value was not measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." will flash in the first two digits and "--" will flash in the last two digits.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the period from the initial power-on to a predetermined number of balls (for example, 256 balls) where the number of balls dispensed is less than 500 is designated as a test section, and the base value is not calculated. This is because, during the initial power-on of the pachinko machine 1 and the predetermined number of shots, the number of balls dispensed may vary within the range of the probability distribution, making it impossible to stabilize the base value and measure a meaningful base value. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base indicator 1317, and the base value is considered undefined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits and "--" in the lower digit, and in the confirmed section display, "bb." is displayed in the upper two digits and "--" in the lower digit. In the test section, all digits of the base indicator 1317 are flashed to indicate that an accurate base value has not been measured. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated even in the test section, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base indicator 1317, thus remaining undefined.

Here, "initial power-on" refers to the first power-on after the completion of the pachinko machine (item 1), or the state immediately after the initialization of the base calculation work area (S26 in Figure 101, S8013 in Figure 108). Furthermore, "power-on" as generally used in this specification refers to any power-on other than the initial power-on.

Furthermore, all LEDs on all digits of the base display 1317 may blink for a predetermined time after power-on, or for a predetermined time after the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (from the OFF operation of setting key 971).

Furthermore, if an anomaly is detected in the data of the base calculation area 13128 (described later) and the data is deleted, the calculation of the base value will resume from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of balls out across all game states (jackpot, normal gameplay, time-saving mode, non-time-saving mode, high probability mode, low probability mode, etc.) reaches 52,000, the system switches to the next section and measures the base value anew. Note that the number of balls out in one section is not limited to 52,000; any predetermined value is acceptable. For example, assuming a daily operating time of 10 hours for pachinko machine 1, the number of balls out in one section could be set to 60,000, which is the daily operating time (number of balls out). Alternatively, round numbers such as 50,000 or 100,000 could also be used.

Furthermore, the configuration may allow the number of balls out per section to be changed as needed. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of balls out per section may be set according to the setting of the switch. This switch may be provided on the main control board 1310 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Additionally, changing the setting of this switch may initialize the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) of the RAM 1312, restarting the calculation of the base value from the test section, or restarting from the beginning of the current section. Since pachinko machines are heavily used immediately after being introduced as new machines, the number of balls out per section is set to a large number, and after the operating period has elapsed, the number of balls out per section is set to a smaller number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means that allows setting the operation that determines the length of the section, which is the unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is first turned on, the length of one section is set based on the operation set by this setting means.

The following example demonstrates displaying the section immediately preceding the currently measured provisional section as a confirmed section display. However, it is also possible to switch between and displaying the base values of multiple confirmed sections (for example, sections 1 to 3 sections prior). In this case, the display can be switched between provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → confirmed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, or it can be switched between provisional section → confirmed section 1 → confirmed section 2 → confirmed section 3 by operating a separate display switching switch.

In this case, instead of displaying "bb.", the first two digits of the base indicator 1317 in the confirmed interval display should be displayed differently for each confirmed interval, such as "b1," "b2," and "b3," so that the displayed interval can be identified.

In this manner, the base display 1317 displays the base value of the currently measured section and the base value of one or more previous sections, switching between them at predetermined intervals. Furthermore, a portion of the base display 1317 displays information that can be distinguished, while another portion displays the measured base value.

Figure 100 shows an example of characters displayed on the base display unit 1317.

As mentioned above, the base display 1317 is composed of a multi-digit (e.g., 4-digit) 7-segment LED, and displays numbers and letters by lighting or flashing each digit segment. It can display numbers from 0 to 9, and letters such as A, b, c, d, E, F, L, and the minus sign. Furthermore, it can display decimal points simultaneously with numbers and letters. The diagram illustrates the cases where the number 6 and the number 9 are displayed simultaneously with the decimal point.

Figures 101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process for a pachinko machine in this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in Figures 101 and 102 is different from the initialization process described in Figures 21 and 22, as the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are omitted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code for the base calculation area is performed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same steps as in the initialization process described in Figures 21 and 22, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, making it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and determines whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start up) has elapsed (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch has been operated, the data in the areas of the built-in RAM 1312's work area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) that are backed up (step S30), and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power outage is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, there is a risk that the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, a check code is used to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are several cases in which at least a portion of the RAM 1312 is initialized: operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), a power outage flag abnormality where the power outage flag is not set (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and a base calculation work abnormality (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, if the RAM clear switch operation is detected when the power is turned on, or in the case of a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) is cleared, but the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Furthermore, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Contrary to the diagram, in the case of a power outage flag anomaly, RAM anomaly, or base calculation work anomaly, the validity of the data stored in RAM 1312 cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, the entire RAM area, including the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128, may be cleared. If clearing the entire RAM area in the case of a base calculation work anomaly results in the loss of data indicating the game state, making normal processing impossible, then only the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area should be initialized. Furthermore, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) should be cleared, as described above, but the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be cleared.

Furthermore, when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, it is advisable to first check the main area using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, then check backup areas 1, 2, and N in that order, and copy the data of the first backup area determined to be normal to the main area. Afterward, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 erases data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 under different conditions for each type of data (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128). That is, operating the RAM clear switch erases the backed-up game control area 13126, but not the backed-up base calculation area 13128. If the base calculation area 13128 could be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 could be erased at any time. Therefore, by preventing the backed-up base calculation area 13128 from being erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is possible to prevent the base calculation area 13128 from being erased by the operation of the game hall staff, thus preventing the concealment of abnormal base values. This allows for reliable detection of game machines that have been modified to have high or low base values.

When the RAM work area is powered back on or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs initial setup processing (step S28) to set various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111), and power-on command setting processing (step S32) to send to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby enabling the execution of interrupt processing, including timer interrupt processing (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal (step S36) and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON or OFF (step S38). If the power outage warning signal is NOT ON (result of step S38 is "No"), it executes random number update processing (step S40).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power outage processing (power outage setting means). In power outage processing, first, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of devices controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the backup work area has been properly retained (step S46), and stores the checksum calculation result in the checksum area of RAM 1312 (step S48).

Next, the data from the main area of the base calculation workpiece (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. Backup may be performed as appropriate during the base calculation process (for example, each time the data is updated), rather than during the main board power-off processing. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value, along with the calculated (or predetermined) check code, in the backup area, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be retained even when the power is cut off, allowing for the calculation of the base value during long-term operation.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (Figure 106) of the base calculation process. In the modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (Figure 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating successful backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56), and writing to RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop).

Figure 103 shows the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, where the area for calculating the payout ratio shown in Figure 26(A) is replaced.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a portion of the RAM 1312 and, as mentioned above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for base value A, base value B, interval counter, total number of outs, number of low-probability/non-time-saving outs, and number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls.

The storage area for base value A consists of 1 byte and stores the base value of the currently measured provisional interval. The storage area for base value B consists of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the interval immediately preceding the provisional interval. The storage area for the interval counter consists of 1 byte and stores a value indicating the interval in which the base value is currently being measured. The interval counter is updated each time the interval is switched and is used to control the display content which differs depending on the interval. It is preferable to control the interval counter to a value of 0, 1, or 2, i.e., not greater than 2. Specifically, in the test interval, the interval counter = 0; in the first interval, the interval counter = 1; and from the second interval onward, the interval counter = 2. Alternatively, the interval counter may be controlled to a value between 0 and 255, not greater than 255, so from the second interval onward, the interval counter = 2 or greater.

The storage area for the total number of outs consists of two bytes and stores all outs regardless of the game state (i.e., a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of outs is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the base measurement unit. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, approximately one day of operation is considered one interval, and the base value in each interval is measured. Therefore, two bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of outs. As mentioned above, the total number of outs is a storage area for counting all outs regardless of the game state for each interval, and is different from the total number of outs in the embodiment described above (the sum of outs during special prizes from the start of operation of pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for low-probability, non-time-saving out ball counts consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of out balls (number of out balls in game states other than during special prize rounds) for calculating the base value. The storage area for low-probability, non-time-saving prize ball counts consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of prize balls (number of prize balls in game states other than during special prize rounds) for calculating the base value. While the storage areas for low-probability, non-time-saving out ball counts and low-probability, non-time-saving prize ball counts only need to be 2 bytes or more, it is preferable to use the same number of bytes considering the base value calculation process.

The storage capacity (in bytes) of each storage area mentioned above is merely an example; it should be determined according to the number of outs in a single section.

Furthermore, when providing a main area and a backup area for the base calculation area 13128, a storage area with the same configuration is provided in RAM 1312.

Figure 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing for a pachinko machine in this embodiment.

The timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 104 differs from the timer interrupt processing described in Figure 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is added instead of the bonus ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the bonus ratio calculation and display process in step S89 is deleted. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described in Figure 23, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first setting the RBS (Register Bank Selection Flag) in the program status word to 1, and then switching the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, updates the base calculation area 13128 (see Figure 103) of the main control's built-in RAM 1312, and calculates the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later using Figures 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is best to execute it in an earlier order to ensure reliable execution with each timer interrupt.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following: frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S86), normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control processing (step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Lastly, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns to) the register bank. Once these processes are complete, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the system returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Thus, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the base value is measured using timer interrupt processing, allowing for real-time measurement of the base value during gameplay.

Figures 105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as mentioned above, if there is a malfunction in the prize entry sensor (general prize entry sensor 3015, first start entry sensor 2104, second start entry sensor 2551, first large prize entry sensor 2114, second upper large prize entry sensor 2554, second lower large prize entry sensor 2557, etc.) or the ball discharge sensor (board-side ball discharge sensor 3060A, frame-side ball discharge sensor 3060B), the MPU determines that there is an error that prevents the accurate calculation of the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is taking place (for example, if the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), it is determined that there is an error that prevents the accurate calculation of the base value. If this error is determined to exist, the display on the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, errors that cause the game to stop (e.g., magnetic, vibration, radio wave errors, etc.) may be determined as errors (YES), while errors that do not cause the game to stop (e.g., abnormal prize payouts, open doors, etc.) or malfunctions not directly related to the base calculation (e.g., running out of supplies, full tank errors, etc.) may be determined as not errors (NO). In other words, even if some of the multiple types of abnormal conditions are present, the base calculation process may be executed; however, if other abnormalities are present, the base calculation process may not be executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As mentioned earlier, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020 and the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc. In the switch input processing of step S74, the detection signals from these sensors are read, and if a detection signal is found, the number of out balls = 1 is acquired. If out balls are detected by multiple ejected ball sensors 3060, the sum of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. In other words, multiple out balls may be detected in a single timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As mentioned above, the number of prize balls is obtained from the prize ball control process in step S80, based on the input information. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls for which a payout has been decided. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a previously created payout command. It may also be the number of prize balls corresponding to a previously transmitted payout command. Furthermore, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to a payout command that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and for which a receipt confirmation (ACK) has been received from the payout control board 951. Finally, it may also be the number of prize balls (number of prize balls already paid) that the main control board 1310 has sent to the payout control board 951 and for which a payout completion report has been received from the payout control board 951. These variations are explained using Figures 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S8014 whether an out ball has been detected (step S8016). If no out ball has been detected, the process related to out balls is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if an out ball has been detected, the number of detected out balls is added to the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine if it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a predetermined section from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or the initialization of the base calculation area 13128) where the number of balls out is less than 500, and the value of the section counter is the initial value of 0. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current game state is during a special prize (step S8019). The determination of whether it is during a special prize can be made in the same way as in step S810 of Figure 39 described above. The game state being during a special prize means that the large prize winning holes 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot, and the player can win many prize balls during this time, but the opening and ending times of the jackpot game may also be included. If the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 repeatedly open and close during a single jackpot, the time between the closing and reopening of the large prize slots (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means the time while the conditional device is operating, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbols in the special symbol variation display game until the end of the ending sequence. It may also include all the time during the right-hand shooting instruction.

Furthermore, in the case of starting gates 2002 and 2004, the periods during time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode may be included in the special prize period. Additionally, in game states other than time-saving mode, probability variation mode (ST mode), and electric support mode, the period from the opening of starting gate 2004 to a predetermined time after closing (for example, the few seconds required for a ball that entered the starting gate to be detected as an out ball) may be included in the special prize period. Note that the so-called "latent game state," which is a high-probability game state but not time-saving mode (electric support mode), may not be included in the special prize period. Instead, the base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls in that game state, similar to the normal state (low probability, non-time-saving state). In this case, the base value may be calculated separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed in a way that allows identification of which base value is being displayed.

While a latent game state is a high-probability state, the player is not aware of it. However, if the latent game state is excluded from the base value calculation, a player might recognize the latent game state (i.e., high probability) by looking at the base indicator 1317 when the frame is opened during business hours. In other words, when the frame is open and a hall employee places balls into the prize slot or sends balls into the output slot, the player can determine the game state by whether the base indicator changes. This problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state.

On the other hand, in the course of operating a pachinko parlor, it may be necessary to manage the base value in low-probability, non-time-saving states. Calculating the base value including the latent game state may make it impossible to manage according to the parlor's operating style. This problem can be avoided by excluding the latent game state from the calculation of the base value. Similarly, the same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for normal game states and latent game states. This is because normal game states and latent game states are fundamentally different game states, and depending on the parlor's operating style, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state.

Furthermore, when calculating base values separately for normal gameplay and latent gameplay, the base values may be calculated using either a dedicated calculation process for each gameplay state or a common calculation process. Using a common calculation process reduces the CPU processing load and thus the program size.

The electrically operated mechanisms provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize period for the large prize openings 2005 and 2006 is the period when the condition device is in operation (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol in the special symbol variation display game until the end of the ending), and the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize period, so normal (so-called jackpot) entries into the large prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for the start opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) which has an opening and closing member, the number of prize balls and prize balls that enter the opening other than during the special prize period (when the probability is low or when the time is not shortened) are used in the calculation of the base value. In other words, among the electrically operated mechanisms, some mechanisms (large prize slots 2005 and 2006) do not use the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls awarded in the calculation of the base value, regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded). Other mechanisms (start slot 2004) switch whether or not the number of balls entered and the number of prize balls awarded are used in the calculation of the base value depending on the game state (whether or not a special prize is being awarded).

Furthermore, the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 may open even when the conditional device is not activated (as a so-called minor win). Generally, minor wins occur during the time-saving mode, and because the opening is short-lived, the probability of game balls entering is low, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, minor wins may occur outside of the special prize mode (during normal play), and the slots may be opened only for the time when the probability of game balls entering is high. In this case, the game balls that enter the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 during minor wins occurring outside of the special prize mode, as well as the prize balls awarded, may be used in the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of minor wins occurring outside of the special prize mode. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the base value standard, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom.

If the game state is during a special prize, the out ball is not relevant to the calculation of the base value, so the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S8022. On the other hand, if the game state is not during a special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used in the base calculation, so the number of detected out balls is added to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time an out ball or prize ball other than during a special prize is detected during the execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), indicating when the base value should be calculated (see steps S8026 to S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S8015 whether a prize ball has been detected (step S8022). If no prize ball has been detected, the process related to the prize ball is not executed, and the system proceeds to step S8026. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, the system determines whether the current game state is during a special prize round (step S8023). The determination of whether a special prize round is in progress is the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not relevant to the base value calculation, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count. On the other hand, if the game state is not during a special prize, the prize ball count detected in step S8015 should be used in the base calculation, so the detected prize ball count is added to the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, then in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), an out ball or prize ball other than a special prize ball has been detected. Therefore, the base value is calculated by dividing the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls by the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls, and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the interval counter to determine if it is in a test interval (step S8028). If the interval counter value is 0, indicating it is a test interval, it determines whether it is time to end the test interval (step S8029). The test interval is the interval from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128) until the number of balls out is less than 500 (a predetermined value). If the interval counter indicates it is a test interval and the total number of balls out is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test interval.

As a result, unless it is the time to end the test section, the system proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is within the test section and it is the time to end the test section, the system proceeds to step S8032 to transition from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0, representing the test section, to 1, representing the first section. Then, the total number of outs, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving outs, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). This process ends the test section and transitions to the first section.

On the other hand, if in step S8028 the interval counter value is not 0 and it is determined that the test interval is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of outs is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of outs is less than 52,000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current interval.

On the other hand, if the total number of outs is 52,000 or more, the current section ends, and the process to start a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes it to the base value B storage area (step S8031). Then, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As mentioned above, the section counter is controlled so that it does not become greater than 2, i.e., it is limited to one of the values 0, 1, or 2. Therefore, if the section counter value is 2, adding 1 to the section counter does not increase the section counter value, and it remains at 2. Then, the total number of outs, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving outs, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the system moves to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is set to 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is set to 1, it generates data for displaying the newly calculated base value (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later using Figure 107. Afterward, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display, as explained in Figure 99, at predetermined time intervals (e.g., 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display should be sufficiently longer than the period of the flashing display (the flashing display controlled in step S8051 of Figure 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. This is because if the flashing and display switching periods are similar, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the flashing display (i.e., whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) and makes it clearer whether it is a flashing display or a display switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (e.g., a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The method for calculating the check code is the same as the method used to calculate the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (Figure 22). If a fixed value is used instead of calculating a check code, it is preferable to use a multi-byte value where adjacent bits of the check code are not equivalent (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it could be A55AH (1010010101011010B)). Furthermore, fixed values may be placed separately rather than in consecutive areas. For example, the first fixed value could be stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value in the middle, and the third fixed value at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to use a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the probability of detecting RAM abnormalities.

As described above, the base calculation process in this embodiment calculates and displays the base value for each timer interrupt process. Therefore, the base value can be displayed without delay (in real time) at the timing of each prize ball occurrence and each out ball occurrence, allowing for immediate determination of whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Furthermore, since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is the memory area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, calculating a check code at the end of each execution of the base calculation process has little impact on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311.

Furthermore, regarding prize balls, if the base value is calculated and displayed using the planned number of prize balls to be dispensed based on the generated prize ball signal, the timing of the calculation and display of the base value differs from the timing of the prize balls being dispensed. That is, even if a malfunction occurs in the dispensing device and prize balls are not dispensed (e.g., running out of balls, the upper tray being full, a malfunction of the dispenser count sensor in the prize ball passage, or a stoppage of the dispensing device due to a malfunction of the dispensing motor), the base value will still be calculated and displayed.

In the base calculation process described above, the base value was calculated using the number of balls out and the number of prize balls calculated in the timer interrupt process each time the base calculation process was called from the timer interrupt process. However, the base value may also be calculated each time the ball ejection sensor 3060 detects a ball out, and each time the various prize entry sensors detect a prize ball. That is, in a single timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing of the section switch (52,000 balls out) occurs within a single base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section's base value to use for calculation, and an accurate base value can be displayed in real time.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (Figure 46) described above, it may be determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls. If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Additionally, as shown in steps S824 to S825, it may be determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. If the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command may be generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is less than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt processing described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, since the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, the processes in steps S8042 to S8045 are executed when the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the processes in steps S8046 to S8049 are executed when the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is less than 1250, data is generated to display "bA." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 (step S8042). Then, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine if it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data is generated to display "--" in the lower two digits (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data is generated to display the currently measured base value A in the provisional section (step S8045).

In step S8041, if the display switching counter is determined to be 1250 or higher, data is generated to display "bb." in the upper two digits of the base display 1317 (step S8046). Then, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether the current state is a test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in past confirmed sections during the test section or the first section, data is generated to display "--" in the lower two digits (step S8048). On the other hand, if the current state is neither a test section nor the first section, data is generated to display the base value B measured in the most recent confirmed section (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000 (step S8050). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000, the base value may not be stable because the number of plays (out balls) since the start of base value measurement in that section is small, and the display of the base indicator 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base indicator 1317 is controlled to remain lit instead of blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or greater (step S8053). If the display switching counter is less than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized, and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or greater, one iteration has finished, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern with the generated display data and the specified lighting mode (on or flashing) (step S8055).

In this way, by switching the display content on the base indicator 1317 using a periodically updated display switching counter in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) that is executed at predetermined intervals, the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed section can be clearly displayed.

Furthermore, since the indicator flashes when the base value is unstable in each section, it is easy to confirm whether the base value is in a stable or unstable range by looking at the display on the base indicator 1317.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing a modified version of the base calculation process. The modified version shown in Figure 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in Figure 105, except that a check process for the base calculation workpiece (steps S8012 and S8013) has been added. Note that Figure 108 explains the base calculation process up to the calculation of base value A (step S8027), but the processing from steps S8028 to S8038 is the same as in Figure 106 described above.

The main control unit (MPU) 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 uses a check code to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) is functioning correctly (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S8013).

Furthermore, when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, it is advisable to first check the main area using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, then check backup areas 1, 2, and N in that order, and copy the data of the first backup area determined to be normal to the main area. Afterward, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained.

In the illustrated example, the process first determines whether there is an error in the base value calculation (step S8011), and then determines whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). Alternatively, the process could be reversed: first, determine whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012), perform the necessary processing based on the determination result, and then determine whether there is an error in the base value calculation (step S8011).

The subsequent processes (steps S8014 onwards) are the same as those shown in Figures 105 and 106, so their explanations will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in Figure 108, the data in the base calculation area 13128 is checked for normality with each timer interrupt (i.e., every 4 milliseconds). Therefore, abnormalities in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected early, and the display of abnormal base values can be suppressed.

Next, the method for determining abnormalities in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be explained. The values used to calculate the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "payout ratio calculation area 13128" shown in Figure 26 should be read as "base calculation area 13128"), and it is determined at a predetermined timing whether the data is normal or abnormal. There are the following variations in the timing at which this normal/abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
Figures 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt processing) is checked when the power is turned on.
Figures 21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is shut off is checked when the power is turned on (initialization process).
Figures 106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is judged in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where a check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and checked when the power is turned on.)
First, using Figures 101 and 106, we will explain the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt processing) when the power is turned on.

Assuming the initialization process is as shown in Figures 101 and 102, and the base calculation process is as shown in Figures 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (Figures 105 and 106), a check code (e.g., a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (Figures 101 and 102), a check code is used to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

If the data in base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state for base value calculation is reset. Therefore, the calculated base value is cleared, and base value calculation starts from the test period.

Furthermore, if one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area may first be checked using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1, 2, and N may be checked in that order. The data from the backup area determined to be normal first may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. Afterward, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup areas may be deleted or retained.

In this case, the frequency of check code evaluation is reduced, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) used for abnormality detection can be decreased.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is cut off and judged when the power is turned on.)
Next, using Figures 21 and 22, we will explain the process of determining the check code calculated when the power is shut off, when the power is turned on (initialization process).

Assuming the initialization process is as shown in Figures 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is as shown in Figures 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing during the initialization process (Figures 21 and 22), a check code (e.g., a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128).

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (Figures 21 and 22), a check code is used to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is erased (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculating and determining the check code is reduced, thereby lowering the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality detection.

(A case where the check code is calculated and judged using a timer interrupt.)
Next, using Figures 106 and 108, we will explain the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) using the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

Assuming the base calculation process is as shown in Figures 108 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (Figures 108 and 106), a check code (e.g., a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Furthermore, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (Figures 108 and 106), a check code is used to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is as shown in Figures 101 and 102, and the steps S24 and S26, which determine whether the base calculation work area is normal, may be omitted.

In this case, compared to the previously described case, anomalies in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly.

Furthermore, when using a fixed value instead of a checksum as the check code, the timing of setting and determining the check code can be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Alternatively, both checksums and fixed values may be used in combination as the check code.

Figure 109 shows the calculation of the base value when the game state changes.

While the starting gate 2004 (electric tulip) is open, one game ball enters it, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ends, the time-saving state ends, and the machine returns to the normal state. Then, in the normal state, we consider the case where another game ball enters the open starting gate 2004.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display unit in accordance with the entry into the starting slot 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is displayed in relation to any entry into the starting slot 2004, as shown in the figure.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the balls that are out during the special prize are not used in the base calculation, the first ball that enters the starting opening 2004 is not added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count, while the second ball that enters is added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count.

The above explanation focused on the end of the time-saving mode, but the same applies to the end of the probability variation mode during ST (Special Time).

In addition to the aforementioned phenomenon occurring at the end of the time-saving state, the same phenomenon also occurs when a jackpot is won in the special symbol variation display game. Let's consider a scenario where, in the normal state, one game ball enters the starting gate 2004 (electric tulip) while it is open, then the jackpot state begins, and another game ball enters the open starting gate 2004.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol changes in relation to each entry into starting gate 2004. However, since the balls that are out during the special prize are not used in the base calculation, the first ball that enters starting gate 2004 is added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count, but the second ball that enters is not added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. Let's consider a scenario where, under normal conditions, one game ball enters the starting opening 2004 (electric tulip) while it is open, then a specific error occurs, and another game ball enters the open starting opening 2004. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when an abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331 determines that there is an error preventing the accurate calculation of the base value), the out-of-bounds balls are not used in the base calculation.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol changes in relation to any entry into starting gate 2004. On the other hand, since out balls during specific errors are not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball into starting gate 2004 is added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is not added to the low-probability, non-time-saving out ball count.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, under certain conditions (such as the end of the time-saving feature, the occurrence of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game, or the occurrence of a specific error), multiple game balls that enter the machine while the electric mechanism is operating may or may not be used in calculating the base value, and in either case, the variation of the special symbol can be initiated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, regarding the pre-announcement effect for the special symbol variation display game while the ball is in reserve, the first ball entering the starting gate 2004 in the time-saving state may not be subject to the pre-announcement effect, while the second ball entering in the normal state may be subject to the pre-announcement effect. Conversely, the first ball entering the starting gate 2004 in the time-saving state may be subject to the pre-announcement effect, while the second ball entering in the normal state may not be subject to the pre-announcement effect.

The timing for transitioning from the shortened time state to the normal state has been explained, but the same applies to the timing for transitioning from the probability variation state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching during processing outside the game control area]
Next, we will explain how the CPU switches memory used in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing).

Figure 110 shows the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311, specifically the memory area configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in Figure 18, but Figure 110 shows the configuration related to the memory area in detail.

The main control MPU 1311 is equipped with RAM 1312, ROM 1313, and an internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 as data storage areas. The internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 primarily temporarily stores data during program execution by the CPU 13111 (e.g., flags representing the state of calculation results, program execution status, data input/output to the CPU 13111, etc.). The internal CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 also temporarily stores, for example, random values updated during the random number update process (step S40 in Figure 22) and intermediate values in the random number update calculation. Furthermore, it temporarily stores the addresses of subroutines to be executed and jump destination addresses, allowing the processor core 13141 to execute the processing corresponding to the stored addresses. Additionally, it temporarily stores values input to ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (e.g., intermediate values used to create edge information for signals input from switches, and edge information detection results).

Furthermore, when acquiring a random number upon entry into the starting slot and storing it in the reserve memory area, the random value is temporarily stored in the CPU's auxiliary memory unit 13142, and the temporarily stored random value is then stored in the RAM 1312's reserve memory area. Additionally, when acquiring a random number upon entry into the starting slot and performing a pre-read judgment (win/loss judgment upon entry into the starting slot) based on the value of this random number, the pre-read judgment may be performed based on the random value temporarily stored in the CPU's auxiliary memory unit 13142, or the random value stored in the reserve memory area may be (re)read into any memory area of the CPU's auxiliary memory unit 13142 to perform the pre-read judgment.

The CPU's internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space specified by addresses, which is composed of RAM 1312 and ROM 1313, and is identified by the name of each storage area included in the CPU's internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 (e.g., Area0). The CPU's internal auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C.

The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C are composed of multiple storage areas (Area 0 to 6) of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes). Groups are formed for each predetermined number of storage areas (7 in the diagram), and each group is accessible from the processor core 13141. That is, when auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can only access auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of this auxiliary storage area 13145 allows for the simultaneous switching of multiple storage areas for each group with a single CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0, and the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 is switched to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but it can consist of two or more groups. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 (Area 0 to 5) is a separate storage area from RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data during program execution. It can be used individually (1 byte = 8 bits) or in sets of multiple areas (for example, Area 0 and Area 1 as a pair, totaling 2 bytes = 16 bits). Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating excess capacity in the storage area. Furthermore, the storage area (Area 6) is set to be used as a storage area with a capacity that is an integer multiple of the other storage areas (for example, 2 bytes), and cannot be divided into 1-byte storage areas. In this way, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of storage areas of multiple capacities, and storage areas that can be used in any combination are provided, so that the storage areas can be used differently depending on the application in arithmetic processing (for example, data length). For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be specified using one (or a combined set of) storage areas. Therefore, the number of instruction arguments can be reduced, and instructions can be executed in fewer clock cycles.

The switching unit 13143 switches the group of memory areas that the processor core 13141 can access, according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a memory area that stores data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that the processor core 13141 can access regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 may store, for example, data for identifying the selected auxiliary storage area 13145 (e.g., 2-bit data for switching between 4 areas), an error flag indicating that the switching was not performed correctly (if the error flag is set, the switching instruction will be executed again), and an unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs, such as a change in the value of an unselected auxiliary storage area 13145.

Furthermore, the switching register 13144 may store flags indicating the state of the calculation result (e.g., carry flag, parity/overflow flag, zero flag, sign flag, etc.).

In addition to the switching register 13144, a memory area accessible by the processor core 13141 without being selected in the auxiliary memory area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address where the program is currently executing, and a stack pointer indicating the starting address of the stack area in RAM 1312 may be provided.

Figure 111 shows an example of a program for timer interrupt handling and base calculation handling, illustrating a specific example of the part where the timer interrupt handling calls the base calculation handling and returns from the base calculation handling.

In the timer interrupt handling (Figure 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801. However, before proceeding to the base calculation process, the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction. This allows the base calculation process to be performed without interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction.

Subsequently, the PUSH instruction saves the data from the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see Figure 113). Then, the CALL instruction executes the program from the starting address xxxx of the base calculation process.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in Figures 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0, used by the calling timer interrupt process, to group 1, used by the called base calculation process. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with a single CHANGE instruction, and multiple storage areas can be switched simultaneously with a single instruction (i.e., fewer steps).

Furthermore, the LD instruction writes the stack pointer value currently used by the timer interrupt handler to an arbitrary address in RAM 1312 (for example, zzzz), thereby saving the stack pointer value. Then, the LD instruction writes the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer, modifying the stack area.

After preparations for executing the base calculation process are complete, the process is executed from step S8011 in Figure 105 or Figure 108. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in Figure 106), the LD instruction restores the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process from address zzz in RAM 1312. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1, which is used in the called base calculation process, to group 0, which is used in the calling timer interrupt process, and then the RET instruction returns to the calling timer interrupt process. Generally, the instruction to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction to restore data saved on the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched by returning the data saved on the stack to the switching register 13144. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 using the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed; however, it is also possible to reliably switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction.

Thus, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

Subsequently, upon returning from the base calculation process, the POP instruction restores the data from the switching register 13144, which was saved in the game control stack area 13137, back into the switching register 13144. Note that saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144 may be done using other instructions (e.g., data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

Subsequently, after enabling the interrupt with the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing continues, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated with RETI, returning to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in Figure 21).

Alternatively, interrupts may be disabled at the beginning of the timer interrupt handler using the DI instruction, and enabled at the end of the timer interrupt handler using the EI instruction. Furthermore, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, the interrupt enable flag can be directly manipulated to disable interrupts when the timer interrupt handler starts and enable them at the timing of the RETI instruction execution.

Furthermore, since timer interrupt handling is inherently performed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt handling process itself. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts to set the state to interrupt disabled when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be maintained until the end of the timer interrupt handling process, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt handling process, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the example described above, the saving of the switching register 13144 was performed in the caller's timer interrupt processing, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area was performed in the called system's base calculation processing. However, these three processes only need to be performed in either the caller or the called system when processing moves outside the game control area and when processing returns to the game control area. Figure 112 illustrates an example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the caller's timer interrupt processing.

Figure 112 shows another example of a timer interrupt handling and base calculation processing program, illustrating a specific example of the part where the timer interrupt handling calls the base calculation processing and returns from the base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt handling (Figure 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801. However, before proceeding to the base calculation process, the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction. An interrupt between the DI instruction and the EI instruction allows the base calculation process to be performed without interruption.

Subsequently, the PUSH instruction saves the data from the switching register 13144 to the game control stack area 13137 (see Figure 113). Then, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0, used for the caller's timer interrupt processing, to group 1, used for the called base calculation processing. In this way, multiple storage areas can be switched group by group with a single CHANGE instruction, and multiple storage areas can be switched simultaneously with a single instruction (i.e., fewer steps).

Subsequently, the program is executed from the starting address xxxx of the base calculation process via the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the processes shown in Figures 105 to 108, the stack pointer value currently used by the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address in RAM 1312 (for example, zzzz) using the LD instruction, thereby saving the stack pointer value. Then, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer using the LD instruction, thereby changing the stack area.

After preparations for executing the base calculation process are complete, the process is executed from step S8011 in Figure 105 or Figure 108. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in Figure 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt processing is recovered from address zzz in RAM 1312 using the LD instruction.

Subsequently, upon returning from the base calculation process, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 1, used by the called base calculation process, to group 0, used by the calling timer interrupt process. The POP instruction then restores the data from the switching register 13144, which was saved in the game control stack area 13137, back into the switching register 13144. Note that saving and restoring the data in the switching register 13144 may be done using other instructions (e.g., data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) instead of the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

As mentioned above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to its state before the base calculation process was called when the switching register 13144 returns to its original state, so it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction. However, it is also preferable to reliably switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 using the CHANGE instruction.

Subsequently, after enabling the interrupt with the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing continues, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated with RETI, returning to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in Figure 21).

As mentioned above, interrupts may be disabled at the beginning of the timer interrupt handler using the DI instruction, and enabled at the end of the timer interrupt handler using the EI instruction. Alternatively, instead of using the DI or EI instructions, the interrupt enable flag may be directly manipulated to disable interrupts when the timer interrupt handler starts and enable them at the timing of the RETI instruction execution.

Furthermore, since timer interrupt handling is inherently performed with interrupts disabled, there is no need to further disable or enable interrupts within the timer interrupt handling process itself. In the illustrated program example, the DI instruction disables interrupts to set the state to interrupt disabled when interrupts are enabled for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt disabled state should be maintained until the end of the timer interrupt handling process, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt handling process, not immediately after the POP instruction.

Figure 111 illustrates an example of switching between timer interrupt processing, base calculation processing, and auxiliary storage area 13145. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may also be switched during the test processing executed by the debug (test function) code 13133. In this case, it is advisable to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the test processing auxiliary storage area 13145 using a CHANGE instruction at the beginning of the debug (test function) code 13133. Furthermore, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched for initialization processing (steps S10 in Figure 21 to step S34 in Figure 22), main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in Figure 21), power-off processing (steps S42 to S58 in Figure 21), and timer interrupt processing (Figures 23, 75, 80, etc.), allowing different auxiliary storage areas 13145 to be used for each process.

Furthermore, if only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, the auxiliary storage areas 13145 can be switched between processes executed within the game control area (e.g., main control processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and processes executed outside the game control area (e.g., debug (inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc.), thereby using different auxiliary storage areas 13145 for processes inside and outside the game control area.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 will be used for both the main control processing and the timer interrupt processing. However, since the timer interrupt processing starts by interrupting the main control processing that is currently running, it is advisable to temporarily store the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of the timer interrupt processing (for example, at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing), and then return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145 at the end of the timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of the timer interrupt processing).

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has multiple (byte) storage areas, saving one unit (byte or word) at a time to the stack area increases the number of instructions required for saving. Similarly, the number of instructions required to recover data from the stack area also increases. Furthermore, if the order of processing between saving data to the stack area and recovering data from the stack area is incorrect, incorrect data may be read from the stack area, potentially leading to inaccurate subsequent processing. Therefore, this problem can be solved by providing instructions to save all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area simultaneously and to recover all of the multiple storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area simultaneously.

Furthermore, if all memory areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved to the stack area, the stack area may overflow, potentially overwriting data outside the area designated as the stack area (such as stack areas used for other purposes). Therefore, in addition to the instruction to save all memory areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area at once, it may be possible to provide and execute instructions to save multiple arbitrarily selected memory areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area at once, and instructions to restore those arbitrarily selected memory areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 that were saved to the stack area at once.

In this way, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the system switches to a different auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to processing within the game control area, it switches back to the original auxiliary storage area 13145. Therefore, processing can proceed without saving the data stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area).

Furthermore, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the switching register 13144 is saved to RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area), and when moving to processing within the game control area, the switching register 13144 is recovered from RAM 1312. Therefore, when moving to processing within the game control area, the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering it from RAM 1312.

Furthermore, when transitioning to processing outside the game control area, the system switches to a different stack area, and when transitioning to processing within the game control area, it switches back to the original stack area. Therefore, the stack area used for processing within the game control area is not updated during processing outside the game control area, allowing for complete separation of processing within and outside the game control area.

Furthermore, when transitioning to processing outside the game control area, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area), and when transitioning to processing within the game control area, the saved value is restored to the switching register 13144. Therefore, values related to the program execution results within the game control area are not updated during processing outside the game control area, allowing for complete separation of processing within and outside the game control area.

Figure 113(A) shows an example of the arrangement of programs (code) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. The memory arrangement shown in Figure 113 includes the stack area within the RAM 1312, which was omitted in the memory arrangement described in Figure 26. However, the RAM 1312 shown in Figure 26 also has a stack area.

ROM 1313 includes areas for storing game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, base calculation/display code 13135, and base calculation/display data 13136. In this embodiment, ROM 1313 is allocated a game control area (first memory area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1, such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132; a debug (inspection function) area (second memory area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) code 13133 and debug (inspection function) data 13134; and a base calculation area (third memory area) for storing programs used for calculating base values, such as base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136.

A free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the starting address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, so that the game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format. Similarly, a free area of a predetermined length (unused space) is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the starting address of the base calculation/display code 13135. It is desirable to set this predetermined length to 16 bytes or more so that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the free area should be a fixed value that is the same, and it is preferable that it be a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area, or a value that is used infrequently. Also, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction that does nothing to the CPU, such as a No Operation code. This approach makes it easy to distinguish between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area when displayed in dump list format.

Furthermore, the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area may not be separated; the base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area. In other words, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguishable. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data) and the base calculation area (base calculation/display code 13135 and base calculation/display data 13136), which are processes not directly related to the control of game progress, are placed separately from the game control area, thus avoiding the risk that a malfunction (bug, etc.) in the base calculation/display code 13135 could affect game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to gameplay. For example, it stores code 13133 for outputting various function inspection signals used only during debugging of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to controlling the gameplay of the pachinko machine 1. These debug (inspection function) codes 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. The base calculation area stores programs for calculating base values, which are not directly related to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. While the game control code 13131 can read from and write to the RAM 1312 as needed, the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 is configured so that only reading is possible from the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and writing to this area is not possible. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area accessible only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is executing, but the system is configured so that the debug (inspection function) code cannot call and execute the game control code 13131. This increases the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the changes to the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum.

Furthermore, the base calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the inspection of the base calculation/display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed separately, reducing the inspection effort of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the base calculation/display code 13135 can be used commonly across multiple models, regardless of the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is the area where data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and it is read-only and write-only. While data cannot be written to the game control area 13126 from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135, read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation/display code 13135 can access the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted; data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is where data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored. The base calculation area 13128 is accessible from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted; data writing is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is where data used by the game control code 13131 is stored. The debug stack area is where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The base calculation stack area 13138 is where data used by the base calculation/display code 13135 is stored. Each stack area is used exclusively to temporarily store data stored in the CPU's auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the starting address of the stack area.

Figure 113(B) shows the details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may include a main area where the base calculation result is stored, as well as backup area 1 and backup area 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. Each area is assigned a check code to detect data errors. The check code may be the checksum of the data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code may be set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set each time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation and display process, or set in the main control side power outage processing (steps S50 to S54 in Figure 22). In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code may be initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value may be set in the main control side power outage processing (step S50 in Figure 20). The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Furthermore, if a predetermined value is set for the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check codes for each area are correct (i.e., the data in each area is normal).

Furthermore, if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the system may determine whether the backup area is normal and, if the backup area is determined to be normal, copy the data from that backup area to the main area (step S24 in Figure 21). Also, during the main control power failure processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in Figure 22). Additionally, during the base calculation and display processing, the values of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation and display processing. At least when a portion of the main area is updated, it is sufficient to copy all of the main area or only the area containing the updated values to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in Figure 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1, and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the higher digits of the address.

[11. Recording of game history]
Next, we will describe an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records game history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among several prepared animations that match the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined animation on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific animation from among the several prepared animations (for example, two specific animations out of three types of super reach), it displays on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, along with the progress of the game, how many special symbol variation display games were played starting from the switch in the game state and how many times the specific animation appeared (in other words, on which spin the animation appeared).

Specifically, according to the game history shown in Figure 114, the following information will be displayed: Super Reach 1 appeared at 10:25 AM on the 34th spin, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a miss; Super Reach 2 appeared at 10:54 AM on the 127th spin, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a miss; and Super Reach 2 appeared at 11:30 AM on the 428th spin, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a guaranteed jackpot.

While the history of big wins (for example, a history showing a big win on the 15th spin and another on the 50th spin) can be viewed on the data display installed in the hall, the specific animations that appeared leading up to the big wins cannot be seen. Some players judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or poorly based on the frequency of specific animations (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 spins after a big win, they might think that a big win will occur in a short time). To meet the expectations of such players, the frequency of animation appearances should be displayed in a visible way. Also, since the game balls are not launched when the player is checking the frequency of animation appearances, displaying the frequency of appearances for all of the multiple animations available might increase the time players spend checking the frequency of each animation, potentially reducing the machine's usage. Therefore, it is best to display only specific reach animations (reach animations with a high expectation of a big win). Alternatively, the history of each animation appearance could be checked by operating a predetermined control means (such as operation button 220C).

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the displayed effects. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of variations and displayed effects based on the received variation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 220C) is operated, the system should display the number of variations required for a limited, specific effect to appear, rather than displaying all of the displayed effects.

Furthermore, if an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 while it is in operation, the pachinko machine 1 outputs error information to notify the hall staff. This notification can take the form of displaying the error screen shown in Figure 115(A) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or displaying the detailed error screen shown in Figure 115(B) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error, outputting an alarm sound, or outputting the error signal shown in Figure 116 from the external terminal board 784. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in Figures 117, 118, and 119. Errors occurring in the pachinko machine 1 are notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the hall staff can find out the cause. For example, a code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status indicator LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if there is a faulty cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, the status indicator LED included in the function display unit 1400 will display "0," and the LED in the middle right of the door will light up blue.

However, errors can occur due to a variety of causes, including minor malfunctions in the pachinko machine (e.g., a disconnected connector), serious malfunctions requiring parts replacement, or fraudulent activity.

When an error occurs in pachinko machine 1, the cause of the error must be investigated, and the machine must be restored to operation. Investigating the cause of the error requires time and cost, and the shutdown of pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can obtain detailed information about the error that occurred, it can resolve the error quickly and reduce the downtime of pachinko machine 1.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the status of the pachinko machine 1 based on signals output from the external terminal board 784. However, investigating the cause of an error requires, in addition to the signals output from the external terminal board 784, preferably, game history information such as "number of entries in the general prize slots," "number of entries in the large prize slots," "number of gate passages," and "number of normal symbol changes." If the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning, it can be resolved by repair or parts replacement, so it is not a major problem. However, if game balls are obtained through fraudulent activity, the opportunity for legitimate players to profit is reduced, disrupting the hall's operations and potentially leading to financial difficulties for the hall.

Outputting this kind of game history information from the external terminal board 784 increases the number of terminals on the connector used in the external terminal board 784, thus increasing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, since events such as "winning into the general prize slot," "winning into the large prize slot," "passing through the gate," and "changing of the regular symbols" occur frequently, outputting all data from the pachinko machine 1 would require a high-performance hall computer for data analysis, increasing the burden on the hall.

In this embodiment, to solve the aforementioned problems, the pachinko machine 1 stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes the stored data available for later reference, thereby allowing for detailed confirmation of the events leading up to the error.

Furthermore, the timestamps for events that occurred leading up to these errors (such as the number of entries in the general prize slots, the number of entries in the major prize slots, the number of gate passes, and the number of normal symbol changes) are recorded, allowing us to understand how many events occurred and over what period of time. For example, it can detect an anomaly such as 50 entries in the general prize slots per minute.

Recording the date and time of each event would increase the amount of data used to investigate the cause of errors, thus prolonging the troubleshooting process. Therefore, it may be acceptable to output and notify error information only when a predetermined number of events occur within a predetermined time period (e.g., one minute).

For example, since it's possible to win prizes in the general prize slots in any game state, it's appropriate to output and notify an error message if more than a predetermined number of prizes are won within a predetermined time. However, since prizes can only be won in the large prize slots during a jackpot game, it's best to set the predetermined time to the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output and notify an error message if more than a predetermined number of prizes are won in the large prize slots within that time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

Figure 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit in this embodiment. The power-on processing for the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 120 is the same as the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit described in Figure 60, but with the addition of game history recording processing (step S1023).

The game history recording process involves the peripheral control unit 1511 analyzing the command received from the main control board 1310. If the received command is a predetermined command, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in memory. The game history is recorded as the date and time of event occurrence, for example, in the format shown in Figure 122. While DRAM may be used for recording the game history, it is preferable to use SRAM, which does not require refresh operations and consumes less power, considering the need to retain stored data even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) should be executed before the game control-related processes (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process early in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the game control-related processes are interrupted and some effects are not executed. In other words, even if some effects are not executed (or even if all effects are not executed), the results of the lottery already conducted on the main control board 1310 remain unchanged, and the benefits granted to the player also remain unchanged. Therefore, the game history is recorded with priority over the effects. Furthermore, since the game history recording process is not affected by the game control-related processes, the game history recording process can be standardized across multiple pachinko machine models.

Next, we will explain the process that occurs when the memory capacity for recording game history reaches its limit. If the amount of game history data to be recorded reaches the memory capacity limit, the game history recording process is executed, but it is not necessary to update the game history already recorded in memory. In other words, the information recorded in memory remains unchanged. By executing the game history recording process even when there is no free memory for recording game history, it is unnecessary to check the available memory status for recording game history, thus reducing the processing load on the peripheral control unit 1511 each time.

Furthermore, if the memory capacity for recording game history reaches its limit, a game history recording process may be executed to update the game history stored in memory. In this case, a ring buffer with multiple (e.g., 10) memory areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the oldest game history may be erased and the latest game history recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the availability of memory for recording game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 each time can be reduced.

Furthermore, if the recorded game history reaches the memory capacity limit, step S1023 may be skipped, and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the memory capacity limit, unnecessary processing can be prevented. This ensures that other processes performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 (effect control, lamp control, sound control) are reliably executed, and the freed-up processing time can be used to execute new processes (for example, processes that are executed across multiple peripheral control unit regular processes due to insufficient processing time, or processes that are executed once every few peripheral control unit regular processes because they do not need to be executed every time (for example, a process to switch the selection table)).

Alternatively, the received command may be analyzed immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) (step S1022), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

Figure 121 shows an example of the configuration of the game history recording condition setting table.

The game history recording condition setting table registers the types of commands that the peripheral control unit 1511 receives from the main control board 1310 and which are recorded as game history, i.e., the events that are recorded as game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for the occurrence of each command and the purpose of recording them as game history are as follows:

For example, the commands for when a game ball enters Starter 1 and Starter 2 are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters Starter 2002 and Starter 2004, respectively. The peripheral control unit 1511 then counts the number of game balls that enter each Starter 2. Similarly, the commands for Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2 are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbols begin to change, allowing the peripheral control unit 1511 to count the number of changes for Special Symbols 1 and 2.

Furthermore, the power-on command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, allowing the peripheral control unit 1511 to acquire information such as RAM clear operations. The state at the start of the variation command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the variation of the special symbols begins, allowing the peripheral control unit 1511 to acquire the state at the start of the variation of the special symbols. The states that can be distinguished by the state at the start of the variation command are four states: low probability/shortened time, low probability/no shortened time, high probability/shortened time, and high probability/no shortened time. Changes in the state can be acquired, and the number of variations that started in each state can be counted. Here, low probability means that the probability of a jackpot being drawn in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is the normal probability, and high probability means that the probability of a jackpot being drawn in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is higher than normal. The "time-saving" state is a condition where the probability of the second start door member 2549 being open (or enlarged) is higher than in the non-time-saving state, and the time from when the regular symbols start to change until they are confirmed is shortened. In other words, the frequency of the second start door member 2549 being open (or enlarged) is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Consequently, the probability of selecting a shorter special symbol change display game duration increases.

The commands for winning in the first and second prize slots (per win) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters the second prize slot (2005) and the second prize slot (2006), respectively. The peripheral control unit 1511 then counts the number of balls that have entered each prize slot.

The commands for winning in the first large prize slot (below the specified number of winning balls) and the command for winning in the second large prize slot (below the specified number of winning balls) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when, in the case of the first large prize slot 2005 and the second large prize slot 2006, if fewer than the specified number of game balls have been won by the end of the round, a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each large prize slot (for example, from 1 second after closing until before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the winning status of each large prize slot in one round. The commands for "Grand Prize Entrance 1 (greater than the specified number of balls)" and "Grand Prize Entrance 2 (greater than the specified number of balls)" are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the number of game balls exceeds the specified number in Grand Prize Entrance 2005 and Grand Prize Entrance 2006, respectively, and the round ends. This command is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each Grand Prize Entrance (for example, from 1 second after closing until the next opening). The peripheral control unit 1511 then acquires the status of balls entering each Grand Prize Entrance during one round. The reason this command is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each Grand Prize Entrance 2005 and 2006 is that even when the specified number of balls (for example, 10) for a round are detected and the Grand Prize Entrance is closed, there is a possibility that undetected game balls may still exist within the Grand Prize Entrance. This command ensures accurate tracking of the ball entry status even in such cases of over-entry.

The jackpot OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (i.e., when the condition device is activated or the continuous mechanism device is activated). The peripheral control unit 1511 can then acquire the change to the jackpot state and count the number of jackpots. The jackpot operation end transition command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot state ends. The peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the status after the jackpot.

The minor win OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the opening of the main prize opening is relatively short (for example, when the opening time for one opening is 1.8 seconds, or when the total opening time for multiple openings is less than 1.8 seconds), and the continuous mechanism operation device does not activate (a so-called minor win). The peripheral control unit 1511 can then count the number of minor wins.

The "Normal Symbol Stop" command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a normal symbol stops. The peripheral control unit 1511 can then acquire the stopped normal symbol and count the number of normal symbol variations. The "Normal Symbol Gate Pass" command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. The peripheral control unit 1511 can then acquire the number of game balls that passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if a special or regular symbol is not drawn after a ball enters the starting slot or passes through the gate (e.g., due to an overflow or lack of memory), the main control board 1310 sends commands to the peripheral control unit 1511 for entry into starting slot 1, entry into starting slot 2, and passing through the regular symbol gate. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of balls that enter the starting slots and the number of balls that pass through the gate.

The error display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs. The peripheral control unit 1511 can then acquire the timing of the error and count the number of errors.

The commands for general prize slot 1, general prize slot 2, and general prize slot 3 are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters each general prize slot 2001. The peripheral control unit 1511 then counts the number of balls that have entered each general prize slot 2001. The number of general prize slot entry commands is sufficient to represent the number of general prize slots 2001 provided in the game area 5a; the above example illustrates the case where three general prize slots 2001 are provided. As shown in Figures 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has four general prize slots 2001, so four types of general prize slot entry commands are defined: general prize slot 1 entry command, general prize slot 4 entry command, and so on.

Figure 122 shows an example of the configuration of the game history recorded in memory.

The game history includes the history number, event, and event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in memory in chronological order of event occurrence. The event occurrence date and time may be recorded as the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, or the main control board 1310 may notify the peripheral control unit 1511 of the time it detects an event, and the peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified by the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded with a granularity down to the minute, but they may also be recorded down to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in Figure 122, it is possible to know the details of events that occurred in relation to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in game state, results of the variable display game, etc.). For example, the power-on command in history number 1 occurred at 3:30 PM on March 15, 2016, and from the content of the command, it can be seen that a RAM clear was performed and the game started in a low probability, non-time-saving state. In other words, it can be seen that the hall opened for business at 3:30 PM, the power to the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the player started playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and the ball entered the general prize pocket 2001. Also, the special symbol 1 variation start event in history number 4 occurred at 3:34 PM on March 15, 2016, and from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stopped symbol), the result of the special symbol variation display game can be seen. The Special Symbol 1 variation start event for history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016. The result of the Special Symbol variation display game can be determined from the content of the received Special Symbol 1 symbol type command (the type of stopped symbol). Although Figure 122 does not show the results of the Special Symbol variation display games, the result of each Special Symbol variation display game can be determined from the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the Special Symbol variation. The result of the variation display game (miss, normal 4-round win, high-probability 4-round win, high-probability 16-round win, etc.) may be recorded as part of the game history.

Next, we will explain how the arcade accesses the information (game history) recorded in memory.

First, a history output interface 1590 is provided to output information recorded in memory from the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the main control board 1310, it outputs the game history recorded in memory through the history output interface 1590.

Furthermore, when a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1, and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, it outputs the game history recorded in memory via the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured using a history output terminal provided on the peripheral control unit 1511, or it may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the pachinko parlor for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be via a cable connection through the history output interface 1590, or via a wireless connection using short-range wireless technology (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history may be a history reference command specifically for outputting the game history, or it may be a command that is not sent when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and normal gameplay is in progress (a command not defined in Figure 121), and is used when special conditions (operations) are met. Special conditions (operations) include, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Furthermore, even commands sent during normal gameplay may be used as conditions for sending a history reference command based on unlikely (or unlikely) events. For example, this could be when 50 balls enter the start slot or general prize slot in one minute. Additionally, the game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

Furthermore, a control panel (keyboard) and a display (LCD display) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place not visible to the player) to display the game history.

Figure 123 is a block diagram showing the peripheral control board and its surrounding configuration.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868; a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and controls sound such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573; and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second.

The peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, as shown in Figure 123, includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing performed when the power is turned on and the performance operations that are performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and various information that continues across the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing that is performed each time a V-blank signal is input from the sound source built into the VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (described later), for example, the main liquid crystal The system includes a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data (such as schedule data defining the screen to be displayed on the display device 1600 and schedule data defining the light emission patterns of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

While the peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when power is cut off for an extended period (in the event of a prolonged power outage), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours because it is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d no longer receives backup power, and therefore loses its stored contents.

Furthermore, a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is powered by a backup power supply 1513, which is different from the backup power supply provided by the power supply board 931. The area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d powered by the backup power supply 1513 stores the game history, and is configured to retain its contents even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium-ion battery, and preferably has the power supply capability to retain data in at least a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to about one month.

Figure 124 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores the game history may be configured in a separate package from the peripheral control CPU, which includes the peripheral control MPU, or it may be configured together with the peripheral control MPU within the peripheral control CPU package.

Figure 124(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has a separate package from the peripheral control CPU for storing game history. As shown, the area for controlling effects, which is not powered by the backup power supply 1513, is located outside the peripheral control CPU package, while the area for storing game history, which is powered by the backup power supply 1513, is also located outside the peripheral control CPU package.

When resetting the pachinko machine 1 by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d within the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the peripheral control CPU is not cleared.

Figure 124(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has a region for storing game history within the peripheral control CPU package. As shown, both a region for controlling effects, which is not powered by the backup power supply 1513, and a region for storing game history, which is powered by the backup power supply 1513, are provided within the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in Figure 124(B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d within the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the peripheral control CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d be physically separated.

Furthermore, the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d used to store the game history may be configured as flash memory instead of SRAM. By storing the game history in flash memory, the game history can be retained even when the pachinko machine 1 is not receiving power, without the need for a backup power supply 1513.

In both the (A) and (B) configurations shown in Figure 124, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method that differs from the usual data initialization method of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. For example, a history clear switch may be provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while operating the history clear switch will initialize the stored game history. In this case, turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch will initialize both the stored game state information and the game history. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the RAM clear switch is continued to be operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history may be initialized.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 that is different from the normal power-on command.

Furthermore, while the RAM clear switch is operated, the main control board 1310 may continuously send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510. If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a predetermined number of power-on commands within a predetermined time, or if it receives power-on commands consecutively, it may initialize the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d. By providing a means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the gaming machine operates in a hall for a year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is malfunctioning. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is initiated. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), a reset will occur. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within that period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is restarted, and therefore no reset occurs.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. Upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board-side light emission data to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to output a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, based on these commands. It also transmits game board-side motor drive data to the motor drive board via a serial I/O port for the motor drive board to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable parts provided on the game board 5. The system transmits signals from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, transmits door-side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and transmits door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 from the serial I/O port for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Furthermore, detection signals from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401, and detection signals from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405, are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This serialized performance operation unit detection data is then input from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors) used to detect the original position and movable position of various movable parts on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) on the motor drive board 4180. This serialized movable part detection data is then input from the game board-side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board's serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the motor drive board's serial I/O port.

As explained above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, events that occur during gameplay are recorded as a game history according to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by analyzing the events that occurred during gameplay later (for example, after the hall closes), the performance and malfunctions of the gaming machine can be understood. Furthermore, since the game history is stored in non-volatile memory (SRAM with backup power input), the game history can be checked even after the gaming machine has been restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, various information is recorded along with the time of occurrence, as shown in Figures 121 and 122. Furthermore, for example, when a ball enters the starting gate 1, the pachinko machine 1 stores more information internally than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in Figure 116, such as (1) the fact that a ball entered the starting gate 1, (2) the time of entry into the starting gate 1, and (3) events that occurred before the ball entered the starting gate 1. This is because, in cases such as when a ball enters the starting gate, the minimum necessary information (such as the aforementioned (1) information indicating the fact that a ball entered the starting gate) is output from the external terminal board 784, while in special cases (for example, when investigating the cause of an error), the information stored internally in the pachinko machine 1 can be checked. This is because if all the information stored internally when a ball enters the starting gate were output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 would increase, potentially burdening the pachinko parlor. In other words, when an event occurs, more information than what is output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1. A portion of this internally recorded information is then output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784, allowing for verification of the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 in special cases.

[11-2. Compact Plan 1]
Next, we will describe some modifications of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history. Note that some of the modifications described below are changes to parts of the previously described embodiment and constitute part of that embodiment.

In the previously described embodiment, for predetermined commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the generated event (type of command) and the date and time of the event were recorded. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d, which records the game history, is finite, making it difficult to record all of the vast number of events that occur during gameplay over a long period of time. Therefore, in Modification 1 (Compact Version 1), the changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events that occurred in that state are recorded.

Figure 125 shows an example of the configuration of the game history recording condition setting table in Modification Example 1.

In the modified example 1's game history recording condition setting table, the commands recorded as game history are defined separately into commands to be counted and commands that trigger state changes. Some commands have both attributes set. Note that the columns for countable information and obtainable state changes are included for explanatory purposes; when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is necessary.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command with an attribute to be counted, it analyzes the command and counts the number of events that triggered the command. Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command with an attribute that triggers a state change, it analyzes the command and updates the state of the game history recorded in memory, adding a record to count the number of events.

For example, the power-on command, the command indicating the state at the start of a variation, the jackpot OP command, the command indicating the destination at the end of a jackpot operation, and the error display command are all commands issued in response to state changes. These can be understood as transitions between power-on, the start of special symbol variation display, the start of a jackpot state, the end of a jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state, respectively.

Furthermore, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the Start Entrance 1 entry command and the Start Entrance 2 entry command can count the number of balls that enter each start entrance. The Special Symbol 1 symbol type command and the Special Symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations for each special symbol. The Grand Prize Entrance 1 entry command (per entry) and the Grand Prize Entrance 2 entry command (per entry) can count the number of balls that enter each grand prize entrance. The Grand Prize Entrance 1 entry command (below the specified number of entries) and the Grand Prize Entrance 2 entry command (below the specified number of entries) can count the number of rounds that ended with a number of entries below the specified number. The Grand Prize Entrance 1 entry command (greater than the specified number of entries) and the Grand Prize Entrance 2 entry command (greater than the specified number of entries) can count the number of rounds that ended with a number of entries exceeding the specified number of entries (i.e., an over-entry).

The "Small Win OP" command counts the number of small wins. The "Normal Symbol Stop" command counts the number of normal symbol changes. The "Normal Symbol Gate Pass" command retrieves the number of game balls that passed through the gate. The "Error Display" command counts the number of errors. The "General Prize Entrance 1 Entry" command, "General Prize Entrance 2 Entry" command, and "General Prize Entrance 3 Entry" command count the number of balls that entered each general prize entrance.

Figure 126 shows the game history recorded in the memory of Modified Example 1.

The game history in Modification 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time the state change event occurred, and the cumulative number of counting events detected from a predetermined starting point until the end of that state (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may also be the number of counting events detected during that state (between the previous state change event and the current state change event). The predetermined starting point is the initialization time of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The states in which counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. However, these states may be further subdivided.

Next, we will explain the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 1. In the game history shown in Figure 126, the following events are recorded as counting events: number of entries into starting gate 1, number of entries into starting gate 2, number of changes in special symbol 1, number of changes in special symbol 2, number of entries into general prize gate 1, number of entries into general prize gate 2, number of entries into general prize gate 3, number of entries into large prize gate 1, number of entries into large prize gate 2, number of gate passes, and number of changes in regular symbols. Note that the number of events other than those shown in the figure may also be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative count of each counting event. In particular, data that does not occur very frequently and whose cumulative count does not become large (e.g., the number of winners in the general prize draw) can be stored in one byte, while all other data should be stored in two bytes. In this case, it is best to arrange the data in the order of two bytes, then one byte (or one byte, then two bytes), rather than mixing one-byte and two-byte data.

Furthermore, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event, and the date and time of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in the new record.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state should be recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and then stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. While the new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, it may also be created at the start of the period during which counting events are counted. In this case, even if no data is stored in the newly created record during the period in which counting events are counted, it may be set to 0 as an initial value. Alternatively, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after the new record is created, the counting results of the counting events for that period are stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area, the count value recorded in the work area is added, and the result is stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, if the number of count events detected during the current state (between the previous state change event and the current state change event) is recorded as part of the game history, the count values of the count events are stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In other words, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result for the current state, recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, remains stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs. While the stored contents are backed up in the event of a power outage, they are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, the game history information recorded in the working area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) as 50 entries into the starting gate 1 is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1. In other words, if the game state does not change, no game history is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and a RAM clear operation is performed while in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, this count of 50 entries is initialized to 0.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state may be written to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting results for the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not initialized by a normal RAM clear operation, but are initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Furthermore, even if the recorded game history reaches the memory capacity limit, the game history recording process should still be executed. In this case, recording of the game history to the peripheral control RAM 1511c should continue in the current state, and it is not necessary to store the cumulative number of counting events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) from the oldest state may be erased, and the cumulative number of counting events from the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer should be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

Even if there is no free memory for recording the game history, the game history recording process can be executed without needing to check the available memory capacity, thus reducing the processing load on the peripheral control unit 1511 each time. Furthermore, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Furthermore, if the recorded game history reaches the memory capacity limit, step S1023 may be skipped, and the game history recording process may not be performed. By not performing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the memory capacity limit, unnecessary processing is prevented, and the processing load on the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced.

As explained above, in Modification 1, the state changes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winning entries, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between changes are recorded. Therefore, long-term game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, a characteristic of the modified pachinko machine 1 is that it internally records more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of Modification Example 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state. If the game state does not change, no information (game history) is written to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if fraud occurs while no new records are being created in the game history storage area (while the same game state continues), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As mentioned above, while the hall can check the information written to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information written to memory (game history), in the pachinko machine 1 of Modification Example 1, no information is written to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the game state changes. Therefore, even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. A check function that can detect fraud early in such cases may be provided.

Specifically, if the comparison result between the first record (the latest record in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) containing the most recent game history and the second record (the record in the peripheral control RAM 1511c) containing the current game history satisfies predetermined conditions, an error may be reported.

For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where the game balls are launched so that they roll along the right side of the game area 5a during high-probability/shortened time states or jackpot states (so-called right-handed shooting), if the game transitions from the high-probability/shortened time state to the jackpot state, and then transitions back to the high-probability/shortened time state after the jackpot state ends, even though the state has changed, the probability of the balls entering the general prize slot on the left side of the game area 5a is extremely low because right-handed shooting is normally performed. In this case, the number of balls entering the general prize slot can be compared between the jackpot state and the subsequent high-probability/shortened time state, and an error may be reported if a difference is detected. The allowable difference in the number of balls entering the general prize slot between states should be one, and an error should be reported if a difference of two or more occurs. This is because releasing the hand from the launch handle can cause inconsistencies in the launch force, potentially causing the game balls to roll along the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of an error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in Figure 116. The aforementioned early fraud detection check function predicts gameplay based on the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, assuming the player will shoot to the right because it's in a high-probability/short-time state) and detects errors accordingly. Therefore, it may detect errors if an inexperienced player uses an unexpected playing style. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify errors, but instead only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. This allows hall staff to check for potential errors from a distance without the player noticing, thus preventing conflicts with players.

Thus, because the error detection function of pachinko machine 1 is not foolproof, the cause of errors can be checked by analyzing the game history externally from pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact Plan 2]
In the modified version 1 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event records the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of counting events in each state during the switching is recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state that occurs repeatedly. For this reason, modified version 2 (compact version 2) records the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state.

In Modification 2, the same game history recording condition setting table (Figure 125) as in Modification 1 is used to record the game history.

Figure 127 shows the game history recorded in the memory of the modified example 2.

As shown in Figure 127, the game history of Modified Example 2 consists of a history of state events and the cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of state events includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of Modified Example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states: low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. In Modification 2, the counting events (and related commands) recorded are: number of entries into starting gate 1 (command when entry into starting gate 1 occurs), number of entries into starting gate 2 (command when entry into starting gate 2 occurs), number of variations in special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of entries into general prize gate 1 (general prize gate 1 entry command), number of entries into general prize gate 2 (general prize gate 2 entry command), number of entries into general prize gate 3 (general prize gate 3 entry command), number of entries into large prize gate 1 (large prize gate 1 entry command), number of entries into large prize gate 2 (large prize gate 2 entry command), number of gates passed (normal symbol gate passing command), and number of normal symbol variations (normal symbol stop command).

Furthermore, the number of counting events other than those mentioned above may also be counted, and the state in which counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in Figure 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event, and the date and time of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the game machine is detected due to a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in non-volatile memory, and the recording of the cumulative number of counting events described above begins in accordance with the state after the change.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state are recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After a state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value for that state) of the SRAM 1511d is read, the value recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is added, and the result is stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In other words, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c before the state change. Therefore, the counting results for the current state recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state may be written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting results for the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d are not initialized by a normal RAM clear operation, but are initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in Modification 2, the state changes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and the counting events for each state type (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) are recorded. Therefore, long-term game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d.

[11-4. Compact Plan 3]
In the modified version 2 described above, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 was recorded in the state change events among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state was recorded. However, the timing of the state change may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state. For this reason, in modified version 3 (compact version 3), the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, and instead the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In Modification 3, the same game history recording condition setting table (Figure 125) as in Modification 1 is used to record the game history.

In Modification 3, the same events recorded in Modification 1 are recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in Figure 125.

Figure 128 shows the game history recorded in the memory of Modification Example 3.

As shown in Figure 128, the game history in Modified Example 3 consists of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history in Modified Example 3 includes the cumulative time for each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of events (e.g., the number of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which counting events are recorded separately are low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. However, the counting events may be recorded in even more subdivided states.

In Modification Example 3, the counting events (and related commands) recorded are: number of entries into starting gate 1 (command when entry into starting gate 1 occurs), number of entries into starting gate 2 (command when entry into starting gate 2 occurs), number of variations in special symbol 1 (command for special symbol 1 symbol type), number of variations in special symbol 2 (command for special symbol 2 symbol type), number of entries into general prize gate 1 (command for entry into general prize gate 1), number of entries into general prize gate 2 (command for entry into general prize gate 2), number of entries into general prize gate 3 (command for entry into general prize gate 3), number of entries into large prize gate 1 (command for entry into large prize gate 1), number of entries into large prize gate 2 (command for entry into large prize gate 2), number of gates passed (command for passing through the gate), and number of variations in normal symbols (command for stopping normal symbols). Note that the number of counting events other than those mentioned above may also be counted.

Next, we will explain the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2. In the game history shown in Figure 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative count of the aforementioned counting events is recorded, corresponding to the state of the game machine changed by that state change event.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state are recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After a state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value for that state) of the SRAM 1511d is read, the value recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is added, and the result is stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In other words, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results for the current state recorded in the working area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Furthermore, the counting results of the counting events in the current state may be written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting results for the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d are not initialized by a normal RAM clear operation, but are initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in Modification 2, the state changes of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and the counting events for each state type (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) are recorded. Therefore, long-term game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d.

As explained above, in modified examples 1 to 3, when an event occurs, the game history recording process temporarily records the data in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c). When the conditions for writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met, the data from the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Furthermore, in a normal RAM clear operation, the information written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Let's briefly touch upon the operation of pachinko parlors. In most cases, parlors have set operating hours, for example, opening at 10:00 AM and closing at 11:00 PM. Therefore, during peak hours, such as shortly after opening or in the evening, it can be difficult for staff to monitor whether players are engaging in fraudulent activities. However, as closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there are pachinko machines in a high-probability/time-saving mode near closing time, these machines may be reset to a low-probability/non-time-saving mode in preparation for the next day's operation. In this case, because there are fewer players, it becomes possible to monitor the high-probability/time-saving machines, allowing staff to determine if recent gameplay has been fraudulent. In other words, considering that some pachinko machines don't require recent game history, allowing staff to choose whether or not to retain recent information would allow for more efficient provision of gaming machines.

Specifically, initializing the pachinko machine 1 through a RAM clear operation erases the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event, while retaining the game history stored in the game history storage area for events that occurred before the most recent event. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information not output from the external terminal board 784, it records game history by separating the information recorded in the work area (which is erased by the RAM clear operation) from the information recorded in the game history storage area (which is not erased by the RAM clear operation). This way, if a staff member wants to retain the record of all events recorded in the work area, they only need to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine; if they want to erase the record of events recorded in the work area, they only need to perform a RAM clear operation. The reason why the RAM clear operation does not erase all game history, but only the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event, is, as mentioned above, because staff members do not see events that occurred before the most recent event (they cannot see them due to the large number of players).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, not only is information about balls entering the start slot recorded, but balls entering the general prize slots, which are unrelated to the lottery, are also initially recorded in the work area. Therefore, even if the special symbols (symbols that begin to change when balls enter the start slot, and whose stopping pattern indicates the lottery result) are not changing, the game history is collected as long as game balls are being launched into the game area 5a. In other words, the game history recording process is not a process that is executed only when a lottery is held to determine the winner or loser, but rather a process that may be executed at any time as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Furthermore, in low-probability, non-shortened state, the game balls are launched in a manner similar to left-handed shooting or short-shot shooting, so that they enter the starting opening 2002. In such cases, a reasonable number of balls should enter the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001. However, if there are no (or very few) entries into the general winning opening 2001, but many game balls enter the starting opening 2002, or conversely, if there are no (or very few) entries into the starting opening 2002, but many game balls enter the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility of fraud. Therefore, the first and second winning openings, which receive game balls at the same time, may be set as monitoring targets, and an error may be reported when the number of entries into the first winning opening exceeds a predetermined multiplier of the number of entries into the second winning opening.

Alternatively, instead of an error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. The aforementioned detection method may detect errors if an inexperienced player uses an unexpected playing technique. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify errors, but instead only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. This allows hall staff to check for potential errors from a distance without the player noticing, thus preventing potential conflicts with players.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is also characterized by its collection of accumulated information from multiple games as game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, recording each game (each variation) would prevent the recording of many games (long periods of time). Therefore, this mechanism allows for the retention of records for a larger number of games.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function as a game performance feature, for example, that changes the operating ratio of a condition device.

[12-1. Basic configuration of a pachinko machine with setting functions]
Figure 129 is a schematic block diagram showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, Figure 130 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine having a setting unit with the doors open, viewed from the back, Figure 131 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 130 with the doors closed, viewed from the back, and Figure 132 is a diagram showing the setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 130.

The pachinko machine shown in Figure 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation status of each switch and controls the display of the setting indicator 974.

As shown in the front view of Figure 132(A), the setting board 970 is equipped with a setting key 971 for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts setting change operations.

In this embodiment, the operation signals from the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are received by the payout control unit 952. The setting indicator 974 is also controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may also control components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is a switch that outputs a signal to trigger a change to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the set position, thereby maintaining a short-circuit or open state of the contacts. Alternatively, the setting key 971 may be omitted and used in conjunction with another switch. In this case, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode can be started by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or longer, and the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode can be terminated by long-pressing the setting change switch 972 while in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode can be started by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while turning on the power, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Alternatively, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while turning on the power, and the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process will be executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode can be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 while in the setting change mode.

This approach allows employees who do not possess the key for the setting key 971 to change the settings, thus simplifying the operation of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Furthermore, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is, for example, a push-button switch and is operated to sequentially switch and select the setting value (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting value is 6 and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value becomes 1. Alternatively, the setting value could be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 instead of providing the setting change switch 972. The setting value may also be limited to six levels, or fewer (e.g., two levels) or more (e.g., eight levels).

Alternatively, the setting key 971 may function as the setting change switch 972 instead of providing a separate setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages: in the neutral position (normal position), the key can be inserted and removed; turning it to the left initiates the setting change mode; and turning it to the right selects the setting value to be set (when turned to the right, it functions as the setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 exhibits alternate operation, maintaining the left and neutral positions; and momentary operation, where the right position is not maintained (it returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The setting value changes the activation rate of the condition device (i.e., the probability of hitting a special symbol). A setting value of 1 results in a low probability of hitting, while a setting value of 6 results in a high probability of hitting. Furthermore, the setting value can be used to change various parameters related to the game, such as the percentage of probability-increasing jackpots, the percentage of time-saving (ST) rounds after a jackpot, the number of time-saving rounds, the number of rounds and counts in a jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular symbol, and the number of prize balls awarded for general, starting, and large prize winning slots, thereby altering the number of prize balls the player can win.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary switch, and is used to confirm the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and input it into the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 can be a push-button switch or a momentary toggle switch, as long as it is a momentary switch. To prevent accidental operation of the two switches, it is advisable to use switches with different operating methods (directions of operation) and shapes for the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting change switch 972 could be a push-button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 could be a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position, without providing a setting confirmation switch 973. Furthermore, the selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of other switches or sensors provided on the pachinko machine 1. For example, the selected setting may be confirmed by operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 when the handle lever 504 is touched, operation of the stop button on the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, operation of the ball dispensing button, operation of the return button, or detection of game balls entering the start openings 2002 and 2004. The operating unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for gameplay) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (located on the back of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1, but it is sufficient to provide only one or two switches on the setting board 970.

Furthermore, the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 may be omitted, and setting changes may be made possible using only the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode can be started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Alternatively, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while turning on the power, and the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than the predetermined time, a RAM clear process will be executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting value can be confirmed by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time or longer (long press). Furthermore, the setting change mode can be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting has been confirmed.

The setting indicator 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED and displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972. It also displays the current setting value through a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the setting key 971). Alternatively, the setting indicator 974 may be composed of LEDs corresponding to the number of configurable values, rather than a 7-segment LED. In this case, the LEDs corresponding to the setting value will light up to display the setting value.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the payout control board 951 is equipped with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED to display the type of payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 may be used interchangeably, displaying the selected setting value or the current setting value on the error type indicator. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode to distinguish between the error type display and the setting value display. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Alternatively, the error type display may be a (non-flashing) lit display, while the setting value display may be a flashing display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may also be connected to the power supply board (not shown) inside the power supply board box 930. By placing the setting board 970 adjacent to the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932, which are operated when changing settings, can be placed close together, improving the ease of changing settings.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in another configuration, the setting board 970 may not be a separate board, but rather part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, setting confirmation switch 973, and setting indicator 974 may be mounted on either the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main frame 4 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1 (i.e., the frame side, not the game board 5). As shown in Figure 131, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, making it difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. Thus, the right frame member 40 functions as a means of making setting changes difficult, concealing the setting key 971, preventing the insertion of a key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, it is sufficient for at least a portion of the setting board 970, specifically the setting keys 971, to face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow distance. However, the entire setting board 970 may also face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow distance. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. By arranging the entire setting board 970 at a narrow distance from the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 in this way, it becomes difficult to operate the setting board 970 while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (i.e., with the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2), thereby deterring players from fraudulently changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 (means for making setting changes difficult) is the right frame member 40, but other members may also be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be positioned so that it faces the setting board 970 at a narrow distance when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Alternatively, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main frame 4 may be provided, and when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, this cover may be positioned so that it faces the setting board 970 at a narrow distance.

The means for making it difficult to change the settings, which is composed of a member provided opposite the setting board 970, may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971, which is the trigger for starting the setting change mode, with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers the various control boards including the setting board 970 may be provided. Alternatively, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case is provided with a first cover body (for example, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) that prevents accidental operation of the setting key 971 and each switch 972, 973 (at least the setting key 971). Furthermore, a second cover body that covers the setting board 970 and the various control boards including the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. The second cover body may also be provided on the main frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover the various control boards. This prevents accidental activation of the settings change mode, thereby deterring unscrupulous players from altering the settings of pachinko machine 1.

With the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the distance at which the setting board 970 faces other components such as the right frame member 40 should be shorter than the length of the key head (the key head held during operation) inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

It is preferable to position the setting board 970 near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971, which is operated when changing settings, and the power switch 932 are located close together. This improves the ease of operation when activating the setting change mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 131, the power supply board box 930 is equipped with a power switch 932 for supplying power to the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is equipped with a RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with several switches that are not operated during gameplay but can be operated from the back side. The aforementioned power switch 932 and RAM clear switch 954 are located in positions that are visible and operable from the back side. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (and preferably the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 as well) is located in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process and are therefore located in positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden in a way that makes it difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is running, thereby preventing fraudulent activity such as manipulating the setting board 970 and changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 during gameplay. In this way, the switches on the back of the pachinko machine 1 are positioned to achieve both convenience and the prevention of fraudulent activity.

Similarly, since the current settings of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for players in selecting a machine, it is desirable that they remain unknown to the players. Therefore, as shown in Figure 131, similar to the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should be positioned opposite the right frame member 40 at a narrow distance so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not being operated, it is desirable that the setting indicator 974 be turned off to prevent players from knowing the setting value. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a means of obscuring visibility, concealing the display content of the setting indicator 974 and making it difficult to see the display content of the setting indicator 974 (setting status display unit).

Figure 132(B) shows a top view of the setting board 970 with the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow distance, causing interference between the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40, preventing the key 975 from being inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, allowing the key 975 to be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Furthermore, the display surface of the setting indicator 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to check the current setting value of the pachinko machine from the front.

Figure 133 shows a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modified version, as in the previously described example, the setting board 970 is equipped with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting indicator 974. However, in this modified version, the setting key 971 is positioned horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, in this modified example, the setting board 970 is installed on the back side of the main frame 4, not the side side, with the keyhole facing the side. As shown in Figure 133(B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, with the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the side of the setting board 970 (i.e., the keyhole) faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow distance. Therefore, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, preventing the key 975 from being inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified configuration shown in Figure 133, the circuit board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same orientation as the other circuit boards, reducing the difficulty of circuit board arrangement while simultaneously suppressing fraudulent activity such as altering the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by manipulating the setting board 970 during operation.

Next, a modified version of a pachinko machine with a setting unit will be described. In this modified version, the setting board 970 is located on the game board 5 instead of the main frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

Figure 134 is a schematic block diagram showing the control configuration of this modified pachinko machine; Figure 135 is a perspective view of the game board with the setting unit, seen from the rear; and Figure 136 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the game board shown in Figure 135 installed, seen from the rear.

The setting board 970 is equipped with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting indicator 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in Figure 132(A) or Figure 133(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 134, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation status of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 controls the display of the setting indicator 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and its components are the same as those described in the previous embodiment, and therefore, common explanations are omitted.

The main control board 1310 is equipped with a base indicator 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 may be used interchangeably, displaying the selected setting value or the current setting value on the base indicator 1317. Normally, the base indicator 1317 displays the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the confirmed section (the straight section) at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in setting change mode, the selected (next to be set) setting value is displayed, and during setting confirmation (see Figure 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is advisable to change the display method to distinguish between the base value display and the set value display. For example, the base value display may use four digits, while the set value display may use only a predetermined single digit (e.g., the rightmost digit) and display a "-". Instead of a "-", other numbers, letters, or symbols not used in the base value display may be displayed in the digits not used in the set value display. Furthermore, when displaying the set value, characters not used in the base value display may be displayed. For example, the set value could be displayed using the six letters A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Furthermore, in setting change mode, the indicator should blink while a setting value is being selected, and the confirmed setting value should be displayed as a solid light. The current setting value should also be displayed as a solid light. In the base display, the top two digits represent the type of displayed data, and no numbers are displayed. Therefore, the most significant digit may be used to display the setting value. Note that when the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 are used interchangeably, the setting value takes priority during setting change mode and setting confirmation. Therefore, although the base value is calculated, the base value is not displayed. After the setting change mode or setting value confirmation is completed, the base indicator 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

Furthermore, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used interchangeably, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 within the game control area, while the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a portion of the base calculation/display code 13135 (for example, the process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be placed within the game control area. This commonality of processing reduces the program size and saves memory.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display unit 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 within the game control area, while the process of outputting the display content to the base display unit 1317 is executed by the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. This allows for complete separation of processes within and outside the game control area, thereby improving security.

Furthermore, the processes of changing settings and confirming settings may be performed outside the game control area.

In other words, whether the setting indicator 974 is provided separately from the base indicator 1317, or whether it is used in conjunction with the base indicator 1317, in either case, it falls within the scope of the invention described herein. In this way, by displaying multiple indicators on the main control board box 1320 in a way that is not confusing during setting change mode or setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent incorrect operation during setting changes and misinterpretation of setting values.

Furthermore, even if the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 are not used interchangeably, the display on the base indicator 1317 may be turned off or fully illuminated while the setting indicator 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, once the setting change mode or setting value confirmation is complete, the base indicator 1317 will resume displaying the base value. By not displaying multiple indicators on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode or setting value confirmation, errors during setting changes and misinterpretation of set values can be prevented.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310. However, the setting board 970 may not be a separate board, but rather formed as a part of the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, setting confirmation switch 973, and setting indicator 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. If the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 will be provided with holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, i.e., the opening and closing direction, differs depending on the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted perpendicularly into the board from the front, the main control board box 1320 should be structured so that the front and back surfaces of the setting board 970 separate perpendicularly to the setting board 970, or so that the front side box (or cover) and the back side box can be opened and closed using one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 should be structured so that the front side box (or cover) and the back side box slide and separate in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends (the direction in which the key 975 is inserted).

In this modified configuration, the operation signals from the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are received by the main control MPU 1311. Furthermore, the setting indicator 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in Figure 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (left side in Figure 135) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in Figure 136, when the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, making it difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it is sufficient for at least a portion of the setting board 970, namely the setting keys 971, to face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow distance, but the entire setting board 970 may also face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow distance. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. When the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow distance, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity that would involve manipulating the setting board 970 and changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 while the machine is in operation (i.e., while the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2).

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 (means for making setting changes difficult) is the right frame member 40, but other members may also be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be positioned so that it faces the setting board 970 at a narrow distance when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Alternatively, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main frame 4 may be provided, and when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, this cover may be positioned so that it faces the setting board 970 at a narrow distance.

With the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the distance at which the setting board 970 faces other components such as the right frame member 40 should be shorter than the length of the key head (the key head held during operation) inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 136, the power supply board box 930 is equipped with a power switch 932 for supplying power to the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is equipped with a RAM clear switch 954 for initializing the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with several switches that are not operated during gameplay but can be operated from the back side. The aforementioned power switch 932 and RAM clear switch 954 are located in positions that are visible and operable from the back side. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (and preferably the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 as well) is located in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process and are therefore located in positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden in a way that makes it difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is running, thereby preventing fraudulent activity such as manipulating the setting board 970 and changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 during gameplay. In this way, the switches on the back of the pachinko machine 1 are positioned to achieve both convenience and the prevention of fraudulent activity.

Similarly, since the current settings of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for players in selecting a machine, it is desirable that they remain unknown to the players. Therefore, as shown in Figure 136, similar to the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should be positioned opposite the right frame member 40 at a narrow distance so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not being operated, it is desirable that the setting indicator 974 be turned off to prevent players from knowing the setting value. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a means of obscuring visibility, concealing the display content of the setting indicator 974 and making it difficult to see the display content of the setting indicator 974 (setting status display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 134, with the main frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, a top view of the setting board 970 is as shown in Figures 132(B) and 133(B). In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 are positioned close to the right frame member 40. Therefore, the head of the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971's keyhole interferes with the right frame member 40, preventing the key 975 from being inserted into the setting key 971's keyhole.

Furthermore, the display surface of the setting indicator 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. Therefore, the player cannot see the current setting value of the pachinko machine from the front.

Next, we will explain the process related to changing settings.

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in Figure 137 differs from the initialization process described in Figure 21 in that it performs a RAM clear process when a setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and performs a setting change process within the CPU initial setup process (step S28). Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same steps as in the initialization process described in Figure 21, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled, making it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and determines whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start up) has elapsed (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and whether its output is ON (step S17). If the setting key 971 is operated, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, including the setting value data and game status data (e.g., probability variation state, time reduction state, special and regular symbol retention memory, and information on prize balls), is retained, while all other data is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, excluding the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power outage is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, there is a risk that the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (excluding the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, a check code is used to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, cases in which at least a portion of the RAM 1312 is initialized include operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), power outage flag abnormality where the power outage flag is not set (step S20), RAM abnormality where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and abnormality of the base calculation workpiece (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, if operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game workpiece area and the game stack area) retains data on the setting value and game state (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, retention memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clears all other data, and does not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). If the RAM clear switch is detected to be operated when the power is turned on, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) will be cleared, but the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) will not be cleared. Furthermore, if there is a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) will be cleared, but the game control area 13126 will not be cleared.

Contrary to the diagram, in the case of a power outage flag anomaly, RAM anomaly, or base calculation work anomaly, the validity of the data stored in RAM 1312 cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, the entire RAM area, including the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128, may be cleared. If clearing the entire RAM area in the case of a base calculation work anomaly results in the loss of data indicating the game state, making normal processing impossible, then only the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area should be initialized. Furthermore, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) should be cleared, as described above, but the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be cleared.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 erases data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 under different conditions depending on the type of data (game control area 13126 (set values, game state data), base calculation area 13128). That is, when the RAM clear switch is operated, the backed-up game control area 13126, excluding the set values, is erased, while the set values and base calculation area 13128 are not. If the set values were erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it would be necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clear is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the setting values are not erased when the RAM clear switch is operated.

The processing after step S28 may be performed using either Figure 22 or Figure 102, as needed. The difference between Figure 22 and Figure 102 is the presence or absence of the process (steps S50, S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) when the power is cut off.

Figures 138 and 139 are flowcharts illustrating examples of setting change and setting display processes. Figure 138 shows the process when the setting board 970 is connected to (or integrated with) the dispensing control board 951, and Figure 139 shows the process when the setting board 970 is connected to (or integrated with) the main control board 1310.

First, we will explain the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, as shown in Figure 138(A), work in conjunction.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main frame open switch. However, considering the position of the setting key 971, the main frame 4 must be open from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so this determination of whether the main frame 4 is open may be omitted.

If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a means for generating a state where setting changes are permitted. Other conditions for starting the setting change mode include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 due to touching the handle lever 504, or if a prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit (with a balance), or if there is a balance deposited into the cash dispenser. In these cases, the setting change mode does not need to be started. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (e.g., a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. These conditions may be determined by the main control MPU 1311 after receiving the setting change start command, rather than by the payout control unit 952. In such cases, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the hall, and there is a possibility that a setting change operation is being attempted by a fraudulent player, so it is better not to transition to the setting change mode.

(2) When the setting change mode is started, the dispensing control unit 952 sends a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, it executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. This RAM clear process before the setting change clears the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area), leaving the game state data (e.g., probability change state, time reduction state, special and normal symbol hold memory, and information on prize balls) and clearing all other data, while not clearing the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). Note that the setting value will be set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it does not need to be cleared in this step.

(4) Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in setting change mode. This notification of being in setting change mode involves performing initial operation of the bonus features or displaying a predetermined information on the main LCD display 1600. However, the peripheral control unit 1511 does not necessarily have to perform initial operation of the bonus features. For example, if the main LCD display 1600 is displaying the setting change procedure or status, performing initial operation of the bonus features during a setting change would partially obscure the display on the main LCD display 1600, interfering with the setting change process.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in conjunction with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the function display unit 1400 may display a special type of display that does not normally appear during gameplay (for example, turning off or on all LEDs for special symbol display) to stop the game. Alternatively, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out-balls, thereby stopping the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, thereby stopping the launch of game balls controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a means to disable launching. When the launch of game balls is stopped during the setting change mode, launching game balls during the launch stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the setting value to 0. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected between 1 and 6. A setting value of 0 means that no setting has been made. When the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be exited, and the game (launching of game balls, variable display game, etc.) will not start.

(7) Subsequently, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display unit 974.

(8) The dispensing control unit 952 determines whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the openness of the main frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, this determination only needs to be made at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. Thus, the dispensing control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generation means, determining whether the conditions for setting change are met before confirming the setting change.

(9) Furthermore, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated.

(10) If the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the dispensing control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and displays on the setting indicator 974 that the setting value has been confirmed. The setting value confirmation display may show a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or the confirmed setting value may be displayed blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) Subsequently, the dispensing control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 has been turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned OFF, the setting change mode is terminated, and the dispensing control unit 952 sends a setting change termination command to the main control board 1310. This setting change termination command notifies the main control MPU 1311 of the confirmed setting value.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change completion command from the dispensing control unit 952, it transmits a setting change completion command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change completion command from the main control MPU 1311, it terminates the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 was providing notification during the setting change, that notification also terminates.

Furthermore, the notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or it may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in procedure (5) is considered merely a notification to external parties (players, hall employees), then it is best to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in procedure (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, then it is best to cancel the notification after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting change mode ends. This is because, when a setting change is made, a predetermined display is shown or the game stops for a predetermined period of time, making it easier to detect if a fraudulent player has changed the settings during business hours.

If the launch of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the launch of game balls during the launch stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period.

(15) Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. This RAM clear process after the setting change clears the data of the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), retaining the setting value and game state data (for example, probability change state, time reduction state, retention memory of special and normal symbols, and information on prize balls), while clearing all other data. The base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clear process after the setting change.

Then, exit the settings change mode.

In this manner, when the setting board 970 is connected to the dispensing control board 951 and functions as a sub-board of the dispensing control board 951 (or when the setting board 970 is integrated with the dispensing control board 951), the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951 work together to execute the setting change process.

In the process described above, the dispensing control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may also make this determination. In this case, the signal regarding the operation of the setting key 971 from the dispensing control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted via serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses at a predetermined frequency), or an intermediate potential signal that is neither the power supply voltage nor the ground voltage. This is because, in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971 to activate the setting change mode, it is preferable to transmit the signal regarding the operation of the setting key 971 from the dispensing control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 using a signal that cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminals.

Next, we will explain the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, as shown in Figure 138(B), work in conjunction.

When the setting key 971 is turned ON while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (powered on), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. However, considering the position of the setting key 971, the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so this determination of whether the main frame 4 is open may be omitted.

(2) When the dispensing control unit 952 determines that the main frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2, it sends a setting value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting value request command from the dispensing control unit 952, it reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and sends a setting value notification command to the dispensing control unit 952.

(4) The dispensing control unit 952 displays the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display unit 974.

In the above description, the setting value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) was displayed on the setting indicator 974. However, the payout control unit 952 may store the setting value, and the setting value stored in the payout control unit 952 may be displayed on the setting indicator 974.

Next, the setting change process performed by the main control board 1310, shown in Figure 139(A), will be explained.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a means for generating a state where setting changes are permitted. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main frame open switch. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may send a main frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal from the main frame open detection switch. Alternatively, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal from the main frame open detection switch directly to the main control board 1310. Note that, considering the position of the setting key 971, the main frame 4 must be open from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so the determination of whether the main frame 4 is open may be omitted.

If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 will start the setting change mode. Other conditions for starting the setting change mode include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 due to touching the handle lever 504, or if a prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit (with a balance), or if there is a balance deposited into the cash dispenser. In these cases, the setting change mode does not need to be started. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (e.g., a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such cases, it is presumed that the activity is not maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 by the hall, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent player is attempting to change the settings; therefore, it is better not to transition to the setting change mode.

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311, upon receiving a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, executes a RAM clear process for the time before the setting change. This RAM clear process for the time before the setting change clears the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), leaving the game state data (e.g., probability change state, time reduction state, special and normal symbol hold memory, and information on prize balls) intact, while clearing all other data. The base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value will be set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it does not need to be cleared in this step.

(4) Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in setting change mode. This notification of being in setting change mode involves performing initial operation of the bonus features or displaying a predetermined information on the main LCD display 1600. However, the peripheral control unit 1511 does not necessarily have to perform initial operation of the bonus features. For example, if the main LCD display 1600 is displaying the setting change procedure or status, performing initial operation of the bonus features during a setting change would partially obscure the display on the main LCD display 1600, interfering with the setting change process.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in conjunction with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the function display unit 1400 may display a special type of display that does not normally appear during gameplay (for example, turning off or on all LEDs for special symbol display) to stop the game. Alternatively, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls, thereby stopping the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, thereby stopping the launch of game balls controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a means to disable launching. When the launching of game balls is stopped during the setting change mode, launching game balls during the launch stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the setting value to 0. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected between 1 and 6. A setting value of 0 means that no setting has been made. When the setting value is 0, the setting change mode cannot be exited, and the game (launching of game balls, variable display game, etc.) will not start.

(7) Subsequently, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main frame 4 is also determined in the procedure (1) described above, it is sufficient to determine this at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. Thus, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generation means, determining whether the conditions for setting change are met (in particular, whether a detection signal for the main frame open switch has been input from the payout control board 951) before confirming the setting change.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated.

(10) The main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and displays the confirmation of the setting value on the setting indicator 974 if the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. The setting value confirmation display may show a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or it may blink the confirmed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned OFF, the setting change mode is terminated, and the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change termination command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change completion command from the main control MPU 1311, it terminates the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 was providing notification during the setting change, that notification also terminates.

Furthermore, the notification (including game stop and firing stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends, or it may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in procedure (5) is considered merely a notification to external parties (players, hall employees), then it is best to cancel the notification immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in procedure (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, then it is best to cancel the notification after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting change mode ends. This is because, when a setting change is made, a predetermined display is shown or the game stops for a predetermined period of time, making it easier to detect if a fraudulent player has changed the settings during business hours.

If the launch of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the launch of game balls during the launch stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during that period.

(15) Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. This RAM clear process after the setting change clears the data of the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), retaining the setting value and game state data (for example, probability change state, time reduction state, retention memory of special and normal symbols, and information on prize balls), while clearing all other data. The base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. In other words, unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clear process after the setting change.

Then, exit the settings change mode.

Thus, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a sub-board of the main control board 1310 (or when the setting board 970 is integrated with the main control board 1310), the main control board 1310 receives the detection signal for the main frame release switch from the dispensing control board 951. Therefore, the main control board 1310 alone cannot perform the setting change process; the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951 work together to perform the setting change process.

Next, we will explain the setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the dispensing control board 951, as shown in Figure 139(B), work in conjunction.

When the setting key 971 is turned ON while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (powered on), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. However, considering the position of the setting key 971, the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, so this determination of whether the main frame 4 is open can be omitted.

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the main frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2, it reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change process described in Figures 138(A) and 139(A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, it is advisable to disable the setting change mode and temporarily stop it. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned back on to restart the stopped setting change mode. The restart of the setting change mode can be performed from the point where it stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value = 0, where no setting value is selected).

It is advisable to record the history of setting value changes a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time the setting was confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the setting value history in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM of the RTC provided within the peripheral control unit 1511, as this ensures that the stored contents are backed up even when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Furthermore, the recorded history of setting value changes can be output. For example, the recorded history of setting value changes can be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 through a predetermined operation.

The measurement interval for the base value may be changed when the setting value is changed. That is, when the setting value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the current measurement interval is less than 52,000, the current interval ends and the next interval begins. Since the game performance of the gaming machine changes depending on the setting value, changing the interval when the setting value is changed allows for the calculation of a base value that does not contain a mix of different game performances, and enables tracking of the base value's progression due to changes in the setting value.

Furthermore, if the setpoint is changed, the measurement interval for the base value may be maintained, continuing the current measurement interval. Since the setpoint changes the operating ratio of the conditional device, it is possible to design the system so that the base value does not change significantly when the setpoint is changed. In such cases, there is no need to change the calculation interval for the base value when the setpoint is changed.

Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. Considering the method of operation and the arrangement of the operating means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be accidental, therefore, activating the setting change mode can be considered to reflect the operator's intention. Also, since the contents of the main control RAM 1312, excluding the game state and base value, are cleared in the setting change mode, activating the setting change mode is considered sufficient even if a RAM clear is desired.

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may not be activated, and a RAM clear may be performed. This is because, if both are operated, it is assumed that the operator at least wants a RAM clear. Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, neither the activation of the setting change mode nor the RAM clear may be performed. This is because, from the perspective of file safety against accidental operation, it is preferable not to accept operations where the operator's intention is not clear.

In the RAM clearing procedures (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the special symbol hold memory may be erased. Since the setting value changes the activation rate of the condition device, the result of the random number judgment for the special symbol lottery may change. Therefore, it is preferable to erase the special symbol hold memory and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, while the special symbol lottery (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when a game ball enters the starting slot, the lottery result is determined at the start of the variable display game. Therefore, it is sufficient to determine the random number stored in reserve under the conditions after the setting value has been changed. For this reason, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Furthermore, in the RAM clearing procedure described in steps (3) and (15) above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area that is erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, during the RAM clearing process in setting change mode, the backed-up game control area 13126 (excluding the setting value) is erased (including the game state data), while the setting value and base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because, since setting changes are usually made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, there is no need to maintain game state data (such as probability variation state, time reduction state, special and normal symbol hold memory, and information regarding prize balls) without erasing it.

[12-2. Presentation in pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special Symbol and Special Electric Mechanism Control Processing]
The following describes the details of the processing performed by the main control MPU 1311. First, the special symbol and special electric prize control processing will be explained. Figure 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol and special electric prize control processing. The special symbol and special electric prize control processing is performed in step S86 of the main control timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 will be collectively referred to as start ports. Also, the first big prize port 2005 and the second big prize port 2006 will be collectively referred to simply as big prize ports. Also, the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be collectively referred to simply as special symbols.

In the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, upon receiving a game ball into the start slot, i.e., triggered by a start-up win (fulfillment of the start condition), a random number for jackpot determination is acquired for each start-up memory information (start-up information) where this start condition has been met. It is then determined whether this random number for jackpot determination matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (lottery means). Based on the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state. If the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is met), the game transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. The procedure for the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process will be explained below according to the flowchart shown in Figure 140.

When the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not game ball B has entered the large prize slot (step S100). If game ball B has entered the large prize slot (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the command to specify entry into the large prize slot is set (step S102).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting slot (step S112). This determination is made based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, obtained by reading the presence or absence of detection signals from the first starting slot sensor 3002 or the second starting slot sensor 2511 during the switch input processing in the main control's timer interrupt processing (step S74).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the start-gate entry processing (step S116) when a game ball enters the start-gate (the result of step S114 is "yes"). This processing includes setting the start-gate entry command to be sent when a new game ball enters the start-gate, extracting random numbers for jackpot determination and storing them in a predetermined area, and executing processes for performing special symbol pre-reading animations.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number, which is a game progress state variable that specifies the type of branching process to be executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state memory area of the main control's built-in RAM and is updated in each branching process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the system transitions to the branching process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state memory area. Upon completion of the transitioned branching process, the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process terminates. Note that the values of the game progress state variables stored in the game progress state memory area are game information and are therefore backed up during the main control power-off process.

In step S130, based on the value of the game progress status variable, the following branching processes are executed: waiting for special symbol variation (step S130), processing during special symbol variation (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination (step S134), special symbol miss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening the jackpot opening (step S140), jackpot opening processing (step S142), jackpot closing processing (step S144), or jackpot opening completion interval processing (step S146).

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the entry of game ball B into the starting slot, the special symbol variation display on the special symbol indicator is initiated, and other processes are performed.

In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing is performed to control the display of the special symbol variation. In the special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), based on the entry of a game ball into the starting slot, a determination is made as to whether the confirmed-stopped special symbol will trigger a jackpot game state.

In the special symbol miss stop processing (step S136), if a jackpot game state is not generated, the display of the special symbol changes is stopped and a notification is issued. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), if a jackpot game state is generated, the display of the special symbol changes is stopped and a notification is issued.

In the pre-opening interval processing (step S140), processing is performed to generate a jackpot game state and notify the player that the jackpot operation is about to begin. In the jackpot opening processing (step S142), processing related to the jackpot operation is performed to open the jackpot openings, making it easier for game balls to enter each jackpot opening.

In the large prize slot closure process (step S144), processing related to the jackpot operation is performed by closing the large prize slots from an open state to a closed state, making it difficult for game balls to enter each large prize slot. In the prize slot opening completion interval processing (step S146), processing is performed to notify the player when the jackpot operation has finished.

[12-2-2. Processing while waiting for special symbol changes]
Next, we will explain in detail the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process. Figure 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed when the special symbol variation display has not been performed, and if the variation display is on hold, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is pending (step S420). Specifically, it determines whether or not the number of balls pending special symbol activation is zero. Note that the number of balls pending special symbol activation is stored for each activation port if multiple activation ports are provided. If the special symbol variation is not pending (the result of step S420 is "no"), the special symbol variation display is not started, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation display is pending (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the pending ball count specification command as command data (step S438).

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 executes the special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is performed based on the random number used for jackpot determination obtained when the ball enters the starting slot.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In this process, the variation pattern is set based on the results of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later in Figure 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special pattern variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special pattern identification flag is set as the command value (step S452). Furthermore, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as the lower command data (step S458). Then, the variation type type value is obtained from the variation type type area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is calculated by adding the variation type type value to the command value set in step S452 (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the pattern type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Furthermore, it sets the variable state specification command in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created through the above process is set in the command buffer. The command specifying the number of reserved balls, set in the command buffer, is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Setting Process]
Next, we will explain in detail the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is the process for setting the variation pattern in the display of the special symbol variation. Figure 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls reserved for special symbol activation (step S530). The number of balls reserved for special symbol activation is stored in the special symbol activation ball reservation buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process to select a variation pattern for the special symbol based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol activation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later in Figure 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection judgment process (step S544). Then, it searches for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process to select a variation type defined for the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type value obtained through the variation type determination process is then set (step S550).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches for the variable time addition value corresponding to the variable type value from the variable time addition value data (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variable type, for example, the addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo-consecutive wins. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variable time addition value found in step S552 to the reference variable time value found in step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). Finally, the final variable time is stored in the special symbol/electric mechanism operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variable pattern setting process ends.

[12-2-4. Variation Pattern Selection Determination Process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be explained. Figure 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the variable information source table based on the variable table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value used to select (obtain) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The variable information source table is a data table that stores table information for referencing wins (win variable selection information status table), losses (loss variable selection information status table), reach (reach variable selection information status table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table), and variable type (variation type determination data table), depending on the game state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning judgment value to derive the result of the special lottery (step S346). It determines whether a jackpot has been won by checking whether the winning judgment value matches the jackpot value (step S350). If a jackpot has been won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the type of jackpot symbol are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs a variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number is obtained from the jackpot variation selection information type table to determine the variation pattern selection value data table. Based on the obtained variation information number, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a random number 1 for the variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big or small prize (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variation display corresponding to the start prize (step S372).

If the main control MPU 1311 does not generate a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), it obtains a random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the loss fluctuation selection information retention table based on the number of reserved balls (step S376).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 generates a "reach" in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), it obtains a random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process (step S388) based on the variation pattern random number 1 obtained in step S360, step S378, or step S382. Then, it obtains a variation pattern selection value data table through the variation information number search process and obtains a variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, it executes a variation information number search process (step S394) based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table. Based on the result of the variation information number search process, it selects a variation pattern (step S396) and terminates this process.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two stages using two types of random numbers: Random Number 1 for Variation Patterns (steps S360, S372, S378) and Random Number 2 for Variation Patterns (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (a group of variation patterns such as "○○-type reach") is selected based on Random Number 1 for Variation Patterns. Furthermore, based on Random Number 2 for Variation Patterns, the final variation pattern to be displayed (the value set in the variation pattern command) is selected from the group of variation patterns selected by Random Number 1. Note that the method is not limited to a two-stage selection; a method with three or more stages is also possible, or the variation pattern may be selected directly using a single Random Number for Variation Patterns.

[12-3. Explanation of the effects in pachinko machines with setting functions]
The following describes the effects in a pachinko machine 1 that has a setting function. Specifically, it describes the setting-indicating effects that suggest the current setting. In a pachinko machine 1 with a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the more game balls are paid out for each special lottery round. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot in a non-probability-increasing state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270, setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since players want to play on a pachinko machine 1 with the highest possible setting, the inclusion of setting-indicating effects increases their motivation to play.

In this chapter, for the sake of clarity, the main control MPU 1311 will be assumed to directly select a variation pattern using a single random number in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 will perform the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state (whether it is in a time-saving state (a state where time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state) and the result of the special lottery (whether it is a jackpot or a miss). If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a random number for the variation pattern and selects a variation pattern from the selected variation pattern table based on the obtained random number and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table. If the result of the special lottery is a miss, the MPU further determines whether a reach has occurred, obtains a random number for the variation pattern, and selects a variation pattern from the selected variation pattern table based on the obtained random number and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table.

Figure 144(A) shows an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is normal and the special lottery result is a loss. Figure 144(B) shows an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is normal and the special lottery result is a jackpot.

The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding performance content column, and a random number distribution column for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern type column stores information that identifies the type of variation pattern for identification within the table. The variation time column stores information that identifies the variation time for the corresponding variation pattern type. The corresponding performance content column stores information that identifies the performance content executed for the corresponding variation pattern.

The random number distribution field for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution for which the corresponding variation pattern is selected, for each setting. Furthermore, in the variation pattern table selected when the special draw result is a loss (i.e., the variation pattern table in Figure 144(A) and Figure 149(A) described later), the random number distribution field for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution for which the corresponding variation pattern is selected, for both when a reach occurs and when a reach does not occur, for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion animations performed after the provisional display of special lottery results]
First, we will explain the setting suggestion effects for the losing fluctuation patterns stored in the fluctuation pattern table in Figure 144(A). First, we will explain the effects performed in losing fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, using Figure 144 as well.

Figure 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). In the variation of losing variation pattern 20, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a provisional display indicating a high probability that the special lottery result is a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. In contrast, in the variations of losing variation patterns 25-29, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a provisional display indicating a high probability that the special lottery result is a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600, followed by a setting suggestion effect, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss.

Thus, in fluctuation patterns 25-29, after a provisional display indicating a high probability of a losing special lottery result is shown, the setting suggestion animation is executed. Even after the provisional display is shown, the player can maintain their anticipation and expectation for the subsequent setting suggestion animation. Furthermore, if the setting suggestion animation occurs during a losing fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, it can suppress the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result and, consequently, enhance their sense of excitement.

Furthermore, in the variation of losing variation pattern 24, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a provisional display indicating a high probability that the special lottery result is a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600. Then, a false effect suggesting the execution of a setting suggestion effect is performed, but the setting suggestion effect itself is not performed. Instead, a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600.

Furthermore, an SP Reach is a reach animation that is more likely to be selected when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and less likely to be selected when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is high during a spin in which an SP Reach is performed.

The following describes in detail the effects performed in the losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29. Note that, in addition to the content described below, each effect may also simultaneously perform sound output from various speakers, illumination from various lamps, operation of various movable parts, and/or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In losing spin patterns 20 and 24-29, a pre-reach animation is performed first. During the pre-reach animation, all decorative symbols on the main LCD display 1600 change. Subsequently, in losing spin patterns 20 and 24-29, the game progresses to a normal reach animation. During the normal reach animation, the decorative symbols on the main LCD display 1600 enter a reach state. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (e.g., left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol), the left and right symbols stop as the same symbol, while the middle symbol remains in a changing state.

Next, in losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the game progresses to SP Reach 1, and the first half of SP Reach 1's presentation is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main LCD display 1600, and they engage in a rock-paper-scissors match. In the first half of SP Reach 1's presentation in losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the main LCD display 1600 displays a scene where the main character loses the rock-paper-scissors match to the enemy character. During SP Reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed smaller and closer to the periphery of the main LCD display 1600 compared to, for example, the pre-reach presentation and the normal reach presentation.

Next, in losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29, the game progresses to the second half of the SP Reach 1 sequence. In the second half of the SP Reach 1 sequence in losing variation patterns 20 and 24-29, for example, a so-called revival sequence is performed. For example, at the start of the second half sequence, the protagonist's voice, such as "Not yet!", is output from various speakers, and on the main LCD display 1600, a sequence is executed showing the protagonist character and the enemy character playing rock-paper-scissors again. In the second half of the SP Reach 1 sequence in losing variation patterns 24-29, the main LCD display 1600 executes a sequence showing the protagonist character losing to the enemy character in rock-paper-scissors again.

Next, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is executed on the main LCD display 1600. Specifically, for example, on the main LCD display 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in a losing state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the symbols that stopped in the reach state, but the middle symbol is different from those identical symbols) is displayed in a manner that appears to be fluctuating in a small range.

Next, in losing variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, without any other effects, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result was a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600. In losing variation pattern 24, after the provisional display, a false setting suggestion effect is performed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result was a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600. In contrast, in losing variation patterns 25 to 29, a setting suggestion effect is performed after the provisional display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result was a loss is shown on the main LCD display 1600. In the confirmation display, for example, the same combination of decorative symbols as the one displayed in the provisional display is displayed on the main LCD display 1600 in a completely stopped state. In both the provisional and confirmation displays, the decorative symbols are displayed, for example, in the center of the main LCD display 1600, at the same size as during the pre-reach effect and normal reach effect.

In the false indication of settings in the losing variation pattern 24, for example, the main LCD display 1600 will execute an animation in which one main character spots two enemy characters and chases after them but fails to catch them. As shown in the distribution of losing variation pattern 24 in Figure 144(A), it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which the false indication of settings is executed be equal or approximately equal across all settings. If the distribution is not equal, the false indication of settings will inadvertently suggest the setting.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the proportion of losing variation patterns 24 within the total distribution of variations in which SP Reach 1 is executed be low (for example, 20% or less). If this proportion is high, false indications of the settings will occur frequently when SP Reach 1 is reached, potentially diminishing the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of setting indications.

In the setting suggestion sequences for losing variation patterns 25-29, for example, the main LCD display 1600 may show a sequence where one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases after them and captures them, and then the three characters play rock-paper-scissors.

In the setting suggestion animation for losing variation pattern 25, a scene is performed where three people play rock-paper-scissors and all three throw rock, resulting in a tie. Furthermore, in Figure 144(A), losing variation pattern 25 is determined to occur only in low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). In other words, the setting suggestion animation in losing variation pattern 25 confirms that a low setting is being played.

In the example shown in Figure 144(A), the distribution of losing variation pattern 25 is the same as the distribution of losing variation pattern 26, etc., in high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). However, since a low-setting confirmation演出 (performance/animation) may cause players to stop playing early, the distribution of losing variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmation performances in other settings, or losing variation pattern 25 may not even exist.

In the setting suggestion animation for the losing variation pattern 26, a scene is performed where three people play rock-paper-scissors and all three throw scissors, resulting in a tie. Furthermore, in Figure 144(A), the losing variation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only in high-setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). In other words, the setting suggestion animation in the losing variation pattern 26 is an animation that confirms a high setting.

In the setting suggestion animation for the losing variation pattern 27, an animation is performed in which three people play rock-paper-scissors and all three players choose paper, resulting in a tie. Furthermore, in Figure 144(A), the losing variation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). In other words, the setting suggestion animation in the losing variation pattern 27 confirms that an even-numbered setting is selected.

In the setting suggestion animation for the losing variation pattern 28, an animation is performed in which three people play rock-paper-scissors and all three play different hands, resulting in a tie. Furthermore, in Figure 144(A), the losing variation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). In other words, the setting suggestion animation in the losing variation pattern 28 confirms that an odd-numbered setting is selected.

Furthermore, if, for example, odd-numbered and even-numbered settings have different characteristics, incorporating the aforementioned odd-numbered setting confirmation animation or even-numbered setting confirmation animation can attract the player's interest in the animation.

Specifically, for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state increases in the order of setting 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, and 1 (6 being the highest, 1 being the lowest), the proportion of jackpots with a bonus round increases in the order of setting 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, and 2 (5 being the highest, 2 being the lowest), and the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls entering the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 increases in the order of setting 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 (6 being the highest, 1 being the lowest). Thus, the jackpot winning probability and bonus round ratio for each setting are determined as follows.

In this case, even-numbered settings, compared to odd-numbered settings, have a higher probability of winning a jackpot in normal mode, but a lower probability of entering a bonus round. That is, the number of game balls required to win the initial jackpot tends to be lower, but the total number of game balls obtained in a single bonus round from the initial jackpot also tends to be lower. On the other hand, odd-numbered settings, compared to even-numbered settings, have a lower probability of winning a jackpot in normal mode, but a higher probability of entering a bonus round. That is, the number of game balls required to win the initial jackpot tends to be higher, but the total number of game balls obtained in a single bonus round from the initial jackpot tends to be higher. In such cases, it is possible that some players will prefer the payout tendencies of even-numbered settings, while others will prefer the payout tendencies of odd-numbered settings, leading to increased player interest in odd-numbered or even-numbered setting confirmation animations. Furthermore, even-numbered settings may have characteristics such as a higher probability of winning a jackpot in normal mode compared to odd-numbered settings, but a higher tendency to select jackpots with fewer rounds.

In the aforementioned losing spin patterns 25-29, the animation leading up to the start of the setting suggestion animation is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion animation differs (the results of the three-person rock-paper-scissors match differ). It is desirable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors match animation be used only in losing spin patterns 25-29. This allows the player to recognize that the setting suggestion animation has started when the three-person rock-paper-scissors match animation begins, thus increasing their sense of excitement.

Furthermore, for example, while the losing variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an animation confirming a high setting is executed, it may also be a variation pattern in which an animation suggesting a high probability of a high setting is executed. Specifically, for example, if the low setting also has a distribution of variation pattern 25, and that distribution is lower than the distribution of variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), then the animation in the losing variation pattern 25 will not be an animation confirming a high setting, but rather an animation suggesting a high probability of a high setting.

Furthermore, in addition to the variation patterns that trigger animations confirming a high setting, there may also be variation patterns that trigger animations suggesting a high probability of a high setting, as described above. The same applies to animations confirming low settings, odd-numbered settings, even-numbered settings, and the highest setting.

Furthermore, according to the variation pattern table in Figure 144(B) (variation pattern table for normal play and when a jackpot is won), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, no setting-indicating effects other than the winning variation pattern 34, which confirms the highest setting, are executed. Also, the distribution of variation patterns in which no setting-indicating effects are executed is higher compared to when the special lottery result is a loss. As a result, setting-indicating effects are primarily executed when the special lottery result is a loss, allowing players to experience a sense of anticipation even in such cases.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effects using shortened fluctuations]
The following will explain the non-winning variation pattern 30, using Figure 146 as well. Figure 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in non-winning variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A).

In losing variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a shortened variation is executed. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation with a shorter variation time compared to other variation patterns, in which all decorative symbols stop without developing into a reach state after the variation of the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display 1600 begins. In a normal variation, the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal display 1600 stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in a shortened variation, all decorative symbols may stop simultaneously.

Next, in losing variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating a high probability of a losing result in the special lottery will be shown, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is indeed a losing result. The explanations for the provisional and confirmed displays are the same as those described above and will therefore be omitted.

The non-standard variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation times of all other variation patterns in which shortened variations, such as non-standard variation patterns 1 and 2, are performed. In the example in Figure 144(A), the variation time of non-standard variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of non-standard variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of non-standard variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. Furthermore, in Figure 144(A), non-standard variation pattern 30 is configured to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when non-standard variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

Furthermore, the distribution of the losing variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which a shortened variation is performed and which suggests a setting, should be extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns in which a shortened variation is performed (for example, less than 10% of the minimum distribution of the other variation patterns). Also, it is desirable that the execution times of the provisional display and the confirmed display are the same for each variation pattern in which a shortened variation is performed, with only the duration of the shortened variation differing. Furthermore, it is desirable that the difference between the variation duration of the losing variation pattern 30 and the variation duration of other variation patterns in which a shortened variation is performed be within a range that is recognizable to the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more).

As a result, when a shortened variation is executed, the player anticipates a variation time similar to the frequently occurring losing variation patterns 1 and 2. However, when losing variation pattern 30 is executed, the player can recognize that the variation time differs from what was expected, allowing them to enjoy the spectacle that confirms the highest setting. In particular, in the example of Figure 144(A), variation patterns including shortened variations are only selected when there is a no-reach loss. Therefore, when a shortened variation is executed, the player's sense of anticipation diminishes, and they lose interest in it. However, by executing a setting-suggesting spectacle using shortened variations in this way, the player can maintain a sense of anticipation even for shortened variations that are only selected when there is a no-reach loss, thus preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in losing variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the content displayed on the main LCD display device 1600 is the same, but only the duration of the shortened variation differs. This allows players to concentrate on the animation so as not to miss the animation confirming the highest setting.

Furthermore, while the "out-of-bounds" variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the highest setting is determined and a shortened variation is executed, there may also be variation patterns for each setting other than the highest setting in which that setting is determined and a shortened variation is executed. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each such variation pattern differs from the variation time of the other out-of-bounds variation patterns in which a shortened variation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion animations performed before the provisional display of special lottery results]
The following will explain the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, using Figure 147 as well. Figure 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). In Figure 144, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are set to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

In the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, for example, Special Movie 1 is played on the main LCD display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. Special Movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, meaning it is an effect that confirms the highest setting.

In losing variation pattern 31, after the end of Special Movie 1, a provisional display indicating a high probability of a losing result is shown, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result. In winning variation pattern 34, after the end of Special Movie 1, a provisional display indicating a winning result is shown, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning result.

Unlike losing patterns 25-30, the losing pattern 31 and winning pattern 34 begin the setting suggestion animation before the provisional display (specifically, for example, simultaneously with the start of the animation). This allows players to experience the excitement of waiting for the jackpot result while knowing that the highest setting is confirmed. Furthermore, especially when the display time of Special Movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it allows players to demonstrate to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, thereby giving players a sense of superiority over other players, and making it easier for the hall to demonstrate to other players that the highest setting is being used.

[12-7. Setting-indicating effects that guarantee a big win or a high setting]
The following will explain the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, using Figure 148 as well. Figure 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of Figure 144(A). In Figure 144(A), the losing variation pattern 32 is set to be distributed only in high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is confirmed.

In the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, for example, Special Movie 2 is played on the main LCD display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of the variation. Special Movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In losing variation pattern 32, after the end of Special Movie 2, a provisional display indicating a high probability of a losing result is shown, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result. In winning variation pattern 35, after the end of Special Movie 2, a provisional display indicating a winning result is shown, followed by a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is a winning result.

Therefore, if Special Movie 2 occurs, either a high setting or a big win in that spin is confirmed. In other words, if the special lottery result is a loss after Special Movie 2 occurs, a high setting is confirmed. This allows the player to mitigate disappointment from a loss in the special lottery and, consequently, experience a sense of exhilaration from the confirmed high setting.

Furthermore, especially if the Special Movie 2 display time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), players can feel a sense of superiority over other players. Moreover, if Special Movie 2 plays and the special lottery result is a loss, it becomes easier for the arcade to advertise to other players that they are using a high-setting machine.

[12-8. Setting suggestion effects during time-saving mode]
The following describes the variation patterns selected when the game state is in a time-saving state. Figure 149(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is in a time-saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. Figure 149(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is in a time-saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In the example shown in Figure 149(A), the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of losing variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of losing variation pattern 2 when a reach is not achieved. Furthermore, the variation time for losing variation pattern 2 is shorter than that for losing variation pattern 3. For example, if a higher setting results in a higher probability of winning a jackpot, and assuming the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, then a higher setting would make it easier to win a jackpot in a shorter time, increasing the number of game balls dispensed per unit time, which could lead to a burden on the arcade.

However, as shown in the example in Figure 149(A), the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of variation patterns with longer variation times, thus equalizing the number of game balls paid out per unit time by a jackpot for each setting. Furthermore, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the long-duration losing variation pattern 3 among the variation patterns including shortened variations; therefore, losing variation pattern 3 can also function as a variation pattern that suggests a high setting.

Furthermore, even when a near-miss occurs, the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of the long-duration losing variation pattern 11, and the smaller the distribution of the short-duration losing variation pattern 12. Similarly, when a jackpot is won, the higher the setting, the greater the distribution of the long-duration winning variation pattern 2, and the smaller the distribution of the short-duration winning variation pattern 3.

As mentioned above, for example, if a higher setting results in a higher probability of winning a jackpot, and assuming the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, then a higher setting makes it easier to win a jackpot in a shorter time. In other words, a lower setting means it takes longer to win a jackpot, and more game balls are launched before a jackpot is won. For example, if a lower setting has a higher distribution of variation patterns with longer variation times, and a lower selection rate for variation patterns with shorter variation times, then a player who stops launching game balls during a variation can equalize the number of game balls launched per unit time for each setting.

Furthermore, in the various setting indication effects described in this chapter, a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is indicated. This predetermined sound effect and light effect may be exclusive to the setting indication effect. In particular, in setting indication effects that confirm a high setting or the highest setting, it is desirable that a predetermined sound effect and a predetermined light effect be output or executed only during that setting indication effect.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of fluctuation patterns that indicate a high setting or the highest setting, or suggest a high probability of such a setting, be extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of these fluctuation patterns is high, players may lose their sense of anticipation and, consequently, stop playing prematurely if they do not see the high-setting or highest-setting suggestion effects, even if they have only played for a short time.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of fluctuation patterns that indicate a low or minimum setting, or suggest a high probability of such a setting, be extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of these fluctuation patterns is high, low-setting or minimum-setting suggestion effects will be executed frequently, potentially causing players to lose confidence and, consequently, to stop playing prematurely.

Furthermore, while we have described setting suggestion animations that indicate setting groups such as high settings, low settings, highest settings, odd settings, and even settings, the setting groups in setting suggestion animations are not limited to these. Setting suggestion animations may be performed for any group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings, or there may be a group consisting only of setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
Figure 150 shows an example of the main control board 1310 being mounted. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown with solid lines, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown with dotted lines.

In the previous explanation, the setting board 970 was connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquired the operating status of each switch and controlled the display of the setting indicator 974. However, in the following explanation, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operating status of each switch and controls the display of the setting indicator 974.

Figure 150(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and is designed to house the main control board 1310 in a sealed manner, making it impossible to open without damaging it once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

Figure 150(B) shows the main control board 1310 and setting board 970 housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in Figure 150(B), the main control board 1310 has a main control MPU 1311 and driver circuits (not shown), as well as a base indicator 1317, an indicator switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954. Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the dispensing control board 951 or the power supply board) instead of the main control board 1310. In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, two operating units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger a RAM clear are provided within the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased differs depending on whether only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is also operated.

The setting board 970 is located adjacent to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to enable signal transmission. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by directly connecting the boards using connectors or by using wires. The setting board 970 is equipped with a setting key 971 for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and a setting indicator 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming the changed setting value may also be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

Alternatively, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may communicate serially, and the driver circuit for the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted in a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 during the initialization process (Figures 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code specific to each pachinko machine manufacturer may be set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads and verifies the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 1. In other words, although it is possible to launch game balls towards the game area 5a, no prize balls will be dispensed even if they enter the prize pockets, and the variable display game will not be executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or a serial number may be set for each pachinko machine. The method for setting the authentication code may be, for example, by setting the authentication code using DIP switches, jumper wires, jumper pins, or short-circuiting patterns on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit (for example, a small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)) with the authentication code set may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by having the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 output different signals to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 can recognize whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port in the interface circuit 1331 of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to that port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (each model), it is possible to prevent the incorrect setting board 970 from being installed in the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970.

Figure 150(C) shows the main control board 1310 and dummy board 979 housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As mentioned earlier, in recent years, some pachinko machines (1) have a function to set their game performance. This setting function allows for changes to the machine's performance related to the prize balls won by the player, such as the probability of winning a jackpot in special symbol variation display games. This allows the performance of the pachinko machine (1) to be modified according to the hall's operating policy. On the other hand, some halls believe that conventional pachinko machines without a setting function are sufficient and that the setting function is unnecessary. Therefore, pachinko machine manufacturers need to design and produce both pachinko machines with and without a setting function. There is a need to standardize the specifications of pachinko machines to efficiently design and produce both types of machines.

Therefore, in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a setting function, a dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be produced in the same way as when the setting board 970 is mounted. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 can be shared between pachinko machines without a setting function and those with a setting function.

The dummy circuit board 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 or the setting indicator 974 that are mounted on the setting board 970, but it may have patterns for mounting these devices. That is, the dummy circuit board 979 has patterns for mounting devices, but no devices are mounted on those patterns.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed circuit board; it may be a component (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Furthermore, since the driver circuit for the setting indicator 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit for the setting indicator 974 should be terminated by a dummy resistor on the dummy board 979, rather than being open or ground. This prevents damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Also, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 communicate serially, the dummy board 979 should terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When a dummy circuit board 979 is installed, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. Alternatively, a movable small door that covers the hole 971A may be provided in the main control board box 1320, operable from the inside but not from the outside. This allows for the common use of the main control board box 1320 between pachinko machines with and without setting functions.

Furthermore, the dummy board 979, described later, may also have an authentication code set for authentication by the main control board 1310. Alternatively, the dummy board 979 may not require authentication by the main control board 1310 and therefore does not need an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may communicate serially, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations in the operating mechanisms implemented on the setting board 970, as described above, are summarized as follows:

(1) Setting change switch 972 present, setting confirmation switch 973 present In this case, insert key 975 into setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while also pressing RAM clear switch 954), then operate the power switch of pachinko machine 1 to turn on the power. Then, operate setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, and then operate setting confirmation switch 973.

(2) Setting change switch 972 present, setting confirmation switch 973 absent In this case, insert key 975 into setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while also pressing RAM clear switch 954), then operate the power switch of pachinko machine 1 to turn on the power. Then, operate setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, and then return setting key 971 to the normal position.

(3) No setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while also pressing the RAM clear switch 954), then turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 1. Then, operate the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, and then operate the setting confirmation switch 973. Alternatively, instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, you may turn the setting key 971 to the right to select the setting value to be set.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while also pressing the RAM clear switch 954), then turn on the power switch of the pachinko machine 1. Then, operate the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, and then return the setting key 971 to the normal position. Alternatively, instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, you may turn the setting key 971 to the right to select the setting value to be set.

Figures 151 and 152 show another example of the main control board 1310's implementation. In these figures, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown with solid lines, and the internal configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown with dotted lines.

The implementation examples shown in Figures 151 and 152 differ from the implementation example shown in Figure 150 in that the main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321.

Figure 151(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. Similar to the previous description, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and houses the main control board 1310 in a sealed manner, making it impossible to open without damaging it once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 976A for operating the setting mode switch 976 for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode.

The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is equipped with a key unit 1322. By inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, exposing the hole 976A and allowing operation of the setting mode switch 976.

As shown in Figure 152(A), in the normal state where the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bolt 1323 is in its maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322. The bolt 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324, and the bolt 1323 and receiving seat 1324 engage, fixing the small door 1321 in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 152(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bolt 1323 retracts from its maximum protruding position, disengaging the bolt 1323 from the receiving seat 1324, and the small door 1321 can be opened using the hinge 1325 as an axis. When the small door 1321 is in the open state (Figure 152(B)), the hole 976A is exposed, and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

Figure 153 shows yet another implementation example of the main control board 1310. In the implementation example shown in Figure 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is released from the main frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) becomes operable.

In other words, in the normal state where the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed to the back side of the main frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main frame base 600, exposing the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 to the back side, and the setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in Figure 151(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin that can seal the main control board 1310 in a way that prevents it from being opened without being damaged once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 976A for operating the setting mode switch 976 for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, in addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. The RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) instead of the main control board 1310. In this case, the hole 954A is not provided in the main control board box 1320.

The setting board 970 is located adjacent to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted between them. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by directly connecting the boards using connectors or by connecting them with wires. The setting board 970 is equipped with a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to setting change mode, and a setting indicator 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming the changed setting value may also be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of the configuration change process]
Figure 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in Figure 154 differs from the initialization process described in Figure 101 in that it performs a RAM clear process (steps S17 and S30) when the setting key 971 is operated. The same reference numerals are used for the same steps as in the initialization process described in Figures 21 and 101, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization by executing the main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built into the main control MPU 1311 to write-enabled mode, making it possible to write to RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and determines whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start up) has elapsed (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

Furthermore, the RAM clear switch 954 should be detected immediately after power-on (for example, before step S12), the detection result should be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value should be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if it is operated only for a short time after power-on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and whether its output is ON (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30, and a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is operated, that is, if both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated and the power is turned on, the system transitions to setting change mode. In other words, since operation of two switches and the power switch are required to start setting change mode, accidental activation of setting change mode can be prevented.

In setting change mode, the setting value is first displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for display on the setting display 974. Then, it outputs a security signal (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. However, it is extremely rare for the pachinko machine 1 to enter setting change mode during gameplay, and since this could indicate fraudulent activity, the hall computer should be notified if the machine enters setting change mode during business hours.

The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time from the start of the configuration change mode, from the start to the end of the configuration change mode, or from the start of the configuration change mode until a predetermined period after the end of the configuration change mode. Outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the configuration change mode extends the period during which anomalies can be detected, thereby increasing security.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed based on whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62). It then changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972 and writes it to the main control RAM 1312 (step S63). For example, if the setting change switch 972 is a push-button switch, pressing the setting change switch 972 once changes the setting value by one step. Similarly, if the setting key 971 also functions as the setting change switch 972, turning the setting key 971 to the right once changes the setting value by one step. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates data to display the changed setting value on the setting indicator 974 (step S64).

Subsequently, a decision is made to exit the setting change mode and confirm the setting value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is exited and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be exited by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be exited triggered by the operation of other switches or sensors provided on the pachinko machine 1.

In the process described above, after the setting change mode ends, or if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not ON, the process proceeds to step S30. However, it may also proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20), and whether the checksums match (step S22). If the power outage flag is not set and the checksums do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. Note that if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not ON, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, the system deletes all data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, retaining the setting value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the game state data (e.g., probability change state, time reduction state, special and normal symbol retention memory, and information regarding prize balls), and proceeds to step S24. Note that the game state data may be deleted without being retained. In this case, the memory area deleted by the RAM area deleted after the setting change operation and the memory area deleted by the RAM clear operation will be the same.

On the other hand, if no operation to exit the setting change mode is detected, the process returns to step S62, and then a setting change operation is detected.

Furthermore, if no operation of the setting key 971 is detected in step S17, in step S30, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted, leaving only the setting value data and the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the process proceeds to step S24.

Furthermore, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and instead determines whether the power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (except for the base calculation area 13128) (step S30) and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power outage flag and compares (verifies) the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power outage with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, there is a risk that the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is incorrect. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (excluding the base calculation area 13128) (step S30) and proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses a check code to determine if the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) is functioning correctly. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are cases in which at least a portion of the RAM 1312 is initialized, including operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), a power outage flag abnormality where the power outage flag is not set (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation workpiece (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, if operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game workpiece area and the game stack area) retains data on the setting value and game state (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, retention memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls), clears all other data, and does not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). If the RAM clear switch 954 is detected to have been operated when the power is turned on, but the setting key 971 is not detected to have been operated, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) is cleared, but the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Furthermore, if there is a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Contrary to the diagram, in the case of a power outage flag anomaly, RAM anomaly, or base calculation work anomaly, the validity of the data stored in RAM 1312 cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, the entire RAM area, including the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128, may be cleared. If clearing the entire RAM area in the case of a base calculation work anomaly results in the loss of data indicating the game state, making normal processing impossible, then only the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area should be initialized. Furthermore, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and game stack area) should be cleared, as described above, but the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be cleared.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 erases data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 under different conditions depending on the type of data (game control area 13126 (set values, game state data), base calculation area 13128). That is, when the RAM clear switch is operated, the backed-up game control area 13126, excluding the set values, is erased, while the set values and base calculation area 13128 are not. If the set values were erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it would be necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clear is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the setting values are not erased when the RAM clear switch is operated.

The processing after step S28 may be performed using either Figure 22 or Figure 102, as needed. The difference between Figure 22 and Figure 102 is the presence or absence of the process (steps S50, S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation region 13128) when the power is cut off.

The initialization process described above does not perform a setting confirmation process; instead, it is performed in a setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (Figures 155 and 156). However, the setting confirmation process may also be performed during the initialization process. Performing the setting confirmation process during the initialization process allows setting confirmation to be permitted only when the power is turned on, preventing accidental confirmation of the setting value during operation of the pachinko machine 1.

In this case, in addition to the setting key 971, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push-button switch) may be provided (the setting change switch 972 may also function as the setting confirmation operation unit). If the setting confirmation operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data is generated for display on the setting indicator 974, and the setting value is displayed on the setting indicator 974. In this case as well, it is advisable to output a security signal along with the display of the setting value.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, if the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). In other words, the main control MPU 1311 postpones the RAM clear process and executes it after a predetermined condition is met (end of setting change mode). During the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to remember when to execute the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The above describes in detail how to clear (initialize) the main control RAM 1312. Next, we will explain how to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may also be cleared at the same time. Alternatively, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may not be cleared. Furthermore, the operation can be used to switch whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit is cleared. For example, if the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the power is turned on, the RAM of both the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will be cleared. If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated while the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 will be cleared, but the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will not be cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, it is possible to clear a portion of the main control RAM 1312 while leaving the RAM of the payout control unit 952 intact.

Furthermore, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there may be a delay between the timing of the clearing of the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952, depending on whether the setting key 971 is operated or not. Specifically, if the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, the payout control unit 952 immediately clears its RAM upon detecting the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operation), it may occur that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 is not.

Furthermore, even in pachinko machines 1 where the RAM clear switch 954 is located not only on the main control board 1310, but also on the payout control board 951 or the power supply board 931, it is desirable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 be cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the power is turned on when changing the setting value. That is, rather than the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM in response to a RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and then determines whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Providing the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being able to accommodate various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of the configuration confirmation process]
Figure 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for a pachinko machine in this embodiment.

The timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 155 differs from the timer interrupt processing described in Figure 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is added instead of the bonus ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the bonus ratio calculation and display process in step S89 is deleted. Additionally, a setting confirmation process (step S802) is added to display a setting value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating rate of the condition device). Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described in Figures 23 and 104, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first setting the RBS (Register Bank Selection Flag) in the program status word to 1, and then switching the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, updates the base calculation area 13128 (see Figure 103) of the main control's built-in RAM 1312, and calculates the base value (step S801; see Figures 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is best to execute it in an earlier order to ensure it is executed reliably with each timer interrupt.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following: frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control processing (step S88).

Subsequently, a setting confirmation process (step S802) is performed to display the setting value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1. During the setting confirmation process, a hall employee performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display unit 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using Figure 156.

Next, the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Lastly, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns to) the register bank. Once these processes are complete, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the system returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process for a pachinko machine in this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 155).

In the setting confirmation process, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in Figure 154). If it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation, and the current setting can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is returned to its normal position. Therefore, data is generated to prevent the display of the setting value, and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display conditions are met (step S8062).

The setting display conditions are determined by the output of the frame release switch, which determines whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Since the setting key 971 is located on the back of the pachinko machine 1, it cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, it is better not to display the setting. Furthermore, since the setting display unit 974 is located on the back of the pachinko machine 1, it cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and therefore there is no need to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. Alternatively, display conditions may be set to allow display only at specific times. For example, the set position may be displayed only for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the power is turned on. In this case, a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or the initial CPU settings in step S28) should be operated, and the set value should be displayed until the timer expires.

Furthermore, setting display conditions may be established to allow the display of the set value under specific game states. For example, the setting display conditions may be disabled during special symbol variation displays or jackpot gameplay. That is, setting display conditions may be established to allow the display of the set value during periods other than special symbol variation and jackpot gameplay. Note that the setting value may also be disabled during game states other than those mentioned above. In this case, if the setting key is operated during a special symbol variation game or jackpot game, the setting value may be displayed at the time the special symbol variation game or jackpot game ends.

When it is determined that the setting display conditions are met, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting the security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. However, it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during gameplay, and this can sometimes be a precursor to fraudulent activity. Therefore, if a setting check operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time from the start of setting value display, from the start to the end of setting value display, or from the start of setting value display until a predetermined period after the end of setting value display. Outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of setting value display extends the period during which anomalies can be detected, thereby increasing security.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is sent when the setting display conditions are met. However, even if the setting display conditions are not met, a security signal may be sent if a setting confirmation operation (operation using setting key 971) is detected.

Subsequently, the setting value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for display on the setting display 974.

Furthermore, if the setting display conditions are not met, the system will continue to check the conditions until they are met. However, this may result in a prolonged loop. Therefore, if the setting display conditions are not met for a predetermined period of time, the setting confirmation process may be terminated. For example, if it is determined that the setting value should not be displayed because a special symbol variation is being displayed, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display conditions will be met upon the end of the special symbol variation display, and the setting value will be displayed. Alternatively, if the setting conditions are not met, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeatedly checking the setting conditions.

In this case, the condition for starting the special symbol variation display may include the fact that the set value is not currently displayed. In this case, the new special symbol variation display will not start while the set value is displayed, and will only start after the set value is hidden.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting value can be checked at a predetermined timing, allowing the setting value to be checked without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed preferentially during setting confirmation, so although the base value calculation is performed, the base value is not displayed. In gameplay where many prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desirable to check the change in the base value. Therefore, the setting value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signals associated with setting changes and setting confirmations]
Figure 157 is a timing diagram of security signals output in conjunction with setting changes and setting confirmations.

As mentioned above, a security signal is output during the setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in Figure 154, S8063 in Figure 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in Figure 157(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined period (T seconds) for which the security signal is output only needs to be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal; it can be less than one second or several tens of seconds.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output for the entire period from the start to the end of the configuration change mode, rather than for a predetermined time from the start of the configuration change mode.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, as shown in Figure 157(B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear process performed in conjunction with the setting change mode.

During the configuration check, as shown in Figure 157(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of the configuration check. The predetermined period (T seconds) for which the security signal is output only needs to be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal; it can be less than one second or several tens of seconds.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the configuration check, but for the entire period from the start to the end of the configuration check (the period during which the configuration value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the time of error detection, as shown in Figure 157(D). If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the time of error detection, as shown in Figure 157(E). That is, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from the error detection are output consecutively for more than the predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from error detection). However, even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected while a security signal is being output, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the currently outputting security signal.

Furthermore, during the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not detect errors, so the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection do not overlap. In other words, even if an error occurs during the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended; however, if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal is extended.

[12-13. Another example of the configuration confirmation process]
The following describes another example of the setting confirmation process. The above description mainly explained an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the timer interrupt process in the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit. Below, we will describe an example in which the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

Specifically, for example, if the setting key is ON when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of this process are explained below. Note that the timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 23 (i.e., the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

Figure 158 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization process. The differences from Figure 154 are explained below. In step S18, if the main control MPU 1311 determines that the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated (step S18: No), it determines that the setting key 971 has been operated and that its output is ON (step S29).

If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), it proceeds to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of setting key 971 is OFF (step S29: No), it proceeds to step S20.

Figure 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). The differences from Figure 156 will be explained. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting display conditions are met without performing the process in step S8061 (step S8062). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display conditions are met (step S8062: Yes), it outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display conditions are not met (step S8062: No), it repeats the process in step S8062.

Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and whether its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S8071: No), it performs the determination in step S8071 again, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), it hides the setting value (step S8075) and terminates the setting confirmation process. In other words, the system transitions to the setting confirmation state when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is started without pressing the RAM clear button.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation, the number of reserved symbols and the remaining variation time for that special symbol, etc., managed by the main control board 1310, will remain stored. Subsequently, if a setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is started with the setting key 971 in the ON state), the special symbol variation will resume after the setting confirmation process is completed (after the setting key 971 is returned to its initial position without turning off the power). At this time, for example, any effects that were being performed along with the special symbol variation (effects using display devices, effects using lamps, sound effects using speakers, and effects using movable parts, etc.) will not be performed at all after the special symbol variation resumes.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation, and a setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on again, the effects that were being performed along with the special symbol variation may be resumed when the special symbol variation resumes after the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, effects using display devices, lamps, and speakers that were interrupted may be resumed. Also, regarding effects using movable parts, for example, if the effect pattern specifies that the movable part should be operated after the special symbol variation resumes or when the power is turned on, the movable part should be operated according to that effect pattern.

In other words, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation state when the movable part is not in its initial position, it should be returned to its initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation process is completed. Then, if the performance determined based on the special symbol variation pattern includes a performance that moves the movable part, the movable part may be moved. Furthermore, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation state while the movable part is moving, the performance pattern for that movement may not be executed, or the movable part may be moved if the pattern allows for operation even after returning the movable part to its initial position.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation, and a setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on again, when the special symbol variation resumes after the setting confirmation process is completed, the effects using the display device, the effects using the lamp, and the sound effects using the speaker that were being performed along with the special symbol variation will be resumed. After the special symbol variation resumes or when the power is turned on, the movable body will be returned to its initial position, and the effects using the movable body may not be performed.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during a special symbol variation, and a setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on again, the main LCD display 1600 may resume the variation of the decorative symbols that were displayed when the special symbol variation resumes after the setting confirmation process is completed (resume the originally planned performance), or it may perform a high-speed variation with the decorative symbols transparent until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking variation immediately before the symbol is confirmed), or it may hide the decorative symbols until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking variation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). Also, at the time of symbol confirmation, for example, the combination of decorative symbols that was planned before the power was turned off may be displayed on the main LCD display 1600. In this case, at the end of the special symbol variation after resumption, a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the initial power-on, or a special combination of decorative symbols not displayed during normal special symbol variation (for example, "xxx") may be displayed on the main LCD display 1600.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol variation, a setting confirmation process may be performed when the power is turned on again. When the setting confirmation process is completed and the machine returns to the normal state, the same initial operations as when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 in the off state (i.e., when the power is turned on normally) may be performed (for example, operations such as confirming the predetermined movements of movable parts or the predetermined illumination of LEDs). (The aforementioned effects may be resumed after these initial operations are performed.)

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while a pre-announcement effect is being performed during a special symbol variation, and a setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on again, for example, when the special symbol variation resumes after the setting confirmation process is completed, the pre-announcement effect will not be executed for the special symbol variation that was held in reserve immediately before the power was turned off. (Specifically, for example, the display during the waiting period of a special zone that was displayed during the special symbol variation that was being performed before the power was turned off (for example, a special stage that shows the player that there is a high expectation of a big win across multiple variations, and which develops from the rival horse effect described later to the horse racing effect (the horse racing effect is a special zone where the expectation level of the effect itself is set to be relatively higher (for example, higher than the dialogue effect described later))) or the display effect within that special zone will be erased, or if the reserved display was blue instead of the usual white, it will be changed back to the usual white.) However, the pre-announcement effect may be executed for special symbol variations corresponding to a win after the setting confirmation process is completed.

Furthermore, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while a pre-announcement effect is being performed during a special symbol variation, and a setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on again, for example, when the special symbol variation resumes after the setting confirmation process is completed, the pre-announcement effect during that special symbol variation will be canceled (specifically, for example, the display of the special zone waiting state that was displayed during the special symbol variation before the power was turned off, or the display effect during the special zone will be erased, or if the hold display was blue instead of the usual white, it will be changed back to the usual white), but the pre-announcement effect may be resumed from the next special symbol variation (the erased display may be restored, or if the effect pattern at the start of the variation was to upgrade the pre-announcement effect, it may be restored to the upgraded display effect). In this case, the pre-announcement effect executed from the next special symbol variation will be resumed as if the pre-announcement effect during that special symbol variation was not canceled. In other words, before turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1, the pre-announcement effect that was scheduled to be executed from the next special symbol variation onward will be executed. Furthermore, a new pre-announcement animation pattern may be set, and the animation of this new pre-announcement pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of a setting suggestion effect]
The following describes an example of a process in which the execution of setting-indicating effects is restricted. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 during normal play are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively, and the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 during probability variation are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. It is also assumed that the probability variation rate when a jackpot is won is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation Pattern Table]
Figure 160 shows another example of a variable pattern table. The variable pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the explanation of Figure 142, etc., an example was described in which there is a variable pattern table for each type of special lottery result (winning or losing), but in the example of Figure 160, the variable pattern for each type of special lottery result (winning or losing) is defined in a single variable pattern table. Also, in the example of Figure 160, it is assumed that a common variable pattern table is used for all settings.

The variation pattern table in Figure 160 shows the correspondence between the type of special lottery result (winning or losing), the variation pattern identifier, the outline of the variation pattern's presentation, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example in Figure 160, the variation pattern information for each special lottery result is stored in a single variation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning or losing type corresponding to the prize, according to the selection rate shown in the variation pattern table. Note that, as in the example in Figure 144, the variation time for each variation pattern may also be defined within the variation pattern table.

The "Movie Reach" mentioned in the description is a reach animation that is highly likely to be selected when the special lottery result is a jackpot, and extremely unlikely to be selected when the special lottery result is a loss. In other words, the probability of a jackpot occurring during a spin in which a Movie Reach is performed is high. Furthermore, when a Movie Reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main LCD display device 1600.

Furthermore, the "+1 symbol" mentioned in the description for "misses" indicates that after a decorative symbol stops in a near-win state, the last remaining decorative symbol to move past the near-win symbol before stopping. Specifically, for example, after a near-win state is reached with the "7" symbol, the last remaining decorative symbol to move stops at "8". The "+1 symbol" for "jackpots" indicates that after a decorative symbol stops in a near-win state, the last remaining decorative symbol to move appears to stop past the near-win symbol before stopping as the same symbol as the near-win symbol. Specifically, for example, after a near-win state is reached with the "7" symbol, the last remaining decorative symbol appears to stop at "8", then stops at "7", indicating a jackpot.

In the example in Figure 161, the "+1 symbol" is selected only when the win/loss type is "Big Win (Non-Probability Variation)". However, it may also be selected only when the win/loss type is "Big Win (Probability Variation)", or both when the win/loss type is "Big Win (Non-Probability Variation)" and "Big Win (Probability Variation)". Furthermore, the "+1 symbol" may also be selected only when the win/loss type is "Loss".

Furthermore, the "+Pseudo 1" and "+Pseudo 2" in the description indicate that a two-part pseudo-consecutive performance and a three-part pseudo-consecutive performance will be executed, respectively. A pseudo-consecutive performance is a performance in which the action of changing the decorative symbols and ending the change of the decorative symbols is performed multiple times during a single change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. "Ending the change of the decorative symbols" means, for example, stopping some or all of the decorative symbols, giving the player the impression that the change of the decorative symbols has ended, or stopping a pseudo-consecutive symbol (a symbol whose stopping confirms a pseudo-consecutive) among the decorative symbols. A pseudo-consecutive performance in which this action is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-part pseudo-consecutive performance, and the M-th change of decorative symbols in an N-part pseudo-consecutive performance (M is a natural number of 1 or more and less than or equal to N) is called the M-th pseudo-consecutive performance. Furthermore, a performance that suggests to the player that the action in question may be performed again during a single rotation of the first or second special symbol display, but does not actually perform the action again, is called a "pseudo-false performance." Hereafter, pseudo-consecutive performances will also simply be referred to as "pseudo-consecutive performances."

If a pseudo-consecutive win animation occurs or continues, that is, if it is determined that the operation of changing the decorative symbols and ending the change in the decorative symbols will be performed again during a single change of the first or second special symbol indicator, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-consecutive win animation on at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops the text "Continue!" as the pseudo-consecutive win animation on the middle decorative symbol. Note that, for example, a specific combination of decorative symbols (for example, all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are odd or even and no reach occurs) may be used as the pseudo-consecutive win animation. Note that a pseudo-false win animation may be performed, for example, when the animation summary is "normal change". Also, for example, even in a change pattern where "+psecutive 1" is performed, a pseudo-false win animation suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-consecutive win in "+psecutive 2" may be performed.

[12-14-2. Final Reserved Color Table]
Figure 161 is an example of a final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored, for example, in the peripheral main control ROM. The final reserved color table stores, for example, the selection rate of the display color of the reserved display at the end of each variation (hereinafter also called the final reserved color) for each variation pattern (type of winning or losing in the special lottery result, identifier of the variation pattern, and outline of the performance of the variation pattern).

The main LCD display device 1600 includes a hold display area that shows the number of first and second special random numbers currently in reserve. In step S116 of Figure 142, during the start-gate entry process, a hold count specification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, specifying the number of first and second special random numbers to be reserved. The peripheral control MPU displays the number of reserved numbers indicated by the hold count specification command in the hold display area.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first or second starting port 2002 (starting condition met), the number of reserved balls (reserved memory count) specified by the reserved ball number specification command increases, and one reserved ball display is added to the reserved ball display area. Conversely, when the display of decorative symbols (display of special symbols) based on the reserved ball display begins (starting condition met), the number of reserved balls (reserved memory count) specified by the reserved ball number specification command decreases, and the reserved ball display in the reserved ball display area is erased.

Furthermore, there may be multiple display modes for the pending indicator. For example, there may be multiple display modes using different colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereafter, the probability of winning the special lottery result corresponding to the pending indicator increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In particular, in the example shown in Figure 161, the rainbow-colored pending indicator is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In other words, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate shown in the final reserved color table. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU can, for example, change the display mode of the reserved display during the display period from when the reserved display is shown in the reserved display area until it disappears, thereby executing a reserved display notification effect that suggests the probability of a big win for the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of a special symbol) corresponding to the reserved display.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a hold change effect can be executed during the hold display period, suggesting the possibility of a change in the hold display's appearance. The hold change effect and hold notification effect that occur during the hold display period and before the corresponding change begins are also referred to as hold pre-announcement effects.

For example, the peripheral control ROM maintains a hold notification table (not shown) that defines the timing of changes in the display pattern of the hold notification. Specifically, the hold notification table defines, for example, the timing of changes in the display pattern of the hold notification, and the display pattern (display color) of the hold notification at the time of winning and at each change timing, for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of the special symbol variation that occurs after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to that win are examples of such change timings.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the display pattern of the hold indicator at each change timing be a hold color with a jackpot expectation level equal to or lower than that of the final hold color. Also, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation level indicated by the hold indicator does not decrease at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that a blue hold indicator does not change to a white hold indicator). It is also possible to have different hold indicator notification tables for each number of hold indicators stored at the time of winning.

Furthermore, for example, the start of a special symbol variation that was held in reserve before the aforementioned reserve display is one example of the timing for the change in the display pattern of the reserve display described above. Also, for example, a timing for the change in the display pattern of the reserve display may be provided during the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserve display.

Furthermore, the pre-reading effects, including the hold pre-reading effect, are executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 during the pre-determination process performed in step S116 of Figure 142 when a prize is awarded at the starting gate.

The following describes the pre-determination process for the entry into the starting gate for the first special symbol. Since the pre-determination process for the entry into the starting gate for the second special symbol is similar, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares the pre-determination table (not shown) with the special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable random number to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is achieved, and, if not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach animation as a game animation on the main LCD display device 1600, and the type of game animation to be executed.

Then, a pre-determination command is set based on the identified pre-determination information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is, whether or not a reach animation will be executed as a game animation on the main LCD display 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game animation to be executed), the type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the acquired special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the pre-determination process for the first special symbol animation, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set based on the identified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved memory number.

Then, when a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information before the display of the special symbols corresponding to the starting gate where the starting prize occurred. This information includes the number of reserved symbols stored in the starting gate, whether or not the display result of the special symbol variation display based on the starting prize will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and if not a jackpot, whether or not a reach animation will be executed as a game animation on the main LCD display device 1600, and the type of game animation to be executed.

Figure 162 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern in Setting 1, where the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table in Figure 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table in Figure 161. Figure 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern in Setting 3, under similar circumstances. Figure 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern in Setting 5, under similar circumstances. According to Figures 162 to 164, higher settings result in a higher appearance rate of the reserved display patterns indicating higher jackpot expectations. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation for each color increases with higher settings. These appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probabilities for each setting described above, and it is assumed that the final reserved color table in Figure 161 is used for all settings.

Furthermore, the peripheral control ROM may maintain different final reserve color tables for each setting. In this case, for example, the selection rate of the final reserve color table is set such that, for the same reserve display configuration, the probability of a big win increases with higher settings. This allows the player to experience a sense of excitement, as, for example, if a big win is achieved during a special symbol variation corresponding to a red reserve display, the probability of reaching a higher setting also increases.

Furthermore, for example, in the display mode of the hold indicator other than white, which is the most frequently selected, the selection rate of the final hold indicator color in the final hold indicator color table may be set so that the probability of winning a jackpot increases as the setting decreases (specifically, for example, the probability of winning a jackpot when the hold indicator is red may be set to 50% for setting 1, which is a low setting, and 30% for setting 6, which is a high setting). This allows for, for example, a higher probability of winning a jackpot even if the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold indicator does not result in a win, thus reducing player disappointment and encouraging continued gameplay.

Furthermore, for example, in the display configuration of a hold indicator other than white, which is the most frequently selected, the selection rate of the final hold indicator color in the final hold indicator color table may be set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately the same across all settings for the same hold indicator display configuration. This makes it difficult to estimate the setting from, for example, the combination of the final hold indicator color and the special lottery result, allowing players to focus solely on their expectations for the special lottery result based on the hold indicator display configuration. Also, for example, if a jackpot is not won during a special symbol variation corresponding to the red display configuration, it prevents a situation where the probability of a low setting becomes high.

[12-14-3. Preview Presentation Table]
Figure 165 shows an example of a preview animation table. The preview animation table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The preview animation table holds, for example, the selection rate of each preview animation for each variation pattern (identified by the type of win/loss of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and an overview of the animation for that variation pattern).

In the example shown in Figure 165, the preview effects include dialogue effects, weather change effects, and rival horse effects. Dialogue effects, for example, involve a predetermined character appearing on the main LCD display 1600 and speaking a line of dialogue during the relevant spin. Weather change effects, for example, involve a change in the weather behind the decorative pattern displayed on the main LCD display 1600 during the relevant spin. Rival horse effects involve the appearance of a rival horse to the main character's horse on the main LCD display 1600 during the relevant spin.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute setting suggestion sequences using pre-announcement sequences, and the pre-announcement sequence table stores the selection rate for each pre-announcement sequence depending on whether or not the setting suggestion sequence is executed. In the example in Figure 165, "set not executed" indicates that the setting suggestion sequence will not be executed, and "set executed" indicates that the setting suggestion sequence will be executed. The peripheral control MPU determines which pre-announcement sequence to execute based on the variation pattern and the selection rate in the pre-announcement sequence table.

Furthermore, in each variation pattern of the pre-announcement effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate of the pre-announcement effect without a setting suggestion effect is significantly higher than the selection rate of the effect with a setting suggestion effect. A high selection rate of the effect with a setting suggestion effect leads to frequent occurrences of setting suggestion effects. If the frequency of setting suggestion effects indicating a high setting is low in this situation, players are likely to stop playing after a short time. In other words, the utilization rate of Pachinko Machine 1, which is set to a low setting, will decrease significantly, potentially placing an excessive burden on the hall. Conversely, for example, if the frequency of setting suggestion effects indicating a high setting is high, more players may surmise that other Pachinko Machine 1s in the hall are set to low settings, leading to a decrease in the utilization rate of those other Pachinko Machine 1s and potentially placing an excessive burden on the hall.

Furthermore, while the selection rate of each variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the probability of a big win increases with the number of pseudo-consecutive wins, the selection rate for whether or not to execute setting-indicating effects in the pre-announcement effect table is determined so that, for example, the appearance rate of setting-indicating effects does not change significantly depending on the number of pseudo-consecutive wins. In other words, for variation patterns whose outlines are "SP Reach," "SP Reach + Pseudo 1," and "SP Reach + Pseudo 2," the selection rate for whether or not to execute pseudo-setting-indicating effects is determined so that the appearance rate of setting-indicating effects is approximately the same. As a result, although the probability of a big win is low for variation patterns with a small number of pseudo-consecutive wins, the occurrence rate of setting-indicating effects is not lower than that of variation patterns with a large number of pseudo-consecutive wins, allowing players to be interested in variation patterns with a small number of pseudo-consecutive wins.

Furthermore, the selection rate for whether or not to execute a setting-indicating effect in the予告演出表 (pre-announcement effect table) may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting-indicating effect increases as the number of pseudo-consecutive spins increases, or conversely, the selection rate for whether or not to execute a setting-indicating effect in the予告演出表 (pre-announcement effect table) may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting-indicating effect increases as the number of pseudo-consecutive spins decreases. However, if the appearance rate of the setting-indicating effect is increased as the number of pseudo-consecutive spins decreases, the aforementioned problems may arise. Therefore, even if the appearance rate of the setting-indicating effect is increased as the number of pseudo-consecutive spins decreases, it is preferable to set the values to be approximately the same (specifically, for example, the probability of a dialogue effect with "set" when variation pattern 5 is selected during a miss should be set to 15/256, and the probability of a dialogue effect with "set" when variation pattern 6 is selected should be set to 16/256).

Furthermore, the selection rate for whether or not to execute a setting-indicating effect in the予告演出表 (pre-announcement effect table) may be determined such that the appearance rate of setting-indicating effects increases with the variation pattern that has a high probability of winning a jackpot (or with an effect that does not have a high probability of winning a jackpot, but whose expected value is relatively high (for example, an effect with a jackpot probability of above a predetermined value)). Specifically, for example, the selection rate for whether or not to execute a setting-indicating effect in the予告演出表 (pre-announcement effect table) may be determined such that the appearance rate of setting-indicating effects increases in the order of "normal variation," "variation including normal reach," "variation including SP reach," and "variation including movie reach."

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 165, while setting-suggestion sequences may occur in all preview sequences (dialogue sequences, weather change sequences, and rival horse sequences), there may be preview sequences in which no setting-suggestion sequences occur.

Furthermore, if the general outline of the variation pattern is the same, the selection rate for whether or not to execute the setting-indicating演出 (performance/effect) in the予告演出 (pre-announcement performance) table may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting-indicating performance is higher when the special lottery result is a jackpot without a probability-increase than when the special lottery result is a jackpot with a probability-increase. This increases the appearance rate of the setting-indicating performance when a jackpot without a probability-increase is won, thereby reducing the player's disappointment when a probability-increase is not granted. It goes without saying that while the above example described three types of pre-announcement performances—dialogue performances, weather change performances, and rival horse performances—there are no limitations to these three types.

[12-14-4. Line production]
The following describes the details of the dialogue-based preview sequences. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue sequence without a setting suggestion sequence as a preview sequence, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the spin (for example, 2 seconds later), character A will appear on the main LCD display 1600 and character A's dialogue will be displayed as "What day is it today?". Then, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of character A's dialogue (for example, 3 seconds later), character B will appear on the main LCD display 1600 and character B's dialogue will be displayed as "Well...". Note that, for example, the dialogue of character A and character B may also suggest the probability of a big win in that spin.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue sequence with a setting suggestion sequence as a preview sequence, it selects a line of dialogue for character B (a line suggesting the setting) from the dialogue sequence table described later. For example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the spin (for example, 2 seconds later, i.e., the same timing as when character A appears in the case without the setting suggestion sequence), the peripheral control MPU displays character A on the main LCD display 1600 and shows the line "What day is it today?" as character A's dialogue. For example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of character A's dialogue (for example, 3 seconds later), the peripheral control MPU displays character B on the main LCD display 1600 and shows the selected line of dialogue for character B. Note that character A's dialogue may also be a line that directly expresses the setting value, such as "Do you know what the setting of this machine is today?"

Figure 166 shows an example of a dialogue performance table. The dialogue performance table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The dialogue performance table maintains the performance type of the dialogue and the selection rate of the content of character B's dialogue for each setting. The performance types include "patterns that are the same up to a certain point" and "patterns that branch abruptly," and for each of these two patterns, there are "maybe" type dialogue and "confirmation" type dialogue.

Each line of dialogue belonging to the "pattern where they are the same up to a certain point" contains the same line of dialogue up to a certain point, after which it branches off into a different line of dialogue. In the example in Figure 166, all lines of dialogue belonging to the "pattern where they are the same up to a certain point" begin with "Now..." and then branch off into different lines of dialogue. On the other hand, lines of dialogue belonging to the "pattern where they branch off immediately" branch off into different lines of dialogue from the beginning. It is desirable that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "pattern where they are the same up to a certain point" is higher than the selection rate of lines belonging to the "pattern where they branch off immediately" to maintain anticipation.

Lines belonging to the "maybe" category are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce it. For example, "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "maybe" line that suggests an even-numbered setting. Because "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day..." is a "maybe" line, its selection rate is determined so that it can also appear in odd-numbered settings. However, the selection rate of this line in odd-numbered settings is set to be sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the same line in even settings. Similarly, for other "maybe" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting it suggests is set to be sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in other settings.

On the other hand, lines belonging to the "confirmative" category are lines that definitively announce a setting. For example, "Ah! I remember now! It's an even-numbered day!" is a "confirmative" line that definitively announces an even-numbered setting. Therefore, the selection rate of this line is 0 for odd-numbered settings, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only for even-numbered settings.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the selection rate of lines belonging to the "possibly" category be higher than the selection rate of lines belonging to the "confirmative" category. If the selection rate of lines belonging to the "confirmative" category is high, there is a good chance that a high setting will be definitively communicated to the player in a short time after starting the game. In this case, a certain number of players will surmise that the settings of other pachinko machines in the hall are not good, which could reduce the usage of other machines.

Furthermore, in the dialogue sequences used when executing specific reach sequences such as SP Reach or Movie Reach, and in the dialogue sequences used when performing pseudo-consecutive wins, the dialogue suggesting the setting of Character B may be displayed in red text (the dialogue in normal sequences such as the jackpot expectation suggestion sequence may be displayed in white text). This makes it easier for players to distinguish between expectation suggestion dialogue and setting suggestion dialogue, allowing the two types of sequences (setting suggestion sequences and expectation suggestion sequences) to coexist without making the player feel unnatural. An expectation suggestion sequence is a sequence that indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the relevant special symbol variation is at a predetermined value. Specifically, this includes pre-announcement sequences that suggest the expectation of a jackpot within a single variation, and pre-read sequences that suggest the expectation of a jackpot across multiple variations.

Furthermore, although not illustrated, the peripheral control MPU should determine the setting suggestion effects for weather change and rival horse effects using a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table. For example, in the setting suggestion effect for weather change effects, a thundercloud might be displayed on the main LCD display 1600, and numbers such as "246?" might be displayed by lightning (a "maybe" type effect suggesting an even setting). In the setting suggestion effect for rival horse effects, a joint horse race between the protagonist character's horse and a rival horse might be displayed on the main LCD display 1600, and numbers such as "135?" might be displayed on the rival horse's saddlecloth (a "maybe" type effect suggesting an odd setting).

In the example above, the dialogue for character A in the dialogue sequence was displayed as "What day is it today?". However, in addition to this line, you could also have multiple variations for a single sequence (for example, a dialogue sequence), such as character A saying "What was my score on last week's test?", and character B saying "66 points! (A 'confirmed' line that confirms setting 6)" or "I think I got 55 points... (A 'maybe' line that suggests setting 5)". In that case, it would be good to make sequence B (for example, a sequence that asks about the test score) more credible as a setting suggestion than sequence A (for example, a sequence that asks about the date). Specifically, for example, the expectation of setting 6 when character A says "I think it was a day with a 6 in it... (maybe)" might be 30%, while the expectation of setting 6 when character B says "I think I got 66 points... (maybe)" might be 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of a preview presentation table]
Figure 167 shows another example of a preview animation table. In the example in Figure 167, the preview animation table 173 holds the selection rate of the preview animation for each variation pattern. Unlike the example in Figure 165, the preview animation table in Figure 167 does not hold information about whether or not a setting suggestion animation is performed. In other words, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of preview animation according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern in the preview animation table in Figure 167.

The peripheral control MPU then decides whether or not to execute a setting suggestion animation based on the variation pattern and the type of pre-announcement animation selected. Figure 168(A) is an example of a setting suggestion animation table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion animation when the variation pattern is "normal variation" and "dialogue animation" is selected as the pre-announcement animation. Figure 168(B) is an example of a setting suggestion animation table showing the distribution of whether or not to execute a setting suggestion animation when the variation pattern is "normal reach + 1 symbol" and "dialogue animation" is selected as the pre-announcement animation. Setting suggestion animation tables for all combinations of variation patterns and pre-announcement animations, as shown in Figure 168, are pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

In the example above, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion animation after determining the content of the preview animation. However, it is also possible to determine whether to execute the setting suggestion animation first, and then determine the content of the preview animation. Using this method, although the amount of data will be larger than that of the table shown in Figure 165, it is possible to set the appearance rate and reliability of the animations in more detail. Furthermore, the table shown in Figure 165 and the processing shown in this example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific Examples of Setting Indication Effects]
Figure 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion sequence. The sequence in Figure 169(A), (B), and (C) shows an overview of the setting suggestion sequence when the line "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!" is selected as the line for character B in the dialogue sequence.

In Figure 169(A), the special symbol variation begins. In Figure 169(B), after the special symbol variation begins, the main LCD display 1600 displays the line "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!" by character B. In Figure 169(C), the line is displayed on the main LCD display 1600 until the special symbol variation ends.

The sequence of events shown in Figures 169(A), (D), and (E) outlines the setting suggestion sequence when the line "It's a day with a 6 in it!" is selected as character B's line during the dialogue sequence. In the sequence of events shown in Figures 169(A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion sequence begins from the start of the special symbol variation, and the setting suggested by the setting suggestion sequence changes during the end of the special symbol variation. Specifically, in Figure 169(D), after the start of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!" is displayed on the main LCD display 1600. In Figure 169(E), at the end of the special symbol variation, character B's line "It's a day with a 6 in it!" is displayed. In other words, the setting suggested by character B's line has been upgraded.

Specifically, for example, for each line of dialogue in the dialogue presentation table (the final line of dialogue displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of the dialogue change and the dialogue at each timing, as well as the selection rate for each scenario, may be defined for each setting. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

Furthermore, in this case, it is desirable that the dialogue presentation table does not hold scenarios where the suggested setting might be downgraded. Specifically, for example, it is desirable that the dialogue presentation table does not hold scenarios where the line "It's an even-numbered day!" is displayed after the line "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!"

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed during the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, effects that suggest the probability of a big win) may be performed in parallel. While the example shows Character B's dialogue being upgraded at the end of the special symbol variation, this is not the only option; the upgrade may occur before the end of the special symbol variation. Note that Character A appears before Character B's dialogue, and Character A speaks to Character B, but this is omitted from the diagram.

Figure 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect as a pre-announcement effect. In Figure 170(A), during a special symbol variation with no special symbol variation pending, game ball B enters the first start opening 2002. Subsequently, in Figure 170(B), immediately after game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the main LCD display device 1600 displays the line "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!" from character B. In this case, since the remaining time of the already variationring special symbol is indefinite, character B may be displayed immediately without displaying character A, character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since entry, or character B may be displayed after character A. Also, in Figure 170(B), the number of pending symbols displayed in the pending symbol display area has increased by one.

Next, in Figure 170(C), all decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation ends. The main LCD display 1600 still displays Character B's line, "It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!" Next, in Figure 170(D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning combination begins. Simultaneously with the start of this special symbol variation, Character B's line displayed on the main LCD display 1600 changes to "It's a day with a 5 or 6 in it!" In other words, the setting indicated by Character B's line has been upgraded.

Next, in Figure 170(E), all decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning combination ends. At the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning combination, the dialogue of character B displayed on the main LCD display 1600 changes to "It's a day with a 6 in it!". In other words, the setting indicated by character B's dialogue has been upgraded.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue pre-reading performance table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of character B and the timing of dialogue changes. Specifically, for example, the dialogue pre-reading performance table defines the timing of dialogue changes for character B, and the dialogue of character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of the special symbol variation that occurs after winning and before the special symbol variation corresponding to that win are examples of such change timings. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue do not decrease at each change timing. It is also possible that there are different dialogue pre-reading performance tables for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute a pre-reading performance based on a pre-determination command, it executes the dialogue pre-reading performance by referring to the dialogue pre-reading performance table at a predetermined rate, for example. Furthermore, while Figure 170 shows promotions one level at a time ("It's a day with a 4, 5, or 6 in it!", "It's a day with a 5 or 6 in it!", "It's a day with a 6 in it!"), it is also possible to show multiple levels of promotion at once. Specifically, for example, in Figure 170, the dialogue (E) could be displayed without displaying the dialogue (D).

Furthermore, the setting indication animation may be executed under specific circumstances other than those described above. For example, the setting indication animation may be executed when the conditions for a "reserve chain" are met. A "reserve chain" refers to the next jackpot being achieved by a special random number that has been reserved until the end of a jackpot game. In this case, for example, the setting indication animation would be executed after the reservation occurs and before the end of the jackpot game. Also, for example, if a specific variation pattern occurs a predetermined number of times consecutively, the setting indication animation may be executed during the special symbol variation of that predetermined number.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
The following explains the limitations on setting suggestion effects under specific conditions.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when entering a special state]
First, we will explain the limitations on setting indication effects when entering a special state. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the setting value, which is started when the setting confirmation process determines that the setting display conditions are met (step S8062: Yes).

Figure 171(A) shows an example of a performance restriction table for the setting confirmation mode. Figure 171(B) shows an example of a performance restriction table for when an error occurs. The performance restriction tables for the setting confirmation mode and the performance restriction tables for when an error occurs are stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting indication effects when entering or exiting setting confirmation mode]
First, let's explain the performance restriction table during the settings confirmation mode. The performance restriction table during the settings confirmation mode stores restriction flags that indicate whether or not to restrict the setting suggestion performance for a variation (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter) when the settings confirmation mode is started while the variation is being executed or is on hold, in which case the setting suggestion performance for that variation is to be executed.

The performance restriction table for setting confirmation mode includes record 1701, which stores the restriction flag when setting confirmation mode is started before the start of the setting suggestion performance (i.e., when it is determined that a setting suggestion performance should be performed, but the performance related to setting suggestion is not executed (displayed)); and record 1702, which stores the restriction flag when setting confirmation mode is started after the start of the setting suggestion performance in setting suggestion fluctuation (i.e., when it is determined that a setting suggestion performance should be performed and the performance related to setting suggestion is executed (displayed)).

When the setting confirmation process shown in Figure 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation process shown in Figure 156 is performed, the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode performance restriction table includes a column 1703 that stores the restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and a column 1704 that stores the restriction flag when the game continues even during the setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, if gameplay continues during the setting confirmation mode, a game ball entering the start slot during the setting confirmation mode may cause a new setting indication variation to be held in reserve. Therefore, column 1704 includes column 1705, which stores the restriction flag for the new setting indication variation corresponding to a game ball entering the start slot during the setting confirmation mode. Note that each restriction flag in the setting confirmation mode performance restriction table can be set, for example, during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 or in the hall, using an operating medium (which may be either an operating medium that the player cannot operate or one that the player can operate). Note that if a game ball enters the start slot during the setting confirmation mode, the acquisition of lottery information and the awarding of prize balls do not necessarily have to be performed for that ball. However, even in such cases, special symbol variations that have already been held in reserve will be executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

If the game stops when the settings confirmation mode starts, then the values of one field 1706 and field 1707 are 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, the values of one field 1712 and field 1713 are 1 and the other is 0, and the values of fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Furthermore, if gameplay continues during the settings confirmation mode, the values of fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other is 0, one of fields 1710 and 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, and one of fields 1716 or 1717 is 1 and the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes restriction patterns for setting suggestion animations according to the restriction flags defined in the animation restriction table for each state in the animation restriction table for when the setting confirmation mode starts and when an error occurs. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) In the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting indication animation begins, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After resuming gameplay, execute a setting indication animation (the value of field 1706 is 1 and the value of field 1707 is 0). Executing this setting indication animation informs the player that the game is in setting confirmation mode rather than setting change mode, providing reassurance that it will not affect the outcome of the game.

(1-2) Do not execute the setting suggestion animation after resuming gameplay (the value of field 1706 is 0 and the value of field 1707 is 1). For example, if, during setting confirmation mode, audio or images indicating that the settings are being confirmed are output to various speakers and the main LCD display device 1600, by not executing the setting suggestion animation in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the settings may have been changed to a higher setting, even while in setting confirmation mode.

(2) Regarding the setting indication effect when the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting indication effect begins, and when gameplay continues during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting indication animation is executed (the value of field 1708 is 1 and the value of field 1709 is 0). Since gameplay continues even during the setting confirmation mode, operation is not interrupted. If audio and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is active are output to the various speakers and the main LCD display 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images of the setting indication animation. At this time, in order to avoid causing discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is active is displayed on the main LCD display 1600 so that some or all of the setting indication animation is shown. Alternatively, to provide the player with a sense of anticipation, such as "when was the setting indication animation displayed?" or "a setting indication animation suggesting a high setting might have been displayed," the image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is active may be displayed on the main LCD display 1600 while completely hiding the setting indication animation.

(2-2) Do not execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1708 is 0 and the value of field 1709 is 1). For example, if a player checks the setting value, and the setting indication animation does not match the actual setting (for example, if an animation suggesting a high setting such as "Maybe a high setting?" occurs when the setting value is 1), the player may develop distrust towards the gaming machine. By not executing the setting indication animation, this situation can be avoided.

(2') Regarding a new setting indication effect corresponding to a winning entry into the starting slot during the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting indication effect begins and gameplay continues during the setting confirmation mode.

(2'-1) Execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1710 is 1 and the value of field 1711 is 0). Executing the setting indication animation informs the player that the setting confirmation mode was executed, rather than the setting change mode, providing reassurance that it will not affect the outcome of the game.

(2'-2) Do not execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1710 is 0 and the value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall has doubts about the setting value and has switched to setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that the setting value will be changed afterward. In such a case, if the setting indication animation is executed, the setting indication animation and the actual setting may differ (for example, the setting indication animation may display that an even setting is confirmed, but after the setting has been changed, the setting indication animation may display that an odd setting is confirmed), which could lead to trouble between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting indication animation, such a situation can be avoided.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the images, sounds, and lights indicating the aforementioned setting confirmation state be displayed regardless of the values of the fields mentioned above. Also, since it is conceivable that new winnings may be valid even when the game is stopped after transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the same processing as for continuing the game should be performed in such cases.

(3) In the case where the setting confirmation mode starts during a setting indication change and after the start of a setting indication effect (while the setting indication effect is being displayed, and after the setting indication effect has been displayed and then finished), and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) Restart the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes (when the value of field 1712 is 1 and the value of field 1713 is 0). If the setting indication animation that has already started is stopped, players may become suspicious that the settings have been changed. By restarting the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes, this situation can be avoided.

(3-2) Do not resume the setting indication演出 (setting indication effect) after gameplay resumes (the value of field 1712 is 0 and the value of field 1713 is 1). For example, if, during setting confirmation mode, audio and images indicating that the settings are being confirmed are output to various speakers and the main LCD display device 1600, by not executing the setting indication effect in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the settings may have been changed to a higher setting, even while in setting confirmation mode.

(4) Regarding the setting indication effect during the setting indication variation and after the start of the setting indication effect (while the setting indication effect is displayed, and after the display of the setting indication effect has ended), when the setting confirmation mode starts and the game continues during the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) Continue the setting indication animation (the value of field 1714 is 1 and the value of field 1715 is 0). Since gameplay continues even during setting confirmation mode, operation is not interrupted. When audio and images indicating that setting confirmation mode is active are output to various speakers and the main LCD display 1600, these audio and images are output with priority over the audio and images of the setting indication animation. At this time, to avoid causing discomfort to the player, the main LCD display 1600 displays an image indicating that setting confirmation mode is active so that part or all of the setting indication animation is displayed (the image related to the setting indication animation and the image indicating setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting indication animation and the text indicating setting confirmation mode, such as "Setting Confirmation Mode," do not overlap). Note that the same processing can be applied when an error occurs, as described later. Note that "do not overlap" here refers to the visual appearance to the player, not the actual image data set in RAM.

Furthermore, in order to provide players with a sense of anticipation regarding "when the setting indication effect was displayed" and "the possibility that a setting indication effect suggesting a high setting was displayed," the main LCD display 1600 may display an image indicating that the machine is in setting confirmation mode, while concealing all setting indication effects.

(4-2) Stop the setting suggestion animation (when the value of field 1714 is 0 and the value of field 1715 is 1). For example, if a player confirms the setting value, and the setting suggestion animation differs from the actual setting (for example, if an animation suggesting a high setting such as "Maybe a high setting?" occurs when the setting value is 1), the player may develop distrust towards the gaming machine. By not executing the setting suggestion animation, this situation can be avoided.

(4') Regarding a new setting indication variation and setting indication effect corresponding to a win at the starting gate during setting confirmation mode, when setting indication variation is in progress, setting confirmation mode starts after the start of setting indication effect, and gameplay continues during setting confirmation mode.

(4'-1) Execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1716 is 1 and the value of field 1717 is 0). Executing the setting indication animation informs the player that the setting confirmation mode was executed, rather than the setting change mode, providing reassurance that it will not affect the outcome of the game.

(4'-2) Do not execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1716 is 0 and the value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall switches to setting confirmation mode because it has doubts about the setting value, it may change the setting value afterward. In such a case, if the setting indication animation is executed, the setting indication animation and the actual setting will differ (for example, the setting indication animation may show that an even setting is confirmed, but the setting indication animation after the setting has been changed will show that an odd setting is confirmed), which could lead to trouble between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting indication animation, such a situation can be avoided.

Furthermore, if gameplay continues even in the settings confirmation mode, and the settings confirmation mode spans multiple spins, the peripheral control MPU, for example, based on a notification from the main control MPU 1311, determines whether or not it is in settings confirmation mode at the time of the first symbol confirmation after the start of settings confirmation mode or at the start of the next spin. If the peripheral control MPU determines that it is in settings confirmation mode, and a newly acquired reserved ball is in a setting-indicating spin, it will perform a setting-indicating animation along with the spin corresponding to that reserved ball. By executing the setting-indicating animation, the player is informed that settings confirmation mode was executed and not settings change mode (where settings change processing is performed), providing reassurance that the outcome of the game will not be affected.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU may choose not to execute the setting suggestion animation in this case. If, after the player confirms the setting value, the setting suggestion animation differs from the actual setting (for example, if an animation suggesting a high setting, such as "Maybe it's a high setting?", occurs when the setting value is 1), the player may develop distrust towards the gaming machine. By not executing the setting suggestion animation, such a situation can be avoided.

Thus, since the effects are achieved both when setting hints are displayed and when they are not, allowing arcades to set restrictions on setting hints allows them to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of their operating style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Next, Figure 171(B) will be used to explain the error occurrence performance restriction table. The error occurrence performance restriction table stores restriction flags that indicate whether or not to restrict the setting suggestion performance of a variation (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion variation in this chapter) when an error occurs during the execution or pending execution of that variation.

The error occurrence performance restriction table includes record 1801, which stores a restriction flag for when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion performance, and record 1802, which stores a restriction flag for when an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion performance within the setting suggestion fluctuation.

Errors can be categorized into strong errors, which stop the game and trigger a notification, and weak errors, which are triggered while the game continues. An example of a strong error is the detection of an abnormal magnetic field in the launch ball sensor 1020 and within the game area 5a. A example of a weak error is the full tank error (an error indicating that the foul cover unit 520 is full of game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535).

Therefore, it includes an error occurrence performance restriction table, a column 1803 that stores restriction flags corresponding to errors that are reported when the game stops, and a column 1804 that stores restriction flags corresponding to errors that are reported while the game is still in progress.

Furthermore, if gameplay continues while an error occurs, a game ball entering the starting slot during the error may cause a new setting indication change to be postponed. Therefore, column 1804 includes column 1805, which stores a restriction flag for the new setting indication change corresponding to a ball entering the starting slot during the error.

Furthermore, the restriction flags in the error occurrence performance restriction table can be set, for example, during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 or at the pachinko parlor, using an operating medium installed in the pachinko machine 1 (this can be an operating medium that the player cannot operate or one that the player can operate).

Furthermore, in the error occurrence animation restriction table, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other is 0; one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other is 0; one value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other is 0; one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other is 0; one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 1 and the other is 0; and one value of field 1816 and field 1817 is 1 and the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction patterns for setting suggestion effects according to the restriction flags for each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. These restriction patterns are described below.

(1) In the case where an error occurs before the start of the setting indication演出 (performance/presentation), and the game stops at the time the error occurs (severe error).

(1-1) After resuming gameplay, execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1806 is 1 and the value of field 1807 is 0). Executing the setting indication animation informs the player that the settings have not been changed when the error was cleared by the hall staff, providing reassurance that the outcome of the game will not be affected.

(1-2) Do not execute the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes (the value of field 1806 is 0 and the value of field 1807 is 1). This means that if an error occurs, the setting indication animation will not be executed, which could be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, players will proceed with the game in a way that avoids errors, ensuring smooth gameplay and reducing the burden on the arcade.

(2) Regarding the setting indication animation in cases where an error occurs before the start of the setting indication animation, and the game continues to play after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) Execute the setting suggestion animation (the value of field 1808 is 1 and the value of field 1809 is 0). This allows the game to continue even during an error, thus preventing a decrease in the machine's operation. Furthermore, since the setting suggestion animation occurs even during an error, it can enhance the player's enjoyment. When audio and visual information indicating an error is output to various speakers and the main LCD display 1600, these audio and visual information are output with priority over the audio and visual information of the setting suggestion animation. In this case, to avoid causing discomfort to the player, the image indicating an error is displayed on the main LCD display 1600 so that some or all of the setting suggestion animation is shown. Alternatively, to provide the player with a sense of anticipation, such as "when was the setting suggestion animation displayed?" or "a setting suggestion animation indicating a high setting might have been displayed," the image indicating an error may be displayed on the main LCD display 1600 while completely hiding the setting suggestion animation.

(2-2) Do not execute the setting indication animation (the value of field 1808 is 0 and the value of field 1809 is 1). This means that if an error occurs, the setting indication animation will not be executed, which could be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, players will proceed with the game in a way that avoids errors, ensuring smooth gameplay and reducing the burden on the arcade.

(2') Regarding the setting indication演出 (setting indication performance) for new setting indication variations that correspond to the entry into the starting slot during the occurrence of the error, when an error occurs before the start of the setting indication performance and the game continues to play even while the error is occurring (weak error).

(2'-1) Execute the setting suggestion animation (the value of field 1810 is 1 and the value of field 1811 is 0). This allows the game to continue even during an error, preventing a decrease in the machine's operation. Furthermore, since the setting suggestion animation occurs even during an error, it can enhance the player's enjoyment.

(2'-2) The setting indication animation is not executed (the value of field 1810 is 0 and the value of field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting indication animation is not executed for winnings while an error is occurring, causing the player to stop shooting balls and clear the error early.

(3) In the case where an error occurs during a setting indication change and after the setting indication animation has started, and the game stops at the time the error occurs (severe error).

(3-1) Restart the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes (when the value of field 1812 is 1 and the value of field 1813 is 0). If the setting indication animation that has already started is stopped, players may become suspicious that the settings have been changed. By restarting the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes, this situation can be avoided.

(3-2) Do not resume the setting indication animation after gameplay resumes (the value of field 1812 is 0 and the value of field 1813 is 1). This means that if an error occurs, the setting indication animation may be stopped, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, players will proceed with the game in a way that avoids errors, ensuring smooth gameplay and reducing the burden on the arcade.

(4) Regarding the setting indication animation during the setting indication change, when an error occurs during the setting indication change and after the start of the setting indication animation, and the game continues to play even while the error is occurring (weak error).

(4-1) Continue the setting suggestion animation (value of field 1814 is 1 and value of field 1815 is 0). This allows the game to continue even during an error, preventing a decrease in the machine's operation. Furthermore, since the setting suggestion animation continues to occur even during an error, it can enhance the player's enjoyment. When audio and visual information indicating an error is output to various speakers and the main LCD display 1600, these audio and visual information are output with priority over the audio and visual information in the setting suggestion animation. In this case, to avoid causing discomfort to the player, the image indicating an error is displayed on the main LCD display 1600 so that some or all of the setting suggestion animation is shown. Alternatively, to provide the player with a sense of anticipation regarding "when the setting suggestion animation was displayed" and "whether a setting suggestion animation indicating a high setting was displayed," the image indicating an error may be displayed on the main LCD display 1600 while completely obscuring the setting suggestion animation.

(4-2) The setting indication animation is stopped (when the value of field 1814 is 0 and the value of field 1815 is 1). This means that if an error occurs, the setting indication animation will be stopped, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, players will proceed with the game in a way that avoids errors, ensuring smooth gameplay and reducing the burden on the arcade.

(4') Regarding a new setting indication variation and setting indication effect corresponding to a ball entering the starting slot during a setting indication variation, when an error occurs during the setting indication variation and after the start of the setting indication effect, and the game continues to play even while the error is occurring (weak error).

(4'-1) Execute the setting suggestion animation (the value of field 1816 is 1 and the value of field 1817 is 0). This allows the game to continue even during an error, preventing a decrease in the machine's operation. Furthermore, since the setting suggestion animation occurs even during an error, it can enhance the player's enjoyment.

(4'-2) The setting indication animation is not executed (the value of field 1816 is 0 and the value of field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting indication animation is not executed for winnings while an error is occurring, causing the player to stop shooting balls and clear the error early.

Thus, since the effects are achieved both when setting hints are displayed and when they are not, allowing arcades to set restrictions on setting hints allows them to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of their operating style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on presentation for new prize-winning entries]
The following describes the limitations on the animations in spins corresponding to a new starting win while a special symbol is changing and a new spin can be held in reserve. Figure 172 is an example of a new starting win animation limitation table. The new starting win animation limitation table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

The new start-up prize winning animation restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by assumptions about the animation of the previous spin and the animation restrictions for the new start-up prize winning animation under those assumptions. In this chapter, the previous spin refers to the spin immediately preceding the spin corresponding to the new start-up prize winning animation. The conditions for the animation of the previous spin include cases where only an animation indicating whether the special lottery result corresponding to that spin is a jackpot is performed, and cases where both an animation indicating the expectation of a jackpot and an animation indicating the setting are performed.

Furthermore, as restrictions on the pre-announcement animations for new starting prize wins, there are three options: restricting only the setting-indicating animations in the pre-announcement animations (i.e., not executing the setting-indicating animations); restricting both the setting-indicating and expectation-indicating animations in the pre-announcement animations (i.e., not executing either the setting-indicating or expectation-indicating animations); and not restricting either the setting-indicating or expectation-indicating animations in the pre-announcement animations (i.e., executing both the setting-indicating and pre-announcement animations).

The Reference Processing Table column stores the identifier of the processing table referenced when executing the pre-read animation restriction for new starting wins, which is included in the corresponding conditions. The Flag column stores flags indicating which conditions are executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the pre-read animation for new starting wins.

Furthermore, a value of 1 is stored in the flag field corresponding to one of processing tables 1 to 3, and a value of 0 is stored in the flag fields corresponding to the other two processing tables 1 to 3. Also, a value of 1 is stored in the flag field corresponding to one of processing tables 4 to 6, and a value of 0 is stored in the flag fields corresponding to the other two processing tables 4 to 6. The flags in the New Start Prize Performance Restriction Table can be set, for example, during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 or in the pachinko parlor, using an operating medium installed in the pachinko machine 1 (this can be an operating medium that the player cannot operate or an operating medium that the player can operate).

The peripheral control MPU, upon determining that a new starting win occurs during a special symbol variation and while a new variation is available for holding, and that only an expectation-indicating effect was executed in the previous variation, executes the condition indicated in the condition column corresponding to the flag column in the new starting win effect restriction table where the value in the "Previous Variation Effect" column corresponds to "Expectation Indication Only," and where the flag column stores a value of 1. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to that flag column to determine the content of the pre-announcement effect in the variation corresponding to the new starting win.

Similarly, when a new starting win occurs during a special symbol variation and while a new variation is pending, and when an expectation-indicating effect and a setting-indicating effect were executed in the previous variation, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column in the "Previous Variation Effect" column of the new starting win effect restriction table that corresponds to "Expectation Indication + Setting Indication" and stores the value as 1, to determine the content of the pre-read effect in the variation corresponding to the new starting win.

The following explains each condition indicated in the Conditions column. The first condition (the condition under which Processing Table 1 is selected) is that, when only expectation-indicating effects are executed in the previous spin, the pre-announcement effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win is restricted to only setting-indicating effects. Under the first condition, because expectation-indicating effects are performed in the previous spin, the player's excitement level is high due to their anticipation of a big win. If a setting-indicating effect is executed as a pre-announcement effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win in this state, the player's attention may be directed to the setting-indicating effect as well, potentially reducing the excitement felt during the previous spin's effects. Furthermore, the player may confuse the setting-indicating effect with the expectation-indicating effect, leading to false hope. Therefore, the execution of the first condition can prevent these situations from occurring.

Furthermore, under the first condition, if an expectation-indicating effect is performed in the preceding spin, and if a setting-indicating effect is then performed as a pre-announcement effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, even if the player anticipates a loss in the previous spin, they can still have expectations for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, thus providing the player with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect using the preview effect table in Figure 165, the peripheral control MPU determines the effect using the table, and then determines whether the flag in the condition column indicating the restriction of the setting suggestion effect is 1 (whether to restrict it or not). If it is 1 (restricted), even if "set present" was selected, it is rewritten to "set absent" and displayed, thereby restricting the setting suggestion effect. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can restrict the setting suggestion effect using the preview effect table shown in Figure 165 by performing a determination process after determining the effect. That is, the pachinko machine 1 does not need to maintain an effect table for each type of effect restriction, thus reducing the amount of data. Similarly, for the expectation suggestion effect described later, even if the pre-read hold display is selected using the final hold color table in Figure 161 and a value other than white is selected, if the expectation suggestion effect is restricted, the selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

The second condition (the condition under which processing table 2 is selected) is that, when only an expectation-indicating effect is executed in the previous spin, both the setting-indicating effect and the expectation-indicating effect are restricted as pre-announcement effects for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Under the second condition, because an expectation-indicating effect is performed in the previous spin, the player's excitement level is high due to their anticipation of a big win. If, in this state, both the setting-indicating effect and the expectation-indicating effect are executed as pre-announcement effects for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, the player's attention may be directed to these effects as well, potentially reducing the excitement experienced during the previous spin's effect. Therefore, the execution of the second condition can suppress the occurrence of these situations.

The third condition (the condition for selecting processing table 3) is that, when only an expectation-indicating effect is executed in the previous spin, neither the setting-indicating effect nor the expectation-indicating effect is restricted as a pre-announcement effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Under the third condition, because an expectation-indicating effect is performed in the previous spin, the player's excitement level is high due to the expectation of a big win. In this state, if a setting-indicating effect is executed as a pre-announcement effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, the player can be given not only excitement about a big win, but also excitement about the setting-indicating effect (especially if a high-setting confirmation effect or a high-setting confirmation effect is executed).

The fourth condition (the condition under which processing table 4 is selected) is that, when expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects are performed in the previous spin, only the setting-indicating effect is restricted as a pre-reading effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Under the fourth condition, because expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects are performed in the previous spin, the player feels excitement from the possibility of winning a jackpot in the previous spin, and (especially if a high-setting-indicating or high-setting-confirming effect is performed) excitement from the setting indication. In this state, if a setting-indicating effect is performed as a pre-reading effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, there is a risk that the excitement regarding the expectation of a jackpot in the previous spin's hold will decrease.

Specifically, for example, if the setting indication演出 (performance/presentation) in the previous spin confirms a setting of 4 or higher, and the setting indication演出 (pre-announcement performance) corresponding to the new starting win confirms a setting of 5 or higher, then the setting indication演出 in the previous spin contains a lot of inaccurate information (it suggests the possibility of setting 4 even though it is actually setting 5 or higher). In such cases, players may infer that not only the setting indication演出 in the previous spin but also the expectation indication演出 contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, they may infer that the probability of a big win is not high even for reserves displayed in red), and their excitement for the expectation indication演出 may decrease. The fourth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The fifth condition (the condition under which processing table 5 is selected) is that, when expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects are executed in the previous spin, both setting-indicating and expectation-indicating effects are restricted as a pre-reading effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Under the fifth condition, since expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects are performed in the previous spin, if a setting-indicating effect is performed in the pre-reading effect corresponding to the new starting win, multiple setting-indicating effects will be performed in a short period, potentially leading the player to accurately guess the setting value (for example, if an odd-number setting-indicating effect and a high-setting-indicating effect are performed, there is a high probability that it is setting 5). If the player judges it to be a low setting in this situation, they may stop playing on that pachinko machine 1; if they judge it to be a high setting, the operation of other pachinko machines 1 in the hall may decrease. Executing the fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such situations.

Furthermore, if expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects are performed in the preceding spin, and then again as pre-announcement effects in the spin corresponding to a new starting win, a large number of effects may occur in a short period, potentially confusing the player. The fifth condition can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The sixth condition (the condition for selecting processing table 6) is that, if an expectation-indicating effect and a setting-indicating effect are performed in the previous spin, neither the setting-indicating effect nor the expectation-indicating effect is restricted as a pre-reading effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Under the sixth condition, since the expectation-indicating effect and the setting-indicating effect are performed in the previous spin, the player anticipates the expected value of the expectation-indicating effect based on the setting indicated by that effect. In this state, if the setting-indicating effect and the expectation-indicating effect are performed in the spin corresponding to the new starting win, the expected value of these two expectation-indicating effects may increase.

Specifically, for example, if a setting-suggesting animation indicating a setting of 4 or higher is performed in the previous spin, and then a setting-suggesting animation indicating a setting of 5 or higher is performed as a pre-announcement animation upon a new starting win, the player will have assumed a setting of 4 or higher based on the expectation-suggesting animation in the previous spin. However, since the setting-suggesting animation as a pre-announcement upon the new starting win then suggests a setting of 5 or higher, the player's expectation for that expectation-suggesting animation will shift to an expectation of a setting of 5 or higher, increasing their excitement.

Thus, since each of the pre-announcement effect restrictions corresponding to the new starting prize win is effective, allowing arcades and other establishments to set these pre-announcement effect restrictions makes it possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of their operating style.

The following describes each processing table and the pre-reading effects executed by referring to each processing table. Note that each processing table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

Figure 173 shows an example of processing table 1. First, we will explain the common contents of each processing table. Each processing table stores the winning type in the previous special lottery result, the processing details related to the new starting prize corresponding to that winning type, and the processing number, which is the identifier of that processing detail.

Furthermore, the processing details held by each processing table define the processing details for pre-announcement effects that are not subject to restrictions. Specifically, for example, when restricting only the setting-indicating effects as a pre-announcement effect restriction for fluctuations corresponding to a new starting win, the processing details of processing table 1, which is referenced, define the processing details for expectation-indicating effects. Similarly, when restricting both expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects as a pre-announcement effect restriction for fluctuations corresponding to a new starting win, the processing details of processing table 3, which is referenced, define the processing details for both expectation-indicating and setting-indicating effects.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the pre-read animations subject to restrictions in new start-up wins and the processing table to be referenced, based on the flags in the new start-up win animation restriction table. Based on this processing table, it then determines the processing for pre-read animations that are not subject to restrictions.

Furthermore, processing tables 3 and 6, described later, store flags for selecting the processing content related to a new start-up prize from multiple processing options. These flags in the processing tables can be set, for example, during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 or at the pachinko parlor, using an operating medium (which may be either an operating medium that the player cannot operate or one that the player can operate).

The following describes the processing details related to new starting wins as defined by Processing Table 1. Processing Table 1 is referenced when only expectation-indicating effects are executed in the previous spin, and when the pre-reading effect for the spin corresponding to the new starting win is restricted to only setting-indicating effects. The following describes an example where a hold-pre-reading effect is used as an expectation-indicating pre-reading effect.

The process for process number 1 is the process related to a new starting win when the type of win in the previous spin is a jackpot with a time-saving feature. In the process for process number 1, if the mode of the reserve display for the new starting win is a specific mode that indicates a high probability of a jackpot (for example, reserve display modes such as blue, green, or red), the peripheral control MPU will return the mode of the reserve display for the new starting win to the default (the white display mode in the final reserve color table in Figure 161) at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous spin. However, if the reserve is no longer displayed in the reserve display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the reserve display of that specific mode will be erased in the same way as other reserve displays. Furthermore, when the time-saving feature is activated after the jackpot ends, the peripheral control MPU will not return the mode of the reserve display for the new starting win to that specific display mode (i.e., it will remain in the default display). Furthermore, even if the pending new winning combination has not been used up at the end of the time-saving feature, the peripheral control MPU will not revert the display of the pending new winning combination to the specific display mode (i.e., it will remain in the default display mode).

The processing for processing number 2 concerns the processing of a new starting entry when the previous spin's winning type was a jackpot without a time-saving feature. In processing number 2, if the mode of the new starting entry's hold display is a specific mode indicating a high probability of a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU will reset the mode of the new starting entry's hold display to the default, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous spin. However, if the hold display area becomes empty at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of that specific mode will be erased in the same way as other hold displays. Furthermore, even during the transition to the normal state controlled after the jackpot game ends, the mode of the new starting entry's hold display will not be reset to the specific display mode (i.e., it will remain in the default display).

The process for process number 3 is the process related to a new starting prize when the previous spin's winning type was a minor win. In the process for process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the display pattern of the new starting prize's hold (i.e., it continues to display the hold; specifically, for example, if the hold display pattern is blue, it continues to display the blue hold display pattern). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU may revert the hold display pattern of the new starting prize to the default at the start of the opening screen for the minor win won in the previous spin. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the minor win's opening screen, that specific hold display pattern is erased in the same way as other hold displays.

Processing step 4 is the process related to a new starting prize when the previous spin's winning type was a loss. In processing step 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the display of the new starting prize's hold (i.e., it continues to display the hold; specifically, if the hold display is blue, it continues to display the blue hold display).

Figure 174 shows an example of Processing Table 2. Processing Table 2 is referenced when only the expectation-indicating animation is executed in the previous spin, and when both the setting-indicating animation and the expectation-indicating animation are restricted as limitations on the pre-announcement animation for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Because Processing Table 2 is referenced when both the setting-indicating animation and the expectation-indicating animation are restricted as limitations on the pre-announcement animation for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, it is defined that no special processing is executed for the pre-announcement animation in the spin corresponding to the new starting win, regardless of the type of jackpot in the previous spin.

Figure 175 shows an example of processing table 3. Processing table 3 is referenced when only expectation-indicating effects were executed in the previous variation, and when neither setting-indicating effects nor expectation-indicating effects are restricted as pre-announcement effects for the variation corresponding to the new starting win.

The processes for processing numbers 5 and 6 are those related to a new starting point entry when the previous spin's winning type was a jackpot with a time-saving feature. One of the processes for processing numbers 5 and 6 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting point entry in processes 5 and 6 is the same as that for process number 1.

In the processing of processing number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the consumption of the second special symbol reserve during the time-saving mode associated with the jackpot won in the previous variation. Processing number 5 ensures that players do not forget that a setting suggestion animation will be performed if they are aware that the setting suggestion animation has started before the start of the previous variation, etc.

In the processing of processing number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Since a jackpot with a time-saving feature was won in the previous variation, the variation corresponding to this new win is highly likely to begin after the end of the time-saving feature (because during the time-saving feature, game balls frequently enter the second starting gate 2004, and if there are reserves for the first and second special symbol variations, the second special symbol variation is executed in priority over the first special symbol variation). Therefore, because the setting suggestion animation is executed after the end of the time-saving feature due to processing number 6, the player's disappointment due to the end of the time-saving feature can be mitigated.

The processes for processing numbers 7 and 8 are those related to a new starting point entry when the previous spin's winning type was a jackpot without a time-saving feature. One of the processes for processing numbers 7 and 8 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting point entry in processes 7 and 8 is the same as that for process number 2.

In the processing of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the previous variation, or during the jackpot game won in the previous variation. Although the player may feel disappointed if they won a jackpot but did not win the time-saving feature, if the setting suggestion animation starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to the processing of process number 7, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with their disappointment mitigated.

In the processing of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting win. Because the setting suggestion animation begins immediately after the end of the jackpot due to the processing of process number 8, the player's disappointment at not receiving a time-saving bonus can be reduced.

The processes for processing numbers 9-10 are those related to a new starting win when the previous win was a minor win. One of the processes for processing numbers 9-10 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting win in processes 9-10 is the same as that for process number 3.

In the processing of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the opening of the minor win that was won in the previous variation, or during the minor win itself. Since a minor win only grants the player a small reward, the player may be disappointed; however, the processing of process number 9 allows the setting suggestion animation to start at an earlier timing, thus mitigating this disappointment.

In processing step 10, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Since the time it takes to complete a series of spins related to a minor win is shorter than the time it takes to complete a series of spins related to a major win, if the player is aware that a setting suggestion animation has started before the start of the previous spin, and the animation is not executed, the player may feel distrustful. Processing step 10 prevents this kind of distrust from being caused to the player.

The processes for processing numbers 11-13 are those related to a new starting win when the previous spin's winning type was a miss. One of the processes for processing numbers 11-13 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting win in processes 11-13 is the same as that for process number 4.

In the processing of processing number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start-up win.

In the processing of processing number 12, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-read animation for the new starting entry during the spin corresponding to the new starting entry, but only if the hold display pattern in the previous spin's hold pre-read animation is a specific pattern that indicates a high probability of a big win (e.g., green or red). The timing of the execution of this setting suggestion animation is not changed, i.e., no special processing is performed. However, the timing of the execution of the setting suggestion animation may be controlled differently (for example, the timing of the appearance of the line suggesting the setting by character B may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 2 seconds)). The processing of processing number 12 can alleviate the disappointment of players who feel disappointed after missing a win despite the appearance of a hold display pattern indicating a high probability of a big win in the previous spin. In Figure 175 and Figure 178 (described later), "old hold" refers to the hold corresponding to the previous spin, and "new hold" refers to the hold corresponding to the new starting entry.

In the processing of processing number 13, if the hold display pattern is a specific pattern indicating a high probability of a jackpot (e.g., green or red), the peripheral control MPU will not execute the setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement for the new starting entry. Because processing number 13 prevents the player from becoming overly engrossed in the game, even if a hold display pattern indicating a high probability of a jackpot appeared in the previous spin, resulting in a miss, and furthermore, no setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement appears in the spin corresponding to the new starting entry.

Figure 176 shows an example of processing table 4. Processing table 4 is referenced when, in the previous variation, both the expectation indication and setting indication effects were executed, and as a pre-announcement effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting win, only the setting indication effect is restricted.

The process for process number 14 concerns the new starting point entry when the previous spin's winning type was a jackpot with a time-saving feature. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting point entry in process number 14 is the same as that for process number 1.

The process for process number 15 concerns the processing related to a new starting entry when the previous variation's winning type was a jackpot without a time-saving feature. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting entry in process number 15 is the same as that for process number 2.

The process for process number 16 deals with the new starting win when the previous win was a minor win. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting win in process number 16 is the same as that for process number 3.

The process in processing number 17 deals with the new starting win when the previous spin's winning type was a miss. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting win in processing number 16 is the same as the process in processing number 4.

Furthermore, processing table 4 is a table referenced when restricting only the setting-indicating effects as a pre-announcement effect for fluctuations corresponding to new starting wins. Therefore, regardless of the type of jackpot in the previous fluctuation, it is defined that no special processing is performed on the setting-indicating effects in the fluctuations corresponding to new starting wins.

Figure 177 shows an example of processing table 5. Processing table 5 is referenced when both the expected outcome indication and the setting indication were executed in the previous spin, and both the setting indication and the expected outcome indication are restricted as pre-reading restrictions for the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Because processing table 5 is referenced when both the setting indication and the expected outcome indication are restricted as pre-reading restrictions for the spin corresponding to the new starting win, it is defined that no special processing is performed for the pre-reading effects in the spin corresponding to the new starting win, regardless of the type of jackpot in the previous spin.

Figure 178 shows an example of processing table 6. Processing table 6 is referenced when, in the previous variation, both the expectation indication and setting indication effects were executed, and neither the setting indication effect nor the expectation indication effect is restricted as a pre-reading effect restriction for the variation corresponding to the new starting win.

The processes for processing numbers 18-21 are those related to a new starting point for winning when the previous spin was a jackpot with a time-saving feature. One of the processes for processing numbers 18-21 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting point in processes 18-21 is the same as that for process number 1.

In processing step 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the variation of the previous variation, during the jackpot game won in the previous variation, or during the consumption of the second special symbol reserve during the time-saving mode associated with the jackpot won in the previous variation. Processing step 18 ensures that players do not forget that a setting suggestion animation will be performed if they are aware that the setting suggestion animation has started before the start of the previous variation, etc.

In processing step 19, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-announcement setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin is better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin (specifically, for example, if the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin indicates that setting 4 or higher is confirmed, and the pre-announcement setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win indicates that setting 5 or higher is confirmed). The period before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win specifically refers to, for example, during the spin of the previous spin, during the jackpot game won in the previous spin, or during the consumption of the second special symbol reserve during the time-saving mode associated with the jackpot won in the previous spin.

Through processing number 19, players can see the high-setting indication animation at the latest during a bonus round with reduced playtime, thus experiencing a double thrill from both the bonus round with reduced playtime and the high-setting indication. Furthermore, for example, if the setting indication animation in the previous spin confirms a setting of 5 or higher, and the pre-announcement setting indication animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting entry confirms a setting of 4 or higher, then the pre-announcement setting indication animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting entry is a useless animation that does not provide new information to the player, and processing number 19 allows for the omission of such a useless animation. Conversely, for example, if the setting indication animation in the previous spin confirms a setting of 4 or higher, the player is likely to continue playing even if the pre-announcement setting indication animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting entry does not confirm a setting of 5 or higher, making that setting indication animation likely to be useless, and processing number 19 allows for the omission of such a useless animation.

In the processing of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start-up win. Because the setting suggestion animation often starts immediately after the end of the time-saving mode due to the processing of process number 20, it can reduce the player's disappointment upon the end of the time-saving mode.

In the process of processing number 21, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion animation during the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin. The process of processing number 21 can eliminate unnecessary setting suggestion animations as described in the process of processing number 19, and reduce the player's disappointment upon the end of the time-saving state.

The processes for processing numbers 22-25 are those related to a new starting point entry when the previous spin's winning type was a jackpot without a time-saving feature. One of the processes for processing numbers 22-25 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting point entry in processes 22-25 is the same as that for process number 2.

In the processing of processing number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the previous variation, or during the jackpot game won in the previous variation. Although the player may feel disappointed if they won a jackpot but did not win the time-saving feature, if the setting suggestion animation starts at the latest during the jackpot game due to processing number 22, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with their disappointment mitigated.

In processing step 23, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-announcement setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the pre-announcement animation is better than the setting suggested in the previous spin's setting suggestion animation. Specifically, "before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the previous spin, or during a jackpot game won in the previous spin. If the setting suggestion animation starts at the latest during a jackpot game due to processing step 23, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with reduced disappointment.

In processing step 24, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the fluctuation corresponding to the new winning spin. Because processing step 24 starts the setting suggestion animation immediately after the big win ends, it reduces the player's disappointment if they did not enter the time-saving mode.

In processing step 25, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion animation during the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin. Processing step 21 allows for the omission of unnecessary setting suggestion animations, as explained in processing step 19, and reduces the player's disappointment if they do not enter a time-saving mode. Furthermore, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin, executing the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win would show an even more unnecessary setting suggestion animation to a player who is already disappointed about not entering a time-saving mode, potentially further irritating the player.

The processes for processing numbers 26-29 are those related to new starting entries when the previous win was a minor win. One of the processes for processing numbers 26-29 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting entry in processes 26-29 is the same as that for process number 3.

In processing step 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win. Specifically, "before the start of the variation corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the previous variation, during the opening of the minor win achieved in the previous variation, or during the minor win itself. Since minor wins only grant the player a small reward, the player may be disappointed; however, processing step 26 allows the setting suggestion animation to start at an earlier timing, thus mitigating this disappointment.

In processing step 27, the peripheral control MPU executes the pre-announcement setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the pre-announcement animation is better than the setting suggested in the previous spin's setting suggestion animation. Specifically, "before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win" refers to, for example, during the previous spin, during the opening of the minor win won in the previous spin, or during the minor win itself. Processing step 27 allows for the omission of unnecessary setting suggestion animations, as explained in processing step 19, and reduces player disappointment caused by minor wins offering only small benefits.

In processing step 28, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the spin corresponding to the new starting win. Since the time it takes to complete a series of spins related to a minor win is shorter than the time it takes to complete a series of spins related to a major win, if the player is aware that a setting suggestion animation has started before the start of the previous spin, and the animation is not executed, the player may feel distrustful. Processing step 28 prevents this kind of distrust from being caused to the player.

In processing step 29, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion animation during the spin corresponding to the new starting win only if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin. Processing step 29 allows for the omission of unnecessary setting suggestion animations, as explained in processing step 19, and reduces player disappointment when only small benefits are granted in minor wins. Furthermore, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin, executing the setting suggestion animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win would further irritate players who are already disappointed by the small benefits of minor wins, potentially further upsetting them.

The processes for processing numbers 30-34 are those related to a new starting win when the previous spin's winning type was a loss. One of the processes for processing numbers 30-34 can be selected using a flag. The processing for the expectation-indicating pre-announcement effect corresponding to the new starting win in processes 30-34 is the same as that for process number 4.

In the processing of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. Processing of process number 30 can reduce the player's disappointment caused by the previous fluctuation being unsuccessful.

In the processing of processing number 31, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-read animation for the new starting entry during the spin corresponding to the new starting entry, but only if the hold display pattern in the previous spin's hold pre-read animation is a specific pattern that indicates a high probability of a big win (e.g., green or red). The timing of the execution of this setting suggestion animation is not changed, i.e., no special processing is performed. However, the timing of the execution of the setting suggestion animation may be controlled differently (for example, the timing of the appearance of the line suggesting the setting by character B may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 2 seconds) or advanced by a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 2 seconds)). The processing of processing number 31 can alleviate disappointment for players who feel disappointed after missing a win despite the appearance of a hold display pattern indicating a high probability of a big win in the previous spin.

In the processing of processing number 32, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion animation as a pre-read animation for the new starting win during the spin corresponding to the new starting win, only if the hold display pattern in the previous spin's hold pre-read animation is a specific pattern that indicates a high probability of a big win (e.g., green or red), and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation as a pre-read animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is better than the setting suggestion animation for the previous spin. Processing number 32 allows for the mitigation of the player's disappointment when the previous spin, which had a hold display pattern indicating a high probability of a big win, turns out to be a miss, through the setting suggestion animation.

In processing step 33, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation for the new starting win during the spin corresponding to the new starting win, but only if the hold display pattern in the previous spin's hold pre-announcement animation is not a specific pattern indicating a high probability of a big win (e.g., green or red). Processing step 33 allows for the mitigation of disappointment for players who were disappointed by the low probability of a big win in the previous spin's hold pre-announcement animation, by providing a setting suggestion animation.

In the processing of processing number 34, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation for the new starting win during the spin corresponding to the new starting win, only if the hold display pattern is not a specific pattern indicating a high probability of a big win (e.g., green or red), and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation as a pre-announcement animation before the start of the spin corresponding to the new starting win is better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion animation of the previous spin. Processing of processing number 34 can suppress situations that would amplify player frustration, such as when the hold display pattern of the previous spin indicates a low probability and the setting suggestion animation in the spin corresponding to the new starting win indicates a low setting.

Furthermore, in the process described above, even under circumstances where the pre-announcement effect for fluctuations corresponding to a new starting win is not restricted, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in the following cases. For example, if the new starting win occurs during a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after a jackpot, players are likely to continue playing even without the incentive of a setting suggestion effect.

As shown in the examples of processing tables 3 and 6, each processing number has an effect on the processing related to the new starting prize. Therefore, by allowing halls and other establishments to set the processing related to the new starting prize, it is possible to provide gaming machines that meet the needs of the hall's operating style.

Furthermore, for example, if the new starting win occurs near the end of the ST state (a probability variation state that continues until a jackpot is won or a predetermined number of special symbol variations are performed) (specifically, for example, when the remaining number of special symbol variations until the end of the ST state is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of special symbol variations that can be held, or when the remaining number of special symbol variations until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main LCD display device 1600), the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion animation. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not they will win a jackpot in that ST state. If a setting suggestion animation is started as a pre-announcement animation related to a new starting win in such a state, the player may mistakenly believe that the setting suggestion animation is an animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot, potentially leading to false hope. The above-described process can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Furthermore, for example, if a new start entry occurs between the end of the ST state and the transition to the normal state, and the predetermined number of special symbol variations (specifically, for example, four special symbol variations, which is the maximum number of special symbols held, or, considering that the second start port 2004 may be open immediately after the transition from the ST state to the normal state, a predetermined number of special symbol variations (for example, five)) has been performed, the peripheral control MPU does not need to execute the setting suggestion animation. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not they will win a jackpot. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high probability that variations corresponding to the holding of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot of a type that is highly advantageous to the player, will be executed. If a setting suggestion animation is started as a pre-announcement animation related to a new start entry in such a state, the player may mistakenly believe that the setting suggestion animation is an animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot, potentially leading to false hope. The above-described process can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

Furthermore, if it is determined that a setting suggestion animation will be executed for each of the multiple pending states, the setting suggestion animation in the previous spin may be modified so that a single setting suggestion animation spanning the spins corresponding to those multiple pending states is executed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 1]
The following describes another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing a setting change switch 972. However, in order to distinguish between the RAM clear switch 954's original function of initializing the main control RAM 1312 and its setting change function, the operation related to changing the setting value may be described as being performed by the setting change switch 972.

Figures 179 and 180 are flowcharts of the power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in Figures 179 and 180 is an alternative example of steps S10 in Figure 21 to S34 in Figure 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 receives the signal levels of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 from the input ports and stores the received level data in a register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated in steps S212 and S214, after the peripheral control board 1510 has been successfully started up. Therefore, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be detected in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing begins. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during power-on can be reliably detected, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation early after power-on.

Furthermore, the ON levels of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be set to be different. For example, the positive and negative values of the logic for the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be reversed, so that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON at a High level and the setting key 971 is ON at a Low level. Alternatively, the voltage used to determine ON status for the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be different. By doing so, it becomes difficult to perform fraudulent acts that involve changing the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves to activate the setting change mode. Also, as will be described later, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the signal level of the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where the setting can be selected from 1 to 6, if the value of the workpiece where the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 5 for setting 6), then if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area, and the system waits for initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 (step S203). Since the set value is not within the range for which the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, abnormal set values are not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there are any abnormalities in the set value, and if there are any abnormalities, the system prevents the execution of normal gameplay processes such as special symbols and regular symbols.

Furthermore, the setting value is determined not only when the power is turned on, but also when a prize is won in the starting slot, when the variable display game begins, and when the game state changes (from normal state to jackpot state, from low probability state to high probability state, from non-time-saving state to time-saving state, etc.) when certain conditions are met. This prevents the lottery from being conducted based on an incorrect setting value, even if an abnormal value is mistakenly set.

If an abnormal setting is detected, the game will stop, and the abnormal setting (RAM abnormality) state will be maintained until the power is turned back on or the setting is changed. If an abnormal setting is detected, it is recommended to set a predetermined value. For example, a value corresponding to setting 6 (the highest setting) or a value corresponding to setting 1 (the lowest setting) should be used to update the setting value storage area.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the RAM error can only be resolved via the setting change mode; simply restarting the power will not resolve the RAM error. This is because RAM errors can occur not only due to malfunctions but also due to fraud. If a RAM error caused by fraud could be resolved by simply restarting the power, the RAM error would be easily resolved. In contrast, by requiring the setting change mode to resolve the RAM error, it becomes necessary to operate three switches: the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954. Furthermore, since this involves operating the setting key 971, which can only be operated by hall employees with a key, the security performance against fraudulent activity is enhanced.

Furthermore, to counter fraudulent activities that involve illegally changing the setting value to an arbitrary value, updating the setting value to the value corresponding to setting 1, which represents the lowest setting, when an abnormal setting value is detected, is an effective way to improve the security of the gaming machine.

The setting status management area, as shown in Figure 201(B), is a memory area where the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, it records the normal game state (game start ready state), setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, and abnormalities in the main control RAM 1312.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, wait for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up (step S204).

Next, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 during the previous power outage is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated during the previous power outage and stored in step S48. Alternatively, a fixed check code may be used instead of a checksum. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value in the backup flag area is normal. If the power outage flag value, indicating a successful backup, is stored in the backup flag area, then the RAM data was successfully backed up during the power outage (step S205).

If the checksum or backup flag area value is found to be abnormal as a result of the check, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 (including the area where the setting value is stored) is initialized (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Note that erasing data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization," but "RAM clear" is also used with the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the checksum and backup flag area values are normal, it is determined whether a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 ON, setting key 971 ON) has been performed based on the value (content) of the setting key stored in the register. If it is not a setting change operation (both or either of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are OFF), it is determined whether a value indicating "setting change in progress" (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area to determine if the state was "setting change in progress" before power-on (step S208).

As a result, if the register indicates that a setting change operation has been performed, it can be determined that the setting change mode was activated using the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power was turned on, and that the system is in a state where the setting change operation should begin. Furthermore, if the value indicating that a setting change is in progress (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power was turned on after a power outage during a setting change operation. When it is determined to transition to setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change status (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312, which should be initialized when the RAM is functioning normally, is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

Furthermore, in step S208, when transitioning to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. However, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to transition to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, it is not necessary to record the value indicating the setting change state (02H) in the setting state management area.

On the other hand, if no setting change operation is set in the register, and the setting state management area does not contain a value (02H) indicating that a setting change is in progress, the setting change operation should not be initiated. Therefore, to determine whether the state before power-on was in a RAM abnormal state, it is checked whether the setting state management area contains a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on was RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before power-on was not RAM abnormal (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and therefore, it is determined whether the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register (step S212).

As a result, if the register stores the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S210 to initialize the RAM area within the game control area (the clear area when RAM is functioning normally), excluding the setting value and setting state management area.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, it means that the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command to notify the game state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the ON level of setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). If the ON level of setting key 971 is stored in the register, it is determined that setting key 971 was operated when the power was turned on and the setting confirmation operation should begin. Therefore, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S215).

Subsequently, the initial setup of the devices built into the main control MPU 1311 is performed (step S216), and a power-on operation command notifying the operation of each part upon power-up is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). This power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of Figure 22. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to its power-on state (step S218).

Next, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the game start ready state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game start ready state is recorded in the setting state management area, normal gameplay can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setup continues. On the other hand, if a value indicating the game start ready state is not recorded in the setting state management area, normal gameplay cannot be started, so the initial setup is terminated and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, initial settings are performed at the start of gameplay or after a power outage. Then, a power-on status command, which notifies the state of each part at the time of power-on, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Next, a power-on recovery destination command, which notifies the state of the special symbols upon power-on recovery, is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on status command and the power-on recovery destination command are among the power-on commands described in step S32 of Figure 22. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted during timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, a setting value command notifying the setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are enabled (step S224), and the process proceeds to the normal main loop (for example, step S36 in Figure 22).

Figures 181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. Unlike the timer interrupt processing shown in Figures 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, the timer interrupt processing shown in Figures 181 and 182 executes a setting change process within the timer interrupt processing itself.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter determines which common terminal of the base indicator 1317 is turned on, i.e., which digit is displayed. In this embodiment, an example is described where the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 are used together; however, the base indicator 1317 and the setting indicator 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide one LED common counter for each indicator.

Subsequently, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in Figure 23.

Next, it is determined whether the initial value (a value indicating the game start ready state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (a value indicating the game start ready state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute the setting change/confirmation process (step S234 onwards) in the timer interrupt process, so the normal timer interrupt process (for example, step S76 onwards in Figure 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process of step S233, the performance display process (Figure 183), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (a value indicating the game start ready state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, and the setting change/confirmation process is executed.

In the setting change/confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning OFF the LED common signal early in the timer interrupt processing, time is secured until the LED common signal turns on, i.e., the LED is off, suppressing the ghosting phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display switch appear mixed, and preventing LED flickering.

Subsequently, it is determined whether a value indicating a RAM anomaly (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM anomaly is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without performing the process of changing/confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM anomaly is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation to change/confirm the setting value has been performed (steps S236, S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value indicating a setting change (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of incrementing the setting value exceeds the upper limit, it is reset to the initial value. On the other hand, if no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (or if a value indicating a setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area), or if the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, it is determined whether an OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 has been detected (step S239). If an OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 has been operated to its normal position, and the setting change/confirmation mode termination process is executed (steps S240-S244). On the other hand, if no OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 has been detected, the setting change/confirmation mode is not terminated, and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change/confirmation mode termination process, as shown in Figure 182, an initial value (a value indicating the state in which the game can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), initial settings for game start or initial settings for power recovery are performed (step S241), and a power-on state command that notifies the state of each part at the time of power-on (game state such as low probability/high probability, time reduction/non-time reduction, etc.) is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S242). Then, a power-on recovery destination command that notifies the state of the special symbols at the time of power recovery after a power outage is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing state related to the special symbols/special electric mechanism (the state of each process related to the special symbols/special electric mechanism (standby, during variation, judgment, during jackpot, etc.)) is transmitted as a command. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbols and the operating state of the special electric mechanism when power is restored. Then, the setting value command, which notifies the setting value, is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

Furthermore, it is advisable to send the command notifying the setting value not only during the setting change/confirmation mode termination process at power-on, but also at the start of a spin and when the game state changes. In this case, the setting value command sent at power-on and the command sent during normal gameplay (such as at the start of a spin) can be the same command or different commands (for example, with different upper-byte values).

If the setting value commands differ between power-on and normal gameplay, the peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving a series of commands (variation pattern commands, symbol commands, etc.) including the setting value at the start of the special symbol variation display game, determines whether any commands are missing. By differentiating the content of the commands depending on the timing of their transmission (power-on, during normal gameplay, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether the setting value received correctly at power-on or whether any variation pattern commands or symbol commands other than the setting value were missing at the start of the variation.

In step S245, it is determined whether a value indicating a RAM error (08H) is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the system is configured to display an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 if it is a separate unit) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the system is configured to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 if it is a separate unit) (step S247).

Subsequently, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base indicator 1317, and the base indicator 1317 is lit by a segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing starts, the setting value change operation is determined (step S237), and then, for each timer interrupt, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED to display the setting value (switching the display of the setting value). The setting value is displayed without being triggered by a setting operation. Specifically, by performing the setting change/confirmation process within the same timer interrupt processing as when normal gameplay starts, rather than as a power-on process, even if a power outage occurs during the execution of the setting change/confirmation process and the setting key 971 is returned to its original state before power is restored, the system can return to the state of the setting change/confirmation process at the time of the power outage without having to operate the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 to the same position as when the power outage occurred. Furthermore, in the settings change/confirmation process, processes that are also executed in normal gameplay, such as command transmission and dynamic LED lighting control, can be standardized.

Then, a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, etc., are actually output as serial data from the main control board 1310.

The timer interrupt processing described above branches depending on whether normal gameplay is performed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is performed (step S232 in Figure 181). However, multiple timer interrupt processes may be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated for the normal game state and the setting change mode. These multiple timer interrupt processes may include some common processing (for example, a common subroutine may be called in each timer interrupt process), or they may consist entirely of different routines. In other words, timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change/confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and timer interrupt 2 (for normal gameplay) is called in the normal game state. These two timer interrupt processes will have processing (modules) that are executed in common and processing (modules) that are executed only in one of the timer interrupt processes. Examples of processing that is executed in common include switch input processing that takes the output of various detection switches such as the prize entry sensor, and peripheral board command processing that sends commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, the register bank may be shared between the processing performed during normal gameplay and the processing performed in the setting change mode. If bank 0 is used in the main control processing, both timer interrupt processing processes will use bank 1. Since the two timer interrupt processing processes do not start simultaneously, they can share a single register bank. In other words, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by bank, and includes a main control processing process that is executed repeatedly, and timer interrupt processing 1 (during normal gameplay) and timer interrupt processing 2 (in setting change mode) that are executed periodically. At least two of the main control processing, timer interrupt processing 1, and timer interrupt processing 2 use registers from a common bank.

The timer interrupt processing performed during normal gameplay and the timer interrupt processing performed in setting change mode should ideally have the same execution cycle, but they may also be executed at different cycles. Since the only switches sampled in the timer interrupt processing performed in setting change mode are the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, while the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in normal gameplay is 4ms, the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing performed in setting change mode may be faster (e.g., 2ms) or slower (e.g., 8ms). Note that if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing performed in setting change mode is slowed down, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED that displays the setting value will also be slowed down, resulting in a display pattern of the setting value that differs from the base display during normal gameplay. If there are eight common LEDs, and the timer interrupt processing cycle is 8ms, the display cycle will be 64ms (8ms ON, 56ms OFF). If the timer interrupt processing cycle is 4ms, the display cycle will be 32ms (4ms ON, 20ms OFF). The OFF time increases proportionally to the timer interrupt processing cycle, and the LED flickering becomes more pronounced, allowing the display to be perceived as different from the base display during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, when the system starts up and enters either the settings change mode or the settings confirmation mode, the timer interrupt process 1 for settings change/confirmation is enabled, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal gameplay is disabled. On the other hand, when the system starts up in normal gameplay mode (without entering settings change/confirmation mode), the timer interrupt process 1 for settings change/confirmation is disabled, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal gameplay is enabled. Finally, at the end of settings change mode or settings confirmation mode, the timer interrupt process 1 for settings change/confirmation is disabled, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal gameplay is enabled.

Figure 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance of the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., base value) is displayed on the base display unit 1317.

The performance display processing is executed during the timer interrupt in the normal gameplay state, as described above. Specifically, it is executed during the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 181, and during the base display output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address within the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the registers used within the game control area to a register saving buffer (step S261). In step S261, the destination for saving the registers used within the game control area is preferably the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, the destination for saving the registers used within the game control area may be the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the initial power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag indicates whether the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (i.e., whether it is the first power-on). When the area outside the game control region is initialized, 5AH is set. Therefore, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 was initialized during the initial power-on (i.e., the area outside the game control region was also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the parameter values used for displaying the base value are within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digits of the base indicator 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and in step S264, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized.

If the power outage flag is not normal, or if the values of each parameter are not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power outage flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power outage flag is normal and the values of each parameter are within the predetermined range, the various prize entry sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the ball discharge sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated (step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the time for switching intervals in the base value calculation (step S266). If the time for switching has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each interval. For example, display control for each interval includes displaying test intervals with fewer than 500 outs, and flashing displays when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving outs is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 6000) (step S269).

Subsequently, the register values are restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

Next, with reference to Figure 184, the notification method of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, or during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, a notification is issued to clearly inform the hall staff of the status of the pachinko machine.

The notification modes described below (for example, the display modes of the function display unit 1400) are output in the mode selected within the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern in conjunction with the display settings on the base display unit 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 181). Specifically, this is performed in the setting display processing in step S2069 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 190. Alternatively, a dedicated module for displaying the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to perform the processing.

First, if the main control RAM 1312 is malfunctioning, it is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 181). Note that malfunctions in the main control RAM 1312 are reported with priority over other malfunctions or status notifications.
Function display unit 1400: All lights off, or all LEDs flash rapidly at the same cycle. Main LCD display device 1600: Displays the words "RAM error" and emits a sound (sound effect) an alarm sound indicating a RAM error (the alarm sound may be the same as the alarm sound for modes other than setting change mode or setting confirmation mode).
Sound (Voice) Outputs the voice message "RAM error". Volume Maximum volume independent of the volume control on the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Frame decorative LEDs The predetermined frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding burnt-out and stock notification LEDs) on the door frame 3 flash red. Display panel decorative LEDs All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification Release conditions The RAM has been cleared by changing the settings on the main control board 1310, or power has been restored to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, we will explain the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in setting change mode. The setting change notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 181).
Function display unit 1400 All LEDs lit, or all LEDs flashing at a medium speed with the same cycle Main LCD display device 1600 Displays the words "Settings being changed" Sound (sound effect) Outputs a notification sound for setting change mode Sound (voice) Outputs the voice "Settings being changed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume independent of the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decorative LEDs Predetermined frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding burnt-out and stock notification LEDs) provided on the door frame 3 flash in white Display panel decorative LEDs All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Condition for output re-notification The peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as an operation command when power is turned on.

Next, we will explain the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 181).
Function display unit 1400: All LEDs illuminated, or all LEDs blinking slowly at the same cycle. Main LCD display device 1600: Displays the text "Checking settings". Sound (sound effect): Outputs a notification sound for setting confirmation mode (the notification sound for setting confirmation mode may be the same as the notification sound for setting change mode).
Sound (Voice) Outputs the voice message "Checking settings" a predetermined number of times (e.g., 16 times) Volume Maximum volume independent of the volume control box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decorative LEDs Predetermined frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding burnt-out and stock notification LEDs) on the door frame 3 flash in white Display panel decorative LEDs All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification Release condition A predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 received "A001H" as a power-on operation command

The notification of the three states mentioned above should be prioritized so that an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 is notified first, followed by notification in the order of setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priority should be determined in the order shown in Figure 185. Priority 1 indicates a high notification priority, and priority 9 indicates a low notification priority. In other words, if multiple notifications are required, the notification with the higher priority (lower number) will be issued. Also, if the conditions for multiple notifications with the same priority are met and the notifications conflict, even if the conflicting notifications are switched between, the notification that was met first may be issued first, and if the conditions for the conflicting notification are met after the notification is canceled, the conflicting notification may be issued. Specifically, at priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur simultaneously, so the notifications do not conflict. At priority 4, the excessive prize ball abnormality notification and the normal electric prize ball entry abnormality notification may occur simultaneously, and the two notifications may conflict.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM abnormality is detected. Priority 2: Setting change notification in setting change mode. Priority 3: RAM clear notification when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 954 (excluding RAM clear due to setting change).
Priority 3: Notification of setting confirmation in setting confirmation mode Priority 4: Notification of excessive prize ball payout when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed Priority 4: Notification of abnormal entry of normal electric mechanism when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are detected consecutively when the normal electric mechanism is not operating, or when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are detected when the normal electric mechanism is operating once Priority 5: Notification of abnormal discharge when the difference between the number of prize balls entered and the number of prize balls discharged from the large prize opening exceeds a predetermined number Priority 6: Notification of abnormal vibration sensor when vibration is detected Priority 7: Notification of abnormal door opening when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected to be open Priority 8: Notification of abnormal magnetic sensor when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism Priority 9: Notification of abnormal entry of large prize opening when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are detected consecutively when the large prize opening is not operating, or when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are detected during a single jackpot

Next, we will explain the details of the power-on processing described above (Figures 179 and 180). Figures 186 and 187 are flowcharts of the power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311, upon release of the reset signal, begins processing at address 8000, which is the starting address of the program code. The RAM protect register is set to disable protection and the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function to reset if access to a prohibited area other than the specified area is detected, by specifying the area of use of the main control RAM 1312. To disable the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is disabled, allowing access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, and the prohibited area may be enabled so that the main control MPU 1311 resets if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set to the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Then, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and then to OFF (step S2004). By first setting the power outage clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated only after the peripheral control board 1510 has been successfully started, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined to be active in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing begins. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as the register after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation early after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation can be reliably detected.

Subsequently, a power outage warning signal is detected to determine if a power outage is occurring (step S2006). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits in step S2006 until the power supply voltage stabilizes.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where the setting can be selected from 1 to 6, if the value of the workpiece where the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 5 for setting 6), then if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined to be within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the system waits for initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1. Since the set value is not within the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, it is not corrected even if the set value is abnormal. Therefore, the system checks for abnormalities in the set value when the power is turned on, and if an abnormality is found, it prevents the system from starting normal gameplay. In pachinko parlors, a RAM clear operation may be performed when it is desired to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, to clear a latent probability variation (high probability non-time-saving mode) and return to the normal low probability time-saving mode). If the set value is initialized by a RAM clear operation during business hours, it is necessary to shut off the power, activate the setting change mode, and reset the original set value in order to continue business after resetting the set value. To avoid such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, a sub-start-up waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up (step S2008). The waiting period for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up can be anytime between power-on and the first command transmission to the peripheral control board 1510, not necessarily after determining the set value.

Subsequently, the system re-checks whether a power outage is occurring (step S2009). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the system remains in standby mode at step S2009.

Furthermore, the system determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and stores the determination result in a register (step S2010). Specifically, the system compares a checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 during the previous power outage with a checksum calculated using the same area. If the two differ, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. Also, if the value of the power outage flag, which indicates that the backup was successful (that the power outage processing was executed successfully), is not stored in the backup flag area, it is determined that the data in the main control RAM 1312 was not successfully backed up during the power outage (that the power outage processing was not executed successfully), and that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012).

Next, the bits for the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked from the register value where the PF port value is recorded (step S2013). Then, using the values stored in the register, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 was operated ON when the power was turned on (step S2014). If both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in Figure 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the system was in setting change mode when the power outage occurred (step S2015). For example, if the value in the setting state management area saved in S2011 is in setting change mode (02H), it is determined that the power outage occurred while the system was in setting change mode.

Then, if it is determined that a power outage occurred during the settings change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in Figure 187.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no power outage occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, this can be determined using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. If an abnormality is found in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in Figure 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, if the value in the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

If a power outage is detected during RAM error processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in Figure 187. Conversely, if no power outage is detected during RAM error processing, a value indicating normal gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). Recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018 resets the RAM error value (08H) temporarily recorded in step S2012 back to a normal state. Furthermore, recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018 results in different values in the setting state management area when jumping from steps S2016 and S2019 to step S2031. This allows for the use of a common program between these two steps, reducing the program size.

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in Figure 187.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so normal game processing cannot be executed. In this case, if a setting change operation is performed after the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality can be cleared. That is, if it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is updated from a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) to a value indicating a setting change (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormality state ends. Thus, recovery from a RAM abnormality always involves a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power outage is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved by changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state to what it was before the power outage (step S2020).

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the setting key 971 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2021). If the setting key 971 was operated to ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value indicating the setting confirmation mode (01H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and the process proceeds to step S2036 in Figure 187. In other words, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power outage was during setting confirmation, if only the setting key 971 was operated (i.e., the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated), the system transitions to setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2018 to S2022 are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 has not been operated. Therefore, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2019) or whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the diagram, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2019) may be performed first and then the determination of whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2021), or vice versa.

Next, we will explain Figure 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (Figure 186).

If the result is determined to be YES in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the setting values within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area within the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result from step S2010 is stored in the register, the determination in step S2032 can be made based on the determination result stored in the register.

When an abnormality is detected in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2033), and the RAM used outside the game control area (work area and stack area) of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later in Figure 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2035).

Subsequently, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random number generator (e.g., win/lose random number generator) built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setup process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setup process will be described later in Figure 194.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control side main processing (Figure 188).

Figure 188 is a flowchart of the main control processing performed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (Figure 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update process 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of random number update process 2 will be described later in Figure 195. Random number update process 2 primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winners in special and regular lotteries.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. This power outage processing backs up data necessary to restore the system to its state before the power outage. Specifically, interrupts are first disabled (step S2042). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later, prohibits writing data to the main control's built-in RAM 1312, and protects against overwriting game information. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2043). Specifically, it outputs the power outage clear signal OFF bit data to the solenoid, power outage clear, and ACK output ports. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors with high power consumption may be cleared. Clearing these output ports reduces power consumption until the main board's power outage processing is completed, ensuring reliable completion of the main board's power outage processing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the backed-up work area has been properly preserved, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. It is preferable to exclude the settings state management (setting values and values in the settings state management area), backup flags, and checksum area values from the work area within the game control area, which may change between power-on and the execution of the main control side's main processing.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power outage processing was successfully executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibited) and the prohibited area is disabled, and writing to the designated area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function that, by specifying the area of use of the main control RAM 1312, determines an abnormality and resets if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area. To disable the reset function due to access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to disabled, allowing access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area may be enabled, and the main control MPU 1311 may be reset if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

Figure 189 is a flowchart of the RAM error initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM error initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (Figure 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in a buffer for saving SP outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and stores all register values in a buffer for saving registers outside the game control area (step S2052).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the initialization occurred during the initial power-on based on the value of the initial power-on flag (step S2053). The initial power-on refers to the time when the pachinko machine is first powered on, and the time when power is turned on after the backup power supply has been interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 has been erased. For example, if the connection wire between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 can no longer be retained.

If the initialization occurs during the initial power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. If it does not occur during the initial power-on, the process determines whether the number of ejected balls used for base calculation is outside a predetermined range (step S2054). If the number of ejected balls used for base calculation is outside a predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. If the number of ejected balls used for base calculation is within a predetermined range, the process determines whether the display parameters for the performance display monitor are within a normal range (step S2055). If the display parameters for the performance display monitor are within a normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by writing 00H to all work areas outside the used area (step S2056), initialized by writing 00H to all stack areas outside the used area (step S2057), a predetermined value (e.g., 5AH) is set to the initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling process.

Figures 190 and 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt processing performed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two sets of registers used for calculations; one is used as the registers of bank 0, and the other as the registers of bank 1. It is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used without switching banks. Register bank 0 is used in the main control processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank state in a flag register (for example, a register with the Z flag and C flag set). The flag register is saved to the stack area at the start of the interrupt and restored from the stack area by the execution of the RET instruction. Therefore, executing the RET instruction also restores the bank flags of the registers stored in the flag register to their original state. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Furthermore, since the flag register also stores a flag that controls interrupt enablement, it is not necessary to set the system to interrupt enablement before executing the RET instruction. Note that the flag controlling interrupt enablement is set to interrupt disablement after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled during timer interrupt processing (e.g., by the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed, the system will not enter an interrupt enable state.

Next, update the LED common counter by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, set it to 0 (step S2061).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and this is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, the switch input process 1 in step S2062 is related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 (described later) is related to the input of the fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing performed in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, a NO result is determined in step S2604, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected. Even if winning is detected, the payout of prize balls and the display of fluctuations are not executed. This is because setting change and setting confirmation operations are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud does not occur and is not detected in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, even in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (e.g., radio wave sensors) may be detected in switch input processing 1 to monitor specific types of fraud. This allows for the detection of fraudulent activity, such as a professional cheat activating the setting change mode by emitting radio waves.

Next, random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). Random number update process 1 updates the random numbers for determining the jackpot, the random numbers for determining the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for determining the minor jackpot symbols. In addition to these random numbers, it also updates the random numbers used to determine the initial values of the random numbers used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in random number update process 2 of the main control side (shown in Figure 188).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in Figure 191. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of gameplay is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065). By turning OFF the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, time is secured until the LED common signal turns ON, i.e., the LED is off, suppressing the ghosting phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display switch appear mixed, and preventing LED flickering.

Subsequently, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, it is recommended to turn ON only the game state error signal and OFF all others.

Then, the configuration process is executed (step S2068). Details of the configuration process will be described later in Figure 192.

Subsequently, the settings display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the settings display process will be described later in Figure 193.

Furthermore, the peripheral board executes a command transmission process (step S2070) to output the value from the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit. The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area, which is a multi-byte FIFO-type transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses simple clear mode, it is cleared by setting one word. Then, a return instruction (e.g., RETI) is used to switch the register bank (step S2072), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

Next, Figure 191 will be explained. In step S2064 of Figure 190, if it is determined that a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing 2 to detect the state of the sensors (switches) for fraud detection (step S2080). Specifically, it reads detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, which detects fraudulent activity using magnets, and if a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, it stores it in the input information storage area. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in switch input processing 2, the fraud detection processing in step S2084 determines whether or not fraud has been detected. In addition to detecting fraud by the fraud detection sensors, the fraud detection processing (step S2084) also determines abnormalities in prize winning, such as excessive winnings in the large prize winning slot or the regular electric prize winning mechanism.

Subsequently, a timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, time management is performed for, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process, and the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the payout control board 951 has received the payout ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Specifically, when the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variable time, and the result of this subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed is calculated based on the read input information, and this is written to the main control RAM 1312. Furthermore, based on the calculation result of the prize ball count, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created, and a self-check command to confirm the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

Next, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The dispensing control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command) categorized by the status display, according to the dispensing control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when the various commands are successfully received as dispensing serial data, information to inform the dispensing control board 951 of this is stored in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. The main control MPU 1311 also formats the commands that were successfully received as dispensing serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.) and stores them in the transmission information storage area mentioned above. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to provide notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is modified to conform to the command system to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same way as other generated commands. Furthermore, if the command from the payout control board 951 is received successfully, a signal is generated to control the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, rather than through the serial communication circuit.

Next, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). The fraud detection process checks for abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetic interference, vibration, prize entry abnormalities, etc.). For example, if the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the count switch detects that game balls have entered the large prize entry slots 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot state, the main control program creates a prize entry abnormality display command, which is classified as an abnormal condition and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Next, the system executes a switch-pass command output process (step S2085) to create commands corresponding to the detection of passage through various switches, such as the prize-winning switch and the start-up switch, and set them in the transmission information storage area.

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2086), and the base indicator output processing is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base indicator output processing is executed using a second area outside the game control area and is a common process unaffected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, to ensure the independence of the base indicator output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area before and after the execution of the base indicator output processing, so that it is not updated during the base indicator output processing. Afterward, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Next, the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, it is determined whether the random value for the jackpot matches the hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, and whether or not to transition to a probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. If the random value for the jackpot matches the hit judgment value, it is decided whether or not to open and close the large prize slots 2005 and 2006. If the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) as a result of this decision, the game transitions to a state where game balls can be accepted into the large prize slots 2005 and 2006, which is advantageous for the player. If the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are met, the game then transitions to a probability variation state, while if the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are not met, the game transitions to a state other than the probability variation state. Here, "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) where the probability of winning the special lottery mentioned above is set relatively higher compared to the normal gameplay state (low probability state).

Next, the control process for the regular symbols and regular electric prizes is executed (step S2090). In the control process for the regular symbols and regular electric prizes, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 was input to the input terminal. If a detection signal was input to the input terminal, a random number for determining whether a regular symbol win is achieved is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the regular symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as "regular lottery"). Then, based on the lottery result from the regular lottery, it is decided whether or not to open or close the second start-up door member 2549. If the decision is made to open or close the door, the second start-up door member 2549 becomes open (or expanded), allowing game balls to be accepted into the start-up opening 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). During the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are successfully received from the output terminals of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1311 based on output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When a jackpot is in play, drive signals are output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening/closing members 2107 of the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006. In addition, drive signals are output to the starter opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starter opening (second starter opening door member 2549). Furthermore, various game-related information signals (game information) such as probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output signals, and starter opening prize information output signals, as well as security signals, are output to the external terminal board 784 as output information to the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-of-bounds balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out-of-bounds balls (e.g., 10 balls).

Furthermore, the output data setting process sets test signals to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1. These test signals include, for example, signals indicating the game state and signals indicating the stopping patterns of regular and special symbols.

Then, proceed to step S2070 in Figure 190.

Figure 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area is not a value indicating the normal game state (00H), and primarily involves changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling process without executing the setting process.

If a RAM error is detected, the system will repeatedly execute the setting process, preventing the execution of special and regular symbol processing, resulting in a state where gameplay is completely impossible. This RAM error can be resolved by shutting off the power, performing a power outage, and then, upon powering back on, activating the setting change mode using the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954. This puts the system into a setting change state and resolves the RAM error. Finally, returning the setting key 971 to its original position exits the setting change mode, allowing normal gameplay to resume.

Furthermore, if, when restarting the power, any operation other than activating the setting change mode using the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting state management area (08H) will be maintained, the RAM abnormality state will continue, and normal gameplay cannot be started. In other words, to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gameplay state, it is absolutely necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has reached the ON to OFF edge, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), the power-on setting process is executed (step S2104), and the process returns to the calling device.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), a delay time is set in the security signal output timer to allow the security signal to turn OFF after the setting change mode has ended. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends quickly (for example, within a single timer interrupt), the shortest possible output signal of the security signal can be secured for the duration set in the security signal output timer, ensuring that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Furthermore, if an intrusion is detected during the delay period before the security signal turns off, the security signal should be maintained and output for a period or duration corresponding to the newly detected intrusion.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay period before the security signal turns OFF, when the system is hot-started in normal gameplay mode upon power restoration, the security signal will be output for the remaining time. However, when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch or when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM malfunction, the security signal will not be output for the remaining time. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset upon initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal stops.

When power is restored after a power outage while a security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, configuration change mode, configuration confirmation mode, or continued RAM abnormal state.

When the system enters configuration change mode or configuration confirmation mode, a security signal is output until the activated mode ends and the delay period has elapsed. If the RAM abnormality persists, the security signal due to the continued RAM abnormality will be output even after power is restored, as no configuration change operation has been performed. In the case of a hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the output of the security signal resumes after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) and the system transitions to timer interrupt processing. In other words, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output in the following cases, there is a predetermined period after power is restored during which the output of the security signal is stopped.
- When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output due to fraud detection, etc., and the power is restored by a hot start. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output due to a RAM abnormality, and the power is restored, but the RAM abnormality continues. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output in setting change mode, and the power is restored, but the setting change mode continues. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output in setting confirmation mode, and the power is restored, but the setting confirmation mode continues. In this way, even when a security signal continues to be output after a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the hall computer can determine whether there was an abnormality in the security signal or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been cleared.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation mode, where only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for the security signal to be output. The output of the security signal is stopped after the setting confirmation mode ends and the delay time has elapsed. It is also preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode, where both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value indicating a setting change (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2106). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used in conjunction with the RAM clear switch 954. If, as a result, it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the setting value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, the process returns to the calling function.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting status management area (i.e., it is in setting confirmation mode), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the system returns to the calling process without updating the setting value.

Furthermore, when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it is also possible to determine whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. By determining the operation of the setting key 971 when the setting change switch 972 is operated in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by operating the setting change switch 972, even if the setting change mode was active during a power outage and the setting key 971 was not operated to ON when the power was restored.

Figure 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value indicating a RAM error (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, it sets the output of the LED segment terminals so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, it sets the output of the LED segment terminals so that an error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

Subsequently, the system outputs an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113), drives the driver to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display unit 1317 (step S2114), and then returns to the calling process.

Figure 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setup process. The power-on setup process is a subroutine and is called and executed at step S2038 of the power-on process (Figure 187) and at step S2104 of the setup process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). As shown in Figure 202(A), the power-on operation command is a command that notifies the contents of the settings state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to their initial value of 1. The other bits should be set to 0 (step S2121). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area to 1 prevents the switch bits from being detected as 1 during the next timer interrupt, thus preventing the creation of an incorrect ON edge.

Subsequently, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the game start-ready state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If a value indicating the game start-ready state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it indicates either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error. Therefore, the power-on setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling function.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game start-ready state is recorded in the setting state management area, the game can normally be started. Therefore, the work area within the game control region is initialized according to whether or not the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2123).

Subsequently, a power-on status command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in Figure 202(B), the power-on status command is a command that notifies whether the system is in a state where normal gameplay can be started, based on the recorded contents of the setting status management area.

Then, a power-on recovery command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in Figure 202(C), the power-on recovery command is a command that notifies the game state related to special symbols.

Furthermore, a setting value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command that notifies the setting value, as shown in Figure 202(D).

Furthermore, along with the power-on status command, power-on restore destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol hold count command indicating the number of holds in the special symbol variation display game may be transmitted to restore the hold count display on the function display unit 1400 and the main LCD display device 1600 to the state before the power outage. The special symbol hold count command may be transmitted after the power-on status command, power-on restore destination command, and setting value command, before these commands are transmitted, or during the transmission of these commands.

After that, the process returns to the calling function.

The power-on configuration process is executed when the system is neither in configuration change mode nor configuration confirmation mode after a power outage, or when the configuration change mode or configuration confirmation mode ends. Therefore, the aforementioned commands (power-on operation command, power-on status command, power-on recovery destination command, and configuration value command) are sent when the system is neither in configuration change mode nor configuration confirmation mode after a power outage, or when the configuration change mode or configuration confirmation mode ends.

Figure 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (Figure 188) and primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winners in special and regular lotteries.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt disable (step S2131), updates the initial random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt enable (step S2133). Since the initial random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt processing, interrupts are disabled before the initial random number update process and enabled after it to prevent the timer interrupt process from interrupting the initial random number update process. The initial random number is used to change the initial values for each cycle, including the random number used for determining jackpots with special symbols, the random number used for determining wins with normal symbols, and the random number used to determine the type of symbol (low probability/high probability/time-saving/non-time-saving, etc.) when a special symbol jackpot is achieved.

Afterward, the random numbers other than the win/loss random number (excluding the initial random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling program.

Figure 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the same processing steps as those described in Figures 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted.

In the alternative example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the setting key 971 is operated upon power restoration, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 does not switch between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but only functions as an operation to change the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), and executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141). Details of switch input processing 3 will be described later in Figure 197. Note that in step S2141, switch input processing 1 (S2062) may be applied instead of switch input processing 3 (described in Figure 197).

Then, random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change/confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change/confirmation process will be described later in Figure 200.

Next, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer update process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Then, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and the switch pass command output process is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2086), the base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved to the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control processing is executed (step S2090), and the output data setting processing is executed (step S2091). Furthermore, the peripheral board command transmission processing is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by a return command (e.g., RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Figure 197 is a flowchart of the switch input processing 3. Switch input processing 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt processing. It reads various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and stores it as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the starting address of the switch-entry information data (step S2160) and obtains the number of processing repetitions from the switch-entry information data (step S2161). The number of processing repetitions is n, which is the number of blocks in the switch-entry information data table. Then, it obtains the input port address specified in the switch-entry information data (step S2162) and the input level data area address specified in the switch-entry information data (step S2163). Furthermore, it reads the input information from the obtained input port address (step S2164) and corrects the read input information using the logical correction value specified in the switch-entry information data (step S2165).

Subsequently, the system determines whether it is in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is neither setting change mode nor setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch entry information data for normal gameplay (step S2167). This mask allows the system to acquire the bits used during normal gameplay from the input ports.

On the other hand, in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch entry information data for setting change/confirmation (step S2168). This mask allows only the bits used in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode from the input port to be acquired.

Subsequently, input level data is generated from the bits obtained through masking, and the input level data area specified by the switch entry information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, edge data for the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch activation information data is updated (step S2170).

Subsequently, the data is set as switch entry information in the next block (step S2171), and it is determined whether processing of all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 and processes the next input port. On the other hand, if it is determined that processing of all switch input ports has been completed, the switch input processing 3 is terminated, and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

Figure 198(A) shows an example of the configuration of the switch entry information data table.

The switch-entry information data table shown in Figure 198(A) is composed of n blocks (where n is the number of processing repetitions), and each block contains the input port address, logical correction value, normal gameplay mask value, setting change/confirmation mask value, and the address of the input level data area.

Figure 198(B) shows an example configuration of the switch input level/edge data area.

The switch input level/edge data area contains n pairs of addresses, each consisting of an input level data area address and an input edge data area address.

The address of the input edge data area is set to the address immediately following the input level data area, as shown in the diagram, and therefore is not specified in the switch entry information data. If the input level data area and input edge data area are not placed consecutively, the addresses of both the input level data area and the input edge data area will be set in the same table. Note that while the addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area are 16-bit (2-byte) values, the values set as the addresses of the input level data area and input edge data area in the switch entry information data table may be the lower 8 bits (1-byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the values of the input level data area and input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the RAM area address, and only the lower byte needs to be set, thus reducing data capacity.

Figure 199 shows another example configuration of the switch entry information data table. Figure 199(A) shows an example configuration of the switch entry information data table used in normal gameplay, and Figure 199(B) shows an example configuration of the switch entry information data table used in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

The switch-entry information data table shown in Figure 199 is composed of n blocks (where n is the number of processing repetitions), and each block contains the input port address, logical correction value, mask value, and input level data area address. The switch-entry information data table used in normal gameplay and the switch-entry information data tables used in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode contain ports with different logical correction values and mask values. In other words, while the switch-entry information data table shown in Figure 198(A) uses different mask values for setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and normal gameplay, the switch-entry information data table shown in Figure 199 uses different switch-entry information data tables for setting change mode (and setting confirmation mode) and normal gameplay, allowing for the acquisition of different switch-entry information data.

To accommodate this configuration, the switch input processing 3 (Figure 197) is modified as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the game is in setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or normal gameplay, and the starting address of the switch entry information data is set according to the determination result. Then, in step S2166, without determining whether the game is in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, in step S2167, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch entry information data.

Figure 200 is a flowchart of the setting change/confirmation process. The setting change/confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change/confirmation process shown in Figure 200, the same processing steps as those described in Figures 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value indicating game start (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating game start is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change/confirmation process ends and the system returns to the processing before the interrupt. On the other hand, if a value indicating game start is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). Then, the setting process (Figure 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (Figure 193) is executed (step S2069).

Figure 201(A) shows an example configuration of the switch input port 2.

Switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs from various switches and sensors are input, and it consists of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, bit 7 detects the reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the dispensing control board 951 at level 1. Bit 6 detects the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit at level 0. Bit 5 becomes level 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Bit 4 becomes level 0 when the setting key 971 is turned ON. Bit 3 becomes level 1 when the door open sensor detects that the door frame 3 is open. Bit 2 becomes level 0 when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

Figure 201(B) shows an example configuration of the settings status management area.

The setting state management area, as shown in Figure 201(B), is a one-byte memory area where the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower four bits are used, while the upper four bits are undefined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in normal gameplay mode, 01H in setting confirmation mode, 02H in setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H during a RAM clear process performed solely by operating the RAM clear switch 954; the current value is maintained. Furthermore, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Additionally, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change operation during the next power-on will update the setting change mode from 08H to 02H, and then update from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Figure 202(A) shows an example of the configuration of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the contents of the settings state management area. For example, the power-on operation command consists of two bytes, with the upper byte being A0H and the lower byte indicating the contents of the settings state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value of the settings state management area plus 1. This is because, during normal gameplay, the value of the settings state management area is 00H, and if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality where the output is 0. Therefore, one of the bits is set to 1.

Note that power-on operation commands are generated at least once during the power-on process. Specifically, they are generated once during hot start, RAM clear, and RAM error, and twice during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode: once during the power-on process and once at the end of the setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power-on operation command, it provides notification in the manner described above, depending on whether it is in setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, or RAM abnormality status (see Figure 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during normal gameplay without receiving the power-on operation command A001H, the game state may be inconsistent. Therefore, the board determines the received game command to be invalid and does not start the game operation (such as a performance) corresponding to that game command. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, if a predetermined number of game commands are transmitted consecutively during normal gameplay), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). In this case, it is advisable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform the performance corresponding to the game command.

Furthermore, even when game commands are disabled, the system may perform an animation that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands (for example, for symbol movements, lamps, movable parts, sounds, etc., the system may perform an animation corresponding to the received command), and the display device's background or predetermined lamps may be used to notify the user that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Alternatively, the system may notify the user of the inconsistency in the game state at a low volume. This is to prevent potential problems in the hall, as players might not understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred if no animation is performed until the predetermined conditions are met, leading them to believe that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning, such as when the special symbol variation display game does not start even after a ball enters the starting slot. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables game commands, the main control board 1310 continues to perform normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally.

Figure 202(B) shows an example of the configuration of a power-on status command. The power-on status command is a command that notifies whether the machine is in a state where it can normally start playing, based on the contents recorded in the setting state management area. For example, the power-on status command consists of two bytes; if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the machine is in a state where it can normally start playing. The lower byte of the power-on status command may also be used to notify the series code for each pachinko machine model. For example, using bits 6 to 4 allows identification of eight different series. Note that the power-on status command may also be an example as shown in Figure 220(C). Using the power-on status command shown in Figure 220(C), the information recorded in the power-on buffer (play state before the power outage) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 202(C) shows an example of the configuration of the power-on recovery command. The power-on recovery command is a command that notifies the game state related to special symbols. For example, the power-on recovery command consists of two bytes, with the upper byte being 31H and the lower byte indicating the game state related to special symbols. The power-on recovery command notifies the state of the special symbols and the operating state of the special electric mechanism in the event of a power outage. The power-on recovery command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Figure 202(D) shows an example of the configuration of a setting value command. A setting value command is a command that notifies the setting value. For example, a setting value command consists of two bytes, with the upper byte being A1H and the lower byte indicating the setting value. The setting value command is transmitted when power is restored from a power outage (when neither setting change mode nor setting confirmation mode is in mode), when setting change mode ends, or when setting confirmation mode ends. It is also transmitted when special symbol variations begin, or when the game state changes (when a jackpot, probability variation, time reduction, etc. begins and ends). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the setting value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it will be changed to the correct setting value during subsequent gameplay (for example, when special symbol variations begin), so that the effects are not performed based on an incorrect setting value. Effects based on the setting value are effects that suggest the setting value using effect devices such as displays, lamps, sounds, and movable parts. They suggest the setting value by causing effect patterns that are unlikely (or do not) occur under normal circumstances to occur with a predetermined probability. This setting value suggestion effect may include other forms of the effects exemplified below, and may also include false signals. As an example of a setting value suggestion effect, the main LCD display device 1600 may display effects such as pre-announcements corresponding to the setting value, or change the pattern of symbol variation from normal (for example, the timing of the start and confirmation of the left, right, and middle symbols' variation may differ from normal (normally, each symbol starts varying simultaneously; in the case of a high setting, they start varying in the order of left, middle, and right)). If using sound, a notification sound corresponding to the setting value may be generated with a predetermined probability when a ball enters the starting slot, or different sounds may be generated during the effect (for example, a male voice in normal mode and a female voice in the case of a high setting).

Figure 203 shows the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 under various conditions. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating the processing status related to special symbols/special electric features, and m is a value corresponding to the set value.

As illustrated, in a hot start, which initiates the normal gameplay state, the following commands are transmitted in the following order: Power-on operation command (A001H) → Power-on state command (3001H) → Power-on return destination command (310nH) → Setting value command (A10mH).

Furthermore, when initializing the main control RAM 1312 by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the following commands are transmitted in the following order: power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on restore destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

Furthermore, in setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is sent. Then, after the setting value is changed in setting change mode and the setting key 971 is returned to its normal position, the following commands are sent in that order: power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

Furthermore, in setting confirmation mode, the power-on operation command (A002H) is first transmitted, followed by the confirmation of the setting value. After returning the setting key 971 to its normal position, the following commands are transmitted in the following order: power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (310nH) → setting value command (A10mH).

Furthermore, in the event of a RAM malfunction, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first sent. Upon power restoration after a power outage, the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on), and the power-on operation command (A003H) is sent. After returning the setting key 971 to its normal position, the following commands are sent in order: power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

In the event of a RAM malfunction, the power-on operation command (A009H) is sent first. If no setting change operation is performed upon power restoration after a power outage, the RAM malfunction state persists, and the power-on operation command (A009H) is sent again. After returning the setting key 971 to its normal position, the following commands are sent in the following order: power-on operation command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on restore destination command (3101H) → setting value command (A10mH).

As explained above, when the main control board 1310 starts up in normal gameplay mode, a set of commands indicating power restoration (a combination of multiple commands in a predetermined order) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. Therefore, after receiving all of the series of commands from A001H to A10mH, it is determined that normal gameplay can begin. If some of these commands are not received (missed), it is determined that normal gameplay cannot be started, and a notification of this inability to start normal gameplay is issued.

In other words, similar to the aforementioned indication of a disabled game command, the system may perform an indication that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands (for example, the system may perform an indication corresponding to the received command for symbol movement, lamps, movable parts, sound, etc.), and use the display device's background or predetermined lamps to notify the system that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive a setting value command, it may use the setting value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game to compensate for the setting value command missed at power-on, and then start normal gameplay.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive a setting value command, it may set a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the setting value when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on, and then update it to the setting value corresponding to the received command when a setting value command is received.

Furthermore, both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on status command (3001H) notify the system that the game is ready to begin. Since they are usually transmitted consecutively, sending either one to the main control board is sufficient.

Figure 204 shows the state transition of the setting state management area from the state before power outage to the value set after power restoration.

The operation of a pachinko machine with a setting function upon power-on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns designed to consider both fraud prevention measures and user (hall employee) convenience.

<Pattern 1>
Figure 204(A) describes an example of operation when the system was in a normal game state (VALID_PLAY = 00H) at the time of the previous power outage, and when the main control RAM 1312 is functioning normally upon power restoration. First, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, which includes the entire stack area excluding the setting value and base value. The main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 02H. The base display 1317 displays the setting value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting confirmation mode, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Furthermore, the base display 1317 displays the current setting value for setting confirmation.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, including the entire stack area excluding the setting value and base value. The main control MPU 1311 starts in the normal game state, and the value in the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The base display 1317, as an initial display upon power-on, shows a display indicating that it has switched to the performance display (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds), and then displays the base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 will be maintained in the state before the power outage. Even if not all contents of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained, it is sufficient that at least the area containing information necessary to return to the game state before the power outage (the memory area containing information related to the game (special symbols, normal symbols, prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.))) is maintained. The area containing information not necessary to return to the game state before the power outage may be in a different state after power is restored. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained as 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Furthermore, the base display unit 1317, as an initial display upon power-on, shows an indication that it has switched to performance display mode (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds), and then displays the base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in Figure 204(B), in Operation Example 1, where the system was in setting change mode when the power was immediately cut off and the main control RAM 1312 is functioning normally when power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, including the stack area other than the set value and base value, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on. The main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode, and the value in the setting state management area is maintained as 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays the set value associated with the setting change.

In Pattern 2-1, the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 can be performed by initializing the area used as the game control area, including the stack area, along with the memory area initialized by the initialization process already performed when the power outage occurred. For example, if the power is cut off during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining memory area that has not yet been initialized should be initialized. Alternatively, regardless of the progress of the initialization process during the power outage, the area used as the game control area, including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312, may be initialized after power is restored.

If a power outage occurs during the initialization process, it is advisable to provide a memory area (e.g., a RAM clearing flag) to store whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized, and to prohibit writing data to the memory area targeted for initialization while the RAM clearing flag is set.

Furthermore, the process of monitoring for power outages in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in Figure 22), the power outage warning signal may also be monitored using, for example, a timer interrupt.

The power outage monitoring process and power outage processing may be performed as a common process in all three states (operating modes): setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and normal gameplay mode. Alternatively, they may be performed as a common process in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and as separate processes in normal gameplay mode. In other words, the power outage monitoring process and power outage processing may be common to at least two of the three or more operating states (operating modes) of the pachinko machine.

As explained above, in pattern 2-1, where the power is cut off in setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is functioning normally upon power restoration, the system will always start in setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. For example, if a power outage occurs during setting change work in a hall, it would be desirable for the system to start in setting change mode upon power restoration. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, which are necessary to start setting change mode, may not be operated upon power restoration. Therefore, controlling the system as in pattern 2-1 prevents it from entering an unintended state (different from setting change mode) upon power restoration.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the system will start in setting confirmation mode instead of setting change mode. If only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 will be initialized and the system will start in normal game mode. If neither switch is operated, the system will start in normal game mode. However, if the system is controlled as in pattern 2-1, it will always start in setting change mode, regardless of whether the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the system was in setting change mode when the power was immediately cut off, and the main control RAM 1312 is functioning normally when power is restored, the system may operate in a different pattern than pattern 2-1, as shown in Figure 204(C). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, which includes the stack area other than the setting value and base value. The main control MPU 1311 also starts in setting change mode, and the value in the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays the setting value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are operated in any way other than described above when the power is turned on, and if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 will not change. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts in a game-stopped state, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 08H, indicating an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 also displays an error (e.g., an error code). The game-stopped state may be due to the main control MPU 1311 executing an infinite loop, or it may be due to the normal game processing not being executed.

In other words, in Pattern 2-1, regardless of the state of the setting key and RAM clear switch after power restoration, the system unconditionally transitions to the setting change mode. However, in Pattern 2-2, if the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are activated to start the setting change mode when power is restored, the system activates the setting change mode. If the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are in any other state, the system enters a state where gameplay is impossible (RAM abnormality). That is, in Pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 is operated when power is restored, the system does not start normal gameplay in a RAM abnormality state, but instead goes through the setting change mode before starting normal gameplay. Therefore, if the operation to activate the setting change mode has not been performed, the system does not execute normal gameplay in a state other than the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (such as RAM abnormality), and instead notifies the hall staff of the game suspension state, prompting them to activate the setting change mode.

If a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area and the stack area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized, and the system waits in a game-stopped state until the next setting change operation is performed. The game-stopped state can be due to either an infinite loop execution in the main control MPU 1311 or a game-stopped state due to the failure to execute normal game processing. Afterward, the power is temporarily cut off, the setting key and RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on. This updates the value in the setting state management area to 02H, clears the game control area and the stack area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and starts the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1, 3-2>
Figure 204(D) describes an example of operation when the system was in setting confirmation mode at the time of the previous power outage and the main control RAM 1312 is normal upon restoration of power. First, if the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, which includes the stack area other than the setting value and base value. The main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 02H. The base display 1317 displays the setting value associated with the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is set to ON, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 will not change. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting confirmation mode, and the value in the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays the current setting value for setting confirmation.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, including the stack area other than the set value and base value. The main control MPU 1311 starts in the normal game state, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 00H. The base display 1317, as an initial display upon power-on, shows a display indicating that it has switched to the performance display (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds), and then displays the base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 will not change. The main control MPU 1311 starts in the normal gameplay state, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 00H. The base display 1317, as the initial display when the power is turned on, shows an indication that it has switched to the performance display (for example, full flashing for 5 seconds), and then displays the base value representing the performance of the pachinko machine. In this case, as shown in pattern 3-2 in Figure 204(E), the main control MPU 1311 may start in setting confirmation mode, the value in the setting state management area will be maintained at 01H (the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value), and the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in Figure 204(F), an example of operation when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 during power restoration will be described. First, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON and the setting key 971 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 initializes the area used as the game control area, which includes the entire stack area other than the set value and base value. Also, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area becomes 02H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a message for setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are not operated as described above when the power is turned on, that is, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 will not change. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the game stopped state, and the value in the setting state management area remains 08H. Note that the same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Also, the base display 1317 displays an error (e.g., an error code).

Furthermore, if there was an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 during the previous power outage, and the main control RAM 1312 was initialized before the power outage, it is recommended to execute at least one of the following actions before running the main loop: (1) Initialize the devices built into the main control MPU 1311; (2) Restart the hardware random number generator; or (3) Set interrupt enable.

Furthermore, even if there was an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 during the previous power outage, when the power is turned on, before determining whether the state before the power outage was a RAM abnormality (step S211 in Figure 179), it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 have been operated. If a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started. However, even if no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (whether the operation to start the setting confirmation mode is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or neither is operated), the RAM abnormality state is maintained. In other words, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, the processing for the setting change mode and the processing for the setting confirmation mode are executed within the timer interrupt processing. However, when the power is turned on again from a RAM abnormality state, different processing is executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the system recovers from a RAM abnormality state by powering it back on, if it starts in configuration change mode, the configuration change mode processing is executed within the timer interrupt handler as usual. However, if it starts in configuration confirmation mode, different processing is executed within the timer interrupt handler.

As described above, when a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the settings state management area, the game cannot be started even after the power is turned back on. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, we will explain the operation of pachinko machine 1 and its variations using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
• Time chart for normal setting changes (Figure 205)
• Time chart for normal setting checks (Figure 206)
- Time chart (Figure 207) for when the system transitions to the setting change mode after a power outage, with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored.
- Time chart (Figure 208) for when the system enters setting change mode after a power outage, with setting key 971 ON and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored.
- Time chart (Figure 209) for when the system enters setting confirmation mode after a power outage, with setting key 971 OFF and RAM clear switch 954 OFF after power is restored.

Figure 205 shows a time chart from the start to the end of the settings change mode.

In the time chart shown in Figure 205, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON and the setting key 971 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, so the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Then, at timing T4, it stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T5.

The peripheral control board 1510 starts the customer waiting animation when power is supplied. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting animation after receiving a command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers, records 02H in the setting state management area, and transitions to setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also illuminates all LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 begins outputting a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in Figure 184 above.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating a transition to the setting change mode and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance (notification) in the setting change mode shown in Figure 184, according to the power-on command received.

In the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value from N to N+1, and the base display 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6). Furthermore, upon a second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value from N+1 to N+2, and the base display 1317 displays the updated setting value N+2 (T7). In other words, in the setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the setting value is changed within the range of 1 to 6, and if the setting value exceeds 6, it is updated to 1.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after changing the setting value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and transitions to the normal game state (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing becomes capable of executing processing during normal gameplay. The main control MPU 1311 also turns off all the lights on the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal game state. Furthermore, the base display unit 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal game state. In this way, by displaying the base indicator 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of normal gameplay, the end of the setting change mode is clearly indicated, reducing operational errors at the end of the setting change mode. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the power-on status command (3001H), the power-on return destination command (3101H), and the setting value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in setting change mode, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. The 'm' in the setting value command (A10mH) is a number from 1 to 6 corresponding to the setting value, as shown in Figure 202(D). Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on status command (3001H) notify the state where normal gameplay can be started, and are usually transmitted consecutively; therefore, transmitting either one to the main control board is sufficient.

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the power-on status command, recognizes that the system is ready to start normal gameplay and executes the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). Alternatively, after a predetermined delay has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 recognized the system was ready to start normal gameplay via the power-on status command, it may switch to canceling the notification animations during setting changes and starting the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). During the predetermined delay, some animation devices may continue the notification animations during setting changes; for example, the main LCD display 1600 and sound may return to normal gameplay animations, while the decorative lamps continue the notification animations during setting changes. Furthermore, regarding the continuation of notification animations by decorative lamps, some decorative lamps (e.g., frame-side) may continue the notification animations, while others (e.g., panel-side) may return to normal gameplay animations.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal (T9) after a predetermined delay (e.g., 50 milliseconds) following the end of the configuration change mode. This is to ensure a minimum output time for the security signal, as if the configuration change mode ends very quickly and the security signal is output only briefly or not at all, the hall computer may not be able to detect the transition to the configuration change mode.

Figure 206 shows the time chart from the start to the end of the settings confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in Figure 206, the system was in normal gameplay or setting confirmation mode when the power was immediately cut off. Since the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated when the power was turned on, and the setting key 971 was set to ON, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting confirmation mode.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Then, at timing T4, it stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T5.

The peripheral control board 1510 starts the customer waiting animation when power is supplied. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting animation after receiving a command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers, records 01H in the setting state management area, and transitions to setting confirmation mode. The main control MPU 1311 also illuminates all LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 begins outputting security signals.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the power-on command received.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. Upon detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and transitions to the normal game state (T6). The value in the setting state management area becoming 00H enables the execution of normal game processing in the timer interrupt processing. Furthermore, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) before displaying the base value in the normal game state.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on status command (3001H), a power-on restore destination command (310nH), and a setting value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. The 'm' in the setting value command (A10mH) is a number from 1 to 6, corresponding to the setting value, as shown in Figure 202(D). In setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is generally not initialized; therefore, the lower byte of the power-on restore destination command transmits the state before the power outage.

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the power-on status command, recognizes that the system is ready to start normal gameplay and executes the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). Alternatively, after a predetermined delay has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 recognized the system was ready to start normal gameplay via the power-on status command, it may switch to canceling the notification animations during setting changes and starting the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). During the predetermined delay, some animation devices may continue the notification animations during setting changes; for example, the main LCD display 1600 and sound may return to normal gameplay animations, while the decorative lamps continue the notification animations during setting changes. Furthermore, regarding the continuation of notification animations by decorative lamps, some decorative lamps (e.g., frame-side) may continue the notification animations, while others (e.g., panel-side) may return to normal gameplay animations.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined delay (e.g., 50 milliseconds) following the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

Figure 207 shows another time chart from the start to the end of the settings change mode.

In the time chart shown in Figure 207, since the system was in setting change mode at the time of the previous power outage, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode. Note that, as shown in Figure 204(B), if the system was in setting change mode at the time of the previous power outage, the main control MPU 1311 starts in setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Then, at timing T4, it stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T5.

The peripheral control board 1510 starts the customer waiting animation when power is supplied. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting animation after receiving a command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers, records 02H in the setting state management area, and transitions to setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also illuminates all LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 begins outputting security signals.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating a transition to the setting change mode and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the animation in the setting change mode according to the power-on command it receives. Since the peripheral control board 1510's operating state is reset to its initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 upon power restoration and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value from N to N+1, and the base display 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Subsequently, when the power supply to the main control board is interrupted, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power outage and executes power-off processing (T7). Then, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base indicator 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). Note that during power-off processing, the security signal output may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base indicator 1317 in the power-off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base indicator 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during power-off processing, power consumption during power-off processing is reduced, and a reset due to a drop in power (5V) before the power-off processing is complete can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum during power-off processing. Furthermore, it is advisable to turn off the output port for the signals to the solenoids that control the opening and closing of the main prize slots 2005 and 2006, and the second start slot 2004, to stop the solenoid drive signals.

Subsequently, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, then stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers at timing T12, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in Figure 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the system transitions to setting change mode at timing T13, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed. When transitioning to setting change mode, the game control area and the stack area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are reinitialized, similar to the transition to normal setting change mode. Note that since the system monitors for power outages after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is complete and then performs power outage processing, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by power outage processing. Therefore, if the system is in setting change mode during a power outage, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, so the RAM clear process may be executed upon power restoration to avoid initializing the game control area. After reinitialization, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and begins outputting security signals.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating a transition to the setting change mode and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the animation in the setting change mode according to the power-on command it receives. Since the peripheral control board 1510's operating state is reset to its initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and displays the updated setting value on the base display unit 1317.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after changing the setting value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it terminates the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and transitions to the normal game state (T14). Recording 00H in the setting state management area allows the timer interrupt processing to execute processing during normal gameplay. Furthermore, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal game state. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a setting value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. The 'm' in the setting value command (A10mH) is a number from 1 to 6, corresponding to the setting value, as shown in Figure 202(D).

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the power-on status command, recognizes that the system is ready to start normal gameplay and executes the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). Alternatively, after a predetermined delay has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 recognized the system was ready to start normal gameplay via the power-on status command, it may switch to canceling the notification animations during setting changes and starting the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). During the predetermined delay, some animation devices may continue the notification animations during setting changes; for example, the main LCD display 1600 and sound may return to normal gameplay animations, while the decorative lamps continue the notification animations during setting changes. Furthermore, regarding the continuation of notification animations by decorative lamps, some decorative lamps (e.g., frame-side) may continue the notification animations, while others (e.g., panel-side) may return to normal gameplay animations.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal (T15) after a predetermined delay (e.g., 50 milliseconds) following the end of the configuration change mode. This is to ensure a minimum output time for the security signal, as if the configuration change mode ends very quickly and the security signal is output only briefly or not at all, the hall computer may not be able to detect the transition to the configuration change mode.

Figure 208 shows another time chart from the start to the end of the settings change mode.

In the time chart shown in Figure 208, even if the main control MPU 1311 was in setting change mode when the power was immediately cut off, it starts in a different operating mode depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Then, at timing T4, it stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T5.

The peripheral control board 1510 starts the customer waiting animation when power is supplied. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting animation after receiving a command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers, records 02H in the setting state management area, and transitions to setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting the security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating a transition to the setting change mode and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the animation in the setting change mode according to the power-on command it receives. Since the peripheral control board 1510's operating state is reset to its initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 upon power restoration and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value from N to N+1, and the base display 1317 displays the updated setting value N+1 (T6).

Subsequently, when the power supply to the main control board is interrupted, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power outage and executes power-off processing (T7). Then, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base indicator 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). Note that during power-off processing, the security signal output may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base indicator 1317 in the power-off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base indicator 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during power-off processing, power consumption during power-off processing is reduced, and a reset due to a drop in power (5V) before the power-off processing is complete can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum during power-off processing. Furthermore, it is advisable to turn off the output port for the signals to the solenoids that control the opening and closing of the main prize slots 2005 and 2006, and the second start slot 2004, to stop the solenoid drive signals.

Subsequently, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, then stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers at timing T12, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

At timing T13, when the waiting time for the peripheral control board to start up has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers and changes the operating mode based on the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954. In the example shown in Figure 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is ON so that the system enters setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, because the state recorded in the setting state management area before the power outage is a value indicating a setting change (02H), at timing T13, when the waiting time for the peripheral control board to start up has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 restarts in setting change mode, and the value in the setting state management area remains 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When transitioning to setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area within the game control area are reinitialized, similar to the transition to normal setting change mode. Furthermore, since the system monitors for power outages after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is complete and then executes power outage processing, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power outage processing. Therefore, if the system is in setting change mode during a power outage, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, so the RAM clear process may be executed when power is restored without initializing the game control area. For example, in Figure 186 mentioned above, if the state before the power outage was in setting change mode, step S2015 is YES, and the system branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in Figure 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the system branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in Figure 187), the system will continue in the state before power cut-off without executing the RAM abnormality initialization process step S2034. After re-initialization, the main control MPU 1311 lights up all LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting security signals. In other words, as shown in the timing chart in Figure 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to the ON position. To put it another way, the setting change mode is activated when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated to the ON position at power-on, and furthermore, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are not operated to the ON position at power-on.

Note that, as indicated by the dashed line at timing T12, if the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is OFF when the power is restored, unlike the time chart shown in Figure 207, 00H may be recorded in the setting state management area, and the system may restart in a state where normal gameplay cannot be performed (e.g., RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. In other words, in the operation pattern shown in Figure 208, even if the system is in setting change mode during a power outage, if no setting change operation has been performed when the power is restored, the system will restart in a RAM abnormality state. In short, if the power is cut off while in setting change mode, normal gameplay cannot be started unless the setting change mode is properly terminated at some point.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating a transition to the setting change mode and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the animation in the setting change mode according to the power-on command it receives. Since the peripheral control board 1510's operating state is reset to its initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted by the main control board 1310 upon power restoration and continues the setting change state.

During the setting change mode, when the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON state of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and displays the updated setting value on the base display unit 1317 (T14).

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after changing the setting value. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it terminates the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and transitions to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing becomes capable of executing processing during normal gameplay. The base display 1317 then blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal game state. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the power-on state command (3001H), the power-on return destination command (3101H), and the setting value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so the lower byte of the power-on return destination command becomes 01H. The value 'm' in the setting value command (A10mH) is a number from 1 to 6, corresponding to the setting value, as shown in Figure 202(D). Note that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on status command (3001H) notify the system that it is ready to start normal gameplay. Since they are usually transmitted consecutively, sending either one to the main control board is sufficient.

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the power-on status command, recognizes that the system is ready to start normal gameplay and executes the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). Alternatively, after a predetermined delay has elapsed since the peripheral control board 1510 recognized the system was ready to start normal gameplay via the power-on status command, it may switch to canceling the notification animations during setting changes and starting the normal gameplay animations (e.g., customer waiting animations). During the predetermined delay, some animation devices may continue the notification animations during setting changes; for example, the main LCD display 1600 and sound may return to normal gameplay animations, while the decorative lamps continue the notification animations during setting changes. Furthermore, regarding the continuation of notification animations by decorative lamps, some decorative lamps (e.g., frame-side) may continue the notification animations, while others (e.g., panel-side) may return to normal gameplay animations.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal (T16) after a predetermined delay (e.g., 50 milliseconds) following the end of the configuration change mode. This is to ensure a minimum output time for the security signal, as if the configuration change mode ends very quickly and the security signal is output only briefly or not at all, the hall computer would not be able to detect the transition to the configuration change mode.

Figure 209 shows another time chart from the start to the end of the settings confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in Figure 209, if the main control MPU 1311 was in setting confirmation mode when the power was immediately cut off, it will start in setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the RAM clear switch 954 or setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on.

First, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. Then, at timing T4, it stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T5.

The peripheral control board 1510 starts the customer waiting animation when power is supplied. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting animation after receiving a command from the main control board 1310.

At timing T5, when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1311 reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the registers, records 02H in the setting state management area, and transitions to setting change mode. The main control MPU 1311 also starts outputting the security signal.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the power-on operation command received.

Subsequently, when the power supply to the main control board is interrupted, the main control MPU 1311 detects the power outage and executes power-off processing, and the main control MPU 1311 stops operating (T7). Then, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value on the base indicator 1317 disappears, and the security signal output stops (T8). Note that during power-off processing, the security signal output may be stopped and the base indicator 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning OFF the security signal output port and the output port to the base indicator 1317 in the power-off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base indicator 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port during power-off processing, power consumption during power-off processing is reduced, and a reset due to a drop in power (5V) before the power-off processing is complete can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum during power-off processing. Furthermore, it is advisable to turn off the output port for the signals to the solenoids that control the opening and closing of the main prize slots 2005 and 2006, and the second start slot 2004, to stop the solenoid drive signals.

Subsequently, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is established (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the beginning address of the program code upon receiving a reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 performs a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, then stores the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 in registers at timing T12, and waits for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up until timing T13.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in Figure 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is ON so that the system enters setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, because the state recorded in the setting state management area before the power outage is a value indicating setting confirmation (01H), at timing T13, when the waiting time for the peripheral control board to start up has elapsed, the system restarts in setting confirmation mode, and the value in the setting state management area remains 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. In other words, in the time chart shown in Figure 209, the setting confirmation mode can be started even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. To put it another way, the setting confirmation mode is started when the setting key 971 is operated to ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to OFF when the power is turned on, and furthermore, the setting confirmation mode can be started even if the setting key 971 is not ON when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 generates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the performance in the setting confirmation mode according to the power-on command received.

During the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (which also functions as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, it continues to display the setting value on the base display unit 1317 without updating the setting value.

The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. Upon detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 terminates the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and transitions to the normal game state (T15). Recording 00H in the setting state management area allows the timer interrupt processing to execute processes during normal gameplay. Furthermore, the base display 1317 blinks all LEDs for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) before displaying the base value in the normal game state. The main control MPU 1311 also transmits the power-on state command (3001H), the power-on return destination command (310nH), and the setting value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the power-on status command, recognizes that the machine is in a state where normal gameplay can begin and executes the effects for normal gameplay (for example, a customer waiting effect). Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may start the effects for normal gameplay (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay has elapsed since recognizing the machine as being in a state where normal gameplay can begin via the power-on status command. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 may switch the effects to stop the notification effects during setting changes and start the effects for normal gameplay (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay has elapsed since recognizing the machine as being in a state where normal gameplay can begin via the power-on status command. During the predetermined delay, some effect devices may perform notification effects during setting changes; for example, the main LCD display 1600 and sound may return to normal gameplay effects, while the decorative lamps continue the notification effects during setting changes. Furthermore, regarding the continuation of the notification effects using decorative lamps, some decorative lamps (e.g., those on the frame) may continue the notification effect, while other decorative lamps (e.g., those on the panel) may revert to the normal gameplay state.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal (T16) after a predetermined delay (e.g., 50 milliseconds) following the end of the setting confirmation mode. This is to ensure a minimum output time for the security signal, as if the setting change mode ends very quickly and the security signal is output only briefly or not at all, the hall computer would not be able to detect the transition to the setting change mode.

Figures 210 to 212 show examples of the configuration of a jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold table stores the threshold values for random numbers used to determine jackpots for special symbols.

The jackpot threshold determination table shown in Figure 210 consists of an address table for selecting setting values and a threshold determination table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 210 is an example where a jackpot is determined when the random value for jackpot determination is greater than the threshold defined in the table.

The address table for selecting setting values defines the pointer addresses of the judgment threshold tables selected for each setting value. Each data entry should ideally be a two-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value's judgment threshold table stores the threshold for low probability (normal state) and the threshold for high probability (probability-boosting state).

When determining a jackpot, the system retrieves a pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the setting value table. This value is used as an offset to select the threshold determination table for the current setting value. Then, using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold value for jackpot determination is retrieved from the selected threshold determination table. Finally, if the random value for jackpot determination obtained when the ball enters the starting slot is greater than or equal to the retrieved threshold, it is determined to be a jackpot; otherwise, it is determined to be a miss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 211 consists of an address table for selecting setting values and a determination threshold table for each setting value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 211 is an example where a jackpot is determined when the random value used for jackpot determination falls within the range defined in the table from the lower limit to the upper limit.

The setting value selection address table defines the pointer addresses of the judgment threshold tables selected for each setting value. Each data entry should ideally be a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each setting value judgment threshold table stores the lower threshold for low probability (normal state), the upper threshold for low probability (normal state), the lower threshold for high probability (bonus state), and the upper threshold for high probability (bonus state).

When determining a jackpot, the system retrieves a pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the setting value table. This value is used as an offset to select the threshold determination table for the current setting value. Then, using the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the system determines whether the selected threshold determination table is in the low probability or high probability block, and obtains the lower and upper threshold values for jackpot determination. Finally, if the random value obtained when the ball enters the starting slot is greater than or equal to the obtained lower threshold and less than or equal to the upper threshold, it is determined to be a jackpot. If it falls outside the range between the lower and upper thresholds, it is determined to be a miss.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 212 consists of an address table for selecting low-probability setting values, determination threshold tables for each low-probability setting value, an address table for selecting high-probability setting values, and determination threshold tables for each high-probability setting value. While the jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 211 has the low-probability and high-probability tables integrated, the jackpot determination threshold table shown in Figure 212 has the low-probability and high-probability tables configured separately.

The address table for selecting low-probability settings defines pointer addresses to the judgment threshold tables selected for each setting value in the low-probability (normal state), and the address table for selecting high-probability settings defines pointer addresses to the judgment threshold tables selected for each setting value in the high-probability (bonus state). The data defined in each setting table selection address table should ideally be composed of 2-byte values. Note that if the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each judgment threshold table for low-probability settings stores the lower and upper threshold values for the low-probability (normal state). Each judgment threshold table for high-probability settings stores the lower and upper threshold values for the high-probability (normal state).

During the jackpot determination process, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) determines whether to select the address table for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table. The setting value is then retrieved as an offset from the selected address table, and the determination threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected based on the retrieved offset. Finally, if the random value for jackpot determination obtained upon entry into the starting slot is above the lower threshold and below the upper threshold, it is determined to be a jackpot; otherwise, it is determined to be a miss.

[12-17. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 2]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing a setting change switch 972. However, in order to distinguish between the RAM clear switch 954's original function of initializing the main control RAM 1312 and its setting change function, the operation related to changing the setting value may be described as using the setting change switch 972.

Figures 213 and 214 are flowcharts of the power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311, upon release of the reset signal, begins processing at address 8000, which is the starting address of the program code. The RAM protect register is set to disable protection and the restricted area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function to reset if access to a restricted area other than the specified area is detected, by specifying the area of use of the main control RAM 1312. To disable the reset function caused by access to the restricted area of the main control RAM 1312, the restricted area is disabled, allowing access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a restricted area, and the restricted area may be enabled so that the main control MPU 1311 resets if access to the specified restricted area is detected.

Next, a simple clear mode timer is set to the watchdog timer for a predetermined period of time (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Then, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and then to OFF (step S2204). By first setting the power outage clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power outage signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a register (step S2205). The register can be any of the multiple general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to calculations in processing calculations) pre-installed in the main control MPU 1311. The general-purpose registers are divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and in step S2205, the registers in bank 0 are used. The registers are located in the main control RAM 1312 and are erased without retaining information during a power outage; they are different from the RAM area where information is backed up during a power outage. The determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated is performed by the main control MPU 1311 after the peripheral control board 1510 has been successfully started. Therefore, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined unintentionally by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing begins. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as the register after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation early after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation can be reliably detected.

Subsequently, a power outage warning signal is detected to determine if a power outage is occurring (step S2206). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits in step S2206 until the power supply voltage stabilizes.

Subsequently, a sub-start-up waiting timer (for example, approximately 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until this timer expires, while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up (step S2207). The waiting period for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up can be anytime between power-on and the first command transmission to the peripheral control board 1510.

Subsequently, the system re-checks whether the power outage warning signal indicates an actual power outage (step S2208). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the system remains in standby mode at step S2208.

Subsequently, a setting value verification process is executed to determine if the setting value is within the normal range, and to determine if the value in the setting status management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value verification process will be described later in Figure 215.

Subsequently, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2210). This is to ensure the independence of processing outside the game control area from processing inside the game control area, by preventing information used in one process from affecting the other. Then, the power-on-time game area outside RAM confirmation process is executed to determine any abnormalities in the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area (step S2211). Details of the power-on-time game area outside RAM confirmation process will be described later in Figure 216. Finally, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2212).

Subsequently, the RAM abnormality detection result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. Note that general-purpose registers in bank 0 are used during power-on processing.

In Example 2, the value set in the setting state management area differs from that shown in Figure 201(B) in the previously described embodiment. As shown in Figure 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area in Example 2 is a 1-byte memory area where the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are undefined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in normal gameplay mode, 01H in setting confirmation mode, 02H in setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H during a RAM clear process performed solely by operating the RAM clear switch 954; the current value is maintained. Furthermore, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Additionally, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change operation during the next power-on will update the setting change mode from 03H to 02H, and then update from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Furthermore, the system determines whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, stores the determination result in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the system compares the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in the area backed up in the internal RAM 1312 during the previous power outage with the checksum calculated using the same area. If the two differ, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. Also, if the value of the power outage flag, which indicates that the backup was successful (power outage processing was executed successfully), is not stored in the backup flag area, it is determined that the data in the main control RAM 1312 was not successfully backed up during the power outage (power outage processing was not executed successfully), and that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

Then, if there are no abnormalities in either the game control area or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normal judgment result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register (step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

Subsequently, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) is temporarily recorded in the configuration state management area (step S2219).

Next, the bits for the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked from the register value where the PF port value is recorded (step S2220). The register used to store the PF port value is a general-purpose register, different from the registers temporarily set in S2213 and S2214. Then, using the values stored in the registers, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 was operated ON when the power was turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 was operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 was operated ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the system was in setting change mode when the power outage occurred (step S2222). For example, if the value in the setting state management area is in setting change mode (02H), it is determined that the power outage occurred while the system was in setting change mode.

Then, if it is determined that a power outage occurred during the settings change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no power outage occurred during the setting change mode, the system determines whether there are any abnormalities within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above can be used to determine if there are any abnormalities within the game control area. If an abnormality is found either within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the system proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there are no abnormalities within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value in the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, if it is determined that a power outage occurred during RAM error processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, if it is determined that no power outage occurred during RAM error processing, a value indicating the normal game state (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value indicating a RAM error (03H) that was temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to a normal state. Also, because 00H is recorded in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value in the setting state management area differs when jumping from steps S2226 and S2231 to step S2235. In this way, since the value in the setting state management area differs between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clear processing is the same, eliminating the need for separate programs and reducing the program size.

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and remains 03H until the power is cut off, preventing normal game processing. At this time, if the power is cut off and then a setting change operation is performed before the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality can be resolved. That is, if it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is updated from a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating a setting change (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormality state ends. Thus, recovery from a RAM abnormality always involves a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power outage is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved by changing the setting value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state to what it was before the power outage (step S2227).

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the setting key 971 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2228). If the setting key 971 was operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value indicating the setting confirmation mode (01H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. In other words, even if the state at the time of the power outage was the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 was not operated when the power was turned on, the system returns to the normal game state. Note that if the state at the time of the power outage is the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key 971 was not operated when the power was turned on, the system may transition to the same power outage confirmation mode as before the power outage, rather than the normal game state.

Steps S2225 to S2229 are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 has not been operated. Therefore, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2226) or whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the diagram, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2226) may be performed first and then the determination of whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2228), or vice versa.

If the result in step S2221 or step S2222 is YES, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game control area in step S2266 described above, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined. If, as a result, there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if an abnormality occurs outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, a RAM clear process for the area outside the game control area is executed. Specifically, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2232), and the abnormality handling process for RAM outside the game area is executed (step S2233). Details of the abnormality handling process for RAM outside the game area will be described later in Figure 217. Afterward, the flag register saved to the stack area within the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the settings within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the areas other than the setting state management area, and the stack area within the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, RAM clearing outside the game control area is not executed without a setting change. When a RAM abnormality occurs outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, similar to when a RAM abnormality occurs within the game control area, and the game stops. Therefore, recovery from the RAM abnormality state is not possible without a setting change. However, while the only condition for clearing RAM outside the game control area is a setting change, the conditions for clearing RAM within the game control area are both a setting change and operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (when the RAM is forcibly cleared by an employee even if no RAM abnormality has occurred).

In step S2235, the RAM clearing process within the game area excludes the setting value and setting state management area because if the setting value is set to a high value due to an unauthorized RAM clearing operation by the player, the hall will incur losses. Furthermore, if a malfunction (RAM abnormality) occurs during gameplay with a high setting, causing the game to stop, a RAM clearing operation will change the setting from high to low, resulting in losses for the player.

Subsequently, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because if the power is cut off while commands are stored in the command buffers and then restored without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffers will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off while a variation command is being sent, the symbol command may be sent, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be sent. Then, when the power is restored, if only the variation pattern command is sent, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that there is an abnormality. Furthermore, if unsent commands related to setting changes are stored in the command buffers, the peripheral control board 1510 may malfunction when the unsent commands from the setting process are sent after the power is restored, causing it to set the game state based on those commands. To prevent such abnormalities from occurring, the command buffers are initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, it is also acceptable to clear the command buffer only when starting the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. During the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so it is advisable to clear the command buffer when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode.

Subsequently, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number generator (e.g., win/loss random number generator) built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number generator in step S2238, the hardware random number generator is updated even in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode; however, the hardware random number generator may also be activated at the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later in Figure 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control side main processing (Figure 221).

Figure 215 is a flowchart of the setting value verification process. The setting value verification process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (Figure 213). It determines whether the setting value in the setting state management area is within the normal range. Note that the setting value verification process may also be executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, in addition to when the power is turned on. Furthermore, it may be executed at the start of special symbol variations or when the game state changes (at the start and end of jackpots, probability changes, time-saving modes, etc.).

In the setting value verification process, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a value other than the value that should be recorded is set in the setting state management area (step S2250). As shown in Figure 220(A), the setting state management area records values from 00H to 03H. If a value of 04H or higher is set, it is considered abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where the setting can be selected from 1 to 6 stages, if the value of the workpiece where the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 5 for setting 6), then if a value of 6 or greater is stored, it is determined to be outside the predetermined range.

If the set value is outside the predetermined range, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on state. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on state.

Regarding the values recorded in the setting state management area and the set values, the main control RAM 1312 is also checked for abnormalities during gameplay (at the start of each variation, when switching game states, etc.). Therefore, the conditions for determining a RAM abnormality related to the setting state management area and set values during gameplay are different from the conditions for determining a RAM abnormality (abnormalities in the work area within the game area excluding the setting state management area and set values, and in the work RAM outside the game area) at power-on. Note that these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be partially the same. For example, if the setting state management area and set values are also checked for abnormalities at power-on, then the two determination conditions can be said to be partially the same.

The reason for the different criteria for detecting RAM abnormalities is that if RAM abnormalities related to setting values were only detected at power-on, then if setting values were changed due to fraudulent activity or malfunctions caused by noise, it would result in disadvantages for the hall and players. Therefore, it is desirable to detect abnormalities early and shorten the period during which disadvantages occur.

Furthermore, by creating a subroutine for the RAM anomaly detection process related to the setting state management area and setting values during gameplay, the program size can be reduced by calling this subroutine as needed during gameplay to detect RAM anomalies, thus avoiding the need to place the same program in multiple locations.

Furthermore, although the setting state management area is excluded from RAM abnormality detection at power-up, it may be treated as a target for RAM abnormality detection, similar to other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By including the setting state management area in the RAM abnormality detection at power-up, if the system was in setting change mode before a power outage and a RAM abnormality is detected upon power restoration, the RAM abnormality takes precedence. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (i.e., a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the memory area of the main control RAM 1312 where the setting values are stored may be included in or excluded from the RAM abnormality detection at power-up.

Furthermore, in the power-on checks, RAM abnormalities have the highest priority, while returning to a normal gameplay state has the lowest priority. Entering the settings change mode has a higher priority than entering the settings confirmation mode or performing a RAM clear operation. By executing the checks in this order of priority based on the resulting states, even when multiple conditions are met after power restoration, the highest priority state can be accurately determined.

Figure 216 is a flowchart of the process for checking the RAM outside the game area when the power is turned on. This process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on process (Figure 213) and determines an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 that is outside the game control area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2261), and stores all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). Note that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer to store all registers in processes executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized during the initial power-on (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power-down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5AH, it can be determined that the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized during the initial power-on.

If the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized upon initial power-on, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized upon initial power-on, the checksum of the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum is correct (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, a RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, if the checksum calculated in step S2265 is determined to be normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds and activated (step S2267), the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) (step S2268), and the mode switching time timer is set to a mode switching time (5 seconds) (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking the upper two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and one blinking cycle is completed when the LED blinking cycle timer time-up. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling the mode switching in the base display 1317, and the base display switches to the appropriate mode when the mode switching time timer time-up.

Subsequently, the performance display monitor management area is initialized by setting it to 0 (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

Subsequently, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all register values of the bank used in the calling process (bank 0 or bank 1), which were saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2272), the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to power-on processing.

Figure 217 is a flowchart of the processing for when an abnormality occurs in the RAM outside the game area. This processing is performed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (Figure 214), and initializes the area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), and stores all register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). Note that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer to store all registers in processes executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process for areas outside the usage area is executed to initialize the area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area (step S2283). Details of the RWM initialization process for areas outside the usage area will be described later in Figure 218.

Subsequently, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on next.

Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds and activated (step S2285), the LED blinking cycle timer is set to a blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to a mode switching time (5 seconds) (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base indicator 1317.

Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the calling process, saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288), the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the calling process when power is turned on.

Figure 218 is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the used area. This RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the RAM abnormality processing outside the game area, and initializes the area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the main control RAM 1312 by writing 00H to the work area outside the game control area (step S2290). Then, it initializes the main control RAM 1312 by writing 00H to the stack area outside the game control area (step S2291). After that, it returns to the processing for when an abnormality occurs in the RAM outside the game area.

Figure 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setup process. The power-on setup process is a subroutine and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (Figure 214), performing the initial power-on setup.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). The power-on operation command, as described later in Figure 220(B), is a two-byte command that notifies the contents of the setting state management area. The upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte is the value of the setting state management area plus 1.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to their initial value of 1. The other bits should be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area to 1 prevents the switch bits from being detected as 1 during the next timer interrupt, thus preventing the creation of an incorrect ON edge.

Next, clear the backup flag (step S2302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a value (00H) indicating the game start ready state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If a value indicating the game start ready state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it indicates either setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or a RAM error. Therefore, the power-on setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling function.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game start-ready state is recorded in the setting state management area, the game can normally be started. Therefore, the work area within the game control region is initialized according to whether or not the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2304).

Subsequently, a power-on status command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in Figure 220(C), the power-on status command is a two-byte command, where the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte indicates the state before the power outage.

Then, a power-on recovery command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in Figure 202(C), the power-on recovery command is a two-byte command that notifies the game state related to the special symbols. The upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the state of the special symbols and the operating state of the special electric mechanism during a power outage. The power-on recovery command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, a setting value command is created and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in Figure 202(D), the setting value command is a two-byte command that notifies the setting value, with the upper byte being A1H and the lower byte indicating the setting value.

Furthermore, along with the power-on status command, power-on restore destination command, and setting value command, a special symbol hold count command indicating the number of holds in the special symbol variation display game may be transmitted to restore the hold count display on the main LCD display device 1600 to its state before the power outage. The transmission order of the special symbol hold count command is flexible; it may be transmitted after the power-on status command, power-on restore destination command, and setting value command, before these commands are transmitted, or during the transmission of these commands.

After that, the process returns to the calling function.

The power-on setup process is always executed, regardless of whether the system is in setting change mode. Furthermore, the power-on setup process is called from the setup process (Figure 224) when the setting key 971 is turned OFF and the setting change/confirmation process is completed. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change/confirmation process is performed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so the power-on operation command is sent twice. On the other hand, when the setting change/confirmation process is not performed, the power-on operation command is sent only once, by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board 1510 provides notification corresponding to the state, such as setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or RAM abnormality.

Furthermore, in the setting/confirmation change mode, the player's setting adjustment function (for example, adjusting volume and brightness by operating buttons on the door frame 3) may be disabled, while adjustments by hall staff (adjusting volume and brightness using the volume controls on the peripheral circuit board box 1520) may be enabled. Specifically, it is advisable to disable the player's setting adjustment function until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Furthermore, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the entire screen of the main LCD display device 1600 may be used to display whether it is in setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, or RAM abnormality state. In this case, an audio message indicating whether it is in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be output. Additionally, some or all of the lamps (including the lamps provided on the door frame 3) may be used for notification.

Figure 220(B) shows an example of the configuration of the power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the contents of the setting state management area. Since the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value in the setting state management area, unlike the example shown in Figure 202(A) in the previously described embodiment, in alternative example 2, the lower byte becomes 04H when a RAM abnormality occurs.

Specifically, the power-on operation command consists of two bytes: the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte is the value in the setting state management area plus 1. This is because, during normal gameplay, the value in the setting state management area is 00H. If the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality where the output is 0. Therefore, one of the bits is set to 1.

Note that power-on operation commands are generated at least once during power-on processing. Specifically, commands A001H or A004H are generated once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM errors. In setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, commands A002H or A003H are generated during power-on processing, and then command A001H is generated twice more, once at the end of setting change/confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power-on operation command, it provides notification in the manner described above, depending on the state: normal game start ready state (A001H), setting confirmation mode (A002H), setting change mode (A003H), and RAM abnormality state (A004H) (see Figure 184). Note that the notification for the normal game start ready state, although not shown in Figure 184, displays a demo screen or performs a standby state presentation explaining the game content.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during normal gameplay without receiving the power-on operation command A001H, the game state may be inconsistent. Therefore, the board determines the received game command to be invalid and does not start the game operation (such as a performance) corresponding to that game command. However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, if a predetermined number of game commands during normal gameplay are transmitted consecutively), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). In this case, it is advisable to release the invalidation of the received game command and perform the performance corresponding to the game command.

Furthermore, even when game commands are disabled, the system may perform an animation that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands (for example, for symbol movements, lamps, movable parts, sounds, etc., the system may perform an animation corresponding to the received command), and the display device's background or predetermined lamps may be used to notify the user that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred. Alternatively, the system may notify the user of the inconsistency in the game state at a low volume. This is to prevent potential problems in the hall, as players might not understand that an inconsistency in the game state has occurred if no animation is performed until the predetermined conditions are met, leading them to believe that the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning, such as when the special symbol variation display game does not start even after a ball enters the starting slot. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 disables game commands, the main control board 1310 continues to perform normal game processing, so the function displays such as special symbols and normal symbols on the function display unit 1400 are displayed normally.

Figure 220(C) shows an example of the configuration of the power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in Figure 202(B) in the previously described embodiment, the power-on state command in alternative example 2 defines four states: 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the system is in a state where normal gameplay can be started, based on the contents recorded in the power-on state buffer, and further notifies the state before the power outage. For example, the power-on state command consists of two bytes. If the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify of a RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power outage was a low probability/non-time-saving state, the main control RAM 1312 has returned without being initialized, and the system is in a state where normal gameplay can be started. If the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power outage was a high probability/time-saving state, the main control RAM 1312 has returned without being initialized, and the system is in a state where normal gameplay can be started. Furthermore, if the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power outage was a low-probability/time-saving state, the main control RAM 1312 was not initialized and returned to normal, and the game is ready to start.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the power-on state buffer is a memory area that stores information about the game state at the time of a power outage in order to restore the state to what it was before the power outage occurred. The power-on state command stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value in the power-on state buffer. For example, in a low-probability non-time-saving mode, the power-on state buffer stores 1, and 2 (1 added to this value) is stored in the power-on state command. Also, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is 0, so 1 is stored in the power-on state command, indicating that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

Figure 221 is a flowchart of the main control side processing performed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side processing is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (Figure 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2310). In alternative example 2, power outages are monitored in the main process, but power outages may also be monitored in the timer interrupt process, and power outage processing may be executed when a power outage is detected. For example, it may be determined whether the power outage warning signal is ON at at least one of the start and end times of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and it may be determined that a power outage has occurred when the count result reaches a predetermined value.

If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so random number update process 2 is executed (step S2311). Random number update process 2 can be the same as that described in Figure 195, and primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winners in special and regular lotteries.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected, power outage processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. This power outage processing backs up data necessary to restore the system to its state before the power outage. Specifically, interrupts are disabled (step S2312). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from occurring. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2313). Specifically, it outputs the power outage clear signal OFF bit data to the solenoid, power outage clear, and ACK output ports. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors with high power consumption may be cleared. Clearing these output ports reduces power consumption until the main board-side power outage processing is completed, ensuring that the main board-side power outage processing is reliably completed.

Subsequently, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2314), and the power-off processing is executed to perform necessary processing before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later in Figure 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game area is restored (step S2316).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the backed-up work area has been properly preserved, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. It is preferable to exclude the settings state management (setting values and values in the settings state management area), backup flags, and checksum area values from the work area within the game control area that may change between power-on and the execution of the main control side main process.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power outage processing was successfully executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protection is enabled (write prohibited) and the prohibited area is disabled, and writing to the designated area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function that, by specifying the area of use of the main control RAM 1312, determines an abnormality and resets if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area. Therefore, by setting the prohibited area in the RAM protection register to disabled, the reset function due to access to the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (it is not reset), and access to all areas is made possible. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, and the prohibited area may be enabled so that the main control MPU 1311 is reset if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

Figure 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. Power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main processing (Figure 221), performing necessary processing before the power is cut off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the stack pointer value in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), and stores all register values in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Next, the checksum of the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area for the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Then, 5AH is set in the power-down check area (EX_PDIND) to record that the RAM area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power-down check area, the power-down process has been executed successfully. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM within the game control region are essentially the same. Since the power-down process has been executed successfully, the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has already been determined to be normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power-down check area, the initialization of the area outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 has been completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two types of flags indicating whether the power outage processing was executed successfully are provided in both the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. This is because a double determination is made in both the game control area and the area outside the game control area, and because it is desirable to process them independently since they do not share a single memory area. For example, if there were only one flag indicating that the power outage processing was executed successfully, and 5AH was mistakenly set to that flag, and the system recovered without performing power outage processing, it would be incorrectly determined that the power outage processing was executed successfully. By performing this double determination, the possibility of misjudgment is reduced.

Furthermore, by placing the two flags in separate memory areas (for example, areas where the lower byte (**00H to **FFH) or upper byte (00**H or 01**H) of the address do not overlap), the system can be restored correctly even if the data is overwritten due to noise or other malfunctions.

Then, all register values of the bank used in the calling process (bank 0 or bank 1), which were saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2325), the stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the calling program.

Figure 223 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing performed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two sets of registers used for calculations; one is used as the registers of bank 0, and the other as the registers of bank 1. It is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used without switching banks. Register bank 0 is used in the main control processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank state in a flag register (for example, a register with the Z flag and C flag set). The flag register is saved to the stack area at the start of the interrupt and restored from the stack area by the execution of the RET instruction. Therefore, executing the RET instruction also restores the bank flags of the registers stored in the flag register to their original state. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Furthermore, since the flag register also stores a flag that controls interrupt enablement, it is not necessary to set the system to interrupt enablement before executing the RET instruction. Note that the flag controlling interrupt enablement is set to interrupt disablement after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled during timer interrupt processing (e.g., by the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed, the system will not enter an interrupt enable state.

Next, update the LED common counter by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, set it to 0 (step S2331).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and this is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, the switch input process 1 in step S2332 is related to the winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in Figure 191 is related to the input of the fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is determined to be NO in step S2335, so winning is detected, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Even if winning is detected, the payout of prize balls and the display of fluctuations are not executed. This is because setting change operations and setting confirmation operations are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that no fraud occurs and is not detected in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. For example, since setting change and setting confirmation operations are performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are prone to shaking, so the vibration sensor may falsely detect vibration. For this reason, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, hall employees carry magnets to collect balls that have fallen to the floor, and false alarms caused by the magnets held by employees during setting changes or setting confirmation operations can be prevented. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means to disable (or restrict, regulate, or suppress) fraud detection. After transitioning to normal gameplay (for example, after the initial setup process upon power-on), fraud detection is enabled, and in specific game states (for example, during the setting process), fraud detection is disabled (or restricted, regulated, or suppressed) by the aforementioned means.

Furthermore, even in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (e.g., radio wave sensors) may be detected in switch input processing 1 to monitor specific types of fraud. This allows for the detection of fraudulent activity, such as a professional cheat activating the setting change mode by emitting radio waves.

Next, random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). Random number update process 1 updates the random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, and minor jackpot symbols. In addition to these random numbers, it also updates the initial value determination random numbers for changing the initial values of the jackpot symbol determination random numbers and minor jackpot symbol determination random numbers, which are updated in random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in Figure 221. In the timer interrupt process shown in Figure 223, random numbers are updated even when a setting process to change the setting value is executed. This is because the hardware random numbers used to determine wins and losses are updated regardless of whether setting changes or setting confirmation processes are underway. Therefore, by updating the software-generated random numbers at the same time as the hardware random numbers are activated—that is, even during setting changes and setting confirmation processes—inconsistencies between hardware and software random numbers are less likely to occur, and deviations from the design values of the expected value of the game's effects and the expected value of jackpots during specific effects can be suppressed.

Subsequently, a setting value verification process (Figure 215) is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range (step S2334). While the setting value verification process is performed periodically during the timer interrupt process, it is also possible to perform it when specific conditions are met, such as at the start of a change, when the game state is switched (e.g., when the jackpot probability is switched, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state), or when fraud is detected (e.g., when the door is opened, when magnetic field is detected). By performing the verification only when specific conditions are met, rather than periodically at short intervals like during the timer interrupt process, resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced.

Next, it is determined whether a value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By checking the value in the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, Figure 215), if the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the system controls the system so that normal gameplay is not executed in the subsequent check of the setting state management area value (S2335). If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the system proceeds to step S2080 in Figure 191. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of gameplay is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2336). By turning OFF the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, time is secured until the LED common signal turns ON, i.e., the LED is off, suppressing the ghosting phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display switching appear mixed, and preventing LED flickering.

Subsequently, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed, and the test signal is output (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2340). Before and after the start of the execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and registers are saved, similar to other processes outside the game area, and restored after the process is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a process outside the game control area. However, if executing the test signal processing as a process within the game control area does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process within the game control area. If the test signal processing is executed as a process within the game control area, the saving and restoration of the flag register (steps S2337, S2340) performed before and after the test signal output process (step S2339) becomes unnecessary.

Then, the configuration process is executed (step S2341). Details of the configuration process will be described later in Figure 224.

Subsequently, the settings display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the settings display process will be described later in Figure 225.

Furthermore, a peripheral board command transmission process is executed to output the value from the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO-type transmission information storage area. This transmission information storage area stores the command generated each time a command is generated, and the value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, the generated command may be directly stored in the FIFO-type transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit each time a command is generated.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses simple clear mode, it is cleared by setting one word. Then, a return instruction (e.g., RETI) is used to switch the register bank (step S2345), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

The processing after it is determined in step S2335 that a value indicating the start of gameplay has been recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the processing described above in Figure 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 in Figure 223.

Figure 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 223) when the setting state management area is not a value indicating the normal game state (00H), and primarily involves changing the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it creates a power-on command (step S2351) and returns to the calling process.

As a result, in the event of a RAM error, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM error is sent with each timer interrupt until the RAM error is resolved. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM error were sent only once, the peripheral control board 1510 would not be able to know the status of the gaming machine if the command was missed, as no further notification of the RAM error would be sent. Furthermore, since the function display unit 1400 is completely off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the status of the gaming machine, no error notification would be sent. This prevents the gaming machine's status from being externally monitored. Also, since no game is played during a RAM error, no commands other than the power-on operation command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the power-on operation command is repeatedly sent as long as the RAM error persists.

In other words, the pachinko machine of this embodiment includes a first case in which a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command) is transmitted only a predetermined number of times (for example, multiple small numbers such as once, twice, or three times) triggered by the execution of a periodic process (timer interrupt process) that is performed at predetermined intervals, and a second case in which the command is repeatedly transmitted at predetermined intervals without limit during the operation of the pachinko machine. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether the peripheral control board 1510 has received it correctly, and it is a command that is transmitted even when no other game-related commands are transmitted when normal gameplay is stopped.

The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving a command related to a RAM error, issues a notification regarding the RAM error. Even if the same command is received again during a RAM error notification, it is preferable to invalidate the received command and continue the currently running notification. By invalidating subsequent commands, for example, repeating the voice notification from the beginning can be prevented, ensuring normal notification.

The command regarding RAM abnormalities may always be the same, but it may also vary depending on the timing of transmission. The consistency of the commands may be determined by changing the command regarding RAM abnormalities depending on the timing of transmission. For example, by having a power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when there is a RAM abnormality at power-up, and a power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when there is a RAM abnormality during a normal timer interrupt, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine that the RAM abnormality at power-up is continuing if it receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H). On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), it can be determined that the setting values or setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 have become abnormal after power restoration (for example, during normal gameplay). In this way, the notification method can be made different for each of the two determined states. For example, if a RAM error persists after power-on, it can be reported as a RAM error. If a RAM error occurs after power-up, it can be reported as a setting error.

Furthermore, during a RAM error notification, the player's ability to adjust settings (for example, adjusting volume or brightness using buttons on the door frame 3) may be disabled. This is because any setting adjustments made by the player during a RAM error notification are considered erroneous. Specifically, it is advisable to disable the player's ability to adjust settings until the power-on operation command indicating normal gameplay is received.

If a RAM error is detected, the system will repeatedly execute the setting process, preventing the execution of special and regular symbol processing, resulting in a state where gameplay is completely impossible. This RAM error can be resolved by shutting off the power, performing a power outage, and then, upon powering back on, activating the setting change mode using the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954. This puts the system into a setting change state and resolves the RAM error. Finally, returning the setting key 971 to its original position exits the setting change mode, allowing normal gameplay to resume.

Furthermore, if, when restarting the power, any operation other than activating the setting change mode using the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting state management area (03H) will be maintained, the RAM abnormality state will persist, and normal gameplay cannot be started. In other words, to resolve the RAM abnormality and return to the normal gameplay state, it is absolutely necessary to go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has reached the ON to OFF edge, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined as the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2354), the power-on setting process shown in Figure 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling device.

When the setting change mode is terminated (setting key 971 is turned OFF), a delay time is set in the security signal output timer to allow the security signal to turn OFF after the setting change mode has ended. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends quickly (for example, within a single timer interrupt), the shortest possible output signal of the security signal can be secured for the duration set in the security signal output timer, ensuring that the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Furthermore, if an intrusion is detected during the delay period before the security signal turns off, the security signal should be maintained and output for a period or duration corresponding to the newly detected intrusion.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the delay period before the security signal turns OFF, when the system is hot-started in normal gameplay mode upon power restoration, the security signal will be output for the remaining time. However, when the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch or by changing settings, the security signal will not be output for the remaining time. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset upon initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal associated with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 begins.

When power is restored after a power outage while a security signal is being output, one of five patterns will occur: hot start, RAM clear, configuration change mode, configuration confirmation mode, or continued RAM abnormal state.

When the system enters configuration change mode or configuration confirmation mode, a security signal is output until the activated mode ends and the delay period has elapsed. If the RAM abnormality persists, the security signal due to the continued RAM abnormality will be output even after power is restored, because no configuration change operation has been performed. If a power outage occurs before the configuration change mode or configuration confirmation mode ends and the delay period has elapsed, and a hot start occurs after power is restored, the security signal will be output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the output of the security signal resumes after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) and the system transitions to timer interrupt processing. In other words, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output in the following cases, there is a predetermined period after power is restored during which the output of the security signal is stopped.
- When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output due to fraud detection, etc., and the power is restored by a hot start. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output due to a RAM abnormality, and the power is restored, but the RAM abnormality continues. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output in setting change mode, and the power is restored, but the setting change mode continues. - When a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output in setting confirmation mode, and the power is restored, but the setting confirmation mode continues. In this way, even when a security signal continues to be output after a power outage occurs while a security signal is being output, by stopping the output of the security signal for a predetermined period after the power is restored, the hall computer can determine whether there was an abnormality in the security signal or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal has been cleared.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation mode, where only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for the security signal to be output. The output of the security signal is stopped after the setting confirmation mode ends and the delay time has elapsed. It is also preferable to perform the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode in the setting change mode, where both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value indicating a setting change (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356). If it is determined that the system is in setting change mode, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the setting change switch 972 may also be used in conjunction with the RAM clear switch 954. If, as a result, it is determined that a value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the setting value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359, S2360). After that, the process returns to the calling system.

On the other hand, if no value indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting status management area (i.e., it is in setting confirmation mode), or if it is determined that the setting change switch 972 has not been operated, the system returns to the calling process without updating the setting value.

Furthermore, when determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it is also possible to determine whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. By determining the operation of the setting key 971 when the setting change switch 972 is operated in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by operating the setting change switch 972, even if the setting change mode was active during a power outage and the setting key 971 was not operated to ON when the power was restored.

Figure 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 223) when the setting state management area is not a value indicating the normal game state (00H), and it displays the setting value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether a value indicating a RAM error (03H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminals is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminals is set so that an error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

Subsequently, the system outputs an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), drives the driver to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display unit 1317 (step S2375), and then returns to the calling process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 3]
Next, we will describe another embodiment of a pachinko machine that has a setting change function. In the alternative example 3 described below, the main difference from the aforementioned alternative example 2 is that a timer interrupt process for setting change processing is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for normal gameplay. Processing other than that described below is the same as in the aforementioned alternative example 2.

In Example 3, similar to Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing a setting change switch 972. However, in order to distinguish between the RAM clear switch 954's original initialization function of the main control RAM 1312 and its setting change function, the operation related to changing the setting value may be described as using the setting change switch 972.

Figures 226 and 227 are flowcharts of the power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311, upon release of the reset signal, begins processing from address 8000, which is the starting address of the program code. The RAM protect register is set to disable protection and the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function that, by specifying the area of use of the main control RAM 1312, will determine an abnormality and reset if access to a prohibited area other than the specified area occurs. In this alternative example 3, to disable the reset function caused by access to the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to disabled, allowing access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, and the prohibited area may be enabled so that the main control MPU 1311 resets if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 954 operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksum does not match or the backup flag is not set correctly, the machine's functions are stopped due to a RAM error, rendering it unplayable. Furthermore, if a setting change operation is not performed, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, and gameplay is not executed.

Therefore, if the RAM protect register's restricted area is enabled, a reset may occur due to incorrect access to the restricted area of RAM caused by malfunction or failure. When the main control MPU 1311 performs the power-on process, the power-out process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, resulting in a RAM abnormality detection. If a RAM abnormality is detected, not only is the game initialized by the RAM clear process, but the game cannot be resumed unless a hall employee performs a RAM abnormality解除 operation (setting change operation). Therefore, it is desirable to set the RAM protect register's restricted area to "disabled".

Furthermore, the restricted area may be enabled. By enabling the restricted area, if unauthorized access to the restricted area of the main control RAM 1312 occurs, gameplay cannot be resumed unless a hall employee performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), thereby improving resistance to fraudulent activity.

Next, a simple clear mode timer is set to the watchdog timer for a predetermined period of time (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). Then, the power outage clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and then to OFF (step S2404). This allows the power outage warning signal stored in the latch to be set to a normal state (not a power outage) by setting the power outage clear signal to ON and then OFF.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated only after the peripheral control board 1510 has been successfully started, if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 will be determined to be active in a state unintended by the hall employee. Therefore, the input states (levels) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the power-on processing begins. By determining the states of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as the register after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends, even if a hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation early after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 during the power-on operation can be reliably detected.

Subsequently, the system determines whether a power outage is occurring based on the power outage warning signal (step S2406). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so the system waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage stabilizes. In the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer is not cleared, so if the power outage is not resolved, the watchdog timer will reset. This reset by the watchdog timer immediately starts the program from the start address without performing a security check like a system reset, and the power-on processing is executed. Therefore, the system will not exit the loop in step S2406 unless the power outage warning signal is cleared.

Thus, the power outage detection process, which detects the power outage warning signal, is executed in two places: first, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on processing, and second, in step S2450 during the main control side processing during normal gameplay. In the latter (step S2450), power outage detection triggers the execution of power outage processing from step S2462 onwards, while in the former (steps S2406 and S2408), power outage processing is not executed even if power outage is detected. Furthermore, because the checksum value and backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the system can correctly return to the state it was in at the time of the power outage even without executing power outage processing.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes two types of resets: a system reset caused by the reset circuit and a user reset caused by access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, the program starts after a security check lasting several hundred milliseconds, while in a user reset, the program starts immediately without performing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer during normal gameplay, the power outage processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, resulting in a RAM error. When a RAM error is detected, the game state is initialized by the RAM clear process, and gameplay cannot be resumed unless a hall employee performs a RAM error解除 operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, the system can correctly return to the state it was in at the time of the power outage without a hall employee performing a RAM error解除 operation (setting change operation).

Thus, regarding resets caused by the watchdog timer, the reason why there are cases where a setting change operation is required to clear the RAM abnormality in order to restart the pachinko machine 1, and cases where it is not, is that a reset caused by the watchdog timer during normal gameplay indicates a software malfunction, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is likely to be corrupted, and there is a high possibility that it stores content different from the game state at the time of the power outage, so it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, a reset caused by the watchdog timer during power-on processing indicates a hardware malfunction, and the possibility of data corruption in the main control RAM 1312 is low, so there is little need to initialize the main control RAM 1312.

The above describes the reset caused by the watchdog timer, but similar processing is performed for other types of user resets that occur due to the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are multiple reset factors, and the aforementioned processing may be executed in response to a reset caused by one of these reset factors (for example, a user reset caused by the watchdog timer).

Subsequently, a sub-start-up waiting timer (for example, approximately 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until this timer expires, while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up (step S2407). The waiting period for the peripheral control board 1510 to start up can be anytime between power-on and the first command transmission to the peripheral control board 1510, even if it is not after determining the set value.

Subsequently, the system re-determines whether the power outage is occurring based on the power outage warning signal (step S2408). If the power outage warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the system waits in step S2408. Note that the determination of whether the power outage is occurring based on the power outage warning signal does not need to be made in both steps S2406 and S2408; the determination can be made in either step.

Subsequently, the setting value verification process shown in Figure 215 is executed to determine whether the setting value is within the normal range (step S2409).

Subsequently, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control region (step S2410), and the power-on RAM check process shown in Figure 216 is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control region of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control region is restored (step S2412).

Subsequently, the RAM abnormality detection result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

In Example 3, the value set in the setting state management area differs from that shown in Figure 201(B) in the previously described embodiment. As shown in Figure 220(A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312, 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area in Example 3 is a 1-byte memory area where the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are undefined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in normal gameplay mode, 01H in setting confirmation mode, 02H in setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H during a RAM clear process performed solely by operating the RAM clear switch 954; the current value is maintained. Furthermore, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Additionally, if the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting change operation during the next power-on will update the setting change mode from 03H to 02H, and then update from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Furthermore, the system determines whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415, S2416). Specifically, it compares a checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding data saved in the stack) in the area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 during the previous power outage with a checksum calculated using the same area. If the two differ, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. Also, if the value of the power outage flag, which indicates that the backup was successful (that the power outage processing was executed successfully), is not stored in the backup flag area, it is determined that the data in the main control RAM 1312 was not successfully backed up during the power outage (that the power outage processing was not executed successfully), and that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

Then, if an abnormality is detected either within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), the information of the setting state management area is set in the B register (step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the C register contains the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal. Therefore, in subsequent processing, it is not necessary to re-execute the process of determining RAM abnormality (the process of determining the match of the checksum and backup flag) as a determination of "RAM abnormality" or "game state before power outage," thus reducing the program size.

Furthermore, the B register stores the value of the setting state management area during a power outage or the result of the main control RAM 1312's determination (RAM abnormal value) upon power restoration. By temporarily setting the RAM abnormal value in the setting state management area in step S2419, unnecessary processing can be eliminated, reducing the program size. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when the determination in steps S2423 and S2424 is YES, it would be necessary to set the RAM abnormal value in the setting state management area and execute the JUMP instruction to step S2436. However, since the RAM abnormal value is already temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination during the determination in step S2423 reduces the number of JUMP instructions, as shown in the source code example below.

Example source code when no temporary RAM abnormality value is set in step S2419
AND A, 30H ;S2420
CP A,30H;S2421 (when bit 5 is the setting key and bit 4 is the RAM clear switch)
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR Z, $111;
$000:
LD W,03H ;S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
JR S2436; Jump command to S2436
$111:
CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z,$000;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
Example source code for temporarily setting an abnormal RAM value in step S2419
LD W,03H ;S2419
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
AND A,30H ;S2420
CP A,30H;S2421
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP B,02H ;S2422
JR Z,RESET_P_6 ;

CP C,00H ;S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B,03H ;S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;

Subsequently, in step S2419, a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Next, the bits for the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked from the register value where the PF port value is recorded (step S2420). Then, using the values stored in the register, it is determined whether the setting key 971 was operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 was operated ON when the power was turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 was operated ON and the RAM clear switch 954 was operated ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the system was in setting change mode when the power outage occurred (step S2422). For example, if the value of the B register set in step S2418 is in setting change mode (02H), it is determined that the power outage occurred while the system was in setting change mode.

Then, if it is determined that a power outage occurred during the settings change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no power outage occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 can be used to determine if there is an abnormality within the game control area. If an abnormality is found either within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there are no abnormalities within or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H), it is determined that a power outage occurred during RAM abnormality processing.

Then, if it is determined that a power outage occurred during RAM error processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, if it is determined that no power outage occurred during RAM error processing, a value indicating the normal game state (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value indicating the RAM error (03H) temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as a temporary setting value. Also, because 00H is recorded in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value in the setting state management area differs when jumping from steps S2426 and S2431 to step S2435. Therefore, since the value in the setting state management area differs between normal RAM clear processing and RAM clear processing associated with setting change processing, even if the programs for both RAM clear processing are common, the caller can be distinguished, eliminating the need for separate programs and reducing the program size.

As shown in the example source code below, at step S2425, it has not yet been determined whether 01H or 00H will be recorded in the setting state management area. While the determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination, this would require recording 00H in the setting state management area after the RAM clear process when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON. Therefore, since the processing differs between the power-on process and the setting change RAM clear process, separate processing is required for each, except for the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312. To address this, 00H is temporarily set in step S2425 to unify the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312 between setting changes and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

Example source code for when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2425.
CP A,10H ;S2426 (The A register stores information about the PF port)
JR NZ,$000; (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear switch)

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H;S2428
JR NZ, $111;

LD W,01H ;S2429
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
JR S2436;

$000:
XOR W,W; equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
JR S2435; Increase

$111:
XOR W,W; increment
LD (VALID_PALY), W ; Increment
JR S2436; Increase

S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
....
S2435:
[RAM Clear Process] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436
Example source code for temporarily setting 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425
XOR W,W ;S2425
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;

CP A,10H;S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A,(JOTAI_BF) ;S2427
LD (POWER_BF),A ;

CP A,20H;S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W,01H;
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W,02H ;S2430
LD (VALID_PALY),W ;
....
S2435:
[RAM Clear Process] ;S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers] ;S2436

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 was operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and remains 03H until the power is cut off, preventing normal game processing. In this case, if the setting change operation is performed after the power is cut off and then the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality can be resolved. That is, if it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is updated from a value indicating a RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating a setting change (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormality state ends. Thus, recovery from a RAM abnormality always involves a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power outage is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can only be resolved by changing the setting value.

Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is detected, the work area and stack area within and outside the game control area may be initialized, and game processing may be started. This allows the system to automatically return to normal gameplay even if the main control RAM 1312 is detected as abnormal.

Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is detected, the game may be stopped, the power may be cut off, and upon power restoration, if the work areas within and outside the game control area are determined to be normal, the work areas and stack area within and outside the game control area may be initialized and game processing may be started. In this way, the game can be returned to a normal state by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is detected, the game may be stopped. After the power is cut off, and upon power restoration, if the work areas within and outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the RAM clear switch is operated, the work areas and stack areas within and outside the game control area may be initialized, and game processing may be started. In this way, the game can be returned to a normal state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is detected, the game may be stopped, the power may be cut off, and upon power restoration, if the work areas within and outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the setting key 971 is operated, the work areas and stack areas within and outside the game control area may be initialized and game processing may be started. In this way, the game can be returned to a normal state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the information of the game state at the time of the power outage is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the game state to the state before the power outage occurred (step S2427). This prepares the peripheral control board 1510 to restore the effects (background, decorative pattern (different decorative patterns are used for low probability and high probability states)) corresponding to each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time-saving state or non-time-saving state). This is used in step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439 when creating the power-on operation command.

Subsequently, it is determined, using the value stored in the register, whether the setting key 971 was operated to ON when the power was turned on (step S2428). If the setting key 971 was operated to ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value indicating the setting confirmation mode (01H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. In other words, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power outage was the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 was operated (i.e., the RAM clear switch 954 was not operated), the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode.

Steps S2425 to S2429 are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 has not been operated. Therefore, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2426) or whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the diagram, the determination of whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S2426) may be performed first and then the determination of whether the setting key 971 has been operated (step S2428), or vice versa.

If the result in step S2421 or step S2422 is YES, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, the abnormality outside the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. If there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 as a result, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if an abnormality occurs outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2432), and the abnormality processing outside the game area RAM shown in Figure 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register that was saved to the stack area within the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area (excluding the set value and setting state management area) within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the stack area within the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that the unused area between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

Subsequently, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because if the power is cut off while commands are stored in the command buffers and then restored without clearing the RAM, the unsent commands stored in the command buffers will be sent. For example, if the power is cut off while a variation command is being sent, the symbol command may be sent, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be sent. Then, when the power is restored, if only the variation pattern command is sent, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that there is an abnormality. Furthermore, if unsent commands related to setting changes are stored in the command buffers, the transmission of these unsent commands during the setting process after power restoration may cause the peripheral control board 1510 to set the game state based on those commands, potentially leading to malfunction. To prevent such abnormalities, the command buffers are initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, it may also be cleared when starting the configuration change process or the configuration confirmation process. Note that during the configuration change process, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, during the configuration confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so it is advisable to clear the command buffer when transitioning to configuration confirmation.

Subsequently, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built into the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt period is set for CTC0, which is used for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to allow interrupts. Note that the time for CTC1, which controls the timer interrupt processing in normal gameplay, is not set, and the interrupt for CTC1 for normal gameplay remains disabled.

Then, the hardware random number generator (e.g., win/lose random number generator) built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number generator, and the power-on setting process shown in Figure 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control side main processing (Figure 228).

Figure 228 is a flowchart of the main control processing performed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (Figure 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop processing for setting change processing (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop processing, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In alternative example 3, power outages are monitored in the main processing, but power outages may also be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and power outage processing may be executed when a power outage is detected. For example, it may be determined whether the power outage warning signal is ON at least one of the start and end times of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output may be counted, and it may be determined that a power outage has occurred when the count result reaches a predetermined value. In alternative example 3, since separate timer interrupt processing is provided for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing, power outages may be monitored in either timer interrupt processing, or both timer interrupt processing may be used to monitor power outages. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring and power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt handlers, it becomes unnecessary to incorporate the same program (code) for power outage monitoring and power outage processing into each timer interrupt handler, thus reducing the program size.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and it is determined whether a value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start normal gameplay. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of gameplay is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupts are set to enabled (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, repeatedly executing the first main loop process for setting change processing.

If it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to normal gameplay mode, and then the second main loop processing for normal gameplay (steps S2457-S2458) is executed. Before executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt period is set for CTC1 for normal gameplay (step S2454), the interrupt for CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting processing) is stopped, the interrupt for CTC1 (timer interrupt for normal game processing) is started (step S2455), and the system is set to enable interrupts (step S2456).

Subsequently, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is supplied normally, so random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). Random number update processing 2 can be the same as that explained in Figure 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than those used for determining winning outcomes in special and normal lotteries. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop processing for normal gameplay is repeatedly executed.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the power outage processing shown in Figure 228 of the main control side, a process is executed to back up data necessary to restore the state before the power outage. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from occurring. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power outage clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power outage clear, and ACK output ports. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors with high power consumption may be cleared. Clearing these output ports reduces power consumption until the main board side power outage processing is completed, ensuring that the main board side power outage processing is reliably completed.

Subsequently, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to perform necessary processing on the work area outside the game area before the power is cut off (step S2465). Details of the power-off processing are shown in Figure 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the backed-up work area has been properly preserved, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. It is preferable to exclude the settings state management (setting values and values in the settings state management area), backup flags, and checksum area values from the work area within the game control area that may change between power-on and the execution of the main control side main process.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power outage processing was successfully executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the setting values for RAM protect enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled are written to the RAM protect register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function that, by specifying the usage area of the main control RAM 1312, determines an abnormality and resets if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area. In this embodiment, this reset function due to access to the prohibited area is disabled, allowing access to all areas. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, and the prohibited area may be set as enabled in the RAM protect register. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

In the process described above, the output port is cleared (step S2463), power-off processing is performed (step S2465), the checksum is calculated (step S2467), and the backup flag is set (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to that shown in the diagram; other orders are also acceptable.

In alternative example 3, the main control side monitors for power outages, but it is also possible to monitor for power outages using a timer interrupt and execute power outage processing based on the monitoring results. For example, in each of the two main loops, a power outage signal can be checked at least at the start and end, the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output can be measured, and a power outage can be detected when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value.

In the main control side main processing shown in Figure 228, two main loops are provided, corresponding to the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay, and there is always at least one trigger for executing the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. Also, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed at this trigger (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, it is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value, such as executing the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal gameplay (timer interrupt processing) and not executing the process of calculating the base value which is unnecessary in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. In alternative example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay are provided separately, power outages may be monitored in either timer interrupt processing, or power outages may be monitored in both timer interrupt processing. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring and power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt handlers, it becomes unnecessary to incorporate the same program (code) for power outage monitoring and power outage processing into each timer interrupt handler, thus reducing the program size.

Figure 229 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for setting operations executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two sets of registers used for calculations; one is used as the register set of bank 0, and the other is used as the register set of bank 1. By switching banks, either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for setting processing or normal gameplay. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register with the Z flag and C flag set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area at the start of the interrupt and restored from the stack area by the execution of the RET instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored to its original state when the RET instruction is executed. Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Furthermore, since the flag register also stores a flag that controls interrupt enablement, it is not necessary to set the system to interrupt enablement before executing the RET instruction. Note that the flag controlling interrupt enablement is set to interrupt disablement after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled during timer interrupt processing (e.g., by the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed, the system will not enter an interrupt enable state.

Next, update the LED common counter by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, set it to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and this is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it will be determined as NO in step S2473. Therefore, winning will be detected, but fraud will not be detected. Even if winning is detected, the payout of prize balls and the display of fluctuations will not be executed. This is because setting change and setting confirmation operations are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable that fraud not occur and is not detected in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, even in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (e.g., radio wave sensors) may be detected in switch input processing 1 to monitor specific types of fraud. This allows for the detection of fraudulent activity, such as a cheater forcibly activating the setting change mode by emitting radio waves. For example, while a hall employee is performing a setting change or setting confirmation operation, the door is open, and a sensor attached to the door is positioned close to the adjacent pachinko machine. Therefore, while the setting change or confirmation operation is being performed, fraudulent activity using radio waves or other means on the adjacent pachinko machine can be detected.

Then, it is determined whether the value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). Note that, in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing, the value in the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so it is not necessary to determine whether the value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area. However, this determination is made to prevent fraudulent activity such as illegally switching to setting change mode during normal gameplay.

If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the process related to changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of gameplay is not recorded in the setting state management area, a specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signals cleared as specific output ports in step S2474 include the power outage clear signal, solenoid signals for the big prize slot and electric tuner, and the response signal (ACK) when a command is received by the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2475). By turning OFF the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, time is secured until the LED common signal turns ON, i.e., the LED is off, suppressing the ghosting phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display switching appear mixed, and preventing LED flickering.

Subsequently, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in Figure 224 is executed (step S2477). Then, the setting display process shown in Figure 225 is executed (step S2478).

Furthermore, a peripheral board command transmission process is executed to output the value from the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-type transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the value stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, if there are unsent commands remaining in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or nearly full, it is advisable to control whether to store the command in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the available space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is possible to determine if the available space in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area is greater than the size (number of bytes) of the command to be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area. If the available space is greater, the command may be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area. Alternatively, a predetermined upper limit may be set on the size of the command to be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area for each execution of the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510. If the size of the command to be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area exceeds the predetermined upper limit without determining the available space, even if not all commands can be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area, the remaining commands may be stored in the serial communication circuit's transmission information storage area in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit should be set to the same amount as, or less than, the amount of data that the serial communication circuit (SIO) can transmit in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, if the serial communication circuit has a communication speed of 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 milliseconds, approximately 80 bits of serial communication are possible in one timer interrupt cycle. If one command consists of 20 bits, then 80 ÷ 20 = 4, so it is appropriate to set the upper limit to 4 commands. However, in practice, it is also acceptable to set the upper limit to 5 commands, one more than the maximum length. This is because, although we assumed a maximum command length of 20 bits, there are many commands that are shorter than this maximum length.

Furthermore, regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set on the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area during a single command transmission process, it is advisable to ensure that the capacity of the storage area where commands are stored before being stored in the transmission information storage area is smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area, so that the transmission information storage area does not become full.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses simple clear mode, it is cleared by setting one word. Then, a return instruction (e.g., RETI) is used to switch the register bank (step S2481), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for setting change processing shown in Figure 229, unlike other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATART_K) is not executed. However, since the hardware random number generator has already been activated in S2438, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for setting change processing, similar to the hardware random number generator.

In example 3, the test signal output processing can be performed either in the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay (for example, the output data setting processing S2505 in Figure 230) or called within the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing.

Figure 230 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two groups of registers used for calculations; one is used as the register group of bank 0, and the other is used as the register group of bank 1. By switching banks, either bank can be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, and register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register with the Z flag and C flag set), and the flag register is saved to the stack area at the start of the interrupt and restored from the stack area by the execution of the RET instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored to its original state when the RET instruction is executed. Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Furthermore, since the flag register also stores a flag that controls interrupt enablement, it is not necessary to set the system to interrupt enablement before executing the RET instruction. Note that the flag controlling interrupt enablement is set to interrupt disablement after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled during timer interrupt processing (e.g., by the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed, the system will not enter an interrupt enable state.

Next, update the LED common counter by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, set it to 0 (step S2491).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and this is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Next, random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). Random number update process 1 updates the random numbers for determining the jackpot, the random numbers for determining the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for determining the minor jackpot symbols. In addition to these random numbers, it also updates the random numbers used to determine the initial values of the random numbers used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in random number update process 2 of the main control side (shown in Figure 221).

Subsequently, special switch input processing is performed (step S2494).

Subsequently, the timer update process is executed (step S2495). The timer update process manages time for various purposes, including the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process, and the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the payout control board 951 has successfully received the payout ACK signal transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Specifically, when the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variable time, and the result of this subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the variable time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variable display pattern.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed based on the read input information is calculated, and this is written to the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for two channels of output, transmitting commands to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel and commands to the payout control board 951 on the other channel. The serial communication transfer rate (baud rate) can be set for each channel, for example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate should be set lower on the payout control board 951 than on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the prize balls controlled by the payout control board 951 have game value and are therefore less susceptible to noise, etc. They are transferred at a low speed to prevent abnormal prize ball commands due to command corruption or omissions. However, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits commands for effects that do not have game value; therefore, the effect only needs to resume with the next command. Furthermore, since many commands are transmitted, it is desirable to send commands to the peripheral control board 1510 quickly to ensure a responsive effect and avoid causing discomfort to the player. This is because if the effect response is poor (for example, even if a game ball enters the starting prize slot and the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 begins to change, the decorative symbols on the main LCD display device 1600 do not begin to change), the player may feel uneasy and wonder if there is a malfunction.

Next, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The dispensing control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command) categorized by the dispensing control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when the various commands are successfully received as payer serial data, information to inform the dispensing control board 951 of this is stored in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. The main control MPU 1311 also formats the commands successfully received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.) and stores them in the transmission information storage area mentioned above. Specifically, in the frame command reception process, in order to provide notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command received from the payout control board 951 is modified to conform to the command system to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same way as other generated commands. Furthermore, if the command from the payout control board 951 is successfully received, a signal is generated to control the output of the main ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output directly to the payout control board 951 from the output port, rather than from the serial communication circuit. Note that the main ACK signal may also be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Next, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). The fraud detection process checks for abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetic interference, vibration, prize entry abnormalities, etc.). For example, if the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the count switch detects that game balls have entered the large prize entry slots 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in a jackpot state, the main control program creates a prize entry abnormality display command, which is classified as an abnormal condition and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Next, the system executes a switch-pass command output process (step S2499) to create commands corresponding to the detection of passage through various switches, such as the prize-winning switch and the start-up switch, and set them in the transmission information storage area.

Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area (step S2500), and the base indicator output processing is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base indicator output processing is executed using a second area outside the game control area and is a common process unaffected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, to ensure the independence of the base indicator output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game control area before and after the execution of the base indicator output processing, so that it is not updated during the base indicator output processing. Afterward, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Next, the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, it is determined whether the random value for the jackpot matches the hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, and whether or not to transition to a probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. If the random value for the jackpot matches the hit judgment value, it is decided whether or not to open and close the large prize slots 2005 and 2006. If the large prize slots 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) as a result of this decision, the game transitions to a state where game balls can be accepted into the large prize slots 2005 and 2006, which is advantageous for the player. If the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are met, the game then transitions to a probability variation state, while if the conditions for transitioning to a probability variation state are not met, the game transitions to a state other than the probability variation state. Here, "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) where the probability of winning the special lottery mentioned above is set relatively higher compared to the normal gameplay state (low probability state).

Next, the control process for the regular symbols and regular electric prizes is executed (step S504). In the control process for the regular symbols and regular electric prizes, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 was input to the input terminal. If a detection signal was input to the input terminal, a random number for determining whether a regular symbol win is achieved is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the regular symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as "regular lottery"). Then, a decision is made whether or not to open or close the second start-up door member 2549 according to the result of the regular lottery. If the decision is made to open or close the door, the second start-up door member 2549 becomes open (or expanded), allowing game balls to be accepted into the start-up opening 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the output data setting process is executed (step S2505). During the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are successfully received from the output terminals of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When a jackpot is in play, drive signals are output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening and closing members 2107 of the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006, and a drive signal is output to the start opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start opening (second start opening door member 2549). In addition, various game-related information signals (game information) such as probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time reduction information output signals, start opening prize information output signals, and security signals are output to the external terminal board 784 as output information to the hall computer. Furthermore, during the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be executed to output a test signal.

Furthermore, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-of-bounds balls counted in the switch input special processing (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out-of-bounds balls (e.g., 10 balls).

Furthermore, the output data setting process sets test signals to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1. These test signals include, for example, signals indicating the game state and signals indicating the stopping patterns of regular and special symbols.

Furthermore, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed to output the value from the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-type transmission buffer, and it sequentially transmits the value stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses simple clear mode, it is cleared by setting one word. Then, a return instruction (e.g., RETI) is used to switch the register bank (step S2508), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example of setting change/confirmation process 4]
Next, we will describe another embodiment of a pachinko machine that has a setting change function. In the alternative example 4 described below, the setting change process is executed in the main control side main process rather than in the timer interrupt process. The processes other than those described below are the same as in the alternative example 3 mentioned above.

In Example 4, similar to Example 2, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing a setting change switch 972. However, in order to distinguish between the RAM clear switch 954's original initialization function of the main control RAM 1312 and its setting change function, the operation related to changing the setting value may be described as using the setting change switch 972.

Figure 231 is a flowchart of the main control side processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (Figure 227). In the main control side processing of alternative example 4, steps S2481 to S2484 are executed instead of step S2452 of the main control side processing of alternative example 3 (Figure 228). The execution of setting change and setting confirmation processing in the main control side processing is applicable not only to cases where separate timer interrupt processing is provided for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing, as in alternative example 4, but also to alternative examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control processing shown in Figure 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting (steps S2450-S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal gameplay (steps S2457-S2458). In either main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (Figure 196 in Example 1, Figure 223 in Example 2) is executed. Within this timer interrupt processing, both the setting processing (step 2068 in Figure 190, step S2341 in Figure 223) and the normal gameplay processing are executed. In this case, since there is only one timer interrupt processing executed in the main loop, the CTC switching in steps S2454 and S2455, described later, becomes unnecessary.

In the main control side processing shown in Figure 231, the same reference numerals are used for the same processes as in the main control side processing of Example 3 (Figure 228).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop processing for setting (steps S2450 to S2453). In the first main loop processing, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2450). In alternative example 4, power outages are monitored in the main processing, but power outages may also be monitored in the timer interrupt processing, and power outage processing may be executed when a power outage is detected. For example, it may be determined whether the power outage warning signal is ON at least one of the start and end times of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power outage warning signal is continuously output is counted, and it may be determined that a power outage has occurred when the count result reaches a predetermined value. In alternative example 4, since separate timer interrupt processing for setting processing and timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are provided, power outages may be monitored in either timer interrupt processing, or both timer interrupt processing may be used to monitor power outages. Therefore, by creating subroutines for power outage monitoring and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring and power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt handlers, it becomes unnecessary to incorporate the same program (code) for power outage monitoring and power outage processing into each timer interrupt handler, thus reducing the program size.

If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so the interrupt is set to disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in Figure 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in Figure 225 is executed (step S2483).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the setting change/setting confirmation process is complete based on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has changed from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF. If the operation to terminate the setting change/setting confirmation process has been performed, the system proceeds to step S2454 to start normal gameplay. On the other hand, if the setting change/setting confirmation process is not complete, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). Clearing the edge information prevents multiple setting value changes in a single operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process that detects the edges of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is executed once. Therefore, the first main loop process executed after one setting change does not use the same edge information as the previous time to change the setting. Note that it is also possible to clear only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. Subsequently, the interrupt is enabled (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, repeatedly executing the first main loop process for setting changes. The reason for disabling interrupts in steps S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change and setting confirmation processes from being interrupted by timer interrupts.

Furthermore, in the first main loop processing for setting (steps S2450 to S2453), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared. When the game transitions to normal gameplay (while the second main loop processing is running), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referenced.

If the settings change/confirmation process is determined to be complete in step S2484, the second main loop process for normal gameplay (steps S2457-S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt period is set for CTC1 for normal gameplay (step S2454), the interrupt for CTC0 is stopped, the interrupt for CTC1 is started (step S2455), and CTC1 is set to interrupt enabled (step S2456).

Subsequently, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S2457). If a power outage warning signal is detected, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is supplied normally, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described in Figure 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than those used for determining winning in special and normal lotteries. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop processing for normal gameplay is repeatedly executed. If it is detected that the setting key 971 has been turned ON during normal gameplay (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 may generate a command to notify the system, and the peripheral control board 1510 may display a notification on the display device. Since this notification effect occurs during normal gameplay, it is desirable that it does not interfere with the progress of normal gameplay. For example, it may be possible to light up only specific LEDs, display characters or specific symbols in a small area of the main LCD display 1600, or display a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is ON, in accordance with the progress of the game.

If a power outage warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

During power outage processing, a process is executed to back up data necessary to restore the system to its state before the power outage. Specifically, interrupts are first disabled (step S2462). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from occurring. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power outage clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power outage clear, and ACK output ports. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids or motors with high power consumption may be cleared. Clearing these output ports reduces power consumption until the main board-side power outage processing is completed, ensuring that the main board-side power outage processing is completed reliably.

Subsequently, the flag register is saved to the stack area within the game area (step S2464), and the power-off processing is executed to perform necessary processing on the work area outside the game area before the power is cut off (step S2465). Details of the power-off processing are shown in Figure 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area within the game area is restored (step S2466).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area within the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the backed-up work area has been properly preserved, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. It is preferable to exclude the settings state management (setting values and values in the settings state management area), backup flags, and checksum area values from the work area within the game control area that may change between power-on and the execution of the main control side main process.

Furthermore, a value (5AH) indicating that the power outage processing was successfully executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the setting values for RAM protect enabled (write prohibited) and prohibited area disabled are written to the RAM protect register, prohibiting writing to the main control RAM 1312 (step S2469), and the system waits until power is restored (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function that, by specifying the usage area of the main control RAM 1312, determines an abnormality and resets if there is access to a prohibited area other than the specified area. In this embodiment, this reset function due to access to the prohibited area is disabled, allowing access to all areas. Alternatively, an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 may be designated as a prohibited area, and the prohibited area may be set as enabled in the RAM protect register. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset if access to the specified prohibited area is detected.

In the process described above, the output port is cleared (step S2463), power-off processing is performed (step S2465), the checksum is calculated (step S2467), and the backup flag is set (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to that shown in the diagram; other orders are also acceptable.

In alternative example 4, the main control side monitors for power outages, but it is also possible to monitor power outages using a timer interrupt process and execute power outage processing based on the monitoring results. For example, in each of the two main loops, a power outage signal can be checked at least at the start and end, the period during which the power outage signal is continuously output can be measured, and a power outage can be detected when the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. In alternative example 4, separate timer interrupt processes are provided for setting processing and normal game processing, so power outages can be monitored using either timer interrupt process, or both timer interrupt processes can be used to monitor power outages. Therefore, by subroutines for power outage monitoring and power outage processing, and executing these subroutines (power outage monitoring and power outage processing) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, it is not necessary to incorporate the same program (code) for power outage monitoring and power outage processing into each timer interrupt process, thus reducing the program size.

In the main control side main processing shown in Figure 231, two main loops are provided, one corresponding to the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing and the other to the timer interrupt processing for normal gameplay. There is always at least one trigger for the execution of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. However, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing may not be executed at this trigger (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, it is possible to switch whether to execute the base value calculation process in the main loop for normal gameplay (timer interrupt processing) and not execute the unnecessary base value calculation process in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing.

Figure 232 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In Alternative Example 4, the setting change and setting confirmation processes are repeatedly executed in the main loop for setting processing. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 4 is the same as the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing in Alternative Example 3 (Figure 229), but with the setting change and setting confirmation processes (steps S2477 to S2478) removed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two sets of registers used for calculations; one is used as the registers of bank 0, and the other as the registers of bank 1. It is configured so that registers in both banks cannot be used without switching banks. Register bank 0 is used in the main control processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank state in a flag register (for example, a register with the Z flag and C flag set). The flag register is saved to the stack area at the start of the interrupt and restored from the stack area by executing the RET instruction. Therefore, executing the RET instruction also restores the bank flags of the registers stored in the flag register to their original state. If a configuration is adopted in which the bank state is not stored in the flag register, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Furthermore, since the flag register also stores a flag that controls interrupt enablement, it is not necessary to set the system to interrupt enablement before executing the RET instruction. Note that the flag controlling interrupt enablement is set to interrupt disablement after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless interrupts are enabled during timer interrupt processing (e.g., by the EI instruction) or the RETI instruction is executed, the system will not enter an interrupt enable state.

Next, update the LED common counter by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, set it to 0 (step S2471).

Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and this is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, even if a winning combination is detected, processes related to the progress of the game, such as the payout of prize balls or the display of special and regular symbols, are not executed. Also, while winning detection related to the progress of the game is performed, detection of fraudulent activities such as magnets or shocks (vibrations) is not performed. This is because setting change and setting confirmation operations are performed by hall employees, and it is considered desirable not to detect fraudulent activities such as magnets or shocks (vibrations) in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode.

Furthermore, even in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (e.g., radio wave sensors) may be detected in switch input processing 1 to monitor specific types of fraud. This allows for the detection of fraudulent activity, such as a professional cheat activating the setting change mode by emitting radio waves.

Then, it is determined whether the value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). Note that it is not necessary to check the value in the game state management area during the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. This is to address fraudulent activity that would otherwise lead to an unauthorized transition to setting change processing. Furthermore, the determination of whether the value indicating the start of gameplay (00H) is recorded in the setting state management area can be made before switch input processing 1 (step S2472), and if the value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission processing (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the process related to changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476) is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2479. If a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command may be generated to indicate that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed. This is because, when a value indicating the start of gameplay is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt process for setting change processing shown in Figure 232 is not executed, indicating that some kind of abnormality has occurred. This abnormality notification may be a notification using an LCD, lamp, or sound, similar to notifications for magnets, radio waves, vibrations, etc., or a security signal may be output from the external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification methods may be adopted and used individually or in combination for notification.

On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of gameplay is not recorded in the setting state management area, a specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signals cleared as specific output ports in step 2474 include the power outage clear signal, solenoid signals for the big prize slot and electric tuner, and the response signal (ACK) when a command is received by the payout control board 951. Afterward, the LED common port is turned OFF (step S2475). By turning OFF the LED common signal early in the timer interrupt processing, time is secured until the LED common signal turns ON, i.e., the LED is off, suppressing the ghosting phenomenon where the display before and after the LED display switch appear mixed, and preventing LED flickering.

Subsequently, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). Note that the process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for setting change processing of the main control side main process shown in Figure 231, similar to the setting change and setting confirmation processes.

Furthermore, a peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2479) to output the value from the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit. The transmission information storage area is a storage area that temporarily stores the generated transmission commands. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO-type transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission process may be executed after the completion of the main process S2480 or S2481, rather than as a timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses simple clear mode, it is cleared by setting one word. Then, a return instruction (e.g., RETI) is used to switch the register bank (step S2481), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

Unlike other timer interrupt processes, the timer interrupt process for setting change shown in Figure 232 does not execute the random number update process (R_ATART_K). This is because there is no need to update the random numbers generated by the software in the event of a RAM error; however, the random number update process may be executed if desired.

[13. Pachinko machines equipped with light guide plates]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are equipped with a light guide plate that emits light when illuminated on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, they perform the special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, complex effects are possible by using the liquid crystal display device and the light guide plate, for example by superimposing images. Furthermore, since the light guide plate is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it displays a three-dimensional effect in combination with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there are light guide plates that enable stereoscopic viewing using the parallax between the left and right eyes, displaying an even greater sense of three-dimensionality.

However, the use of light guide plates in the display has become monotonous, and there is a need to enhance the entertainment value through new lighting effects. Furthermore, there are light guide plates that can display multiple patterns on a single plate, and there is a demand for even more diverse patterns to create highly engaging displays.

[13-1. Structure]
Figure 233 is an exploded perspective view of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5, showing the center component 2500 and the front display unit 2600 disassembled and viewed from the front. Figure 234 is a front view showing the front display unit with the first symbol illuminated. Figure 235 is a front view showing the front display unit with the second symbol illuminated.

The front display unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center feature 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center feature 2500. The front display unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center feature 2500. The front display unit 2600 includes a transparent, flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the frame of the center feature 2500, and a first pattern board 2611 and a second pattern board 2612 attached to the rear side of the center feature 2500. The first pattern board 2611 has multiple light guide plate LEDs 2613 mounted on the right side of the light guide plate 2610, and the second pattern board 2612 has multiple light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610.

The first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 are positioned perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be projected onto the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, from the front of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first and second pattern boards 2611 and 2612 are visible, making them difficult for the player to see and improving the appearance within the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 is described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see Figure 234) formed by countless uneven first reflective surfaces that reflect light from above toward the front, and a second pattern 2622 (see Figure 235) formed by countless uneven second reflective surfaces that reflect light from the side toward the front. In other words, when the display unit 2600 illuminates the LED 2613 for the light guide plate on the first pattern substrate 2611, it can illuminate and display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610, and when the LED 2614 for the light guide plate on the second pattern substrate 2612 illuminates, it can illuminate and display the second pattern 2622 on the light guide plate 2610. The multiple LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and a highly directional light source (LED with lens) that illuminates a narrow area is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 using any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 has finely formed irregularities that constitute multiple first reflective areas for reflecting the first pattern 2621, and multiple second reflective areas for reflecting the second pattern 2622. When the LEDs 2613 for the light guide plate on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the LEDs 2614 for the light guide plate on the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, allowing for clear viewing of the various decorative elements on the rear unit 3000 and the performance images displayed on the performance display device 1600. The light guide plate 2610 is provided with a transparent region that allows the liquid crystal display device 1600, located on the back side, to be seen even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are illuminated; a matte region with a frosted glass-like finish that does not reflect light irradiated onto the light guide plate 2610; a glitter region with a reflective pattern that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation within the light guide plate 2610; and a moving region with a reflective pattern that changes whether it illuminates depending on the light-emitting location of the light guide plate LED 2613 (i.e., the direction of light propagation within the light guide plate 2610).

As shown in Figure 234, the first pattern 2621, along with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 (as described later), becomes part of the special pattern variation display game's presentation. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The area outside the first pattern 2621 is a transparent area 2621f. The moving areas 2621a and 2621c are illuminated by switching the illumination points of some of the LEDs 2613 for the light guide plate on the first pattern substrate 2611. Therefore, by blinking the LEDs 2613 for the light guide plate, it is possible to make the size of the first pattern 2621 appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in Figure 234, the moving region and glitter region are arranged in a repeating pattern twice, but the number of repetitions is unlimited. By repeating the moving region and glitter region multiple times to constitute the first pattern 2621, complex movements can be represented by the first pattern 2621. Furthermore, in the first pattern 2621 shown in Figure 234, the moving region and glitter region are repeated alternately, but instead of placing glitter regions between the moving regions, moving regions with different characteristics (i.e., the incident light position for the light emitting light in the moving region) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By illuminating the light guide plate LED 2613 in such a way that its emitted color changes, the moving region 2621a can be illuminated in a different color for each section. Furthermore, by sequentially changing the emitted color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → violet → red), the image can be made to appear to move in accordance with the color changes.

As shown in Figure 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which multiple streaks of light extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that the diagonally extending streaks of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. In other words, when one light guide plate LED 2614 is illuminated, a streak of light is emitted, starting from the illuminated LED 2614 on the upper edge of the light guide plate 2610 and extending diagonally downward from the light guide plate 2610.

As the second pattern 2622 moves downwards from the light guide plate 2610, it becomes further away from the LED 2614 for the light guide plate. Therefore, the brightness of the light beam decreases as it moves downwards from the light guide plate 2610. This makes it appear as if the light beam extends backwards as it moves downwards from the light guide plate 2610 when viewed from the front (player side), creating the illusion of three-dimensional light emission and allowing players to enjoy the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate 2610.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflective parts in a way that enables stereoscopic vision through parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on a single ray of light that constitutes the second pattern 2622, by arranging the second reflective part that emits light to focus this ray of light onto the player's retina at different positions on the light guide plate 2610 for the left and right eyes, parallax between the player's left and right eyes can be created, allowing the player to see the second pattern with depth.

As shown in Figure 234, the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment is composed of a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, glitter regions 2621b and 2621d that have a reflective pattern that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a that have a reflective pattern that reflects light from a specific direction of propagation. Therefore, the first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern region (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a stationary pattern region (static pattern) that appears to be stationary.

Furthermore, a single light guide plate 2610 can project both the first pattern 2621 shown in Figure 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in Figure 235, depending on the direction of illumination. Therefore, by irradiating with a single color light from the side (for example, red of a single wavelength or white light containing a mixture of multiple wavelengths) and multiple colored light from above (for example, adjacent LED groups 2614 emitting light at different wavelengths), a single light guide plate 2610 can produce both a seven-color rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) and a single-color pattern.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2610 projects a static image in the matte region 2621e and glitter regions 2621b and 2621d of the first image 2621, and a moving image in the moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a, when illuminated with light from the side. In other words, the light guide plate is illuminated with both a static and a moving image by the first image 2621 when light is illuminated from the side. In this case, the static and moving images from the first image 2621 are projected simultaneously.

Unlike the previous example, the first pattern 2621 is composed of a matte area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 does not necessarily include a moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate effect is performed by a stationary pattern from the first pattern 2621 illuminated by light from the side, and a second pattern 2622 illuminated by light from above. In this case, the stationary pattern from the first pattern 2621 and the moving pattern from the second pattern 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving pattern may be projected after the stationary pattern, or the stationary pattern may be projected after the moving pattern. By projecting stationary and moving patterns at different timings in this way, a variety of effects can be performed. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a stationary pattern, an effect can be created where the character appears to descend. On the other hand, by displaying a background as a stationary pattern and then displaying a character as a moving pattern, an effect can be created where the character appears to move at a specific location.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2610 may be arranged with the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 superimposed. When light is irradiated from the side and above, in the region where the two patterns superimposed on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are mixed, allowing both patterns to be recognized. However, if the first pattern 2621 is a pattern viewed in plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern viewed in stereoscopic view, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in the region where the two patterns are mixed. Therefore, by providing a transparent region 2621f where the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided and the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) is visible through it, and projecting the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the player can easily view the second pattern 2622 in stereoscopic view.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be placed in separate areas without superimposing them. If the first pattern 2621 is a pattern viewed in plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern viewed in stereoscopic view, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in areas where the two patterns are mixed. Therefore, by separating the area where the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is provided from the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and projecting the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily viewed in stereoscopic view by the player.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, the specific configuration of the reflective section will be explained. Figure 236 shows the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (in particular, the arrangement of the reflective section).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with a transparent region 2621f through which the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) is visible, a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, glitter regions 2621b and 2621d with a reflective pattern that reflects transmitted light regardless of the direction of light propagation, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a with a reflective pattern that reflects light in a specific direction of propagation.

Figure 237 shows the structure of the reflective section.

The reflective portion is formed by a recess on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. Through reflection of light at the interface (reflective surface 2651), the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected back to the front side of the light guide plate 2610, causing the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 to illuminate and allowing the player to see the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels within the light guide plate 2610 with a certain degree of spread (e.g., ±30 degrees). The streaks of light constituting the second pattern 2622 are visible because the light traveling in the direction of these streaks is reflected by the reflective portion 2650, which will be described below.

The reflective portion of the moving region 2622a shown in Figure 237(A) has multiple reflective portions 2650 arranged along the ray of light. The size of the reflective portions 2650 is preferably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely small compared to the ray of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but it is shown larger in the figure.

The reflective section 2650 is composed of a reflective surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflective surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is positioned at approximately a 45-degree angle to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular line of the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are also approximately 45 degrees apart. Therefore, light traveling through the interior of the light guide plate 2610 and striking the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610, as shown in Figure 237(B).

Furthermore, light traveling perpendicular to the light beam appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, light traveling parallel to and along the reflective surface 2651, does not strike the reflective surface 2651, is reflected by the reflective section 2650, and does not emit from the surface of the light guide plate 2610. Similarly, light traveling in a direction at an angle (especially an acute angle) to the light beam appearing in the moving region 2622a strikes the reflective surface 2651 in small amounts, the reflective section 2650 reflects only a small amount of light, and only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light of wavelengths that arrive in large quantities is visible to the player's eye, and the image can be displayed using the color of the LED 2614 for the light guide plate that emits light at specific positions.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflective surface 2651, the direction of emission of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source illuminating the light guide plate 2601 in this embodiment emits highly directional light, the reflected light from the reflective part 2650 also reaches the player as a directional beam of light. This can create parallax between the player's left and right eyes, allowing them to see a second image with depth. That is, since the reflective part 2650 that reflects the light reaching the right eye and the reflective part 2650 that reflects the light reaching the left eye are in different positions, the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the image will appear to be recessed. If the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the image will appear to be closer.

The inclined surface 2652, provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651, may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, similar to the reflective surface 2651, or it may be formed at an angle that does not reflect light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface rather than a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light arriving from directions other than the specific direction, without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portion 2660 of the glitter regions 2621b and 2621d shown in Figure 238 is formed by a spherical recess provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610. It reflects light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 and arriving at the reflective portion 2660 from multiple directions (i.e., multiple paths), and emits it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflective portion 2660 of the glitter regions reflects light from multiple light guide plate LEDs 2614, if each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 flashes at different timings, the glitter region 2621b will sparkle. Furthermore, if the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit light of different colors, the glitter region 2621b will sparkle with a mixture of multiple colors. Additionally, if the light guide plate LEDs 2614 flash in different colors, the glitter region 2621b will sparkle with a mixture of multiple colors.

Furthermore, the matte area 2621e does not have a reflective surface and is processed with irregularly shaped irregularities, similar to frosted glass, so that it does not reflect light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 towards the front.

We have described the light guide plates 2610 representing the first and second patterns so far. Next, we will describe an example of a light guide plate representing a different pattern. Figure 239 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the LED and the reflective part in the light guide plate that constitutes the patterns shown in Figures 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in Figure 239 has multiple fine reflecting parts 2670 formed on its back surface that reflect light incident from any of the multiple specific light-receiving parts 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 and emit it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. The multiple specific light-receiving parts 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from multiple positions. Four specific light-receiving parts 2630 are shown: the first specific light-receiving part 2630a, the second specific light-receiving part 2630b, the third specific light-receiving part 2630c, and the fourth specific light-receiving part 2630d, but there are also seven specific light-receiving parts from the first specific light-receiving part 2630a to the seventh specific light-receiving part. This system uses seven repeating specific light-receiving sections 2630 (LED group 2614) to create a rainbow effect by emitting seven colors of light from the light guide plate. The number of specific light-receiving sections should be determined by the type of light-emitting color. The first to seventh specific light-receiving sections 2630a (not shown) are arranged sequentially from left to right along the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the diagram) of the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 (after the seventh specific light-receiving section, the sequence returns to the first specific light-receiving section 2630a).

The reflective portion 2670 extends perpendicular to the straight line connecting it to the corresponding specific light-receiving portion 2630 (the direction in which light incident from the specific light-receiving portion 2630 travels through the light guide plate 2610) and has an interface surface inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2610. The reflective portion 2670 is recessed in a pent-roof-shaped triangle. The reflective portion 2670 reflects light incident from the corresponding specific light-receiving portion 2630 and emits it in a direction approximately perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the reflective portion 2670 reflects light incident from a non-corresponding specific light-receiving portion 2630 and emits it in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 239, light incident from the corresponding specific light-receiving section 2630 is reflected by the reflecting section 2670 toward the front side (perpendicular to the plane of the paper) of the light guide plate 2610, and to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflecting section 2670 appears to be emitting light. In contrast, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 239, light incident from a non-corresponding specific light-receiving section 2630 is reflected by the reflecting section 2670 toward a direction other than the front side of the light guide plate 2610, and to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflecting section 2670 appears not to be emitting light.

In this embodiment, the reflective portion 2670 is shown as having a triangular recess and extending perpendicular to the line connecting it to the corresponding specific light-receiving portion 2630. However, it is not limited to this configuration; any reflective portion that extends perpendicular to the line connecting it to the corresponding specific light-receiving portion 2630 is acceptable.

The multiple reflective sections 2670 correspond to any of the multiple specific light-receiving sections 2630, and include multiple first reflective sections 2670a corresponding to the first specific light-receiving section 2630a, multiple second reflective sections 2670b corresponding to the second specific light-receiving section 2630b, multiple third reflective sections 2670c corresponding to the third specific light-receiving section 2630c, multiple fourth reflective sections 2670d corresponding to the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d, and so on.

Furthermore, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying multiple patterns 2623, each capable of emitting light in a different manner, by having a specific reflective part 2670 among the multiple reflective parts 2670 reflect light forward. The multiple patterns 2623 include patterns 2623a consisting of multiple first reflective parts 2670a, patterns 2623b consisting of multiple second reflective parts 2670b, patterns 2623c consisting of multiple third reflective parts 2670c, patterns 2623d consisting of multiple fourth reflective parts 2670d, and so on.

The patterns are arranged sequentially and in a circular pattern from the center outwards, as shown in Figures 240 to 242.

The second pattern substrate 2612 is a strip-shaped plate extending to the left and right, with LEDs 2614 mounted at positions corresponding to each specific light-receiving section 2630. The multiple LEDs 2614 consist of a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light-receiving section 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light-receiving section 2630b, a third LED group 2614c corresponding to the third specific light-receiving section 2630c, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d, a fifth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the fifth specific light-receiving section (not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light-receiving section (not shown), and a seventh LED group (not shown) corresponding to the seventh specific light-receiving section (not shown). Note that Figure 239 shows the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, while the fifth to seventh LED groups are omitted. Each LED group consists of multiple LEDs 2614 arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612. These LEDs are divided along the left-right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612 and arranged sequentially from left to right (after the seventh LED group, the sequence returns to the beginning, becoming the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614.

Next, the light emission effect by the display unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is illuminated, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light receiving section 2630a. The first reflecting section 2670a reflects the light towards the front of the light guide plate 2610, while the other second reflecting sections 2670b, third reflecting section 2670c, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc., reflect the light in directions other than the front. Therefore, to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, only the first reflecting section 2670a will appear to be illuminated, and the pattern composed of multiple first reflecting sections 2670a can be made to light up.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is illuminated, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light-receiving section 2630b. The second reflecting section 2670b reflects the light towards the front of the light guide plate 2610, while the other first reflecting sections 2670a, third reflecting section 2670c, fourth reflecting section 2670d, etc., reflect the light in directions other than the front. Therefore, to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, only the second reflecting section 2670b appears to be illuminated, allowing the pattern, which is composed of multiple second reflecting sections 2670b, to be illuminated.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is illuminated, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light-receiving section 2630c. The third reflecting section 2670c reflects the light towards the front of the light guide plate 2610, while the other first reflecting sections 2670a, 2670b, and 4th reflecting section 2670d reflect the light in directions other than the front. Therefore, to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, only the third reflecting section 2670c appears illuminated, allowing the pattern, composed of multiple third reflecting sections 2670c, to be illuminated.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is illuminated, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d. The fourth reflecting section 2670d reflects the light towards the front of the light guide plate 2610, while the other first reflecting sections 2670a, 2670b, and 3rd reflecting sections 2670c reflect the light in directions other than the front. Therefore, to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, only the fourth reflecting section 2670d appears illuminated, allowing the pattern, composed of multiple fourth reflecting sections 2670d, to be illuminated.

Similarly, when the fifth through seventh LED groups 2614 are illuminated, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light-receiving section 2630, is reflected back to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the corresponding reflecting section 2670, and is reflected in directions other than the front by the other reflecting sections 2670. To a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, only the corresponding reflecting sections 2670 appear to light up, allowing the patterns composed of the corresponding reflecting sections 2670 to illuminate.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, multiple patterns 2623 can be illuminated individually, and by illuminating multiple patterns in sequence, a dynamic, animation-like light effect can be created. In particular, as shown in Figure 240, in the light guide plate 2610 with superimposed similar patterns, a moving effect can be achieved where the patterns emit light in an animation-like manner, either expanding from the center outwards or contracting from the outside towards the center.

Figure 240 shows an example of a pattern displayed using a moving light guide plate. In the example shown in Figure 240, the size of the pattern changes by switching the position of the group of emitting LEDs over time.

As mentioned above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with first specific light-receiving sections 2630a to seventh specific light-receiving sections 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are arranged corresponding to each of the specific light-receiving sections 2630a to 2630g. In Figure 240, the position corresponding to each specific light-receiving section is indicated by the last letter of the reference numeral.

As shown in Figure 240(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g light up, and light enters from the sixth specific light-receiving section 2630f and the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g, the sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g reflect the light that entered the light guide plate 2610, causing the pattern on which the sixth reflecting section 2670f and the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

Subsequently, the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f light up, and when light enters from the fifth specific light-receiving section 2630e and the sixth specific light-receiving section 2630f, the fifth reflecting section 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f reflect the light that entered the light guide plate 2610, causing the pattern on which the fifth reflecting section 2670e and the sixth reflecting section 2670f are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 240(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e light up, and light enters from the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d and the fifth specific light-receiving section 2630e, the fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e reflect the light that entered the light guide plate 2610, causing the pattern on which the fourth reflecting section 2670d and the fifth reflecting section 2670e are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

Subsequently, the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d light up, and when light enters from the third specific light-receiving section 2630c and the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d, the third reflecting section 2670c and the fourth reflecting section 2670d reflect the light that entered the light guide plate 2610, causing the pattern on which the third reflecting section 2670cd and the fourth reflecting section 2670d are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 240(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c light up, and light enters from the second specific light-receiving section 2630b and the third specific light-receiving section 2630c, the light entering the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c. The pattern on which the second reflecting section 2670b and the third reflecting section 2670c are arranged illuminates, allowing the player to recognize it.

In this way, by changing the position of the LED groups (LED elements) without changing the number of LEDs used for illumination, it is possible to change the size of the image and create a moving effect where the image illuminates from the center outwards. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group (i.e., depending on its position) may emit light in different colors.

Figure 241 shows an example of a pattern displayed using a different moving effect with a light guide plate. In the example shown in Figure 241, the size of the pattern changes by varying the number of emitting LEDs over time.

As mentioned above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with first specific light-receiving sections 2630a to seventh specific light-receiving sections 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are arranged corresponding to each of the specific light-receiving sections 2630a to 2630g. In Figure 241, the position corresponding to each specific light-receiving section is indicated by the last letter of the reference numeral.

As shown in Figure 241(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g light up, and the second reflecting section 2670b to the seventh reflecting section 2670g reflect the light incident from the second specific light receiving section 2630b to the seventh specific light receiving section 2630g. The pattern on which the second reflecting section 2670b to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged lights up, making it recognizable to the player.

Subsequently, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g illuminate, and the third specific light-receiving section 2630c to the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g. The pattern on which the third reflecting section 2670c to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged illuminates, making it recognizable to the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 241(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g light up, and the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d to the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g is reflected by the fourth reflecting section 2670d to the seventh reflecting section 2670g, causing the pattern on which the fourth reflecting section 2670d to the seventh reflecting section 2670g are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

Subsequently, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g light up, and the fifth reflector 2670e to the seventh reflector 2670g reflect the light incident from the fifth specific light-receiving section 2630e to the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g. The pattern on which the fifth reflector 2670e to the seventh reflector 2670g are arranged illuminates, making it recognizable to the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 241(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g light up, and the sixth reflecting part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect the light incident from the sixth specific light receiving part 2630f to the seventh specific light receiving part 2630g, causing the pattern on which the sixth reflecting part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged to light up, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size (illumination range) of the image and create a moving effect where the image appears to shrink as it lights up. At this time, the LED groups may emit light in a single color, or each group (i.e., depending on its position) may emit light in a different color.

Figure 242 shows an example of a pattern displayed using a different moving effect with a light guide plate. In the example shown in Figure 242, the moving effect changes the color of the pattern by changing the light emission color of the LED group over time.

As mentioned above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with first specific light-receiving sections 2630a to seventh specific light-receiving sections 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are arranged corresponding to each of the specific light-receiving sections 2630a to 2630g. The first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In Figure 242, the position corresponding to each specific light-receiving section is indicated by the last letter of the code.

As shown in Figure 242(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up red, and the red light incident from the first specific light-receiving section 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting section 2670a, causing the pattern on which the first reflecting section 2670a is located to emit red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light-receiving section 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting section 2670b, causing the pattern to emit orange light. In addition, the third LED group 2614c lights up yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light-receiving section 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting section 2670c, causing the pattern to emit yellow light. Furthermore, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting section 2670d, causing the pattern to emit green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light-receiving section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting section 2670e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Also, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light-receiving section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting section 2670f, causing the pattern to emit indigo light. Finally, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting section 2670g, causing the pattern to emit purple light.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 242(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the colors of the image change. After further time has passed, as shown in Figure 242(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the colors of the image change again.

In this way, the light-emitting color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds) the color of the image is altered. Since the human eye focuses on images that emit the same color, a moving effect can be achieved by making the image appear to move inward.

Figure 243 shows the arrangement of the pattern on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, multiple LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflective section 2670 that constitutes a single pattern, and these multiple LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display a single pattern. Specifically, seven LED groups are used as repeating units, and the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light-receiving section 2630) is controlled to be repeated. Furthermore, the LEDs emit light with directionality and are configured to illuminate a predetermined angular range from the front of the LEDs.

In other words, as shown in Figure 243, the illumination range of the LEDs emitting light in the same pattern (the light sources that constitute one pattern) is the range indicated by the sector in the figure, and there is an area near the second pattern substrate 2612 where the light from the LEDs does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is placed at a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 where light enters. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (half-width angle θ = ±30 degrees), the area not reached by light from the LED will be an equilateral triangle. Therefore, the pattern is placed at a distance of 0.87 times the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (the spacing between LEDs that emit light in the same pattern) α from the edge of the light guide plate 2610.

In general terms, if α is the length of the repeating unit of the LED group, θ is the illumination angle of the LEDs, and L is the distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 to the pattern, then the following relationship holds.
L = tanθ × α/2

Thus, when the moving image is composed of light from multiple LED groups, the moving image must be positioned at a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610. That is, the area displaying the moving image is smaller than the area displaying the stationary image. If the light guide plate 2610 is the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the moving effect can be achieved using the light guide plate 2610 in an area smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the presentation of a variable display game, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of special symbols that are normally displayed near the edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and to allow the player to recognize the progress of the variable display game. Furthermore, by performing the moving effect in the central part of the liquid crystal display device 1600, which the player focuses on, the excitement created by the moving effect can suppress a decline in the player's enjoyment.

In the previously described embodiment, an example was explained in which the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center feature 2500 of the front unit 2000. In this case, a region within a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 within the inner frame of the center feature 2500 (the opening window visible to the player at the front of the pachinko machine 1) becomes impossible for the moving effect to function. This region is visible to the player. Furthermore, the area where the moving effect is possible becomes smaller, reducing the effectiveness of the effect.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center mechanism 2500, so that the area where moving effects are impossible is hidden by the center mechanism 2500, the area where moving effects are impossible is placed outside the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and moving effects become possible in all (or most) of the inner frame of the center mechanism 2500. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the ends of the light guide plate 2610 will be located away from the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer edge of the center mechanism 2500.

The back unit 3000 is equipped with various decorative elements (decorative unit 3050, movable performance units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.). Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned so that its end is behind these decorative elements, allowing the light-emitting devices (first pattern board 2611, second pattern board 2612) to be positioned behind the decorative elements. This allows the light source boards to be placed in a position invisible to the player, thus ensuring decorative appeal.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs that illuminate the decorative element may be mounted on a single circuit board.

In this way, by attaching the light guide plate 2610 to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main LCD display device 1600 can be made into an area where moving effects can be performed, and the unnaturalness caused by limitations on the moving effect area can be prevented from being noticed by the player.

Figure 244 shows an example of a pattern displayed using a different moving effect with a light guide plate. In the example shown in Figure 244, the moving effect changes the color of the pattern by changing the light emission color of the LED group over time.

As mentioned above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with first specific light-receiving sections 2630a to seventh specific light-receiving sections 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are arranged corresponding to each specific light-receiving section. The first LED group 2614a to seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In Figure 244, the position corresponding to each specific light-receiving section is indicated by the last letter of the code.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up red, and the first reflector 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light-receiving section 2630a, causing the pattern on which the first reflector 2670a is located to emit red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up orange, and the second reflector 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific light-receiving section 2630b, causing the pattern to emit orange light. Also, the third LED group 2614c lights up yellow, and the third reflector 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific light-receiving section 2630c, causing the pattern to emit yellow light. Furthermore, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up green, and the fourth reflector 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light-receiving section 2630d, causing the pattern to emit green light. Furthermore, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light-receiving section 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting section 2670e, causing the pattern to emit blue light. Also, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light-receiving section 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting section 2670f, causing the pattern to emit indigo light. Finally, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the purple light incident from the seventh specific light-receiving section 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting section 2670g, causing the pattern to emit purple light.

Subsequently, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g each light up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the colors of the image change. As more time passes, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g each light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the colors of the image change again.

In this way, the light-emitting color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds) the color of the image is altered. Since the human eye focuses on images that emit the same color, a moving effect can be created where the image glows as if streaks of seven colors are flowing.

While a detailed explanation is omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern of two intersecting rays of light as shown in Figure 235, changing the emission color of each LED group 2614, as explained in Figure 244, allows for a moving effect where the pattern (rays of light) changes color, making the pattern appear as if seven-colored rays of light are flowing. Furthermore, by using left-right parallax to make the rays of light appear to recede or move closer as they move away from the light source, a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

Next, we will explain the stereoscopic and planar images produced by the light guide plate 2610.

Figure 245 illustrates how a pattern viewed from above is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in Figure 245(B), the reflective portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflective surface. Therefore, light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in multiple directions and reaches the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Furthermore, the reflective portion 2660 reflects light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 and arriving at the reflective portion 2660 from multiple directions (i.e., through multiple paths), and emits it to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in Figure 245(A), no parallax occurs between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective portion 2660, and the player perceives the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located on the light guide plate 2610.

Figure 246 shows how a pattern viewed from above is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in Figure 246(B), the reflective portion 2650L, provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610, reflects light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L, while the reflective portion 2650R reflects light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective portions 2650L and 2650R are positioned close together (for example, less than 1 mm apart), as shown in Figure 246(A), the parallax between the left and right eyes of the pattern 2621 formed by the reflective portions 2650L and R is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye formed by the reflective portion 2650L and the pattern for the right eye formed by the reflective portion 2650R are positioned in the same location. Therefore, the player perceives the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern located on the light guide plate 2610.

Figure 247 illustrates how a stereoscopic image is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in Figure 247(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L, provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610, is set at an angle to reflect light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 towards the player's left eye 10L, and the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650R is set at an angle to reflect light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 towards the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in Figure 247(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective sections 2650L and 2650R, and the player perceives the right eye image and left eye image with left-right parallax. In the state shown in Figure 247, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will perceive the pattern 2621, composed of the reflective sections 2650L and R, as a three-dimensional pattern located behind the light guide plate 2610.

Figure 248 illustrates how a stereoscopic image is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in Figure 248(B), the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle to reflect light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L, and the reflective surface 2651 of the reflective section 2650R is set at an angle to reflect light traveling within the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in Figure 248(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflective sections 2650L and 2650R, and the player perceives the right eye image and left eye image with left-right parallax. In the state shown in Figure 248, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player will perceive the pattern 2621, composed of the reflective sections 2650L and R, as a three-dimensional pattern located in front of the light guide plate 2610.

Thus, with the front display unit 2600, multiple different patterns can be illuminated using a single light guide plate 2610. Therefore, there is no need to provide multiple light guide plates for each pattern to display animations, and the thickness of the front display unit 2600 in the front-to-back direction can be made as thin as possible. In addition, because the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center mechanism 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player, making it easier to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable performance unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, and the upper front movable performance unit 3300 can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. This improves the appearance within the game area 5a, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. Furthermore, in addition to the illumination display of the symbols 2623, the movable performances provided by the lower movable performance unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, and the upper front movable performance unit 3300 offer players a variety of performances, keeping them entertained and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, by positioning the light guide plate 2610 in front of the performance unit, decorative elements, and performance display device 1600, multiple translucent patterns appear to float due to the light emitted by multiple reflective parts 2670, creating an animated-like luminous decoration. This can have a strong impact on players accustomed to conventional luminous effects using light guide plates, surprising and entertaining them, and making them think that something good might happen, thereby increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, since only the player seated directly in front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the illuminated symbols displayed by the light guide plate 2610, other players seated further away will have difficulty seeing the illuminated symbols 2623. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that the light guide plate 2610 is being used for special effects, thus preventing other players from paying attention and allowing them to play without feeling self-conscious, thus enhancing their enjoyment of the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is installed within the frame of the center feature 2500, which is mounted in the center of the front-view game area 5a, even when the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated by LEDs 2613 and 2614, the illuminated patterns do not interfere with gameplay within the game area 5a. This allows the player to clearly see the area where the game is actually played, preventing them from becoming distrustful due to difficulty seeing the game and allowing them to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center component 2500, aligning the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center component 2500 makes the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern circuit board 2611 and the second pattern circuit board 2612) difficult for the player to see. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the patterns are illuminated, it creates a strong impact and surprises the player who was unaware of the light guide plate 2610's presence, allowing them to enjoy the illumination of multiple patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is equipped with a display device 1600 capable of displaying performance images, the light guide plate 2610 can illuminate multiple different patterns, and the display device 1600 can display performance images, allowing players to see a combination of these. By appropriately combining them, a variety of performances can be created, making it less likely for players to get bored. The performances provided by the light guide plate 2610 and the display device 1600 can also entertain players, preventing a decline in their interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the display device 1600 is positioned behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display related visual effects to the multiple patterns 2623 illuminated by the light guide plate 2610, giving the illuminated patterns 2623 a sense of depth and three-dimensionality. This allows for visual effects (display effects) that strongly attract the player's attention, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their interest in the game.

Furthermore, LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs. Also, the number of specific light-receiving sections, reflective sections, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the image.

[13-3. Examples of staging]
Next, we will explain an example of a special symbol variation display using a light guide plate for visual effects. Figures 249 to 254 show examples of visual effects using a light guide plate.

In the display shown in Figure 249, the light guide plate 2610 is illuminated so that a predetermined image is projected onto it, and a movement animation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, showing the image moving toward the predetermined image. This display animation may be performed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach animation or pre-announcement animation).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 249(A), the liquid crystal display device 1600 will first display nothing, and the entire screen will turn black (blackout). This blackout will cause the player to focus their attention on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 249(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is lit, projecting the first pattern 2621 onto the light guide plate 2610. This causes the player to focus their attention on the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in Figure 249(C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 249(D), the movement effect may involve moving the image 1611 toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The image 1611 that moves and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Also, the image 1611 that moves and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621, as shown in Figure 249, or a different shape, as shown in Figure 250. Furthermore, the moving image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 may be images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different) or the same text (for example, the character's name), but with the same or different font and color. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is preferable that an image is also displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 on the back of the first pattern 2621 projected onto the light guide plate 2610, as shown in Figure 249(D).

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 249(E), in the movement animation, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first image 2621, and the proportion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 occupied by these moving images 1611, may be changed over time.

During the movement animation, the appearance of the first image 2621 projected onto the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in Figure 251, the color and brightness of the first image 2621 projected onto the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement animation. The color and brightness of the first image 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or in stages (stepwise).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 252, the size of the first image 2621 projected onto the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, multiple light guide plates can be provided, and different sized images can be projected using other light guide plates. Also, since the light guide plate 2610 can project multiple different images by irradiating it with light from different directions, different sized (larger or smaller) first images 2621 may be projected by irradiating it with light from a different direction (e.g., diagonally) than the irradiation direction used to project the initial size of the first image 2621 (horizontal direction).

After the movement animation is performed for a predetermined time, as shown in Figure 249(F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is removed from the light guide plate 2610. Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also turned off, causing the entire screen to black out. This blackout creates a pause to draw the player's attention to the liquid crystal display device 1600 and increase anticipation for the next animation.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 249(G), an image 1612 (for example, a character with a high probability of winning) different from the first image 2621 or the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 249(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, increasing the size of the character image 1612 increases the player's expectation of winning, while decreasing its size decreases it. The color and expression of the character image 1612 may also be changed. Additionally, the character image 1612 should be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first image 2621. Furthermore, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see Figure 235).

Furthermore, this character image may be projected onto the light guide plate 2610. As mentioned above, the light guide plate 2610 can project multiple different images by irradiating it with light from different directions. Therefore, the character image may be projected by irradiating it with light from a direction different from the direction used to project the first image 2621 (horizontal direction) (for example, an oblique direction). Alternatively, multiple light guide plates may be provided, and character images may be projected onto the other light guide plates. By projecting character images of different sizes and expressions onto light guide plates other than the light guide plate 2610, it becomes possible to create a display with a sense of depth, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600.

The image movement animation described above, where the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, involves the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moving after the first pattern 2621 is displayed. However, the first pattern 2621 may be displayed after the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 has started moving. Specifically, as shown in Figure 253, after a blackout (Figure 253(A)), and as shown in Figure 253(B), before the first pattern 2621 is displayed, the image movement animation begins by displaying an image moving toward the position where the first pattern 2621 will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Then, as shown in Figure 253(C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is lit, and the first pattern 2621 is projected onto the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in Figure 253(D), the image movement animation, where the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, continues.

Thus, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is displayed (the time of the light guide plate effect) and the time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) may be such that the light guide plate effect for displaying the first pattern 2621 starts before or after the effect for moving the image 1611. Furthermore, the time of the light guide plate effect for displaying the first pattern 2621 may be longer or shorter than the time during which the image 1611 moves.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 254, the game may be enhanced by switching between moving images (where the image converges) and static images (where the image appears stationary).

In the light guide plate effect shown in Figure 254, the appearance of a moving image indicates a high expectation of a jackpot, while the appearance of only a stationary image indicates a low expectation of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in Figure 254(A), a stationary image 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in Figure 254(B), a moving image 1611 moving toward the displayed stationary image 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, the stationary image 2621 is switched to a moving image, as shown in Figure 254(C). In addition, as shown in Figure 254(D), a moving image 1611 may be moved toward the first image 2621 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in Figure 254(D).

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 254(E), as the variable display game progresses, a still image 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and as shown in Figure 254(F), a movement effect is performed by displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed still image 2621 on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in Figure 254(G), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 moves toward the image 1613 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Afterward, as shown in Figure 254(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still image 2621 to a moving image.

In the presentation shown in Figure 254, when a specific display presentation (for example, a specific reach presentation, a pseudo-consecutive presentation, or a specific pre-announcement presentation) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the specific image 1611 displayed in the specific display presentation is performed in conjunction with the moving presentation of the first symbol 2621. In other cases, the first symbol does not need to perform a moving presentation.

Thus, in the variable display game shown in Figure 254, the light guide plate 2610 selectively displays both static and moving patterns. This allows players to anticipate the development of the variable display game, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain an example of a special symbol variation display game that combines the use of a light guide plate with effects using moving parts.

Figures 255 and 256 show examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the presentation shown in Figure 255, the image displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 that appears in front of the liquid crystal display device 1600 form a single image. Specifically, as shown in Figure 255(A), in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, a part of the movable body 3601 repeatedly appears and disappears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in short cycles, increasing the player's expectation of a jackpot. Then, as shown in Figure 255(B), the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 255(C), a movement effect is performed in which the pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by the illumination of the light guide plate 2610, and the image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Furthermore, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which images are moved toward the pattern 2621 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in Figure 255(D).

The movable body 3601 may be illuminated at the start of this movement animation, or during the movement animation. The illumination pattern (illumination color and timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as, or different from, that of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively displaying either the animation without the movable body 3601 shown in Figure 249 or the animation with the movable body 3601 shown in Figure 255, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the development of the variable display game, resulting in a more engaging pachinko machine.

In the example described above, the movable body 3601 was displayed in place of the image that the images converged on. However, a single character may also be represented by the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the movable body 3601 represents the torso and the light guide plate 2610 represents the face, the facial expression can be changed by switching the image displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effects provided by the liquid crystal display device 1600, a variety of effects can be realized using the light guide plate 2610.

In the presentation shown in Figure 256, a light guide plate 2610 is used as a visual effect to suggest the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in Figure 256(A), as the variable display game progresses, the light guide plate 2610 emits light to display the pattern 2621, and as shown in Figure 256(B), a movement effect is performed by displaying an image 1611 moving toward the pattern displayed by the light guide plate 2610 on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Alternatively, as the variable display game progresses, a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 moves toward the first pattern 2621 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, as shown in Figure 256(C). Then, as shown in Figure 256(D), the movable body 3601 appears from the top of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position where it overlaps with the pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 256(E), as the variable display game progresses, the image 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and as shown in Figure 256(F), a movement effect is performed by displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed image 1613 on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Alternatively, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in Figure 256(G), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 moves toward the image 1613 from multiple locations (i.e., multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Afterward, as shown in Figure 256(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without any movable objects appearing.

Thus, in the effect shown in Figure 256, a light guide plate can be used to create an effect that suggests the appearance of a movable object.

[14. Pachinko machine using a main control MPU with serial communication capabilities]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In conventional pachinko machines, the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 within the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port where one signal is transmitted on a single signal line, or an 8-bit bus. This meant that it was possible to read data output from the main control MPU 1311 or to input malicious signals to the main control MPU 1311 to perform fraudulent activities. Therefore, a configuration that makes it difficult to detect the input/output signals of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside is required. However, using a serial communication function that transmits data continuously at predetermined timings on a single signal line makes it difficult to read or input data in accordance with the timing of that serial communication line.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when inspection agencies inspect pachinko machines. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric mechanism, in order to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric mechanism, the signal input to the solenoid drive driver (transistor) (for example, a 5V on/off signal) was branched and used as a test signal. If the serial signal transmitted within the main control board 1310 is output as a test signal, the inspection agency will need equipment to analyze the serial signal, making it difficult to use the serial signal as a test signal. For this reason, in pachinko machines that transmit signals via serial communication within the main control board 1310, ingenuity is required in outputting the test signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a single serial signal is input to two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, thereby generating a test signal whose level changes at the same timing as the solenoid drive signal. By configuring the output transistor of a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit as an open-collector (or open-drain) transistor, it is possible to generate two synchronized signals with different voltage levels by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps required to detect input via serial communication, thereby lowering the software load. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine, a portion of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311 are input to a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, while another portion is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. Therefore, careful consideration is needed regarding which port accepts the input signals. For example, signals whose input level needs to be determined immediately after power-on should not be input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, but rather directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. This is because the signal level input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before interrupt processing is executed, allowing for signal level detection even outside of timer interrupt processing, such as immediately after power-on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it may not be necessary to use extended I/O using chip select. The signal level input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be acquired bit by bit at each clock cycle, allowing for real-time detection of the signal level without waiting for serial signal reception.

Figure 257 is a block diagram of the synchronous serial interface surrounding the main control board 1310, Figure 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and Figure 259 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310. In Figures 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate parallel signal transmission lines, and thin lines indicate serial signal transmission lines.

The main control MPU 1311 in this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (such as the peripheral control board 1510 and the dispensing control board 951), a synchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with interface circuits within the main control board 1310, and a general-purpose port that outputs control signals from other devices (such as solenoids) and receives signals output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has multiple transmit/receive ports and multiple transmit ports. The communication partners for the transmit/receive ports are selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmit/receive port consists of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a receive signal input terminal (SERRX), chip select output terminals (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmit port consists of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in Figure 257, one parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmit/receive port. The number of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmit/receive port is not limited to those shown in the figure.

Furthermore, by connecting multiple serial-to-parallel conversion circuits, such as the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, without using the chip select terminal, it is possible to connect even more serial-to-parallel conversion circuits. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits will not increase.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, connected to the transmit/receive port, receives parallel data when CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) is at a level of 0, and outputs the data from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing after CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (start prize entry, large prize entry count switch, normal prize entry, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and photosensors, and primarily detects game balls flowing down the game area 5a. While the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 has a 16-bit input port configuration, it may also be configured as a 16-bit system by connecting an integrated circuit with 8-bit input ports in parallel.

Specifically, the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR/LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. Therefore, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is at level 0, the output signal of the game ball detection switch is acquired. After the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 acquires the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, allowing data from the ball detection sensor to be acquired at any desired timing.

Furthermore, serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, connected to the transmit/receive ports, both output signals to illuminate LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display unit 1317). The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. Serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the input serial data according to a predetermined clock signal when the chip select (CS) signal is at level 0, and output a signal from the parallel port when the chip select signal rises to 1. The output level from the parallel port is latched within serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 and maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 258, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 output signals at predetermined timings to dynamically illuminate the LED. While the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have 16-bit output ports, a 16-bit configuration may also be achieved by connecting integrated circuits with 8-bit output ports in parallel.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing when it outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), setting the display digit of the 7-segment LED on the base display unit 1317. It then outputs a segment signal at the timing when it outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1), illuminating the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED with the anode side being the common terminal is used in the base display 1317. When the LED is lit, a drive current flows from the anode-side common terminal to the cathode-side segment terminal. However, since the same integrated circuit is used in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuits in each conversion circuit 1342 and 1343 (the polarity of the output transistor of the driver circuit) is the same. Therefore, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 to supply current to the anode-side common terminal. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has the function of outputting a drive current to light up the LED, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has the function of drawing in a drive current to light up the LED.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may each utilize an integrated circuit having only parallel-to-serial conversion functionality and an integrated circuit having only serial-to-parallel conversion functionality, respectively. Alternatively, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting serial and parallel signals may be used, switching between parallel-to-serial conversion and serial-to-parallel conversion functions.

Furthermore, two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmit port of the main control MPU 1311. Similar to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 receive input serial data according to a predetermined clock signal when the chip select (CS) is at level 0, and output it from the parallel port when CS rises to 1. The output of the parallel port is equipped with a driver transistor, which generates an output signal by switching the voltage applied to it. In other words, various voltage output signals can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

External terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0-PA7) of channel A of serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (e.g., security signals, ball dispensing signals, etc.) are output. Various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0-PB7) of channel B of serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for these solenoids are output. Test terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0-PB7) of channel B of serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, and signals output from the test terminal 1348 (e.g., special electric mechanism release signals, normal electric mechanism release signals, etc.) are output. Nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The main control MPU 1311's transmission port can only control one channel (16 bits), and since the same branched signal, including the chip select, is input to both the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a pair of parallel signals that change at the same timing from a single serial signal. In other words, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the test signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 change at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the test terminal 1348. Furthermore, +12V is applied to serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12V, and +5V is applied to serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V test signal. By using two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits with different applied voltages in this way, synchronized signals with different voltage levels can be generated.

Of the outputs from serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal, which carries a relatively large current, should be thicker, while the pattern on the output side of the test signal, which carries a relatively small current, may be thinner. Alternatively, instead of thickening the pattern, the resistance of the pattern can be reduced, and the effective cross-sectional area can be increased by forming patterns on both the front and back surfaces, or by forming inner layer patterns.

Furthermore, since the two serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit increases, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit remains undisturbed, and the output signal is unaffected. In other words, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output a test signal with the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal, regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345, thus contributing to accurate testing.

Next, with reference to Figure 259, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in Figure 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around it. Furthermore, a test circuit layout area is provided on the main control board 1310, and this area includes a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and a test terminal 1348. The circuit components (serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, test terminal 1348, etc.) located in the test circuit layout area are only installed in pachinko machines 1 that undergo inspection by an inspection agency, and are not installed in commercially available pachinko machines 1 (although patterns for component installation are provided). In other words, commercially available pachinko machines 1 have a connector that relays the signal output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, but they do not have a test terminal 1348 that relays the test signal output from the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, commercially available pachinko machines (1) are configured so that the inspection signal cannot be detected by fraudulent individuals and used for fraudulent activities.

As mentioned above, in commercially available pachinko machines 1, no components are mounted in the test circuit layout area, but a printed circuit pattern (for example, a data bus connected to interface circuit 1347) is provided. Therefore, since noise can be induced in the data bus and cause malfunctions, it is advisable to reduce the impact of noise by pulling up the wiring (printed circuit pattern) in the test circuit layout area to the power supply (+5V) (or pulling it down to GND) via a resistor.

Furthermore, from the perspective of preventing illegal modifications, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not use surface-mount components. However, since the circuit components located in the inspection circuit layout area are not mounted in commercially available pachinko machines 1, surface-mount components can be used. Therefore, the components in the inspection circuit can be miniaturized, the inspection circuit layout area can be reduced, and consequently, the main control board 1310 can be miniaturized. Similarly, from the perspective of preventing illegal modifications, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not have components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310. However, since the circuit components located in the inspection circuit layout area are not mounted in commercially available pachinko machines 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the test terminal 1348, which are components of the test circuit, may be provided on a separate board located near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on pachinko machines 1 that undergo testing by a testing organization, and is not mounted on commercially available pachinko machines 1. In this case as well, commercially available pachinko machines 1 do not output test signals.

In this way, by consolidating the circuit components used for inspecting the pachinko machine 1 into the inspection circuit layout area, it becomes easier to detect missing components in commercially available pachinko machines 1 and to detect the installation of additional components for fraudulent purposes. Furthermore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be placed near the inspection terminal 1348, enabling the construction of a main control board 1310 with high noise immunity.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 259, it is preferable to orient the circuit components placed in the test circuit layout area differently from similar circuit components placed elsewhere on the main control board 1310 (for example, rotated 180 degrees as shown). By arranging the circuit components in the test circuit layout area and elsewhere on the main control board 1310 in different orientations, it becomes easy to distinguish between components used for normal gameplay and components used for testing. This prevents mis-mounting, such as mistakenly placing components in the test circuit layout area, during the manufacturing process of commercially available pachinko machines 1.

Furthermore, while the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310, for example, by silk-screen printing, it is preferable to group the symbols and numbers of the circuit components placed in the test circuit layout area with symbols and numbers that follow those of the circuit components used for game control. For example, integrated circuits for game control would be designated IC1 to IC11, and integrated circuits placed in the test circuit layout area would be designated with symbols starting from IC12. This ensures that the game control circuit components implemented in commercially available pachinko machines 1 have consistent symbols and numbers, simplifying the checks performed after the circuit components are mounted on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, by using a separate system for the symbols and numbers of the test terminals from those of the connectors connected to the game control components, it becomes easy to distinguish between the connectors connected to the game control components and the test terminals, preventing miswiring and incorrect cable connections. In particular, using the same symbols and numbers for the test terminals as the corresponding connectors on the other test device makes cable connections during testing convenient and reduces connection errors.

Furthermore, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused ports. It is preferable to arrange these unused ports so that they are clustered together on adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are consecutive, it is preferable to arrange the terminals of the unused ports in a clustered position. By clustering the unused terminals, the areas on the main control board 1310 where no printed patterns are provided are concentrated, making it easier to detect missing components and the unauthorized installation of additional components.

Furthermore, the terminals of the unused ports are positioned close to connectors where relatively large currents flow (for example, to which solenoids are connected). That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are located on the left and right (top and bottom in the diagram) sides of the side with the unused port terminals. Therefore, when adding additional functions to the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 can be easily configured without having to run long traces.

As explained above, by using serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, the wiring of the data bus can be reduced, making it easier to detect the installation of unauthorized additional components. Specifically, the numerous data buses connected to multiple parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and the control lines, including the signal lines, are reduced to just a few lines. This results in a cleaner circuit pattern compared to the complex wiring of the numerous data buses. Furthermore, the shorter data line routing distance allows for the construction of a main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise.

Furthermore, because the number of data lines is reduced, the circuit can be positioned without being affected by the routing of data lines, allowing the I/O ICs (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) to be placed near the main control MPU 1311.

Furthermore, by reducing the number of circuit patterns, the ground pattern can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, resulting in a main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise.

Figure 260 shows the port arrangement in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port at address D2 (chip select SERS0) is the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343. As shown in Figure 258, output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are connected to the common side (anode terminal of the LED) of the function display unit 1400, and output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side (anode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display unit 1317. Output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Furthermore, the parallel output port of address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342. As shown in Figure 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of channel A are connected to the segment side (LED cathode terminals) of the function display unit 1400, and the output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B are connected to the segment side (7-segment LED cathode terminals) of the base display unit 1317.

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port that is turned ON at a fixed interval (for example, every 4ms interrupt). Focusing on the output ports of channel A, the timer interrupt process turns only PA0 ON, the next timer interrupt process (4ms later) turns only PA1 ON, ..., the next timer interrupt process (4ms later) turns only PA7 ON, and this is repeated at a fixed interval (4ms x number of ports). In other words, if the 8 ports are switched repeatedly, each port will be turned ON every 32ms. Alternatively, the output ports PA0-PA3 and PA4-PA7 of channel A can be grouped together, and focusing on the output ports of channel A, the timer interrupt process can turn only PA0 and PA4 ON, the next timer interrupt process (4ms later) turns only PA1 and PA5 ON, ..., the next timer interrupt process (4ms later) turns only PA3 and PA7 ON, and this is repeated at a fixed interval (4ms x number of ports). By using serial communication for this periodic operation, it becomes difficult to detect the timing of the main control MPU 1311's operation.

Furthermore, the parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input as serial signals to the main control MPU 1311 and read as the signal at address D5.

Furthermore, the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 on the main control MPU 1311 receive inputs for operation information of the setting key 971, operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, a power outage warning signal, a main pay ACK signal, and a detection signal for the frame open detection switch. These signals require real-time monitoring (at the time requested by the program) or monitoring outside of timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power-on), and are therefore directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without going through a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit.

Furthermore, the general-purpose input/output ports (for both input and output) IOP0 to IOP3 on the main control MPU 1311 receive detection signals from the radio wave detection sensor, vibration detection sensor, magnetic detection switch, and proximity error switch. These signals are output when an abnormality (such as fraudulent activity or malfunction) occurs in the pachinko machine 1. Because real-time monitoring (at the time requested by the program) is required, these signals are directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without going through a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit. These sensor and switch detection signals also trigger an alert on the main LCD display 1600 and via audio. This alert prompts hall staff to check the status of the pachinko machine, effectively halting gameplay. If this alert is a false alarm, it can cause discomfort to players, so it is necessary to suppress false detections. Therefore, it is advisable to input these signals to the general-purpose input/output ports and detect them multiple times in a short period (so-called double reading) to suppress false detections due to noise.

This double-reading process is performed within a single timer interrupt by executing read commands consecutively to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or by executing multiple read commands with several commands in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or by executing multiple read commands with several clock cycles of wait in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I/O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, while continuously determining the port level via a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit only allows detection at intervals of tens of microseconds, continuously determining the general-purpose port level allows detection at intervals of less than one microsecond, enabling signal level detection at short periods.

Thus, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, signals from various switches and sensors requiring real-time processing can be directly input to the general-purpose input and output ports without using extended I/O via chip select. Since the signal level input to the general-purpose input/output port (combined input/output) is captured bit by bit at each clock cycle, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the serial signal to be received.

Although the general-purpose input/output ports (for both input and output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not currently used, some of the signals input via the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 may be input to these ports.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the main control MPU 1311 may also have a general-purpose output port.

Furthermore, if a general-purpose input port is an unused terminal, it is advisable to pull it up to 5V via a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from becoming an intermediate potential and reduce the influence of noise induced in the power line. Similarly, if a general-purpose output port is an unused terminal, it may be left open, but it is advisable to pull it up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent level changes in the output port from becoming noise.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for game control is output via a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the ball entry detection signal is consolidated into a single port and input, making it easier to handle in the game control program.

Furthermore, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, signals that need to be detected multiple times in a short period (so-called double reading) are input to the general-purpose port, while signals that do not need to be read twice are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port allows for real-time monitoring of signal levels, the signal level can be detected multiple times in a short period, eliminating the influence of noise and enabling accurate determination. If a general-purpose input port is available, it may be assigned to the general-purpose port so that signals that do not need to be read twice are input to it.

While general-purpose input ports can be assigned signals input to the main control MPU 1311, general-purpose input/output ports (combined input/output) can be assigned signals input to the main control MPU 1311 and signals output from the main control MPU 1311. Therefore, general-purpose input/output ports offer greater versatility in handling specification changes. For this reason, it is preferable to use general-purpose input/output ports (combined input/output) as backups for adding new functions, and to prioritize the assignment of general-purpose input ports.

Next, Figure 261 will be used to explain the timing of data output and acquisition using synchronous serial signals.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the base indicator 1317. In the diagram, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal for the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the diagram, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B-channel port of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343, it normally maintains a value of 1 (HIGH) during the data acquisition timing of PB7 to PB0. However, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR/LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. Data is acquired from PA0 to PB7 when this signal is 0 (LOW). Therefore, at one of the timings of PB7 to PB0, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) to acquire data from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), it outputs serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) to prevent the reception of new data.

Thus, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the transmission signal of an available output port is used as the trigger for acquiring the output of the game ball detection sensor, allowing data from the ball detection sensor to be acquired at any desired timing.

Next, using Figures 262 and 263, we will describe another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be used commonly across multiple models without redesign. However, the input/output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input/output interfaces of the main control board 1310, which differ depending on the model, are mounted on a separate board (input/output board 1351), while the peripherals of the main control MPU 1311, which are common to all models, are mounted on the main control board 1310. By making the main control board 1310 common across multiple models—that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, and component placement the same—the main control board 1310, whose performance (e.g., noise immunity) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable, can be used commonly across multiple models without redesign.

Furthermore, when the input/output interface of the main control board 1310 is implemented on a separate input/output board 1351, the question arises as to where to divide the circuit. One method is to divide it using serial signal lines, and the second is to divide it using parallel signals converted from the serial signals. The former is preferable because it reduces the number of wires between boards compared to the latter. Also, even if the serial signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, making it unclear when and which data is being transmitted. Moreover, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and this synchronization clock may differ from and can be changed from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311. Therefore, it is difficult to infer the data rate from the outside, and even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data. For this reason, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 using serial signal lines.

As shown in Figure 262, an input/output board 1351 is provided attached to the main control board 1310, and both the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 are mounted inside the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and is designed to be sealed so that it cannot be opened without damage once closed, thus housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351. The input/output board 1351 is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311 and parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by serial communication lines, allowing for connection between boards with fewer wires than using a parallel bus or general-purpose ports. Serial signal lines may be connected by wires or by board-to-board connectors.

Furthermore, by using serial communication between boards, even if the signals are intercepted, data analysis becomes difficult, thus reducing the possibility of fraudsters discovering the contents of the transmitted data. Additionally, by separating the input/output board 1351, which inputs and outputs signals for game control, from the main control board 1310, and setting the input/output signals that vary depending on the machine model on the input/output board 1351, the number of machines to which the system can be applied without modifying the main control board 1310 increases, improving the versatility of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351 within a single main control board box 1320, the serial communication signal lines can be shortened.

Furthermore, when using the main control board 1310 in other models, only the input/output board 1351 needs to be configured. Since the relationship between the connector on the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model, the design of pachinko machines becomes easier, and the main control board 1310, which has been evaluated for its performance (e.g., noise immunity) and has stable design quality, can be used. Also, if the size of the input/output board 1351 and the position of the mounting holes are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be reused without redesigning it. Moreover, noise countermeasures that vary from model to model can be implemented on the input/output board 1351, rather than on the main control board 1310.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, which output the drive signal for the base display unit 1317, should be placed on the main control board 1310. If the base display unit 1317 is placed on the input/output board 1351, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 should be placed on the input/output board 1351, and the signal for driving the function display unit 1400 should be output from the input/output board 1351.

Furthermore, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, which generates the test signals, is preferably located on the main control board 1310. That is, the test circuit area and test terminals 1348 are preferably located on the main control board 1310. This is because, since a portion of the signals output from the test terminals 1348 are output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, placing the test terminals 1348 on the input/output board 1351 would increase the number of connection lines between the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351.

Alternatively, as shown in Figure 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed inside the main control board box 1320, and the input/output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320.

In the configuration shown in Figure 263, the input/output board 1351 is located outside the main control board box 1320. Therefore, even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes, it can be used in common. Furthermore, since the input/output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the flexibility of board placement is improved. Also, by providing the main control board box 1320 (which houses the main control board 1310) and the input/output board box 1350 (which houses the input/output board 1351) as separate units, each board box can be made smaller, allowing for greater flexibility in board placement. Additionally, while the main control board 1310, which includes a base indicator 1317, an LED for displaying error codes, and a setting key 971, needs to be visible from the back of the pachinko machine 1, the input/output board 1351 does not need to be visible from the back of the pachinko machine 1, thus allowing for greater flexibility in board placement. In this way, the configuration shown in Figure 263 improves design flexibility.

In the configuration shown in Figure 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output outside the main control board box 1320. In addition to the serial signal, the main control MPU 1311 also outputs data via a data bus. In pachinko machines, it is desirable not to output the data bus from the main control MPU 1311 outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent fraudsters from detecting the machine's operation. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output outside the main control board box 1320, the likelihood of fraudsters detecting the machine's operation is low. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311, and the data rate is constant, making it easy to infer the data rate from the outside, and as a result, the signals transmitted on the data bus may be acquired. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the serial signal clock, and the speed of this synchronization clock may differ from and can be changed from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311. Therefore, it is difficult to infer the data rate from an external source, and even if the serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to determine the content of the transmitted data.

The above describes an example where an input/output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, and input/output functions for machine-dependent signals are mounted on the input/output board 1351. However, if there are other parts that can be placed outside the main control board 1310 without reducing immunity to fraud or noise, they may also be mounted on the input/output board 1351. For example, the output of signals requiring drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, the output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and the input of signals from various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) are functions that may be mounted on the input/output board 1351. Furthermore, communication with the payout control board 951, output of signals from the external terminal board 784, power outage detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), and output to the base display unit 1317 are functions that are better mounted on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input/output board 1351 should have a dummy signal (0V or 5V) input to an unused input terminal, or a dummy resistor connected to an unused output terminal. This is because if nothing is connected to the unused terminal, noise may be introduced, causing the circuit to malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudulent perpetrator attempts to acquire are transmitted via a parallel bus or general-purpose port, while other signals are transmitted via serial signals, analyzing the serial signals becomes difficult. Therefore, the fraudulent perpetrator would need to acquire signals from multiple locations, including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351, thus enhancing the deterrent against fraud.

[15. Slot Machines]
Having explained the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of a pachinko machine, we will now explain the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of a slot machine (slot machine). While a general overview of a pachinko machine was shown in Figure 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM in the same way as in the case of the slot machine 4000, which will be explained later.

[15-1. Structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and Figure 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in Figures 264 and 265, the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment has various devices installed inside a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front. A front panel 4200 is provided on the front of the casing 4100, allowing it to open and close in a single-opening manner. The upper part of the front panel 4200 is equipped with an image display unit 4500 that displays visual effects and information according to the progress of the game, and speakers for sound effects. The image display unit 4500 is, for example, composed of a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to game-related visual effects. The various visual effects and history information displays on the image display unit 4500 are controlled by a visual effect control board 4700. In other words, the image display unit 4500 serves as a visual effect display means capable of displaying effects according to the progress of the game, and the visual effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of controlling the display of the visual effect display means.

The front panel 4200 has a central section that prevents rear visibility and features decorative patterns. A (e.g., transparent) pattern display window 4401 is formed in the center of the front panel, allowing rear visibility. The front panel may also be configured as a display device. When no image is displayed in the pattern display window 4401, the reels 4301 are visible, and images that enhance the gameplay are primarily displayed around the pattern display window 4401. In this case, it is also possible to display images that enhance the gameplay in the pattern display window 4401.

The symbols displayed by the rotation of the reels 4301, which are arranged inside the casing, can be seen through the symbol display window 4401 (window section). The reels 4301 consist of three cylindrical reels: a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, arranged horizontally. Multiple symbols are arranged according to a predetermined pattern by wrapping strip-shaped sheets, each with multiple symbols drawn on it, around the outer periphery of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is equipped with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c (see Figure 266), which are stepping motors, respectively, allowing each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c to be driven and stopped independently. In other words, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as the drive source for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled using a two-phase excitation method, similar to the payout motor 839 of the aforementioned pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing both the driving torque and the resting torque. This makes it possible to use smaller motors as the drive source, reducing costs.

In the following, reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as needed. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c will be referred to as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel will be referred to as the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Furthermore, by rotating the reel 4301 with the reel drive motor 4341, multiple types of symbols visible through the symbol display window 4401 are made to change in a cyclical manner, for example, from top to bottom (variable display). On the other hand, when the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, three) for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, i.e., a total of nine symbols (3 x 3), are visible through the symbol display window 4401. In other words, the effective display areas of reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for displaying the game's stopping result are visible through the symbol display window 4401.

For the 3x3 pattern matrix visible from the pattern display window 4401, predetermined lines that can be activated are set. In this embodiment, the lines that cross the middle patterns of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (middle lines), the lines that diagonally cross each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the bottom of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b and from the top of the right reel 4301c (upward-sloping lines), and the lines that diagonally cross each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the top of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b and from the bottom of the right reel 4301c (downward-sloping lines) are the lines that can be activated. Then, when a player inserts tokens or enters credits (hereinafter referred to as "betting operations"), the active lines are activated, and the success or failure of a winning combination (winning hand) is determined based on the combination of symbols (results) formed on these active lines.

When a win is achieved, it may occur not only when three of the specified symbols line up on an active payline, but also when three of the specified symbols appear to line up on another line. Such lines include the lines that cross the upper symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (upper lines). Furthermore, symbols may appear to line up on virtual lines that cross the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (lower lines), or on virtual lines that cross the front portion (visible area) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Hereinafter, the active paylines (middle, upward-right, and downward-right lines), the lines where symbols can appear to align upon winning (upper lines), and other lines (lower lines, etc.) will be collectively referred to as symbol stopping lines (symbol alignment lines).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-right, and downward-right lines are designated as active lines. A predetermined number of these lines are activated according to the number of bets. The game then determines whether a winning combination (winning hand) has been achieved or not based on the symbol combinations formed on these active lines. For example, with a bet of 1, the middle line is an active line; with a bet of 2, the upper and lower lines are active in addition to the middle line; and with a bet of 3, the upward-right and downward-right lines are active in addition to the upper, middle, and lower lines. Alternatively, all lines may be activated regardless of the bet (even if the bet is 1 or 2), or a line may be reserved for 3-coin bets only.

Around the pattern display window 4401 (for example, below it), there is a payout display LED 4562 that shows the number of medals dispensed by the game. A credit display that shows the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000, and a count display that shows the remaining number of games during a special prize round, may also be provided.

Below the pattern display window 4401, a step is formed that protrudes forward. The upper surface of this step forms an operating section 4202 that slopes downward toward the front. The operating section 4202 includes a coin slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206, which serve as game progression controls.

The coin slot 4203 is located on the right side of the slot machine 4000 when viewed from the front of the operating unit 4202. The game can be played when a player inserts coins into the coin slot 4203 and places a bet. A coin insertion sensor 4207b is provided along the path through which the inserted coins pass, and the number of inserted coins is counted based on the detection information from the coin insertion sensor 4207b.

The single-coin insertion button 4205 and the max-bet button 4206 are located on the left side of the operating unit 4202 when viewed from the front of the slot machine 4000. The single-coin insertion button 4205 allows for the insertion of one coin at a time from the credits with a single press. The max-bet button 4206 allows for the input of up to the maximum bet amount (e.g., 3 coins) from the credits with a single press; however, if the number of credits is less than the maximum bet amount, the number of credits will be entered as the bet amount.

Below the control unit 4202 are the payout button 4209, start lever 4210, return button 4208, reel stop button 4211, key device 4215, etc. The payout button 4209 is used to issue a command to return medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals entered as bets via the single-coin insertion button 4205, the max-bet button 4206 (betting medals), or medals dispensed upon winning and stored as credits (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. Furthermore, if medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on a replay win, or if the number of medals exceeds a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, they are also returned to the medal tray 4201 via the medal selector 4207.

The start lever 4210 is an operating lever for starting a game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front panel 4200 or when resetting an error (e.g., a hopper error) in the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return tokens inserted through the token slot 4203 and jammed inside the token selector 4207 to the token tray 4201.

The reel stop buttons 4211 consist of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, each of which is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Their purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c in accordance with the stop operation.

Furthermore, below the area where these control buttons are located, a decorative panel (decorative panel) is provided, forming the lower region of the front panel 4200. Below the decorative panel, at the very bottom of the front panel 4200, are a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal dispensing outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see Figure 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is located at the top of the interior of the enclosure. A payout ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The payout ratio indicator 1317 is configured, for example, using a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. Alternatively, the payout ratio indicator 1317 may be configured using a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The payout ratio indicator 1317 may not be mounted on the main board 4600, but instead be shared with other indicators mounted on the front of the slot machine 4000 (for example, the payout quantity indicator LED 4562 or the image display unit 4500), and the payout ratio may be displayed on the payout quantity indicator LED 4562 or the image display unit 4500.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the payout ratio is displayed on the payout ratio indicator 1317. It is advisable to indicate (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the casing 4100 that this is a switch for operating the payout ratio display. While it is desirable to place the display switch 1318 near the payout ratio indicator 1317, it may be placed on other circuit boards (e.g., the performance control board 4700, power supply unit 4112), the casing 4100, or the front panel 4200, as long as it is in an easily accessible location. Furthermore, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also function as a RAM clear switch. By placing the display switch 1318 in a location inaccessible to the player, accidental operation can be prevented.

Furthermore, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided approximately in the center of the casing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are mounted on it. Additionally, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting signals from the main board 4600 to external devices is provided inside the casing of the slot machine 4000.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device (hopper) 4110 is installed at the bottom of the machine's interior. The medal dispensing device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207. When a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the active line and a win is achieved, the device dispenses the corresponding number of medals (dispensed medals) or any medals exceeding the credit limit due to the win into the medal tray 4201. The credit-value medals are dispensed into the medal tray 4201 by the medal dispensing device 4110 when the refund button 4209 is operated. To the right of the medal dispensing device 4110, an overflow tank is provided to store medals overflowing from the device and to guide the incoming medals to the medal collection mechanism on the island where the slot machine 4000 is installed.

[15-2. Internal Structure of a Slot Machine]
Figure 266 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operating members provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, ROM 4602, RAM 4603, input/output interface 4604, etc.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the main board 4600 is provided with a payout ratio indicator 1317 that displays the payout ratio calculated by the CPU 4601, and a display switch 1318 that switches the display of the payout ratio indicator 1317. The display switch 1318 is preferably a momentary push-button switch, but other types of switches are also acceptable. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the payout ratio may be displayed on the payout ratio indicator 1317.

The aforementioned single-coin insertion button 4205, max-bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, and payout button 4209 are all connected to the main board 4600. These operation buttons are operated by the player using sensors (not shown), and the detected operation signals are output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 to start the aforementioned symbol variation display device 4300 (to start the rotation of reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c). When the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are operated, operation signals are output to the main board 4600 to stop reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively.

Furthermore, the slot machine 4000 houses the main board 4600 along with other equipment, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from this equipment. This equipment includes a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal dispensing device 4110, and others.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 is equipped with reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, and right reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motors 4341 are stepping motors, and each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can rotate and stop independently. During rotation, multiple types of symbols are displayed in the symbol display window 4401, continuously changing from top to bottom.

Furthermore, each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c has position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c for detecting the reference position related to its rotation. Each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c has a corresponding position sensor 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c installed within it (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, and right reel position sensor 4331c). The detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors are input to the main board 4600, allowing the main board 4600 to obtain the stopping position information for each reel.

The medal selector 4207 contains the aforementioned solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b. The insertion sensor 4207b detects medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When solenoid 4207a is OFF, inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. Conversely, when solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage leading to the insertion sensor 4207b within the medal selector 4207 is locked out, preventing medal insertion. Even if a player inserts medals, those that pass through the medal selector 4207 and flow into the return trough are returned to the medal tray 4201. At the same time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is disabled, preventing either betting or medal storage through medal insertion.

The medal dispensing device 4110 has a dispensing sensor 4110e inside the discharge port that detects each dispensed medal individually, and the dispensing signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 4110e to the main board 4600. Furthermore, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is equipped with a medal full sensor 4111a, which outputs a detection signal to the main board 4600 when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity. At this time, an error display indicating an abnormality in medal storage is shown via the image display unit 4500, error lamp 4554, etc., notifying players and hall employees that an abnormality has occurred.

Meanwhile, the main board 4600 outputs control signals to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal dispensing device 4110. Specifically, the main board 4600 outputs drive pulse signals to control the starting and stopping of the aforementioned reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. In addition, the medal dispensing device 4110 receives drive signals from the main board 4600 according to the type of symbol combination stopped on the active line, and in response, the medal dispensing device 4110 performs the medal dispensing operation. At this time, if the medal dispensing device 4110 does not have enough medals to dispense, or if there are no medals at all, the medal count detection by the dispensing sensor 4110e will be delayed. After a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormality signal regarding the payout of medals to the main board 4600. In response, the main board 4600 displays information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout on the error lamp 4554, image display unit 4500, etc., to notify players and hall employees of the abnormality.

The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 as well as a performance control board 4700. This performance control board 4700 is equipped with a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input/output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, AMP (Audio Amplifier) 4705, sound source IC 4706, etc. The performance control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display unit 4500, the illumination (or on, blinking, off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Furthermore, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the arcade's hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 is responsible for relaying various signals (such as token insertion signals, token payout signals, and game status) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply unit 4112 generates multiple types of DC power from the 24-volt AC (24V) power supply provided by the island equipment. For example, it generates three types of power: DC +5V (hereinafter, "+5V"), DC +12V (hereinafter, "+12V"), and DC +24V (hereinafter, "+24V"). These three types of power supplies—+5V, +12V, and +24V—generated by the power supply unit 4112 are supplied to each component of the slot machine 4000. For example, the +5V and +12V power supplies are supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300, which includes the reels 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341.

In addition, the power supply unit 4112 includes a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, and a power switch 4112v. None of these switches are exposed on the outside of the slot machine 4000; they can only be operated by opening the front panel 4200. The power switch 4112v is used to turn the power supply to the slot machine 4000 ON/OFF, and the setting change key switch 4112t is used to change the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). The reset switch 4112u is used to clear errors that occur in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated in conjunction with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Furthermore, the main board 4600 is equipped with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When obtaining the drive torque necessary to rotate the reel 4301 by rotating the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (e.g., HI) and outputs it to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605, thereby controlling the supply of +12V as the motor drive voltage to the reel drive motor 4341. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque necessary to maintain the stopped state of the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (e.g., LOW) and outputs it to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605, thereby controlling the supply of +5V as the motor drive voltage to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In a game played with the slot machine 4000, the player operates the start lever 4210 after deciding on the number of tokens to bet. The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c then rotate. Afterward, the player operates the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c, which control the stopping of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Once all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active paylines, and the prescribed number of tokens corresponding to the winning combination are awarded as needed.

As mentioned above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is fitted with a reel strip depicting a symbol. When all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, the display content (the combination of symbols displayed on the active lines) in the symbol display window 4401 determines whether a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed. Specifically, the symbol display window 4401 determines whether a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the aforementioned active lines. Furthermore, it is determined whether a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the multiple active lines. If it is determined that multiple winning combinations are displayed, a payout of medals equal to the sum of the payout amounts corresponding to each displayed winning combination is performed.

[15-3. Memory Area Configuration]
Next, the memory area provided by the ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, etc., on the main board 4600 will be described. As outlined in Figure 24, the memory area of the pachinko machine is configured similarly to that of the slot machine 4000 shown in Figures 267 to 270. Figure 267 is a diagram showing the access area for game control of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment, and the details of the ROM area 4910, which is the memory area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

In this embodiment, the storage area is provided by a medium such as ROM 4602 or RAM 4603, and is provided as a single access area with addresses ranging from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Furthermore, the access area in this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium providing the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I/O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to the medium providing the access area; a single area may be provided by multiple media, or multiple areas may be provided by a single medium.

Because the access area of this embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address, without being aware of the medium actually providing the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, let's explain the configuration of the ROM area 4910. The ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains its contents even when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The stored data can be read, but it cannot be updated or deleted. Note that the ROM 4602 can be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be made updatable.

ROM area 4910 is assigned addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in ROM 4602 by specifying addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH".

The ROM area 4910 includes the first control area, the first isolation area, the first data area, the second control area, the second isolation area, the second data area, the third control area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The first control area is the game control area, where programs for game control are stored. The first data area is the game data area, where data necessary for game control is stored. In other words, game control is performed by executing the programs stored in the first control area and referencing the data stored in the first data area. The areas used for game control (first control area and first data area) are referred to as the game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores programs used for debugging (functional testing) the control program. The second data area stores data used for debugging (functional testing). Note that the second data area is not strictly necessary; debugging data may be stored in the second control area instead. Furthermore, the area (second control area, second data area) that stores programs and data used for debugging (functional testing) the game control program, but is not used for game control itself, is referred to as the debugging (testing function) area (second memory area).

The third control area stores programs for calculating and displaying the payout ratio. Data for calculating the payout ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing the payout ratio calculation data may also be provided. Note that the area (third control area) where programs and data for calculating the payout ratio are stored but not used for game control is designated as the payout ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the payout ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the inspection of the payout ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed separately, reducing the inspection effort for the slot machine 4000. Furthermore, the payout ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used commonly across multiple models, regardless of the specific model.

The first, second, third, and fourth isolated areas are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas where access is prohibited. The CPU 4601 is configured to forcibly perform a reset process if an isolated area is accessed during processing. The first, second, third, and fourth isolated areas are contiguous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is the address following the end address of the first control area ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately preceding the first data area ("0AFFH"). The third isolated area is located between the game control area and the debug (function test) area. In Figure 30, it is treated as the game control area, but it may also be treated as the debug (function test) area. Similarly, the fourth isolated area is located between the debug (function test) area and the prize ratio calculation area. In Figure 267, it is treated as the debug (function test) area, but it may also be treated as the prize ratio calculation area.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 4920 will be described. Figure 268 is a diagram showing the details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. The RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose contents are erased when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and it is possible to read and write the stored data. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores data derived by the execution of a program. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be a non-volatile storage medium in which data can be read and written. In addition, in the event of a power outage, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period of time by a backup power supply.

RAM area 4920 is assigned addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The CPU 4601 can access data stored in RAM 4603 by specifying addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 4920 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (testing function), a save area, and an isolation area. Each area has a set start address and end address.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The work area for debugging (inspection function) is a work area used when executing program debugging control (second control). The work area for calculating the payout ratio is an area that stores data for calculating the payout ratio and the calculated payout ratio (payout ratio, continuous payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc.). Note that it is not necessary to allocate dedicated work areas for the debugging (inspection function) work area and the payout ratio calculation work area; the game control work area may be used, or the debugging (inspection function) work area and the payout ratio calculation work area may be assigned to the game control work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debugging (inspection function) control area, and the payout ratio calculation work area will decrease. However, if the program is configured in a way that does not use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the payout ratio calculation work area, then it is not necessarily required to use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the payout ratio calculation work area.

The backup area is a temporary storage area for data used in game control, debugging (inspection function) control, or prize ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic registers, flag registers, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the backup area before the execution of the predetermined process, and the copied values are returned to the CPU registers after the process is completed. The backup area may be used commonly for game control, debugging (inspection function), and prize ratio calculation, but it may also be separated individually for game control, debugging (inspection function), and prize ratio calculation, similar to the work area. This allows for greater independence between game control, debugging (inspection function) control, and prize ratio calculation.

The isolated area is allocated between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the payout ratio, and between the work area for debugging (inspection function), the storage area, and the storage area for calculating the payout ratio. It is a continuous area with each of the surrounding areas (the areas before and after it). For example, the starting address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the address immediately following the end address of the work area for game control ("3076H"), and the end address is the address immediately preceding the work area for debugging (inspection function) ("307FH"). Furthermore, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and if it is accessed during processing by the CPU 4601, a forced reset process is executed.

Figure 268 shows the details of the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio on its right side. The work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio may include a main area where the calculation result of the bonus payout ratio is stored, as well as backup area 1 and backup area 2 where copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. There may be one or more backup areas. Each area is assigned a check code to detect data errors. The check code may be the checksum of the data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code may be set during the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, set each time the data in the main area is updated during the bonus payout ratio calculation and display process, or set during the initialization process (step S1020 in Figure 271). In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code may be initialized when the initialization process determines that it is normal or when the data is erased, and the fixed value may be set during the initialization process (step S1020 in Figure 271). The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set for the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Furthermore, if a predetermined value is set for the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check codes for each area are correct (i.e., the data in each area is normal).

Furthermore, during the initialization process (step S1020 in Figure 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and if the data in the backup area is determined to be normal, it is preferable to copy it to the main area. Alternatively, during the power-off process executed when the power is cut off, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1, and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the higher digits of the address.

Figure 269 shows the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the bonus item ratio.

Figure 269(A) shows the simplest work area structure. The work area structure shown in Figure 269(A) stores the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total payout, the bonus ratio, the consecutive bonus ratio, the number of games played in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section ratio. The number of bonus payouts is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is active (e.g., during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls acquired is the number of medals paid out while the consecutive bonus is active (e.g., during a big bonus). The total payout is the total number of medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated as the number of bonus payouts ÷ the total payout. The consecutive bonus ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive bonus payouts ÷ the total acquired payout. The number of games played in the advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state where the player's tokens are less likely to decrease, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)). The number of games played in the non-advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous period. The advantageous period ratio can be calculated as: Number of games played in the advantageous period ÷ (Number of games played in the advantageous period + Number of games played in the non-advantageous period).

In the work area structure shown in Figure 269(A), the number of bonus payouts, consecutive bonus payouts, total payouts, number of games played in the advantageous section, and number of games played in the non-advantageous section correspond to the cumulative totals in Figure 269(B), which will be described later. Each of these is stored in a 3 or 4-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 or 42,949,672,950 in decimal. Since this data is not erased unless an anomaly occurs, a large memory area is provided to store data for a long period. Furthermore, the bonus payout ratio, consecutive bonus payout ratio, and advantageous section ratio are stored in a 1-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonus payouts, consecutive bonus payouts, total payouts, number of games played in the advantageous section, and number of games played in the non-advantageous section are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in Figure 271). The bonus ratio, consecutive bonus ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation and display process (step S1119 in Figure 272).

Figure 269(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. The work area structure shown in Figure 269(B) stores the number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the number of games played, the bonus payout ratio, the consecutive bonus payout ratio, the number of games played in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section ratio. Furthermore, the storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer with n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number of games played reaches a predetermined number (400 times), the write pointers for all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for the predetermined number of games played is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area, and the data is stored in the first storage area.

The write and read pointers for the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data move every predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves along with the write pointer. The read pointer points to a memory area one position behind the write pointer. This is because the payout ratio is calculated using data from 400 games.

The cumulative sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n memory areas of the ring buffer. The cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio are calculated from the cumulative values of each data. When the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative values of the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio are calculated from the cumulative values of each data. Even when the ring buffer completes a cycle and one memory area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in Figure 269(B), the number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the number of games played are each stored in a 2-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 65535 in decimal. The cumulative totals of the number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the number of games played are each stored in a 3-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games × n (6000 games if n=15), a large memory area is provided. The total cumulative totals of the number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the number of games played are each stored in a 3 or 4-byte memory area, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 or 42,949,672,950 in decimal. Since the total cumulative data is not erased unless an anomaly occurs, a larger memory area is provided to store data for a longer period. Furthermore, the cumulative and total cumulative values for the bonus payout ratio and consecutive bonus payout ratio each occupy 1 byte of memory, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal. The number of games played in the advantageous section and the number of games played in the non-advantageous section each occupy 3 bytes of memory, capable of storing values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio occupies 1 byte of memory, capable of storing values up to 255 in decimal.

Furthermore, by increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each memory area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of contiguous memory areas (n) for storing time-series data can be reduced to 10, while still allowing for the storage of the same 6000 games' worth of data in total. Therefore, the size of the memory area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

In the work area structure shown in Figure 269(B), the number of prize payouts, consecutive prize payouts, prize ratio, consecutive prize ratio, number of games played in the advantageous section, number of games played in the non-advantageous section, and advantageous section ratio are the same as those explained in Figure 269(A). The number of replays is the number of games that resulted in a replay. The number of winning payouts is the total number of medals dispensed by the game. The number of games played is the number of games executed; when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of replays, the number of winning payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total payout, the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in the non-advantageous section are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in Figure 271). The bonus ratio, consecutive bonus ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation and display process (step S1119 in Figure 272).

In the data structure shown in Figure 269(A), if a stored value is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio is erased during the initialization process (step S1020 in Figure 271). However, the data is not erased under any other circumstances. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the bonus payout ratio may be erased at predetermined intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly). Similarly, the total cumulative value in Figure 269(B) may be erased at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, if the data in the work area used for calculating the bonus payout ratio, or the calculated bonus payout ratio, is an abnormal value (for example, the bonus payout ratio exceeds 100%, the calculated bonus payout ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation, or the number of bonus payouts > total payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value, but all data in the work area used for calculating the bonus payout ratio may also be deleted. Additionally, if the data in the work area used for calculating the bonus payout ratio, or the calculated bonus payout ratio, is an abnormal value, a notification of the abnormality may be issued. Furthermore, the data in the backup area may be checked using a check code, and after replicating the normal data from the backup area to the main area, the bonus payout ratio may be recalculated.

[15-3-3. I/O Area Configuration]
Next, the I/O area 4930 will be explained. The I/O area 4930 corresponds to input/output ports, and the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port by accessing the I/O area 4930. Input/output ports include, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, and ports related to outputs such as solenoids for the main prize slot and LED drive signals. The settings for input/output ports (settings regarding the use/non-use of input settings and output settings, etc.) are set based on the settings in the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter Information Setting Area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be described. Figure 270 is a diagram showing the details of the parameter information setting area 4940 in this embodiment. The parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include the start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in Figure 270. In Figure 270, the definitions of the start and end addresses of the third control area, the work area for calculating the prize ratio, and the save area for calculating the prize ratio are not shown, but the start setting and end setting of the third control area are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of the other control areas, the start setting and end setting of the work area for calculating the prize ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of the work area for calculating the prize ratio, and the start setting and end setting of the save area for calculating the prize ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of the save area for calculating the prize ratio. Areas other than those set here are considered unused (unset) areas. This configuration ensures that if the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Although Figure 270 shows the areas as continuous, the setting areas do not need to be continuous; for example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, accessing areas other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of ROM 4910, and the isolated area of RAM 4920) is configured to forcibly trigger a reset. Therefore, intentionally accessing the isolated areas triggers a reset, enabling the program to be initially started. Since slot machines execute processing sequentially, accessing the isolated areas after the last game processing is complete allows the program to be executed from the startup process, and the initial settings can be performed again. This means that even if the initial settings function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or other factors during gameplay, the initial settings can be re-executed to reset it to the correct value. Additionally, while the initial setting process uses a power-off flag to determine RAM clearing, accessing the isolated areas without setting the power-off flag allows for forcibly triggering a RAM clear. On the other hand, in the aforementioned pachinko machine, gameplay occurs in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, gameplay cannot be continued. However, in the case of a slot machine, it is necessary to initialize the RAM information that is no longer needed after the game ends. Accessing the isolated areas eliminates the need for the process of initializing the RAM information.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 4940 are not sequentially set during user program processing such as the initial setup of the CPU 4601. Instead, the parameter area address and setting values are stored separately in the ROM 4602, so that the CPU 4601 sequentially sets the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 to the CPU's various function setting registers before starting the control program at startup. This allows various parameters to be set as soon as the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of the various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are stored in the ROM 4602 where the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game Control]
[15-4-1. System Reset Startup Process]
Next, the control of the slot machine in this embodiment will be described. Figure 271 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the system reset startup process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset startup process is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power outage occurs, and is started when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset startup process begins, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process to set various parameters necessary for game execution (step S1010). Specifically, it sets the setting values stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 contained in the memory area into the CPU 4601's function setting registers, and sets the addresses of each area allocated to the access area as setting values. By setting the addresses of each area as setting values, for example, the work area and backup area of the RAM area 4920 are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas (isolated areas in Figure 268) are allocated as unused areas. Furthermore, the work area and backup area are separated into areas for game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Similarly, in the ROM area 4910, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 performs a security check (step S1012). The security check determines whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is legitimate. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not legitimate, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an invalid ROM, and the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Furthermore, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

Furthermore, the process from powering on the slot machine to the completion of the security check (the process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by a user program, but rather a process performed by the CPU hardware that cannot be modified by the developer.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initialization (step S1016). This device initialization setting process includes tasks such as setting the start of periodic processes (Figure 272, timer interrupt processing) that periodically execute predetermined processes. In this embodiment, functions such as preventing user programs from overwriting settings related to game抽選 (lottery), including random number generation, after a security check are executed in the parameter setting process, while all other functions are executed in the device initialization setting process. By separating the initialization of the CPU 4601 into parameter setting and device initialization setting processes in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased, and cheating during gameplay is made more difficult.

Furthermore, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603, or a hot start to resume gameplay using the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603.

If the CPU 4601 performs a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), it executes an initialization process to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the pachinko machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power-off flag is not set.

On the other hand, if the CPU 4601 performs a hot start to resume gameplay based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), it executes a process to resume gameplay based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603 (step S1022). At this time, the resume process returns to the process that was interrupted during the power outage. Specifically, the process returns to the interrupted process during the power outage in either steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset startup process (described later) or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (Figure 272).

In this embodiment, the slot machine 4000 calculates a checksum based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when recovery processing is performed. At this time, the checksum calculation target may be limited to the game control work area, excluding the debug (inspection function) work area, from the entire area used as work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). Calculating the checksum using only the game control work area is possible because the debug (inspection function) processing is designed to maintain independence from the game control processing and does not affect the game's outcome. Therefore, insufficient verification may leave some bugs. In this case, including the debug (inspection function) work area, where information obtained from such processing is stored, in the checksum calculation target could impair the reliability of normal recovery from power outages. On the other hand, since game control processing is directly related to gameplay, if bugs remain and are incorporated into the product, it could cause significant problems in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and product recalls may be necessary. This would likely cause significant financial and other damages to manufacturers and arcades, leading to thorough verification. Therefore, the work area for game control is considered more reliable than the work area for debugging (inspection functions).

When the initialization process is complete, or when a series of games has finished, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setup process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setup process, the information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for the series of game controls is restored to its initial state.

After the initial game setup process is complete, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process to output the debug (inspection function) signal for the start of the game (step S1026). The information signal 1 output process performs tasks such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to its initial state. The information signal output process has defined information signal 1 to N output processes, and the necessary module is called at the timing of information signal output. For example, when outputting debug (inspection function) signals associated with the start of the game (reel rotation start, start lever ON, information on winning combinations) during the game start process, when outputting debug (inspection function) signals related to the stopping of each reel (stop operation signal, information on stopped symbols, etc.) during the symbol stop process, and when outputting debug (inspection function) signals related to confirmed combinations (confirmed combinations displayed on each reel, payout information associated with confirmed combinations, information on the output signal regarding the number of payouts at the time of payout (number of medals paid out), etc.) during the winning judgment process, the "information signal N output process" module necessary for the relevant process is called and executed as appropriate.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a waiting process (step S1028) that performs the processing that precedes the player operating the start lever 4210. Before the player operates the start lever 4210, the CPU determines, for example, whether a replay command has been issued, whether a medal has been inserted, whether a medal settlement has been performed, and also checks the game's settings.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process to begin the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random value is obtained for the game's draw, the winning combinations are determined, and the reels 4301 are started to rotate. Afterward, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process to wait until the reels 4301 reach a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 makes the reel stop button 4211 available for input and executes a symbol stop process that runs until all reels 4301 have stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, once all reels 4301 have stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a prize determination process to determine the winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the prize determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if a win is determined, settings corresponding to the winning combination are made, and settings are made to execute the payout process corresponding to the winning combination.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the work area for calculating the prize ratio in RAM area 4920 (see Figures 268 and 269) (step S1038). The process in step S1038 can be skipped if there are no prize medals to be paid out in step S1036, thereby reducing the load on the CPU 4601.

Furthermore, even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the process for updating the area for calculating the payout ratio (step S1038) is still executed. By executing these processes, regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, data for calculating the payout ratio can be collected even while fraud is being reported.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes the game termination process (step S1042), which handles the process at the end of the game. The game termination process executes the payout process corresponding to the winning combination. If there is no winning combination, or if the winning combination does not result in a payout, this process is skipped. Once the game termination process is complete, the system returns to the initial game setup process and executes the main loop process from steps S1024 to S1038.

[15-4-2. Periodic Processing]
Next, we will explain the periodic processing, which is an interrupt process that is triggered at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup process is being executed. Figure 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure for periodic processing.

When a periodic process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in Figure 268. As mentioned above, since the periodic process is an interrupt process that is activated while the main loop process is running, it is necessary to save the CPU registers used by the main loop process so that processing can continue after recovery.

Next, CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built into the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be periodically cleared.

Next, the CPU 4601 performs switch input processing to sample input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, it performs game state check processing (step S1116). The game state check processing involves processing related to the drive control of the drive unit (stepping motor) that rotates the reels 4301. Specifically, it performs pulse output of the stepping motor, detection of the origin position, etc.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process to update various timers used for game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is performed periodically, the set time is equal to the execution interval of the periodic processing multiplied by the set number of times.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 is being operated. If the display switch 1318 is being operated, it calls the prize ratio calculation and display process and calculates the prize ratio by referring to the number of medals dispensed stored in the prize ratio calculation work area. Then, it displays the calculated prize ratio on the prize ratio display unit 1317 (step S1119). The prize ratio calculation and display process is the same as the prize ratio calculation and display process described in the embodiment of pachinko machine 1 (Figures 24 and 25). Furthermore, the specific calculation method and the specific display method of the prize ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the prize ratio calculation and display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the prize ratio, the prize ratio (the gambling potential of the slot machine 4000) based on the most recent data can be confirmed.

Furthermore, while all types of values (prize ratio, continuous prize ratio, cumulative total, and total cumulative total) may be calculated when the display switch 1318 is operated, only the values displayed may be calculated each time the display switch 1318 is operated. Alternatively, the prize ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated prize ratio may be displayed on the prize ratio indicator 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated.

Next, the CPU 4601 performs LED output processing to control the LEDs (step S1120). The LEDs to be controlled are those controlled by the main board 4600, such as the payout count display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the bonus payout ratio on the LEDs.

The CPU 4601 performs information output processing to output a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Furthermore, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the performance control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process to update the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). This random number update process updates the random numbers generated by the software. In addition to random numbers generated solely by software, the CPU also updates its built-in software random numbers. While the counting itself is performed by hardware for the CPU's built-in software random numbers, the trigger for the update is determined in this process. This configuration reduces the program processing involved in random number updates.

Once the random number update process is complete, the CPU 4601 performs the necessary steps to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, it restores the values of the registers saved in step S1110 (step S1128). Furthermore, it enables the execution of the interrupt (step S1130). While the periodic process (timer interrupt process) is running, even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending and will only be executed after the previously executed timer interrupt process has successfully completed and the interrupt has been enabled. Therefore, the system is configured to prevent the periodic process (timer interrupt process) from being executed multiple times simultaneously.

[15-4-3. Information Signal Output Processing]
Next, we will explain the information signal output processing performed during system reset startup and other processes. The information signal output processing is provided according to the function of each output signal (1 to N) and is composed of multiple modules. For example, there are "Condition device output signals (signal output related to the operation of the condition device)" and "Lottery determination processing (signal output related to the lottery)." Although the signals output are different, the configuration of each information output processing is basically the same, so we will omit the explanation of each flow. Figure 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing in this embodiment.

When the CPU 4601 starts the information signal output process, it first saves the values of all of its registers (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being corrupted by the execution of the information signal output process (or to ensure that they can be reliably restored even if corrupted), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. Furthermore, the stack area used at this time is allocated as a debug (test function) save area and is allocated to a separate area distinct from the game control save area.

Next, the CPU 4601 obtains information from the RAM 4603 to select (ON/OFF) the information signal to be output (debug (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). Each information signal output process only references the information stored in the RAM 4603; no data is written to the RAM 4603 during the process. If writing is necessary, a dedicated work area for information output is provided in the debug (inspection function) work area, and this work area is configured not to be used (including reference) by processes other than the information signal output process. This ensures independence from other game control programs, even if the program executing the information signal output process is located in a different location from other game control programs, without using a common area.

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information obtained in step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time required to maintain the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. Afterward, the values of all registers saved in step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the process from step S1210 to step S1220 generates and outputs information signals (debug (inspection function) signals). The process from step S1210 to step S1220 is then executed for each debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function of the output signal (1 to N). In this embodiment, multiple types of information signal output processing are defined for each function. However, the information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a table defining the output signals corresponding to each function in the second data area of the debug (inspection function) area, and configuring the system to select and output the signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller.

As described above, in this embodiment, by providing a separate area (debug (inspection function) area) for storing programs that perform information signal output processing, etc. (signal output programs) in an area clearly distinct from the area for storing the game control program (game control area), programs intended for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently placed. The signal output programs are used for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 and are processes that do not affect the outcome of the game, thus not impairing the fairness of the game. Furthermore, programs are not placed in the debug (inspection function) area for any other purpose (for example, to place game control programs or general-purpose programs to compensate for insufficient capacity in the game control area).

The signal output program is statically called and executed from the game control program, with the address of the called program explicitly specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized by function, and when called, it protects all registers used in the game control area. As mentioned earlier, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited when program processing in the game control area is running, and when program processing in the debug (inspection function) area is running, only referencing the game control work area is permitted, while writing is prohibited. Additionally, calling modules (including subroutines) located in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area is also prohibited. Programs located in the debug (inspection function) area, including the signal output program, are always called in subroutine format, and after the subroutine finishes, a return command returns to the state immediately after the call. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are organized according to their purpose. This configuration ensures that the execution of the signal output program (programs located in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of slot machine 4000, the timing of erasing the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the payout ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 in Figure 21 of the embodiment of pachinko machine 1. Note that slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch; instead, when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data of the game state is erased.

As described above, this embodiment allows for the accurate calculation of the payout ratio of a slot machine in operation, in addition to the effects explained in the previously described pachinko machine embodiment, and enables verification of the gambling potential of the game machine in operation.

Although the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations and includes various modifications and equivalent configurations within the spirit of the attached claims.

Among the inventions disclosed herein, the following are representative aspects of the inventions other than those described in the claims:

(0) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control unit that executes a program to control the progress of the game,
It includes a payout ratio display that shows information regarding the assigned game value,
The aforementioned bonus ratio indicator comprises a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device.
The main control device is
Data to be displayed on the aforementioned bonus ratio indicator is transmitted to the driver circuit via serial communication.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, after power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use stop bits are set for serial communication with the driver circuit.

(1) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the communication between the main control unit and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control unit and the peripheral control unit.

This prevents inaccurate display of bonus item ratios due to data corruption during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of winning combinations even when the power is off.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it performs the settings for serial communication after clearing the work RAM.

This prevents the display of incorrect payout ratios due to the use of incorrect RAM data.

(3) The main control device is
It has the function of transmitting data stored in the FIFO buffer via serial communication.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it sets a data storage amount that determines the timing for sending data from the FIFO buffer after power is turned on.

This allows data to be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with any number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control unit that executes a program to control the progress of the game,
It includes a payout ratio display that shows information regarding the assigned game value,
The aforementioned bonus ratio indicator comprises a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the main control unit, the display device, and the driver circuit are arranged such that the length of the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device.

By lengthening the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing components around the main control unit. Furthermore, by making the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device shorter than the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit, noise interference is reduced, allowing for more accurate display of the prize ratio.

(5) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the prize ratio indicator are housed in a single case.

This allows for easier detection of unauthorized modifications without placing other components around the main control unit, and further reduces the impact of noise.

(6) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the prize ratio indicator are arranged on a single printed circuit board.

This allows for easier detection of unauthorized modifications without placing other components on the printed circuit board surrounding the main control unit, and further reduces the impact of noise.

(7) The game machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the prize ratio indicator is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in a single package.

This reduces the impact of noise on the signal lines connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Furthermore, it allows for a shorter signal line length between the driver circuit and the display device.

(8) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power pattern) is provided along the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

This reduces the impact of noise on the signal lines connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit.

(9) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the orientation of the bonus ratio indicator is the same as the orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

This allows for easy confirmation of whether the main control unit has been replaced and the displayed payout ratio without requiring awkward postures.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode that does not display characters and numbers on the display device and reduces power consumption,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the prize ratio display is in a closed state and cannot be seen in the installed state of the gaming machine.

This prevents unnecessary power consumption in the gaming machine when displaying the payout ratio is not required.

(11) A gaming machine that awards prize balls to a player as game value when a game ball launched towards the game area enters a predetermined prize slot,
A main control device that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a prize ratio display that shows information about the prize balls,
The aforementioned prize winning slots include a general prize winning slot whose entrance shape does not change depending on the game state, and an electric prize winning slot whose entrance opens or widens depending on the game state.
The main control device counts the number of prize balls dispensed to the player by separately counting at least the number of first prize balls dispensed when a ball enters the general prize slot and the number of second prize balls dispensed when a ball enters the electric prize slot.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the prize ratio display device displays information regarding the ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the number of prize balls that have been counted in its memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of prize balls stored,
The gaming machine as described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory if the check code is not normal.

This allows for the detection of anomalies in the number of prize balls stored in memory, and prevents the display of incorrect prize ratios (the ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area that retain the contents of the memory even when the power is cut off.
Game control data is stored in the first backup area.
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the payout ratio is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

This allows for the deletion of only the abnormal data and retaining the normal data, provided that at least one of the data used for game control and the data used for calculating the payout ratio are normal.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area that retain the contents of the memory even when the power is cut off.
Game control data is stored in the first backup area.
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the payout ratio is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased.

By operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculation and display data 13136 can be erased, allowing the game machine to erase the calculated bonus ratio at any time. Therefore, by preventing the RAM clear switch from erasing the backed-up bonus ratio calculation and display data 13136, it is possible to prevent the erasure of the bonus ratio calculation and display data 13136 by game hall staff, thus preventing the concealment of a high bonus ratio. This allows for easy detection of game machines modified to have a high bonus ratio, preventing the concealment of such a state.

(15A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to the input or output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information relating to the value of the game is a base,
The control means is
The game's progression is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value, and a normal game state other than the aforementioned special game state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the sum of the number of game balls shot into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, the number of game balls that passed through the out gate, and the number of prize balls that entered the machine).

(15C) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates the number of prize balls used to calculate the base for display on the display means at the timing of receiving a prize ball entry detection signal, a prize ball payout command reception confirmation signal, or a prize ball payout completion signal as the predetermined signal, or at the timing of transmitting a prize ball payout command instructing the payout of prize balls.

(15D) The control means is
The total number of prize balls used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
In the normal game state described above, when a signal is received indicating that a game ball has entered a prize slot provided in the game area, the number of prize balls determined to correspond to the prize slot is calculated,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15E) Equipped with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
In the normal game state described above, when it is detected that a game ball has entered a prize slot provided in the game area, the number of prize balls determined to correspond to the prize slot is calculated.
The payout control means is instructed to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15F) Equipped with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
In the normal game state described above, when it is detected that a game ball has entered a prize slot provided in the game area, the number of prize balls determined to correspond to the prize slot is calculated.
The payout control means is instructed to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player.
The dispensing control means receives confirmation of receipt of the aforementioned instruction.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that received the confirmation of receipt.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15G) Equipped with a payout control means that controls the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
In the normal game state described above, when it is detected that a game ball has entered a prize slot provided in the game area, the number of prize balls determined to correspond to the prize slot is calculated.
The payout control means is instructed to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player.
The completion of the payout of the prize balls specified in the above instruction is received from the payout control means.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that indicates the completion of the aforementioned payout.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15H) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means includes an information update means for updating information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to the input and output of a predetermined signal, and a processing display means capable of processing (statistically processing) the results of the calculation processing performed when updating the information and displaying the updated information relating to the game value on the display means.

According to inventions 15A to 15H, the process related to acquiring game tokens can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to the state of the game meeting predetermined conditions.

(16B) The information relating to the value of the game is a base,
The control means is
The game's progression is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value, and a normal game state other than the aforementioned special game state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated at the time when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means is
The total number of prize balls used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
In the normal game state described above, when it is detected that a game ball has entered a prize slot provided in the game area, the number of prize balls determined to correspond to the prize slot is calculated and stored in a buffer.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the base is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed by the player during the normal game state (for example, the sum of the number of game balls shot into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, the number of balls passing through the out gate and the number of prize balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby moving the predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of prize balls.

(16E) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means includes an information update means for updating information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to the input and output of a predetermined signal, and a processing display means capable of processing (statistically processing) the results of the calculation processing performed when updating the information and displaying the updated information relating to the game value on the display means.

According to inventions 16A to 16E, within the constraints of the main control device as defined by the rules, it is possible to accurately execute processes that are different from gameplay while maintaining the game's characteristics.

(17A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The control means is
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, in relation to the counted number of balls consumed satisfying predetermined conditions, information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(17B) The control means is
The game's progression is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value, and a normal game state other than the aforementioned special game state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it calculates information regarding the game value when the number of balls consumed in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The game machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means counts the number of game balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the out-out opening and the number of winning balls.

(17D) The information relating to the value of the game is a base,
The control means is
The total number of outs used to calculate the aforementioned base is stored.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated and stored in a buffer.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number of balls are moved from the buffer to the total number of balls out at a predetermined timing, and the base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the total number of balls out.

(17E) The predetermined timing is the timing at which the number of balls consumed by the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when the number of balls consumed by the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of balls that have been thrown out, thereby moving the predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of balls that have been thrown out.

(17F) The control means is
Upon winning a prize in the starting prize slot, a special symbol variation display game is executed to derive the aforementioned special game state.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, when the reserved memory for the special symbol variation display game reaches its upper limit, the machine does not record the entry into the start prize slot and counts the number of prize balls.

(17G) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means includes an information update means for updating information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to the input and output of a predetermined signal, and a processing display means capable of processing (statistically processing) the results of the calculation processing performed when updating the information and displaying the updated information relating to the game value on the display means.

According to inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processes that are different from gameplay while maintaining the game's characteristics.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
The game board, which has a game area on which the aforementioned game is played, is detachably attached to a main frame,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display means displays information related to the game value even when the main frame is closed.

(18B) The main frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame which is attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, which is visible when the main frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main frame,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display means is provided within the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to inventions 18A to 18C, the decline in hall sales can be suppressed.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to fulfilling predetermined conditions in the game,
The game includes a means for executing a game in which a special symbol variation display game is performed when a prize is entered into the starting prize slot.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that even when the predetermined conditions are met while the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means, the information relating to the game value is updated.

(19B) The information relating to the value of the game is a base,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates the number of prize balls used to calculate the base for display on the display means at any of the following timings, as predetermined conditions: detection of a prize ball entering the prize slot, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception of confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and reception of a prize ball payout completion signal.

According to inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that incorporates sufficient countermeasures against fraud even during variable display games.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the presentation of a special symbol variation display game that is triggered by a prize being entered into the starting gate,
It includes a game value information display means that displays information related to the assigned game value,
The aforementioned performance control means is
Control the transition to a low-power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced compared to the normal mode.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, during the low-power mode, the display mode of the game value information display means is not changed in a way that reduces power consumption.

(20B) A display means for displaying the effects of the special symbol variation display game, which is composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The aforementioned display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of light-emitting diodes and is characterized in that the brightness is not reduced even during the low-power mode.

(20C) The system is equipped with a means for displaying the effects of the special symbol variation display game,
The aforementioned display means controls the display mode to the low-power mode after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reserved memory for the special symbol variation display game was consumed.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming value information display means does not change the display mode in a way that reduces power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has been consumed.

According to inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with enhanced energy-saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The control means is
The game has a normal game state and a game state control means that controls the game to one of several advantageous game states that are more favorable to the player than the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it calculates and updates information regarding the game value by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.

(21B) The game machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal game state by one of the following: the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the out-out opening and the number of winning balls.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variation display game results in a jackpot, the advantageous game state is determined, and the system is controlled to open the winning slots that allow the player to acquire a large amount of game value.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the period from the confirmation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is considered the advantageous game state, and the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value.

(21D) The control means is
In the aforementioned advantageous game state, the system controls the opening of prize winning slots that allow the player to acquire a large amount of game value.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of game balls that enter the prize slot is excluded from the number of game balls launched into the game area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted.

According to inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that awards game balls when certain conditions are met,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information about the assigned game balls,
The game area on which the launched game balls roll is provided with at least an activation opening that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls, and a passage opening that triggers the opening of the activation opening from a closed state.
The control means is
It is also possible to control the game to a special game state that makes it easier to bring the aforementioned starting port into an open state.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it calculates and updates information regarding the game balls by excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of balls consumed by the player when the machine is controlled to either the aforementioned special game state or the aforementioned special game state, and dividing the number of prize balls awarded to the player by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The game machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by one of the following: the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the out-out opening and the number of winning balls.

(22C) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means sets the period from the confirmation of a win in a normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expanded state, and excludes the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed during this period from the calculation of the information regarding the game balls.

(22D) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means counts the number of game balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that entered the starting gate from the number of game balls launched into the game area.

According to inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches game balls toward the game area,
A prize ball dispensing means that dispenses a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected in the prize entry slot provided in the game area,
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined prize-winning slot among the prize-winning slots, a main control means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to grant the player a favorable game state,
A gaming machine comprising peripheral control means that determines the effects to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes an information update means that can update the information regarding the assigned game balls by either increasing or decreasing it.
There is at least one first state in which the information updating means can update the information regarding the assigned game balls to increase or decrease, and a second state in which the information updating means can update the information regarding the assigned game balls to increase or decrease, but the rate at which the information regarding the assigned game balls is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating a transition from the first state to the second state.

(23B) The information relating to the value of the game is a base,
The main control means is
The game's progression is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value, and a normal game state other than the aforementioned special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with respect to the timing at which the base is likely to decrease, which is set as the second state.

(23C) The main control means is
Information about the game balls is written to the memory area at predetermined intervals, after a predetermined number of prize balls, or after a predetermined number of balls consumed.
The information regarding the game balls written to the memory area is compared with the information regarding the game balls that was stored in the memory area before the writing, and the increase or decrease in the information regarding the game balls is determined.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase or decrease.

According to inventions 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game is interrupted for an extended period, the decline in enjoyment can be suppressed.

(24A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls that a player will win at a predetermined time,
The system includes a means for detecting the number of balls consumed by the player,
The control means is
If the predetermined timing and the detection of consumed balls by the ball consumption detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the number of consumed balls detected are counted within the same repetition.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it calculates information relating to the game value using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(24B) The information relating to the game value is a basis,
The control means is
The game's progression is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value, and a normal game state other than the aforementioned special game state.
The total number of winning balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.

According to inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game tokens acquired by the player can be displayed quickly.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
An outlet detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through an outlet located at the bottom of the game area,
It includes a means for detecting a prize ball that enters a designated prize slot,
The control means is
The game has a game state control means that controls the game to one of two game states, where there is at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than in the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the outlet is counted from the output of the outlet detection means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detection means,
The number of balls consumed by the player is calculated by summing the number of balls that passed through the counted out gate and the number of balls that entered the winning slot.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, at a predetermined timing, it calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
It includes a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means is
The game has a game state control means that controls the game to one of two game states, where there is at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than in the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of game balls consumed by the player is counted.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, at a predetermined timing, it calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
It includes a detection means for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the gaming machine,
The control means is
The game has a game state control means that controls the game to one of two game states, where there is at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than in the normal game state.
The number of game balls dispensed from the game machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of game balls consumed by the player is counted.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, at a predetermined timing, it calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

According to inventions 25A to 25C, the process related to acquiring game tokens can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It includes a display means for displaying information related to the assigned game value,
The control means is
A game state control means that controls the game to one of two game states, where there are at least two states: a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than in the normal game state.
A prize ball counting means that counts the number of prize balls while excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area enters a prize-winning slot,
It has a means for counting the number of game balls consumed by the player, excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means updates information regarding the game value using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26B) The information relating to the game value is a basis,
Excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area enters a prize-winning slot, the number of prize balls awarded in the normal game state is counted.
Excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area, the number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(26C) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means excludes a predetermined period from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed after detecting the passage of a game ball through the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or its entry into the prize slot provided on the right side of the game area.

(26D) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines the predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the last detection, the time required to consume a predetermined number of game balls, or the time required to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls.

(26E) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means counts the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed, excluding the number of balls passing through the gate section provided on the right side of the game area and the number of prize balls entering the prize entry point provided on the right side of the game area.

According to inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
A first data setting means for setting first data based on the results of the game,
A second data setting means for setting second data that is not based on the results of the game,
A third data setting means for setting third data based on the results of the game,
A first conversion means that obtains first converted data from first data set by the first data setting means and second data set by the second data setting means,
A second conversion means that obtains second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means,
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means that does not display the first converted data but displays the second converted data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first conversion means is a multiplication means that, at a timing when a predetermined condition is met, multiplies the first data and the second data to obtain the first converted data.

(27D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second conversion means is a division means that, at the timing when a predetermined condition is met, divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain the second conversion data.

(27E) The first data is the game value (e.g., the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data mentioned above represents the value of the game consumed by the player (e.g., the number of balls that went out),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain second conversion data, and obtains information regarding the assigned game value.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display unit displays information relating to the game value (e.g., base) obtained by the second conversion means.

According to inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding the results of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value necessary for evaluating the game machine can be displayed accurately in real time. Furthermore, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the game value (e.g., the base value) can be displayed accurately in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A control means that performs periodic processing to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
It has a conversion means for calculating the aforementioned game value,
The control means is
Arguments are passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted by the conversion means based on those arguments is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform the process of passing the aforementioned arguments and the process of obtaining the result of the aforementioned conversion within a single periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means is
This is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register for inputting the divisor, a dividend register for inputting the dividend, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means is
Write the arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed since the argument was written, the quotient is read from the result register.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is performed before the predetermined time after the termination of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) A means for counting the number of game media provided to a player in a predetermined game state,
It has a means for counting the number of game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state,
The control means is
The number of prize game media counted by the prize game media counting means is multiplied by 100 and the result is written to the dividend register.
The number of game media consumed counted by the consumption media counting means is written to the divisor dial.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it reads a base value from the result register.

According to inventions 28A to 28C, information regarding the game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing arguments to the conversion circuit and the process of obtaining the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within a single iterative process (timer interrupt processing), the complexity of the control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A prize slot into which the game ball can enter,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information regarding the assigned game value,
A ball consumption counting means for counting the number of balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls to be awarded to the player,
At least one of the prize-winning slots is a specific prize-winning slot that can be switched between an open state that makes it easy for game balls to enter and a closed state that makes it difficult for game balls to enter.
The control means is
Based on the counted number of balls consumed and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if a prize is detected in the specified prize slot despite the slot being in the closed state, it is determined that there is a prize anomaly, and when this determination is made, the number of prize balls related to the prize anomaly is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the prize winning slots is a starting prize winning slot that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls,
The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines that there is a prize entry abnormality when a prize is detected in the starting prize entry while the starting prize entry is closed, excludes the number of prize balls related to the prize entry from the number of balls consumed, and updates the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means.

(29C) At least one of the prize winning slots is a large prize winning slot that is opened in a special game state,
The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines that a prize is awarded when a prize is awarded to the prize-winning opening while the prize-winning opening is closed, excludes the number of prize-winning balls from the number of balls consumed, and updates the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means.

(29D) The system has a means for detecting the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the ball consumption counting means counts the number of balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of balls consumed detected by the ball consumption detection means.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed used to calculate the information relating to the game value,
The amusement machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the ball consumption counting means adds the number of balls consumed detected by the ball consumption detection means to the total number of balls consumed, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of balls consumed, and counts the number of balls consumed.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed used to calculate the information relating to the game value,
The amusement machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the ball consumption counting means counts the balls consumed by subtracting the number of balls consumed due to the prize-winning abnormality from the number of balls consumed detected by the ball consumption detection means and adding this value to the total number of balls consumed.

(29G) The prize entry opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter.
The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means detects a prize entry into the prize entry slot in a closed state and does not dispense prize balls in connection with the prize entry, determines that there is a prize entry abnormality, excludes the number of prize balls related to the prize entry from the number of balls consumed, and updates the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means.

(29H) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, when multiple abnormalities in ball entry into the prize slot are detected within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of balls involved in the abnormal entry from the number of balls consumed and updates the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means.

According to inventions 29A to 29H, information regarding the results of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning combinations from the total number of balls lost, information regarding the game value (e.g., base value) can be displayed accurately in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that provides a gaming medium to a player as a prize,
A game area with multiple prize slots,
A prize awarding means that, when a game medium is detected in each of the aforementioned prize slots, awards a specific prize predetermined from among several prizes,
A calculation processing means that performs a predetermined calculation using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media awarded as prizes by the prize awarding means,
Processing means for processing the results of the calculation process performed by the calculation processing means,
The system includes a display means for displaying the results of the calculation process performed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific prize occurs among the multiple prizes mentioned above during gameplay, the prize awarding means awards the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the calculation process in such a way that it does not change.

According to the 30 inventions, information regarding the results of a game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, even when a prize is awarded in conjunction with the occurrence of a specific prize (for example, prize balls dispensed upon entry into a prize slot that awards a high-value prize (such as a general prize slot or a large prize slot with a large number of prize balls)), the result of the calculation process (the calculated base value) can be displayed without changing, making it easy to determine whether the game machine is performing as intended (for example, whether it is performing according to the set payout rate).

(31A) A gaming machine comprising a main control means including a lottery means that performs a lottery regarding winning or losing when certain conditions are met, and a peripheral control means that controls a predetermined performance based on a signal from the main control means,
The peripheral control means is
A temporary storage means that stores information based on the signal received from the main control means,
Information storage means that is updated by information stored in the temporary storage means,
The system includes a first information output means that outputs at least a portion of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when predetermined conditions are met,
A gaming machine characterized by its ability to track the status history of the aforementioned gaming machine.

(31B) Even when not in a special game state, the game is equipped with a general prize entry point into which game balls launched into the game area can be entered.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating that a prize has been won in the general prize slot.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first information output means outputs to the outside information regarding winning a prize in the general prize slot when predetermined conditions are met.

(31C) External output means that outputs information based on predetermined conditions to an external terminal board when predetermined conditions are met,
When the aforementioned predetermined conditions are met, an information storage means stores more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, further comprising an information presentation means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) The system is equipped with a first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, further comprising a limited initialization means that, even when initialized by the first initialization means, does not initialize a portion of the information stored in the storage means.

(31E) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
The system comprises a second initialization means for initializing the contents of the information storage means,
The aforementioned information storage means is capable of retaining its contents even when the power to the gaming machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first initialization means does not initialize the contents of the information storage means, but initializes the contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time of reception of said signal in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include signals relating to counting events that are counted in accordance with the progress of the game, and signals relating to state change events that trigger changes in the state of the game machine.
The peripheral control means is
A temporary storage means that stores information based on the signal received from the main control means,
Information storage means that is updated by information stored in the temporary storage means,
The system includes a first information output means that outputs at least a portion of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when predetermined conditions are met,
The peripheral control means is
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when it receives a signal relating to the state change event from the main control means, it stores the state change event in the information storage means and stores the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means in the information storage means.

(31H) The signals transmitted from the main control means include signals relating to counting events that are counted for the management of the gaming machine, and signals relating to state change events that trigger changes in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting events for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means is
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
The amusement machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, upon receiving a signal relating to the state change event from the main control means, the type of signal relating to the state change event and the time the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counting results of the counting events stored in the temporary storage means are added to the counting results of the counting events stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signals transmitted from the main control means include signals relating to counting events that are counted for the management of the gaming machine, and signals relating to state change events that trigger changes in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting events for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means is
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, upon receiving a signal relating to the state change event from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

According to inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the history of how the number of balls dispensed has changed. In particular, according to inventions 31D and 31E, information related to the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine that provides players with prize game media as game value,
A control means for performing periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A means for counting the amount of game media consumed by a player,
A means for counting the number of prize game media to be given to players,
A calculation means that uses the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media to calculate information regarding the assigned game value,
A first group of light-emitting elements includes multiple light-emitting elements that display information related to the game, including the display of changing patterns,
It has a second group of light-emitting elements, which includes a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information related to the assigned game value,
The first group of light-emitting elements has a first terminal to which one terminal of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements are each connected.
The second group of light-emitting elements has a third terminal to which one terminal of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements are each connected.
The first terminal of the first group of light-emitting elements and the third terminal of the second group of light-emitting elements are connected to a single output driving means.
The control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but during the period in which the selection signal is output, it outputs a signal to the plurality of second terminals to light up at least one light-emitting element of the first light-emitting element group and a signal to the plurality of fourth terminals to light up at least one light-emitting element of the second light-emitting element group at different timings, thereby controlling the display of the first light-emitting element group and the second light-emitting element group within a single periodic processing cycle.

According to invention 32, a circuit for displaying information regarding the assigned game value (e.g., base value and payout ratio) can be simply configured, and information regarding the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that provides players with prize game media as game value,
A control means for performing periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A means for counting the amount of game media consumed by a player,
A means for counting the number of prize game media to be given to players,
A calculation means that uses the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media to calculate information regarding the assigned game value,
A first group of light-emitting elements includes multiple light-emitting elements that display information related to the game, including the display of changing patterns,
It has a second group of light-emitting elements, which includes a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information related to the assigned game value,
The first group of light-emitting elements has a first terminal to which one terminal of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements are each connected.
The second group of light-emitting elements has a third terminal to which one terminal of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of each of the plurality of light-emitting elements are each connected.
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light-emitting group, the signals output to the plurality of second terminals to light up at least one light-emitting element of the first light-emitting group in response to the selection signal output to the first terminal, the selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light-emitting group, and the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals to light up at least one light-emitting element of the second light-emitting group in response to the selection signal output to the third terminal are all output within the same periodic process, but the process of outputting the selection signal output to the first terminal and the signals output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the process of outputting the selection signal output to the third terminal and the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals corresponding to the selection signal are different processes within the same periodic process, and the signals are output at different timings within the periodic process.

According to invention 33, the circuit for displaying information regarding the assigned game value can be simply configured. Therefore, information regarding the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that provides players with prize game media as game value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for counting the amount of game media consumed by a player,
A means for counting the number of prize game media to be given to players,
A calculation means that uses the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media to calculate information regarding the assigned game value,
It has a calculation result display means that displays information related to the game value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means is
A control device that performs processing for game control,
Timing means for generating signals (for example, clock signals and reset signals) that determine the operating timing of the control device,
The control device has an output drive means that controls at least the calculation result display means and outputs a control signal for displaying the result,
A gaming machine characterized in that, on a circuit board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction, away from the timing means.

(34B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the connection lines between the control device and the timing means, and the connection lines between the control device and the output driving means, are arranged on the circuit board so as not to cross each other.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillator circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, on a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillator circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged separately from the reset circuit and the oscillator circuit.

According to inventions 34A to 34C, interference between signals related to game control and signals for displaying game-related information can be suppressed. Therefore, the impact on game control is reduced, and information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that provides players with prize game media as game value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for counting the amount of game media consumed by a player,
A means for counting the number of prize game media to be given to players,
A calculation means that uses the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media to calculate information regarding the assigned game value,
The control means controls the display means which displays information related to the game value,
The control means is
A control device that performs processing for game control,
The control device accesses a memory that stores at least information related to the game value when the aforementioned process is executed,
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory,
The control means is
A first initialization means that determines whether the data stored in the memory is normal or not at a predetermined timing, and if it is determined to be abnormal, initializes a predetermined first area of the memory.
The system includes a second initialization means that determines whether the input means is being operated when the power is turned on, and if it is determined that it is being operated, initializes a predetermined second area of the memory.
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means include an overlapping region that is initialized in common by both the first and second initialization means.
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information relating to the game value is stored in the first region other than the overlapping region.

(35B) The first area stores data used to calculate the information relating to the game value,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game.
The control means is
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized.
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) The first region stores data used to calculate the game value,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game.
The control means is
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process, which is repeatedly performed at predetermined time intervals, is executed.

(35E) The game machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time it calculates the information relating to the game value.

(35F) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to inventions 35A to 35F, the memory storing information regarding the assigned game value (base value and payout ratio) can be appropriately controlled. Therefore, information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that provides players with prize game media as game value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for counting the amount of game media consumed by a player,
A means for counting the number of prize game media to be given to players,
A calculation means that uses the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media to calculate information regarding the assigned game value,
A display means for displaying information relating to the game value,
It has an electric mechanism that is operated by the aforementioned control means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, under certain conditions, when multiple gaming media enter the machine during the operation of an electric mechanism triggered by a single win, some of the winning gaming media are used in calculating the information related to the game value, while others are not used in calculating the information related to the game value, but all of the gaming media can trigger a variable display game.

(36B) The control means is
When the specified starting conditions are met, the variable display game will be executed.
Based on the results of the aforementioned variable display game, the game is controlled to either a first game state that is advantageous to the player (such as a shortened time state, a high probability state, or a big win) or a second game state that is less advantageous than the first game state (a normal state).
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when multiple gaming media enter a prize during a single operation of the electric mechanism, the gaming media that enter a prize in the second game state are used in calculating the information regarding the game value, while the gaming media that enter a prize in the first game state are not used in calculating the information regarding the game value, but any of the gaming media can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
It detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
The amusement machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when multiple game media enter the game during a single operation of the electric mechanism, game media that enter the game while a predetermined type of error is detected are not used in calculating the game value information, and game media that enter the game while no predetermined type of error is detected are used in calculating the game value information, but any game media can trigger a variable display game.

According to inventions 36A to 36C, the use of the game medium for calculating information related to game value is switched depending on the state of the game machine, allowing for the rapid and accurate display of information related to game value.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main frame supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making setting changes difficult when the main body frame is closed relative to the outer frame, compared to when the main body frame is open relative to the outer frame.

(37B) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main frame supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and on which a game board is provided, and a setting status display unit that displays the changed setting status when a setting change operation is performed to change the setting status related to the game,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making the display content of the setting status display unit difficult to see when the main body frame is closed to the outer frame.

(37C) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main frame supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determination operation unit on which setting determination operations are performed to determine the setting state related to the game,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making it difficult to operate the setting determination operation unit when the main body frame is closed to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main frame supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting change operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game,
The aforementioned setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the main body frame is in a closed state relative to the outer frame, a specific part of the outer frame prevents the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion part.

According to inventions 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for fraudulent individuals to change the settings of the gaming machine, thereby increasing its reliability.

(37E) A gaming machine that displays a change in the symbols based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the change in the symbols, grants a predetermined gaming benefit,
A variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the aforementioned pattern,
It includes a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
The game machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time determination means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that displays a change in the symbols based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the change in the symbols, grants a predetermined gaming benefit,
A variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the aforementioned pattern,
The system includes a probability determination unit that determines the probability of obtaining the aforementioned result to be one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
The game machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time determination means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that displays a change in the symbols based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the change in the symbols, grants a predetermined gaming benefit,
A variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the aforementioned pattern,
It includes a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
The variation time determination means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, or it may determine different variation times depending on the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of determining different variation times according to the aforementioned setting information is set lower than the probability of determining a common variation time.

(37H) A gaming machine that displays a change in the symbols based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the change in the symbols, grants a predetermined gaming benefit,
A variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the aforementioned pattern,
A setting information determination unit that determines one of several predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a specific operation unit,
It comprises a performance control unit that performs a predetermined performance,
The aforementioned variation time determination means can determine different variation times according to the setting information,
The game machine is characterized in that, when the performance control unit determines a specific variation time corresponding to a specific setting information among the setting information by the variation time determination means, it sequentially performs a result suggestion performance that suggests the result of the variation display of the symbols and a setting suggestion performance that suggests the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit within the specific variation time.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting status in a new manner, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(37I) A gaming machine comprising: a main control board on which a game control unit that performs control related to gaming is provided; a separate control board connected to the main control board and on which a control unit separate from the game control unit is provided; and a setting-related operation unit for changing the setting state related to gaming performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a setting change permission state generating means that allows operations related to changing the setting state on the setting-related operation unit,
The aforementioned setting change permission generating means is characterized in that it allows an operation related to changing the setting state when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information.

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for fraudulent individuals to change the settings, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game machine comprising a game control unit that performs control related to the game, and a setting change operation unit for changing the setting state related to the control performed by the game control unit, wherein the game machine awards a game prize when a game ball launched towards the game area by the operation of a predetermined launch operation unit by the player enters a predetermined prize pocket,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for disabling the firing of game balls by operating the firing operation unit for a predetermined period of time when the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed.

According to the invention of 37J, it is possible to suppress acts of illegally changing the setting state.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a gaming control unit that performs control related to gaming, and a setting operation unit for changing the settings related to the control performed by the gaming control unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are housed in a single case.

(38B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the case can accommodate, together with the game control unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform operations to change the settings, instead of the setting operation unit.

(38C) The setting operation unit is,
A first operation unit for initiating a setting state in which the aforementioned settings can be changed,
A second operation unit for confirming the aforementioned settings and ending the aforementioned setting state,
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized by having a setting display that shows the contents of the settings.

(38D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the dummy unit does not have the first operation unit, the second operation unit, or the setting display unit.

According to inventions 38A to 38D, the specifications of gaming machines with and without setting functions can be standardized, allowing for efficient design and production.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling the game and a memory that the processor accesses,
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory,
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation unit for changing the settings related to the control performed by the aforementioned gaming control unit,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for initiating a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The aforementioned game control unit,
When the gaming machine is powered on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected.
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

(39B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the termination of the setting state.

(39C) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the gaming control unit initializes the memory in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region.

According to inventions 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent accidental operation during setting changes.

(40A) A gaming machine comprising a gaming control unit that performs control related to gaming, and a setting operation unit for changing the settings related to the control performed by the gaming control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means that displays information regarding the assigned game value,
The setting operation unit includes a setting change operation unit for initiating a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting.
The game control unit is characterized in that, in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means are displayed in a way that does not cause confusion.

(40B) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the game control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in a single case.

(40C) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the game value display means and the setting display means are composed of a single display unit.

(40D) The game value display means displays information regarding the assigned game value on the display without delay in accordance with the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information about the setting on the display device in place of the information about the assigned game value when the setting state is reached.

(40E) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the game value display means and the setting display means are composed of separate displays.

(40F) The game value display means is
In settings other than those described above, information regarding the assigned game value will be displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the aforementioned setting state, one of the characters, numbers, or shapes that are not displayed in the aforementioned setting state is displayed.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means is
In settings other than those described above, information regarding the assigned game value will be displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the aforementioned setting state, the lights may be turned off or all lights may be turned on.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

According to inventions 40A to 40G, confusion between multiple displays placed on a substrate can be prevented.

(41A) A lottery means that conducts a lottery regarding a win based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting gate,
A performance determination means that determines one of several performances based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined control unit, a setting information determination means determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game,
The system includes a setting information confirmation means that, when an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, displays the setting information determined by the setting information determination means on a predetermined display unit,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion performance even if a different operation is performed when it has been decided by the performance determination means to perform the setting suggestion performance.

(41B) A lottery means that conducts a lottery regarding a win based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting gate,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined control unit, a setting information determination means determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game,
A performance determination means that determines one of several performances based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for executing the performance determined by the performance determination means,
An error detection means for detecting errors,
The system includes an error notification means that notifies the error detected by the error detection means,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means,
The aforementioned performance execution means is characterized in that it can execute the setting suggestion performance during the period in which the error notification means notifies of an error that satisfies predetermined conditions.

(41C) A means for acquiring lottery information that acquires lottery information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means determines whether it is a win,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
If the aforementioned starting conditions are met but the aforementioned commencement conditions are not met, a holding means stores and reserves the lottery information up to a predetermined number,
A setting information determination means that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a predetermined control unit,
It comprises a display means on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
The aforementioned performance includes an expected performance for the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the aforementioned expectation suggestion performance is to be performed during the variation period of a special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the aforementioned expectation suggestion performance will be performed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is being held in reserve, the execution of the aforementioned setting suggestion performance in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition is restricted.

(41D) A means for acquiring lottery information that acquires lottery information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means determines whether it is a win,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
If the aforementioned starting conditions are met but the aforementioned commencement conditions are not met, a holding means stores and reserves the lottery information up to a predetermined number,
A setting information determination means that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a predetermined control unit,
It comprises a display means on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
The aforementioned performance includes an expected performance for the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance is to be performed during the variation period of a special symbol variation in which it has been decided that the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance will be performed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is being held, the aforementioned start condition can be newly established, and the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance and the aforementioned setting-indicating performance can be performed in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41E) A means for acquiring lottery information that acquires lottery information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means determines whether it is a win,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
If the aforementioned starting conditions are met but the aforementioned commencement conditions are not met, a holding means stores and reserves the lottery information up to a predetermined number,
A setting information determination means that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a predetermined control unit,
It comprises a display means on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
The aforementioned performance includes an expected performance for the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the aforementioned expectation suggestion effect and the aforementioned setting suggestion effect are to be executed during the variation period of a special symbol variation in which it has been decided that such effect will be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is being held in reserve, the execution of the aforementioned setting suggestion effect in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition is restricted.

(41F) A means for acquiring lottery information that acquires lottery information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means determines whether it is a win,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
If the aforementioned starting conditions are met but the aforementioned commencement conditions are not met, a holding means stores and reserves the lottery information up to a predetermined number,
A setting information determination means that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a predetermined control unit,
It comprises a display means on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
The aforementioned performance includes an expected performance for the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance and the aforementioned setting-indicating performance are to be performed during the variation period of a special symbol variation in which it has been decided that such performance will be performed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is being held in reserve, the performance of the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance and the aforementioned setting-indicating performance will be to be restricted in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41G) A means for acquiring lottery information that acquires lottery information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means determines whether it is a win,
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions,
If the aforementioned starting conditions are met but the aforementioned commencement conditions are not met, a holding means stores and reserves the lottery information up to a predetermined number,
A setting information determination means that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to the game based on an operation on a predetermined control unit,
It comprises a display means on which a predetermined effect is displayed,
The aforementioned performance includes an expected performance for the determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance and the aforementioned setting-indicating performance are to be performed during the variation period of a special symbol variation in which it has been decided that such performance will be performed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is being held, the aforementioned start condition can be newly established, and the aforementioned expectation-indicating performance and the aforementioned setting-indicating performance can be performed in the special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

According to inventions 41A to 41G, the enjoyment of games can be improved.

(42A) A gaming machine equipped with a main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of a lottery in the game,
The main control means is
A program storage means for storing a first program and a second program,
A calculation means that performs the necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program,
The first storage means has multiple storage areas for temporarily storing data in the aforementioned calculation process,
It includes a second storage means having a storage area with the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means are configured such that access is enabled or disabled so that either one is accessible.
The aforementioned calculation means
When the first program is executed, the first storage means is used,
A gaming machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42B) A gaming machine characterized in that the first storage means and the second storage means can be accessed or disabled by a single instruction input to the arithmetic means.

(42C) A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the instructions (opcode) and arguments (operands) differs between the instruction to make the first storage means accessible and the instruction to make the second storage means accessible.

(42D) The first program is a program (within the game control area) that performs the lottery for winning or losing in the game,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second program is a program (outside the game control area) that calculates information regarding the game value assigned during a game, and is called and executed by the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine equipped with a main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of a lottery in the game,
The main control means is
A program storage means for storing a first program and a second program,
A calculation means that performs the necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program,
The first storage means has multiple storage areas for temporarily storing data in the aforementioned calculation process,
It includes a second storage means having a storage area with the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means are configured such that access is enabled or disabled,
The aforementioned calculation means is
When the first program is executed, the first storage means is used,
At the start of the second program, the second program switches from making the first storage means inaccessible to making the second storage means accessible.
A gaming machine characterized by using the second storage means when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches to a state where the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible within the second program.

(42G) A gaming machine equipped with a main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of a lottery in the game,
The main control means is
A program storage means for storing a first program and a second program,
A calculation means that performs the necessary calculation processing using the first program and the second program,
The first storage means has multiple storage areas for temporarily storing data in the aforementioned calculation process,
It includes a second storage means having a storage area with the same configuration as the first storage means,
The first storage means and the second storage means are configured such that access is enabled or disabled so that either one is accessible.
The aforementioned calculation means
When the first program is executed, the first storage means is used,
When the second program is started, the first program switches from making the first storage means inaccessible to making the second storage means accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) The gaming machine is characterized in that, after the termination of the second program, the calculation means switches to a state where the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible in the first program that has returned from the second program.

According to inventions 42A to 42H, when transferring processing between programs, data can be saved quickly with simple instructions, reducing the number of precautions required during program creation.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
A peripheral control means that controls the game's effects based on instructions from the main control means,
A display device that performs a visual display under the control of the aforementioned peripheral control means,
A display panel that shows the animation patterns,
The system includes a light-emitting device controlled by the peripheral control means that emits light from multiple positions on the side of the display panel so as to move through the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of first reflective parts that reflect light traveling through the display panel along a specific path towards the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect light traveling through the display panel along multiple paths towards the front of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means is
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflector, a dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by the second reflector reflecting light from the light-emitting device.

(43B) The light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means changes the light emission color of the plurality of light-emitting elements over time, and causes light of different colors to travel through the display panel along different paths, thereby causing light of different colors to be emitted from the plurality of first reflectors, and thereby changing the color of the image projected by the plurality of first reflectors over time.

(43C) The light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions toward the side of the display panel,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means switches the illumination of the plurality of light-emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and causes light to be emitted from at least a portion of the plurality of first reflectors, thereby changing the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflectors according to the passage of time.

(43D) The light-emitting device has a plurality of light-emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions toward the side of the display panel,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means switches the number of light-emitting elements among the plurality of light-emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and causes light to be emitted from at least a portion of the plurality of first reflectors, thereby changing the color of the image projected by the plurality of first reflectors according to the passage of time.

According to inventions 43A to 43D, moving and stationary patterns can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
A peripheral control means that controls the game's effects based on instructions from the main control means,
A display device that performs a visual display under the control of the aforementioned peripheral control means,
A display panel that shows the animation patterns,
The system includes a light-emitting device controlled by the peripheral control means that emits light from multiple positions on the side of the display panel so as to move within the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of first reflective parts that reflect light traveling through the display panel along a specific path towards the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality of second reflective parts that reflect light traveling through the display panel along multiple paths towards the front of the gaming machine.
The first reflective section includes a plurality of first right-eye reflective sections that reflect light traveling through the display panel along a specific path toward the player's right eye, and a plurality of first left-eye reflective sections that reflect light toward the player's left eye.
The plurality of first right-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel to form a right-eye pattern.
The plurality of first left-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel such that they form left-eye patterns at positions different from those for the right eye.
The peripheral control means is
By illuminating the light-emitting device so that light emitting in the same pattern reaches the first right-eye reflective section and the first left-eye reflective section, the right-eye pattern and the left-eye pattern are displayed on the display panel, allowing the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern that creates parallax between the left and right eyes.
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light-emitting device with the second reflector.

(44B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the second reflective portion displays the planar pattern on the display panel by reflecting light traveling through multiple paths within the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in directions that reach the player's right eye and left eye.

(44C) The second reflective section includes a plurality of second right-eye reflective sections that reflect light traveling through the display panel along a specific path toward the player's right eye, and a plurality of second left-eye reflective sections that reflect light toward the player's left eye.
The plurality of second right-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel to form a right-eye pattern.
The plurality of second left-eye reflective sections are arranged on the display panel such that they form a left-eye pattern in the same position as the right-eye pattern.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the planar pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting part.

According to inventions 44A to 44C, three-dimensional and two-dimensional patterns can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

(45A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
A peripheral control means that controls the game's effects based on instructions from the main control means,
A display device that performs a visual display under the control of the aforementioned peripheral control means,
A display panel that shows the animation patterns,
The system includes a light-emitting device controlled by the peripheral control means that emits light from multiple positions on the side of the display panel so as to move within the display panel,
The peripheral control means is
By illuminating the aforementioned light-emitting device, both dynamic and static patterns can be displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized by performing a presentation that suggests the result of the winning or losing lottery by combining the display of the dynamic image and the display of the static image.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling through the display panel in a specific path and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of second reflectors that reflect light traveling through the display panel in a plurality of paths and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means is
By causing the light-emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling within the display panel is changed, thereby altering the light reflected by the first reflector, and thus displaying a changing pattern on the display panel.
The second reflector reflects the light from the light-emitting device, thereby displaying a stationary image on the display panel.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it performs a presentation that suggests the result of the winning or losing lottery by combining the display of the changing patterns and the display of the stationary patterns.

According to inventions 45A to 45B, moving and stationary patterns can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(46A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to the player,
A main control means that derives a game state favorable to the player based on the result of the lottery in the game,
A peripheral control means that controls the game's effects based on instructions from the main control means,
A display device that displays a performance image under the control of the aforementioned peripheral control means,
A display panel that shows the animation patterns,
The system includes a light-emitting device controlled by the peripheral control means that emits light from multiple positions on the side of the display panel so as to move within the display panel,
The display panel has a plurality of reflective parts that reflect light traveling within the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means is
By illuminating the aforementioned light-emitting device, the target pattern is displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized by displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or letter.

(46C) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel, and then displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device.

(46D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel.

According to inventions 46A to 46D, multiple patterns or patterns of different forms can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

(47A) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
A gaming machine comprising setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned gaming control means,
The aforementioned game control means is
The following processes are performed: a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals.
When the setting operation means is operated and power is turned on to the gaming machine, in the power-on processing, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is executed according to the operation state of the setting operation means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, after executing a setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the periodic processing enables the execution of a process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(47B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the periodic processing includes processing related to changing the setting value, processing related to confirming the setting value, processing related to normal gameplay, and processing that is performed in common in at least two of the plurality of processing.

(47C) The periodic processing consists of at least a first iterative processing that performs processing related to the normal gameplay and a second iterative processing that performs processing related to the change of settings,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming control means selectively executes the first iterative process and the second iterative process depending on the operating mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the contents of the memory are backed up when the power is cut off.
The aforementioned game control means is
In the setting change mode, the setting state management area is set to indicate that it is in the setting change mode as a predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the setting confirmation mode, the setting status management area is set to indicate that it is in the setting confirmation mode as a predetermined condition.

(48) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
A gaming machine comprising setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned gaming control means,
The aforementioned game control means is
The following processes are performed: a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, in the power-on processing, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is executed according to the operation state of the setting operation means.
The aforementioned periodic processing enables the execution of normal game processing related to normal gameplay and setting processing related to setting changes or setting confirmations.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the normal gameplay process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes can be executed in common with the normal gameplay and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned game control means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The setting operation means consists of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The aforementioned game control means is
Equipped with a memory means capable of storing information related to the game,
In the power-on processing performed when power is turned on to the gaming machine, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored in a specific storage means among the storage means,
In the power-on process, when determining whether the setting operation means is being operated, the determination is made based on information stored in the specific storage means, without reading the output signal of the setting operation means.
The second setting operation means is a means for initializing the storage means when, in the power-on processing, the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the power-on processing, when the storage means is initialized if the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated, the specific storage means is not initialized.

(49B) The display device is equipped with peripheral control means for controlling the effects,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming control means determines the mode for starting the gaming machine based on the output signal stored in the memory after the activation of the peripheral control means.

(50A) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned game control means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The setting operation means consists of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The aforementioned game control means is
The storage means comprises at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area.
The first memory area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second memory area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
If it is determined that the aforementioned setting value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the first setting operation means among the setting operation means has not been operated and the second setting operation means has been operated, the first storage area is not initialized and the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is met.

(50C) The third memory area is a memory area other than the area that stores various parameters used in normal gameplay,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming control means determines that the third condition has been met when data backed up in the memory is erased in the event of a power outage, and initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area.

(51A) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned game control means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The aforementioned game control means is
It is equipped with a storage means that can retain information related to the game even when the power is turned off,
The following processes are performed: a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is executed at predetermined intervals.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, in the power-on processing, a setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is executed according to the operation state of the setting operation means.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means includes a setting state management area in which a value is stored corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, according to the operation state of the setting operation means, at least during the power-on processing.

(51B) The system is equipped with setting operation means which is operated to start in a setting change mode that changes the setting values related to the control performed by the game control means,
The aforementioned game control means is
When an operation is performed to start the gaming machine in the setting change mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, a predetermined area of the memory is initialized, and when the setting operation means is used to terminate the setting change mode, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the gaming machine is started in the normal game state in which game balls can be launched.
The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that when an operation is performed to start the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode while a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area continues, and even when the setting operation means is used to terminate the setting confirmation mode, the normal game state is not recorded in the setting state management area.

(52) A game control means that, upon the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, conducts a lottery for a special game that is beneficial to the player,
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm setting values related to the control performed by the aforementioned game control means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The aforementioned game control means is
The system is capable of performing a power-on process when power is turned on to the gaming machine, a first periodic process performed at predetermined first cycles, and a second periodic process performed at predetermined second cycles.
In the power-on processing, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means.
If the setting operation means determines that an operation associated with the setting operation is being performed, it will execute a setting corresponding to either a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed, depending on the operation state.
If the setting operation means determines that no operation associated with the setting operation has been performed, the normal game start process can be executed without performing a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed.
The first periodic processing is performed after the power-on processing has executed the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second periodic processing is performed after the normal game start processing is made possible in the power-on processing.

(53A) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A mechanism controlled according to a control signal output from the aforementioned game control means,
It comprises a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the aforementioned mechanism,
A gaming machine capable of being equipped with a test signal generation circuit for outputting test signals used for testing gaming machines,
The aforementioned test signal generation circuit is:
A second driver circuit receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the said control signal,
Includes a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The first driver circuit converts the control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the mechanism,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second driver circuit converts the control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each have an output transistor that switches the input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface-mount component.

(53E) Game control means that performs periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game,
A first detection means for detecting events related to the progress of the game that the game control means captures in the periodic processing,
A gaming machine comprising: a second detection means for detecting events related to the progress of the game that are captured by the game control means in processing other than the periodic processing;
The aforementioned game control means is
A conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal,
A serial input port into which a serial signal is input,
It has a general-purpose input port to which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The signal from the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to the control performed by the gaming control means.

(53G) A mechanism that is driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
The system includes a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the aforementioned mechanism,
The serial input port is a serial input/output port capable of inputting and outputting serial signals,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the mechanism from the serial input/output port,
The amusement machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) Game control means that performs periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game,
A gaming machine comprising a first detection means and a second detection means for detecting events related to the progress of the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
A conversion means for converting the signal from the first detection means into a serial signal,
A serial input port into which a serial signal is input,
It has a general-purpose input port to which signals from the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input,
The first detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting a signal once within one of the periodic processing steps.
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the results of detecting the signal multiple times within a single periodic processing cycle.
The signal from the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion means.
The signal from the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.
The game control means is characterized in that it detects the signal of the second detection means multiple times within a single periodic processing cycle and determines the signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to the control performed by the gaming control means.

(53J) Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the aforementioned mechanism,
The aforementioned game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts the control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on the second printed circuit board.
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal, which is a converted signal that repeats at a predetermined period, from the first printed circuit board side.

(53K) It is possible to install a test signal generation circuit for outputting test signals used for testing gaming machines,
The aforementioned test signal generation circuit is:
A second driver circuit receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the said control signal,
Includes a test connector that outputs the generated test signal,
The amusement machine is characterized in that the second driver circuit converts the control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the test signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board.

(53L) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in a single circuit board box.

(53M) The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first printed circuit board is sealed by a crimping mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each have an output transistor that switches the input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltage inputs and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

[16. Communication with various circuit boards when executing the setting function]
As mentioned above, in gaming machines with a setting function, the setting function (confirmation of setting information ("setting confirmation") and modification ("setting change")) can be executed by operating a specific control unit. The method for activating the setting function is as described above, but the processing on the main control board side when the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing will be explained with separate examples.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on and when the setting information is changed, main control recognition information, which is information for recognizing the main control board 1310, is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951). The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. This allows the ball information control board to determine whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is legitimate. If it is not determined to be legitimate, the ball information control board can stop operations related to prize balls, preventing tampering with the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) and allowing changes to the setting information on the main control board 1310 to be reflected in the ball information control board at an appropriate time.

[16-1. Initialization Process]
First, the initialization process in this embodiment (Another Example 5) will be described. Figures 274 and 275 are flowcharts of the initialization process in Another Example 5. The initialization process in Another Example 5 adds processing related to the setting function to the initialization process described in Figures 21 and 22, and omits processing related to the calculation of the bonus ratio. However, it is not necessary to omit the processing related to the calculation of the bonus ratio, and it was omitted for the sake of simplification.

When power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs power-on processing. Specifically, it first sets the stack pointer (step P10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address where the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use are temporarily stored on the stack, or the address where the return address of the main routine is temporarily stored when a subroutine finishes and returns to the main routine. The stack pointer advances each time an item is added to the stack. In step P10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the registers, the return address, etc., are pushed onto the stack. Then, by reading sequentially from the last stacked item to the first stacked item, the stack pointer returns to the initial address. Power-on processing corresponds to the processing in steps P10 to P52.

Following step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step P14). Note that the voltage does not rise immediately from the time of power-on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the power supply is suddenly temporarily suspended), the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, from the time of power-on until it reaches a predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step P12 is a process to wait after power-on until the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination in step P14 is performed based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After power-on, when the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit becomes silent, and the process proceeds to step P16.

In step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch (Figure 76) has been operated (step P16). This determination is made based on whether the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 has been operated and whether its operation signal (detection signal) has been input to the main control MPU. If a detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch has been operated; conversely, if no detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated.

If the system determines in step P16 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step P18) and proceeds to step P30. Conversely, if the system determines in step P16 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step P19) and proceeds to step P20.

The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to the game, such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") of the main control MPU 1311. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps P18 and P19 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

In step P20, the main control MPU 1311 performs a combination authentication process to determine whether the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the ball information control board is correct. The frame manufacturer identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame manufacturer identification information storage unit of the main control MPU 1311, and authentication is performed to determine whether correct frame manufacturer identification information has been output. If the authentication is successful, the process proceeds to step P30. If it is determined that the combination is incorrect, an abnormality notification is issued using a speaker, liquid crystal display, etc.

The main control MPU, upon proceeding to step P30, performs wait timer processing 2 (step P30). This wait timer processing 2 waits until the system controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600, controlled by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510, starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the boot time (boot timer) is set to 2 seconds (s).

In this embodiment, once the wait timer processing 2 (step P30) is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not an operation to change the setting information has occurred (step P3031). An operation to change the setting information refers to an operation to change the setting information, not an operation to confirm the setting information.

If an operation is performed to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the processes from step P44 onwards to clear the game information in the memory area, as the game will proceed after power-on based on the new setting information.

On the other hand, if there is no operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0 or not, and branches the processing based on the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 when game information is erased, and to value 0 when game information is not erased. If it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0, that is, when game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step P34, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the power-off processing (power-off) described later (step P36). If they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1 (step P38). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG were stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the power-off processing described later. It is set to value 1 when the power-off processing is completed successfully, and to value 0 when the power-off processing is not completed successfully.

Once the backup flag determination process (step P38) is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not an operation to check the setting information has been performed (step P3038). If an operation to check the setting information has been performed (result of step P3038 is "YES"), setting information indicating that the setting information is being checked is set (step P3039). To prevent the game from continuing while the setting information is being checked, setting the setting information prevents the execution of processes related to the game and prize balls. If there was no operation to check the setting information (result of step P3039 is "NO"), or after setting information has been set (step P3039), the work area of the main control's built-in RAM is set as power restored (step P40). This setting involves setting the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0, reading power restored information from the ROM built into the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and setting this power restored information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, "power restoration" includes not only the state of restoring power after it has been cut off, but also the state of power being restored after a blackout or momentary power interruption, and the state of resetting and then recovering after detecting exposure to high-frequency radiation.

Following step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs a power-on command creation process (step P42). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if in step P32 the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is determined to be not 0 (i.e., 1), meaning that game information is to be erased; or if in step P36 the checksum value (sum value) does not match; or if in step P38 the backup flag BK-FLG is determined to be not 1 (i.e., 0), meaning that the power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1311 clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" to the main control's built-in RAM (although a predetermined value may be read from the main control's built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase game information, when the SAM value does not match, or when the power-off process has not been completed properly, the random number used to determine the initial value of the random number used for determining the jackpot is retrieved from a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU. Based on this retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is performed to derive the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used for determining the jackpot, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, result of step P32 is "NO"), if information is not properly stored in RAM (RAM abnormality, result of step P36 is "NO", result of step P38 is "NO"), or when a setting is changed (result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, this is done by writing the value "00h" to the main control's built-in RAM (although a predetermined value may be read from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value and set). Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase game information, when the SAM value does not match, or when the power-off process has not been completed properly, the random number used to determine the initial value of the random number used for determining the jackpot is retrieved from a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU. Based on this retrieved ID code, an initial value derivation process is performed to derive the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used for determining the jackpot, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

Furthermore, the area cleared in the main control's built-in RAM may vary depending on the situation, rather than clearing the entire RAM. For example, during a RAM clear operation, all areas except the set value and setting-related work areas (including some RAM areas related to game processing) may be cleared; in the case of a RAM error, all areas in the RAM may be cleared; and during setting changes, only some RAM areas related to game processing may be cleared. In other words, all areas may be cleared in the case of a RAM error, but in other cases, the corresponding areas may be cleared according to the operation content. For example, the set value and setting-related work areas may not be cleared unless a RAM error is detected.

Furthermore, clearing a region can be done not only by setting "00h" to each region, but also by setting an initial value that does not disadvantage the player or the arcade (hall). For example, if the setting value is "00h" and it is the most advantageous setting for the player (high setting), then when the RAM is cleared, "00h" will be set and the game will start from the high setting, which is advantageous for the player but disadvantageous for the arcade. Therefore, when clearing the work region of the setting value, the lowest setting (for example, "05h") should be set.

When the processing in step P42 or step P48 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a setting process, that is, whether or not there is a setting confirmation or setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), the MPU sets up the system to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information (step P3049). If there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the system executes the processing from step P50 onwards without setting up the system to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt processing, after the setting confirmation or setting change is completed, the system sets up the system to notify the ball information control board of the main control recognition information.

Furthermore, when the notification of main control recognition information is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the memory area for storing information to be transmitted to the ball information control board. For example, if the area for storing untransmitted information is in a ring buffer format, the read counter and write counter, which indicate the read and write positions within the buffer, are initialized (both set to 0), and the buffer for SIO communication is also cleared. If information remains in these buffers, the remaining information will be transmitted first when power is restored. This configuration ensures that the main control recognition information is always transmitted to the ball information control board first after power is turned on. When the ball information control board receives the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, it executes the corresponding processing and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. From the time the notification of main control recognition information is set until the response signal is received, the main control board 1310 is in a state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal. When the response signal for the main control recognition information is received, the state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal is released.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 authorizes the execution of the timer interrupt process by executing interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52). In this embodiment, if the main control recognition information is set to be notified to the ball information control board, the system is configured not to execute the processing necessary for normal gameplay until a response signal is received from the ball information control board. For example, the timer interrupt processing described later determines whether a response signal has been received, and if not, the process is skipped. This configuration ensures that the ball information control board is properly started before gameplay can begin.

When timer interrupt processing is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop processing. Specifically, it first sets value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is then cleared by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step P56). As described above, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary interruption, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power outage warning. The determination in step P56 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is received in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step P58). This non-win/lose random number update process updates, for example, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, and random numbers for determining initial values for minor jackpot symbols. Thus, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination). Note that random numbers for normal symbol win determination, random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbol win determination, and random numbers for normal symbol variable display patterns are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step P58, the process returns to step P54, setting value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Step P56 determines whether a power outage warning signal is present. If no power outage warning signal is present, step P58 performs a non-win/lose random number update process, and steps P54 through P58 are repeated. This process from step P54 to P58 constitutes the "main loop processing."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is received in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 disables interrupts (step P60). This setting prevents the timer interrupt processing described later, preventing writing to the main control's built-in RAM and protecting against overwriting of game information.

Following step P60, the main control MPU 1311 stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2550, the big prize port solenoids (attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556)), the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 1185, the special symbol memory indicator, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol memory indicator, the game status indicator, the round indicator, etc. (step P62).

Following step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step P64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step P66). This completes the storage of the backup information.

Following step P66, the main control MPU 1311 performs the watchdog timer clear setting (step P68). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

Following step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process that repeatedly performs no actions. The processing from steps P60 to P68 and the loop process are referred to as the "power-off processing." During this loop, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is not set to values A, B, and C in sequence, thus preventing the watchdog timer from being cleared. As a result, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a timeout signal. This timeout signal resets the main control MPU, which then repeats this power-on processing from the beginning.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) resets when there is a power outage or momentary power interruption, and then performs power-on processing upon restoration of power.

Furthermore, step P36 checks whether the backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is legitimate, and then step P38 checks whether the power-off process was completed successfully. In this way, the backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked twice to determine whether or not the backup information was stored through fraudulent means.

[16-2. Timer Interrupt Handling]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 1310 (Another Example 5) will be described. Figure 276 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing in Another Example 5. The timer interrupt processing in Another Example 5 is performed repeatedly at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on processing shown in Figure 274. In the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for confirming and changing the setting information is added.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in a state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal (step P3070). As described above, the state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal is a state in which the system waits after the notification setting of the main control recognition information until it receives a response signal output from the ball information control board. If the main control MPU 1311 is in the state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal (the result of step P3070 is "YES"), it skips the subsequent processing and terminates the timer interrupt processing. Note that in the processing of step P3070, in addition to determining whether or not it is in the state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal, it may also perform processing to communicate with the ball information control board. For example, in the processing of step P3070, various signals transmitted from the ball information control board can be received, and if the response signal of the main control recognition information is included, the state of waiting to receive the main control recognition information response signal can be released, and if it is any other signal, processing corresponding to the received signal can be performed. When the standby state for receiving the main control recognition information response signal is released, a launch permission signal is input to the ball information control board, enabling the launch of game balls from the ball launching device and allowing the game to begin.

If the main control MPU 1311 is not in a state of waiting for the main control recognition information response signal (the result of step P3070 is "NO"), it sets value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following value A, which was set in step P54 of the main loop processing.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). Clearing this interrupt flag initializes the interrupt cycle, and the next interrupt cycle is timed from its initial value.

Following step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step P74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the main control I/O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer subtraction process (step P76). This timer subtraction process manages time, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 1185 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process described later, and the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1189 lights up, as well as the time during which the ACK signal input determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the ball information main ACK signal, which indicates that the ball information control board has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), has been input. Specifically, when the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variation time, and the variation time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the result of this subtraction becomes 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input detection time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input detection time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input detection time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input detection time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs a win/loss random number update process (step P78). In this win/loss random number update process, the random numbers for determining the jackpot, the random numbers for the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for the minor jackpot symbols, as described above, are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process at step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in Figure 274, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols are updated in the main loop process and in this timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase their randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for determining the jackpot, the random numbers for the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for the minor jackpot symbols are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), so their respective counters are incremented only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. For example, the counter that updates the random number used to determine the jackpot is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767), and this range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time this timer interrupt process is performed. The counter counts up from the random number used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the random number used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination toward the random number used to determine the jackpot. Once the counter that updates the random number used to determine the jackpot has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number used to determine the jackpot, the random number used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. At this time, the updated value is determined by the main control MPU retrieving an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM. Based on this retrieved ID code, it performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used for jackpot determination. This derived fixed value is then set as the initial value. In other words, the random number used to determine the initial value for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code through the execution of the initial value derivation process. The random numbers used for determining normal symbol wins and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for normal symbol wins are also updated by this win/loss random number update process. The method for updating the random numbers used for normal symbol wins, etc., is the same as the method for updating the random number used for jackpot determination described above, and therefore its explanation is omitted.

Once the random number update process in step P78 is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not processing related to setting information (setting process) is currently being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it determines whether or not setting information is being modified or checked. For example, it can determine whether or not setting confirmation information is set.

The main control MPU 1311 performs prize ball control processing (step P80) if no processing related to setting information is currently being executed (the result of step P3080 is "NO"). This prize ball control processing reads input information from the aforementioned input information storage area and creates a prize ball command to be transmitted to the ball information control board based on this input information. It also creates a self-check command to confirm the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then transmitted to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, if one game ball enters the large prize slot, a prize ball command representing 15 balls is created and transmitted to the ball information control board. If the ball information main ACK signal, indicating that the ball information control board has successfully received this prize ball command, is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command to confirm the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board is created and transmitted to the ball information control board.

Following step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step P82). The ball information control board transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands categorized as status indicators. In the frame command reception processing of step P82, when these various commands are successfully received as ball information main serial data, information indicating this to the ball information control board is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, the command successfully received as ball information main serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command and stored as transmission information in the aforementioned transmission information storage area.

Following step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step P84). This fraud detection processing checks for abnormal conditions related to prize balls. For example, it reads input information from the input information storage area described above. When a detection signal is received from the count switch while the game is not in a jackpot state (e.g., when a game ball enters the jackpot slot), it creates a prize ball abnormality display command, which is classified as an abnormal condition and displayed as notification information, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining the jackpot mentioned above is taken out and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value that is pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state ("special lottery")), or the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and it is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation jackpot determination value that is pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a probability variation). Here, "probability variation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation state) which is set higher than the normal state (low probability). In this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is set from 32668 to 32767 for low probability and read from the normal determination table, while for high probability it is set from 32438 to 32767 and read from the probability variation determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing of step P86, when determining whether the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, the determination is made based on whether the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number falls within the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are from the first start port sensor 2104, various commands related to the synchronization effect of Special Figure 1 are created. If the lottery result is from the second start port sensor 2511, various commands related to the synchronization effect of Special Figure 2 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Furthermore, the output of a lighting signal to the special symbol display 1185 is set to light up the special symbol display 1185 according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Furthermore, depending on the game state being generated, for example, when a jackpot is achieved, various commands categorized as jackpot-related are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. A drive signal output to the jackpot solenoid is set to open and close the opening/closing mechanism and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of times (rounds) the jackpot opens from the closed state to the open state is two, a signal output to the 2-round indicator lamp on the round indicator is set to light up and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When there are 15 rounds, a signal output to the 15-round indicator lamp on the round indicator is set to light up and stored as output information in the output information storage area. A signal output to the game state indicator is set to light up in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not a probability change has occurred and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs control processing for normal symbols and normal electric prizes (step P88). In this control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate entry processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate entry processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 was input to the input terminal. Based on this determination, if a detection signal was input to the input terminal, the value of the counter used to update the random number for normal symbol win determination described above is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if processing related to setting information is currently underway (the result of step P3080 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 stops the game by skipping processes such as the prize ball control process (step P80). Then, it executes a setting change/confirmation process to modify or confirm the setting information (step P3082). During the setting change/confirmation process, the setting information is displayed on the touch panel or LCD display device 1600, or changes to the setting information are accepted from input devices such as the touch panel.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting process (setting change/confirmation process) is complete (step P3083). If the setting process is not complete (result of step P3083 is "NO"), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, if the setting change/confirmation process is complete (result of step P3083 is "YES"), the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board (step P3084), and the processes from step P92 onwards are executed. At this time, the memory area (work area) temporarily used to execute the setting process is initialized, and the setting process is set so that it cannot be executed again, such as by clearing the setting confirmation information. After that, the main control board 1310 remains in a state of waiting for the main control recognition information response signal to be received until it receives the main control recognition information response signal from the ball information control board.

As described above, when changing or confirming setting information, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board after the setting process is completed. However, if the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board during the power-on process (step P3039). Thus, in this embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board only once when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when a setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board only once after completion. This prevents the ball information control board from unnecessarily executing setting information processing multiple times, reducing the load on the gaming machine during startup and enabling rapid startup. Additionally, until the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response signal from the ball information control board (step P3070), the main control board can execute its processing only after the setting change has been reliably notified.

In the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 276, steps P80 to P90 were skipped during the setting process. However, the switch input processing (step P74), timer subtraction processing (step P76), and win/loss random number update processing (step P78) may also be skipped. Furthermore, the port output processing (step P90) may also be skipped. Since no processing necessary for normal gameplay is executed during the setting process, skipping these processes will not hinder subsequent gameplay. Therefore, skipping random number-related processing may reduce the load on the game machine during the setting process, or the random number-related processing may be executed even while the setting process is being performed by a game hall employee, thereby increasing the randomness of the random numbers by continuing to update them. Similarly, regarding switch input processing and port output processing, skipping these processes during setting changes may reduce the load on the game machine, or processing may be continued during setting changes to immediately reflect the results of switch inputs received during the setting change process upon recovery, or to prevent delays in processing at the output destination by continuously performing port output.

When the processing in step P88 or step P3084 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 performs port output processing (step P90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, based on the output information, when various commands from the ball information control board are successfully received from the output terminal of the main control I/O port 1314, the main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board. When a jackpot is in play, a drive signal is output to the jackpot solenoid, which controls the opening and closing of the jackpot opening mechanism, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2550, which controls the opening and closing of the movable piece. In addition, various game-related information signals (game information) such as 15-round jackpot information output signals, 2-round jackpot information output signals, probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output signals, and starter opening winning information output signals are output to the ball information control board.

Following step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. This transmission information stores various commands categorized as related to special feature 1 synchronization effects, special feature 2 synchronization effects, jackpot effects, power-on effects, general feature synchronization effects, general electric effect effects, notification display, status display, test effects, and other commands, all created in this routine's timer interrupt processing. Each main frequency serial data packet consists of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main-period serial data consists of a status indicating the command type (with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), a mode indicating the variation of the effect (also with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values. This sum value is created at the time of transmission. The processing from steps P74 to P92 will be referred to as "game control processing."

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). In step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, following the value B set in step P70. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to values A, B, and C in sequence, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 performs a register switch (return) (step P96) and terminates this routine. At this point, when the timer interrupt processing, which is part of this routine, begins, the main control MPU 1311 hardware-wise saves the contents of the general-purpose registers by pushing them onto the stack. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used during initialization from being corrupted. In step P96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written back to the original registers. After returning in step P96, the main control MPU 1311 sets the interrupt enable setting.

[16-3. Data transmission to the ball information control board]
In the aforementioned gaming machine, the transmission of data (main ball information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board was performed by the port output processing of the timer interrupt processing. As mentioned above, the main ball information serial data includes information related to prize balls (prize ball commands) and information for checking the connection status (self-check commands), and also includes the main control recognition information in this embodiment.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4ms, the ball information control board frequently received serial data for main ball information. However, as long as the total number of prize balls is correct and the player does not notice any discrepancies, it is not necessary to dispense prize balls in the order in which the balls entered the winning slots. If multiple types of winning slots occur in a short period, for example, if a ball enters a slot set to "4" and then another ball enters a slot set to "15" (the large prize slot), processing in the order of "15" and then "4" is acceptable. Therefore, in situations where prize ball commands are frequently generated, such as during a jackpot, there was a risk of a temporary increase in load.

In this embodiment, the interval at which data is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is set to be longer than the timer interrupt processing execution interval (4 ms) (for example, 100 ms), thereby reducing the number of communications and thus reducing the load on the data transmission from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. Furthermore, instead of generating a prize ball command for each winning combination, the load is further reduced by aggregating prize ball information at each communication cycle to the ball information control board, thereby reducing the amount of data transmitted. The following describes an example of the configuration of the prize ball data transmitted to the ball information control board.

Figure 277 illustrates an example of prize information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 277, the number of prizes won at each prize entry point, including the gate, is counted and stored as prize information. Then, each time the communication cycle arrives, the stored prize information is transmitted to the ball information control board. At this time, if the number of prizes is 0, transmission may be omitted.

The ball information control board, upon receiving prize information from the main control board 1310, calculates the number of prize balls by comparing it with the prize ball count table shown in Figure 278. In the example shown in Figures 277 and 278, the number of prize balls at the gate is 1, the number of prize balls at the upper start opening is 2, the number of prize balls at general prize opening 1 is 1, and the number of prize balls at general prize opening 2 is 1. Therefore, the prize balls at the gate are 1 × 0 = 1, the prize balls at the upper start opening are 2 × 3 = 6, the prize balls at general prize opening 1 are 1 × 1 = 1, and the prize balls at general prize opening 2 are 1 × 1 = 1. The total number of prize balls is 0 + 6 + 1 + 1 = 8.

Furthermore, the ball information control board may transmit the number of prize balls included in the winning information without maintaining a prize ball count table. Additionally, if the number of prize balls is the same even if multiple winning slots are located in different game areas, such as general winning slots, they may be aggregated. Figure 279 shows an example where the number of prize balls is included in the winning information; (A) shows the number of winning slots being aggregated for each general winning slot, and (B) shows the number of winning slots being aggregated from all general winning slots. This eliminates the need for the ball information control board to maintain a prize ball count table, allowing for centralized management by the main control board 1310.

In the examples explained in Figures 277 to 279, the order of winning entries within a communication cycle was ignored when creating the winning information. However, conventionally, the order of winning entries was tracked by generating commands sequentially upon winning. Here, Figure 280 shows an example where winning information is sent collectively for each communication cycle, while adding information regarding the winning order. Figure 280 shows an example where winning information is stored in the order of winning.

In the example shown in Figure 280, each time a game ball enters a prize slot, the sequence counter is incremented by 1, and a record is generated consisting of the sequence, prize type (prize slot), number of prize balls, and number of prizes. The number of prize balls may be omitted if it is stored by the ball information control board. Similarly, the number of prizes is usually 1 and can be omitted, but if prizes occur consecutively in the same prize slot, the number of prizes may be increased by the number of consecutive wins.

In the examples shown in Figures 277 to 279, the number of winning entries was increased by 1 for each win, and the winning entry information for transmission was created at the time of transmission to the ball information control board. However, in the example shown in Figure 280, a record of the winning entry information is generated for each win, and the generated winning entry information is transmitted at each communication cycle. In both cases, the transmitted winning entry information is discarded, and in the examples shown in Figures 277 to 279, the number of winning entries is cleared to 0. In the example shown in Figure 280, the transmitted records can simply be deleted.

As shown in the examples from Figures 277 to 279, counting only the number of winning entries while ignoring the order of winning entries reduces the processing load at the time of winning. On the other hand, as shown in the example in Figure 280, creating winning information at the time of winning allows for the preservation of the winning order. Furthermore, since there is no need to create winning information again when transmitting it, the generated winning information can be transmitted as is, reducing the load during winning information transmission. Additionally, by adding the number of winning entries when the same winning slot is hit consecutively, the number of winning information records can be reduced. Normally, in a jackpot state, the game balls are launched aiming for the large winning slot. If there are winning slots that can only be hit in specific game states (e.g., a probability variation state), the game balls are launched aiming for these slots when the specific game state is reached. Therefore, the increase in the number of winning information entries can be suppressed, especially in states where the number of winning entries is high.

The above describes the configuration for transmitting prize information from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. The information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board includes not only prize information (prize ball information, prize ball commands), but also game status signals and self-check commands to confirm the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. Furthermore, in this embodiment, main control recognition information is transmitted when the power is turned on and during setting processing (setting change/confirmation).

Here, it is necessary to transmit the game status signal to the ball information control board at least every time the game status changes. Therefore, by transmitting it similarly during the communication cycle for transmitting prize winning information, and by aggregating the prize winning information, game status signals, and other information to be transmitted to the ball information control board as game information in a common format, the transmission process can be standardized and control can be simplified.

Figure 281 shows an example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in Figure 281, "Data Type" is defined as a major category, and "Type 1" and "Type 2" as minor categories, in order to distinguish between the types of data to be transmitted. The items used to distinguish between data types can be changed as needed. For example, other types can be excluded by defining the data type in detail, or more items can be added to allow for even more detailed classification. Note that in Figure 281, the names of the items used to distinguish between data types are written as they are for ease of understanding, but in reality, pre-coded information is set. Also, in the example shown in Figure 281, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

Figure 281(A) shows data corresponding to prize information. The data type is set to "Prize" (or "Prize Balls"), indicating that it is prize information (prize ball data). Type 1 contains the type of prize slot, and Type 2 contains information identifying the prize slot. If only the information identifying the prize slot needs to be set, one of the fields may be left blank. In the example shown in Figure 281, it is possible to set two types of data; in the example shown in (A), the number of prize balls and the number of prizes can be set. Since the number of prize balls and the number of prizes will not realistically exceed 100, it may be possible to set the number of prize balls in the upper 4 bits and the number of prizes in the lower 4 bits, setting both in a single field. Furthermore, if there are no prizes, data indicating that there are no prizes and that the number of prize balls is 0 may be sent.

Figure 281(A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball commands) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle. However, more prize ball information (for example, 10 types) may be transmitted together in one cycle. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, the load per unit time on the data (command) transmitting side (main control board 1310) and the receiving side (ball information control board 110) will increase. Therefore, an upper limit may be set on the amount of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle. In this case, the data (commands) that could not be transmitted in one cycle (the amount exceeding the upper limit) will be transmitted in the next cycle. Note that when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a jackpot, there may be a time lag between the actual entry and the addition of prize balls, which may cause discomfort to the player. However, in reality, since the launch cycle is 600 ms and the data (command) transmission cycle is approximately 100 ms, even if the upper limit is temporarily exceeded, it will immediately fall below the upper limit, so the possibility of the player feeling uncomfortable is low. Furthermore, while the transmission period (600 ms) is fixed, the command transmission period can be set arbitrarily. Therefore, by setting the data (command) transmission period shorter than the transmission period, it is possible to suppress the time lag caused by exceeding the upper limit in the number of data (commands) transmitted.

Figure 281(B) shows an example of transmitting a chip ID that identifies the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, which is included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and it is stored in two records. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311 and can be defined, for example, in a specific register and read from the program. In this embodiment, it is possible to transmit data (commands) of multiple data types in one cycle. However, if the number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle exceeds the upper limit, a priority order may be set for each data type, and data (commands) with higher priority may be transmitted first. For example, as mentioned above, prize ball information tends to generate a larger amount of data than other data, but as mentioned above, even if there is a slight time lag, the player is unlikely to notice any discomfort, so data (commands) of other data types may be prioritized. Alternatively, data (commands) may be transmitted up to the upper limit in the order they are generated, regardless of the data type.

In the example shown in Figure 281, since the data size is fixed, there is a problem in that the number of records becomes large when transmitting large amounts of data. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in Figure 281(B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to transmit data for 5 records, and all information such as data type must be set in each record. Therefore, by setting the data length for each record and making the data variable length, the system can be configured to handle many types of data. Figure 282 shows another example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in Figure 282, a field indicating the data length has been added, and the field indicating the data can store data of any size within the allowed range. In the example shown in Figure 282, since there is no need to split the data, the number of fields indicating detailed classification has been reduced from two to one. Note that since the transmitted data will be of variable length and may be large in size, a field for checking, such as a checksum, may be added.

Next, the communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board will be explained. Figure 283 is a diagram illustrating the communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board during the startup of the gaming machine. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 starts up, it notifies the ball information control board of main control recognition information through initialization processing or timer interrupt processing (main control recognition information notification). As mentioned above, the main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310, and the ball information control board determines whether the received main control recognition information is normal or not. If the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, if the main control board 1310 is not a genuine one and has an unauthorized MPU installed, the ball information control board will notify that the main control board 1310 is abnormal.

Furthermore, if the time from power-on to transmission of the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), an abnormality is determined to have occurred, and an abnormality is reported. In this case, the main control board 1310 may continue to operate. If the startup process is completed while the abnormality report is being issued, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the report may continue. If the report continues, employees of the gaming facility may check the situation and decide whether or not to continue using the gaming machine.

When the ball information control board receives a main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. Upon receiving the main control recognition information response notification from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 enters a state where it can start normal gameplay.

Subsequently, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). As mentioned earlier, the transmission interval for game information is 100 milliseconds. A specific example of game information is prize ball information (prize ball command). Upon receiving game information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board transmits a response signal (game information response notification) to the main control board 1310. In this way, the transmission of a response signal from the ball information control board to the game information notification from the main control board 1310 ensures that communication is functioning correctly. Similarly, when the ball information control board notifies the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 also transmits a response signal to the ball information control board.

Next, we will explain what happens when an abnormality occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. Figure 284 shows a situation where, in communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board of the gaming machine, there is no response from the ball information control board to a notification from the main control board 1310.

In the example shown in Figure 284, the main control board 1310 notifies the ball information control board of game information at a predetermined communication cycle. If the ball information control board does not respond for a predetermined number of consecutive times, an abnormality is considered to have occurred, communication is cut off, and the abnormality is reported. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to 8, and the same game information is notified up to 8 times. Even after communication from the main control board 1310 has been cut off, if a response signal is received from the ball information control board, the communication cutoff is lifted, the system is considered to have returned to a normal state, and processing resumes. In the example shown in the figure, if a response signal is not received within one communication cycle, notification is sent again. However, it is also possible to cancel notification for the next cycle, wait for a response, and determine that one communication failed if a response signal is not received after the end of the next cycle. This configuration helps to avoid missing response signals.

Furthermore, if there is no response from the ball information control board, it may be because the game information has not reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310, or because the game information has reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310, but the response signal has not reached the main control board 1310. In the latter case, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), there is a risk that prize balls may be dispensed consecutively based on the same prize ball information, potentially leading to a discrepancy between the game's lottery result and the number of prize balls dispensed. Therefore, to avoid such problems, an example of transmitting the next game information without retransmitting the previous game information, even if the response signal cannot be received properly, is described below.

Figure 285 shows another example of communication between the main control board 1310 of a gaming machine and the ball information control board, specifically when the ball information control board does not respond to a notification from the main control board 1310. Here, similar to the example shown in Figure 284, game information is transmitted at each communication cycle, and even if a response signal is not received, the next game information is transmitted. If the maximum number of response signals (e.g., 8 times) are not received consecutively, an abnormality is determined, communication is cut off, and the abnormality is reported. This configuration reduces the possibility of discrepancies in the number of prize balls when the game information is prize ball information.

Furthermore, retransmitting the same game information could potentially cause newly generated game information to accumulate in the buffer and become unmanageable during the game's progression; however, this can be prevented. Note that, only for prize ball information where a large amount of data is likely to be generated, the next information may be sent without retransmission. For other types of information where the generated data is relatively small, retransmission may be performed as shown in Figure 284, thus varying the processing depending on the data type. In this case, the number of times a response signal cannot be received consecutively (number of transmission failures) is counted, and when a predetermined number is reached, communication is interrupted and an abnormality is reported.

[17. Edge buffer for detecting inconsistencies]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is obtained when a game medium enters the prize-winning device. The entry of the game medium is detected by sensors and switches provided in the prize-winning device, and the detection results are input at predetermined intervals and stored in a predetermined memory area.

Furthermore, the game tokens have a validity period for winning prizes, such as the period during which the prize-winning device is able to accept them. On the other hand, to detect malfunctions or fraudulent activity, prizes won outside the validity period are also counted. If the number of prizes won outside the validity period exceeds a predetermined value, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and a security signal is output externally or an abnormality is reported.

Thus, while it was necessary to detect only winning entries within the valid period when dispensing prize balls, it was necessary to detect winning entries regardless of the valid period when detecting an anomaly. Therefore, there was a risk of complicating the input judgment processing for various signals input by sensors, switches, etc.

This embodiment includes a buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals input by sensors, switches, etc., and a buffer 2 (second storage area, edge buffer for fraud detection) that counts and stores various signals input according to the state, such as whether or not it is within (or outside) the valid period. This allows for the generalization of most of the processing associated with input detection simply by switching the location that specifies the area to be referenced according to the state when executing the input detection process, thereby simplifying the entire process associated with award determination.

[17-1. Buffer Structure]
First, the structure of the buffer that temporarily stores information for executing various processes will be explained. This buffer is allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1311 as the input information storage area. Note that the input information storage area may also be allocated to RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1311. The input information storage area stores various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311. In addition to the input information storage area, the main control built-in RAM is allocated to store backup flags and checksum information for determining whether the contents of the RAM are normal when the power is turned on, random values for various lotteries, commands to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951, etc.

Figure 286 shows an example of the memory area allocated to the main control's built-in RAM in the game control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each memory area includes a backup flag area, checksum area, input level data area, input edge data area, prize ball determination area, etc. In addition, it includes areas for storing various random values used in the lottery and for storing commands to be transmitted. Furthermore, each area is divided into 1-byte units, resulting in areas of 1 byte or multiple bytes.

Next, the configuration of the input information storage area will be described. Here, we will describe the configuration of the input information storage area that stores input information indicating the detection of a game ball entering the prize slot, specifically the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). Figure 287 shows an example of a data area included in the input information storage area of this embodiment, where (A) is the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and (B) is the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR).

The input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) consists of 1 byte (8 bits), as shown in (A), and stores input information from the switch (sensor) corresponding to each bit. Specifically, Bit0 is the first start-up sensor 2104 that detects ball entry into the first start-up opening 2002, Bit1 is the second start-up sensor 2511 that detects ball entry into the second start-up opening 2004, Bit2 and Bit3 are the general prize-winning opening sensors 3015 that detect ball entry into the general prize-winning openings 2001 and 2201, Bit4 is the count switch (large prize-winning opening sensor) that detects ball entry into the large prize-winning opening 2005, Bit5 is unused, and Bit6 is input information from the sensor that detects ball entry into the discharge opening. In addition to the start-up and large prize-winning openings, the gaming machine in this embodiment also has a probability variation area (V area of V-AT), and Bit7 is input information from the sensor that detects the passage of the gaming ball through the probability variation area. The probability variation area sensor is a sensor that detects only passage into the V area and, unlike other sensors, does not involve awarding prize balls. Furthermore, the bit arrangement can be any arrangement; for example, bit 0 may correspond to the second start opening 2004, bit 1 to the big prize opening 2005, and the sensors to be used to determine whether or not the valid period is active may be arranged consecutively.

Furthermore, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR), like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), consists of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each byte is stored. Each bit in the prize ball determination area corresponds to each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but for the second start gate (Bit1), the big prize gate (Bit4), and the probability variation area (Bit7), it is set to "1" (ON) only if the sensor detects it during the valid period. In other words, the input information from each sensor is directly set in each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but among the bits in the prize ball determination area, the bit corresponding to the prize entry device (prize entry area) for which a valid period is set for accepting game balls is set to "1" only if it is detected by the sensor within the valid period.

Furthermore, the validity period of the second start opening 2004 is set by considering the period from when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, causing the normal electric mechanism to open and the second start opening 2004 to be able to accept the game ball until the normal electric mechanism closes (normal electric mechanism opening time), as well as the validity determination period (OFF delay, e.g., 1000 msec) that takes into account the time the game ball remains inside the second start opening 2004 after the normal electric mechanism closes. Similarly, the validity period of the big prize opening 2005 is set by considering the time it takes to open the big prize opening 2005 (big prize opening opening time), as well as the validity determination period (OFF delay, e.g., 1994 msec) that takes into account the time lag the game ball remains inside the big prize opening 2005 until it is detected by the count sensor. On the other hand, in the probability variation area (the V area of V-AT), the validity period of the probability variation area is set at the timing when the V-attacker (large prize slot) opens, and no validity determination period is set after the validity period of the probability variation area ends.

[17-2. Switch Input Processing]
Next, the procedure for setting data in the buffer mentioned above will be explained. Figure 288 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for switch input processing to acquire information detected by sensors and the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Switch input processing is performed in step S74 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 23.

The procedure shown in Figure 288 is an excerpt of the procedure for storing information such as winnings at the starting prize slot and the main prize slot in the input edge data area 1 (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). The same processing is possible when storing information such as the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payout control board 951's payout ACK signal. Furthermore, while the switch processing shown in Figure 288 describes an example of processing one port (1 byte) of data in the input edge data area 1 (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR), it is not limited to this; if the switch input port has two or more bytes, processing for the corresponding number of bytes will be executed.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines the change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Furthermore, it stores the generated switch edge information in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002) and sets the number of valid prize judgments (step P6003). Note that the switch edge information is data that combines the individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch in byte units. The number of valid prize judgments may correspond to the number of switch input information entries in the switch edge information, or it may correspond to the number of bits in the switch edge information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the switch corresponding to the prize-winning judgment is within its validity period (step P6004), and clears any updates to the switch input information that are outside the validity period. Specifically, if the switch corresponding to the prize-winning judgment is not within its validity period (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the prize-winning judgment in input edge data area 1 is cleared (step P6005).

Next, the main control MPU 1311, after clearing the update of switch input information outside the validity period, or if it is within the validity period (the result of step P6004 is "yes"), updates the number of valid prize judgments by -1 to change the switch input information subject to judgment (step P6006). Furthermore, it updates the validity period of the switch corresponding to the prize judgment by -1 (step P6007). Note that for switches without a set validity period, the processing from step P6006 onwards is executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the validity period determination may be such that processing is unconditionally skipped if the switch input information does not have a set validity period, or, for example, a large value may be set as the validity period so that it is always within the validity period.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of valid prize judgments has reached zero, that is, whether the valid prize judgments for all switch input information included in the switch edge information have been completed (step P6008). If the valid prize judgments for all switch input information have not been completed (the result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is repeated from step P6004. Note that in this process, the timer that determines the valid period is updated after determining whether it is within the valid period; however, it may also be updated together with other timers in the various timer update processes executed with each timer interrupt.

The main control MPU 1311, upon completion of the prize-winning validity determination for switch input information with a set validity period included in the switch edge information, and when the number of prize-winning validity determinations becomes 0 (result of step P6008 is "yes"), stores the switch edge information reflecting whether or not the switch input information with a set validity period is within its validity period in the prize-winning determination area (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information directly in the input edge data 1 area and also storing the switch input information in the prize ball determination area considering the validity period, processing can be simplified by referring to the area corresponding to the processing. For example, in the prize ball control processing (step S80 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 23)) executed when prize balls are dispensed, when determining whether or not there are prize balls, it is not necessary to perform processing such as determining whether or not it is a prize ball from a sensor that dispenses prize balls only within the validity period, or determining whether or not to dispense prize balls depending on whether or not it is within the validity period. When dispensing prize balls, prize balls can be dispensed simply by referring to the information in the prize ball determination area, thereby simplifying the prize ball dispensing process. In addition, when counting the number of game balls that entered outside the validity period for a sensor that does not dispense prizes outside the validity period by the fraud detection processing (step S84 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 23)), it is possible to detect fraudulent entries by referring to the information in the input edge data 1 area and counting the number of entries that entered outside the validity period (the number that is suspected to be fraudulent entries). Furthermore, it becomes possible to count fraudulent wins by calculating the difference between the number of wins detected by the input edge data area 1 and the number of wins detected by the prize ball judgment area.

[17-3. Opening the Grand Prize Gate]
Next, we will explain the process of opening the large prize slot 2005, which is opened when the lottery is won. In the large prize slot opening process, when a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005, it is detected by the count switch (large prize slot sensor), and the number of game balls that have entered the large prize slot 2005 is counted by the switch input process described above. Figure 289 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the large prize slot opening process in this embodiment. The large prize slot opening process is called from the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. Note that the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process is called after each start slot passage process is executed, and the process corresponding to the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number, including the large prize slot opening process, is called. In the large prize slot opening process, the number of game balls that have entered the large prize slot is counted based on the information of the large prize slot (count) switch generated by the switch input process described above.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first obtains the number of balls that have entered the big prize slot from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, it sets the number of big prize slot count switches as the number of loops and sets the big prize slot count switch bit 1 as the determination bit value. For the number of loops, it determines whether or not a prize has been won based on the value of the big prize slot count switch in the prize ball determination area and the determination bit value, and counts the number of balls that have entered the big prize slot. Furthermore, it determines whether or not the obtained number of balls that have entered the big prize slot is less than the maximum number of balls that can be won in the big prize slot (step P6012). The maximum number of balls that can be won in the big prize slot is the prescribed number of balls that can be won in one round from the time the big prize slot 2005 opens until it closes. Even if the number of game balls equal to the maximum number of balls that can be won in the big prize slot does not reach the big prize slot, the big prize slot 2005 will close after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In step P6011, the process loops for the number of count switches on the large prize slot 2005 to count the number of balls entering the large prize slot. When there is only one count switch, the loop count is set to 1, and the number of balls entering the large prize slot in the prize ball judgment area is counted only once. In configurations with multiple large prize slots, the loop count is set to the number of count switches, and the number of balls entering the large prize slot in the prize ball judgment area is counted for each loop. While it would be possible to count the number of balls entering the large prize slot only once without setting the loop count when there is only one count switch, the number of count switches on the large prize slot 2005 varies depending on the game machine. Therefore, two types of large prize slot opening processes are necessary: one for one count switch and one for multiple count switches. To ensure that the large prize slot opening process is executed consistently regardless of the number of large prize slot switches, the loop count is set to 1 even when there is only one switch.

Furthermore, in the case of over-entry during a jackpot (where the number of game balls entering the jackpot 2005 exceeds the maximum number of balls that can be entered), the determination is made based on the value in the prize ball determination area because the jackpot 2005 is still within its valid period (it is also possible to make the same determination based on the value in input edge data area 1). On the other hand, in the case of fraudulent entries other than jackpots (fraudulent entries into the jackpot 2005), the fraudulent entries are determined based on the value in input edge data area 1, as these cannot be counted using the value in the prize ball determination area.

The main control MPU 1311 determines if the number of balls entering the large prize slot is equal to or greater than the maximum number of balls entering the large prize slot (result of step P6012 is "no"), and sets the large prize slot over-winning flag to the large prize slot over-winning flag (step P6013). Note that while the number of balls entering the large prize slot is obtained from buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) to determine over-winning, the number of balls entering the large prize slot may also be counted in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) to determine over-winning. Furthermore, the number of balls entering the large prize slot is continuously counted even while the large prize slot 2005 is closed, and if the number of balls entering the large prize slot exceeds the maximum number of balls entering, the large prize slot over-winning flag is set to the large prize slot over-winning flag. Subsequently, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 sets the large prize opening status number to "00H," and then closes the large prize opening 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the large prize slot is less than the maximum number of balls entering the large prize slot (result of step P6012 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the timer that measures the opening time of the large prize slot and determines whether the opening time of the large prize slot has ended (step P6014). If the opening time of the large prize slot has not ended (result of step P6014 is "no"), this process is terminated, and the acceptance of game balls into the large prize slot 2005 continues.

The main control MPU 1311, upon confirmation that the opening time for the large prize slot 2005 has ended (resulting in "yes" in step P6014), configures the system to close the open large prize slot 2005 (step P6015). Step P6015 involves setting the necessary data for closing the large prize slot 2005.

When the processing in step P6015 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets the operation of the large prize slot 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, it obtains the large prize slot opening and closing time data from the selected large prize slot opening pattern and sets it in the special power operation signal output timer. The special power operation signal output timer is set with a time (valid period) for determining whether the large prize slot switch is active or not. The valid period is the interval time between openings of the large prize slot (large prize slot closing time) - α. If the valid period is longer than the large prize slot closing time, a time longer than the closing period will be set, so a new value will be set by the opening of the large prize slot 2005 before the timer reaches 0. When the opening of the large prize slot 2005 begins, the opening time corresponding to the large prize slot opening pattern is set in the special power operation signal output timer. For example, if the opening pattern for the large prize slot 2005 is 29 seconds for rounds 1-7 and 9-16, and 5 seconds for round 8, then the special electric operation signal output timer will be set to 29 seconds before the start of rounds 1-7 and 9-16, and to 5 seconds before the start of round 8.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether to continue opening the large prize slot 2005, that is, whether it is the final round (step P6017). If the large prize slot 2005 is to be kept open (not the final round) (result of step P6017 is "yes"), this process ends. If the large prize slot 2005 is not to be kept open (it is the final round) (result of step P6017 is "no"), the post-jackpot processing is executed, such as setting the ending command to configure the ending (step P6018). In the post-jackpot processing, an effective determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending is set, which enables the detection of game balls by the count switch after the large prize slot 2005 is closed. The effective determination period corresponding to the ending may be the same as the time for each large prize slot opening interval, but it may also be a different time (for example, the time corresponding to the ending period).

[17-4. Timing Chart (Grand Prize Entrance)]
Next, the process for detecting the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot 2005 will be explained in chronological order. Figure 290 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each configuration when a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 in the game machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information and time values shown on the timing chart are examples only and are not limited to these values.

In the example shown in Figure 290, as described above, the validity period is set at the start of a jackpot. For example, the validity period is set to the opening time of the large prize slot when open, and the closing interval period minus 4 milliseconds when closed. The fraudulent count value is initially set to a value (L) corresponding to the type of jackpot. It is sequentially deducted whenever a game ball is detected entering the large prize slot 2005, regardless of whether it is within or outside the validity period. When it reaches 0, fraud is considered to have occurred. The initial value of the fraudulent count value is, for example, 16 × (10 + 3) = 208 for jackpot 1 (16 rounds, 10 counts), and 4 × (9 + 3) = 48 for jackpot 2 (4 rounds, 9 counts). Furthermore, for jackpot 3 (12 rounds, effectively 2 rounds, 5 counts), it is set to 2 × (5 + 3), and for 10 rounds, a maximum of 1 ball enters (10 × 1), resulting in a total of 26. The timing chart is explained below.

First, at time t1, a ball enters the large prize slot 2005 during the valid period (prize sensor (count switch) OFF → ON). The corresponding bit (large prize slot count switch) in buffer 1 (input edge data area 1 (INPUT_EDG1)) is set to "1," and similarly, the corresponding bit (large prize slot count switch) in buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to "1." At this time, "1" is added to the number of balls entered into the large prize slot N based on the value in buffer 2. Furthermore, "1" is subtracted from the fraudulent count based on the value in buffer 1 (M-1). Finally, a command related to winning into the large prize slot, such as a large prize slot entry command, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a command for the number of prize balls awarded for winning into the large prize slot is sent to the payout control board 951.

At time t2, similar to time t1, a prize is awarded to the grand prize slot during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (grand prize slot count switches) in buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Furthermore, "1" is added to the grand prize slot count based on the value in buffer 2 (N+2), and "1" is subtracted from the fraudulent count based on the value in buffer 1 (M-2). Finally, commands corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 are transmitted.

At time t3, the jackpot game ends, and the initial value of the fraudulent count (15) is set. As mentioned above, the effective time of the jackpot entry point 2005 is the time the entry point is open plus the time during which entry detection is permitted. The initial value of the fraudulent count may also be set at the end of the jackpot ending, for example, during the special symbol variation waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing.

Subsequently, between times t4 and t6, an illegal entry occurs where a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 in a state other than a jackpot (large prize slot not activated). The corresponding bit (large prize slot count switch) in buffer 1 corresponding to input edge data area 1 is set to "1" (enabled, ON), while the corresponding bit (large prize slot count switch) in buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball judgment area is set to "0" (disabled, OFF). Then, the illegal count is deducted by "1" based on the value in buffer 1. Performance commands and prize ball commands are sent based on the value in buffer 2, but since the value in buffer 2 is "0" (disabled, OFF) at this time, these commands are not sent in cases where the entry is not legitimate.

At time t8, another fraudulent win occurs, and the fraudulent count is reduced by 1, bringing it to "0". This triggers the activation of the security signal (external output signal) (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to initiate fraud notification. In this case, the prize ball command is not sent. Note that either the fraud notification or the security signal output may occur, but not both.

Furthermore, at time t9, the fraudulent count is set to 1. This allows the security signal (external output signal) and fraud notification to continue even if fraudulent winnings continue to occur. Note that times t8 and t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, another fraudulent win occurs, and the fraud count is deducted by "1". Since the fraud count was set to "1" at time t9, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the security signal (external output signal) is re-output (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to restart fraud notification. If another fraudulent win is detected while the security signal is output, the output time is reset (extended) while the security signal output continues. Subsequently, at time t11, the fraud count is set to "1" again. The processing at times t10 and t11 is executed within the same timer interrupt.

Subsequently, at time t12, the lottery result is a jackpot, and the validity period and the number of fraudulent counts during the jackpot are set to their initial values (L). At time t13, similar to time t2, a ball enters the jackpot pocket during the validity period, and the corresponding bits (jackpot pocket count switches) in buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Then, "1" is added to the number of balls entered the jackpot pocket based on the value of buffer 2 (1), and "1" is subtracted from the fraudulent count based on the value of buffer 1 (L-1). Furthermore, a prize ball command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and a performance command is sent to the payout control board 951.

In the gaming machine described above, a large prize slot 2005 (gaming medium receiving means) becomes capable of receiving a game ball (gaming medium) based on the result of a lottery-based display of changing symbols, which determines when a game ball (gaming medium) is received (passes through) the starting slot (starting area). The received game ball is detected by a count switch (large prize slot sensor, gaming medium detection means) provided in the large prize slot 2005 and stored in an input information storage area (gaming medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area is allocated a buffer 1 (first storage means) that always stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the large prize slot 2005, and a buffer 2 (second storage means) that stores input information (gaming medium detection information) when a game ball is received during an effective period (predetermined period) based on the result of the changing symbols (lottery result). This configuration allows the system to refer to buffer 2 when paying out prize balls, and to refer to buffer 1 (and buffer 2) to detect fraudulent entries (abnormal occurrences), and to count the number of fraudulent entries.

[17-5. Timing Chart (Second Start-up)]
The above describes the case when a game ball enters the main prize slot 2005. Next, the process of detecting the entry of a game ball into the second start slot 2004, which is equipped with a standard electric mechanism, will be described in chronological order. Figure 291 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each component when a game ball enters the second start slot 2004, which is equipped with a standard electric mechanism, in the game machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information and time values shown on the timing chart are examples only and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the effective time is set in conjunction with the start of the opening of the standard electric mechanism. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the standard electric mechanism. Also, an initial value for the fraudulent count (for example, "15") is set. The initial value for the fraudulent count is, for example, the maximum number of winning entries when the standard electric mechanism is operating + α.

At time t2, a prize is awarded to the second start port 2004 during the valid period, and the corresponding bit (second start port switch) in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) is set to "1". Furthermore, "1" is added to the number of reserved balls N based on the value in buffer 2, and "1" is subtracted from the fraudulent count based on the value in buffer 1. Then, a lottery is performed based on the prize award, and various performance commands (e.g., pre-read command, reserved ball increase command) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the lottery result and the increase in the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the prize award at the second start port 2004 is sent to the payout control board 951. At time t3, a prize is also awarded to the second start port 2004 during the valid period, so it is processed as a normal prize award in the same way as at time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting game balls into the second start opening 2004 has elapsed (ended), and the initial value of the fraudulent count (number of fraudulent entries: "10") is set. As mentioned above, the valid time for accepting game balls into the second start opening 2004 includes the operating time of the normal electric mechanism, plus the time after the normal electric mechanism closes that entry detection is permitted. Note that the number of fraudulent entries is set to different values when the normal electric mechanism is open and after it closes, but they may be the same, or a larger value may be set when the normal electric mechanism is open than after it closes. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of opening times for the normal electric mechanism, the number of fraudulent entries may be switched according to the opening time. For example, the number of fraudulent entries could be set to 3 for a short opening and 15 for a long opening (or multiple openings).

Subsequently, between times t5 and t8, when the normal electric mechanism is not activated, an improper entry occurs where a game ball enters the second start port 2004. In this case, the corresponding bit (second start port switch) in buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area is set to "1" (enabled, ON), and the corresponding bit (second start port switch) in buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball judgment area is set to "0" (disabled, OFF). Then, the improper count is deducted by "1" based on buffer 1. Since the improper entry is determined based on the value of buffer 1, no performance commands or prize ball commands are sent if the entry is not legitimate. In other words, when determining that an entry into the second start port 2004 is valid, processing is performed based on the value of buffer 2; when determining improper entry (counting the improper entry), processing is performed based on the value of buffer 1.

As described above, if a prize is awarded to the second start port 2004 (a normal award) within the valid period, the corresponding bit values (second start port switch) in buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1," and various commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. Furthermore, if a prize is awarded to the second start port 2004 outside the valid period, only the corresponding bit value in buffer 1 is set to "1," and the fraudulent count is updated without sending the various commands that would normally be sent. Note that instead of updating the fraudulent count when setting the values of each buffer, the fraudulent count may be updated after the values of each buffer have been updated, based on the values of each buffer. This makes it possible to separate the module that updates the values of each buffer from the module that updates the fraudulent count, and to commonize the processing from switch input to setting the values of the corresponding buffers. The update of the fraudulent count based on the values of each buffer may be performed in cases other than when the corresponding bit values of buffers 1 and 2 are both "1," or it may be performed when the corresponding bit value of buffer 1 is "1" and the corresponding bit value of buffer 2 is "0."

At time t9, another fraudulent win occurs, and the fraudulent count is reduced by "1," bringing it to "0." This triggers the activation of the security signal (external output signal) (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to initiate fraud notification. In this case, the prize ball command is not sent. Note that either the fraud notification or the security signal output may occur, but not both.

Furthermore, at time t10, the fraudulent count is set to "1". This ensures that even if fraudulent wins continue to occur, a security signal (external output signal) is output, and notification is immediately given when fraudulent wins occur. While it's not strictly necessary to set the fraudulent count to "1", it's desirable to set a value smaller than the initial value ("15") to recognize that fraudulent wins are continuing. Alternatively, a value greater than "1" may be set to prevent frequent fraud notification due to false detections such as noise, even when no fraud is occurring. Times t9 and t10 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, another fraudulent win occurs, and the fraud count is deducted by "1". Since the fraud count was set to "1" at time t10, the fraud count becomes "0" again, and the security signal (external output signal) is re-output (output for 30 seconds). Furthermore, a notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to restart fraud notification. If another fraudulent win is detected while the security signal is output, the output time is reset while the security signal output continues. Subsequently, at time t12, the fraud count is set to "1" again. The processing at times t11 and t12 is executed within the same timer interrupt.

Subsequently, at time t13, similar to time t1, the validity period is set in conjunction with the opening of the standard electric mechanism. The validity period is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the standard electric mechanism. Also, an initial value for the fraudulent count (for example, "15") is set.

At time t14, similar to time t2, a prize is awarded to the second start slot 2004 during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (second start slot switches) in buffers 1 and 2 are set to "1". Based on the value of buffer 2, "1" is added to the number of reserved balls N, and based on the value of buffer 1, "1" is subtracted from the fraudulent count. Then, as the number of reserved balls increases, various performance commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the prize awarded to the second start slot 2004 is sent to the payout control board 951. At time t15, similar to time t4, the valid time for accepting game balls from the second start slot 2004 has elapsed, and the initial value of the fraudulent count ("10") is set.

Furthermore, since the first starting gate 2003 is always capable of accepting game balls, when a game ball enters, it is sufficient to simply set bit0 of buffer 1 (input edge data area 1) and buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area) to "1," and there is no need to count fraudulent entries. In other words, for prize entry gates such as the starting gate and the main prize entry gate, which have an effective period for entry, buffer 2 can be set based on whether or not it is a fraudulent entry. For prize entry gates that are always capable of accepting balls, the contents of buffer 1 can be directly set to buffer 2, or buffer 1 can be referenced.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, when a game ball (game medium) enters the starting slot, a lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize. The lottery only needs to be performed if a prize occurs within the valid period (in the case of a normal prize). However, regardless of whether the prize occurs within or outside the valid period, the decision to perform the lottery may be made based on the corresponding bit values in buffers 1 and 2. That is, after setting the corresponding bit values in each buffer, the lottery is performed by referring to the corresponding bit values in buffers 1 and 2 without determining whether the prize occurred within the valid period. A modified example in which the lottery is performed based on the values set in each buffer will be described below.

First, if the corresponding bit values in buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different, the system may send a special command to the peripheral control board 1510 instead of executing the lottery, treating the result as an invalid prize due to some kind of abnormality (or a highly probable abnormality). Upon receiving this special command, the peripheral control board 1510 can notify that there is a possibility of an abnormality in the prize. In this embodiment, as described above, to notify of fraud when multiple prizes occur outside the valid period, a different command may be sent when the fraud count reaches "0" to clearly notify of the abnormality. Alternatively, the value of the fraud count may be included in the special command. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether the fraud count is "0" or not, and if it is, it can clearly notify of the abnormality.

Furthermore, one buffer may be prioritized, and the lottery may be executed only if the corresponding bit value of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, prioritizing the effectiveness of the prize, the lottery may be executed based on the value of buffer 2 (prioritizing the value of buffer 2). On the other hand, prioritizing the fact that the game ball entered the prize slot, the lottery may be executed based on the value of buffer 1 (prioritizing the value of buffer 1). In this case, a special command indicating that the corresponding bit values of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. If this special command is received consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, or if it is received more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, an abnormality may be detected and an abnormality notification may be issued.

Furthermore, the preferred buffer may be determined during the execution of the lottery process using parameters or other means. For example, a table containing information specifying the preferred buffer can be maintained in advance, and the table can be referenced during the execution of the lottery process to identify the preferred buffer. This allows the preferred buffer to be switched without modifying the program code by changing the data values in the table. This configuration makes it possible to use common program code even if the preferred buffer differs for each machine model, thereby increasing the program's versatility and improving development efficiency.

Furthermore, regarding the procedure for specifying the preferred buffer, at the start of the lottery process, the starting address of the table that stores data values indicating the preferred buffer is stored in a predetermined register. The table is identified from the address stored in this predetermined register, the necessary information is retrieved, and the preferred buffer is identified. The information stored in the table includes the address of buffer 1 when the lottery is performed based on the value of buffer 1, and the address of buffer 2 when the lottery is performed based on the value of buffer 2. Since the address of the buffer specified in the table is referenced during the lottery process, the reference destination can be switched simply by changing the data value stored in the table, allowing it to be configured as a common process. It is also possible to switch the reference destination depending on the game state; for example, in a game state where game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, there is a high probability of a valid win, so buffer 1 can be prioritized, emphasizing the fact that the game ball entered the winning port. In a game state where game balls cannot be accepted into the second starting port 2004, buffer 2 can be prioritized, emphasizing the validity of the win.

Furthermore, if the lottery is performed with different bit values in buffer 1 and buffer 2, a command based on the lottery result (such as a variation pattern command or a symbol type command, the same as the commands sent at the start of a normal variation) is sent, and a special command indicating the difference is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The order in which the command based on the lottery result and the special command are sent may be either with the command based on the lottery result sent first, or with the special command sent first. Alternatively, instead of sending the special command, information indicating that the corresponding bit values in buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. In this case, the information indicating that the corresponding bit values in buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different may be added to all commands in the command based on the lottery result, or it may be added to only one (or some) of the commands (for example, the first command sent). The addition of information indicating that the corresponding bit values in buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different is, for example, that if the variation pattern command for normal (matching) conditions is "3001h" to "30FFh", then the variation pattern command for abnormal (different) conditions is "B001h" to "B0FFh". Specifically, by changing the first bit of the variation pattern command, the upper byte of the variation pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110000b") to "B0h" ("10110000b").

Furthermore, if the corresponding bit values in both Buffer 1 and Buffer 2 are set to "1" (valid), the lottery is executed based on the information stored in Buffer 2 (which is set when a prize is won within the valid period), without using the information stored in Buffer 1 (which is also valid). This ensures that the lottery is executed based on information whose validity is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on the information stored in Buffer 1 (which is also valid) instead of the information stored in Buffer 2 (which is also valid). In this case, Buffer 2 only needs to hold the minimum information related to the switch input, thus reducing the required storage capacity.

In the gaming machine described above, a lottery is executed and the display of changing symbols begins based on the acceptance (passage) of a game ball (game medium) into the starting port (starting area) (lottery execution means). Based on the result of the lottery, the machine transitions to a state (special game state) in which game value can be given to the player, such as by paying out prize balls. The accepted game ball is detected by a starting port switch (game medium detection means) provided in the starting port and stored in an input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area is allocated a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) that always stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is accepted into the starting port, and a buffer 2 (prize ball determination area, second storage means) that stores input information (game medium detection information) only during the period in which a game ball can be accepted (effective period) when a normal electric mechanism is opened (when the conditions for accepting a game ball are met), such as in the second starting port 2004. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to perform a lottery based on the input information stored in buffer 2, detect fraudulent winnings (abnormal occurrences) by referring to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), and count the number of fraudulent winnings, etc.

[17-6. Timing Chart (Probability Change Zone Switch)]
The above describes the case when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004. Next, we will explain, in chronological order, the process of detecting when a game ball enters the probability variation area, which transitions to a probability variation state after the end of a jackpot, when it enters at a specific timing (specific round) during a jackpot game. Figure 292 is a timing chart that explains the processing of each configuration when a game ball enters the probability variation area (V-AT area) in the game machine of this embodiment. Note that the numerical information and time values etc. shown on the timing chart are examples and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the passage of the game ball through the probability variation area switch is detected. This causes the probability variation area switch to turn ON from OFF. At this time, since it is a specific round (round in which V can be passed) (valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)) is set to "1", and the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) in buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to "1". If the corresponding bit is set to 1 based on the value in buffer 2, the probability variation judgment flag is set. After the jackpot ends, if the probability variation judgment flag is set, the game transitions to the probability variation state. Alternatively, the probability variation judgment flag may be set if the corresponding bit in buffer 1 and the corresponding bit in buffer 2 have the same value. In this case, the AND value (logical AND) of the corresponding bit in buffer 1 and the corresponding bit in buffer 2 may be calculated, and the probability variation judgment flag may be set if the value is 1. At time t1, the system is determined to be normal, and therefore, a command for the V-pass animation is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (the round in which V-passing is possible) ends at time t2, but multiple specific rounds may occur within a single jackpot game.

Next, at time t3, the passage of the game ball through the probability variation area switch is detected, similar to time t1. At this time, since it is not within a specific round (within the valid period), the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) in buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area is set to "1", and the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) in buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball judgment area is set to "0" (invalid, OFF). Since the corresponding bit of buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of buffer 2 have different values, it is determined to be an abnormality, i.e., a V passage outside of a specific round, and the system does not transition to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot. A security signal is output as a V passage abnormality notification until time t4, and a V passage abnormality notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The security signal may be the same as the signal for abnormalities in the large prize entry opening 2005 or the second start opening 2004, or it may be a different external output. Also, the output time may be any predetermined time, and does not need to be the same as the time for large prize entry abnormalities, etc. Furthermore, either the V-pass abnormality notification or the security signal output may be performed.

Furthermore, if the passage of the probability variation area switch is detected in a specific round, and then again in a round other than the specific round, only an abnormality notification will be executed (an abnormality notification command will be sent) when the switch is passed in a round other than the specific round. However, the game may transition to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variation judgment flag will be maintained), or it may not transition to a high probability (advantageous state) after a jackpot (the value of the probability variation judgment flag will be cleared). Also, when the passage of the probability variation area switch is detected in a round other than the specific round, an abnormality notification command may be sent, but the security signal may not be output, and only an abnormality notification may be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, such as by lamps or sounds. Alternatively, the notification command may be sent, but the peripheral control board 1510 may not perform an abnormality notification in response to that command.

In the timing chart shown in Figure 292, an anomaly is detected by determining whether the corresponding bits in buffer 1 and buffer 2 match. However, similar to the detection of anomalies in the main prize winning slot, a method of pre-setting the count number is also possible. For example, the fraud detection counter could be set to "2" at the start of a specific round, and the fraud detection counter could be decremented based on the information in buffer 1. Alternatively, it could be set to "1" at the end of a specific round, and if the result of decrementing the fraud count becomes 0, it could be determined to be fraudulent. The initial value of the fraud count set at the start of a specific round does not need to be limited to "2"; it should be set to a value that would not normally occur. If it is impossible for two or more game balls to pass through, then 2 should be set. Furthermore, outside of the specific round, if even one game ball passes through, it is necessary to determine it as fraudulent. Therefore, at the end of the specific round, "1" should be set, and after the result of decrementing becomes "0" and fraud is reported, it should be set to "1".

In the gaming machine described here, the game transitions to a bonus state when a game ball enters the bonus zone at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during a jackpot game. If the bonus zone is not in a state where game balls can be received, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter. If a game ball is accepted into the bonus zone under these conditions, it is judged as an illegal entry. Therefore, as described above, a bit corresponding to the bonus zone switch is provided in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area). Buffer 1 is set regardless of whether it is enabled or disabled, while buffer 2 is set only when it is enabled. This simplifies the process of transitioning to the bonus state, as it only requires referencing buffer 2 without having to judge whether an illegal entry has occurred. On the other hand, referencing buffers 1 and 2 makes it possible to judge illegal entries and count the number of illegal entries.

[17-7. Summary and Variations]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a gaming medium detection means that detects the acceptance of gaming balls (gaming media) into a large prize slot or a start slot using a detection sensor (switch) (detecting that the gaming media has passed through a predetermined area), and a gaming medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing detection information (gaming medium detection information) of these gaming balls (gaming media). The gaming medium detection information storage means has a buffer 1 (first storage means, edge buffer for fraud detection, input edge data 1 area) that can constantly store gaming medium detection information, and a buffer 2 (second storage means, prize ball determination area) that stores gaming medium detection information within the validity period (when predetermined conditions are met). For example, when a gaming ball enters a prize slot within the validity period and prize balls are paid out (when processing is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions), the processing is performed by referring to the gaming medium detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

Furthermore, if an effective period is set for accepting game balls in areas such as prize winning slots or bonus rounds, an abnormality can be detected by counting the number of times switch input information (game medium detection information) is stored only in buffer 1 (number of fraudulent entries). The count of fraudulent entries can be calculated by subtracting 1 each time a fraudulent entry occurs, starting from an abnormality detection threshold, and determining an abnormality when it reaches 0; or by adding 1 each time, starting from an initial value of 0, and determining an abnormality when it reaches the abnormality detection threshold.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, by switching the area referenced during input judgment processing, the processing associated with input judgment can be standardized, simplifying the overall process. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to dispense prize balls based on information detected within the validity period, or to perform abnormality detection by counting the number of game balls that entered outside the validity period, thereby improving the development efficiency of the game machine. For example, when determining whether a ball has entered the large prize slot 2005, in the embodiment described above, the determination was made based on the value of the prize ball determination area. However, for counting balls that have entered the large prize slot 2005 in a jackpot state, the determination may be made using the value of the input edge data area 1, and only the prize ball entry determination may refer to the value of the prize ball determination area.

In this embodiment, a configuration with two types of buffers—buffer 1 for continuously storing input and buffer 2 for storing input within the valid period—has been described. However, a configuration with two or more types of buffers, such as providing a buffer for each game state, is also possible.

Furthermore, while the embodiments described so far have described prize slots where an expiration period is set upon winning, the first start slot 2002, which can always accept game balls, sets "1" (valid) to the corresponding bit (first start slot switch) in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) without determining the expiration period when a game ball enters. Therefore, for the first start slot 2002, prize balls may be awarded based on the value of buffer 1, or, similar to the second start slot 2004, based on the value of buffer 2. Also, since the values of buffer 1 and buffer 2 match, and the result of the expiration period determination process in the second start slot 2004 is always normal, for example, the prize ball processing when a ball enters the first start slot 2002 may be the same as the prize ball processing for the second start slot 2004.

Buffers 1 and 2 are included in the input information storage area allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM). These buffers may be placed in contiguous or separate areas. When buffers 1 and 2 are allocated in contiguous areas, setting values in each buffer can be done simply by executing the INC/DEC instruction, simplifying processing. On the other hand, when buffers 1 and 2 are allocated in separate areas, each buffer can be freely positioned, increasing the flexibility of the storage area design and improving development efficiency.

[18. Bit Transfer Instructions]
In recent years, gaming machines have required complex game control to enhance the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, the game control devices that actually perform the game control are subject to certain constraints to ensure fairness in the game and to prevent excessive stimulation of gambling tendencies, so that the game is played within a predetermined framework.

Therefore, in order to implement complex game control, the program structure became complex, potentially leading to problems such as malfunctions. To address this, the program was simplified by digitizing the game control. For example, by having the program sequentially process data that defines the control content, the program structure was simplified, and it became easier to adapt to specification changes by modifying the data.

On the other hand, the digitization of game control led to increased reliance on data, and the complexity of game machine specifications resulted in an increase in data volume. Furthermore, because there are limitations to the storage capacity for data used to control game machines, it was necessary to suppress the increase in data volume.

This gaming machine, in view of the above circumstances, aims to provide a gaming machine that reduces data capacity by compressing and storing data, thereby suppressing the increase in data capacity used in the gaming machine.

According to this embodiment of the gaming machine, by compressing data, it becomes possible to store more data, enabling the provision of games incorporating complex specifications and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by further digitizing game control data, it becomes possible to simplify the program, suppressing the complexity of game control and reducing the probability of malfunctions. Moreover, it becomes easier to adapt to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, and by replacing some data, it becomes possible to easily provide various variations of the gaming machine.

Specifically, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by improving the command for reading game data, the degree of freedom in the structure of the table that holds the game data is increased, and the process of reading game data is simplified, thereby compressing the capacity of the game data and simplifying game control that involves reading data. The configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be described below.

[18-1. Overview of Bit Transfer Procedures]
First, an overview of the configuration and procedure for reading data in this embodiment will be described. In the data transfer procedure in this embodiment, it is possible to read data bit by bit from a specified bit position in the table, rather than reading data byte by byte from a specified address.

Figure 293 is a diagram illustrating the outline of the bit transfer procedure in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the bit transfer procedure is configured to identify the location (address) from which to read data based on an index (index information) that specifies the data source, and to read the specified number of bits of data. When executing this procedure, the index, extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read, and the storage location of the read data are specified as parameters. The index may be specified as a register containing the index information, or its value may be specified directly.

In this embodiment, the index consists of two bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the starting address of the data table (table location information), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position from which to read data from the specified data table (relative data location information). In this embodiment, the address of the specified data table is identified and the data reading position of that data table is obtained by correcting the specified index. Specifically, the upper 13 bits of the index before correction are used as the lower 13 bits, and "000" is added to the upper part to create a two-byte (16-bit) index, thereby creating the corrected index.

Next, the reference address (N) of the data to be retrieved is calculated by adding the value set in the "TP (register)," which indicates the reference address for the data storage location (table layout), to the corrected index, thereby identifying the table storage location (address). Furthermore, the data read position (read start bit position) for reference address (N) is determined from the lower three bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in Figure 293, the lower three bits of the index before correction (the hatched area sloping downwards to the left) represent the read start bit position for reference address (N). For example, if the lower three bits are set to "100," the read start bit position for reference address (N) will be the 4th bit ("100").

Thus, in this embodiment, since the address of the data storage area can be identified by adding the value set in the TP register to the index value, it is only necessary to specify the lower address of the data storage location, and the area for storing the upper address can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area for specifying the starting bit position for reading data (the lower 3 bits of the corrected index). With this configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to identify the address of the data storage area and the starting bit position for reading data using a 2-byte index. In other words, compared to conventional load instructions where data is read by specifying an address, it is possible to identify the data storage location and read the data bit by bit without increasing the capacity.

Furthermore, in the bit transfer procedure of this embodiment, extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read is specified as a parameter at execution time. The extraction specification information is set to a value equal to the number of bits of the data to be acquired minus 1. In the example shown in Figure 293, the data from the 5th bit to the 6th bit (when the extraction specification information = 5) of the table indicated by the reference address (address N) is read and stored in the specified storage location.

In this embodiment, the address where the data is actually stored is obtained by adding the corrected index to the value of the starting address (reference address) of the data area, which is pre-set in the TP register. Furthermore, when the CPU is reset, such as when the power is turned on, the value set in the TP register is set to the default value (initial value) of the starting address of the data area. In addition, the TP register can be rewritten to any value by the program. By configuring it in this way, the data reference destination can be changed without modifying the program code by appropriately rewriting the value of the TP register according to the game state, etc., thereby simplifying the program code and improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine. Details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to Figure 299 and subsequent figures.

The TP register is a dedicated register used to specify the reference address index among the registers owned by the CPU. While general-purpose registers used for calculations and other operations are composed of two or more banks, the TP register, like the flag register, is not configured in a bank structure but as a single register. Alternatively, a TP register could be provided for each bank, similar to general-purpose registers, allowing the use of one bank's TP register each time the bank is switched. For example, if bank 0 is used for initialization and a general-purpose register in bank 1 is used for timer interrupt processing, the TP register used for initialization will be the one set for bank 0, and the TP register used for timer interrupt processing will be the one set for bank 1. This allows the value of the TP register to be switched according to the processing, for example, the data reference destination can be switched for each processing step. Even if a TP register is provided for each bank, it can still be rewritten by the program, just as it cannot be if it is not provided for each bank, and a default value is set upon reset. The default value can be a common value regardless of the bank, or different values can be set for each bank.

[18-2. Types of Bit Transfer Instructions]
Next, we will explain the instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction). In this embodiment, we will explain the case where the bit transfer instruction is executed using assembler (mnemonics), but the same applies to other development languages. Figure 294 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the instruction code for executing the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment.

A bit transfer instruction consists of the instruction code "RBT" and parameters. The parameters are the storage location of the data to be referenced, an index indicating the reference address, and extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be extracted. In this embodiment, the storage location of the data to be referenced is a register, but it may also be written directly to a memory area on RAM. The index value specifies the address of the table storing the data to be read and the position of the data to be read, as shown in the example in Figure 293.

Next, we will explain an example of actually using the instruction code. Figure 295 shows an example of the types of bit transfer instructions in this embodiment. As mentioned above, the instruction code is "RBT," and the acquired data is stored in register r. Register r can be, for example, a general-purpose register such as register W, register A, register B, register C, register D, register H, or register L. If the data to be read is 2 bytes, a pair register such as register WA, register BC, or register DE should be specified.

Furthermore, parameters (the storage location of the data to be referenced, the reference address, and the extraction specification information) can be specified either by directly specifying the index (address) value mm, or by specifying the addressing register rr. When register rr is specified, the value stored in that register is read and processed. Since the addressing register rr stores a 2-byte value, it corresponds to registers such as the DE register, HL register, and index registers (IX register, IY register). The following describes an example of a bit transfer instruction code shown in Figure 295.

The command "RBT r, (mm).n" directly specifies the address mm of the data storage table, reads the data corresponding to the number of bits specified by the extraction specification information n, and stores it in register r. The extraction specification information n can be a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or register A can be specified. If register A is specified, data corresponding to the number of bits stored in register A is read.

Furthermore, to explain the specific operation (procedure) of "RBT r, (mm).n", as explained in Figure 293, mm/8 corresponds to the corrected index, as it corresponds to the table address identified by the upper 13 bits of the 16-bit index mm. The value set in the TP register mentioned earlier is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the referenced table. Then, the lower 3 bits of index mm are extracted (mm∧07H) to identify the bit position where data is to be read from the referenced table. Then, data equivalent to n+1 bits of extraction specification information is extracted from the identified position and stored in register r. At this time, the instruction processing cycle is 11, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 5 bytes. Also, after instruction execution, the J and Z flags in the flag register become zero, while the other flags retain their values from before instruction execution. Note that the changes in the flag register are the same for the instruction codes described below.

"RBT r, (rr).n" specifies register rr, which stores the address of the table, reads data for the number of bits specified by the extraction specification information n from the table, and stores it in register r. The other parameters are the same as those for "RBT r, (mm).n". Specifically, if the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register and the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes "RBT A, (HL).n". The specific operation of "RBT r, (rr).n" is the same as when replacing the address mm in "RBT r, (mm).n" with the value stored in register rr, so the explanation is omitted, but the detailed procedure will be described later in Figure 300. In this case, the instruction processing cycle is 9, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. Note that if the data to be read is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity increases by 1 byte to 4 bytes in order to specify a register such as the DE register, HL register, or index register (IX register, IY register) as the storage destination. The detailed procedure for the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later in Figure 302.

The command "RBT r, (rr+).n" is executed using the same operation as "RBT r, (rr).n", and then the value of the address stored in register rr is incremented by n+1. In this case, the instruction processing cycle is 10, and the instruction storage capacity is 3 bytes. This allows for continuous reading of specified memory areas. For example, after executing "RBT A, (HL+).n", executing "RBT W, (HL).m" allows for reading n bits of data from the specified position in the address table stored in the HL register and storing it in register A, and then reading m bits of data from the next area and storing it in register W. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r, (rr+).n", multiple data can be read from consecutive memory areas, simplifying the process when reading only the required amount of data with the same number of bits, or when reading records (data sets) composed of multiple types of data with different numbers of bits. Detailed procedures for reading multiple data from consecutive memory areas will be described later in Figure 301.

The command "RBT r, (rr + d).n" reads data from the address of the table stored in register rr, with the value d added to the address. This allows you to specify and read any data from the designated table. In this case, the instruction processing cycle is 10, and the instruction storage capacity is 4 bytes.

The command "RBT r, (rr + W).n" reads data from the address of the table stored in register rr plus the value stored in register W. This allows you to specify and read any data from a designated table. Furthermore, by updating the value in register W, you can continuously read data from specified locations using a common code. The command "RBT r, (rr + A).n" works similarly, simply by changing register W to register A. The cycle required to process these instructions is 10, and the instruction storage capacity is 3 bytes.

[18-3. Program Example]
Next, we will explain an example of applying the bit transfer instruction "RBT" mentioned above. Figure 296 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of a process using the bit transfer instruction "RBT" in this embodiment. Figure 297 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart of a process using the bit transfer instruction "RBT" in this embodiment (Figure 296). The corresponding steps of the flowchart are described as comments in the program. The processes shown in Figures 296 and 297 are processes that read data from a table in units of 6 bits. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets the index value as the initial value of the reference address, which is the value obtained by subtracting the starting address of the data area from the starting address of the reference table (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program in Figure 297, the address of the table to be referenced is stored in the HL register ("LD HL, table_Top"). The address of the table to be referenced is identified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. This table has 6 bits allocated to one data item (total number of bits of the basic configuration block), and stores 4 data items ("25, 48, 32, 63"). Regarding the starting address of the data area, since the "starting address of the data area" is set as a default value in the TP register each time a reset signal is input, such as when power is restored, if the TP register is not rewritten, i.e., if the starting address of the data area remains stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the starting address of the data area.

Next, the main control unit MPU 1311 extracts the pointer information (pointa_a) of the data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register ("LD A, (pointa_a)").

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits in the basic configuration blocks of the reference table (step P8003). A basic configuration block represents an area for storing a single unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. The total number of basic configuration blocks is the number of bits in the data storage area, corresponding to the data capacity per record. For example, in a table storing integer values in the range of 0 to 30, 5 bits of space are required to store each data item, so the total number of basic configuration blocks is 5. In this embodiment, the total number of bits in the basic configuration blocks is 6. The result of the multiplication is stored in the A register, as shown in the program ("MUL A, 6").

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the basic unit number (step P8004). The basic unit number of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine in this embodiment (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) is 8 (number of bits in 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register, as shown in the program ("LD C, 8 → DIV WA, C"). Note that when the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder in the W register.

The main control unit MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the WA register is added ("ADD HL, WA"). Note that, referring to the program, before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register, "PUSH WA" is executed to save the WA register to the stack area. This is because the value in the W register, where the remainder is stored, is cleared ("XOR W"), and then the remainder is used as the calculation value ("POP WA → LD A, W → ...").

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). In the program, this is done by multiplying the value of the HL register by 8 by performing three left shifts (SLA HL) (a 3-bit shift).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder of the division in step P8005 to the calculation result of the process in step P8006 and sets it as the reference address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register is the starting bit position for reading the reference data from the beginning address of the reference table. In the program, the remainder value is calculated ("POP WA" → "LD A, W" → "XOR W"), and the remainder value (the value stored in the WA register) is added to the HL register where the index value is stored ("ADD HL, WA"). Through these processes, the index (pre-correction index) shown in Figure 293 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction designation information based on the number of pieces of information to be acquired (the number of bits of the data to be referenced, which is 6 in this embodiment), and sets it to the storage location of the reference data using a bit transfer instruction from the reference address information (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the pre-correction index, and data corresponding to the number of bits (6 bits) of the extraction designation information n is stored in the A register ("RBT A, (HL).n").

[18-4. Variations]
As described above, the procedure for performing a bit transfer instruction in this embodiment consists of (1) specifying the data to be referenced, (2) creating an index (pre-correction index), and (3) reading/storing the data. Here, we will describe a modified example that simplifies the program structure by separating processes that can be executed independently of the bit transfer instruction execution process into subroutines.

(1) Specifying the data to be referenced involves setting information to identify the data (reference data) necessary for the process being executed. In the flowchart of Figure 296, this corresponds to specifying the information corresponding to the table to be referenced in step P8001 and specifying the information corresponding to the data reading location in step P8002. These processes are specific to the content being executed (the caller) and are specified individually when various functions are executed. (3) The process of reading/storing data is similar and is executed in subsequent processes based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creating the index (pre-correction index), in addition to the address of the referenced table and the pointer information of the data reference location specified in (1), the total number of bits of the basic configuration block can be specified, allowing the pre-correction index to be created independently of the currently executing process. Therefore, the (2) index creation process can be made into a subroutine.

Figure 298 shows an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process in this embodiment is subroutine-based, where (A) is the process of the caller of the index creation process, and (B) is the subroutine-based index creation process. The flowchart shown in Figure 298(A) executes the same process as in Figure 296. The flowchart of the index creation process in Figure 298(B) is a subroutine-based version of the process from step P8003 to step P8008 in Figure 296. By subroutine-based index creation in this way, the process of the caller can be simplified, thereby improving development efficiency.

Furthermore, the input parameters for the index creation process are the "index value," which is the starting address of the reference table; the "pointer information" of the data to be referenced; and the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" of the stored data. In this embodiment, the result of subtracting the starting address of the data area from the starting address of the reference table is set as the "index value" in the HL register (step P8001), and the "pointer information" is set in the A register (step P8002). Additionally, the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting the "index value" and "pointer information" as input parameters for the index creation process, this is done by setting (specifying) them in the registers that will be treated as the "index value" and "pointer value" in the index creation process. Regarding the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block," the numerical value itself may be specified, or it may be set (specified) in the register that will be treated as the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block."

[18-5. Compressed Data]
In conventional data read commands, data storage is managed in predetermined basic units (bytes), so it was necessary to read data from the table in these units. In conventional table structures, such as the gaming machine of this embodiment, which manage data in 1-byte (8-bit) units, it was necessary to store data in byte units even if the data did not require the capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). For example, for numbers in the range of 0 to 63, although it would be sufficient to allocate 6 bits of capacity for each data, it was necessary to allocate and store 1 byte of capacity for each data.

On the other hand, the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment allows reading a specified number of bits of data from a specified position in the referenced table. Therefore, only the necessary data area needs to be allocated, making it possible to compress and store the data. The structure for compressing and storing data will be explained below with reference to Figure 299.

Figure 299 illustrates an example of a table structure in this embodiment. The table shown in Figure 299 holds four records (data) "25, 48, 32, 63". When these data are converted to hexadecimal, they become "19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh", and when converted to binary (bit conversion), they become "00011001b, 00110000b, 00100000b, 00111111b". Because the basic unit of data handled by the arithmetic unit of a gaming machine is 8, conventionally, the table structure held data in 8-bit units, as shown by the dotted line in area 4771, and the upper two bits of each record were "0".

The bit transfer instruction described above allows data to be read from any bit at a specified address. Therefore, in this embodiment, by continuously storing the six bits of data from each record—that is, the data contained in area 4772—it becomes possible to arrange the data as shown in area 4773. This results in the storage of "19h, 0Ch, FEh".

As described above, while conventional table structures required 4 bytes (32 bits) of capacity, this embodiment allows for data retrieval using bit transfer instructions, enabling the removal of unnecessary bits and resulting in a compressed table structure of 3 bytes (24 bits). Thus, this embodiment minimizes the data storage area, saving memory capacity. This allows for the management of more data and enables more detailed game control.

[18-6. Detailed Procedure for Bit Transfer Instructions]
Next, we will describe typical patterns for the detailed procedures of bit transfer instructions in this embodiment. Here, we will explain the cases of reading a single specified data (RBT A, (HL) . 5), reading data sequentially from a table ([1] RBT A, (HL+) . 5 → [2] RBT B, (HL) . 5), and reading data with a capacity larger than 1 byte (RBT DE, (HL) . 9). In the examples described below, the value of the TP register will be set to "8000h", which is the starting address of the data area.

[18-6-1. Reading individual data]
Figure 300 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment, and illustrates the case of reading a single data item from a referenced table. The referenced table is the same as the table shown in Figure 299. The bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBT A, (HL).5".

As shown in Figure 300, the HL register stores the uncorrected index "4C6E". The address of the table to be referenced is "898Dh", and the example described here shows the transfer of the second data (30h) stored in the referenced table. As mentioned above, the total number of bits in the basic structural block of the referenced table is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). Based on this information, the uncorrected index "4C6E" can be calculated by executing the index creation process (Figure 298(B)).

When the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL).5" is executed, the reference address for reading the data is first identified. Specifically, the reference address ("898Dh") can be calculated by dividing the uncorrected index "4C6E" by the base unit number (8) ("098Dh") and adding the TP "8000h".

Furthermore, by calculating the logical AND of the uncorrected index "4C6E" and "07h", the lower three bits ("110b") are obtained, and the starting position (bits) of the reference address is identified. In the example shown in Figure 300, this corresponds to the 6th (= "110b") bit of the reference address. Then, by extracting 6(n+1) bits of data from the 6th bit of the reference address "898Dh", "110000b" (= 48 ("30h")) can be obtained. The obtained value is then interpolated with "00" in the upper two bits to match the basic unit number (8), and stored in the A register.

[18-6-2. Sequential Data Readout]
Figure 301 is a diagram illustrating the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment, and illustrates the case where data is read sequentially from a referenced table. The referenced table is the same as in Figure 300, as shown in Figure 299. Furthermore, the case in which bit transfer instruction [1] "RBT A, (HL+).5" is executed, followed by [2] "RBT B, (HL).5", will be described. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction and correspond to the arrows of the referenced addresses in Figure 301.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL+).5" is the same as "RBT A, (HL).5" (Figure 300) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. In the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL+).5", after storing the acquired data in the A register, the value of the extraction specification information n+1 (5+1) is added to the index value "4C6Eh" stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the HL register (the index before correction) remains unchanged from the value set before the bit transfer instruction was executed, even after the bit transfer instruction is executed (after the data has been read). By performing this index update process, which updates the index value to the storage position of the next data, the storage position of the data following the read data can be specified. In the example shown in Figure 301, this becomes "4C74h".

Subsequently, the reference address and the starting position (bit) for reading are identified, similar to the case of reading a single data item as explained in Figure 300. In the example shown in Figure 301, six bits of data are read from the 4th (= "100b") bit of the reference address "898Eh" and stored in the B register.

Thus, when reading data sequentially from a specified table, an index creation process is performed first to calculate the index value. Subsequently, the index value can be updated sequentially by adding the number of bits of the read data to the index value.

Furthermore, if each record in a table is composed of a combination of data with different bit counts, it becomes possible to retrieve data for each record by specifying extraction information according to the number of bits that make up the record. For example, if a record consists of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, the data for one record can be retrieved by specifying 4, 6, and 10 as extraction information and executing bit transfer instructions sequentially. In this case, if the data consists of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, the total number of basic configuration blocks (bit count) will be 20 (= 4 + 6 + 10). In this case, for example, by configuring the program to execute bit transfer instructions in the order of "RBT A, (HL+).4", "RBT B, (HL+).6", and "RBT DE, (HL).10", it becomes possible to retrieve each piece of data that makes up the record. By configuring the program in this way, it becomes unnecessary to create individual index values while retrieving data, thus simplifying the program for retrieving data on a record-by-record basis and speeding up execution time.

[18-6-3. Reading data larger than 1 byte]
Figure 302 illustrates a bit transfer instruction for data larger than one byte in this embodiment, where (A) is a diagram showing the referenced table and (B) is a diagram illustrating the procedure.

The table shown in Figure 302(A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and as an example, it holds three records (data) "55,258,942". When these data are converted to hexadecimal, they become "37h,102h,3AEh", and when converted to binary (bit conversion), they become "0000110111b,0100000010b,1110101110b".

However, the table shown in Figure 302(A) has an upper limit of 1000, allowing for storage in 10 bits. As mentioned earlier, the basic unit of data handled by the gaming machine's arithmetic unit is 8, requiring data to be stored in 8-bit (1-byte) units. Therefore, actually storing the data required 16 bits of capacity. Conventionally, the table structure was as shown by the dotted line 4801, with the upper 6 bits of each unused record assigned to "0". Thus, similar to the example shown in Figure 299, the data for 10 bits of each record, i.e., the data in area 4802, is stored consecutively, arranging the data as shown in 4803. This results in the storage of "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah". In this way, data exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can also be compressed and stored in the same manner.

The total number of basic structural blocks can be determined by specifying the maximum number of bits of the data being composed. For example, as in the example above, if the upper limit of the data being composed is 1000 (3E8h), then the total number of basic structural blocks will be 10, which is the number of bits. Also, if the total number of basic structural blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored will be from 0h to 3FFh (1023). Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, if each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different numbers of bits (for example, first data, second data, third data), then the total number of basic structural blocks for the first data, the second data, and the third data will be the maximum number of bits of the first data, the second data, and the third data, respectively.

As mentioned above, Figure 302(B) illustrates the procedure for executing a bit transfer instruction for data larger than one byte, executing the bit transfer instruction "RBT DE, (HL).9". The HL register stores the uncorrected index "4C72h". The starting address of the table to be referenced is "898Dh", and this example shows the transfer of the second data item in the table. Furthermore, the total number of bits in the basic block of the table to be referenced is 10, and the basic unit is 8. Based on this information, the uncorrected index "4C72h" can be calculated by executing the index creation process (Figure 298(B)).

The reference address is identified using the same procedure as shown in Figure 300, and "898Eh" is calculated. Furthermore, the starting position for reading the reference address ("010b") is identified using the same procedure. Then, by extracting 10(n+1) bits of data from the 2nd bit ("010b"), which is the starting position for reading the reference address "898Eh," "0100000010b" (= 258 ("102h")) can be obtained. Since the obtained value exceeds the basic unit number (8), the upper two bits of the obtained value ("01b") are taken, and "000000" is interpolated into the upper six bits of the extracted value ("00000001b"), and stored in the D register. Finally, the remaining lower eight bits ("00000010b") are stored in the E register.

As described above, this embodiment allows for the storage of data requiring a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) through compression, and enables data to be read using a simple procedure.

[18-7. Application Examples]
Next, we will describe an example of applying the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment to game control. Here, we will describe as an example the process of extracting random numbers and selecting a variation pattern for the variation display (dynamic display) of symbols in game control based on these extracted random numbers. In this process, the extracted random numbers are sequentially compared with thresholds obtained from the variation pattern table, and if the extracted random numbers are greater than or equal to the threshold, the variation pattern number corresponding to this threshold is selected as the lottery result. The following explanation will be given with reference to Figures 303 to 305.

[18-7-1. Structure of the Variation Pattern Table]
First, the variable pattern table in this embodiment will be described. Figure 303 is a diagram illustrating an example of the application of the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment, where (A) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the variable pattern and the corresponding range, (B) is program code showing the variable pattern table, and (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression for the variable pattern table corresponding to (B).

In this embodiment, the range of random numbers extracted is from 0 to 63 (integer values). As shown in Figure 303(A), the corresponding variation pattern number is selected when the extracted random numbers fall within the range corresponding to each variation pattern. In this embodiment, variation patterns from Pattern 1 (PT1) to Pattern 5 (PT5) are defined. Pattern 1 corresponds to random values of 0 to 32, Pattern 2 to 33 to 45, Pattern 3 to 46 to 54, Pattern 4 to 55 to 60, and Pattern 5 to 61 to 63. Furthermore, the larger the pattern number, the higher the probability of transitioning to a state advantageous to the player (i.e., the lottery result being a jackpot). Note that the pattern numbers may not be arranged so that larger numbers correspond to higher probability; instead, smaller pattern numbers may correspond to higher probability. Also, the pattern numbers may be set based on criteria other than the expected probability for management purposes.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 303(B), the variation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as a record consisting of a random number threshold and a pattern number. The random number threshold and variation pattern number are stored consecutively in the same table.

As mentioned above, the range of random numbers extracted is from 0 to 63, and the threshold requires a maximum capacity of 6 bits. Similarly, the variation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, requiring a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7). When storing data using conventional methods, the gaming machine of this embodiment requires 1 byte (8 bits) of capacity to store one piece of data. Therefore, as shown on the left of Figure 303(C), if the number of records composed of the random number threshold and variation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right of Figure 303(C), by employing the data compression technology of this embodiment, only 6 bits of capacity are needed for the threshold and 3 bits for the variation pattern number. Since this data is stored consecutively, if the number of records is 5, the data can be stored in a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), reducing the capacity by more than 40%.

Note that the table shown in Figure 303 is just an example, and the compression ratio of the table changes depending on the random number threshold and the range of the variation pattern number. For example, if the capacity of the random number threshold is in bytes (8 bits), data cannot be compressed. However, if the capacity of the random number threshold is not in bytes, that is, if there is a fractional bit between 1 and 7 bits, the capacity can be reduced by the fractional bit from 8 bits for each data point. In particular, when the data capacity is 9 bits or 17 bits, where the fractional bit is 1 bit, it is possible to reduce the capacity of one data point by 7 bits, achieving the maximum effect.

[18-7-2. Procedure for selecting a variation pattern]
Next, an overview of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment will be described. Note that if multiple variation pattern tables are defined, a variation pattern table should be selected in advance according to the game state, etc.

First, a random number between 0 and 63 is extracted to be used for selecting the variation pattern. Next, the random number threshold and variation pattern number are sequentially obtained from the variation pattern table, record by record, starting from the beginning of the table. Furthermore, the extracted random number is compared with the obtained random number threshold. If the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the obtained threshold, the corresponding variation pattern is selected as the selection result. On the other hand, if the value of the random number is less than the obtained threshold, the next record is obtained from the variation pattern table, and the variation pattern is selected by comparing it with the threshold using the same procedure. In this way, the threshold corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers used to select the corresponding variation pattern. Also, since the threshold for the last record in the variation pattern table is 0, the variation pattern is always selected in the final record. To give a numerical example of the variation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is "48", it is first compared with the threshold "60" corresponding to the first record in the table. Since it is less than the threshold, it is then compared with the threshold "54" of the next record. Similarly, comparing the extracted random number "45" to the threshold "45" of the next record, the corresponding pattern "PT3" (variation pattern number 3) is selected because the extracted random number "45" is greater than or equal to the threshold.

Here, we will specifically explain the procedure for obtaining the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection process). Figure 304 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. Figure 305 is a diagram showing an example of the program for selecting a variation pattern in this embodiment. The flowchart in Figure 304 corresponds to the program in Figure 305. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure for selecting a variation pattern is as follows: First, identify the variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (number). Next, create an index from the identified variation pattern table to retrieve data using the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment. Subsequently, extract random numbers for selecting a variation pattern. Finally, use the bit transfer instruction to obtain the random number threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number from the variation pattern table, and select the variation pattern number by comparing the random number threshold and the random number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first obtains the address (Hp_no_table) of the variable pattern table (step P8021). In this embodiment, one variable pattern table is defined, but if multiple variable pattern tables are defined depending on the game state, the variable pattern table is identified at this time.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the parameters for creating the index to execute the bit transfer instruction RBT of this embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating the index is as described in Figures 296 and 297, etc.

To explain in more detail, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the index value in the HL register as the value obtained by subtracting the starting address of the data area from the starting address of the variable pattern table identified in the processing of step P8021 ("LD
HL,Hp_no_table-9000h" and "9000h" correspond to "TP" in the program code shown in Figure 297, and are values stored in the TP register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the parameters for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, it first extracts the pointer information of the data to be referenced (records in the variable pattern table) and sets it as a parameter. Since data is retrieved from the beginning of the variable pattern table, the data pointer information is 0. Furthermore, it sets the total number of basic configuration blocks as a parameter. As mentioned above, the total number of basic configuration blocks corresponds to the data capacity of the area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the random number threshold is 6 bits and the variable pattern number is 3 bits, 9 bits of capacity are required to store one record, and the total number of basic configuration blocks is 9.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs an index creation process to create an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the pointer information (0) of the data to be referenced (variable pattern table) is multiplied by the total number of bits (9) of the basic configuration block. The result of the multiplication is 0 and is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value in the WA register by the base unit number (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder in the W register (0). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register again and adds the value in the WA register to the HL register. As mentioned above, the value of the W register before clearing is saved in the stack area for use in subsequent calculations. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 left-shifts the value in the HL register by 3 bits (multiplies by 8). Finally, the saved value of the W register is added to the HL register, completing the index creation.

Once the index creation is complete and preparations are ready to retrieve the variable pattern number from the variable pattern table, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a random number for drawing a variable pattern (step P8024). The extracted random number is a 6-bit integer between 0 and 63, as described above, and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Next, the extracted random values are compared with threshold values stored in the variation pattern table to identify the variation pattern number. The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the random number threshold from the variation pattern table based on the index created in step P8023 using a bit transfer instruction (step P8025). Specifically, it obtains 6 bits of data from the position specified by the index and stores it in the A register (RBT A, (HL+).5). Furthermore, it obtains the variation pattern number stored in the contiguous area using a bit transfer instruction (step P8026). The variation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBT W, (HL+).2).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number threshold and the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table, and then determines whether the threshold is 0 or not (step P8027). In this embodiment, since the threshold for the last record in the variation pattern table is set to 0, determining whether the threshold is 0 or not means determining whether the last record has been detected or not (AND A, FFh → JR Z, hp_select_2). If the threshold is 0 (the result of step P8027 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates this process using the variation pattern number obtained in step P8026 as the lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, if the random number threshold is not zero (result of step P8027 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the random number threshold is smaller than the random number used for selecting the variation pattern (step P8028). If the random number threshold is larger than the random number used for selecting the variation pattern (result of step P8028 is "yes"), the process returns to step P8025 to select the next record and obtain the threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number.

Furthermore, if the random number threshold is less than or equal to the random number used for selecting the variation pattern (the result of step P8028 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates this process (step P8029) using the variation pattern number obtained in step P8026 as the lottery result.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern selection process is configured to loop through steps P8025 to P8028. This loop sequentially compares the threshold values of the variation pattern table records from the first to the last with the acquired random values to identify the variation pattern. Once the variation pattern is identified, the loop is exited. In the program, as shown in Figure 305, the processing from tag "hp_select_1" to tag "hp_select_2" corresponds to this loop.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection process of this embodiment, an index is created using the table's starting address as the data reading start position, and the bit transfer instructions "RBT A, (HL+).5" and "RBT W, (HL+).2" are executed sequentially. This allows data reading to begin from the beginning of the table, enabling continuous reading of subsequent data without recalculating the index. In this way, data can be acquired without resetting parameters even when acquiring data continuously, thus simplifying the program.

[18-8. Other Application Examples]
Here, the application example shown in Figure 303 involved using the bit transfer instruction in this embodiment on a table for selecting a variation pattern. However, the application is not limited to this, and it can be applied to tables for other purposes as well. For example, it can be applied to a table for identifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, where each port is composed of the port address, logical correction value, mask value, data area address, etc. In this case, the effect of the data transfer instruction in this embodiment can be obtained as long as all the data constituting the table is in byte units.

Furthermore, this method can also be applied to data used to create commands to be sent to various circuit boards, such as data that identifies the parameters of the commands to be sent. Specifically, for a command specifying the number of prize balls to be dispensed, if the number of prize balls is between 1 and 15, it can be specified using 4 bits. In this case, 5 bits may be allocated to allow specifying prize ball numbers of 16 or more, or the leading bit may be fixed to "1" to identify it as a prize ball number, with the lower 4 bits used to specify the number of prize balls.

Another example of this approach is its application to tables used to identify areas for storing various types of data. Specifically, this table consists of records containing information for identifying data (information for identifying the data) and information for identifying the address of the area where that data is stored. Instead of storing the address itself, the information for identifying the address of the data storage area could be stored by pre-registering a reference address in a separate area and then storing the difference (difference address) from that reference address in the table. This reduces the amount of storage space required for addresses. Furthermore, it allows for flexible handling of large amounts of data or data volume, or when data volume changes.

Furthermore, as an alternative example of a table for identifying areas to store various data, the address (2 bytes) of the data storage area can be identified by combining a higher address (1 byte) and a lower address (1 byte). In this case, the higher address is stored in a separate area beforehand as reference address information, and only the lower address needs to be stored in the table. By storing the lower address in an area smaller than 1 byte, data capacity can be reduced. Also, since the address where data is stored can be identified without calculation (or with simple calculation), the process for identifying addresses can be simplified. Moreover, since the address where data is actually stored can be easily identified by referring to the table, maintenance, such as when reviewing the data storage addresses, can be easily performed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the data compression technology in this embodiment makes it possible to retrieve data of a specified number of bits, and therefore can be applied even when storing data of different sizes consecutively. However, when data of different sizes are stored consecutively, it is necessary to identify the size of each data item, and it may not be possible to efficiently reduce data capacity by individually maintaining the size of each data item. Therefore, by allocating an area equivalent to the maximum data capacity of a series of data items and storing each data item in that area, it becomes possible to retrieve data without identifying the size of each data item, thereby simplifying the entire process. As mentioned above, when storing multiple types of data as a single record in a table, it is possible to achieve both data capacity reduction and processing simplification by first identifying the size of each data item constituting the record, and then retrieving each record in the table based on the identified data sizes.

Furthermore, if the table structure is the same, compressed data can be retrieved using a common process; therefore, it is advisable to standardize the structure of similar tables. For example, if multiple variable pattern tables are defined according to the game state, even if it is possible to reduce the data capacity for each table due to reasons such as a small number of variable pattern types, using a common structure allows data to be retrieved from the variable pattern table using a common process regardless of the game state, thus simplifying the overall process.

[18-9. Effects, etc.]
As described above, by reading data using the bit transfer command of this embodiment, it is possible to remove unnecessary bits and create a compressed table structure, thereby minimizing the area required to store the data. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

Furthermore, since the process of creating the index for executing the bit transfer instructions in this embodiment can be made independent, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the original game control. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in data capacity while suppressing the complexity of conventional game control.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since it is possible to read multiple data from a contiguous area by executing bit transfer instructions consecutively while incrementing the index, the processing can be simplified when reading only the required amount of data with the same number of bits, or when reading records (data sets) composed of data of multiple different numbers of bits.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even data requiring a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and stored, and the data can be read using the same procedure as for data of less than 8 bits, thus providing a highly versatile data reading method.

The data structure readable by the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment is effective when the data size is not in bytes, and the amount of capacity saved increases with the amount of data. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of defined data, such as data used in processing related to special and normal symbols, for example, variation patterns. Note that if the data consists of byte-sized data, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction ("LD"). On the other hand, since the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment involves more steps to read data than a load instruction, it may be preferable to use a load instruction rather than the bit transfer instruction of this embodiment when it is necessary to quickly perform routine processing such as power-on processing or power outage processing, or when the amount of data to be handled is small. Thus, when controlling the game based on a wide variety of data, such as control related to the variation display of special and normal symbols, it is possible to reduce data capacity by using a bit transfer instruction that can acquire data bit by bit. On the other hand, when it is necessary to quickly process routine procedures, it may be possible to simplify and speed up processing by using a load instruction that allows access to data stored at a directly specified address without requiring the creation of an index.

[19. Improvement of commands to call processes]
The above describes methods for reducing capacity by compressing the data storage area. Next, we will describe methods for speeding up processing by reducing the number of steps (clock cycles, steps) processed by the arithmetic means (main control MPU 1311) by shortening the word length of the instructions (commands) that make up the program, and for simplifying the program by executing frequently used instructions together. Here, we will describe an improved instruction for executing a predefined process (INV instruction). Since INV instructions are executed very frequently, speeding up the execution of INV instructions makes it possible to speed up the entire game control process. In addition, it is possible to simplify the program by implementing an instruction that integrates the processes executed in combination with INV instructions.

[19-1. INV command]
First, let's explain the general outline of the INV instruction. The word length of the INV instruction varies depending on the type of MPU (processor), but in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine has a word length of 4 bytes.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, the return address, which is the return destination for the calling process after the execution of the called process is complete, is stored in the stack area. This allows the calling process to execute a return instruction, overwriting the program counter value at the return address stored in the stack area, returning to the caller, and continuing processing from the instruction following the executed INV instruction.

Furthermore, since the INV instruction can specify any address in the memory area, it is possible to call all processes stored in memory. Therefore, the placement of programs and data can be freely configured. On the other hand, this high degree of flexibility can increase the number of steps required to call processes (the number of clock cycles needed), resulting in overhead. Therefore, it was desirable to reduce this overhead to lower the overall processing load.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and reduce the load of calling frequently executed processes, prior art has been proposed that enables calling processes while reducing the load of identifying the placement of processes based on a predefined table containing the addresses of the processes to be called (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174833). The outline of the INVD instruction, which has a function similar to the prior art, will be described below.

[19-2. INVD command]
As mentioned above, the INVD instruction creates a pre-defined processing address table containing addresses of frequently executed processes, and specifies the process to be called based on this processing address table when the INVD instruction is executed. Each process in the processing address table is assigned an index (1 byte), making it possible to call a specific process simply by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). This shortens the word length of the instruction, speeds up processing, and simplifies the program structure. Furthermore, even if the program's location in memory (where the processes are stored) is changed, only the data defined in the processing address table needs to be modified. This allows for flexible adaptation even when the program's location or configuration changes, improving the efficiency of program development.

Here, the configuration of the memory area for storing the processing address table will be described. Figure 306 is a diagram showing an example of an address map illustrating the configuration of the memory area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in this embodiment. The memory area is provided by RAM 1312 and ROM 1313.

In this embodiment, the areas accessed by game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine include the RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), the internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), the ROM area (8000h to C12Fh), and the extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used area), and access by the game control program is prohibited in principle.

To explain each area, the RAM area is a temporary storage area for data read and written during program execution. The internal function register area stores the settings of various registers for controlling internal functions. In this embodiment, the internal function register area is located in two places, but it may be a single area or divided into three or more areas. While the internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, unlike the RAM area, the values are not stored during calculations by the main control MPU 1311. Instead, it specifies the functions that the main control MPU 1311 executes. In other words, once the values in the internal function register area are set at power-on, they cannot be changed, unlike information stored in the RAM area.

The ROM area includes the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh), the ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), the processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and the HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program/data area stores read-only data and programs. The ROM comment area contains data such as the program title and version. The processing address table area stores data related to processes (subroutines) called when a specific processing call instruction (e.g., the INVD instruction described later) is executed. The HW parameter area contains hardware-related parameters for executing the internal functions of the main control board 1310.

The extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated as an unused (access prohibited) area in standard (mass-produced) gaming machines, while in development gaming machines, it can be allocated as a program/data area and is assigned to a separate ROM from the ROM where the program/data is stored. This design prevents programs/data placed in the extended ROM area from malfunctioning in development machines by eliminating the need for an extended ROM in mass-produced gaming machines.

Furthermore, the extended ROM area may be stored in the same ROM as the ROM where the program/data is stored. In that case, the hardware parameters should be set so that the extended ROM area is inaccessible in mass-produced gaming machines, so that even if development programs/data are mistakenly left in the extended ROM area, those programs/data will not function.

Next, we will explain the structure of the processing address table. Figure 307 shows an example of a program implementation of a processing address table that stores the addresses of processes (subroutines). In the implementation example shown in Figure 307, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table that stores the addresses of processes executed by the INVD instruction, an interrupt processing address table that stores the addresses of processes executed when various interrupts occur may also be included. In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "processing address table" refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used by the INVD instruction.

The processing address table stores the addresses of frequently executed and general-purpose processes. Frequently executed processes include, for example, timer interrupt processing and processes executed within the main loop of the initialization process on the main control board. General-purpose processes, as will be described later, include processes that read signals from specified ports and processes that perform predetermined calculations on specified numerical values. To maintain versatility, these processes are significantly simplified compared to processes specialized for game control (e.g., jackpot determination processing and variation pattern selection processing). These processes, for example, have small program sizes and short processing times.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 306, the processing address table is stored in a different area from the area where the program is stored. As mentioned earlier, the processing called by the INVD instruction is highly versatile and may be used as a common process in the development of other gaming machines. By separating and arranging the areas in this way, it becomes possible to manage the processing separately from machine-dependent programs, thereby improving the development efficiency of the gaming control program. Additionally, because a ROM comment area is located between the area where the processing address table is stored and the area where the program is stored, even if a problem occurs during program execution and processing extends beyond the program/data area, the ROM comment area contains data that does not match the program code, such as the program title. This prevents unexpected processing from being executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table.

In the example shown in Figure 307, 16 types of processes are defined, from INVD0 to INVD15. For example, INVD0 includes port reading (PORT_RD), and INVD1 includes data setting (DAT_SET). When executing an INVD instruction, you only need to specify the number (processing index) corresponding to the process to be called.

Here, we will explain the processing index with reference to Figure 308. Figure 308 shows an example of program code that defines an index to identify the processing stored at an address in the processing address table. The program code shown in Figure 308 has predefined processing indexes that can be called with the INVD instruction. Within the program, instead of directly specifying numerical values, you should specify a variable corresponding to the processing name (function name). For example, when executing the port reading process (PORT_RD), instead of directly specifying the constant "0", you should specify it using the label (_PORT_RD). This improves program readability and enhances the development efficiency of game control programs.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned prior art (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-174833), the upper address is pre-set, and the lower address is specified; unlike this embodiment, a number (processing index) is not specified. Therefore, if the processing address changes, the instruction to execute that processing must be modified each time, making it impossible to improve development efficiency compared to specifying a number.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the processing index is set to 0 to 15 and the number of processes defined in the processing address table is 16, the index capacity becomes 4 bits. This reduces the memory capacity required to identify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction compared to specifying a (lower) address. Furthermore, since the instruction portion (opcode) of the INVD instruction consists of 4 bits, it can be composed of a total of 8 bits (1 byte) together with the index capacity (operand). Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction becomes 1 byte, and compared to calling a process with a normal call instruction (INV instruction), the number of clock cycles required for the main control MPU 1311 to call the process specified by the INVD instruction can be reduced, and furthermore, the program capacity can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the INVD instruction is frequently used in processes executed when the power is turned on and during gameplay (main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.), while its usage is less frequent during power-off processing. This is to prevent increased overhead during process calls caused by increasing the number of memory references while the power is off, thereby minimizing power consumption. Also, since power-off processing is executed less frequently than processes during gameplay, its specifications are not frequently changed, and there is a limit to the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction, processes called during power-off are configured not to be executed by the INVD instruction, except for general-purpose processes. Thus, in power-off processing, the control is simplified to reduce the execution load of the process, rather than reducing program size using the INVD instruction.

Next, the procedure for executing processing using the INVD instruction will be explained. Figure 309 is a diagram illustrating the operation when the INVD instruction is executed in this embodiment. Figure 309 illustrates the changes in the program counter and stack pointer stored at address "80A4h" when the INVD instruction is executed.

When an INVD instruction is executed, the address to which the program will return after the execution of the INVD instruction is first saved to the stack. In the example in Figure 309, an INVD instruction stored at address "80A4h" is executed, and since the length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, the value saved to the stack is "80A5h".

Next, the INVD instruction retrieves a two-byte data (call destination address) corresponding to the specified number (operand, processing index) from the processing address table. The retrieved two-byte data (call destination address) is then set in the program counter, and the specified process is invoked. The procedure for invoking the specified process will now be explained with reference to Figure 310.

Figure 310 illustrates the procedure for identifying the process to be called by the INVD instruction in this embodiment. Here, the procedure for executing the port reading process (PORT_RD) is described. As shown in Figure 307, the port reading process (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (index 0) of the processing address table.

The number specified in the INVD instruction shown in Figure 310 is "_PORT_RD". Referring to the INVD instruction processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Next, the processing address table is referenced to identify the instruction corresponding to the specified number. Specifically, "PORT_RD" is identified. Note that the left column of the processing address table in Figure 310 corresponds to the row number and is added for explanatory purposes. As shown in Figure 307, it is not included in the actual processing address table. The INVD instruction identifies the instruction corresponding to the specified number. "PORT_RD" is a label indicating the processing address ("80D4h").

When the address of the process specified by the INVD instruction is identified, the program counter is updated to the address of the specified process. Returning to the explanation in Figure 309, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to "80D4h," which is the starting address of the port reading process "PORT_RD." At this time, the value of the stack pointer shifts by two bytes because the address of the calling process's return is stored in the stack area, updating from "01F8h" to "01F6h."

Subsequently, the called process (port reading process "PORT_RD") is executed, and instructions are executed sequentially starting from the called address ("80D4h"). Then, in order to return to the caller via a return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and subsequent processes are executed sequentially. At this time, the program counter value is updated from the return instruction address "80E8h" to the address "80A5h" that was saved in the stack area. Furthermore, by changing the stack pointer from "01F6h" to "01F8h", the area in the stack area where the return address was stored becomes available again. After returning to the caller's process, the processes are executed sequentially starting from address "80A5h".

As described above, the INVD instruction in this embodiment allows for calling processes with fewer clock cycles than a normal process call instruction, i.e., at high speed, and furthermore, program size can be compressed. In particular, as mentioned above, by configuring the system so that frequently called processes can be called with the INVD instruction, the entire control process can be sped up. In this embodiment, as defined in the process address table (Figure 307), 16 types of processes are defined. Specifically, these include port reading (PORT_RD), data setting (DAT_SET), work area setting 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search (LD_HLA_HL), command buffer setting 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage (COM_SET), common output determination process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), common output determination process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting (PORT_DAT_SET), variable information number search (TI_SRCH), fraud notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET), data search (HLA_SRCH), multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), and SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX_WA).

The following describes each process executed by the INVD instruction in this embodiment. Figures 311 to 324 show example programs (modules) for each process. The comments at the beginning of each program indicate the input register, output register, protection register, and caller. The input register is a register that stores the value set by the calling module. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register that stores the value set by the called module. The execution result of the process is stored here. The protection register is a register whose use is restricted by the called module. However, it may be used if the value at the start and end of the called module's execution is the same. For example, it is acceptable to use the register if it is temporarily stored on the stack, etc., when it is destroyed (used), and then restored after use. The caller is the module that calls the module in question. A large number of modules listed here indicates high usage frequency. However, the actual number of executions depends on the call frequency of the calling module itself, so a small number of modules does not necessarily mean low usage frequency.

Figure 311 shows an example program for the port reading process (PORT_RD) of this embodiment. The port reading process reads the input signal of a specified port. Specifically, the port reading process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register) and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read multiple times, and predetermined flags (e.g., J flag, Z flag) included in the PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) are updated depending on whether the acquired signals match. This makes it possible not only to read the input signal from the specified port, but also to determine whether the signal is being input correctly.

Figure 312 shows an example program for the data setting process (DAT_SET) of this embodiment. The data setting process sets a series of data defined in a table, specified by the setting data address set in the HL register, into a work area (e.g., the DE register) all at once. Furthermore, the first data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process has a defined data setting number (the number of data entries in the table). Subsequent data (records) consist of the (lower) address of the work area where the setting value is stored and the setting value stored in that work area. The setting value is read sequentially by calling the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), described later, with the INVD instruction. As described above, when the data setting process starts, after first obtaining the data setting number stored at the address specified in the input register, it is possible to obtain a series of data entries (records) of the specified data setting number, regardless of the number of data entries.

Figure 313 shows an example program for the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) in this embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process that sets a work area to be used temporarily during program execution. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table identified by the address stored in the HL register. Furthermore, the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) can also be called from processes executed by other INVD instructions. Thus, processes executed by INVD instructions consist of very short programs that implement general-purpose functions, and can be called multiple times. This allows for overall speed improvement of game control by combining processes called by INVD instructions. Additionally, program code duplication can be avoided, thus compressing the program size.

Figure 314 shows an example program for the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of this embodiment. In the work area setting process 2, after executing the work area setting process 1, the specified setting data address is set to the next address, thereby simplifying the process of setting work areas consecutively.

Here, we will explain an example using the data setting process, work area setting process 1, and work area setting process 2, following the data setting process program shown in Figure 312, to retrieve data from a table consisting of the (lower) address of the work area and the setting values to be stored in the work area, and then store that data in the work area.

In the data setting process, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the setting data address is obtained, and the setting of the work area by the work area setting process 2 and the setting of data in that work area are repeated for the number of records (loop processing). In the loop processing, first the setting data address is updated (incremented) and moved to the next row, and then the work area setting process 2 is called by the INVD instruction.

In Work Area Setting Process 2, the work area is set using the address identified by the setting data address in Work Area Setting Process 1. Next, the setting data address is updated (incremented) to reflect the address of the data storage area. Afterward, the process returns from Work Area Setting Process 2 to Data Setting Process, and the data identified by the setting data address (the value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (the value set in the DE register). Once the data for the number of table records has been set in the corresponding work areas, the loop is exited, and the data setting process terminates.

By configuring the program as described above, the program structure can be simplified and the program size reduced by hierarchically calling the data setting process, work area setting process 2, and work area setting process using the INVD instruction.

Figure 315 shows an example program for the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of this embodiment. The 2-byte data search process selects an address set in a data table specified by the HL register (input register) and sets it in the HL register. Since the address value is 2 bytes, the address of the target data table is identified by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, and this address is then reset in the HL register (output register). For example, it is used when transitioning to various processes in special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing, such as when executing a process to select the destination address based on the job number (selected value) using a jump table.

Figure 316 shows an example program for the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET) of this embodiment. Normally, processes called by instructions such as the INVD instruction include a return (BK) instruction at the end to return to the calling process. However, the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in Figure 316 do not contain instructions to return to the calling process. Therefore, after the jackpot information command setting process finishes, the command buffer setting process 1 is executed, followed by the command storage process. Finally, the return instruction placed at the end of the command storage process returns to the calling process.

When calling command buffer setting process 1 using the INVD instruction in the jackpot information command setting process, as explained in Figure 309, it is necessary to store the return address in the stack area. However, by arranging the program sequentially, these processes can be omitted, reducing the program size. Furthermore, since the stack area is not used, a reduction in memory usage can also be achieved.

The jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is the process of setting jackpot information commands that specify the actions to be taken when a jackpot occurs. It sets the appropriate jackpot information commands according to the situation, such as the opening and closing of the jackpot entry point during a jackpot. Subsequently, the command buffer setting process 1 and the command storage process are executed, and the information is sent from the transmission buffer to the destination.

Command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) identifies the command to be actually transmitted using reference command data (MODE value) and command addition data to specifically identify the command, and stores it in the transmit buffer through the command storage process described later. The command stored in the transmit buffer is sent to the destination as appropriate. The "reference command data" consists of two bytes; for example, in the case of the variation pattern in Figure 1, it would be "1001h" (upper byte: variation pattern type, lower byte: command reference value (starting from 01h)). If variation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the variation pattern in Figure 1, the command to be transmitted will be the result of adding the value of variation pattern 5 (05h) to the lower 8 bits of the reference command "1001h" ("1006h").

The command storage process (COM_SET) is the process of storing commands and other data in the transmit buffer. The specific procedure involves first checking the state of the transmit buffer to determine if there is a predetermined number of free bytes. If there are no free bytes in the transmit buffer, the process terminates. If there are free bytes, the status and mode constituting the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmit buffer. Furthermore, a sum value obtained by adding the values of the H register and the L register is set in the transmit buffer. In the case of the command "1006h" with variation pattern 5 (05h) selected as the variation pattern in Figure 1, the sum value would be "10h" + "06h" = "16h". Note that the sum value does not necessarily have to be set in the transmit buffer.

Furthermore, the commands stored in the transmission buffer consist of two bytes (excluding the sum value). The first byte indicates the type of command being transmitted (variation pattern, symbol stop, hold memory, jackpot, etc.), and the second byte indicates the specific action for that type (for example, the specific variation pattern number if it's a variation pattern type).

The transmit buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built into the main control MPU 1311, and is a separate memory from the RAM 1312. The transmit buffer is configured to store multiple bytes of information (it has a capacity of 64 bytes). Commands stored in the transmit buffer are sent via serial output to the destination by the hardware in the order they were stored.

Figure 317 shows an example program for the common output determination process 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of this embodiment. The common output determination process 1 obtains data from the information determination output data (the value indicated by the HL register), determines whether a flag is set in the working area (lower address) set in the information determination output data, and if the flag is set, sets the information set in the A register (port output calculation value) corresponding to that flag (working area). By looping the above process the number of times set in the information determination output data, the value to be output to the port is stored in the A register. For example, if the information determination output data is "solenoid information determination output data", the number of loops is set to 3, and first the content of the big prize slot 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) is determined, and if 1 (flag value) is set in DSOL1_FG, then _TDSOL1_PB (big prize slot solenoid 1 bit data) set in correspondence with DSOL1_FG is set as the output value (when this value is output, the big prize slot solenoid 1 is turned ON). This process is repeated the number of times (3 times) specified in the solenoid information judgment output data.

Figure 318 shows an example program for the common output determination process 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of this embodiment. The common output determination process 2 retrieves data from the status determination output data and processes the LED port output values, etc. The status determination output data, like the information determination output data, has a table structure. The number of records in the table is retrieved, and the data corresponding to that number of records is processed.

Figure 319 shows an example program for the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) in this embodiment. The output port data setting process is for setting information in the I/O area to the output port or internal register. It outputs the set value corresponding to the output destination (output port, internal register) to the output destination set in the table (setting data address).

Figure 320 shows an example program for the variable information number search process (TI_SRCH) of this embodiment. The variable information number search process searches a predetermined data area for an information number that matches a specified comparison value, and is used when selecting variable pattern information based on a variable pattern random number. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written to the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random value, etc.) are compared with the information set in the table specified by the HL register (the value to be compared with the random number (determination value)). The process is repeated until the condition (e.g., random value < determination value) is met. When the condition is met, the information set in accordance with the determination value (search result (e.g., variable pattern number, etc.)) is stored in the A register, and the process returns to the caller.

Figure 321 shows an example program for the fraud notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET) of this embodiment. The fraud notification setting process is for providing notifications in the event of an anomaly. Specifically, it sets the specified anomaly display command using the command storage process and sets the time for the fraud notification.

Figure 322 shows an example program for the data retrieval process (HLA_SRCH) of this embodiment. The data retrieval process searches for specified data from specified search data. First, the data matching the comparison value is searched from the area (address) where the specified search data is stored. At this time, the data searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Furthermore, a search is performed from the area of the searched address based on the specified selection value. The data retrieval process is executed by combining multiple search processes, and subsequent search processes are executed based on the search results of the preceding search processes. In this embodiment, the first search is performed by a 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by a variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). This makes it possible to identify multiple tables defined according to the game state, etc., in the first search, and to obtain a specific variable information number in the next search. This implementation makes it easier to perform multi-stage searches and reduces the amount of data by storing data in stages.

As described above, in this embodiment, a single process is constructed by combining multiple processes that can be called using the INVD instruction, which has a shorter word length than other call instructions. By calling such a configured process with the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire process while reducing program size. Furthermore, this is applicable not only to data retrieval processes but also to any multi-stage execution process. For example, if multiple arithmetic processes that can be called with the INVD instruction are defined, it is possible to combine them to realize more complex arithmetic processes.

Figure 323 shows an example program for the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL) of this embodiment. The multiplication value addition address acquisition process multiplies a specified base value by a multiplication value and adds it to the specified base address value. It combines frequently executed routine operations, thus simplifying the program.

Figure 324 shows an example program for the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) of this embodiment. SPI 2-byte output processing is a process for setting output data to the SPI port when outputting 2 bytes of data via SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used to transmit data to light-emitting devices such as LEDs and drive devices such as motors and solenoids.

As described above, the processing called by the INVD instruction in this embodiment is highly versatile because it consists of short processes of a few to several tens of bytes. Furthermore, since the INVD instruction allows processing to be called with a word length of one byte, it is possible to achieve high-speed execution of the entire game control program while simultaneously compressing the program size.

[19-3. INVS command]
The INVD instruction streamlined the process of calling a process (subroutine) by pre-storing the address in the processing address table. However, since only predefined processes could be called, adding or changing a process required updating the contents of the processing address table and the definition information of the processing address table number. Furthermore, while the INVD instruction limited the number of callable processes to 16 to achieve a word length of 1 byte, attempting to apply it to 17 or more processes would lead to a decrease in processing speed, potentially undermining the effectiveness of using the INVD instruction.

Therefore, in this embodiment, we propose an INVS instruction that has a shorter word length than a normal INV instruction while offering greater flexibility than an INVD instruction. The INVS instruction reduces the overhead (procedures, clock cycles) required to call a process (subroutine) by storing the process in a specific area, enabling equivalent processing with a shorter word length than an INV instruction. Furthermore, since any number of processes (subroutines) can be defined as long as the processes are stored within the specific area, it offers greater flexibility than an INVD instruction. Note that the specific area (third area) is included in the program/data area of the ROM area explained in Figure 306.

Next, we will further explain the INVS instruction. Figure 325 is an excerpt of a program that calls processing using the INVS instruction in this embodiment. (A) is an excerpt of the program that calls the solenoid drive processing and motor drive processing, (B) is an example program (partial) of the solenoid drive processing, and (C) is an example program (partial) of the motor drive processing. In the program example shown in Figure 325, it consists of "address," "program," "mnemonic," and "comment." The "address" is the location where the program is stored. The "program" is so-called machine language, an instruction that the main control MPU 1311 can directly interpret and execute. The "mnemonic" is a simplified memory symbol used to make programming easier for machine language (a series of numbers) used to execute the program. The value of the "program" corresponds to the value of the "mnemonic." The "comment" is an explanation to make the program easier to read and is ignored during processing execution.

In the example shown in Figure 325, the solenoid drive process ("89A6h") and the motor drive process ("89CCh") are called using the INVS instruction. The INVS instruction consists of the upper four bits ("Ch") which constitute an instruction to access the first region (8000h to 8BFFh) within a specific region, and the lower 12 bits which indicate the address of the process to be called. Specifically, the lower 12 bits ("9A6h") of the program "C9A6" that calls the solenoid drive process identify the address where the solenoid drive process is stored. Since the upper four bits of the first region are fixed as "8***h", when combined with the lower 12 bits of the program, the address of the storage location of the solenoid drive process is "89A6h", as shown in Figure 325(B). Similarly, for the motor drive process, since the lower 12 bits are "9CCh", the address of the storage location is "89CCh". As described above, in this embodiment, the process (steps, number of clock cycles) required to identify the process to be called is reduced by storing the process in a specific area, and it becomes possible to execute the process stored in the first area with a 2-byte instruction.

Furthermore, while it is possible to access the second region (8C00h to 93FFh) within a specific memory area, unlike accessing the first region, the upper byte becomes the opcode for the INVS instruction, and the lower two bytes become the call address, resulting in a 3-byte instruction.

The game control program is designed with address 8000h as the starting address, and the frequency of access to the first memory region is significantly higher than that of the second memory region. Therefore, by shortening the word length when accessing the frequently used memory region, it is possible to compress the program size and reduce the processing time (number of clock cycles) for those instructions.

On the other hand, the INV instruction, which executes a process stored in an arbitrary area of memory, has a length of 4 bytes, as the upper two bytes contain the INV instruction's code information (opcode) and the lower two bytes contain the call destination address (operand). Therefore, in this embodiment, by using the INVS instruction, which executes a process stored in a specific area, it is possible to execute the process with a shorter word length compared to the INV instruction, which executes a process stored in an arbitrary area of memory.

In this embodiment, by placing frequently called processes (subroutines) in a specific area (particularly the first area) and placing less frequently called processes (e.g., error handling or processes for outputting test signals) and data in areas other than the specific area, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. If there are limitations on the program code capacity due to rules or other reasons, the program is placed in the first area first. If possible, such as when the program code capacity limit is smaller than the capacity of the first area, all processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that all processes (programs) called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area, and no programs are stored in the second area. Clearly defining the areas where programs are stored simplifies the configuration and facilitates management.

Furthermore, the first area contains at least the processing directly related to game control, while error handling and the display of the payout ratio monitor (base monitor), which are not directly related to game control, are placed in the second area. As mentioned above, placing frequently called processing in the first area can speed up the overall game control processing, but it is also possible to improve the readability of the entire program and increase development efficiency by consolidating related processing. Since the processing that can be called by the INVS instruction can be freely placed within a specific area, for example, if there are multiple specifications for the same model, controls common to each specification can be consolidated in a predetermined area, and processing that differs for each specification (spec-dependent processing) can be consolidated and placed in a separate area. Specifically, special symbol-related processing, special electric prize-related processing, normal symbol-related processing, and normal electric prize-related processing should not be distributed, but rather related processing (for example, special symbol-related processing such as variation start processing, variation in-processing, symbol confirmation processing, and variation stop processing) should be consolidated and placed together. Furthermore, even within the consolidated area, the program may be arranged in an order that follows the control executed in normal gameplay, depending on the execution timing. Specifically, in the special feature-related processing, the elements should be arranged in an order corresponding to the timing, such as when a prize is won at the start, when the variation begins, and when the variation ends.

On the other hand, error handling and payout ratio monitor (base monitor) display processing, which are not affected by game specifications and can be used universally even with different types of gaming machines, are also consolidated and placed in the second area. Since these processes may be used in multiple types of machines, it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if a team is developing multiple types of machines in parallel, the aforementioned game specification-dependent processes can be shared within the team, while processes common to all these machines can be shared between teams, thereby improving the overall development efficiency of gaming machine development. Furthermore, since the capacity limits for game specification-dependent processes may differ from machine to machine, placing universally usable processing programs (modules) in the second area allows for common addresses even when calling these processes from game control programs of different machines.

As described above, the INVS instruction makes it possible to arrange programs (modules) within a specific area according to development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). This means that while the INVD instruction prioritized defining general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading to limit the number of definable processes, the INVS instruction allows for the grouping of processes dependent on game content, facilitating management by consolidating processes by function, and improving development efficiency.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute processing using the INVD instruction within a module called by the INVS instruction. This configuration allows for further speedup of processing called by the INVS instruction, reducing program size, and ultimately speeding up and reducing the overall program size of the game control program. It is also possible to call a module using the INVS instruction within a module called by the INVD instruction. Because there is a limit to the number of processes that can be defined in the processing address table, the INVS instruction allows for the calling of highly general-purpose processes that could not be defined in the processing address table. In this way, the system is configured to allow mutual processing calls within modules called by the INVD and INVS instructions.

Furthermore, processes that are executed at predetermined intervals and are executed very frequently, such as timer interrupt processing, should be placed in a specific area (the first area). Conversely, processes that can be called from timer interrupt processing but are actually called infrequently, such as setting operation processing, should be placed outside the scope of the specific area. By configuring it in this way, the capacity of the specific area can be secured without reducing processing speed.

Furthermore, the program may be placed only in the first memory area, where the speed-enhancing effect of the INVS instruction is more pronounced, and configured so that the INVS instruction does not access the second memory area. This simplifies the management of memory areas, including program placement. For example, by placing a program that defines processes shareable across different machine types outside of the second memory area, rather than in a specific area with fewer constraints, the flexibility of program placement increases, reducing constraints arising from differences in program capacity when sharing programs. Also, even if the specifications of the INVS instruction change due to a change in the specifications of the main control MPU 1311, if the area accessible by the INVS instruction is single, adaptation becomes easier, eliminating the need to significantly change the basic structure of the game control program. This allows for the utilization of existing programs and data, improving development efficiency.

[19-4. INVI command]
Up to this point, we have described methods for speeding up instructions that call processes. Now, we will describe means of simplifying programs by implementing instructions that integrate processes that are frequently executed in combination.

When executing a specific program for game control, if other processes running concurrently overwrite information in memory, it can disrupt the game's progress. Therefore, to prevent information stored in areas commonly accessed by multiple processes from being overwritten, it is common practice to disable interrupts until the process is complete. In particular, the procedure of disabling interrupts when executing a specific process and then restoring the interrupt disablement after that process is finished is frequently used.

In game control, procedures such as disabling interrupts, calling processes, and releasing interrupt disabling are frequently performed. However, due to limitations in program memory size, it was desirable to reduce program size by omitting common procedures. Therefore, in this embodiment, we propose an INVI instruction that extends the INV instruction, which calls a process, to disable interrupts before calling the process.

The INVI instruction executes a specified process, and therefore its execution procedure is the same as the INV instruction. However, the internal processing during INVI instruction execution involves storing necessary data in the stack area and disabling interrupts before moving the program counter to the specified address. Afterward, the called process is executed. At the end of the called process, the BKI instruction is executed, returning to the calling process while restoring the interrupt state to what it was before the process was called. That is, if the INVI instruction's interrupt state is interrupt disabled, it remains disabled; if the INVI instruction's interrupt state is interrupt enabled, the interrupt disable is released. The following describes the sequence of steps for the INVI instruction with reference to Figure 326.

Figure 326 illustrates the procedure for executing the INVI instruction in this embodiment. It describes the procedure for executing the INVI instruction stored at address "8200h".

The INVI instruction specifies that the program's execution location is "A800h," so the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h." At this time, the stack area stores the address "8202h" (the address after the caller, the return address after the called program's execution is complete) and the PSW (Program Status Word) from the time of the execution call. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h." In the example in Figure 326, the return addresses are stored in "01F6h" and "01F7h," and the PSW is stored in "01F8h."

The PSW (Status Word) is a control word (status register) used in the main control MPU 1311 to control the order in which instructions are executed and to indicate and maintain the state of the computer system related to a specific program. It also includes the status of the main control MPU 1311 during execution. Furthermore, it stores the contents of the flag register and the interrupt status in a single byte. The PSW will be explained with reference to Figure 327.

Figure 327 shows an example of a PSW in this embodiment, where (A) shows the configuration of the PSW and (B) provides a description of each configuration. The PSW consists of a jump status flag (JF), a zero flag (ZF), a carry flag (CF), a half-carry flag (HF), a sign flag (SF), an overflow flag (VF), a register bank flag (RES), and an interrupt master enable flag (IMF).

The Jump Status Flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of jump instructions and subroutine instructions. Depending on the executed instruction, either ZF or CF is set.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 if the calculation result or transferred data is "00H (0000H)", and cleared to 0 otherwise. In bit/flag manipulation instructions, if the specified bit is 0, the flag is set to 1, and if the specified bit is 1, it is cleared to 0.

The carry flag (CF) sets the carry/borrow value during carry flag operations. It also sets the instruction execution details in shift/rotate instructions or bit/flag manipulation instructions. The half-carry flag (HF) sets the carry/borrow value of the fourth bit in 8-bit operations.

The sign flag (SF) is set to 1 if the MSB (Maximum Significant Bits) of the calculation result is 1, and cleared to 0 otherwise. If the most significant bit indicates a sign (positive or negative), the sign flag can be used to identify the sign. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 if an overflow occurs in the calculation result, and cleared to 0 otherwise.

The Register Bank Flag (RES) indicates the selected bank for the general-purpose register. It is set to 0 for bank 0 and 1 for bank 1.

The Interrupt Master Enable Flag (IMF) determines whether interrupts are disabled (IMF = 0) or enabled (IMF = 1). Furthermore, during the execution of a DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction, IMF = 0, disabling interrupts. Conversely, during the execution of an EI (Enable Interrupt) instruction, IMF = 1, enabling interrupts. Interrupts that can be disabled or enabled in this way are called maskable interrupts.

Now, let's return to the explanation of Figure 326. When the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the IMF contained in the PSW is set to "0", disabling interrupts. At this time, interrupts are disabled by the execution of the INVI instruction without executing the interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). Furthermore, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and processing is executed sequentially from address "A800h". Then, after processing up to address "A80Eh", the BKI instruction is executed to return to the caller. The BKI instruction sets the program counter value to the return address stored in the stack area, and restores the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW that were saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to the return address "8202h". Also, in order to restore the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW before the INVI instruction was executed, if the value of the IMF (interrupt master enable flag) before the INVI instruction was executed was 1 (interrupt enabled), the interrupt disable is released. When the INVI instruction is executed, the values stored in the stack area are erased, so the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, executing a process using the INVI instruction makes it possible to disable interrupts until the specified process is completed without explicitly executing the interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). Furthermore, by returning to the caller by executing the BKI instruction, if the interrupt-enabled state was in place before the INVI instruction was executed, the interrupt disable can be released without explicitly executing the interrupt release instruction (EI instruction). If the interrupt-enabled state was in place before the INVI instruction was executed, the interrupt-disabled state will be maintained. Note that this can be used not only when executing the INVI instruction, but also when returning to the original process after executing a process with interrupts disabled by the DI instruction, etc. In addition, the BKI instruction is not an instruction that directly releases the interrupt disable, but merely returns the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to its value before the INVI instruction was executed by returning the PSW to the state before the INVI instruction was executed. Therefore, if the interrupt-enabled state was in place before the INVI instruction was executed, it returns from the interrupt-disabled state to the interrupt-enabled state, while if the interrupt-disabled state was in place before the INVI instruction was executed, it remains in the interrupt-disabled state after returning. Furthermore, since there is no need to execute interrupt disable and interrupt disable commands, control can be simplified and program size can be compressed. This allows processing to be executed without data being modified by other processes.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the areas where programs can be implemented (usage area, game area) are predetermined, and executing programs outside the usage area is generally prohibited. However, some processes, such as test signal processing, are not directly related to game control and are therefore permitted to be executed outside the usage area. Similarly, processes related to the payout ratio monitor (base monitor) and errors are also not directly related to game control and are therefore permitted to be executed outside the usage area. When executing such processes, the impact on other processes can be suppressed by disabling interrupts with the INVI instruction and saving the PSW (Status Register) before execution.

Furthermore, when calling a process stored in an area outside the used memory area using the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage location using the process address table, as with the INVD instruction mentioned above. However, this may cause problems because the process calls the process by directly specifying an address outside the memory area from a process within the used memory area. Therefore, it may be possible to set up a temporary area that must be passed through for the execution of the INVI instruction. In this case, the process called by the INVI instruction is defined in a limited temporary area (for example, in the range of "A800h" to "A8FFh"). However, since it is not possible to define all processes within this limited range, the calling process specifies an address within the temporary area, but executes the process actually stored outside the used memory area from that address. Specifically, the system moves from the address specified within the used memory area to the address where the specified process is stored using a jump instruction or similar. Figure 328 shows a concrete example.

Figure 328 is a diagram illustrating a program example explaining the arrangement of processes called by the INVI instruction in this embodiment. (A) shows a program example of the region where the process is read from, and (B) shows a program example of the actual process. Here, the region up to address "A8FFh" is the used region, and the region from address "A900h" onwards is outside the used region.

As shown in Figure 328(A), the process called by the INVI instruction is defined by a pair of a label indicating the process and a jump instruction (JP). For example, when calling the performance display monitor process with the INVI instruction, it is written as "INVI _EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is predefined in a separate area. The value of "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is "A900h".

When the instruction "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is executed, the program counter value is updated to address "A800h" corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW (Program Switch) is saved to the stack area. Furthermore, the IMF (Interrupt Master Enable Flag) value of the PSW is set to 0 (interrupt disabled). Subsequently, the performance display monitor process ("EX_MONITOR_OUT") defined at address "A900h," the jump destination set in the operand of the jump instruction, is executed.

The performance display monitor process is performed outside the used memory area; therefore, to avoid affecting processes within the used memory area, the contents of the registers are saved (register saving process within the used memory area). Afterward, the performance display monitor process itself is executed. Finally, the saved register contents are restored, and the process returns to the calling process via the BKI instruction, while simultaneously returning to the interrupt state before the process was executed.

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes easier to separate processing outside the used area, simplifying program management. Furthermore, since interrupts are disabled during INVI instruction execution, interrupts are disabled while processing outside the used area is running, ensuring independence from processing stored within the used area and guaranteeing safety. Note that in the example explained with reference to Figure 328, the area storing the processing called by the INVI instruction was limited, but this limitation is not required. This simplifies the calling of processing stored in any area, allowing for execution with interrupts disabled.

[19-5. Examples of Application of Extended Processing Call Commands]
This section will explain specific application examples of the various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) used to call the processes (subroutines) described above. Here, we will apply them to the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. Specific application examples of the process call instructions will be explained in conjunction with the program code for the game stop processing included in the timer interrupt processing.

Figure 329 is a flowchart illustrating the timer interrupt processing using various processing call commands in this embodiment. The basic functions of the timer interrupt processing are the same as those described previously.

The main control MPU 1311 first specifies register bank 1 (step P101). As mentioned above, the main control MPU 1311 has two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and switches between banks to use one or the other. Bank 1 is used for timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used for main control processing. Note that it is not always necessary to switch banks during timer interrupt processing; for example, the register values may be saved in the stack area and restored after processing is complete.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step P102). In the switch input processing, as described above, the various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs setting value confirmation processing to determine whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

Once the setting value confirmation process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming machine is in a playable state (step P104). If it is not in a playable state (the result of step P104 is "NO"), i.e., if a setting operation is to be performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the setting operation process is executed (step P105).

During the setup operation process, the system executes processes to change or confirm the settings of the gaming machine. It loads the setup data and sets it to the corresponding output port. Specifically, it outputs the power outage clear signal as OFF, clearing the ACK output port. Furthermore, it outputs the LED common port and LED cathode port as OFF, clears the motor port and solenoid port, and outputs the security signal. Afterward, it executes the setup display process and the setup confirmation/change process.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is in a playable state (result of step P104 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there are factors that would cause the game to stop (step P106). If there are factors that would cause the game to stop (result of step P106 is "YES"), the game stop processing is executed (step P107). The game stop processing executes the necessary processes to stop the gaming machine. Details will be described later with reference to Figure 330.

Furthermore, if there are no factors that would cause the game to stop (the result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the game-ready processing to allow the game to proceed (step P108). The game-ready processing is the process for normal gameplay. Specifically, it performs processes such as special switch input processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, switch pass command output processing, performance display monitor processing, special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing, solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, and output data setting processing. Each of these processes is described above.

Once the game-ready processing or game-stopping processing is complete, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output processing (step P109). Furthermore, after the display LED output processing or setting operation processing is complete, it executes the test signal output processing (step P110). The test signal output processing performs the processing necessary to output a test signal to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processes such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111), or returning the register bank to 0, and then terminates the timer interrupt processing.

The above explains the overview of timer interrupt processing. Next, we will explain processing using various processing call commands. As mentioned above, we will focus on the processing that occurs when the game stops as part of the timer interrupt processing. First, we will explain the procedure for processing when the game stops, and then, referring to the program code, we will explain examples of how to apply various processing call commands as appropriate.

Figure 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure for game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. Figure 331 is the program code for game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. Game stop processing is the process of stopping the game when an abnormality such as a magnetic anomaly or vibration anomaly is detected, or when setting changes are made. In addition to magnetic anomalies and vibration anomalies, other abnormalities include door/main frame open, radio wave anomalies, and prize entry anomalies, and in addition to setting changes, setting confirmation may also occur. Depending on the type of game machine, only an error notification may be issued, or the game may be stopped. In particular, in types where a jackpot can be obtained by passing through a specific area (V area) within the mechanism, a jackpot can be obtained through fraudulent entry, so the game is configured to stop when an abnormality is detected as fraudulent activity.

When the game stop processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command that notifies the outside that the gaming machine is to be stopped. Referring to the program code, the game stop command is set by first determining whether or not there is a game stop factor in the process described in step P106, where a command increment value (game stop factor; PLAY_STOP_NO) is set in the A register. In this state, the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) is set in the HL register, and then the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

Command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by the INVD instruction. The variable "_CMBF_SET1" specified in the INVD instruction is the number corresponding to the address of command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the processing address table, and in this embodiment, it is "4" (INVD4). When the main control MPU 1311 receives a number in the processing address table via the INVD instruction, it refers to the processing address table and executes the process corresponding to the specified number. This makes it possible to execute the process without directly specifying the address, thus speeding up process calls and compressing program size.

In command buffer setting process 1, as described above, the game stop command is identified based on the reference command data (value in the HL register) and the command addition data (value in the A register, a value corresponding to the game stop factor). The command is then stored in the transmit buffer through command storage processing, and the game stop command is output.

The main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmission buffer and then executes external output processing (GAIB_OUT) to output external output information (step P123). This external output information includes, for example, symbol confirmation data, start gate data, jackpot entry data, main prize ball data, security data, etc.

External output processing (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. As mentioned above, the INVS instruction allows for faster processing retrieval compared to when the processing is stored at an arbitrary address, by storing the processing in a specific area. External output processing (GAIB_OUT) is frequently executed, such as being called from output data setting processing (PORT_SET) during gameplay (when game-ready processing is executed), and is therefore stored in a specific area. Furthermore, in order to speed up the overall processing, output data setting processing (PORT_SET) is configured to call many processes, including output judgment common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1) and output judgment common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), which are called by INVD instructions defined in the processing address table, as well as processes called by INVS instructions stored in a specific area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing to output various signals for transmission to drive units such as solenoids and external devices via SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication processing, the data to be output is set in the WA register, the address to which the data set in the WA register will be output is set in the E register, and then the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) is executed. The SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA), like the command buffer setting processing 1 (CMBF_SET1), is called by the INVD instruction, and the variable "_SPI_TX_WA" specified in the INVD instruction is "14" (INVD14).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data to stop the game (step P125). Then, it executes output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) to set the set game stop data to the output port (step P126). The game stop data is, for example, data to output OFF signals such as the power outage clear signal, LED common port, and LED cathode port, and to clear the motor port and ACK output port.

The output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) is called by the INVD instruction, similar to the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1). The variable "_PORT_DAT_SET" specified in the INVD instruction is "10" (INVD10).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor process that displays various game-related information on the performance display monitor (step P127). The performance display monitor process only displays various information; it does not execute any processes directly related to game control, and the performance display monitor itself is not something the player intentionally refers to. Therefore, the performance display monitor process in this embodiment is stored outside the usage area, and interrupts are disabled while the process of displaying performance information on the performance display monitor is executed by the INVI instruction, allowing it to be executed independently of the game control process. Furthermore, since the BKI instruction returns the system to the interrupt state before the process call at the end of the performance display monitor process before returning to the caller, it is not necessary for the caller to release the interrupt disable even if the interrupt state before the process call was interrupt-enabled.

Furthermore, the test signal output process in the timer interrupt handling is also stored outside the usable memory area because it is called during testing, not during normal gameplay, and outputs game information. It may also be possible to store initialization and backup processes for power-off handling and processes outside the usable memory area outside the usable memory area.

Furthermore, when executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, it is possible to set the system to disable interrupts to prevent multiple interrupts. However, it is also possible to design the system so that multiple interrupts can occur without problems, and set the system to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt processing. The INVI instruction in this embodiment returns the system to the interrupt state before processing, so it can be used without problems regardless of whether multiple interrupts are allowed or not.

[19-6. Placement of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Next, the arrangement of the program, which defines the processes executed by various call commands in the game control of the gaming machine of this embodiment, will be described in detail. The program is stored in the program/data area (8000h to BFFFh) included in the ROM area of the storage area provided by the main control board 1310.

Figure 332 shows an example of a memory map of the program/data area within the ROM region shown in Figure 306. The left side of Figure 332 shows the configuration of the program/data area, and the right side shows the detailed configuration of the first area of the program/data region.

In this embodiment, the program/data area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine includes a first area (8000h to 8BFFh) and a second area (A800h to BFFFh) (left side of Figure 332). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the usage area), and access by the gaming control program is prohibited in principle. Furthermore, the data 00H is set as unused data in these areas, and 00H is a NOP (non-operation instruction) as a CPU instruction. Even if this area is accessed incorrectly, unnecessary control is not executed. In the event of incorrect access to this area, a reset signal is input to the CPU, allowing immediate return to gaming processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 332, the first region is located at the beginning address of the program/data region, and the second region is located at the end address of the program/data region, with an unused region (outside the used region) located between the first and second regions. As will be described later, the first region contains programs that define the main game control processes, including processes that affect the game's outcome, while the second region contains programs that define processes that do not directly affect the game's outcome, such as error handling, test firing processes, and processes related to calculating the payout ratio. By placing an unused region between the first and second regions, the independence of each region can be increased. For example, by ensuring sufficient unused region so that there is no need to change the address of the second region even when the first region is expanded, the impact of specification changes can be minimized.

Next, let's explain each area. The first area stores the game control-related processes (programs), including those called by various call commands. As shown in Figure 332 (right), the start process is located at the beginning of the address (8000h) in the first area. The start process is executed when the game machine is started up and is designed to be less dependent on the machine model. Specifically, it corresponds to the power-on process (Figure 213, etc.). Furthermore, by placing the start process at the beginning of the area and setting the initial value of the program counter to "8000h," the start process can be automatically initiated during initialization. Initialization refers to the time when a reset signal is input to the core of the main control MPU 1311 on the main control board 1310. Specifically, this includes when a reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 during power-on, and when a reset signal is input due to the detection of a malfunction within the main control MPU 1311 (execution of an illegal instruction, access to an area outside the specified ROM/RAM area, watchdog timer, etc.).

Following the area where the start process is stored, there is an area where the group of processes called by the INVD instruction is stored. Because the capacity of the area where the start process is stored is small, the area where the group of processes called by the INVD instruction is stored is close to the beginning address of the first area (a relatively low address). The group of processes called by the INVD instruction are processes defined in the process address table, and this area stores the actual implementations (programs) of the processes defined in the process address table. While it is preferable to centrally place all processes called by the INVD instruction in the area where the group of processes called by the INVD instruction is stored, processes called by instructions other than the INVD instruction may also be included in this area.

As mentioned above, the processing group called by the INVD instruction is a general-purpose process and, like the start process, is machine-independent (or less machine-independent). In this embodiment, by placing machine-independent processes such as the start process and processes called by the INVD instruction in an area closer to the starting address (8000h) of the first area than the area where machine-dependent processes such as the game control process described later are stored, it becomes possible to have a common layout (address) even for different machines. This makes it easier to reuse these general-purpose processes and improves the development efficiency of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by specifying the content and layout (address) of the general-purpose processes in the early stages of gaming machine development, it is possible to streamline the creation of development documents and accelerate the start of game control processing for each machine. In addition, even when multiple teams are developing the gaming machine, it becomes easier to share each process (program), shortening the development period.

The remaining area of the first region, following the area that stores the processing group called by the INVD instruction, is the area that stores the program defining the game control processing, and is the area on the final address side of the first region. The game control processing consists of various processes for controlling the progress of the game, and includes machine-dependent processing. Specifically, it includes processes called from timer interrupt processing that controls the game (Figures 190, 329, etc.), such as processing for controlling the display of changing symbols (dynamic display) (special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089 in Figure 190), normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090 in Figure 190), etc.).

The program defining the process called by the INVS instruction is included in the area where the program defining the game control process is stored. As mentioned above, by calling a process based on a program located in a specific area using the INVS instruction, it becomes possible to execute the process with a shorter word length (2 or 3) than the normal INV instruction's word length (4). The word length refers to the combined length of the opcode and operands that constitute the instruction. The opcode is the part that is decoded by the instruction decoder after being fetched by the processor, and it specifies the type of operation to be executed. The operand specifies the value or variable to be operated on.

The second region (A800h to BFFFh) stores processes that do not directly affect the outcome of the game (display and dynamic display of symbols), such as error handling, test firing, and processes related to calculating the payout ratio. Processes that do not directly affect the outcome of the game include, for example, test signal processing (step S2067 in Figure 190, step P109 in Figure 329), which outputs a test signal to an inspection device connected to the game machine during the process of controlling the game in timer interrupt processing (Figures 190, 191, 329, etc.), and performance display monitor processing, which displays various information related to the game on the performance display monitor. Performance display monitor processing is called and executed in the game-ready processing (step P108 in Figure 329) and game-stopping processing (step P107 in Figure 329, step P127 in Figure 330). In addition, the payout ratio calculation and display processing (step S89 in Figure 23) in timer interrupt processing (Figure 23) is also included in the processes that do not directly affect the outcome of the game. In the prize ratio calculation and display process, the prize ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the prize ratio calculation area 13128, and the calculated prize ratio is displayed on the prize ratio display unit 1317, allowing the gambling potential of the game machine to be confirmed. Although there are differences in terminology, the performance display monitor process and the prize ratio display process share the common purpose of displaying information to confirm the gambling potential of the game machine, and the necessary information is displayed depending on the type of game machine. For example, in pachinko machines, the base (total number of prize balls from balls entering the winning slots during non-time-saving modes (excluding balls during jackpots) / total number of shots during non-time-saving modes) is displayed, while in reel-type games, the prize ratio is displayed.

Furthermore, when calling other processes from processes stored in the second area, only the INV instruction is used. While the INV instruction (4 bytes) has a longer word length compared to the extended process call instructions (INVS instruction (2 bytes), INVD instruction (1 byte), INVI instruction (2 bytes)), the extended process call instructions may have different specifications depending on the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310). In contrast, the INV instruction, which calls a specified process without special constraints, reliably maintains compatibility even when the arithmetic unit is changed. Therefore, by structuring the program to use only the INV instruction when calling other processes within a process defined in the second area, the independence of the processes defined in the second area is ensured, making it easy to reuse the program even in the event of significant changes to the gaming machine specifications, such as changes in the model (updates) or hardware updates including changes in the arithmetic unit.

In contrast, the processing stored in the first area is structured using not only the INV instruction but also the improved processing call instructions, the INVD, INVS, and INVI instructions. Furthermore, the processing called by the INVD and INVS instructions is placed only in the first area. Therefore, the processing called by the INVS instruction can call the INVS or INVD instructions as needed (any number of times), further accelerating processing and simplifying the program.

For example, in the setting operation process (step P105 in Figure 329) which performs processing to change or confirm the settings of a gaming machine, as described above, the setting data for the setting operation is loaded and set to the corresponding output port, and then the setting confirmation/change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS, Figure 192) and the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY, Figure 193) are executed. The setting confirmation/change process and the setting display process are programmed to be called by the INVS instruction from the game control process (timer interrupt process; Figure 190, etc.).

The setting confirmation/change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS) is configured to call the power-on setting process (step S2104 in Figure 192, Figure 194, etc.) via the INVS instruction if the setting key 971 returns from the ON position to the OFF position without detecting a RAM abnormality.

In the power-on setup process, the program is configured to execute the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, Figure 316) using the INVD instruction to set the power-on operation command (step S2120 in Figure 194). Subsequently, in order to initialize the work within the game area, the program is configured to set the power-on initial data specified by the data setting process (DAT_SET, Figure 312) into the work area all at once using the INVD instruction (step S2123 in Figure 194). Then, if the game has started, the program is configured to set the power-on state command and the power-on return destination command using the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, Figure 316) by specifying the RAM initialization game start data or the power-restore game start data using the INVD instruction (steps 2124 and 2125 in Figure 194). Furthermore, the program is configured to execute the setting value command transmission process to send the setting value command using the INVS instruction (step 2126 in Figure 194).

In the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), first, it is determined whether the setting state is abnormal or not. If it is normal, the current setting value is set to be displayed on the base display unit 1317 (step S2111). If it is abnormal, an error is set to be displayed on the base display unit 1317 (step S2112 in Figure 193). After that, an LED common signal is output to the LED common output port (step S2113 in Figure 193), and display data (segment signal) corresponding to the setting value or error display is output to the base display unit 1317 (step S2114 in Figure 193). In the process of outputting to the base display unit 1317, the program is configured to first execute the common output determination process 2 (_OHAN_SUB2; Figure 318) by the INVD instruction in order to obtain the LED port output value (LED common signal) based on the LED state determination output data address table. Furthermore, the program is configured to execute SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA; Figure 324) using the INVD command in order to send output data to the base display unit 1317 by setting the LED common signal to the SPI port (LED common output port) via SPI communication.

In addition to the setting confirmation/modification process (SET_PROCESS) and setting display process (SET_PROCESS) mentioned above, various processes are executed by extended process call commands during timer interrupt processing. The processes called during timer interrupt processing are listed below. Note that some processes are consolidated in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 329, so it will be explained in correspondence with the timer interrupt processing in Figures 190 and 191.

The processes executed by the INVS instruction include: switch input processing 1 (SW_INPUT; step S2062), random number update processing 1 (R_ATAR_K; step S2063), peripheral board command transmission processing (SCM_JOB; step S2070), setting processing (SET_PROCESS; step S2068), setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY; step S2069), switch input processing 2 (SW_INPUT2; step S2080), and timer update processing (TIM_DEC This includes steps S2081, prize ball control processing (PAY_JOB; step S2082), frame command reception processing (WK_CM_JOB; step S2083), switch pass command output processing (SW_COMSET_JOB; step S2085), special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089), normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090), and output data setting processing (PORT_SET; step S2091). Because these processes involve relatively large amounts of processing or cannot be reused due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the program is intentionally structured to call them using the INVS instruction.

As mentioned above, in the processing executed by the INVS instruction, various processes are performed internally by the INVS or INVD instruction, aiming to compress program size and increase processing speed.

Furthermore, the processes executed by the INVI instruction include the process of outputting a test signal (KENIG_OUT; step S2067), the process of detecting fraudulent activity (ILG_ACT_JUDG; step S2084), and the process of outputting the base indicator (EX_MONITOR_OUT; step S2087). As mentioned above, the program defining these processes is stored in the second area, and the system is configured so that processes based on the program stored in the second area cannot be called by the INVS or INVD instructions. These processes are designed to be easily reused regardless of the specifications of the gaming machine, and because they do not affect the outcome of the game, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVI instruction.

As described above, the program is structured so that processes called by the INVS instruction and processes called by the INVI instruction coexist within a single timer interrupt handler. This configuration allows for program size compression while simplifying the program code structure. Alternatively, the program could be structured to consolidate the calls to processes using the INVS instruction and those using the INVI instruction separately. For example, the calls to processes using the INVI instruction could be consolidated at the beginning, end, or a specific location within the program defining the timer interrupt handler. Since the INVI instruction returns to the interrupt state before execution, consolidating the calls to processes using the INVI instruction at a specific location within the program ensures that the interrupt state is maintained while the processes at that location are being executed, making it easier to understand the interrupt state and thus facilitating debugging. Furthermore, since the processes called by the INVI instruction do not affect the game outcome, consolidating the calls to processes using the INVI instruction at a specific location within the program makes it easy to determine whether the processes called at that location affect the game outcome.

Furthermore, the power-on processing (start processing) is also configured to execute various processes using extended processing call instructions, similar to the timer interrupt processing. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, the processes called during power-on processing include the setting value confirmation process (SET_LV_CHK; step S2209) and the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET; step S2239) executed by the INVS instruction. Additionally, the processes executed by the INVI instruction include the power-on game area out-of-game RAM confirmation process (EX_RWMSUMCK; step S2211) and the power-on game area out-of-game RAM abnormality processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233; Figure 217).

Thus, the program is structured so that various processes are called not only during timer interrupt processing but also during power-on processing (start processing) using the INVS, INVD, and INVI instructions. In particular, by using the same general-purpose processes called by the INVS instruction in timer interrupt processing, etc., in power-on processing (start processing), the overall size of the game control program can be compressed. This allows for faster processing than using the INV instruction, thus enabling faster startup of the game machine. Furthermore, even when interrupts are disabled to ensure the reliable execution of various initialization processes during game machine startup, the need to add interrupt control to the program code using the INVI instruction is eliminated, thus compressing the program size and improving program readability.

The INV, INVS, and INVD instructions all return to the calling process via the BK instruction, but the INVI instruction returns to the calling process via the BKI instruction and also returns to the interrupt state before the execution of the process. That is, if the interrupt state when the INVI instruction is executed is an interrupt-disabled state, the interrupt-disabled state is maintained, and if the interrupt state when the INVI instruction is executed is an interrupt-enabled state, the interrupt prohibition is released. The BKI instruction is also a return instruction that can be used when returning from timer interrupt processing, and it maintains the interrupt-enabled/disabled state before the timer interrupt processing was executed. For example, the processing for when a RAM abnormality occurs outside the game area at power-on (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233) is called by the INVI instruction in the power-on processing, so as shown in Figure 217, the processing from step S2280 onwards is executed with the interrupt-disabled setting, and the INV instruction is used to call the RWM initialization processing outside the used area (EX_EXRWMCLR) to execute processing other than game control. Furthermore, the system is configured to return to the interrupt state before calling the power-on RAM abnormality handling (EX_INITIAL_RWM) by recovering via the RET instruction (equivalent to the BKI instruction) after the execution of step S2289.

In the processes executed following the start process (Figure 221, etc.), processes are also called by the INVS instruction or INVI instruction. In the main loop that repeats the processes of step S2310 and step S2311, the system is configured to repeatedly execute the random number update process (R_OTHE_K; step S2311) using the INVS instruction and wait until the next timer interrupt process starts. Furthermore, in the power outage process (processing from step S2312 onwards), the system is configured to execute the power off process (EX_POWER_DOWN) using the INVI instruction and call the checksum calculation process (S2317) using the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to call the process located in the second area (power off process) using the INVI instruction and execute the process (located in the first area) that calculates the checksums (check values of the work RAM) of the work RAM used for processing outside the game area and the work RAM used for processing inside the game area during the power outage process (using the INVS instruction). Thus, in the power outage handling system, the processing based on programs located in the first area and the processing based on programs located in the second area can be called as needed. This makes it easy to combine game-related and non-game-related processing into the program, increasing the flexibility of program placement and improving management efficiency.

Alternatively, separate processes may be provided for calculating checksums within the game area and checksums outside the game area. The process for calculating checksums within the game area may be placed in the first area, and the process for calculating checksums outside the game area may be placed in the second area. In this case, the INVS instruction may be used to call the process for calculating checksums within the game area located in the first area, the INVI instruction may be used to call the power-off process, and then the INV instruction may be used to call the process for calculating checksums outside the game area located in the second area. This configuration makes it possible to increase the independence of processing for areas outside the game area.

Furthermore, the process of selecting the variation pattern when executing the variation display (dynamic display) of the symbols is also included in the game control process and is called by the INVS instruction within the timer interrupt process. In the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select), the variation pattern number is identified by using the bit transfer instruction described above. Figure 333 shows an example of the program code for the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). Note that the processing by the program code shown in Figure 333 achieves the same functionality as the processing by the program code shown in Figure 305, but uses processing call instructions that have been extended to some functions, and, similar to the program code shown in Figure 305, it corresponds to the flowchart of the variation pattern selection process shown in Figure 304.

Referring to Figure 333, when selecting a variation pattern, it is first necessary to identify the variation pattern table corresponding to parameters such as special symbols (types of dynamic display results) and game states (step P8021). Further detailing the process in step P8021, the special symbol identification information (dynamic display result) is first set as the selection value, and the address of the selection data address table is used as the search data address (step P8021-1). A 2-byte data search process (Figure 315, LD_HLA_HL) is then executed by the INVD instruction (step P8021-2). The 2-byte data search process identifies the selection data address table corresponding to the special symbol identification information (dynamic display result). The identified selection data address table is then used as the search table (step P8021-3), and the state flag is set as the selection value. Subsequently, by executing the 2-byte data search process by the INVD instruction (step P8021-4), the variation pattern selection table can be identified.

Furthermore, an index creation process (step S8023; GEN_IDX) is executed to create a data transfer index based on the address of the identified variable pattern selection table, thereby creating an index for use with bit transfer instructions. This index creation process is configured to be executed by the INVS instruction. Finally, the variable pattern number corresponding to the variable pattern selection random number extracted from the identified variable pattern selection table is obtained using the bit transfer instruction (step P8028). In this way, by constructing the program by combining extended processing call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction) and bit transfer instructions, processing speed can be increased and capacity can be reduced.

Furthermore, the processing that uses the extended processing call instruction and bit transfer instruction in combination is not limited to the processing that selects the variable pattern; any processing stored in the first area is acceptable. Also, by configuring the program to define the index creation processing required for executing the bit transfer instruction in the processing address table and call it using the INVD instruction, it is possible to achieve both data capacity compression and processing speed increase. In this way, by grouping the processing required for executing the bit transfer instruction, it becomes possible to use the bit transfer instruction in a more general-purpose manner.

On the other hand, it is preferable to disable interrupts when calling processes stored in the second area. For example, this is to prevent the game from stopping in the event of an error, or to prevent the calculation of the prize ratio from becoming inaccurate due to changes in the number of acquired balls during prize ratio calculation. Therefore, in this embodiment, the program is configured to call processes stored in the second area using the INVI instruction, simplifying interrupt control (control that disables interrupts during process execution and returns to the interrupt state before execution after execution). Furthermore, when the INVI instruction is executed, a PSW containing interrupt disable/enable information is stored in the stack area, and when returning from the called process, the PSW stored in the stack area is restored to its state before return. This eliminates the need to use instructions to individually save/restore PSWs to the stack area, thus simplifying control. By configuring the program in this way, processes that do not directly affect the outcome of the game (symbol variation display/dynamic display) are consolidated and stored in a specific area, simplifying game control while managing program placement.

[19-7. Frequency of use of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
While improving the enjoyment of the game may lead to increased complexity in game control and a rise in program size, the extended processing call instructions can compress the program size. In particular, the INVD instruction has a shorter word length than the INVS and INVI instructions, and replacing the INV instruction with it is expected to compress the program size the most. However, the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited to 16, which can be defined in the processing address table. Therefore, in this embodiment, particularly frequently used processes are defined. For this reason, in this embodiment, the program is configured so that the most frequently used of the three types of extended processing call instructions is used. For example, in the game control processing of this embodiment, the usage frequency of the extended processing call instructions in the program code (number of lines of processing call instructions / total number of lines of the program) is approximately 8% for the INVD instruction, approximately 4% for the INVS instruction, and approximately 0.3% for the INVI instruction. The frequency of use of the extended processing call commands varies depending on the type of gaming machine and is not limited to the values mentioned above. However, by arranging the usage frequency in the order of INVD, INVS, and INVI commands, it is possible to compress data capacity and speed up processing.

On the other hand, the frequency of use of extended processing call instructions in program code (number of lines of processing call instructions / total number of program lines) differs from the frequency of execution of extended processing call instructions during program execution (number of executions). For example, when used in processes with a high number of calls, such as periodically executed timer interrupt processing, even if the frequency of use in program code is low, the actual execution frequency will be high because it is executed repeatedly periodically. In the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment (Figure 329), the execution frequency of INVD instructions within one cycle is configured to be higher than that of INVS instructions. In this way, by increasing the number of executions of INVD instructions, which have a shorter word length than INVS instructions, it is possible not only to compress the program size but also to speed up program processing.

As mentioned above, the processes that can be called by the INVD instruction are highly versatile and consist of programs with a relatively small number of bytes (shorter number of steps) compared to the processes called by the INVS instruction. Since programs with fewer bytes have less execution overhead by the arithmetic unit, processing can be sped up. Therefore, calling them with the frequently used INVD instruction can speed up the entire game control system.

On the other hand, processes called by the INVS instruction have limitations on the program's storage area, but compared to processes that can be called by the INVD instruction, they have fewer constraints on the number of processes and capacity. Therefore, although machine-dependent, they are frequently called processes. The INVI instruction calls processes stored in the second area, so the program is structured to be used less frequently compared to the INVD and INVS instructions.

[19-8. Summary of Processing Call Commands]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU (CPU) 1311 of the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game by executing a program stored in the ROM 1313. The program defines processes that realize various functions necessary for controlling the gaming machine, and these are executed by process call commands. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, multiple types (four types) of process call commands are implemented.

The INVD instruction, which is the first processing call instruction (first specific processing execution instruction), differs from other processing call instructions in that it does not directly indicate the address where the processing to be called is stored, but rather uses an identification number from 1 to 16 as an operand. The INVD instruction calls the processing (first specific processing) selected from the processing address table based on the identification number set as an operand during execution.

Furthermore, while the processing address table used in the INVD instruction is stored in the same ROM (memory memory) as the program/data area, it is used as an address table within the program but is stored in a different area than the program/data area where the program and data are stored. Specifically, it is stored in an area with addresses greater than those of the program/data area (8000h to BFFh) (C080h to C0FFh).

The INVS instruction, which is the second processing call instruction (second specific processing execution instruction), is an instruction that calls the processing (second specific processing) specified by the identification information set as a parameter. Furthermore, the INVS instruction's word length changes between 2 and 3 depending on the area where the program defining the calling processing is stored. Specifically, if the area where the program is stored is between addresses 8000h and 8BFFh, the word length is 2 bytes, and if it is between addresses 8C00h and 93FFh, the word length is 3 bytes.

The INVI instruction, which is a third processing call instruction (third specific processing execution instruction), stores and saves the PSW containing interrupt disable/enable information in the stack area when the instruction is executed. After setting the system to an interrupt disable state, it calls the processing (third specific processing) specified by the identification information set as a parameter.

Furthermore, unlike other process call instructions, the INVI instruction allows the interrupt disable/enable state to be returned to its state before the INVI instruction was executed by using the same return instruction (BKI instruction) as when executing a timer interrupt process upon returning from the called process. Specifically, after saving the interrupt disable/enable information (PSW in Figures 326 and 327(B)) that was stacked in the stack area when the INVI instruction was executed, the interrupt disable state is set by setting the IMF value of the PSW to 0 (interrupt disabled). By restoring the saved PSW when the BKI instruction is executed, the interrupt disable/enable state can be returned to its state before the INVI instruction was executed.

The fourth processing call instruction, the INV instruction, is an instruction that calls the processing specified by the identification information set as a parameter. The INV instruction is longer in word length than the INVS instruction.

The game control program for the gaming machine in this embodiment uses at least the first to third processing call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction). Furthermore, the word length of the INV instruction is longer than that of any of the INVD, INVS, or INVI instructions. By prioritizing the use of the INVD and INVS (INVI) instructions over the INV instruction, program size can be compressed, processing calls can be sped up, and the program code can be simplified, thereby improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

The program processing (module) called by the first processing call instruction, the INVD instruction, is located at the beginning address (value 8000h), which is the relative starting address, within the program/data area (8000h to BFFFH). The INVD instruction is a process that is not machine-dependent, and by placing it in an area close to the beginning address of the program storage area, it is possible to have a common placement (address) across different machines. This makes it easier to reuse these general-purpose processes, improving the development efficiency of gaming machines. Furthermore, by identifying the content and placement (address) of general-purpose processes early in the development of a gaming machine, the creation of development documents can be streamlined, and the start of game control processing for each machine can be accelerated. Moreover, even when multiple teams are developing a gaming machine, it becomes easier to share each process (program), shortening the development period.

Furthermore, the program processing (module) called by the second processing call instruction, the INVS instruction, can be placed at any location within the program/data area, unlike the program processing called by the INVD instruction. Moreover, as mentioned above, the word length of the INVS instruction varies between 2 and 3 depending on the area where the program defining the calling processing is stored, but it is shorter and faster than the word length of the INV instruction (4). Therefore, the INVS instruction allows for more flexible program placement than the INVD instruction while enabling faster calling than the INV instruction, resulting in faster processing and reduced memory usage.

The program processing (module) called by the third processing call instruction, the INVI instruction, is, as mentioned above, an instruction for calling processing that does not affect the outcome of the game, located in the second area. By making it reusable across different gaming machine models, development efficiency during the development of new gaming machines can be improved. Therefore, the program defining the processing called by the INVI instruction is placed relatively towards the last address (BFFH value) within the program/data area (8000h to BFFH), minimizing the impact when porting to other models. Furthermore, to maintain compatibility even with changes in the gaming machine's hardware configuration, the program is configured to call processing using the INV instruction rather than extended processing call instructions such as the INVD instruction. This configuration makes it easy to reuse the program even when the gaming machine's specifications change.

In contrast, in the processing stored within the first area (the area on the starting address side), it is possible to use not only the INV instruction but also the improved processing call instructions, the INVD, INVS, and INVI instructions. Furthermore, the processing called by the INVD and INVS instructions is structured to be located only in the first area. Therefore, in the processing called by the INVS instruction, it is possible to call the INVS or INVD instructions as needed (any number of times), further improving processing speed and simplifying the program.

In the game control program of this embodiment, the first processing call instruction, the INVD instruction, the second processing call instruction, the INVS instruction, and the third processing call instruction, the INVI instruction, are configured such that their usage frequency (number of uses; execution count) increases in the order of INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. Since the INVD instruction is the shortest instruction among these processing call instructions, this configuration allows for program size compression and faster program processing.

Based on the above, this embodiment allows for the acceleration of the entire game control process and reduction of program size by improving existing instructions that call defined processes. Furthermore, the program can be simplified by implementing instructions that integrate interrupt control and process call instructions, such as the INVI instruction.

[20. Arrangement of electronic components on the main control board]
The procedure for SPI communication during game stop processing has been explained above. Incidentally, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, serial communication such as SPI communication is used for signal transmission within the main control board 1310, which makes it possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus. In other words, by eliminating the numerous data buses connected to multiple parallel interface circuits and performing communication with fewer signal lines, including control lines, the circuit pattern can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to easily arrange various electronic components on the main control board 1310, such as the main control MPU 1311, connectors for outputting external information, and serial-to-parallel conversion circuits (first electronic components) for serial communication. Below, an example of the arrangement of electronic components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to Figure 334.

Figure 334 shows an example of an assembly diagram of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. Note that the assembly diagram shown in Figure 334 corresponds to the circuit diagrams shown in Figures 93, 259, etc., and the reference numerals and descriptions of each electronic component are as described above.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 has the main control MPU 1311 positioned near the center of the board. The main control board 1310 has a first region 6100 centered on the main control MPU 1311 and a second region 6200 outside of the first region. The main control MPU 1311 can be positioned as long as a predetermined distance is secured from the edges of the main control board 1310, ensuring that both the first region 6100 and the second region 6200 are occupied.

The first region 6100 contains an unmounted region 6101 where no electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311, such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components, are placed, and a component mounting region 6102 where discrete components that need to be placed close to the main control MPU 1311 are placed. Discrete components are electronic components that basically have a single circuit function. By providing the unmounted region 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, it is possible to prevent heat generated by the operation of the main control MPU 1311 from affecting other electronic components, and vice versa.

Various logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) are arranged in the second region 6200. Components that need to be located near the main control MPU 1311 (for example, components susceptible to noise) are placed in the region of the second region 6200 adjacent to the main control MPU 1311, while other logic components are placed in the region further outside. The following describes typical arrangements of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

The reset circuit 1335 is located in the area of the second region 6200 closest to the main control MPU 1311 (the area adjacent to the component mounting area 6102 of the first region 6100). Specifically, it is positioned as close as possible to the main control MPU 1311, and the number of electronic components placed between it and the main control MPU 1311 is minimized to avoid crossing with other wiring. This configuration prevents incorrect signals from being input due to factors such as noise generation from crosstalk, thus preventing the game from being interrupted and significantly hindering the progress of the game due to incorrect signals being input to the reset circuit 1335.

The clock oscillator 1336 (second electronic component) is placed in the component mounting area 6102 of the first region 6100. If the wiring distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is long or intersects with other wiring, noise is more likely to occur, causing variations in the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock oscillator 1336, which may interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is too short, the clock oscillator 1336 may not operate normally due to heat generated by the main control MPU 1311, which may cause variations in frequency. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, the effects of heat generation from the main control MPU 1311 are suppressed by providing an unmounted area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, while the clock oscillator 1336 is placed in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100 to suppress the separation between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336, thereby suppressing the generation of noise.

As mentioned above, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from game ball detection switches (start prize entry point, big prize entry point count switch, normal prize entry point, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and photosensors, and primarily detects game balls flowing down the game area 5a. Since the switches and sensors that output these input signals are distributed within the game area, multiple parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1341 are provided (in this embodiment, parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1341a to 1341c). These input signals are first input to a buffer before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is located in the second area 6200, but because it receives signals that add game value, such as detection of entry into the start prize entry point and big prize entry point, it is positioned to minimize the influence of noise and other factors.

As described above, serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 output signals to illuminate the LEDs (function display unit 1400 and base display unit 1317). Since the displays of the function display unit 1400 and base display unit 1317 do not directly affect the game's outcome, they can be located relatively far from the main control MPU 1311, allowing for greater flexibility in placement. For example, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is located at the end of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, a drive circuit 1344 is provided downstream of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1343. The drive circuit 1344 receives the signal before outputting it to the LEDs (function display unit 1400 and base display unit 1317).

The base indicator 1317 is located in the outer region of the second region 6200 (the end side of the main control board 1310), that is, relatively far from the main control MPU 1311. The base value is displayed on the base indicator 1317, but even if an incorrect base value is displayed or the base value is not displayed due to the influence of noise or other factors, the display of the base value itself does not affect the outcome of the game. In addition, it is possible to output the base value information from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or to display the base value on a liquid crystal display device, so alternative means are also available. Therefore, in order to prioritize the placement of other logic components (first logic components) that could potentially affect the game if they malfunction near the main control MPU 1311, the base indicator 1317 is placed at a location far from the main control MPU 1311. Furthermore, logic components that do not significantly affect gameplay, such as those that output signals to the base display 1317 (serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and second logic components), should be placed away from the main control MPU 1311 and near the base display 1317.

As described above, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 has an external terminal board 784 connected to the output ports (PA0-PA7) of channel A, and various solenoids connected to the output ports (PB0-PB7) of channel B. These solenoids include a large prize slot solenoid, and since they affect the game value provided to the player, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 is positioned in the second region 6200, adjacent to the first region 6100. This allows for a shorter signal line connecting the main control MPU 1311 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. Furthermore, since the solenoid drive signals from the main control board 1310 are transmitted and received via serial communication (SPI communication), the number of data lines can be reduced. This makes it easier to route data lines when arranging electronic components, reducing the possibility of malfunctions due to noise and other influences.

Furthermore, serial-to-parallel conversion circuits that output signals to control motors other than solenoids need to be placed near the main control MPU 1311 and the output connector (for example, connector 13103) because the output signal is output directly without passing through buffers, transistors, etc.

As described above, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 has a test terminal 1348 connected to the output port of channel B, and outputs signals from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric mechanism release signal, a normal electric mechanism release signal, etc.). The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is located in the test component mounting area (test circuit placement area) 6300, and in addition to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347 and a test terminal 1348 are also provided. The electronic components provided in the test component mounting area 6300 are installed only in gaming machines that undergo inspection by an inspection agency, and are not installed in gaming machines that are generally sold commercially. However, although no components are mounted in the test component mounting area 6300, a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided, and since noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunctions, it is placed in a location away from other electronic components (first logic components) that affect gameplay. For example, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, which perform LED displays, are positioned closer to the test component mounting area 6300 (serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1346) than the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345, which outputs a signal to control the solenoid for opening and closing the grand prize slot.

In the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 334, the setting key 971 is located on the main control board 1310, specifically at its edge (outside the second region). Since the setting key 971 is directly operated by employees of the game machine, it is positioned away from various electronic components (first logic components) such as the main control MPU 1311 and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit that performs the main game control, in order to avoid the influence of vibrations during operation. Furthermore, since the control based on the signal input by operating the setting key 971 includes changing the settings of the game machine, it could directly affect the progress of the game. Therefore, the wiring between the setting key 971 and the main control MPU 1311 is minimized to reduce the susceptibility to noise and other interference.

As described above, in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in this embodiment, the basic guidelines for circuit design can be clearly defined by specifying the arrangement of each electronic component in each area according to its function and characteristics. This makes it possible to maintain and improve quality without reducing development efficiency, even when new gaming machine designs are created or when organizational changes occur due to changes in the development team.

[21. Controlling Serial Communication (SPI Communication)]
Here, we will further explain the serial communication function (SPI communication) that outputs signals from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The serial communication function has been explained in Figures 257 to 263, but here we will explain the procedure of SPI communication in more detail with reference to the program code.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine in this embodiment uses serial communication for signal transmission within the main control board 1310. Typical examples of serial communication include I2C communication and SPI communication. SPI communication has the advantage of higher communication speed, although it requires more signal lines than I2C communication. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, SPI communication is used when the main control MPU 1311 receives signals from various switches and when the main control MPU 1311 transmits control signals from various LEDs, solenoids, etc.

Furthermore, not all signals are input/output via SPI communication. Some signals, such as those used to detect fraudulent activity during the initial power-on setup process, are input to the main control MPU 1311 via parallel communication. For example, signals such as the "setting key switch," "main RWM erase/setting change signal," and "power outage warning signal" are directly input via parallel communication from the general-purpose input terminals of the main control MPU 1311. These signals are necessary for verification during the initial power-on setup process of the gaming machine (e.g., the initialization processes shown in Figures 21 and 22). Since inputting these signals via the SPI circuit would require time for acquisition and verification, they are acquired via parallel communication. Because parallel communication is faster than serial communication, it is possible to speed up the initial setup process compared to sending and receiving various signals solely via serial communication, thereby shortening the time until game processing begins.

Furthermore, by transmitting some signals via parallel communication and other signals via serial communication (SPI communication), when a cheater attempts to obtain signals for game control, they will need to acquire signals from multiple locations, including the main control board 1310 and the input/output board 1351. This enhances the deterrent against cheating.

SPI communication outputs signals based on information stored in the SPI communication buffer register. For example, when outputting a stop signal to a solenoid during game stop processing in timer interrupt handling, or when outputting signals to the LED cathode port or LED common port during display LED output processing or setting display processing, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the signals transmitted via SPI communication from the main control MPU 1311 are primarily signals that control light-emitting elements such as LEDs and drive elements such as motors and solenoids.

Furthermore, signals from various sensors are input via SPI communication to the main control MPU 1311 and other processing units. For example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot, the starting slot switch detects the entry, and a signal is input to the main control MPU 1311. The following describes the configuration and procedure for sending and receiving signals to and from the main control MPU 1311 via SPI communication.

[21-1. Control configuration for serial communication (SPI communication)]
First, we will explain the configuration for realizing SPI communication. The basic configuration is as shown in Figures 257 to 263, but we will further explain the settings of the parameters necessary for each configuration and control, referring to Figures 335 to 337, and also supplement the startup procedure, such as the initialization of various parameters when SPI communication starts, referring to Figure 338.

Figure 335 is a block diagram of the configuration for SPI communication with the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine in this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 is the master that controls the communication, and the various ICs arranged on the main control board 1310 constitute the slaves. Specifically, the slaves are serial-to-parallel conversion circuits (1342, 1343, 1346, 1349) and parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. Note that some of the slaves may be arranged on a relay board connected to the main control board 1310 instead of on the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, two types of communication are possible from the master (main control MPU 1311): SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). SPI transmission/reception (CHA) communication is performed with slaves 1 through 4. This communication is primarily for normal game control, including input of signals from various switches and sensors, output of signals for controlling the solenoid that opens and closes the main prize slot, and output of signals for controlling the illumination of various LEDs. On the other hand, SPI transmission (CHB) communication is performed with slave 5 and is mainly used for outputting test signals.

In SPI transmission/reception (CHA) communication, it is possible to initiate communication with all slaves (1-4) simultaneously. In this case, communication with each slave is initiated in a predetermined order. In this scenario, the enable setting (SPENBAN; n corresponds to an individual slave) for all slaves is set to "Initiate Communication" ("1"). If no data is stored in the communication (transmit) buffer, communication with the next slave is initiated without performing communication with the corresponding slave.

Furthermore, it is possible to specify individual slaves and initiate communication. For example, to light up the LEDs connected to slaves 1 and 3, the enable setting for slaves 1 and 3 is set to "1" (communication start), while the enable setting for slaves 2 and 4 is fixed at "0" (communication start). This ensures that communication for slave 3 begins after communication for slave 1 is complete.

As mentioned above, each slave is capable of both input and output of signals, and is configured to capture input signals when an output signal is output. Furthermore, each slave may be controlled with its function limited (specifically) to either output-only or input-only. In the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) communication of this embodiment, slaves 1 through 3 are output-only, and slave 4 is input-only. Therefore, the input-only slave is configured to capture input signals while transmitting dummy data. The procedure for the master (main control MPU 1311) to capture signals received from the slaves will be described later.

Next, the SPI communication of this embodiment will be further explained. As mentioned above, the SPI communication in the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine in this embodiment has two channels: SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). There are four channels for SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Furthermore, the communication speed can be set for each channel, and a 16-byte transmit/receive buffer is provided for each channel. There are four types of SPI communication operation modes, which are common to all channels. The bit direction can be set to LSB-first or MSB-first, and this can be set for each channel. LSB-first communication starts from the least significant bit, and MSB-first communication starts from the most significant bit. SPI transmission (CHB) is for transmission only and has one channel. Other settings are the same as for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), but all receive-related settings are unused (fixed to "0"). The registers for setting the operation modes and parameters will be explained below with reference to Figures 336 and 337.

First, let's explain the operating modes of SPI communication. Figure 336 illustrates the operating modes of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Four operating modes are defined for SPI communication, and as shown in Figure 336, they are determined by whether the initial state of the clock is "Low" or "High," whether the data change timing is on the "falling edge" or "rising edge" of the clock, and whether the sampling timing is on the "falling edge" or "rising edge." The initial state of the clock is when communication has not started, and one bit of data is transmitted between the data change timing and the sampling timing. The operating mode is set according to the specifications of the slave (serial-to-parallel conversion circuit), and the master (main control MPU 1311) outputs a signal according to the set operating mode.

Next, the configuration of the registers for setting parameters to control SPI communication in this embodiment will be described. Here, the case of SPI transmission/reception (CHA) will be described, but the same applies to SPI transmission (CHB). Figure 337 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), and (C) is prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3).

The control register 1 shown in (A) consists of 8 bits and includes bit shift setting (SPBSFAn), operating mode (SPMODA), and initialization setting (SPRSTA). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operating mode (SPMODA) are set when the power is turned on (during initialization). The initialization setting (SPRSTA) is performed when the power is turned on, or when it is determined that communication cannot be performed normally on any slave, and initialization is performed on all slaves. When initialization is performed, the bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operating mode (SPMODA) are reset. This allows for early recovery from abnormalities in the SPI communication circuit, preventing disruptions to gameplay.

The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) specifies whether to transmit data from the most significant bit ("0": MSB first) or from the least significant bit ("1": LSB first). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) can be specified for each slave, and in this embodiment, four bits corresponding to the number of slaves are allocated, allowing for individual configuration (bits 6-3). Specifically, bit 6 corresponds to slave 4, bit 5 to slave 3, bit 4 to slave 2, and bit 3 to slave 1.

The operating mode (SPMODA) specifies the four operating modes mentioned above and is set commonly for each slave. Since there are four operating modes, two bits are allocated to this setting: "00" for mode 1, "01" for mode 2, "10" for mode 2, and "11" for mode 4 (bits 2 and 1).

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) has different functions during reading and writing, and is set commonly for each slave. During reading, a setting of "0" indicates initialization is complete, while "1" indicates initialization is in progress. Writing "1" to the initialization setting controls the initialization of SPI communication, while writing "0" continues control without taking any action. For example, if it is determined that communication cannot be performed properly, "1" is written to the initialization setting to perform initialization. Furthermore, it is possible to initialize the communication circuit by writing "1" to the initialization setting regardless of the communication status, such as whether communication is in progress or not. Once the communication circuit is initialized, various parameters need to be reset.

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) can be read to determine whether initialization is in progress or not. Based on the value of the bit, it may be possible to check whether initialization is in progress ("1") before executing initialization or starting communication. When the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is initialized (bit 0 is set to "1"), the initialization time is shorter than the execution time of a single instruction. Therefore, when the next instruction is executed after setting it to initialization, initialization is completed. For this reason, if the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is still read as "1" after setting it to initialization, it is possible that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the SPI communication circuit. In this case, the system may forcibly switch to game stop, abnormality notification, or power cut-off processing, thereby resetting the main control MPU 1311 (reset by watchdog timer). This allows for rapid recovery even if the SPI communication circuit malfunctions.

Each slave device starts up in an initialized state when powered on, so initialization is not necessary. On the other hand, when resets such as watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-bounds access reset occur, the system maintains the state before the reset. Therefore, regardless of whether the program starts up due to a system reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-bounds access reset, the system performs initial settings other than initialization settings without performing initialization settings on the SPI circuit. Note that if a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-bounds access reset occurs, it is possible that the game processing was not executed correctly, and this may have changed the settings of the SPI circuit. Therefore, when the program is started after a reset, it is determined whether a watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-bounds access reset occurred. If it is determined that the reset was caused by one of these, the SPI circuit is initialized (writing "1" to SPRSTA). This improves the stability of game control after a reset and minimizes disruptions to gameplay.

The control register 2 (SPICNA1) shown in (B) consists of 8 bits and is set each time communication begins. The control register 2 contains the receive status (SPRVSAN) and enable status (SPENBAN) of each slave. The receive status is set for each slave (bits 7-4), with "1" set if there is received data, and "0" if there is no received data.

The enable value is set for each slave and has different functions during read and write operations (bits 3-0). During read operations, it is set to "1" if communication is in progress and "0" if communication has ended. Conversely, writing "1" to the enable value enables communication for the corresponding slave and initiates communication. By obtaining the enable value at the start of communication, it is possible to determine the communication status. If the value is "0" (communication ended), it is possible to set it to "1" to start communication; if the value is "1" (communication in progress), it is possible to wait until communication ends.

The prescaler register shown in (C) consists of 16 bits and is provided for each slave. The prescaler register consists of 5 bits for transmit buffer status (bits 15-11) and 10 bits for baud rate setting (bits 9-0) (note that bit 10 is unused).

The transmit buffer status stores the number of data bytes to transmit. A value of "00h" indicates no data to transmit, while values from "01h" to "10h" indicate that the transmit buffer contains 1 to 16 bytes of data. The transmit buffer status can also be used to check the remaining data in the transmit buffer. If the transmit buffer status is "10h," all data is stored in the transmit buffer (full), and data writes are ignored. Whether or not communication is in progress can be determined by referring to the enable value of the corresponding slave in control register 2.

The baud rate setting corresponds to the communication speed during communication and is set once when the power is turned on. The setting value can be set from "000h" to "3FFh". In this embodiment, the actual baud rate can be calculated as system clock (20MHz) / (setting value × 4). Note that if the setting value is "000h", it will be calculated as "001h". Note that the setting needs to be reset during SPI communication initialization (when "1" is set in the initialization setting of control register 1).

[21-2. Control at the start of SPI communication]
Next, we will explain the control process from when the gaming machine is started (initialized) until it becomes possible to start SPI communication. Figure 338 is a time chart showing the state of the gaming machine in this embodiment from when it is initialized until it becomes possible to start SPI communication.

In Figure 338, at time a, a reset signal is input due to the power being turned on of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is started (initialized). Once the gaming machine is started (initialized), a security check is performed (period A) to inspect whether any unauthorized devices have been installed or if any unauthorized modifications have been made, before user programs such as initial setup processing are executed (started).

Once the security check is complete, the user program, the initial setup process, is executed by the main control unit (MPU) 1311 (time b). The initial setup process includes machine-specific processing and executes the necessary steps to enable gameplay (period B).

The initial setup process includes initializing various parameters set in SPI communication. Specifically, it sets the control register 1 (SPICNA0, SPICNB0) shown in Figure 337(A) (time c). As mentioned above, the control register 1 is used to set the bit shift settings for each slave and the common operating mode for all slaves.

In setting the operating mode, the initial clock state is set according to the selected operating mode. In the example shown in Figure 338, the clock terminal signal level is set to "1" (High) when the power is turned on. Therefore, when Mode 1 or Mode 2 is specified, the clock terminal signal level is set to "0" (Low). The signal changes of the clock terminal for each mode are as shown in Figure 338. Bit shift settings should be set appropriately according to the slave specifications, etc. Since the SPI circuit is automatically initialized when the gaming machine starts up, it is not necessary to perform the initialization setting of the SPI circuit (writing "1" to SPRSTA) during mode setting by the initial setup process. This eliminates the need to include initialization processing in the user program, reducing program size and the load during initialization.

Subsequently, once the initialization setup process is complete (time d), the game process begins (period C). The start of the game process corresponds to the start of the main loop process (steps S36-S40 in Figure 22) in the initialization process (Figure 21, etc.), enabling the execution of the timer interrupt process. Once the timer interrupt process is executed (time e), processes involving SPI communication, such as switch input processing, are executed (time f).

Furthermore, in the case of a reset when no reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 (user reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, out-of-bounds access reset—hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, these resets will be referred to as "user reset"), the program starts immediately after the reset is released. Regardless of whether it is a system reset or a user reset, the SPI communication settings are performed using the same process. This allows for a reduction in program size and a reduction in the load during initialization by performing the same SPI communication settings without distinguishing between system resets and user resets.

Furthermore, the period from reset release until the operating mode is set (the period from time a to c) is made longer in the case of a system reset than in the case of a user reset. Since restarting by powering on increases the likelihood of security issues, measures are taken to ensure that various function checks of the main control MPU 1311 are reliably completed after restarting with power on.

[21-3. Control during output signal transmission in SPI communication]
SPI communication is performed in various processes called from timer interrupt processing and initialization processing. For example, timer interrupt processing includes switch input processing, which processes signals input via SPI communication from various switches and sensors; display LED output processing, which outputs signals via SPI communication for controlling the lighting of various LEDs; and game stop processing, which outputs signals for external output to external output terminals via SPI communication. Here, we will explain the procedure for outputting signals via SPI communication in game stop processing. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing for executing SPI communication is simplified while using processing call commands such as the INVD command mentioned above.

The general procedure for transmitting a signal via SPI communication involves setting the data to be transmitted in a predetermined SPI communication buffer register and executing the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) called by the aforementioned INVD instruction. Here, the SPI communication process in step P124 of the game stop processing (Figure 330) is used as a specific example, and the procedure will be explained with reference to the program code for the game stop processing (Figure 331) and the program code for the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) (Figure 324).

As shown in the program code in Figure 331, when the game stop processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmit buffer and executes external output processing (GAIB_OUT) to output external output information (step P123). The A register is then set with the external output information to be output.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 loads (stores) the value stored in the A register into the W register ("LD W, A"), thereby setting the external output information set in the A register into the W register. Then, by setting the contents of the A register to "0" ("XOR A, A"), it sets the solenoid signal output when the game stops to OFF.

Then, the address value of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) is set in the E register. The SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX_WA), called by the INVD instruction, and the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET), called from the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX_WA), set the external output information set in the WA register and each solenoid signal in the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) indicated by the E register, and output via SPI transmission (CHB). The contents of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) will be explained with reference to Figure 339.

The SPI communication B0 port corresponds to the parallel output port of address DA and is connected to the external terminal board 784 and various solenoids via the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1345 (Figure 257). Figure 339 illustrates the configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. The SPI communication B buffer register is 16 bits, and consists of 8 bits each for the external information output ports (PB0 to PB7) and the ports for outputting data (drive signals) to the solenoids (PA0 to PA7).

The signals output from the external information output port include security signals and ball dispensing signals. Various signals output from the external terminal board 784 are detected by the hall computer. The hall computer stores the signals received from each gaming machine and monitors the players' gameplay by tracking the number of game tokens dispensed and other game information.

To further explain the ports that output drive signals to the solenoids, as shown in Figure 339, output port PA1 corresponds to solenoid 1, output port PA2 to solenoid 2, and output port PA3 to solenoid 3. In this embodiment, other ports are not used, and the number of output ports increases or decreases depending on the model. The solenoids include solenoids that open and close the large prize openings. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 16, solenoids that open and close the first large prize opening 2005 and the second large prize opening 2006 are included. Since the second large prize opening 2006 is composed of two large prize openings, the second upper large prize opening 2006a and the second lower large prize opening 2006b, which are located in a single flow path through which the game balls pass, three ports serve as output destinations for the solenoid drive signals.

Furthermore, while each solenoid is associated with one output port, it may also be configured with multiple bit outputs (for example, 2-bit outputs). For instance, output ports PA0 and PA1 may correspond to solenoids that open and close the first large prize opening 2005, output ports PA2 and PA3 to solenoids that open and close the second upper large prize opening 2006a, and output ports PA4 and PA5 to solenoids that open and close the second upper large prize opening 2006b. By bundling multiple output ports (output terminals) in this way and outputting a drive current connected to a single solenoid, insufficient drive current can be prevented, ensuring reliable solenoid operation. On the other hand, when outputting a drive signal from a single output port (output terminal), the drive signal may be amplified by an amplification circuit located on the main control board 1310 or the relay board.

Returning to the explanation of the program code for the game stop processing shown in Figure 331, once the SPI communication B buffer register is set in the E register, and the output destination via SPI communication is identified, the main control MPU 1311 calls the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) using the INVD instruction to start SPI communication. The SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA) is called not only in the game stop processing (Play_Stop), but also in the setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY), output data setting processing (PORT_SET), and LED_DISPLAY (display LED output processing), and is called when serial communication (SPI communication) is executed.

Next, the details of the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) will be explained with reference to Figure 324. When the SPI 2-byte output processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first outputs the contents of the W register to the SPI communication B buffer set in the E register ("OUT (E), W"). As mentioned above, the W register stores the port output value created in the external output processing (step P123) of the game stop processing. Furthermore, the contents of the A register are loaded into the W register ("LD W, A"), and the contents of the W register are output to the SPI communication B buffer ("OUT (E), W"). Through the above processing, after setting the data for external information output, the data for the solenoid (drive signal) can be set.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets definition information for SPI communication ("LDT HL, SPI_COMTX_B-_OFS_TP"). SPI_COMTX_B is a table (SPI common output setting data) that defines the setting data for output via SPI communication, and _OFS_TP is the initial value address of the area where various tables are defined. The SPI common output setting data will be explained below with reference to Figure 340.

Figure 340 shows an example of the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) in this embodiment. The SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) first defines the number of data settings, and then defines that communication is possible for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB).

The number of data settings is the number of records defined in the table. Since there are two records defined—one for SPI communication settings via SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and another for SPI communication settings via SPI transmission (CHB)—the actual number of data settings is 2. To flexibly accommodate changes in the table structure (increases or decreases in the number of records), the value of the number of data settings is calculated based on information such as the table's termination address.

SPI communication is initiated by writing the SPI communication enable bit to the SPI communication control register. The SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) defines the setting data for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Each setting data defines the setting address of SPI communication control register 1 and the setting value of the SPI communication enable bit. Specifically, for SPI transmission/reception (CHA), it is the setting address of SPI communication A control register 1 (_SPICNA1) and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB), and for SPI transmission (CHB), it is the setting address of SPI communication B control register 1 (_SPICNB1) and the setting value of the SPI communication B enable bit (_SPI_SPENBB_PB). _SPI_SPENBA_PB contains communication start information for slaves performing SPI transmission/reception (CHA). For example, when initiating communication for all slaves 1 through 4, the lower four bits corresponding to slaves 1 through 4 become "1," resulting in the setting of "0FH" ("00001111B"). Note that _SPI_SPENBB_PB contains communication start information for slaves performing SPI transmission (CHB).

Here, since slave 4 is used as an input, there is no need to initiate communication with slave 4 at the output timing. However, even if the enable signal of slave 4 is set to initiate communication, since there is no data for communication in slave 4's buffer, communication with slave 4 will not be initiated as a result. The reason for including the enable signal of slaves that do not need to initiate communication in the communication start setting is to allow the table to be used commonly during SPI communication. This allows the settings for initiating SPI communication to be handled by a single table, thereby reducing the program (data) size. Alternatively, instead of enabling communication for all slaves, it is also acceptable to configure separate tables to enable only the slaves that require communication. While this would increase the program (data) size, it prevents accidental communication by slaves that do not need to communicate.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 initiates SPI communication by executing the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) via the INVD instruction ("INVD_PORT_DAT_SET"). Further explanation will be provided with reference to the program code shown in Figure 319.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the data setting count in the B register ("LD B, (HL+)"). The HL register stores the table "SPI_COMTX_B" (Figure 340), which contains the definition information for SPI communication in the SPI 2-byte output process, the caller of the output port data setting process. The initially defined data setting count is then stored in the B register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 initiates SPI communication for SPI transmission/reception (CHA). Specifically, it sets the address corresponding to the SPI communication A control register in the W register ("LD W, (HL+)") and sets the value of the SPI communication A enable bit in the A register ("LD A, (HL+)"). Then, by setting the SPI communication A enable bit in the SPI communication A control register, it initiates SPI communication via SPI transmission/reception (CHA) ("OUT (W), A"). Furthermore, it determines whether the loop for the number of data settings has completed ("DJNZ P?ORTDAT_SET_1"), but since SPI communication via SPI transmission (CHB) has not yet started, it sets the SPI communication B enable bit in the SPI communication B control register, similar to the communication via SPI transmission/reception (CHA), and then terminates the output port data setting process.

The "LD B, (HL+)" operation loads the data at the address indicated by the HL register into the B register, and then increments the value of the HL register by +1. This eliminates the need to perform the HL register increment operation (INC HL) when successively reading data at the addresses indicated by the HL register, thus reducing program size.

Once the SPI communication process in step P124 is complete, the main control MPU 1311 sets game stop data to stop the game (step P125). Furthermore, it executes output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) to set the set game stop data to the output port (step P126). Finally, it executes performance display monitor processing to display various game-related information on the performance display monitor (step P127), and returns to the calling process (timer interrupt processing).

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the INVD instruction is used to call the SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX_WA) and the output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET) in order to perform SPI communication. Therefore, the overhead for performing SPI communication is reduced, and processing speed can be increased.

[21-4. Control during input signal reception in SPI communication]
Next, we will describe the configuration and procedure for receiving signals from various sensors and switches using SPI communication. First, we will describe the configuration for receiving input signals via SPI communication. The slave that receives the input signal corresponds to slave 4 in the block diagram shown in Figure 335, and in the specific configuration of this embodiment, it corresponds to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. As shown in the main board mounting diagram in Figure 334, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is actually composed of three ICs (1341a to 1341c).

[21-4-1. Configuration for receiving input signals via SPI communication]
Figure 341 is a circuit diagram focusing on the configuration for receiving signals via SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from each switch and sensor via each connector at terminals Q/D1 to Q/D8. It also receives the clock signal output from the SPICK terminal of the master main control MPU 1311 at terminal CK. The signal output from SPITX of the main control MPU 1311 is not captured, and when "0" data is output from SPITX, a LOW level signal is input to the CLR/LOAD terminal, and the signals connected to terminals Q/D8 to Q/D1 are input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. The specific data acquisition timing is as explained in Figure 336, etc., based on the operating mode.

The parallel signal input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 is converted to a serial signal and input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311. The signals input to each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 are output sequentially (for example, in the order of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1314c, 1314b, and 1314a). Parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a outputs the converted signal from its Q8' terminal and inputs it to the SI terminal of parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b. Parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b outputs the signals input to Q/D1-8 terminals from its Q8' terminal, and then outputs the signal input to the SI terminal from its Q8' terminal. The signal output from the Q8' terminal of parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b is input to the SI terminal of parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c outputs the signals input to Q/D1-8 terminals from Q8C terminal, and then outputs the signal input to SI terminal from Q8C terminal. The signal output from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c is input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311.

Next, we will describe the signals input from various switches and sensors for each of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits 1341 (1341a to 1341c). In this embodiment, each of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuits (1341a to 1341c) uses the same hardware.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a receives input signals from the regular prize slot switches 1-3 and the large prize slot switches 1-3 via connector 13101. Furthermore, it receives input signals from the start slot switch 2 via connector 13107 and from the start slot switch 1 via connector 13108. The signals from each switch pass through the interface (IF) circuit 13105a before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a.

The interface circuit 13105a can detect open circuits, short circuits, power supply abnormalities, etc., in response to the input signal. If an abnormality is detected, an error signal is output from the E terminal. The interface circuit 13105a also accepts input signals detected by the proximity sensor. The proximity sensor outputs a voltage of approximately 9V when the sensor is not passing (not detected) and a voltage of approximately 0.8V when the sensor is detected passing. Therefore, internally, the interface circuit 13105a determines that an input signal of 0V is an open circuit and that a signal of 12V is a short circuit. Note that the E terminal of interface circuit 13105a and the E terminal of interface circuit 13105b (described later) are directly connected by a wiring pattern, so it is not possible to determine whether the abnormality is on the interface circuit 13105a side or the interface circuit 13105b side. This is because, regardless of which sensor experiences an abnormality, it will disrupt the progress of the game, so there is no need to detect abnormalities individually. Alternatively, abnormalities can be detected individually for each interface circuit by connecting the E terminal of each interface circuit. The error signal, like other input signals, is input from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 to the main control MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 receives the error signal along with signals from various sensors during input processing. The program determines whether the error signal indicates an error, and if an error is detected, it sends a command to the peripheral control board to notify it of the switch abnormality. This notification is then displayed on the lamp (LED), sound, liquid crystal display, etc., indicating that a switch abnormality has occurred.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b receives signals output from the out switch and safe switch via connector 13104, and signals output from the start switch 3 via connector 13106. Furthermore, it receives signals output from the general-purpose input, outlet switch, specific area switch, linked gate switch, and general gate switch via connector 13101. Signals from each switch pass through the interface (IF) circuit 13105b before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The interface circuit 13105b has the same function as the interface circuit 13105a and receives signals detected by the proximity sensor. As described above, the wiring from the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b is connected to the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c receives input signals from the vibration detection sensor, magnetic detection switch, specific area tamper prevention switch, and start gate tamper prevention switches 1-3 via connector 13101. Furthermore, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c also receives input error signals (SW-E) from the E terminals of interface circuits 13105a and 13105b. The specific area tamper prevention switch and start gate tamper prevention switches 1-3 are phototype sensors, outputting a 12V voltage when the sensor is not passing (non-detection) and a 0V voltage when passage is detected. Similarly, the vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection switch, although not phototype sensors, output a 12V voltage when no vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected (non-detection) and a 0V voltage when vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected (detection). Note that the voltages for detection and non-detection may be reversed; for example, 0V may be output when non-detection and 12V when detection. Unlike proximity sensors, the voltage differs when the sensor is ON/OFF. Therefore, the signal is converted to 5V by transistor 13109 without going through an interface circuit and then output. The transistor 13109 used in this case has a built-in rejection circuit (resistor) in its input stage to prevent false detection due to noise during signal input.

Furthermore, a pull-up resistor 13109b is connected between the interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109 and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314. In addition to the pull-up resistor 13109b, a capacitor 13109c is connected between GND and the signal line for noise suppression. Furthermore, a pull-up resistor 13109d is connected between the connector 13101 and the interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109a. These pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109a are arranged relatively close to the connector 13101, while the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 does not need to be arranged close to the connector 13101. In other words, the electronic components placed near connector 13101 are specific circuits within the input circuit (the input circuit from connector 13101, etc., to the main control MPU 1311), specifically the pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, interface circuit 13105, and transistor 13109a. This is because the outputs from interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109a have high drive capability and are less susceptible to noise even at a distance from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314. Furthermore, when receiving signals from outside the main control board 1310, routing wiring patterns within the board could affect the wiring patterns of other signals. Therefore, electronic components such as interface circuit 13105, transistor 13109a, and the pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitor 13109c, etc., connected to them, need to be placed near the connector.

[21-4-2. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (switch input processing)]
Next, we will explain the procedure for inputting data from various switches on the gaming machine to the main control MPU 1311 via serial communication (SPI communication). Specifically, we will explain the switch input processing in step S74 of the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 23. Regarding the switch input processing, Figure 288 describes the process of detecting the entry of a game ball into the starting slot and storing switch edge information in the prize ball determination area. However, here we will explain the procedure for receiving input signals from various sensors, not limited to prize ball information, and inputting the signals to the main control MPU 1311 via SPI communication.

Figure 342 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for switch input processing to acquire information detected by sensors and other devices provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 343 is a diagram showing an example of program code for the switch input processing of this embodiment, corresponding to the flowchart in Figure 342. The details of the switch input processing will be described below with reference to Figures 342 and 343, and the procedure for receiving signals input to the main control MPU 1311 via SPI communication will be shown. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the input signal is received using the third channel (slave 4, A3 channel) of SPI transmission/reception (CHA). When describing the program processing, "slave 4" will be referred to as "A3 channel".

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the switch input process, it sets dummy data (8 bytes) for transmission in the A3 channel communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) (step P6001). Specifically, it first sets the starting address of the SPI input setting data (see Figure 344) in the HL register. At this time, by adding the value of the second operand to the test pointer address (fixed at 9000H; programmatically rewritable) using the LDT instruction and setting the value in the HL register, what would normally be a 3-byte word length instruction (LD HL, SPI_SWRX_B) can be reduced to a 2-byte word length, thereby reducing the program size. The value of the second operand is the difference from the starting data address of the data to be set, and by adding the value of the second operand to the value indicated by the test pointer, the starting data address of the data to be set is stored in the HL register (first operand). As described above, in this embodiment, when receiving an input signal from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314 (slave 4), the system is controlled to capture the input signal each time dummy data is transmitted. The dummy data set during data reception is defined in the SPI input setting data, and the contents of the SPI input setting data will be explained below with reference to Figure 344.

Figure 344 shows an example of program code for the setting data (SPI input setting data; SPI_SWRX_B) used when starting to receive an input signal via SPI communication in this embodiment. The SPI input setting data is defined at the beginning with data indicating the number of data to be set, followed by the address of the transmit (communication) buffer and the transmit data (dummy data) to be stored in the transmit buffer. In the example shown in Figure 344, dummy data is set in the transmit (communication) buffer (SPIBFA3) for channel A3. At this time, the first and fifth bytes of transmit data are used as input signal load data (latch data; SPI receive LOAD signal (_SPI_LOAD_SIG=FEH)), and the remaining (bytes 2-4, 6-8) of the transmit data are dummy data (SPI general-purpose receive signal (SPI_COMM_SIG=FFH)). This is because the switch's input port is allocated 3 bytes, and the same amount of transmit data is required. One set of data consists of 4 bytes in total: 1 byte of the load signal and 3 bytes of dummy data. In this embodiment, the 8th bit of the load data is set to "0," but as will be described later, the load data is discarded without being captured. Therefore, it is not limited to the 8th bit; for example, the 1st bit could be set to "0." Furthermore, instead of outputting the load signal via serial communication, the load signal may be output from an input/output port.

In a configuration where load data is transmitted via serial communication, hardware (circuit) costs such as wiring patterns for outputting load signals, noise reduction configurations, and I/O port placement, as well as software costs such as program processing for turning load signals ON/OFF, can be reduced compared to outputting load signals from I/O ports. On the other hand, when outputting load signals from I/O ports, the process of transmitting load data is eliminated, and there is no need to discard data acquired at the timing of the load data without transmitting it, thus simplifying program processing. Note that when outputting data via SPI communication, the SPITX signal may output "0" data (LOW level signal). In this case, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 may receive the input signal. However, since the A3 channel transmission buffer is empty, SPI communication on the A3 channel will not start. Therefore, the signal received by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 at this timing is updated when the load signal is output during input processing, and is consequently discarded.

In this embodiment of SPI communication, to prevent the game from progressing due to incorrect data caused by noise or other influences, the signal input from a switch or other device is read twice. If the signals match, it is determined that normal communication has occurred, thereby improving communication accuracy. In this embodiment of the game machine, two sets of data (8 bytes total) consisting of a 1-byte load signal and 3 bytes of dummy transmission data are transmitted. The received data from both sets is compared to determine if the communication was successful. Note that the first and fifth bytes of the transmission data are used as load signals and are therefore not captured as input signals during transmission; these input data are invalid. Furthermore, the input signals captured during transmission of the second and sixth bytes, third and seventh bytes, and fourth and eighth bytes correspond to each other. If the corresponding input signals match, the communication (double reading) is considered successful, edge data is created, and the game is controlled.

When the SPI input setting data is set in the HL register, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) using the INVD instruction. This sets the 8 bytes of transmission data defined in the SPI input setting data into the A3 channel communication buffer. Then, by setting the enable status of all slaves used for communication in the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) to 1, the 8 bytes of dummy data stored in the A3 channel communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) are transmitted.

Furthermore, while initiating communication only with specific slaves, such as input slave 4, requires individual processing and configuration data, configuring the system to initiate communication with all slaves allows for the standardization of processing and data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the monitoring time until the SPI communication is completed (step P6002). If the communication is not completed by the set start time, it is determined that the communication has failed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether communication is in progress (communication is ongoing) (step P6003). Specifically, it first stores the value set in the SPI transmission/reception (CHA) control register 2 (SPINA1; SPI communication A control register 1; see Figure 339(B)) in the A register. Then, it refers to the enable bit from the value stored in the A register to determine whether communication is in progress. If communication is in progress (result of step P6003 is "YES"), it waits until communication is completed or the monitoring time has elapsed (step S6004).

The main control MPU 1311, if the monitoring time elapses while channel A3 remains in communication mode (resulting in "YES" in step P6004), performs initialization settings for the communication circuit (step P6005). Furthermore, it sets communication error data in a predetermined register (described later) instead of input data (step P6006). Subsequently, by executing the processes from step P6008 onward, the system is controlled to prevent the creation of edge data where the signal changes from OFF to ON (i.e., the switch is not determined to be ON).

Here, we will explain the initialization settings in step P6005. Figure 345 is an example of the program code for the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) used when initializing the communication circuit of the SPI communication in this embodiment. The SPI restart setting data is defined at the beginning with data indicating the number of data settings, followed by setting data for initializing the communication circuit. First, the control register 1 (SPINA0) for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is set to "00000001B", which sets SPRSTA to "1", and the initialization of the communication circuit is performed. The setting value for the control register 1 for SPI transmission/reception (CHA) is as explained in Figure 337. Furthermore, the bit shift settings of slave 1, slave 3, and slave 4 are set to "1" (LSB first), and the operation mode is set to "0" (mode 0). Furthermore, configure the settings for Slave 1 (_SPIPSA0), Slave 2 (_SPIPSA1), and Slave 4 (_SPIPSA3). Note that Slave 3 (A2 channel) is unused and therefore not configured.

The "communication error data" set in step P6006 is set to "FFH" (the same value as when the input signal is OFF) so that edge data is not set when edge data is created in the processing of step P6008, which changes from OFF to ON. In this embodiment, since ON is determined when all signals are Low, the communication error data is set to "FFH" so that it is the same as when all signals are High. Therefore, for example, if ON is determined when the input signal is High, the communication error data to be set would be "00H" instead of "FFH".

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 is not communicating (i.e., the dummy data communication is complete) (the result of step P6003 is "NO"), it takes the input data received along with the dummy data transmission from the SPI communication A3 buffer register as input data and sets it in a predetermined register (step P6007). To explain the process of step P6007 in detail, as mentioned above, data acquisition involves acquiring 8 bytes of data ((load data + dummy data × 3) × 2 times = 8 bytes) from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. First, the first byte of data is acquired, but this acquired data is discarded because it is invalid data acquired along with the transmission of the load data. The second byte of acquired data and the third byte of data are then temporarily stored in the WA register, which is a pair register (one that can be used as a 2-byte register), and then moved to the BC register. Furthermore, the fourth to sixth bytes of data are acquired. As mentioned earlier, the fifth byte of data is discarded due to invalid data captured along with the load data transmission. The fourth and sixth bytes of captured data are then temporarily stored in the WA register, and subsequently moved to the DE register. Finally, the seventh and eighth bytes of captured data are stored in the WA register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates edge data from the input data stored in predetermined registers (step P6008). In step P6008, edge data is created based on the data taken into each register, regardless of whether communication was completed successfully or not. If a communication error occurs, "communication error data" is set in the predetermined register in step P6006, so edge data (where input data is taken in, changing from OFF to ON) is not created. This allows edge data to be created using the same process as when communication is normal, even if communication is abnormal, simplifying the program's control structure.

To specifically explain the process in step P6008, first, the values of the W register and the D register are swapped, and the starting address of the SPI switch input information data is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, three types of data are defined: SPI switch input information data 1, SPI switch input information data 2, and SPI switch input information data 3. The specific configuration is shown in Figure 346.

Figure 346 illustrates an example of SPI switch input information data in this embodiment. The SPI switch input information data consists of adjustment data, mask data, and a level area address.

The adjustment data is defined as a one-byte bit sequence and is used to adjust the input data. The adjustment data is designed to be 1 when the acquired input signal is ON. In Figure 346, the adjustment data is "00h," so when the acquired value is "1," the switch level data becomes "1" (indicating ON). Conversely, when it is "0," the switch level data becomes "0" (indicating OFF).

Mask data, like adjustment data, is defined as a one-byte bit sequence and is used to identify the data to be compared as needed. By configuring the mask data with bits used as input signals set to "1" and unused bits set to "0," unused input bits that are mistakenly ON ("1") can be set to OFF ("0") by the mask data.

The level area address is the address of the area that stores the level data created from the input data. Since edge data is stored immediately after the level data, the area for storing edge data is contiguous with the area for storing level data. Therefore, the address for storing edge data is not set in the SPI switch input information data. Furthermore, the areas for storing level data and edge data have the same configuration. If the areas for storing level data and edge data are not contiguous, the area for storing edge data should be set (maintained). In this case, if the upper byte of the addresses of the areas for storing level data and edge data are fixed (common), setting only the lower byte of the address can reduce data capacity compared to maintaining the addresses of each area directly.

Figure 347 shows an example of the configuration of the area for storing level data and edge data in this embodiment. Referring to Figure 347, the level area address of the SPI switch input information data 1 is "0006h", where the first bit (BIT0) is for start gate SW (switch) 1, the second bit (BIT1) is for start gate SW2, the third bit (BIT2) is for big prize gate SW1, the fourth bit (BIT3) is for big prize gate SW2, the fifth bit (BIT4) is for big prize gate SW3, the sixth bit (BIT5) is for normal prize gate SW1, the seventh bit (BIT6) is for normal prize gate SW2, and the eighth bit (BIT7) is for normal prize gate SW3. The area for storing edge data corresponding to the SPI switch input information data 1 (edge area address) is "0007h", and is a continuous area with the area for storing level data. This configuration eliminates the need to redefine the area for storing edge data, thus reducing program and data size. Furthermore, since data retrieval only requires reading from a contiguous area, processing efficiency can be improved while simplifying the program.

Now, let's return to the explanation of the process in step P6008 of Figure 342 (Figure 343). After setting the SPI switch input information data in the HL register, the SPI double-read process (TWICE_SPI) is executed to check the input data and create level data and edge data. The details of the SPI double-read process (TWICE_SPI) will be explained with reference to Figures 348 and 349.

Figure 348 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the SPI double-reading process (TWICE_SPI) in this embodiment. Figure 349 is a diagram showing an example of the program code for the SPI double-reading process (TWICE_SPI) in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 348.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the SPI double-reading process, it saves the value of the DE register to the stack area (step P6101) because the DE register may be used in subsequent processing. Next, it identifies the level area address from the address of the SPI switch input information data stored in the HL register, which stores the level data, and stores it in the index register (step P6102). After creating the level data and edge data using the level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) described later, it stores the data created based on the address stored in the index register. Also, after the processing in step P6102, the value of the HL register is subtracted and adjusted for subsequent processing. The level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) is called not only to create edge data for inputs via SPI communication, but also for general-purpose I/O switches (input signals from parallel ports) that do not use SPI communication. In this case, since the switch input information data for receiving signals from the general-purpose I/O switch is greater than that for SPI communication, the address of the switch input information data is adjusted by subtracting the value of the HL register ("DEC HL"). Data not included in the switch input information data for SPI communication includes, for example, the number of times data is read and the address of the input port.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the input data read twice matches (i.e., whether the data being compared matches) (step S6103). The data to be compared is stored in the W register and A register, and is compared using the CP instruction. As mentioned above, immediately after input data is received from the communication buffer, the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 6th, 7th, and 8th received input data are stored in the B, C, D, E, W, and A registers (predetermined registers). However, before the first SPI double-read process is executed, the values of the W register and D register are swapped, so the 4th received data and the 8th received data are compared. Subsequently, when the SPI double-read process is executed, the calling process (switch input process) swaps the values of the registers containing the data to be compared as needed, allowing the process to be executed without being aware of which byte of the data being compared is being performed. This makes the SPI double-read process (TWICE_SPI) a highly versatile process.

If the input data read twice by the main control MPU 1311 does not match (the result of step P6103 is "NO"), it stores "00H" as edge data in the edge data area (step P6105). Furthermore, it restores the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106) and terminates this process.

If the input data read twice matches, the main control MPU 1311 executes the level/edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) via the INVS command (step P6104) to create level data and edge data corresponding to the input data. The level/edge data creation process will be explained with reference to Figures 350 and 351.

Figure 350 is a flowchart showing the procedure for creating level edge data according to this embodiment. Figure 351 is a diagram showing an example of the program code for creating level edge data according to this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 350.

The main control MPU 1311 first creates level data from the input data based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the switch input information table (step P6201). Specifically, it adjusts the value of each bit in the input data stored in the A register based on the adjustment data so that when the acquired input signal is ON, it is "1", and when it is OFF, it is "0". Furthermore, it creates level data so that bits other than those used as input signals are not set to ON ("1") by using the mask data. Finally, it saves the calculated level data to the E register.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the XOR value (intermediate data) of the level data from the previous interrupt (step P6203). This sets the value to 1 only if it is an ON or OFF edge. Next, the main control MPU 1311 stores (updates) the current level data in the level data area (address stored in the index register) (step P6204). Furthermore, it calculates the AND value of the intermediate data (value in the A register) and the level data created by the current interrupt to create edge data (step P6205). At this point, "1" is stored if it is an ON edge, and 0 otherwise. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 stores the edge data stored in the A register in the edge data area (area adjacent to the level data area) (step P6206).

After creating the level data and edge data, the main control MPU 1311 returns the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106), and terminates this process.

Now, let's return to the switch input processing shown in Figure 342 (Figure 343) and explain the processing from step P6008 onwards. Once the creation and storage of the level data and edge data for the initial input data are complete, the main control MPU 1311 swaps the values of the C register and E register, and stores the value of the DE register in the WA register. As a result of this swap, the DE register now contains the seventh and third input data points. By storing these in the WA register, the seventh and third input data points are compared, and the level data and edge data for the input data are created. The subsequent processing is the same as the initial procedure for processing the fourth and eighth input data points. Furthermore, the BC address now contains the second and sixth input data points. By storing these in the WA register and processing them similarly, the processing of three bytes of input data is completed, and the acquisition of the signal from the serial port is finished.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the data input from the parallel port and calls the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) via the INVS command to create edge data of the input signal acquired from the parallel port (step P6009), and then terminates this process.

[21-4-3. Procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication (Time Chart)]
The procedure for receiving input signals via SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above with reference to the flowchart and program code. Next, the process of receiving input signals via SPI communication will be described in chronological order with reference to the time charts in Figures 352 and 353.

Figure 352 is a time chart showing the process from the start of the switch input processing in this embodiment to the completion of data transmission via SPI communication, in chronological order. Figure 353 is a time chart showing the process from the completion of data transmission via SPI communication to the start of the switch input processing with the next timer interrupt in this embodiment, in chronological order.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 23 is executed. As mentioned above, the timer interrupt interval (CTC setting) is set during the initial setup of the main control MPU 1311, and can be set not only to any value such as "0000h" to "FFFFh", but also to a fixed value (1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 1,489ms). Furthermore, the CTC can be set to any fixed value, and the first, second, and third fixed values are set to be in a multiple relationship, while the fourth setting can be set to a value that is not in a multiple relationship to the first to third settings. In this embodiment, by setting the third setting value, a timer interrupt occurs every 4ms. The timer interrupt can be generated using any of the first, second, or fourth setting values, not just the third setting value. The sampling period for the timer interrupt (input signal acquisition, output signal output, timing update reference time, random number update period, etc.) is set to an appropriate value according to the specifications of the gaming machine. In particular, the sampling of the input signal acquisition is important; the timer interrupt period is set to correspond to the pulse width at which the ON signal is output when the switch detects the passage of a game ball. When the switch detects the passage of a game ball, the pulse width changes according to its falling speed; the faster the falling speed, the shorter the pulse width. Therefore, the shorter the pulse width (faster the falling speed), the shorter the sampling period needs to be. However, if the sampling period is too short, processing cannot be completed within one timer interrupt period; therefore, the timer interrupt period is set according to the processing amount and the shortest pulse width from the switch.

When the switch input processing begins, the SPI input setting data (SPI_SWRX_B; Figure 344) first sets 8 bytes of dummy transmission data in the communication buffer (SPIBFA3) for channel A3 (step P6001). As described above, the transmission data has a latch load signal ("FEH"; _SPI_LOAD_SIG) in the first and fifth bytes, and dummy data ("FFH"; _SPI_COMM_SIG) in the second to fourth and sixth to eighth bytes. Note that the value of the dummy data is not limited to "FFH" and can be any value.

At the start of SPI communication, the enable terminal (SPENBA3) is updated from OFF ("0") to ON ("1"), and a clock signal is output from the clock terminal (SPICK) at predetermined intervals. Then, a load signal is output from the transmit terminal (SPITX) of the main control MPU 1311. At this time, since there is no corresponding input data for the load signal, it is ignored by the receiving side, and therefore the state of the receive terminal (SPIRX) is undefined.

When a load signal is received, the signal changes from ON ("1") to OFF ("0") on the 8th clock cycle. This changed signal is input to the LOAD terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, and 3 bytes of input signal are latched to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341. The main control MPU 1311 then sequentially receives the input data from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 as a serial signal via the receiving terminal SPIRX. Specifically, when the second byte of data is transmitted, the first byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341c. Subsequently, when the third byte of data is transmitted, the second byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341b, and finally, when the fourth byte of data is transmitted, the third byte of input data is received from the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341a. Subsequently, data for a second read (check) (second time) is received. Similar to the first data reception, the load signal is output first, causing the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 to latch three bytes of input signals again. Then, the input data from bytes 4 to 6 is received sequentially from the receiving terminal (SPIRX) in accordance with the transmission timing of the transmission data from bytes 6 to 8. After this, data transmission ends. At this point, the reception status of channel A3 is set to "received" ("1"), and the enable status (SPENBA3) of slave 4 in the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is updated from "communicating" ("1") to "communication finished" ("0").

The main control MPU 1311, upon receiving the next data, confirms that the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB) has reached communication termination ("0") and begins reading input data from the communication buffer (SPIBFA3) (from step P6007 onwards). At this time, a monitoring time is set, and if communication is not confirmed to have ended within the monitoring time, the SPI communication circuit is initialized (steps P6002-P6005). The contents of the communication buffer are cleared sequentially each time data is read, until all data has been read and the buffer is empty. From this point onward, the process of setting dummy data in the communication buffer and receiving input data is repeated until the next timer interrupt process begins. When the next timer interrupt process begins, the switch input process is executed from the beginning.

As described above, in this embodiment, serial communication (SPI communication) makes it possible to reduce the amount of data wiring on the main control board 1310, thereby increasing the flexibility of the board design. Furthermore, while the number of wires increases compared to I2C communication, the communication speed can be increased by adopting SPI communication.

In this embodiment, by designating the slaves (parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, serial-to-parallel conversion circuit 1342, etc.) controlled by the master (main control MPU 1311) as either dedicated to receiving (input) or dedicated to transmitting (output), the management of electronic components is simplified, and the flexibility of electronic component placement is increased. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring distance between electronic components, allowing for easier separation of wiring that outputs the clock signal from wiring that transmits and receives data, thereby eliminating the effects of noise and stabilizing communication.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 enables both synchronous and asynchronous serial communication, and has multiple channels for both synchronous and asynchronous serial communication. The asynchronous serial communication format is 8 bits. In asynchronous serial communication, each channel is fixed to either receive or transmit, and each channel is equipped with a storage means (communication buffer) capable of storing communication data. Multiple sizes of communication buffers can be defined; for example, the largest size (e.g., 512 bytes) is used for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510, which has a large amount of data to transmit. On the other hand, a smaller size (e.g., 128 bytes) is sufficient for sending commands to the payout control board, and a general-purpose buffer may be provided. Asynchronous communication allows data transmission and reception to be performed in parallel with other processes, thereby improving the overall efficiency of the process.

[22. Switch-related control]
The serial communication function (SPI communication) for inputting and outputting signals to the main control board 1310 in this embodiment of the gaming machine has been described above. As mentioned above, signals are input to the main control board 1310 by switches and sensors that detect when a game ball enters the game. The input data (signal) is captured by the switch input processing (step P102) in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 329). Furthermore, if the machine is in a playable state, various processes based on the input signal are executed in the switch-related control processing (step 01TKS0010 in Figure 354; Figure 357) included in the playable state processing (step P108; Figure 354).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, detection signals from various switches and sensors are input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 outputs commands to various control boards (e.g., peripheral control board 1510 and payout control board 951) and controls drive elements such as motors and solenoids, and light-emitting elements such as LEDs, based on the input signals. Thus, the input signals include many types, from those related to the progress of the game to those detecting fraud or abnormalities. Therefore, because processing corresponding to each signal is required, there was a risk that the program for controlling the game would become complex and the program capacity would increase.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a gaming machine is provided that enables the execution of control corresponding to input signals using a general procedure by adopting a specific structure for the data related to the control processing of input signals. This simplifies game control, suppresses the increase in program capacity, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines.

The following describes the configuration for storing the necessary data for switch-related control processing, which performs signal-based processing, and the procedure for controlling the game using this data.

[22-1. Processing when game is ready]
First, before explaining the switch-related control processing, we will explain the game-ready processing that calls the switch-related control processing. As mentioned above, the game-ready processing is executed after the gaming machine has started up and when it is possible to proceed with normal gameplay. Specifically, it is executed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 329) when the game-ready state is met and there are no factors that would cause the game to stop (step P108). Below, we will explain the general procedure of the game-ready processing.

Figure 354 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the game-ready processing executed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. Figure 355 is a diagram showing an example of the program code for the game-ready processing in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 354.

When the game-ready processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first executes switch-related control processing (step 01 TKS0010). In the switch-related control processing, data is created and corresponding processing is executed based on signals input from various switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine. Details will be explained with reference to Figures 357 and subsequent figures.

After the switch-related control processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the probability variation area passage determination process (step 01TKS0020). The probability variation area passage determination process determines whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation area if the timer set in the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing (step 01TKS0080) is active, and changes the probability state according to the determination result. Note that the active timer is set in the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing (step 01TKS0080) and updated in the next interrupt. However, if this process is executed during the execution of the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing, the switch input in that interrupt will determine that the probability variation area has been passed. Therefore, this process is called at the start of the timer interrupt processing (before the execution of the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing).

After the probability variation area pass detection process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step 01TKS0030). The timer update process updates various timers necessary for the game's progress. These timers include 1-byte and 2-byte timers, depending on the time they measure.

After the timer update process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step 01 TKS0040). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed is calculated based on the read input information. Furthermore, based on the calculation result of the prize ball count, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. Other processes, such as checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, are also performed.

After the prize ball control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step 01 TKS0050). In frame command reception processing, the received commands are stored as information for transmission to the payout control board 951 and peripheral control board 1510, or commands are generated.

After the frame command reception process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step 01 TKS0060). The fraud detection process checks for abnormal conditions such as prize ball entry. For example, this includes detection of abnormalities in the large prize slot entry, magnetic detection abnormalities, random number abnormalities, and normal electric prize entry abnormalities.

After the fraud detection process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the performance display monitor process (step 01 TKS0070). The performance display monitor process displays various information. As mentioned above, no processes directly related to game control are executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not something the player intentionally refers to. Therefore, in this embodiment, the performance display monitor process is stored outside the usage area and can be executed independently of the game control process by the INVI instruction.

After the performance display monitor processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing (step 01 TKS0080). After each start gate passage processing is executed, the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing calls the processing corresponding to the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number, including the big prize opening processing. After the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control processing (step 01 TKS0090). The normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control processing performs processing such as drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to open the second start gate 2004 when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003.

After the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the solenoid drive processing (step 01 TKS0100). In the solenoid drive processing, the solenoid and other electrical drive sources are driven based on the drive data. Note that the index register (IY register) is updated during the solenoid drive processing; therefore, the index register is saved to the stack area before the solenoid drive processing is executed and restored from the stack area after completion.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step 01 TKS0110), outputting the output information set in each process from the output terminals of the various output ports. Afterward, it terminates the game-ready processing and returns to the timer interrupt processing while maintaining the interrupt state.

[22-2. Overview of Switch-Related Control Processing]
Next, an overview of the switch-related control processing will be described. Some of the input signals from various switches are stored as history monitoring switch data in chronological order. The history monitoring switch data includes a predetermined number of signals starting from the last input signal, and is configured to discard the oldest signal when a new signal is input. The main control MPU 1311 performs predetermined processing based on this history monitoring switch data. These some input signals include, for example, signals from a contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and a firing stop switch (firing stop button).

Before explaining the switch-related control processing, we will first outline the configuration for receiving signals output from various switches, followed by a description of the basic procedure for switch-related control processing. Then, we will explain the detailed procedure for switch-related control processing and the structure for storing the data used.

[22-2-1. Configuration for performing control based on input signals]
This section describes the configuration in which signals output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509 and the firing stop switch (firing stop button, stop button) are input to the input ports of the main control MPU 1311. Figure 356 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit diagram extracted from the configuration in the gaming machine of this embodiment, showing the input of signals output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the firing stop switch (firing stop button) to the main control MPU 1311.

The contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) are included in the handle unit 500 located on the main frame 4. The contact detection sensor 509 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504; if the handle lever 504 is touched, the game balls can be launched. The launch stop switch (launch stop button, stop button) detects whether the player wishes to forcibly stop the launch of the game balls. The detection signals from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) are input to the launch control input circuit included in the payout control board 951, and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signals input to the launch timing control circuit are then input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 via the connector 13104 of the main control board 1310.

[22-2-2. Outline of the procedure for switch-related control processing]
Next, an overview of the switch-related control processing procedure will be described. Figure 357 is a flowchart showing the switch-related control processing procedure in this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the signal level from the area where the input signal is stored (input level data area) and executes a history monitoring switch data creation process to create/update history monitoring switch data (step 01 TKS0110). As mentioned above, the history monitoring switch data is data that holds a predetermined number of signal values input to the main control MPU 1311 in chronological order. For example, if the history monitoring switch data is 1 byte (= 8 bits), it stores the values of 8 input signals. Details of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be explained with reference to the drawings from Figure 358 onwards. In addition to the touch sensor signal and firing stop switch mentioned above, the targets for creating history monitoring switch data include door open information and proximity switch error signals.

After the history monitoring switch data creation process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs the open circuit/short circuit abnormality detection process (step 01 TKS0120). The open circuit/short circuit abnormality detection process obtains the proximity switch error signal from the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process and determines whether an error has occurred. If an error has occurred, an open circuit/short circuit abnormality command is sent.

After executing the wire break/short circuit abnormality detection process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the process to prohibit the awarding of prize balls to the unoperated large prize slot (Step 01 TKS0130). This process determines whether the awarding of prize balls to the large prize slot is valid, and if so, stores the award ball determination data in the award ball determination area. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has multiple large prize slots, this determination is performed for all of them.

After the execution of the process to prohibit the awarding of balls to the unactivated large prize slot, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01 TKS0140). In the switch history command transmission determination process, a command is generated based on the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process. For example, the command is sent if the signal value is determined to be ON by referring to the history monitoring switch data.

In this embodiment, by structuring and defining the information for acquiring the signal to be judged (information identifying the area where the input signal value is stored), command information, and information for judging the input signal as a set (sequence) of data, it is possible to process the judgment of the input signal and the generation of commands in a general manner. The data structure and specific examples for executing the switch history command transmission judgment process will be explained with reference to Figures 364 and 365. Furthermore, the detailed procedure for the switch history command transmission judgment process will be explained with reference to Figures 367 and 368.

After the switch history command transmission determination process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch passage command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process, which includes a switch passage command transmission process and a safe switch abnormality determination process. The switch passage command transmission process generates the command for determining the winning combination at the winning slot. The procedure for generating the command is a common process that can be executed regardless of the winning slot. Furthermore, the safe switch abnormality determination process determines whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning combinations (safe ball count) by counting the number of winning combinations according to the type of winning slot, or by counting the number of safe balls (safe judgment count value) based on the presence or absence of prize balls.

Furthermore, in the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process, by structuring and defining the information for identifying the target prize slot, command information, and count information for counting the number of safe balls as a single data set, it is possible to perform a common process regardless of the type of prize slot. The data structure and specific examples for executing the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process will be explained with reference to Figures 367 and 368. The detailed procedure for the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process will be explained with reference to Figures 369 to 372.

The above outlines the switch-related control processing. Next, we will explain the detailed procedures and data structures of each process that constitutes the switch-related control processing.

[22-3. History Monitoring Switch Data Creation Process]
When the switch-related control processing starts, the history monitoring switch data creation process is executed, which creates history monitoring switch data from the received input signals. As mentioned above, the history monitoring switch data creation process creates history monitoring switch data based on history area creation data, which has a common data structure regardless of the type of signal. The configuration for creating history monitoring switch data is described below. Specifically, the data structure of the history area creation data is described first, followed by a description of specific history area creation data. Then, the detailed procedure is explained with reference to the flowchart and program code of the history monitoring switch data creation process.

[22-3-1. Structure of data created in the history area]
Figure 358 illustrates the data structure of the history area creation data in this embodiment. The history area creation data is information for creating history monitoring switch data corresponding to the input signal. Specifically, for one type of input signal, it is configured as a set consisting of the lower address of the reference destination (input level data area), the switch bit number, and the lower address of the area where the history monitoring switch data is stored (input signal history area) (history management RWM lower address). Since the capacity for storing each data is 1 byte, the history area creation data can be accessed sequentially by incrementing the address by 1 from the starting address of the history area creation data ("XXXXh").

The lower address of the reference destination (input level data area) is the lower address of the area where the signal value (history management switch input level data) input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 is stored. Since the upper address is predetermined, only the lower address needs to be specified, thereby reducing the required area (capacity) to one byte. Alternatively, instead of setting only the lower address, the upper address can also be included, resulting in a two-byte address data.

The signals input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 are aggregated into a predetermined set of multiple signals and stored as one byte of input level data. In this embodiment, since the input level data consists of one byte (= 8 bits), a maximum of eight types of input signals can be assigned to a single input level data. The switch bit number is information used to identify which bit of the input level data corresponds to the signal for which the history monitoring switch data is to be created. The switch bit number is set to a value from 0 to 7. The specific configuration will be described later in Figure 363.

The signals constituting the input level data are those acquired from the input ports of the main control MPU 1311 via serial or parallel communication. For example, the proximity switch error signal is acquired via SPI communication (serial communication). The proximity switch error signal input to the main control MPU 1311 generates level data based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the SPI switch input information data (Figure 346), and this data is stored in "INPUT_LEV3".

The area for storing history monitoring switch data (input signal history area), like the input signal reference area (input level data area), has its upper address predetermined, so only the lower address needs to be specified. This allows the required area (capacity) to be reduced to one byte.

Next, we will explain a specific example of history area creation data. Figure 359 shows an example of history area creation data in this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as mentioned above, the input signals that are targeted for creating history monitoring switch data include the door open information signal, touch sensor signal, launch stop switch, and proximity switch error signal. Here, we will explain using the history area creation data for the launch stop switch as an example.

The input signal for the launch stop switch is stored in the input level data "INPUT_LEV4," and the reference destination (input level data area) is set to the lower address of the storage location of "INPUT_LEV4" (".LOW.INPUT_LEV4") (history management switch input level data lower address).

Here, we will explain the area where input level data is stored. Figure 360 is a diagram showing the configuration of the area (data area) that stores signals targeted for the creation of history monitoring switch data, within the area (data area) that stores signals input to the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. The frame release information signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV5" and its address is "000Eh," so the lower address of the history management switch input level data is "0Eh." Similarly, the touch sensor signal and the fire stop switch signal are stored in "INPUT_LEV4" and their address is "000Ch," so the lower address of the history management switch input level data is "0Ch." Furthermore, the proximity switch error signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV3" and its address is "000Ah," so the lower address of the history management switch input level data is "0Ah."

The corresponding switch bit number "_DOOR_SW_BIT" for the frame release information signal is set to "5," which identifies the value of the 5th bit of "INPUT_LEV5." In "INPUT_LEV5," the "frame release information signal" is stored in the 5th bit, and the other bits are unused.

Similarly, the corresponding switch bit number for the touch sensor signal, "_HASSYA_TCH_BIT," is set to "2," which identifies the value of the second bit of "INPUT_LEV4." "INPUT_LEV4" stores the "setting key switch" in bit 0, the "payer ACK input signal" in bit 1, the "touch sensor signal" in bit 2, the "fire stop switch signal" in bit 3, and the "main RWM erase/setting change signal" in bit 4, with bits 5-7 being unused. Furthermore, the corresponding switch bit number for the fire stop switch signal, "_HASSYA_STP_BIT," is set to "3," which identifies the value of the third bit of "INPUT_LEV4."

Furthermore, the corresponding switch bit number "_SW_ERR1_BIT" for the proximity switch error signal is set to "6," which identifies the value of the 6th bit of "INPUT_LEV3." "INPUT_LEV3" stores the "magnetic detection switch" in the 4th bit and the "proximity switch error signal" in the 6th bit, with the other bits remaining unused.

As described above, the input of the frame release information signal can be identified by the lower address of the history management switch input level data and the corresponding switch bit number.

Returning to the explanation of the history area creation data in Figure 359, the address of the area where the history monitoring switch data for the launch stop switch is stored (launch stop switch signal history area "HS_STP_HIST") is, for example, "002Ch". In this case, "2Ch", which is the lower address of the launch stop switch signal history area (".LOW.HS_STP_HIST"), is set as the lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the area where the history monitoring switch data is stored (input signal history area).

At the end of the area where the history area creation data is defined, the number of switches targeted by the history area creation data, known as the history monitoring switch count ("_HIST_SW_CNT"), is defined. Specifically, this value is obtained by dividing the number of bytes from the address of the starting area of the history area creation data to the address where the history monitoring switch count is stored by 3. Since the history area creation data consists of three types of one-byte data per switch, it is possible to define it without directly storing numerical values. This definition allows the program to adapt to increases or decreases in the number of monitored switches without requiring program changes, reducing the possibility of program malfunctions such as bugs.

In the example described above, data for creating history monitoring switch data was explained for door open information signals, touch sensor signals, launch stop switches, and proximity switch error signals. However, other signals may also be managed using history monitoring switch data. For example, signals from the position sensor of a mechanism (drive unit) controlled by the main control board 1310 may be managed using history monitoring switch data to determine whether the mechanism has returned to its original position. Furthermore, switches and sensors that only rely on the ON/OFF switching of input signals, such as gate switches, may also be managed using history monitoring switch data.

[22-3-2. Procedure for creating history monitoring switch data]
In the history monitoring switch data creation process, history monitoring switch data is created for the signals input to the main control MPU 1311 based on the information defined in the history area creation data. The procedure for the history monitoring switch data creation process will be explained below with reference to the history monitoring switch data creation process flowchart and program code.

Figure 361 is a flowchart showing the procedure for creating history monitoring switch data in this embodiment. Figure 362 is an example of program code for creating history monitoring switch data in this embodiment, corresponding to the flowchart in Figure 361.

When the history monitoring switch data creation process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the starting address of the history area creation data (Figure 359) (Step 01 TKS 1010). The starting address of the history area creation data is set in the HL register. At this time, similar to the procedure for setting the starting address of the SPI input setting data in the switch input process, by setting the difference value from the starting data address of the history area creation data as the second operand of the LDT instruction and executing it, the instruction, which would normally be a 3-byte word length instruction, can be reduced to a 2-byte word length, thereby reducing the program size.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of history monitoring switches ("_HIST_SW_CNT") as the number of repetitions for the history monitoring switch data creation process (Step 01 TKS 1020). The number of history monitoring switches is stored, for example, in the B register. Once the address setting for the history area creation data and the setting of the number of history monitoring switches are complete, and preparation for creating the history monitoring switch data is finished, history monitoring switch data for the number of history monitoring switches is created, and the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area corresponding to each switch (input signal) is created (updated).

The main control MPU 1311 obtains the address of the area (input level data area) where the input signals to be used to create history monitoring switch data are stored (step 01 TKS 1030). Specifically, it obtains the address of the area (input level data area, specifically "INPUT_LEV4") where the input signals are stored from the value of the lower address of the history management switch input level data (for example, the value of ".LOW.INPUT_LEV4"), and stores it in a predetermined storage area (for example, the DE register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates and updates history monitoring switch data based on the input level data area identified in step 01 TKS 1030.

First, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the corresponding switch bit number and stores it in a predetermined memory area (for example, register A) (step 01 TKS 104). The corresponding switch bit number is set to a value in the range of 0 to 7.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the input signal for which history monitoring switch data is to be created from the bit corresponding to the switch bit number and stores it in a predetermined storage area (step 01 TKS 1050). At this time, the predetermined storage area may be a register or a temporary area allocated in RAM. Since the value of the signal is a binary value of ON ("1") or OFF ("0"), in this embodiment, the information of the bit indicated by the A register from the data of the address indicated by the DE register is set in CF (carry flag). For example, in the case of a door open information signal, the bit information (5) of "_DOOR_SW_BIT" of "INPUT_LEV5" is acquired, and if the 5th bit of "INPUT_LEV5" is "1", "1" (carry flag) is set in CF, and if it is "0", "0" is set in CF (carry flag). In this way, the entire process of retrieving arbitrary bit information from a specific address and setting that information to the CF (carry flag) can be executed in a single instruction. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the program size. Further details of the configuration are explained in Figure 363.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets an area for storing history monitoring switch data (input signal history area) (step 01 TKS 1060) and identifies the history monitoring switch data to be updated. Specifically, the process in step 01 TKS 1060 updates the contents stored in the DE register from the address of the input level data area to the address of the history monitoring switch data (history management RWM address).

The main control MPU 1311 updates the identified history monitoring switch data to be updated based on the newly acquired input signal value (step 01 TKS 1070). As mentioned above, the history monitoring switch data in this embodiment is 1 byte (= 8 bits) and can store the history of 8 input signals. The specific process for updating the history monitoring switch data involves using the ROLC instruction to left-shift the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area by 1 bit, and setting the value of the carry flag (CF), where the input signal value acquired in step 01 TKS 1050 is stored, to bit 0. This implementation simplifies the program code and suppresses an increase in program size. Furthermore, the ROLC instruction is a 2-byte word length instruction, resulting in a shorter word length than calculating the history monitoring switch data before the update, thus speeding up processing.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the processes from step 01TKS1030 to step 01TKS1070 for all input signals that are subject to the creation of history monitoring switch data (step 01TKS1080). After the creation of the history monitoring switch data is complete (the result of step 01TKS1080 is "YES"), this process terminates.

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes possible to create history monitoring switch data using a common procedure regardless of the signal type, thereby simplifying game control and reducing program size.

[22-3-3. Flowchart for Creating History Monitoring Switch Data (Summary)]
The procedure for creating history monitoring switch data has been explained above. Here, we will focus on explaining the data flow from the input signal to its reflection in the history monitoring switch data. Figure 363 is a diagram illustrating the process of creating history monitoring switch data in this embodiment, showing the process from the touch sensor signal to its reflection in the history monitoring switch data.

The top row of Figure 363 shows a timing chart illustrating the changes in the touch sensor signal input from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509, with time progressing from left to right. In this embodiment, the touch sensor signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 is periodically acquired at predetermined intervals. The predetermined interval (sampling period) is the timer interrupt period (4 milliseconds). In Figure 363, the touch sensor signals are acquired in the order of "1" → "1" → "1" → "0" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1", showing the state where a new touch sensor signal "1" has been acquired. The acquired touch sensor signal is converted as needed and stored in BIT2 of the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" (address "000Ch"), as shown in Figure 360.

When the switch-related control process (history monitoring switch data creation process) is executed and the history monitoring switch data for the touch sensor signal is updated, the input level data stored in the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" is first acquired as the history management switch input level data. In the state before the update, the history management switch input level data is "0000110," and since the corresponding switch bit number for the touch sensor signal is "2" (Figure 359), the input signal "1" stored in BIT2 is acquired and temporarily stored in the carry flag.

The program code to retrieve the value of the bit specified for the corresponding switch bit number from the referenced input level area can be implemented with a single instruction, "LD CF, (DE).A", as shown in Figure 362. The DE register stores the address of the referenced input level area, and the A register stores the value corresponding to the relevant switch bit number. The above instruction stores the value obtained from the value stored in the input level area indicated by the DE register, based on the value specified in the A register, in the carry flag (CF).

Furthermore, the history monitoring switch data is acquired based on the lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the history monitoring switch data storage location (HS_TCH_HIST) of the touch sensor signal history area creation data. The history monitoring switch data stores input signals in reverse chronological order from BIT0 to BIT7, and from the timing chart mentioned above, the history monitoring switch data storage location is "11101111".

Updating the history monitoring switch data involves shifting the values from BIT0 to BIT6 to BIT1 to BIT7. Furthermore, the input signal stored in the carry flag is stored in BIT0. The program code for updating the history monitoring switch data can be implemented with a single "ROLC (DE)" instruction, as shown in Figure 362. The ROLC instruction shifts (rotates) the specified value one bit to the left and stores the value of the carry flag (CF) in BIT0. The SLA instruction (shift instruction) can also be used instead of the ROLC instruction. Executing the "ROLC (DE)" instruction updates the history monitoring switch data, shifting the value of the history management RWM address indicated in the DE register one bit to the left.

[22-4. Switch History Command Transmission Determination Process]
Once the process to prohibit the awarding of balls to the unactivated large prize slot is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01 TKS0140). As described above, the switch history command transmission determination process determines whether or not to send a command based on the switch history command transmission determination data and the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process, and sends the defined command according to the determination result.

The decision of whether or not to send a command is made by detecting changes in the input signal from the history monitoring switch data. If a change is detected, it is determined that the corresponding command should be sent. For example, since the history monitoring switch data in this embodiment stores the history of input signals for a predetermined number of times (eight times in this embodiment), it is possible to determine that the input signal has changed when the value of the previously input signal differs from the value of the latest input signal.

The following describes the configuration for determining command transmission based on history monitoring switch data. First, the data structure for switch history command transmission determination data, which is used for general-purpose processing of multiple types of input signals, is described. Then, specific examples of switch history command transmission determination data are described. Next, the detailed procedure is explained with reference to the flowchart and program code of the switch history command transmission determination process.

[22-4-1. Structure of Switch History Command Transmission Determination Data]
Figure 364 illustrates the data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data in this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, in order to determine whether or not to transmit a command based on an input signal using a common process for multiple types of input signals, determination data (command transmission determination target data) is defined in a common data structure for each command to be transmitted.

Each individual data item of the command transmission determination target data consists of the detection target history monitoring switch data address (lower address), the transmission command value, the detection mask value, and the detection determination value. In addition, the number of data items per set (one block) of switch history command transmission determination data (number of data items per switch input data block) is defined, and in this embodiment, the number of data items per switch input data block is 5. Furthermore, the total number of defined switch history command transmission determination data items, m, is defined. Note that the order in which each data item is set is not limited to this. For example, the number of data items m may be defined at the beginning of the switch history command transmission determination data, and the order of the individual data items of the command transmission determination target data does not have to be the same as the example described above.

The detected history monitoring switch data address is the address of the area where the history monitoring switch data created by the history monitoring switch data creation process is stored. Since the upper address of the area storing the monitoring switch data is predetermined, only the lower address needs to be specified. This allows the required area (capacity) to be reduced to 1 byte. The transmitted command value is the value corresponding to the command to be transmitted and consists of 2 bytes. This is because the packet transmitting the command is 2 bytes; if the packet transmitting the command is 3 bytes, it will be updated with 3 bytes, setting different sizes according to the command size of one packet.

The detection mask value is used to extract the data necessary to determine whether or not to send a command from the history monitoring switch data. It consists of bits "1" for those necessary to determine whether or not to send a command, and "0" for those bits that are not used. The detection judgment value is used to determine whether or not to send a command created from the sent command value by comparing it with the masked history monitoring switch data.

Next, we will explain a specific example of switch history command transmission determination data. Figure 365 shows an example of switch history command transmission determination data in this embodiment. The targets for determining whether or not to transmit a command based on the history monitoring switch data include the ON/OFF switching of the contact detection sensor (touch sensor, handle sensor) 509, which detects whether or not a palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504; the ON/OFF switching of the firing stop switch; and the switching of the door open/closed. First, we will explain the switch history command transmission determination data for determining the ON/OFF switching of the contact detection sensor 509 on the handle lever 504.

The switch history command transmission determination data related to the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle lever 504 includes data indicating that the contact detection sensor 509 has detected a switch from OFF to ON, and data indicating that it has detected a switch from ON to OFF.

The data address for the detected history monitoring switch is set to the same address (".LOW.HS_TCH_HIST") because it refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is an ON-to-OFF switch or an OFF-to-ON switch.

The transmission command values are defined to correspond to the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509.

The signal change of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is detected by comparing the most recent four historical data points (signal values). Therefore, the detection mask value is set to "00001111B" to identify the most recent four bits of data. Note that the target bits are the same regardless of whether the detection is an ON-to-OFF switch or an OFF-to-ON switch, so the same value is set.

The change from OFF to ON of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is determined when the signal value switches from OFF to ON and then remains ON for three consecutive times. In this case, the detection determination value is "00000111B". Since the first four bits ("0000B") are masked by the detection mask value, the change from OFF to ON of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is determined when the latter four bits ("0111B") match. Similarly, for a change from ON to OFF, the change is determined when the signal value switches from ON to OFF and then remains OFF for three consecutive times, so the detection determination value is "00001000B". Note that the detection determination value is not limited to the example shown in Figure 365; for example, a change from ON to OFF could be determined when two consecutive ON states are followed by two consecutive OFF states.

Furthermore, a switch input data block size (_SW_HIST_1BLOCK) is defined between the switch history command transmission determination data that detects the switching of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 from OFF to ON and the switch history command transmission determination data that detects the switching from ON to OFF. The switch input data block size is calculated by setting the difference between the starting address and the ending address of the switch history command transmission determination data that detects the switching of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 from OFF to ON. In this embodiment, the switch input data block size is 5 bytes.

Next, we will explain the switch history command transmission determination data used to determine the ON/OFF switching of the firing stop switch on the handle lever 504. Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data for the firing stop switch includes data detecting a switch from OFF to ON and data detecting a switch from ON to OFF.

The detection target history monitoring switch data address is set to the same address (".LOW.HS_STP_HIST") because it refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is an ON-to-OFF switch or an OFF-to-ON switch. The transmission command value is defined for the rising edge (ON-to-OFF switch) and falling edge (ON-to-OFF switch) of the firing stop switch, respectively.

The signal change of the firing stop switch is detected by comparing the most recent four historical data points (signal values), similar to the contact detection sensor 509. The detection mask value and detection judgment value are the same as those of the contact detection sensor 509, and the determination of signal changes is also the same.

Finally, we will explain the switch history command transmission determination data used to determine the ON/OFF switching of the door open information signal. Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data related to the door open information signal includes data that detects a switch from OFF to ON and data that detects a switch from ON to OFF.

The detection target history monitoring switch data address is set to the same address (".LOW.DOOR_SW_HIST") because it refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is an ON-to-OFF switch or an OFF-to-ON switch. The transmission command value is defined for the rising edge (ON-to-OFF switch) and falling edge (ON-to-OFF switch) of the door open information signal, respectively.

Unlike the contact detection sensor 509 and the firing stop switch, the door open information signal change is detected by comparing the two most recent historical data points (signal values). That is, a signal change is determined when a signal different from the previous one is received. The detection mask value is set to "00000011B" to identify the two most recent bits of data. Furthermore, the detection judgment value for determining a switch from ON to OFF is "00000001B," and the detection judgment value for determining a switch from OFF to ON is "00000010B."

The historical data used for the determination is not limited to what is shown in the diagram. For example, the change in the signal of the contact detection sensor 509 may be determined using two historical data points, or four or more data points (e.g., eight) may be used to account for the effects of noise. If eight data points are used, all bits will be fixed and masked, allowing for precise detection of specific signal change patterns. Furthermore, while the lower four bits are fixed and masked when comparing the most recent four historical data points, the upper four bits may be fixed and masked instead. This configuration allows for a predetermined time interval to be established before starting the processing executed after the detection of a signal change.

Furthermore, while switch history command transmission determination data is defined for both ON-to-OFF and OFF-to-ON signal changes for the contact detection sensor 509, the firing stop switch, and the door open information signal, it is also possible to define switch history command transmission determination data for detecting only one of these changes. For example, when providing notification for a certain period, the notification ends after that period regardless of signal changes, so it is sufficient to send a notification command only when the signal changes from OFF to ON.

Furthermore, the number of command transmission targets is defined at the end of the switch history command transmission determination data. This number is calculated by dividing the difference between the starting address and the last data address in the area where the switch history command transmission determination data is defined by the number of data points in one block of switch input data. By calculating the number of data points in one block of switch input data and the number of command transmission targets from the defined data addresses, program code modifications can be minimized even if the data structure or the number of data points changes.

Furthermore, if the data structure and number of data points do not change, a numerical value may be directly defined at the beginning of the switch history command transmission judgment data. Additionally, without defining the number of command transmission judgment targets, the system may be controlled to terminate the switch history command transmission judgment process when the last data point of the switch history command transmission judgment data is detected.

Furthermore, while the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment targets signals that are processed as historical information (history monitoring switch data), such as touch sensor signals, it can also be applied to signals that are determined based on edge information, such as prize winning signals. It can also be applied to prize winning determination at the start prize winning slot (for example, the middle start slot switch). The following examples of application will be explained with reference to the figures.

Figure 366 shows an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment to a switch that processes input signals as edge information. The area for storing the input signal of the central start-up switch is BIT0 of the input edge data 1 "INPUT_EDG1" (Figure 360). Therefore, the address of the area for storing the input signal is set to the lower address of "INPUT_EDG1" ("LOW.INPUT_EDG_1"). At this time, by setting the detection mask value to "00000001B", the input signal of the central start-up switch corresponding to BIT0 becomes the target of determination. By setting the detection determination value to "00000001B", the command defined as the transmission command value ("_SID_ON_CM") is transmitted when BIT0 of the input edge data 1 is "1".

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes possible to send commands using the same procedure not only to input signals managed as historical information (history monitoring switch data) but also to input signals processed as edge information. This standardizes processing, improves development efficiency, and reduces program size.

[22-4-2. Procedure for determining whether to send a switch history command]
The switch history command transmission determination process detects signal changes from the history monitoring switch data based on the information defined in the switch history command transmission determination data. The procedure for detecting signal changes will be explained below, referring to the flowchart and program code of the history command transmission determination process.

Figure 367 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the history command transmission determination process in this embodiment. Figure 368 is an example of the program code for the history command transmission determination process in this embodiment, corresponding to the flowchart in Figure 367.

When the switch history command transmission determination process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the starting address of the switch history command transmission determination data (Figure 365) (Step 01 TKS2010). The starting address of the switch history command transmission determination data is set in the DE register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of command transmission targets ("_SW_HIST_ALLBLOCK") as the number of repetitions for the switch history command transmission determination process (Step 01 TKS2020). The number of command transmission targets is set in the B register. Once the switch history command transmission determination data address and the number of command transmission targets are set, the system acquires the history monitoring switch data to be detected and determines whether or not to send a command.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the history monitoring switch data to be detected (Step 01 TKS2030). Specifically, it obtains the address of the history monitoring switch data to be detected from the switch history command transmission determination data, identifies the history monitoring switch data to be detected, and stores it in the W register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the transmission command value from the switch history command transmission determination data (step 01 TKS2040). The transmission command value is 2 bytes and is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the switch signal value has changed based on the history monitoring switch data acquired in step 01 TKS 2030 (step 01 TKS 2050). Specifically, first, the acquired history monitoring switch data is masked with a detection mask value (step 01 TKS 2050-1). Furthermore, by comparing it with a detection judgment value (step 01 TKS 2050-2), a change in the signal value is determined (step 01 TKS 2050-3). If the masked history monitoring switch data matches the detection judgment value, it is determined that the signal value has changed.

If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the signal value has changed (the result of step 01TKS2050 is "YES"), it stores the transmit command value, which was acquired in step 01TKS2040 and stored in the HL register, in the transmit buffer by executing the command storage process (step 01TKS2060).

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether all the judgments for the target commands have been completed (step 01TKS2070) if it determines that the signal value has not changed (result of step 01TKS2050 is "NO"), or after the command storage process (step 01TKS2060) has been executed. If all judgments for the commands have been completed, the history command transmission judgment process is terminated.

By configuring the system as described above, this embodiment of the gaming machine makes it possible to detect not only ON/OFF changes in signal values by changing mask values and detection judgment values, but also specific change patterns simply by adding or modifying switch history command transmission judgment data. For example, if patterns of signal changes that are likely to occur when fraudulent activity is occurring or when malfunctions or abnormalities occur are known, it is only necessary to set values corresponding to these signal change patterns. This allows for easy addition or deletion of data simply by registering it, without increasing program capacity, thereby increasing the likelihood of detecting problems before they occur.

[22-5. Examples of application to information stored in internal function registers (built-in registers)]
In the configuration described above, history monitoring switch data was created based on signals input to the main control MPU 1311 from various switches or sensors, and processing such as sending commands was performed based on this history monitoring switch data. In contrast, the history monitoring switch data creation process and the switch history command transmission determination process in this embodiment can also specify the internal function registers of the main control MPU 1311. The means for applying the history monitoring switch data creation process and the switch history command transmission determination process based on the information stored in the internal function registers will be described below.

[22-5-1. Creating historical monitoring switch data]
Figure 369 shows an example of an internal function register that stores random number errors in the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. In addition to general-purpose registers, the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment can be provided with internal function registers that can store calculation results, random values, and error details during random number generation. Figure 369 shows an example of an internal function register that stores random number errors, and an address is defined for each register. For example, a random number clock error, which indicates an error when an abnormality occurs in the period (clock) for generating random numbers, is stored in BIT2 of register "_RDER3", and "1" is set when an error occurs. Also, the address "111Ah" is set for register "_RDER3".

Here, we will explain the procedure for creating history monitoring switch data for random clock errors. Figure 370 shows an example of history area creation data for random clock errors stored in the internal function register of the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. Referring to Figure 370, the address of the internal function register "_RDER3" is set as the reference address instead of the lower address of the history management switch input level data. Furthermore, "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" is set for the corresponding switch bit number, and since the random clock error is stored in BIT2 of register "_RDER3", the value of "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" becomes "2". Finally, the lower address of the area where the created history monitoring switch data will be stored is set. In this way, by defining the history area creation data, it becomes possible to create history monitoring switch data by processing it in the same way as signals input from various switches and sensors. In addition, by executing the switch history command transmission determination process based on the created history monitoring switch data, it becomes possible to send the corresponding command. Furthermore, if a 2-byte value including the upper address is specified during the work area setting process (_WORK_AD_INC_HL; step 01TKS1030), the upper address can be set directly to the DE register without interpolation. Also, even if the upper address of the internal function register differs from the upper address of the RAM, the corresponding upper address may be interpolated during the work area setting process. By configuring it as described above, it becomes possible to create history monitoring switch data using a common process, regardless of whether the signals are input from various switches and sensors or information stored in the internal function register. This allows for the consolidation of programs for creating history monitoring switch data, thereby reducing program size.

[22-5-2. Sending commands without using history monitoring switch data]
Here, we will describe the switch history command transmission determination data used to perform the switch history command transmission determination process without using the history monitoring switch data. The procedure for performing the switch history command transmission determination process without using the history monitoring switch data is the same as the procedure for sending commands based on edge information such as the winning signal mentioned above.

Figure 371 shows an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment to an internal function register (random clock error). The information used in this example is the random clock error, similar to the example of creating history monitoring switch data.

Referring to Figure 371, the internal function register "_RDER3" for storing the random clock error state is set to correspond to the area where the history monitoring switch data is stored. Furthermore, by setting the detection mask value to "00000100B", the random clock error state corresponding to BIT2 becomes the target for determination. By setting the detection determination value to "00000100B", the command defined as the transmission command value ("_RND_CLK_ERR_CM") is sent when the random clock error state is "1 (error present)". This configuration makes it possible to send commands using the same procedure as when history information (history monitoring switch data) is created, without actually creating the history information itself.

As described above, this embodiment can also be applied to information stored in internal function registers. Whether the information is input from various switches and sensors or stored in internal function registers, it is possible to send commands based on the detection mask value and detection judgment value using a common process. This allows for the consolidation of the command sending program, similar to the case where history monitoring switch data is created, thereby reducing program size.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to select history monitoring switch data according to the type of information to be judged and the type of command. For example, if the game is to be stopped immediately when a random number clock is generated, the system can be configured to send a command by directly referencing the register value without referring to the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock anomaly (data configuration in Figure 371). Subsequently, if the random number clock error continues for a predetermined period, history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock anomaly can be created, and the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock anomaly can be used as the reference address for the switch history command transmission judgment data. The command for when the random number anomaly continues, the detection mask value (00011111b) as the predetermined period, and the detection judgment value (00011111b) can be set.

This two-stage process is a safeguard against situations where the built-in register's random number clock anomaly bit information is incorrectly identified as an anomaly due to external noise or other factors, even when there is no actual anomaly. The system checks whether the anomaly persisted for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, when issuing a command upon the resolution of a random number clock anomaly, the switch history command transmission determination data for determining when the random number clock anomaly is resolved may be set using the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock anomaly as the reference address. The command for the resolution of the random number anomaly, a detection mask value for a predetermined period (e.g., "0001111b"), and a detection determination value (e.g., "00001000b") may also be set.

Furthermore, the ability to switch whether or not to create history monitoring switch data, depending on the application, applies to various switches and sensors as well. By defining switch history command transmission determination data, it becomes possible to make the switch history command transmission determination process a common process, whether the command transmission is determined based on history monitoring switch data or without creating history monitoring switch data. This allows for program sharing and reduces program size.

[22-6. Switch Pass Command Transmission / Safe Switch Anomaly Detection Processing]
Once the switch history command transmission determination process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process (step 01 TKS0150). As mentioned above, in the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality determination process, if a prize is detected, a command is transmitted and the number of safe balls (safe determination count value) is counted based on the switch pass command data.

The following describes the switch pass command data and the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process. First, the data structure of the switch pass command data, which enables general processing for multiple types of prize entry points (start entry points) (signals from switches/sensors detecting prize entry), is explained. Then, specific switch pass command data is described. Next, the detailed procedure for the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process is explained, referring to the flowchart and program code.

[22-6-1. Structure of command data passed through a switch]
Figure 372 illustrates the data structure of the switch passage command data in this embodiment. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, in order to process winnings at multiple types of winning slots in a general manner, the switch passage command data is defined with a common data structure for each winning slot (switch).

The switch passage command data is first defined by the number of data settings (the number of winning slots (switches) for which switch passage command data is defined). Subsequently, individual data for each winning slot is defined for each input edge. Each individual winning slot's data consists of edge data reference information, command value, and safe count. The number of data settings is the number of blocks, assuming that each individual winning slot's data is considered one block.

The edge data reference information stores information indicating the reference location of the input edge data of the switch/sensor that detects the win. This information includes the identifier of the input edge data storage area and the bit information within the input edge data of the referenced switch.

The command value is the value of the command to be sent when a win is detected (when the switch is determined to be ON). The command value consists of two bytes and is stored in the transmission buffer during the command storage process.

The safe count is defined by a counter corresponding to the prize entry point (switch) that detected the entry, and a value that increments or decrements that counter. For example, when a game ball enters a general prize entry point, the safe judgment count value (safe ball count) is added. On the other hand, when a safe switch (a switch installed at the location where game balls are collected after entering a prize entry point (safe entry point)) detects the passage of a game ball, the safe judgment count value is subtracted. Since game balls that pass through prize entry points also pass through safe entry points, the safe judgment count value should be 0 under normal circumstances. Therefore, considering measurement errors, if the safe judgment count value is greater than the upper threshold (e.g., 100) or less than the lower threshold (e.g., -100), it can be determined that there is a high probability that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, if a game ball passes through a prize entry point or gate that does not award prize balls, a safe count value is set that does not increment or decrement the safe judgment count value. Also, the upper and lower threshold values are not limited to the examples described above, and appropriate values are set according to the structure of the game machine and the content of the game.

Next, we will explain a specific example of switch passage command data. Figure 373 shows an example of switch passage command data in this embodiment. The switch passage command data first defines the number of data settings, followed by the definition of individual data for each prize slot. As mentioned above, the number of data settings is the total number of individual data for each defined prize slot. In this embodiment, however, it is calculated based on the address of the label indicating the end of the switch passage command data and the data capacity of the individual data for each prize slot.

Regarding the individual data for each winning slot, using the central starting slot (starting slot 1) as an example, the edge data reference information is stored in the bit ("_TSHID1_BIT") corresponding to starting slot 1 in the input edge data 1 ("_SWCM_P1"). The upper four bits correspond to the value indicating the input edge data, and the lower four bits correspond to the bit data corresponding to the starting slot. In this embodiment, the value indicating the input edge data (for example, corresponding to "_SWCM_P1") is extracted by performing a predetermined operation on the edge data reference information, and the input edge data (for example, input edge data 1 ("INPUT_EDG1")) is identified from the switch address data "SW_ADD_W" (Figure 372B) based on the extracted value.

This section explains the structure of the switch address data "SW_ADD_W" and the procedure for identifying the input edge data. Figure 374 shows an example of the switch address data in this embodiment. The switch address data defines information for identifying the input edge data (e.g., "_SWCM_P1") and the corresponding input edge data (e.g., input edge data 1 ("INPUT_EDG1")). Referring to Figure 374, "_SWCM_P1" is set to "00h" and "_SWCM_P2" is set to "08h". "_SWCM_P3" and "_SWCM_P4" are reserves to accommodate when the number of target switches increases.

Next, we will explain the procedure for identifying input edge data, using a safe switch as an example. The step numbers in the following explanation correspond to the step numbers in the program code (the process for acquiring the data of the target bit) in Figure 377.

The specific procedure is as follows: First, obtain the edge data reference information (Step 01TKS3040-3). At this time, the edge data reference information is "_SWCM_P2(08h) + _EX_SAFE_SW_BIT(06h)", which is "0Eh(14)". Next, perform a predetermined operation on the edge data reference information. Specifically, divide by 8 (Step 01TKS3040-4), and double the division result (excluding the remainder) (Step 01TKS3040-5). Furthermore, add the obtained value to the starting address "9138h" of the switch address data stored in the HL register (Step 01TKS3040-6). In the case of a safe switch, the calculation result is "2", so the value of the HL address becomes "913Ah". By referring to address "913Ah", input edge data 2 ("INPUT_EDG2") can be identified.

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes possible to implement edge data reference information in one byte, thereby reducing data capacity. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 375, the edge data reference information may be defined by separating the input edge data area from the corresponding bits. This configuration makes it easier for developers to understand the edge data references from the program code, improving program readability. However, it increases the capacity per individual data item by one byte, resulting in an overall increase in capacity proportional to the number of data settings.

The command value defines the value corresponding to the command sent when the edge data reference information is set to ON. The command value consists of two bytes. The command value for the middle start gate switch is set to the start gate 1 command ("_SID1_ON_CM"), and the start gate 1 command is sent when the edge data reference information is set to ON. On the other hand, the command value for the right large prize gate count switch is set to "No command" ("_NO_CM"), and no command is sent even when a game ball enters the right large prize gate.

In this embodiment, by allowing the setting of "No Command" ("_NO_CM") as the command value, a common data structure can be maintained even when no command is sent upon winning. This configuration allows for the standardization of processing such as data retrieval and calculations regardless of whether a command is sent during the winning determination process, thereby simplifying control.

Furthermore, by defining "0" for the command value "_NO_CM" which indicates not to send a command, the Z flag is set to "1" when a command value is set in the HL register ("LD HL, (DE+)"; step 01TKS3050). This makes it possible to perform conditional judgment and processing execution—specifically, the command transmission judgment ("NZ" (true if the Z flag is not "1", i.e., if the command value is not "_NO_CM"); step 01TKS3070) and command transmission (execution of command storage process "COM_SET"; step 01TKS3080)—with a single instruction ("INV NZ, COMSET"). This configuration achieves generalization of the processing related to command transmission upon winning a prize.

The safe count for the central start-up slot switch is set to a value that indicates it should be added to the safe judgment count value when a prize ball is dispensed upon entry (addition count upon passing the prize slot; "_INC_SAFE_CNT"; "1 (01h)"). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the safe count for the safe switch is set to a value that indicates it should be subtracted from the safe judgment count value (subtraction count upon passing the prize slot; "_DEC_SAFE_CNT"; "-1 (FFh)"). Additionally, if the game ball is ejected from the out-out slot without entering a prize, the safe count for the out-out switch is set to a non-addition count upon passing the switch ("_NON_SAFE_CNT"; "0 (00h)"), and it is neither added to nor subtracted from the safe judgment count value. Moreover, updating the safe judgment count value can be implemented with a common instruction, simplifying the program structure, as it only requires adding the defined safe count value regardless of whether an addition, subtraction, or no update is performed.

[22-6-2. Procedure for sending a switch-pass command]
The switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process is configured to call the safe switch abnormality detection process when the target switch (prize entry point) is identified during the execution of the switch pass command transmission process. First, the switch pass command transmission process will be explained, followed by the safe switch abnormality detection process.

Figure 376 is a flowchart showing the procedure for sending a switch pass command in this embodiment. Figure 377 is an example of program code for sending a switch pass command in this embodiment, corresponding to the flowchart in Figure 376.

In the switch pass command transmission process, the target switch (winning slot) to which the command will be sent is identified based on the edge data reference information of the switch pass command data. The specified command is sent when the switch's signal value is ON.

When the switch pass command transmission/safe switch abnormality detection process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first obtains the current safe judgment count value (step 01TKS3010). The safe judgment count value is stored in the C register. Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the starting address of the switch pass command data (Figure 373) (step 01TKS3020). The starting address of the switch pass command data is set in the DE register. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the data setting count (step 01TKS3030). The data setting count is stored in the B register. After the processing in step 01TKS3030 is completed, the command transmission detection and safe switch abnormality detection processes for each switch are executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 identifies the switch to be processed and obtains the signal value (target bit) of the identified switch (step 01 TKS 3040). Specifically, it first sets the switch address data table. The switch address data table stores data for identifying the input edge data containing the target bit, and the address of the input edge data can be obtained. Furthermore, it obtains edge data reference information from the switch pass command data. Finally, it identifies the value of the target bit based on the edge data reference information and the switch address data table, and stores the target bit information ("0" or "1") in a predetermined area (carry flag; CF).

Specifically, the edge data reference information obtained from the switch-pass command data is set in the A register (steps 01TKS3040-1 to 3), and the calculations shown in the program code are performed (steps 01TKS3040-4 to 6). This extracts a value indicating the input edge data (e.g., "_SWCM_P1"). The address of the input edge data corresponding to the edge data reference information (e.g., "INPUT_EDG1") is defined at the address obtained by adding the extracted value from the starting address of the switch address data table "SW_ADD_W". The input edge data (or its address) is identified, and the address of the identified input edge data is stored in the HL register (step 01TKS3040-7).

The "LD CF, (HL).A" instruction retrieves the content specified by the lower three bits of the A register from the value stored in the HL register. The HL register stores the address of the identified input edge data, and the A register stores the edge data reference information, as mentioned above. The lower four bits of the edge data reference information represent the bit data corresponding to the start gate being checked. Since the value of the target bit is in the range of 0 to 7, specifying the value of the lower three bits allows the "LD CF, (HL).A" instruction to retrieve the specified bit data from the identified input edge data and set it in the CF (carry flag). This configuration allows the information identifying the input edge data and the information identifying the bit corresponding to the start gate being checked to be implemented in a single byte. Furthermore, once the input edge data and corresponding bit are identified, the entire process from retrieving the identified bit information from the input edge data to setting the retrieved information in the CF (carry flag) is executed in a single instruction, reducing program size.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the command value from the switch-passed command data (step 01 TKS 3050). Furthermore, it determines whether the value of the target bit is ON or not (step 01 TKS 3060).

The main control MPU 1311, if the value of the target bit is ON (result of step 01TKS3060 is "YES"), executes the command storage process (step 01TKS3080) unless the command value is "no command" ("_NO_CM"). Executing the command storage process stores the command in the transmit buffer. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the safe switch abnormality detection process (step 01TKS3090). The safe switch abnormality detection process will be described later in Figures 378 and 379.

In this embodiment, the determination of the target command value and the execution of the command storage process are realized in a single instruction. In the processing of step 01 TKS3050, when the command value is acquired into the HL register by the "LD HL, (DE+)" instruction, if there is no command to send, the command value "_NON_CM" is set. The command value "_NON_CM" is "0", and if there is a command to send, a value other than "0" is set. Therefore, if a command is sent, the Z flag is set to "1", and if no command is sent, it is set to "0". At this time, the "INV NZ, COM_SET" instruction determines whether or not to send a command based on the Z flag, and if a command is to be sent, it executes the command storage process ("COM_SET"), all in a single instruction. This eliminates the need to execute the determination of whether or not to send a command and the corresponding processing (command storage process) in separate instructions, thus reducing program size.

After the safe switch abnormality detection process is executed, or if the value of the target bit is not ON (i.e., OFF) (the result of step 01TKS3060 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether processing has been completed for all switches (step 01TKS3100). If processing has not been completed for all switches (the result of step 01TKS3100 is "NO"), processing is executed for the next switch starting from step 01TKS3040. If processing has been completed for all switches (the result of step 01TKS3100 is "YES"), this process is terminated.

[22-5-3. Procedure for detecting abnormalities in the safe switch]
Figure 378 is a flowchart showing the procedure for determining a safety switch malfunction in this embodiment. Figure 379 is an example of program code for determining a safety switch malfunction in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 378.

In the safe switch anomaly detection process, the safe judgment count value is updated for the switch (prize entry point) identified based on the edge data reference information of the switch passage command data during the switch passage command transmission process. This process then determines whether an anomaly has occurred, such as whether an unauthorized prize entry has occurred.

When the safe switch abnormality detection process is initiated, the main control MPU 1311 first adds the safe count obtained from the switch pass command data to the safe detection count value stored in the C register (step 01 TKS 4010). Next, the updated safe detection count value is stored in the full safe detection count area (step 01 TKS 4020).

In this embodiment, three types of safe counts are defined: as described above, there are cases where 1 is added ("_INC_SAFE_CNT"; "1 (01h)"), cases where 1 is subtracted ("_DEC_SAFE_CNT"; "-1 (FFh)"), and cases where neither addition nor subtraction occurs ("_NON_SAFE_CNT"; "0 (00h)"). Adding 1 occurs when a prize ball is generated due to a winning entry. Subtracting 1 occurs when a game ball is detected by the safe switch, as described above. Neither addition nor subtraction occurs when a switch that does not generate prize balls (e.g., a regular gate) detects entry (passage). Furthermore, updating the safe judgment count value only requires adding the defined safe count number, regardless of whether it is added, subtracted, or not updated. Therefore, it can be implemented with a common instruction regardless of the case, improving the efficiency of program development and reducing the amount of data required.

Once the safe judgment count value is updated and stored in the predetermined area, it is determined whether the safe judgment count value is within the normal range (i.e., whether it is an abnormal value) (Step 01 TKS 4030). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first compares the safe judgment count value stored in the C register with the lower threshold ("_ILG_SAFE_JDG1") (Step 01 TKS 4030-1). If the safe judgment count value is greater than or equal to the lower threshold (and less than or equal to 0) (the result of Step 01 TKS 4030 is "NO"), the safe judgment count value is normal, and this process is terminated.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 compares the safe judgment count value with the upper limit value if the safe judgment count value is below the lower threshold, or above the lower threshold and greater than 0 (step 01 TKS 4030-2). If the safe judgment count value is below the upper limit value (and greater than or equal to 0) (the result of step 01 TKS 4040 is "YES"), the safe judgment count value is normal, and this process is terminated.

The main control MPU 1311, if the safe judgment count value is abnormal, i.e., the safe judgment count value is below the lower threshold or greater than the upper threshold (result of step 01 TKS 4030 is "NO"), sets the game stop factor number to the safe switch abnormality game stop setting data (step 01 TKS 4040). Furthermore, it clears the safe judgment count value (step 01 TKS 4050). Clearing the safe judgment count value involves storing "00H" in all safe judgment count areas (step 01 TKS 4050-1) and clearing the C register (step 01 TKS 4050-2).

By configuring the system as described above, this embodiment of the gaming machine can handle different control methods for each winning slot using a common process, thereby simplifying the program code. Furthermore, by adding or modifying the switch pass command data, it becomes easy to adapt to changes in the gaming machine's specifications, thus improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Note that while the program code shown in the diagram stores values in various registers during execution, these are merely examples. The registers used to store values are not limited to those shown in the diagram; any register may be used.

In this specification, the following are examples of inventions representing representative viewpoints, including the inventions described in the claims:

(1) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
A calculation means for executing a program that controls the progress of the game,
An input signal storage means capable of storing the input signal input to the calculation means,
A history information creation means that periodically acquires input signals from the input signal storage means and creates input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on history information creation data defined for each type of input signal,
A history information storage means capable of storing the aforementioned input signal history information,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned history information creation data is
First information indicating the region in which the aforementioned input signal is stored,
Second information indicating a region for storing input signal history information corresponding to the aforementioned input signal,
Includes,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the history information creation means acquires an input signal from the input signal storage means based on the first information, regardless of the type of input signal, creates the input signal history information from the acquired input signal, and stores the created input signal history information in the history information storage means based on the second information.

(2) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
A calculation means for executing a program that controls the progress of the game,
An input signal storage means capable of storing the input signal input to the calculation means,
A history information creation means that periodically acquires input signals from the input signal storage means and creates input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on history information creation data defined for each type of input signal,
A history information storage means capable of storing the aforementioned input signal history information,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned history information creation data is
First information that can identify the input signal storage means indicating the region in which the input signal is stored,
A second piece of information that can identify the history information storage means, which indicates a region for storing the input signal history information corresponding to the input signal,
Third information that identifies the position of the input signal obtained from the input signal storage means identified by the first information,
Includes,
The aforementioned history information creation means is
The process is executed at a predetermined interval, identifies an input signal to be obtained from the input signal storage means identified based on the first information and the third information, obtains the identified input signal as input information, processes the information stored in the history information storage means identified based on the second information, and stores the obtained input information in a predetermined location in the history information storage means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can create the input signal history information using a common process regardless of the type of input signal.

In the gaming machines described in (1) and (2), it is possible to create historical information by arranging the signals input to the calculation means (main control MPU 1311) from various switches and sensors installed in the gaming machine in chronological order. In this case, even if there are differences in the types of input signals, a series of processes such as acquiring input signals, creating and storing historical information can be realized with common processing, thus simplifying the program structure and reducing program capacity.

(3) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
A calculation means for executing a program that controls the progress of the game,
An input information storage means capable of storing multiple types of input information input to the calculation means,
An input information determination means that determines the pattern of the input information based on input information determination data corresponding to the input information,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned input information determination data is
A first piece of information that can identify the input information storage means indicating the region where the input information is stored,
Second information that specifies the range for determining the pattern of the input information,
A third piece of information for determining the pattern of the aforementioned input information,
Includes,
The aforementioned input information determination means is
Based on the first information, the input information is obtained from the input information storage means identified, input information corresponding to the range identified based on the second information is extracted from the obtained input information, and the pattern of the extracted input information is determined based on the third information.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can determine the pattern of the input information using a common process regardless of the type of input information.

In the gaming machine described in (3), this method is applicable not only to input information, but also to information stored in a predetermined storage means in chronological order, such as periodically extracted values or the results of periodically performed predetermined calculations. It can also be applied when comparing patterns of combinations of multiple related pieces of information. According to the gaming machine described in (3), it becomes possible to detect abnormalities early by determining whether changes in continuously accumulated information conform to a specific pattern. Furthermore, since patterns of information change can be identified using common processing, game control can be simplified, and program capacity can be reduced.

(4) The system further comprises command transmission means capable of transmitting commands for controlling the game,
The aforementioned input information determination data further includes a fourth piece of information corresponding to a command based on the pattern of the input information,
The command transmission means transmits a command corresponding to the fourth information based on the result of determining the pattern of the input information in the (3) gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in (4), in addition to the configuration of the gaming machine described in (3), it is possible to send commands according to the pattern of input information. For example, by detecting a pattern indicating an abnormality, it becomes possible to send a command for abnormality notification.

(5) A gaming machine equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The aforementioned game control means is
A calculation means for executing a program that controls the progress of the game,
A processing information storage means capable of storing multiple types of processing information that the calculation means can process,
A processing information determination means for determining changes in the processing information based on processing information determination data corresponding to the processing information,
Equipped with,
The processing information storage means includes an internal storage means provided in the arithmetic means and an external storage means that can read and write processing information by the arithmetic means.
The aforementioned processing information determination data is
A first piece of information that can identify the processing information storage means indicating the region where the processing information is stored,
Second information that specifies the range for determining the change in the processing information,
A third piece of information for determining the change in the aforementioned processing information,
Includes,
The processing information determination means is
Based on the first information, the processing information is obtained from the processing information storage means identified, processing information corresponding to the range identified based on the second information is extracted from the obtained processing information, and changes in the extracted processing information are determined based on the third information.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine changes in the extracted processing information using a common process, regardless of whether the processing information is stored in the internal storage means or the external storage means.

In the gaming machine of (5), the same effects as in the gaming machine of (3) can be obtained, and even if the processing information storage means is different, patterns in which the processing information changes can be identified using a common process. This allows for the determination of information changes using a common process not only for processing information stored in general RAM, but also for processing information stored in the built-in registers of arithmetic means such as the main control MPU 1311. Therefore, even if the storage means is changed due to a change in the gaming machine's specifications, it can be handled simply by updating the processing information determination data, thereby improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine. Because the storage means hardware constitutes the base, game control can be simplified, and program capacity can be reduced.

(6) Multiple means for receiving game media capable of receiving game media,
A game medium detection means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has received a game medium,
A game medium counting means capable of individually counting the number of game media detected by the game medium detection means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game medium counting means is capable of counting the game mediums based on the winning detection data corresponding to the game medium receiving means.
The aforementioned prize-winning detection data is
First information indicating the storage location of the detection information of the gaming medium,
Second information for performing counting based on the detection of the aforementioned gaming medium,
Includes,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming medium counting means performs a process to acquire detection information of the gaming medium based on the first information using a common process regardless of the gaming medium receiving means that received the gaming medium, and performs a process to count the gaming medium based on the second information using a common process regardless of the gaming medium receiving means that received the gaming medium.

In the gaming machine described in (6), multiple game media receiving means (e.g., start prize slot, big prize slot, etc.) are provided. A common process can be used for detecting game media and counting the number of winning game media for each game media receiving means. This allows for the commonization of the programs implementing these functions, resulting in a reduction in program size. Furthermore, changes in specifications, such as increases or decreases in the number of game media receiving means, can be easily accommodated by updating the prize detection data. This simplifies the configuration management of the gaming machine and improves the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(7) Multiple means for receiving gaming media capable of receiving gaming media,
A game medium detection means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has received a game medium,
Discarded game medium detection means capable of detecting game mediums discharged from the game medium receiving means,
A game medium counting means capable of individually counting game media detected by the game medium detection means or the dispensed game medium detection means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game medium counting means is capable of counting the game medium based on the winning detection data,
The aforementioned prize-winning detection data is
First information that can identify the storage location of the detection information of the game medium by the game medium detection means or the discharged game medium detection means,
Second information for performing counting based on the detection of the aforementioned gaming medium,
Includes,
The game medium counting means acquires detection information of the game medium based on the first information, and counts the game medium based on the acquired detection information and the second information.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the process for acquiring detection information of the gaming medium is a common process whether the detection information is from the gaming medium detection means or from the discharged gaming medium detection means.

In the gaming machine described in (7), the process for acquiring detection information on gaming media can be performed using a common process without distinguishing between detection information from gaming media detection means (e.g., start prize slot switch, big prize slot switch, etc.) and detection information from discharged gaming media detection means (e.g., safe slot switch). This allows for the detection of gaming media by multiple types of gaming media detection means, as well as by discharged gaming media detection means, using a common process. By standardizing this process, including counting, the program size can be reduced.

(8) The process of counting the game media is a common process whether the information is detected by the game media detection means or by the discharged game media detection means.
(7) A gaming machine that determines whether the acceptance of the gaming media by the gaming media receiving means is normal, based on the counting result of the gaming media detected by the gaming media detection means and the counting result of the gaming media detected by the discharged gaming media detection means.

In the gaming machine described in (8), the same effects as in the gaming machine described in (7) can be obtained. Furthermore, by comparing the counting results of the gaming media detected by the gaming media detection means with the counting results of the gaming media discharged from the gaming media detection means by the discharged gaming media detection means, it is possible to detect abnormalities in the gaming media detection means and the discharged gaming media detection means. Additionally, by enabling counting using a common process regardless of whether the gaming media detection means or the discharged gaming media detection means are used, the program size can be reduced.

(9) The process of counting the game media is a common process whether the information is detected by the game media detection means or by the discharged game media detection means.
Each time the game medium is counted by the game medium counting means, the game machine (7) determines whether the acceptance of the game medium by the game medium receiving means is normal based on the counting result of the game medium.

In the gaming machine described in (9), the same effects as in the gaming machine described in (7) can be achieved, and the program capacity can be reduced by enabling counting using a common process without relying on separate gaming medium detection means and dispensing gaming medium detection means. Furthermore, by comparing the counting results of gaming media detected by the gaming medium detection means with the counting results of gaming media dispensed from the gaming medium detection means by the dispensing gaming medium detection means, it is possible to detect abnormalities in the gaming medium detection means and dispensing gaming medium detection means. Since an abnormality determination is made each time a gaming medium is counted, a rapid response can be made when an abnormality occurs.

(10) The second information is set to a value of 1, 0, or -1.
The counting of the game media is performed by a common command that adds the second information to the number of game media in the (7) gaming machine.

In the gaming machine of (10), the same effect as in the gaming machine of (7) can be obtained, and the variety of counting can be increased by making it possible to count the gaming media not only by addition but also by subtraction and without calculation. For example, even for a gaming media detection means that does not award prize balls, such as a general-purpose gate, it is possible to count the number of prize balls without performing exception handling by executing a common command such as adding the value of the second information to the number of prize balls. This simplifies the program structure and improves the maintenance efficiency of the gaming control program.

[23. Procedures for disconnecting/reconnecting wiring]
As mentioned above, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a setting function that allows the user to change the setting value (setting value information) that affects the activation rate (lottery probability) of the condition device. In the example described above, the basic operation of the setting function was explained, and control in the event of a power outage while the setting function is being executed was also explained.

The settings of a gaming machine affect the value (profit) of the game provided to the player. Therefore, if players could check the settings, it could disrupt fair gameplay. It is natural for players to want to play on machines with settings that offer a high probability of obtaining a large amount of game value (profit). If settings could be checked, the utilization rate of machines with settings that offer a low probability of obtaining game value would decrease significantly. Furthermore, if it were possible to check or change the settings through fraudulent activities (so-called cheating), it is expected that some people would attempt to do so. For example, they might try to clear the settings by cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310, or try to check the settings by observing the machine's behavior during restart.

Therefore, in this embodiment, we propose a gaming machine that prevents unauthorized verification or modification of settings by inducing malfunctions in the gaming machine through methods such as cutting and reconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, or temporarily interrupting the power supply while the wiring remains connected using some kind of unauthorized device.

[23-1. Connection configurations of various control boards]
Figure 380 is a block diagram showing an example of the connection configuration of connection lines that supply power to various control boards for the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the various control boards. In addition, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the payout control board 951 are each supplied with power from the power supply board 931 via separate systems (different wiring). Therefore, even if the power supply between the main control board 1310 and the power supply board 931 is interrupted (the wiring related to power supply is cut), the supply of power to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 will continue.

Furthermore, in the event of a power outage or other interruption of external power supply, the main control board 1310 can receive power from a backup power supply capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, thereby continuing to retain the information stored in the main control RAM 1312. The backup power supply may be, for example, an electric double-layer capacitor ("capacitor"), and may be mounted on the power supply board 931 or mounted independently.

Furthermore, various information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch 954 on the main control board 1310 is operated upon power-up. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 954 is also output to the dispensing control board 951.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, separate wiring is provided for supplying the normal power to the main control board 1310 and for supplying the backup power to the main control board 1310, to prevent the supply of backup power from being interrupted along with the normal power. This ensures that even if the normal power supply is interrupted, the backup power supply continues, maintaining the various information stored in the main control RAM 1312. Alternatively, the backup power supply may be interrupted when the normal power supply is interrupted. In this case, if the wiring connecting the backup power supply and the main control board 1310 is cut, the backup power supply will also be cut off. Specifically, the backup power supply is provided on the power supply board 931, where the wiring supplying the normal power and the wiring supplying the backup power are integrated. If the wiring between the power supply board 931 and the main control board 1310 is physically cut or the connectors connecting the boards are disconnected, the supply of backup power will be cut off along with the normal power.

The main control board 1310 communicates bidirectionally with the payout control board 951. For example, the main control board 1310 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 951. Conversely, the payout control board 951 transmits response signals to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 (e.g., a payout ACK signal for a prize ball command) and various commands related to the status of the gaming machine to the main control board 1310. Therefore, if only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted, the payout control board 951 can recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 has been cut off and can notify the abnormality using an error LED indicator or the like.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 transmits various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc., and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is unidirectional, from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 has been cut off, and will continue the ongoing effects and screen displays while waiting for command transmission from the main control board 1310.

[23-2. Settings Function]
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a setting function, which will be explained again. The setting function includes a setting change function and a setting confirmation function. The setting change function is a function that changes the setting value of the gaming machine, and the setting confirmation function is a function for referring to the setting value.

The setting function (changing and confirming setting values) is not normally performed during gameplay, but rather when the gaming machine is started (before gameplay begins) or when gameplay is interrupted. Furthermore, to prevent the player from knowing the setting values, at least a portion of the control panel necessary for executing the setting function is located on the back of the gaming machine, and it cannot be operated without opening the main body frame 4. In this embodiment, the setting function of the gaming machine is started by performing predetermined operations on the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954, and the power switch 932.

Figure 381 shows an example of the operation for executing the setting function of the gaming machine in this embodiment. Setting confirmation is initiated by setting the RAM clear switch 954 to "OFF", setting key 971 to "ON", and power switch 932 to "ON", followed by starting the gaming machine. Setting changes are initiated by setting the RAM clear switch 954 to "ON", setting key 971 to "ON", and power switch 932 to "ON", followed by starting the gaming machine.

[23-3. Power-on control]
Next, we will explain the control process when the gaming machine is powered on. Here, we will focus on the setting-related functions when the gaming machine is powered on, and will omit explanations of processes that have already been described.

[23-3-1. Power-on processing]
Figure 382 is a flowchart of the power-on processing for the gaming machine in this embodiment. Power-on processing is the first process executed when the gaming machine is powered on.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 first performs the RAM protect permission setting (step 02TKS0010). An access-restricted area is set in the main control RAM 1312's memory area, and if the program attempts to access this restricted area during gameplay, an error occurs and a reset is performed. Considering the possibility of unstable power supply immediately after power-on, the access restriction on the main control RAM 1312 is lifted until gameplay begins and the gaming machine's initialization is complete. The RAM protect permission setting allows access to any area of the main control RAM 1312. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and the power outage clear signal is set (after being set to ON, it is set to OFF).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on startup confirmation process (step 02 TKS0020). In this process, first, the power outage warning signal is read to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a predetermined register (power-on pre-wait setting-related switch acquisition process). After that, the system waits for a predetermined time (power-on wait process), and then the power outage warning signal is read again to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (post-power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). If a power outage is detected, the system waits until the power voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes. Finally, it confirms whether the boards (wiring) connected to the main control board before the power cut-off have been reconnected. Details of the power-on startup confirmation process are explained in Figure 383.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear determination process (step 02 TKS0030). The RAM clear determination process checks the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on and determines whether the contents of the main control RAM 1312 were properly retained at the time of power-out. For example, it determines whether the settings information of the gaming machine and the contents of the main control RAM 1312 before the power outage were properly stored. Details of the RAM clear determination process are explained in Figure 384.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the setting operation determination process (step 02 TKS0040). During the setting operation determination process, if necessary, actions such as transitioning to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, checking for RAM abnormalities, and clearing the main control RAM 1312 are performed. Details of the setting operation determination process are explained in Figure 390.

Next, after the setting operation determination process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number setting activation process (step 02 TKS0050). In the random number setting activation process, initial settings such as the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) which defines the interrupt timing are performed, and interrupts are enabled. Furthermore, the hardware random number generation circuit (e.g., win/lose random numbers) built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game start determination process (step 02TKS0060). In this process, it determines whether or not the game can be started, sets commands to be sent when the power is turned on (for example, power-on operation commands), and sets initial data for power-on. Furthermore, it configures the system to allow the execution of interrupt processing, such as timer interrupts (step 02TKS0070).

When the main control MPU 1311 is authorized to execute interrupt processing, it executes the main control side main processing (steps 02TKS0080 and 02TKS0090). In the main control side main processing, it first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step 02TKS0080). If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process is executed (step 02TKS0090). The random number update process primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winners in special and regular lotteries.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage warning signal, it executes power outage processing (step 02 TKS0200). Power outage processing involves backing up data to restore the system to its state before the power outage. The specific processing is the same as that described in Figure 188.

[23-3-2. Power-on Startup Confirmation Process]
Next, the power-on startup confirmation process (step 02TKS0020) will be explained. In the power-on startup confirmation process, in addition to confirming the main power outage warning signal when the gaming machine is powered on and acquiring switch-related input information, it confirms that wiring connections were disconnected/reconnected before the power outage. In particular, it detects cases where wiring connections were disconnected/reconnected in a way that would interrupt the game. Note that wiring connections that allow the game to proceed (for example, connection to the peripheral control board 1510) are confirmed by the disconnection/short circuit abnormality determination process called by the timer interrupt process (Figure 392).

Figure 383 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the power-on startup confirmation process in this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311, upon initiating the power-on startup confirmation process, reads the power outage warning signal and executes a power-on wait pre-main power outage warning signal confirmation process to check whether a power outage is occurring (step 02TKS0110). Subsequently, it executes a power-on wait pre-setting related switch acquisition process, which reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the PF port and stores them in a predetermined register (step 02TKS0120).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a power-on wait process, waiting for a predetermined time (step 02TKS0130). The predetermined time is set to at least the time required for the display control unit to be able to perform drawing control on the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 performs a power-on wait pre-main power outage warning signal confirmation process (step 02TKS0140), which reads the power outage warning signal to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (step 02TKS0140). If a power outage is detected, the system waits until the power voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main control board 1310 has been reconnected to other boards, sensors, etc. (Step 02 TKS0150). Whether or not reconnection has occurred is determined based on information stored in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. For example, the determination may be based on information regarding an error that occurred due to the inability to receive a response signal from the payout control board 951, or on error information such as a proximity switch error. Alternatively, the determination may be based on whether a wiring connection failure flag is set in the backed-up game control area.

The main control MPU 1311 sets a wiring reconnection flag (step 02TKS0160) if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 to other boards or sensors is disconnected before the power is cut off and reconnected when the gaming machine starts up (the result of step 02TKS0150 is "YES"). After setting the wiring reconnection flag, the wiring connection failure flag is cleared (step 02TKS0170).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 notifies of an unauthorized setting confirmation error based on the setting of the wiring reconnection flag. As mentioned above, the unauthorized setting confirmation error indicates the possibility that unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine has been made, such as unauthorized access to change or confirm setting information, due to unauthorized power supply interruption/restarting to the main control board 1310, such as the disconnection and reconnection of wiring connected to the main control board 1310, and further unauthorized setting change operations or setting confirmation operations. Therefore, when an unauthorized setting confirmation error occurs, it is desirable to stop the functions of various detection sensors, stop the start or continuation of a new game, check the settings, and inspect for other abnormalities in the gaming machine. The unauthorized setting confirmation error notification is performed by lighting up indicators composed of LEDs and lamps such as the function display unit 1400 and the setting display unit 974 in a specific manner, or by displaying an error screen on the liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the main control board 1310 may output a command to the dispensing control board 951, and notification may be provided by displaying it in a specific manner on an error LED indicator (not shown) provided on the dispensing control board 951.

[23-3-3. RAM Clear Determination Process]
Next, the details of the RAM clear determination process (step 02 TKS0030) in the power-on processing will be explained. Figure 384 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the RAM clear determination process in this embodiment. Figure 385 is an example of the program code for the RAM clear determination process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 384. In the RAM clear determination process, as described above, the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on is checked, and it is determined whether or not the contents of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-off are properly retained. The specific details of the process will be explained below.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the RAM clear determination process, it first executes a setting value verification process (step 02 TKS0210). In the setting value verification process, it acquires setting value information (setting values) that affect the probability of winning the game draw, and if there is an abnormality, it sets the setting state and setting values to abnormal values. The specific process is explained in Figure 386.

Once the setting value information has been verified, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on out-of-use RAM verification process to check if the information in the area of the main control RAM 1312 that is not used for gameplay (out-of-use RAM) is abnormal (step 02TKS0220).

Once the check of unused RAM is complete, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the game control area (the area where game information is stored) of the main control RAM 1312 (Step 02 TKS0230).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 temporarily sets the game control area to an abnormal state (RAM abnormality detection value) (step 02TKS0240). The state of the game control area is then determined based on the results of the processing from step 02TKS0210 to step 02TKS0230.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the checksum value calculated in step 02TKS0230 is a normal value (step 02TKS0250). If the checksum value is not a normal value (the result of step 02TKS0250 is "NO"), the game control area is in an abnormal state, so this process is terminated, and the contents of the game control area are cleared in subsequent processes as needed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value of the backup flag, which was set before the power outage, is a normal value (step 02TKS0260). If the value of the backup flag is not a normal value (the result of step 02TKS0260 is "NO"), the game control area cannot be confirmed to be normal, so this process is terminated, and the contents of the game control area are cleared in subsequent processes as needed.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the state of the area outside the usage area of the main control RAM 1312, as confirmed in step 02TKS0220, is normal (step 02TKS0270). If the state of the area outside the usage area of the main control RAM 1312 is not normal (the result of step 02TKS0270 is "NO"), this process is terminated, indicating that the game control area is in an abnormal state, and the contents of the game control area are cleared in subsequent processes as necessary.

The main control MPU 1311, if the checksum and backup flag values are normal and the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, sets the state of the game control area to the RAM normal determination value (step 02TKS0280), and sets the setting state to the state before the power cut (step 02TKS0290). The state of the main control RAM 1312 is set (stored) in the C register, and the state before the power cut is set (stored) in the B register.

[23-3-4. Setting Value Confirmation Process]
Next, the setting value confirmation process in step 02TKS0210 of the RAM clear determination process will be explained. In the setting value confirmation process, the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine is acquired, and if there is an abnormality, the setting state and setting value are set to abnormal values. Figure 386 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting value confirmation process in this embodiment. Figure 387 is an example of the program code for the setting value confirmation process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 386.

When the setting value verification process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first obtains the setting state from the setting state management area (VALID_PLAY; setting state storage means) (step 02TKS0310). The setting state management area is a 1-byte area, as shown in Figure 388. The values that can be set in the setting state management area are one of the following: playable state ("0"; _SETST_NON), setting verification state ("1"; _SETST_CHK), setting change state ("2"; _SETST_CHG), or RAM abnormal state ("3"; _SETST_ERR) (Figure 389). Alternatively, an invalid setting verification error ("4"; _SETST_CHER) may be set to distinguish it from the RAM abnormal state. An invalid setting verification error does not necessarily mean that the setting value is abnormal, but it is treated similarly to the RAM abnormal state considering the possibility that the setting value may have been tampered with.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state obtained from the setting state management area is an abnormal value, specifically, a value other than the configurable values defined in Figure 389 (Step 02 TKS0320). In the program implementation, the setting state value is compared with the setting state management area abnormality discrimination value (_VALID_PLAY_CK). If the value is smaller than the setting state management area abnormality discrimination value, it is determined to be a normal value. The setting state management area abnormality discrimination value is the maximum value of the configurable values (in this embodiment, RAM abnormality state = "3") plus 1. In this embodiment, if the setting value is 4 or less, it is determined to be normal.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the setting value (setting value information) (step 02TKS0330) if the setting state obtained from the setting state management area is not an abnormal value (the result of step 02TKS0320 is "NO"), that is, if the setting state is a normal value. The setting value (setting value information) is stored in a 1-byte area called the setting value area (SETTEI_AR; setting value information storage means; Figure 388). In this embodiment, the setting value is set to a value between "0" and "5".

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the acquired set value (set value information) falls within a predetermined range, i.e., between "0" and "5" (step 02 TKS0340). Since only positive numbers can be set in the set value area, similar to the setting status check, the program implementation only requires determining whether the value is greater than the upper limit (set value upper limit determination value; _SETTEI_LIM = "5"; Figure 389) plus 1.

If the value of the set value (set value information) is within the predetermined range (the result of step 02 TKS0340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates this process and returns to the calling process (RAM clear determination process), as the set state and set value are set correctly.

On the other hand, if the setting state is an abnormal value (the result of step 02TKS0320 is "YES"), or if the setting value is an abnormal value (the result of step 02TKS0340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the setting state to RAM abnormal state "3" (step 02TKS0350). Finally, the setting value is initialized (step 02TKS0360), and the process returns to the calling process (RAM clear determination process).

The settings are not erased (reset) even when a RAM clear operation is performed. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the settings, the settings are reset during the settings verification process. This is to allow the machine's state to be reset while maintaining the settings, such as when returning a high-probability state to the normal state by clearing the RAM.

[23-3-5. Setting Operation Determination Process]
Next, we will explain in detail the setting operation determination process (step 02 TKS0040) in the power-on processing. Figure 390 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting operation determination process in this embodiment. Figure 391 is an example of the program code for the setting operation determination process in this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart in Figure 390. As mentioned above, the setting operation determination process includes transitioning to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, checking for RAM abnormalities, and initializing (clearing) the main control RAM 1312.

When the setting operation determination process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first provisionally sets a value indicating a RAM abnormality (_SETST_ERR) in the setting state management area (setting value information storage means) (step 02TKS0410).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (step 02 TKS0420). Specifically, it reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the external input port (_PINSTS) immediately after power-on to make the determination.

If no setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (the result of step 02TKS0420 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power outage was a setting change, that is, whether a power outage occurred during the setting change mode (step 02TKS0430). The setting state before the power outage is stored in the B register during the RAM clear determination process in step 02TKS0290.

If the setting state before the power outage was not a setting change (the result of step 02TKS0430 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power outage was a RAM abnormality (step 02TKS0440). If the setting state before the power outage was a RAM abnormality (the result of step 02TKS0440 is "YES"), this process terminates and returns to the calling process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 initializes the setting state management area (step 02TKS0460) if the setting state before the power outage was not abnormal (the result of step 02TKS0450 is "NO"). Furthermore, it determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 was ON when the power was turned on (step 02TKS0470).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not ON when the power is turned on (the result of step 02TKS0470 is "NO"), i.e., OFF, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game state at the time of the power outage in the power-on state buffer (step 02TKS0480) in order to restore the state to what it was before the power outage. Furthermore, it determines whether the setting key is OFF or not (step 02TKS0490). If the setting key is not OFF (the result of step 02TKS0490 is "NO"), i.e., ON, it means that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and therefore the setting state is set to the setting confirmation state (step 02TKS0500).

If the setting key is OFF (the result of step 02TKS0490 is "YES"), or if the setting confirmation state is selected, the main control MPU 1311 executes the door status confirmation process (step 02TKS0510). The door status confirmation process checks the open/closed state of the door frame 3, and if it is in the open state, it performs the corresponding setting. Once the door status confirmation process is complete, it returns to the calling process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 changes the setting state to the changed state (step 02TKS0520) if a setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (result of step 02TKS0420 is "YES"), or if the setting state before the power was cut off was a setting change (result of step 02TKS0430 is "YES"). Next, it determines whether the unused RAM is normal or not (step 02TKS0530). If the unused RAM is not normal (result of step 02TKS0530 is "NO"), i.e., if an abnormality has occurred in the unused RAM, it executes the unused RAM abnormality processing to restore the unused RAM to a normal state (step 02TKS0540).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is ON (result of step 02TKS0470 is "YES"), or if the RAM outside the used area is normal (result of step 02TKS0530 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM initialization processing (step 02TKS0550) and clears the working area (step 02TKS0560) after the execution of the RAM outside the used area error processing is completed. Then, this process ends, and the system returns to the calling process (power-on processing).

As described above, in this embodiment, setting value information is acquired when the gaming machine is powered on, and setting value-related control is performed according to the operation input at power-on and the setting state before power-off. For example, if the setting state before power-off was "setting change," regardless of whether there was an operation input or the setting state, the setting change mode is started when the gaming machine is powered on, and the setting change is continued to allow for a smooth resumption of gameplay. In this case, there is a possibility of a RAM error occurring because the setting value has not been finalized, and the setting value may not be what the user intended.

On the other hand, even if the setting state before power-off was "setting confirmation," if there is no input to start setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation operation) when power-on, the gaming machine will start without continuing the setting confirmation. Unlike setting change mode, the setting values are maintained without being changed, so gameplay can begin. If further confirmation is needed, the user can simply input the operation again. Furthermore, by not automatically switching to setting confirmation mode upon startup, it is possible to prevent unauthorized confirmation of setting values by intentionally restarting the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the setting is "RAM abnormality," the game cannot be started normally, so the machine's startup is stopped without performing a RAM clear. Since the setting "RAM abnormality" requires resetting the setting information, to prevent unauthorized changes by third parties, the system prevents the game from starting until the administrator intentionally resets the settings, thereby reducing the possibility of fraudulent activity. Additionally, if the setting "Fraudulent setting confirmation error" is available, similar to "RAM abnormality," the system prevents the game from starting normally, preventing unauthorized changes by third parties from tampering with the settings and resuming gameplay.

[23-3-6. Disconnection/Short Circuit Anomaly Detection Process]
Here, we will describe the disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process (step 01TKS0120), which includes a process to confirm that wiring that was disconnected during gameplay has been reconnected. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process is executed in the switch-related control process (step 01TKS0010; Figure 354) in the game-ready processing (step P108; Figure 329) of the timer interrupt processing. Figure 392 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process in this embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the open circuit/short circuit abnormality detection process, it acquires connection error history information (switch error history information) (step 02TKS0610). Furthermore, it determines whether the connection error history information includes error information for the wiring to be detected (step 02TKS0620). In this embodiment, the wiring to be detected in the connection error history information includes all of the multiple wirings connected to the main control board 1310; however, it is also possible to target only some of the multiple wirings instead of all of them. If only some of the multiple wirings are targeted instead of all of them, it is desirable to configure the system to target at least the wiring related to power supply to the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311, if the connection error history information contains error information for the wiring to be detected (result of step 02TKS0620 is "YES"), waits for a predetermined time (step 02TKS0630) and sets the wiring connection failure flag to ON (step 02TKS0640). Furthermore, it sends a disconnection/short circuit abnormality command (step 02TKS0650) and terminates this process. The wiring connection failure flag may be set to a different flag for each wiring, or it may be a common flag for all wiring, with one wiring connection failure flag set to ON when a disconnection or short circuit is detected in any of the wiring to be detected. Alternatively, the wiring connection failure flag may be stored in the game control area, and the wiring connection failure flag may be referenced when the game machine is restarted to set the wiring reconnection flag to ON during the power-on startup confirmation process.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the wiring connection failure flag is set (step 02TKS0660) if the connection error history information does not contain error information for the wiring to be detected (result of step 02TKS0620 is "NO"). If the wiring connection failure flag is not set (result of step 02TKS0660 is "NO"), the gaming machine is operating normally without any abnormalities such as wire breaks, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the wiring connection failure flag is set in the main control MPU 1311 (resulting in "YES" in step 02TKS0660), the disconnected wiring has been reconnected, so the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON (step 02TKS0670). After setting the wiring reconnection flag to ON, the disconnection or short circuit has been resolved, so the wiring connection failure flag is cleared (set to OFF) (step 02TKS0680). The wiring reconnection flag is cleared (set to OFF) when the normal setting change that occurs when the power switch 932 is turned from OFF to ON is performed and the game starts normally.

The above procedure allows for detection of connection abnormalities such as disconnections or short circuits in the wiring, after which the abnormality has been resolved through reconnection. It is unnatural for connection abnormalities such as disconnections or short circuits to be resolved without the gaming machine being restarted. For example, it is possible that the gaming machine was tampered with through fraudulent means before the wiring was reconnected, potentially altering or verifying the setting information. Therefore, as mentioned above, an error indicating fraudulent settings is generated based on the ON setting of the wiring reconnection flag, thereby suppressing continued gameplay and preventing the fraudulent exploitation of game value.

The power-on startup confirmation process is executed when the gaming machine is started up. Therefore, the wiring reconnection flag is set during the power-on startup confirmation process, and if an error in detecting an incorrect setting occurs, the start of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even if the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON in a process executed during gameplay, such as the disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process, and an error in detecting an incorrect setting occurs, the continuation of the game should similarly be stopped to prevent the unfair exploitation of game value. However, if an error in detecting an incorrect setting occurs due to fraudulent activity, the game may be allowed to continue to an extent that does not cause actual harm to the hall in order to identify the person who committed the fraud. For example, even during the period between a disconnection or short circuit in the wiring and reconnection (while the fraudulent activity is taking place), the performances by display devices such as LCD displays and movable parts should continue as normal for a predetermined period. At this time, game control that newly adds game value (such as new lotteries or awarding of prize balls) should be stopped to prevent the unfair exploitation of game value. Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 and setting display unit 974, etc., notify the fraudulent setting confirmation error in a manner that is not visible from the front of the gaming machine. This makes it difficult for the person who committed the fraud to realize that an error has occurred, thus preventing the person from immediately leaving their seat. This allows the hall staff sufficient time to gather evidence and makes it easier to identify the full extent of the fraud.

[23-4. Control when an error occurs in checking for incorrect settings]
Next, we will consider how to deal with fraudulent activities that induce malfunctions in the gaming machine by disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310. One example of fraudulent activity envisioned in this invention is an attempt to gain an unfair advantage by forcibly interrupting the wiring that supplies power to the main control board 1310 to induce a malfunction, or by outputting special commands (for example, setting commands) in an illegal manner during the disconnection or restart due to reconnection of the wiring.

One possible method for forcibly cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is to physically sever the wiring connected to the power supply board. However, since it would be difficult to continue playing after the severance, it is conceivable that the game could be continued fraudulently by temporarily disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring connector using some method. Detection of potentially fraudulent behavior, such as disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, can be performed using the aforementioned disconnection/short-circuit abnormality detection procedure.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, an unauthorized setting confirmation error occurs, as described above, by detecting the reconnection of wiring rather than its disconnection. Furthermore, when an unauthorized setting confirmation error occurs, the game is stopped. In other words, when an unauthorized setting confirmation error occurs, the game cannot be resumed unless a specific recovery operation is performed. Since this specific recovery operation should only be performed by the arcade operator, it is desirable to use a specific operation unit that can be operated from the back of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, to simplify the control complexity of the main control board 1310 and the gaming machine configuration, the setting change operation is configured to also serve as the specific recovery operation (details will be described later). Also, by performing the setting change operation as the specific recovery operation, even if there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally confirmed and altered, the arcade operator can set a new setting value and safely resume the game.

The following explanation, with reference to the timing chart, describes the control measures to prevent unauthorized activity when disconnection and reconnection of the wiring of the main control board 1310 are detected.

[23-4-1. When performing a setting confirmation operation after reconnecting the wiring]
First, we will explain the case where a setting confirmation operation is performed after detecting the reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310. Figure 393 is a timing chart that explains the control when an improper setting confirmation operation occurs, such as when the power supply is interrupted due to the disconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 in this embodiment, and the setting confirmation operation is performed when the power supply is restored after the wiring is reconnected.

Referring to Figure 393, the main control power supply was continuously supplied until time t11, with the power switch 932 in the "ON" position, the setting key 971 in the "OFF" position, and the RAM clear switch 954 in the "OFF" position. Since the wiring connection status is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared.

The setting display unit 974 is in a hidden state, meaning the setting value is not displayed, as the game state is normal and no setting functions such as setting confirmation or setting change are being performed (if the setting display unit 974 also functions as the base display unit 1317, it displays the predetermined base information). The function display unit 1400 displays the normal game state, and the special symbol display unit included in the function display unit 1400 is displaying the variation of the special symbols. The main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the start of the variation of the special symbols, including information to determine the variation display mode of the performance symbols, and instructs the start of the variation. Furthermore, since communication is functioning normally between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 is lit in a normal mode.

Furthermore, similar to the main control power supply, the performance power supply is also supplied with power. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to initiate variation, it starts displaying the variation of the performance symbols and, based on the variation start command, executes a performance that displays characters and other elements on the liquid crystal display in accordance with the variation of the performance symbols. Additionally, performances using movable parts, LEDs, lamps, and other performance devices are executed.

Time t11 represents a situation where the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is improperly disconnected while the power switch 932 remains in the ON position. In this case, only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is stopped. Therefore, the game state becomes powered off, game control by the main control MPU 1311 is interrupted, and the power-off process is executed. In this embodiment, as described above, considering the risk of some kind of fraudulent activity occurring in response to this behavior, the wiring connection failure flag is set to ON during the execution of this power-off process (time t11). The wiring connection failure flag is set to ON based on the pattern of voltage changes, etc.

Furthermore, if the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is improperly disconnected, the signal from the main control board 1310 will be interrupted, causing the function of the function display unit 1400 to stop. In this case, the LEDs and 7-segment display included in the function display unit 1400 may be turned off, or an error display may be shown if power is supplied from a different system than the main control board 1310. Also, since the error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 cannot receive a signal from the main control board 1310, a connection abnormality error will be displayed in a specific manner different from when the connection is normal.

As shown in Figure 380, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the wiring supplying power to each circuit board is a separate system. Therefore, even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally interrupted, power supply to the peripheral control boards 1510 and various display devices continues. For this reason, even after time t11, when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally interrupted, the display of effects on the liquid crystal display, various lamp displays, sound effects, etc., can continue.

The display of the changing symbols in the performance sequence is supposed to stop when the main control board 1310 sends a command to stop the change after the special symbol change has finished. However, because the power supply to the main control board 1310 has been cut off, the command to control the performance (the command to stop the changing symbol display) is not sent. Therefore, the performance display continues with the state it was in at the time of the power outage until the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restored. Specifically, because the symbol stop command is not received while the performance symbols are changing, the high-speed display of the performance symbols continues, or a temporary stop state (where the performance symbols are shaking in a predetermined position without stopping completely) continues, resulting in the performance symbols continuing to change.

In the example shown in Figure 393, when the wiring supplying power to the main control board 1310 is improperly disconnected while the power switch 932 remains in the ON position, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted. Therefore, upon reconnection, the timer interrupt process (disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process) is not executed, and the wiring reconnection flag is not set to ON at this time. Then, when the wiring supplying power to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed (time t12), and the main control MPU 1311 starts the power-on process. The power-on startup confirmation process sets the wiring reconnection flag to ON (time t13, step 02TKS0670). In this way, when the wiring connection is improperly disconnected, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted, and then power is restored, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are sequentially set to ON to remember this fact, enabling monitoring for improper operation.

When the main control power supply is restored and the main control board 1310 starts up (time t13), an invalid setting confirmation error is notified on the back of the gaming machine via the setting display 974, etc., based on the ON-set wiring reconnection flag. By notifying the invalid setting confirmation error on the back of the gaming machine, the hall can later verify the contents of the main control RAM 1312 due to the power supply to the main control board 1310 being cut off.

Furthermore, since it is possible that one of the multiple wires, including the wire supplying power to the main control board 1310, may be disconnected and that connection path may be used for fraudulent activity (an illegal wire may be connected in place of another wire), this embodiment also monitors such connection paths as follows. That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, if one of the multiple wires, including the wire supplying power, is disconnected and then reconnected, a specific notification is issued to indicate the possibility of an abnormality in the set value, regardless of whether the power is cut off or not. Figure 393 shows, as an example, an example in which a specific notification is issued by the function display unit 1400 when the wire supplying power is cut off and then reconnected, but the same specific notification is also issued when a wire other than the wire supplying power is cut off and then reconnected. The target of the specific notification does not have to be the function display unit 1400; the base display unit 1317 may display specific information, or the liquid crystal display device 1600 may display a specific image. Furthermore, to distinguish it from the incorrect configuration confirmation error, the notification may be sent by a separate device from the device that notifies the incorrect configuration confirmation error, or it may be sent by the same device.

The error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 may continue to display a connection error because it cannot receive signals from the main control board 1310 due to the game being stopped. Alternatively, it may be configured to receive commands from the main control board 1310 indicating an incorrect setting confirmation error or a state where gameplay is impossible, and then provide notification of the incorrect setting confirmation error or a specific notification. Furthermore, when power is restored to the main control board 1310, even if gameplay cannot be started, the error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 may display a message indicating that the connection is normal, since the connection itself is normal.

If an error occurs in confirming fraudulent settings, it is possible that fraudulent activity has occurred, and the continuation of gameplay will be restricted. Similarly, if a specific notification is issued, gameplay may be stopped, or only the notification may be issued, allowing gameplay to continue.

Furthermore, if an error occurs in the invalid setting confirmation process, and an abnormality such as the contents of the main control RAM 1312 being completely cleared actually occurs, the setting status will be set to "RAM abnormality" in the setting value confirmation process (Figure 385) of the RAM clear determination process (Figure 383) during the power-on process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are determined to be normal, such as when the checksum is normal, if an invalid setting confirmation error occurs, the setting state may be set to "Invalid Setting Confirmation Error" so that the same processing as "RAM Abnormal" is performed, in order to more reliably prevent fraudulent activity. If the same processing as "RAM Abnormal" is performed, the game will remain stopped without starting until the setting change operation is successfully executed.

At time t13, after the main control power supply is restored, the main control board 1310 becomes capable of sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510. The LCD display shows a message indicating that the game cannot be started, corresponding to an error in the incorrect settings. Various lamps illuminate in response to the error, and various speakers emit an audio notification corresponding to the error. At this time, the display of the reel symbols stops or becomes invisible. Furthermore, at time t13, the operation of the reel mechanisms in operation stops, and initialization processes are performed, such as moving them to their initial positions.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally interrupted, the game cannot be started even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restored. This prevents illegal exploitation and loss of profit even if an attempt is made to illegally access the setting value information by illegally disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310.

Next, we will explain the control when the main control power supply is restored at time t12, and the execution of the setting confirmation operation is determined at time t13. The setting confirmation operation does not require operating the RAM clear switch 954 located on the back of the gaming machine, and is a simple operation of turning on the setting key 971 when the power is turned on, so the setting value can be confirmed in a relatively simple manner. For this reason, in addition to the possibility of fraudulent acts such as interrupting and restarting the power supply to the main control board 1310, the setting confirmation operation may be performed fraudulently by some means, so the gaming machine of this embodiment is designed to prevent the setting value information from being fraudulently confirmed even if the setting confirmation operation is accepted when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally interrupted and then restarted (even if the setting key is turned on). In the setting confirmation operation, the setting key 971 only needs to be operated to the ON position during the startup process (determination) after power-on; it may also be operated to the ON position before power-on (in Figure 393, determination is possible if the setting key 971 is operated to the ON position between time t11 and t12).

Referring to Figure 393, at time t13, the execution of the setting confirmation operation is determined by detecting that the setting key 971 is ON when power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed. However, because the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON due to the disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process, this setting confirmation operation is not considered valid and is deemed invalid. Therefore, no processing related to setting confirmation is performed, and the game is stopped, preventing the game from starting.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted and then the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restored to perform a setting confirmation operation, the game cannot be started. This prevents fraudulent acts such as temporarily stopping the power supply to the main control board 1310 to illegally check the setting values.

Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is performed, by ensuring that no changes are made to the game's visual presentation, it is possible to make the game machine appear to be operating normally for a period of time. This increases the likelihood that the person who committed the fraud will remain with the machine, making it easier to identify the perpetrator.

The following section details how to resolve the fraudulent setting confirmation error using a specific recovery operation (in this embodiment, a setting change operation). As mentioned above, if a fraudulent setting confirmation error occurs due to fraudulent activity, the game can be restarted by temporarily shutting off the power, directly operating the power switch 932 to perform a setting change operation, and then restarting the power. In the timing chart shown in Figure 393, the power is shut off at time t14 and restarted at time t15. The shaded area in the timing chart of Figure 393 from time t14 to time t15 indicates that the functions of each component are stopped due to the power shutdown.

When the gaming machine's power is turned back on, the process to start the machine begins, and during this process, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Note that a setting change operation is considered complete only if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set to "ON" at the time the power switch 932 is operated from "OFF" to "ON" (at the time of determination). It is also acceptable if the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set to "ON" before the power is turned on.

Once a setting change operation is detected and the gaming machine has finished starting up (time t16), the wiring reconnection flag is released. This clears the incorrect setting confirmation error, and specific notifications and various error notifications cease. The gaming machine's setting state is then set to the setting change state, and it transitions to setting change mode (step 02TKS0520). The setting display unit 974 switches from displaying the incorrect setting confirmation error to displaying the setting value being changed. The function display unit 1400 remains completely off (or displays corresponding to the setting change, or may be fully lit) until the setting change is complete. At this time, the liquid crystal display device may display a screen indicating that a setting change is in progress.

Once the settings change is complete (time t17), the necessary processes to start the game, such as clearing the game control area, are executed, and the game becomes ready to begin.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, if an unauthorized setting confirmation error occurs, performing a setting change operation as a specific recovery operation will clear the unauthorized setting confirmation error, allowing normal gameplay to begin via the setting change mode. Since the setting change operation requires the operation of multiple control units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971), it is difficult for fraudsters to perform this operation. Furthermore, because it includes the operation of the setting key 971, which can only be operated by hall employees with keys, and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 located on the back of the gaming machine, the security performance against fraudulent activity can be enhanced.

Furthermore, while a special recovery procedure could be implemented in the event of an incorrect setting confirmation error, this could complicate the power-on process. Therefore, by allowing recovery using the same procedure as normal setting changes, the program can be standardized, suppressing increases in program size and complexity in game control.

[23-4-2. When performing a setting change operation after reconnecting the wiring]
Next, we will explain the case where, after detecting an unauthorized reconnection of wiring connected to the main control board, an unauthorized setting change operation is performed instead of an unauthorized setting confirmation operation. Figure 394 is a timing chart illustrating the control when an unauthorized act occurs in which the power supply is improperly interrupted by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, and a setting change operation is performed when the power supply is restored after the wiring is reconnected.

While it is more difficult for an unscrupulous individual to perform a setting change operation compared to a setting confirmation operation, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured such that when power supply is restored, the setting change mode cannot be entered unless a legitimate setting change operation is performed, which requires not only reconnecting the wiring to restore power, but also actually turning the power switch 932 from OFF to ON to turn on the power. Therefore, the timing chart shown in Figure 394 is the same as the timing chart shown in Figure 393, except that the setting change operation is performed when the wiring is reconnected, and a detailed explanation is omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if a setting change operation is performed after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the wiring connection flag is not released, the fraudulent setting confirmation error persists, and the game cannot be started. This prevents fraudulent activity such as attempting to change setting values fraudulently by temporarily stopping the power supply to the main control board 1310.

[23-4-3. Cases where setting value information is accessed illegally without cutting off the power]
Next, we will explain how to deter fraudulent activities that could involve illegally using input from the wiring path to verify and tamper with setting value information when the wiring supplying power to the main control board remains connected, while other wiring (for example, wiring connected to various input switches related to lotteries and prize winnings) is disconnected and then reconnected. Figure 395 is a timing chart that explains the control when wiring other than the wiring supplying power to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and then reconnected, unlike the embodiments described in Figures 393 and 394.

Referring to Figure 395, similar to the examples shown in Figures 393 and 394, power is continuously supplied to the main control power supply until the wiring connection is disconnected (time t21). The power switch 932 is "ON," the setting key 971 is "OFF," and the RAM clear switch 954 is "OFF." Furthermore, since the wiring connection is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared. Various indicators, such as the setting indicator 974 and the function indicator unit 1400, display the same information.

Furthermore, the special symbol display unit included in the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbols in a variable manner. The main control MPU 1311 includes information for determining the mode of display of the performance symbols and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the start of the variation. The liquid crystal display displays the performance symbols in a variable manner, and also performs effects such as displaying characters. In addition, effects using movable parts, LEDs, and lamps are also executed in conjunction with the display of the performance symbols.

In Figure 395, if a specific wire (such as one connected to various input switches related to lotteries and prize winnings) among the multiple wires connected to the main control board 1310 (time t21) is disconnected, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is not cut off, and a wire connection failure flag is set by the disconnection/short circuit abnormality detection process (step 02 TKS0640). At this time, the setting indicator 974 may remain hidden, or it may display an error. Also, the function display unit 1400 is completely off, indicating that normal gameplay cannot be continued, but it may also display an error. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the symbol variation stops at this point. Furthermore, although the error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 is shown as a connection abnormality in the diagram, it may be shown as normal if the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is normal, or it may be shown as an error indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the wiring connection of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 393 and 394, the ongoing performance continues. Since power is continuously supplied to the main control board 1310, the performance could be stopped when the wiring connection failure flag is set. However, the setting indicator 974 and other devices notify the game hall manager and employees of the fraudulent activity, making it easier to identify the perpetrator.

Subsequently, the disconnected wiring is reconnected (time t22), and the wiring reconnection flag is set (step 02 TKS0670). Because the wiring reconnection flag is set, the setting indicator 974, etc., notifies the aforementioned incorrect setting confirmation error. Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 provides specific notification. In addition, the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the ongoing animation, and an error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

At time t22, the rewiring flag is set, triggering an error confirming fraudulent settings, and the game is stopped. This means that while the wiring supplying power to the main control board remains connected, other wiring (such as wiring connected to various input switches related to lotteries and prize winnings) is disconnected. Even if someone attempts to fraudulently use input from the wiring path to verify or tamper with the setting information during reconnection, the game is forcibly stopped after reconnection, thus deterring fraudulent activity.

Next, we will explain the control process when the hall operator shuts off the power to the gaming machine (time t23) to resolve an error related to incorrect settings, and then restarts the power while performing a setting change operation (time t24). While the power is shut off (shaded area in Figure 395), the displays on the LCD and other indicators, as well as the operation of the performance devices, are interrupted. When the gaming machine's power is turned on at time t24, the process to start the machine begins, and during this process, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation has been performed. As mentioned above, the setting change operation only requires that the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are "ON" when the power switch 932 is turned "ON"; the state before and after power-on (determination) is irrelevant.

Subsequently, once a legitimate setting change operation is detected and the gaming machine has finished starting up (time t25), the wiring reconnection flag is released, and the incorrect setting confirmation error is cleared. The gaming machine's setting state is then set to the setting change state, and it transitions to setting change mode. The display modes of the display means, such as the setting display unit 974 and the function display unit 1400, are as explained in Figure 393. Once the setting change is complete (time t26), the necessary processes for starting the game, such as clearing the game control area, are executed, and the machine becomes ready to start playing.

In the example shown in Figure 395, the power was disconnected and then reconnected after reconnecting the wiring. However, if the setting change operation is performed without disconnecting the power, the setting change function will not be executed, as shown in the example in Figure 394. In other words, gameplay cannot be resumed without going through a power reconnection process, including the operation of the power switch 932. This prevents fraudulent activity such as temporarily disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 and attempting to illegally change the setting values while the gaming machine is not functioning properly.

[23-4-4. If an error occurs when disconnecting the wiring]
Next, we will explain the behavior of the gaming machine when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is improperly interrupted while a minor warning (for example, a warning notification saying "Please return to left-hand play," a warning notification regarding a malfunction in the decorative system, or a warning notification regarding the amount of balls stored in the tray) is occurring, without stopping game control such as symbol changes or the payout control of prize balls. Figure 396 is a timing chart that explains the control when the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and then reconnected while a minor error occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

In the example shown in Figure 396, at time t31, the full-capacity detection sensor 535 detects that the foul cover unit 520 is full of game balls, and a full-capacity error (minor warning) is issued. At this time, the liquid crystal display shows a full-capacity error, prompting the removal of the stored game balls. The error LED indicator on the payout control board 951 also displays a message corresponding to the full-capacity error.

If the wiring to the main control board 1310 is disconnected while the full tank error is being reported (time t32), the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and the function display unit 1400 lights are completely turned off, similar to the case in Figure 394. Meanwhile, power continues to be supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and various display devices, so the full tank error display and display of effects on the liquid crystal display continue. Afterward, when the wiring to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the power supply is restored (time t33), the power-on processing is executed, and the gaming machine restarts.

Once the gaming machine restarts (time t34), the wiring connection failure flag is cleared and the wiring reconnection flag is set. Setting the wiring reconnection flag triggers an incorrect setting confirmation error, which is reported by the setting display unit 974. At this time, the function display unit 1400 performs a specific notification, and a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it of the error, resulting in the display of an error screen corresponding to the LCD display. The recovery operation from the incorrect setting confirmation error state involves directly operating the power switch 932 to cut off the power and then changing the settings upon power-on, as described above. After updating the settings, the machine becomes playable.

By configuring the system as described above, if an unauthorized act is performed by cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 during an error, it is possible to make it appear as if the error notification is continuing for a certain period of time. This increases the likelihood that the person who committed the fraud will remain in place until the error notification is cleared, making it easier for hall employees to identify the perpetrator.

Furthermore, to further enhance the fraud deterrence effect of the above-described embodiment, when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying it of the occurrence of a fraudulent setting confirmation error, the history information of the fraudulent setting confirmation error may be stored in the history storage unit provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and this information may be made displayable on a liquid crystal display device or the like by accepting a predetermined history display operation. It is desirable that the history storage unit be supplied with a predetermined backup power supply so that it retains the history information even if the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted. It is also desirable that the history information of the fraudulent setting confirmation error include date and time information extracted from the real-time clock provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and that all or part of the date and time information of the wiring connection failure flag being set, the date and time information of the fraudulent setting confirmation error occurring, and the date and time information of the legitimate setting change operation being performed and the fraudulent setting confirmation error being resolved be stored.

Furthermore, to further enhance the fraud deterrent effect of the above-described embodiment, since the fraudulent setting confirmation error is an extremely important error related to the unauthorized change of setting values, it may be given higher priority than other errors (for example, errors related to the opening of the door frame 3 or magnetic sensor errors) and the notification processing and output processing from the external terminal board 784 related to the error may be performed accordingly. In terms of importance, it is equivalent to a RAM error, and it is desirable to set it to the same priority as a RAM error.

Furthermore, in the embodiments described above, an example was given of a gaming machine (a gaming machine with multiple setting levels) that has multiple setting levels from 1 to 6 corresponding to multiple types of operating ratios for the condition device (i.e., the probability of winning a special symbol), and that allows any of the setting levels from 1 to 6 to be set. However, the operating ratio of the condition device may be limited to one type, and the corresponding setting value may also be limited to only setting level 1 (a gaming machine with no multiple setting levels). In such a gaming machine (a gaming machine with no multiple setting levels) that can only set setting level 1, setting confirmation (in reality, only setting level 1 can be confirmed) and setting changes (in reality, only setting level 1 can be set) are possible, but no damage to the hall occurs due to fraudulent confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in cases where a fraudulent user mistakenly uses the wrong device, it may be possible to fully understand the extent of the fraudulent activity and apprehend the fraudulent user without incurring any losses, thus contributing to the deterrence of fraudulent activity.

[24. Special conditions shortened time]
[24-1. Overview of Special Conditions for Reduced Working Hours]
In the gaming machines described so far, whether or not to transition to a time-saving state was determined based on the results of a special lottery. Therefore, unless the player won the special lottery, they could not transition to a game state (specific game state) that was advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state. As a result, there were cases where players had to continue playing monotonously for a long period without winning the special lottery, which could significantly reduce the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, this embodiment describes a gaming machine that allows players to transition to a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to them without winning the special lottery. Specifically, the machine transitions to the time-saving state if the player fails to win the special lottery a predetermined number of times (special condition time-saving state). In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment also allows transitioning to the time-saving state based on winning the special lottery (normal time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is described as follows: The probability of winning the lottery (normal lottery) to open the second start gate 2004 is set higher than in the normal state, and the opening time of the second start gate 2004 when the lottery is won is set to be longer. In this embodiment, the time-saving state is executed with the same content whether it is a normal time-saving state or a special condition time-saving state. However, the number of times the time-saving state continues (number of time-saving rounds) and the opening time may differ depending on the type of special lottery result, the transition conditions to the time-saving state (normal time-saving or special condition time-saving), etc. Furthermore, the probability of the normal lottery may be set to the same high probability (100% win rate is also acceptable) whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving state, and the opening time of the second start gate 2004 may be longer in the time-saving state compared to the normal state.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the time-saving state ends when the player wins a special lottery and transitions to the next game state based on the result of the special lottery. The time-saving state also ends when the game is played a predetermined number of times without winning a special lottery, transitioning to the normal game state. Thus, the time-saving state continues until predetermined conditions are met, such as winning a special lottery or performing a predetermined number of symbol changes (special lottery).

[24-2. Basic Flow of Special Conditions for Reduced Working Hours]
Next, the control of the special condition time reduction in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the special condition time reduction is controlled to transition to the time reduction state when the number of consecutive times the special lottery is not won (time reduction transition count) reaches a predetermined number (time reduction transition count). Note that since the special condition time reduction has an aspect of being a relief when it is difficult to win the special lottery, the time reduction transition count may not be updated when the probability of winning the special lottery is high.

Furthermore, in normal gameplay, the second starting gate 2004 is not opened. Therefore, the time-saving mode transition count is updated only if the special lottery held when a game ball enters the first starting gate 2002 is not won. Note that if the game machine allows game balls to enter the second starting gate 2004 even outside of the time-saving mode, the time-saving mode transition count may also be updated when a game ball enters the second starting gate 2004. In other words, as mentioned above, if the normal gameplay state is designed to have a high probability of winning the regular lottery, just like the time-saving mode, then a game ball will enter the second starting gate 2004 in the normal gameplay state. Therefore, the time-saving mode transition count may also be updated upon this entry.

The update of the time-saving transition count is performed by a process called from the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process (step 01TKS0080) in the game-ready processing (Figure 354), and the specific processing details will be described later. The time-saving transition count may be updated by adding to zero, or by subtracting from the number of time-saving transitions as the initial value. Examples of updating the time-saving transition count by addition and by subtraction will be described separately later.

In the addition-based update method, the game transitions to the time-saving state when the time-saving transition count reaches the number of time-saving transitions. Since the time-saving transition count stored in the main control RAM 1312 matches the actual time-saving transition count value during game control program execution, debugging and other management can be easily performed.

On the other hand, with subtraction-based updates, the system transitions to the time-saving state when the time-saving transition count becomes zero. When updating by subtracting the time-saving transition count, the time-saving transition count will never exceed the number of time-saving transitions, thus reducing the capacity of the area in the main control RAM 1312 that stores the time-saving transition count. Furthermore, it becomes possible to simplify the control related to the time-saving transition count when the number of time-saving transitions is reached. For example, when updating by adding to the time-saving transition count, control is required to stop the addition when the number of time-saving transitions is reached. However, if the comparison value is zero, it can be processed with a single instruction, simplifying control and reducing program size and speed.

The game transitions to a time-saving state under special conditions, and if the time-saving state continues for a predetermined number of times without winning the special lottery, it returns to the normal game state. In this embodiment of the game machine, when returning to the normal game state from the time-saving state under special conditions, it is configured not to transition to the time-saving state under special conditions again until the time-saving transition count is cleared. This is because the number of time-saving transitions will not be reached again unless the conditions for clearing (initializing) the time-saving transition count are met. Naturally, if the time-saving transition count is cleared at the time of returning to the normal game state, it becomes possible to transition to the time-saving state under special conditions, and the system may be implemented in this way.

[25. Special conditions for reduced working hours (reduced working hours transition count: added/updated)]
As mentioned above, the time-saving transition count, which is used to control the transition to the time-saving state due to special conditions, is updated by addition or subtraction. Here, we will describe an example in which the time-saving transition count is updated by addition.

[25-1. Control of shortened time state due to special conditions]
[25-1-1. Control of the shortened time state from start to end due to special conditions]
First, the control of the special condition time reduction from start to finish will be explained chronologically, referring to the timing chart. The condition for starting the special condition time reduction is that if the time reduction transition count is cleared and the special lottery is not won for 300 consecutive times (number of time reduction transitions), the player will transition to the time reduction state. The maximum number of times the time reduction state can continue is 100, and the maximum number of times the time reduction state can continue under normal time reduction and the maximum number of times the time reduction state can continue under special condition time reduction are the same, but they may be different. It is preferable that the number of times since the time reduction transition counter was cleared for the special condition time reduction to start is about three times the so-called jackpot probability (jackpot probability under normal circumstances) (for example, 800 to 900 times). It is also preferable that the number of times time reduction is granted under special condition time reduction be within a range of about three times the jackpot probability (for example, 900 times or less). It is preferable that the number of times time reduction is granted be different for each setting, or it may be the same regardless of the setting, but it is preferable that it be within a range of about three times in any setting.

Here, we will explain the state of each configuration in the control for transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions. Figure 397 is a timing chart illustrating the control for transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The timing chart shown in Figure 397 explains the control from the clearing of the time-saving transition count due to winning the special lottery to the transition to the time-saving state due to special conditions.

Time t1 is the timing when the jackpot ending sequence, which is executed at the end of the jackpot game state resulting from winning the special lottery, ends, i.e., the timing when the game transitions to the time-saving state. While the jackpot game state continues, the value of the time-saving transition count for the symbol variation of the special lottery that led to the transition to the jackpot game state is set. Referring to Figure 397, the time-saving transition count, the remaining number of times the special condition is met, and the time-saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor are set to the same value from the time the jackpot game state is entered until it ends. Regarding the remaining state count, since it is set to the number of times the jackpot game state continues, it may be set to "1," or it may be set to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Furthermore, the performance display monitor may also display information related to game performance, such as base values and setting values, in addition to the time-saving transition count value.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the time-saving mode transition count is cleared at the timing when the jackpot ending is completed, that is, at the timing when the game transitions to the time-saving mode. In the example shown in Figure 397, the time-saving mode transition count is updated by adding to it, so the time-saving mode transition count is set to "0". If the time-saving mode transition count is updated by subtracting from it, the number of time-saving mode transitions (300 times) is set. Further details regarding the clearing of the time-saving mode transition count will be described later.

Furthermore, when the time-saving transition count is cleared, the remaining number of times the special condition is met is set to "300," and the remaining number of times the time-saving state is maintained is set to "100." Since the remaining number of times the special condition is met can be calculated based on the time-saving transition count and the number of time-saving transitions, it may be calculated when necessary, for example, when sending the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is met (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that when updating the time-saving transition count by subtraction, the remaining number of times the special condition is met and the time-saving transition count will be the same value and may be stored in the same variable within the program. This reduces the memory capacity required.

Time t2 is the timing when the special symbol variation display is first executed after transitioning to the time-saving state. The time-saving transition count is updated at the timing when the special symbol variation display begins, and after the update, it is reflected in the performance display monitor. At this time, commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the special symbol variation pattern, the symbol type of the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbol variation displays, the game state (time-saving state) at the start of the variation, and the remaining number of turns in the current game state. Details of each command are explained in Figure 400.

Time t3 marks the timing when the special symbol variation display ends. When the special symbol variation display ends, the remaining number of times the special condition is met is updated. At this time, commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct it to stop the special symbol variation display, to notify it of the game state at the time the special symbol variation stops, and to notify it of the updated remaining number of times the special condition is met. Details of these commands are explained in Figure 400.

After the stopping symbols are determined, the next variation display begins (time t4). Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends (time t5). At this point, the remaining number of times in the time-saving state becomes "0" and the update (counting) stops. However, the time-saving state transition count continues to count.

When the time-saving mode ends, the game returns to normal gameplay. At this time, the remaining number of normal gameplay states does not need to be managed (it cannot be managed), so it is not updated. However, when returning to normal gameplay, the remaining number of states may be treated as the remaining number of special condition fulfillment states. This is because, after clearing the time-saving mode transition count, if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times (time-saving mode transition count = 300 times), the game returns from normal gameplay to time-saving mode, and the normal gameplay state ends.

During normal gameplay, when the time-saving mode transition count reaches a predetermined number of times (300 transitions) and the corresponding display ends (time t6), the remaining number of times the special condition for transitioning to the time-saving mode becomes 0, the special condition is met, and the game transitions to the time-saving mode (special condition time-saving mode). Upon transitioning to the time-saving mode due to the special condition time-saving mode, the time-saving mode transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is met stop updating. Furthermore, a maximum number of times the time-saving mode can continue (100 times) is set for the remaining number of states. Note that if the time-saving mode transition count reaches the upper limit (300 transitions), the value is maintained without updating.

Subsequently, after transitioning to the time-saving state under special conditions, if the special lottery is not won before reaching the maximum number of times the time-saving state can be maintained (100 times), the game returns to the normal game state (time t7). At this point, since the end of the time-saving state under special conditions is not a condition for clearing the time-saving transition count, the values of the time-saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special conditions are met are maintained. Therefore, the game will not transition to the time-saving state under special conditions until the time-saving transition count is cleared.

By not making the end of the time-saving state due to special conditions a clear condition for the time-saving transition count, the occurrence of consecutive transitions to the time-saving state due to special conditions is suppressed. This prevents players' expectations from becoming too high. Furthermore, it becomes possible to adjust the base value of the gaming machine to prevent it from becoming too high, allowing for gameplay with appropriate settings.

[25-1-2. Clearing the conditions for transitioning to the reduced time state due to special conditions (initialization)]
In the special condition time reduction of the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the time reduction state is entered when the time reduction transition count is cleared and the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times consecutively. In this embodiment, the conditions (special conditions) for clearing (initializing) the time reduction transition count are (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) in a predetermined procedure, and (2) when the special lottery is won (after the jackpot game ends). The conditions for (2) when the special lottery is won (after the jackpot game ends) are as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) according to the prescribed procedure of condition (1). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as mentioned above, there are two types of operations for initializing (RAM clearing) the gaming machine: (a) operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone, and (b) operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone (first operation), the time-saving transition count is cleared. On the other hand, (b) when the setting key 971 is operated while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (second operation; setting change operation), the time-saving transition count is not cleared. This is because if the setting key 971 is required to clear the time-saving transition count, it will not be easy to clear the time-saving transition count. By making it easy to clear the time-saving transition count, the management of the special condition time-saving of the gaming machine can be easily performed by employees of the gaming parlor.

Unlike the example above, it is also possible to configure the system so that (a) the time-saving transition count is not cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, while (b) the time-saving transition count is cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the setting key 971 is also operated. Whether or not the time-saving transition count, which is a condition for granting special time-saving conditions, is cleared directly impacts the player's profit and is therefore important for the operation of the amusement arcade. For this reason, if the time-saving transition count is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971 (b), the management of this clearing can be limited to authorized personnel who possess the key necessary to operate the setting key 971, thus facilitating appropriate (safe) management in the amusement arcade.

[25-1-3. Updating the time-saving transition count after RAM clear operation]
Here, we will explain the control of the gaming machine when the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation) described above are performed. First, before explaining the control when each operation is performed, we will give an overview of the cases in which a RAM abnormal state occurs when the power is turned on.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, upon power-on, the system first determines whether the set value is abnormal (a value other than 0-5). If the set value is determined to be abnormal, the system resets to an initial value, clears the time-saving transition count, and sets the game state to a RAM abnormal state. If the set value is not determined to be abnormal, the system then checks the checksum, power-off flag, and RAM outside the game area. If any of these checks are found to be abnormal, the system is also set to a RAM abnormal state. In this case, except when the set value is determined to be abnormal, the time-saving transition count is not cleared and retains its value before power-off. Afterward, the game is stopped due to a RAM abnormality, and during timer interrupt processing, the system determines whether a RAM abnormality (including setting change/checking) is occurring. Based on the determination result, it decides whether or not to execute game-related processing.

The time-saving transition count is only set to its initial value when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, and at the end of the jackpot ending, except when the first operation is performed. At all other times, the initial value is not set. Furthermore, the system does not check whether the time-saving transition count value is abnormal or not. The reason for not checking for abnormalities in the time-saving transition count is that if the setting value is abnormal, the time-saving transition count is also likely to be abnormal, so it is considered sufficient to judge based solely on the abnormality of the setting value.

Next, we will explain the control when the first or second operation is performed and the power to the gaming machine is turned on, without the setting value being determined to be abnormal. Figure 398 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the power to the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on by performing the first operation. Figure 399 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the power to the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on by performing the second operation. In the examples shown in Figures 398 and 399, the time-saving transition count is cleared in the case of the first operation (operating the RAM clear switch 954 alone), and the time-saving transition count is not cleared in the case of the second operation (operating the setting key 971 while operating the RAM clear switch 954).

The example shown in Figure 398 illustrates the control of each configuration when the power is interrupted while gameplay is in normal mode, and the power is restored while the first operation is being performed. In this case, the time-saving transition count is cleared during the initialization process when the power is restored.

When the power is cut off at time t11, the display of the special symbols is interrupted, and the performance display monitor is turned off. At this time, the time-saving transition count is maintained in a predetermined area within the main control RAM 1312 by the backup power supply, even during the power outage. At this time, the value of the time-saving transition count is "249".

Subsequently, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (first operation), and the power is turned on (time t12), triggering the initialization process (Figure 21, etc.). At this time, because the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the game control work area of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared. Also, because the first operation is performed, the time-saving transition count value is cleared during the initialization process (time t13). Furthermore, in this embodiment of the game machine, the time-saving transition count value is not reflected in the performance display monitor immediately after being cleared, but rather in the performance display monitor processing (step 01TKS0070) executed by the timer interrupt processing after the initialization process is completed. Note that if information is displayed on the performance display monitor after power-on, the time-saving transition count value before the power outage is displayed on the performance display monitor. On the other hand, if the performance display monitor display is updated only by the performance display monitor processing executed by the timer interrupt processing, the time-saving transition count value will not be displayed until gameplay is resumed, and after gameplay resumes, the time-saving transition count value after clearing ("0") will be displayed.

Once the initialization process is complete, the game resumes with the time-saving transition count value cleared (time t14). Because interrupts are permitted during the initialization process, a timer interrupt is executed, and the cleared time-saving transition count value is reflected on the performance display monitor via the performance display monitor process. Then, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot, the special symbol variation display begins, and the time-saving transition count is updated at the start of the variation display. Note that the time-saving transition count is updated after it is displayed on the performance display monitor; therefore, the display on the performance display monitor is reflected in the next interrupt following the time-saving transition count update.

Next, referring to Figure 399, we will explain the control of each configuration when the power is interrupted while gameplay is continuing in the normal game state, and the power is restored while performing the second operation. In this case, the setting change function is executed during the initialization process when the power is restored, but the value of the time-saving transition count is maintained at the value before the power interruption.

When the power is cut off at time t21, the display of special symbols is stopped and the performance display monitor is turned off, similar to the state at time t11 shown in Figure 398. Then, when the power is turned on (time t22) while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 (second operation), the initialization process is executed. At this time, the main control RAM 1312 game control work area is cleared, but the time-saving transition count value is maintained. After the initialization process is executed, the system enters setting mode (time t23). During setting mode, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to clear the work area for game control by specifying a region. For example, even if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, the region where the setting value information is stored is not initialized (RAM cleared), and the stored contents remain intact. Therefore, when initializing the gaming machine by performing the second operation, the region where the time-saving transition count is stored is excluded from the initialization (RAM clear) target, and the gaming machine is restarted while maintaining the time-saving transition count.

In this way, if the game machine is initialized while performing the second operation, the time-saving transition count (249) from before the power outage remains even after the initialization process is completed. Then, after the game resumes at time t24, the time-saving transition count value from before the power outage (time t21) is displayed when the special symbol variation display begins. Subsequently, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot, the special symbol variation display begins, and the time-saving transition count is updated at the start of the special symbol variation display. The updated time-saving transition count is then displayed on the performance display monitor by the performance display monitor process executed at the next interrupt timing.

Furthermore, if a value equivalent to the time-saving transition count is displayed on the LCD screen to notify the player of the occurrence of a special time-saving condition, the screen will remain displayed even if the time-saving transition count is cleared. The LCD screen display is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the display is updated based on the transmission of a command from the main control board 1310 notifying the value equivalent to the time-saving transition count when gameplay resumes. This eliminates the need for special control on the peripheral control board 1510 when the time-saving transition count is cleared, thereby suppressing the complexity of the control. Note that the screen display may be cleared in the event of an abnormality.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a means for confirming the value corresponding to the time-saving transition count, regardless of whether or not the value corresponding to the time-saving transition count is displayed on the LCD screen. The confirmation means may be displayed on the LCD display device, on a display unit such as the function display unit 1400, or on any other display device. In this gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the value of the time-saving transition count is displayed on the performance display monitor.

When the time-saving transition count is cleared, a common notification sound is output for both the first and second operations. In the case of the second operation, the notification sound may be output at the timing of the setting key 971 operation. In this case, the RAM clear process may be executed after the setting change is confirmed, or the RAM clear may be performed before the setting change, and then the setting change may be confirmed. The output of the notification sound can be terminated by a predetermined operation. For example, this may be done by ending the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, or by turning off the power of the gaming machine. When the first and second operations are executed, not only the notification sound but also the display on the LCD display may be common. In this case, it is not necessary for the entire screen display to be common; at least a part of it should be common. This prevents the player from realizing whether or not the time-saving transition count has been cleared due to an abnormality during gameplay, thereby reducing the possibility of causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, different notification sounds may be used for the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation). In this case, a common sound may be output as background music, while different sound effects and voice announcements may be used for each operation (for example, "RAM has been cleared" during a RAM clear operation, and "Settings have been changed" during a setting change operation) to distinguish between the states where the RAM has been initialized.

As described above, an example was explained in which the time-saving transition count is cleared when (a) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, and (b) the time-saving transition count is not cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the setting key 971 is also operated. However, it is also possible to control the system so that the time-saving transition count is not cleared when (a) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, and so that the time-saving transition count is cleared when (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the setting key 971 is also operated. Furthermore, it is also possible to clear the time-saving transition count in both cases: (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone, and (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while the setting key 971 is also operated.

Furthermore, in both operations (a) and (b), the RAM is cleared, and the data content related to the monitor display is also reset (cleared). From a hall operation perspective, it is considered convenient to clear the monitor display at the same time as clearing the time-saving transition count, so the monitor display is also cleared. However, since the monitor display is updated along with the time-saving transition count, it is acceptable to maintain it as is without resetting (clearing) it at the time of RAM clearing. This reduces the processing required to reset (clear) the monitor display, thereby reducing program size.

[25-2. Commands related to special conditions and time reduction]
During the control process from the initial entry into the first starting gate 2002 to the end of the display of special symbols based on the special lottery resulting from that entry, various commands are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to execute effects corresponding to the progress of the game. Based on these commands, effects corresponding to special time reduction conditions are also executed. The following describes each command.

Figure 400 shows an example of commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The commands shown in Figure 400 are only a partial representation; various other commands may be included as needed. Each command consists mainly of a "status" indicating the command type and a "mode" indicating the detailed content of the command, each consisting of two bytes.

[25-2-1. Special Prize Winning Related Commands]
When a starting prize is won at the first starting gate 2002, a special lottery is executed in the special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing, and commands related to the starting prize and the special lottery are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. For example, these commands include instructions to execute effects associated with starting prize winning (increase in the number of reserved operating balls) and pre-read effects based on the pre-determination results of the special lottery. The pre-determination of the special lottery is performed based on the starting memory (random value) acquired at the time of starting prize winning.

In the table shown in Figure 400, commands categorized as "Special Prize Win" correspond to these commands. The "Starting Gate Win Command" is sent when a game ball enters the starting gate. At this time, a different command may be used for each starting gate, or it may be identified by the "Mode" value.

The "Special Symbol Reserve Count Specification Command at Winning" is a command for transmitting the number of active reserves when a prize is won at the starting gate. It is transmitted when a prize is won at the starting gate, i.e., when the number of active reserves increases. It may also be transmitted only if the pre-draw is successful and the pre-read animation can be executed. Whether or not the pre-read animation is actually executed may be determined by the peripheral control board 1510, or the pre-read animation (a so-called false animation) may be executed even if the prize is not won.

Furthermore, the "Special Symbol Reserve Count Specification Command at Winning" may, similar to the "Special Symbol Reserve Count Specification Command at Start of Variation," set separate "Statuses" for Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, and specify the number of active reserves in "Mode." Alternatively, the "Status" may be a common value, with the higher bits of "Mode" identifying either Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2, and the lower bits identifying the number of active reserves.

The "Special Symbol Type Pre-read Command" and the "Variation Pattern Pre-read Command" are sent when the pre-determination of the special lottery is successful. They may be sent together with the "Special Symbol Reserve Count Specification Command at Winning," but only before the pre-reading animation is executed on the peripheral control board 1510. The "Special Symbol Type Pre-read Command" is a command that notifies the type (type of win) of the special symbol (stopping symbol) identified during the pre-determination of the special lottery. The "Variation Pattern Pre-read Command" is a command that notifies the variation pattern of the special symbol's variation display. The "Special Symbol Type Pre-read Command" and the "Variation Pattern Pre-read Command" may be separate commands with different "statuses" for Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2, or they may be distinguished by a "mode" value as a common "status" value.

[25-2-2. Special Pattern Fluctuation Related Commands]
If the special symbol variation display continues after a win in the starting slot, the start memory acquired at the time of the start win is retained up to a predetermined limit. When the ongoing special symbol variation display ends, the special symbol variation display based on the retained start memory begins. When the special symbol variation starts, commands related to the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display) corresponding to the result of the special lottery and commands related to the game state when the special symbol variation display game is executed are sent.

In the table shown in Figure 400, commands categorized as "Special Symbol Variation" correspond to these commands. Variation pattern commands, symbol type commands, and symbol stop commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 for Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2. The system may specify whether it is Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2 by "Status" or by "Mode." In the example shown in Figure 400, the system specifies whether it is Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2 by "Status," and different values are set for "Status" depending on whether it is Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2. The following is an overview of each command. This section explains Special Symbol 1, but the configuration is similar for Special Symbol 2.

The "Special Symbol Reserve Count Specification Command at Start of Variation" is a command used to transmit the number of reserved special symbols at the start of their variation display. It is transmitted when the special symbols begin to vary, i.e., when the number of reserved special symbols decreases. Alternatively, separate "Statuses" may be set for Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, and the number of reserved special symbols may be specified in "Mode." Alternatively, the "Status" may be a common value, with the upper byte of "Mode" identifying either Special Symbol 1 or Special Symbol 2, and the lower bit identifying the number of reserved special symbols.

The "Special Symbol 1 Variation Pattern Command" is a command that notifies the variation pattern in the variation display of Special Symbol 1, and is sent when the variation of Special Symbol 1 begins. The "Special Symbol 1 Symbol Type Command" is a command that notifies the type of symbol in the variation display of the result symbol 1 of the special lottery, and is sent when the variation of Special Symbol 1 begins, specifically immediately following the transmission of the "Special Symbol 1 Variation Pattern Command."

The "Special Symbol 1 Stop Command" is transmitted when the variation display of Special Symbol 1 ends, that is, after the variation time has elapsed. Upon receiving the "Special Symbol 1 Stop Command," the peripheral control board 1510 terminates the animation related to the variation display of Special Symbol 1 and displays the result of the special lottery.

The "Special Symbol 2 Variation Pattern Command," "Special Symbol 2 Symbol Type Command," and "Special Symbol 2 Symbol Stop Command" notify the peripheral control board 1510 of information about Special Symbol 2 instead of Special Symbol 1.

[25-2-3. Status-related commands]
Furthermore, the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it of information regarding the game state. Based on the notified command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a performance corresponding to the game state. The command notifying it of information regarding the game state includes a command notifying it of the current game state and a command notifying it of information regarding the transition to another game state.

In the table shown in Figure 400, commands with the category "Status" correspond to these commands. The "Power-On Status Command" is a command that notifies the game state at the time of power-on. After power is restored, it notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the game state identified from the backed-up RAM information, and causes the corresponding game state to be executed.

The "Special Symbol Variation State Command" is a command that notifies the game state at the start of the special symbol variation, and executes the corresponding effects as needed. At this time, the command may be distinguished by using different "statuses" for each game state, or it may be distinguished by a common "mode" as the "status."

The "Special Symbol Stop State End Command" is a command that notifies the game state at the end of the special symbol's variation. If necessary (for example, if the game state changes), it executes the animation corresponding to the notified game state. Furthermore, it may be configured to update (initialize) parameters related to the game state upon receiving this command.

The "Remaining State Count Command" is a command that notifies the number of times the current game state will continue (the number of times the special symbol variation display game will be executed). The remaining state count is notified after being subtracted as the game progresses. Since the remaining state count can be set to a value greater than 1 byte (255) (2 bytes), it is sent by splitting it into a command to send the upper byte and a command to send the lower byte. The "Transition Destination Command at End of Variation" is a command used to specify the destination game state when transitioning from the current game state to another game state.

Alternatively, instead of using the "Special Symbol Stop State End Command," the transition to other game states may be determined by the change in the "Remaining State Count Command." In this case, the transition to a game state can be determined when the remaining state count changes from "1" to "0." Since the normal game state continues unless a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special lottery is won and the game transitions to a time-saving state), it is not possible to define the remaining state count for the normal game state. Therefore, for reasons such as simplifying the program, it may be possible to implement the system so that the command continues to be sent even when the remaining state count is "0." In this case, the transition to a game state must be determined not only by the remaining state count, but also based on the change in the remaining state count.

Furthermore, by notifying the remaining number of turns, it becomes possible to execute a countdown animation that suggests a transition to a new game state. For example, in the countdown animation, the notification of the remaining turns begins only after a specific number of turns has been reached before transitioning to the time-saving state. The normal animation continues until this specific number is reached.

Furthermore, depending on the number of remaining states notified, it becomes possible to suppress the execution of pre-announcement animations to prevent discrepancies between the content of the pre-announcement animation and the actual lottery result, which can occur when the game state at the time of the initial win differs from the game state at the time of the lottery. For example, if the variable pattern tables are separated into the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the pre-announcement animation can be prohibited for a predetermined number of remaining states (maximum number of reserved states) before switching to the time-saving state's variable pattern table.

Even if the pre-announcement animation is suspended during the countdown animation, the probability of winning does not change, although there is still a possibility of winning the special lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, if the special lottery is won during the countdown animation, the countdown animation is interrupted and terminated without resuming, even if there are remaining countdown animation attempts. This is because winning the special lottery transitions the player to a different game state than the one indicated by the countdown animation.

Furthermore, if a RAM error occurs during the execution of the countdown animation, the countdown animation will be interrupted. Even if the gaming machine can be restarted successfully, the ongoing countdown animation will be stopped, and gameplay will resume in the normal state. This is because restarting the gaming machine (re-energizing) to resolve the RAM error resets values such as the remaining state count, making it impossible to continue gameplay from the state before the interruption. In addition to RAM errors, if a magnetic anomaly or other issue is detected, causing the game to stop, the countdown animation will also be interrupted, and gameplay will resume from the normal state even after the magnetic anomaly is resolved. Since magnetic anomalies cannot occur under normal gameplay conditions (they can only occur through fraudulent operation), the countdown animation is interrupted to intentionally reduce the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a minor malfunction such as a ball jam occurs and the door is opened to resolve the issue, the countdown animation will be temporarily interrupted. At this time, the game will resume and the interrupted countdown animation will restart once the door is closed again after the jam is resolved. In other words, if the door is opened during the countdown animation, the animation will be temporarily interrupted, but will resume upon closing the door. Since ball jams are malfunctions that can occur without fraudulent activity, and opening the door is a common maintenance procedure, restarting the game from the initial state without resuming the animation after interruption could diminish the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, this embodiment of the gaming machine is controlled to continue the game.

The gaming machine of this embodiment has multiple factors that can interrupt the execution of the countdown animation. Depending on the interruption factor, it is possible to decide whether to resume the countdown animation or leave it interrupted. Therefore, if a factor that allows for resumption occurs during the countdown animation, the animation can be resumed after the interruption factor is resolved, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the interruption factor involves a special situation (such as a RAM malfunction), the countdown animation will not be resumed, preventing it from being restarted unnecessarily in situations where it should not be executed.

Furthermore, even if the remaining number of times the special condition is met reaches a predetermined number of remaining times that the variable pattern table for the time-saving state is switched to, the execution of the pre-announcement effect may be performed without prohibition. In this case, a pre-announcement effect different from the normal one may be performed. For example, if the remaining number of times the special condition is met (the number of times remaining until the transition to the time-saving state) is within the predetermined number of remaining times and the lottery is won by the reserved start memory, an effect that notifies that the special condition time-saving will not occur (special condition time-saving occurrence suppression effect) may be performed. This allows the player to be influenced by the fact that an effect is performed that notifies the player that the special condition time-saving will not occur, even though it should have occurred. Thus, the special condition time-saving function is activated after a predetermined number of spins have finished following the end of a big win (or the end of a probability variation). However, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, if the remaining spins until transitioning to the time-saving state are within a predetermined number of spins and the draw is successful based on the start memory), the system may internally decide to suppress the activation of the special condition time-saving function. Based on this decision, a special pre-announcement effect (special condition time-saving suppression effect) may be executed during the period when the remaining spins display shows a predetermined number of spins.

As described above, by notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the remaining number of state counts from the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to diversify the variety of effects by suggesting useful information to the player, and to suppress discrepancies between the effects and the actual lottery results, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as described above, if the time-saving transition count is cleared (initialized) and the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times, the machine transitions to a time-saving state (special condition time-saving). Therefore, the number of consecutive times the special lottery is not won (time-saving transition count) is counted by the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 then creates a "remaining number of times the special condition is met command" based on the counted time-saving transition count and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. If the time-saving transition count is updated by addition, the remaining number of times the special condition is met is calculated from the difference between the number of time-saving transitions and the time-saving transition count. If the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the time-saving transition count should be matched to the remaining number of times the special condition is met.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit only a command indicating the value of the time-saving transition count, without generating and transmitting a command indicating the remaining number of times the special condition is met to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 calculates the remaining number of times until the special condition is met by performing a predetermined calculation process based on the command indicating the value of the time-saving transition count. Specifically, when the time-saving transition count is cleared, it is set to "0," and when the time-saving transition count is updated by adding to it, the calculation result (time-saving transition count - command value (time-saving transition count)) managed by the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed as the remaining number. If the number of time-saving transitions differs for each model (series), the model may be identified from a command including the model specifications received at power-on, and the number of time-saving transitions may be selected from a predefined time-saving transition count table. On the other hand, when the time-saving transition count is cleared, the number of time-saving transitions is set, and when the time-saving transition count is updated by subtracting to it, the count value of the received command indicating the value of the time-saving transition count may be used directly and displayed as the remaining number.

When the number of remaining special condition fulfillments reaches "0" and the game state transitions from normal game state to time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function, the value of the number of remaining special condition fulfillments remains "0" while the time-saving state continues. Furthermore, if the game transitions back to normal game state from the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function, the time-saving transition count is not cleared, and the number of remaining special condition fulfillments remains "0". Therefore, as described above, in this embodiment of the game machine, even if the game returns to normal game state from the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function, it is not possible to transition back to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving function until the time-saving transition count is cleared. In other words, even in the same normal game state, there are cases where the special condition time-saving function occurs and cases where it does not.

In addition to the commands illustrated in Figure 400, commands categorized as "Status" include the "Power-On Status Command," which notifies the game state at power-on, and the "Power-On Restoration Destination Command," which is sent immediately after the "Power-On Status Command" and can identify the destination for game control restoration.

[25-3. Control during transition to time-saving mode]
The normal time-saving mode is the same as the conventional control; after winning the special lottery and the jackpot game state that resulted from the activation of the continuous mechanism is completed, the game transitions to the time-saving mode. The effects during the time-saving mode are also the same as the conventional game control (effects during normal time-saving mode), for example, effects such as setting a different background than in the normal game state are performed.

In the special condition time-saving mode of this gaming machine, as explained in Figure 397, after the time-saving transition count is cleared, the game transitions to the time-saving state if the special lottery is not won for a predetermined number of consecutive times (time-saving transition count; 300 times in this embodiment) (i.e., the special condition is met). Specifically, the game transitions to the time-saving state when the remaining number of times the special condition is met changes from 1 to 0. The remaining number of times the special condition is met is obtained by subtracting the time-saving transition count from the time-saving transition count when the time-saving transition count is updated by addition, and is updated after the special symbol variation display ends. Note that if the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, it may be shared with the time-saving transition count. When the remaining number of times the special condition is met becomes 0, the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the time-saving state during the game-ready processing of the timer interrupt. At this time, an upper limit (100 times) is set for the remaining number of times the time-saving state is met.

Here, we will explain an example of screen transitions (presentation patterns) when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions. Figure 401 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in Figure 401, (A) shows the state where the symbols have stopped in the last symbol change of the normal game state before transitioning to the time-saving state. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, no effects such as countdown effects are executed until the change immediately before transitioning to the time-saving state, but as shown in (B), the time-saving state entry effect is executed when the transition to the time-saving state is confirmed.

Furthermore, when the transition to the time-saving mode is approaching, a countdown animation may be implemented that displays the remaining number of spins until the transition to the time-saving mode occurs. For example, if the remaining number of spins is less than or equal to a predetermined number (e.g., 10 spins), the remaining number of spins may be displayed. Alternatively, instead of explicitly showing the remaining number of spins, an animation may be used to suggest the transition to the time-saving mode, such as by displaying a character or changing the background color.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, when the game transitions to the time-saving mode, the background changes from the normal game mode background to the time-saving mode background, allowing the player to recognize that they have entered the time-saving mode. After the time-saving mode entry animation is performed, the time-saving mode screen shown in (C) is displayed. The background of the time-saving mode screen is different from that of the normal game mode screen. In the example in Figure 401, for convenience, the background of the normal game mode screen is a single color (colorless), while the background of the time-saving mode screen is shaded. In practice, it is sufficient for the normal game mode screen and the time-saving mode screen to be different; in addition to the background color, the appearance of the animation symbols may also be different, or different characters may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode of this gaming machine, the game balls are launched into the right-hand area of the game area (right-handed shooting), so the time-saving mode screen displays instructions to shoot to the right. The remaining number of spins until the time-saving mode continues is also displayed. Note that these contents do not need to be displayed, or other information may be displayed instead.

When the variable display symbols stop after a special condition has been met (Figure 401(A)), a special symbol stop command and a special symbol stop state termination command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 recognizes the termination of the current game state (normal game state) from the special symbol stop state termination command. Furthermore, after the symbol confirmation time has elapsed, the peripheral control board 1510 is notified that the number of remaining special condition fulfillments is 0 via the special condition fulfillment command, allowing it to determine that the game will transition to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving. Once the transition to the time-saving state due to the special condition time-saving is determined, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the time-saving state entry animation (Figure 401(B)).

When the special symbol variation begins (Figure 401(C)), the main control board 1310 transmits a variation start command along with a special symbol variation state command, a variation pattern command, and a variation symbol type command. These commands determine the variation time and content of the special symbol variation display based on the game state and the results of the special lottery. Specifically, a variation pattern table is identified for selecting a variation pattern, a variation pattern is selected from the identified table, and the corresponding effect is executed. An example of the variation pattern table will be described later in Figure 403. Along with these commands, a remaining state count command is transmitted to notify the remaining number of states in the time-saving state. The notified remaining state count command allows for the execution of a countdown effect showing the number of variations until the time-saving state ends. In the example shown in Figure 401(C), the remaining number of states in the time-saving state (100 times), identified by the remaining state count command, is displayed on the screen.

Furthermore, when the special symbol stops moving, a special symbol stop command is sent from the main control board 1310. At this time, a command indicating the remaining number of times the special condition is met is sent, setting the remaining number of times the special condition is met to "0". The transmission of this command continues until the time-saving transition count is cleared. Note that if the remaining number of times the special condition is met reaches 0, the transmission of the special condition meeting command may be prohibited until the time-saving transition count is cleared.

[25-4. Control at the end of the time-saving mode]
Next, we will explain the control at the end of the time-saving state. As mentioned above, the time-saving state ends if the player fails to win the special lottery after a predetermined maximum number of attempts. Even if the player wins the special lottery, the ongoing time-saving state will end, but the time-saving transition count will be reset, and a new time-saving state using the normal time-saving system will begin.

In a normal time-saving state, the time-saving transition count continues to update. Therefore, after transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal game state, if the remaining number of special state occurrences reaches zero, the game transitions to a time-saving state under special conditions. On the other hand, in a time-saving state under special conditions, the time-saving transition count stops updating when the game transitions to the time-saving state. Since the special conditions cannot be met until the time-saving transition count is cleared, the game does not transition to a time-saving state under special conditions.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even during a time-saving state, there are cases where the time-saving transition counter is updated and cases where it is not. In this case, the difference in the presentation during the continuation of the time-saving state may be used to allow the player to recognize whether the time-saving transition counter is being updated or not. If the player can recognize that the time-saving transition counter is being updated, they can expect to transition back to the time-saving state even after the current time-saving state ends, thereby increasing the player's anticipation and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the differences in the presentation during the shortened time state, for example, content such as "Shortened Time Transition Counter Updating" or "Shortened Time Transition Counter Stopped" may be displayed in the background, or in the background of the presentation symbols. Furthermore, different presentation symbols may be displayed depending on whether the shortened time transition counter is being updated or not. Additionally, the background display of the entire screen may be different, or a character indicating whether the shortened time transition counter is being updated or not may be displayed.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the presentation at the end of the time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures is made different from the presentation at the end of the time-saving state due to special conditions. Specifically, when the time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures ends, an explicit time-saving state termination presentation is executed, directly or indirectly suggesting the transition to the next time-saving state, and then the game transitions to the normal game state. On the other hand, when the time-saving state due to special conditions ends, no time-saving state termination presentation is executed, and the game transitions directly to the normal game state. However, regardless of which time-saving state ends, presentations such as background changes based on the transition to the normal game state are executed, so the player can recognize the end of the time-saving state itself.

Here, we will explain the specific presentation at the end of the time-saving state, referring to Figure 402. Figure 402 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition at the end of the time-saving state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 402(A) shows the state where there is one remaining turn of the time-saving state, that is, the time-saving state will end in the next spin.

If the currently running time-saving state is a special condition time-saving state, the normal animation for the time-saving state will be executed even for the final spin display (Figure 402 (B1)). Then, the final spin display will finish and the stop symbols will be displayed (Figure 402 (C1)). In other words, in the case of a time-saving state due to special conditions, even the 100th spin display will be controlled in the same way as the spin displays from the 1st to the 99th, and the animation content will be selected based on a common spin pattern table from the start to the end of the time-saving state.

When the symbol change display ends during the final spin in the time-saving mode, the game transitions to normal gameplay. When the time-saving mode ends due to special conditions, no ending animation is performed; instead, the background and other displays switch to those for normal gameplay, and the right-hand shooting indicators (arrows, text, etc.) for the time-saving mode are hidden. Furthermore, if there are any held symbols in memory, the symbol change display begins (Figure 402 (D)), and gameplay continues.

On the other hand, in the case of a shortened time state due to normal time reduction, a special effect indicating the end of the shortened time state is performed at the last variation display (Figure 402 (B2)), and further, an ending effect is performed after the symbols stop display to announce the end of the shortened time state (Figure 402 (C2)). The special effect and the ending effect may be a series of effects or separate effects.

Furthermore, the shortened spin times for non-reach special symbol combinations in both normal and special-condition shortened time modes may be the same, or they may differ for some non-reach combinations. However, the stop period (the time until the next spin begins) after a miss in the final spin should be longer in normal shortened time modes than in special-condition shortened time modes. This ensures sufficient time for the transition from normal shortened time modes to normal gameplay, and improves the enjoyment of the game by making the ending animation smoother. On the other hand, the stop period for the final spin in special-condition shortened time modes should be the same as or approximately the same as the stop periods for other spins.

When the time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures ends, unlike the time-saving state due to special conditions, the final (100th) variation display is controlled differently from the variation displays from the 1st to the 99th. At this time, the performance content is selected based on a variation pattern table (Figure 403(B)) different from the common variation pattern table (Figure 403(A)). This allows, for example, the variation time of the final variation in the time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures to be longer than the final variation in the time-saving state due to special conditions, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for subsequent gameplay. Furthermore, instead of switching only the final variation, the variation pattern table may be switched in stages according to the number of variations. For example, it may be switched at each stage: from the 1st to the 50th, from the 51st to the 80th, from the 81st to the 90th, and from the 91st to the 99th. For the 100th variation, the performance period after the end of the variation is set to be longer than the performance period defined in the variation pattern table for each stage.

Figure 403 shows an example of a variation pattern table in this embodiment. (A) is a table commonly used during normal time-saving states and may also be used for other game states (e.g., normal game states). (B) is a special table used in the final variation of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving. The commonly used table (A) and the special table (B) used in the final variation of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving differ in their variation times and presentation content when the special lottery result is a loss. Note that if the special lottery result in the final variation is a jackpot, no special presentations are executed; the normal jackpot presentation should be performed.

Subsequently, when the symbols stop during the final fluctuation display, the game transitions to the normal game state, similar to the time-saving state under special conditions (Figure 402 (D)), and the game continues. Once in the normal game state, the game proceeds with the same animations, regardless of whether the previous time-saving state was under special conditions or normal conditions. Therefore, if the player does not observe the special animations or ending animations at the end of the time-saving state, they will be unable to determine whether the special conditions will be met in subsequent gameplay. This encourages players to pay close attention to the series of animations, thereby enhancing their effectiveness.

The animations during the shortened time state are the same whether it's a special condition shortened time state or a normal shortened time state, with the exception of the final spin. By executing a special animation during the final spin of a normal shortened time state, it can be suggested that if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times thereafter, a special condition shortened time state will occur. This can increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the normal gaming state after the end of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the end of a time-saving state due to special conditions. Specifically, while the transition from a time-saving state due to special conditions to a normal gaming state where such a state does not occur again occurs is advantageous to the player because the transition from a time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures to a normal gaming state where such a state can occur again occurs is advantageous to the player. In addition, the normal gaming state after the end of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures may be made more advantageous to the player by shortening the variation time of special symbols compared to the normal gaming state after the end of a time-saving state due to special conditions. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state after the end of a time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures, the machine may be made more likely to execute effects that suggest the machine's setting value information, or to execute various pre-announcement effects.

The above explains the presentation patterns at the end of the time-saving state. Now, let's add some supplementary information regarding the relationship with the commands received from the main control board 1310 for the purpose of controlling the presentations described above. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the end of the time-saving state using the special symbol stop state end command. However, since this command is transmitted at the time the symbols stop during the final variation that ends the time-saving state, it may be limited to presentations that are only performed when the time-saving state has ended, potentially causing inconvenience. For example, since the time-saving state end presentation can only be performed after the symbol variation has ended, only short, restrictive presentations can be executed, potentially preventing the execution of highly engaging presentations.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as described above, a special effect different from the normal one is executed during the final symbol change in the time-saving state caused by the normal time-saving mode. Furthermore, if the end of the time-saving state is determined solely by the special symbol stop state end command, there is a risk that the special effect (end effect) will not be sufficiently entertaining. Therefore, by determining the end timing of the time-saving state based on the remaining number of states in the time-saving state included in the remaining state count command, it becomes possible to execute the effect including one or more changes before the end of the time-saving state. For example, by determining the end of the time-saving state at the timing when the remaining state count changes from 1 to 0, a special effect can be executed during the final change of the time-saving state. Since the remaining state count command is transmitted at the start of the symbol change, the final change of the time-saving state can be determined when the remaining state count is 1.

However, while it is possible to pre-determine the end timing of the time-saving state based on the remaining number of states, it is not possible to determine whether the currently running time-saving state is a normal time-saving state or a special condition time-saving state. Here, in the case of a normal time-saving state, the remaining number of special condition fulfillments continues to update and is at least greater than 0 (Figure 397). On the other hand, the execution of a time-saving state due to special conditions occurs after the special condition is fulfilled, and the remaining number of special condition fulfillments is 0. The remaining number of special condition fulfillments is transmitted from the main control board 1310 via the special condition fulfillment command after the symbol stop and symbol confirmation time has elapsed. Based on the remaining number of special condition fulfillments along with the remaining number of time-saving states, the system identifies whether the currently running time-saving state is a normal time-saving state or a special condition time-saving state, and determines whether or not to execute a special effect. If it is a normal time-saving state, a different variation pattern table is referenced during the final symbol variation to execute a different special effect. Conversely, if it is a special condition time-saving state, a common variation pattern table is referenced to prevent the execution of a special effect.

Therefore, by changing only the reference point in the variable pattern table, other controls can be kept common, allowing for the execution of distinctive effects while minimizing the complexity of game control (effect control).

Furthermore, when the game state changes from normal gameplay to a time-saving state, or vice versa, the execution of the pre-announcement animation may be stopped before and after the change in game state. This is because, in the case of a transition to a time-saving state via normal time-saving mode, the result of the special lottery may become highly probable, potentially leading to discrepancies in the pre-determination results. Also, since the animation style changes depending on the game state, this is to prevent the animation control from becoming overly complex and to avoid confusion for players due to changes in animation style. However, if the probability of winning the special lottery remains the same even after a change in game state, the pre-announcement animation may be continued, as at least there will be no discrepancy in the pre-determination results.

Furthermore, the period during which the execution of pre-announcement effects is prohibited can be determined by the maximum number of reserved symbols (e.g., 4). The start of the pre-announcement prohibition period can be determined by comparing the number of remaining special condition fulfillments with the period during which the execution of pre-announcement effects is prohibited (maximum number of reserved symbols) in the case of normal time-saving mode.

Furthermore, the command for the remaining number of attempts to trigger the special condition may not be sent every time there are attempts remaining, but rather only under specific conditions (for example, when the remaining attempts are very few (4 attempts)). This configuration prevents unauthorized detection of the remaining attempts command, thereby preventing the determination of the number of attempts until the special condition time reduction is activated. Additionally, if the command for the remaining number of attempts to trigger the special condition is sent every time, it may not be possible to send it immediately if it overlaps with other commands (resulting in an unsent command remaining in the command transmission buffer), potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game due to a delay in the start timing of the command-based effects. Therefore, by reducing the frequency of sending the command for the remaining number of attempts to trigger the special condition, it is possible to prevent delays in the start timing of effects caused by unsent commands remaining in the command transmission buffer.

[25-5. Variant Example]
In the gaming machine described above, a special condition was met if the special lottery, based on a game ball entering the first start opening 2002, failed to result in a win a predetermined number of times in a row, and the game would transition from normal gameplay to a time-saving state. In this case, if the number of reserved balls reached the limit, the time-saving transition count would not be updated, and the game would become monotonous, with players repeatedly losing lotteries until the special condition was met, which could lead to a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

[25-5-1. Counting ball entrance]
Therefore, as a modified example of the gaming machine of this embodiment, a gaming machine equipped with a counting ball entry unit 2007 capable of updating the time-saving transition count in addition to the first start port 2002 will be described. Figure 404 is a diagram showing a modified version of the gaming board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the gaming board 5 of this modified gaming machine, the counting ball entry unit 2007 is located on the left side of the game area (left-handed area) and above the side unit upper 2300. The configuration other than the counting ball entry unit 2007 is the same as that of the gaming board 5 shown in Figure 10, so its explanation will be omitted.

[25-5-2. Structure of the ball counting slot]
Figure 405 is a cross-sectional view of an example of a ball counting unit 2007 arranged in a modified version of the game board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The ball counting unit 2007 of this modified version is equipped with an opening 2007a that opens upward and can receive game balls flowing down the left side of the game area (left-handed area). Game balls received from the opening 2007a are guided to the ball counting port 2007b via a guide path 2007d formed inside. A sensor (not shown) that detects the passage of game balls is arranged inside the ball counting port 2007b, and the main control board 1310 counts the number of game balls that have entered based on the signal output from the sensor.

At the bottom of the guideway 2007d, a movable piece 2007c is positioned, which can slide between the front and rear of the game board 5. When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the front of the game board 5, game balls can enter the ball counting slot 2007b (ball entry permitted state). Conversely, when the movable piece 2007c is slid to the rear of the game board 5, game balls fall downward from the guideway 2007d, making entry impossible (ball entry denied state). The following describes the paths the game balls take within the ball counting slot unit 2007 for each state.

Figure 406 shows the movement path of game balls when the ball counting and ball entry unit 2007 of this modified embodiment is in the ball entry permission state, where (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view and (B) is a cross-sectional view.

When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the front of the game board 5 (ball entry permitted state), as shown in (A), the movable piece 2007c forms the bottom surface of the guide path 2007d. As a result, game balls received from the receiving opening 2007a are guided from the guide path 2007d to the counting ball entry opening 2007b, making them available for entry.

Figure 407 shows the movement path of game balls when the ball counting and ball entry unit 2007 of this modified embodiment is in a state where ball entry is not permitted, where (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view and (B) is a cross-sectional view.

When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the rear of the game board 5 (ball entry prohibited), the bottom surface of the guide path 2007d is not formed, and an opening that opens downwards is formed, as shown in (A). The opening is large enough for game balls to pass through, and game balls received from the receiving port 2007a fall (flow down) into the game area below the counting ball entry unit 2007. The fallen game balls roll towards the center in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 on the side unit upper 2300, and flow down towards the general prize entry port 2001 and the first start port 2002.

[25-5-3. Ball entry control for the ball counting slot]
As described above, the ball counting slot unit 2007 can switch whether or not balls can enter the ball counting slot 2007b by controlling the position of the movable piece 2007c. The main control board 1310 can control whether or not balls can enter the ball counting slot 2007b according to the game state, etc., by outputting a control signal to the drive body that operates the movable piece 2007c.

As a specific example of control, a gate section may be placed to transition the ball counting unit 2007 to a ball entry permitted state, and the ball entry permitted state may be maintained for a predetermined time upon passing through the gate. If the condition for transitioning the ball counting unit 2007 to the ball entry permitted state is the passage of a game ball through the gate, a lottery may be conducted when the game ball passes through the gate, or the ball entry permitted state may be guaranteed. Even when transitioning to the ball entry permitted state by lottery, since the purpose of this modified example is to make the special condition easier to meet, the probability of winning is set to approximately 100%. In this case, by placing the gate section above the ball counting unit 2007, game balls aimed at the gate section will be directed towards the ball counting unit 2007, allowing for smooth gameplay without the need for frequent ball targeting.

Furthermore, the ball counting unit 2007 may be set to allow ball entry when the reserve memory in the first starting port 2002 reaches its maximum number. This facilitates the updating of the time-saving transition count, thereby accelerating the transition to the time-saving state under special conditions. In particular, since players can aim for ball entry into the first starting port 2002 while aiming for the ball counting unit 2007, it becomes possible to continue updating the time-saving transition count even when the reserve number reaches its limit, thereby encouraging active continuation of the game. Also, if the reserve memory in the first starting port 2002 has not reached its maximum number, the ball counting unit 2007 can be set to deny ball entry, thereby suppressing excessive updates of the time-saving transition count and allowing for adjustment of the base value.

Furthermore, the ball counting unit 2007 may be configured to switch between a ball entry permitted state and a ball entry denied state at predetermined time intervals. In this case, if the number of reserved balls has reached its upper limit, the time for the ball counting unit 2007 to be in the ball entry permitted state may be set to a longer duration, as the time for ball entry into the ball counting unit 2007 is not updated by a ball entering the first starting opening 2002. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls has not reached its upper limit, in order to maintain the original gameplay, the time for ball entry into the ball counting unit 2007 may be set to a shorter duration (for example, shorter than the ball launch interval) to encourage players to aim for the first starting opening 2002.

Furthermore, the ball counting unit 2007 for counting the time-saving transition count may be placed not only in the left-handed area but also in the right-handed area, or in both left and right areas. This allows for the targeting of different game balls, increasing the variety of gameplay and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[25-5-4. Time-series changes in the time reduction transition count in this modified example]
Here, we will explain the time-series changes in the time-saving transition count for a gaming machine in which the time-saving transition count is updated when a game ball enters the ball counting unit 2007, with reference to the figures. Figure 408 is a timing chart showing the changes in the time-saving transition count in a modified example of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, we will explain the case in which the normal ball counting unit 2007 is in a ball entry permission state regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state.

As mentioned above, the time-saving transition count is updated at the start of the display of the special symbol 1's variation, or at the timing when the entry of a game ball into the counting ball entry slot 2007b is detected by the counting ball entry slot switch (not shown). Referring to Figure 408, when the time-saving transition count is "84", the display of the special symbol 1's variation starts, and the time-saving transition count is updated to "85" (time t101). While the display of the special symbol 1's variation continues, a game ball enters the counting ball entry slot 2007b, and the time-saving transition count is updated to "86" (time t102). Thereafter, the time-saving transition count is similarly updated by the display of the special symbol 1's variation or by the entry of a game ball into the counting ball entry slot 2007b. In the example shown in Figure 408, the time-saving transition count is updated when the ball counting slot switch changes from ON to OFF. However, it is also possible to update the time-saving transition count when the ball counting slot switch changes from OFF to ON.

[25-5-5. Lottery based on ball entry into the counting slot (starting prize slot)]
In the modified configuration described above, the time-saving transition count was updated when a game ball entered the counting ball entry slot 2007b of the counting ball entry unit 2007. In contrast, the counting ball entry slot 2007b may function as a prize entry slot capable of executing a lottery related to the granting of game value, independently of updating the time-saving transition count. In this case, the time-saving transition count should only be updated if the lottery is not won. Furthermore, a function to hold this lottery may be provided. In the case of a special lottery, a hold indicator is displayed on the LCD screen, but it is not necessary to notify the player of the lottery based on balls entering the counting ball entry slot 2007b.

The counting ball entry port 2007b capable of executing the aforementioned lottery may be designated as the second starting port 2004. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a special lottery is executed and the time-saving transition count is updated, provided the number of held balls is not at its upper limit. However, the time-saving transition count may be updated only if the special lottery is unsuccessful. Figure 409 is a timing chart for a modified version of the game machine of this embodiment where the second starting port 2004 functions as the counting ball entry port 2007b. In the example shown in Figure 409, even in normal gameplay, balls can enter not only the first starting port 2002 but also the second starting port 2004. The display of the corresponding special symbols begins in the order in which the balls enter the starting entry ports. The time-saving transition count is updated at the timing when the display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 begin.

Referring to Figure 409, with the time-saving transition count at "71," the display of special symbol 1 begins, and the time-saving transition count is updated to "72" (time t111). After the display of special symbol 1, a game ball enters the second starting gate 2004, so the display of special symbol 2 is executed immediately afterward (time t112). At the start of this display of special symbol 2, the time-saving transition count is updated to "73." Similarly, the time-saving transition count is updated each time the display of a special symbol corresponding to the starting gate into which the ball entered begins. Note that a common time-saving transition count is used regardless of the starting gate into which the ball entered.

Furthermore, even in normal gameplay, it is possible to enter the second starting slot 2004. When the time-saving transition count is updated after failing to win the special lottery, in normal gameplay, the system encourages entry into the first starting slot 2002, prioritizing the function of the second starting slot 2004 as a ball counting slot to avoid compromising gameplay. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002, a winning sound is output, while when a game ball enters the second starting slot 2004, no winning sound is output. Alternatively, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002, a specific display may be shown to allow the player to recognize that a ball has entered. In this case, when a game ball enters the second starting slot 2004, no specific display may be shown, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a ball has entered.

As shown above, this modified version allows the second starting port 2004 to function as a ball counting port. In normal gameplay, prioritizing the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2002 makes it easier to trigger special time-saving conditions without compromising gameplay. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly install a ball counting port, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced without increasing the design cost of the game board.

[25-5-6. Others]
The transition to the shortened time state under special conditions requires that the probability of winning the regular lottery be high at all times, because the continuous operation device for the special features cannot be activated since the special lottery has not been won. If the probability of winning the regular lottery is not high, even if the player transitions to the shortened time state, the second start opening 2004 will not become a winning entry point, making it difficult to win. On the other hand, if the probability of winning the regular lottery is high, the second start opening 2004 will become a winning entry point every time a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, which may impair the gameplay.

To resolve the above problem, the gate unit 2003 may have the same configuration as the ball counting unit 2007 described above. Specifically, in normal gameplay, the gate unit 2003 can be controlled to a state where ball entry is not permitted, thereby preventing the normal lottery from being executed. In time-saving mode, the gate unit 2003 can be controlled to a state where ball entry is permitted, thereby enabling the second starting gate 2004 to accept prizes.

Furthermore, the second starting port 2004 may have the same configuration as the ball counting port unit 2007 described above. By setting it to a state where ball entry is not permitted during normal gameplay and permitted during the time-saving mode, it is possible to control the system so that balls cannot enter the second starting port 2004 unless the time-saving mode is active.

[26. Special Conditions for Reduced Working Hours (Reduced Working Hours Transition Count: Deduction Update)]
The above describes an example where the time-saving transition count is updated by addition. Next, we will describe an example where the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction.

[26-1. Control of shortened time state due to special conditions]
[26-1-1. Control of the shortened time state from start to end due to special conditions]
First, we will explain the control from the start to the end of the special condition time-saving mode when the time-saving mode transition count is updated by subtraction. Similar to when it is updated by addition, the condition for starting the special condition time-saving mode is that the time-saving mode is entered when the special lottery is not won for 300 consecutive times (time-saving mode transition count) after the time-saving mode transition count is initialized. The same applies to other points, such as the maximum number of consecutive times the time-saving mode can continue.

The time-saving transition count, which controls the transition to the time-saving state due to special conditions, is updated by the state transition determination process, which determines whether the current game state will transition to another game state. The state transition determination process is called from the special symbol miss stop process, which is executed when a special symbol stops on a losing symbol. The special symbol miss stop process is called from the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process (step 01TKS0080) of the game-ready process (Figure 354), which is executed by the timer interrupt process (Figure 329).

The following describes the specific control of transitions between game states, including the shortened time state due to special conditions, with reference to a flowchart. Figure 410 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for determining whether or not to transition to a different game state in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the state transition determination process, it first sets the identification information to an initial value of "0" (step 03 TKS0010). The identification information is a variable that stores information for determining whether or not to transition the game state, and its value is set in the CPU's registers in subsequent processing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of time-saving rounds is 0, that is, whether the game state is a time-saving state (step 03 TKS0020). The number of time-saving rounds corresponds to the number of variations after the start of the time-saving state. In this embodiment, when the time-saving state starts, the number of continuations (for example, 100 times) is set as an initial value, and it is deducted by 1 each time the special symbols change. At this time, if the time-saving state is in effect, the number of time-saving rounds will be set to a value of 1 or more. Alternatively, the initial value may be set to 0, and the system may be controlled to increment by 1 each time.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the processing from step 03TKS0060 onwards if the number of time-saving cycles is 0, i.e., if the time-saving state is not active (the result of step 03TKS0020 is "yes").

On the other hand, if the number of time reductions is not zero, i.e., if the time reduction state is active (the result of step 03TKS0020 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 subtracts one from the number of time reductions (step 03TKS0030). Furthermore, to determine whether the current change is the final change in the time reduction state, it is determined whether the number of time reductions is zero (step 03TKS0040). If the number of time reductions is not zero, i.e., if the time reduction state continues (the result of step 03TKS0040 is "no"), the processing from step 03TKS0060 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of time-saving cycles is 0, that is, if the current change is the final change in the time-saving state (the result of step 03 TKS0040 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the identification information to "1" to indicate the end of normal time-saving (step 03 TKS0050).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a high-probability state (step 03TKS0060). If the game state is a high-probability state (the result of step 03TKS0060 is "yes"), the processing from step 03TKS0130 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high-probability state (the result of step 03TKS0060 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the time-saving transition count is 0 or not (step 03TKS0070). If the time-saving transition count is 0 (the result of step 03TKS0070 is "yes"), the processing from step 03TKS0130 onwards is executed.

If the time-saving transition count is not zero (the result of step 03TKS0070 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 decrements the time-saving transition count by 1 (step 03TKS0080). Furthermore, it determines whether the time-saving transition count is zero or not (step 03TKS0090). If the time-saving transition count is not zero (the result of step 03TKS0090 is "yes"), the processing from step 03TKS0130 onwards is executed.

The main control MPU 1311, if the time-saving transition count is 0 (resulting in "yes" of step 03TKS0090), determines whether the current game state is a time-saving state (step 03TKS0100). If the current game state is a time-saving state (resulting in "yes" of step 03TKS0100), it executes the processes from step 03TKS0130 onwards.

If the current game state is not the time-saving state (the result of step 03 TKS0100 is "no"), the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions are met, and the main control MPU 1311 sets "2" in the identification information to indicate the start of the special conditions time-saving state (step 03 TKS0110). At this time, the value corresponding to the time-saving state due to special conditions is set in the next state transition destination information (next state transition destination number area). Furthermore, in order to output a signal (external output signal) from the external terminal, the ON time is set in the external output 3 timer (step 03 TKS0120). By setting the ON time in the external output 3 timer, the signal of external output 3 is turned ON for the set ON time. The output timing of the external output signal will be described later in Figure 423.

The process up to step 03TKS0120 completes the setting of the identification information, and thereafter, the game state is transitioned based on the value of the identification information. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value of the identification information is "0" or not (step 03TKS0130). If the value of the identification information is "0" (the result of step 03TKS0130 is "yes"), there is no need to transition the current game state to another game state, so the state transition determination process is terminated.

If the value of the identification information is not "0" (the result of step 03 TKS0130 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a state transition process to switch the current game state to another game state (step 03 TKS0140). The state transition process determines the destination game state based on the identification information and sets the necessary information. Details of the state transition process will be described later in Figure 411. Once the state transition process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 sets commands corresponding to the end of the time-saving state or the reach of the time-saving transition count (state transition destination command at the end of variation, state end command at special stop) (step 03 TKS0150). Afterward, the state transition judgment process ends, and the system returns to the special symbol miss stop process.

Next, we will explain the state transition process, which is called from the state transition determination process, determines the target game state, and sets the necessary information. Figure 411 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the state transition process in this embodiment.

When the state transition process begins, the main control MPU 1311 sets the address of the state transition data for the next state transition destination based on the starting address of the state transition data and the next state transition destination information (the value in the next state transition destination number area) (step 03 TKS0210). The state transition data defines various data corresponding to the game state of the transition destination. Details of the state transition data will be described later in Figure 412.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 identifies the state transition data for the next state transition and sets the starting address of the work area where the state transition data will be set (step 03TKS0220). Furthermore, it sets the number of times the state transition data will be set (step 03TKS0230), reads the set values for the set number of times from the identified state transition data, and stores them in the predetermined work area (step 03TKS0240). Once the state transition data corresponding to the next state to be transitioned to is stored in the work area, the state transition process ends and the system returns to the state transition determination process.

Furthermore, state transition processing is executed not only when the special symbol miss stop process triggers the state transition determination process, but also when the game state changes. For example, it is executed when the game transitions to the high probability state at the end of the jackpot state, and when the time-saving state begins (transitions) at the end of the jackpot state.

By making the state transition judgment process and state transition process executable in common at the start of normal time-saving mode, the end of normal time-saving mode, the start of special condition time-saving mode, and the end of special condition time-saving mode, it becomes unnecessary to create separate processing for each game state transition, thus reducing program size. Furthermore, by commonizing the processing, debugging efficiency can be improved compared to creating separate processing for each state, thereby increasing the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Next, we will describe an example of the configuration of the state transition data and the work area that stores the state transition data. Figure 412 shows an example of the state transition data in this embodiment. The state transition data defines the number of times the state is maintained, the state flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, the next state transition destination number, and the number of times the state is displayed, corresponding to the game state after the transition. Note that the transition destination number is assigned for convenience in explanation. The contents of each item will be explained while referring to the work area that stores the state transition data (Figure 413).

Furthermore, the state transition data is not limited to the configuration shown in Figure 412. The information set when the game state changes can be modified or added as needed. For example, it should include at least a state flag that identifies the destination game state and the next state transition number.

Figure 413 shows an example of the configuration of the work area for storing state transition data in this embodiment. The work area for storing state transition data is allocated to a predetermined area within the main control RAM 1312. In addition to areas corresponding to each item of the state transition data, it includes an area for storing the number of state transition data items (number of state setting data, the "number of times state transition data is set" in the processing of step 03 TKS0230). When transitioning from the current game state to another game state, the state transition data corresponding to the destination game state is acquired and stored in the work area.

Next, we will explain the state transition data and each item in the work area where the state transition data is stored. The explanation for each item is provided in the remarks column of the work area in Figure 413.

The "State Maintenance Count" is the number of times the corresponding game state continues after a transition. For example, if it's a time-saving state, it will be the number of time-saving counts. The state flag is set to "0" for low-probability non-time-saving (normal game state), "1" for high-probability time-saving (probability-changing state), and "2" for low-probability time-saving. The probability-changing flag is set to "0" if the probability of winning the special lottery is low, and "1" if it is high. The time-saving flag is set to "0" when time-saving is not active, and "1" when time-saving is active. Note that to distinguish between time-saving due to special conditions and normal time-saving, you may set it to "2" when time-saving due to special conditions is active. The next state transition destination number is the destination number used to identify the next game state to transition to if the special lottery is not won within the number of state maintenance counts. The "State Display Count" is used to generate the time-saving remaining count command, but is essentially the same as the state maintenance count.

To explain in more detail, for example, if you win a normal time-saving mode a while in normal gameplay mode, the state transition process is called by the big prize opening end interval processing (at the end of the big win ending) (not shown) when the big win gameplay mode ends. In the state transition process, state transition data corresponding to normal time-saving mode a (transition destination number 2) is selected, and the following are set in each work area: state maintenance count "100", state flag "2", probability change flag "0", time-saving flag "1", next state transition destination number "1", and state display count "100". This sets the low probability time-saving mode to continue for 100 spins. When the time-saving mode due to normal time-saving mode a ends, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so the game returns to normal gameplay mode. In addition, probability change a (transition destination number 4) and probability change b (transition destination number 5) have the same setting values, but their performance modes are different. Note that the normal game state is set to "0" as the state transition data because the game state to which the player transitions varies depending on the result of the special lottery, and the next transition destination number is not defined. However, if the player transitions to the probability variation state a as a result of winning the special lottery while in the normal time-saving state a, even if there are remaining rounds in the time-saving state, after the jackpot game state ends, the state transition data corresponding to probability variation a (transition destination number 4) will be selected during the state transition process, and the game state will be transitioned.

The work area for storing state transition data has the following areas arranged from the beginning of the area, corresponding to the items of the state transition data: state maintenance count area, state flag area, probability change flag area, time reduction flag area, next state transition destination number area, and state display count command area. The state setting data count is allocated after these areas. Furthermore, the state maintenance count area and the state display count command area are allocated 2 bytes, while the state flag area, probability change flag area, time reduction flag area, and next state transition destination number area are allocated 1 byte.

In this embodiment, the state transition data has predetermined values and setting order. Therefore, by arranging the work areas according to the order in which the data included in the state transition data is set, it is not necessary to define the address of each work area in the state transition table. Here, the procedure for setting the values set in the state transition data to the work areas is as follows: First, the number of state setting data is obtained from the work area. Next, the value is obtained one byte at a time from the starting address of the state transition data to be set, and the obtained values are set sequentially from the beginning of the work area (state maintenance count area). This is repeated for the number of state setting data, updating the address from which the value is obtained and the address of the work area to which the value is stored. In this way, the acquisition of the value and the setting of the work area are repeated one byte at a time, so the data included in the state transition data is defined in units of one byte. For this reason, the state maintenance count and the state display count are divided into upper and lower bytes and defined individually. Also, the number of state setting data corresponds to the total number of bytes in each area, and in the program, the difference between the starting address of the work area and the address of the area that stores the number of state setting data is set. This eliminates the need to redefine the number of state setting data entries even if the number or size of data items included in the state setting data changes. It allows for general use without modifying the program, enabling flexible adaptation to specification changes and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Here, we will explain the data corresponding to each game state included in the state transition data. In the normal game state, the game state does not transition based solely on the number of spins, so the state maintenance count is set to 0. Note that the game may transition to the time-saving state if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times consecutively after the time-saving transition count is reset (special condition time-saving). However, since the game does not always transition to the time-saving state (for example, if the time-saving transition count has not been reset), the time-saving transition count is not set in the state maintenance count.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, three patterns are defined for the low-probability time-saving mode, where the probability of winning the special lottery is low. Specifically, these are: transitioning after winning the special lottery and after the jackpot game state (normal time-saving mode a); transitioning based on the result of the special lottery (normal time-saving mode b); and failing to win the special lottery a predetermined number of times consecutively after the time-saving mode transition count is initialized (special condition time-saving mode).

The above explains the state transition data and the items in the work area where the state transition data is stored. Each item in the state transition data is set to a value according to the game specifications, and the number of records increases or decreases depending on the type of game state. Furthermore, if the game state to which the player transitions after a specific game state ends is predetermined, setting the next state transition destination number to the number corresponding to the next state allows for control of the game state transition based on the information defined in the state transition data. This enables changing the game state transition destination without modifying the program code.

Figure 414 shows a modified example of the state transition data in this embodiment. In the example shown in Figure 412, when the game state transitioned to another game state due to the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (result of special lottery, time-saving transition count), the transitioned game state continued for a set number of state maintenance times, and then transitioned to the normal game state. In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 414, for example, in a normal time-saving win, the game state transitions in the order of normal time-saving a-1 state, normal time-saving a-2 state, and normal time-saving a-3 state. This makes it possible to have different presentation content for each game state, and for example, by associating presentation content with the game state, it becomes possible to execute presentations that progress step by step along with the transition of game states without requiring complex control. Alternatively, the table defining the variation time may be switched at the timing of the game state switch.

To further explain, if the special lottery results in a regular time-saving win, the state transition data for transition number "2" is set, and the regular time-saving state a-1 begins. After the state maintenance count (50 spins) is completed, since the next state transition number is set to "3", the game transitions to the regular time-saving state a-2, and the corresponding state transition data is set. Similarly, after the state maintenance count (30 spins) is completed, since the next state transition number is set to "4", the game transitions to the regular time-saving state a-3, and the corresponding state transition data is set. Finally, after the state maintenance count (20 spins) is completed, since the next state transition number is set to "1", the game transitions to the normal game state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. The same control applies to probability-changing wins.

In the case of special condition time reduction, when the condition is met (when the time reduction transition count value changes from 1 to 0), the state transition data for transition destination number "7" is set, and the special condition time reduction -1 time reduction state begins. After the state maintenance count (100 times) is completed, since "8" is set as the next state transition destination number, the game transitions to the special condition time reduction -2 time reduction state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. Furthermore, after the state maintenance count (700 times) is completed, since "1" is set as the next state transition destination number, the game transitions to the normal game state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. In this way, the gaming machine of this embodiment allows game state transitions to be performed simply by setting data, eliminating the need to create program code for game state transitions. This makes it possible to easily add or modify data to match specification changes.

Furthermore, the parameters set in the state transition data are not limited to the example shown in the figure; any information that switches according to the game state is acceptable. Specifically, it is sufficient to include information that identifies the timing of the game state transition (e.g., the number of state maintenances) and information that identifies the destination game state (e.g., the next state transition destination number). Other information can be set as needed. Specifically, this information may include information for identifying the game state, such as information indicating the probability of winning a special lottery or information indicating the probability of winning a regular lottery. By including information that identifies the game state after the state transition, the process of transitioning game states can be standardized, simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

The information used to determine the timing of the game state transition is, for example, the number of variations (number of special lottery executions, number of state maintenances) mentioned above. The game transitions to the next game state after a predetermined number of variations. Furthermore, before the predetermined number of variations are completed, the game may transition to another game state based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, such as winning a special lottery, regardless of the number of variations. Therefore, it is desirable to define not only game state transitions based on the number of variations, but also transitions based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, such as winning a special lottery. For example, an item corresponding to a specific flag can be defined in the state transition data, and the game state can be transitioned when that flag is set to ON. This flag check can be performed by a periodically executed process, such as a timer interrupt. Thus, the timing for executing the transition process based on the state transition data in conjunction with the transition of game states can include timing based on the number of special symbol variations and timing based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, such as the results of a special lottery. This allows for flexible timing of transitions between game states based on the game's progress, thereby suppressing the complexity of game progression control.

Furthermore, the information used to identify the target game state does not necessarily have to be the values set in the state transition data; the corresponding values can be set directly within the program processing. For example, when a game state transition occurs, the program can forcibly set the target game state and set various parameters other than the target game state in the state transition data. Specifically, in the case of special condition time reduction, the state transition data is referenced when the number of time reduction transitions reaches zero. However, by setting the setting number for special condition time reduction (7 in the case of Figure 414) as the next state transition destination number before executing the subroutine that references the state transition data within the program processing, the subroutine that references the state transition data can set the parameters corresponding to the transition destination number "7".

Furthermore, the system may be configured to include information regarding the game's state transition data, and to send a corresponding command to the peripheral control board 1510 (game performance control means) when the game state transitions. This makes it possible to include the process that triggers the start of the game performance within the series of processes associated with the transition of the game state, and to manage the processes related to the transition of the game state, including the game performance, as a whole.

Next, we will explain the control process for transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions, following a time-series explanation. Figure 415 is a timing chart illustrating the control process for transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The timing chart shown in Figure 415 explains the control process from the initialization of the time-saving transition count due to winning the special lottery to the transition to the time-saving state due to special conditions. Note that it operates the same way as the timing chart shown in Figure 397, but the method of updating the time-saving transition count is different. Also, the commands transmitted are the same as those shown in Figure 400, but the transmission timing of some commands differs.

Time t1 is the timing when the jackpot ending sequence, which is executed at the end of the jackpot game state resulting from winning the special lottery, ends, i.e., the timing when the game transitions to the time-saving state. While the jackpot game state continues, the value of the time-saving transition count for the symbol variation of the special lottery that led to the transition to the jackpot game state is set. Referring to Figure 415, the time-saving transition count, the remaining number of times the special condition is met, and the time-saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor remain the same because these values are not updated from the time the jackpot game state is entered until it ends. Regarding the remaining state count, since it sets the number of times the jackpot game state continues, it may be set to "1," or it may be set to the number of rounds in the jackpot game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the time-saving mode transition count is initialized at the time the jackpot ending is completed, that is, at the time the game transitions to the time-saving mode. In the example shown in Figure 415, the time-saving mode transition count is decremented and updated, so the time-saving mode transition count is set to the number of time-saving mode transitions (300 times). Further details regarding the initialization of the time-saving mode transition count will be described later.

Furthermore, when the time-saving transition count is initialized, the remaining number of times the special condition is met is set to "300," and the remaining number of times the time-saving state is maintained is set to "100." Since the remaining number of times the special condition is met can be calculated based on the time-saving transition count and the number of time-saving transitions, it may be calculated when necessary, for example, when sending the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is met (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that since the time-saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the remaining number of times the special condition is met and the time-saving transition count will be the same value and may be stored in the same variable within the program. This reduces the memory capacity required.

Time t2 is the timing when the special symbol variation display is first executed after transitioning to the time-saving state. In this embodiment, the time-saving transition count is updated at the timing when the special symbol variation display ends. The performance display monitor display may be updated simultaneously with the update, or it may be reflected at the start of the variation. By updating the time-saving transition count at the time of the confirmed time elapsed after the variation ends, rather than at the start of the variation, it is possible to process the update of the time-saving transition count and the transition to the time-saving state within the same timer interrupt. Details of the various commands are explained in Figure 400.

While it's possible to update the time-saving transition count at the start of the change, in this case, it's necessary to determine whether the time-saving transition count is "0" or not at the start of the change. If it's determined to be "0", the time-saving transition count is not updated. Furthermore, it's necessary to determine whether the time-saving transition count is "0" or not at the timing of the transition to the time-saving state (when the fixed time has elapsed). Therefore, the determination of whether the time-saving transition count is "0" or not must be performed twice: once at the start of the change and again at the time of the time-saving transition, which may complicate the program code.

When the remaining state count command is sent during the time-saving transition count update, the command is not sent during the first spin. Therefore, it is preferable to send the remaining state count command at the start of the spin. Furthermore, if the value of the remaining state count command is displayed as is, the special symbol spin will have already started by the time it is displayed. For example, if the remaining state count is 300, the actual remaining spin count is 299, so displaying 300 as is may mislead the player. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the remaining state count command, displays a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the notified remaining state count as the remaining state (spin) count.

Time t3 marks the timing when the special symbol variation display ends. Upon completion of the special symbol variation display, the remaining number of times the special condition is met is updated. At this time, commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510: a command instructing the stopping of the special symbol variation display, a command notifying the game state at the time the special symbol variation stops, and a command notifying the updated remaining number of times the special condition is met. Note that the command notifying the remaining number of times the special condition is met is sent not immediately after the special symbol variation stops, but after the symbol confirmation time has elapsed since the special symbol variation stopped. Details of these commands are explained in Figure 400.

After the stopping symbols are determined, the next variation display begins (time t4). Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends (time t5). At this point, the remaining number of times in the time-saving state becomes "0" and the update (counting) stops. However, the time-saving state transition count continues to count.

When the time-saving mode ends, the game returns to normal gameplay. At this time, the remaining number of normal gameplay states does not need to be managed (it cannot be managed), so it is not updated. However, when returning to normal gameplay, the remaining number of states may be set to the number of times the special condition is met. This is because, after the time-saving mode transition count is initialized, if the special lottery is not won for a predetermined number of consecutive times (time-saving mode transition count = 300 times), the game returns from normal gameplay to time-saving mode, and the normal gameplay state ends.

During normal gameplay, when the time-saving mode transition count reaches 0 and the current display ends (time t6), the remaining number of times the special condition for transitioning to the time-saving mode is met becomes 0, the special condition is met, and the game transitions to the time-saving mode (special condition time-saving mode). Upon transitioning to the time-saving mode due to the special condition time-saving mode, the time-saving mode transition count and the remaining number of times the special condition is met stop updating. Furthermore, a maximum number of times the time-saving mode can continue (100 times) is set for the remaining state count. The value of the time-saving mode transition count remains at 0 without updating.

Thus, although the time-saving transition count can be updated via timer interrupt processing, it is designed not to update when it reaches a predetermined value ("0"). Therefore, without determining whether the game is in the normal state after the special condition time-saving mode has ended, it is possible to prevent the special condition time-saving mode from activating until the next big win (when the initial value is set).

Subsequently, after transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions, if the special lottery is not won before reaching the maximum number of times the time-saving state can be maintained (100 times), the game returns to the normal game state (time t7). At this time, since the end of the time-saving state due to special conditions is not a condition for resetting the time-saving transition count, the values of the time-saving transition count and the remaining number of times the special conditions are met are maintained. Therefore, the game will not transition to the time-saving state due to special conditions until the time-saving transition count is reset.

[26-1-2. Clearing (initializing) the game area including the time-saving transition count]
As mentioned above, the conditions (special conditions) for initializing the time-saving transition count are: (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) using a predetermined procedure, and (2) when a special lottery is won (after the jackpot game ends). Here, unlike the example mentioned above, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone (first operation; RAM clear operation), the time-saving transition count is not initialized, and (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; setting change operation), the time-saving transition count is initialized.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, values necessary for game control, such as the time-saving transition count, are stored in an area allocated to the memory area provided by the main control RAM 1312. As described above, when a RAM clear operation is performed, the time-saving transition count is not initialized, while when a setting change operation is performed, the time-saving transition count is initialized. However, values such as the remaining state counts and the remaining number of special condition fulfillment counts are cleared (initialized) regardless of which operation is performed. The area cleared by the RAM clear operation is different from the area cleared by the setting change operation.

As described above, if the time-saving transition counter is not initialized during a RAM clear operation, and the remaining number of state counts and the remaining number of special condition fulfillment counts are cleared, the time-saving transition counter may not reach zero even though the command indicating the remaining number of state counts shows zero. This could lead to inconsistencies in the presentation. Therefore, to prevent inconsistencies in the presentation, if information other than the time-saving transition counter is cleared by a RAM clear operation, the peripheral control board 1510 either ignores the command regarding the remaining count sent from the main control board 1310 or prevents the main control board 1310 from sending such a command.

Figure 416 shows an example of the arrangement of values stored in the memory area provided by the main control RAM 1312 of the gaming machine in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 416, the time-saving transition count is located in area 9901 along with the setting state management area, which indicates the setting value and setting state in the setting mode of the gaming machine (e.g., setting change, setting confirmation). In this embodiment, area 9901 is located at the beginning of the memory area, but it is not limited to this and may be located in another area.

Furthermore, area 9902, distinct from area 9901, stores information such as probability variation flags, time reduction flags, remaining number of special condition activations, and remaining state counts. It also stores input/output port-related data, including input signals such as switches for detecting the entry of game balls into various prize slots; normal symbol-related data for normal lotteries and the display of normal symbol variations; special symbol-related data for special lotteries and the display of special symbol variations; and external information output-related data for outputting signals to the outside of the gaming machine.

The time-saving transition counter is normally located in area 9901. However, if the time-saving transition counter is initialized during either a RAM clear operation or a configuration change operation, it may be placed in area 9902 and cleared along with information from other areas, such as the time-saving flag. Furthermore, when a RAM clear operation or configuration change operation is performed, the time-saving transition counter is not directly initialized; rather, its value is cleared, and then a new initial value is set.

Area 9902 is an area that is cleared when either (a) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone (first operation; RAM clear operation) or (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; setting change operation) is performed. The starting address of area 9902 is defined as the "RAM clear starting address" (in this embodiment, "0005h"). During initialization, the area from the "RAM clear starting address" onward is cleared.

Area 9901 is not cleared when a RAM clear operation is performed, while area 9902 is cleared when a RAM clear operation is performed. Conversely, when a setting change operation is performed, area 9902 is cleared, while the time-saving transition count located in area 9901 is set to its initial value (300). Note that when the time-saving transition count is incremented, it is set to 0.

As described above, while the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation both clear the same RAM region (region 9902), they initialize (set initial values) different regions. Therefore, by unifying the process for clearing region 9902, program code can be simplified, improving development efficiency.

Furthermore, while area 9901, where the time-saving transition count and other data are stored, and area 9902, where the probability variation flag and other data are stored, are contiguous areas, it is also possible to place an empty area between areas 9901 and 9902. Placing an empty area increases the likelihood of preserving data in one area if data in either area 9901 or 9902 is corrupted due to a program bug or other issue.

Furthermore, the areas from area 9902 onward contain a stack area within the game area, a work area outside the game area, and another stack area outside the game area. The stack area within the game area is for temporarily storing data when programs related to game control are executed. The work area outside the game area is for temporarily storing data when programs for displaying information on the performance display monitor (base display unit 1317) are executed. The stack area outside the game area is for temporarily storing data necessary when processing is performed outside the game area (for example, processing to calculate base values). Although an empty area 9904 is located between area 9902 and the stack area within the game area, area 9902 and the stack area within the game area may be made into a continuous area without the empty area 9904. On the other hand, an empty area 9905 is located between the stack area within the game area and the work area outside the game area, and this area must always be included. A vacant area 9906 is located between the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area; however, the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area may be treated as a continuous area without providing area 9906.

Furthermore, the time-saving transition count may be initialized regardless of whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone or while operating the setting key 971. Additionally, the time-saving transition count may be initialized using operating means other than the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971. For example, an operating means may be provided to initialize (clear) only the setting values related to special condition time-saving, including the time-saving transition count. This allows for the maintenance of other game-related information and minimizes the impact on gameplay. For example, the setting values related to special condition time-saving can be initialized (cleared) at the end of business hours, allowing the gaming machine to operate on the next business day without being affected by the previous day's gameplay.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that allows transition to a shortened time state through special conditions, as in this embodiment, there is a risk that the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be tampered with in order to re-enter the shortened time state through special conditions once it has ended. Therefore, tampering can be prevented by providing both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 on the back side of the gaming machine.

Based on the above explanation, each component can be identified as follows:

(1) A gaming machine that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a benefit to the player based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, controls the player to a special gaming state that grants gaming value based on the lottery result, and controls the player to one advantageous gaming state from a plurality of advantageous gaming states, which include at least a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (low probability time reduction state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, based on the type of special gaming state, comprising: a gaming control means (main control MPU 1311) capable of controlling the progress of the game including the lottery; a storage means that stores gaming information including the result of the lottery and can retain the gaming information even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off; a counting means that counts the number of times the lottery has been performed by the lottery means when predetermined conditions are met; and an operating means that cannot be operated by the player, wherein the storage means stores the count value from the counting means. The game control means is capable of controlling the game to a third advantageous game state (special condition time reduction) that is advantageous to the player, including a possible area, based on the counting result by the counting means, and the operation states by the operation means include at least a first operation state (RAM clear operation/setting change operation) and a second operation state (setting change operation/RAM clear operation), and when the power is turned on in conjunction with the first operation state by the operation means, a predetermined area of the storage means is initialized, but the information stored in the area capable of storing the count value by the counting means is maintained, and when the power is turned on in conjunction with the second operation state by the operation means, a predetermined area of the storage means is initialized, and the information stored in the area capable of storing the count value by the counting means is initialized, and the area capable of storing the count value by the counting means is located in an area other than the predetermined area of the storage means. Furthermore, the count values stored in the storage means by the counting means may not be updated during the third advantageous game state, but may be maintained during the third advantageous game state and in the normal game state after the end of the third advantageous game state.

Furthermore, the first advantageous game state offers a higher degree of advantage to the player than the second advantageous game state, while the second advantageous game state offers the same/approximately the same degree of advantage to the player as the third advantageous game state. In this embodiment of the game machine, the second advantageous game state is assumed to be a time-saving state due to normal time-saving measures, and the third advantageous game state is assumed to be a time-saving state due to special conditions. The probability of winning the special lottery is the same in both the second and third advantageous game states. The degree of advantage to the player in the second and third advantageous game states may be the same, or even if they differ, it may only be a difference in the number of time-saving rounds, resulting in approximately the same degree of advantage.

By configuring the system as described in (1), the RAM cleared area is the same for both the first and second operation states. Therefore, by standardizing the process of clearing the area, the program code can be simplified, improving development efficiency. Furthermore, by maintaining the information stored in the area where the count value can be stored through operation, the arcade manager can decide whether or not to clear the count value according to the game situation, enabling flexible operation.

The above explains how a predetermined memory area is initialized when a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. However, a RAM clear is also performed when a RAM abnormality occurs due to a momentary power outage such as noise, making it difficult to continue playing normally. The memory area (setting value) that is cleared during a RAM clear (when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated) and when a RAM abnormality occurs will be explained below with reference to Figure 417.

Figure 417 illustrates the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the control of the memory area and various values in the event of a RAM malfunction in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 417 describes the RAM clear operation (first operation), the setting change operation (second operation), and the cases of RAM malfunctions 1 to 5.

When the RAM clear operation (first operation) is performed, the work within the game area (area 9902) is cleared, while the work outside the game area is retained. The actual timing of the memory area being cleared is when the RAM clear signal is determined to have changed to ON by the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, and before the timer interrupt processing begins. Area 9901, which stores the set value and the time-saving transition count, is retained. When the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the time-saving transition count continues to be displayed on the performance display monitor. When the RAM clear operation (first operation) is performed, an alert sound corresponding to the RAM clear is output. Furthermore, the decorative lamps light up in a manner corresponding to the RAM clear, and a screen indicating that the RAM is being cleared is displayed on the LCD screen. The movable parts provided in the gaming machine perform predetermined initial operations.

When the setting change operation (second operation) is performed, the workpieces within the game area are cleared. On the other hand, workpieces outside the game area are maintained if they are functioning normally, and cleared if an abnormality occurs. The set values are also maintained. The time-saving transition count is initialized as described above. The actual timing of the memory area being cleared is when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and before the timer interrupt processing begins. After the setting change, the performance display monitor shows the set values, but it may also display an indication that the time-saving transition count has been initialized, or it may display the set values first, followed by the time-saving transition count. When the setting change operation (second operation) is performed, a notification sound corresponding to the setting change is output. Furthermore, decorative lamps light up in a manner indicating that the setting is being changed, and a screen indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the LCD screen. The movable parts provided in the gaming machine perform predetermined initial operations.

When a setting value anomaly (RAM anomaly 1) occurs, the work within the game area is cleared. Work outside the game area, however, is maintained. Because an anomaly has occurred in the setting value, "Setting 1" is set as the new setting value. Furthermore, the time-saving transition count is initialized. The actual timing of the memory area being cleared is when it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed after the RAM anomaly has been detected and the power has been restored. If a setting change operation is not performed even after a RAM anomaly is detected, the RAM anomaly state persists. The base display unit 1317 displays the RAM anomaly code. When a setting value anomaly (RAM anomaly 1) occurs, a RAM anomaly notification sound is output, and a lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the RAM anomaly notification. Furthermore, a screen indicating that a RAM anomaly has been detected is displayed on the LCD screen. At this time, the system may switch to a demo screen after a predetermined time has elapsed. The movable parts of the gaming machine perform predetermined initial operations. Alternatively, the initial operation of the movable parts may be started not when a RAM anomaly occurs, but after the RAM anomaly has been resolved by a setting change operation.

When a power outage flag abnormality (RAM abnormality 2) or a checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality 3) occurs in a workpiece within the game area, the workpiece within the game area is cleared. On the other hand, workpieces outside the game area are maintained unless abnormalities occur. Furthermore, the setting values are maintained, and the time-saving transition count is initialized. The actual timing of the memory area being cleared is not when a RAM abnormality is detected, but rather when, after a RAM abnormality is detected, the power supply is turned OFF, and then the setting change operation is performed while the power is turned back on, thus determining that the setting change operation has been executed. The base display 1317 displays the RAM abnormality code.

If a power outage flag anomaly (RAM anomaly 4) or a checksum anomaly (RAM anomaly 5) occurs in a work outside the game area, the work within the game area is cleared as a result of the setting change operation being performed during recovery from the power outage. Work outside the game area is also cleared due to the anomaly. Furthermore, the setting values are maintained, and the time-saving transition count is initialized. The actual timing of the memory area clearing is when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. The RAM anomaly code is displayed on the base display 1317.

To further explain the control of RAM anomalies in workpieces outside the game area, the determination of RAM anomalies in workpieces outside the game area is performed before determining whether a setting change operation has been performed when the power is turned on. If a RAM anomaly is determined, only information indicating that a RAM anomaly was determined is stored. At this point, the workpiece outside the game area is treated as having a RAM anomaly without being initialized, and the game is stopped. After transitioning to the game stopped state, if a setting change operation is performed and the power is cut off/on again, it is determined that a setting change has occurred. When the setting change processing is executed, based on the information stored before the power cut indicating that the workpiece in the game area had a RAM anomaly, it is determined that the workpiece outside the game area had a RAM anomaly, and the workpiece outside the game area is cleared. Note that if information indicating that the workpiece outside the game area had a RAM anomaly was not stored when the setting change processing is executed, the workpiece outside the game area is not cleared, and the stored contents are maintained.

When the power is turned on while a setting change operation has been performed, if the initial setup process determines that the setting value or the work inside or outside the game area is abnormal in the RAM, the setting change process will start immediately, and each memory area will be cleared at the time the RAM abnormality is determined. Furthermore, the initial setup process executed when the power is turned on determines whether the setting value is abnormal, the work inside the game area is abnormal, or the work outside the game area is abnormal, and stores only the result of that determination. After each determination is completed, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. In other words, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, the system is controlled to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed after the abnormality was determined.

The above explains the case when a RAM clear is performed. Next, we will provide supplementary information regarding the control of the gaming machine during the execution of the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (an operation different from the first operation, such as a settings change operation).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, upon power-on, the machine first determines whether the set value is abnormal (a value other than 0-5). If an abnormality is detected, the set value is reset to an initial value, the time-saving transition count is reset to an initial value (300 times), and the game state is set to a RAM abnormal state. Subsequently, the checksum, power-off flag, and RAM outside the game area are checked, and if any of these are found to be abnormal, the RAM abnormal state is also set. At this time, except when the set value is determined to be abnormal, the time-saving transition count is not initialized and retains its value from before the power-off.

The time-saving transition count is only set to its initial value when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, and at the end of the jackpot ending, except when the first operation is performed. At all other times, the initial value is not set. Furthermore, the system does not check whether the time-saving transition count value is abnormal or not. The reason for not checking for abnormalities in the time-saving transition count is that if the setting value is abnormal, the time-saving transition count is also likely to be abnormal, so it is considered sufficient to judge based solely on the abnormality of the setting value.

Furthermore, an "abnormality check" of the time-saving transition count may be performed along with the abnormality check of the set value. In this case, even if the set value is within the normal range, if the time-saving transition count is outside the specified range, the accuracy of the RAM cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, the contents of the RAM may be completely initialized, or the set value and the time-saving transition count may be initialized.

Furthermore, if a setting value anomaly occurs, the setting value is reset, a RAM anomaly is reported, and this state persists. To restore the gaming machine, the main work RAM (area 9902) is cleared by restarting the power while performing a setting change operation. Additionally, if the work for the performance display monitor (base display 1317) is abnormal, it is cleared; otherwise, it is maintained. The setting state changes to the setting change state, the timer interrupt processing begins, and after the setting change is completed, the system transitions to the normal gameplay state. At this time, the performance display monitor (base display 1317) displays normally.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can indicate whether or not the time-saving transition count has been initialized based on the display mode of the performance display monitor (base display unit 1317) when the power is turned on. Specifically, if the performance display monitor is displayed in the normal mode after the power is turned on, it indicates that the time-saving transition count has not been initialized, and if the performance display monitor is displayed in the specific mode, it indicates that the time-saving transition count has been initialized. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the time-saving transition count is initialized when a setting change operation (second operation) is performed, and at this time the performance display monitor displays content indicating that the time-saving transition count has been initialized. Normally, the performance display monitor displays the time-saving transition count (normal mode), but when a setting change operation (second operation) is performed, the changed setting value is displayed (specific mode). Also, when a RAM clear operation (first operation) is performed, the performance display monitor continues to display in the normal mode (time-saving transition count), while when a setting change operation (second operation) is performed, the performance display monitor does not display in the normal mode until the setting change is completed. In other words, by displaying the performance indicator monitor in different ways depending on whether the time-saving transition count has been reset, it is possible to indicate to hall employees and others that the time-saving transition count has been reset.

The above describes an example of notifying whether the time-saving transition count has been initialized by the display mode of the performance display monitor (base display unit 1317), but similar notification may be provided by other displays. Alternatively, notification may be provided by sound or light. In this case, the light may be placed outside the game area of the gaming machine or in an inconspicuous location within the game area (for example, away from the liquid crystal display device) so that it is possible to recognize whether the time-saving transition count has been initialized from the front side as well. For example, when the power supply is resumed by a RAM clear operation (first operation) (including normal power-on (recovery)), the first mode (including off) is displayed so that it is possible to recognize that the power supply has been resumed without the time-saving transition count being initialized, and when the power supply is resumed by a setting change operation (second operation), the second mode (where it is not possible to identify whether the time-saving transition count has been initialized or not) is displayed. This configuration allows players to recognize that the special condition time-saving feature is likely to occur before the number of fluctuations shown on the top lamp (data display) is reached, as the time-saving transition count is maintained. This enables players to play with the expectation that the special condition time-saving feature will occur.

[26-1-3. Initialization Settings Data (Setting Data Table)]
Regardless of whether it's a time-saving state or not, when transitioning from the current game state to another game state, it's necessary to set various parameters (initial setting data such as flags) to set the game state. For example, when a special lottery is won, initial setting data corresponding to the jackpot game state is set at the timing when the jackpot game state begins, or initial setting data (setting data table) corresponding to a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of the jackpot game state) is set in order to transition to a probability variation state (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends. The handling of this initial setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained below.

Figure 418 shows an example of the initial jackpot interval transition setting data set when the game transitions to the jackpot state after winning a special lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The initial jackpot interval transition setting data is set (referenced) in the jackpot start setting process, which is executed at the timing of starting the jackpot state after winning a special lottery. Based on this initial jackpot interval transition setting data, the necessary values for various parameters (data, flags, etc.) are set.

The settings data for the initial interval transition after a big win defines the size (in bytes) of the data to be cleared (initialized) first, followed by the size (in bytes) of the data to be initially set. Next, the parameters to be cleared (initialized) are defined (within the frame). Finally, the data to be initially set is defined.

Referring to Figure 418, the specific contents of the setting data at the start of the first jackpot interval transition will be further explained. The data that is cleared includes the status flag (JOTAI_FG), the probability variation flag (KAKUHEN_FG), the time reduction flag (JITAN_FG), the number of status displays (JT_HYO_CNT), and the power-on status buffer (PWON_JOT_BF). Details of each data are as described above.

The data that is initially set includes the following: Condition device operation signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG), continuous mechanism operation device operation signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG), right-hand shooting flag area (R_HS_FG), central rotating body operation state management flag (MOT_ACT_FG), motor 1 operation pattern area (MOT1_ACT_PT), motor 1 operation number area (MOT1_ACT_NO), and motor 1 photo detection abnormality determination timer area (M1_ERR_JDG_TM).

Specifically, the condition device activation signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG) is set to a value (_T_SIG_JKN_OK) for setting the condition device activation signal to ON. Similarly, the continuous mechanism activation signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG) is set to a value (_T_SIG_YAK_OK) for setting the continuous mechanism activation signal to ON. The right-hand shooting flag area (R_HS_FG) is set to a value (_HASSYA_RIGHT) indicating that right-hand shooting is permitted. In addition, values for defining the initial operation of the central rotating body (motor 1) are set accordingly.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the initial setup data defines the size (number of bytes) of the data to be cleared (initialized) and the size (number of bytes) of the data to be initialized, followed by the definition of clear data and initial setup data for setting the game state. This configuration allows the clear data and initial setup data to be treated together as a single table. Note that the clear data consists only of the data (address) to be cleared, so it is 1 byte, while the initial setup data consists of a pair of data (address) to be set and the initial setting value, so it is 2 bytes.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with multiple large prize slots (first large prize slot 2005, second large prize slot 2006), and the clear data and initial setting data for these large prize slots can be treated as a single table.

Figure 419 shows an example of the large prize slot closure setting data that is set when closing the large prize slots during a jackpot game state of the gaming machine in this embodiment. The large prize slot closure setting data is referenced in the large prize slot opening process to execute the process of transitioning each large prize slot from the open state to the closed state.

The large prize gate closure setting data includes setting data for the first large prize gate 2005 and setting data for the second large prize gate 2006. Between the setting data for the first large prize gate 2005 and the setting data for the second large prize gate 2006, a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) is defined to identify the starting address of the setting data for the second large prize gate 2006. Specifically, this is the difference between the starting address of the large prize gate closure setting data and the starting address of the setting data for the second large prize gate 2006. By adding the value of "_NX_CLOSE_OFS" to the large prize gate closure setting data, the starting address of the setting data for the second large prize gate 2006 can be identified.

The setting data for the first major prize slot 2005 includes clear data and initial setting data, similar to the setting data for the transition to the first jackpot interval. The clear data defines the size of each data set (clear data and initial setting data) and the major prize slot 1 solenoid flag.

The initial setup data defines the Special Electric 1 Operation Signal Output Timer (T1_SD_TM), the Special Electric 1 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer (T1_SD_PAY_TM), and the Special Symbol/Electric Mechanism Operation Number (T_JOB_NO). The Special Electric 1 Operation Signal Output Timer is set to the time value for outputting the Special Electric Mechanism 1 Operation Signal, and the Special Electric 1 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer is set to the Special Electric 1 Prize Ball Validity Extension Time Value (the time after the large prize opening is closed that the ball entry is judged as valid). The Special Symbol/Electric Mechanism Operation Number is set to the number value for closing the large prize opening (_TNO_CLOSE).

The setting data for the second major prize slot 2006 includes clear data and initial setting data, similar to the setting data for the first major prize slot 2005. The clear data defines the size of the clear data and the initial setting data, as well as the major prize slot 2 solenoid flag.

The initial setup data defines the Special Electric 2 Operation Signal Output Timer (T2_SD_TM), Special Electric 2 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM), Special Electric 2 Operation Signal Output Timer 2 (T3_SD_TM), Special Electric 2 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer 2 (T3_SD_PAY_TM), and the Special Symbol/Electric Mechanism Operation Number (T_JOB_NO). Two types each of the Operation Signal Output Timer and the Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer are defined.

The Special Electric 2 Operation Signal Output Timer (T2_SD_TM) and Special Electric 2 Operation Signal Output Timer 2 (T3_SD_TM) are both set to the time value for outputting the Special Electric 1 Operation Signal. The Special Electric 2 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM) and Special Electric 2 Prize Ball Validity Judgment Timer 2 (T3_SD_PAY_TM) are both set to the Special Electric 2 Prize Ball Validity Extension Time Value. The Special Symbol/Electric Feature Operation Number is set to the number value for closing the large prize opening (_TNO_CLOSE).

This explanation describes a method for setting initial data when the two large prize winning holes in a gaming machine are closed. However, this method may also be applied to setting initial data at different timings, such as when the large prize winning holes are opened. Furthermore, it can be applied to prize winning holes other than the large prize winning holes. For example, in a gaming machine with multiple starting prize winning holes, the initial data for the first starting prize winning hole (Figure 1) and the second starting prize winning hole (Figure 2) may be defined in the same way as the initial setting data shown in Figure 419, and the data initialization process may be executed.

The configuration of the initial setup data has been explained above. Next, we will specifically explain the procedure for performing the initial setup based on the above-described initial setup data, using the large prize slot closure setting data as an example. Figure 420 shows a sample module for performing the initial setup based on the large prize slot closure setting data in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The procedure for setting the initial setup data will be explained below, referring to the module.

The main control MPU 1311 stores the address of the large prize slot closure setting data (T_CLOSE1_B) in the HL register as the reference address for the area where the setting data is stored. Next, it stores identification information to determine which large prize slot to control in the A register. "OPEN_TD_FG" is an opening special electric mechanism identification flag; it is set to "00" when controlling the first large prize slot 2005, and to "01" when controlling the second large prize slot 2006. Based on the value of "OPEN_TD_FG", the position where the data included in the large prize slot closure setting data is referenced is determined.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) in the W register to identify the starting address of the setting data for the second large prize slot 2006. Furthermore, by executing the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), the reading position of the large prize slot closure setting data is identified. To explain in more detail, the multiplication value addition address acquisition process multiplies the specified base value (W register = "_NX_CLOSE_OFS") by the multiplication value (A register = "OPEN_TD_FG") and adds it to the specified base address value (HL register = starting address of the large prize slot closure setting data). In other words, when controlling the first major prize slot 2005 ("OPEN_TD_FG" = "00h"), the base address value itself becomes the starting address, while when controlling the second major prize slot 2006 ("OPEN_TD_FG" = "01h"), the starting address becomes the base address value plus "_NX_CLOSE_OFS".

When the address referencing the large prize gate closure setting data is identified, the main control MPU 1311 executes data initialization processing (DATA_SET_CLR). Data initialization processing clears and initializes the data based on the setting data referenced by the address set in the HL register. Details of the data initialization processing are explained in Figure 421.

Figure 421 shows an example program for the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) of this embodiment. The details of the process will be explained below, specifically in the case of clearing and initializing the data related to the first grand prize slot 2005 ("OPEN_TD_FG" = "00h").

When the data initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the number of work clears and the number of work sets in the BC register. In other words, it sets the number of work clears in the C register and the number of work sets in the B register. The number of work clears is the number of data to be cleared, and the number of work sets is the number of data to be initialized. Referring to the data (T_CLOSE1_B) corresponding to the first large prize opening 2005 in the large prize opening closure setting data in Figure 419, the first data is "T_CLOSE1_CLR_END-$-2", so there is only one data to be cleared, and the value is 1, which is stored in the C register. The value of the data is "(T_CLOSE1_B_END - T_CLOSE1_CLR_END) / 2". Since there are actually five 2-byte data entries defined between labels T_CLOSE1_CLR_END and T_CLOSE1_B_END, the value is 5, and this value is stored in the B register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the data. Specifically, it uses the data set after the work clear count and work set count of the clear data, i.e., the value from the 3rd byte onward, as the address of the data to be cleared. It then sets "00H" to the number of times specified in the C register equal to the work clear count, and clears the data.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 performs data initialization. Specifically, it sets the value of the first byte from the beginning of the initialization data as the address and the value of the second byte as the initialization value, repeating this process for the number of worksets set in the B register. Once processing is complete for all initialization data, the data initialization process ends.

Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, the structure of the initial setup data is standardized, making it usable not only for game state transition processing but also for general-purpose applications such as initial setup of drive components. Therefore, by including the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) in the processing address table, it can be called using the INVD instruction, allowing processing to be executed simply by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). This shortens the instruction word length, thereby increasing processing speed.

In this embodiment, by including a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) in the large prize slot closure setting data to identify the starting address of the setting data for the second large prize slot 2006, it is possible to treat data for multiple large prize slots as common data. Therefore, if one attempts to perform the same processing as the sample module shown in Figure 420 using a conventional method where _NX_CLOSE_OFS is not defined, it becomes necessary to branch by referring to OPEN_TD_FG, as shown in Figure 422. In this case, more capacity is required than with the method of this embodiment; specifically, the sample program in the reference example (Figure 422) is 3 bytes larger in capacity than the sample program of this embodiment (Figure 420).

In the sample modules shown in Figures 420 and 422, the LDT instruction, which reads data from a table, specifies a value obtained by subtracting the starting address of the data area, "_OFS_TP" (the value in the TP register, e.g., "9000H"), from the table address (e.g., "T_CLOSE1_B"). That is, "LDT HL, T_CLOSE1_B - _OFS_TP" sets the HL register to a value of [the value in the TP register ("9000H") + the relative data portion of "T_CLOSE1_B" from the data starting address]. By allowing the LDT instruction to set a value based on the TP register in the HL register, instructions that would normally require three or more bytes ("LD HL, T_CLOSE1_B") can be executed in two bytes.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, when transitioning from the current game state to another game state, parameters corresponding to the destination game state are set based on predefined initialization setting data. During the transition to a new game state, processes related to the special lottery are switched, such as changing the winning probability of the special lottery or changing the table that defines the variation time of the special symbols.

Furthermore, the initialization setting data is not only used when transitioning between game states such as the probability variation state or the time reduction state. For example, in the case of special symbol-related processing, it can be used at the transitions between states (the timing of changes in the game's progress), such as the waiting process, the process during the variation, the symbol confirmation process, the interval process after a miss, the interval process after a win, the jackpot opening process, the jackpot opening process, the jackpot closing process, and the jackpot ending process. Specifically, it is used when executing the variation start process after the waiting process is completed, when executing the symbol confirmation process after the process during the variation is completed, when executing the miss interval process after the symbol confirmation process is completed, when executing the waiting process after the miss interval process is completed, when executing the win interval process after the symbol confirmation process is completed, etc. It is used at the timing when the execution of the next process begins after the execution of the previous process is completed.

Furthermore, the initialization setting data is used not only for special symbol-related processing but also for regular symbol-related processing. Specifically, it can be used when executing the in-game processing after the in-game processing has finished, or when executing the symbol confirmation processing after the in-game processing has finished, etc.

The transitions between each state (the progress of the game) are controlled by job counters corresponding to each control target, such as special symbols and regular symbols. Each job counter corresponds to a specific process (state). For example, for a job counter for special symbols, the following settings are used: Job Counter "0" for the special symbol change waiting process, Job Counter "1" for the special symbol change process, Job Counter "2" for the special symbol confirmation process, Job Counter "3" for the special symbol miss interval process, Job Counter "4" for the special symbol hit interval process, Job Counter "5" for the jackpot opening process, Job Counter "6" for the jackpot opening process, Job Counter "7" for the jackpot closing process, and Job Counter "8" for the jackpot ending process. The same settings should be applied to regular symbols.

The initialization setting data used during game state transitions is defined in the format (data structure) described above in Figure 418. Specifically, after defining the size (number of bytes) of the data to be cleared (initialized) and the size (number of bytes) of the data to be initially set, the lower addresses of the area (first area) storing parameters whose settings are cleared during transition, the lower addresses of the area (second area) storing parameters whose initial values (fixed values) are set during transition, and these initial values are sequentially placed from the beginning of the area where the initialization setting data is stored. Parameters whose settings are cleared during transitions can be set as needed by the calling program during game state transitions. Parameters that count up from "0," such as when counting the number of special lottery executions in the transitioned game state, are used as is after being cleared. While defining only lower addresses in the initialization setting data can reduce data capacity, it is also acceptable to include upper addresses as long as the storage area for the value can be identified. This increases data capacity, but allows for direct identification of the storage area, eliminating the need for address conversion and thus speeding up program processing.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by specifying initialization setting data and executing the data initialization process (Figure 421), it is possible to clear specified parameters or set initial values for specified parameters. Therefore, the process of setting (initializing) parameters during game state transitions or process initiation can be executed by a common process simply by specifying the initialization setting data, regardless of the source and destination game states or the processes for ending and starting execution. This allows for the setting (initialization) of necessary parameters during game state transitions and process execution, even when changing game specifications, adding or changing game state definitions, or adding processes to control the game, while minimizing the need to modify or add program code. This is achieved by simply adding or modifying the corresponding initialization setting data.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by defining initialization setting data with a common data structure, it becomes possible to clear/initialize parameters using a common process (data initialization process). This allows for the use of a common procedure when parameter settings are required at transitions in game progress, such as during game state changes. This enables flexible adaptation to changes in game specifications, resulting in a wider variety of gameplay and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by standardizing parameter settings, the program can be simplified, improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Based on the above explanation, each component can be further specified as follows:

(2) The program processing (data initialization processing) that uses the setting data table (initialization setting data) is called and executed by the calling process (processing related to special symbols, etc.) which is executed according to the progress of the game state as the game progresses (at the timing of the change in progress). Although the calling process executed according to the progress of the game state as the game progresses (at the timing of the change in progress) is a different procedure for each stage of the game state, the program processing (data initialization processing) that uses the setting data table is made executable as a common process. After the setting values have been set for the addresses of the storage areas set in the first area (area 9901) and the second area (area 9902) by the program processing that uses the setting data table, the execution of the calling process is continued, thereby enabling the switching of the game state.

By configuring the system as described in (2), even when the definition of game states is changed or new states are added due to changes in the game specifications, or when processing to control the game is added, it is possible to minimize the modification or addition of program code. This is achieved by simply adding or modifying the corresponding setting data table (initialization setting data) to set (initialize) the necessary parameters for transitioning game states and executing processes, thereby switching the game's progress.

[26-1-4. Modified Example of Initialization Setting Data Selection Method]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated alone (RAM clear operation), the time-saving transition count is not cleared, but when the setting key 971 is operated while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (setting change operation), the time-saving transition count is cleared. Therefore, if the initial setting data includes the time-saving transition count, it will always be initialized, so it is necessary to define the initial setting data individually or to branch the processing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the initialization operation can be confirmed by referring to the value of VALID_PLAY (setting state management area). Therefore, a table for selecting initialization setting data is defined, and by selecting based on the value of VALID_PLAY, the initialization setting data corresponding to the initialization operation can be identified.

Figure 423 shows the VALID_PLAY (setting state management area) and an example of the values set in VALID_PLAY in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Referring to Figure 423, VALID_PLAY is set to "00h" during normal recovery, "01h" during RAM clear operation, "02h" during setting confirmation operation, "03h" during setting change operation, and "04h" during RAM abnormality.

Figure 424 shows an example of a table for selecting initialization setting data during the initialization of the gaming machine in this embodiment. The initialization setting data selection table defines initialization setting data corresponding to VALID_PLAY, and the initialization setting data should be selected based on the value of VALID_PLAY. With this implementation, it is possible to determine whether or not to clear the data depending on the initialization operation.

The time-saving transition count is not stored in the area cleared during the initialization of the gaming machine; instead, it is initialized based on the definition in the initialization setting data. That is, it is initialized only if it is defined in the initialization setting data; to maintain the value of the time-saving transition count, it should be excluded from the initialization setting data. For example, in a RAM clear operation (normal RAM clear), the time-saving transition count is not initialized, so the corresponding initialization setting data (RAM_CLR_TBL) does not contain data corresponding to the time-saving transition count. On the other hand, in a setting change operation, the time-saving transition count is initialized, so the corresponding initialization setting data (SET_CHG_TBL) contains data corresponding to the time-saving transition count. This configuration allows for the maintenance or initialization of the time-saving transition count by defining it in the initialization setting data corresponding to the initialization operation, without changing the program. This eliminates the need for branching in the program code, simplifies the program, and compresses the program size. Furthermore, this method applies not only to the time-saving transition count but also to other parameters; it is possible to switch between maintaining or initializing (clearing) the value by defining the data.

Furthermore, the initialization setting data may be further subdivided according to the initialization conditions of the gaming machine. For example, as shown in Figure 417, initialization setting data may be defined for each cause of RAM abnormality. If the number of initialization setting data patterns is less than the value defined in VALID_PLAY, the data capacity may be reduced by assigning common initialization setting data to different VALID_PLAY values.

Furthermore, when the time-saving transition count is updated by addition, the initial value becomes 0 and is registered in the clear data. Conversely, when updated by subtraction, the initial value becomes the number of time-saving transitions (= 300) and is registered in the initial setting data. In this way, even with different update methods, it is possible to manage with the same initial setting data, allowing for flexible adaptation to changes in game specifications and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

[26-2. External output signals related to special conditions time reduction]
Next, the output of external output signals will be explained in chronological order from the time the gaming machine is powered on (when the setting change operation is performed). Figure 425 is a time chart showing the output timing of external output signals related to the time-saving state due to special conditions in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The external output signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 provided on the gaming machine and is transmitted to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. Based on the received external output signal, the hall computer can grasp the status of the gaming machine in real time.

First, the gaming machine is powered on (time t200), and initialization is performed. Once the initialization is complete, the machine becomes playable. Afterward, gameplay continues, and if the special lottery is not won for 300 consecutive times (after the time-saving transition count is initialized), the machine transitions to a time-saving state under special conditions. At this time, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms), and the signal is output (time t201). Outputting the external output signal (jackpot information) for a predetermined fixed time indicates that the machine has transitioned to a time-saving state under special conditions. Note that while the external output signal (jackpot information) is output during the jackpot game state, the time it is output during the transition to the time-saving state under special conditions (fixed time) is significantly shorter than the time it is output during the jackpot game state. Furthermore, the external output signal (during time-saving) is set to ON, and the signal continues to be output until the end of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, if the special lottery is not won after transitioning to the time-saving state under special conditions and reaching the maximum number of consecutive times the time-saving state is maintained (= 100 times), the time-saving state under special conditions is terminated (time t202). At the time the time-saving state ends, the output of the external output signal indicating that the time-saving state is active is stopped.

Subsequently, if a jackpot occurs that transitions to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state ends (winning the special lottery with probability variation symbols, resulting in a probability variation jackpot), the continuous mechanism operation device activates after a predetermined symbol confirmation time has elapsed following the stopping of the special symbols. At the same time, the external output signal (jackpot information) and the external output signal (time reduction) are set to ON, and each signal is output (time t203). Note that during the jackpot game state, time reduction control is not executed, but the output of the external output signal (time reduction) continues. Furthermore, the output of the external output signal (jackpot information) continues until the jackpot game state ends (variable period). This allows for prize ball management during the special prize (consecutive wins). Note that in the so-called time reduction state, as mentioned above, the output of the external output signal (time reduction) continues, while the output of the external output signal (jackpot information) does not continue.

After the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot end interval time has elapsed, the game state transitions to a probability variation state (high probability time-saving state) (time t204). At this time, the output of the external output signal (jackpot information) is stopped (set to OFF), while the output of the external output signal (time-saving state) continues until the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, the time-saving transition count is set to an initial value (=300). Note that in a high probability state without a time-saving state, the external output signal (time-saving state) is not output. This allows the hall computer to accurately grasp the game state and verify whether the base value is normal or not.

Subsequently, if a special lottery is won with a non-probability symbol during the high-probability time-saving state (time t205), the time-saving game state ends, the probability state is set to low probability, and the game transitions to the jackpot game state (the jackpot game state is always a low-probability, low-base state). At this time, although the time-saving state ends, the external output signal (during time-saving) is not set to OFF, but remains ON as the game enters the jackpot game state. Furthermore, the external output (jackpot information) is set to ON upon entering the jackpot game state.

When a jackpot game state triggered by a non-probability symbol ends, after the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the time-saving control begins, and the game state transitions to a (low probability) time-saving state (normal time-saving) (time t206). The external output signal (jackpot information), which was ON during the jackpot, is set to OFF after the jackpot end interval has elapsed, and the time-saving state is activated (the time-saving flag is set to ON), causing the external output signal (during time-saving) to remain ON and continue outputting. At this time, the time-saving transition count is set to an initial value (=300 times).

After the jackpot game state ends, and the symbol changes (execution of special lottery) for the maximum number of consecutive times in the time-saving state have finished (time t207), the time-saving state ends by setting the time-saving flag to OFF, and the output stops by setting the external output signal (during time-saving) to OFF.

If, after the jackpot game state ends, the special lottery is not won for the specified number of time-saving transitions (300 times) (when the time-saving transition count reaches 0), the game transitions to a time-saving state under special conditions, similar to time t201 (time t208). At this time, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms), and the signal is output. Subsequently, if the special lottery is won with a non-probability-increasing symbol, the special symbol stops, and after a predetermined symbol confirmation time has elapsed, the continuous operation device for the special feature begins. The external output signal (jackpot information) is set to ON and output begins, the time-saving flag is set to OFF, while the external output signal (during time-saving) remains ON and continues to output (time t209).

Subsequently, the jackpot game state ends, and the game state transitions to a (low probability) time-saving state (normal time-saving) (time t210). After the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the external output signal (jackpot information) is set to OFF to stop output, the time-saving flag is set to ON, and the external output signal (time-saving) remains ON and continues to output. After the jackpot game state ends, when the symbol changes (execution of special lottery) for the maximum number of times the time-saving state has continued have finished (time t211), the time-saving flag is set to OFF, and the external output signal (time-saving) is set to OFF to stop output.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the external output signal (jackpot information) that notifies the hall computer that a special lottery has been won and the game is in a jackpot state (during special prize) is output ON even when a predetermined number of losing spins have ended (when the special time-saving condition is met) without a jackpot occurring. Thus, one external output signal is used for both jackpots and specific losing spins. Furthermore, when transmitting the external output signal (jackpot information) to a device other than the hall computer, such as a data lamp (a data display device installed outside the gaming machine as equipment on the hall side), one external output signal can also be used for both jackpots and when the special time-saving condition is met. When the external output signal (jackpot information) is turned ON, it is possible to reset the number of spins on the data lamp. This allows the player to identify not only the number of spins until a jackpot, but also the number of spins until transitioning to the time-saving state due to the special time-saving condition. Furthermore, if different signals are output for a big win and when special time-saving conditions are met, the data lamp needs to be configured to reset the spin count using both signals. Therefore, by using a single external output signal for both, it becomes possible to accommodate data lamps that cannot reset the spin count using either of the two signals.

The period during which the external output signal (jackpot information) is output (variable period) is determined by the transition from the jackpot game state to the time-saving state. Furthermore, the period during which the external output signal (jackpot information) is output when transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions (fixed period) is measured based on the number of times the periodic processing that can be executed periodically by the main control MPU 1311 is performed. With this configuration, when transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions, the external information signal is output for a fixed time (for example, a 128ms pulse signal), and when a special lottery is won, the external information signal is output only for the duration that the jackpot game state continues. By monitoring each output time (ON time), the arcade manager can identify whether the game is in the jackpot state or if special conditions have occurred using a hall computer or similar system.

The fixed time is measured by periodically processing a value (timer value) set in a predetermined specific area of the main control RAM 1312. For example, a fixed time is set in the specific area, and the value set in the specific area is repeatedly subtracted periodically a predetermined number of times. Measurement ends when the value reaches "0". In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a fixed time (128 ms) is set in the specific area when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions, and a special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output while the value in the specific area is set to a predetermined value.

On the other hand, in the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) output during a jackpot game, a specific value ("0") is set in a specific area. The output of the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is maintained by a process that is executed periodically without referring to the value in the specific area (timer interrupt processing and processing called from timer interrupt processing). In other words, the time (variable time) during which the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output is determined by the period specified by the periodically executed process.

Therefore, when transitioning to a shortened time state due to special conditions, a fixed time is set in a specific area and the output time is measured by an external output timer. On the other hand, in a jackpot game state, without setting a value in the specific area ("0" is set) and without using an external output timer, a special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output based on information that can determine that a jackpot game state is in progress (information whose value is set only in the jackpot game state, such as the job counter and jackpot number) in a periodically executed process (port output processing within the timer interrupt processing). In other words, the conditions for outputting (setting to ON) the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) are when a predetermined value is set in the external output timer, or when one of the requirements for information indicating a jackpot game state (job counter, jackpot number, etc.) is met. Note that the signals to be output are not judged individually, but rather a data table is defined in advance, consisting of a set of a reference address of the specific area corresponding to the external output signal and a set value, and the system is configured to repeatedly judge (set a value in the reference address of the specific area) for the number of records set in the data table. In this case, by standardizing the process of referencing the data table, the output of the external output signal can be controlled by changing the data table without modifying the program. The settings in the data table correspond to the bit information of the external output port that outputs the external output signal.

Furthermore, since there is a limited number of ports that can output external signals, it is possible to transmit more information externally by enabling the notification of multiple types of information through an external output signal output from a single port, such as by outputting the same information for both jackpot information and special condition time-saving modes.

Furthermore, by enabling the notification of multiple types of information through an external output signal from a single port, it becomes possible to notify the game status in detail. For example, in a gaming machine with multiple performance modes, the execution status of special performances can be measured. To illustrate with a specific example, in a gaming machine that always transitions to a special performance mode if a certain number of special lottery wins are not achieved, if certain conditions are met during the execution of the special performance mode, it transitions to a different special performance mode. These predetermined conditions include the special performance mode transition lottery, the combination of symbols in the special lottery, and the elapsed time of gameplay determined by random lottery. In this case, after outputting an external output signal for a predetermined time when transitioning to a special performance mode, the output is stopped, and then the external output signal is output again when transitioning to a special performance mode. Furthermore, by varying the output time depending on the predetermined conditions met, or by outputting at the end of the special performance mode, it is possible to grasp the game status in even more detail. By collecting information on the game status in this way, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by identifying more effective timing for executing performances.

Furthermore, in addition to the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends due to a special lottery win (normal time-saving state) and the time-saving state entered when a special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times (special condition time-saving state), there are also gaming machines that can enter a time-saving state when a special symbol stops in a predetermined combination (specific symbol time-saving state). When transitioning to a time-saving state via specific symbol time-saving state, an external output signal (jackpot information) is output for a predetermined time (128 ms), and an external output signal (during time-saving state) is continuously output until the end of the time-saving state. In other words, the external output signal is output in the same manner as in special condition time-saving state. Therefore, since there is no need to output signals in different manners depending on the type of time-saving state, there is no need to increase the number of signal lines related to external output. Increasing the number of signal lines that output external output signals increases the management costs for the hall. Furthermore, since the circuit board for outputting external output signals is generally provided in the frame, it is not easy to increase or decrease the external output signals according to the specifications of the game, so there is also the advantage of not needing to add signal lines or perform other modifications.

As described above, by using the same signal line to notify multiple types of information, and by outputting signals in the same manner for different types of time-saving states, it is possible to accurately notify external parties of the game status, including the game state, without modifying existing equipment.

Based on the above explanation, each component can be identified as follows.
(3) The variable period is a period determined by the switching of the game state, and the fixed period is a period measured based on the number of times a periodic process that can be executed periodically by the game control means is performed. Therefore, in the configuration shown in (3), when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions, an external information signal is output for a fixed time (for example, a 128ms pulse signal), and when a special lottery is won, an external information signal is output only for the period during which the jackpot game state continues (variable period). By monitoring the respective output times (ON times), the administrator can identify whether the game state is a jackpot state or a special conditions time-saving has occurred using a hall computer, etc., making it easier to manage the game hall.

(4) The fixed time is the period during which the special game state signal is output (during periodic processing) when a predetermined value (timer value) is stored in a specific area of the main control RAM 1312 (storage means) that has been set in advance. The variable time is the period during which the special game state signal is output (during periodic processing) when a specific value different from the predetermined value is stored in the specific area of the storage means. In other words, in the configuration shown in (4), measurement using the fixed time is performed by setting a fixed time in a specific area and measuring using an external output timer, while measurement using the variable time is performed by processing that is executed periodically without using an external output timer (such as timer interrupt processing). By controlling the output time of the external output signal by using fixed time and variable time in this way, it becomes possible to more accurately notify the outside of the game machine of the progress of the game.

External output when the game is stopped.
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a RAM error occurs, the game is stopped, all signals except the security signal are set to OFF, and output is stopped. Therefore, if a RAM error occurs in the time-saving state due to special conditions, the external output signal (during time-saving) is set to OFF, and then the game state is returned to the initial state by a setting change operation. At this time, since the external output signal (during time-saving) remains set to OFF, when the game is restarted, it is as if the time-saving state due to special conditions had not occurred. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the time-saving transition count is initialized by the setting change operation, and the game is restarted from the initial state.

Furthermore, if a RAM error (abnormal setting value/work error outside the set value) is detected upon power-on, or if a RAM error (abnormal setting value) is detected during normal gameplay, the same process is executed. If a RAM error is detected within the timer interrupt process, game-related processes (input processing, timer update processing, special symbol-related processing, normal symbol-related processing, etc.) are skipped.

Furthermore, unlike in the case of a RAM malfunction, if the game stops due to fraud detection, various timers (including timers for external output) will not be updated, and the external output signal will remain in the output state. Note that output signals controlling drive components such as solenoids will be forcibly set to OFF to prevent malfunction. The game stop state can be released by, for example, restarting the power, or by performing a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation. Alternatively, even with normal power-on or setting confirmation operations, the game stop state may be released if a special operation (for example, opening a door) is performed while the power is turned on.

Therefore, if the game is stopped due to the detection of fraud or other issues while the external output signal (jackpot information) is output for 128 milliseconds during the transition to a shortened time due to special conditions, the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal is stopped updating. This allows the timer value to be maintained in the state before the game was stopped, and the output of the external output signal can be kept ON. This eliminates the need to determine whether the external output signal was outputting when the game was stopped, making it possible to control the output of the external output signal using a common process regardless of whether it is an exception (game stop) or normal processing.

As described above, when a game is stopped due to a RAM error, a setting change operation is required to resume gameplay, and as a result, the game state is also reset. Therefore, the external output is set to OFF when a RAM error is detected. On the other hand, when a game is stopped due to fraud detection, etc., it is possible to resume gameplay by restarting the power or detecting the resolution of the error. Since it is necessary to restore the game to the state before the game stopped, if the external output is set to OFF when the game is stopped, it may turn ON again after resumption, potentially causing the hall computer to mistakenly detect that a signal has been output twice. Therefore, the external output is maintained when the game is stopped.

Whether or not the game enters a stopped state is determined by the abnormality detection process within the timer interrupt. Therefore, if the abnormality detection process determines that the game has stopped (i.e., it is detected that the game should enter a stopped state), the next timer interrupt process will skip the game-related processing. In other words, the actual game stop processing is executed in the timer interrupt process that detects the transition to the stopped state. Because the timer is updated when the game is stopped, if the timing of the game stop determination and the timing of updating the external output timer to 0 occur simultaneously (within the same timer interrupt process), the external output timer will change from 1 to 0, and the external output will turn OFF before the game actually enters a stopped state.

Both game stoppages due to RAM malfunctions and game stoppages due to fraudulent activity trigger a security signal, but the security signal alone cannot determine which factor caused the game stoppage. In contrast, the gaming machine of this embodiment transitions to a game stop state upon detection of fraud, such as a magnetic error, and uses different control than when the game stops due to a RAM malfunction. As a result, in both cases—game stoppage due to fraud detection and game stoppage due to a RAM malfunction—the control can determine whether the game stopped due to fraudulent activity or due to an unexpected malfunction such as noise or a failure. Furthermore, it becomes possible to externally ascertain the timing when the gaming machine ceases to function normally due to fraudulent activity, which can be used, for example, to identify the perpetrator of the fraud using surveillance cameras installed in the hall. Furthermore, factors that trigger a game-stopping state include not only magnetic anomalies, but also the detection of vibrations by the vibration detection sensor, the detection of radio waves by the radio wave detection sensor, the detection of a predetermined number of winning entries by the large prize slot sensor or the regular electric prize slot sensor while the prize slot is not normally operating, and a mismatch between the winning entries from specific prize slots (such as the V-attacker) and the payout slot.

Based on the above, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a first game stop condition (RAM abnormality (setting value abnormality)) and a second game stop condition (malfunction notification such as magnetic abnormality) that stop the execution of specific processes related to the game. When the game is stopped based on the first game stop condition, immediately before stopping the game, the output of the external output signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is stopped, regardless of whether the special game state signal (external output signal (jackpot information)) is output for a variable period or a fixed period.

On the other hand, under the second game stop condition, while the game is stopped in the same way as the first game stop condition, the external output signal (jackpot information) can be continuously output regardless of whether it was output for a variable or fixed period immediately before the game stopped. For example, if the game is stopped due to the detection of fraud, etc., while the external output signal (jackpot information) is output for a fixed time (128 milliseconds) during a time-saving transition under the special condition (second game stop condition), the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal is stopped updating, allowing the timer value to be maintained in the state before the game stopped, and the output of the external output signal to remain ON. This eliminates the need to determine whether the external output signal was outputting when the game was stopped, making it possible to control the output of the external output signal using a common process regardless of whether it is an exception (game stop) or normal processing.

In the case of a game stop due to the first game stop condition (RAM abnormality (abnormal setting value)), a setting change operation is required to resume play, and as a result the game state is reset. Therefore, the external output is also set to OFF at the time the RAM abnormality is detected. On the other hand, in the case of a game stop due to the second game stop condition (malfunction notification such as magnetic abnormality), since it is possible to resume play by restarting the power or detecting the resolution of the abnormality, it is necessary to restore from the state before the game stopped. If the external output is set to OFF when the game stop is detected, it may turn ON again after resumption, potentially causing the hall computer to mistakenly detect that a signal has been output twice. Therefore, the external output is maintained when the game stops.

Both RAM malfunctions and fraudulent activity trigger security signals, but these signals alone cannot determine the cause of the game stoppage. In contrast, the gaming machine of this embodiment transitions to a game stop state upon detection of fraud, such as a magnetic error, and employs different control mechanisms than those used when the game stops due to a RAM malfunction. This allows the control system to determine whether the game stoppage was due to fraud (second game stop condition) or a RAM malfunction (first game stop condition). Furthermore, it becomes possible to externally ascertain the timing of when the gaming machine ceased to function normally due to fraudulent activity, which can be used, for example, by surveillance cameras installed in the hall to identify the perpetrator.

Based on the above explanation, each component can be identified as follows:

(5) The main control MPU 1311 (game control means) has a first game stop condition and a second game stop condition for stopping the execution of specific processes related to the game. When the game is stopped based on the first game stop condition, the output of the special game state signal is stopped regardless of whether the special game state signal is output for a variable period or a fixed period (immediately before the game is stopped). Under the second game stop condition, the game is stopped in the same manner as the first game control means, but the special game state signal can be continuously output regardless of whether the special game state signal is output for a variable period or a fixed period (immediately before the game is stopped).

In the configuration shown in (5), when a game is stopped due to the first game stop condition, a setting change operation is required to resume gameplay, and as a result the game state is initialized. Therefore, the external output is also set to OFF when a RAM abnormality is detected. Furthermore, when a game is stopped due to the second game stop condition, it is possible to resume gameplay by restarting the power or detecting the resolution of the abnormality. By stopping the update of the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal, the output is kept in the ON state. This eliminates the need to determine whether the external output signal was outputting when the game stop was detected, and by re-outputting the external output signal after resumption, it is possible to prevent the hall computer from mistakenly detecting that the signal was output twice. Therefore, it is possible to control the output of the external output signal using a common process regardless of whether it is an exception (game stop) or normal processing.

《Time-saving transition counter update stopped》
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the game transitions to a time-saving state due to special conditions by repeating a predetermined number of spins that do not result in a special lottery win. Therefore, there is a risk of fraudulent activity where the number of special lottery draws is fraudulently increased by falsely detecting a win at the starting prize slot using radio waves or magnetism, thereby quickly transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions. To suppress such fraudulent activity, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, when radio waves or magnetism are detected, the update of the time-saving transition counter is stopped for a predetermined suppression period. This suppression period continues even after radio waves or magnetism are no longer detected and the fraud is resolved, until the suppression period is released. The release of the suppression period can be achieved, for example, by a hall employee performing a release operation, restarting the power, or opening the door. By configuring the machine in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity using radio waves or magnetism from fraudulently generating the time-saving state due to special conditions.

"others"
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, multiple performance modes are executed according to the result of a special lottery. The multiple performance modes have different performance patterns according to the player's benefit, such as the value of the game and the probability of winning a jackpot. In the special performance mode among the multiple performance modes (the performance mode that provides the highest benefit to the player), the update of the time-saving transition counter is suppressed. During this suppression period, an external output signal indicating that it is a suppression period is output so that the hall computer can recognize that it is a suppression period. The external output signal may be used for both jackpot information and time-saving mode, or it may be a dedicated external output signal. The hall computer can recognize that the update of the time-saving transition counter is suppressed during the suppression period based on the external information signal output during that period.

A special presentation mode may be a presentation mode that is executed when certain conditions are met in a pre-announcement presentation that suggests a high probability of a jackpot in the held memory, or it may be a presentation mode that indicates a specific jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the highest payout) when a specific jackpot symbol stops. Furthermore, it may be a presentation mode that corresponds to a game state such as a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, while the system currently notifies the hall computer of the initialization of the time-saving transition count by outputting an external output signal (jackpot information) when transitioning to the time-saving state due to special conditions, it may also be possible to notify the initialization of the time-saving transition count by outputting other external output signals. For example, when a special lottery is won, the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine may send a signal to initialize values such as the number of spins that were being counted, and when the hall computer receives this signal, it may initialize values such as those corresponding to the time-saving transition count. If it is not possible to increase the types of signals to be output, or if increasing the types of signals would increase management costs, other signals may be used for multiple purposes. For example, this could be an external output signal (jackpot information), a symbol confirmation signal, or a combination of specific multiple signals (for example, both the time-saving state and jackpot information signals).

External output signals (jackpot information) and external output signals (time-saving mode) may be output at the timing when the special symbol movement stops, but in this embodiment of the gaming machine, they are output after a predetermined symbol confirmation period has elapsed since the symbol stopped. When transitioning to the time-saving mode due to special conditions, the movement of the special symbol stops when the time-saving transition count reaches 0, the output of the external output signal begins with a timer interrupt after the predetermined confirmation period has elapsed, and the movement of the special symbol begins with the next timer interrupt (if there are not 0 reserved symbols). Therefore, each external output signal indicating the time-saving mode due to special conditions is output from the timing (before) even if there are 0 reserved symbols. This makes it possible to identify the start of the time-saving mode due to special conditions even without reserved symbols, allowing for accurate understanding of the game situation.

Furthermore, the timing at which the external output signal starts may be the next symbol variation after the special symbol variation in which the time-saving transition count reaches 0. Alternatively, the external output signal may be started after the stop symbol is determined in the first symbol variation after the time-saving state due to special conditions has started. By outputting the signal after the special symbol variation has actually started, after the conditions for starting the time-saving state due to special conditions have been met, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy between the timing of the signal output and the timing of the start of the time-saving state, and accurate information can be collected. In this case, by setting it so that the next variation does not start when the time-saving transition count is 0, the player will be able to activate the time-saving state due to special conditions immediately from the first variation, so it can be used as a service (morning) by the hall. For example, the variation is made until the time-saving transition count reaches 0 from the end of business on the previous day until before the start of business on the next day, and at this point the number of variations on the data lamp is reset (back to 0). As a result, after business starts on the next day, the first player will be able to activate the time-saving state due to special conditions at the same time as the start of the first symbol variation. By changing the symbols after closing time, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the game is transitioning to a shortened time state based on the previous day's results.

[26-3. Output of individual external output signals according to the game state]
Regarding the output mode of the external output signal, other modes are possible, not limited to the example shown in Figure 425. Figure 426 is a modified example of a time chart showing the output timing of the external output signal related to the time-saving state due to special condition time-saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in Figure 426, individual external output signals (special condition time-saving, normal time-saving), jackpot game state, probability variation state, etc.) are output according to each game state, making it possible to manage the number of balls dispensed according to the game state.

Furthermore, in the time chart shown in Figure 425, an external output signal corresponding to the jackpot information (shown as "Special Prize" in Figure 426) was output for 128 ms when transitioning to a time-saving state due to special conditions or specific symbol time-saving. However, in the modified version shown in Figure 426, the external output signal (jackpot information, Special Prize) is not output. In a hybrid type 1 and type 2 machine, if the signal indicating the start of special conditions time-saving and the signal indicating Special Prize (jackpot information) are combined, there is a possibility that the time-saving signal will rise before the Special Prize signal when only the actual jackpot rounds (excluding minor wins) are considered jackpots, potentially leading to misinterpretation as the start of a time-saving state due to specific symbol time-saving. Therefore, as shown in the modified version in Figure 426, the above-mentioned problem can be resolved by outputting the signal indicating the start of special conditions time-saving and the signal indicating Special Prize (jackpot information) separately as external information.

Furthermore, in this modified version of the gaming machine, the same signal (shortened time signal) is output whether the shortened time state is due to normal or special conditions. Therefore, it is not possible to manage the shortened time state separately from the shortened time state due to special conditions. If it is necessary to separate the data for the shortened time state due to special conditions from the shortened time state due to normal, a dedicated external information signal is output only when the shortened time state due to special conditions is activated. The same applies to the shortened time state for specific symbols. If it is necessary to manage the payout (base) for each shortened time state (normal, special conditions, and specific symbols), dedicated signals are output for the shortened time state due to special conditions and the shortened time state due to specific symbols (times t201-t202, t208-t209).

Finally, in this embodiment and its modified version, a special signal is output when the probability of winning the special lottery is high. This makes it possible to determine the timing for starting the update of the time-saving transition count in ST machines and fall-out lottery machines. Since the update of the time-saving transition count is invalid during high probability (only valid during low probability), it is possible to manage the time-saving transition count from the end of the high probability state. Because the time-saving signal is output in both high probability and low probability time-saving states, it is necessary to determine whether or not the high probability state is in effect after the jackpot game state ends and update the time-saving transition count. Furthermore, when a fall-out lottery is performed, where the probability of winning the special lottery changes from high probability to low probability, the update of the time-saving transition count begins at the timing of the transition to low probability. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that performs a fall-out lottery, it is necessary to initialize the time-saving transition count at the timing of winning the fall-out lottery.

[27. Control Configuration of Peripheral Control Boards]
The special conditions for shortening the game time in the gaming machine of this embodiment have been described above. Next, the control of the game effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the control of displaying images on the game effects display device (main display device) 1600. First, the configuration for performing the game effects control will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a main control board 1310 as a means for comprehensively controlling the game, a peripheral control board 1510 as a means for controlling the game effects, and a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. The configuration and basic control of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are as described in Figure 17, etc., so the explanation will be omitted here, and supplementary explanations will be provided as needed.

The performance control is executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on commands transmitted from the main control board 1310. This section describes the configuration and control necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 to execute performance control after receiving a command. First, the basic configuration of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the entire performance will be described, and in particular, the configuration for displaying images on the performance display device (main display device) 1600 of this embodiment will be described. Furthermore, the control necessary from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the performance will be described.

[27-1. Configuration of the Peripheral Control Board]
Figure 427 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in Figure 427, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, a performance display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511, a sound source IC (04TKK0030) that outputs sound, an external RAM (05TKK0020) for pre-storing performance data before execution and temporarily storing decoded image data, and a performance data ROM (05TKK0070) for storing programs and performance data for controlling the performance. The configurations of the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below.

[27-1a. Peripheral Control Unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510, includes a CPU (04TKK0011), RAM (04TKK0012), and boot ROM (05TKK0013), and also includes various I/O interfaces (not shown). The peripheral control unit 1511 may be arranged on the board as individual electronic components, or it may be configured as a peripheral control IC that integrates these into a single semiconductor chip.

The peripheral control unit 1511 is further equipped with external input/output means such as parallel I/O ports and serial I/O ports, and receives various commands transmitted from, for example, the main control board 1310. The CPU (04TKK0011) performs various performance controls based on programs and data stored in the RAM (04TKK0012). The programs include system-side processing such as initial settings for the CPU (04TKK0011) and various devices, and application-side processing for controlling performances such as lamps, movable parts, sound sources, and images.

The RAM (04TKK0012) is allocated a work area for temporarily storing data during program execution and a program area for storing programs read from the boot ROM (05TKK0013) or performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Note that the work area and program area may be configured as separate RAMs.

The CPU (04TKK0011), based on the various commands received, transmits light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5, for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) transmits drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motors or drive solenoids of the game board 5, for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided on the game board 5. It also transmits door-side drive data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3. This data consists of drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lifting drive motor 367, and sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the display device 1600 to the display control unit 1512 via the serial I/O port for the display control unit, and outputs control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information to the sound source IC (04TKK0030), based on the various commands received.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, pressure detection sensor 373, lifting/lowering detection sensor 374, and thrust detection sensor 375 of the performance control unit 300 installed on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the unit is functioning normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 is equipped with an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the internal WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU (04TKK0011). The CPU (04TKK0011) uses both the internal and external WDTs to diagnose whether its system is malfunctioning. Note that the WDT (watchdog timer) may be monitored solely by the external WDT without an internal WDT.

The display commands output from the CPU (04TKK0011) to the display control unit 1512 are performed via a serial input/output port. In this embodiment, the bitrate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side illumination/flashing commands, game board side illumination/flashing commands, movable body drive commands, etc., output from the CPU (04TKK0011) to the game board 5 are performed via multiple serial input/output ports different from those used for the display commands. In this embodiment, the bitrate is set to 250 kbps.

The boot ROM (05TKK0013) stores the power-on processing and the data necessary for that processing, which is executed when the power is turned on. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, when the power is turned on, the power-on processing is executed by processing the program stored in a predetermined area (boot area) of the boot ROM (05TKK0013). At this time, the devices and input/output means (I/O) necessary for starting the peripheral control board 1510 are initialized.

[27-1b. External RAM]
The external RAM (05TKK0020) preloads data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) based on instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060).

Furthermore, by having the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060) access data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020), processing can be significantly faster than when retrieving programs and data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Therefore, to quickly control the performance, access to the external RAM (05TKK0020) needs to be as fast (efficient) as possible. For example, DDR3 SDRAM and its successor standards of memory (storage medium) are used.

Furthermore, while the external RAM (05TKK0020) offers high-speed access, securing enough capacity to store all the data necessary for the effects is not practical from a cost perspective. Therefore, various effect data is stored in the effect data ROM (05TKK0070), which can store large amounts of data. However, reading data from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) takes more time than reading data from the external RAM (05TKK0020). As mentioned above, the time required to read the effect data is reduced by pre-loading the effect data from the time-consuming effect data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020), which can read data at high speed.

Furthermore, the preloaded data can be any data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), and may include not only image (video) data and sound data, but also various control data and scheduler data for controlling the performance. Additionally, preloading frequently displayed image data (e.g., identification symbols and hold indicators) and output sound data as resident data can speed up performance control.

Thus, the external RAM (05TKK0020) stores image data and sound data (songs, sound effects, etc., that meet predetermined conditions). Meanwhile, the RAM (04TKK0012) of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the entire program executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) (excluding the boot program) and data used in processing by that program (e.g., scheduler data). Furthermore, a work area temporarily used during program execution is allocated to this RAM.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, data to be preloaded is selected in advance and resides in the external RAM (05TKK0020). As described later, it is stored in the resident content data area (05TKK081) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) (see Figure 428B), and after power-on, it is preloaded from the resident content data area (05TKK081) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to a predetermined area of the external RAM (05TKK0020) (external RAM side resident content data storage area), thereby enabling faster performance control. The data to be preloaded will be described later.

[27-1c. Sound Output Section (Sound Source IC)]
The sound source IC (04TKK0030) enables high-quality performance based on sound data. The sound source IC (04TKK0030) acquires sound data based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and controls the playback of music and sound effects, etc., from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, which are installed in the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, to match the various effects.

The sound data is stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and contains information for outputting music, voice, and sound effects. The sound source IC (04TKK0030) can output sound based on sound data directly acquired from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), while also being able to output sound based on sound data preloaded from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Furthermore, the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box housing the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, by sending acoustic signals (for example, 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and the main frame speaker 622 for bass frequencies on the main frame 4, it is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than in conventional systems.

[27-1d. Performance Display Control Unit]
[27-1d-1. Basic configuration of the display control unit]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. As shown in Figure 427, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) (04TKK0060) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM (04TKK0090) to which various data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) are transferred and copied. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the performance display control unit 1512 is located on the peripheral control board 1510, but it may be located on a different board.

The VDP (04TKK0060), upon receiving a drawing instruction (liquid crystal display command list) output from the peripheral control unit 1511, extracts sprite data (image data) based on this input drawing instruction, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. The sprite data (image data) used for display is obtained from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) or external RAM (05TKK0020) and stored in the image RAM (04TKK0090).

Furthermore, the VDP (04TKK0060) outputs an execution signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the performance display device 1600 does not accept a drawing instruction from the peripheral control unit 1511. The VDP (04TKK0060) employs a double-buffer frame buffer. In the double-buffer system, two frame buffers are allocated in the image RAM (04TKK0090), one serving as a display buffer for display on the performance display device 1600, and the other as a drawing buffer for drawing the display image. Once drawing to the drawing buffer is complete, the display buffer and drawing buffer are switched (bank flip), and this process is repeated. Alternatively, a line buffer system may be used, where drawing data for one line (drawing in the left-right direction) is held in a line buffer, and this line of drawing data is output to the performance display device 1600.

The sprite data (image data) stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is the base data before the sprites are expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state. To explain "sprites," a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unified unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." Therefore, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc., that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 with their positions on the screen and their overlapping vertical relationships set.

In the double-buffer method, as described above, sprites are drawn to the drawing buffer, and after drawing is complete, the drawing buffer and display buffer are switched to display them on the animation display device 1600, and this process is repeated. Because the frame buffer buffers an entire screen frame, unlike the line buffer method, there is no limit to the number of sprites that can be arranged horizontally. Therefore, the display performance of sprites can be improved by increasing the drawing speed to the image RAM (04TKK0090) by the VDP (04TKK0060) and the access speed to the image RAM (04TKK0090).

The basic configuration of the performance display control unit 1512 has been described above. Now, a more detailed description of the performance display control unit 1512 will be provided.

[27-1d-2. VDP]
The VDP (04TKK0060) includes a CG data decoder (04TKK0061) that decodes image data read from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), a rendering engine (04TKK0062) that processes and generates image data for one frame, a pixel shader (04TKK0063) that generates and processes images for 3D display, and a display controller (04TKK0064) that controls the output of images to the performance display device 1600. Other components, not shown in the figures, include a CG memory controller that controls the reading of image data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and a VDP controller that controls the various internal components of the VDP (04TKK0060).

[27-1d-3. Image RAM]
As mentioned above, the image RAM (04TKK0090) is memory that temporarily stores the data necessary for the VDP (04TKK0060) to perform drawing operations. The memory area provided by the image RAM (04TKK0090) is largely occupied by buffers for temporarily recording characters and images to be displayed on the screen, and such buffers include the frame buffer (04TKK0091) and the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092).

The frame buffer (04TKK0091) is a storage area where image data identifying the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is temporarily stored. The off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) is a storage area where image data is temporarily stored during the process of creating images to be displayed on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the frame buffer (04TKK0091) has a double buffer structure with a first buffer and a second buffer, and is configured to be switchable between a drawing bank and a display bank.

[27-1d-4. Overview of Image Display Control]
Next, the procedure for displaying an image on the performance display device 1600 will be described. The performance display control unit 1512 receives a liquid crystal display list command created by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 after processing the main command received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, and displays an image on the performance display device 1600 based on the received liquid crystal display list command.

The liquid crystal display list command is temporarily stored in the command buffer (command memory). The VDP (04TKK0060) displays an image on the display device 1600 based on the liquid crystal display list command stored in the command buffer. The command buffer has a FIFO (First In First Out) structure, storing and processing liquid crystal display list commands in the order they are received. The command buffer may be provided independently as command memory, or it may be allocated to an area within the VDP's internal work RAM (not shown).

Furthermore, the liquid crystal display list command identifies each frame of the display device 1600, and includes, for example, control commands related to VDP control, such as interrupt operations of the VDP (04TKK0060), drawing commands related to the drawing operations of the rendering engine (04TKK0062), and decoding commands related to the decoding operations of the CG data decoder (04TKK0061).

The VDP (04TKK0060) reads image data (image information) from the external RAM (05TKK0020) or the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) via the CG memory controller. The read image data is then decoded by the CG data decoder (04TKK0061) to generate image display data (image display information). Note that the image data read by the CG memory controller is stored in a compressed state, and therefore the read image data is decoded by the CG data decoder (04TKK0061).

Furthermore, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes the image data generated by the rendering engine (04TKK0062). When displaying the image on the display device 1600 in 3D, the pixel shader (04TKK0063) performs pixel transformation, converting the image data into a lenticular image. Finally, the final image data to be displayed on the display device 1600 is stored in the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Furthermore, as will be described later, the gaming machine of this embodiment is capable of displaying objects such as characters on the screen in 3D. Therefore, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores both 3D image (stereoscopic image) data and 2D image (planar image) data. Both types of image data are compressed using the same method. In this embodiment, compression is performed in both the X-axis direction (horizontal direction) and the Y-axis direction (vertical direction). This reduces the size of the image data. It is also possible to compress in only one direction. Additionally, by using the same compression method for both 3D and 2D image data, the processing during data decoding (decompression) can be simplified. The CG data decoder (04TKK0061) of the VDP (04TKK0060) supports multiple compression methods, allowing for selection of any method; however, a common compression method is selected during implementation. Furthermore, for images where pixel conversion is performed by the pixel shader (04TKK0063), as will be described later, it is desirable to use lossless compression, as each dot is synthesized on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The VDP (04TKK0060) processes the decoded image data as needed based on the liquid crystal display list command using the rendering engine (04TKK0062). It then draws the image to be finally displayed on the performance display device 1600 into the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Subsequently, a bank switch (bank flip) occurs, switching from the drawing bank to the display bank, and the image is displayed on the performance display device 1600. The timing of the bank flip is defined by the bank flip wait command included in the liquid crystal display list command. After the VDP (04TKK0060) receives the bank flip wait command, the bank flip is actually executed at a predetermined cycle (bank flip cycle, for example, 1/30 second = screen update cycle (frame cycle)).

[27-1d-4. Memory Map]
When performing image processing, the VDP (04TKK0060) accesses the memory area provided by the image RAM (04TKK0090) and the external RAM (05TKK0101). A common address space is allocated to this memory area. Figure 428A is an example of a memory map of the memory area accessed by the VDP (04TKK0060).

Referring to Figure 428A, the memory area accessed by the VDP (04TKK0060) includes the frame buffer (04TKK0091), off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), expansion buffer (05TKK0093), temporary save buffer (05TKK0094), and decode buffer (05TKK0101).

As mentioned above, the frame buffer (04TKK0091) and off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) are provided in substance by the image RAM (05TKK0101). However, this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the frame buffer (04TKK0091) that is ultimately output to the display screen may be provided by the image RAM (05TKK0101), while the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) may be provided by external RAM (05TKK0020).

The expansion buffer (05TKK0093), temporary storage buffer (05TKK0094), and decode buffer (05TKK0101) are provided by either or both of the image RAM (04TKK0090) or external RAM (05TKK0101).

[27-1e. Performance Data Storage Unit (Performance Data ROM)]
The configuration of the performance display control unit 1512 has been described above. Next, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), which stores various performance data, will be described. As mentioned above, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores the data and programs necessary for the execution of the performance.

[27-1e-1. Composition of the production data ROM]
The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) used in the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured as a ROM board mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. The interface standard for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is Serial ATA. Therefore, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is equipped with a SATA controller (05TKK0071) and performs control in response to access requests from the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060), etc.

The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) includes a storage device (05TKK0073) for storing various programs and data. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the storage device (05TKK0073) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is a NAND flash memory. NAND flash memory is a high-capacity non-volatile storage medium.

NAND flash memory uses a memory cell, which is a storage area of one or more bits, as its basic unit. In the game machine's performance data ROM (05TKK0070) of this embodiment, a multi-bit (for example, 3 bits) storage area is used to achieve low cost. Memory cells store data by holding charge in their charge-holding areas. Data is read in pages, which are composed of multiple memory cells. Furthermore, because NAND flash memory has a configuration where multiple cells are connected in series, high integration can be achieved at low cost. Therefore, by adopting NAND flash memory for the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) in this game machine, it is possible to achieve both large storage capacity and cost reduction. Note that the storage device (05TKK0073) is not limited to NAND flash memory; other storage media may be used as long as they meet the specified conditions regarding capacity and cost.

However, NAND flash memory has a significantly slower data access speed compared to DDR3 DRAM, which is commonly used in RAM. This meant that reading image and sound data during performance execution could become a bottleneck, potentially causing delays in the performance. Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a cache memory (05TKK0072) is incorporated into the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to speed up data reading.

The cache memory (05TKK0072) is composed of high-speed read/write DRAM (or SRAM). When accessing data stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) from the CPU (04TKK0011) or VDP (05TKK0020), the data retrieval time can be significantly reduced if the data is stored in the cache memory (05TKK0072). This is particularly effective when the amount of data to be read from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is large.

The SATA controller (05TKK0071) holds the management information for the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Alternatively, the management information for the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) may be stored in the cache memory (05TKK0072). This management information includes memory cell arrangement information, etc. Furthermore, the cache memory (05TKK0072) may be integrated into the SATA controller (05TKK0071).

NAND flash memory is susceptible to changes in the digital values of neighboring cells if data stored in the same memory cell is repeatedly read. Furthermore, if a specific memory cell is not accessed for a long period, it may lose its charge, potentially preventing data retention. To address this issue, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) installed in this gaming machine incorporates a refresh function. The refresh function, for example, reads the contents of a page containing data and writes the same content back. This re-injects charge into the memory cell, suppressing unintended data changes and preventing data read errors. The refresh function may be performed only on pages containing data, or on all pages. For example, it may be performed on pages containing data upon power-on, while it may be performed periodically or manually on all pages.

Furthermore, the refresh function can be executed independently of the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060) by the SATA controller (05TKK0071). In this embodiment, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) of the gaming machine can automatically execute the refresh function when the power is turned on. The mechanism for detecting power on by the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is provided in the SATA controller (05TKK0071) separately from the power on detection by the CPU (04TKK0011). Therefore, the refresh function can be executed independently without waiting for instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011). In addition, by providing a power on detection mechanism in the SATA controller (05TKK0071), the refresh function can be executed based on the power supply to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) regardless of the power supply status on the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is interrupted during the refresh function, it will be possible to restart the refresh function from the beginning when the power is restored.

Furthermore, instead of executing the refresh function every time the gaming machine is powered on, it may be configured to execute the refresh function only when the machine is powered on after a period of 24 hours or more has passed since the last power-on. This is to prevent the refresh function from being executed frequently, as the machine may be powered on multiple times a day for maintenance, etc. Also, the period during which the refresh function is suppressed is not limited to 24 hours; it may be less than 24 hours (for example, around 12 hours) or longer than 24 hours (for example, around 48 hours).

Furthermore, the refresh function can be executed via external commands through specific operating means (power-on switch, effect buttons, etc.). This allows arcade staff to initiate the refresh function at any time. It may also be possible to execute the refresh function based on commands from the CPU (04TKK0011) or based on commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and instructions from the peripheral control unit 1511.

Furthermore, while the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) can perform a refresh function when the SATA controller (05TKK0071) detects a predetermined number of cells with a high probability of data errors (cells with reduced electrification), if the refresh function is performed during gameplay, the data reading speed will decrease, potentially preventing normal performance control. Therefore, as in this embodiment, by performing the refresh function when the game machine is powered on, i.e., before gameplay begins, the execution of the refresh function during gameplay is suppressed, ensuring smooth performance execution and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, NAND flash memory reads data in pages composed of multiple memory cells. Therefore, when reading small data, data that doesn't need to be read must also be read, resulting in reduced read efficiency. For example, when a gaming machine starts up (powers on), frequently accessed data, i.e., frequently displayed images, are transferred to the cache memory (05TKK0072). However, data stored within the page that is not intended for transfer is also read, resulting in a significantly larger amount of data actually read than the total amount of image data required. Consequently, a considerable amount of time is needed to preload data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) after the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with a predetermined power supply voltage (3.3V) before audio output and image display become possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, when preloading sound data and resident image data (frequently read images and small-sized images) into the external RAM (05TKK0020), the overhead is reduced and the transfer time shortened by changing the data transfer unit from 16KB to 32KB to match the specifications of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). The time required for power-on is directly affected by the amount of data preloaded, and this also affects the execution of the refresh function.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the power is turned on, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) performs a refresh function (PoB; Power on Busy), resulting in continuous access to the NAND flash memory storage device (05TKK0073). Therefore, the data read speed to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) decreases. Also, as mentioned above, the speed reduction is particularly noticeable when reading small data. Therefore, when displaying an image with a capacity of around 16KB (smaller than the data size per page) upon power-on, attempting to directly read the image data from the performance data ROM's storage device (05TKK0073) results in a longer time before gameplay can begin. Note that approximately half of the images displayed on the performance display screen 1600 have a capacity of 16KB or less.

As a means of solving the above problems, one could consider extending the standby time on the main control board 1310 until the image becomes displayable. However, this would prolong the time required for the inspection process during mass production of gaming machines, making it necessary to shorten the startup time of the peripheral control board 1510. For example, when inspecting whether the demo screen display (including lamp effects, movable part effects, etc.) is executed correctly as part of the power-on inspection, the start of the demo screen is triggered by a power-on command from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time from power-on to the completion of the above inspection is affected by the standby time of the main control board 1310, resulting in a decrease in inspection efficiency.

Therefore, as mentioned above, image data is preloaded as resident data into the external RAM (05TKK0020), and the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the image data from the external RAM (05TKK0020). Furthermore, while bandwidth is limited during the refresh function's execution, and the memory device (05TKK0073) is accessed during the refresh function's execution, the time until the refresh function finishes increases. However, since effects requiring large amounts of animation data are not executed immediately after power-on, this does not practically pose a problem.

Furthermore, the data preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) is not image-by-image, but rather a size that minimizes the overhead when writing data to the cache memory (05TKK0072). Therefore, a larger data size (e.g., 32KB) than that of a single image (16KB) will be transferred. This is because when attempting to read small data, data is actually read in page units, and the specified data is extracted from the read data. By using a size that eliminates the need for data extraction, the increase in overhead is suppressed. For example, the size of the data preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) could be set to the page unit, which is the unit of data reading. Note that the size of resident image data is not necessarily limited to 32KB or less; large image data exceeding 32KB that is frequently used may also be used.

Furthermore, since the access speed to the external RAM (05TKK0020) is faster than the access speed to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), increasing the amount of preloaded data can speed up performance control. However, increasing the capacity of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will lead to increased costs. Moreover, as mentioned above, the read efficiency of image data preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) deteriorates as its size decreases. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, about half of the image data has a capacity of 16KB or less, and furthermore, image data of 32KB or less accounts for 2/3 of the total. Therefore, it may be possible to preload approximately 1/2 to 2/3 of the total image data into the external RAM (05TKK0020) in order of increasing size. When defining the size threshold for preloaded image data, it should be set so that the image data is included in the 1/2 to 2/3 of the total in order of increasing size, and has a capacity of 2n bytes (page or block unit).

As described above, by setting the size of the data to be preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020), it is possible to significantly reduce the time it takes for the peripheral control board 1510 to become operational.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the data reading time can be shortened by providing a cache memory (05TKK0072) in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Moreover, since data is read from the cache memory (05TKK0072) and external RAM (05TKK0020), the frequency of access to the storage device (05TKK0073), which is a NAND flash memory, can be reduced. This suppresses data degradation, prevents a decrease in reading performance due to error correction, and extends the lifespan of the storage device (NAND flash memory).

As mentioned above, smaller image data sizes result in higher read efficiency. However, there may be image data that is not preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) due to reasons such as its large size despite being read relatively frequently. Such image data may be loaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) after a predetermined number of reads. In this case, a memory area for post-loading resident data may be pre-allocated in the resident content data area (05TKK0081), or a separate memory area for post-loading resident data may be allocated separately from the resident content data area (05TKK0081).

Furthermore, the system may be controlled to ensure that image data not preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) is more easily stored in the cache memory (05TKK0072) (increasing the cache memory hit rate). Since the cache memory (05TKK0072) stores the read data during data retrieval, the target image data is read at a predetermined timing (dummy read). This predetermined timing could be, for example, at predetermined intervals, during the execution of a predetermined performance, or when transitioning to a customer waiting state. The data to be read may be defined in advance, or it may be set based on the number of times unpreloaded image data has been read.

[27-1e-2. Control during refresh function execution]
The above describes the basic control of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). Now, we will explain the state and control of the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 while the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) refresh function is being executed.

The refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is, in principle, not executed by a program such as the power-on processing of the peripheral control board 1510 (Figure 429), but rather is executed independently based on the supply of a predetermined power voltage to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 waits for a predetermined time after the gaming machine is powered on until the peripheral control board 1510 can begin drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it waits during the power-on wait processing (step 02TKS0130) of the power-on startup confirmation processing (step 02TKS0020 in Figure 382; Figure 383). Since the waiting time is set to at least the time until drawing control by the performance display control unit 1512 becomes possible, the system is controlled so that the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is completed before the power-on wait processing is finished.

In other words, while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) at power-on is still running, the main control board 1310 starts supplying power to the control circuit, releases the reset signal, and then starts processing the program code at the starting address (address 8000) (power-on processing), and continues processing up to the power-on wait processing.

Furthermore, gameplay can only begin after the timer interrupt is permitted (step 02TKS0070 in Figure 382). Gameplay is not initiated until the power-on startup confirmation process (step 02TKS0020) is completed, i.e., until the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) has finished executing.

Furthermore, before the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the power-on wait process (step 02TKS0130), it executes a power-on wait pre-setting-related switch acquisition process (step 02TKS0120) to acquire the signal levels of the setting-related operation units (setting key 971, RAM clear switch 954). Therefore, since only the signal levels of the setting-related operation units are acquired, and the determination of whether a setting operation has actually been performed is made by the setting operation determination process (step 02TKS0040), the setting function will not be executed while the refresh function is running, and the system is controlled to prevent transitioning to the setting state (setting change state, setting confirmation state).

Furthermore, since the RAM clear determination process (step 02TKS0030) is executed after the power-on wait process, a RAM clear will not be performed even if a RAM abnormality occurs until the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is completed. After the refresh function is completed, a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a RAM clear, and the RAM clear is performed based on the result of that determination.

After the power-on processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 enables the RAM protect permission setting (step 02TKS0010), at least enabling the watchdog timer. At this time, it controls the system to prevent the watchdog timer from expiring while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to initialize during the power-on wait processing. This ensures that the watchdog timer is activated after the power-on wait processing is executed, allowing for reliable detection of abnormalities.

Furthermore, if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed, the refresh function will not be interrupted and will continue. When power is restored to the main control board 1310, the power-on processing will be executed again. At this time, even if it is possible to return to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the main control RAM 1312, the system will wait without executing the return process until the refresh function is completed. For example, the process of displaying the special symbols and the number of reserved memories before the power outage on the function display unit 1400 will be performed after the refresh function is completed. Also, even if the game state before the power outage was a favorable game state (jackpot game state, high probability state, time-saving state, etc.), the system will return to that favorable game state after the refresh function is completed. Furthermore, if the game medium payout process was not completed before the power outage, the game medium payout process will be suspended until the refresh function is completed, and will resume after the refresh function is completed.

Furthermore, since the ball dispensing operation is controlled solely by the main control board 1310, it may be possible to accept the operation even while the refresh function is running. When a ball dispensing operation is accepted, balls may be dispensed even while the refresh function is running, or the balls may be dispensed after the refresh function has finished. Also, even while the refresh function is running, the game ball launch control is solely controlled by the main control board 1310, so there is no need to suppress the launch control.

As described above, the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is executed independently of the control of the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if power supply to the main control board 1310 is restored, there is no need to execute the refresh function again, thus preventing excessive load on the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

Furthermore, while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is running, even if various sensors detect an anomaly, an anomaly notification will not be issued, and processing related to anomaly notifications will be suppressed. Since it may not be possible to acquire drawing data or audio data necessary for anomaly notifications while the refresh function is running, this ensures reliable anomaly notifications.

The refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is, in principle, executed when the power is turned on, but it can also be executed during gameplay. When the refresh function is executed during gameplay, game control can be started or continued. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 can accept command input from the main control board 1310. The processing corresponding to the command is executed after the refresh function has finished. This makes it possible to process commands immediately after the refresh function is executed, minimizing the time lag.

While the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is running, the initialization process for drawing control to the performance display device 1600 is not started, but the initialization processes of other performance devices can be started. For example, the self-check operation (initialization operation) of movable parts can be performed. In this case, the series of initialization operations may be terminated after the refresh function is completed, or they may be terminated while the refresh function is running.

If there are any unpaid game balls (game media) while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is running during gameplay, the unpaid prize balls will be dispensed. Furthermore, if a ball dispensing operation is received, the ball dispensing operation will be initiated. Additionally, the launch control by the launching device will be enabled. These controls do not directly affect the control on the peripheral control board 1510, and therefore can be executed independently of the refresh function.

Furthermore, if an abnormality is detected while the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is being executed during gameplay, an abnormality notification will be displayed after the refresh function is completed. In this case, the abnormality notification may be displayed only if the abnormality persists after the refresh function is completed, or it may not be displayed if the abnormality has been resolved, or the decision on whether or not to display the abnormality notification may be made depending on the type of abnormality that occurred. Also, if a command related to abnormality notification is received from the main control board 1310 during the execution of the refresh function, abnormality notification may be enabled by means other than the performance display device 1600 (e.g., lamp, sound).

Furthermore, if the refresh function of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is initiated during gameplay, drawing control is interrupted, and the drawing of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 is suppressed. At this time, the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 of the main control board 1310 continues even while the refresh function is running. Similarly, if there is a hold memory, the hold display on the performance display device 1600 is suppressed while the refresh function is running, and the display resumes after the refresh function is completed. At this time, the hold display on the function display unit 1400 of the main control board 1310 also continues even while the refresh function is running.

While the refresh function is running, the display device 1600 will be in a specific state. For example, when the refresh function is running after the gaming machine is powered on, nothing may be displayed because the game has not yet started, or the gaming machine's startup screen may be displayed. In this case, the image displayed on the startup screen may be stored in a storage medium other than the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) so as not to affect the execution of the refresh function. Furthermore, if the refresh function is executed after the gaming machine is powered on, such as during gameplay, a special image indicating that the refresh function is running will be displayed.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine is capable of entering power-saving mode, it will not enter power-saving mode while the refresh function is running. For example, the system may suppress the transition to power-saving mode when displaying a special image indicating that the refresh function is running, and release this suppression upon completion of the refresh function. Alternatively, while the refresh function is running, the command to transition to power-saving mode sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 may be canceled (ignored).

Furthermore, during the refresh function, the execution of various adjustment means (volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, effect settings, etc.) is suppressed. For example, during the refresh function, the execution of various adjustment means is suppressed by controlling the system to not accept input from the control unit, such as the effect buttons. In this way, by suppressing the execution of various controls by the peripheral control board 1510 during the refresh function, stable control can be achieved.

[27-1e-3. Memory area for storing various types of data]
Figure 428B is a diagram illustrating the allocation of memory area provided by the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores image (CG) data and sound data, as well as various programs executed by the CPU (04TKK0011), data for those programs, and performance control data for controlling each performance. Alternatively, the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) may be configured to store only image (CG) data that requires a large amount of capacity, while other programs and data are stored in a separate ROM located on the peripheral control board 1510.

The memory area provided by the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) includes a resident content data area (05TKK0081), a peripheral control program area (05TKK0082), a drawing program area (05TKK0083), an audio data area (05TKK0084), and an image (CG) data area (05TKK0085).

The resident content data area (05TKK0081) is the area where frequently used performance data (resident content data) is stored. By preloading the resident content data into the external RAM (05TKK0020) after power-on, the frequency of access to the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) can be reduced, leading to faster performance control and longer storage life. Furthermore, including a large amount of small data in the resident content data can further enhance these effects. While the resident content data area (05TKK0081) does not need to be located at the beginning of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), it is desirable to group the data to be preloaded and kept resident in a designated area as much as possible.

The resident content data is basically image data, but it is not limited to image data; it may also include sound data, data for driving performance devices such as lamps and movable parts (including schedule data). This type of data is used more frequently than other types of data. If the capacity of the sound data and data for driving performance devices such as lamps and movable parts is small, it may be stored in external RAM (05TKK0020) beforehand.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to preload all resident content data into the external RAM (05TKK0020); it can be swapped depending on usage frequency. For example, it can be swapped depending on the game state. Specifically, if different decorative symbols are displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state, the symbols for the normal state should be preloaded in the normal state, and when transitioning to the time-saving state, the decorative symbols for the time-saving state should be preloaded in place of the symbols for the normal state.

The peripheral control program area (05TKK0082) may include not only the performance control program in the peripheral control unit 1511, but also programs for sound output control and programs for controlling lamps and movable parts. Furthermore, programs for controlling individual performance devices may be allocated to separate areas.

Furthermore, the peripheral control program area (05TKK0082) also stores control data necessary for the execution of various performance control programs. For example, it includes scheduler data that defines the performance for each variation pattern. The scheduler data includes sub-performance scheduler data for controlling various performance devices and drawing scheduler data for displaying the screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. However, the drawing scheduler data may be stored in the drawing program area (05TKK0083).

The sub-effect scheduler data includes scheduler data for generating light emission patterns to control the emission patterns of various LEDs and lamps, scheduler data for generating sound to play background music, sound effects, and notification sounds, and scheduler data for controlling the operation patterns of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

The drawing program area (05TKK0083) stores programs and control data for displaying performance images on the performance display device 1600. The control data includes, for example, drawing scheduler data. The drawing scheduler data corresponds to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration, arranged in chronological order, thus defining the order in which screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the drawing scheduler data includes non-resident area transfer scheduler data, which is composed of non-resident area transfer data arranged in chronological order that defines the order in which image data stored in the image data area is transferred to the buffer area (non-resident area) of the image RAM (04TKK0090). The non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which screen data to be drawn on the display device 1600, according to the progress of the drawing scheduler data, is transferred in advance from the image data area (05TKK0085) to the buffer area of the image RAM (04TKK0090).

The sound data area (05TKK0084) stores information defining the sounds output by the gaming machine. Furthermore, the sound data area (05TKK0084) also stores data for controlling the sound output based on the sound data stored in the sound data area (05TKK0084).

The image (CG) data area (05TKK0085) stores various types of image data. This includes an image data area for single images and an image data area for video. The single image data area also contains data for both 2D and 3D images (details are described later in Figure 435). The structure for storing data in the video image data area is shown in Figure 456, etc.

[27-2. Processing when the peripheral control board is powered on]
The configuration of the peripheral control board 1510 has been described above. Next, the processing when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on will be described. Figure 429 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. The power-on processing is performed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing the boot program stored in the boot ROM (05TKK0013) and the peripheral control program stored in the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

When the gaming machine is powered on and the necessary power voltage for the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied, the CPU (04TKK0011) reads the boot program from the boot ROM (05TKK0013) and starts it (step 05TKS0010). Furthermore, it initializes the devices and input/output ports necessary for executing the boot program (step 05TKS0020). At this time, the devices initialized are only those necessary for executing the boot program, not those for executing various effects, but rather those for performing various settings necessary to transfer data and programs from the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) to the RAM (04TKK0012).

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) executes the boot program to load the peripheral control program from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0030). Furthermore, it starts the peripheral control program on the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0040). The peripheral control program performs the necessary processing to start performance control. The CPU (04TKK0011) also initializes the devices necessary for the execution of the peripheral control program (step 05TKS0050).

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) synchronously preloads the drawing program from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) into the RAM (04TKK0012) (step 05TKS0060). The drawing program is used to execute the process for displaying images on the performance display device 1600. At this timing, for example, the program is executed to draw the logo mark displayed when the power is turned on.

Synchronous preloading involves the CPU (04TKK0011) directly sending a data transfer request from the SATA controller (05TKK0071) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) or VRAM (04TKK0090). Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) waits until the data transfer is complete. The completion of the data transfer can be confirmed by referring to the transfer completion status register of the SATA controller (05TKK0071), and the CPU (04TKK0011) periodically checks this to confirm the completion of the data transfer (polling). Note that the SATA controller (05TKK0071) is not configured to confirm the completion of the data transfer by sending an interrupt request to the CPU (04TKK0011). Furthermore, while the CPU (04TKK0011) is polling, other initialization processes (e.g., lamps and motors) are not executed and the system simply waits.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) asynchronously preloads sound data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0070). The sound data is the data used by the sound source IC (04TKK0030) to output sound from the speaker. The preloaded sound data includes not only the startup sound data output when the power is turned on, but also sound data for all performance-related sounds.

In asynchronous preloading, the CPU (04TKK0011) sends a data transfer request to the VDP (04TKK0060) or sound source IC (04TKK0030) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) or VRAM (04TKK0090). The completion of the data transfer can be confirmed by the VDP (04TKK0060) or sound source IC (04TKK0030), which received the transfer request, sending an interrupt request to the CPU (04TKK0011) upon completion. Therefore, the CPU (04TKK0011) can continue initialization processing even after sending the transfer request. For example, various initial settings can be performed in parallel while sound data is being preloaded.

When performing asynchronous preloading, the CPU (04TKK0011) instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) of the source address (the address of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070)), the destination address (the address of the external RAM (05TKK0020) and the address of the VRAM (04TKK0090)), and the amount of data to be transferred. Based on the instructions from the CPU (04TKK0011), the VDP (04TKK0060) specifies the block (page) of the storage device (05TKK0073) to be the source of the transfer to the SATA controller (05TKK0071) and reads the specified data sequentially. When sequentially reading data from the storage device (05TKK0073), the SATA controller (05TKK0071) can only read data in block/page units. Therefore, to avoid reading extra data, when preloading to external RAM (05TKK0020), only the necessary data (excluding extraneous data) is preloaded.

Subsequently, the CPU (04TKK0011) asynchronously preloads the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) (step 05TKS0080). The resident content data is data that is frequently used when performances are executed. The resident content data mainly consists of image data. As mentioned above, by preloading the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020), the time required to read the data can be shortened. The resident content data contains a large amount of data that is used after the game starts, and there is a grace period before the performances actually begin, so the data is transferred from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) by asynchronous preloading. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as described above, all sound data is preloaded. However, if the sound data capacity is large, it may be divided into resident and non-resident sound data, and only the resident sound data may be preloaded when the power is turned on.

Finally, the CPU (04TKK0011) initializes the devices necessary for drawing and sound output (step 05TKS0080). Once these processes are complete, the game is ready to begin.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the time required to read the performance data can be shortened by pre-loading the resident content data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020). This is because the time required to read data from the external RAM (05TKK0020) is shorter than the time required to read data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070). This allows for a relaxation of the required read speed for the storage medium of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070), enabling the selection of a high-capacity, low-cost storage medium, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. Furthermore, shortening the read time for performance data makes it possible to implement performances using a wide variety of image data, improving the performance effect and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the preloading of performance data from the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) to the external RAM (05TKK0020) is possible using both synchronous and asynchronous preloading. Therefore, if processing needs to be stopped until data transfer is complete, synchronous preloading is used to transfer the data. Conversely, asynchronous preloading allows processing to be performed in parallel with data transfer. This allows for flexible responses depending on the nature of the performance control.

[28. Performance control on peripheral control boards]
The above describes the configuration of the peripheral control board and the processing when the power is turned on. Next, we will explain the basic performance control in the peripheral control board 1510. Here, we will mainly explain the control that executes performances based on the main commands (variation pattern commands, special performance synchronization commands, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the results of the special lottery.

[28-1. Configuration and Performance Control of Peripheral Control Units]
Figure 430 shows an example of the configuration of modules used in the performance control by the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine in this embodiment. Each component is configured not only as hardware but also as software through a computer program executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. Some or all of the various modules may be configured as hardware.

The performance data ROM (05TKK0070) stores various modules (programs) for controlling the overall performance and driving each performance device, and is executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. These modules include the command analysis module (04TKK0102), LCD module (04TKK0113), sound module (04TKK0122), lamp module (04TKK0123), and drive unit module (04TKK0124), among others.

Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 is equipped with various modules, as well as buffers such as a main command buffer (04TKK0101), a liquid crystal display list command buffer (04TKK0114), a lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125), and a motor data output buffer (04TKK0126). It also includes a serial control IC (04TKK0127) for transmitting control signals to each performance device.

The main command buffer (04TKK0101) receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module (04TKK0102). In this embodiment, the main command is a set of 3 bytes of information, consisting of the command status value, command mode value, and checksum value of the command status and mode value, in that order from the first byte. The main command buffer (04TKK0101) receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command. If the command is determined to be correct, passes it to the command analysis module (04TKK0102).

As mentioned above, the main command includes information representing the game state and the operating state of the gaming machine, specifically those related to the game's presentation. For example, the main command may include information such as whether or not a game ball has entered the starting prize slot, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Furthermore, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, it can include information such as door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of the start lever and stop buttons, reel rotation and stopping, and whether or not a winning combination was achieved upon stopping. Note that the commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the gaming machine model and the content of the presentation.

The command analysis module (04TKK0102) analyzes the content of the main command and determines whether or not it is a command related to the performance. If it is determined to be a command related to the performance, the performance control unit (04TKK0100) executes the corresponding processing.

The performance control unit (04TKK0100) determines the performance block number corresponding to the performance content and identifies the performance block data based on the analysis results of the main command. For example, if the command indicates the start of a special symbol variation, it identifies the performance block data corresponding to the variation pattern. In the case of an error, it identifies the performance block data corresponding to the error display. The same applies in the case of abnormalities, etc.

The performance block data includes scheduler data for executing the performances. Scheduler data is data that stores multiple functions in the order in which they should be executed, instructing which predetermined processes to be executed from among the multiple processes required by each performance device, in order to control the performances in each performance device. The performance block data includes "LCD performance block data" for executing the performances displayed on the performance display device (LCD display device) 1600, and "sub-performance block data" for controlling sounds, lights, and other effects. Note that "LCD symbol block data" for displaying changing symbols on the performance display device 1600 may be treated separately from the "LCD performance block data."

The performance block control unit, which controls the performance based on the performance block data, includes a liquid crystal performance block control unit (04TKK0110) and a sub-performance block control unit (04TKK0120). The liquid crystal performance block control unit (04TKK0110) determines control information for executing performances that display images on the performance display device 1600. The sub-performance block control unit (04TKK0120) determines control information for executing sound output, lamp lighting/flashing, and the operation of mechanical devices. Performance control based on performance block data will be described later with reference to Figure 431, etc.

The liquid crystal display block control unit (04TKK0110) executes the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the determined display block number. The liquid crystal display block data is data for executing liquid crystal display effects and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, patterns, etc., are displayed on the display device 1600.

The LCD animation block control unit (04TKK0110) executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. To do this, it activates the LCD animation drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) for displaying animation elements such as backgrounds and characters, and the LCD pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) for displaying patterns.

The LCD animation drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the LCD pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) are executed at a frame cycle (1f = approximately 33.334 milliseconds), which is the screen update cycle. The LCD animation drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) and the LCD pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the LCD animation block data using the drawing scheduler, and the LCD module (04TKK0113) generates an LCD display list command. The LCD display list command is passed to the animation display control unit 1512 via the LCD display list command buffer (04TKK0114). The animation display control unit 1512 generates display data based on the received LCD display list command and outputs it to the animation display device 1600. Display data is generated, for example, by expanding character data specified by an LCD display list command onto the frame buffer at the specified location.

The liquid crystal display command list is a set of commands used to set display control-related commands (data) for registers provided in each function of the VDP (04TKK0060) in order to control the display of images on the display device. The data for one frame of the screen is created as a group of data (list) and then stored in the liquid crystal display list command buffer.

The sub-effect block control unit (04TKK0120) executes the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number once the effect block number is determined. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing the effects of lamps, sounds, and motors, and includes one or more sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, the lamp, sound, and motor effect devices perform the operations predefined in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub-performance block control unit (04TKK0120) activates the sub-performance scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) according to the execution cycle of various performance devices, and executes the sub-performance scheduler data included in the sub-performance block data. The sub-performance scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) includes a sub-performance 1f scheduler execution unit that controls performance devices at 1-frame intervals, and a sub-performance 1ms scheduler execution unit that controls performance devices at 1-millisecond intervals. By providing scheduler execution units corresponding to execution intervals in this way, it becomes possible to execute performances according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the performance devices. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it becomes possible to synchronize sound output and the operation of mechanical devices with the LCD display. Furthermore, if the sensor detection interval is in units of 1ms, it becomes possible to respond quickly if a malfunction occurs in the operation of a mechanical device.

The sub-performance block control unit (04TKK0120) performs performance control other than liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, three types of performance control will be described as examples: sound output, lamp illumination/flashing, and the operation of mechanical devices. The following describes the general overview of control according to the type of performance device.

First, let's explain how sound output is used for effects. If the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the sub-effect scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) starts the sound output scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (e.g., SPLAY) is executed, the sound module (04TKK0122) generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the specified parameters. Note that multiple schedulers can be started; for example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel, and sound can be output simultaneously. The sound source IC (04TKK0030) reads the sound data specified in the sound source drive data from the sound ROM (04TKK0040) and outputs it from the speaker 622.

Next, we will explain how to perform effects using lamps. If the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit will start the lamp scheduler and execute the scheduler data. Then, when the lamp control function (e.g., HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module (04TKK0123) generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As with sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, allowing for the parallel control of multiple lamps and layers.

The lamp module (04TKK0123) creates lamp drive data every period (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125). The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure and temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module (04TKK0123) and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125) a double buffer, the creation and output of lamp data can be performed simultaneously in a single period. This configuration addresses the increase in lamp control processing time due to an increase in the number of lamp systems or the layering of lamps. By setting the output of lamp data to the next operating period after lamp data creation, the processing related to lamp data creation only needs to be completed within the processing period.

Specifically, if the lamp data output buffer (04TKK0125) is composed of buffer A and buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in buffer A, data for the next cycle is output to buffer B, and the previously created lamp drive data is output from buffer A to the serial control IC (04TKK0127) via DMA, causing each lamp to light up or blink. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module (04TKK0123) to buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in buffer B is output to the serial control IC (04TKK0127). The same applies to controlling the lighting and blinking of LEDs; therefore, explanations regarding lamp control can be replaced with explanations for LEDs unless otherwise specified.

Finally, we will explain how to control the drive devices (e.g., motors, solenoids) that operate the special effects. If the sub-performance block data includes scheduler data for drive device control, the scheduler execution unit starts the drive device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the drive device control function (e.g., MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module (04TKK0124) generates motor drive data based on the specified parameters. As with sound output, it is possible to start multiple schedulers, allowing for the parallel control of multiple drive devices.

The drive unit module (04TKK0124) creates motor drive data at regular intervals and outputs it to the motor data output buffer (04TKK0126). In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a 1-millisecond interval. The motor data output buffer (04TKK0126) temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive unit module (04TKK0124) and outputs it to the serial control IC (04TKK0127). The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control unit 1511 without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal to reflect the motor data in each drive unit is not at the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer (04TKK0126) to the serial control IC (04TKK0127), but rather the latch signal is output in the period following the transmission of all motor data. This is because the latch signal output timing occurs after the serial transmission of all motor data is complete. As the serial transmission time of the motor data increases, the waiting time until the serial transmission is complete becomes overhead, resulting in insufficient overall processing time for each frame cycle. In this embodiment, the waiting time until the serial transmission is complete is eliminated by shifting the timing of the motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output. However, depending on the CPU used, if multiple DMAs can be used, the waiting time until the serial transmission is complete can be eliminated in the same way by using the DMA to serially transmit the motor drive data and outputting the latch signal with a DMA completion interrupt. In addition, simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, the performance drive photo information is input to the drive unit module (04TKK0124). Each performance drive photo information is received via serial communication through a parallel serial control IC.

[28-2. Performance control using performance blocks and scheduler data]
Next, we will explain the execution procedure for the予告演出 (preview effect) based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern. Here, we will explain the execution procedure for the basic effect and preview effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the first half variation of variation pattern "10H03H". The first half variation of variation pattern "10H03H" is a 12-second normal variation, and the corresponding effect block data assigned is the normal variation 12-second LCD effect block data (LCD03_BLK), the normal variation 12-second LCD symbol block data (ZUG03_BLK), and the normal variation 12-second sub-effect block data (SCH03_BLK). Figure 431 is a diagram illustrating the overview of the effect control for the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of variation pattern "10H03H".

When the main control board 1310 receives the variation pattern command (main variation-related command) "10H03H", the command analysis module (04TKK0102) analyzes the received command to identify the variation pattern number "10H03H" and notifies the performance control unit (04TKK0100).

The performance control unit (04TKK0100) identifies the performance device to be controlled and determines the corresponding block data number. Based on the determined block number, it retrieves the block data number corresponding to the variation pattern number "10H03H" from a table where these combinations are defined. By assigning the same block data number to each performance device, it becomes possible to execute all performances of each device in synchronous order.

The performance control unit (04TKK0100) then transmits block data numbers equal to the number of performance devices to be controlled to the LCD performance block control unit (04TKK0110) and the sub-performance block control unit (04TKK0120).

Subsequently, the LCD animation block control unit (04TKK0110), the LCD animation drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111), the LCD pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112), and the sub-animation block control unit (04TKK0120), along with the sub-animation scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121), execute the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the LCD animation drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0111) executes the normal variation 12-second LCD animation block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half of the variation, the LCD pattern drawing scheduler execution unit (04TKK0112) executes the normal variation 12-second LCD pattern block data "ZUG03_BLK", and the sub-animation scheduler execution unit (04TKK0121) executes the normal variation 12-second sub-animation block data "SCH03_BLK".

When processing of LCD effect block data begins, one or more LCD effect schedulers corresponding to the LCD effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes LCD effect functions (LCD function information) for displaying images on the effect display device 1600. Parameters according to the effect content are specified, and the LCD function information is transmitted to the LCD module (04TKK0113) in a predetermined order. The LCD module (04TKK0113) analyzes and executes the received LCD function information, and then sends an LCD display list command to the effect display control unit 1512, thereby performing drawing on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, when processing LCD pattern block data, the LCD pattern scheduler is activated, and drawing scheduler data corresponding to the pattern variation display mode is executed. The procedure for drawing on the display device 1600 is the same as when processing LCD performance block data.

On the other hand, when processing of sub-performance block data begins, one or more sub-performance schedulers corresponding to that sub-performance block data are launched, and the scheduler data specified according to the performance content is executed. Note that the schedulers may be prepared according to their execution cycle, or they may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As mentioned above, the scheduler data includes functions (performance data specification functions) for controlling performance devices such as lamps ("KPLAY"), speakers ("SPLAY"), and mechanical devices ("MPLAY"). The system is configured to execute the specified performances by sequentially executing these functions in a defined order. These functions are transmitted to modules corresponding to the controlled performance devices (lamp module (04TKK0123), sound module (04TKK0122), drive unit (motor) module (04TKK0124), etc.), and each module executes the performances using the various performance devices.

Furthermore, it is possible to call other scheduler data from one scheduler data using the function "REQ". By executing the performance data specification function in the called scheduler data, it is possible to control various performance devices. In addition, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND", control is possible using commands instead of functions. For example, by sending an LCD command to the LCD module (04TKK0113) at the timing of executing the performance data specification function that controls the operation of a special feature, it is possible to execute a performance where the operation and drawing of the special feature are coordinated.

[28-3. Functions for controlling the performance]
The above explains the execution procedures for basic and preview effects based on the performance scheduler data corresponding to the first half of the variation pattern "10H03H". As mentioned above, the performance scheduler data defines functions for controlling the effects, and the effects are executed by executing the defined functions. Functions include those that perform sequence control, such as specifying the operating order of the effect devices, those that operate the effect devices by specifying parameters, and those that control the LCD display. Here, we will explain some representative functions.

Figure 432 shows an example of a function in the performance control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, various performance devices, and liquid crystal displays.

Functions belonging to the sequence control group are primarily functions for controlling the flow of the performance. For example, "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions specified as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If it is executed on a frame cycle, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so specifying 30 as the number of executions will result in a wait of approximately 1 second. If it is executed on a 1ms cycle, specifying 30 as the number of executions will result in a wait of approximately 30ms. There are also other functions, such as conditional wait functions that wait for a time corresponding to the number of executions. "REQ" is a function for activating other specified schedulers.

The functions for controlling the lamps include "HPLAY" and "KPLAY". "HPLAY" is a function that executes lamp gradation data playback processing, which illuminates the lamps based on the gradation data specified by the parameters. "HPLAY" resets the lamps even if they are already being played with the same gradation data, and starts lamp playback from the beginning when the function is executed. "KPLAY" is similar to "HPLAY," but if the lamps are already being played with the same gradation data, it continues the currently running lamp playback without resetting.

The functions for controlling sound include, for example, "SPLAY," which executes a phrase playback process that outputs a sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter. "SPLAY" resets the phrase number even if a sound with the same phrase number is already being played, and starts playback from the beginning when the function is executed. On the other hand, if you want to continue playback without resetting if a sound with the same phrase number is already being played, other functions are provided. Functions for controlling volume and other operations are also available.

Functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids include, for example, "MPLAY," which performs a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameters. Other functions, such as those for solenoids, are also available.

Functions other than those for LCD effects that do not belong to the groups described so far are conveniently grouped under "User" functions. These functions include, for example, "COMMAND," which issues commands from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" allows direct command issuance to the effect display control unit 1512, enabling the start of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, there are commands that issue commands to the peripheral control unit 1511, which are then analyzed by the command analysis module (04TKK0102) and executed in the same manner as the main command. Other functions include copying the contents of the work area of a currently running scheduler to the work area of another scheduler.

Next, we will explain the functions for LCD effects. Each LCD effect function is managed according to its function and purpose, and can be divided into groups such as coordinate settings, scale settings, rotation angle settings, alpha settings, 3D settings, frame settings, and Z-index settings.

The coordinate setting function, for example, specifies the coordinates of the display area of the display device 1600 and sets the object to be displayed in the liquid crystal display, thereby specifying the position of the object to be displayed. Specifically, the function "POSX" sets the display position of the object to be displayed in the liquid crystal display by specifying the X-axis coordinate position.

The scaling (scale setting) function, for example, sets the center of the display area that will be enlarged or reduced when displaying images or videos stored on the CGROM on the display device 1600, and converts the coordinate units. By setting an appropriate coordinate system for the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at the appropriate position and size. Specifically, the "SCALE" function sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object by specifying the X and Y axis values.

The rotation angle setting function is used, for example, to set the angle when rotating an object to be displayed on a liquid crystal display (LCD). By storing only the reference LCD display object in the CGROM and specifying the angle for display, it becomes unnecessary to store multiple rotated LCD display objects, thus suppressing an increase in memory capacity. Specifically, the "ANGLEX" function rotates the LCD display object by specifying the X-axis value.

The "ALPHA" function in the α setting allows you to specify the α value to set the transparency of the object being displayed on the LCD. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from completely transparent (colorless), where the background color is fully transmitted, to completely opaque, where the background color is not transmitted at all.

The 3D setting functions control the 3D display of objects shown on the LCD. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the gaming machine enables 3D display of objects shown on the LCD. Specifically, the function "3D_SW" sets the ON/OFF status of the 3D display. The function "3D_DSP" instructs the display control unit 1512 (VDP04TKK0060) to perform 3D display control (creation of a command list for 3D control) by specifying parameters. By specifying parameters, it is possible to set the objects to be displayed in 3D (LCD display objects such as backgrounds, characters, and patterns), and to set the 3D depth (depth) during 3D display.

The "FRAME" function sets the frame value, which is the drawing update interval for objects displayed on the LCD. The frame value is a numerical value that indicates the interval at which objects displayed on the LCD are redrawn during animation processing.

The "ZINDEX" function sets the Z-index of the object being displayed on the LCD screen. The Z-index is the layer in which the object is displayed on the LCD screen. By setting this, the object can be displayed in the foreground or moved to the background. For example, if the object being displayed is the background, the Z-index is set so that it is drawn at the very back.

The above describes the outline of the performance control based on the performance block data and scheduler data in this embodiment. Next, the means for displaying images on the performance display device (main display device) 1600 will be described. Specifically, first, the configuration and control for displaying stereoscopic images will be described, and then the configuration and control for displaying moving images will be described.

[28-4. Displaying Stereoscopic Images]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to display both a two-dimensional image (planar image) and a three-dimensional image (stereoscopic image) (3D display, stereoscopic display), allowing the player to view part or all of the image displayed on the display device 1600 in stereoscopic form. In this embodiment, the lenticular method is employed as a means of achieving 3D display. In addition to the lenticular method, other means of achieving 3D display include the parallax barrier method, in which a liquid crystal panel for parallax barrier is placed on the front side of the display device 1600. The outline of the lenticular method will be described below.

[28-4a. Overview of the Lenticular Method]

Binocular parallax (the difference in the position of the image seen by the right and left eyes) is greater for closer objects and smaller for farther objects. The brain detects this difference and converts it into distance, allowing us to perceive objects as three-dimensional. The lenticular method utilizes this property to display specific images (lenticular images, stereoscopic images, 3D images) through lenticular lenses, enabling the visualization of three-dimensional, depth-based, and dynamic movement. The following further explanation of 3D display using the lenticular method will refer to Figure 433.

Figure 433 illustrates the mechanism of 3D display using the lenticular method, where (A) shows the area visible to the left eye (L) and (B) shows the area visible to the right eye (R).

A lenticular lens is constructed by arranging a series of tiny, elongated, semi-circular convex lenses on its surface. By placing the lenticular lens on the front side of the display device 1600 and displaying a lenticular image (stereoscopic image, 3D image) on the screen of the display device 1600, players can view the displayed image three-dimensionally with the naked eye.

Figure 434 shows an example of a lenticular image in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in Figure 434, a lenticular image is formed by dividing two or more images into strips and arranging them sequentially so that each divided image can be viewed through a single convex lens. As shown in Figure 433, the lenticular image thus constructed can be viewed three-dimensionally by (A) viewing only the left-eye image with the left eye and (B) viewing only the right-eye image with the right eye through the lenticular lens. The lenticular lens and lenticular image are configured to be optimal when the player plays the game from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the pixel shader (04TKK0063) mounted on the VDP (04TKK0060) of this gaming machine has a synthesis function that enables image processing on a pixel-by-pixel basis. By utilizing this synthesis function, a lenticular image is generated by dividing the left-eye image and the right-eye image into strips, arranging them alternately, and then synthesizing them into a single image.

[28-4b. Image placement within the image data area]
The image data area (05TKK0085) stores images for generating a lenticular image, specifically images for the left eye and the right eye placed side by side (side-by-side images). That is, the images are stored in the manner shown in Figure 434(A). The left eye image and the right eye image are placed in consecutive areas.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is capable of displaying a mixture of 2D and 3D images. Therefore, both 2D and 3D images are stored in the image data area (05TKK0085). The 3D images are compressed using a lossless method. By compressing the image data using a lossless method, it is possible to display the compressed image without degrading the image quality when it is decoded. Also, the 2D images are generally compressed using a lossy method to suppress an increase in capacity. However, since the symbols are the objects (characters) that players pay the most attention to, it is preferable to use lossless compression even for 2D displays. This is because with lossy compression, the color and shape (outline) may degrade compared to the original image before compression, and there is a possibility that they may be slightly different from the original image. However, if lossy compression of the symbols does not make a significant difference to the player compared to lossless compression, and the degradation of color, outline shape, etc., is not easily noticeable, then lossy compression may be used. Furthermore, when performing lossless compression, the same compression method is used for both 2D and 3D images.

Figure 435 illustrates the arrangement of images stored in the image data area (05TKK0085). (A) shows the overall arrangement of the image data area (05TKK0085), and (B) shows the detailed arrangement of the area where the 3D image is stored.

As shown in Figure 435(A), the image data area (05TKK0085) is allocated separately as a 2D image storage area for storing 2D images and a 3D image storage area for storing 3D images. Alternatively, a blank area may be allocated between the 2D and 3D image storage areas. This minimizes changes to definition information such as address information, even when the storage capacity of the images increases or decreases, thus minimizing modifications to the program and definition information. Furthermore, a storage area capable of storing a mixture of 2D and 3D images may be provided depending on the function and application.

The 2D images displayed in the game machine's effects in this embodiment include background images, symbols, character images, etc. In addition to these effects images, other images are also included, such as those used for error displays and abnormality notifications. These images may be arranged according to their function and purpose as needed, and may be arranged in display order when used in a continuous series of effects.

Furthermore, 3D images are, in principle, composed only of images related to the visual effects. For example, they include characters (objects) that appear in preview sequences and patterns used for the effects. Background images used during 3D display may also be stored in the 3D image storage area. In this case, the stored background images are not necessarily limited to images capable of 3D display; any image usable during 3D display is acceptable. Alternatively, background images used only during 3D display may be stored in the 3D image storage area, or only 3D-compatible background images may be stored in the 3D image storage area.

As shown in Figure 435(B), a series of images of a character used in a performance are stored, from its appearance (start of performance) to its exit (end of performance). In this embodiment, each character (preview performance) is stored in chronological order (display order). This simplifies the process by setting the address of the first image displayed at the start of the preview (when the character appears), and then updating the address to acquire images as the performance progresses by adding a value equal to the image size. Furthermore, since images related to a series of performances are stored together, image placement management becomes easier.

[28-4c. Layer Structure]
In this embodiment, when an image is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is generally drawn on a layer corresponding to the content of the image to be displayed. Figure 436 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of layers on which the images displayed on the performance display device 1600 of the gaming machine in this embodiment are drawn.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to display both 2D and 3D images together, but the 2D and 3D images are drawn on separate layers. The images drawn on each layer are then combined on a frame buffer (or off-screen buffer) and displayed on the display device 1600.

Furthermore, the hierarchy (order) of each layer is predetermined, and in principle, the order is not changed. In this embodiment, a layer for displaying errors or abnormalities is placed at the forefront (top layer), and nothing is displayed while normal gameplay is in progress. On the other hand, when an image is to be displayed on this layer, such as when an error occurs, the image or message is displayed in front of other images being displayed (at the forefront), ensuring that it can be reliably presented to players and hall employees.

In addition, a hold layer for displaying hold information, a preview layer for displaying images for preview effects, a pattern layer for displaying effect symbols, and a background layer for displaying the background are arranged in that order. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the hold layer and background layer display 2D images, but when 3D display is required, a 3D display layer is provided in addition to the 2D display layer (only the 3D display layer is provided if 2D display is not required), and the image is displayed on the 3D display layer.

Furthermore, the preview layer is configured to display only 3D images. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, although the detailed procedure will be described later, it is possible to switch to executing the effects using only 2D display without 3D display. In this case, a layer for executing the preview effects in 2D display may be prepared, but if a 3D image is to be displayed as a 2D image, it may be displayed on the 3D display layer without preparing a separate layer for 2D display. In this embodiment, since the 3D display image is processed and displayed as described later, the image is drawn on the 3D display preview layer.

Furthermore, if images for both 2D and 3D display are pre-prepared for a common purpose, both 2D and 3D display layers should be provided. For example, if images for 2D and 3D display of animation patterns are pre-prepared, as shown in Figure 436, both 2D and 3D layers should be provided to display the animation patterns.

As described above, by providing a dedicated layer for 3D display (or 2D display), processing related to that layer will always execute processing specifically for 3D display. Therefore, there is no need to distinguish between 2D and 3D display, eliminating the need for processing that considers differences in display methods, such as data handling, and simplifying display control.

Furthermore, when using the same image with separate layers for 2D and 3D display, the same image (e.g., a pattern) will not be displayed on multiple layers. Therefore, layers that are not being drawn should be set to hidden. In this case, a parameter (effect switch) that allows setting the display/hide status (ON/OFF) of layers can be defined in the drawing scheduler data. This allows for the simultaneous display/hide setting of layers by setting this parameter (effect switch). Moreover, since it becomes unnecessary to set the display/hide status for each individual layer when switching between 2D and 3D display layers, the control for switching between 2D and 3D display can be simplified.

Next, we will explain the procedure for generating a display screen on the performance display device 1600 by drawing images on each layer and compositing the layers. Figure 437 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for writing images to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 of the gaming machine in this embodiment to the frame buffer.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, images are drawn sequentially from the lower (back) layer to the upper (front) layer. Specifically, first, the image to be drawn as the background is acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) and drawn on the background layer. In the example shown in Figure 437, instead of displaying the acquired background image as is, it is enlarged vertically for display. Therefore, the image drawn on the background layer is copied to an off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), and the image on the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) is processed by the rendering engine (04TKK0062).

Next, the image corresponding to the animation pattern is drawn to the pattern layer, which is placed in front of the background layer, based on the instructions of the LCD display list command. Furthermore, the contents of the pattern layer are combined with the image of the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) where the processed background is drawn (overlaid on the front of the background image), and then the combined image is drawn (copied) to the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Furthermore, a preview layer for 3D display shows three-dimensional images of trees and an airplane as a preview. The images drawn on the preview layer are combined with the images drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091). Finally, a hold display is drawn on a hold layer located further forward, and combined with the image on the frame buffer (04TKK0091) to complete the image to be displayed on the performance display device 1600. Since the frame buffer (04TKK0091) that generates the display image is a drawing bank, it is then switched to the display bank by a bank flip, and the generated screen is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[29. Basic Procedure for Generating 3D Display Images]
Next, we will explain the general procedure for generating a 3D display image (lenticular image) by combining a 2D image (background image, etc.) that has been side-by-side with a 3D display image (character, etc.) that has been arranged with images for the left eye and the right eye. The specific procedure for generating the display image will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 439 and onward.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a 3D display image (lenticular image) is generated by applying the side-by-side image compositing effect of the pixel shader (04TKK0063) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060).

Figure 438 illustrates the procedure for generating a 3D display image (lenticular image) by combining a 2D image (such as a background image) that has been side-by-side with a 3D image containing images for the left and right eyes.

First, a 3D image (an image with the left-eye and right-eye images side-by-side) is obtained from the image data area (05TKK0085) with the object to be viewed in stereoscopically (a logo mark in Figure 438(A)) drawn on it. This 3D image has transparency in areas other than the object, and an alpha channel is set. As mentioned earlier, the alpha channel is auxiliary data held separately from the color representation data for each pixel, and generally indicates the opacity of the pixel. By placing this image in front of the opaque image and compositing them, an image with the composite image as the background can be generated.

In the example shown in Figure 438, a 3D image (A) is composited with a 2D background image (filled in black) stored in a buffer. This results in an image (B) where the logo (object) is placed in front of the background image.

When the side-by-side image compositing effect of the pixel shader (04TKK0063) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060) is applied in state (B), the 3D display image (lenticular image) shown in (C1) is generated. At this time, as shown in (C1), blurring occurs around the three-dimensional logo. Possible causes include the fact that when generating the stereoscopic parallax portion of the left-eye and right-eye images, the image is generated based only on the color information of the drawn portion when compositing the pixels of the object-drawn portion and the non-drawn portion (transparent portion). Thus, applying the side-by-side image compositing effect to an image created by simply superimposing multiple images obtained from the image data area (05TKK0085) can result in unintended blurring.

Therefore, in this embodiment, transparency is removed from the image by deleting the α channel, which represents the opacity of the image, before applying the side-by-side image compositing effect, so that only the drawn portions (non-transparent portions) are composited. This suppresses the occurrence of unintended blurring or other visual effects.

Alternatively, the alpha value of 2D images, such as background images used for 3D image synthesis, can be set to 255 (opaque) to eliminate transparency at the time of 3D image synthesis. Since the background image is the size of the entire display screen (fullscreen size), making the background image opaque can be expected to suppress blurring without explicitly deleting the alpha channel.

[30.3D display performance]
The basic configuration for executing 3D display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described above. Next, the 3D display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. First, the basic procedure for generating the display screen (image) when executing the 3D display effects will be described.

[30-1. Basic Procedure for Generating a 3D Display Screen]
Figure 439 illustrates the procedure for creating image data for the 3D display effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, we describe the procedure for generating an image that is displayed in 3D by compositing a 3D display object (logo mark) placed on a background image for 2D display and viewing it through a lenticular lens.

The images to be displayed on the display device 1600 are generated (drawn) from the back-side layers and transferred (combined) to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) layer by layer. When image processing or combining multiple layers is required, the images are processed in the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) before being transferred to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). The procedure for creating image data for the 3D display effects of this gaming machine will be described below.

The VDP (04TKK0060) first retrieves the background image specified in the liquid crystal display list command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the image data area (05TKK0085) and draws it on the background layer. (A) shows the state of the background layer after the background image retrieved from the image data area (05TKK0085) has been drawn. Each layer is created and managed by a program executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. Liquid crystal display list commands are created on a layer-by-layer basis and transmitted to the VDP (04TKK0060). The VDP (04TKK0060) processes the liquid crystal display list commands transmitted on a layer-by-layer basis, resulting in drawing being performed on a layer-by-layer basis. Furthermore, each layer is drawn sequentially from the bottom layer upwards.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) converts the background image to a side-by-side format in order to generate an image for 3D display. Note that the background image is a 2D image; the actual 3D display is achieved by the preview layer (for 3D image display), which is placed in front of the background layer. In this embodiment, as described later, the 2D background image is converted to a side-by-side format, and the background image is then composited with the left-eye and right-eye images that constitute the 3D image of the preview layer to generate the 3D display image.

Figure (B) shows the state in which the side-by-side background image is drawn to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092). In this embodiment, the background image drawn on the background layer is transferred to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), and then side-by-side is performed on the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092). This improves image quality compared to directly transferring the background image to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) and side-by-side (reducing) it, due to the effect of the VDP (04TKK0060) filter (a function that smooths pixels during reduction). The specific procedure for side-by-side background image creation will be explained with reference to Figures 440 to 442.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the objects to be displayed in 3D from the image data area (05TKK0085) onto the preview layer for 3D image display. As mentioned above, the objects to be displayed in 3D are stored in the 3D image storage area of the image data area (05TKK0085). Furthermore, the image for 3D display is pre-converted to side-by-side, as shown in (C), and the pixel shader (04TKK0063) applies a side-by-side image synthesis effect to combine the left-eye image and the right-eye image to convert it into a 3D display image. Note that the alpha channel value is set so that areas other than the objects to be displayed in 3D are transparent.

Furthermore, the VDP (04TKK0060) composites the objects drawn on the preview layer onto the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), where the side-by-side background image is drawn, and transfers this to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). This generates images, as shown in (D), in which the 3D display objects are composited onto the background image for both the left-eye and right-eye images.

Finally, the VDP (04TKK0060) can generate the 3D display image shown in (E) by applying a side-by-side image compositing effect via the pixel shader (04TKK0063) to the image on the frame buffer (04TKK0091), i.e., the image in which the 3D display object is composited onto the background image along with the left-eye image and the right-eye image.

The above describes the procedure for creating image data for 3D display effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment. By following the above procedure, it becomes possible to create a display that enables stereoscopic viewing by combining a 2D background image with 3D image objects such as characters.

Furthermore, by storing the non-stereoscopic background image in full-screen size within the image data area (05TKK0085) and then combining it with the 3D image by side-by-side during 3D display, the background image can be shared between 2D and 3D display effects, thereby suppressing an increase in the capacity of the image data area (05TKK0085).

[30-2. Generating Side-by-Side Images]
Next, the procedure for side-by-side conversion of the background image will be explained. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, when side-by-side conversion of the background image, the image acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) is horizontally reduced by half, and the same image is drawn on the left and right sides as the left-eye image and the right-eye image. Furthermore, since the image is enlarged horizontally again when the side-by-side image compositing effect is applied, the resolution decreases (image quality deteriorates) due to the loss of image information, and jagged edges that were not present in the original image may occur. This is because the same reduced image is composited, so it is not possible to compensate for the image information lost during reduction, and there are limits to the image quality improvement by the pixel shader (04TKK0063).

For the reasons stated above, a deterioration in the image quality of the display screen may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this embodiment, we propose a side-by-side image generation procedure that can suppress the loss of image information during side-by-side image creation.

[30-2a. Side-by-side image generation procedure 1]
As mentioned above, simply placing two identical images, each reduced horizontally by half, results in identical missing image information, making it difficult to compensate for using VDP functions. Therefore, when creating left-eye and right-eye images by reducing a full-screen image, the goal is to minimize image loss when combining the left and right images, thereby restoring as much of the original image's information as possible. The following describes a method for generating side-by-side images.

Figure 440 illustrates a first method for generating a side-by-side image. When reducing an image, for example, pixels are extracted at equal intervals according to the reduction ratio, and the extracted images are arranged sequentially. For example, when creating a side-by-side image from a background image obtained from an image data area (05TKK0085) as shown in (A), the base background image is reduced horizontally by half, resulting in an image composed only of even-numbered dots (Figure 440 (C), left-eye image).

On the other hand, when generating the image for the right eye, in order to suppress the loss of the same image information as the left eye image, an image composed of odd-numbered dots should be generated as much as possible. Therefore, in the first method, as shown in (B), the base background image is first shifted one dot (to the left) and then horizontally reduced by half. This causes the odd-numbered pixels to move to the positions of even-numbered pixels, allowing the reduced image to be composed of odd-numbered dots (Figure 440 (C), image for the right eye). Furthermore, the blank area of the leftmost column that occurs when shifting one dot to the left is filled with black in the buffer before transferring the image, making the blank area opaque (black) rather than transparent before reducing the image. This suppresses the blurring that occurs when combining transparent images.

[30-2b. Side-by-side image generation procedure 2]
Next, the second method will be explained. The basic principle is the same as the first method, and the aim is to suppress the loss of image information from the original image when the image information of the left and right images are combined. Figure 441 is a diagram illustrating the second method for generating side-by-side images.

The second method involves specifying the area of the base image to be reduced in order to generate the reduced image. For example, if the base image is n x m pixels, the area from 0 pixels to n-1 pixels horizontally is targeted. That is, when generating the image for the left eye, the entire area of the base image is targeted. This results in a reduced image for the left eye consisting of an even number of pixels, similar to the first method. On the other hand, when generating the image for the right eye, the area from 1 pixel to n pixels horizontally is targeted. This allows for the generation of a reduced image for the right eye consisting of an odd number of pixels, similar to the second method.

As described above, by using the first and second methods, the left eye image is reduced to a reduced image composed only of even-numbered dots, and the right eye image is reduced to a reduced image composed only of odd-numbered dots. This minimizes the loss of image information while applying a side-by-side image compositing effect, thereby suppressing image degradation and reducing the occurrence of jagged edges.

[30-2c. Side-by-side image generation procedure 3]
Next, we will explain the third method. The basic principle is the same as the methods explained so far, but in the third method, each dot row of the base image is assigned to the left-eye image and the right-eye image on a color element basis, with the aim of suppressing the loss of image information from the original image when the image information of the left and right images are combined. Figure 442 is a diagram illustrating the third method for generating side-by-side images.

The image information indicating the color of each dot is represented by a combination of primary color values (red (R), green (G), blue (B)) and an alpha channel (alpha value). Each color value is composed of 8 bits, and similarly, the alpha channel (alpha value) is also 8 bits.

In the third method, first, as shown in Figure 442(A), the color of each dot is assigned element by element, i.e., the three primary colors are individually distributed to the left-eye image (B1) and the right-eye image (B2). In the example shown in Figure 442, the R element of the 0th dot of the original image becomes the R element of the 0th dot of the right-eye image, and the G element of the 0th dot of the original image becomes the G element of the 0th dot of the left-eye image. Furthermore, the B element of the 0th dot of the original image becomes the B element of the 0th dot of the right-eye image. Similarly, the R and B elements of the 1st dot of the original image become the R and B elements of the 1st dot of the left-eye image, and the G element of the 1st dot of the original image becomes the G element of the 1st dot of the right-eye image. In other words, the image information of two dots from the original image is distributed to the left-eye image and the right-eye image, one dot each. By similarly distributing information for all dots, a side-by-side image is generated.

By following the above procedure, the color elements of the base image are decomposed, and the three primary colors are individually distributed to generate side-by-side images, thereby reliably suppressing the loss of image information. The decomposition of color elements is performed by the pixel shader (04TKK0063). This is because the VDP (04TKK0060) is not efficient at processing pixel-level operations, and the pixel shader (04TKK0063) complements this. The pixel shader (04TKK0063) is a dedicated circuit that enables extremely high-speed execution of arbitrary complex calculations on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

[30-3. Side-by-Side Image Compositing Effect]
Next, we will explain the procedure for converting a side-by-side image into a full-screen image by applying a side-by-side image compositing effect. Here, we will convert a side-by-side image generated by the third method described above into a full-screen image.

Figure 443 illustrates the procedure for synthesizing a full-screen image from a side-by-side image. In the third method, the side-by-side image was generated by decomposing the image information (color information) of each dot in the base full-screen image and distributing it to the left-eye and right-eye images. Therefore, the image information of the full-screen image is reconstructed by aggregating the image information of each dot in the left-eye and right-eye images that constitute the side-by-side image and then synthesizing the images.

For example, as shown in Figure 443, the R, G, and B elements of the 0th pixel in the left eye image are used as the R, G, and B elements of the 1st pixel in the composite image. Furthermore, the R, G, and B elements of the 0th pixel in the right eye image are used as the R, G, and B elements of the 0th pixel in the composite image.

In this embodiment, the pixel shader (04TKK0063) executes the above procedure. Figure 443 shows an example of application to a 2D image. However, when applied to a 3D image composed of a left-eye image and a right-eye image, the image information (color information) of the left-eye image and the right-eye image are converted and combined to generate a 3D display image, corresponding to the specifications of the lenticular lens provided in the display device 1600. The lenticular lens has a structure in which elongated, semi-circular convex lenses are arranged on its surface. The 3D display image is generated based on the image size, the density of the semi-circular lenses (number of lines), and the shape of the convex lenses. The generated 3D display image is designed to create parallax between the left and right eyes when the player is playing in a normal posture, allowing for effective stereoscopic viewing.

Then, as shown in Figure 439, by applying a side-by-side compositing effect to an image (for example, the image in Figure 439(D)) in which an object for 3D display (e.g., a preview character) is composited onto a side-by-side background image, the loss of image information in 2D images such as background images can be suppressed during conversion, while 3D images can be converted into 3D display images that are compatible with the specifications of lenticular lenses.

As described above, by recombining the side-by-side images using the third method mentioned earlier, it is possible to recombine (restore) the full-screen base image while preventing the loss of image information. This configuration prevents the loss of image information, thereby suppressing the degradation of image quality during the display. This allows for enhanced visual effects and reduces the decline in the enjoyment of the game by minimizing the increase in storage capacity required for image information while suppressing image quality degradation.

[30-4. Drawing Procedure]
Next, we will explain the procedure for drawing on the display device 1600. First, we will explain the case where there is a single 3D layer, and then we will explain the case where there are multiple 3D layers.

[30-4a. Drawing Procedure (When there is a single 3D layer)]
Figure 444 shows an example of a layer structure when there is a single 3D layer. Figure 445 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure of Figure 444.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first issues a set of drawing commands for all the materials necessary to draw the bottom layer, Layer 1 (Step 04TKS0010). The issued drawing commands include commands to acquire images from the image data area (05TKK0085) and commands to convert the acquired images into side-by-side images. Layer 1 is the layer for drawing 2D images, and as the bottom layer, it is typically the background layer.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for all materials for layer 2, which draws the image to be displayed in 3D (step 04TKS0020). The issued drawing commands include commands to acquire the image for 3D display from the image data area (05TKK0085) and commands to combine the acquired image with the side-by-side image processed in step 04TKS0010. Furthermore, it includes commands to generate the 3D display image by applying a side-by-side image synthesis effect using the pixel shader (04TKK0063) (pixel conversion command (3D display image conversion command)).

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands to draw an image on the frontmost layer 3 (step 04TKS0030). After sending all the drawing commands necessary for drawing layer 3, it sends a bank flip waiting command to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040).

The processing up to step 04TKS0040 is performed by a program executed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511. Processing from step 04TKS0050 onwards is performed by the performance display control unit 1512 (VDP (04TKK0060)). When a bank flip is executed, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes the drawing commands stored in the command buffer and outputs an image to the performance display device 1600.

The display control unit 1512, upon receiving a command from the peripheral control unit 1511, stores the received command in a command buffer. In this embodiment, the command buffer also has a double-buffer configuration, comprising a storage command buffer for storing drawing commands transmitted from the peripheral control unit 1511 and a drawing command buffer for reading drawing commands to be processed by VDP (04TKK0060). The storage command buffer and the drawing command buffer are configured to be switched via a bank flip.

Next, when the rendering of the currently rendering frame buffer (04TKK0091) is completed and the frame buffer (04TKK0091) is switched via a bank flip, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads the rendering commands from the storage command buffer to the switched rendering command buffer, and then renders to the rendering bank's frame buffer (04TKK0091) based on the read rendering commands (step 04TKS0050).

Furthermore, when the VDP (04TKK0060) processes a bank flip waiting command, it executes a bank flip at a predetermined interrupt timing, switches the drawing bank to the display bank, and displays the image drawn to the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091) on the display device 1600 (step 04TKS0060). Through this process, the drawing of one screen can be completed.

Here, we will explain in detail the procedure by which the VDP (04TKK0060) generates the image to be displayed on the display device 1600 based on the drawing command issued by the peripheral control unit 1511 during the processing of steps 04TKS0010 to 04TKS0030.

As mentioned above, the command buffer stores drawing commands in the order they are received. The VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing commands in the stored order and executes processing based on the read drawing commands. In the example shown in Figure 445, the drawing commands for drawing each layer—layer 1, layer 2, and layer 3—are stored in the command buffer, and each drawing command is processed in this order. The following describes the procedure by which the VDP (04TKK0060) combines the images drawn on each layer based on the received drawing commands.

The VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command for drawing Layer 1, which was initially stored in the command buffer. First, it reads the image specified by the read drawing command from the image data area (05TKK0085) and draws it onto Layer 1. The image drawn on Layer 1 is a 2D image, and this image is then drawn to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) to create a side-by-side image.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command from the command buffer to draw Layer 2. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn to Layer 2. Furthermore, the image drawn on Layer 2 is overwritten (composited) onto the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), which contains the side-by-side image of Layer 1. The image drawn on Layer 2 is a 3D image, and by applying a side-by-side compositing effect, a stereoscopic image is generated and drawn to the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Finally, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command from the command buffer to draw Layer 3. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn onto Layer 3. By overwriting (combining) the image drawn on Layer 3 with the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091), the combination of the images on Layer 1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 is completed, and the image to be displayed on the display device 1600 is finalized.

Furthermore, while the above explanation described reading images to be drawn on each layer from the image data area (05TKK0085), it is also possible to read them from the image RAM (04TKK0090). For example, if a common background image is used in a series of effects, and the background image is to be drawn on Layer 1, the background image can be stored in advance in the image RAM (04TKK0090), which has a faster access speed than the effects data ROM (05TKK0070). Then, while the series of effects is being executed, the background image can be read from the image RAM (04TKK0090), thereby speeding up the entire image processing.

[30-4b. Drawing Procedure (When there are multiple 3D layers)]
Next, we will explain the case where there are multiple 3D layers. Figure 446 is a diagram showing an example of a layer structure when there are multiple 3D layers. Figure 447 is a flowchart explaining the procedure for drawing on each layer in the layer structure of Figure 446. Note that processes common to the case with a single 3D layer (Figure 445) are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first issues a set of drawing commands for all materials to draw the bottom layer, Layer 1 (Step 04TKS0010). Next, it issues a set of drawing commands for all materials for Layer 2, which will draw the image to be displayed in 3D (Step 04TKS0320). At this point, the side-by-side image compositing effect is not applied. Upon completion of Step 04TKS0320, the image of Layer 2 is overwritten and composited onto the image of Layer 1, resulting in a side-by-side state.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for all materials to layer 3 (step 04TKS0330). Since layer 3 is a 2D display area, the commands include commands to acquire images from the image data area (05TKK0085) and commands to side-by-side the acquired images. In the processing of step 04TKS0050, described later, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes these commands, and the side-by-side image of layer 3 is transferred to the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091) and overwritten onto the image of layers 1 and 2 combined.

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for all materials for layer 4, which draws the image to be displayed in 3D (step 04TKS0340). In the processing of step 04TKS0050, described later, the VDP (04TKK0060) processes the issued drawing commands to acquire the image for 3D display from the image data area (05TKK0085) and overwrites the image stored in the frame buffer (04TKK0091), which is a composite image of layers 1 through 3, with the acquired image. Furthermore, the VDP (04TKK0060) generates the 3D display image by applying a side-by-side image compositing effect using the pixel shader (04TKK0063).

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for the image to be drawn on Layer 5, which is positioned at the very front (step 04TKS0350). Subsequently, it sends a bank flip waiting command to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040).

The display control unit 1512 stores drawing commands and bank flip wait commands received from the peripheral control unit 1511 in the command buffer. The subsequent processing is the same as shown in Figure 445. When the VDP (04TKK0060) processes a bank flip wait command, it executes a bank flip at a predetermined interrupt timing, switches the drawing bank to the display bank, and displays the image drawn in the frame buffer (04TKK0091) on the display device 1600 (step 04TKS0060).

Here, we will explain in detail the procedure by which the VDP (04TKK0060) generates the image to be displayed on the display device 1600 based on the drawing command issued by the peripheral control unit 1511 during the processing of steps 04TKS0010 to 04TKS0350.

In the example shown in Figure 447, drawing commands for each layer—Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer 4, and Layer 5—are stored in the command buffer, and each drawing command is processed in this order. The following describes the procedure for compositing the images drawn on each layer based on the received drawing commands.

The VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command for drawing Layer 1. Then, it reads the image specified by the read drawing command from the image data area (05TKK0085) and draws it onto Layer 1. The image drawn on Layer 1 is a 2D image, and this image is drawn to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) to create a side-by-side image.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command from the command buffer to draw Layer 2. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn onto Layer 2. Furthermore, the image drawn on Layer 2 is overwritten (combined) onto the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), which contains the side-by-side Layer 1 image.

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command for drawing Layer 3. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn to Layer 3. The image drawn to Layer 3 is a 2D image; this image is then converted to side-by-side and drawn to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092).

Next, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command from the command buffer to draw Layer 4. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn to Layer 4. Furthermore, the image drawn to Layer 4 is overwritten (composited) onto the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092), where the images of Layers 1, 2, and 3 are composited. The image drawn to Layer 4 is a 3D image, and by applying a side-by-side compositing effect, a stereoscopic image is generated and drawn to the frame buffer (04TKK0091).

Finally, the VDP (04TKK0060) reads a drawing command from the command buffer to draw layer 5. The image specified by the read drawing command is read from the image data area (05TKK0085) and drawn to layer 5. By overwriting (combining) the image drawn on layer 5 with the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091), the compositing of images from layer 1 to layer 5 is completed, and the image to be displayed on the display device 1600 is finalized.

In summary, all layers behind (below) the 3D layer are converted to side-by-side. At this point, the 3D image becomes visible as a side-by-side flat image (2D image) through a lenticular lens after applying a side-by-side image compositing effect (pixel conversion). The foremost 3D layer and all layers below it are combined, and a stereoscopic image is generated by applying a side-by-side image compositing effect (pixel conversion), which is then drawn to the frame buffer. If the foremost layer is 2D, it can be drawn directly to the frame buffer without side-by-side conversion, resulting in a normal 2D image visible through a lenticular lens. Similarly, 2D layers positioned in front of (above) all 3D layers should also be drawn directly to the frame buffer without side-by-side conversion.

Furthermore, as will be described later, if 3D display is set to OFF and the system is configured to execute 2D display effects, the peripheral control unit 1511 will not issue commands for 3D display, such as side-by-side image synthesis effects (pixel conversion), and the VDP (04TKK0060) will not execute 3D display control. Therefore, even through the lenticular lens, the image displayed on the display device 1600 will be perceived as a 2D (planar) image.

As described above, the 3D display image is generated by overwriting and compositing the images in a side-by-side format (left-eye image and right-eye image placed side-by-side without gaps) until all 3D layers are composited. After all 3D layer compositing is complete, the side-by-side image compositing effect is applied. If there are layers displaying 2D images on the front side, the 2D layer images can be overwritten and composited on the front side of the generated 3D display image. Layers placed at the very front or in front of (above) the 3D layers include, for example, error notification displays, volume/brightness adjustment displays, and 3D switching displays. These displays do not need to be displayed in 3D and are therefore displayed in 2D. Alternatively, all layer images can be side-by-side and composited in the order of the layers, and the side-by-side image compositing effect can be applied last.

[30-5. Switching between 2D and 3D display effects]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the display can be switched between 2D and 3D. However, if separate images are to be stored for 2D and 3D displays, the required capacity of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) will increase. Therefore, by reusing images intended for 3D display effects for 2D display effects, the increase in capacity of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070) is suppressed.

[30-5a. Example of display mode selection screen]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a sense of realism is achieved by displaying stereoscopic images. However, even with such a gaming machine, players may not necessarily prefer the display of stereoscopic images, but rather the conventional display of flat images. Therefore, as mentioned above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to switch between a 2D display mode and a 3D display mode, and the player is configured to choose between the two.

Figure 448 shows an example of the screen for the performance selection mode of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. In the example screen in Figure 448, the performance mode can be selected by selecting either the 3D performance display mode or the 2D performance display mode, selecting the confirm button, and operating the performance buttons. In this embodiment, the performance selection mode screen is located on a layer immediately following the layer that displays abnormality notifications, and is on a layer in front of the area where the preview effects and performance symbols are displayed. Since the performance selection mode screen is displayed in the customer waiting state, it may be on a layer behind the layers where images for 3D display effects are displayed (preview layer, symbol layer). In this case, it should be a layer dedicated to the performance selection mode screen. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a layer that is not displayed in the customer waiting state (for example, the preview layer, symbol layer).

Furthermore, switching between 2D and 3D display modes is permitted only when specific conditions are met, such as when the game is in a waiting state. When these conditions are not met, especially during periods when 3D display effects are running, mode switching is disabled. This allows for switching of display modes without needing to confirm whether the current game state is suitable for 3D display effects, thus simplifying the processing involved in 3D effect control.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, switching between 2D and 3D display modes is permitted only while the machine is waiting for customers. Furthermore, the default display mode is 2D mode, and even if it is set to 3D mode, if the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted and then restored, it will revert to the default 2D mode. Note that the default display mode may also be 3D mode, and this can be set, for example, by a switch on the peripheral control board 1510. Also, while the cursor is displayed on the default setting side in the setting screen shown in Figure 448, it may be changed to display the cursor on the currently set display mode side.

The display mode selection is displayed by operating the display button while the symbols are not changing and the player is waiting. Alternatively, the mode can be changed at any time when the symbols are not changing, such as during a jackpot game. It may also be possible to change the mode even while the symbols are changing, provided that a 3D display effect (stereoscopic display effect) is not being executed. Furthermore, when the symbols are changing, the system may forcibly return to the display screen when it is time to display the lottery results. If the selection screen is displayed while the symbols are changing, the display may continue in the background (the layer behind the selection screen), allowing the display to continue when the foreground selection screen is cleared. Additionally, when switching display modes while the symbols are changing, the mode may be switched by performing a specific operation on the control panel, such as the display button, without displaying a selection screen or using video. In this case, a notification indicating that the change operation has been accepted (for example, by displaying a specific mark at the edge of the screen) may be displayed on the screen, or a specific sound may be output to indicate this.

Furthermore, in addition to the function to switch between performance modes, players can also adjust the brightness of the performance display device 1600 and the volume of the audio output from the screen. Unlike the function to switch between performance modes, adjusting the brightness and volume of the performance display device 1600 does not require the use of performance buttons or other controls during gameplay; these adjustments may be performed using a dedicated control panel. While the function to switch between performance modes involves turning the 3D performance display ON/OFF and can be performed with a specific operation without displaying a selection screen, brightness and volume adjustments require gradual adjustments and are therefore configured to always display the screen and be performed while waiting for customers.

Furthermore, when adjusting brightness and volume, and also setting the 3D effect display ON/OFF, the changes may be applied simultaneously, or only one of them may be applied. If simultaneous application is not possible, for example, the result of brightness adjustment may affect the 3D effect display. Therefore, if changes are made simultaneously, only the brightness adjustment result should be applied, and the 3D effect display ON/OFF setting should be applied after the change has been applied.

When the 3D effect display is set to ON/OFF, the peripheral control unit 1511 reflects this in the parameters of the aforementioned function "3D_SW". This eliminates the need for branching in the program code, allowing the use of common effect block data and scheduler data regardless of whether the 3D effect display is ON or OFF, thereby simplifying the effect data and program code.

[30-5b. Drawing procedure when executing 2D display effects]
Next, we will explain the procedure for using images intended for 3D display effects in 2D display effects.
Figure 449 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for using images for 3D display effects in the 2D display effect mode in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 450 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for using images for 3D display effects in the 2D display effect mode shown in Figure 449. The procedure shown in Figure 450 corresponds to the procedure for performing a 3D display effect when there is a single 3D layer, and common steps are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, when executing the same 3D display effect at the appropriate timing, as shown in Figure 449(A), the background image acquired from the image data area (05TKK0085) is drawn directly without processing during background layer rendering. Specifically, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for all materials necessary to draw layer 1 for background rendering and stores them in the command buffer. The VDP (04TKK0060) reads the drawing command set from the command buffer, acquires the background image from the image data area (05TKK0085) corresponding to the information specified in the drawing command set, and draws the image to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) or off-screen buffer without side-by-side conversion (step 04TKS0410).

Next, the 3D image displayed during 3D effect execution is shown as a 2D image (Figure 449(B)). In this case, the layer used for drawing is not a dedicated 2D layer, but rather the 3D display layer where the 3D image is displayed during 3D effect execution. This makes it easier to manage the relationship between the effect content and the layer by drawing to the same layer regardless of whether the effect is executed in 2D or 3D, thereby simplifying effect display control.

To specifically explain the procedure for displaying a 3D image as a 2D image, the VDP (04TKK0060) first acquires a side-by-side image for 3D display from the image data area (05TKK0085). It then extracts the left-eye image from the acquired image and draws it to the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) (step 04TKS0420). Furthermore, the left-eye image in the off-screen buffer (04TKK0092) is horizontally enlarged by two times and overwritten and composited onto the background image already drawn in the frame buffer (04TKK0091) (step 04TKS0430).

The peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands to the display control unit 1512 to perform the above procedure, thereby generating a 2D display image without the VDP (04TKK0060) applying a side-by-side image compositing effect via the pixel shader (04TKK0063) (without issuing drawing commands (pixel conversion commands) related to the side-by-side image compositing effect) (Figure 449(C)).

Furthermore, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 issues a set of drawing commands for the image to be drawn on layer 3, which is positioned at the very front (step 04TKS0440). Then, it sends a bank flip waiting command to the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 04TKS0040). The sent drawing commands are stored in the command buffer of the performance display control unit 1512, and the VDP (04TKK0060) executes the processing from step 04TKS0050 onwards. The processing from step 04TKS0050 onwards is the same as the processing shown in Figure 445. When the drawing process is completed and the drawing bank of the frame buffer (04TKK0091) is switched to the display bank, the image drawn on the frame buffer (04TKK0091) is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

As described above, by using an enlarged version of the image intended for the 3D display effect—specifically, the image for the left eye (or the image for the right eye)—when executing the 2D display effect, it becomes unnecessary to duplicate images specifically for the 2D display effect. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the effect data ROM (05TKK0070) can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since scaling 3D images when displaying them in 2D may degrade image quality, 3D images that may be displayed in 2D may be stored in the image data area (05TKK0085) for 2D display. This makes it possible to suppress the degradation of image quality during 2D display and thus prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

[30-6. Handling Abnormalities During 3D Display and Performance Execution]
Figure 451 shows an example of an error notification screen displayed when an error occurs during the execution of a 3D display effect. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when an error occurs during a 3D display effect, a predetermined message (error notification image) is displayed on the foremost layer (2D) that displays error notifications, etc. The following describes an example of screen display with reference to Figure 451.

Figure 451(A) shows the state before the anomaly occurred, where the left and right symbols of the special effect symbols (04TKM0010) are temporarily stopped at the same number, indicating a "reach" (a near-miss). At this point, a pre-announcement effect begins, in which a stereoscopic car (3D display image) drives along a road drawn on the background (2D).

Subsequently, if an anomaly such as a magnetic anomaly occurs in the gaming machine, an anomaly notification image (04TKM0030) containing the warning message "Anomaly Triggered!!" is displayed on the foremost anomaly notification layer. At this time, the display of the warning message makes the animation on the animation display screen difficult to see, but the 3D animation of a moving car continues, and as shown in Figure 451(B), it moves to the back side of the anomaly notification image (04TKM0030) over time. Subsequently, the animation control of the animation continues even while the recovery process is being executed. Therefore, even if the player cannot see the animation on the back side of the anomaly notification image (04TKM0030), the drawing control of the 3D animation of the car continues.

Subsequently, during the process of returning from an abnormal state to a playable state, if the main control board 1310 is initialized (power cut off), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 interrupts the control of the 3D display effect and, as shown in Figure 451(C), stops displaying the 3D display image, the予告 character (04TKM0020). The background image may continue to be displayed, be switched to a different image (for example, a dedicated background image for power restoration), or be erased.

In the example shown in Figure 451, the anomaly notification image (04TKM0030) occupies most of the display screen area. However, it is sufficient for the player to recognize the anomaly; the anomaly notification image (04TKM0030) should be displayed in a format recognizable by the player on the foremost layer.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by placing a layer for anomaly notification at the very front, it is possible to reliably notify the player of an anomaly even while an effect, including a 3D display effect, is being executed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to stop the effect control, anomaly notification can be performed quickly and with the highest priority.

[30-6a. Control when the power supply to the main control board is cut off]
Next, we will explain the control process when the power supply to only the main control board 1310 is interrupted during 3D display, referring to Figures 452 and 453.

Figure 452 is a timing chart showing the state of each configuration when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted during 3D display. Figure 453 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is interrupted during 3D display.

In the examples shown in Figures 452 and 453, during normal gameplay, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off at time t11 while the special symbols are being displayed. Then, at time t12, the power supply is restored. At this point, the power supply from the backup power source is also cut off, completely interrupting the power supply to the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 452, the special symbols are displayed in a normal game state until time t11. At this time, as shown in Figure 453(A), the left and right symbols of the identification symbol (04TKM0010) stop as the same symbol, and a reach occurs. Following this, a pre-announcement character (04TKM0020), modeled after a car, appears as a pre-announcement effect. The pre-announcement character (04TKM0020) is a 3D display image, and an effect is performed in which it drives on a road drawn on the background image (2D). As mentioned above, the pre-announcement character (04TKM0020) is stored in the 3D image area of the image data area (05TKK0085), and images from the character's appearance to its departure are stored in chronological order.

Subsequently, at time t11, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is stopped. At this time, power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 continues, but since no stop command for the symbols is transmitted to the main control board 1310, the symbol variation display continues until time t13 (Figure 453(B)). Meanwhile, the 3D display effect ends when a predetermined condition (e.g., a predetermined time has elapsed) is met (time t12) (Figure 453(C)). The symbol variation display can continue until a stop command is received, but since the preview effect has a set duration, it is configured to end when the effect is finished. Note that if a predetermined effect is to be executed repeatedly, the preview effect may continue.

At time t13, power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed. At this time, the main control board 1310 executes power-on processing to start the gaming machine. A command related to the gaming machine's startup is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, stopping the continuous display of changing symbols and effects, and the gaming machine's startup screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (Figure 453(D)). The startup screen is displayed in 2D regardless of the effect display mode. This reduces the load when restarting gameplay.

[30-6b. Control when the power supply to the peripheral control board is cut off]
Finally, the control in the case where the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during a 3D display effect will be explained with reference to Figures 454 and 455. Note that the example shown in Figures 454 and 455 describes the case where the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during a 3D display effect in a jackpot game state, but this is just one example, and the same processing will be applied to the case where the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off during a 3D display effect in the display of changing symbols, for example.

Figure 454 is a timing chart showing the state of each configuration when the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is interrupted during a 3D display animation in the jackpot game state. Figure 455 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions when the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is interrupted during a 3D display animation in the jackpot game state.

In the examples shown in Figures 454 and 455, the game transitions to a jackpot state upon winning the special lottery (time t21). In the example shown in Figure 454, the jackpot state ends after 15 rounds. Each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the large prize slot 2005. At the start of the Nth round, the main control board 1310 outputs a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating the Nth time the large prize slot has been opened. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the corresponding animation for each round, such as displaying the round number (N). The animations corresponding to each round (animations in the jackpot state) are 3D display animations.

As shown in Figure 454, at time t20, the special symbol display stops, a special lottery is won, and the jackpot is announced while the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state (Figure 455(A)). Then, at time t21, the jackpot game begins, and the first round starts (Figure 455(B)). At this time, the first round (Round 1) is started upon receiving the command for the first display of the jackpot opening from the main control board 1310.

Subsequently, during round 3 of the jackpot game (time t22), the power supply to only the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off. In this embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 is not powered by a backup power supply, the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is completely interrupted. Therefore, as shown in Figure 455(C), nothing is displayed on the display device 1600. At this time, the main control board 1310 continues to control the game, and the round continues to progress even though the screen remains blank.

At time t23, when power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is restored, a message to that effect is displayed on the display device 1600. In the example shown in Figure 455(D), the message "Restoring" is displayed. Note that the "Restoring" message is displayed in 2D, regardless of whether the display mode is 2D or 3D.

In the example shown in Figure 454, power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is restored during round 14. Since the trigger for the start of each round's animation is the reception of the command indicating the Nth time the big prize slot has been opened, the peripheral control board 1510 was unable to receive the command indicating the 14th time the big prize slot has been opened during the power outage. Therefore, the animation corresponding to the round could not be executed, and a message indicating that the game would resume was displayed. This message is displayed in 2D regardless of the animation display mode. This minimizes the load when the animation resumes, allowing for a quick transition to the regular animation (in this case, the animation corresponding to the round).

When round 14 of the jackpot game ends and round 15 begins (time t24), the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to display the 15th opening of the jackpot slot, and the animation corresponding to round 15 begins (Figure 455(E)).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is cut off, preventing the display mode from being maintained. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize whether the display is 2D or 3D before the power cut. Thus, the game is restarted with the default display mode enabled. In this embodiment, the default display mode is 2D, so even if the display was running in 3D before the power cut, it will run in 2D after restarting. If the default display mode is 3D, the display will run in 3D after restarting.

After the jackpot game ends, the special symbol display starts based on the saved start memory, and the game continues (time t25).

By configuring the system as described above, if a power supply abnormality occurs to the peripheral control board 1510, the screen display immediately after recovery will be set to 2D regardless of the performance display mode, minimizing the rendering load. This allows for rapid resumption of performance after receiving a command from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, by setting the performance display mode upon recovery to the default performance display mode, processing such as remembering the performance display mode before the abnormality occurred is unnecessary, thus suppressing the complexity of performance control.

[31. Video Display Control]
The above describes the three-dimensional display of the performance images. Next, the configuration for displaying videos in this embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 is capable of displaying videos in which character images and the like are in motion, thereby enhancing the performance effect. Performances that include videos can attract the attention of players more than performances that consist of still images, and are expected to make a significant contribution to improving the enjoyment of the game.

Videos represent action by displaying multiple images in sequence, utilizing apparent motion generated by continuously changing images or objects. Therefore, they require more memory capacity than displaying individual images. While it's possible to reduce the number of images needed by partially processing them, this increases the image processing load.

Therefore, by establishing reference frame data at predetermined intervals and generating the video for each frame based on difference frame data containing only the difference between the reference frame data and the immediately preceding frame, the image data size is compressed.

However, when generating video data based on differential frame data, it is necessary to retain the image data of the immediately preceding frame. This requires constantly allocating memory space for the previous frame's image data, potentially leading to insufficient capacity. Furthermore, video generation places a heavy load on VDP (04TKK0060), and even with image data compression, this could cause processing delays.

Therefore, the present invention aims to improve the enjoyment of the game by stabilizing the game's performance control and enabling more effective performances, while simultaneously suppressing the increase in the memory capacity required for video display and reducing the load on the VDP (04TKK0060), thereby compressing the image data for video display stored in the performance data ROM (image ROM, CGROM).

[31-1. Configuration for displaying videos]
First, the video displayed on the performance display device 1600 in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the video displayed does not express movement by preparing an image for one screen in advance and displaying it continuously in chronological order, but rather by changing (updating) the part that is different from the image displayed immediately before to generate the next image to be displayed, and then displaying the generated images continuously to express movement.

[31-1a. Arrangement of Image Data]
First, the basic configuration for generating the video to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 of the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. The image data is stored in the image data area (05TKK0085) of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

As described above, the video in this embodiment expresses movement by changing (updating) the parts that differ from the image displayed immediately before. Therefore, the video image data includes reference image data (reference frame data) and difference image data (difference frame data). Furthermore, since the video expresses movement by continuously displaying one frame's worth of image data generated from the reference frame data and difference frame data, each image data is arranged in chronological order (display order) from the first frame within the image data area (05TKK0085).

Next, we will describe the structure for storing image data to generate a video. Figure 456 shows an example of a structure for storing frame data to generate a video. As shown in Figure 456, the image data constituting a series of videos is arranged in chronological order (display order) with the reference frame data at the beginning. Furthermore, the reference frame data is placed at predetermined intervals, and a predetermined number of difference frame data is placed between each reference frame data. By arranging the reference frame data at equal intervals in this way, the video can be generated with a simple loop process, thus simplifying the program.

Furthermore, each frame data contains header information. This header information indicates whether the corresponding frame is a reference frame or a difference frame. Therefore, by referring to the header information, it's possible to determine whether a frame is a reference frame or a difference frame, making it possible to arrange reference frame data without a fixed interval. In this case, it becomes easier to place reference frame data at scene transitions, increasing the flexibility of data placement and improving the efficiency of creating and managing image data for video.

Furthermore, the header information of the frame data may include not only information identifying whether it is a reference frame or a difference frame, but also display position, display size, and transformation state (scaling, rotation, etc.). Also, as described later, it holds information (address information, etc.) that identifies the frame data of the preceding frame, making it possible to play the video from any frame data or in reverse order.

The reference frame data contains all the display content of the image to be shown, while the difference frame data contains only the difference information from the immediately preceding image (frame). Therefore, the size of the reference frame data is larger. Consequently, by reducing the proportion of reference frame data (and increasing the proportion of difference frame data), the total size of image data required to generate the video can be reduced. On the other hand, while the reference frame data only needs to display the image as is, generating an image using difference frame data requires both the reference frame data and the image data from the reference frame data to the immediately preceding difference frame data. This leads to a problem of increased processing load for combining this image data.

Figure 457 is a graph showing the relationship between the interval at which a reference frame data is placed and the amount of data. The horizontal axis represents the number of data points (GOP) containing the reference frame data until the next reference frame data appears. Therefore, when the value on the horizontal axis is 1, all data consists of reference frames, and when it is 60, reference frames are placed every 60 frames. The vertical axis represents the amount of data when GOP = 60 is set to 1. The example shown in Figure 456 has GOP = 30, and reference frame data is placed every 30 frames.

Referring to Figure 457, when differential frame data is not included (GOP = 1), the GOP is approximately 1.8, requiring about 1.8 times the capacity compared to the case of GOP = 60. Furthermore, up to GOP = 10 (1.06), there is no significant difference compared to GOP = 60, and processing load can be reduced while suppressing capacity increase up to about 1.2 times. In the example shown in Figure 457, the GOP exceeds 1.2 at GOP = 3, so GOP = 4 or 5 is considered to offer a good balance between suppressing data capacity increase and reducing processing load. Note that the GOP values shown in this specification are experimental data for the performance data in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and are not common to all gaming machines. The appropriate value may differ depending on factors such as performance differences of the VDP (04TKK0060) and image RAM (04TKK0090).

[31-1b. Image arrangement (layer structure)]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, multiple regions are assigned to the display area, and a static image or video is drawn in each region. Each region includes a region smaller than the entire display area. Figure 458 shows an example of the arrangement of regions for displaying images. In the example shown in Figure 458, a region A0 that corresponds to the entire display screen of the performance display device 1600 and displays the entire background, and eight regions (A1 to A8) smaller than region A0 are assigned.

Furthermore, each region corresponds to a layer, and the image, unfolded in the decode buffer (05TKK0101), is drawn to each layer and transferred (combined and drawn) to the frame buffer (04TKK0091) to generate a display image for one screen. While each region has positional information directly or indirectly defined to indicate its placement on the display screen, the decode buffer only has a memory area sized to match the image size and does not handle positional information during screen display. The placement information for each region may be stored collectively as management information, as described later in Figure 460, or it may be included in the frame data header information, as mentioned above. Including it in the frame data header information makes it possible to move the regions themselves, which is expected to further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 459 is a diagram illustrating the images corresponding to each region. The upper section shows the images corresponding to each region, and the lower section shows the displayed image generated by drawing all the images corresponding to all regions. Figure 460 is a table showing the configuration information for each region. Each region is associated with a region name, drawing content, region location, region size, and corresponding layer name. While Figure 460 shows this information in a table format, instead of storing all the information together as management information, it might be possible to store information associating regions with layers, and store information such as location and size as layer attribute information. Note that region A0, corresponding to the background layer, is omitted from the display.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the content of the animation is determined based on the results of a special lottery, and images corresponding to each area are drawn according to the determined animation content to complete the display image for one screen. Therefore, it is possible to change the combination of images drawn for each area, enabling a wide variety of animations with a small number of images. Furthermore, by reducing the number of images, the capacity of the animation data ROM (05TKK0070) can be saved.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the drawing area of the display screen is 1600 pixels wide and 1200 pixels high, and its position is defined using a coordinate system with the upper left corner as the origin. The size of the drawing area is not limited to this and can be set according to the performance of the display device 1600. Furthermore, the origin of the coordinate system may also be a different position, for example, the lower left corner.

Furthermore, since the areas for drawing each image correspond to layers, a layer-to-layer hierarchy is defined for each layer. Figure 461 illustrates the layer-to-layer hierarchy. As shown in Figure 461, the background layer is placed at the very back, and the fourth symbol layer is placed at the very front. In the event of an error, a message or image is displayed on an error display layer (error/warning display layer) located even further forward than the fourth symbol layer. This layer is for displaying still images (described later), and in addition to displaying a single image, it is also possible to display moving images by displaying them in sequence. Separate layers are also set up for operation instructions for the performance buttons and right-hand shot notifications. These layers may be common layers or individual dedicated layers.

Next, to explain each area, area A0 corresponds to the background layer, and its size corresponds to the entire drawing area. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the content to be drawn is a single image, but it may also be a video, or it may be managed as a video with no movement. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, since the shape of each area is rectangular, the top-left vertex is set as the position. The arrangement of the areas can be determined from the position information and size information.

Area A1 displays an object shaped like a "cloud," and can show videos that change to states like "rain" or "thunder." The appearance changes based on the pattern of the symbols and the results of special draws. The object changes are confined to this area and do not affect the rendering state of other areas. In other words, independent visual effects are possible in each area. Furthermore, by defining the rendering scheduler data corresponding to each area in the LCD effect block data, it becomes possible to link the images displayed in each area with a series of effects.

Area A2 displays an object shaped like an airplane. It appears from the left of the screen at the start of the animation and moves to the right. In this embodiment, area A2 represents the entire movement area of the airplane. However, it is also possible to define an area large enough to display the airplane and reset its position as the animation progresses.

Area A3 displays an object in the shape of a "building" and is rendered as a single image that does not change from the start of the animation. Even in such cases, by separating it from the background, it becomes possible to choose whether to place moving objects in front of or behind stationary objects. For example, in this embodiment, it becomes easy to set whether the airplane passes in front of or behind the building by adjusting the layer placement, and in either case, the control for rendering the image can be made a common rendering process simply by changing the layer position. Furthermore, it is easy to implement a preview effect that increases anticipation when the airplane passes in front of the building. In this way, it is possible to diversify the animation while simplifying the animation control and reducing program size.

Areas A4 through A7 contain objects indicating pending status, and their display content is changed based on commands from the main control board 1310. If the display pattern of the pending status does not change, it may be represented as a single image. Furthermore, all pending statuses may be displayed in a single area without dividing the area for each start memory, or the areas may be divided but drawn on the same layer.

Area A8 is the area where the fourth symbol is displayed. The fourth symbol's movement is represented by sprite processing. Specifically, the elements that make up the fourth symbol are held as multiple small parts (images), and these are combined and displayed at arbitrary positions on the screen. Similarly, the animation symbols (first to third symbols) also achieve movement by switching and transforming the display position of their image (sprites).

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment allows for the playback of videos in each region. The playback time of the videos in each region is managed by a timer (not shown). A single timer may manage all regions, or a separate timer may be provided for each region for individual management.

Furthermore, a dedicated suppression layer may be placed in front of the layer used for displaying preview effects (for example, the layer corresponding to areas A0 to A3) to display an image that suppresses the visibility of the preview effects. The dedicated suppression layer may display a monochrome opaque image, or it may display an image (video) different from the preview effects. When displaying a monochrome opaque image (filling the layer with a specific color), for example, a blackout effect that temporarily makes the display screen black can be achieved simply by controlling a specific layer. Also, when displaying an image (video) different from the preview effects, the preview effects can be immediately returned to by hiding (transparently) the layer in question. This allows for switching effects without complex control, and temporarily executing a different effect can increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The suppression layer is placed behind the layers on which regularly displayed objects (e.g., hold indicators, fourth symbol, etc.) are drawn (e.g., layers corresponding to areas A4 to A8). In the example in Figure 461, it is placed between the layer corresponding to area A2 and the layer corresponding to area A4. This arrangement allows for continued visibility of hold indicators and other elements while suppressing the visibility of the pre-announcement effects. Alternatively, the suppression layer may be placed in front of the layers on which regularly displayed objects are drawn, allowing the suppression layer's effects to run across the entire screen. Even in this case, the suppression layer should be placed behind the error (warning) display layer to enable notification in case of an abnormality in the gaming machine. This allows for enhanced visual effects while reliably notifying of abnormalities.

[31-2. Controls for displaying videos]
The above describes the layer configuration for displaying video. Next, we will explain the procedure for generating images for each frame and displaying the video. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as mentioned above, video is displayed by generating images for each frame using reference frame data and difference frame data, and displaying them sequentially. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, we will explain two methods for generating images using reference frame data and difference frame data.

[31-2a. Video Generation Procedure 1]
Figure 462 illustrates the first step in generating a video. In the procedure shown in Figure 462, reference frame data is placed every 30 frames, resulting in high compression efficiency for storing image data.

In the first step, images corresponding to each region are drawn to the designated region (layer), and the images drawn to each region (layer) are drawn to the frame buffer (04TKK0091). In the procedure shown in Figure 462, the first and 31st frames generate an image for one screen using the reference frame data. Therefore, image data stored in the image data area of the production data ROM (05TKK0070) or image data preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020) is expanded into the decode buffer (05TKK0101) reserved for each region (layer). For example, as shown in Figure 462, the image data to be drawn to region A1 is expanded into the decode buffer for region A1 allocated in the external RAM (05TKK0020). Note that single images or images to be processed as sprites may be expanded directly into the frame buffer.

Here, if some or all of the image data for the video to be generated is not preloaded into the external RAM (05TKK0020), it is necessary to read the image data stored in the image data area of the production data ROM (05TKK0070) during image generation. Therefore, based on the determination of the video to be generated, the necessary image data may be preloaded from the production data ROM (05TKK0070) into the external RAM (05TKK0020). This eliminates the need to directly access the production data ROM (05TKK0070) during video generation, thus speeding up production control. In this case, by reading the image data in playback order (display order), the time lag between video generation and image data reading can be minimized.

Next, we will explain the case of drawing based on frame data other than the reference frame data, i.e., difference frame data. Here, we will explain the case of generating the image for region A1 of the fourth frame. As mentioned above, difference frame data is the difference from the image of the previous frame, so the image data of the previous frame is necessary to generate complete image data. The difference frame data of the fourth frame is an image showing a single drop of water, and by combining it with the image stored in the decode buffer of the third frame, it becomes the complete image data to be drawn in region A1. In this way, the image data stored in the decode buffer for each region is superimposed in the order of layers to generate the data for one screen.

As described above, the first procedure allows for a higher proportion of differential frame data, thereby compressing the data size. Furthermore, by allocating a decode buffer corresponding to the area of each layer, memory space can be saved compared to allocating an entire screen area to the decode buffer.

However, in the first step, it is necessary to store the image data of the previous frame in the decode buffer for all areas where the video is displayed. Therefore, increasing the number of areas where the video is displayed to enhance the visual effect would increase the memory capacity required to allocate the decode buffer (05TKK0101), potentially leading to insufficient memory space provided by the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Figure 463 illustrates the required decoding buffer capacity when generating videos using the first procedure. Although this embodiment describes six videos, a dedicated decoding buffer must be allocated for each video. Furthermore, since actual gameplay displays even more videos, there is a risk of temporary memory capacity shortage when releasing the decoding buffers allocated in memory at the end of a series of animations. This could cause delays during the execution of animations designed to capture the player's attention, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

[31-2b. Video Generation Procedure 2]
The first procedure had the problem of increasing the capacity of the decode buffer allocated to the external RAM (05TKK0020). Therefore, a second procedure is described that can suppress the increase in capacity allocated to the decode buffer (05TKK0101) more than the first procedure.

In the second step, to suppress the increase in the size of the decode buffer, instead of allocating a separate decode buffer for each region, a single decode buffer (common decode buffer) is provided that is common to all regions. The common decode buffer, like the frame buffer, corresponds to the display area of one screen and directly draws the image data for each region from the lower layer downwards (display order). Since the common decode buffer is single, it may be allocated to the image RAM (04TKK0090) instead of the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Furthermore, instead of assigning the common decode buffer to the display area of a single screen, it may be assigned to the largest display area among the multiple layers being drawn. Also, if the display areas of each layer are far apart, and the maximum display area cannot accommodate all layers, the common decode buffer may be allocated to the smallest display area that can encompass at least all layers. This allows the common decode buffer to correspond to a smaller area than the frame buffer, thereby reducing the memory capacity required for buffer allocation.

As described above, the common decode buffer does not necessarily need to correspond to the display area of one screen; it only needs to correspond to the required area. If the common decode buffer needs to correspond to the display area of one screen, the common decode buffer may be allocated to the external RAM (05TKK0020) during the power-up processing of the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, the common decode buffer may be allocated for each animation. This allows for buffer allocation and deallocation as needed, improving the efficiency of memory allocation and enabling more effective utilization.

Furthermore, when generating images based on difference frame data other than the reference frame data, the reference frame data immediately preceding the frame to be generated, and all difference data from that reference frame data onward, are drawn to the common decode buffer. Therefore, as in the first step, increasing the spacing between reference frame data increases the amount of image data to be processed simultaneously, thus increasing image processing time. For this reason, the spacing between reference frame data is reduced. The details of the second step are explained below.

Figure 464 shows an example of the spacing of reference frame data when generating a video in the second step. In the example shown in Figure 464, reference frame data is placed every four frames. This requires approximately 1.17 times more capacity compared to placing reference frame data every 60 frames, but it is still about two-thirds the capacity of using only reference frame data (see Figure 457). The second step will be explained below with reference to Figure 465.

Figure 465 illustrates the second procedure for generating the video. As mentioned earlier, in the second procedure, instead of allocating a separate decode buffer for each region of the video to be played, the data is drawn directly to a common decode buffer. Specifically, image data corresponding to each region is drawn to the common decode buffer in order (display order), starting from the back-facing region (layer). Once the drawing of image data for all regions is complete, it is transferred to the frame buffer and output to the display screen of the animation display device 1600.

Alternatively, instead of transferring the data to the frame buffer only after all layers have been drawn to the common decode buffer, the data may be transferred to the frame buffer and overwritten after each layer has been drawn. In this case, the image of the next layer may be overwritten without clearing the common decode buffer, or the common decode buffer may be cleared before drawing the image of the next layer. Clearing the common decode buffer can reduce memory usage, while not clearing it can reduce the processing load associated with buffer clearing.

First, when drawing (unfolding) reference frame data, the read image data should be drawn sequentially from the backmost region (layer). On the other hand, when drawing difference frame data, for example, when generating the second frame image, an image based on the difference frame data of the second frame is drawn in addition to the reference frame data of the first frame. The drawing order is to draw from the bottommost region (layer), and within the same region, drawing is done in chronological order starting from the reference frame data. In the example in Figure 465, after drawing the background image, the reference frame data (image of the first frame) of region A1 is drawn, and then the difference frame data of the second frame is drawn. Next, the image of the building, which is a single image, is drawn. Furthermore, the reference frame data and difference frame data of region A2 are drawn in that order, and the remaining regions are drawn similarly. Once the image data of all regions has been drawn, the images in the common decode buffer are transferred to the frame buffer and output to the display device 1600. By controlling it in this way, it is possible to generate video using only a common decode buffer, without allocating decode buffers for each region to external RAM (05TKK0020) or image RAM (04TKK0090).

Similarly, when generating the third frame image, the layers are drawn sequentially starting from the bottom layer. For the third frame image, as with the second frame, the background layer image of area A0 is drawn first, followed by the preview layer of area A1. At this point, the reference frame data (the first frame image) is drawn, followed by the difference frame data of the second frame. Finally, the difference frame data of the third frame is drawn, completing the drawing of area A1. The remaining areas are then drawn in the same manner, completing the drawing of one screen for the third frame.

Furthermore, the reference frame data positions for the video drawn on each layer do not necessarily have to match. Specifically, layers that begin drawing from the start of the animation and layers that begin drawing midway through the animation may be mixed. For example, if a character appears midway through the animation, drawing will begin at the moment the character appears, and this timing will be the reference frame start position (animation start position) for that layer. Also, the animation end position for each layer may be the moment the character exits, rather than the moment the animation ends.

Generally, "video" refers to a representation of movement by displaying a series of images (broadly defined "video"). However, in the game machine's presentation in this embodiment, a "video" in the narrow sense is defined as one that incorporates differences between each image (frame), and as described above, this refers to a system composed of reference frame data and difference frame data. On the other hand, a "still image" is defined as one composed of complete images (reference frame data) rather than differences. This includes not only a single image without movement, but also cases where movement is represented by displaying a series of complete images (reference frame data).

In the narrow sense, "video" is composed of differential images (differential frame data), which allows for compression of the storage capacity for images, but may result in a degradation of image quality. On the other hand, "still images" have complete images for each frame, thus suppressing image quality degradation. Therefore, for displays where misinterpretation by the player could cause problems (e.g., display of decorative patterns), "still images" should be used. Conversely, for effects that enhance the enjoyment of the game (e.g., preview effects, video displays), which do not directly display the lottery results, "video" (in the narrow sense) should be used. Furthermore, when expressing movement, image quality can be adjusted by adjusting the interval of the reference frame data, and by making all images "video" in the narrow sense, including differential frame data, control can be unified while reducing image capacity. Alternatively, by making all images "still images" without differential frame data, control can be simplified without the need for processing the combination of reference frame data and differential frame data.

Furthermore, since the layers for displaying videos are composed of multiple objects, there are more layers than those for displaying still images. This allows for more detailed and nuanced effects. Also, by allocating a region to each layer according to the size of the objects being displayed, it's possible to prevent memory depletion due to excessive allocation of space. Since the objects being drawn in layers for displaying still images don't operate independently, the number of layers can be kept to a minimum. Note that, depending on the type of effect, the number of layers for displaying videos may be fewer than the number of layers for displaying still images.

Furthermore, in the second step, since the decode buffer for each region is not maintained and the common decode buffer is also discarded, it is necessary to identify the most recent reference frame data when drawing differential frame data. As mentioned above, the frame data contains information in the header that identifies whether it is reference frame data or differential frame data. Also, since it is configured to identify the frame data of the preceding frame, it is possible to trace back to the reference frame data by sequentially checking the contents of the header information of the frame data of the preceding frame.

Furthermore, even if the decode buffer (05TKK0101) is not allocated to the external RAM (05TKK0020) but instead allocated to the VDP's built-in RAM or image RAM (04TKK0090), the memory area provided by these RAMs will be available, allowing it to be repurposed for other control functions and thus stabilizing the performance control.

Figure 466 illustrates the required decoding buffer capacity when generating video using the second procedure. In the second procedure, since only one common decoding buffer for one screen is needed regardless of the number of areas for video playback, memory usage can be kept constant regardless of the content of the presentation. Although six videos are described in this embodiment, as mentioned above, actual presentations display many more videos, thus increasing the amount of memory that can be reduced. In contrast, generating video using the second procedure allows for a constant decoding buffer capacity, enabling stable presentation control. This suppresses delays and other disruptions to the presentation, even when executing eye-catching presentations that play many videos, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, the second procedure for video playback makes it possible to reduce the size of the decode buffer required when performing an effect that displays multiple videos simultaneously on a single screen, thereby suppressing delays during image display and stabilizing the effect control. In particular, since it is extremely difficult to increase the capacity of the external RAM (05TKK0020) after the peripheral control board 1510 has been manufactured, it is possible to reduce costs by using a smaller capacity external RAM (05TKK0020). Furthermore, being able to play more videos with a smaller capacity external RAM (05TKK0020) increases the freedom of the effects, enabling more engaging and entertaining presentations.

Furthermore, while both of the aforementioned video playback procedures allowed video playback from reference frame data, the first procedure, in particular, had a problem: the interval between reference frame data was long, forcing video playback from the beginning. In contrast, the second procedure achieves a certain level of data compression while shortening the interval between reference frame data compared to the first procedure, making it easier to play the video from any point (partway through). This simplifies the design of the game's presentation. Additionally, when long and short versions of a presentation are defined, the frame data can be standardized by sharing some elements of the long version's presentation with the short version's.

Furthermore, the second method of video playback has the problem of increased processing load compared to the first method because the amount of data extracted from each frame is generally larger. However, recent VDP performance has improved, and experimental results have shown that it is sufficiently practical if the interval of the reference frame data is around 5 (GOP = 5).

Furthermore, in the second procedure for video playback, the interval between reference frame data is shorter than in the first procedure, resulting in less data compression and an increase in capacity. However, as shown in Figure 457, if the interval between reference frame data is set to approximately 5, the capacity increase is limited to about 1.13 times that of a reference frame data interval of 60, so the increase in capacity is not a major problem. Also, the production data ROM (05TKK0070) in this embodiment employs NAND flash memory, achieving cost reduction and increased capacity, making it possible to store more image data. Furthermore, the time required to read data from the NAND flash memory can be shortened by installing a cache memory (05TKK0072) or preloading image data to external RAM (05TKK0020), so the above-mentioned point is not a practical problem.

Furthermore, while the above example uses a common decode buffer corresponding to the area of one screen, multiple common decode buffers may be provided. Specifically, a common decode buffer can be provided for each of the related layers. This configuration allows for the commonization of data and buffer settings related to characters, such as when a common character appears in multiple preview sequences. This reduces redundant data and saves memory capacity.

By the way, if a common decode buffer is used for all areas (layers), the processing load for display control will increase when the number of video layers increases, potentially causing the rendering process to not keep up. To solve this, setting a smaller GOP value results in an increase in the image data size. Therefore, among the areas (layers) used to render video, a common decode buffer is used for larger areas (layers), while individual decode buffers are used for smaller areas (layers). A specific example will be explained below with reference to Figure 467.

Figure 467 illustrates the required decode buffer capacity when generating a video by combining the first and second procedures. In the example shown in Figure 467, regions A0 to A3 are drawn to a common decode buffer, while regions A4 to A8 are drawn to separate decode buffers. As shown in Figure 458, regions A4 to A8 are small in size, while regions A0 to A3 are relatively large. Note that regions A0, A3, and A8 are areas where still images or single images are drawn, so they may be drawn directly to the frame buffer.

As described above, the common decode buffer is not limited to a single buffer for all layers of video; it may be a common buffer for some of the video layers. Video generation is performed by combining the first and second steps; when using a common decode buffer, the second step is followed; when using individual decode buffers, the first step is followed. This configuration makes it possible to suppress the increase in image data size while simultaneously suppressing the increase in display control processing load.

[31-2c. Modification of video generation procedure 2]
The second procedure for video playback has been described above. In this second procedure, if the frame to be generated is differential frame data, the system identifies all of the reference frame data immediately preceding the frame to be generated and all of the differential frame data from that reference frame data onward, and draws them to a common decode buffer. The identification of the reference frame data and differential data was performed based on the identification information contained in the header information.

However, because it was necessary to individually check the frame data of specific targets, processing was required to identify the frame data. Therefore, in this modified version, by providing image management information corresponding to each frame data, it becomes possible to efficiently identify the base frame data and difference data.

Figure 468 shows an example of image management information, where (A) is the case when the interval of the basic frame data is fixed, and (B) is the case when the interval of the basic frame data is variable. The image management information consists of the interval of the reference basic frame data (frame interval), video type information for identifying the video, and frame identification information indicating whether it is reference frame data or differential frame data. Frame identification information is set corresponding to each frame. The image management information may also include the storage location (address) of the image information for each frame. This makes it possible to directly acquire frame data (image information), simplifying processing.

In the example shown in (A), a reference frame interval is defined at the beginning of the image management information, and video type information is defined for each video. Furthermore, frame identification information for the frame data corresponding to each frame included in each video is defined. In this embodiment, "1" is set as the frame identification information for basic frame data, and "2" is set as the frame identification information for differential frame data. Additionally, an exit code indicating the end of the video is set after the frame identification information of the last frame.

In the example shown in (B), video type information and a reference frame interval are defined for each video. The frame identification information is the same as in the example shown in (A).

(A) By fixing the reference frame interval, reference frame data is always arranged at equal intervals, simplifying control. On the other hand, by making the reference frame interval variable, as in (B), finer settings can be made for each video. For example, for videos with little movement (small changes), the size of the difference data is small, so setting a longer reference frame interval can save image size. Conversely, for videos with a lot of movement (large changes), the size of the difference data is large, so setting a longer reference frame interval will not reduce the size. In this case, shortening the reference frame interval can reduce the amount of frame data to be drawn, thereby reducing the processing load for generating frames.

[32. Inspection of External RAM]
In conventional gaming machines, the peripheral control board 1510 has a RAM (04TKK0012) used when executing the program that controls the effects, and an image RAM (VRAM) (04TKK0090) used for display control of images, etc., as temporary storage means for effect control. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned temporary storage means, an external RAM (05TKK0020) is arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 to speed up effect control by pre-storing effect data and decoded image data before execution (Figure 427).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a DDR3 SDRAM is used as the external RAM (05TKK0020), and it is accessible from various components such as the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with inspection functions to diagnose whether each component is functioning correctly. These inspection functions are implemented as functions of arithmetic means such as the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060), or by programs executed by these arithmetic means. For example, the inspection of the RAM (04TKK0012) included in the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed by the CPU (04TKK0011). Similarly, the image RAM (04TKK0090) is included in the performance display control unit 1512, and its inspection is performed by the VDP (04TKK0060). For reasons such as the VDP (04TKK0060) being configured to perform only image control, or the VDP (04TKK0060) and image RAM (04TKK0090) being configured independently, the inspection of the image RAM (04TKK0090) may be performed by the CPU (04TKK0011).

To ensure the normal operation (performance control) of the gaming machine, it is necessary to provide a similar configuration for testing the newly added external RAM (05TKK0020) in this embodiment of the gaming machine. Since the external RAM (05TKK0020) is accessible from both the CPU (04TKK0011) and the VDP (04TKK0060), either the CPU (04TKK0011) or the VDP (04TKK0060) may perform the testing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the CPU (04TKK0011) and VDP (04TKK0060) perform inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020). Since the configuration for inspection by the CPU (04TKK0011) is the same as the conventional configuration, first, the configuration for inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) by the VDP (04TKK0060) will be described. Next, the content of the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be described. Finally, the control during the execution of the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be described.

[32-1. Configuration for testing external RAM]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the VDP (04TKK0060) is equipped with a memory controller (06TKK0010) that controls access to the external RAM (05TKK0020), and inputs and outputs signals to the external RAM (05TKK0020) from various terminals.

Figure 469 is a block diagram showing an excerpt of the configuration for testing the external RAM (05TKK0020). The VDP (04TKK0060), in addition to the configuration shown in Figure 427, includes a memory controller (06TKK0010) that controls access to the external RAM (05TKK0020) from each component of the VDP (04TKK0060).

The memory controller (06TKK0010) includes a controller core (06TKK0011). The controller core (06TKK0011) receives commands for each component of the VDP (04TKK0060) to access data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020) and stores them in the command queue (06TKK0012). Furthermore, it processes the commands stored in the command queue (06TKK0012) and sends them to the command scheduler (06TKK0015) via the selection logic (06TKK0013). The command scheduler controls the execution timing of commands received by the VDP (04TKK0060). The command scheduler (06TKK0015) transmits various signals from the corresponding terminal (06TKK0018) to the memory device (06TKK0022) of the external RAM (05TKK0020) based on the received command, for read/write operations.

Furthermore, the memory controller (06TKK0010) includes a RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) that checks whether the bus and terminals connecting to the external RAM (05TKK0020) are functioning correctly.

The signals output from terminal (06TKK0018) on the memory controller (06TKK0010) and input to the external RAM (05TKK0020) via terminal (06TKK0021) include the reset signal (RESET#), clock signal (CK/CK#), chip select signal (CS[1:0]#), row address strobe signal (RAS#), column address strobe signal (CAS#), write enable signal (WE#), address signal (A[15:0]), and data signal (DQ[31:0]).

The reset signal (RESET#) causes the external RAM (05TKK0020) to perform a reset operation. The clock signal (CK/CK#) determines the timing of operations (data reading/writing, etc.) performed by the external RAM (05TKK0020).

The chip select signal (CS[1:0]#) is used to specify the memory chip to access. The row address strobe signal (RAS#) specifies the row address of the memory device to be accessed, and the column address strobe signal (CAS#) specifies the column address of the memory device to be accessed. The row address strobe signal and column address strobe signal are used to identify the memory device to be accessed. The write enable signal (WE#) is used to make the memory device to be accessed writable.

The address signal (A[15:0]) specifies the address of the cell containing the data to be accessed and activated. The data signal (DQ[31:0]) performs input and output of the data specified by the address signal. There are 16 (0-15) terminals for outputting address signals, each connected to an address bus. Additionally, there are 32 (0-31) terminals for outputting data signals, each connected to a data bus.

Termination resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) are connected to the address bus and data bus. The resistance values of the termination resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) are adjustable, and in this embodiment, they can be switched to at least three types: 36Ω, 40Ω, and 60Ω. The RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) performs testing while switching the resistance values of the termination resistors. The RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) may also be equipped with a termination resistor setting register, allowing testing of the external RAM (05TKK0020) by specifying one of the termination resistors in the termination resistor setting register.

[32-2. Inspection of External RAM]
The configuration of the VDP (04TKK0060) and external RAM (05TKK0020) has been described above. Next, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be described. The inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) may be performed based on an inspection command received via a terminal provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or when predetermined conditions for performing the inspection are met. The terminal that receives the inspection command is a serial input/output interface that can receive commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 as well as commands transmitted by the inspection device connected during factory inspection of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the external RAM (05TKK0020) can be inspected in two ways: one is performed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing an inspection program, and the other is performed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060).

The inspection based on the inspection program is executed when the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processes the corresponding inspection program based on the receipt of the inspection command. First, the command receiving unit (communication port) of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the transmitted inspection command and stores it in the command buffer. The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the inspection program corresponding to the inspection command stored in the command buffer. Note that the inspection command is received by the same command receiving unit (communication port) that receives performance-related commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, but it may also be configured to receive it by a dedicated command receiving unit (command input port, communication port) for inspection.

[32-2a. Inspection Commands]
First, let's explain the inspection commands. The inspection targets include not only the external RAM (05TKK0020), but also the VDP (04TKK0060), the sound source IC (04TKK0030), and the operating modes of various performance devices. Furthermore, the execution of the inspection program is not limited to the CPU (04TKK0011), but may be performed by other arithmetic means such as the VDP (04TKK0060) depending on the inspection target. The following describes the commands that target the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Figure 470 shows an example of a command for checking the external RAM (05TKK0020). The system of check commands is the same as or similar to that of game commands. If the game commands are similar but not identical, for example, game commands consist of a command value + checksum, while check commands consist only of a command value. Furthermore, even in similar cases, the command values for game commands and check commands do not overlap. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute processing based solely on the command value without distinguishing between game commands and check commands when it receives a command.

The external RAM (05TKK0020) in this gaming machine is inspected using two main methods: R/W (Read/Write) testing (first inspection method) and glitch margin checking (second inspection method). Each inspection method is further subdivided based on the number of trials, etc. The R/W (Read/Write) test and glitch margin checking (inspection) will be described below.

[32-2b. R/W Test]
The R/W (Read/Write) test determines whether data can be successfully read from and written to the storage area provided by the external RAM (05TKK0020). The R/W test is performed by the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 processing an inspection program for executing the R/W test.

In the R/W test, a predetermined value is written to the entire memory area, and then it is determined whether the written value can be read accurately. If the value cannot be read correctly, the test result is a failure, and the ongoing test is terminated at this point. At this point, the test itself may be terminated, or the test may be continued by receiving the next test command. Note that the test result can be output from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GPIO) of the CPU (04TKK0011) when the test is completed, and for example, the test result can be sent to the test device that sent the test command. When the test device receives the test result, it displays the test result and, if necessary, sends the next test command to continue the test. For example, the R/W test 1 command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the test result is received and displayed, and then the R/W test 2 command is sent. Furthermore, the glitch margin check 1 command, glitch margin check 2 command, etc. are sent sequentially. The test contents corresponding to each command will be described later. Furthermore, the general-purpose input/output terminals used to output the test results are not used for gameplay. This allows for the management of the configuration required for testing independently of the configuration for gameplay, thereby reducing the complexity of managing the game machine's configuration.

The R/W test command includes three types of tests depending on the type of data being written. R/W Test 1 performs a test by writing a predetermined value ("0x55aa55aa"). R/W Test 2 performs a test by writing a different value ("0xaa55aa55") than the value written in R/W Test 1. The predetermined value written in R/W Test 1 is "010101011010100101010101101010" in binary, and the predetermined value written in R/W Test 1 is "101010100101010110101001010101". By executing R/W Test 1 and R/W Test 2, "0"s and "1"s are written to the entire area, improving the accuracy of the test.

Furthermore, R/W Test 3 performs the test by writing a 2-byte random value. When performing both R/W Test 1 and R/W Test 2 would be time-consuming due to factors such as memory capacity limitations, writing a random value allows for a less biased test, thereby improving test accuracy. Note that the random value generated during writing and the random value generated during reading (comparison) are the same, and are generated by the same random number generation process (function) in the same program. Alternatively, the random value may be generated by hardware such as a random number generation circuit, rather than by a program (software).

As described above, by enabling the writing of multiple types of values during testing, it becomes possible to perform tests according to the situation, improve testing accuracy, and achieve stable performance control, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[32-2b. Glitch margin check (inspection)]
The glitch margin check (inspection) determines the durability of the memory module when a glitch occurs. A glitch is a malfunction that occurs when the clock signal momentarily turns ON/OFF near the limit voltage during the rising/falling edge of the clock signal due to noise or other factors. The glitch margin check measures the acceptable range (margin) when a glitch occurs, inspecting the durability against unexpected faulty signals input due to noise or other factors. While sufficient durability is usually ensured at the design stage, durability may change due to errors that occur during mass production of the memory module or deterioration over time. Therefore, safety is enhanced by enabling post-production inspection.

The glitch margin check is performed by the diagnostic function of the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the VDP (04TKK0060). The glitch margin check command is a command for performing a glitch margin check (inspection), and two types of commands are available depending on the number of inspections (3 times, 30,000 times). Note that the number of inspections is not limited to the number shown in Figure 470 and may be different. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the glitch margin check is performed by switching the value of the termination resistor, and the predetermined number of inspections are performed for each resistance value of the termination resistor. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, three types of resistance values can be set as the termination resistor, so the predetermined number of inspections is performed three times. That is, if the number of inspections is three, one inspection (predetermined number of times) is performed for each resistance value, and if the number of inspections is 30,000, 10,000 inspections (predetermined number of times) are performed for each resistance value.

When the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a glitch margin check command, it instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to perform a glitch margin check. Upon receiving the instruction to perform the glitch margin check, the VDP (04TKK0060) sets values in registers that configure the parameters for the check and the execution results, and then performs the glitch margin check (inspection) using the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020). The inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) will be described below.

[32-2c. Testing using a RAM diagnostic circuit]
Next, the inspection by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) will be described. The VDP (04TKK0060) of the gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with a RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020), which sets parameters in a test register and performs an inspection based on the contents of the register. The RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) performs an inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020), but it may also be configured to perform an inspection of the image RAM (04TKK0090).

As mentioned above, the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) performs the test based on the peripheral control unit 1511 receiving a test execution instruction from the VDP (04TKK0060). Alternatively, the test may be performed even without receiving an execution instruction from the peripheral control unit 1511, if a predetermined timing or condition is met, such as when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) performs the test by setting various parameters in the test register described later. During this process, the test is performed multiple times while varying the resistance values of the termination resistors (06TKK0016, 06TKK0017) of the address and data buses of the memory controller (06TKK0010) of the VDP (04TKK0060) to which the external RAM (05TKK0020) is connected. Specifically, the values are changed in the order of 40Ω, 36Ω, and 60Ω. By performing the test while varying the resistance values of the termination resistors in this way, the accuracy of the glitch margin check can be improved.

Next, we will explain the registers (test registers) that are set for executing the test. Various parameters during test execution are set in the registers located on the VDP (04TKK0060). In addition to parameter settings, the output of test results and the instruction to start the test are also handled by registers.

Figure 471 illustrates the registers configured for the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) to perform a check on the external RAM (05TKK0020). Each register consists of 32 bits, and parameters are set by writing values to the corresponding bits.

The registers used to perform the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) test on the external RAM (05TKK0020) include a control register, a start address register, and an expected value mask register. The control register is used to control the test, including outputting test results and inputting test execution instructions. The start address register sets the starting position for the external RAM (05TKK0020) test. The expected value mask register specifies the test location on the external RAM (05TKK0020). Each register is described below.

[32-2c-1. Control Register]
As mentioned above, the control register is a register used to control the check. The control register includes two types of registers: control register 0 and control register 1. The functions of each bit in each control register are described below.

(Control register 0)
Control register 0 stores the address check result (RESULT_A) in bit 25, the data check result (RESULT_D) in bit 24, the test execution instruction (TEST_GO) in bit 16, and the MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15:0]) in bits 15 through 0. The remaining bits are set to "0b".

The address check result (RESULT_A) stores the results of the check for defects related to the address/command terminal. The stored value is read-only. If a defect is found (abnormal), "0b" is set in the bit; if no defect is found (normal), "1b" is set. Note that the address check only determines whether a defect exists; the location of the defect is not identified.

The data check result (RESULT_D) stores the results of checking all bits of the external RAM (05TKK0020) for defects. The stored value is read-only. If a defect is found (abnormal), "0b" is set to the bit; if no defects are found (normal), "1b" is set to the bit. Note that during the data check, defective locations are recorded in a separate register, and the memory controller controls whether data is read from or written to those locations.

The test execution instruction (TEST_GO) is set to "1b" if the test is running, and "0b" if it is not running. The test execution instruction (TEST_GO) is write-only; setting this bit to "1b" starts the test. Similarly, the test execution completion (TEST_DONE) is set to "1b" if the test is running, and to "0b" if the test is not executed (test execution completed). The VDP (04TKK0060) determines the test is complete when the TEST_DONE value becomes "0b" and reads the respective test results (RESULT_A, RESULT_D). Furthermore, upon completion of the test, the VDP (04TKK0060) always sets TEST_GO to "0b," making it possible to run the test again.

The MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15:0]) consists of 16 bits. The value of the MR3 data (MR3_DATA_1[15:0]) is readable and writable.

When the gaming machine is reset, predetermined initial values are set in each register. At this time, the bits related to the start/end of the test execution (e.g., TEST_GO, TEST_DONE) are set to initial values that enable the test to be executed. Specifically, TEST_GO is set to "0b" (test not executed), and TEST_DONE is set to "0b" (test not executed). This configuration allows the test to be executed normally from the moment the power is turned on.

(Control Register 1)
Control register 1 stores whether an address check can be performed (ADDR_CHECK) in 16 bits, whether a data check can be performed (DATA_CHECK) in 8 bits, and the memory capacity of the DDR to be checked (ADDR_SPACE[5:0]) in bits 5 to 0. The other bits are set to "0b".

The ADDR_CHECK setting determines whether an address check is performed: "0b" if no address check is performed, and "1b" if an address check is performed. An address check is a simple check that involves changing the address bus bit by bit. For example, it changes the address to 0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x04, ... . Note that when performing an address check, the start address (described later) must be set to a predetermined value (0_0000_0000h).

The DATA_CHECK setting (DATA_CHECK) is set to "0b" if the data check is not performed, and "1b" if the data check is performed. The data check examines the entire address range based on a test algorithm. Because data errors can cause unexpected behavior and potential failure of the display device, the test algorithm is not a simple one, but rather a quality-focused inspection.

If both address and data checks are configured to be performed (by setting ADDR_CHECK and DATA_CHECK to "1b"), the address check will be performed first, followed by the data check. Furthermore, if a defect is found during the address check, the process will terminate without performing the data check. This is because the data check is a quality-focused inspection that can pinpoint the location of defects, and therefore, if a defect is found in the address, the defect cannot be identified at that point.

The memory capacity (ADDR_SPACE[5:0]) is a value indicating the area of the external RAM (05TKK0020) to be inspected, and the actual area is 2ADDR_SPACE. Since ADDR_SPACE is 6 bits, values from "00h" to "3Fh" can be specified. Note that if the area to be inspected is small, the inspection efficiency deteriorates; therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a value of at least 6 ("06h"; "000110b") or higher is set. Normally, there is no need to exclude a specific area from inspection, so by setting ADDR_SPACE to the maximum value ("3Fh") and specifying the starting address of the area ("0_0000_0000h") as the inspection start address, the system is configured to perform inspection on the entire memory area regardless of the maximum memory capacity.

Furthermore, since the initial value of each bit in ADDR_SPACE is set to "0b," even if the test is executed by mistake (for example, if "1b" is set in TEST_GO), the area to be tested will be 20 = 1 (bit), so the test will effectively not be executed. This prevents the test from being executed and the performance from being interrupted even if "1b" is unintentionally set in TEST_GO due to noise or other factors.

[32-2c-2. Start Address Register]
The start address register specifies the starting address of the area to be checked (start address; (START_ADDRESS[34:0])). The start address is defined as 35 bits, and since the register capacity is 32 bits, it consists of two registers: the upper start address register and the lower start address register.

The upper start address register stores the value of the upper three bits of the start address (START_ADDRESS[34:32]). The value of the upper three bits is stored in bits 2 through 0, and the remaining bits 31 through 3 are set to "0b". The upper two bits of the upper start address (START_ADDRESS[34:33]) are set to "0b".

The lower start address register stores the lower 32 bits of the start address (START_ADDRESS[31:16], START_ADDRESS[15:0]). The lower 32 bits of the start address are managed in 16-bit (2-byte) increments, as shown in Figure 471. The lower 5 bits of the lower start address (START_ADDRESS[4:0]) are always set to "0" (32-byte boundary).

As mentioned above, the external RAM (05TKK0020) is typically checked across its entire memory area. Therefore, both the upper and lower start address registers are set to "0" to make it the starting address (address 0).

[32-2c-3. Expected Value Mask Register]
The expected value mask sets whether to enable or disable the inspection of a specific terminal. Set it to "0b" to enable the inspection, and to "1b" to disable it. This allows only specific terminals to be targeted for inspection. Expected value mask registers are defined for each of the four addresses ("00", "01", "10", "11") specified in the column addresses of the external RAM (05TKK0020) (Expected Value Mask Register 00, Expected Value Mask Register 01, Expected Value Mask Register 10, Expected Value Mask Register 11). The configuration of each expected value mask register is the same.

The expected value mask register is divided into four areas (A to D) corresponding to memory elements (memory devices (06TKK0022)) every 8 bits (31 to 24 bits: MASKD_DQ[7:0], 23 to 16 bits: MASKC_DQ[7:0], 15 to 8 bits: MASKB_DQ[7:0], 7 to 0 bits: MASKA_DQ[7:0]). Normally, all bits are set to "0b" to check all terminals. On the other hand, if "1b" is set in the register to exclude a terminal from the check, a failed expected value is ignored. Note that if "1b" is set in the register to exclude a terminal from the check, the check itself may not be performed.

[32-3. Control for performing external RAM inspection]
Next, the control for performing the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) is performed when the power is turned on, before the machine becomes ready to start playing. It is also possible to perform the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) after the power is turned on (after the power-on processing is completed). Note that it is not necessary to implement the function to perform the inspection when the power is turned on. It is sufficient to enable the inspection to be performed as needed after the peripheral control board 1510 becomes ready to receive inspection commands after the gaming machine is powered on, and it is not necessary to implement the inspection process in the power-on processing (boot program, peripheral control program).

First, to explain the basic control during test execution, after the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a test command, it either executes the test program (in the case of R/W testing) or sets parameters in the test register of the VDP (04TKK0060) and performs the test using the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the memory controller (06TKK0010) (in the case of glitch margin checking).

Once the external RAM (05TKK0020) test is complete, the CPU (04TKK0011) reads the test results and outputs them via the general-purpose input/output terminal (GPIO). The CPU (04TKK0011) outputs the test results (commands, information) to the testing device without specifically determining whether the results are normal or abnormal. The end of the test is determined by the value of the TEST_DONE in the test register or by an interrupt request from the VDP (04TKK0060). Upon receiving the test results, the testing device displays the received results and, if further tests are to be performed, sends additional test commands to continue the test.

The following explains the inspections performed during power-on (power-on processing) and after the power-on processing is complete, referring to the flowchart.

[32-3a. Inspection during power-on (power-on processing)]
As described above, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) in the gaming machine of this embodiment includes an R/W test and a glitch margin check. The R/W test is performed by processing a test program. The test program is included in the peripheral control program. Therefore, the R/W test cannot be performed before the peripheral control program is read and executed when the power is turned on. In addition, the glitch margin check is performed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) based on the test register, so it can be started before the execution of the peripheral control program.

During power-on processing, as shown in Figure 429, the boot program is started first, followed by the peripheral control program. The R/W test is performed within the inspection process included in the peripheral control program (step 05TK0040). Furthermore, the glitch margin check is performed by the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) provided in the memory controller (06TKK0010) of the VDP (04TKK0060), and is therefore executable within the boot program's inspection process (step 05TK0010). Note that the power-on inspection may be controlled to be performed programmatically rather than via an inspection command.

The following explains the execution timing of each test, including the case where tests are performed upon power-on. First, we will explain the case where the glitch margin check, which can be performed first, is executed, followed by the case where the R/W test is executed.

[32-3a-1. Glitch Margin Check]
Figure 472 is a flowchart showing the procedure for checking the external RAM (05TKK0020) (glitch margin check) in the boot program.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first sets various registers in the test register of the VDP (04TKK0060) (step 06TKS0010). The contents of the registers to be set are as explained in Figure 471. Alternatively, a register setting instruction may be sent to the VDP (04TKK0060), causing the VDP (04TKK0060) or the RAM diagnostic circuit (06TKK0020) to set the test registers.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to execute the test (step 06TKS0020). At this time, the CPU (04TKK0011) may instruct the test to execute by setting "1b" in the test register's TEST_GO, or the VDP (04TKK0060), upon receiving the test execution instruction, may set "1b" in the test register's TEST_GO according to the instruction.

Finally, when the inspection is complete, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the inspection results from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) (step 06TKS0030). If an inspection device is connected to the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) of the peripheral control board 1510, the received inspection results are displayed on the inspection device.

[32-3a-2. R/W Test]
Figure 473 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the inspection process (R/W test) of the external RAM (05TKK0020) in the peripheral control program.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes a test program to perform R/W tests (step 06TKS0110). Three types of R/W tests are possible depending on the value to be written. The value written in R/W test 1 ("0x55aa55aa") and the value written in R/W test 2 ("0xaa55aa55") are the bit-inverted values of the binary representation of the other. Therefore, by performing both tests, the values "0" and "1" can be written to all areas, improving the test accuracy. R/W test 3 is a test that writes a 2-byte random value. It offers improved accuracy compared to performing only R/W test 1 or R/W test 2, and can complete the test in half the time compared to performing both R/W test 1 and R/W test 2.

Finally, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the test results from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) when the test is complete (step 06TKS0120). If a test device is connected to the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) of the peripheral control board 1510, the received test results are displayed on the test device, similar to the glitch margin check. Note that the process in step 06TKS0120 is the same as the process in step 06TKS0030 of the flowchart shown in Figure 472.

The above describes the execution of the external RAM (05TKK0020) inspection at power-on. However, it is also possible to perform the RW test and glitch margin check at the end of the power-on processing. Even if there is a defect in a part of the memory area of the external RAM (05TKK0020), the power-on processing can continue by writing data to another area, so it is possible to perform the inspection at the end. Furthermore, if a critical failure occurs in the external RAM (05TKK0020), the power-on processing cannot be completed without even needing to perform the inspection, and subsequent processing (starting up the gaming machine) will be stopped. By performing the inspection at the end of the power-on processing, defects can be detected before the start of gameplay, thereby reducing the possibility of the gaming machine malfunctioning during gameplay.

[32-3b. Inspection after power-on processing is complete]
Next, we will explain the case where the external RAM (05TKK0020) is inspected after power-on. The inspection process shown in Figures 472 and 473 is called from the power-on process and the inspection is completed before the start of gameplay. Here, we will explain the process for performing the inspection after power-on and after the initial setup of the various devices of the gaming machine is complete.

Figure 474 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the external RAM (05TKK0020) inspection process (glitch margin check and R/W test) executed after power-on. This process is included in the peripheral control program and is configured to execute both the glitch margin check and the R/W test.

Furthermore, the timing of this process can be adjusted; it may be executed periodically using a timer interrupt, or it may be executed when predetermined search conditions are met. Also, when performing the test during the power-on process as described above, if the test is to be performed at the end of the power-on process, this process may be called at the very end of the power-on process.

Furthermore, when this process is executed, as mentioned above, it is not necessary to perform the inspection process (Figures 472 and 473) when the gaming machine is powered on, i.e., during the power-on process. Conversely, if the inspection process is performed during the power-on process, this process does not need to be executed (implemented). Also, these inspection processes do not need to be performed every time the power is turned on; for example, they may be performed only when an inspection device is connected, or only once a month (for example, at the beginning of the month).

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether the inspection execution conditions are met (step 06TKS0210). These inspection execution conditions include, for example, a predetermined time elapsed after transitioning to the customer waiting state and an inspection command being received, the peripheral control board 1510 being connected to an inspection device, and the inspection being performed at the end of the power-on processing. Note that if game effects are being performed, for example, if the effect symbols are changing, the inspection is not performed and the search execution conditions are not met.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511, if the test execution conditions are not met (result of step 06TKS0210 is "NO"), further determines whether the test is currently being performed (step 06TKS0270). If the test is not currently being performed (result of step 06TKS0270 is "NO"), this process terminates. On the other hand, if the test is currently being performed (result of step 06TKS0270 is "YES"), it determines whether to cancel the ongoing test (step 06TKS0280). A case where the test execution conditions cease to be met during the execution of a test is, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command (game command) to start or continue playing a game while the test is being performed.

If the ongoing inspection is to be stopped (the result of step 06TKS0280 is "YES"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 will stop the ongoing inspection (step 06TKS0290), and then terminate this process. This applies, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to start or continue playing (a game command) while the inspection is in progress. This configuration makes it possible to prioritize the continuation of gameplay without interrupting it. Even if some memory areas are faulty, if the external RAM (05TKK0020) is usable, gameplay can be continued without interruption, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 does not want to cancel the ongoing inspection (the result of step 06TKS0280 is "NO"), it will continue the inspection and terminate this process.

The decision to cancel the inspection is based on factors such as the type of inspection currently running and the reason the inspection execution conditions were lifted. For example, as mentioned above, if a game command (a command for visual effects) is received, the inspection is canceled, and the visual effects control based on the received command is executed. Conversely, if a command other than a game command (a command for visual effects) is received, the inspection may be continued. Furthermore, if the inspection is continued, the system may ignore the reception of commands until the inspection is complete, or it may execute the processing based on the received commands after the inspection is complete.

The CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a means (calculation means) to execute the test (step 06TKS0220) if the test execution conditions are met (the result of step 06TKS0210 is "YES"). If the means to execute the test is the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 (the result of step 06TKS0220 is "CPU"), it executes the program corresponding to the specified test (step 06TKS0230). The test specification may, for example, correspond to a received test command, or it may be based on a predefined list of tests to be executed. This corresponds to the case of executing the R/W test described above.

On the other hand, if the means for performing the inspection is VDP (04TKK0060) (the result of step 06TKS0220 is "VDP"), the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 sets various registers in the inspection register of VDP (04TKK0060) to correspond to the specified inspection (step 06TKS0240). Note that the processing in step 06TKS0240 is the same as the processing in step 06TKS0010 in Figure 472, and therefore the explanation is omitted. Furthermore, the specification of the inspection is the same as when the inspection is performed by an inspection program.

Next, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 instructs the VDP (04TKK0060) to perform the inspection (step 06TKS0250). Note that the processing in step 06TKS0250 is the same as the processing in step 06TKS0020 in Figure 472, and therefore its explanation is omitted.

Finally, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the test results from the general-purpose input/output terminal (GIPO) once the test execution is complete (step 06TKS0030). The output of the test results is performed using the same process as step 06TKS0030 in Figure 472.

Furthermore, even if the inspection results of the external RAM (05TKK0020) indicate an abnormality, the CPU (04TKK0011) of the peripheral control unit 1511 will not refuse (suppress) the acceptance of game commands from the main control board 1310, but will execute processing based on the received game commands and continue controlling the various display devices. This is because gameplay can continue even if there is a defect (abnormality) in part of the external RAM (05TKK0020), and since the external RAM (05TKK0020) is used for display control and not for control related to the assignment of game value, a decrease in enjoyment due to interruption of gameplay can be suppressed. Note that if an inspection is being performed based on an inspection command transmitted from the inspection device, gameplay is not continuing, so the operation (use) of the game machine should be stopped.

[32-3c. Modified version of the inspection after power-on processing is complete]
The above explains the case where the test is performed after the power-on processing is complete. If a test that writes a predetermined value to the entire memory area of the external RAM (05TKK0020), such as an R/W test, is performed during gameplay, the data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020) will be corrupted. Therefore, even if a performance command is received after the start of the test, it will not be possible to execute normal performance control.

Therefore, when the external RAM (05TKK0020) inspection is initiated, the acceptance of performance commands may be stopped. For example, if the inspection execution condition is met (the result of step 06TKS0210 is "YES"), the acceptance of performance commands is stopped. After the inspection starts, each time an inspection command is received, the corresponding inspection is executed, and the inspection result is notified to the outside of the peripheral control board 1510 via the communication port. During this time, performance commands are not accepted.

Furthermore, since the data stored in the external RAM (05TKK0020) is corrupted after the inspection is complete, the gaming machine must be powered back on and restarted before gameplay can resume.

Furthermore, the system may be configured not to accept (receive) inspection commands after the gaming machine's power has been turned back on and gameplay has begun, i.e., while gameplay is in progress. In other words, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) may be performed only after the power is turned on and before gameplay begins. To put it another way, the inspection is performed if the first command received by the peripheral control board 1510 after power-on is an inspection command, or if a command received before the command indicating the start of gameplay includes an inspection command. This configuration prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to interruptions caused by inspections during gameplay.

Furthermore, if the acceptance of performance commands is stopped after the inspection has started, the game's performance cannot be started (the suspension of performance command acceptance is not released) unless conditions such as the power of the gaming machine being restarted or the initialization of the peripheral control board 1510 are met. This configuration prevents the performance from being executed based on corrupted performance data due to the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020).

Furthermore, the tests performed on the peripheral control board 1510 include not only specific tests such as R/W tests and glitch margin checks, but also tests that can preserve data stored in temporary storage means such as external RAM (05TKK0020) without destroying it, i.e., tests that allow gameplay to resume after the test is performed (third test means). Such tests include, for example, display checks of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and connection checks of the performance data ROM (05TKK0070).

If performing the test does not corrupt the data stored in temporary storage means such as external RAM (05TKK0020), the test may be made possible after the game has started. Furthermore, for tests that allow the game to resume after completion, even if the test is performed after the game has started, the game may be made possible after the test is completed, even if conditions such as restarting the game machine are not met. In other words, conditions such as whether the test can be performed after the game has started and whether the game can be started after the test is completed may be set depending on the type of test. By configuring the system in this way, certain tests can be performed during gameplay, thereby reducing the time the game machine is stopped due to tests while maintaining stable operation.

[32-3d. Others]
If the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 is interrupted while the external RAM (05TKK0020) is being tested, the test will be suspended. In this case, even if the power is restored, the interrupted test will not be resumed and will be terminated. This is because managing the progress of the test would complicate the control; if necessary, the test can be restarted from the beginning.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, while glitch margin checks and R/W tests are completed in a short time, the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) becomes longer as the memory capacity increases. Therefore, it is conceivable to divide the inspection of the external RAM (05TKK0020) into regions and memory elements (memory devices), and perform the inspection on each divided region as needed. In this case, when inspecting all regions, the progress of the inspection can be managed by managing the regions that have been inspected. In a gaming machine where the progress of the inspection is managed in this way, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and then restored, in the case of a hot start, the inspection before the power cut-off will continue. On the other hand, in the case of a cold start, since the progress of the inspection is not retained, the inspection will be stopped immediately. This configuration makes it possible to continue the inspection even when performing long-term inspections after the power is restored.

[33. Detection of fraudulent winnings in gaming machines capable of generating multiple types of winnings]
[33-1. Overview of the game]
In the gaming machines described so far, if a player wins a special lottery, a special game state is activated in which the large prize slot is opened for a predetermined period of time. In this special game state, after the large prize slot is open to accept game balls, if predetermined conditions are met, the slot is closed again to prevent game balls from being accepted. This process is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), thereby providing the player with game value. These predetermined conditions include when a predetermined number of game balls enter the large prize slot or when a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the large prize slot opened.

In contrast, in the gaming machine described below, a win occurs in a special game state that develops after a special lottery win, where the large prize slot opens to accept game balls for one round. In this embodiment, at least two types of such wins (special game states) occur based on the results of the special lottery. Figure 475 illustrates the types of wins in this embodiment of the gaming machine.

The first win is set so that the probability of winning the special lottery increases after the special game state (first special game state) ends, and the game is controlled to make it easier for the first win to occur consecutively. For example, the probability of winning the first win is set to high until the special lottery is executed 20 times.

Furthermore, the number of consecutive wins possible for the first win is predetermined. If the first win occurs four times in a row, the probability of winning the next time after the special game state ends returns to the normal probability. Therefore, the number of consecutive first wins is stored in a memory area provided by the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, if a player fails to win the special lottery a predetermined number of times after winning the first prize, it will not be considered a consecutive win, and the number of consecutive wins for the first prize will be reset. It may also be staggered to not consider a consecutive win if a predetermined amount of time has elapsed after winning the first prize.

On the other hand, after the second win, the probability of winning the special lottery is set to the normal probability after the special game state (second special game state) ends. Also, while the second win is generally a single win and does not occur consecutively, the probability of winning the second win may be increased through a lottery or other means. Note that it is not necessary to remember the number of consecutive wins for the second win.

Furthermore, while the amount of game value (number of prize balls) awarded for a single special game state is not large for the first win, the possibility of consecutive special game states results in a greater game value (number of prize balls) being awarded than for the second win. In the example shown in Figure 475, four consecutive first wins result in prize balls corresponding to 2 x 4 = 8 winnings, while a second win results in prize balls corresponding to 6 winnings. Note that the number of winnings and consecutive win counts shown in Figure 475 are examples only and are not limited to these values.

Furthermore, in both the first and second wins, if the number of game balls entering the grand prize slot exceeds the predetermined number of balls allowed, it will be judged as an illegal entry. For the first win, because the grand prize slot is only open for a short time, the determination is based on the total number of balls entered when four (maximum) consecutive first wins occur. On the other hand, for the second win, the determination is based on the total number of balls entered in a single win. The procedure for determining illegal entries in each win will be described later.

Furthermore, while the probability of winning the first prize is set to increase the likelihood of consecutive first prize wins, the possibility of winning the second prize is not ruled out even when the probability of winning the first prize is high. If a second prize is won after winning the first prize, but before the maximum number of first prize wins (four) have occurred, the probability of winning the first prize will not be high even after the special game state triggered by the second prize ends.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, it is possible to win both the first and second prizes. The probability of winning each prize may be different depending on which starting opening the game ball enters.

Furthermore, a third type of win may occur, similar to a conventional jackpot, where the opening of the large prize slot is repeated a predetermined number of times (rounds). Alternatively, the second type of win may also be similar to a conventional jackpot, where the opening of the large prize slot is repeated a predetermined number of times (rounds).

Furthermore, both the first and second wins may be multi-round jackpots. In this case, the first win will have fewer rounds than the second win. This allows for an improved system for detecting fraudulent winnings by grouping multiple wins with fewer rounds together.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the winning probability to a high probability after the first win. For example, the winning probability of the first win may be set higher than that of the second win from the beginning, making it easier to win the first win consecutively. Also, even if the winning probability after the first win is at the normal level, the winning probability per unit time may be increased by shortening the time it takes for the special symbols to change. In this case, the number of spins considered as consecutive wins may be set higher than in the normal state.

Furthermore, the first and second wins may involve opening and closing the same large prize slot, or they may involve opening and closing separate large prize slots.

[33-2. Hit Detection]
Next, the method for determining a win in the special lottery in this embodiment of the gaming machine will be explained. The method for determining a win in the special lottery is the same as in conventional methods: random numbers are generated within a predetermined range, and if the value of the generated random numbers matches a pre-set winning value, it is determined to be a win. Alternatively, the winning value may be set as a range, in which case, if the generated random number value is included within the winning range, it is determined to be a win.

Figure 476 illustrates the random number generation used for determining a win in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is Pattern 1 and (B) is Pattern 2.

In Pattern 1 shown in (A), corresponding ranges are set for each of the following: a miss, a first win, and a second win. The lottery result is then determined by the range that includes the value of the random number generated for win determination. This makes it possible to identify the type of win with a single random number, simplifying the processing and data related to the determination.

In Pattern 1 shown in (B), the lottery is conducted in two stages. First, a random number is generated for determining whether it is a win or a loss. Then, if it is determined to be a win, a random number is generated for determining the type of win, and the type of win is determined. This step-by-step determination allows for detailed setting of the type of win. Furthermore, compared to Pattern (A), the win determination and the type of win determination can be separated, and their respective ranges can be set individually, thus simplifying data management.

Furthermore, if the first and second wins are the same regardless of the starting gate into which the game ball enters, the win determination, including the win determination value, is performed using a common process. On the other hand, if the probability of winning the first and second wins differs depending on the starting gate into which the game ball enters, then a win determination value should be defined for each starting gate.

[33-3. Determination of fraudulent winnings]
[33-3a. overview]
When a player wins a special lottery and enters a special game state, the number of game balls that can be accepted while the large prize slot is open is predetermined. If the number of game balls that enter exceeds the predetermined number, the large prize slot will close. At this time, there is a time lag between reaching the predetermined number and the large prize slot closing, so a certain number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number is permitted. However, if the number of game balls that enter significantly exceeds the predetermined number, it will be judged as an illegal entry.

However, in the first win of this gaming machine, the game value (prize balls) is obtained by repeatedly opening the large prize slot for a relatively short period of time. Therefore, if fraudulent entry is detected for each win, the accuracy of detecting fraud may decrease.

Therefore, in the case of consecutive first wins, fraudulent entries are determined based on the total number of winning entries until the consecutive wins end. For example, the number of balls that can be entered for one first win is multiplied by the number of consecutive first wins to calculate a threshold for fraud detection. Then, when the consecutive wins end, the calculated threshold is compared with the number of winning entries counted during the series of consecutive wins to determine if a fraudulent entry has occurred. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, when the number of consecutive first wins reaches the upper limit (4 times), the total number of winning entries is compared with the fraud detection value to determine if a fraudulent entry has occurred.

Furthermore, in the case of a second win, as before, if more than the prescribed number of game balls enter the main prize slot, it will be judged as an illegal win.

[33-3b. Fraudulent Activity Detection Process]
Next, we will explain the process for detecting fraudulent winnings. The detection of fraudulent winnings is performed in the fraud detection process (step 01TKS0060 in Figure 354) of the game-playable processing (Figure 354) in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 329). The fraud detection process will be explained below.

Figure 477 is a flowchart showing the procedure for detecting fraudulent activity in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The fraudulent activity detection process detects fraudulent entries into the main prize slot and the start prize slot, as well as fraudulent magnetic fields.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the large prize slot fraud detection process (step 07 TKS0010). This process detects fraudulent entries into the large prize slot. Details of the large prize slot fraud detection process will be described later in Figure 478.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the magnetic fraud detection process (step 07 TKS0020). In the magnetic fraud detection process, when a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024, which detects fraudulent activity using magnets, is input to the main control MPU 1311, the game stop reason number is set to a number corresponding to game stop due to magnetic detection, and the game is stopped.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal electric prize mechanism fraud detection process (step 07 TKS0030). This process detects fraudulent operation of the normal electric prize mechanism. For example, this could occur if a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 even though the second start opening door member 2549 is not open, meaning the second start opening door member 2549 is not in an open state. If fraud is detected, the fraud notification setting process is executed to store the normal electric prize mechanism entry abnormality command in the command buffer and output a signal to an external source (hall computer) to notify of the fraud.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a hardware error detection process (step 07TKS0040). This process, for example, detects an anomaly in the hardware random number generation circuit. If an anomaly is detected, a hardware error command is stored in the command buffer. In this case, since it is considered a hardware failure, it is distinguishable from fraudulent activity, and therefore, it is not necessary to output a signal to the external system (hall computer) to notify of fraud. Alternatively, a different signal from the one output in the event of fraudulent activity detection may be output externally.

[33-3c. Detecting fraudulent activity in the grand prize draw]
Next, we will explain the process for detecting fraudulent activity in the jackpot slot. Figure 478 is a flowchart showing the procedure for detecting fraudulent activity in the jackpot slot in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The main control unit (MPU) 1311 first determines whether the special lottery has been won and the game state has transitioned to a winning state (special game state) (step 07TKS0110). This is because the game state must be a winning state (special game state) for the game ball to be able to enter the large prize slot when it opens. If the game state is not a winning state (the result of step 07TKS0110 is "No"), the game ball cannot enter the large prize slot, and the process ends without checking for fraudulent entry. However, if a game ball enters the large prize slot even though it should not be possible to enter unless the game state is a winning state, this is clearly a fraudulent entry. In such cases, only a check for entry into the large prize slot is performed, and if entry is detected, it may be processed as a fraudulent entry.

The main control MPU 1311 determines the type of win (step 07TKS0120) if the game state is a winning state (the result of step 07TKS0110 is "Yes"). As mentioned above, this embodiment of the game machine has two types of wins, and the method for determining fraudulent winnings differs depending on the type of win, so the necessary settings are made for each determination.

The main control MPU 1311, if the type of win is a first win (the result of step 07TKS0120 is "first win"), obtains the number of consecutive first wins (step 07TKS0130). As mentioned above, first wins are wins with relatively small payouts that occur consecutively. Fraudulent entry is not detected based on a single win, but rather when first wins occur consecutively up to a predetermined upper limit (winning the special lottery). Fraud is detected by comparing the total number of balls entered into the main prize slot with the fraud detection value.

Upon obtaining the number of consecutive wins for the first round, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 determines whether the number of consecutive wins for the first round has reached the upper limit (step 07TKS0140). If the number of consecutive wins for the first round has not reached the upper limit (the result of step 07TKS0140 is "No"), this process terminates. Even if the number of consecutive wins for the first round has not reached the upper limit, a fraud detection value corresponding to the number of consecutive wins at the time of the determination may be defined or calculated, and compared with the total number of wins to detect fraud at the main prize slot.

The main control MPU 1311 sets the fraud detection condition for the first win (step 07TKS0150) when the number of consecutive wins for the first win reaches the upper limit (the result of step 07TKS0140 is "Yes"). The condition for determining fraud in the first win is that the total number of entries into the main prize slot since the start of consecutive wins for the first win is greater than a predetermined fraud detection value. Setting the fraud detection condition for the first win means setting the fraud detection value to the first detection value.

Furthermore, if fraud detection of the main prize slot is performed before the number of consecutive wins for the first prize reaches the upper limit, for example, fraud detection of the main prize slot is performed when the first prize continues for more than half of the upper limit. In this case, the fraud detection value may be set to the same value as when the number of consecutive wins for the first prize reaches the upper limit (first detection value), or it may be changed according to the number of consecutive wins. Using a common fraud detection value reduces the area required to store the detection value and simplifies the process by eliminating the procedure for setting the value. On the other hand, setting the fraud detection value according to the number of consecutive wins makes it possible to perform a more accurate detection.

On the other hand, if the type of win is a second win (the result of step 07TKS0120 is "second win"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the fraud detection conditions for the second win (step 07TKS0160). A second win is determined based on the total number of balls that enter the large prize slot in a single win. The condition for determining fraud in a second win is that the total number of game balls that enter the large prize slot since the start of the special game state due to the second win is greater than a predetermined fraud detection value, and the fraud detection value is set to the second detection value. Note that the processing may be made common with the first win by setting the upper limit of the number of consecutive second wins to 1.

When a judgment value corresponding to the type of win is set in the fraud detection value, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the total number of balls that have entered the large prize slot (step 07 TKS0170). The total number of balls that have entered the large prize slot is counted in other processes, such as the large prize slot opening process. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the counter that stores the total number of balls is used in common for both the first and second wins. This means that if a second win occurs while a series of first wins are continuing, the total number of balls for the first win is cleared, eliminating the need for initialization and simplifying the process. Furthermore, by using a common counter, the process of acquiring the total number of balls corresponding to a win can be standardized. Note that the counters that store the total number of balls may be different for the first and second wins.

The main control MPU 1311, upon obtaining the total number of winning entries into the main prize slot, compares this total number with the judgment value set in step 07TKS0150 or step 07TKS0160 (step 07TKS0170). If the total number of winning entries is greater than the judgment value (the result of step 07TKS0180 is "No"), it is not an illegal win, and this process terminates.

On the other hand, if the total number of winnings is less than or equal to the judgment value (the result of step 07TKS0180 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines that it is a fraudulent win and issues a fraudulent win command (step 07TKS0190). Note that in step 07TKS0190, the fraudulent win command is a common command, but it may be possible to distinguish between fraudulent wins for the first and second wins. This makes it possible to distinguish the manner of fraud notification according to the type of win, allowing for a more detailed identification of the circumstances under which fraudulent activity occurred.

Furthermore, a fraud notification setting process is executed to alert the system to fraudulent winnings (Step 07 TKS0200). The fraud notification setting process is explained in Figure 479.

The main control MPU 1311, upon completion of the fraud notification setting process, initializes the total number of entries into the grand prize slot and the number of consecutive first wins (step 07TKS0210), and then terminates this process. Alternatively, the values of the total number of entries into the grand prize slot and the number of consecutive first wins may be initialized at the time the special game state begins upon winning the special lottery. In this case, it is determined whether the first win is in a winning streak, and if not, the values are initialized. For the second win, the values may be initialized each time the second win occurs. Furthermore, the timing for initializing the total number of entries into the grand prize slot and the number of consecutive first wins may be at the time of the second win, or at the end of the special game state resulting from the second win. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the first win is in a winning streak and initialize the number of consecutive wins upon the first win, thus simplifying the process.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the total number of winning entries counter was initially set to 0 and incremented each time a game ball entered the game. Whether or not a winning entry was fraudulent was determined by whether the increment result was equal to or greater than the fraud detection value. However, it may also be possible to initially set the counter's initial value to the fraud detection value, subtract it each time a game ball enters the game, and determine that fraud occurred when the result reached 0 (a negative calculation result).

[33-3d. Fraudulent Notification Setting Process]
Next, the fraud notification setting process will be explained. Figure 479 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud notification setting process in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Note that the fraud notification setting process can be used not only when fraud is detected in the big prize slot, but also when other fraud is detected, and is executed when fraud is detected in the normal electric prize mechanism fraud detection process.

The main control MPU 1311 first stores the command indicating that fraud has been detected, issued when the fraud notification setting process is called, from a predetermined register (HL register) into the transmit buffer (step 07TKS0310). Storing the command to be sent to the predetermined register during the fraud notification setting process makes the process general-purpose. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 executes actions based on the transmitted command, such as displaying a warning on a display device like an LCD, lighting or flashing decorative lamps on the game board or frame, outputting voices, sound effects, and warning sounds.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a signal indicating fraud to an external source (hall computer) via the external terminal board 784 (step 07TKS0310). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a common signal (security signal) indicating that fraud has been detected is output. This makes it possible to standardize the processing as a fraud notification setting process, thereby simplifying control. Alternatively, instead of using a generalized fraud notification setting process, command setting and signal output may be performed in each fraud detection process. This configuration allows for the transmission of commands and output of signals according to the type of fraud.

The signal indicating fraud (external output signal) may be output only for a predetermined period after fraud is detected, or it may continue to output until the RAM clear switch is operated. Furthermore, if the system is configured to stop the game upon detecting fraud, the output may continue until the game machine's power is restored.

The above explains the process for detecting fraudulent entries into the grand prize slot. Note that while the flowchart for detecting fraudulent entries into the grand prize slot shown in Figure 478 determined fraudulent entries based on the total number of entries into the grand prize slot, it is also possible to count the number of entries exceeding the maximum possible number of entries (the upper limit of the number of entries) and determine fraudulent entries based on that number.

[33-4. Timing Chart]
[33-4a. Determination of fraudulent winnings in the first round]
Next, we will explain in chronological order what happens when fraudulent entry into the grand prize slot is detected. Figure 480 is a timing chart for when a first win is achieved in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In the example shown in Figure 480, if the first win occurs four times in a row (upper limit) and 10 or more game balls enter the slot, it is determined to be a fraudulent entry. Note that the numerical information and time values shown in the timing chart are just examples and are not limited to these values. For example, the number of consecutive first wins and the value used to determine fraudulent entry (determination value) may be different.

First, at time t11, the first win occurs, the large prize slot opens for a predetermined period, and game balls can enter. Then, at times t12 and t13, the large prize slot switch (SW) detects the game balls entering the large prize slot. Furthermore, at time t14, the second win occurs, and similarly, the third win occurs at time t15, and the fourth win occurs at time t16. In the special game state resulting from each win, game balls enter the large prize slot, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each win (game value is assigned).

At time t17, the total number of winnings since the start of consecutive wins reaches the fraud detection value (=10), and the security signal (external output signal) is activated. At this time, a fraud notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and fraud is detected through a warning display on the display device 1600, a warning sound output from the speaker, and the illumination of a lamp. If fraud is detected, the prize ball command is not sent, and no prize balls are paid out.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a second prize before the number of consecutive first prize wins reaches the upper limit. Figure 481 is a timing chart for when a second prize is won in the gaming machine of this embodiment before the number of consecutive first prize wins reaches the upper limit.

If a first win occurs at time t21, and then a second win occurs (at time t22) despite a high probability of winning the first win, the number of consecutive first wins and the total number of wins are reset. Furthermore, the special game state resulting from the second win continues until time t23. At this point, the area used to store the reset total number of wins is used for counting the second win, and a detection of fraudulent wins for the second win is also performed. By making the area for storing the total number of wins common regardless of the type of win, the memory capacity can be reduced. The timing chart for detecting fraudulent wins for the second win will be described later in Figure 482.

If the first win occurs at time t24, the special game state begins with the consecutive win count reset. Specifically, at time t22, the consecutive win count was 1, but the second win resets the consecutive win count for the first win. Then, at time t25, the consecutive win count becomes 2, and the first win occurs again. Similarly, the third first win occurs at time t26, and the fourth first win occurs at time t27.

At time t28, the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit of 4, and the total number of wins since the start of the consecutive wins reaches the fraud detection value (=10). At this time, as explained at time t17 in Figure 480, the output of a security signal (external output signal) is started, and a fraud notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby triggering a fraud notification.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a win occurs where the opening time of the large prize slot is short and consecutive wins are possible, such as in the first win, the fraudulent win is determined by the total number of wins until the series of consecutive wins ends. While it is impossible to significantly exceed the prescribed number of wins when the opening time of the large prize slot is short, if a small number of excess wins (for example, around 1) is judged as fraudulent, it may hinder the smooth provision of gameplay. Therefore, by determining fraudulent wins collectively in a series of consecutive wins, as in this embodiment, the accuracy of fraudulent win detection can be improved, and frequent game interruptions can be suppressed.

[33-4b. Determination of fraudulent winnings in the second round]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, fraudulent winning is also detected when a second win occurs. As mentioned above, fraud was detected in the first win based on the total number of winnings during consecutive wins, but in the second win, fraud is detected based on the total number of winnings in a single win.

Figure 482 is a timing chart for when a second win occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As mentioned above, fraudulent winning of the second prize is judged for each individual win.

At time t31, if a second win occurs, the large prize slot opens, allowing game balls to enter. After the game balls enter the large prize slot (time t32), the game continues. In this example, the maximum number of balls that can enter (the upper limit of total wins) is 6, and the opening of the large prize slot (second win) ends when 6 game balls have entered (time t33).

Even after the number of game balls that have entered the large prize slot reaches the maximum number of balls that can be entered, there is a time lag before the slot is actually closed. Therefore, even if the number of game balls that enter the large prize slot exceeds the maximum number of balls that can be entered, a predetermined number is permitted. Taking the second win of the game machine in this embodiment as an example, as shown in Figure 475, while the maximum number of balls that can be entered is set to 6, 7 or 8 balls are permitted, and 9 balls are judged as fraudulent.

At time t34, the ninth ball entering the machine, which reaches the fraud detection threshold, is detected by the large prize slot SW. This triggers the output of a security signal (external output signal), and a fraud notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby triggering a fraud notification.

[33-5. What to do in case of a power outage]
In the gaming machine described above, the counter that stores the total number of winnings and the number of consecutive wins for the first jackpot is located in the memory area provided by the main control RAM 1312, specifically in the area where the contents are retained when the power is cut off (backup area). Therefore, even if the power is cut off, the value of the counter is maintained, but if a predetermined condition is met, it will be initialized regardless of the value of the counter. That is, the value of the counter will be cleared to 0, or an initial value (fraud detection value) will be set. The predetermined conditions include, for example, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, when an error occurs that makes it impossible to return to the game (such as a RAM error), or when a setting change is performed, in which case the game cannot be continued.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if the power to the gaming machine is cut off, the value of the counter used to detect fraudulent winnings is retained, allowing the detection of fraudulent winnings to continue. This prevents the counter from being reset due to an unauthorized power outage, thus preventing the detection of fraudulent activity from being evaded.

[33-6. Modified Example (Simultaneous Spread of Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2)]
[33-6a. Application to gaming machines that enable simultaneous variation of multiple types of special symbols]
In the example described above, the game is designed so that if a game ball enters both the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, only one of either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be displayed in a changing pattern. The game is configured so that the pattern change of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the starting opening into which the ball entered is executed. In contrast, in the example shown below, if a game ball enters both the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the pattern changes of each special symbol (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) can be executed simultaneously.

When Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2 are simultaneously displayed in a variable state, both special symbols will be displayed in a variable state on the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, while the performance display device 1600 can display any of the performance symbols (decorative symbols), it will display the main performance symbol in a way that makes it easily visible. For example, in addition to the performance symbols 1 through 3, a fourth symbol may be displayed in an inconspicuous position on the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The main special symbol's performance symbols could be 1 through 3 and 4, while only the fourth symbol could be displayed for the other special symbol.

Furthermore, if Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2 are simultaneously changing and a win occurs with one of the symbols, the other symbol is either forcibly stopped as a loss, or its change display is interrupted. The change display is then resumed only after the special game state corresponding to the winning Special Symbol has ended, thus preventing simultaneous wins.

This section describes an example of implementing the aforementioned first and second wins using a gaming machine that allows for the simultaneous repetition of two types of special symbols. For example, if a first win occurs during the repetition of special symbol 1 while simultaneous repetition is in progress, the repetition of special symbol 2 is interrupted. Then, when the special game state resulting from the first win ends, the repetition of special symbol 2 is resumed. In this case, even if a first win occurs during the repetition of special symbol 2, the consecutive first wins continue. Thus, whether or not consecutive wins continue is determined by the type of win that occurred, regardless of the starting point from which the game ball entered.

Furthermore, if a win occurs during the simultaneous reel spinning of Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, instead of stopping or interrupting the reel spinning of the other symbol as described above, the reel spinning time may be extended. Additionally, the behavior of the other symbol's reel spin may be changed depending on whether the win is a first or second win. Furthermore, the reel spinning time of each special symbol may be changed according to the game state.

[33-6b. Changes to the behavior of symbol variations based on the game state and the results of the variation display]
Here, we will explain an example in which the behavior of the symbols changes according to the state of the game, and in a case where the display of the other special symbol starts or stops while the display of one special symbol is being displayed, the behavior of the other symbol's change will be changed based on the result of the display (win/lose).

The starting point for initiating the variation display of Special Symbol 1 is located in the left area of the game area, and the starting point for initiating the variation display of Special Symbol 2 is located in the right area of the game area. In normal gameplay, Special Symbol 1 performs variation with a normal variation time, while Special Symbol 2 performs variation with a special variation time (for example, a long variation time of several minutes or more). In such a game machine, in normal gameplay, the probability of winning is significantly reduced unless you aim for the left area of the game area.

When a win occurs as a result of the symbol change of Special Symbol 1, and the game state changes, the change time of Special Symbol 2 is changed to the normal change time. This allows the player to aim for the area on the right side of the game area. At this time, an opening/closing member (for example, a second opening door member 2549) may be provided to increase the frequency of winning at the starting opening (second opening 2004) that initiates the change display of Special Symbol 2. By opening this opening/closing member, the player may be encouraged to aim for the starting opening that initiates the change display of Special Symbol 2.

Furthermore, even after a win occurs due to the symbol change of Special Symbol 1, it is possible to continue aiming at the left-hand area. In this case, the change in the game state may be accompanied by a special change in the change time of Special Symbol 1 (for example, a long change time of several minutes or more) to encourage the player to aim at the left-hand area.

Furthermore, if a win occurs due to a symbol change in Special Symbol 1, and the game state is changed to set a higher probability of winning the first win, it becomes easier for the first win to occur consecutively until the second win occurs. With this configuration, while the first win is occurring consecutively, fraudulent entries are judged based on the total number of winning combinations until the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit. This allows for a more accurate judgment of fraud than judging fraud on each individual win, especially if the number of possible winning combinations per first win is small.

When the number of consecutive wins for the first win reaches the upper limit, or when a second win is achieved, the game returns to normal gameplay, and the player once again aims at the right-hand area of the game area. The second win may include both a win that returns the game to normal gameplay after the special game state ends, and a win that clears the number of consecutive wins for the first win and continues the game state with a higher probability of winning the first win. Furthermore, when the special game state resulting from the second win ends, or when the number of consecutive wins for the first win reaches the upper limit, a lottery may be held to determine whether to restart the game state with a higher probability of winning the first win. If successful, the game may continue in the game state with a higher probability of winning the first win.

Furthermore, if a second win occurs, a game state may be created where the probability of winning the first win is set higher. In this case, the probability of winning the first win may be set higher only when a second win occurs.

Furthermore, the probability of winning the first jackpot may always be kept high and constant, and winning may only be possible through symbol changes caused by special symbol 2. In normal gameplay, the special symbol 2 has a unique change time, making it difficult to win the first jackpot. Therefore, the player first aims to win the second jackpot with special symbol 1, and wins the second jackpot through the symbol change of special symbol 1. Once special symbol 2 returns to its normal change time, the player will aim for the second start opening 2004 to initiate the symbol change of special symbol 2, making it possible to generate the first jackpot. Afterward, the game value (prize balls) awarded through consecutive first jackpot wins can be increased until a second jackpot occurs through the symbol change of special symbol 2 or until the number of first jackpot wins reaches a predetermined number.

In this way, by making it possible to win the first prize through the symbol change of Special Symbol 2 only when the second prize is won through the symbol change of Special Symbol 1, consecutive first prize wins will only begin after the second prize is won. Furthermore, the reset of the number of consecutive first prize wins is performed after the second prize is won, at the timing when the first prize first occurs due to the symbol change of Special Symbol 2, and the control for detecting fraudulent winnings in consecutive first prize wins also begins at this timing. By clarifying the execution conditions for the control that detects fraudulent winnings (when the second prize occurs through the symbol change of Special Symbol 1, and then the first prize occurs through the symbol change of Special Symbol 2), it is possible to prevent the control from being executed at times when it is unnecessary, thereby suppressing increased processing load and complexity of game control.

As described above, even in games that exhibit diversity, where behavior changes depending on the game state and the relationships between special symbols displayed simultaneously, it is possible to switch the conditions for determining fraudulent winnings to correspond to the game state and type of win. This allows for the appropriate detection of fraudulent winnings while providing a variety of games, thereby preventing excessive detection of fraud that could disrupt gameplay or overlooking fraudulent activity and resulting in losses.

Furthermore, since the first win involves a small number of balls entering the machine per attempt, it may be treated as a minor win with a short opening time for the large prize slot, and the second win as a major win with a long opening time for the large prize slot. The aforementioned method for detecting fraudulent entries may then be applied.

[34. How to update the number of consecutive time-saving bonuses]
[34-1. Overview of the game]
This section describes a gaming machine that has an upper limit on the number of consecutive times the time-saving state can occur. For example, if a player wins a jackpot consecutively as a result of a special lottery, the machine will not allow the time-saving state to occur more than a predetermined number of times consecutively after the special game state resulting from the jackpot ends. The gaming machine of this embodiment applies the restriction on the number of consecutive time-saving states to a so-called Type 1 + Type 2 gaming machine. In this gaming machine, a jackpot is generated when three types of decorative symbols line up, as in a Type 1 gaming machine, and a minor win is generated, as in a Type 2 gaming machine, which allows the game ball to pass through a specific area (V area), and a jackpot is generated when the game ball passes through this specific area.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, two types of starting openings (first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004) are provided. The first starting opening 2002 is located in the left area of the game area, allowing for winning with left-handed play. On the other hand, the second starting opening 2004 is located in the right area of the game area, allowing for winning with right-handed play.

The special symbol 1, which is displayed when the ball enters the first starting slot 2002, can only result in a jackpot. On the other hand, the special symbol 2, which is displayed when the ball enters the second starting slot 2004, can result in either a minor win or a jackpot. Winning a minor or jackpot triggers a special game state where the large prize slot is opened for a predetermined time. The duration and number of rounds (times) the large prize slot is open are set according to the type of win, with the game value being higher for jackpot wins than for minor wins. Furthermore, there are multiple types of jackpots, each with different opening times and round counts. Alternatively, two types of large prize slots may be provided, with one activating upon a jackpot win and the other upon a minor win.

The gameplay flow of this embodiment of the gaming machine is as follows: First, the player aims at the first start opening 2002 with left-handed shots to win a jackpot through the symbol change of special symbol 1, thereby activating the special game state. When the special game state ends and the game transitions to the time-saving state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second start opening 2004. At this point, the player can aim at the second start opening 2004 with right-handed shots to initiate the symbol change of special symbol 2.

As mentioned earlier, the symbol variation of Special Symbol 2 makes it possible to win a minor prize. When a minor prize is won, a corresponding special game state is activated, and the large prize slot located in the right-hand area of the game area opens and closes a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). This allows the player to continue shooting to the right to enter the large prize slot. This large prize slot has a specific area (V-area) inside, and a major prize is won when the game ball passes through this specific area. However, even if the game ball enters the large prize slot, it does not necessarily mean that the ball will pass through the specific area.

When a game ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won, a special game state is triggered. This special game state is similar to the special game state based on a jackpot with special symbol 1, and the large prize slot remains open for a predetermined number of rounds as long as the predetermined conditions are met.

Furthermore, if a minor win occurs, the game state from before the win is maintained. That is, if the game state is a time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained; if the game state is not a time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained. If the game ball passes through a specific area and a major win occurs, after the special game state resulting from that major win ends, the game transitions to a time-saving state based on the type of major win, etc.

[34-2. Method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds (First embodiment: Specification where time-saving rounds continue even with minor wins)]
Next, we will explain the procedure for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in chronological order. In the aforementioned gaming machine, when a jackpot is won through the variation of special symbols (when a special lottery is won), a special game state is entered, and then the machine transitions to a time-saving state when predetermined conditions are met. If another jackpot (special lottery) is won while the time-saving state is in progress, the machine is configured to make it easier for the time-saving state to occur after the special game state ends, up to a predetermined number of times (limit number, upper limit, for example, 4 times). On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving states (consecutive time-saving rounds) reaches a predetermined number (limit number), the predetermined conditions are not met, and the machine transitions to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) after the special game state is entered. By configuring the machine in this way, once a jackpot is won, players can expect the time-saving state to occur a predetermined number of times (limit number), which increases the player's anticipation and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated when the time-saving round begins after the special game state ends. In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is set to "0" and added at the start (transition) of the time-saving round. Alternatively, an upper limit (limit) may be set for the initial value of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds, and this limit may be subtracted at the start (transition) of the time-saving round.

In the aforementioned Type 1 + Type 2 gaming machine, a special game state is activated even when a minor win occurs, opening the main prize slot. Furthermore, if a minor win is achieved, the game state from before the win is maintained. The procedure for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine with these specifications will be explained chronologically, referring to Figure 483.

Figure 483 is a timing chart illustrating the operation when a game ball passes through a specific area upon winning a minor prize in a gaming machine designed to maintain the game state after a minor prize is won.

First, since the current game state is a non-time-saving state (normal game state), the player aims for the first start slot 2002 with left-handed play to initiate the symbol change of Special Symbol 1 (time t41). Then, at time t42, the symbol change stops and the stopped symbol is displayed. If the result of this Special Symbol 1 symbol change (special lottery) is a jackpot, the condition device activates (time t43), and a special game state (second special game state) is created due to the jackpot. Furthermore, after the condition device finishes activating (after the special game state ends), the game transitions to a time-saving state (time t44). At this time, 1 is added to the number of consecutive time-saving rounds due to the transition to the time-saving state, updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds from 0 to 1.

Furthermore, by transitioning to the time-saving mode, the game ball can enter the second starting gate 2004, and the player aims for the second starting gate 2004 by shooting to the right. When the game ball enters the second starting gate 2004, the symbol change of special symbol 2 begins (time t45). During the symbol change of special symbol 2, it is possible to win either a big win or a small win.

In the example shown in Figure 483, at time t46, the display of special symbol 2 stops, and a minor win is awarded as a result of the display. When a minor win is awarded, the condition device is not activated, and the game state (time-saving state) before the minor win is maintained. Furthermore, since a new time-saving state has not been entered, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds remains unchanged. Note that one or more losing spins may occur between the time of a major win and the occurrence of a minor win.

At time t47, a special game state is triggered by a minor win, the large prize slot opens, and game balls can enter. Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area located inside the large prize slot, a big win is confirmed, and the condition device activates (time t48). Then, the special game state triggered by the minor win ends, and the special game state triggered by the big win begins (the game switches from the special game state triggered by the minor win to the special game state triggered by the big win).

Then, upon the end of the special game state resulting from the big win, the condition device stops operating, and a new time-saving state begins (time t49). At this time, based on the start of the new time-saving state, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated from 1 to 2.

In the aforementioned gaming machine, when a minor win is achieved, the game state is maintained. When a major win is achieved and a new time-saving state is initiated, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated. Furthermore, if a major win is achieved but a new time-saving state is not initiated, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset. Additionally, if a minor win is achieved but the game ball does not pass through a specific area and a major win is not achieved, the game state is maintained while the number of consecutive time-saving rounds from before the minor win is retained.

[34-3. Method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds (Second embodiment: Specification that transitions to a non-time-saving state when a minor win is achieved)]
In the gaming machine configured as described above, the game state is maintained when a minor win occurs, so the number of consecutive time-saving rounds could be accurately counted by updating the count when the game state is switched. However, due to the diversification of game specifications, the conditions for switching game states are not limited to the end of a special game state, and in such cases, the above procedure could not accurately count the number of consecutive time-saving rounds.

For example, in a gaming machine where a large prize slot opens upon winning a minor prize, allowing for the expectation of winning balls, the game transitions to a non-time-saving state upon winning a minor prize to prevent the awarded game value from falling outside the predetermined range. In such a gaming machine, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset at the moment of transition to the non-time-saving state, making it impossible to accurately count the number of consecutive time-saving rounds using the method described above. The following explains the procedure for accurately counting the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine with the above specifications, referring to Figures 484 and 485. Note that while the game transitions to a non-time-saving state upon winning a minor prize, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset after the special game state resulting from the minor prize ends.

Figure 484 is a timing chart explaining the timing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) upon winning a minor prize. It specifically illustrates the case where the game ball does not pass through a particular area upon winning a minor prize.

Figure 484 shows the behavior in chronological order, starting from a state where gameplay continues in a non-time-saving state. The number of consecutive time-saving rounds is initially set to 0, and when transitioning to a time-saving state, 1 is added to the number of consecutive time-saving rounds. Conversely, when transitioning to a non-time-saving state, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared and the initial value (0) is set again. The control executed from time t51 to time t56 in Figure 484 is the same as the control executed from time t41 to time t46 in Figure 483, so the explanation is omitted as needed.

As shown in Figure 484, at time t56, the special symbol's variation display stops, and a minor win is awarded as a result of the variation display. When a minor win is awarded, the condition device is not activated, and the game transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

At time t57, a special game state (first special game state) is triggered by a minor win, opening the large prize slot and allowing game balls to enter. At this time, if a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) located inside the large prize slot, a jackpot is won. However, in the example shown in Figure 484, the game ball does not pass through the specific area, and after the special game state ends, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset (initialized), and the game returns to the normal game state (time t58).

Next, we will explain the case where a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) located inside the main prize slot after a minor win, resulting in a major win. Figure 485 is a timing chart explaining the timing of updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a game machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state after a minor win. It shows the case where a game ball passes through a specific area after a minor win. The control executed from time t61 to time t67 in Figure 485 is the same as the control executed from time t51 to time t57 in Figure 484, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

At time t67, a special game state is triggered by a minor win, the large prize slot opens, and game balls can enter. Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area located inside the large prize slot, a big win is confirmed, and the condition device is activated (time t68). Then, as the special game state triggered by the minor win ends, a special game state triggered by the big win begins. At this point, since the game transitions to a non-time-saving state, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset (initialized) at the moment the special game state triggered by the minor win ends.

Then, upon the end of the special game state resulting from the big win, the condition device stops operating, and a new time-saving state begins (time t69). At this time, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated from 0 to 1 based on the fact that a new time-saving state has begun.

[34-4. Method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds (Third embodiment: Specification that transitions to a non-time-saving state when a minor win is achieved: Improved)]
By the way, if a big win is achieved through a symbol change of special symbol 1, and the game transitions to a time-saving state, and a small win is achieved through a symbol change of special symbol 2, and the game ball passes through a specific area (V area), resulting in another big win and a transition to a time-saving state, it is natural to consider that a time-saving state has occurred continuously, even if the game temporarily transitions to a non-time-saving state. In other words, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the game temporarily transitions to a non-time-saving state via a small win, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the special game state resulting from the small win, resulting in a big win and a transition to a time-saving state again, it is considered that a time-saving state has occurred continuously.

However, if the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated using the procedure described above, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds will be reset when a minor win occurs, as the game temporarily transitions to a non-time-saving state. Therefore, it becomes impossible to determine if the time-saving state occurred consecutively.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a limit is set on the number of consecutive time-saving modes. This configuration makes it easier to transition to the time-saving mode if the number of consecutive time-saving modes falls below the limit. However, if the number of consecutive time-saving modes is unintentionally reset, there is a risk of the time-saving mode occurring more frequently than intended, resulting in an excessive amount of game value being awarded. Therefore, to solve the above problem, we propose an improved method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving modes.

The improved update method determines whether to update the number of consecutive time-saving rounds at the time the special game state ends, and updates the number of consecutive time-saving rounds if predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the decision to update the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is based on whether the condition device is active at the time the special game state ends.

If a game ball passes through a specific area while the special game state resulting from a minor win is in progress, a major win is confirmed, and the condition device activates. In this case, the special game state resulting from the minor win ends, and the special game state resulting from the major win begins (switching from the special game state resulting from the minor win to the special game state resulting from the major win). After the end of this special game state, there is a possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state. Therefore, the update of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds at the end of the special game state resulting from the minor win is withheld (the value of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is maintained). Then, after the special game state resulting from the major win ends, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is added (updated) or cleared (initialized) depending on whether or not a transition to a time-saving state occurs. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area while the special game state resulting from the minor win is in progress, the condition device does not activate, and therefore the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared (initialized) at the end of the special game state resulting from the minor win.

By configuring the system in this way, if there is a possibility of transitioning back to the time-saving state after the special game state ends, the resetting (initialization) of the time-saving count is withheld. Then, when the special game state ends, the time-saving count is updated or initialized, allowing for an accurate value to be set. Below, we will explain, chronologically and with reference to the timing chart, the cases where the time-saving count is reset without the game ball passing through a specific area, and the case where the time-saving count is updated by adding to it when the game ball passes through a specific area.

Furthermore, if the game ball does not pass through a specific area when a minor win is achieved, the number of time-saving updates will be reset (cleared) after the special game state resulting from the minor win ends. Even if the improved update method is applied, the behavior will be the same as the timing chart shown in Figure 484, and therefore the illustration is omitted.

Figure 486 is a timing chart showing an improved timing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state upon winning a minor prize. It illustrates the case where a game ball passes through a specific area upon winning a minor prize. The control executed from time t71 to time t75 in Figure 486 is the same as the control executed from time t61 to time t65 in Figure 485, so its explanation is omitted.

At time t76, the symbol changes stop, similar to the example shown in Figure 485, and a minor win is achieved. Furthermore, the game transitions from a shortened time state to a non-shortened time state, and at time t77, a special game state is triggered by the minor win, the large prize slot opens, and game balls can enter. While the special game state resulting from the minor win continues, a game ball passing through a specific area located inside the large prize slot confirms a major win, and the condition device activates (time t78). At this point, the special game state resulting from the minor win ends, and the special game state resulting from the major win begins.

In the improved method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds, the decision to update (or maintain) the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is made at the timing when the special game state resulting from a minor win ends. Whether or not to update the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is determined based on whether or not a special game state resulting from a major win begins at the timing when the special game state resulting from a minor win ends. Alternatively, the decision may be based on whether or not the condition device activates at the timing when the special game state resulting from a minor win ends. In the example shown in Figure 486, a major win is achieved by the passage of a game ball into a specific area, and the condition device activates, thus confirming that the special game state will occur continuously. Therefore, the value of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is maintained without updating.

Then, upon the end of the special game state resulting from a big win, the condition device stops operating, and a new time-saving state begins (time t79). At this time, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is 1, as it was maintained when the special game state ended due to a small win. Based on the start of the new time-saving state, 1 is added, updating it to 2. Note that if the game does not transition to the time-saving state after the special game state ends—for example, if the number of consecutive time-saving rounds reaches its upper limit and the game transitions to the normal game state without entering the time-saving state—the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared (initialized), and its value is updated to 0.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, if a jackpot is not won during the special game state triggered by a minor win, the special game state does not continue (the condition device is not activated), and therefore, an update is performed to reset the number of consecutive time-saving rounds. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won during the special game state triggered by a minor win, the special game state continues at the end of the special game state triggered by the minor win, and the condition device is activated, so the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is maintained without being updated (reset). At the end of the special game state triggered by the jackpot (when the condition device stops operating), the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated based on the game state after the end of the special game state. This allows for accurate counting of consecutive time-saving rounds as intended by the designer, making it possible to assign game value as intended and resolving the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, in the control shown in Figures 484 and 485, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds was updated based on whether or not the game transitioned from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time the special game state ended. Therefore, if the control system was designed to transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state after the special game state ended due to a minor win, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds would be reset even if the game ball passed through a specific area during the special game state due to a minor win, resulting in a switch to the special game state due to a major win.

In contrast, the improved method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds shown in Figure 486 ensures that, at the timing of the end of the special game state, if the special game state switches and continues, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is not updated. Instead, if the special game state does not continue, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated based on whether or not the game transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. This allows the number of consecutive time-saving rounds to be reset when a game ball passes through a specific area during a special game state triggered by a minor win, resulting in a switch to a special game state triggered by a major win. The number of consecutive time-saving rounds is then initialized or updated at the end of the special game state triggered by the major win, while the number of consecutive time-saving rounds can be cleared if the special game state triggered by a minor win ends without any changes. This resolves the aforementioned problem.

Furthermore, in the special game state triggered by a minor win, if the game ball passes through a specific area and switches to the special game state triggered by a major win, the minor win ending is not executed. Therefore, in this case, the major prize slot opening termination interval processing, which is executed at the end of the special game state triggered by a minor win, is not executed, and instead, the major prize slot opening pre-interval processing for starting the special game state triggered by a major win is executed. Thus, by updating (clearing (initializing) or updating (adding, subtracting)) the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in the major prize slot opening termination interval processing, the processing can be standardized regardless of the type of win. Also, the major prize slot opening termination interval processing may differ between major wins and minor wins; in this case, the processing for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds can be standardized by creating a subroutine. By configuring it as described above, the complexity of game control can be suppressed while compressing program size, the program code can be simplified, and the development efficiency of the game machine (game control program) can be improved.

[34-5. Method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds (Fourth embodiment: When a minor win is achieved, the game transitions to a non-time-saving state, and after the special game state due to the minor win ends, the special game state due to the big win begins)]
Next, unlike the control shown in Figure 486, in a gaming machine where, even if a game ball passes through a specific area while a special game state due to a minor win is continuing, the special game state due to a big win is not immediately started, and the special game state due to a big win is started after the special game state due to a minor win has ended, the procedure for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds will be explained.

Figure 487 is a timing chart illustrating the operation when a game ball passes through a specific area upon winning a minor prize in a gaming machine that transitions to a non-time-saving state upon winning a minor prize and starts a special game state upon winning a major prize after the special game state due to the minor prize ends. The control performed from time t81 to time t88 in Figure 487 is the same as the control performed from time t71 to time t78 in Figure 486, so the explanation is omitted as needed.

At time t87, a special game state is initiated due to a minor win. In this embodiment, while the special game state is active, game balls can pass through a specific area. However, unlike embodiments 1-3 described above, the special game state continues even after the game balls have passed through the specific area.

Furthermore, if a game ball passes through a specific area during the predetermined validity period (while the special game state resulting from a minor win is still active) (at time t88), the specific area passage flag (V passage flag) is set. Afterward, the special game state resulting from the minor win ends.

The large prize slot opening termination interval process, which is executed when the special game state resulting from a minor win ends, compares the number of balls that entered the large prize slot with the number of balls that were ejected from the large prize slot to determine if a malfunction or fraudulent activity has occurred. Since there may be a time lag between the ball entering the large prize slot and its ejection, the determination is made after a certain waiting period. If the number of balls entered and ejected do not match, the special game state resulting from the minor win ends, regardless of whether the specific area passage flag is set, and an alarm sound or external signal is output as necessary. At this time, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset.

If the number of winning entries and the number of winning balls match, and no malfunctions or fraudulent activity have occurred, the game determines whether the specific area passage flag is set. If the specific area passage flag is not set, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared, the special game state resulting from the minor win ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state while continuing the non-time-saving state. In this case, the behavior is the same as the timing chart shown in Figure 484.

On the other hand, if the specific area passage flag is set, the special game state resulting from a minor win ends (time t89). At this time, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is not updated and the value remains unchanged. Furthermore, the special game state resulting from a major win begins, and the condition device is activated (time t90).

Subsequently, upon the end of the special game state resulting from a big win, the condition device ceases to operate, and a new time-saving state begins (time t91). At this time, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is 1, as it was maintained when the special game state ended due to a minor win. Based on the start of the new time-saving state, 1 is added, updating it to 2. If the game does not transition to the time-saving state after the special game state ends, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared (initialized), and the value is updated to 0. The processing at time t91 is the same as the processing executed at time t79 in Figure 486, when the special game state ends.

In Example 4, if a jackpot is confirmed by the specific area passage flag, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is maintained. Furthermore, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is updated based on whether or not the game transitions to the time-saving state at the end of the special game state resulting from a jackpot win. By controlling the game based on the specific area passage flag in this way, the aforementioned problems can be resolved, similar to the gaming machine in Example 3.

[34-6. Configuration of the gaming machine in this embodiment]
To summarize the configuration of the gaming machine that implements the improved update method for the number of consecutive time-saving rounds described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting prize slot, and based on the result of the lottery, the display of special symbols is started, and based on the result, a special game state is made possible. The special game state is generated according to the lottery result, and for example, there is a special game state resulting from winning a minor prize (first special game state) and a special game state resulting from winning a major prize (second special game state).

Furthermore, during the first special game state (minor win), game balls can pass through a specific area, and if a game ball passes through this area, the second special game state (jackpot) can be triggered. Moreover, after the special game state (second special game state) ends due to a jackpot, a time-saving state (advantageous game state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal game state can be triggered.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the number of consecutive occurrences of the time-saving state (advantageous game state) is recorded. If a minor win (the first special game state) occurs while the time-saving state (advantageous game state) is active, the machine transitions from the time-saving state (advantageous game state) to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) at the start of the special symbol display that triggers the minor win or at the start of the special game state.

Furthermore, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is not updated when transitioning from a time-saving state (advantageous game state) to a non-time-saving state (normal game state); instead, the value from before the transition to the non-time-saving state is maintained.

If the number of consecutive time-saving rounds does not reach the predetermined upper limit (the predetermined conditions are met), the number of consecutive time-saving rounds will be updated (added or subtracted) at the time the special game state ends after transitioning from the time-saving state (advantageous game state) to the non-time-saving state (normal game state).

When the number of consecutive time-saving rounds reaches its upper limit (a specific condition is met), the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reset without being added or subtracted at the time the special game state ends after transitioning from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. In this case, after the special game state ends following a transition from the time-saving state (advantageous game state) to the non-time-saving state (normal game state), the game does not transition back to the time-saving state (advantageous game state), but remains in the non-time-saving state (normal game state).

Furthermore, if, during a special game state resulting from a minor win, the game ball does not pass through a specific area and a major win is not achieved, the number of consecutive time-saving rounds may be reset without needing to compare with the upper limit.

[34-7. Method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving bonuses (variant)]
The method for updating the number of consecutive time-saving rounds in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been described. Next, a modified example in which the variation time of the special symbols differs according to the number of consecutive time-saving rounds (remaining limit rounds) will be described. In the example described here, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is set to 10, and there are three types of variation times for the special symbols. The variation time of the special symbols is defined by a variation pattern table, and in this modified example, three types of variation pattern tables are defined.

Figure 487 illustrates the types of variation pattern tables set when the special symbols of the gaming machine of this embodiment are displayed. The example shown in Figure 487 shows the variation time when each variation pattern table fails, representing the shortest variation time during which no special effects such as a "reach" occur.

Referring to Figure 487, in a symbol variation based on Variation Pattern Table A, if the variation pattern that results in the shortest possible variation time is selected, the variation time will be 5,000 seconds. Similarly, in a symbol variation based on Variation Pattern Table B, the variation time will be 1,000 seconds, and in a symbol variation based on Variation Pattern Table C, the variation time will be 3,000 seconds.

The variation pattern table may be selected based on the game state, etc. For example, in a time-saving state, variation pattern table B, which has the shortest variation time, is selected; in a normal game state, variation pattern table C, which has an intermediate variation time, is selected; and in specific performance modes or game states, variation pattern table A, which has the longest variation time, is selected.

Here, we will explain a specification in which the variable pattern table is selected not based on the game state, but according to the remaining number of consecutive occurrences until the maximum number of consecutive time-saving states can occur. Figure 488 shows an example of a pattern in which the variable pattern table is selected according to the remaining number of consecutive occurrences until the maximum number of consecutive time-saving states can occur.

In the example shown in Figure 488, three patterns are defined: Pattern 1, which selects the same variation pattern table regardless of the remaining number of spins; Pattern 2, which selects a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time when losing, as the number of remaining spins increases; and Pattern 3, which selects a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time when losing, as the number of remaining spins decreases.

In Pattern 1, when the game transitions to the time-saving mode, the same variation pattern table is always selected. Therefore, it is possible to stably continue a common gameplay in the time-saving mode. Furthermore, by setting a different variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C) than in the non-time-saving mode, a different gameplay experience can be offered, increasing the level of excitement. In the example shown in Figure 488, the variation pattern table with the longest variation time during a loss is selected, allowing for a longer period of heightened anticipation. Moreover, because the same variation pattern table is selected, game control in the time-saving mode can be simplified.

In Pattern 1, the same variation pattern table can be selected regardless of the remaining number of spins; it doesn't have to be Pattern Table A, but Pattern Table B or Pattern Table C. By selecting a variation pattern table with a short variation time, the game can proceed at a good pace, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In Pattern 2, the more remaining spins there are, the shorter the variation time during losses, which is selected. Therefore, in the initial stages of consecutive time-saving states, the next time-saving state occurs at short intervals, increasing the player's anticipation. As the limit approaches, the variation time increases, maintaining the player's heightened anticipation for a longer period.

In Pattern 3, the fewer spins remaining, the shorter the spin duration during losing spins, thus gradually increasing the player's anticipation by lengthening the spin duration in the initial stages of a continuous shortened spin state. Then, as the spin duration approaches the upper limit, the spin duration shortens, dramatically increasing the player's anticipation. In Pattern 3-1, shown in Figure 488, the spin duration is gradually increased from the initial to the final stage. In Pattern 3-2, after selecting spin duration table A, which has a long spin duration, the player then selects spin duration table B, which has a short spin duration. Furthermore, spin duration table A is selected again, gradually increasing the selection of spin duration tables. In Patterns 3-3 and 3-4, spin duration table A, which has a long spin duration, is selected first, followed by spin duration table C, which has a short spin duration. By selecting spin duration tables with different spin durations in the intermediate stages, a varied gameplay experience is achieved, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[34-8. Method for detecting fraudulent winnings]
Next, an example of a means for detecting fraudulent winnings in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. In the fraudulent winning detection method described in Figure 477, etc., in the case of a first win, fraud was determined by the total number of game balls that entered the big prize slot in multiple special game states, while in the case of a second win, fraud was determined by the number of game balls that entered the big prize slot in a single special game state.

Here, if the time-saving state occurs consecutively, the fraudulent activity may be determined by the total number of game balls entering the large prize slot during multiple special game states (first fraudulent entry detection means). If a single big win or small win occurs, the fraudulent activity may be determined by the number of game balls entering the large prize slot during a single special game state (second fraudulent entry detection means). In other words, the above-described fraudulent entry detection method is applied by designating big wins and small wins that occur consecutively during the time-saving state as the first win, and single big wins and small wins as the second win.

Furthermore, the system may only perform a fraudulent win detection using the first fraudulent win detection method when the number of consecutive time-saving rounds reaches its upper limit. Alternatively, a detection value may be set based on the number of consecutive time-saving rounds each time a time-saving state occurs (when the special game state ends) to determine if a fraudulent win has occurred. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent wins according to the progress of the game, thereby improving the accuracy of fraudulent win detection.

The detection of fraudulent entries is performed during the large prize slot opening termination interval processing, which is executed at the end of the special game state. Therefore, if fraudulent entries are determined by the total number of balls entering the large prize slot during the special game state until the maximum number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reached, the determination is made during the large prize slot opening termination interval processing, which is executed at the end of the special game state for the last time (when the maximum number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reached). No determination is made during the large prize slot opening termination interval processing executed before this point. On the other hand, if fraudulent entries are determined by setting a determination value based on the number of consecutive time-saving rounds each time a time-saving round occurs (when the special game state ends), the fraudulent entry is determined during the large prize slot opening termination interval processing, which is executed at the end of the special game state until the maximum number of consecutive time-saving rounds is reached.

Furthermore, the timing for detecting fraudulent winnings can be the same as when the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is cleared. By limiting the detection to only cases where a time-saving state allowing for a large number of prize balls occurs consecutively, the frequency of detecting fraudulent winnings is reduced. This suppresses an increase in processing load while preventing excessive payouts due to fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if a judgment value is set based on the number of consecutive time-saving states to determine fraudulent winnings each time a time-saving state occurs (when a special game state ends), the judgment value may be set before the judgment, or it may be set after the judgment for the next judgment. Note that if a judgment value for the next judgment is set, it is necessary to initialize the judgment value before the first judgment; for example, the judgment value can be initialized at the same time as the number of consecutive time-saving states is initialized.

Furthermore, even if the number of consecutive time-saving rounds does not reach the upper limit and the game ball does not pass through a specific area, resulting in a no-jackpot win, if the judgment value is set immediately before the judgment, it is not necessary to initialize the judgment value at this time. On the other hand, if the judgment value for the next judgment is set after the initial judgment, it is sufficient to either set the judgment value for the first judgment or initialize the judgment value when the time-saving state first occurs.

The judgment value for fraudulent winnings is defined according to the type of special game state. For example, a value corresponding to the special game state resulting from a minor win and a value corresponding to the special game state resulting from a major win are defined. If there are many types of special game states, a table for storing the judgment values may be defined in advance, or the values may be calculated based on the opening time of the major prize slot. Furthermore, when determining fraudulent winnings based on the number of consecutive time-saving rounds, the judgment value may be calculated based on the number of consecutive time-saving rounds, or a table with defined values corresponding to the number of consecutive time-saving rounds may be provided.

Furthermore, the first fraudulent winning detection means and the second fraudulent winning detection means may be used in combination. For example, the second fraudulent winning detection means may determine fraudulent winning each time a special game state occurs, while when the number of consecutive time-saving rounds reaches its upper limit, the first fraudulent winning detection means may determine fraudulent winning based on the total number of winnings since the start of consecutive time-saving rounds.

Furthermore, while the second fraudulent winning detection means determines fraudulent winnings each time a special game state occurs, the first fraudulent winning detection means may also determine fraudulent winnings each time a special game state occurs based on the total number of winnings since the start of the continuous occurrence of the time-saving state.

When detecting fraudulent winnings using the second fraudulent winning detection means, for example, the detection value for one special game state is set to 20. In this case, the detection value in the first fraudulent winning detection means is set to 20 (1 x 20) if the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is 1, and to 100 (5 x 20) if the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is 5. In this case, if the total number of winnings is 76 when the number of consecutive time-saving rounds is 4, and the number of winnings in the 5th special game state is 21, the second fraudulent winning detection means would consider it a fraudulent winning, but since the total number of winnings is 97, it is not judged as a fraudulent winning (the detection value is 5 x 20 = 100). In this case, it may be possible to avoid determining fraud unless both the first and second fraudulent winning detection means determine it as a fraudulent winning. This is because, as the resulting payout of prize balls falls within the expected range, it does not cause damage to the game hall, and it is sometimes desirable to allow the game to proceed smoothly.

[35. Lottery execution control]
The above explains how to update the number of consecutive time-saving rounds. Next, we will explain the control during lottery execution in the gaming machine of this embodiment. For example, we will explain the control of the special lottery, which is executed based on the random values (start memory, hold memory) acquired when a game ball enters the start slot. As mentioned above, if you win the special lottery, a special game state is generated. At this time, the special lottery not only determines whether the result will be a "big win," a "small win," or a "miss," but also determines the type of special game state to be generated if a big win (or small win) is achieved (number of rounds, etc.), the game state to transition to after the special game state ends, and the variation pattern when the special symbols are displayed.

[35-1. Types of Random Numbers]
The special lottery is executed based on a random number value (start memory) acquired when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a game ball enters the start slot). In this embodiment of the game machine, the random number value is generated by a hardware random number generation circuit built into the main control MPU 1311. The range of random numbers generated differs depending on the lottery target, and will be explained with reference to a specific example in Figure 490. Note that the generation of random numbers is not limited to hardware random numbers; software random numbers generated by program execution may also be used.

Figure 490 shows an example of the types and ranges of random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the starting slot. The example shown in Figure 490 includes random numbers for jackpot determination, reach determination, variation pattern, variation type, and special symbol determination.

The random number used for determining the jackpot is a random number used to determine whether the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot," a "minor win," or a "miss." A 2-byte area is allocated for the random number used for determining the jackpot, and it can store values from 0 to 65535.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the special lottery involves acquiring a random number for determining a jackpot and determining whether the acquired random number falls within a predetermined range. As mentioned above, this predetermined range varies depending on the settings of the gaming machine.

Figure 491 shows an example of the range in which the special lottery results in a jackpot for each setting value of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 491, thresholds (upper and lower limits) are defined corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) and setting value (1 to 6). Furthermore, by setting the upper limit to a common value (63534), the memory capacity required to store the thresholds is reduced. Also, as shown in Figure 491, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the setting value is 6 than when the setting value is 1.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the upper limit for random number generation is set to 63534. However, for the random numbers used to determine jackpots, it is desirable to set the upper limit to 65535 to ensure that all two bytes are within the generation range, thereby preventing the generation of values outside the specified range.

The random number for determining whether or not a "reach" occurs is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs. A 1-byte area is allocated to store values from 0 to 255. The random numbers for the variation pattern and variation type are random numbers used to determine the variation pattern for displaying special symbols. These random numbers are also allocated a 1-byte area capable of storing values from 0 to 255, however, the random number generation range for the variation pattern is 0 to 149.

The special symbol random number is used to determine the type of jackpot (the nature of the special game state, the game state after the special game state ends, etc.) when a jackpot is won as a result of the special lottery. A one-byte area is allocated for the special symbol random number, capable of storing values from 0 to 255, but the range of random number generation is from 0 to 199. This is to obtain the special symbol number corresponding to the result of the special lottery, and the special symbol number allows for the identification of not only the result (jackpot, minor win, or loss), but also the type of jackpot or minor win.

Furthermore, if the random number generation circuit malfunctions and random numbers cannot be generated correctly, problems may occur such as the generated random number always being a specific value, or the random number not being acquired correctly, resulting in the acquired random number being a specific value at the time of acquisition. In such cases, since the specific value is likely to be 0, it is advisable to set the lottery contents so that the game is less affected when various random numbers become 0. For example, if the random number for jackpot determination is 0, the winning range should be set so that it is always a loss. Also, if the random number for special symbols is 0 when a jackpot is expected, a jackpot is guaranteed, so the type of jackpot symbol that is least disadvantageous to the player should be selected. In addition, if the random number for jackpot determination is 0, if it is the random number for reach determination, it should be set to non-reach, and if it is one of the random numbers for variation patterns, the variation pattern should be selected to minimize the variation time. This allows for the quick termination of games affected by noise, etc., and improves the stability of the game.

Furthermore, while the gaming machine of this embodiment primarily uses random numbers generated by a hardware random number generation circuit (hardware random numbers), as mentioned above, some or all of the generated random numbers may be software random numbers generated by program execution.

Furthermore, the method of generating random numbers may differ depending on the type of random number. For example, random numbers used in the lottery for special symbols may be generated by a hardware random number generation circuit, while random numbers used in the lottery for ordinary symbols may be generated by software random numbers generated by a program. Also, random numbers related to the outcome of the lottery (e.g., random numbers for determining the jackpot) may be hardware random numbers, while random numbers related only to the display of symbol variations (e.g., random numbers for variation patterns) may be software random numbers.

[35-2. Control related to lottery]
Next, we will explain the control for executing the special lottery. As mentioned above, the special lottery is executed based on a random number obtained when a predetermined condition is met (when a game ball enters the starting slot). First, we will explain the processes that are executed in advance to generate the random number, and then we will explain the process that actually executes the lottery after the random number has been obtained.

[35-2-1. Preparation process for random number generation]
The random numbers used for the special lottery are initially set in the power-on processing (Figure 382) which is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in the random number setting startup process in step 02TK0050, the hardware random number generation circuit built into the main control MPU 1311 is activated. Furthermore, the maximum value of the random numbers to be generated (random number generation range) is set. The random number generation range is stored in a register corresponding to whether the random value is 8 bits (1 byte) or 16 bits (2 bytes), and whether it is variable length or fixed length. Also, it is not necessary to define the generation range for all random numbers in the random number setting startup process; it may be set when the random numbers are acquired.

[35-2-2. Processing related to special lottery]
As mentioned above, the special lottery is executed when the predetermined conditions are met (when a game ball enters the starting slot), acquiring various random numbers (reserved memory), and when the special symbol variation display based on said reserved memory begins. Below, we will explain how to determine whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (random number for jackpot determination), how to determine the special game state that occurs upon winning a jackpot and the game state after the special game state ends (random number for special symbols), and how to determine the variation display of the special symbols (random number for variation pattern, etc.).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the special lottery is performed in the special symbol determination process. The special symbol determination process is called from the special symbol/flag setting process of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed when the special symbol variation begins, and is called from the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process (step 01TKS0080), which is executed from the game-ready process (Figure 354) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 329). The timer interrupt process (Figure 329) and the game-ready process (Figure 354) have been described above, so their explanation will be omitted. The processes from the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process onward will be described, focusing on the processes leading up to the execution of the special lottery and the processes for executing various lotteries.

[35-2-2a. Process until the special lottery is executed]
(Special design/special electric mechanism control processing)
First, we will explain the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, which is the process leading up to the execution of the special lottery. In the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, when a game ball enters the start slot, various random numbers (hold memory, start memory) are obtained, and processing is executed according to the current progress of the game. The following explains each process in detail.

Figure 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure for controlling special symbols and special electric features in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start opening 2002 (step 08TKS0110). If a game ball has entered the first start opening 2002 (the result of step 08TKS0110 is "Yes"), the start opening entry process is executed, various random numbers (hold memory, start memory) are obtained and stored in a predetermined area (step 08TKS0120).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a game ball entered the second start opening 2004 if no game ball entered the first start opening 2002 (the result of step 08TKS0110 is "No"), or if the execution of the start opening entry processing associated with entry into the first start opening 2002 is completed (step 08TKS0130). If a game ball entered the second start opening 2004 (the result of step 08TKS0130 is "Yes"), the start opening entry processing is executed in the same way as in the case of entry into the first start opening 2002, various random numbers (hold memory, start memory) are obtained, and stored in a predetermined area (step 08TKS0140).

Once the process related to winning at the starting gate is complete, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing according to the progress of the game (steps 08TKS0210 to 08TKS0290). The progress of the game is identified by the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number and is updated in each process. Specifically, in a state where there is no hold memory (start memory) (waiting state), the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number is TZ_IDOL, and in this case, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol change waiting process (step 08TKS0210). The special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number is set to TZ_IDOL at the start of the game.

The special symbol variation waiting process is executed until a game ball enters the starting slot. Once a game ball enters the starting slot, various random numbers (hold memory, start memory) are acquired. Furthermore, by updating the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TZ_HEND, the special symbol variation process, which displays the special symbol variation, is executed the next time the special symbol/electric mechanism control process is run. Details of the special symbol variation waiting process are described later in Figure 493.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TZ_HEND, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol variation processing (step 08 TKS0220). This special symbol variation processing includes controlling the display of the special symbol variation. Specifically, after the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the special symbol jackpot judgment transition setting processing (not shown) is executed, setting the special symbol stop command and updating the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TZ_JUDG.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TZ_JUDG, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol jackpot determination process (step 08 TKS0230). In the special symbol jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the confirmed-stop special symbol generates a special game state (jackpot game state), and the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number is updated to a value corresponding to the result of the special lottery (TZ_HSTOP or TZ_ASTOP).

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TZ_HSTOP, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol miss stop process (step 08TKS0240). This special symbol miss stop process stops the display of the special symbol's movement and notifies the player if a special game state (jackpot game state) is not generated. It also updates the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TZ_IDOL and executes the special symbol movement waiting process.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TZ_ASTOP, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol jackpot stop process (step 08TKS0250). The special symbol jackpot stop process includes stopping the display of the special symbol's movement and notifying the system when a jackpot game state is generated. Furthermore, to open the jackpot opening upon transitioning to the special game state (jackpot game state), the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number is updated to TD_FINT, and the pre-opening interval process for the jackpot opening is executed.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TD_FINT, the main control MPU 1311 executes the pre-opening interval processing for the jackpot (step 08TKS0260). During this pre-opening interval processing, the system performs tasks such as generating a special game state (jackpot game state) to signal the start of the jackpot operation, updating the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TD_OPEN, and executing the jackpot opening process.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TD_FOPEN, the main control MPU 1311 executes the large prize slot opening process (step 08TKS0270). The large prize slot opening process opens the large prize slots, facilitating the entry of game balls into each slot, and performs other processes related to the jackpot operation. It also updates the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TD_CLOSE and executes the large prize slot closing process.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TD_CLOSE, the main control MPU 1311 executes the jackpot closure process (step 08TKS0280). The jackpot closure process performs operations related to jackpot operations, such as closing the jackpot jackpots from an open state to a closed state, making it difficult for game balls to enter each jackpot jackpot. It also updates the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TD_CLOSE and executes the jackpot jackpot opening completion interval process.

When the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number becomes TD_EINT, the main control MPU 1311 executes the jackpot opening completion interval processing (step 08TKS0280). During the jackpot closing processing, if the jackpot operation has ended, it performs processing to notify the player of this fact. Furthermore, it sets the game state after transitioning to the special game state (jackpot game state) and updates the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number to TD_IDOL.

As described above, by updating the special symbol and electric mechanism operation status numbers, it is possible to execute processes according to the progress of the game.

(Waiting for special symbol change)
Next, we will explain the special symbol variation waiting process, which is the process leading up to the execution of the special lottery. In the special symbol variation waiting process, as mentioned above, the process is executed until a game ball enters the starting slot. When a game ball enters the starting slot, various random numbers (hold memory, start memory) are obtained. The details of the special symbol variation waiting process will be explained below.

Figure 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure for waiting for special symbol changes in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol variation waiting process begins, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols for which the variation display of special symbols is pending is 0 (step 08 TKS0310). If the number of reserved special symbols is 0 (the result of step 08 TKS0310 is "Yes"), the special symbols cannot be displayed, the special lottery is not executed, and this process terminates.

If the number of reserved special symbols is not zero (the result of step 08TKS0310 is "Yes"), that is, if the display of the special symbol variation is reserved, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 is one or more (step 08TKS0320).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the display of special symbols 2 takes precedence over the display of special symbols 1. Therefore, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 1 or more (the result of step 08TKS0320 is "Yes"), the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set (step 08TKS0330), and the settings for executing the variation display using special symbols 2 are performed. On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is not 1 or more (the result of step 08TKS0320 is "Yes"), that is, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 1 or more, the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set (step 08TKS0340), and the settings for executing the variation display using special symbols 1 are performed.

The special symbol variation setting data is information used to identify whether the processing target is special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Specifically, if the processing target is special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set; if it's special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set. By setting the special symbol variation setting data in advance, subsequent processing can access the corresponding work area and data table, enabling common processing for both special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a hold command at the start of the hold display change in order to update the hold display on the performance display device 1600 and reflect it in the performance (step 08 TKS0350).

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 executes the special symbol/flag setting process (step 08 TKS0360). This process involves executing a special lottery, and, if successful, determining the winning symbols based on the lottery results—that is, the type of special game state and the game state after the special game state ends. Details of the special symbol/flag setting process will be described later in Figure 494.

Once the result of the special lottery is derived through the special symbol/flag setting process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol variation pattern setting process to set the correspondence for the variation display of the special symbols (step 08 TKS0370). Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later in Figure 500.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 updates the hold memory (step 08TKS0380). Specifically, it shifts the various random numbers stored in the area where the hold memory is stored and clears the various random numbers for the special symbol whose variation display is to be started. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation transition setting process (step 08TKS0390) to set the data necessary to start the variation display of the special symbol. In the special symbol variation transition setting process, processing related to the variation display of the symbol, such as the change time of the special symbol, and processing related to the special symbol test signal output externally are performed.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets various commands to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step 08 TKS0400). These commands include a status display count command, a special symbol variation pattern command, a special symbol type command, and a variation start status command.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 updates the special symbol hold identification history (step 08 TKS0410). The special symbol hold identification history stores a chronological history of information regarding the display of special symbols. For example, it stores the type of special symbol being held (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2). By setting special symbol 1 to "1" and special symbol 2 to "2," and storing "0" if no special symbol is held, the system can determine whether the special symbol hold identification history is 0 or 0 at the start of a spin, and if it is 0, it can terminate the process (step 08 TKS0310).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 updates the special symbol/electric mechanism operation status number from waiting for change (TZ_IDOL) to changing (TZ_HEND) (step 08TKS0420).

(Special pattern/flag setting process)
Finally, the process leading up to the execution of the special lottery will be explained, specifically the special symbol/flag setting process (step 08 TKS0360). Figure 494 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol/flag setting process in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the special symbol/flag setting process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires various random numbers (reserved memory) that will be the subject of the special lottery and stores them in the start memory area (an area for storing reserved memory to start the display of the special symbols) (step 08 TKS0510).

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the result of the special lottery (step 08 TKS0520). In the special symbol determination process, the result of the special lottery is determined as a big win, a small win, or a loss based on a random number for big win determination from various random numbers stored in the start memory area. Furthermore, a special symbol number (big win symbol number) is drawn based on the special symbol random number.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a stop symbol/flag setting process (step 08 TKS0530) to set the stop symbols for the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. Finally, it executes a special symbol conversion process (step 08 TKS0540) to convert the special symbol number into a symbol information value.

[35-2-2b. Process for executing various lotteries]
The above explains the process leading up to the execution of various lotteries. Next, we will explain the procedure for actually conducting the lotteries. Here, we will explain the special symbol determination process, which determines the jackpot and the stopping symbols (special symbols, jackpot symbols), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process (variation pattern selection determination process), which determines the variation pattern for the variation display of the special symbols.

(Special symbol determination process)
Figure 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure for determining special symbols in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a random number for jackpot determination from the jackpot determination random number buffer in the start memory area (step 08TKS0610). Furthermore, it obtains the setting value of the gaming machine (step 08TKS0620). In this embodiment, the setting value of the gaming machine can be set to a value from 1 to 6, and as shown in Figure 491, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the special lottery. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the game state (probability state) (step 08TKS0630). The game state (probability state) indicates whether the probability of winning the special lottery is high or low, and can be obtained, for example, based on the probability variation flag set in the case of high probability.

Here, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the random value for jackpot determination falls within the generation range. If the random value for jackpot determination falls within the generation range, the processing from step 08TKS0640 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if the random value for jackpot determination does not fall within the generation range, the determination result is set to "miss," and the miss setting process (step 08TKS0780) is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the upper limit value for determining whether a jackpot has been hit (step 08 TKS0640). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot is determined based on whether the value of the random number used for jackpot determination falls between a predetermined lower limit and upper limit value. At this time, the upper and lower limits may be stored in a table format, or they may be derived by setting a reference value and using a calculation formula. Alternatively, one of the upper or lower limits may be a fixed value. This reduces the storage capacity of the area where the threshold values (upper and lower limits) for jackpot determination are stored. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 490, the upper limit value is a common value.

The main control MPU 1311 compares the random number used for jackpot determination with an upper limit value and determines whether the random number is less than or equal to the upper limit value (step 08TKS0650). If the random number is less than or equal to the upper limit value (result of step 08TKS0650 is "Yes"), it obtains a lower limit value for jackpot determination (step 08TKS0660). Furthermore, it compares the random number used for jackpot determination with the lower limit value and determines whether the random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit value (step 08TKS0670). If the random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit value (result of step 08TKS0670 is "Yes"), the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot determination process will be described in more detail later.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the jackpot setting value (flag) (step 08TKS0680). Furthermore, it sets the special symbol determination data (step 08TKS0690) and stores the random number for the special symbol in a predetermined area (register) (step 08TKS0700).

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 searches for the winning symbol type number (special symbol) based on the special symbol determination data and the special symbol random number (step 08 TKS0710). The special symbol determination data is structured as a table with multiple records, where each record represents a combination of a threshold value and the winning symbol type number. In the search for the winning symbol type number, the special symbol random number and the threshold value are compared to identify the winning symbol type number (symbol type number) that meets the conditions.

In this embodiment, the threshold value is the lower limit, and the special symbol determination data consists of a combination of the lower limit value and the jackpot symbol type number. The specific search procedure will be described later. Alternatively, the threshold value may consist only of an upper limit value. Furthermore, the threshold value may consist of both an upper and lower limit value, and the upper and lower limits may be compared, similar to the jackpot determination case. The process from step 08TKS0640 to step 08TKS0670, which obtains the jackpot symbol type number, is considered the jackpot setting process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a type command setting process to set a type command based on the identified jackpot symbol type number (step 08TKS0720). Furthermore, it sets a special symbol number (jackpot symbol number) (step 08TKS0730). The special symbol number (jackpot symbol number) is data to be converted into a symbol information value in the special symbol conversion process (not shown), which will be described later. The special symbol number is determined based on the value of the special symbol random number. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the special symbol random number is set to a value between 0 and 199, but by adding 1, it is corrected to a value between 1 and 200, and this becomes the special symbol number (jackpot symbol number). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the random number used for determining a jackpot is greater than the upper limit (result of step 08TKS0650 is "No"), or if the random number used for determining a jackpot is less than the lower limit (result of step 08TKS0670 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a minor win has been achieved (step 08TKS0740). The processing in step 08TKS0740 corresponds to the processing from step 08TKS0640 to step 08TKS0670 in the case of a jackpot determination.

The procedure for determining whether a minor win has occurred can be the same as for determining a major win: by comparing the value to an upper and lower limit, or by storing a value that indicates a win. When comparing to an upper and lower limit, the range should be different from that of the major win range. Alternatively, the upper and lower limits may be fixed regardless of the set values. This reduces the memory space required to store the threshold values necessary for determining minor wins.

If a minor win is achieved (the result of step 08TKS0740 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the minor win setting process (step 08TKS0750). In the minor win setting process, similar to the major win setting process, the minor win symbol type number (symbol type number) is identified. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a type command setting process (step 08TKS0760) to set type commands based on the identified minor win symbol type number.

Finally, the main control unit MPU 1311 sets the special symbol number (minor win symbol number) (step 08 TKS0730). Similar to the jackpot symbol number, the special symbol number (minor win symbol number) is based on a random number for special symbols, and therefore ranges from 0 to 199. However, to avoid duplication with the jackpot symbol number, the random number for special symbols is divided by four to convert it to a value between 0 and 49. Furthermore, the converted value is added to 200, the upper limit of the jackpot symbol number, and then 1 is added again to convert it to a value between 201 and 250. This results in jackpots ranging from 1 to 200 and minor wins from 201 to 250, making it possible to identify the type of win by the special symbol number. Once the setting of the special symbol number (minor win symbol number) is complete, this process terminates.

On the other hand, if a minor prize is not won (the result of step 08TKS0740 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a loss setting process (step 08TKS0790) because the result of the special lottery is a loss. In the loss setting process, the special symbol number is set to 0. This means that the special symbol number will be set within the range of 0 to 250.

(Big win determination)
Here, we will explain the lottery based on random numbers for determining big wins. Figure 496 is a diagram illustrating the means for determining the lottery result. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as mentioned above, even small wins are determined based on random numbers for determining big wins. In addition, the probability of winning a big win differs depending on the probability state and the settings of the gaming machine. (A) is a table for determining the result of the variation display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting of the gaming machine is 1 in a high probability state, (B) is a table for determining the result of the variation display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting of the gaming machine is 6 in a high probability state, (C) is a table for determining the result of the variation display of special symbol 1 (special lottery) when the setting of the gaming machine is 6 in a high probability state, (D) is a table for determining the result of the variation display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting of the gaming machine is 6 in a low probability state, and (E) is a table for determining the result of the variation display of special symbol 2 (special lottery) when the setting of the gaming machine is 1 in a low probability state.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, minor wins are awarded only in special draws based on special symbol 2. In the case of special symbol 1, minor wins are awarded only when the value of the random number used for determining the jackpot is 60254, meaning they are almost never awarded. Furthermore, since the probability state indicates the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning a minor win remains the same regardless of whether the state is high or low. The range of minor wins is fixed according to the type of special symbol; for special symbol 1, a minor win occurs only when the value of the random number used for determining the jackpot is 60254, while for special symbol 2, a minor win occurs when the value of the random number used for determining the jackpot is between 60050 and 60254.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the jackpot determination value is set to a common value (range) for both Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, regardless of the probability state or the settings of the gaming machine. On the other hand, the minor prize determination value is not common for Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2, but it may be common for both Special Symbol 1 and Special Symbol 2. Note that the winning ranges for jackpots and minor prizes shown are examples only and are not limited to these values.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 490, the random numbers used for determining a jackpot range from 0 to 63534. However, since a 2-byte area is allocated, it is actually possible to store values up to 65535. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, values from 63535 to 65535 are reserved as a reserve area and are outside the range of random number generation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 491, the upper limit of the jackpot range coincides with the upper limit of the range for generating the random number used to determine the jackpot. Moreover, the upper limit of the jackpot range remains constant regardless of the probability state, the machine's settings, or the type of special symbol; the lower limit is adjusted according to the probability state and the machine's settings.

Furthermore, since the area for storing the random number used for determining a jackpot is 2 bytes, it is possible to store values that exceed the range of the random number generation range. Normally, neither hardware nor software random numbers are generated outside the specified range; however, when retrieving the generated random number, there is a risk that a random number outside the range (above the upper limit) may be obtained due to factors such as noise.

Figure 497 illustrates the process by which some bits of the random number used for determining a jackpot are altered due to factors such as noise, resulting in a value outside the normal range.

In the example shown in Figure 497, the random number "48172" ("1011110000101100b") was generated for determining the jackpot, but due to noise or other factors, the second bit, "0", changed to "1". As a result, the obtained random number for determining the jackpot becomes "1111110000101100b" ("64556"). Thus, the upper limit for the random number used for determining the jackpot is "63534", and the value exceeds this limit.

In contrast, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the determination based on the random number used for jackpot determination is compared with both the upper and lower limits. Therefore, even if a random number for jackpot determination outside the range is obtained, it will not be determined as a jackpot. Specifically, since the determination result in step 08TKS0650 in Figure 495 is "No," the process for determining a minor win is executed as is. If the value is outside the range but below the lower limit, the determination result in step 08TKS0670 in Figure 495 will be "No," and the process for determining a minor win is executed, similar to the case where the value is outside the range but above the upper limit.

In other words, even if the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the specified range, normal control continues without going through exception handling such as determining whether the acquired random number exceeds a predetermined range. Similarly, determining a minor win involves comparing it to the upper and lower limits, just like determining a jackpot, so control can continue with normal operation without executing exception handling. Furthermore, by controlling the system so that a jackpot is not generated even if the acquired random number is outside the specified range, the arcade can avoid incurring losses.

Furthermore, if the random number used for determining a jackpot falls outside the specified range, it is determined that the game is a miss, and the occurrence of a "reach" (a near miss) may be suppressed. For example, the value of the random number used for determining a reach may be updated to a value that does not result in a reach. In this case, the shortest variation pattern may be selected. This allows for the rapid termination of games affected by noise or other factors, thereby improving the stability of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if the random number used for determining a jackpot falls outside the specified range, it is treated the same as if it were determined to be a miss. This allows processing to continue with normal control without the need for exception handling. This simplifies game control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Determining the winning symbol)
Next, we will explain the procedure for identifying (searching for) the type of jackpot symbol from the special symbol determination data based on the special symbol random number (step 08TKS0710 in Figure 495). Figure 498 shows an example of the special symbol determination data, where (A) shows the case of special symbol 1 and (B) shows the case of special symbol 2. Although separate tables are defined for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, they may be a common table or one of them may be a fixed value.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, for special symbol 1, the settings are configured to be least disadvantageous to the player, in the order of special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 3, special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 2, special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 1, and special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 0. Similarly, for special symbol 2, special symbol 2 jackpot symbol type 9 is configured to be the least disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 490, the special symbol random number is generated in the range of 0 to 199. For example, if the special symbol 1 is of type 3 (a winning symbol), it is selected when the value of the special symbol random number in the variation display of special symbol 1 falls between 190 and 199.

The procedure for identifying (searching for) the type of winning symbol from the special symbol determination data based on the special symbol random number is as follows: First, it is determined whether it is special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and then the special symbol random number and the threshold (lower limit) are compared from the first record of the corresponding table. If the special symbol random number is greater than or equal to the threshold, the corresponding winning symbol type is selected. On the other hand, if the special symbol random number is less than the threshold, the same comparison is made with the next record. Since the threshold (lower limit) of the final record is 0, the special symbol random number will always be greater than or equal to the threshold in the end, and the winning symbol type will be selected.

Next, we will explain the case where a special symbol random number outside the generation range is obtained. Figure 499 is a diagram illustrating the symbol types corresponding to special symbol random numbers, where (A) shows the case of special symbol 1 and (B) shows the case of special symbol 2.

The special symbol random number generator is allocated a 2-byte area that can store values from 0 to 255. As shown in Figure 499, the generation range for special symbol random numbers is 0 to 199, so values from 200 to 255 are outside the generation range. Therefore, similar to the random numbers used for jackpot determination, there is a risk that special symbol random numbers outside the range may be obtained due to noise or other influences. In the method for identifying the jackpot symbol type described above, if a special symbol random number outside the range is obtained, it will be a value larger than the lower limit initially compared, so special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type 3 is searched. In other words, when the threshold is the lower limit, the comparison is performed in descending order of the threshold, so the value outside the range will be a value larger than the original generation range, and the condition will be met in the first comparison. In the example above, the jackpot symbol type that is most advantageous to the player is selected.

While the system was previously controlled to minimize the player's chances of winning if the random number for determining the jackpot fell outside the specified range, since a jackpot (or minor win) is guaranteed even if the special symbol random number falls outside the range, controlling the system to minimize the player's chances would be detrimental to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the system is controlled to minimize the player's chances of winning (ideally, it should be controlled to maximize their chances of winning).

Therefore, by placing the type of jackpot symbol to be selected when the special symbol random number value is outside the generation range in the first record, it is possible to intentionally control the selection of a specific jackpot symbol type. Furthermore, by setting an upper limit for the generation range in the first record, it is possible to set a jackpot symbol type that will only be selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained.

Furthermore, if the threshold is set as the upper limit, comparisons are performed in ascending order of the threshold. Since the condition is met in the last comparison, the type of winning symbol selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained should be made the final record.

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes possible to set the type of winning symbol selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained, simply by arranging or adding data, without adding exception handling to the program. Since normal game control can continue even when a random number outside the generation range is obtained, game control can be simplified, reducing processing load and improving stability.

(Special symbol variation pattern setting process)
Next, we will explain the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step 08 TKS0370) for setting the variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. The special symbol variation pattern setting process includes a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern determination process). Figure 500 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control unit (MPU) 1311 first acquires the number of reserved balls for special symbol activation (step 08TKS0810). The number of reserved balls for special symbol activation is stored in the reach probability selection reserved ball area.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process (step 08TKS0820) to select a variation pattern for the special symbol based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol activation and the jackpot flag. Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later in Figure 501.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection judgment process and searches for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step 08 TKS0830).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process to select a variation type defined for the variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols (step 08TKS0840). The variation type value obtained through the variation type determination process is then set.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 searches for the variable time addition value corresponding to the variable type value from the variable time addition value data (step 08TKS0850). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variable type, and for example, it corresponds to the addition time according to the number of pseudo-consecutive wins. Furthermore, the retrieved variable time addition value is stored in the special symbol addition timer area, and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

(Variation pattern selection determination process)
Next, we will explain the variation pattern selection determination process (step 08TKS0820). Figure 501 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is the process for selecting the variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. This process is also called in the pre-reading process that is performed when a prize is won at the start.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a special symbol-specific variation distribution information information table based on the variation table number (step 08 TKS0910). Multiple special symbol-specific variation distribution information information tables are defined corresponding to the variation table numbers. For each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, the special symbol-specific variation distribution information information table specifies a winning variation selection information table, a reach variation selection information table, a losing variation selection information table, and a special symbol reach probability table.

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 determines whether the result of the special lottery was a big win or a small win (step 08TKS0920). If it was not a big win or a small win (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "No"), that is, if the result of the special lottery was a loss, it determines whether a reach occurs (step 08TKS0930). Whether a reach occurs is determined by identifying a special symbol reach probability table (reach probability data) based on the game state and the number of reserved balls, and then drawing a lottery based on a random number for reach determination.

If it is determined that no reach will occur (the result of step 08TKS0930 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 selects a losing spin pattern from the selection table (step 08TKS0940). Alternatively, if the random number used for determining a jackpot falls outside the range, it may be configured to always determine that no reach will occur. This minimizes the impact on gameplay by quickly moving to the next spin.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the losing variation pattern selection process (step 08 TKS0950) when the losing variation pattern selection table is generated. In the losing variation pattern selection process, a losing variation pattern selection value data table is specified, and one losing variation pattern selection data is identified from multiple losing variation pattern selection data based on the game state (e.g., time-saving state), the number of reserved balls, etc. If the random number for jackpot determination falls outside the range and the game is in a time-saving state, the game controls the selection of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time to minimize the impact on the game. The selection of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time may also be determined based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol activation, in addition to the time-saving state. For example, the game may be forced to select the variation pattern with the shortest variation time only if the number of reserved balls for special symbol activation is above a predetermined value.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (the result of step 08TKS0930 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 selects a reach variation pattern selection table (step 08TKS0960) and executes the reach variation pattern selection process (step 08TKS0970). The reach variation pattern selection process performs the same processing as the loss variation pattern selection process. Specifically, it specifies the reach variation pattern selection value data table and selects a variation pattern based on the game state, the number of reserved balls, etc.

Furthermore, if a big win or small win has not been achieved (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "No"), this includes cases where the process was called from the pre-reading stage. Also, when called from the pre-reading stage, the variation pattern selection table is selected based on the random number used for reach determination and the reach probability data used during pre-reading.

If a big win or a small win is achieved (the result of step 08TKS0920 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 selects the winning variation pattern selection table (step 08TKS0980) and executes the winning variation pattern selection process (step 08TKS0990). The winning variation pattern selection process performs the same operations as the losing variation pattern selection process. Specifically, it specifies the winning variation pattern selection value data table and selects a variation pattern based on the game state, the number of reserved balls, etc. If the random number for special symbols falls outside the range, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the selectable patterns is selected to minimize the impact on the game.

Once the variation pattern selection process (loss variation pattern selection process, reach variation pattern selection process, and winning variation pattern selection process) is complete, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation setting process (08TKS1000). In the variation setting process, the variation pattern number is identified from the variation pattern selection data (loss variation pattern selection data, reach variation pattern selection data, and winning variation pattern selection data) identified in each variation pattern selection process. After the variation setting process is complete, the variation pattern selection determination process is terminated.

Here, we will explain the case where the result of the special draw is a loss, and a reach occurs, but the random number for the variation pattern falls outside the range. Figure 502 shows an example of the reach variation pattern selection data. The loss variation pattern selection data and the winning variation pattern selection data have a similar structure.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, a variation pattern is selected from the reach variation pattern selection data based on a random number for the variation pattern. The method for selecting a variation pattern is similar to that used for selecting the type of winning symbol: a threshold value and a random value (variation pattern random number) are compared starting from the beginning of the reach variation pattern selection data. If the variation pattern random number is greater than the threshold value, the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

The random number generator for the variation pattern is allocated a 1-byte area that can store values from 0 to 255. As shown in Figure 490, the generation range for the random number generator for the variation pattern is 0 to 149, so values from 150 to 255 are outside the generation range. Therefore, similar to the random numbers used for jackpot determination and special symbol generation, there is a risk that values outside the range may be obtained due to the influence of noise, etc. As mentioned above, when identifying the variation pattern, since the threshold is the lower limit, values outside the range will be larger than the original generation range, so the condition is met in the first comparison, and the SPSP Reach, the variation pattern with the highest expectation, will be searched for. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, similar to the case of the random number generator for special symbols, the system is controlled not to select the most unfavorable variation pattern, and by configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

[35-3. Effects and Others]
As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the range, normal control continues without going through exception processing such as determining whether the acquired random number exceeds a predetermined range. Similarly to determining a minor win, the game compares the acquired random number with the upper and lower limits, respectively, so control can continue with normal control without executing exception processing. This simplifies game control, suppresses an increase in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by controlling the game so that a jackpot is not generated even if the acquired random number is outside the range, it is possible to prevent the hall from suffering losses.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to set the type of jackpot symbol and variation pattern selected when a random number outside the generation range is obtained, simply by arranging or adding data without adding exception handling to the program. Since normal game control can continue even when a random number outside the generation range is obtained, the processing load is reduced and stability is improved by simplifying game control. Moreover, by controlling the system to avoid selecting the most unfavorable result when the random number obtained to select the jackpot symbol type and variation pattern is outside the range, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

(Standard design)
Furthermore, the same lottery can be performed not only for special symbols but also for regular symbols. Specifically, the above-mentioned processing for special symbols can be applied by replacing the "random number for determining a jackpot" with the "random number for determining a win," the "random number for special symbols" with the "random number for winning symbols," and the "random number for the variation pattern" for special symbols with the "random number for the variation pattern" for regular symbols. In this case, the random numbers related to special symbols may be generated using hardware random numbers, and the random numbers related to regular symbols may be generated using software random numbers.

Furthermore, since the lottery using special symbols (special lottery) offers many types of jackpots, and the lottery using regular symbols (regular lottery) offers fewer types of wins, the generation range for the random number used to determine jackpots with special symbols can be set to the entire 2-byte range (0 to 65535) to eliminate out-of-range values. Conversely, the generation range for the random number used to determine wins with regular symbols can be limited to a portion of the 2-byte range. This allows for more precise lottery selection in the special lottery and enables the setting of an appropriate range for the regular lottery.

(others)
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the occurrence of an acquired random number outside the range is not limited to cases where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit is outside the range. For example, even if the generated random number is normal, it may become an out-of-range value due to the influence of noise or other factors when stored in the main control RAM 1312, or it may be read out as an out-of-range value during the process of reading the value from the main control RAM 1312.

Furthermore, even if all two bytes of the random number used for determining a jackpot are used within the generation range, if an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit, the system will derive a determination result that is most unfavorable to the player, similar to when a random number outside the generation range is obtained, and then continue processing. An abnormality in the random number generation circuit can be detected from the value of a predetermined register in the main control MPU 1311. If an abnormality is detected from the predetermined register in the main control MPU 1311, the system may be controlled to stop the game and output a security signal without continuing processing. Resumption from the game stop can be achieved by cutting and restoring the power supply.

As mentioned earlier, if a malfunction occurs in the random number generation circuit itself, the game will not be stopped. However, if the random number generation circuit itself is functioning correctly, and the generated random number is outside the generation range, the game will not be stopped, and no notification will be given indicating that the random number is abnormal (outside the generation range). This is because gaming halls are environments prone to noise, and frequent game stoppages could diminish the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be permissible to notify the player of any anomalies in the random numbers used for determining jackpots and to stop the game. Anomalies in the random numbers used for determining jackpots are closely related to the value of the game, and obtaining random numbers outside the generation range results in the most unfavorable outcome for the player, thus reducing the enjoyment of the game. Random numbers for special symbols and variation patterns do not affect the jackpot determination result, so as mentioned above, the game should continue without stopping or notifying the player of any anomalies.

Furthermore, if the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the range, a security signal may be output, similar to the case of abnormalities detected by magnets or vibration sensors, or during setting changes/confirmations. Also, if there is a free external output terminal, a signal other than the security signal may be output. In the case of abnormalities in the random numbers used for special symbols or variation patterns, the game will continue without outputting an external signal, similar to the case of game stoppage or abnormality notification.

(Summary of inventions related to random number ranges)
Representative aspects of the invention disclosed herein include the following:

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and enables the creation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery based on the random numbers,
Equipped with,
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that, if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, the lottery result is not favorable to the player.

(2) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
A symbol variation display means that performs a symbol variation display based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
Equipped with,
The lottery result determination means, if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, determines the lottery result to be the most unfavorable for the player,
The game machine is characterized in that the symbol variation display means performs the symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery result determination means, even if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range.

In configurations (1) and (2), even if the acquired random number falls outside the range due to noise or other factors, processing can continue under normal control without the need for exception handling, by determining that this is the most unfavorable outcome for the player. For example, even if the random number used for determining a jackpot falls outside the range, it can be determined as a miss (an outcome unfavorable to the player), and processing can continue under normal control without the need for exception handling. This simplifies game control, suppresses increases in processing load, and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines. Furthermore, by controlling the system so that a jackpot is not generated even if the acquired random number falls outside the range, it is possible to prevent the hall from suffering losses (Figures 495-497).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned special game state includes a first special game state (a special game state resulting from a big win) and a second special game state (a special game state resulting from a small win) which is different from the first special game state.
The lottery result determination means is
After determining whether or not to generate the first special game state, it is determined whether or not to generate the second special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, it determines whether or not to generate the first special game state, and then determines whether or not to generate the second special game state.

In configuration (3), even if the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the range, it is determined to be a miss (the most unfavorable outcome for the player), and then the determination of a minor win continues. In this way, processing can continue with normal control without the need for exception handling, simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 495-497).

(4) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned lottery includes a first lottery (for example, a lottery based on a random number for determining a jackpot) that determines whether or not the lottery has been won, and a second lottery (for example, a lottery based on a random number for special symbols or a random number for variation patterns) that is performed following the first lottery.
The generated random numbers include a first random number for determining the result of the first lottery (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot) and a second random number for determining the result of the second lottery (for example, a random number for special symbols, a random number for variation patterns), and a generation range is specified for each random number.
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that it performs the second lottery even if the first random number is not within the specified range, and if the second random number is not within the specified range, it sets the result of the second lottery to the least unfavorable result for the player.

In configuration (4), even if the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the range, it is determined to be a loss (the most unfavorable outcome for the player). Subsequently, a lottery is performed based on the random numbers for special symbols and the variable pattern random numbers. Even if these random numbers are outside the range, the system continues normal processing as long as the result is not the most unfavorable for the player. In this way, processing can continue with normal control without the need for exception handling, simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of the gaming machine while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 495, 498, and 499). Note that configuration (4) is also applicable to the lottery for regular symbols.

(5) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned lottery includes a first lottery (for example, a lottery based on a random number for determining a jackpot) that determines whether or not the lottery has been won, and a second lottery (for example, a lottery based on a random number for special symbols or a random number for variation patterns) that is performed following the first lottery.
The generated random numbers include a first random number for determining the result of the first lottery (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot) and a second random number for determining the result of the second lottery (for example, a random number for special symbols, a random number for variation patterns), and a generation range is specified for each random number.
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that, if the first lottery is won and the second random number is not within the specified range, the result of the second lottery is the least unfavorable result for the player.

In configuration (5), even if the random numbers for special symbols or the random numbers for the variation pattern are outside the range, the result is always made in a way that is not the least disadvantageous to the player, and the normal processing continues. Because processing can be continued with normal control without the need for exception handling, game control can be simplified, and the development efficiency of the game machine can be improved while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 495, 498, and 499). Note that configuration (4) is also applicable to the drawing of regular symbols.

(6) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
Equipped with,
The generated random numbers include a random number for determining whether or not the lottery has been won (a random number for determining the big win or a random number for determining the win), and a random number for determining the form of the special game state if the lottery is won (a random number for special symbols or a random number for normal symbols), and a generation range is specified for each of the random numbers.
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that, when a lottery based on the winning determination random number is successful, and the symbol random number is not within the specified range, the result of the lottery based on the symbol random number is the least unfavorable result for the player.

In configuration (6), in addition to the same effect as (5), even if the random number of symbols falls outside the range, the result is always not the most unfavorable for the player, and normal processing continues. In this way, processing can be continued with normal control without the need for exception handling, thus simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 495, 498, and 499).

(7) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
Equipped with,
The generated random numbers include a random number for determining whether or not the lottery has been won (a random number for determining the big win or a random number for determining the win), and a random number for determining the form of the special game state if the lottery is won (a random number for special symbols or a random number for normal symbols), and a generation range is specified for each of the random numbers.
The symbol determination information is composed of multiple records, including a threshold for comparison with the aforementioned symbol random number and a combination of the characteristics of the special game state,
The aforementioned lottery result determination means is characterized in that, when a lottery based on the winning determination random number is successful, and the symbol random number is not within the specified range, the result of the lottery based on the symbol random number is the result corresponding to the first or last record of the symbol determination information.

In configuration (7), in addition to the same effect as (5), even if the random number for the symbols is outside the range, the system will always select the first or last record of the symbol determination data (special symbol determination data or normal symbol determination data) and continue normal processing. In this way, processing can be continued with normal control without the need for exception handling, thus simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 495, 498, and 499).

(8) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
A symbol variation display means that performs a symbol variation display based on the result of the aforementioned lottery,
Equipped with,
The generated random numbers include a random number for determining whether or not the lottery has been won (a random number for determining the big win or a random number for determining the win), and a random number for determining the pattern of the variation display, and a generation range is specified for each random number.
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that, when the lottery based on the winning determination random number is successful, and the variation pattern random number is not within the specified range, the result of the lottery based on the symbol random number is the least unfavorable result for the player.

In configuration (8), in addition to the same effects as in configuration (5), even if the random numbers for the variation pattern (for special symbols and regular symbols) are outside the range, the result will always be one that is not the least disadvantageous to the player, and normal processing will continue. In this way, processing can be continued with normal control without the need for exception handling, thus simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 501 and 502).

(9) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and the generation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
A symbol variation display means that displays a variation in the symbols based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
Equipped with,
The generated random numbers include a random number for determining whether or not the lottery has been won (a random number for determining the big win or a random number for determining the win), and a random number for determining the pattern of the variation display, and a generation range is specified for each random number.
The system includes variable pattern determination information composed of multiple records, which include a threshold value for comparison with the aforementioned variable pattern random number and a combination of the characteristics of the special game state.
The lottery result determination means is characterized in that, when a lottery based on the winning determination random number is successful, and the variable pattern random number is not within the specified range, the result of the lottery based on the variable pattern random number is the result corresponding to the first record or the last record of the variable pattern determination information.

In configuration (9), in addition to the same effects as in configuration (5), even if the random numbers for the variation pattern (for special symbols and regular symbols) are outside the range, the system selects the first or last record of the variation pattern selection data (for special symbols and regular symbols) and continues normal processing. In this way, processing can be continued with normal control without the need for exception handling, simplifying game control and improving the development efficiency of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in processing load (Figures 501 and 502).

(10) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
A symbol variation display means that performs a symbol variation display based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
Equipped with,
The generated random numbers include a random number for determining whether or not the lottery has been won (a random number for determining the big win or a random number for determining the win), and a random number for determining the pattern of the variation display, and a generation range is specified for each random number.
The aforementioned symbol variation display means is characterized in that, if the winning determination random number is not within the specified range, it performs the symbol variation display based on the variation pattern random number that has the shortest symbol variation display time, regardless of the value of the variation pattern random number.

In configuration (10), in addition to the effect of (1), if the value of the winning random number is outside the range, the variation time of the symbol display can be minimized, allowing for the rapid termination of games affected by noise, etc., thereby improving the stability of the game (Figure 495).

(11) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and the generation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
To perform the aforementioned lottery, a random number generation means generates random numbers within a specified range,
A lottery result determination means that obtains the random numbers generated by the random number generation means and determines the result of the lottery,
A symbol variation display means that performs a symbol variation display based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
Equipped with,
The lottery result determination means, if the random number obtained from the random number generation means is not within the specified range, determines the lottery result to be the most unfavorable for the player,
The aforementioned symbol variation display means is characterized in that, in the process of performing a performance that causes the symbols to vary, it suppresses the execution of a reach performance.

In configuration (11), in addition to the effect of (1), if the value of the random number used for determining a jackpot is outside the range, the execution of the reach animation can be suppressed, allowing for the rapid termination of games affected by noise and other factors, thereby improving the stability of the game (Figure 495).

[36. Control for recovery from game stoppage]
The lottery control has been explained above. Next, we will explain the recovery control in the event that the game is stopped due to an abnormality during gameplay. In order to recover from a game stoppage, the power is cut off and then turned back on. However, because the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained by the backup power supply, there are cases where the game cannot be recovered from a game stoppage. In such cases, the game stoppage can be canceled by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, but it is not possible to return to the state before the game stoppage. However, depending on the cause of the game stoppage, it may be possible to recover from the state before the game stoppage by canceling the game stoppage without clearing the RAM. By allowing the game to continue from the state before the stoppage, it is possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with multiple game stop release means, and these means are selected and executed according to the game state, etc. The game stop release means may be executed by operating a corresponding operating means (game stop release operating means), or by operating an existing operating means that is also used for other functions (for example, a RAM clear switch 954 or a power switch 932). Furthermore, the operations of multiple operating means may be combined, or a dedicated operating means and an existing operating means may be combined for execution. The factors causing game stoppage will be described below, followed by an overview of the game stop release means. Finally, specific examples of game stop release means will be described.

[36-1. Factors that cause game suspension]
[36-1-1. Overview]
Factors that can halt gameplay include the detection of signals from fraud detection sensors, such as those that detect magnetism, vibration, or radio waves. The detection of these signals may indicate fraudulent activity, making it difficult to continue playing. Therefore, to resume gameplay, it is necessary to restart from the initial state, such as by clearing the RAM (Database and Memory).

In addition to the cases potentially caused by the aforementioned fraudulent activities, errors may occur in game control due to factors such as noise, causing the game control program to malfunction. In this case, simply releasing the game stop is unlikely to allow normal gameplay, so it is necessary to restart the game from the initial state by clearing the RAM or similar method when releasing the game stop. Furthermore, if the game stops due to noise or similar factors, it may be difficult to identify the cause of the game stop due to poor reproducibility. In this case, similar to cases where an abnormality makes it difficult to continue playing, the game should be restarted from the initial state by clearing the RAM or similar method when releasing the game stop. Similarly, the game will also stop if an abnormality occurs in the main control board 1310, such as an abnormality in the random number generation circuit built into the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, the system controls the game to stop if any abnormalities occur, such as when a game ball is detected entering the jackpot slot while it is closed, when a predetermined number of balls are detected entering the jackpot slot during a jackpot game, or when a game ball passes through the probability variation area (V-AT area) despite a jackpot occurring where the game ball should not have passed through the probability variation area.

Furthermore, in the case of minor malfunctions such as ball jams or full-tank errors, gameplay will continue, and gameplay will continue after the malfunction is resolved (however, the payout of game value (prize balls) will be stopped).

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a mechanism (excess payout suppression means) that stops the game when the difference between the expected payout and the actual payout (difference in payout) exceeds a predetermined threshold (excess payout). By providing the excess payout suppression means, it is possible to prevent excessive stimulation of gambling tendencies. The excess payout suppression means will be described later.

Furthermore, even if other factors causing game stoppages occur simultaneously while the game is stopped, the system will not re-determine whether the game has stopped. For example, if a magnetic anomaly is detected by the magnetic sensor while the game is stopped due to excessive prize balls, the system will maintain the game stoppage without issuing a notification. In this case, since the game is already stopped, there will be no problems such as the fraudulent acquisition of prize balls.

[36-1-2. Means for suppressing excessive prize balls]
(Decision on excessive prize balls)
First, we will explain how to calculate the difference in balls (comparison value) required for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism to activate. The difference in balls is the difference between the value counted based on the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls, out balls, safe balls) (first count value) and the value counted based on the prize balls (second count value). The comparison value is calculated based on the difference in balls. Figure 503 is a diagram illustrating the comparison value required for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism to activate.

In the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, the values used for comparison with a threshold are the maximum value of the difference in balls (first comparison value) when the start of the measurement period is set to 0, and the difference between the minimum and maximum values of the difference in balls during the measurement period (second comparison value). For example, if the maximum value of the difference in balls during the measurement period is 6000 and the minimum value is -2000, then the first comparison value would be 6000 and the second comparison value would be 8000.

The measurement period is the time between when the net winnings are cleared and when they are cleared again. If the net winnings are cleared at the start of the hall's business hours, the period will be from the start of business to the end of business (the start of the next business hours) (1 day). In this case, the clearing should be done during the initialization process when the gaming machine is powered on. Alternatively, the net winnings can be cleared at the end of business hours. In this case, the clearing should be done during the power-off process (power-outage processing).

Furthermore, the ball count may be manually cleared by performing a predetermined operation. For example, a button for clearing the ball count may be provided, and the ball count may be cleared by turning the power off and on while operating this button. This makes it possible to clear the ball count at any time, and even if an abnormality is detected in the count value such as the number of prize balls due to noise, it is possible to continue playing after clearing.

Furthermore, even when the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated, the game control itself operates normally, making it possible to control the timing of stopping the game. Specifically, possible timings include: (1) immediately after the comparison value exceeds the threshold, regardless of the game state; (2) after the end of the jackpot game if the threshold is exceeded during a jackpot game; (3) after the end of the game state (after transitioning to the normal game state) if the threshold is exceeded during a time-saving state (which continues for a predetermined number of times) or a probability variation state; (4) after the end of the symbol variation (after all reserved balls have been consumed, if any); (5) after the end of the jackpot game state if a jackpot is occurring during a symbol variation; and (6) after forcibly changing the lottery result to a loss and ending the symbol variation if a jackpot is occurring during a symbol variation.

(1) By stopping the game when the comparison value exceeds a threshold, the payout can be strictly managed. Furthermore, by continuing the game until the advantageous state for the player ends, as in (2) to (5), the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed. By controlling the game as in (6), it is possible to prevent the game from stopping after a jackpot has been hit, and since the player does not actually realize that a jackpot has been hit, a significant decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

The program for executing the process of determining excessive prize balls (excess prize ball suppression means) is located in an area outside the game control area 13126. For example, it may be located in the base calculation area 13128, similar to the base calculation process, or it may be located in a different area.

Furthermore, the area for storing the number of outs and safe balls counted by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is stored in a separate area of the main control RAM 1312 from the number of outs and safe balls counted for base calculation. This is because the number of outs and safe balls counted by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism may be cleared as needed, and storing them in a common area could prevent accurate base calculation.

Furthermore, by providing separate processes for clearing the values of outs and safe balls, the processes (programs) for counting outs and safe balls can be standardized. For example, one could specify the area for storing the outs and safe balls and update the stored values according to the sensor detection results. This would reduce the program size.

Furthermore, the process for counting the number of out balls and safe balls using the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, and the process for counting the number of out balls and safe balls for base calculation, are both called within the same timer interrupt handler.

(Operation when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated)
Next, we will explain the operation of the gaming machine when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated. When the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, the game is stopped at the timing described above, and various operations are performed. Alternatively, instead of stopping the game, the launch of game balls may be stopped, or both the game and the launch may be stopped.

Furthermore, if there are unpaid prize balls when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, all prize balls will be paid out before the game is stopped. In this case, since the excessive prize balls have already been paid out at the time the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated (when the comparison value exceeds the threshold), the game may be stopped immediately. It is also possible to stop the game while there are unpaid prize balls when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated; in this case, the unpaid prize balls should be paid out after the game is resumed.

Furthermore, thresholds are set in stages. When a special feature is active, such as during a jackpot, the system determines whether to activate the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism when the first threshold is reached, and stops the game after the special feature finishes operating. Conversely, when the special feature is not active, the game stops when the comparison value reaches the second threshold. This suppresses the excessive increase in game value that is being awarded.

When the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, the game state that is currently in progress may be forcibly switched to the normal game state.

As a condition for stopping gameplay, the comparison may be determined based on either the first or second comparison value. Alternatively, the system may alternate between the first and second comparison values each time the power is turned on, or the system may allow staff at the arcade to arbitrarily switch between using the first and second comparison values. The switching mechanism may also be the volume control on the circuit board; for example, a portion of the circuit board volume may be used for the volume setting, and the other portion for the comparison value. Specifically, with a rotary switch, since one switch allows for 16 settings, 0-7 could be used for the circuit board volume, and 8-F for the comparison value. More specifically, "8" could be the first comparison value, "9" for the second comparison value, "A" for switching between the first and second comparison values after power-on, and "B"-"F" for reserve (backup) values.

Furthermore, the procedure for resuming gameplay when it is stopped due to excessive payout suppression is basically the same as when gameplay is stopped due to other factors. If the RAM is not cleared, the difference in ball count (comparison value) will be cleared as needed.

(Notification of activation of excessive prize ball suppression mechanism)
Next, we will explain the notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. When the game is stopped by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, the player is notified accordingly. The types of notifications include notifications that suggest the comparison value is approaching the threshold, notifications that indicate the comparison value has reached the threshold, and notifications that the comparison value has exceeded the threshold and the game will be stopped. In addition, an external output signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine (such as the hall computer) for notification. The external output signal may be used in conjunction with the security signal, or a dedicated signal may be provided.

Furthermore, the notification method may differ depending on whether the threshold is exceeded due to prize balls entering the large prize slot during a jackpot game, or due to prize balls entering other general prize slots or start prize slots. In the former case, there is a possibility of significantly exceeding the threshold, so it may be easier to manage if the administrator is notified. However, if the threshold is not exceeded due to prize balls entering the large prize slot, the number of prize balls will not significantly exceed the number of game balls consumed in the game, so a common notification method may be used without distinction.

Next, we will explain an example of how to notify the player. One method of notification is to illuminate a specific lamp. In this case, the lamp may be kept off under normal circumstances, blink when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold falls within a predetermined value, and illuminate when the comparison value reaches the threshold, thereby notifying the player. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the game is about to end from the blinking lamp and that the game will end when the lamp illuminates.

Furthermore, sound effects or voice notifications may be provided. In this case, the output of the sound effects may be stopped or reduced in volume while the notification sound is output. Additionally, the notification sound may be started when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold falls within a predetermined value, and the sound effects may be stopped and only the notification sound is output when the comparison value reaches the threshold.

Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device 1600 may also display a notification regarding the excessive prize ball suppression means. In this case, the notification content is displayed on the topmost (frontmost) layer or the topmost (frontmost) layer of the performance layers. This allows the performance on the back side to continue, for example, by continuing the performance while displaying a warning notification when the difference between the comparison value and the threshold falls within a predetermined value. In this case, the warning notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means should not affect the prior notification or the hold display. This is because the game is progressing normally, and disrupting the normal performance prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, since the game cannot proceed when the game is stopped, priority may be given to making the player aware of this.

In addition to the notification means described above, notification may also be provided by having a movable mechanism perform a predetermined action. If the notification from the movable mechanism is difficult for the player to recognize, notification may be provided by other means, and the movable mechanism may be operated to indicate that the game has stopped. In this case, the mechanism may perform an initial operation, similar to when the game machine is powered on, or it may operate in a specific manner (such as a manner for executing the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism). For example, if the movable mechanism can cover the entire screen when in operation, the movable mechanism may cover the liquid crystal display. In this case, it may appear on the liquid crystal display screen as during the performance, but it may not return to its initial position as during the performance. Furthermore, if the movable mechanism is equipped with a lamp, it may illuminate during the performance but not when the game has stopped, or it may illuminate in a different manner than during the performance. In this way, the player is made aware that the game has stopped by operating the movable mechanism in different ways during normal operation and when the game has stopped.

Regarding the notification examples described above, notification may be provided not by a single means, but by multiple means. For example, a lamp could be illuminated and an audio output could be used in combination, or a notification screen could be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 while a notification sound is output, creating a visual effect. Furthermore, the notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means could be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and when the game actually stops, a lamp could be illuminated or a notification sound output could be output.

(Notification to peripheral control boards)
As described above, when notifying the system of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, it is necessary to notify the peripheral control means 1510 of the execution of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. Furthermore, when giving advance notice of the execution of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (for example, displaying the remaining number of balls until the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is executed), it is necessary to notify the system of information related to this.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the main control board 1310 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it of the remaining number of balls until the comparison value reaches a threshold. This makes it possible to notify or warn of the game stopping due to the excessive prize ball suppression means. The command may be transmitted as needed in response to changes in the comparison value (difference in balls), or it may be transmitted each time a predetermined number is reached.

The command to be sent (the ball difference command) is configured such that, for example, the upper part indicates the ball difference command, "31H," and the lower part indicates the remaining number of balls. Because there is a limited area for storing the remaining number within the command, it may not be possible to store it directly. Therefore, it may be possible to refrain from sending the command until the difference from a threshold falls below a predetermined value. For example, the command may be sent only when the remaining number reaches 1000.

Alternatively, the remaining quantity can be notified by associating the content of a subcommand with the remaining quantity. For example, when the remaining quantity reaches 1000, command transmission begins, with the subcommand value at this point set to "01H," and then every 100 quantities thereafter, "02H" (990), "03H" (980), ..., "80H" (100). When the remaining quantity reaches 100, commands are then sent every 10 quantities thereafter, for example, "81H" (90), "82H" (80), ..., "89H" (10). In this case, a table should be maintained to store the correspondence between the command content and the remaining quantity.

Figure 504 shows an example of a table showing the relationship between commands and the remaining number of items. By having a table like the one shown in Figure 504, the notification of the remaining number of items can be flexibly adjusted. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 504, even if the threshold differs depending on the settings or model of the gaming machine, the display of the remaining number of items can be adjusted for each threshold. In this case, the upper byte of the command may be different for each threshold. For example, if the threshold is 100,000, it would be "31H", and if it is 60,000, it would be "32H". Note that when suggesting to stop the game to the player, it is not always necessary to notify the remaining number of items itself; instead, the number of jackpots until the game stops could be used.

[36-2. Means for releasing game stoppage]
Next, a means for releasing the game stop on the gaming machine will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with multiple types of game stop release means, and each game stop release means is activated by operating a combination of game stop release operation means and existing operation means (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971, etc.). The game stop release operation means may be an operation means dedicated to releasing the game stop, or it may be another operation means not directly related to releasing the game stop that is used to release the game stop.

(First means of releasing the game stop)
In the first game stop release means, the second game stop release operation means is operated (from ON to OFF) while the first game stop release operation means is operated (from OFF to ON). This releases only the game stop without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the second game stop release operation means is operated (from ON to OFF) without operating the first game stop release operation means (keeping it OFF), only the function corresponding to the first game stop release operation means is executed without releasing the game stop. The control will be explained below in chronological order with reference to Figure 505.

Figure 505 is a timing chart illustrating the process of releasing the game stop using the first game stop release mechanism.

First, at time t101, a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, causing the game to be forcibly stopped. At this time, a security signal is output externally. Alternatively, another signal indicating game stoppage may be used instead of the security signal. Furthermore, the game stop release confirmation means switches from "normal display" to "stopped display."

Next, to release the game stop, the first game stop release operation means is operated (time t102). Furthermore, while the first game stop release operation means is still being operated, the second game stop release operation means is operated (time t103). This initiates the process to release the game stop, and the game state transitions to "recovering." At this time, the game stop release confirmation means turns "off." In this way, by simultaneously operating multiple game stop release operation means, it is possible to prevent accidental release of the game stop and to prevent erroneous operation.

Subsequently, the operation of the second game stop release operation means is terminated (time t104), and then the operation of the first game stop release operation means is terminated (time t105). As a result, the game stop release confirmation means lights up completely, and the game state transitions to a preparation period for resuming gameplay. After the preparation for resuming gameplay is complete (time t106), the game stop release confirmation means returns to its normal display, and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

(Second means of releasing the game stop)
The second game stop release means performs the same operation as the first game stop release means. If it is possible to release the game stop, the game stop release confirmation means allows the user to choose whether to release the game stop or continue playing. The third game stop release operation means determines whether or not to release the game stop. If release is selected, the game transitions to a normal play state and the game resumes.

In this case, only arcade employees should be able to reverse the game suspension; players should not be able to do so. If players were allowed to reverse game suspensions caused by fraudulent activity, they could resume playing, and employees would need to check the situation when a problem occurs.

Furthermore, if the game is in a state advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot state, a time-saving state, or a probability-increasing state, continuing to play as much as possible can suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, even if the game can be continued in a normal state, performing a RAM clear before resuming play can reduce the possibility of the game stopping again. In this way, it becomes possible to decide whether or not to resume play while checking the situation according to the game state before the game stopped.

Furthermore, the third means for releasing the game stop may be a dedicated operating means or an existing operating means such as a performance button.

Figure 506 is a timing chart illustrating the process of releasing the game stop using the second game stop release mechanism. Note that the timing chart from time t101 to time t105 is the same as that shown in Figure 505, so the explanation is omitted.

At time t106, the preparation period for resuming the game is complete, and the system becomes ready to accept the option of whether or not to release the game stop. At this time, the display on the game stop release confirmation means will show "Selecting," and the game state will be in standby mode. Subsequently, if resuming the game is selected (time t107), the game stop release confirmation means will show "Normal Display," and the game state will return to normal game mode. If the game stop is not selected in the third game stop release operation means, the system may either maintain the selection state without resuming the game, or return to the stopped state.

(Third means of releasing the game stop)
In the third means of releasing the game stop, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the game is restarted. In this case, the game is restarted in an initialized state, not the state it was in before the game stop.

(Fourth means of releasing the game stop)
The fourth game stop release means releases the game stop by performing a setting change operation. When the setting change operation is performed, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are cleared, so the game resumes in an initialized state rather than the game state before the game stop. A specific example of releasing the game stop by the fourth game stop release means will be described later. In addition, if a setting confirmation operation is performed, the game stop will not be released after the setting confirmation and will continue (be maintained).

(others)
Depending on the type of cause of the game interruption, the system may be configured to automatically resume after the game has stopped. For example, if the game is stopped due to an excessive payout suppression mechanism, the comparison value may be automatically reset, a notification (effect) indicating that the game has stopped may be executed, and then the game may be allowed to continue. Alternatively, the system may be configured to allow the game to resume automatically after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game stopped. For example, after the game has stopped, the system may be configured to automatically resume so that the game can be started as usual at the start of business the following day.

Furthermore, if gameplay is resumed without a RAM clear when gameplay is stopped by the excessive payout suppression mechanism, the counts of balls out and balls safe (comparison value) are cleared. At this time, the counts used for base calculation (total balls out, base value, safe balls) are not cleared. In other words, the execution of the game stop release mechanism without a RAM clear clears the counts used by the excessive payout suppression mechanism, while maintaining the counts used for base calculation. To put it another way, conditional on the execution of the first game stop release mechanism, the counts used for base calculation are not cleared, but the counts used by the excessive payout suppression mechanism are cleared without the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312 being executed. This allows base calculation to continue after gameplay resumes, while simultaneously enabling a new counting of the comparison value used by the excessive payout suppression mechanism.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a game stop release mechanism in response to a game stop trigger. For example, if an abnormal setting value occurs, the game stop can be released while simultaneously executing the setting change function by executing the fourth game stop release mechanism.

Furthermore, priorities may be assigned according to the cause of the game stoppage, and the means for reversing the game stoppage may be selected based on the highest-priority cause. For example, serious abnormalities such as setting value errors or RAM errors may be given first priority, while fraud detection by magnetic sensors, abnormal ball differences due to the activation of excessive prize ball suppression means, and other malfunctions may be given second priority, and the means for reversing the game stoppage may be different depending on the priority.

Specifically, for first-priority game-stopping factors, the game stop is released by a game-stopping release mechanism that involves setting changes. On the other hand, for second-priority game-stopping factors, the game stop is released by a game-stopping release mechanism that does not involve setting changes. Furthermore, the game-stopping release mechanism for first-priority factors may perform a RAM clear, while the game-stopping release mechanism for second-priority factors may not perform a RAM clear.

The means for releasing a game stop for a first-priority game stop factor involves changing settings (RAM clearing), so it can release the game stop even if the means for releasing a second-priority game stop factor cannot. On the other hand, if the means for releasing a game stop for a second-priority game stop factor does not involve RAM clearing, the game can be resumed from the state before the game stopped. Furthermore, if the game is not to be resumed from the state before the game stopped, even a second-priority game stop factor can be released using the means for releasing a first-priority game stop factor.

Furthermore, when a game is stopped, the system may indicate, via a notification device such as an LCD screen, which means of resuming the game stop according to the priority of the factors causing the game stop, thereby assisting hall employees in resuming the game stop. In addition, if multiple factors causing the game stop occur simultaneously before the game stops, the system may also provide notification according to priority to allow the player to select the appropriate means of resuming the game stop.

[36-3. Specific Examples of Game Stop Release Methods]
Next, a specific example of a game stop release operation means will be described. As mentioned above, the game stop release means is performed by combining the operation of one or more game stop release operation means and existing operation means such as the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. Alternatively, the game stop release operation means may be assigned to an existing configuration provided in the gaming machine. Furthermore, the game stop release operation means does not necessarily have to be a switching means such as a button or switch, as long as the ON/OFF change can be detected by a sensor or the like.

Furthermore, the game stop release confirmation means includes a dedicated display unit (game stop status display unit) capable of confirming whether or not the game stop has been released. For example, it may be composed of one or more LEDs, which light up when the game stop is in effect and turn off when the game stop is released. If multiple LEDs are used, the display may change depending on other related states, such as whether a setting change/setting confirmation is in progress. Additionally, the game stop status display unit may be a 7-segment LED, and may display the setting value when a setting change/setting confirmation is in progress.

[36-3-1. Release of game suspension conditional on opening the door]
In the gaming machine described below, the first game stop release operation means is the opening/closing (ON/OFF) of the door (frame, door frame 3 and main body frame 4, or both), and the second game stop release operation means is the ON/OFF of the power switch 932. The first game stop release operation means only needs to determine ON/OFF based on the detection result of the door opening sensor (specifically, the main body frame sensor, etc.). In this case, the first game stop release means releases the game stop by opening the door while cutting off and then turning on the power. Note that it is sufficient for the door to be open when the power is turned on, and it is not necessarily required that it be in the open state before the power is turned on. For example, the power may be turned on at the same time as the door is opened.

The following explanation, using the diagram and timing chart, describes a specific example of the first game stop release mechanism, specifically the control that releases the game stop conditionally upon opening the door. Note that in each timing chart, the same events occur at the same time, and their explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

Figure 507 is a timing chart showing an example of control where the game stop is released by restarting the power supply when the door is opened. Figure 508 is a timing chart showing an example of control where the game stop is not released by restarting the power supply when the door is closed.

Referring to Figure 508, at time t201, a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, causing the game to be forcibly stopped. At this time, a security signal is output externally. In this embodiment, it is necessary to reopen the power while opening the door during the game's halt. Therefore, first, the door is opened (time t202), the power is cut off (time t203), and then the power is reopened (time t204).

The opening of the door can be detected by a door frame opening switch and a main frame opening switch (not shown), and a detection signal is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The door frame opening switch detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. In this embodiment, if a detection signal (door opening detection signal) is output from either switch, it is determined that the door is in an open state. However, it is also possible to detect the opening of only one door (for example, the main frame 4) and consider it as an open state, or to recognize it as an open state when detection signals are output from both the door frame opening switch and the main frame opening switch. Furthermore, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are retained by the backup power supply from the time the power to the gaming machine is cut off until it is turned back on.

When the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts the game machine and, during the initial setup process, cancels the game stop based on the door open detection signal. At this time, the game stop status indicator is off. After the game machine has finished starting up, a preparation period begins (time t205) to transition to the normal game state (game ready to start). During the preparation period, the game stop status indicator is fully illuminated. Alternatively, the game stop status indicator may be fully illuminated during the game machine's startup. In this case, the illumination pattern during the preparation period should differ from that during startup. Furthermore, the illumination pattern of the game stop status indicator during the preparation period may differ from that when a RAM clear is performed (when the game machine is started while operating the RAM clear switch 954).

Here, we will provide additional information regarding the release of the game stop. When a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the game is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 sets a game stop flag in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312. Then, the power to the gaming machine is restored, and the game stop flag is cleared upon detection of the door open detection signal during machine startup. Alternatively, the system may be configured to continue the malfunction notification while the game stop flag is set, and to forcibly terminate the malfunction notification (malfunction status notification period) (midway through the notification period) when the game stop flag is cleared. With this configuration, if a malfunction occurs after the gaming machine's power is restored, the game stop flag will be set again and the malfunction notification will begin, allowing for immediate determination of whether or not the game can be continued. If the malfunction notification continues, the game cannot be continued in the state before the power outage, so the RAM is cleared and the power is restored. If the malfunction notification has ended, the game can be continued.

The main control board 1310 transitions to the normal game state when the preparation period ends (time t206). At this time, the game stop status indicator is turned off, indicating that the game stop has been released, i.e., the game is in the normal state.

Furthermore, referring to Figure 508, the power is cut off and then restored without opening the door. Therefore, the conditions for releasing the game stop are not met, and the game stop state continues even after the preparation period ends. Note that while the power switch 932 may be located on the back of the gaming machine, it is possible to access the back of the machine from the opposite side of the island, making it possible to operate the power switch 932 without opening the door.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to attempt to release the game stop without performing a RAM clear, thus allowing the game to continue from the state before the stop. Furthermore, even if the game stop cannot be released, operating the RAM clear switch 954 does not prevent the game stop from being released by performing a RAM clear in the conventional procedure.

Therefore, unless the game becomes impossible to continue, it becomes possible to continue playing even after the game has stopped, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it becomes possible to control the game to temporarily stop if minor malfunctions occur repeatedly. For example, if a random number outside the generation range is obtained more than a predetermined number of times during the random number generation in the special lottery mentioned above, it becomes possible to temporarily stop the game, check the state of the game machine, and then resume the game without clearing the RAM.

[36-3-2. Disabling game stop during setting changes/confirmation]
Next, we will explain the cases where settings are changed or confirmed when resuming gameplay after a game stop. The cancellation of gameplay due to a setting change corresponds to the fourth gameplay cancellation method described above. First, we will explain the case of setting changes, then the case of setting confirmation. Finally, we will explain the case where opening the door is the condition for executing the setting change function.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, setting changes are performed by turning on the power while operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954. Furthermore, setting confirmation is performed by turning on the power while operating the setting key 971 without operating the RAM clear switch 954.

(Settings change)
Figure 509 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which a setting change is performed while the door is open after the game has stopped. Figure 510 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which a setting change is performed while the door is open after the game has stopped, and the door is closed after the game machine has started up. Figure 511 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which a setting change is performed while the door is closed after the game has stopped.

Referring to Figure 509, similar to the example shown in Figure 507, the game is forcibly stopped at time t201. Furthermore, the door is opened (time t202), the power is cut off (time t203), and then the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 (time t204).

Furthermore, once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the setting change function is executed (time t205). At this time, a security signal is output, similar to when the game is stopped. While the setting change function is being executed, the game stop status display unit displays an indication that the setting change function is in progress, but it may also display the setting value itself. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting value being changed (unconfirmed) is displayed in a blinking state, indicating that the change is in progress while the setting value is displayed.

Subsequently, the setting key 971 is switched to OFF. Once the setting change is complete (time t207), the system transitions to normal gameplay after a preparation period (time t208). During the preparation period, the game stop status indicator displays a configuration that indicates the preparation period is in progress (e.g., all lights illuminated).

Furthermore, the preparation period after a setting change may differ from the preparation period after the gaming machine is started. For example, during the preparation period after a setting change, the display mode of the game stop status indicator may be changed from full illumination to high-speed flashing. Also, the display mode may be different from when the setting value is being changed, such as by changing the brightness of the game stop status indicator.

Next, in the example shown in Figure 510, the process from time t201 to time t208 is the same as in the example shown in Figure 509. At time t208, the preparation period ends, and the necessary preparation processes to start the game are completed (the game stop is released), but the system remains in a waiting state because the door is not closed. Afterward, by closing the door, the system becomes ready to start the game and transitions to the normal game state (time t209).

Finally, referring to Figure 511, similar to the example shown in Figure 509, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is cut off with the door closed (time t203), and then the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 (time t204).

Furthermore, once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the settings change function is executed (time t205). After the settings change is complete (time t207), the machine transitions to normal gameplay after a preparation period (time t208).

Thus, even with the door closed (without executing the first game stop release operation), the game stop can be released by performing a setting change operation. This is because, upon completion of the setting change, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, similar to when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954. Furthermore, the game stop can also be released by the third game stop release operation, which clears the main control RAM 1312 by operating the RAM clear switch 954, without executing the first game stop release operation.

(Check settings)
Next, we will explain the case of setting confirmation. Figure 512 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which setting confirmation is performed while the door is opened after the game has stopped. Figure 513 is a timing chart showing an example of control in which setting confirmation is performed while the door is closed after the game has stopped.

Referring to Figure 512, similar to the example shown in Figure 507, the game is forcibly stopped at time t201. Furthermore, the door is opened (time t202), the power is cut off (time t203), and then the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 (time t204). At this point, since the power to the game machine is cut off and then turned back on while the door is open, the first game stop release operation means is executed.

Once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the settings confirmation function is executed (at time t205), and a security signal is output, similar to when the game is stopped or when the settings change function is executed. While the settings confirmation function is being executed, the game stop status display unit will show a display mode indicating that the settings confirmation function is being executed, but it may also display the setting value itself. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the set setting value is displayed in a different manner than when the setting value being changed is displayed.

Subsequently, after the setting confirmation is completed (time t207), since the first game stop release operation has been executed, the game transitions to the normal game state after a preparation period (time t208). The duration of the preparation period may be the same as or different from the duration of the setting change.

Next, referring to Figure 513, similar to the example shown in Figure 512, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is cut off with the door closed (time t203), and then the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 (time t204).

Furthermore, once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the settings confirmation function is executed (time t205). Afterward, setting key 971 is switched OFF, and once the settings confirmation is complete (time t207), even though the preparation period has ended, the door remains closed and the RAM has not been cleared, so the game stop release operation has not been executed, and the game stop is maintained (time t208).

Furthermore, even when performing a setting confirmation, the game may be released in the same way as when changing settings. That is, when a function related to the game machine's settings (a function that enables the display of setting values) is executed, the game may be released. In this case, if only the setting value display function is executed, the game may be released without a RAM clear; however, if the setting value change function is executed, a RAM clear may be performed. Also, when the setting value display function is executed, a RAM clear may be performed in the same way as when the setting value change function is executed.

(When the door opening is used as the starting condition for changing the settings)
Figure 514 is a timing chart showing an example of control where opening the door is used as a condition for releasing the game stop and as a condition for initiating a setting change. Figure 514 explains an example where the door is closed.

Referring to Figure 514, similar to the example shown in Figure 511, after the game is forcibly stopped (time t201), the power is cut off with the door closed (time t203), and then the power is turned on while operating the setting key 971 (time t204).

At time t205, even though the gaming machine has finished starting up, the door is not opened, so the setting change function is not executed, and the game remains stopped even after the preparation period has ended (time t206).

In the example shown in Figure 514, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated by the setting change operation, but because the conditions for starting the setting change function are not met, the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared, and the game remains stopped, which is different from the example shown in Figure 512.

Furthermore, the game stop status display unit may utilize an existing display unit, such as a performance display monitor. When the game stop status display unit is also used as a performance display monitor, the base value should be displayed during normal gameplay. During setting changes/setting confirmations, the display may indicate that the function is being executed, or it may display the setting value itself. Additionally, the display should be off when the game machine is started, and fully illuminated during the preparation period after setting changes or setting confirmations. During game stoppages, the display may show the base value as in normal gameplay, or it may display a display specifically for game stoppages.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can resume gameplay from the state before the game stopped without clearing the RAM when the game is stopped, thus contributing to suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

(Summary of inventions related to control for recovery from game stoppage)
Representative aspects of the inventions concerning the control of recovery from game stoppage disclosed herein include the following:

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and enables the creation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A means for releasing a game stop when the game has been stopped,
A game stop release operation means operated to execute the game stop release means,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned game stop release operation means includes a first game stop release operation means (opening and closing of a door) and a second game stop release operation means (power switch) that is different from the first game stop release operation means.
The game stop release means is characterized in that the game stop is released by operating the game stop second release operation means while operating the game stop first release operation means, and the game is resumed from the point in time when the game was stopped.

In configuration (1), even if the game stops due to some factor, it is possible to attempt to release the game stop without performing a RAM clear, thus allowing the game to continue from the state before the stop. Furthermore, even if the game stop cannot be released, operating the RAM clear switch 954 does not prevent the game stop from being released by performing a RAM clear in the conventional procedure. Additionally, by operating multiple game stop release operation means simultaneously, it is possible to prevent easy release of the game stop and to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, unless the game is in a state where continuation is impossible, it is possible to continue playing even after the game has stopped, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. It is also possible to control the game to temporarily stop if a series of minor malfunctions occur (Figures 505 and 506).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A setting change mechanism that allows the setting values of a gaming machine to be changed,
A means for releasing a game stop when the game has been stopped,
A game stop release operation means operated to execute the game stop release means,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned game stop release operation means includes a first game stop release operation means and a second game stop release operation means different from the first game stop release operation means.
The game stop release means releases the game stop by operating the game stop second release operation means while operating the game stop first release operation means, and resumes the game from the point in time when the game was stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the setting change means is executed while the game is stopped, the game stop is released without executing the game stop release means, and the game can be started after initialization rather than at the point when the game was stopped.

In configuration (2), in addition to the same effects as configuration (1), the game stop is released by performing a setting change operation without having to execute the first game stop release operation means. This prevents the game from resuming in the state it was in before the stop after a setting change, enabling stable game control and thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (Figures 509-511).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A means for releasing a game stop when the game has been stopped,
A game stop release operation means operated to execute the game stop release means,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned game stop release operation means includes a first game stop release operation means and a second game stop release operation means different from the first game stop release operation means.
The game stop release means is characterized in that, when the game stop second release operation means is operated while the game stop first release operation means is operated, the game stop is released after the operation of the game stop first release operation means and the game stop second release operation means is completed, and the game is resumed from the point in time when the game was stopped.

In configuration (3), in addition to the same effects as configuration (1), the timing of releasing the game stop can be adjusted. This makes it possible to resume the game at an appropriate time, suppressing the decline in enjoyment of the game caused by unintended restarts (Figure 510).

(4) A gaming machine having multiple prize-winning slots, which executes a lottery based on balls entering the starting slot and generates a special game state based on the results of the lottery,
A prize ball awarding means for awarding prize balls based on winning a prize in the aforementioned prize slot,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the number of game balls consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the aforementioned prize balls,
A ball counting means for counting the difference in balls over a predetermined period based on the first count value and the second count value,
Based on the counted difference in balls, a game stopping means is provided to halt the progress of the game.
A means for releasing the stoppage of the game,
A game stop release operation means operated to execute the game stop release means,
Prepare,
The aforementioned game stop release operation means includes a first game stop release operation means and a second game stop release operation means different from the first game stop release operation means.
The game stop release means is characterized in that, when the game stop second release operation means is operated while the game stop first release operation means is operated, the game resumes from the point in time when the game was stopped, and the first count value and the second count value are initialized.

In configuration (4), a game-stopping mechanism (excessive prize ball suppression mechanism) is provided that stops the game when the difference between the expected payout and the actual payout (difference in payout) exceeds a predetermined threshold (excessive prize balls), thus preventing excessive stimulation of gambling tendencies. Furthermore, even after the game has stopped due to the game-stopping release mechanism, it is possible to continue playing, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (Figures 503 and 505).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A setting confirmation method that allows checking the settings of a gaming machine,
A means for releasing a game stop when the game has been stopped,
A game stop release operation means operated to execute the game stop release means,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the setting confirmation means is executed while the game is stopped, the game remains stopped after the setting confirmation is completed, while if the setting confirmation means is executed while operating the game stop release operation means, the game resumes from the point in time when the game was stopped after the setting confirmation was completed.

In configuration (5), if the game stops, an attempt can be made to resume gameplay without performing a RAM reset. Therefore, after confirming the settings, gameplay can be resumed from the state before the stop (Figures 512 and 513). Note that "when the setting confirmation means is executed while the game is stopped" also includes cases where the power to the game machine is turned off while the game is stopped, and then the setting confirmation function is executed when the power is turned back on.

(6) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A setting change mechanism that allows setting values for a gaming machine,
A means of checking the settings of a gaming machine,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the setting change means is executed while the game is stopped, the game is released and the gaming machine is initialized so that the game can be resumed, while if the setting confirmation means is executed, the game can be kept stopped even after the setting confirmation is completed.

In configuration (6), when a setting change is performed while the game is stopped, the game can be reliably initialized before resuming. Conversely, when a setting check is performed, the game can be kept stopped after the setting value is confirmed, and a decision can be made as needed whether or not to resume the game. This allows for flexible operation, as the game machine's status can be checked before deciding whether or not to resume the game (Figures 511 and 513). Note that "when the setting change means is executed while the game is stopped" also includes cases where the power to the game machine is cut off while the game is stopped, and then the setting change function is executed when the power is turned back on.

[37. Player-participation type of performance]
The above explains the control for recovery from game stoppage. Next, we will explain player-participation-type effects using special features and operating means that can control the operation of those features. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in addition to controlling the start/end of the operation of the special features, the driving strength of the drive unit is controlled to control the movement speed of special features that mimic vehicles such as cars, or to control the intensity with which percussion instruments such as drums (special features that can output sound) are struck.

Traditional gaming machines often featured relatively simple controls for starting and ending the operation of mechanical devices. This resulted in monotonous gameplay and a lack of excitement.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the aim is to enhance the enjoyment of the game by increasing the diversity of the presentation by making it possible to change the presentation patterns with relatively simple operations, thereby realizing a wide variety of presentations and actively involving the player in the presentation.

[37-1. Direction Overview]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a performance is executed in which worshippers line up to ring the New Year's Eve bell and take turns ringing the bell (hereinafter referred to as the "bell-ringing performance"). Figure 515 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration for executing the bell-ringing performance in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The bell-ringing performance involves worshippers lining up in turn to ring the New Year's Eve bell, with the tone and volume of the bell indicating the likelihood of winning the lottery. The tone and volume also vary depending on the force with which the bell is struck, and this force can be adjusted by the player. Furthermore, the number of worshippers can also be used to suggest the likelihood of winning the lottery.

The configuration for executing the bell-ringing effect includes a bell 8000, a bell-ringing rod 8001, and a roof 8002. The bell-ringing effect is activated by striking the bell 8000 with the bell-ringing rod 8001, which produces a bell sound. The bell sound changes according to the force with which the bell-ringing rod 8001 strikes the bell 8000; specifically, the type and volume of the sound change. The bell-ringing rod 8001 is movable left and right by a drive unit (solenoid or motor), and the amount of movement (drive force) can be adjusted by the player using the effect operation unit (operating means) 301, which will be described later.

When struck by the bell rod 8001, the bell 8000 swings from side to side depending on the force of the strike. The swinging motion of the bell 8000 is driven by a motor or other drive mechanism. Alternatively, the bell 8000 may be mounted on the roof 8002 so that it swings due to physical contact with the bell rod 8001.

In this embodiment, the bell 8000 and the bell striking rod 8001 can be housed in the roof 8002 of the bell tower. When the bell-ringing performance begins, the roof 8002 moves to a predetermined position (the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1600) with the bell 8000 and the bell striking rod 8001 housed inside. When the roof 8002 stops at the predetermined position, the bell 8000 and the bell striking rod 8001, which were housed inside the roof 8002, move downward, and the bell striking rod 8001 becomes ready to strike the bell 8000 (start the performance).

When the game is ready for the animation, images of worshippers ringing the bell are displayed on the LCD display 1600. The bell-ringing animation consists of a combination of the bell (8000) and the images displayed on the LCD display 1600. Therefore, by applying the aforementioned 3D image (stereoscopic image) technology to display the worshippers ringing the bell and the bell tower (excluding the roof), an integrated animation can be achieved, enhancing the visual effect and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 shows worshippers 8003 striking the bell and waiting worshippers 8004 waiting to strike the bell, as well as other elements of the bell tower, such as the pillars and base, in addition to the decorative elements. The entire bell tower may also be considered a decorative element.

When the bell-ringing effect becomes available, the effect control unit 301, which determines the movement of the bell-ringing rod 8001, becomes operable. The effect control unit 301 includes a rotation control unit 302 (first control unit) and a press control unit (second control unit) 303. The rotation control unit 302 is formed in an annular shape and can be rotated by the player. The press control unit 303 is a button-shaped unit located at the center of the rotation control unit 302. The configuration of the effect control unit 301 will be described in detail later.

The force with which the bell is struck is the driving force of the drive mechanism that operates the bell striking rod 8001, and is set (adjusted) based on the amount of operation (rotation) of the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, the force with which the bell striking rod 8001 strikes the bell (the amount of movement of the bell striking rod 8001) also affects the amplitude of the bell 8000's swing after being struck. The amount of movement of the bell striking rod 8001 and the amplitude of the bell 8000's swing may be made proportional, or they may be varied according to the attributes of the worshipper 8003 striking the bell (e.g., gender, adult/child). In addition, the volume and type of sound of the bell may differ depending on the force with which it is struck, thereby suggesting the expected degree of pattern change during the reach process. Furthermore, the force with which the bell striker 8001 strikes the bell may vary not only depending on the amount of movement of the bell striker 8001, but also on the operating speed of the bell striker 8001. For example, even if the amount of movement of the bell striker 8001 is the same, varying the operating speed may result in different amplitudes of the bell's movement and different sounds.

The timing of ringing the bell can be specified by the player or set automatically. If the player specifies the timing for the bell-ringing animation to begin, for example, it could be set to the timing of operating the rotary control unit 302. In this case, the system remains in a standby state (waiting for operation, standby display) until the player operates the control unit (rotary control unit 302), and after the operation (after touching the rotary control unit 302), the animation start display is shown. Alternatively, if the timing of ringing the bell is set automatically, for example, worshippers could appear at designated locations to ring the bell at predetermined intervals. In this case, the player only controls the intensity of the bell ringing using the rotary control unit 302. Furthermore, if the system uses the number of worshippers to indicate the level of expectation, automatically ringing the bell ensures that the correct number of worshippers corresponding to the expected level appear.

Furthermore, while controlling the bell to strike automatically at predetermined intervals, the operation of the bell-striking rod may be stopped while the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated. This interrupts the bell-striking while the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated. For example, if the level of anticipation is announced in stages during the progression of the performance, the bell-striking by the worshipper may be stopped once the level of anticipation reaches a certain point, allowing for further heightened anticipation until the announcement or lottery results are displayed after the bell-striking is complete.

Once all worshippers have struck the bell, a notification animation is executed that suggests the outcome (expected outcome) of the symbol change. The notification animation executed may vary depending on the stage of the bell-ringing animation. For example, if the player participates in the bell-ringing animation and all worshippers have struck the bell, a notification animation indicating a high probability of success or a special animation that is only performed when participating in the bell-ringing animation is executed may be shown. In this way, by executing more engaging animations when participating in the bell-ringing animation, the player's motivation to participate can be increased.

Once the bell-ringing animation is complete, the bell 8000 and the bell-ringing rod 8001 are retracted into the roof 8002, and the roof 8002 moves to its standby position. The LCD display 1600 displays the result of the symbol change. If the result of the symbol change is a jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the player is awarded prize balls. If the result of the symbol change is a miss, the next symbol change begins based on the held start memory.

Furthermore, the bell 8000, the bell striking pole 8001, and the roof 8002 may be displayed as images instead of physical objects, and the entire performance may be composed solely of image displays.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by allowing players to actively participate in the player-participation-type performance, it is possible to provide special performances that are more interesting than usual. The configuration and specific performances for executing the bell-ringing performance will be described below.

[37-2. Structure]
First, we will describe the configuration for executing the bell-ringing effect. In particular, we will explain the operating means for operating the bell-ringing rod 8001. First, we will describe the arrangement of the operating means operated by the player in the game machine, and then we will describe the configuration and function of the operating means.

[37-2-1. Front view of a pachinko machine]
Figure 516 is a front view (surface view of the door frame) of a pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the present invention. The basic configuration of the gaming machine is the same as that of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 1, etc., so an explanation is omitted.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, similar to the pachinko machine shown in Figure 1, comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) in a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, a main body frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, having a game area 5a where the player puts the game balls.

The door frame 3 has a rectangular shape with an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front of the frame-shaped door frame base unit. It comprises a tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit above the tray unit, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit above the left side unit 400 and the right side unit 450, a handle unit 500 attached to the lower right front corner of the door frame base unit, and a glass unit 560 that is detachably attached to the door frame base unit and closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be viewed from the front.

The means for players to participate in the bell-ringing effect are included in the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation unit 300 is located in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. It also includes an effect operation section 301 (operation means) that allows players to operate and participate in the effect when a player-participation effect, such as the bell-ringing effect, is performed.

[37-2-2. Configuration of the Production Control Unit (Production Control Section)]
Next, we will explain the performance control unit 300, focusing particularly on the performance control section 301 operated by the player.

The performance control unit 301 consists of a rotation control unit 302 that allows the player to perform a rotation operation (first operation) and a press control unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation (second operation). The performance control unit 301 is formed in an annular shape, with the rotation control unit 302 having an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of its outer diameter, and the press control unit 303 is positioned within this ring. The press control unit 303 is composed of a press portion (operation receiving portion) 303a and an outer circumference portion 303b. Note that the press control unit 303 does not necessarily have to be positioned within the ring of the rotation control unit 302; it may be provided protruding from the outer edge (side surface) of the rotation control unit 302, or it may be positioned outside the rotation control unit 302.

Figure 517 shows a disc unit including the performance control unit 301. (A) is a front view of the disc unit in its normal state, (B) is a front view of the disc unit when the pressing control unit is in the raised position, and (C) is a front view of the disc unit when the central pressing control unit of the pressing control unit is pressed.

The performance control unit 300 has a performance control section 301 on its upper surface that can be operated by the player. The performance control section 301 consists of a large, annular rotating control section 302 and a pressing control section 303 located within the ring of the rotating control section 302. The performance control unit 300 may also be provided with grooves or protrusions on the rotating control section 302 that the player can grip with their fingers. These grooves or protrusions facilitate smooth rotation operation by allowing the player to grip with their fingers, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The performance control unit 300 is assembled to the disc unit 200 in a state where the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation control unit 302 is inclined to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing control unit 303, located within the ring of the rotation control unit 302, is inclined such that it moves backward as it moves downward (in other words, forward as it moves upward).

In the normal state, the press operation unit 303 of the performance control unit 300 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In the normal state, a portion of the press operation unit 303 may be hidden within the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by the player. The rotation (amount of rotation) of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected by a rotation detection sensor (not shown). A sensor for detecting rotation speed may also be provided.

In this embodiment, as described above, the operating intensity of the bell-ringing rod 8000 can be specified by rotational operation during the bell-ringing performance. Furthermore, by configuring the rotational operation unit 302 to be driven by a motor, it is possible to lighten and assist the rotational operation by driving it in the same direction as the rotational operation, or to make the rotational operation heavier by driving it in the opposite direction. Also, under normal circumstances, the feel of the rotational operation does not change according to the amount of rotation; for example, increasing the amount of rotation does not make the rotational operation heavier. In addition, it is possible to return the rotational position of the rotational operation unit 302 to the reference position at the start of the performance.

The rotating operating section 302 is formed in a shape where more than half of the arc of the circle extends in a ring shape. In other words, the rotating operating section 302 is formed in a donut shape. Furthermore, since the rotating operating section 302 is mounted with its outer circumferential surface, top surface, and part of its inner circumferential surface exposed, it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp with their hand.

This allows the player to touch the rotating control unit 302 from various directions, enabling them to rotate the unit in a way that is convenient for them, thereby improving the operability of the rotating control unit 302. Furthermore, when operating the rotating control unit 302 from the reference position, only clockwise rotation may be permitted. In this case, the rotating control unit 302 may be automatically returned to the reference position after the performance ends or after the rotation operation is complete (when the player releases their hand from the rotating control unit 302). Additionally, the rotating control unit 302 can be operated regardless of whether the pressing control unit 303 is in its initial or raised position. Note that since the rotating control unit 302 is attached to the control unit base on its underside, it cannot be gripped like a car steering wheel.

Furthermore, LEDs may be arranged in a ring shape on the rotating operation unit 302 to provide illumination decoration. By sequentially illuminating multiple LEDs arranged in a row in accordance with the rotation of the rotating operation unit 302, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 may be illuminated. Illuminating only a specific part can also be used to indicate the reference position to the player. Additionally, a light-emitting element such as an LED may be placed on the pressing portion 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 to provide illumination decoration.

In its normal state, as shown in Figure 517(A), the press operation unit 303, located within the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, has an initial position where its upper surface protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the press operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the press operation unit 303 is pressed downwards, its upper surface lowers, and the pressure is detected by a pressure detection sensor (not shown).

In the normal state, rotating the rotary operating section 302 clockwise causes the outer circumference 303b to extend upward, raising the entire pressing operating section 303 (see Figure 517(B)). In the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operating section 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operating section 302. Note that further rotation of the rotary operating section 302 clockwise in the raised position does not cause the pressing operating section 303 to rise. While the pressing operating section 303 is currently pressable in its initial position, it may be possible to design it so that pressing is only possible by rotating the rotary operating section 302 clockwise.

Furthermore, when the rotary operating section 302 is rotated counterclockwise in the raised position, the pressing operating section 303 descends (see Figure 517(C)). Note that the pressing operating section 303 does not descend even if the rotary operating section 302 is further rotated counterclockwise in the initial position. Also, when the pressing operating section 303 is in a position between the raised position and the initial position (protruding position), it rises or falls depending on the rotation direction of the rotary operating section 302.

[37-2-3. Operation of the Production Control Unit (Production Control Section)]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 301 will be explained. Figure 518 shows the initial position of the performance control unit 301, where (A) is a plan view and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken from a plane including the center. Figure 519 shows the raised position of the performance control unit 301, where (A) is a plan view and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken from a plane including the center. The reference mark 302a is a mark for determining the amount of operation of the rotation control unit 302. The reference mark 302a may also be formed by illuminating LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the rotation control unit 302.

As shown in Figure 518, in the initial position, the reference mark 302a is in the lower position (reference position), and the tip of the pressing part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 is in its lowest position. When the rotation operation part 302 is rotated clockwise in the initial position, the pressing operation part 303 rises, as shown in Figure 519.

As described above, the pressing operation section 303 is composed of a pressing section 303a and an outer peripheral section 303b. The outer peripheral section 303b gradually extends upward until the rotation operation section 302 rotates by a predetermined amount, causing the pressing section 303a to rise. The height of the pressing operation section 303 may change in conjunction with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, or it may change in steps for each predetermined amount of rotation. Alternatively, it may change from the initial position to the raised position when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation section 302 exceeds a predetermined amount. In other words, when the rotation operation section 302 is operated (rotated) during performance execution, it may be possible to maintain the raised position continuously during performance execution. Therefore, by raising the pressing operation section 301 when the rotation operation section 302 is operated, it is possible to prevent accidentally pressing the pressing operation section 303 while the rotation operation section 302 is being operated. Furthermore, if the pressing operation part 303 is not located within the ring of the rotating operation part 302, but rather, as described above, is provided so as to protrude from the outer edge (side), the position of the leading edge (tip position) of the pressing part 303a in the extension direction will be displaced by the operation of the rotating operation part 302. This makes it possible to suppress erroneous operation during the execution of player-participation effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

When the bell-ringing effect ends, the effect control unit 301 is returned to its normal state. The reference mark 302a of the rotation control unit 302 is returned to the reference position, and the pressing control unit 303 is returned to its initial position. When returning the rotation control unit 302 and the pressing control unit 303 to their normal state, they may be returned to their initial positions by a drive mechanism such as a motor, or by using a spring or the like.

Furthermore, by grasping and lifting the pressing portion 303a of the pressing operation portion 303, the player can pull the pressing operation portion 303 upwards with their hand. When the player releases their hand, the pressing operation portion 303 returns to its original position. This case will be explained with reference to Figure 520.

Figure 520 illustrates the operation of the rotation unit 302 by lifting the pressing unit 303. (A) shows the state where the pressing unit 303 is lifted, and (B) shows the state where the rotation unit 302 has rotated due to the lifting of the pressing unit 303. The pressing unit 303 can be lifted to a height where the amount of rotation of the rotation unit 302 is a predetermined amount.

Furthermore, while the pressing operation unit 303 may be made liftable to the raised position, to prevent malfunction of the performance operation unit 301, the lifting distance is set to be small (lower than the raised position), preventing the pressing operation unit 303 from moving to the raised position. For example, in the bell-ringing performance, the amount of rotation is such that lifting the pressing unit 303a moves the worshipper to the area below the bell (the position to strike the bell), and the actual striking of the bell by the worshipper is limited to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing the complexity of the performance operation.

[37-3. Bell ringing performance]
The above describes the operating means for executing the bell-ringing effect. Next, the bell-ringing effect will be described in detail. The bell-ringing effect in this embodiment can be executed at various timings, such as during the reel spinning effect or during a jackpot game. As an example, we will describe an effect pattern that is executed during the reel spinning effect after the reel spinning display of special symbols has started and a reach has occurred. In this effect pattern, if the bell is successfully rung, a preview effect that notifies the expected result of the reel spinning effect or a special effect will be executed.

This section explains the bell-ringing effects, including the basic effect (single-shot effect) where a worshipper rings the bell once to indicate the likelihood of a symbol change, the intensity-specified effect where the bell is ringed with a specified intensity, the continuous effect where multiple worshippers ring the bell in sequence, and finally, the point-based effect where points are added by multiple worshippers ringing the bell with a specified intensity, and an effect is executed based on the total points.

[37-3-1. Basic Direction]
First, we will explain the basic presentation (single-shot presentation) in which the likelihood of a symbol change is indicated by the worshipper striking the bell once. Figure 521 shows an example of the screen transition when one worshipper strikes the bell once and succeeds. Below, we will explain the transition from the occurrence of a reach to the confirmation of the stopping symbols.

In (A), the reserved start memory is consumed, and the special symbol variation display begins. The left and right decorative symbols stop on the same symbol ("7"), resulting in a reach. From here, the bell-ringing effect begins as shown in (B).

At this point, the roof 8002 moves to the top of the screen, and the bell 8000 and bell-ringing pole 8001 housed within the roof 8002 are positioned in their designated locations. Afterward, the worshippers move to the stairs of the bell tower. The decorative patterns are displayed in a reduced size for visibility, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, operation instructions prompting the operation of the rotating control unit 302 are displayed.

After the rotary control unit 302 becomes ready for operation, when a player touches the rotary control unit 302, the system may output an audio signal indicating the start of the performance or play music for the bell-ringing performance. This allows the player to strongly recognize their participation in the bell-ringing performance, increasing their anticipation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. At this time, the audio and music output may be set based on the result or pattern of the symbol changes.

Subsequently, when the rotary control unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the worshipper moves below the bell-ringing rod 8001, as shown in (C), and prepares to ring the bell. Then, at a predetermined timing, the worshipper rings the bell. At this time, the bell may be rung automatically after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the bell-ringing animation (after a reach occurs), or the bell may be rung when the player operates the rotary control unit 302. When ringing the bell by operating the rotary control unit 302, it is preferable that the bell-ringing rod finishes moving after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of operation of the rotary control unit 302.

As mentioned above, the intensity with which the bell striker 8001 strikes the bell (the operating speed of the bell striker 8001 and the driving strength of the drive mechanism for operating the bell striker 8001) varies depending on the amount of rotation of the rotary control unit 302. This allows the operation of the mechanism to change according to the amount of rotation of the control unit, thereby enhancing the player's sense of participation in the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

(D) shows the result of the bell-ringing, indicating a successful outcome. In the example shown in (D), the bell-ringing effect was successful because the amount of rotation of the rotary control unit 302 was increased, resulting in a stronger bell-ringing effect. The success or failure of the bell-ringing effect may be determined by specifying the intensity, or it may be determined by a lottery when the player operates the rotary control unit 302 without specifying the intensity. By determining the success or failure of the bell-ringing effect according to the amount of rotation of the rotary control unit 302, the gameplay of the pre-announcement effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Subsequently, as shown in (E), the worshippers exit. Furthermore, since the bell ringing was successful, the expectation level notification (preview animation) is performed as shown in (F). After the bell-ringing animation ends, as shown in (G), the decorative symbols are enlarged again, and the stop symbols are displayed.

Next, we will explain what happens when the bell-ringing attempt fails. Figure 522 shows an example of the screen transitions when a worshipper attempts to ring the bell once and fails. Since (A) through (C) are the same as the successful example shown in Figure 521, we will omit the explanation.

(D) shows a state where the rotation amount of the rotary operation unit 302 is insufficient, resulting in failure to properly strike the bell. In order to actually strike the bell, it is necessary to strike it with a certain force. Therefore, in the bell-striking performance, when the force with which the bell is struck, i.e., the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 (operation amount), is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount (specific operation amount), the drive strength of the drive body becomes greater than or equal to a specific drive strength, and the bell is successfully struck. At this time, the position of the reference mark 302a becomes the operating position. This makes it possible to execute preview performances and special performances. Special performances include, for example, the bell 8000 performing a special action (specific action performance) or displaying a special character or image on the performance display device 1600 (specific display performance). In other words, if the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, the force to strike the bell, i.e., the drive strength of the drive body to operate the bell striking rod 8001, is weak, and the performance fails. If the bell ringing fails, no preview or special effects will be triggered, which encourages players to actively participate in the game.

Subsequently, as shown in (E), the worshippers exit. Furthermore, because the bell-ringing failed, the warning animation (indicating the level of expectation) is not performed, and the worshippers exit as shown in (F). Note that in the example in Figure 522, no warning animation was performed, but a low-reliability warning animation or a failure animation could be performed.

After the bell-ringing animation ends, the decorative symbols will enlarge again, as shown in (G), and the stopped symbols will be displayed. Note that the success or failure of the bell-ringing animation is not related to the result of the symbol change (the result of the special lottery); therefore, as shown in (G), a jackpot is still awarded even if the game during the animation fails.

Similarly, if the player does not operate the performance control unit 301 at the predetermined timing, the bell ringing will fail, and the expectation level notification (pre-announcement effect) will not be executed. Furthermore, if the amount of rotation (operation amount) of the rotation control unit 302 is less than a predetermined amount, the bell ringing will also fail. However, if the result of the symbol change (result of the special lottery) is a jackpot, even if the bell ringing fails, a special pre-announcement effect (jackpot confirmation effect) may be executed.

[37-3-2. Single-shot performance (intensity specified)]
The above explains the basic effect (single-shot effect) in which the expectation of a pattern change is indicated by the worshipper striking the bell once. Next, we will explain a specific example of a bell-striking effect in which the amount of rotation (operation amount) of the rotation operation unit 302 is specified. First, we will explain the relationship between the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 and the strength of the bell strike (the driving strength of the drive body that operates the bell-striking rod 8001).

Figure 523 illustrates the rotation amount of the rotary control unit 302 and the operation of the bell 8000 in a bell-ringing performance, corresponding to the intensity with which the bell 8000 is struck. (A) represents a "strong" intensity, (B) a "medium" intensity, (C) a "weak" intensity, and (D) a failure where the bell cannot be struck because the intensity is below a predetermined level.

In the example shown in Figure 523, the maximum rotation of the rotating control unit 302 in the bell-ringing performance is 180 degrees. The rotating control unit 302 may be designed so that it does not rotate more than 180 degrees, or its strength may be designed so that it does not change even when rotated more than 180 degrees.

In the bell-ringing sequence, when bell 8000 is struck with the bell-ringing rod 8001, the volume of the sound is proportional to the force with which the bell is struck. On the other hand, the tone of the bell may vary depending on the game state, expected outcome (variation pattern), etc.

Furthermore, in the bell-ringing animation, the amplitude of the bell's swing when the bell 8000 is struck by the bell-ringing rod 8001 is proportional to the force with which the bell is struck, as shown in (A) to (C). If the force of the bell strike is below a predetermined level, as shown in (D), it is treated as a failure, and either no bell sound is output at all, or a special sound (a failure-specific sound) is output. Outputting a special sound allows the player to recognize a failure, enabling them to distinguish between a "weak" and "false" intensity settings and allowing them to adjust the amount of rotation. This makes it easier for the player to respond the next time the bell-ringing animation is performed, encouraging them to continue playing and preventing a decline in the game's appeal.

The bell striking intensity is currently set to three levels: "strong," "medium," and "weak," but it can be further subdivided. For example, if the rotation amount of the rotary operation unit 302 is set from 0 degrees to 180 degrees, it can be divided into 10 levels of 18 degrees each. In this case, level 1 would be considered a "failure" due to insufficient intensity, levels 2-4 would be "weak," levels 5-7 would be "medium," and levels 8-10 would be "strong," and the drive intensity of the drive mechanism that operates the bell striking rod 8000 would be set according to each range.

Next, we will explain a specific example of a bell-ringing animation when the intensity is specified. Figure 524 shows an example of screen transitions when the intensity of the bell-ringing is specified in a bell-ringing animation where one worshipper rings the bell once. The animation flow is the same as that shown in Figures 521 and 522.

(A) displays a display specifying the intensity. Note that (A) corresponds to the timing when (C) in Figure 521 is displayed. The intensity specification may be displayed when the worshipper is ready (able to ring the bell) or when the performance is ready to begin (for example, (B) in Figure 521).

In (A), a "medium" intensity is specified. In this case, if the rotation control unit 302 is not operated, or if the amount of operation of the rotation control unit 302 is insufficient, resulting in insufficient intensity to strike the bell and failure, the system may be configured to notify the user of the failure, or the failure animation shown in Figure 522 may be executed. The animations for striking the bell at any intensity are described below.

As shown in (B1), when the bell is struck with a "strong" intensity, it shakes violently and emits a loud bell sound. However, because the intensity is not specified, the sound is not pleasant; for example, a sound used for failure is emitted, and as shown in (B2), an animation or display indicating failure is executed. At this point, a display specifying the correct intensity (rotation amount), such as "Please strike the bell with a 'medium' intensity," may be shown. After this, an animation indicating failure in the expectation level notification may be executed, or a screen that directly stops the symbols may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in (C1), when the bell is struck with a "medium" intensity, the bell vibrates moderately and emits a sound at a moderate volume. Because the bell was struck with the specified intensity, a beautiful tone (the tone for success) is emitted, and a success animation is displayed as shown in (C2). Following this, an animation indicating the expected success rate (for example, Figure 521(F)) is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in (D1), when the bell is struck with a "weak" intensity, the bell shakes slightly and a low volume bell sound is emitted. However, since this is not the specified volume, similar to the "strong" intensity case, the bell sound is not a pleasant tone, but rather a tone used for failures, for example, and as shown in (D2), an animation or display indicating failure is executed. As an animation or display indicating failure, for example, a message specifying the correct intensity (rotation amount), such as "Please strike the bell with a 'medium' intensity," may be displayed. Afterward, an animation indicating failure in the expectation level notification may be executed, or a screen directly displaying the symbols stopping may be shown.

Furthermore, a failure in the bell-ringing performance may be determined not only when the force with which the bell is struck differs from the specified force, but also based on the amplitude and number of oscillations of the bell 8000 caused by the striking. For example, the amplitude may be determined by identifying it using a sensor that detects the amount of rotation of the bell 8000, or it may be determined by detecting with a sensor whether or not a part of the bell 8000 passed a predetermined position when the bell 8000 oscillated due to the striking.

Furthermore, if the result of the symbol change (the result of the special lottery) is a jackpot, the special performance may be executed regardless of the success or failure of the bell-ringing performance, and regardless of the amount of operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (the driving strength of the drive body that operates the bell-ringing rod 8001). In this case, the special performance may be executed before ringing the bell, or the transition may be made directly from (A) to (E). Alternatively, after ringing the bell, the transition may be made from (B2) to (E) instead of (D2). In this case, the special performance may also be executed if the rotation operation unit 302 is not operated, or if the bell-ringing strength is insufficient and the attempt fails.

As described above, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by adding variations to the presentation based on the player's actions. Furthermore, by adding game elements to the presentation, and by informing the player of the expected probability of a symbol change upon successful completion of the game (for example, by striking the bell with a specified intensity), the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game. In addition to the expected probability of a symbol change, hints about the machine's settings or the current game state may also be provided.

[37-3-3. Continuous Performance]
The above explains the bell-ringing performance in which one worshipper strikes the bell once. Next, we will explain the performance in which multiple worshippers strike the bell in succession at predetermined intervals. Figure 525 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transitions in a bell-ringing performance in which multiple worshippers strike the bell sequentially.

When the bell-ringing sequence begins, as with the basic sequence, in (A), the reserved start memory is consumed, triggering the display of the special symbols. The left and right decorative symbols stop on the same symbol ("7"), resulting in a near-win situation. Subsequently, the roof 8002 and other components are positioned, forming the bell tower. At this point, as shown in (B), multiple worshippers gather in the bell tower to ring the bell.

Furthermore, for highly anticipated fluctuation patterns, the duration of the pattern fluctuations will be longer. Additionally, since worshippers ring the bell at predetermined intervals, and the number of possible bell rings per unit time is fixed, the maximum number of worshippers is determined in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the number of worshippers increases or decreases depending on the level of anticipation (fluctuation pattern).

Furthermore, instead of having all worshippers participate from the beginning, the first worshipper may ring the bell, and then new worshippers may appear after the first worshipper has departed. Additionally, variations in the procession pattern may be introduced, such as allowing worshippers to leave midway through. This configuration allows players to grasp the level of expectation from the start, preventing them from losing interest in the performance. Moreover, since the performance must continue in order to determine the final number of worshippers, the player's sense of anticipation is heightened, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

When a worshipper moves to the position to strike the bell and becomes ready to strike the bell (i.e., the rotation control unit 302 becomes operable), as shown in (C) and (D), worshippers are replaced at predetermined intervals, and the performance of worshippers striking the bell is executed at predetermined timings. For example, worshippers are replaced every two seconds, and 1.5 seconds after the worshipper is designated to move to the predetermined position (bell-striking position), the bell is struck with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the rotation control unit 302. Then, the next worshipper moves to the predetermined position, and the bell-striking performance continues. While the interval between worshippers' appearances is set to be constant, it may be varied. In this case, it is advisable to ensure that the player can understand the timing of the bell-striking. Furthermore, the appearance interval may be determined according to the attributes of the worshippers (gender, adult/child, etc.).

In the continuous performance explained in Figure 525, worshippers automatically change at predetermined intervals. However, as shown in (E), operating the pressing operation unit 303 temporarily stops the changeover of worshippers. Therefore, even when the rotating operation unit 302 is operated, the operation of the bell-ringing rod 8001 (operation of the drive unit) is stopped. In this case, there is no need to extend the pattern change time, so it is not necessary to have all the planned worshippers appear.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to stop for a predetermined time when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, or to remain stopped while the pressing operation unit 303 is being pressed. Alternatively, instead of stopping the turnover of worshippers when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the system may allow worshippers to leave and resume the turnover of worshippers.

Thus, while the game (performance) is progressing by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the operation of the push operation unit 303 allows for the change of worshippers or the stopping of the drive mechanism that operates the bell-ringing rod 8001. Furthermore, the game (performance) can be immediately resumed by ceasing operation of the push operation unit 303. This allows the player to easily intervene in the progress of the game (performance), thereby enhancing the performance effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the continuous performance continues, worshippers will change at predetermined intervals. However, if the rotating control unit 302 is not being operated, the worshippers may exit via the stairs without moving to the designated position (the position where the bell is struck). In this case, the LCD display device 1600 may display a message to the player instructing them to operate the rotating control unit 302, or the bell-striking performance may be stopped. Additionally, the performance sounds and music may differ depending on whether the player is touching the rotating control unit 302 or not, or the background color on the display screen may be changed accordingly.

On the other hand, if the rotation control unit 302 is operated, the worshipper will move to the designated position (the position for striking the bell). However, if the amount of rotation is 0 when the player merely touches it, it may be considered that the rotation control unit 302 has not been operated.

As mentioned above, when the pressing operation unit 303 is lifted upward, the rotating operation unit 302 rotates (Figure 520). Therefore, as shown in (F), if the pressing operation unit 303 is lifted upward during the execution of a continuous performance, the bell-ringing rod 8001 operates (the drive unit operates), but the amount of rotation (driving force of the drive unit) is insufficient, causing the bell-ringing performance itself to fail. However, under certain conditions, for example, if the worshipper is a child, the required amount of rotation may be reduced to match the child's arm strength, allowing the bell-ringing performance to succeed. With this configuration, the bell-ringing performance fails under normal circumstances, but can be made successful under specific conditions.

Subsequently, as shown in (F), the bell-ringing performance continues until the last worshipper rings the bell, at which point the performance ends. After the bell-ringing performance ends, the result of the symbol change may be announced by executing a preview performance as shown in Figure 521 (F), or by the number of worshippers during the bell-ringing performance, the sound of the bell when it is rung, or the music played during the performance. After the bell-ringing performance ends, the stopped symbols are displayed as shown in (G).

As described above, in the continuous presentation, the player can operate the rotation control unit 302 in response to the continuously appearing worshippers, thus providing a highly engaging presentation for the player. Furthermore, since worshippers appear automatically at predetermined intervals, the player can provide different types of presentations simply by adjusting the rotation amount of the rotation control unit 302, making it an easily accessible presentation for the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[37-3-4. Point Presentation]
Finally, we will explain the point-based presentation, which, like a continuous presentation, features multiple worshippers appearing in succession, and points (scores) are added when each worshipper strikes the bell with a specified intensity. The point-based presentation is a bell-striking presentation that enhances the gameplay by specifying the intensity of the bell strike for each worshipper, similar to the continuous presentation. Depending on the points earned during the presentation period, highly reliable pre-announcement presentations or special presentations will be executed. If the player does not participate in the game or has a low score, a failure presentation will be executed, or the result will be displayed without any presentation.

First, let's explain an example of the screen configuration for the point-scoring animation. Figure 526 shows an example configuration for executing the point-scoring animation of the bell-ringing animation in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Compared to the configuration shown in Figure 515, a score display unit 8101 that displays the total points and an intensity specification unit (gauge) 8102 that specifies the operating intensity of the bell-ringing rod 8001 are added. Note that the other configurations are the same as in Figure 515 and will not be explained further.

In the point-scoring system, points are added when the bell is struck with the specified intensity, and the total points are displayed on the score display unit 8101. At this time, the points added each time the bell is struck (points earned) may be displayed in real time (Figure 529). In the example shown in Figure 526, the total points (score) are displayed numerically, but other display methods are also acceptable. For example, it could be displayed in white at the start and change color each time points are added, or it could show the progress and extend with each point added.

The intensity specification unit (gauge) 8102 specifies the intensity with which the bell is struck. In the example shown in Figure 526, the intensity is specified by the length of the gauge, but it may also be expressed numerically, or an image indicating the amount of rotation of the rotation control unit 302 may be displayed. Alternatively, the intensity may be directly displayed ("Strong," "Medium," "Weak").

In the point-scoring system, the intensity setting unit 8102 specifies the intensity at which each worshipper should strike the bell. The player adjusts the amount of rotation by operating the rotation control unit 302 according to the specified intensity. Points are added each time the bell is struck at the specified intensity. If the bell is not struck at the specified intensity, the total points may be maintained, or points may be deducted as a penalty. The same procedure may be followed as for not operating the rotation control unit 302 or failing to strike the bell, or points may be deducted only in these cases. Alternatively, points may be deducted only if the bell is not struck at the specified intensity, and the score may be maintained if the rotation control unit 302 is not operated.

Once the last worshipper has finished ringing the bell, a pre-announcement or special animation is executed based on the total points. If the total points are above a predetermined value, a highly reliable pre-announcement or special animation is executed; if the total points are below the predetermined value, a less reliable pre-announcement or normal animation is executed. Furthermore, if the player does not participate in the game and the total points are 0, the pre-announcement animation may not be executed, and the stopping symbols may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, if the total points are above a predetermined value when a jackpot is confirmed, a special jackpot confirmation animation may be executed (for example, Figure 524 (H)).

Next, we will explain how to set up point-based effects according to the level of expectation. Figure 527 is a diagram illustrating the setting of point-based effects. In this embodiment, the level of expectation corresponds to the variation pattern, and a "high" level of expectation corresponds to a variation pattern with a high probability of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, the result of the symbol variation (special lottery) may also be taken into account in the level of expectation; for example, a pre-announcement effect that is executed only when a jackpot is confirmed may be prepared.

The table shown in Figure 527 is stored in the memory unit of the peripheral control board 1510, and identifies the point effect setting information (effect pattern) based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the expected value (variation pattern) corresponds to the variation time; a higher expected value results in a longer variation time. Therefore, the number of worshippers in the bell-ringing animation can be increased, allowing players to perceive the expected value through the number of worshippers. Additionally, by setting a limit on the number of worshippers displayed on a single screen, players cannot determine the actual number of worshippers unless they participate in the game, thus encouraging active participation.

Referring to Figure 527, when the expectation level is "high," the number of visitors is set high, and accordingly, the point limit is 50 points. When the expectation level is "medium," the number of visitors is set to a moderate level, and the point limit is 30 points. When the expectation level is "low," the number of visitors is set low, and the point limit is 20 points.

When the bell is successfully rung, points may be awarded based on a specific number of points per worshipper (e.g., 5 points), or points may be assigned based on the worshipper's attributes (e.g., gender, build, age, etc.).

The reliability of the pre-announcement animation that runs after the point-based animation ends is set according to the points earned. The more points earned, the higher the reliability of the pre-announcement animation. If the points are 0, either a failure animation or the stop symbols will be displayed without any pre-announcement animation. The failure animation may be a fixed animation regardless of its expected value.

Next, we will explain the progression of points when the point-scoring animation is performed. Figure 528 illustrates the progression of points earned from the start of the point-scoring animation. Figure 528 shows a scenario where N worshippers appear and sequentially strike the bell with a specified intensity. The expectation level is "high," indicating an animation featuring many worshippers.

First, the first worshipper appears, and a "strong" intensity level (equivalent to 5 gauge units) is specified. At this point, the player operates the rotation control unit 302 to set the intensity to "strong," earning 5 points. Subsequently, with the third worshipper, a "medium" intensity level (equivalent to 3 gauge units) is specified. However, the player fails to operate the rotation control unit 302 correctly, resulting in a "weak" intensity level, and therefore, no points are earned.

In this manner, the operation of the rotating control unit 302 continues until the last (Nth) worshipper has finished ringing the bell. In the example shown in Figure 528, since the points reached 45, a highly reliable pre-announcement animation is executed as shown in Figure 527. If the result of the symbol change (special lottery) is a jackpot, a special animation indicating a confirmed jackpot may be executed.

Next, we will explain the screen transitions for the point-based presentation. The basic flow is the same as the continuous presentation described above (Figure 525), where the bell-ringing intensity is specified by the intensity specification unit 8102 as the worshippers appear. In this embodiment, worshippers appear at equal intervals, and the player specifies the bell-ringing intensity by operating the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, the appearance of worshippers can be temporarily stopped by operating the press operation unit 303.

Figure 529 shows an example of the screen transitions for the point-based presentation. When the bell-ringing presentation begins, worshippers line up as shown in (A). Then, as shown in (B) through (D), worshippers ring the bell one after another, and after the last worshipper finishes ringing the bell, the preview presentation is executed.

As mentioned earlier, the pre-announcement animation is executed based on the total points accumulated when all visitors ring the bell. Figure 530 shows an example of a pre-announcement animation executed based on the total points earned in the point animation, where (A) is the case when the total points are 0, (B) is the case when the total points are 20, and (C) is the case when the total points are 50. Note that the result of the symbol change is a jackpot.

As shown in (A), if the total points are 0, the player is not effectively participating in the game, so the point presentation ends without executing the preview animation, and the stopping symbols are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in (B), when the total points are 20, the player is participating in the game but has earned few points, resulting in a low-reliability pre-announcement animation. This low-reliability animation makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not they have won a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in (C), when the total points reach 50, the player has earned up to the point limit, and a highly reliable pre-announcement animation is executed. However, if a highly reliable pre-announcement animation is executed when the result is a loss, the player will realize it's a loss and may become disappointed before the symbols stop. Therefore, in addition to the animation that announces a big win, a special animation that is not normally seen may be executed. This makes it less likely for the player to be disappointed even if the result of the symbol change (special lottery) is a loss, and encourages active participation in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if different difficulty levels are assigned to consecutively appearing worshippers, as in continuous or point-based events, the difficulty may become too high, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, it may be possible to adjust the difficulty by maintaining the same difficulty level for a predetermined period, and then assigning a different level after that period. This allows for adjustment of the difficulty level of player-participation events, maximizing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the system may record the points earned during the point-based presentation and adjust the difficulty level based on the recorded points. This allows the difficulty level to be adjusted according to the player's skill level, enabling player-participation presentations at an appropriate difficulty level for many players, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game provided by this gaming machine.

The point-based presentation described above was intended for use during a reach (a near-win) sequence, but it could also be used during a jackpot (jackpot gameplay). In the case of a jackpot presentation, points could be awarded based on the number of balls entering the jackpot slot. Furthermore, the points earned could indicate the gameplay state after the jackpot ends; for example, it could indicate whether or not the player will be in a favorable state after the jackpot. This configuration allows players to actively participate in the presentation even during jackpot gameplay, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during jackpot sequences, the display color and background color of the points may be changed in stages according to the points earned. Additionally, the jackpot sequence (bell-ringing sequence) may end when the points earned reach a specific point total. This configuration makes it easier for players to understand the progress of their jackpot gameplay by allowing them to earn points based on the number of balls entering the jackpot slot.

[37-3-5. Another example of point-based presentation]
Finally, let's explain another example of a point-based presentation. In the point-based presentation described above, the bell-ringing intensity was specified by the intensity specification unit 8102, but in this case, the bell-ringing intensity is specified according to the attributes of the worshipper (gender, age, etc.). Figure 531 shows an example of bell-ringing intensity based on the attributes of the worshipper. Referring to Figure 531, the intensity is set higher for men with strong arms, and lower for children with weak arms. With this configuration, the point-based presentation can be performed without displaying the intensity specification unit 8102. In this case, the bell-ringing intensity may be displayed as an auxiliary.

Figure 532 illustrates the progression of points earned from the start of a point-scoring animation when the bell-ringing intensity is specified based on the attributes of the worshippers. Figure 528 shows a scenario where N worshippers appear and sequentially ring the bell at the specified intensity. Furthermore, the expectation level is "high," indicating an animation featuring many worshippers.

First, the first worshipper appears, and since the worshipper is male, the bell-ringing intensity is set to "strong." At this point, the player operates the rotary control unit 302 to set the intensity to "strong," earning 5 points. The next worshipper is a child, so the intensity is set to "weak." However, because the bell is struck at "medium" intensity, no points are earned, and the total points remain unchanged.

The operation of the rotary control unit 302 continues as described above until the last (Nth) worshipper has finished ringing the bell. Once all worshippers have finished ringing the bell, the preview animation shown in Figure 530 is executed based on the total points earned.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing player-participation features that can be accessed with relatively simple operations.

[37-4. Summary of Player Participation Features]
The following are representative aspects of the inventions related to player-participation-type performances disclosed in this specification.

The gaming machine that realizes the player-participation type performance disclosed herein is
A game board having a game area, and a main frame that detachably supports the game board,
A door frame is provided with a game window that is supported on the front of the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and when closed, allows the player to see the game area of the game board supported by the main frame from the front.
A starting prize slot capable of accepting game balls,
A display device capable of displaying the results of a special lottery that may be executed when a game ball is received into the aforementioned starting prize slot,
It comprises a drive unit that operates by power.

Furthermore, below the game window provided in the door frame, there is a ball tray capable of storing game balls dispensed in response to the entry of game balls into the starting prize slot, and an operating means (performance operation unit 301) that receives operations from the player and can change the display on the display device.

Furthermore, the game board is equipped with a special prize slot that operates to accept game balls when the result of the special lottery is a special result.

The aforementioned operating means can receive operations from the player and change the display on the display device, and can operate the drive unit. It also has a first operating unit (rotating unit 302) capable of receiving the player's first operation (rotating operation) and a second operating unit (rotating unit 303) capable of receiving a second operation (pressing operation) from the player that is different from the first operation.

By further incorporating the following characteristic features into the above configuration of the gaming machine, the unique effects of the present invention can be achieved.

(1) The drive strength of the drive unit can be changed by the amount of the player's first operation on the first operating unit.
The display device is characterized in that it has a specific display effect that can be executed only when the amount of operation for the first operation exceeds a specific amount and the drive unit operates with a specific drive strength or higher.

By having the configuration of (1), in a player-participation type performance, if the amount of operation of the first operation unit (rotation operation unit 302) is appropriate, the drive strength necessary for the game (bell ringing) is successfully applied to the drive unit, and if the amount of operation is insufficient, the game (bell ringing) fails. If the game is successful, a specific display performance that is not performed when the game fails can be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In this way, game elements are added to the performance, and by executing a specific performance when the game is successful, it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in the game.

(2) The first operating unit (rotating operating unit 302) of the operating means is positioned in a reference position when it is not receiving rotational operation from the player.
The second operating unit, which is capable of receiving operations other than rotational operations, is capable of receiving pressing operations by the player.
The first operating unit is operated by a player from the reference position to the operating position, and the tip position of the receiving unit that receives the player's pressing operation on the second operating unit is displaced in response to the player's operation on the first operating unit.

(2) With this configuration, the pressing portion (pressing portion 303a) of the second operation unit (pressing operation unit 303) is displaced by the operation of the first operation unit (rotation operation unit 302). In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 causes the outer circumference 303b to extend upward, and the pressing portion 303a to rise. This prevents accidental pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 while operating the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing errors during the execution of player-participation effects and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(3) The drive unit is characterized in that, while it is operating, the operation of the drive unit can be stopped by the player's second operation on the second control unit.

By having the configuration described in (3), it becomes possible to temporarily interrupt the player-participation performance, allowing players to easily intervene in the progress of the game (the progress of the performance), thereby enhancing the performance effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second operating part (pressing operating part 303) of the operating means is configured such that the tip position of the operating receiving part (pressing part 303a) that receives the pressing operation of the player can be displaced between an initial position and a protruding position which is a position that protrudes more than the initial position.
When the tip of the operating receiver of the second operating unit is in its initial position, the player can grasp the operating receiver and displace the tip of the operating receiver to a protruding position.
The first operating unit (rotating operating unit 302) operates in accordance with the displacement of the tip position of the operating unit when the player displaces the tip position of the operating unit from its initial position to a protruding position.

With the configuration of (4), the tip position of the second operation unit (pressing operation unit 303) is displaced by operating the first operation unit (rotating operation unit 302), but the player can rotate the rotating part of the first operation unit (rotating operation unit 302) by displacing the tip position of the second operation unit (pressing operation unit 303). This enables a variety of performance operations and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, displacing the second operating section (pressing operating section 303) does not allow for sufficient force to be secured to perform the operation of the drive unit (the driving force required to strike the bell in the bell-ringing performance) even when the first operating section (rotating operating section 302) is rotated. This limits the operation of the drive unit to the operation of the first operating section (rotating operating section 302), thereby suppressing the complexity of the performance operation.

(5) When the drive strength of the drive unit is specified, if the drive strength of the drive unit set based on the operating amount of the first operating unit does not meet the specified drive strength, a predetermined notification is given.

By having the configuration of (5), in player-participation-type performances, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by adding variations to the performance when the player operates the rotating control unit with a specified amount of input. Furthermore, by adding a game element to the performance, and by informing the player of the expected probability of symbol changes upon success in the game (for example, when the bell is struck with a specified force), the player can be actively encouraged to participate in the game.

(6) The driving intensity of the drive unit can be specified for a specific period,
A feature is that if the driving strength of the drive unit is specified as a predetermined driving strength during the specified period, a driving strength different from the predetermined driving strength can be specified after the elapsed period.

In the game machine of this embodiment, if a different intensity (the driving intensity of the drive mechanism that operates the bell-ringing rod) is specified for each consecutively appearing worshippers, as in the continuous performance and point-based performances, the difficulty level may become too high, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, by having the configuration of (6), the difficulty level can be adjusted by continuing to specify the same intensity for a predetermined period, and then specifying a different intensity after that period has elapsed. This allows for adjustment of the difficulty level of the player-participation performance and maximizes the enjoyment of the game.

(7) If the player is not in contact with the operating means, the game will stop.
The system is characterized by executing a predetermined animation when the player touches the control unit while the game is stopped.

With the configuration of (7), when the bell-ringing effect is being executed, after the rotary operation unit 302 becomes ready for operation, if the player touches the rotary operation unit 302, an audio signal indicating the start of the effect will be output, or music for the bell-ringing effect will be played. This configuration strongly reinforces the player's awareness of participating in the bell-ringing effect, increasing the player's anticipation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[38. Means for suppressing excessive prize balls]
The above explains player-participation features. Now, let's explain in more detail the control provided by the excessive payout suppression mechanism. As mentioned above, the excessive payout suppression mechanism is a mechanism that stops the game when the reference value (comparison value) based on the difference (difference in balls) between the payout expected by the gaming machine and the actual payout exceeds a predetermined threshold (excess payout).

[38-1. Calculation of Reference Values (Comparison Values)]
First, we will explain in detail how to calculate the reference value (comparison value, difference in balls) in the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. As explained in Figure 503, the difference in balls is the difference between the value counted based on the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls, out balls, safe balls) (first count value) and the value counted based on prize balls (second count value). The reference value (comparison value) is calculated based on the difference in balls.

[38-1-1. Values counted based on the number of game balls consumed in the game: First count value]
First, let's explain the value (first count value) that is counted based on the game balls consumed during the game. Game balls consumed during the game include, for example, the balls launched and the balls that go out of bounds.

The number of balls launched is the number of balls launched from the ball launching device 680 and guided into the game area 5a via rails 1001 and 1002 located above the game area 5a. The number of balls out is the number of game balls that left the game area 5a. Therefore, the number of balls out and the number of balls launched are the same and can be treated as equivalent.

As a method for calculating the number of balls launched, for example, a launching ball supply sensor (not shown) that detects the game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 and a foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects game balls launched from the ball launching device 680 but that did not reach the game area 5a (so-called foul balls) are provided, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 as detected by the launching ball supply sensor.

Another method for calculating the number of launched balls is as follows: After being driven into the game area 5a, game balls that have rolled due to collisions with nails or other objects may return to the rails 1001 and 1002. To address this, a backflow prevention member 1007 is provided to prevent game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a from re-entering the rails. In this case, a launch ball sensor 1020 is provided to detect game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, in order to detect game balls passing through the backflow prevention member 1007. The number of game balls detected by the launch ball sensor 1020 is taken as the number of launched balls. In this case, it is possible to exclude game balls that were ejected due to insufficient launch force, thus accurately detecting the number of game balls driven into the game area 5a. Note that the launch ball sensor 1020 only needs to be installed at a position within the game area where game balls are guaranteed to pass, and can be installed either before or after the backflow prevention member 1007.

Out-of-bounds balls can be detected by the ball discharge sensor 3060. As shown in Figure 4, the ball discharge sensor 3060 is located at the discharge port that discharges game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, an out-port ball sensor 1021 (see Figure 53) is provided at the bottom of the game area 5a to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111. The number of out balls may be determined by summing the number of game balls detected by the out-port ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start-port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various prize-winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557.

The first count value may be updated in the timer interrupt processing switch input processing (step P102), or within the game-ready processing. If performed within the game-ready processing, it may, for example, be done in the switch-related control processing (step 01TKS0010), or at the same time as calculating the second count value in the prize ball control processing, or a separate process (subroutine) may be created.

Furthermore, if a new process (subroutine) for calculating the first count value is to be established, it may be placed and executed outside the game area (outside the usage area). When executed outside the game area, the reading of signals from each switch's input ports may be performed within the game area, the results of which are stored in a predetermined memory area allocated to the main control RAM 1312, and then the calculation may be performed by referencing the contents of that memory area during the processing outside the game area. In this case, the input port signals are read only during processing within the game area, but since the calculation process is performed based on the information generated from the read input port signals, the input port signals are used by both the processing within the game area and the processing outside the game area.

[38-1-2. Values calculated based on prize balls: Second count value]
Next, we will explain the value (second count value) that is counted based on the number of prize balls. The second count value is, for example, the number of safe balls, and is equal to the number of prize balls dispensed. The value counted based on the number of prize balls is the sum of the number of prize balls set for each prize entry point, and corresponds to, for example, the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout control board 951 (actual number of balls dispensed) or the planned number of prize balls calculated by the main control board 1310. The calculation of the actual number of balls dispensed and the planned number of prize balls will be explained below.

Furthermore, the entry of game balls into each prize slot is detected by reading the signals from the input ports in the switch-related control processing (Figure 354). At this time, the input information is stored in the memory area (prize ball judgment area; PAY_JDG_AR) allocated to the main control RAM 1312, and is used not only by processes such as prize ball control processing located within the game area, but also by performance display monitor processing and processes that calculate reference values (comparison values) and count values located outside the game area.

[38-1-2a. Actual number of balls dispensed]
As mentioned above, the actual number of balls dispensed is the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout control board 951. Here, we will explain the process performed by the payout control board 951 to calculate the actual number of balls dispensed.

When power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 processes the payout control program using the payout control MPU 954a, thereby executing the power-on processing for the payout control unit. Figures 533 and 534 are flowcharts showing the procedure for the power-on processing for the payout control unit.

When the power-on processing for the payout control unit begins, the payout control MPU 954a sets the interrupt mode (step 09TKS0010). The interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority for the payout control MPU 954a. Next, the payout control MPU 954a performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) to configure its various input and output ports (step 09TKS0020).

Next, the payout control MPU 954a performs a wait timer process 1 to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) after power-on until the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes (step 09TKS0030). Furthermore, the wait timer process 1 is repeatedly executed until the power outage warning signal (payout power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is no longer input (step 09TKS0040).

Next, the payout control MPU 954a sets a payout RAM clear notification flag based on whether or not the operation switch 952 for instructing RAM clearing has been operated (steps 09TKS0050 to 09TKS0070). If the operation switch 952 is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag is set; if the operation switch 952 is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag is cleared. The payout RAM clear notification flag indicates whether or not to erase the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout memory unit) of the payout control MPU 954a, such as various flags and various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked, actual ball count (actual number of balls paid), drive command count, mismatch counter, etc., stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY signal output setting information, etc., stored in the CR communication information storage area).

Next, the payout control MPU 954a grants access to the built-in payout control RAM (step 09TKS0080). Furthermore, it sets the stack pointer (step 09TKS0090).

Next, the payout control MPU 954a determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag is set (step 09TKS0100). If the payout RAM clear notification flag is set (the result of step 09TKS0100 is "Yes"), that is, if the payout control built-in RAM needs to be cleared, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step 09TKS0150), and then the working area of the payout control built-in RAM is reset (step 09TKS0160).

On the other hand, if the payout RAM clear notification flag is not set (the result of step 09TKS0100 is "No"), that is, if the built-in payout control RAM is not cleared, the payout control MPU 954a calculates a checksum (step 09TKS0110) and determines whether it matches the checksum stored before the power cut-off (step 09TKS0120). If the checksum values do not match (the result of step 09TKS0120 is "No"), there is a possibility that the information has not been stored correctly, so the processing from step 09TKS0150 onwards is executed to clear the RAM.

On the other hand, if the checksum stored before the power outage matches (the result of step 09TKS0120 is "Yes"), the dispensing control MPU 954a determines whether the dispensing backup flag is set (step 09TKS0130). The dispensing backup flag indicates whether dispensing backup information, such as dispensing information and the checksum value, was stored in the dispensing control's built-in RAM during the power outage processing of the dispensing control unit described later. If the dispensing backup flag is not set (the result of step 09TKS0130 is "No"), the dispensing control MPU 954a executes the processing from step 09TKS0150 onwards to clear the RAM.

On the other hand, if the payout backup flag is set (the result of step 09 TKS0130 is "Yes"), that is, if the power was shut off properly, the power restoration settings are performed on the work area of the built-in payout control RAM (step 09 TKS0150). At this time, the payout backup flag is cleared, and the power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU 954a (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control ROM") and set in the work area of the built-in payout control RAM.

Once the RAM work area configuration is complete, the payout control MPU 954a performs interrupt-related settings (step 09 TKS0170). Specifically, it sets the interrupt period (2 ms) for timer interrupt processing and enables interrupts.

Next, the payout control MPU 954a executes the payout control unit main processing (steps 09TKS0180 to 09TKS0300). This main processing is executed continuously while the game is progressing normally and controls the payout of prize balls, etc.

When the main processing of the payout control unit begins, the payout control MPU 954a first clears the watchdog timer (step 09TKS0180). Furthermore, it determines whether a power outage warning signal (payout power outage warning signal) has been input (step 09TKS0190). If a power outage warning signal has been input (result of step 09TKS0190 is "Yes"), the payout control unit power outage processing is executed (step 09TKS0320).

During the power-off processing for the payout control unit, interrupts are disabled to prevent writing to the built-in RAM of the payout control unit, thus protecting against overwriting of payout information. Furthermore, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is stopped, halting the payout of game balls. Other processes include clearing the watchdog timer, calculating and storing the checksum, and setting the payout backup flag. Afterward, an infinite loop continues until the power is restored and the payout control MPU 954a is reset.

On the other hand, if no power outage warning signal is input (the result of step 09TKS0190 is "No"), the dispensing control MPU 954a determines whether 2 milliseconds have elapsed since the main dispensing control unit process was executed (step 09TKS0200). If 2 milliseconds have not elapsed since the main dispensing control unit process was executed (the result of step 09TKS0200 is "No"), the process returns to the beginning of the main dispensing control unit process (step 09TKS0180). In other words, the main processes of the main dispensing control unit process (steps 09TKS0210 to 09TKS0300) are executed at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds).

If 2 milliseconds have elapsed since the main processing of the payout control unit was executed (the result of step 09TKS0200 is "Yes"), the payout control MPU 954a initializes the measurement for a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) (step 09TKS0210). Initializing the measurement for the predetermined time (2 milliseconds) may involve initializing the timer that measures the predetermined time, or clearing the flag set in the timer interrupt processing.

The dispensing control MPU 954a performs port output processing (step 09 TKS0220). During port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM, and based on this information, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the dispensing control MPU 954a.

The output information storage area stores various information, such as payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received, drive information for controlling the payout motor 834, prize ball count information for the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 834, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator 953. Based on this output information, the payout control MPU 954a outputs various signals to the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 784.

Next, the dispensing control MPU 954a performs port input processing (step 09 TKS0230). During port input processing, the various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU 954a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

For example, the operation signal from the operation switch 952, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the detection signal from the counting switch, the detection signal from the full tank switch, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, and the main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, are all read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

The payout control MPU 954a executes a timer update process (step 09 TKS0240). The timer update process manages the ball entry detection time, ball removal detection time, full tank detection time, and ball depletion detection time, etc.

The payout control MPU 954a executes CR communication processing (step 09 TKS0250). In CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are being input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 954a exchanges signals with the CR unit.

The payout control MPU 954a performs full-capacity and ball-out check processing (step 09 TKS0260). In the full-capacity and ball-out check processing, based on the input information in the input information storage area, it determines whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 520 is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full-capacity switch, and determines whether the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 827.

The payout control MPU 954a executes command reception processing (step 09 TKS0270). During command reception processing, it receives various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310, such as prize ball commands and self-check commands. When the various commands are received successfully, the payout ACK information is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, if the various commands are not received successfully, connection abnormality information indicating that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 (an abnormality in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area.

The dispensing control MPU 954a executes command analysis processing (step 09 TKS0280). In the command analysis processing, the command received in the command reception processing is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

The payout control MPU 954a executes the main operation setting process (step 09 TKS0290). This main operation setting process involves setting operations such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal, and ball jamming, determining retry operations, and monitoring the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock). The process of calculating the actual number of balls dispensed is included in the main operation setting process.

The payout control MPU 954a executes the LED display data creation process (step 09 TKS0300). In the LED display data creation process, various information is read from the status information storage area, display data is created to be displayed on the error LED indicator 953 of the payout control board 951, and this data is stored in the output information storage area as LED display information. For example, if the above-mentioned bulb failure information is read from the status information storage area, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on this bulb failure information is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

The payout control MPU 954a executes command transmission processing (step 09 TKS0310). During command transmission processing, various information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this information, various commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created and transmitted to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, error information, including the error details, is read from the status information storage area, and machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko machines, along with an error information signal based on the said error information, are output to the hall computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 784.

After the command transmission process is completed, the dispensing control MPU 954a returns to the processing of step 09TKS0590 and continues the main processing of the dispensing control unit.

The actual number of balls dispensed is stored in the output information storage area and counted in the dispensed ball count determination setting process, which is called from the dispensed ball count determination setting process in the main operation setting process. The actual number of balls dispensed is the number of game balls actually dispensed by the dispensed motor 834 and is counted by a counting switch provided in the prize ball path. The detection signal from the counting switch is received by the port input processing (step 09 TKS0230). The dispensed control MPU 954a adds a predetermined number of prize balls to the actual number of balls dispensed based on the detection signal from the counting switch and stores it in the prize ball information storage area of the dispensed control's built-in RAM. It also stores the prize ball count information in the output information storage area of the dispensed control's built-in RAM, and based on this prize ball count information, the actual number of balls dispensed (second count value) is notified to the main control board 1310 by the command transmission processing (step 09 TKS0310).

[38-1-2a. Planned number of prize balls]
The above describes how the payout control board 951 calculates a value (second count value) based on the prize balls during the payout process. Next, we will explain how the main control board 1310 calculates a value corresponding to the value (second count value, safe ball count) based on the prize balls. First, we will explain how the second count value is calculated during the process of sending a prize ball command to the payout control board 951, and then we will explain how a new process for calculating the second count value is provided and placed outside the game area.

When a game ball enters a prize slot, the main control MPU 1311 stores the switch input information in the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) via the switch input processing (Figure 288) within the timer interrupt processing. The prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR), as shown in Figure 287(B), consists of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each bit is stored. Furthermore, for prize slots with a set validity period, each bit in the prize ball determination area is set to "1" (ON) only if the sensor detects a ball during the validity period. In the prize ball control processing, a prize ball command including the number of prize balls is sent based on the value stored in the prize ball determination area, and the planned number of prize balls (second count value) is calculated.

When the payout control board 951 receives a prize ball command from the main control board 1310 (command reception processing; 09TKS0270), it dispenses the corresponding number of prize balls (game balls) based on the prize ball command (command analysis processing; 09TKS0280) (main operation setting processing; 09TKS0290). The prize ball command consists of two bytes and is transmitted byte by byte. The process of creating the prize ball command is a prize ball control process included in the game-ready processing executed by the timer interrupt (step 01TKS0040 in Figure 354). The procedure for the prize ball control process is described below.

(Prize ball control processing)
Figure 535 is a flowchart showing the procedure for prize ball control processing. In prize ball control processing, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the prize slot, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951 to notify it of the number of prize balls corresponding to that entry. Furthermore, the control status of the payout control board 951 is checked, and according to the check result, the payout control board 951 is instructed to perform a self-diagnosis (self-check) as necessary.

The main control unit (MPU) 1311 first performs a prize ball count addition process to calculate the number of prize balls (step 09 TKS0410). In the prize ball count addition process, it first retrieves the data stored in the prize ball determination area and determines whether a prize has been won at each prize slot. Furthermore, if it is determined that a game ball has entered a prize slot, the payout memory area (number of prizes) corresponding to the winning slot is updated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not it is in the payer ACK signal standby state (step 09 TKS0420). The payer ACK signal standby state is a state in which the main control board 1310 has sent a command, such as a prize ball command, to the payout control board 951, and is waiting for the main control board 1310 to receive a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the command has been received.

The main control MPU 1311, when in a payout ACK signal waiting state (result of step 09TKS0420 is "Yes"), determines whether the waiting time has elapsed (step 09TKS0560). If the predetermined waiting time has not elapsed (result of step 09TKS0560 is "No"), the prize ball control process is terminated.

If the predetermined waiting time elapses while the payer ACK signal is in standby mode (resulting in "Yes" in step 09 TKS0560), the main control MPU 1311 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and sets a command indicating the connection abnormality (step 09 TKS0570). Furthermore, it sets the self-check transmission request setting data (step 09 TKS0580). After that, the prize ball control process ends.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 is not in a payout ACK signal standby state (the result of step 09TKS0420 is "No"), it determines whether there is any untransmitted data (step 09TKS0430). If there is untransmitted data (the result of step 09TKS0430 is "Yes"), it waits until the untransmitted data is transmitted, and then terminates the prize ball control process.

If there is no unsent data (the result of step 09TKS0430 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the second byte of the prize ball command has been sent (step 09TKS0440). If the second byte of the prize ball command has not been sent (the result of step 09TKS0440 is "No"), the processing from step 09TKS0530 onwards is executed, and the second byte of the prize ball command is sent. Details of the processing will be described later.

If the second byte of the prize ball command has already been sent (the result of step 09TKS0440 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to send a self-check command (step 09TKS0450). This determination can be made based on whether or not the self-check command is sent based on whether the self-check transmission request setting data is set. If the self-check command is to be sent (the result of step 09TKS0450 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the self-check command (step 09TKS0460).

If a self-check command is not sent (the result of step 09TKS0450 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 refers to the payout memory area and determines whether there are any winning combinations that will award prize balls (step 09TKS0470). If there are no winning combinations (the result of step 09TKS0470 is "No"), the prize ball control process terminates.

On the other hand, if there is a winning combination that will award prize balls (the result of step 09TKS0470 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the prize ball command (first byte) (step 09TKS0480). The prize ball command (first byte) is selected based on the value in the payout memory area.

The main control MPU 1311 transmits the prize ball command (first byte) set in step 09TKS0480, or the self-check command set in step 09TKS0460 (step 09TKS0490).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the prize ball command (first byte) has been sent (step 09TKS0500). If the prize ball command (first byte) has not been sent (the result of step 09TKS0500 is "No"), that is, if the self-check command has been sent, the prize ball control process terminates.

When the prize ball command (first byte) is sent (the result of step 09TKS0500 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 increments (updates) the prize ball count (step 09TKS0510). The prize ball count updated here corresponds to the second count value and is used to calculate the reference value (comparison value).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets the prize ball command (second byte) (step 09TKS0520) and transmits the command (step 09TKS0530).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets the connection abnormality detection time (waiting time for the payer ACK signal) (step 09TKS0540) and sets the payer ACK signal waiting state (step 09TKS0550). After that, the prize ball control process ends.

The above explains how to update the second count value, both when performed on the payout control board 951 and when performed on the main control board 1310. Next, we will explain the process of updating the reference value (comparison value, difference in balls) based on the first and second count values.

[38-2. Updating the reference value (comparison value) (reference value counter update process)]
As mentioned above, the reference value (comparison value) is the difference between the first count value, which is calculated based on the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls, out balls, safe balls), and the second count value, which is calculated based on the number of prize balls. As explained in Figure 503, the reference value (comparison value) includes the maximum value of the difference in balls when the start of the measurement period is set to 0 (first reference value, first comparison value) and the difference between the minimum and maximum values of the difference in balls during the measurement period (second reference value, second comparison value).

Since the reference value (comparison value) is updated during gameplay, the reference value counter update process is called during the game-ready process (Figure 354). The execution timing of the reference value counter update process can be after the switch-related control process (01TKS0010) to avoid discrepancies with the history information. For example, it may be after the performance display monitor process (01TKS0070) or before the performance display monitor process (01TKS0070). By including the reference value (comparison value) in the various information displayed on the base monitor by the performance display monitor process, the operating status of the excessive prize ball suppression means can be confirmed.

As a specific example of the execution timing of the reference value counter update process, for instance, the process of calculating the first count value and the process of calculating the second count value are executed in the game-ready processing, and the reference value counter update process is executed after these count value calculation processes. In this case, the second count value is calculated in the prize ball control processing, i.e., calculated on the main control board 1310 side, making it possible to obtain each count value within the same timer interrupt processing and calculate the reference value (comparison value). This minimizes the timing difference in updating each count value, allowing for more accurate calculation of the reference value (comparison value).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the processes for calculating the first and second count values may be performed outside the game area. In this case, information based on the input port signals is stored in a predetermined memory area of the main control RAM 1312 using switch-related control processing (Figure 354), and each count value is calculated by referring to this memory area.

Furthermore, when accessing input port information from the main control RAM 1312's memory area during processing outside the game area, the bit information of the referenced switch (port) is checked sequentially. If it is ON, the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the second count value. This process is repeated for all target winning slots, allowing the second count value to be calculated in real time without delay within a single timer interrupt, even with multiple winning entries. On the other hand, in processing within the game area, only a single prize ball command is generated per timer interrupt. Therefore, if game balls enter multiple winning slots simultaneously (within a single timer interrupt), it becomes necessary to create the uncreated prize ball commands in subsequent timer interrupts, resulting in a time lag between winning and the start of prize ball calculation. Calculating the count value in processing outside the game area eliminates this time lag.

Furthermore, it is possible to count not only the winning entries but also the number of outputs (first count value), and the bit information of each switch (port) is similarly referenced in the performance display monitor processing. Therefore, a common area (the area where the bit information of each switch (port) is stored) is referenced in both the process for calculating the reference value (comparison value) and the performance display monitor processing.

Furthermore, the reference value counter update process may be executed after the switch input process (step P102 in Figure 329) in the timer interrupt process, rather than being called from the game-ready processing.

The reference value counter update process itself does not directly affect the progress of the game; therefore, the program for executing the reference value counter update process is located outside the game area, similar to the performance display monitor process. For this reason, when executing the reference value counter update process, the stack pointer and registers are saved before the main processing is performed. Details of the process will be described later.

Furthermore, the reference value counter update process is called by the INVI instruction. This makes it easier to separate processing outside the game area, simplifying program management. Additionally, since interrupts are disabled when the INVI instruction is executed, interrupts are disabled while processing outside the game area is running, ensuring independence from processing stored within the game area and guaranteeing safety.

The reference value (comparison value) can be updated by setting the initial value to 0 and adding the number of prize balls up to a predetermined threshold, or by setting the predetermined threshold as the initial value and subtracting the number of prize balls. Furthermore, even if the condition (first condition) for the reference value (comparison value) reaching a predetermined value is met, if the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means is suspended due to other conditions (second condition, for example, the end of the ongoing game state), the update of the reference value (comparison value) is disabled thereafter, and control is made to prevent the reference value (comparison value) from being updated. In this case, if the reference value (comparison value) reaches a predetermined threshold, further updates may be prevented. Finally, the game is stopped when all the operating conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression means are met.

In other words, the game stop factor (PLAY_STOP_NO) is set when the activation conditions (game stop conditions) for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are fully met. However, if even some of the conditions are not met, the reference value (comparison value) is updated until it reaches a predetermined value. Even after the reference value (comparison value) reaches the predetermined value, if the stop conditions are not fully met, the game continues without updating the reference value.

Since the reference value counter update process is located outside the game area, it is intended to be standardized and used across multiple machine models. In particular, when the initial value of the reference value (comparison value) is set as the upper limit (threshold), and the system is controlled to update by subtracting this value, it becomes possible to standardize the control when the threshold is reached (when the reference value becomes 0). Even when multiple types of thresholds need to be set due to differences in game specifications or machine models, the processing can be standardized. This configuration increases the program's versatility and improves the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Next, we will specifically explain the procedure for updating the reference value counter. Figure 536 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for updating the reference value counter.

When the reference value counter update process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first saves the stack pointer used in the game area (step 09TKS0610) and sets a stack pointer for use outside the game area (step 09TKS0620). Furthermore, it saves various registers used in the game area to a predetermined area (step 09TKS0630).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 updates the reference value (comparison value) (step 09 TKS0640). While the reference value (comparison value) could be updated by setting the initial value to 0 and adding the number of prize balls, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the threshold value is set as the initial value and the machine is controlled to subtract it according to the number of prize balls.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 restores the various registers used in the game area processing (step 09TKS0650), sets the stack pointer used in the game area processing (step 09TKS0660), and terminates the reference value counter update process. Afterward, it returns to the calling process via the BKI instruction and returns to the interrupt state before processing execution.

[38-3. Operational control of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the game is stopped due to factors such as errors, a game stop factor number corresponding to the game stop factor (PLAY_STOP_NO) is set. A game stop factor number corresponding to stopping due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means is also defined, and when the activation conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression means are met, the game stop factor number corresponding to the excessive prize ball suppression means is set.

While multiple types of game-stopping factors are defined, they are not set redundantly. If multiple game-stopping factors occur simultaneously, the one with the highest priority is set. Therefore, the game-stopping factors are determined and set in descending order of priority, with the highest priority factor being determined last. This ensures that higher-priority factors overwrite lower-priority factors, ultimately resulting in the highest-priority factor being set. This control method eliminates the need to branch processing for each game-stopping factor, thus reducing the complexity of the control. For example, game-stopping factors that significantly hinder game continuation, such as magnetic anomalies, can be given a high priority, while game-stopping factors such as the activation of an over-prize ball suppression mechanism (which would otherwise allow the game to proceed normally) can be set relatively lower.

Furthermore, since the reference value counter update process is located outside the game area, it does not perform any processes that directly affect the progress of the game; only the process of updating the reference value (comparison value) is executed. Therefore, the reference value counter update process does not include any process to set the game stop factor number in order to activate the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, after the execution of the reference value counter update process, a process is executed to set a game stop factor number in order to activate the excessive prize ball suppression means. For example, in the game-ready processing, if the reference value counter update process is executed before the performance display monitor process is executed, it is determined immediately after the reference value counter update process whether the activation conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression means are met. In this case, if the result of the reference value counter update process is to be reflected in the execution result of the performance display monitor process, the determination of the activation conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression means may be performed after the execution of the performance display monitor process.

When the activation conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are met and a game stop reason number is set, the main control MPU 1311 terminates the game-ready processing and returns to the timer interrupt processing. Then, when the timer interrupt processing is executed in the next cycle, because the game stop reason number has been set, the game stop processing (Figure 330) is executed instead of the game-ready processing.

Furthermore, since the game stop process directly affects the progress of the game, it is placed within the game area. Alternatively, instead of the game stop process, the system may control the game by forcibly stopping the launch of game balls. This process of stopping the launch of game balls (launch stop process) is also located within the game area, similar to the game stop process.

Furthermore, when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, a security signal is output from the external terminal, similar to when the game stops due to other factors, and all LEDs constituting the function display unit 1400 turn off. Alternatively, instead of turning off all LEDs constituting the function display unit 1400, a display that allows the player to recognize that the game machine's functions have stopped may be used. Moreover, not limited to the function display unit 1400, decorative LEDs may be turned off or only some decorative LEDs may be lit to allow the player to recognize that the game has stopped.

Furthermore, when the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated, after the completion animation ends, an audio output notifying the game to stop will continue for a certain period of time, and then stop. However, in the case of potential fraudulent activity such as magnetic anomalies, the audio (alarm) output notifying the game to stop will continue without stopping. The same applies to notifications via screen displays and lights. Since the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism is normal operation, the audio output stops after a predetermined time, but notifications via screen displays and lights continue. This allows the gaming machine with the activated excessive payout suppression mechanism to be maintained (left unattended) without the power being cut off until the end of business hours. Note that audio (alarm) outputs that do not stop after a certain period of time, such as those for vibration anomalies or magnetic anomalies, will be stopped by restarting the gaming machine's power.

Furthermore, when setting the game stop factor number, a command to notify the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when a state is reached that is likely to satisfy the activation conditions of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism—for example, when the reference value falls below a predetermined value (or above a predetermined value in the case of subtraction updates)—a command to perform an advance notification of the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The notification process, in which the peripheral control board 1510 receives and executes these commands, will be described later in Figure 538 and subsequent figures.

Furthermore, commands for notifying the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism and commands for executing a pre-notification of the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism may be generated in processing within the game area or in processing outside the game area. Regardless of which area the command is generated in, the command will be transmitted in processing within the game area. When transmitting a generated command from processing outside the game area, separate command transmission processes must be defined for transmitting commands generated within the game area and for transmitting commands generated outside the game area. In this case, even if there are common parts in the program code of the command transmission processes for each area, they should be defined individually rather than subroutines. This is because processing outside the game area can be used on different machine models, while processing within the game area has limitations such as capacity constraints. Therefore, prioritizing capacity saving and processing speed over program code versatility, even if it is machine-dependent, is essential.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with an over-prize ball suppression means that stops the game when the reference value (comparison value) based on the difference (difference in balls) between the expected payout and the actual payout exceeds a predetermined threshold (over-prize balls). The over-prize ball suppression means counts the number of count values necessary for calculating the reference value using the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, determines whether the over-prize ball suppression means can be activated on the main control board 1310, and stops the game if the activation conditions are met.

Furthermore, the calculation of the count value (second count value) corresponding to the game value (prize balls) awarded to the player may be performed by the prize ball control processing on the main control board 1310 (planned number of prize balls) or by the payout control board 951 (actual number of payouts). When the count value is calculated on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 does not perform processing related to the excessive prize ball suppression means; all processing related to the excessive prize ball suppression means is performed on the main control board 1310, simplifying program management and improving development efficiency. On the other hand, by calculating the count value on the payout control board 951, the processing load can be reduced, and the memory capacity of the main control board 1310 can be reduced.

[38-4. Initialization of Reference Values]
The reference value (comparison value) is initialized (cleared) at the start of operation (when the power is turned on). At this time, various count values (first count value, second count value) are also initialized (cleared). When the reference value (comparison value) is initialized, a predetermined threshold value should be set if the value is updated by subtraction. If the value is updated by addition, "0" should be set. Also, various count values are set to "0" at this time. If the initial value is set to "0" when adding or subtracting from the count values, there is a possibility of overflow (underflow) occurring when the first subtraction is performed, so in this case it is advisable to set a predetermined threshold value for the initial value.

The excessive payout suppression mechanism is a function that stops the game when certain operating conditions are met, such as when the reference value (comparison value) reaches its upper limit, in order to prevent excessive payouts. Therefore, if the reference value (comparison value) is fraudulently reset, the reference value (comparison value) will be counted again from the beginning, potentially resulting in the payout of far more payouts than intended and causing significant damage to the arcade.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the reference value (comparison value) is initialized when the power is turned on. However, even when the power is turned back on to terminate notifications for vibration abnormalities, magnetic abnormalities, etc., the machine is configured to continue retaining the reference value (comparison value) as long as it is stored in the RAM.

This is because resetting the reference value (comparison value) by restarting the power could cause the reference value (comparison value) to be cleared just before the activation conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are met by intentionally causing an anomaly, potentially resulting in more prize balls being paid out than intended. Furthermore, even without fraudulent activity, the reference value (comparison value) may be reset due to sensor malfunctions, etc. Additionally, even in cases of an anomaly that can be resolved without restarting the power, the power may be restarted to terminate the alarm sound output. In such cases, if gameplay is resumed after restarting the power, the reference value (comparison value) may be reset, potentially resulting in more prize balls being paid out than intended.

In this embodiment, to solve the above-mentioned problems, it is possible to determine whether the power cut-off is for error resolution or for other reasons, such as at the end of business hours, when the power is turned on, and then determine whether or not to reset the reference value (comparison value) based on the determination result.

Specifically, if an abnormality occurs during gameplay that requires a power interruption, the game stop error flag is set to "ON" (a value other than 0). This triggers the timer interrupt process (Figure 329) to determine that a game stop is possible (resulting in "Yes" in step P105), and the game stop processing (step P107; Figure 330) is executed.

Furthermore, during the game stop processing, the game stop data is configured to include a game stop error flag (steps P125, P126), and this flag is stored in a predetermined area. The area where the game stop error flag is stored is maintained by the backup power supply even after a power outage.

Furthermore, the value set for the game stop error flag may not only be ON ("1") / OFF ("0"), but may also be set to a different value depending on the type of error that occurred. For example, it may be set to "1" for magnetic anomalies and "2" for vibration anomalies. In this case, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to initialize the reference value (comparison value) depending on the type of error, allowing for more precise control.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, information related to the excessive prize ball suppression means is stored outside the game area (outside the usage area) and is maintained without initialization even if an abnormality occurs in the game information within the game area (however, it is initialized if there is an abnormality in the RAM outside the game area). The reference value (comparison value) and the game stop error flag are stored outside the game area if they are set outside the game area, and stored within the game area if they are set within the game area.

Outside the game area, information related to the excessive payout suppression mechanism (programs and data), as well as information related to the performance display monitor and RAM anomaly detection, are stored. Therefore, if an anomaly is detected in the area outside the game area based on the RAM anomaly detection information, all information may be initialized. Alternatively, the area outside the game area may be divided into sections according to function and purpose, and anomalies may be detected and initialized for each section. For example, the system may be divided into sections related to the performance display monitor, test equipment, and excessive payout suppression mechanism. If an anomaly is detected in the test equipment section, the performance display monitor section and the excessive payout suppression mechanism section may be left uninitialized, and information may be retained. Furthermore, priority may be given to retaining information within each section. For example, since the performance display monitor processing is the most important, if an anomaly is detected in the performance display monitor section, all information in all sections may be cleared. If an anomaly is detected in the test equipment or excessive payout suppression mechanism section, information may be initialized for each section.

When dividing the area outside the gameplay area into areas based on function and purpose, a common subroutine that can be called from each area may be allocated to that area. In this case, the common subroutine should not be callable from processing within the gameplay area. This ensures the independence of processing within and outside the gameplay area.

Furthermore, common subroutines outside the game area may have the same functionality as subroutines within the game area. This allows for continued use of processing outside the game area even if subroutines within the game area are changed due to hardware updates or game specifications. Additionally, processing outside the game area is designed to be usable across different models (making it less dependent on specific models), and because its functionality rarely changes significantly, providing common subroutines makes it easier to reuse them when developing new models, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Examples of common subroutines include processes for setting up a temporary work area used during program execution, and processes for performing a predetermined operation on a value stored in a specific register and then storing the result in a designated register. For example, setting up a work area might involve storing the work area's address in the DE register, with the work area's address determined by data in a table identified by the address stored in the HL register. Another example of a process performing a predetermined operation might involve multiplying the value stored in the W register by the value stored in the A register and adding the result to the value stored in the HL register.

Next, we will explain the process for determining whether or not to initialize the reference value (comparison value). When the game machine's power is restored while the game stop error flag is set, the power-on process (Figure 382) is executed. In the power-on process, in addition to the normal processing, a determination is made based on the game stop error flag whether or not to initialize the reference value (comparison value). Specifically, in the RAM clear determination process (Figure 384), if the RAM is not cleared, the determination is made after the state before the power outage is set.

Figure 537 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the RAM clear determination process corresponding to the initialization of the reference value (comparison value) based on the game stop error flag. The procedure shown in Figure 537 is the same as the procedure shown in Figure 384, but with the addition of processing to initialize the reference value (comparison value) based on the game stop error flag. Steps 02TKS0210 to 02TKS0290 are common to both. The RAM clear determination process is called from the power-on process shown in Figure 382 (step 02TKS0030). If an abnormality such as a checksum abnormality, backup flag abnormality, or RAM abnormality outside the game area is detected during the RAM clear determination process, and a RAM clear is necessary, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the game start determination process (step 02TKS0060).

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game stop error flag is set after the state before the power outage is set (step 02TKS0290) (step 02TKS0710). If the game stop error flag is set (result of step 02TKS0710 is "Yes"), the system terminates without initializing the reference value (comparison value). At this point, the game stop error flag may be cleared (released). However, if the system cannot return to the state before the power outage, such as if the checksum is abnormal, the game stop error flag is cleared (released) and the reference value (comparison value) is initialized.

On the other hand, if the game stop error flag is not set (the result of step 02TKS0710 is "No"), the main control MPU 1311 initializes the reference value (comparison value) as if the game had not stopped due to an abnormality or other issue (step 02TKS0720).

Furthermore, if the reference value (comparison value) needs to be maintained or initialized even when an error does not occur, as mentioned above, it is possible to set a game stop error flag (game stop flag) with a value corresponding to the cause of the game stop. For example, instead of setting the value of the game stop error flag to a value indicating whether or not to stop the game (0 or 1), it could be set to a value corresponding to the cause of the game stop error (e.g., magnetic anomaly = "4", vibration anomaly = "3", prize entry anomaly = "2", excessive prize ball suppression means activated = "1", game not stopped = "0"). If the setting value of the game stop error flag is "1" or "0", the reference value (comparison value) is not initialized; if it is "2" or higher, the reference value (comparison value) is initialized. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to initialize the reference value (comparison value) only when a specific error occurs.

The above explains the method for determining whether or not to initialize the reference value (comparison value) based on the game stop error flag. However, if a minor error occurs that does not normally require a power cycle, and the power is cycled to prematurely stop the alarm sound output and warning screen display, there is a risk that the reference value (comparison value) will be initialized. For example, if the control system only sets the game stop error flag when a power cycle is required, the game stop error flag will not be set in the event of a minor error, and the reference value (comparison value) will be initialized. A minor error is one in which, even if fraud/abnormality is detected, the game does not stop, a notification is issued for a predetermined period, gameplay is possible during the notification period, and after the time has elapsed, the notification ends and the game returns to its normal state. For example, fraudulent entry into large prize slots or start slots 2004 (so-called electric tulips) with opening and closing mechanisms falls under the category of minor errors.

In this case, even for minor errors, similar to severe errors, an external security signal is output from the time of error detection until a predetermined condition is met. Furthermore, if the power is cut off while the external security signal is being output, it is determined upon power restoration whether the external security signal was output before the power cut-off. If the external security signal was output before the power cut-off, this problem can be resolved by recognizing the power cut-off as an error resolution measure and not resetting the reference value (comparison value). The predetermined condition is the condition for canceling the error notification, and may include the resolution of the error itself or the expiration of the error notification period.

Furthermore, in addition to the method for determining whether an external security signal was output when the power was cut off, a flag may be set for minor errors, similar to a flag for a severe error that would result in gameplay stopping. In this case, the flag may remain set during the period when a minor error is being reported, and then be cleared after the error report ends. When the power is turned on, both the gameplay stopping flag and this flag may be checked to determine whether or not to initialize the baseline value (comparison value).

Furthermore, for minor errors, the main control board 1310, which actually determines whether an error has occurred, may be configured to simply determine the trigger for notification of minor errors and send a command related to the minor error to the peripheral control board 1510, in order to simplify the program. In this case, the main control board 1310 does not determine whether the error notification has ended; the peripheral control board 1510 manages the error notification period. In this configuration, by clearing a flag when a condition that results in a period longer than the error notification period (for example, a jackpot, a change in game state (such as switching from a time-saving state to a normal state), or a mode change managed by the main control board 1310) is met, the main control board 1310 does not need to process whether the notification period has ended or not.

Next, we will explain a configuration that allows the amusement arcade staff to choose whether or not to reset the reference value (comparison value). In other words, the amusement machine is provided with an operating means for selecting whether or not to continue updating the reference value (comparison value) when the power is turned on (whether or not to reset the reference value (comparison value)). For example, a dedicated operating unit (count continuation operating means) may be provided on the main control board 1310, or an existing operating means (for example, a setting key 971) may be combined.

The timing for operating the count continuation operation means is the timing for re-energizing the power supply. The power supply may be turned on while operating the count continuation operation means, or it may be turned on after operating the count continuation operation means.

Next, we will explain the control related to the reference value (comparison value) during setting changes and setting confirmation. When settings are changed, the RAM is cleared and the game settings are changed, starting a new game; therefore, the reference value (comparison value) is also initialized. The same applies when setting changes are made after power-on in the event of an error. For example, if the reference value (comparison value) is maintained even when changing from a setting with fewer payout balls to a setting with more payout balls, the game value (payout balls) that would normally be given to the player will be reduced, potentially causing disadvantage to the player. Conversely, if the opposite is true, the game cannot be played as intended by the arcade.

Furthermore, in the case of setting confirmation, since gameplay continues with the settings before stopping, the baseline value (comparison value) is maintained conditionally upon error resolution. If no error occurs, the baseline value (comparison value) may be maintained, or it may be reset. Since setting confirmation is an operation intentionally performed by a game arcade employee, it can be treated as an operation performed at the start of business, and therefore the baseline value (comparison value) may be reset. In this case, setting confirmation may also be used as a means of continuing the count operation.

Furthermore, the system may allow the user to choose whether or not to reset the reference value (comparison value) based on the operation procedure during setting confirmation. For example, if the power is turned on by operating the setting key 971, the settings are confirmed, and then the power is turned off and on again, the reference value (comparison value) may be reset. On the other hand, if the power is not turned off and on again after confirming the settings, the reference value (comparison value) may be maintained without being reset.

As described above, the system is equipped with multiple means for initializing the reference value (comparison value) when the gaming machine is powered on, and the reference value (comparison value) can be initialized based on any of these operations. For example, by setting operational conditions that cannot be simultaneously met, such as the RAM clear switch 954 (first operation), setting change operation (second operation), and setting confirmation operation/dedicated operation means (third operation), as the initialization conditions for the reference value (comparison value), it becomes possible to initialize the reference value (comparison value) without performing any special operations in response to factors that cause the gaming machine to be powered on again.

[38-5. Notification of operation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism]
Next, we will explain the notification related to the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. The excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is a function that stops the game when operating conditions are met, such as when the standard value (comparison value) of prize balls reaches the upper limit, in order to suppress the excessive payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, there is a pre-notification that notifies the player in advance of the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, and an operation notification that notifies the player after the operation has been performed.

In the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, when predetermined conditions (pre-notification execution conditions) are met, the player is notified that the game will stop due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism by the output of a liquid crystal display 1600, an LED lamp, or a predetermined sound effect. The predetermined conditions (pre-notification execution conditions) are, for example, when the reference value (comparison value) exceeds 95% of the upper limit. If the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated at 100,000 balls, then the pre-notification will begin when the remaining balls reach 95,000, i.e., 5,000.

The prior notification and activation notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism are implemented in a manner that makes it easy for players to recognize that the game will be stopped due to the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism as the game progresses. A manner that makes it easy for players to recognize may include displaying a message on the LCD screen indicating that the activation conditions for the excessive payout suppression mechanism are likely to be met, displaying a special character, changing the background color, or changing the color scheme of decorative patterns. Furthermore, the activation notification will continue until the game stoppage caused by the excessive payout suppression mechanism is released by a game hall employee.

Figure 538 shows an example of pre-notification by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (complete function). Figure 539 shows an example of activation notification by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. In the example shown in Figure 538, the remaining number of prize balls until the upper limit is reached is displayed, and the display of the remaining number of prize balls is updated at predetermined intervals. For example, the display is updated every 100 balls. If the interval is too short, the update frequency increases, increasing the load on the display processing, and if the interval is too long, the accuracy of the information decreases, so an appropriate interval should be set.

The remaining number of prize balls is calculated by the main control board 1310 and transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. The instruction to execute the pre-notification of the excess prize ball suppression means is transmitted at the start, and the display continues at all times. Alternatively, the pre-notification may be canceled when the reference value (comparison value) is initialized. Furthermore, the manner of the pre-notification may differ depending on whether the excess prize ball suppression means is activated during normal gameplay or after a jackpot. For example, the area where the pre-notification is performed may differ, or the display content may differ. This configuration makes it possible to provide notifications tailored to the operation status of the excess prize ball suppression means and the gameplay situation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the advance notification will continue even if the conditions for starting the advance notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are no longer met. The advance notification may be canceled when the remaining prize ball count exceeds the upper limit (e.g., 5000) (e.g., when the remaining prize ball count reaches 5100). Alternatively, the remaining prize ball count may be displayed beyond the upper limit (e.g., 5000) (e.g., "5100"), or it may be displayed as a single type of display (e.g., "5000 or more"). If the remaining prize ball count is displayed beyond the upper limit (e.g., 5000), a condition for canceling the advance notification (e.g., 5500) may be set.

Subsequently, when the remaining number of prize balls reaches zero and the activation conditions for the excess prize ball suppression mechanism are met, a screen indicating the activation of the excess prize ball suppression mechanism will be displayed, as shown in Figure 539, and the game will be stopped. At this time, the background color of the LCD display screen may be changed, or sound and light effects may be implemented. Furthermore, the screen indicating the activation of the excess prize ball suppression mechanism may differ depending on whether it is activated during normal gameplay or after a jackpot.

Furthermore, even if the conditions for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are no longer met due to continued gameplay after the initial conditions have been met, no further prior notification will be given, and the mechanism will not be canceled but will activate at the predetermined timing.

In this case, the pre-notification and activation notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism are displayed on a layer in front of the layer that displays the visual effects. The layer displaying the pre-notification and the layer displaying the activation notification may be separate, or they may be on the same layer, as they are never displayed simultaneously. Furthermore, the layer that displays the visual effects can continue to display the visual effects as usual until the game is stopped. By controlling it in this way, the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism can be executed in parallel on different layers without significantly changing the processing for executing normal visual effects control.

Furthermore, if the system is designed to prevent the excessive payout suppression mechanism from activating while a game state favorable to the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) continues until that game state ends, the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism may be notified at the start of that game state, even before the conditions are met. For example, even if the predetermined conditions (conditions for prior notification) are not met at the start of the jackpot game state, if it is expected that the excessive payout suppression mechanism will activate at the end of the jackpot game state, the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism will be notified at the start of the jackpot game state. A state in which it is expected that the conditions for prior notification will be met is, for example, a state in which the conditions for prior notification are met by adding the expected number of payouts for each type of jackpot to the current reference value (comparison value).

In a jackpot state, instead of displaying the remaining number of prize balls (the difference between the upper limit and the standard value), a specific character may be displayed. While displaying a numerical value allows players to more accurately predict the time until the game stops during normal gameplay, in jackpot states or other states with a high number of prize balls per unit time, displaying the remaining number of prize balls results in significant fluctuations. Furthermore, if the game does not stop until the state with a high number of prize balls per unit time ends, players can easily recognize that the game will stop at the end of that state. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide advance notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism by displaying a specific character or changing the background display. Additionally, this reduces the area required for the advance notification, preventing interference with the jackpot state's presentation and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the activation conditions for the excessive payout suppression mechanism are met during a jackpot game state, and the mechanism is activated after the jackpot game state ends. Figure 540 shows an example of the screen transition when the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated after the jackpot game state ends.

(A) indicates that the game is continuing in a normal game state. (B) indicates that a jackpot has been confirmed, and at this point, the conditions for prior notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism are not met. Therefore, as shown in (C), the game enters a jackpot game state and continues.

Subsequently, as shown in (D), when the conditions for pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are met, the pre-notification is executed. Furthermore, as the rounds of the jackpot game progress, as shown in (E), the remaining prize ball count is updated. Then, as shown in (F), when the activation conditions (completion conditions) for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are met, the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism after the jackpot game ends is reserved (excess prize ball suppression mechanism activation reservation notification), and this is displayed. The excess prize ball suppression mechanism activation reservation notification continues thereafter until the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, a screen indicating the activation notification is displayed, as shown in (G) and (H). Unlike the activation notification screen shown in Figure 539, this screen, displayed after the jackpot game state has ended, shows a congratulatory message: "Congratulations!!" Furthermore, since the actual payout amount can be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the activation notification is executed, it is also possible to display messages such as "You won a large payout of XX balls!" In this way, by changing the activation notification screen according to the status of the excessive payout suppression mechanism's activation, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Next, we will explain the case where, if it is anticipated that the pre-notification conditions for the excessive payout suppression means will be met during a jackpot game state, the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means is executed from the start of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, in the example shown below, a predetermined mark (character) is displayed as the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means during the jackpot game state. Figure 541 shows an example of screen transitions when the pre-notification conditions and activation conditions are met during the jackpot game state, and the excessive payout suppression means is activated after the jackpot game state ends.

(A) indicates that the game is continuing in a normal game state. (B) indicates that a jackpot has been confirmed, and at this time, it is expected that the activation conditions for the excessive payout suppression mechanism will be met after the jackpot game state ends. In the pre-notification shown in Figure 541, instead of performing a pre-notification that clearly indicates the number of payouts until the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated, as shown in Figure 538, a mark indicating that the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, as shown in (B), and as shown in (C), the display continues until the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, instead of transitioning to the normal game state, a screen indicating the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is displayed, as shown in (D).

Furthermore, even if the excess prize ball suppression mechanism does not activate at the end of the jackpot game state, if the conditions for pre-notification are met, pre-notification may be performed as shown in Figure 541 (B). After the jackpot game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, pre-notification of the excess prize ball suppression mechanism (Figure 538), which displays the remaining prize ball count, may be performed.

Finally, we will explain what happens when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine while the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means is being executed. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means continues even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine. Figure 542 shows an example of a screen showing a malfunction in the gaming machine while the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means is being executed, where (A) shows the state when the malfunction occurred and (B) shows the state after recovery by cutting and restoring the power supply.

As mentioned above, even if the power is cut off and then restored, the reference value (comparison value) is not reset, and the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means continues to be executed even after the game resumes (screen (B)). The continuation of the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means does not necessarily have to be immediately after the power is restored; it may also occur after the game resumes, for example, when a predetermined game process is executed, when a game ball enters a prize slot and the first prize ball is awarded, or when a game ball enters the starting prize slot and the symbol change is executed for the first time.

Furthermore, the layer displaying the advance notification for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is positioned in front of the layer displaying the abnormality notification. This configuration allows for the display of the advance notification for the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism even if fraudulent activity occurs during the advance notification stage, specifically by shutting off and restarting the gaming machine's power supply to reset the reference value (comparison value). This makes it easier for employees operating the power supply at the gaming facility to detect such fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the event of a severe error (abnormality), the abnormality may be notified across the entire screen, while in the event of a minor error (abnormality), the abnormality may be notified in only a portion of the screen. In this case, if a prior notification from the excessive payout suppression mechanism is already in place, a severe error notification will display the prior notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism in a reduced size, while a minor error notification will display the notification in a position that does not overlap with the prior notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism.

Furthermore, when error notification and pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism are performed simultaneously, the manner of the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism may differ from that when the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is performed alone. For example, by changing the background color, font, and text color of the pre-notification, it may be possible to identify whether or not an error has occurred simply by checking the manner of the pre-notification.

Furthermore, the relationship between the advance notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism and other notifications (displays) will be explained. When providing advance notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism and notification of the direction of ball launch (e.g., right-handed/left-handed instructions), these notifications should not overlap. In this case, since failing to indicate the launch direction may hinder the progress of the game, the notification of the launch direction may be prioritized. For example, if a right-handed launch notification is blocked when a right-handed launch is required, the player may not launch the ball to the right, thus preventing the game from progressing.

Furthermore, the display of the fourth symbol (minor symbol), which is displayed separately from the decorative symbols and the pre-notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, will not overlap. By configuring the display so as not to obstruct the visibility of the fourth symbol's fluctuation, players can recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating even when the decorative symbols are difficult to see. Also, if the fourth symbol stops on the same symbol when all the decorative symbols (first to third symbols) stop on the same symbol, players can not only recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating but also understand the result of the fluctuation display.

Furthermore, the same principle applies to the hold indicator; the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism prevents it from becoming invisible. In this case, since the player only needs to be able to see the number of hold balls, the pre-notification display may be made semi-transparent when it overlaps with the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism. Alternatively, the number of hold balls may be displayed numerically or in some other way, and the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism prevents it from becoming invisible, allowing the player to understand the number of hold balls.

Furthermore, even if a pre-announcement of an excessive payout suppression mechanism occurs during the execution of a pre-announcement effect, the pre-announcement effect will not be hindered by the pre-announcement. For example, if a specific character indicating a high probability of winning appears, the display position of the pre-announcement may be changed, or the pre-announcement image may be made transparent (or semi-transparent), to prevent the pre-announcement from obscuring the player's view. Also, in the case of a pre-announcement effect using a hold display, while a high-probability hold display is being executed, the pre-announcement image may be reduced in size or its transparency increased, making it easier for the player to recognize the execution of the pre-announcement effect even while the excessive payout suppression mechanism's pre-announcement is ongoing.

Furthermore, if the pre-announcement effect involves changing the background color, the pre-announcement image may be made transparent (or semi-transparent) or reduced in size. Similarly, when high-probability reach effects (such as SP reaches) are executed, the nature of the pre-announcement should be modified so that the execution of the effect is not hindered by the pre-announcement.

Furthermore, the layer displaying various effects that run in parallel with the advance notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism has a lower display priority than the layer displaying the advance notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism. In other words, the layer displaying the advance notification is positioned in front of the layer displaying the various effects, but pre-announcement effects and high-expectation effects are controlled so as not to be hindered by the advance notification, as they are expected to enhance the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, by positioning the layer that provides the advance notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism in front, it is possible to reliably provide advance notification to the player.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the control of various performance devices is defined based on scheduler data (performance data) that defines the performances. The scheduler data defines not only the game's performances but also various abnormality notifications and pre-notifications and activation notifications for excessive payout suppression means. By changing the contents of the scheduler data, it becomes possible to change the performance content (notification patterns) without modifying the program, and it also becomes easy to change the patterns of abnormality notifications and the pre-notifications and activation notifications for excessive payout suppression means.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a performance switch (performance switch, performance identification information) is incorporated into the image information of the performance images and pre-notification images. When the performance switch is extracted during performance execution, the corresponding processing is executed. For example, when the execution conditions for the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means are met, a performance switch instructing the execution of the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means is set. When the image information on which the performance switch is set is processed, scheduler data for executing the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means is activated. This allows for control such as executing the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means when the performance switch is extracted, while not executing the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression means when the performance switch is not extracted, using a common procedure.

Similarly, when an activation notification for the excessive payout suppression mechanism is to be issued, the effect switch that instructs the execution of the pre-notification for the excessive payout suppression mechanism is deactivated, while the effect switch that instructs the execution of the activation notification for the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated. This allows for the termination of the pre-notification and the start of the activation notification for the excessive payout suppression mechanism. In other words, by preparing scheduler data (effect data) for the pre-notification and activation notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, these notifications can be executed without requiring program modification.

Furthermore, if the reference value (comparison value) is reset, this fact may be displayed when the power is turned on, and the reference value (comparison value) from the previous power outage may also be displayed. Note that if the previous power outage was normal, for example, a power outage at the end of business hours, the reference value (comparison value) from the previous power outage may not be displayed. The reference value (comparison value) may only be displayed if the power outage was for restoring gameplay from a stopped state.

Similarly, if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine while the over-prize ball suppression mechanism is being pre-notified, the malfunction notification will be executed along with the over-prize ball suppression mechanism's pre-notification. In the case of malfunctions that do not involve power interruption, such as ball jams or full-tank errors, gameplay will continue after the machine recovers from the malfunction, and only the malfunction notification will be canceled. After gameplay resumes, the over-prize ball suppression mechanism's pre-notification will continue. If the malfunction state persists without being resolved, the screen will switch to the game stop screen after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this point, the player will no longer be aware of the malfunction state. If the power is cut off and then restored, the over-prize ball suppression mechanism's pre-notification will continue even after gameplay resumes following power restoration, similar to the case of an abnormality notification.

If a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine while the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism is being executed, the layer that notifies the malfunction may be prioritized over the layer that displays the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, unless fraudulent activity is suspected. Alternatively, if fraudulent activity is suspected, the layer that displays the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism may be prioritized to alert the gaming facility staff.

Similarly, if the gaming machine experiences a power outage or other interruption while the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism is being executed, the pre-notification of the excessive payout suppression mechanism will, in principle, continue even after the power is restored and gameplay resumes.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if an abnormality or malfunction occurs during the execution of the pre-notification or operation notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means, the pre-notification and operation notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means can be continued after the power is restored, thereby preventing fraudulent acts that would hinder the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means.

When the main control board 1310 activates the excess prize ball suppression mechanism based on the planned number of prize balls, the control related to the excess prize ball suppression mechanism is completed on the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the payout control board 951 and the payout of prize balls stops, the excess prize ball suppression mechanism may still activate. In this case, even if the excess prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, there is a possibility that some prize balls will remain unpaid. Therefore, if there are unpaid prize balls when the excess prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, an activation notification (activation animation) of the excess prize ball suppression mechanism is performed, and the player and the amusement hall staff are notified via the liquid crystal display device 1600, lamps, sound output, etc., so that they can recognize that there are unpaid prize balls.

For example, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1600 could show the presence of unpaid prize balls or the number of unpaid prize balls themselves in text, in a configuration that does not interfere with the operation notification (operational effect) of the excessive prize ball suppression means. Alternatively, a special background display or special character could be displayed.

Furthermore, if notification is provided by lamps, a dedicated lamp for notifying unpaid prize balls may be provided and illuminated (flashing), or the lamps used for visual effects may be illuminated in a specific manner. For example, if the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated and there are no unpaid prize balls, all the visual effects lamps may be turned off, while if there are unpaid prize balls, some or all of the visual effects lamps may be made to flash in a specific color (for example, red).

Furthermore, if notification is provided via audio output, for example, when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated, a notification sound can be output, and simultaneously, a notification sound indicating that there are unpaid prize balls can be output from a different audio channel than the one that outputs the activation notification sound.

[38-6. Invention relating to means for suppressing excessive prize balls]
Representative viewpoints of the invention relating to the means for suppressing excessive prize balls disclosed herein include the following:

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and enables the creation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A game state detection means capable of detecting a state occurring in a gaming machine,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the game medium consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize medium that the player can obtain,
A reference value calculation means for calculating a reference value for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the first and second count values,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value is initialized when the gaming machine is powered on, but if the state of the gaming machine before powering on was set to a game state based on the game state detection means, the reference value will not be initialized even if the gaming machine is powered on afterward.

In the gaming machine described in (1), although the reference value is initialized when the power is turned on, if the state before the power is cut off is not a normal game state (for example, during an abnormality notification), the reference value is not initialized even when the power is turned on. The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a means (excess prize ball suppression means) that stops the game when it is determined that the prize balls the player can receive are excessive relative to the game balls consumed during the game. By intentionally causing an abnormality to occur and cutting off the power before the excess prize ball suppression means is activated, the reference value is initialized, and by continuing the game even when the number of prize balls acquired is excessive, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of acquiring prize balls unfairly, thereby enabling the continuation of proper gameplay and improving the enjoyment of the game.

(2) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A performance control device capable of controlling a performance device capable of executing game performances,
A game state detection means capable of detecting a state occurring in a gaming machine,
A game progress detection means capable of detecting triggers for the progression of the game,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the game medium consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize medium that the player can obtain,
A reference value calculation means for calculating a reference value for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the first and second count values,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance control device is
Based on the game progress detection means, a first display layer control is provided to enable the execution of display effects on the first display layer,
Based on the aforementioned game state detection means, a second display layer control is provided to enable the execution of display effects on the second display layer,
Based on the aforementioned reference value calculation means, a third display layer control enables the execution of display effects on the third display layer,
Make it possible to do this,
The first display layer is set to have a lower display priority than the second display layer, and also to have a lower display priority than the third display layer.
The display effects displayed on the first display layer and the second display layer can be displayed simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a display effect performed on the third display layer is displayed, the display effect performed on the first display layer is made invisible or difficult to see, while the display effect performed on the second display layer is made visible.

(3) In the gaming machines described in (2),
The game further includes a game stopping means that allows the game to be stopped based on the aforementioned reference value,
Based on the aforementioned standard value, it is possible to execute a performance that stops the game, and also to execute a performance that can notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped.
The effects that stop the game and the effects that can notify in advance that the game will be stopped are displayed on the second display layer.
When displaying an effect that stops the game or an effect that can notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped on the second display layer, only one of them shall be displayed (not both simultaneously).
It is characterized by the following:

In the gaming machines described in (2) and (3), a means (excess prize ball suppression means) is provided to stop the game if it is determined that the prize balls the player is entitled to receive are excessive relative to the game balls consumed during the game. Even if an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine at the same time that the notification effects (pre-notification effect, activation notification effect) regarding the excess prize ball suppression means are executed, both the abnormality notification of the gaming machine and the notification regarding the excess prize ball suppression means can be confirmed. For example, by executing normal game effects on the first display layer, abnormality notifications on the second display layer, and notifications regarding the excess prize ball suppression means on the third display layer, it becomes possible to visually confirm both notifications even if the abnormality of the gaming machine and the notification regarding the excess prize ball suppression means occur simultaneously. Furthermore, since employees of the gaming hall can check the operating status of the excess prize ball suppression means, they can determine whether or not to reset the reference value when restoring the gaming machine from an abnormal state.

(4) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A game state detection means capable of detecting a state occurring in a gaming machine,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the game medium consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize medium that the player can obtain,
A reference value calculation means for calculating a reference value for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the first and second count values,
A storage means capable of storing a plurality of game information, including the first count value, the second count value, and the reference value,
Multiple operating means that can accept operations when the power is turned on,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value is initialized when the power to the gaming machine is turned on and a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means is operated.

In the gaming machine described in (4), an operating means (specific operating means) for initializing the standard value is provided, allowing the user to choose whether or not to initialize the standard value depending on the situation at the time of power-on. For example, if, when a gaming hall employee attempts to restart the game after it has stopped, both an abnormality notification and a notification regarding the excessive prize ball suppression means have been issued, the game can be restarted with the standard value maintained without initialization by simply restarting the power without operating the specific operating means. This prevents the act of attempting to fraudulently acquire prize balls by intentionally causing an abnormality after (or immediately before) the excessive prize ball suppression means has been activated to initialize the standard value.

Furthermore, by designating the setting key 971 as the specific operating means, the setting confirmation operation, which involves turning on the power while operating the setting key 971, can be made an operation for initializing the reference value. This allows for the provision of a means for initializing the reference value without adding any new special operating means.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4), the reference value is not initialized when a specific operating means is operated, but rather when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and both the specific operating means and the special operating means among the plurality of operating means are operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation by the special operating means initializes the game information, including the reference value other than the reference value.

In the gaming machine of (5), the specific operating means is the setting key 971, and the special operating means is the RAM clear switch 954. The reference value is cleared when the power is turned on while operating the specific operating means and the special operating means. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the operation of turning on the power while operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 corresponds to a setting change operation, and the setting change operation can be combined with the operation of initializing the reference value. Furthermore, when only the special operating means (RAM clear switch 954) is operated, game information other than the reference value is initialized, allowing the game to be resumed with the reference value maintained while other game information is initialized. This makes it possible to choose whether or not to maintain the reference value when resuming the game.

(6) A gaming machine comprising a first control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (payout control board) for controlling the distribution of prize balls to the player,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the game medium consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize medium that the player can obtain,
A reference value calculation means for calculating a reference value for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the first and second count values,
Prepare,
The first counting means updates the first count value when a game medium (game ball) is consumed.
The second counting means is capable of updating the second count value, at least one of the first control means or the second control means.
The reference value calculation means calculates the reference value based on the second counting means which is executed by the first control means, rather than the second control means.
The first counting means, the second counting means, and the reference value calculation means are executed at predetermined intervals.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reference value calculation means calculates the reference value based on the first count value and the second count value, which are counted in the same period.

In the gaming machine described in (6), accurate values can be obtained by updating each count value and the reference value (comparison value) at the same interval in the timer interrupt processing. This allows for accurate operation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, preventing the mechanism from activating prematurely and causing disadvantage to players, or from activating too late and causing disadvantage to the gaming establishment.

(7) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A game stopping mechanism that allows the game to be stopped based on the number of prize balls won by the player,
A first counting means for counting a first count value based on the game medium consumed in the game,
A second counting means for counting a second count value based on the prize medium that the player can obtain,
A reference value calculation means for calculating a reference value for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the first and second count values,
A game information display means capable of displaying game information including the aforementioned reference value,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value calculation means and the aforementioned game information display means are executed at predetermined intervals.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reference value calculation means is executed before the game information display means.

In the gaming machine described in (7), by updating the reference value (comparison value) and then displaying it on the gaming information display means (prize ratio display 1317), it becomes possible to display the reference value (comparison value) at the moment the game stops, allowing the staff of the gaming facility to accurately understand the situation at the time the game stops.

[39. Details of the control of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism]
The control and notification of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism have been explained above. Next, the details of the control of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism will be explained. The process for performing initial settings, which is executed after power-on to execute the control of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, the operation control of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, and the specific processes for calculating (counting) reference values (comparison values) and various count values will be explained.

Furthermore, the reference value (comparison value) explained up to this point is the difference between the first count value, which is calculated based on the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls, out balls, safe balls), and the second count value, which is calculated based on the number of prize balls. The game is stopped when the difference (reference value) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), starting from the start of the game. On the other hand, the reference value (comparison value) explained below will have its starting point set to the minimum value of the reference value (comparison value) at the time of calculation. For example, if the total number of game balls consumed is 20,000 more than the total number of prize balls (prize balls) (the number of balls dispensed is -20,000), the game will be stopped when the value obtained by subtracting the first count value from the second count value reaches 75,000 (= 95,000 - 20,000), starting from -20,000. This prevents a situation where, after a player leaves a gaming machine with a total number of game balls consumed exceeding the total number of prize balls, another player starts playing on the same machine, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being awarded.

[39-1. Control at the start of the game]
The following describes the processes for controlling the excessive payout suppression mechanism. First, we will describe the processes executed at the start of the game, specifically the power-on process and the processes called from the power-on process. These processes perform initial settings necessary for the excessive payout suppression mechanism to function.

[39-1-1. Power-on processing]
Figure 543 is a flowchart showing the procedure for power-on processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Power-on processing is the first process executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and has the same function as the power-on processing described in Figure 382, etc. The explanation of the process (subroutine) with the same name is omitted.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 first performs the RAM protect permission setting (step 10TKS0010). An access-restricted area is set in the main control RAM 1312's memory area, and if the program execution accesses this restricted area during gameplay, an error occurs and a reset is performed. Considering the possibility of unstable power supply immediately after power-on, the access restriction on the main control RAM 1312 is lifted until gameplay begins and the gaming machine's initialization is complete. The RAM protect permission setting allows access to any area of the main control RAM 1312. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and the power outage clear signal is set (after being set to ON, it is set to OFF).

Furthermore, the memory area accessed by the main control MPU 1311 includes a memory area (game area) where programs for executing game control that affects game results, such as jackpot抽選 (jackpot lottery), are stored, and a memory area (outside the game area) where programs that do not directly affect game results, such as outputting test signals, outputting game information from external output terminals, and displaying game information, are stored. Since the excessive prize ball suppression means does not directly affect the lottery results, its program and data are stored outside the game area. The arrangement of the memory areas is explained in Figure 544.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on startup confirmation process (step 10 TKS0020). In this process, first, the power outage warning signal is read to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a predetermined register (power-on pre-wait setting-related switch acquisition process). After that, the system waits for a predetermined time (power-on wait process), and then the power outage warning signal is read again to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (post-power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). If a power outage is detected, the system waits until the power voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes. Finally, it confirms whether the boards (wiring) connected to the main control board before the power cut-off were reconnected. Details of the power-on startup confirmation process are explained in Figure 383.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear determination process (step 10TKS0030). The RAM clear determination process checks the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on and determines whether the contents of the main control RAM 1312 were properly retained at the time of power-out. For example, it determines whether the settings information of the gaming machine and the contents of the main control RAM 1312 before the power outage were properly stored. Details of the RAM clear determination process are explained in Figure 537.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game start processing (step 10TKS0040). This processing sets the game state, performs abnormality detection and initialization of memory areas outside the game area, sets interrupt timings, and performs initial settings for the random number generation circuit. Details of the game start processing are explained in Figure 545.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game start setting process (step 10TKS0050). This process determines whether game can be started, sets commands to be sent when the power is turned on (for example, power-on operation commands), and sets initial data for power-on. Details of the game start setting process are explained in Figure 546. Furthermore, it configures the system to allow the execution of interrupt processing, such as timer interrupts (step 10TKS0060).

When the main control MPU 1311 is authorized to execute interrupt processing, it executes the main control side main processing (steps 10TKS0070 and 10TKS0080). In the main control side main processing, it first acquires a power outage warning signal and determines whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step 10TKS0070). If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, so the random number update process is executed (step 10TKS0080). The random number update process primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winners in special and regular lotteries.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage warning signal, it executes power outage processing (step 10 TKS0090). Power outage processing involves backing up data to restore the system to its state before the power outage. The specific processing is the same as that described in Figure 188.

Next, we will explain the memory area layout. Figure 544 shows an overview of the memory area layout; (A) is a schematic diagram of the memory area layout, (B) is the dump list when the starting address outside the game area is "5060h", and (C) is the dump list when the starting address outside the game area is "5065h".

As shown in Figure 544(A), an unused area is located between the game area and the area outside the game area, which is not accessed by the main control MPU 1311. The value stored in this unused area is "00H". This allows the continuous presence of "00H" in the unused area (the unused area between the game area and the area outside the game area) to serve as a boundary indicator between the game area and the area outside the game area.

Furthermore, the lowest address of the starting address outside the game area is defined to be "0H". For example, as shown in Figure 544(B), if the starting address outside the game area is set to "5060H", the starting position will be at the left edge when the dump list is displayed, making it easier for developers to understand the starting position outside the game area. In particular, when programs such as those for outputting test signals or those related to excessive prize ball suppression are placed outside the game area, as in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it becomes easier for developers to confirm the starting position of the programs, improving development efficiency. On the other hand, if the lowest address of the starting address outside the game area is not "0H", for example, as shown in Figure 544(C), if the starting address outside the game area is set to "5065H", the area outside the game area will be displayed from the middle of the line, making it difficult for developers to understand the starting position outside the game area, potentially reducing development efficiency.

Furthermore, the free area (the unused area between the game area and the area outside the game area) must always be 16 bytes or more. This ensures that the dump list display includes lines consisting only of "00H," making it easier to identify the starting position of the area outside the game area (the program). If it were less than 16 bytes, in the example in Figure 544(B), the starting address of the area outside the game area would be "5050H," making it difficult to identify the starting position of the area outside the game area when displaying the dump list.

Furthermore, a free area containing consecutive "00H" values may be provided within the game area. This makes it easier to locate the program's position when displaying the dump list. Since the capacity of the game area may be limited by regulations, etc., it may be possible to save capacity by placing the program without providing free space. Alternatively, by setting the lowest address of the program's starting position to "0H," the program's starting position becomes the beginning of each line in the dump list. At the same time, by limiting the free area to 16 bytes or less, blank lines are avoided, thus saving capacity and achieving both program readability and capacity savings. In this case, the free space within the game area will be less than the free space between the game area and the area outside the game area.

[39-1-2. Processing at the start of the game]
The above explains the procedure for power-on processing. Next, we will explain each step of the power-on processing. First, we will explain the game start processing (step 10 TKS0040). Figure 545 is a flowchart showing the procedure for game start processing.

When the game start processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (step 10TKS0110). Specifically, it reads the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 from the external input port (_PINSTS) immediately after power-on to make the determination.

If no setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (the result of step 10TKS0110 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power outage was a setting change, that is, whether a power outage occurred in setting change mode (step 10TKS0120). The setting state before the power outage is obtained during the RAM clear determination process and stored in a predetermined register.

If the setting state before the power outage was not a setting change (the result of step 10TKS0120 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a RAM abnormal state occurred before the power outage (step 10TKS0130).

If the RAM was not in an abnormal state before the power cut-off (the result of step 10TKS0130 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the RAM clear switch 954 was ON when the power was turned on (step 10TKS0140).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not ON when the power is turned on (the result of step 10TKS0140 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key is ON or OFF (step 10TKS0150). If the setting key is ON (the result of step 10TKS0150 is "YES"), the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and the setting state is set to the setting confirmation state (step 10TKS0160).

If the setting key is OFF (the result of step 10TKS0150 is "NO"), or if the setting state is set to the setting confirmation state, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the door is in the open state or not (step 10TKS0170).

If the door is open (resulting in step 10TKS0170 as "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game has stopped due to the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (step 10TKS0180). If the game has stopped due to the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (resulting in step 10TKS0180 as "YES"), the game stop factor is set to "Activation of excessive prize ball suppression mechanism" (step 10TKS0190).

On the other hand, if the game was not stopped by the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism (the result of step 10TKS0180 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 clears the game stop factor and sets the system to resume from the game stop state (step 10TKS0200).

Furthermore, if a setting change operation was performed when the power was turned on (the result of step 10TKS0110 is "YES"), or if the setting state before the power was cut off was a setting change (the result of step 10TKS0120 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the setting state to the setting change state (step 10TKS0210).

Furthermore, after setting the configuration state to the configuration change state, or if the configuration state before the power outage was in a RAM abnormal state (the result of step 10TKS0130 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes an out-of-use RAM abnormality detection process (step 10TKS0220), and if an abnormality occurs, initializes the corresponding area.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM initialization process (step 10TKS0230) after the execution of the RAM abnormality detection process outside the used area, or if the RAM clear switch 954 was ON when the power was turned on (the result of step 10TKS0140 is "YES"). In the RAM initialization process, the area to be initialized within the memory area is specified, necessary information is saved, and then the specified area (including the work area and areas outside the game area) is initialized.

When the processing in step 10TKS0190, step 10TKS0200, or step 10TKS0230 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes a startup setting process to set the information necessary for starting the gaming machine (step 10TKS0240). Furthermore, it executes a random number initialization setting process to set the initialization of variable-length random numbers (step 10TKS0250), then finishes the game start processing and returns to the power-on processing.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, setting value information is acquired when the power is turned on, and setting value-related control is performed according to the operation input at power-on and the setting state before power-off. For example, if the setting state before power-off was "setting change," regardless of whether there was an operation input or the setting state, the setting change mode is started when the gaming machine is started up, and the setting change is continued, allowing for a smooth resumption of gameplay. In this case, there is a possibility of a RAM error occurring because the setting value has not been finalized, and the setting value may not be what the user intended.

On the other hand, even if the setting state before power-off was "setting confirmation," if there is no input to start setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation operation) when power-on, the gaming machine will start without continuing the setting confirmation. Unlike setting change mode, the setting values are maintained without being changed, so gameplay can begin. If further confirmation is needed, the user can simply input the operation again. Furthermore, by not automatically switching to setting confirmation mode upon startup, it is possible to prevent unauthorized confirmation of setting values by intentionally restarting the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the setting is "RAM abnormality," the game cannot be started normally, so the machine's startup is stopped without performing a RAM clear. Since the setting "RAM abnormality" requires resetting the setting information, to prevent unauthorized changes by third parties, the system prevents the game from starting until the administrator intentionally resets the settings, thereby reducing the possibility of fraudulent activity. Additionally, if the setting "Fraudulent setting confirmation error" is available, similar to "RAM abnormality," the system prevents the game from starting normally, preventing unauthorized changes by third parties from tampering with the settings and resuming gameplay.

If gameplay is stopped due to an error or other issue, the system will automatically perform a RAM reset without requiring any specific operation to resume gameplay. In this case, if the game stoppage was caused by the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, the game will resume in a state initialized to a mode where it is easier to win prize balls, as the reference value (comparison value) will be cleared. Therefore, if gameplay is stopped due to the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, the system can maintain the reference value (comparison value) without clearing it during the game start setting process described later by leaving the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism as the game stoppage cause. This prevents fraudulent activity where a player intentionally causes a malfunction requiring a RAM reset to disrupt the operation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the power is cut off and then restored before the excessive payout suppression means is activated, the reference value is initialized. However, if the power is cut off and then restored after the excessive payout suppression means has been activated, the control system prevents the reference value from being initialized even if the power is restored multiple times, unless a power restoration accompanied by a RAM clear is performed. Even if the excessive payout suppression means is not activated, if the game is stopped due to an error, the reference value (comparison value) is maintained without being cleared. This prevents players from intentionally causing errors in the gaming machine to delay the activation of the excessive payout suppression means.

Furthermore, even if the game stop factor is cleared (step 10TKS0200) after the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism has been activated, the game stop factor will remain set to "activation of excessive prize ball suppression mechanism" unless a RAM clear is performed.

[39-1-3. Game Start Setup Process]
The above describes the game start processing (step 10TKS0040). Next, we will describe the game start setting processing (step 10TKS0050), which sets the parameters for starting the game. Figure 546 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the game start setting processing.

When the game start setting process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the power-on operation command (step 10TKS0310). Next, it sets the power-on initial data (step 10TKS0320).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not gameplay is possible (step 10TKS0330). If gameplay is not possible (the result of step 10TKS0330 is "NO"), the game start setting process ends and the system returns to the power-on process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game can be played (the result of step 10TKS0330 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 specifies the RAM initialization game start data as the game start data (step 10TKS0340). Next, it determines whether the RAM has been cleared or the settings have been changed (step 10TKS0350). If it is not the case that the RAM has been cleared or the settings have been changed (the result of step 10TKS0350 is "NO"), it specifies the power restoration game start data as the game start data (step 10TKS0360). Furthermore, it sets the specified game start data (step 10TKS0370).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes an over-prize ball suppression setting process (step 10 TKS0380) to perform the necessary settings for controlling the over-prize ball suppression means. Details of the over-prize ball suppression setting process will be described later in Figure 547.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets the game start command after startup (step 10 TKS0390), completes the game start setting process, and returns to the power-on process.

Furthermore, the game start setting process is called not only during the power-on process (step 10TKS0050) but also during the setting change/confirmation process (not shown) in the setting operation process (step 10TKS0750; Figure 551). When the game start setting process is executed during the power-on process, as described above, if it is not a setting change or setting confirmation, the normal power-on command is set as the power-on operation command. However, if it is a setting change or setting confirmation, the power-on command for setting change/confirmation is set. Also, if the game start setting process is executed during the setting change/confirmation process in the setting operation process, since the setting change/confirmation has been completed, the normal power-on command is set instead of the command for setting change/confirmation.

[39-1-4. Excessive Prize Ball Suppression Setting Process]
The game start setting process (step 10TKS0050) has been explained above. Next, the excessive prize ball suppression setting process (step 10TKS0380), which sets the excessive prize ball suppression means, will be explained.

Figure 547 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. As mentioned earlier, since the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism does not affect the results of the special lottery, the program for executing the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is placed outside the game area. However, the process for transitioning to a game stop state when the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated is executed within the game area.

When the excessive payout suppression setting process is initiated, the main control MPU 1311 first executes a game area register saving process (step 10 TKS0410) to save data stored in registers used in processing within the game area. In the game area register saving process, the stack pointer is saved, and a stack pointer used outside the game area is set. Furthermore, the values of various registers are saved to a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a reference value initialization process (step 10 TKS0420). In the reference value initialization process, an initial value is set for the reference value (comparison value). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the upper limit number of spins (for example, 95,000) is set as the initial value of the reference value (comparison value). As mentioned above, the reference value (comparison value) is incremented when it is detected that the game medium (game ball) has passed through the out-out gate, and decremented when prize medium (prize ball) is awarded. Note that if the reference value (comparison value) is to be initialized only when a RAM clear operation is performed, the reference value (comparison value) is maintained without initialization, and this process is skipped.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets the activation notification flag (game stop flag) for the excessive prize ball suppression means to deactivate (step 10 TKS0430). Note that if the reference value (comparison value) is initialized only when a RAM clear operation is performed, the reference value (comparison value) is not initialized. Therefore, if the activation notification flag is set to the activated state, the activation notification flag remains in the activated state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs a reference value division process (step 10 TKS0440). This reference value division process generates a command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the remaining number of balls until the excessive prize ball suppression means is activated, and performs calculations to control the timing of sending this command.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a game stop determination process (step 10 TKS0450). This process determines whether or not to activate the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. Details of the game stop determination process are explained in Figure 548.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a register recovery process within the game area to restore the values of the registers that were used and saved during processing within the game area (step 10 TKS0410). Afterward, it terminates the excessive prize ball suppression setting process and returns to the game start setting process.

[39-1-5. Game Stop Determination Process]
The above describes the setting process for suppressing excessive prize balls (step 10 TKS0380). Next, the game stop determination process (step 10 TKS0440), which determines whether or not to stop the game by activating the excessive prize ball suppression means, will be described.

Figure 548 is a flowchart showing the procedure for determining whether a game should be stopped. Figure 549 is a diagram showing an example of a program for determining whether a game should be stopped. The game stop determination process may be executed at the start of the game to determine whether the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism activated and stopped the game before the power was cut off, or it may be executed during gameplay to determine whether or not to activate the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. In both cases, it is called from processing within the game area, but the game stop determination process is executed outside the game area. Furthermore, the process of determining whether "activation of excessive prize ball suppression mechanism" is set as a "game stop factor," and setting the game to stop if "activation of excessive prize ball suppression mechanism" is set, is executed within the game area, not outside.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the activation notification flag for the excessive prize ball suppression means is set (step 10TKS0510). If the activation notification flag is set (result of step 10TKS0510 is "YES"), it determines whether the conditions for stopping the game due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means are met (step 10TKS0610). The game stop conditions include not only whether the reference value has reached a predetermined value, but also conditions based on the game state. The game stop conditions based on the game state will be explained with reference to Figure 550. The excessive prize ball suppression means activates when all conditions are met. Note that the activation notification flag for the excessive prize ball suppression means is set in the reference value subtraction process (Figure 557), described later, when the reference value reaches a predetermined value, and this timing differs from the timing of actually stopping the game.

If the game stop condition due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means is met (resulting in "YES" in step 10TKS0610), the main control MPU 1311 sets the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means as the game stop factor (step 10TKS0620), terminates the game stop determination process, and returns to the calling process. On the other hand, if the game stop condition due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means is not met (resulting in "NO" in step 10TKS0610), the game stop determination process terminates as is, and returns to the calling process.

If the operation notification flag is not set (result of step 10TKS0510 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the reference value (comparison value) is greater than or equal to the command transmission threshold (e.g., 6000, a value dependent on the gaming machine model, etc.) (step 10TKS0520). If the reference value (comparison value) is greater than or equal to the command transmission threshold (result of step 10TKS0520 is "YES"), the game stop determination process ends without sending a command regarding the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means, and returns to the calling process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value has been set in the periodic judgment counter (step 10TKS0530). The periodic judgment counter (transmission command periodic judgment counter) is a counter used to determine the timing for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510. The commands to be transmitted are the limit-reaching remaining ball count command (step 10TKS0580) and the pre-limit-reaching command (step 10TKS0590), which are used to provide advance notification of the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means. Furthermore, since the limit-reaching remaining ball count command can include the number of prize balls until the excessive prize ball suppression means is activated, a variety of effects can be executed, such as a countdown animation until the excessive prize ball suppression means is activated.

The main control MPU 1311 terminates the game stop determination process and returns to the calling process if a value is set in the periodic judgment counter (other than 0) (the result of step 10TKS0530 is "YES"). On the other hand, if no value is set in the periodic judgment counter (the result of step 10TKS0530 is "NO"), it determines whether the value stored in the transmission command save buffer matches the calculation result of the reference value division process, that is, whether the calculation result of the reference value division process has changed compared to the time of the previous command transmission (step 10TKS0540). Note that at the start of the game stop determination process, the calculation result of the reference value division process (lower two bytes) is stored in the BC register, and the least significant byte of the calculation result is stored in the C register. Specifically, the BC register stores the result (quotient) of dividing the reference value (comparison value) by 100.

In this way, by sending a command whenever the result of division by 100 changes, it becomes possible to send a command every time the reference value changes in increments of 100. Note that the amount of change in the reference value required to send a command is not limited to 100; it can be arbitrarily changed, allowing for adjustment of the number of command transmissions. This reduces the load on command transmission and enables the execution of countdown animations and other visual cues that indicate the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism.

If the calculation result of the reference value division process has not changed compared to the previous command transmission (the result of step 10 TKS0540 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates the game stop determination process and returns to the calling process, as there is no need to send the same command again.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 detects that the calculation result of the reference value division process has changed compared to when the command was sent (the result of step 10TKS0540 is "YES"), it sends a command and stores the value of the least significant byte (C register) of the calculation result of the reference value division process in the command save buffer (step 10TKS0550). As mentioned above, the value of the least significant byte (C register) of the calculation result of the reference value division process is the result (quotient) of dividing the reference value (comparison value) by 100.

To explain in more detail, if the baseline value at the time of the previous command transmission was 4950, the command value would be "**31H" (the lower byte of the command is 49, the result of dividing by 100). If the baseline value at the time of the current command transmission is 4920, the lower byte remains "31H". Therefore, it is determined that there has been no change since the previous transmission, and the command is not sent. On the other hand, if the baseline value is 4890, the lower byte of the command becomes "30H", which is a change compared to the previous transmission, so the command is sent.

Furthermore, if the reference value is 5010, the lower byte of the command will be "32H". In this case, the timing of the previous transmission has changed, and the command can still be transmitted. However, since this would cause the countdown animation to count up, potentially creating a sense of unease for the player, even if the lower byte of the command has changed since the previous transmission, it may be acceptable to refrain from transmitting the command if the reference value has increased (in a direction where the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism does not activate).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a new value for the periodic judgment counter and sets it (step 10 TKS0560). The periodic judgment counter is calculated by adding 50 to the remainder when the lower two bytes of the reference value are divided by 100, and then dividing by 100 again. This rounds the remainder when the lower two bytes of the reference value are divided by 100. Therefore, although the upper limit of the periodic judgment counter value is inherently 99, the program allows for values up to 149.

As described later, the command for the remaining ball count reaching the limit is sent every time the reference value (remaining balls) changes by 100. However, if the command is sent strictly in increments of 100, problems arise such as the command transmission frequency becoming excessive and the control load increasing when, for example, the reference value becomes 5000 and changes from 4999 → 5000 → 4999. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, by performing the above-mentioned control by allowing a predetermined error (e.g., 50; margin), the above-mentioned control is performed using a periodic judgment counter, thereby preventing fluctuations in the threshold for sending commands that repeatedly change within a predetermined range, and suppressing the problem of excessive command transmission frequency. The program that calculates and sets the periodic judgment counter while suppressing fluctuations in the periodic judgment counter corresponds to part 10TKP0010 in Figure 549.

Note that allowing for some error may result in the reference value (remaining quantity) included in the command received by the peripheral control board 1510 and the reference value (remaining quantity) actually managed by the main control board 1310 not perfectly matching. However, when displaying the remaining quantity for visual effect, a strict match is not necessary, and suppressing the increase in control load offers more advantages.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the reference value is greater than the command switching judgment value (for example, 5000) (step 10TKS0560). If the reference value is greater than or equal to the command switching judgment value (between 6000 and 5000) (the result of step 10TKS0560 is "YES"), the command to indicate the limit has not yet been reached is set (step 10TKS0570). On the other hand, if the reference value is greater than the command switching judgment value (the result of step 10TKS0560 is "NO"), the command to indicate the number of balls remaining before reaching the limit is set (step 10TKS0580).

The "Before Limit Reached" command is sent when the reference value is between the command transmission threshold and the command switching judgment value. For example, it notifies that the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism will be activated by providing game media (prize media) between 5000 (command switching judgment value) and 6000 (command transmission threshold). The "Remaining Balls Reached Limit" command is sent after the reference value reaches the command switching judgment value and includes the number of remaining balls until the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism is activated. Furthermore, both the "Before Limit Reached" command and the "Remaining Balls Reached Limit" command are sent every time the reference value changes by 100. Note that the values for the command transmission threshold (6000) and the command switching judgment value (5000) are not limited to the examples given and should be set according to the type of gaming machine. Also, the "Before Limit Reached" command and the "Remaining Balls Reached Limit" command do not necessarily have to be in units of 100; for example, the "Before Limit Reached" command could be in units of 200, and the "Remaining Balls Reached Limit" command in units of 100.

The peripheral control board 1510 can perform pre-notification of the excess payout suppression means upon receiving the command indicating the limit has not been reached and the command indicating the number of balls remaining until the limit has been reached. For example, upon receiving the command indicating the limit has not been reached, it performs a visual effect suggesting that the activation (pre-notification) of the excess payout suppression means is approaching, such as changing the background color, without significantly affecting the ongoing visual effect. On the other hand, upon receiving the command indicating the number of balls remaining until the limit has been reached, it initiates pre-notification of the excess payout suppression means, for example, by performing a countdown visual effect that displays the reference value itself or the number of balls remaining until the excess payout suppression means is activated, thereby suggesting to the player that the activation of the excess payout suppression means is imminent.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes the command transmission process for outside the game area (step 10 TKS0590), terminates the game stop determination process, and returns to the calling process.

Here, we will add some details regarding the conditions for stopping the game. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the excessive prize ball suppression means operates not only when the reference value (comparison value) reaches a predetermined stopping value (0), but also based on the state of the game's progress. For example, if the reference value reaches a predetermined value during a jackpot game and the game is stopped immediately, it would significantly diminish the player's enjoyment. Therefore, in states where the enjoyment of the game is heightened, such as during a jackpot game, the game is not forcibly stopped. Instead, the game is controlled to stop only after the state of the game's progress has changed.

Figure 550 shows an example of operation determination data for determining whether the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism can be activated in accordance with the game's progress. In this embodiment, the game's progress is quantified and stored (T_JOB_NO). The operation determination data defines whether or not to stop the game (activation of the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism) when the reference value reaches a stop value, corresponding to the game's progress (T_JOB_NO).

As shown in Figure 550, in this embodiment, the game is stopped (the excessive payout suppression means is activated) when the game's progress state (T_JOB_NO) is "Standby (0)", "In Progress (1)", "Big Win Determination (2)", "Missed (3)", or "Big Win Stopped (4)". On the other hand, after a big win or small win game has started, the game continues until that game state ends. When the game state ends and the machine returns to standby or in progress, the excessive payout suppression means is activated and the game stops. The program that determines whether or not to stop the game according to the game's progress state corresponds to part 10TKP0020 in Figure 549.

Furthermore, if the game is forcibly stopped immediately after displaying the lottery results in the case of a "jackpot stop," the enjoyment of the game may be significantly reduced. Therefore, it may be possible to stop the game before displaying the lottery results. Alternatively, the "jackpot stop" may be implemented by disabling the operation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, causing the game to stop after the jackpot game has ended.

Furthermore, even if the probability of winning a special lottery where a big win is expected is high (a so-called "probability variation state"), the excessive payout suppression mechanism will be activated if a big win game or a small win game has not yet begun. This is because allowing gameplay to continue in a probability variation state would negate the original purpose of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, which is to prevent excessive gambling.

[39-2. Control after the start of the game]
The above explains the processing at the start of the game. Next, we will explain the control after the game has started. Here, we will mainly explain the procedure for enabling the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism in the timer interrupt processing and the processing called from the timer interrupt processing.

[39-2-1. Timer Interrupt Handling]
First, let's explain timer interrupt processing. Figure 551 is a flowchart showing the procedure for timer interrupt processing. The basic functions of timer interrupt processing are the same as those explained earlier.

The main control MPU 1311 first specifies register bank 1 (step 10 TKS0710). As mentioned above, the main control MPU 1311 has two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and switches between banks to use one or the other. Bank 1 is used for timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used for main control processing. Note that it is not always necessary to switch banks during timer interrupt processing; for example, the register values may be saved in the stack area and restored after processing is complete.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing (step 10TKS0720). In the switch input processing, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs setting value confirmation processing to determine whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step 10TKS0730).

Once the setting value confirmation process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming machine is in a playable state (step 10TKS0740). If it is not in a playable state (the result of step 10TKS0740 is "NO"), i.e., if a setting operation is to be performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the setting operation process is executed (step 10TKS0750).

During the setup operation process, the system executes processes to change or confirm the settings of the gaming machine. It loads the setup data and sets it to the corresponding output port. Specifically, it outputs the power outage clear signal as OFF, clearing the ACK output port. Furthermore, it outputs the LED common port and LED cathode port as OFF, clears the motor port and solenoid port, and outputs the security signal. Afterward, it executes the setup display process and the setup confirmation/change process.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine is in a playable state (the result of step 10TKS0740 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a factor that would cause the game to stop (step 10TKS0760). If there is a factor that would cause the game to stop (the result of step 10TKS0760 is "YES"), it executes the game stop processing (step 10TKS0770). The game stop processing executes the necessary processes to stop the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if there are no factors causing the game to stop (the result of step 10TKS0760 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a game-ready processing step (step 10TKS0780) to control the progress of the game. Details of the game-ready processing are explained in Figure 552.

Once the game-ready processing or game-stopping processing is complete, the main control MPU 1311 executes the performance display monitor processing (step 10 TKS0790). The performance display monitor processing displays various information. As mentioned above, the performance display monitor processing does not execute any processes directly related to game control, and the performance display monitor itself is not something the player intentionally refers to. Therefore, in this embodiment, the performance display monitor processing is stored outside the game area. Details of the performance display monitor processing are explained in Figure 553.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output process (step 10TKS0800). Furthermore, after the display LED output process or setting operation process is completed, it executes the test signal output process (step 10TKS0810). The test signal output process performs processing to output a test signal to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine. In this embodiment, similar to the performance display monitor process, this is stored outside the gaming area.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes the anomaly detection command transmission process (step 10 TKS0820). The anomaly detection command transmission process is the process of sending the command set when an anomaly occurs.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 performs operations such as clearing the watchdog timer by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step 10 TKS0830), and resetting the register bank to 0, thereby ending the timer interrupt processing.

[39-2-2. Processing when game is ready]
Next, we will explain the processing when the game is ready to play. As mentioned above, the processing when the game is ready to play is performed after the game machine has started up and when it is ready to play as normal. Specifically, it is performed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 550) when the game is ready to play and there are no factors that would cause the game to stop (Step 10 TKS0780). Below is an overview of the procedure for processing when the game is ready to play.

Figure 552 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the game-play-ready processing performed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment.

When the game-ready processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first executes switch-related control processing (step 10TKS0910). In the switch-related control processing, data is created and corresponding processing is executed based on signals input from various switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine. Details are explained in Figure 357, etc.

After the switch-related control processing is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step 10 TKS0920). The timer update process updates various timers necessary for the game's progress. These timers include 1-byte and 2-byte timers, depending on the time they measure.

After the timer update process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step 10 TKS0930). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed is calculated based on the read input information. Furthermore, based on the calculation result of the prize ball count, a prize ball command for dispensing game balls is created and transmitted to the dispensing control board 951. Other processes, such as checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, are also executed. Details of the prize ball control process are explained in Figure 535.

After the prize ball control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step 10 TKS0940). In frame command reception processing, the received commands are stored as information for transmission to the payout control board 951 and peripheral control board 1510, or commands are generated.

After the frame command reception process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step 10 TKS0950). Fraud detection processing checks for abnormal conditions such as prize ball entry. For example, this includes processing for detecting abnormalities in the large prize slot entry, magnetic detection abnormalities, random number abnormalities, and normal electric prize entry abnormalities.

After the fraud detection process is executed, the main control unit MPU 1311 executes the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process (step 10 TKS0960). After each starting gate passage process is executed, the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process calls the process corresponding to the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number, including the opening of the main prize gate.

After the special symbol/special electric mechanism control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control process (step 10 TKS0970). The normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control process performs tasks such as determining whether or not to open the second start opening 2004 when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step 10 TKS0980), outputting the output information set in each process from the output terminals of the various output ports. Afterward, it terminates the game-ready processing and returns to the timer interrupt processing while maintaining the interrupt state.

[39-2-3. Performance Display Monitor Processing]
Next, the performance display monitor process will be explained. As mentioned above, the performance display monitor process is executed after the game stop processing or the game enablement processing (step 10 TKS0790). The performance display monitor process displays various information and is stored outside the game area.

Figure 553 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance display monitoring process executed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment.

Since the program for executing the performance display monitor processing is located outside the game area, when the performance display monitor processing starts, the main control MPU 1311 first executes a game area register saving process to save the data stored in registers used in processing within the game area (step 10TKS1010). In the game area register saving process, the stack pointer is saved, and a stack pointer used outside the game area is set. Furthermore, the values of various registers are saved to a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a game-stopping factor (step 10TKS1020). If there is a game-stopping factor (the result of step 10TKS1020 is "YES"), the processing from step 10TKS1070 onwards is executed.

On the other hand, if there are no factors causing the game to stop and the game continues (the result of step 10TKS1020 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the monitor valid state determination table (step 10TKS1030). Furthermore, it performs multi-element mask processing (step 10TKS1040).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor switch detection process (step 10 TKS 1050). In this process, data such as prize ball information is collected and calculated, data for performance display is generated, and the display is updated.

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 executes the excessive prize ball suppression control process (step 10, TKS 1060). This process controls the excessive prize ball suppression means. Details of the excessive prize ball suppression control process are explained in Figure 554.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor display creation process to create display data for displaying information on the performance display monitor (step 10TKS1070). Finally, it executes a game area register restoration process to restore the values of registers that were used and saved during processing within the game area (step 10TKS1080). After that, the performance display monitor processing ends and the process returns to the calling process.

[39-2-4. Excessive Prize Ball Suppression Control Process]
Next, we will explain the excess payout suppression control process. The excess payout suppression control process is called from the performance display monitor process and is therefore executed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the excess payout suppression control process is stored outside the game area, similar to the performance display monitor process. Figure 554 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the excess payout suppression process.

The main control MPU 1311 first sets up a target switch information data table to identify the switches that change the reference value (step 10 TKS 1110). The target switch information data table defines the number of prize balls awarded for each switch. It also includes switches that pass through the output gate, and switches that change (add/subtract) the reference value are commonly defined. An example of the target switch information data table is shown in Figure 555.

As shown in Figure 555, the target switch information data table includes information indicating whether prize balls are enabled or disabled when input to the target switch is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to each switch, and further includes information necessary for determining switch input. The target switch information data table can be used universally to determine the ON/OFF state of each switch. For example, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is used in the performance display monitor switch detection process (step 10TKS0050) of the performance display monitor processing (Figure 553) to detect entries into each prize slot, obtain the number of prize balls, and calculate the base value.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the switch defined in the target switch information data table has detected the entry (passage) of a game ball (step 10 TKS 1120).

If the target switch is detected (passed) (the result of step 10 TKS 1120 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a reference value addition process, adding 1 to the reference value (step 10 TKS 1130). Details of the reference value addition process are explained in Figure 556. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the counting is performed by subtracting the number of prize balls from the reference value when awarding prize balls. However, if the counting is performed by adding the number of prize balls to the reference value when awarding prize balls, then the counting is performed by subtracting 1 from the reference value when detecting the out switch.

Next, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 determines whether the prize ball is invalid or not (step 10TKS1140). If the prize ball is not invalid (the result of step 10TKS1140 is "NO"), it performs a reference value subtraction process to subtract the reference value (step 10TKS1150). Details of the reference value subtraction process are explained in Figure 557.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there are any remaining target switches (step 10TKS1160) if the prize ball is invalid, such as when passing through the output gate (the result of step 10TKS1140 is "YES"). If there are remaining target switches (the result of step 10TKS1160 is "YES"), the processing from step 10TKS1120 onwards is executed for the next target switch.

The processing from step 10TKS1120 to step 10TKS1160 is executed for each record included in the target switch information data table. Therefore, as mentioned above, processing is performed not only for switches that award prize balls when set to ON, but also for switches that do not award prize balls, such as the out switch (outlet). Consequently, based on the "Prize Ball Enabled/Disabled" value in the target switch information data table, the base value subtraction process is not executed if the prize ball is disabled, and is executed if the prize ball is enabled. This configuration allows the program to be reused even if the configuration of various switches differs due to differences in the gaming machine model, thereby improving the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Once the addition or subtraction of the reference value is completed for all target switches (result of step 10TKS1160 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 performs a reference value division process (step 10TKS1170) to generate a command related to the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means and to control the timing of sending that command.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a game stop determination process to determine whether or not to activate the excessive prize ball suppression means (step 10 TKS 1180). Details of the game stop determination process are shown in Figure 548. Once the game stop determination process is complete, the excessive prize ball suppression control process terminates, and the system returns to the calling process (performance display monitor process).

Furthermore, while the excessive prize ball suppression control process is called from the performance display monitor process, it may also be called after the performance display monitor process is executed in the timer interrupt process. For example, since the excessive prize ball suppression means transitions from an inactive state to an active state when prize balls are generated, i.e., when the game is playable, the excessive prize ball suppression control process may be called from the game-ready process.

[39-2-5. Addition of Reference Value]
Next, we will explain the standard value addition process. The standard value addition process is called from the excessive prize ball suppression control process and is stored outside the game area, similar to the performance display monitor process. Figure 556 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the standard value addition process.

The main control MPU 1311 first adds 1 to the value of the first byte of the reference value (comparison value), and then updates the values of the second and third bytes (step 10 TKS 1210). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the reference value (comparison value) consists of three bytes, so 1 is added to the first byte, and if a carry occurs, it is reflected in the second and third bytes.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the transmission command period addition determination process (steps 10TKS1220 to 10TKS1270). This transmission command period addition determination process determines the timing for transmitting a command, including a reference value, to the peripheral control board 1510. The transmission period of the transmission command is determined based on the period determination counter.

In the transmission command period increment determination process, first, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the period determination counter in a predetermined register (step 10TKS1220). Next, it determines whether the period determination counter is 0 or not (step 10TKS1230). If the period determination counter is 0 (the result of step 10TKS1230 is "YES"), it further stores 0 in the register value, i.e., in the period determination counter (step 10TKS1270).

On the other hand, if the period determination counter is not zero (the result of step 10TKS1230 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the register storing the period determination counter (step 10TKS1240). Furthermore, it determines whether the value in the register matches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 149) (step 10TKS1250).

The main control MPU 1311 clears the register (step 10TKS1260) if the register value is not less than a predetermined upper limit (149), i.e., if it matches the upper limit (149) (the result of step 10TKS1250 is "NO"). Furthermore, it stores the cleared register value, i.e., 0, in the periodic judgment counter (step 10TKS1270).

On the other hand, if the value of the register is less than a predetermined upper limit (149) (the result of step 10TKS1250 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the register in the periodic judgment counter (step 10TKS1270). This updates the value of the periodic judgment counter to a value incremented by 1.

Once the periodic judgment counter update is complete, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the reference value (comparison value) is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 95000; the initial value of the reference value (comparison value)) (step 10 TKS 1280). If the reference value (comparison value) is less than the upper limit (the result of step 10 TKS 1280 is "NO"), the reference value increment process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling program.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 finds that the reference value is equal to or greater than the upper limit (95000) (the result of step 10 TKS 1280 is "YES"), it sets the reference value to the upper limit (95000) (step 10 TKS 1290). After that, it terminates the reference value addition process and returns to the calling process.

By configuring the system as described above, the reference value will not exceed the upper limit (95,000). Therefore, the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism can be activated when the number of prize balls acquired reaches the upper limit (95,000) from the state where the most prize balls have been consumed during gameplay. If the reference value were allowed to exceed the upper limit (95,000), a problem would arise where, if a player changes while the amount of prize balls consumed exceeds the amount of prize balls acquired, the new player would acquire more than the upper limit (95,000). However, this gaming machine of this embodiment prevents the occurrence of the above problem.

[39-2-6. Subtraction of Reference Value]
Next, we will explain the standard value subtraction process. The standard value subtraction process is called from the excessive prize ball suppression control process and is stored outside the game area, similar to the performance display monitor process. Figure 557 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the standard value subtraction process.

When the reference value subtraction process begins, the main control unit (MPU) 1311 first temporarily stores the reference value in a register (step 10, TKS 1310). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the reference value consists of three bytes, and each byte is stored in a register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 subtracts the subtraction number from the reference value (step 10 TKS 1320). The subtraction number is the number of prize balls awarded for each target switch determined to be ON. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the value stored in the register is less than 0 (step 10 TKS 1330). Whether the value stored in the register is less than 0 is determined if the carry flag (borrow flag) was set during the subtraction. At this time, the reference value is set to 0.

If the value stored in the register is less than 0 (the result of step 10TKS1330 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game stop condition has been met (step 10TKS1340). As mentioned above, even if the reference value reaches 0, the game may continue until predetermined conditions are met. Therefore, if the game stop condition has not been met (the result of step 10TKS1340 is "NO"), the limit reached notification command is set (step 10TKS1350).

After the limit reached notification command is set, or if the game stop condition is met and the game is to be stopped immediately (the result of step 10TKS1340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 clears the register storing the reference value (step 10TKS1360) and sets the activation notification flag for the excess prize ball suppression means to ON (step 10TKS1370).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 stores the register value in the reference value (step 10TKS1380). That is, if the reference value after subtraction is 0 or greater (the result of step 10TKS1330 is "Yes"), the register value is stored directly in the reference value; otherwise, the register value is cleared, and 0 is stored in the reference value.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 subtracts the subtraction number from the period determination counter (step 10TKS1390) and determines whether the period determination counter is less than 0 (step 10TKS1400). If the period determination counter is 0 or greater (result of step 10TKS1400 is "NO"), this process terminates and returns to the calling process. On the other hand, if the period determination counter is less than 0 (result of step 10TKS1400 is "YES"), the period determination counter is cleared (step 10TKS1410), this process terminates, and returns to the calling process.

The control of the excessive prize ball suppression means of the gaming machine in this embodiment has been described above. In this embodiment, when the operation of the excessive prize ball suppression means is determined during a jackpot game state (when the reference value reaches a predetermined stop value), the excessive prize ball suppression means is actually activated after the jackpot game state ends. In this case, the control when the power is cut off and then restored before the jackpot game state ends (while the jackpot game state is still ongoing) will be described.

As mentioned above, if the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated during a jackpot state, and then the power is cut off and then restored, resetting the baseline value (resetting the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism), a problem arises where players can continue playing on a machine that is more likely to award prize balls. In this situation, there is a risk that a player who senses the excessive payout suppression mechanism is about to activate might intentionally cut off the machine's power, a form of fraud. However, it is not easy to reliably determine whether the power was cut off due to fraudulent activity, and even if it were possible, the control system might become complicated. Furthermore, if the power is not cut off due to fraudulent activity, the game may be stopped again immediately after the power is restored due to the activation of the excessive payout suppression mechanism, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, if the excessive payout suppression means is activated after a specific game state, such as a jackpot game state, has ended, the operation of the excessive payout suppression means may be reset. For example, in a configuration where the operation of the excessive payout suppression means is managed by a flag, the flag is cleared (initialized) when the power is cut off and then turned back on. Furthermore, when the game is resumed, the flag is cleared and the reference value is initialized to prevent the excessive payout suppression means from activating. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the reference value is not initialized when the power of the gaming machine is cut off and turned back on in the case of a game stop due to fraudulent activity. However, only when the flag is set, even if the cause of the power cut off and turned back on is potentially fraudulent activity, the flag may be cleared and the reference value initialized to prevent the excessive payout suppression means from activating. This makes it possible to simplify the processing when the power is turned on. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and the enjoyment of the game being diminished if the game is stopped again due to the activation of the excessive payout suppression means after the power is turned back on, even though the game was stopped due to a malfunction of the gaming machine.

In contrast, if the excessive payout suppression mechanism is activated after a specific game state, such as a jackpot state, has ended (i.e., if a flag is set), the flag may remain set after power-on, without resetting the reference value. This allows control by the excessive payout suppression mechanism to continue regardless of whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred, and enables the excessive payout suppression mechanism to be activated after a specific game state, such as a jackpot state, has ended.

[39-3. Invention relating to the control of means for suppressing excessive prize balls]
Finally, we will list some representative aspects of the invention relating to the control of the excessive prize ball suppression means disclosed herein.

(1) A gaming machine that executes a lottery when the starting conditions are met and enables the creation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A means for calculating a standard value to determine whether or not to stop the game,
A game stopping means that stops the progress of the game based on the aforementioned standard value,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value calculation means is
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on, a predetermined initial value can be set for the aforementioned reference value.
If a game medium is consumed in a game, the number of game mediums consumed shall be added to the aforementioned standard value.
If a prize is won based on the results of the game, the number of prizes won shall be deducted from the aforementioned standard value.
The game stopping means is characterized in that it stops the game when the reference value reaches a predetermined stopping value.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The reference value calculation means is characterized in that, when the number of game media consumed in a game is added to the reference value, if the reference value matches the predetermined initial value, the reference value is not updated.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The reference value calculation means is characterized in that, when the number of game media consumed in a game is added to the reference value, if the reference value exceeds the predetermined initial value, the predetermined initial value is set to the reference value.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The reference value calculation means is characterized in that, when subtracting the subtraction number from the reference value based on the result of the game, if the reference value matches the predetermined stop value, the reference value is not updated.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The reference value calculation means is characterized in that, when subtracting the subtraction number from the reference value based on the result of the game, if the reference value falls below the predetermined stop value, the reference value is set to the predetermined stop value.

In configuration (1), a predetermined initial value is set as the reference value when the power is turned on. The reference value is increased when game balls are consumed, and decreased when prize balls are acquired. By stopping the game when the reference value reaches a predetermined stop value (e.g., 0), the game can be stopped when a predetermined number of prize balls have been acquired by the player, thereby preventing the game from continuing when the number of acquired prize balls is excessive (excess prize ball suppression means).

Furthermore, in configurations (2) and (3), if the number of game tokens consumed exceeds the number of prize tokens won when a player changes, a problem arises where the new player can win more prize tokens than the set upper limit. Therefore, by controlling the consumption of game tokens to prevent exceeding a predetermined initial value, the above problem can be solved, ensuring fairness in the game and suppressing a decline in the game's appeal (see Figures 548, 556, etc.).

Furthermore, in configurations (4) and (5), the predetermined stop value (lower limit) is never exceeded, thus preventing the reference value from being counted correctly due to overflow or other issues (see Figures 548, 557, etc.).

(6) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The system further includes a game state detection means capable of detecting the state that occurs in the gaming machine,
The game stopping means is characterized in that, even if the reference value reaches a predetermined stopping value, it will not stop the game if the game state detected by the game state detection means is a predetermined game state.

Furthermore, in configuration (6), even when the reference value reaches a predetermined stop value, it is possible to determine whether or not to stop the game depending on the game state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the enjoyment of the game by forcibly stopping the game in the middle of a jackpot (see Figures 548, 550, 557, etc.).

(7) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The system further includes a performance control means capable of controlling a performance device capable of executing game performances,
The game stopping means transmits a command (limit reached notification command) to notify that the predetermined threshold has been reached when the reference value reaches a predetermined threshold,
The aforementioned performance control means is characterized by enabling the performance device to execute performances based on the command.

In configuration (7), by setting a predetermined threshold to be a predetermined difference from the game stop value set by the excessive prize ball suppression means, a command indicating that the excessive prize ball suppression means is about to activate can be transmitted to the performance control means (peripheral control board). Upon receiving this command, the performance control means (peripheral control board) can perform a performance to notify the player in advance of the excessive prize ball suppression means's activation, allowing the player to understand the game situation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (see Figure 548, etc.).

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The system further comprises a performance control means capable of controlling a performance device capable of executing game performances,
The game stopping means transmits a command corresponding to the reference value (limit reached remaining balls command) to the performance control means each time the reference value exceeds a predetermined boundary value.
The aforementioned performance control means is characterized by enabling the performance device to execute performances based on the command.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (1),
The system further includes a performance control means capable of controlling a performance device capable of executing game performances,
The game stopping means is capable of transmitting a command corresponding to the reference value (limit remaining ball count command) to the performance control means when the reference value exceeds a predetermined boundary value.
The aforementioned performance control means enables the performance device to execute performances based on the command,
The game stopping means is characterized in that, if the amount of change in the reference value after the command has been transmitted is less than a predetermined amount, it does not transmit a command corresponding to the reference value.

In configurations (8) and (9), by transmitting a command corresponding to the reference value (limit remaining ball count command) to the performance control means (peripheral control board), it becomes possible to execute performances based on the current reference value. This allows players to understand the game situation, and furthermore, it enables the execution of performances that show the progress until the excessive prize ball suppression means is activated based on the reference value (for example, a countdown performance), thereby increasing the diversity of game performances and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (see Figure 548, etc.).

Furthermore, in configuration (9), the reference value changes near the boundary value due to increases or decreases in the reference value based on the progress of the game. This prevents the load on the gaming machine from increasing due to frequent command transmission even when the change in the reference value is small.

(10) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and generates a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A means for calculating a standard value to determine whether or not to stop the game,
A game stop flag setting means capable of setting a game stop flag (an activation notification flag for the excessive prize ball suppression means) for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the aforementioned reference value,
A game stop means capable of stopping the progress of the game based on the game stop flag and the game state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value calculation means is
If a game medium is consumed in a game, the number of game mediums consumed shall be added to the aforementioned standard value.
If a prize is won based on the results of the game, the corresponding deduction amount for the won prize is subtracted from the aforementioned standard value.
The game stop flag setting means sets the game stop flag when the reference value reaches a predetermined stop value.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off while a game is in progress and then the power is turned on, the reference value is initialized even if the game stop flag is set.

In configuration (10), similar to the gaming machine in configuration (1), a configuration equivalent to an excessive prize ball suppression means is included, thus preventing the continuation of gameplay when the number of prize balls acquired is excessive. Furthermore, because the reference value is initialized when the power is turned on, the processing during the startup of the gaming machine can be simplified. In addition, it prevents the game from being interrupted again due to the activation of the excessive prize ball suppression means after the power is turned back on, even if the game has stopped due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, thus preventing a delay in resuming gameplay and diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

(11) A gaming machine that enables the execution of a lottery when the starting conditions are met, and the generation of a special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A means for calculating a standard value to determine whether or not to stop the game,
A game stop flag setting means capable of setting a game stop flag (an activation notification flag for the excessive prize ball suppression means) for determining whether or not to stop the game based on the aforementioned reference value,
A game stop means capable of stopping the progress of the game based on the game stop flag and the game state,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned reference value calculation means is
If a game medium is consumed in a game, the number of game mediums consumed shall be added to the aforementioned standard value.
If a prize is won based on the results of the game, the corresponding deduction amount for the won prize is subtracted from the aforementioned standard value.
The game stop flag setting means sets the game stop flag when the reference value reaches a predetermined stop value.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off while a game is in progress and then the power is turned on, the reference value is not initialized if the game stop flag is set.

In configuration (11), similar to the gaming machine in (1), it has a configuration equivalent to an excessive prize ball suppression mechanism, thus preventing the continuation of gameplay when the number of prize balls acquired is excessive. Furthermore, by maintaining the standard value without resetting it, regardless of whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred, the excessive prize ball suppression mechanism can be activated more reliably.

[40. Switching of effects based on player actions]
The above explains the details of the control mechanism for suppressing excessive prize balls. Next, we will explain the player-participation type of presentation, which allows the content to be changed by the player's actions, as mentioned earlier.

Conventional gaming machines often rely on pre-set animations to control the start and end times of mechanical devices, meaning players sometimes have no control over the progression of the animations. Therefore, this embodiment proposes a means for players to modify the progression and nature of various animations, thereby increasing the diversity of animations, creating a more varied and exciting gaming experience, and further enhancing the enjoyment of the game by actively involving players in the animations.

Furthermore, in the game machine's presentation in this embodiment, the symbol display (decorative symbols) and the hold display are shown in a manner appropriate to the presentation content. For example, the display area on the screen is maximized by reducing the size of the decorative symbols or displaying only numbers for the hold display. On the other hand, to allow the player to accurately understand the progress of the game, the decorative symbols are displayed larger or the hold memory is displayed as a picture.

The following describes an example where the player can change the presentation by inputting information into the control system. This section focuses on the presentation after a reach occurs. In particular, the presentation after a high-probability SP reach occurs is relatively long (compared to presentations performed in less promising situations). Therefore, even if the presentation is flashy and highly promising, repeated execution can bore the player and diminish the enjoyment of the game. To address this, the system is configured to allow the player to select which presentation is performed.

This section describes an example of skipping the execution of a specific animation by operating the control means provided on the gaming machine. The control means refers to the animation control unit 301 described in Figures 516 to 519, and includes a rotary control unit 302 and a push-button control unit (animation button) 303.

[40-1. Skip the staging]
Figure 558 illustrates an example of skipping a specific animation by operating the control device when it is executed after a reach occurs. Figure 559 is a timing chart corresponding to the animation example shown in Figure 558. The animation patterns in the timing chart of Figure 559 are denoted by symbols that correspond to each screen in the screen transitions of Figure 558.

First, the screen configuration of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained. Figures 558(A) to (H) show the screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. To generate the images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, each layer corresponding to the image (object) to be displayed is drawn, and these layers are stacked sequentially. These layers include layers for displaying the background, layers for displaying videos, layers for displaying hold information and symbols, etc. Furthermore, multiple layers can be used even if they serve the same purpose (e.g., for background display, hold information, decorative symbol display, etc.).

Figure 558(A) shows an example screen displaying the state where the pattern changes have stopped (until time t301). The screen shown in Figure 558(A) displays pattern display and hold display in addition to the performance objects (characters, etc., not shown). The pattern display includes decorative patterns 8210 and mini-patterns (fourth pattern) 8220. The hold display includes the hold pattern display 8230, the current hold display (current hold display) 8240, and the hold count display 8250. Note that in diagrams such as Figure 558, the display of performance-specific objects and backgrounds other than those necessary for the necessary configuration is omitted.

As mentioned above, the decorative symbols 8210 are displayed in multiple columns (for example, three columns: left, middle, and right), and the display of each decorative symbol column begins to change, then they are sequentially stopped. Once all decorative symbol columns have stopped, the player is shown the result of a lottery based on the random numbers contained in the held memory (the held symbol). The decorative symbols 8210 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 are displayed larger and more clearly than the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display unit. Therefore, players generally focus their attention on the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The mini-symbols 8220 are displayed in a smaller area than the decorative symbols 8210, and, like the decorative symbols 8210, they suggest to the player the result of a lottery based on the random numbers contained in the held memory (the held symbols). Furthermore, the start and stop timings of the symbol changes are the same as those of the decorative symbols 8210. In addition, the mini-symbols 8220 are positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the execution of animations or other effects. Therefore, by hiding the decorative symbols 8210, the effects can be made more visible, and the mini-symbols 8220 allow the player to confirm the display of the changing symbols. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the mini-symbols 8220 are a scaled-down version of the decorative symbols 8210, but they do not necessarily have to be a scaled-down version of the decorative symbols 8210; any form that can suggest to the player that the symbols are changing or the lottery result is acceptable. Also, the placement of the mini-symbols 8220 may be changed depending on the content of the effects and the state of the game.

The reserved symbol display 8230 includes reserved symbols 8231 corresponding to reserved memories and reserved display areas 8232 where each reserved symbol is placed. Reserved symbols 8231 are displayed when there is a corresponding reserved memory, while the reserved display areas 8232 display all symbols up to the maximum number of reserved symbols (for example, 4). The reserved symbols 8231 can also be displayed in a different manner than usual when there is a high probability of a jackpot due to the symbol change based on the corresponding reserved memory, thus providing a pre-announcement effect that suggests the lottery result to the player.

The reserved display 8240 includes the reserved symbol display 8241 and the reserved display area 8242 (Figure 558(B)). The reserved display 8240 indicates the reserved memory (the reserved symbol) during the symbol variation and is displayed in a way that attracts the player's attention more than the reserved memory symbol display before the variation. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is displayed larger than other reserved memory symbol displays. Furthermore, when the probability of a jackpot is high during the ongoing symbol variation (the variation), such as when a reach occurs, special effects, such as changes in color or shape, may be performed. In addition, in conjunction with the reach effect, the appearance of the reserved symbol display 8241 may be changed to a character or to an object that constitutes the effect.

The "Hold Count Display 8250" shows the number of pending symbols whose symbol changes have not yet been displayed. This provides the player with minimal information regarding the pending symbols.

The reserved symbol display 8230, like the decorative symbol 8210 mentioned above, can be hidden depending on the performance. In this case, to prevent the player from losing track of reserved symbol information, the reserved symbol count display 8250 is generally maintained. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol display 8230 is hidden, the reserved symbol 8231 and the reserved symbol display area 8232 are also hidden. Note that if the reserved symbol count is 0, it may be hidden, or if the symbols are changing, only the relevant reserved symbol display 8240 may be displayed. Also, the reserved symbol display 8230 may be made semi-transparent instead of completely hidden, or only the reserved symbols for which a pre-read performance is being executed may be made visible. By hiding the reserved symbol display 8230, more display area can be secured for performances, thereby increasing the variety of performances and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, Figure 558(B) will be explained. Figure 558(B) shows the state after the symbol change has stopped and the next symbol change, which had been held in reserve, has started (time t300 to time t301). When the display of the decorative symbol 8210 starts to change, the display of the mini symbol 8220 also starts to change in conjunction with it. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the decorative symbol 8210 and the mini symbol 8220 are displayed in conjunction with each other.

When the pattern change begins, the leftmost reserved pattern in the reserved pattern display 8230 moves to the corresponding reserved pattern display 8240. In the example in Figure 558(B), the reserved pattern that has been in the state of a pre-read animation is moving. At this time, the reserved pattern 8231 on the reserved pattern display area 8232 also moves one position to the left. Furthermore, the value of the reserved number display 8250 is also decreased by 1, changing from "4" to "3" in Figure 558(B). Also, if a game ball enters the starting entry point during the variation display, the value of the reserved number display 8250 is increased, and reserved pattern 8231 is added as well, provided that the reserved number does not exceed the upper limit. Note that the pre-read animation using reserved patterns may be performed not only when a reserved pattern is added, but also when a reserved pattern is consumed (moved).

After the symbol change begins, each decorative symbol stops and is displayed sequentially. In this example, the left decorative symbol stops, then the right decorative symbol, then the middle decorative symbol (time t301). Figure 558(C) shows that the left and right decorative symbols stop on the same symbol ("7"), resulting in a so-called "reach" (time t301-t302). In the example shown in Figure 558(C), a special reach with a high probability of winning has occurred.

In Figure 558(C), similar to Figures 558(A) and 558(B), the decorative pattern 8210, mini-pattern 8220, reserved pattern display 8230, the reserved pattern display 8240, and the reserved number display 8250 are all displayed, resulting in a display configuration that makes it easy to understand the game state (first display state). Regarding the reserved pattern display, the display of at least one of the reserved pattern display 8230 or the reserved pattern display 8240 makes it easy to understand the game state in the current variation display. Therefore, when the display of at least one of the reserved pattern display 8230 or the reserved pattern display 8240 is defined as the reserved pattern display, the first display state is the state in which the decorative pattern 8210 is displayed and the reserved pattern display is performed. Furthermore, in the first display state, it is irrelevant whether the mini-pattern 8220 is displayed or the reserved number display 8250 is displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 558, the presentation progresses in stages after an SP Reach (a reach with a high probability of success) occurs. First, a relatively simple screen is displayed for a certain period of time, then objects such as characters are displayed, the main SP Reach presentation (SP presentation) is executed, and then decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The presentation details will be explained below, referring to the screens at each stage.

Figure 558(D) shows the execution of the special effect, which is the first stage of the animation after an SP reach occurs (time t302). The special effect includes special effect 1, which initially emits light from the center of the screen, and special effect 2, which displays a character (star). To make the player more aware of the animation, the objects displayed on the screen are kept to a minimum. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8210 and the hold animation are not displayed (second display state). This configuration allows the player to shift from a dynamic screen (first display state) where the decorative symbol 8210 is displayed and a reach occurs to a screen with fewer objects displayed (second display state), thus attracting the player's attention. Note that the second display state includes cases where the mini symbol 8220 and the hold number display 8250 are displayed, as well as cases where either the mini symbol 8220 or the hold number display 8250, or both, are not displayed.

The display in Figure 558(D) continues for a predetermined time. During this time, no new characters or objects are displayed, but background color changes and lighting effects may continue. Operating the press operation unit 303 while Figure 558(D) is displayed allows the special effect to be skipped (cancelled). While the special effect changes the flow of the performance and can attract the player's attention, it does not display any special characters or other elements. Therefore, if the special effect indicates a high level of expectation, the player can choose to return to the screen displaying the decorative symbols 8210 (Figure 558(F)) according to their preference (time t303).

At this time, the transition from Figure 558(D) to Figure 558(F) may be made not limited to operation of the pressing operation unit 303, but also by receiving operation from the rotating operation unit 302 or other operating means. Furthermore, the special effect may be skipped by operation other than that of the pressing operation unit 303. For example, it may be an operation of the rotating operation unit 302, or another operating means. Also, by equipping the operating means with a contact detection sensor (touch sensor), the special effect may be skipped (cancelled) simply by touching the operating means.

In Figure 558(F), an operation prompt display is executed, and the display of the decorative pattern 8210, the held pattern display 8230, and the held pattern display 8240 is resumed. In the illustrated example, both the rotary operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 303 are capable of receiving operations. When the player operates the operation unit, a special effect is executed. For example, a different character from special effect 2 may be displayed, or special sound effects or voices may be output. This configuration allows players to actively participate in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

It is not necessary to restart the display of the decorative pattern 8210, the reserved pattern display 8230, and the reserved pattern display 8240. For example, in Figure 558(F), only the decorative pattern 8210 is redisplayed, while the reserved pattern display 8240 and the reserved pattern display 8230 are not displayed. Alternatively, only the reserved pattern 8231 of the reserved pattern display 8230 may be displayed, or only the base reserved pattern display area 8232 may be displayed. This configuration allows the player to understand that the game has returned from a special effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since Figure 558(D) was displayed (time t304), special effect 2 is executed (Figure 558(E)). In special effect 2, a character (star) is displayed in the center of the screen. At this time, the character displayed may differ depending on the expected probability of a big win. Also, in special effect 2, as in special effect 1, only the mini symbol 8220 and the number of reserved symbols 8250 are displayed, while the decorative symbol 8210, the reserved symbol display 8230, and the reserved symbol display 8240 are not displayed.

Furthermore, if an operation input is received from the operating means such as the press operation unit 303 while Figure 558(E) is displayed, the player can choose to switch to the normal screen (Figure 558(F)), similar to the case of Figure 558(D). Also, even though operation input is possible during the execution of a special performance, the operation prompt display is not shown. This allows the player to continue playing while testing whether or not they can skip the performance when a performance with a simple screen configuration, such as a special performance, is executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

While Special Performance 2 is running, at a predetermined timing, a lamp will light up in a manner similar to (the same as) when a jackpot is confirmed (a pseudo-jackpot manner) (time t305). The lamp performance in the pseudo-jackpot manner in Special Performance 2 does not necessarily require that the actual result of the symbol change be a confirmed jackpot. If a jackpot is confirmed, the lamp performance will be executed again in the confirmed jackpot manner at the timing when the SP performance, which begins after the execution of Special Performance, ends (time t307). The lighting of the pseudo-jackpot manner may be performed randomly, or the probability of execution may be increased when the expectation of a jackpot is high. In this way, by executing the lamp performance that is performed in the case of a jackpot, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when an SP reach occurs, a special display 8270 is shown, as shown in Figure 558(C). The special display 8270 may be a message assisting the gameplay, or it may be a character. The special display continues from the occurrence of the SP reach until the SP performance begins. Therefore, the display continues through each stage of the special performance, assisting the performance by increasing the player's anticipation until the main SP performance of the SP reach begins. Moreover, once the SP performance begins, the special display is erased to avoid hindering the execution of the SP performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Once the special performance concludes (time t306), the SP performance shown in Figure 558(G) is executed (times t306 to t308). During the SP performance, the decorative symbols 8210, the held symbol display 8230, and the held symbol display 8240 are resumed. The timing of the SP performance's commencement after the special performance ends is controlled to coincide with the timing of the SP performance's commencement after the transition to the normal screen (Figure 558(F)).

In the SP (Special) animation, if the symbol change indicates a jackpot, as mentioned above, a lamp will light up in a predetermined manner (jackpot confirmation manner) at the timing before the end of the animation (time t307). After the SP animation ends, the symbol change stops (Figure 558 (H), time t308), and the game transitions to the jackpot game state (time t309).

Next, we will explain examples of different presentations with varying hold indicators. Figure 560 illustrates another example where a specific presentation is skipped by operating the control device during its execution after a reach occurs. Figure 561 is a timing chart corresponding to the presentation example shown in Figure 560. The basic flow of the presentation is the same as the examples shown in Figures 558 and 559.

The difference from the examples shown in Figures 558 and 559 is that, after a reach occurs, during the execution of reach animations other than special animations, specifically in Figures 560(C), (F), (G), and (H), the reserved symbol display 8230 is hidden, and the reserved symbol display 8240 and the reserved symbol count display 8250 are displayed. Furthermore, by moving the reserved symbol display 8240 from the lower center to the lower right of the screen, the effective display area can be expanded, which is expected to enhance the animation effect and increase the enjoyment of the game. Other differences are explained below.

In the special effects ((D) and (E)) shown in Figure 560, the mini-symbols 8220 and the hold count display 8250 are also hidden. This makes it possible to execute the special effects on the entire screen. In the example explained in Figure 560, the special effects displayed a screen with a simple configuration, but by minimizing the number of objects to be displayed (or not placing any objects for the effects), it becomes possible to execute effects that make maximum use of the display area, thus enabling more dynamic and entertaining effects. Furthermore, in the subsequent SP effects (Figure 560 (G)), the placement of objects to be displayed may also be kept to a minimum, or only the SP effects may have the number of displayed objects kept to a minimum.

Furthermore, in Figure 560(F), unlike Figure 558(F), the decorative pattern 8210 is hidden even after the system is restored. This makes the operation prompt indicator 8260 easier to see, thereby improving operability.

[40-2. Switching between different types of direction]
Next, we will explain an example of executing different effects by operating the control unit. Figure 562 shows an example where an operation prompt is displayed after a reach occurs, and the effect is switched depending on whether or not an operation is performed. Figure 563 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in Figure 562.

Figure 562(A) shows an example screen displaying the state after the start of symbol variation (time t320) and when a reach occurs (time t321). In the screen shown in Figure 562(A), the symbol display and the hold display are shown. The symbol display includes the decorative symbol 8210 and the mini symbol (fourth symbol) 8220. In the hold display, only the hold display 8240 and the hold count display 8250 are shown, and the hold symbol display 8230 is hidden; however, the hold symbol display 8230 may also be displayed.

After a reach occurs, as shown in Figure 562(B), the operation prompt display 8260 is displayed on the front side of the rotating central decorative symbol (at time t322), and the first acceptance period for operation input (times t322 to t324) begins. Displaying the operation prompt display 8260 at this position attracts the player's attention and encourages them to input an operation.

If an operation input is received during the first reception period ("Normal Operation" in Figure 563), Normal Performance 1 is executed at the time the operation was received (time t323). In Normal Performance 1, for example, a character is displayed. The duration of Normal Performance 1 is from time t323 to time t326. The standard duration is from time t324 to time t326. Therefore, if the player inputs an operation, the duration of Normal Performance 1 is extended by the extension period (t324-t323). When Normal Performance 1 is executed, the system prevents transitioning to the suppression performance that would be executed if the operation means were not operated (transition from Figure 562 (C) to (D) is prohibited). This prevents the interruption of an performance selected and started by the player.

When Normal Performance 1 ends (time t326), an operation prompt display 8260 is shown to allow the player to choose whether or not to execute Normal Performance 2, and the second input acceptance period (times t326-t328) begins. When an input is accepted (time t327), Normal Performance 2 begins at the moment the input is received. In Normal Performance 2, for example, a different character is displayed than in Normal Performance 1. At this time, the period from when the input is accepted until the end of the second acceptance period (t328-t327) becomes the performance extension period, and the performance duration is extended. Also, similar to the execution of Normal Performance 1, the transition from Normal Performance 2 to the suppression performance is prevented (transition from Figure 562 (F) to (G) is prohibited).

When the normal animation 2 ends, the animation mode transitions to the reach animation mode (Figure 562(H), time t329), and the symbol changes stop (Figure 562(I), time t330). Then, the symbol changes begin again after consuming the next reserved memory (time t331).

On the other hand, if no input is received during the first reception period (the case of "no operation" in the presentation mode of Figure 563), the first reception period ends at time t324, and a suppressed presentation with fewer display objects is executed (Figure 562(D)). Furthermore, in the suppressed presentation, the decorative symbols 8210, the held symbol display 8230, and the held symbol display 8240 are hidden, and only the mini symbols 8220 and the held number display 8250 are displayed. In the suppressed presentation, the screen brightness may be suppressed, and the volume may also be suppressed. By controlling it in this way, players who prefer flashy presentations will be encouraged to actively input input, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the suppression effect is being executed, the system is capable of accepting input from the operating means (rotating operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303) (times t324 to t326). If the operating means is operated during this time (time t325), the suppression effect ends, an operation prompt display 8260 is displayed allowing the player to choose whether or not to execute normal effect 2, and the second input acceptance period (times t326 to t328) begins.

The start of the second input acceptance period is from the end of the suppression effect when no input is performed (time t326) to the time of input (time t325). Therefore, the second input acceptance period is from time t325 to time t328, and the acceptance period is extended by the difference between time t326 and time t325 (extended acceptance period).

Furthermore, if an operation input is made between time t325 and time t326, when the suppression effect was executable, the normal effect 2 will not be executed until at least time t326. This prevents memory capacity from being strained by simultaneously loading the effect data for normal effect 1 and normal effect 2 into memory. Therefore, the extended acceptance period becomes a transition prohibition period during which the system does not proceed to the next effect to be executed, even if an operation input is received.

Furthermore, during the transition prohibition period, the operation of the control device will be accepted as input, and control based on the input (execution of normal performance 2) will be performed after the transition prohibition period ends. In this case, the player may be notified that the input has been accepted by outputting an input confirmation sound when the control device is operated. Since the transition to the next state cannot be performed immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious.

At this time, in addition to outputting an input confirmation sound, it may also be possible to display a message on the screen indicating that the input has been received, a message indicating that the next animation (normal animation 2) will be executed, or an animation showing a countdown until the next animation is executed. This prevents players from becoming dissatisfied if the animation does not execute immediately after their input, and helps to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

If the control device is not operated during the execution of the suppression effect, it will terminate at the same time as normal effect 1 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (time t326). This makes it possible to unify the processing from time t326 onwards, regardless of whether the suppression effect or normal effect 1 is executed, thereby simplifying effect control and reducing data capacity through the unification of effect data.

Once the suppression animation ends, the second input acceptance period (times t326-t328) begins. If an input is received during the second acceptance period, the normal animation 2 is executed as described above. However, if no input is received during the second acceptance period, the suppression animation is executed again after the second acceptance period ends. Once the suppression animation ends, the animation mode transitions to the reach mode (Figure 562(H), time t329), and the symbol changes stop (Figure 562(I), time t330). Afterward, the symbol changes begin again, consuming the next held memory (time t331).

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can skip certain effects or change the content of effects based on their input. This allows players who prefer flashy effects to be encouraged to actively participate in the game, while players who prefer calmer or less excessive effects can skip effects or select more subdued ones. Therefore, players can select their preferred effects, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[40-3. Penalty Presentation]
Next, we will explain an example of a penalty animation that is executed if the control unit is not operated while the operation prompt display 8260 is displayed. The penalty animation is a simple animation with little variation and does not display characters or anything like that. Figure 564 is a diagram showing an example of an animation that is executed when an operation input is not accepted in a configuration that requires operation by a single control means. Figure 565 is a timing chart corresponding to the animation example shown in Figure 564.

Figure 564(A) shows the state when the pattern change begins (time t340), and then, as shown in Figure 564(B), a reach occurs (time t341). Figure 564(A) has the same configuration as Figure 558(B) described above, and Figure 564(B) has the same configuration as Figure 562(A). Before the reach occurs (previous change), the reserved pattern display 8230 is displayed (Figure 564(A)), but when the reach occurs, it is hidden, and only the reserved pattern display 8240 and the reserved number display 8250 are displayed (Figure 564(B)).

After a reach occurs, as shown in Figure 564(C), an operation prompt indicator (special operation prompt indicator) 8260 for the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern (time t342). At this time, the operation input acceptance period (time t342-t344) begins.

If an operation input is received during the reception period, a special performance will be executed at the time the operation was received (time t343) (see "Special Performance" in Figure 565). The duration of the special performance is calculated by adding the remaining period of the reception period (time t344 - time t343), resulting in a period from time t343 to time t345.

If no input is received during the acceptance period (the "Penalty Animation" in Figure 565), the penalty animation will be executed after the acceptance period ends (time t344). During the penalty animation, only the mini-symbol 8220 will be displayed, and only the number of reserved symbols 8250 will be displayed. Furthermore, during the execution of the penalty animation, no new animations related to the lottery results will be performed; the background will not change, and no new characters will appear.

Furthermore, even if the system is capable of receiving input from the control device, the execution of control based on that input will only occur after the penalty effect has finished. For example, even if the system is configured to output sound when an input is received during the reel spin, while the input itself is valid, the execution of the effect based on that input will only occur after the penalty effect has finished. Also, even if, for example, the system is configured to allow the background color to be updated at any time during the later reel spins by operating the control device, the background color update will only occur after the penalty effect has finished.

Once the penalty animation ends, the decorative symbols 8210, the reserved symbols 8230, and the reserved symbols 8240 are displayed again. When the special animation or penalty animation ends, the symbol display stops (Figure 564(F), time t345), and the game transitions to a jackpot state (time t346).

Next, we will explain the case where multiple types of operation inputs are requested. Figure 566 is a diagram illustrating an example of a penalty animation that is executed when operation inputs are not accepted in a configuration that requests operation of multiple types of operation means. Figure 567 is a timing chart corresponding to the animation example shown in Figure 566.

Figure 566(A) shows the state when the pattern change begins (time t350), and then, as shown in Figure 566(B), a reach occurs (time t351). Figure 566(A) has the same configuration as Figure 558(B) described above, and Figure 566(B) has the same configuration as Figure 558(A). Before the reach occurs (previous change), the reserved pattern display 8230 is displayed (Figure 566(A)), but when the reach occurs, it is hidden, and only the reserved pattern display 8240 and the reserved pattern count display 8250 are displayed (Figure 566(B)).

After a reach occurs, as shown in Figure 566(C), an operation prompt display (special operation prompt display) 8260 prompting operation input using multiple types of operating means (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern (time t352), and the operation input acceptance period (time t352 to t354) begins. During the acceptance period, operation input from the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is accepted. In the example shown in Figure 566, the rotation operation unit 302 selects one of several effects (effect A, effect B), and the press operation unit 303 confirms it (Figure 566(D)(E)).

When either performance A or performance B is selected by the rotary operation unit 302 and confirmed by the press operation unit 303, the performance period begins at the moment the operation input from the press operation unit 303 is received. Alternatively, the system may wait for the selected performance to begin until the end of the acceptance period. In this case, a different performance (related performance), such as a countdown performance, may be executed during the waiting period.

Furthermore, if no animation is selected within the acceptance period, a penalty animation will be executed, similar to the example shown in Figure 564 (Figure 566(F)). During the penalty animation, only the mini-symbol 8220 will be displayed, and only the reserved symbol 8250 will be displayed. Once the penalty animation ends, the decorative symbol 8210, the reserved symbol display 8230, and the reserved symbol display 8240 will resume displaying. After each animation ends, the symbol variation display stops (Figure 566(G), time t355), and the game transitions to the jackpot state (time t356).

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a penalty animation is executed if no input is made, thus encouraging players to actively participate in the animations and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[40-4. Performances involving multiple types of input]
Next, we will describe a configuration in which a series of effects (reach effects) includes effects that require a single type of input and effects that require multiple types of input. Figures 568 and 569 are diagrams showing an example of an effect that includes a configuration requiring the operation of a single type of operation means and the operation of multiple types of operation means. Figure 570 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in Figures 568 and 569.

Figure 568(A) shows the state when the pattern change begins (time t360), and then, as shown in Figure 568(B), a reach occurs (time t361). Figure 568(A) has the same configuration as Figure 558(B) described above, and Figure 568(B) has the same configuration as Figure 558(A).

After a reach occurs, as shown in Figure 568(C), an operation prompt indicator 8260 for the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the front side of the changing central decorative symbol (time t362). At this time, the operation input acceptance period (time t362 to t364) begins (first special display state). Furthermore, while the operation prompt indicator 8260 is displayed, an alert sound is emitted to encourage the player to input an operation. Because the acceptance period is set to be relatively short, the output of the alert sound prevents the player from missing the timing for operation input, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

If an operation input is received via the press operation unit 303 during the reception period, a specific animation will be executed at the time the operation was received (time t363) (Figure 568(D)). The duration of the special animation is calculated by adding the remaining period of the reception period (time t364 - time t363), resulting in a period from time t363 to time t365. In this example, the specific animation displays an indication of the expected probability of a jackpot in the relevant hold.

On the other hand, even if no operation input is received by the press operation unit 303 during the reception period, the specific performance will be executed at the time the operation reception period ends (time t364) (Figure 568(E)). Note that the screen shown in Figure 568(D) and the screen shown in Figure 568(E) have the same configuration. This configuration allows the specific performance to be executed regardless of whether or not an operation input is received by the press operation unit 303. In this performance example, since the reception period is set to be relatively short, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to missing the operation timing. Furthermore, by quickly inputting the operation, it becomes possible to check the probability of a big win early, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Once a specific animation finishes (time t365), a reach animation is executed (Figure 568(F)). Furthermore, after the reach animation finishes, an operation prompt display 8260, prompting operation input using multiple types of operating means (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303), is displayed on the front side of the rotating decorative symbol (time t366), and the operation input acceptance period (time t366-t367) begins (second special display status). During the acceptance period, operation inputs from the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 are accepted.

In the example shown in Figure 569, similar to the example shown in Figure 566, the rotary operation unit 302 selects one of several animations (animation A, animation B), and the pressing operation unit 303 confirms the selection. During the reception period, the rotary operation unit 302 can be operated any number of times until an animation is selected by the pressing operation unit 303.

Furthermore, during the reception period starting at time t366 (second special display status), unlike the reception period starting at time t362 (first special display status), a prompting sound is not output (although it may be output). However, an operation sound is output while the rotary operation unit 302 is being operated (while the rotary operation unit 302 is rotating). The reception period starting at time t366 is set longer than the reception period starting at time t362 due to the larger number of operation methods, and outputting an operation sound while the player is operating enhances the visual effect. Additionally, sound may be output or the background music may be changed to match the selected performance. Furthermore, when a performance is selected by operating the press operation unit 303, an operation sound indicating the selection of a performance may be output.

Furthermore, the operation sounds are not so much the sound effects that constitute the effects such as the reach animation, but rather the sounds that are output in conjunction with the operation of the control device. During the reception period from time t362 (first special display status), a specific animation is executed regardless of whether an operation is performed, so it is not necessary for the player to necessarily be aware that an operation has been performed, and therefore no operation sounds are output. However, during the reception period from time t366 (second special display status), the player selects and executes an animation themselves, so operation sounds are output to make the player aware that they have selected an animation. This ensures that the animation intended by the player is executed reliably, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during the operation input acceptance period (first special display status, second special display status), the operation prompt display 8260 is hidden after the operation input is completed (after the operation input is received by the press operation unit 303). At this time, a light-emitting effect (light-emitting effect) may be performed to indicate that the operation input has been completed. Alternatively, the light-emitting effect may be performed before the operation prompt display 8260 is hidden, surprising the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. The light-emitting effect may also be included in an effect performed after the operation input; for example, the lighting pattern may be changed in response to the result of the symbol change. This can further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

When "Performance A" is selected, the performance period begins at the moment the operation input from the press operation unit 303 is received (time t367). Performance A is a predefined performance. The duration of Performance A depends on the timing of the operation by the press operation unit 303, but the first half of Performance A may be made variable for adjustment, or the performance may be paused for the duration of the extension (time t367 to t368), or an performance that can only be executed during the extension period may be performed. An performance that can only be executed during the extension period may, for example, repeatedly execute a short, dynamic performance, or execute a static performance without movement, such as displaying a character. The end timing of Performance A (time t372) is constant regardless of the timing of the operation by the press operation unit 303.

When the B performance is selected, the performance period begins at the timing (time t367) when the operation input from the press operation unit 303 is received, similar to the A performance (Figure 569(I)). The B performance is divided into a first and second half. The duration of the B performance depends on the operation timing of the press operation unit 303, similar to the A performance, but the first half may be made variable, or the second half may be made variable.

Furthermore, at the end of the first half of the B performance, as shown in Figure 569(J), an operation prompt indicator 8260 for the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the front side of the central decorative pattern (time t369). If an operation input is received from the press operation unit 303 at this time (time t370), the B performance continues with modifications, such as the display of special characters, as shown in Figure 569(K). On the other hand, if an operation input is not received from the press operation unit 303 (time t371), the system transitions to the common performance (Figure 569(L)). Alternatively, the B performance may continue without any special displays instead of transitioning to the common performance.

Furthermore, if no animation is selected within the reception period, a common animation is executed (Figure 569 (L)). The common animation displays fewer objects compared to animations A and B. This helps to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game for players who do not prefer flashy animations. Also, the animation may be the same or different depending on whether the transition to the common animation occurs without any input from the latter half of animation B, or whether animation B is skipped and the common animation is executed directly. Once animation A, animation B, or the common animation is completed, the display of changing symbols stops (Figure 569 (M), time t372), and the game transitions to the jackpot state (time t373).

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by accepting player input at multiple timings during the post-reach animation process under different conditions (first special display condition, second special display condition), it becomes possible to execute multiple animation patterns. This allows for different animations even with the same variation pattern, resulting in a wide variety of animations. Furthermore, while the player can select their preferred animation in the second special display condition, if no selection is made, game information (reserved memory, symbols, etc.) is kept to a minimum, encouraging active player participation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (Figures 568-570, etc.).

As described above, by changing the display of symbols and hold indicators in accordance with the content of the performance during the progression of the presentation, the effect of the presentation can be further enhanced. Furthermore, the display of symbols and hold indicators do not necessarily need to be synchronized; they can be controlled individually. This allows for a wider variety of presentations, thereby increasing the entertainment value.

Furthermore, because player input from the control device allows for intervention in the flow of the presentation, players can tailor the presentation to their preferences, encouraging active participation in the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, the configurations described above—which change the patterns of the symbol display and hold indicators, and control the progress of the game's presentation based on input from the control device—can be implemented independently and combined, allowing for selection and application according to the content of the presentation.

[40-5. Invention relating to the selection of performance control based on player operation]
Finally, we will list some representative aspects of the inventions disclosed herein regarding the selection of effects based on player actions.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The reserved display means enables a reserved animation display that includes a reserved pattern display that can be individually displayed in accordance with the reserved information stored in the storage means, and a current reserved pattern display that corresponds to the display of the change in the executed pattern, and a reserved number display that shows the number of reserved information stored in the storage means.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The aforementioned plurality of display states include a first display state in which the reserved animation display and the reserved number display are performed, and a second display state in which the reserved animation display is not performed.
The game machine is characterized in that the performance execution means can cancel the second display state when it receives an operation input from the operation means while in the second display state.

In configuration (1), the display can be controlled to either a state where players can easily grasp information about each reserved memory by representing it with images (first display state), or a state where information about reserved memories is kept to a minimum, such as displaying only the number of reserved memories (second display state). The system is configured to temporarily switch to the second display state during the performance to impress upon the player the performance and capture their attention, while simultaneously allowing players to easily grasp information about the game, such as reserved memories, by operating the control means to switch back to the first display state (see Figure 558, etc.).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The aforementioned pattern display means is capable of displaying a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern having a smaller display area than the first decorative pattern.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The plurality of display states include a first display state in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, and a second display state in which the first decorative pattern is not displayed.
The game machine is characterized in that the performance execution means can cancel the second display state when it receives an operation input from the operation means while in the second display state.

In configuration (2), the display can be controlled to either a state where players can easily grasp information about each reserved memory by representing it with images or displaying decorative symbols in a large size (first display state), or a state where information about reserved memories and symbols is presented to a minimum, such as displaying only the number of reserved memories or displaying reduced-size symbols (second display state). The system is configured to temporarily switch to the second display state during the performance to impress upon the player the performance and capture their attention, while simultaneously allowing players to easily grasp information about the game by switching back to the first display state by operating the control means (see Figures 558 to 570, etc.).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The reserved display means enables a reserved animation display that includes a reserved pattern display that can be individually displayed in accordance with the reserved information stored in the storage means, and a current reserved pattern display that corresponds to the display of the change in the executed pattern, and a reserved number display that shows the number of reserved information stored in the storage means.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The aforementioned plurality of display states include a first display state in which the reserved animation display and the reserved number display are performed, and a second display state in which the reserved animation display is not performed.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
In the first display state, a special operation prompt display can be shown to encourage operation of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to transition to the second display state when the operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special operation prompt display was displayed.

(4) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The aforementioned pattern display means is capable of displaying a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern having a smaller display area than the first decorative pattern.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The plurality of display states include a first display state in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, and a second display state in which the first decorative pattern is not displayed.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
In the first display state, a special operation prompt display can be shown to encourage operation of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to transition to the second display state when the operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special operation prompt display was displayed.

In configurations (3) and (4), if the player fails to input an action despite being prompted, a penalty animation is performed without executing any special animations, and the display of game information (e.g., information regarding held memory) is minimized. This encourages players to actively participate in the animations and input actions to confirm accurate information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 564-567).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It comprises multiple operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The reserved display means enables a reserved animation display that includes a reserved pattern display that can be individually displayed in accordance with the reserved information stored in the storage means, and a current reserved pattern display that corresponds to the display of the change in the executed pattern, and a reserved number display that shows the number of reserved information stored in the storage means.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
The operation prompt display can be implemented to encourage operation of the aforementioned operating means.
It can be controlled to either a first special display state that displays an operation-promoting display encouraging operation by a single operating means, or a second special display state that displays an operation-promoting display encouraging operation by multiple operating means.
When controlled to the first special display state, a common display is shown regardless of whether or not the operation is performed by the single operating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when controlled to the second special display state, if the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is not performed, the hold display is suppressed more than when the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is performed.

(6) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It comprises multiple operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The aforementioned pattern display means is capable of displaying a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern having a smaller display area than the first decorative pattern.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
The system can perform operation prompting displays to encourage operation of the aforementioned operating means.
It can be controlled to either a first special display state that displays an operation-promoting display encouraging operation by a single operating means, or a second special display state that displays an operation-promoting display encouraging operation by multiple operating means.
When controlled to the first special display state, a common display is shown regardless of whether or not the operation is performed by the single operating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when controlled to the second special display state, if the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is not performed, the display of the symbols is suppressed more than when the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is performed.

In configurations (5) and (6), by accepting player input via different input methods (first special display state, second special display state) at multiple timings during the performance process, players can select and execute various performance patterns. This allows for the selection and execution of different performances even with the same variation pattern, resulting in a wider variety of performances. Furthermore, while players can select their preferred performance in the second special display state, if no selection is made, the display of game information (hold memory, symbols, etc.) is minimized, encouraging active player participation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (Figures 568-570, etc.).

(7) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The reserved display means enables a reserved animation display that includes a reserved pattern display that can be individually displayed in accordance with the reserved information stored in the storage means, and a current reserved pattern display that corresponds to the display of the change in the executed pattern, and a reserved number display that shows the number of reserved information stored in the storage means.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The aforementioned plurality of display states include a first display state that displays the reserved animation and the number of reserved symbols, a second display state that displays the current reserved symbols and the number of reserved symbols, and a third display state that displays only the number of reserved symbols.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third display state has fewer objects displayed than the first and second display states.

In configuration (7), the display can be controlled to show information about each reserved memory in a way that makes it easy for the player to grasp the information about the reserved memory and symbols (first display state), by representing the information corresponding to each reserved memory with images or displaying decorative symbols in a large size (second display state), and a state that displays information about the currently running symbol change (such as the reserved memory) (third display state), or a state that presents information about the reserved memory and symbols to a minimum, such as displaying only the number of reserved memories or displaying reduced-size symbols. By controlling to each display state during the performance and temporarily switching to the third display state, it is possible to impress upon the player the performance and attract their attention, thereby enabling varied performances and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 560, 561, etc.).

(8) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A storage means capable of storing information regarding the display of unexecuted patterns as pending information,
A hold display means that displays a hold corresponding to the hold information,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
It includes an operating means capable of receiving input from the player,
The aforementioned pattern display means is capable of displaying a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern having a smaller display area than the first decorative pattern.
The aforementioned performance execution means is controllable to multiple display states,
The plurality of display states include a first display state in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed, and a second display state in which the first decorative pattern is not displayed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display state has fewer objects displayed than the first display state and the second display state.

In configuration (8), the display can be controlled to either a state where players can easily grasp information about the reserved memories and symbols by representing each reserved memory with images or displaying decorative symbols in a large size (first display state), or a state where information about the reserved memories and symbols is presented to a minimum, such as by displaying only the number of reserved memories or displaying reduced-size symbols (second display state). By controlling the display state during the performance and temporarily switching to the second display state, it is possible to impress upon the player the execution of the performance and attract their attention, thereby enabling varied performances and enhancing the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 558 to 570, etc.).

[41. An effect that allows switching between layers on which characters are displayed]
The above explains the details of the effects that can be changed by the player's actions. Next, we will explain the layer control in the effects that display images on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

In pachinko machines and other gaming machines, a lottery is executed when a game medium enters the starting prize slot, and the game value is awarded to the player based on the lottery result. While gaming machines capable of displaying various effects that suggest the lottery result using a liquid crystal display (LCD) 1600 are known, attempting to implement elaborate effects complicates control, making it difficult to realize a wide variety of effects, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the aim is to enhance the enjoyment of the game by simplifying image control during the execution of effects by devising a way to handle the layers, which are the areas for drawing images on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

First, the control process leading up to the execution of the effects in this embodiment will be explained, followed by a description of the types of effects that can be executed. Furthermore, the layers used for image rendering will be described. Finally, an example of an effect and the control of the layers during the execution of that effect will be explained.

[41-1. Production Overview]
The effects to which layer control in this embodiment is applied are those that are executed from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. These effects are determined (selected) based on various random numbers (start memory), such as variation pattern random numbers, jackpot random numbers, and jackpot symbol random numbers, which are extracted when a game ball enters the start prize slot. Various random numbers, such as variation pattern random numbers, are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time of the start prize entry and at the start of the symbol variation. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives various random numbers, such as variation pattern random numbers, or various information corresponding to these random numbers, it executes the various effects determined based on the received random numbers. First, the content of the effects corresponding to the variation patterns in the game machine of this embodiment will be explained.

[41-1-1. Variation Patterns]
Figure 571 shows an example of the relationship between the pattern variation and the performance. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern is an SP reach, a special performance is executed with improved layer control. The special performance includes performances related to track and field, and the performance corresponding to the selected sport is executed.

The table shown in Figure 571 includes variation patterns such as two types where no reach occurs, a normal reach where a reach occurs but no special effects are performed, and an SP reach where special effects are performed. Furthermore, when a reach occurs, the cases where the lottery result is "miss" and "jackpot" are defined separately. Although not included in the table, other types of reach patterns with different variation times, and effects such as pseudo-continuous variation effects that allow for multiple stopping and re-spinning of the symbols, may also be implemented.

The duration of the symbol changes is set based on the type of change pattern and the lottery result, but it may also be defined solely by the type of change pattern, regardless of the lottery result. Furthermore, the change duration for SP (Special) reaches, where special effects are performed, is set to be longer than for no-reach or normal reaches.

Furthermore, the special effects performed during SP Reach are, as mentioned above, related to track and field events. While the table in Figure 571 exemplified "100m sprint," "marathon," and "long jump," other events may also be included. Each effect is selected by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the start information notified from the main control board 1310. At this time, multiple types of SP Reach may be defined and each may be associated with a different effect, or multiple types of effects may be selected for a single SP Reach.

Furthermore, in character-based sequences, it is possible to change the character's display style regardless of the sequence's content. The specific variations are explained in Figure 574. In this embodiment's track and field sequence, the display style of the athletes can be changed according to the expected probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, the system allows for animations that change (enlarge) the character's size throughout the sequence of animations. In this case, as described later, the layer on which the character is displayed before the enlargement and the layer on which the character is displayed after the enlargement are different. Additionally, a transition animation may be executed during the transition period until the character reaches its maximum size. If the lottery result is a jackpot, the system can immediately display the enlarged character without executing the transition animation. Including such special patterns can indicate to the player that a jackpot is guaranteed.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute both a sequence of animations in which the character size changes (the layer changes) and a sequence of animations in which the character size does not change (the layer does not change). While the former has a higher probability (expected value) of resulting in a jackpot than the latter, this is not limited to this; the probabilities (expected values) may be the same, or the latter may have a higher probability (expected value).

[41-1-2. Basic Elements of Direction]
The relationship between the variation patterns and the performance content in the gaming machine of this embodiment has been explained above. Next, we will explain the long jump performance, which is one of the track and field-related performances performed in SP Reach. First, we will explain the basic screen configuration of the long jump performance, and then we will explain the character's movements and display style.

The long jump animation is a pre-announcement animation that indicates a high probability of winning (i.e., a win) by showing the player's chances of winning after starting their run-up and jumping off the take-off board, and successfully completing a jump beyond a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the announcement of the probability of winning may be based not only on the jump distance, but also on factors such as the player's posture in the air and landing. By conveying the probability of winning through multiple elements during the execution of this series of animations, it is possible to concentrate the player's attention on the animations and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 572 shows an example of the screen configuration for the long jump animation. The objects (characters, etc.) displayed in the long jump animation include game information such as the mini-symbol (fourth symbol) 8220, the held symbol display 8230, the held symbol display (current held symbol display) 8240, and the held symbol count display 8250, as well as a character 8300 representing the competitor. An effect display 8310 indicating the expected outcome is also displayed as needed. Furthermore, decorative symbols 8210 are hidden to ensure sufficient display area for the animation. Note that for each component within the display screen, if they have the same function as those described in Figure 558, etc., the same reference numerals are used and their explanation is omitted.

Furthermore, the timing of the railroad crossing may be adjusted by operating the performance control unit 301. In this case, the operation prompt display 8260 may be displayed. Also, since the lottery result is determined when the performance is executed, adjustment by operating the performance control unit 301 should be considered supplementary. If the operation is performed at a timing other than the predetermined timing, the system can be controlled to cross the railroad tracks at a pre-set timing, thereby preventing discrepancies between the performance content and the lottery result.

Next, we will explain the movement of character 8300 in the long jump animation. Figure 573 shows an example of the character's movements in the long jump animation. In the long jump animation, the character starts running from the approach run, takes off near the takeoff board, jumps, and the animation ends when the character lands in the sandpit. The jump distance can be determined by the player using the win/loss line 8320 (described later as the win/loss judgment object), but the jump distance may also be displayed numerically.

The expectation level based on the nature of the action can be indicated by, for example, the landing. Specifically, a successful landing can result in a high expectation level, while a failed landing can result in a low expectation level. Furthermore, if the takeoff is unsuccessful, it may be considered a guaranteed failure, as the score will be invalid due to the nature of the competition. If the takeoff is successful, the further forward the takeoff position, the higher the expectation level.

Next, we will explain an example where the level of expectation is indicated not by the movement of character 8300, but by the display mode of character 8300. Figure 574 shows an example of the display mode corresponding to the level of expectation for character 8300 in the long jump animation. (A) is normal, (B) is "medium" expectation, (C) is "high" expectation, (D) is "highest" expectation, and (E) is "guaranteed jackpot". In (E), the part corresponding to the head of character 8300 is larger than in the other modes, and it is distinguishable by shape and color to make it easier for the player to notice.

At the start of the performance, character 8300 is in the normal state shown in (A), and its display state changes when predetermined conditions are met. The change in display state may be gradual, or it may change sequentially from the normal state to the "highest" expectation level. Furthermore, the character's display state may change more easily when a performance with a relatively high expectation level (for example, a performance where the layer displaying the character changes) is being executed.

Furthermore, the "guaranteed big win" in (E) may only be changeable during relatively low-probability events (for example, events that do not change the layer displaying the character), thus preventing the player's sense of anticipation from being diminished even when low-probability events are being executed. On the other hand, the "highest probability" in (D) may only be changeable during relatively high-probability events (for example, events that change the layer displaying the character), allowing for a wider variety of pre-announcement events and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Note that while the competitors are shown as stick figures in Figure 574, multiple types of characters may be prepared and the character assigned may depend on the probability of winning.

[41-2. Layer Configuration]
Next, we will explain the configuration for displaying images in the long jump animation. First, we will explain the layer configuration. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, for convenience, the layers that make up the screen are classified into groups such as background layer, animation-related layer, symbol layer, and hold display-related layer. Figure 575 is a diagram showing an example of the layer configuration for the long jump animation. Figure 575 shows the layers that make up the screen displayed in the long jump animation, and other layers such as those that display warnings and alerts are omitted from the description.

Layers have predetermined placement positions (hierarchies). For example, the background layer is placed at the very back (bottom layer), while layers displaying warnings and alerts are placed at the very front (top layer). Furthermore, layers displaying patterns and hold information are placed in front of layers displaying characters, etc., to ensure they are clearly visible to the player. Therefore, changing the display hierarchy is equivalent to changing the layer itself.

In the layering shown in Figure 575, the layers are arranged from the back (bottom) side in the following order: background layer, effects-related layer, symbol layer, and hold display-related layer. Note that the order of the symbol layer and the hold display-related layer may be reversed. Objects displayed on these layers are arranged so that they do not overlap and are clearly visible to the player.

The background layer displays images corresponding to the game state and type of effect, and it is possible to combine multiple layers. For example, a specific effect mode can be created by overlaying a semi-transparent image onto a normal background. This allows for the reuse of background images used in normal gameplay, reducing the amount of storage space required for image data, and simplifies control by standardizing the procedure for displaying the normal background image. The technique of combining multiple layers can also be applied to other layers.

The performance-related layers display characters and special performance objects. For example, in a long jump performance, in addition to the layer displaying the athlete, it includes effect layers for displaying effects to indicate the expected outcome, and occlusion layers for temporarily hiding displayed objects, such as for blackout effects. The occlusion layer is displayed across the entire screen, similar to the background layer, but it's included in the performance-related layers because it allows for easy hiding of individual objects by placing it in front of characters and other objects. Note that the occlusion layer may be a separate group from the performance-related layers. Furthermore, display objects such as characters may be displayed on the occlusion layer.

The character display layer has separate settings for "Normal" and "High Expectation" modes. There are cases where the character layer does not change during the animation process, and cases where it does; details will be explained later.

The pattern layer and the hold/reserve display related layer are placed in front of the performance/effect related layer. This is to ensure that the information displayed on the pattern layer and the hold/reserve display related layer is clearly visible to the player.

Furthermore, the hold indicator (current hold indicator), hold symbol indicator, and hold count indicator are on different layers. This configuration allows for individual switching of the display/hide status of the hold indicator (current hold indicator), hold symbol indicator, and hold count indicator based on the game state, etc. While the hold information and the base are displayed on different layers in this embodiment, they may also be displayed on the same layer.

Figure 576 shows an example of information used to define layers when displaying images in a long jump animation. In this embodiment of the game machine, as shown in Figure 576(A), the display/hide status can be switched for each layer. Figure 576(B) shows the layer definition information for the long jump animation (normal mode), which is read at the start of the animation to switch the display/hide status of each layer.

When switching the display configuration of layers (for example, when transitioning to a high-expectation performance mode and changing the layer displaying character 8300 from the character (normal) layer to the character (high-expectation) layer, or at the end of a performance), new layer definition information may be read, or the display/hide status of each layer may be updated and switched individually. Specifically, when transitioning to a high-expectation performance mode, the character (normal) layer is switched to hidden (OFF), and the character (high-expectation) layer is switched to displayed (ON). Furthermore, the layers to be displayed can be set by switching the reserved symbol display layer and the reserved symbol base layer to hidden.

Furthermore, areas outside the drawing area of each layer (for example, areas where characters are not drawn in a character layer) are generally transparent. When layers are combined (overlaid), the content drawn on the back layer will be displayed on the screen, passing through the front layer. This does not apply to the parts drawn on the front layer (which are opaque). Additionally, layers displaying errors or warnings may be completely opaque, as they prevent gameplay from progressing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the layer arrangement is predetermined, and the screen is generated by switching the display/hide status of each layer. Figure 577 is a diagram illustrating the layer arrangement (display hierarchy) in this embodiment of the gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 577, a layer for displaying errors and warnings is placed at the forefront. This is positioned in front of other objects, such as those related to gameplay effects, to ensure that the player is clearly informed of the content. Note that the error (warning) display layer does not need to be a single layer; multiple types may be provided. For example, severe warnings or errors that require interrupting the game may be placed at the forefront and configured as opaque, while minor warnings or errors that do not interrupt the game may be configured as transparent to allow the game to continue.

As mentioned earlier, layers displaying objects related to hold/reserve actions and symbols are placed in front of layers displaying objects related to visual effects (such as characters). This is to ensure that game information is clearly presented to the player. The layer that renders the background is placed at the very back (bottom layer).

Furthermore, to create a censorship screen that hides all effect-related objects, such as during a blackout effect, a censorship layer is placed in front of the effect-related objects. By making the entire area opaque, the effect objects and background can be censored. For displays related to hold indicators and symbols, placing the layer in front of the censorship layer allows for individual control over the display/hide of each layer, enabling the presentation of information as needed.

Next, we will explain the image data used to store the images displayed on each layer. The image data is stored in a predetermined memory area within the image ROM (performance data ROM (05TKK0070), Figure 427). Figure 578 shows an example of image data stored in the image ROM. Figure 578 shows image data displayed in track and field-related performances; other performance image data, warning displays, cautionary images, and image data displayed during demonstrations are also stored in the same manner.

The background data includes not only images corresponding to individual screens, but also background data used throughout the entire performance, such as background data for a 100m sprint or a long jump. This data is stored as a single image file, and the necessary areas are extracted and displayed during the performance.

The animation data includes both still image and video data. In the long jump animation, the athlete is represented as video data. While the video data is configured to perform a predetermined action through continuous display, the data size can be reduced by combining reference data and differential data. As described later, the long jump animation may switch from a normal animation to an enlarged animation. By positioning the reference data to coincide with the animation switch, it becomes unnecessary to recreate the reference image during the animation switch, thus suppressing the increased load during image generation.

Furthermore, character image data may be stored at a size that allows it to be displayed directly under normal conditions. In this case, the step of enlarging the image can be omitted, thus reducing the image processing load.

The pattern data and hold display data may be image data for each animation sequence, or they may be common image data for all animation sequences.

Here, we will explain the procedure for generating the display screen. Figure 579 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for combining layers to create a display screen. The procedure shown in Figure 579 describes the case where the probability of a big win is high and the character is displayed enlarged. In the procedure shown in Figure 579, images to be drawn on the front layers are generated sequentially, starting from the back layers.

When screen generation begins, the background layer is drawn first. In the example shown in Figure 579, a background indicating a high probability of winning is drawn, so the background (normal) layer and the background (high probability) layer are drawn separately and then combined.

The performance display control unit 1512 first identifies the background image using the identification information defined in the performance data. Since the entire background image is stored in a single image, the performance data specifies the area to be actually drawn. Therefore, the performance display control unit 1512 extracts the specified area from the background image and draws it on the background (normal) layer.

Next, the display control unit 1512 draws on the background (high expectation) layer. The image data for the background (high expectation) layer is combined with the background image drawn on the background (normal) layer to generate the background for high expectation. The image data for the background (high expectation) layer may be made to correspond to a single screen area so that it can be drawn directly without processing such as scaling. This reduces the image generation load. Furthermore, since the image data for the background (high expectation) layer is combined with the background image, it has transparency, and by combining the background (high expectation) layer on the front side of the background (normal) layer, a background image for when the expectation of a big win is high (high expectation mode) can be generated.

Next, the performance display control unit 1512 acquires character image data from the image ROM. Here, since the character is to be enlarged for rendering, it is enlarged to the size (or magnification) specified in the performance data and drawn on the character (high expectation) layer.

Furthermore, the display screen can be generated by drawing the necessary images for the pattern and hold display related layers and compositing them sequentially, starting from the layers placed in the background. Alternatively, multiple layers may be composited during image compositing, temporarily stored in a buffer, and the display screen generated by compositing the images stored in the buffer. For example, since hold-related displays may remain the same until the next pattern change begins, the image generation procedure can be omitted by retaining the generated image. Specifically, by retaining an image created by compositing the hold display layer and the hold base layer in a buffer, the image generation procedure can be omitted during that change. In this case, the hold count display layer may also be composited.

[41-3. Examples of staging]
Next, specific examples of presentations will be explained. In the long jump presentation of the gaming machine of this embodiment, the expected outcome of the pattern change is indicated by the appearance of a character (object) 8300 that imitates an athlete. At this time, there are two cases: one in which the layer on which the character is displayed is not changed during the presentation, and another in which the layer on which the character is displayed is changed during the presentation, and the character is changed to a different display appearance in the display layer after the change. Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is capable of performing a presentation (first special presentation) in which the layer is selectively changed or not changed, and a presentation (second special presentation) in which the layer is not changed.

First, referring to Figures 580 and 581, we will explain the case where the layer on which a character (object) is displayed is not changed from the time it is shown until it is hidden. Next, referring to Figures 582 and 583, we will explain the case where the layer on which a character (object) is displayed is changed from the time it is shown until it is hidden.

[41-3-1. An effect that does not change the layer on which the object is displayed]
Figure 580 shows an example of a screen transition in which the layer on which a character (object) is displayed does not change from the time the character is displayed until it is hidden. Figure 581 is a diagram illustrating the layer switching timing of the effect shown in Figure 580. The effect patterns in the timing chart of Figure 581 are denoted by symbols that correspond to each screen in the screen transition of Figure 580.

Figure 580(A) shows an example screen displaying a state where the pattern changes have stopped. The screen shown in Figure 580(A) displays not only performance objects (such as characters, not shown), but also pattern displays and hold displays. The pattern displays include decorative patterns 8210 and mini-patterns (fourth pattern) 8220. The hold displays include hold pattern displays 8230, the current hold display (current hold display) 8240, and the number of hold displays 8250.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 581, the background (normal) layer, decorative pattern layer, mini pattern layer, the pending display layer, the pending base layer, the pending image display layer, the pending image base layer, and the pending count display layer are all set to "ON," and the images (objects) displayed on each layer are shown.

Figure 580(B) shows the state from the time t400 to t401, after the symbol change has stopped and the next pending symbol change has started. When the decorative symbol 8210 begins to change, the mini symbol 8220 also begins to change in conjunction with it. In this embodiment of the game machine, the decorative symbol 8210 and the mini symbol 8220 change and are displayed in conjunction.

When the pattern change begins, the leftmost reserved pattern in the reserved pattern display 8230 moves to the corresponding reserved pattern display 8240. At this time, the reserved patterns 8231 in the reserved pattern display area 8232 also move one position to the left. Furthermore, the value of the reserved number display 8250 is decreased by 1, changing from "4" to "3" in Figure 580(B). Also, if a game ball enters the starting prize slot during the pattern change display, and the reserved number does not exceed the upper limit, the value of the reserved number display 8250 is increased, and reserved pattern 8231 is also added.

Figure 580(C) shows a state where the left and right decorative symbols have stopped on the same symbol ("6"), resulting in a so-called "reach." In Figure 580(C), as in Figures 580(A) and 580(B), the decorative symbol 8210, mini-symbol 8220, reserved symbol display 8230, the current reserved symbol display 8240, and the reserved symbol count display 8250 are all displayed.

Figure 580(D) is a screen that indicates the start of the animation (long jump animation) that is performed after a reach occurs. At this time, the decorative symbol 8210 is hidden by setting the decorative symbol layer to hidden. The animation presentation may also be provided by a dedicated layer. This makes it possible to generate a background image and to smoothly transition to the animation. Afterward, the presented animation (long jump animation) begins. Furthermore, since the decorative symbol 8210 remains hidden during the execution of the long jump animation, the decorative symbol layer is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, the background for the long jump animation is drawn on the background (normal) layer. Additionally, since the mini-symbol 8220, the reserved symbol display, the reserved symbol display, and the reserved symbol count display continue, the background (normal) layer, mini-symbol layer, the reserved symbol display layer, the reserved symbol base layer, the reserved symbol display layer, the reserved symbol base layer, and the reserved symbol count display layer remain "ON".

The long jump animation includes a series of actions performed by character 8300, such as the approach run (Figure 580 (E)), takeoff (Figure 580 (F)), jump (Figures 580 (G) and (H)), and landing (I), and is represented as a video (animation).

Once the long jump animation's opening display finishes, the Character (Normal) layer is set to "ON," and Character 8300 is displayed. That is, the Character (Normal) layer is set to "ON," and Character 8300, drawn on that layer, becomes visible. At this time, the Background (Normal) layer is drawn with the area of the approach start point specified from the background image of the entire long jump course.

To further explain, when the start of the long jump animation is announced in Figure 580(D), the athlete stands at the approach start position, and character 8300 begins its approach (Figure 580(E)). After reaching the takeoff position, the character jumps from the takeoff board (Figure 580(F)). As mentioned earlier, the takeoff position of character 8300 may indicate the level of expectation. For example, jumping from the furthest forward position on the takeoff board (where a foul is not committed) could indicate a high level of expectation, while jumping before the takeoff board could indicate a low level of expectation.

Furthermore, if the jump is made in front of the takeoff board and the jump is unsuccessful (resulting in a foul), the animation may be stopped and the result of the draw may be immediately announced. In this case, since the variation time will be shorter, a different variation pattern from the normal SP reach may be selected.

Furthermore, if the jump fails to take off (resulting in a foul) by jumping ahead of the takeoff board, the performance may be returned to the start position of the run-up (Figure 580(E)) without interrupting, and the run-up may be restarted. In this case, the pattern change may be temporarily paused, and then the pattern change display may be resumed (pseudo-continuous change). Note that the temporary pause does not actually stop the pattern change display, but rather makes it appear as if it has stopped by causing the pattern to subtly fluctuate.

Furthermore, when the symbols temporarily stop, the decorative symbol 8210 may be temporarily displayed (by setting the decorative symbol layer to "ON"), and then hidden again when the re-spinning resumes (by resetting the decorative symbol layer to "OFF"). In this case, the mini symbol 8220 may continue to be displayed, or it may also be temporarily stopped. The temporary stopping of the symbol display may occur when a different spinning pattern than a normal SP reach is selected. Also, the number of times the temporary stop is performed is not limited to once; it may be possible to repeat it multiple times.

In this way, by providing notifications of the level of anticipation even before the final stage of the performance, and by continuing the performance through different stages, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by making it appear as if the performance has ended and then restarting it, it is possible to surprise the player and increase their enjoyment, and to maintain the player's anticipation even when the performance seems to be ending.

Upon successful completion of the jump, character 8300 transitions to an aerial position (Figure 580(G)(H)). At this time, as shown in Figure 574, the display mode of character 8300 may be changed to indicate the level of expectation.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 580(I), the character 8300 transitions to a landing position. As shown in Figure 573, there are successful and unsuccessful landing patterns. Furthermore, a win/loss line 8320 is drawn near the landing point to distinguish between "win" and "lose." If the landing point is in front of the win/loss line 8320, it is a "win," and if it is behind the line 8320, it is a "lose."

The winning/losing line 8320 may be displayed in advance or after the symbols land. In other words, the timing at which players learn the lottery result before the symbols stop can be varied. Alternatively, by having character 8300 land on the winning/losing line 8320, the player may not be able to learn the lottery result until the symbols stop. This configuration allows for multiple timings of announcing the lottery result, thereby continuously attracting the player's attention and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if the landing is unsuccessful, it is possible to award a jackpot if the landing point exceeds the win/loss line 8320. In this case, by displaying the win/loss line 8320 after the landing, the player may perceive it as a "miss" while actually winning the jackpot, thus maintaining the player's anticipation even after a failed landing.

The winning/losing line 8320 may be drawn on an existing layer, such as the character (normal) layer, or a dedicated layer for drawing the winning/losing line 8320 may be created. If a dedicated layer is created for the winning/losing line 8320, it should be placed in front of the background layer and behind the character layer.

Furthermore, after the display of Character 8300 transitions from the Character (Normal) layer to the Character (High Expectation) layer, the display of Character 8300 will not revert to the Character (Normal) layer again in order to prevent the layer control from becoming overly complex.

Subsequently, the end of the long jump animation is announced (Figure 580 (J)), the fluctuating symbols are stopped, and the decorative symbol 8210 is displayed (Figure 580 (K)). The timing of stopping the symbols may be adjusted to coincide with the completion of both the landing of character 8300 and the display of the win/loss line 8320.

In the example of the long jump animation shown in Figure 580, the layer used to draw character 8300 is only the character (normal) layer, and the animation displays from the start to the end of the competition. The animation display configuration consists of a background layer and a character layer, making it a relatively simple setup. In this configuration, as shown in Figure 574, it is also possible to indicate the level of expectation through the display mode of character 8300. This configuration eliminates image data processing such as scaling, making it easy to add or replace objects drawn on the character (normal) layer, thus simplifying drawing control. This makes it easier to standardize the control of the entire animation sequence from the start to the finish of other animations, such as a 100m sprint.

[41-3-2. An effect that allows you to change the layer on which objects are displayed]
Next, we will explain an example of changing the layer on which a character is displayed during the animation process. Figure 582 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition in an animation where the layer on which a character (object) is displayed is changed from when the object is displayed until when it is hidden. Figure 583 is a diagram illustrating the layer switching timing of the animation shown in Figure 582. The animation patterns in the timing chart of Figure 583 are denoted by symbols that correspond to each screen in the screen transition of Figure 582.

Figure 582(A) shows an example screen displaying the state where the symbol changes have stopped. Figure 582(B) shows the state after the symbol changes have stopped, from the start of the next pending symbol change until a "reach" occurs (time t410-t411). Figure 582(C) shows the state where a so-called "reach" has occurred (time t411-t412). Figure 582(D) is a screen indicating the start of the animation (long jump animation) that is performed after a "reach" occurs (time t412-t413). Since the screens from Figure 582(A) to (D) are the same as Figure 582, a detailed explanation is omitted.

When the long jump animation begins, as shown in Figure 582(E), the athlete stands at the start of the run-up, and character 8300 begins its run-up (times t413-t414). Then, upon reaching the take-off position, as shown in Figure 582(F), character 8300 jumps from the take-off board (times t414-t415). Figures 582(E) and (F) are similar to the example shown in Figure 580.

Upon successful completion of the jump, character 8300 transitions to an aerial position, as shown in Figure 582(G) (time t415). At this time, the effect layer is set to "ON," and an effect indicating a high probability of the current pattern change is displayed. The display mode of character 8300 may also be set to a higher probability than usual. Note that at this point, the layer on which character 8300 is displayed is the character (normal) layer (Figure 583).

In the example shown in Figure 582, as shown in Figures 582(G) to (I), the character 8300 gradually enlarges in size and changes in display mode after transitioning to an aerial pose (times t415 to t417). During this time, the animation (transition animation) progresses in slow motion, gradually changing to a display mode with a higher level of anticipation (Figure 574). While the character 8300 is enlarged and displayed, the display continues on the character (normal) layer, but it may also be displayed on the character (high anticipation) layer, or multiple character layers may be used in combination. When multiple character layers are used in combination, the process includes image enlargement in addition to image reading and image processing (composition). Therefore, by generating the image to be displayed on one character layer while the image on the other character layer is being displayed, and preparing the next image to be displayed, time lag can be suppressed, enabling smooth image display.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 582(J), the enlargement of character 8300 is completed (time t417). At this point, character 8300 is displayed on the character (high expectation) layer, and the character (normal) layer is hidden. Therefore, the character (high expectation) layer is set to "ON" and the character (normal) layer is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, the background (high expectation) layer is set to "ON," making it visible to the player. In the example shown in Figure 582, the background image is constructed by placing the background (high expectation) layer, which is configured to be transparent, in front of the background (normal) layer.

When the display of character 8300 transitions from the character (normal) layer to the character (high expectation) layer, as shown in Figure 583, the reserved symbol display layer and the reserved symbol base layer are set to "OFF," and the reserved symbol display 8230 is hidden. At this time, the position of the reserved symbol display 8240 is moved. This makes character 8300 easier for the player to see, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 582(K), the win/loss line 8320 is drawn, and the character 8300 transitions to a landing position (times t418-t419). Furthermore, once the character 8300 has completed landing (Figure 582(L)), the display of the changing symbols stops (time t420). In the example shown in Figure 582(K), since the character has crossed the win/loss line 8320, it is a "jackpot," and the mini-symbol 8220 stops displaying the jackpot symbol ("777"). Once the display of the changing symbols ends, the game transitions to the jackpot game state (Figure 582(M)).

Furthermore, in the transition sequence from Figure 582(G) to Figure 582(I), an animation may be implemented that alternates between displaying enlarged and normal-sized characters. Additionally, when performing the alternating character display animation, the animation may be played in slow motion, gradually changing to a display mode that increases the level of anticipation (Figure 574). Once the alternating display animation ends, the animation continues with the enlarged size if the anticipation level is high, and with the normal size if the anticipation level is low. This can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, while displaying character 8300 in enlarged size, the display continues on the character (normal) layer, but it may also be displayed on the character (high expectation) layer, or both character display layers may be used in combination. For example, the enlarged character may be drawn on the character (high expectation) layer, and the normal-sized character may be drawn on the character (normal) layer. As mentioned above, by generating the image to be displayed on the other character layer while an image is being displayed on one character layer, and preparing the next image to be displayed in the background, smooth image display becomes possible.

Furthermore, when enlarged characters are displayed on the Character (High Expectation) layer and normal-sized characters are drawn on the Character (Normal) layer, the behavior of characters displayed at the same time (more precisely, the enlarged character displayed immediately after the normal-sized character) is the same. Therefore, by drawing the normal-sized character on the Character (Normal) layer, and then drawing the processed character (such as enlargement) on the Character (High Expectation) layer, it is possible to halve the number of image data reads. Also, while video data generates the displayed image by compositing difference images onto a base image, it is possible to streamline image processing by displaying the composited image on the Character (Normal) layer and then directly processing that composited image and drawing it on the Character (High Expectation) layer.

[41-3-3. Application Examples]
The above describes two types of effects: one in which an object (character) that suggests a certain level of expectation is displayed, and another in which the layer on which the object is displayed is not changed (maintained) from the time the object is displayed until it is hidden; and another in which the layer on which the object is displayed is changed from the time the object (character) is displayed until it is hidden. Next, we will explain examples of combining these effects.

[41-3-3a. Example of branching into multiple types of effects]
Figure 584 illustrates a performance pattern in which a special performance is executed after transitioning to a specific state. In the example shown in Figure 584, after a reach occurs, the game transitions to a specific state under predetermined conditions (for example, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected). The specific state is a display that can attract the player's attention, and may be a simple screen with minimal decorative symbols and hold indicators, or a state where the screen display is interrupted (blackout screen). In this way, by minimizing game information such as hold indicators and executing a highly anticipated special performance from a simple display state with few display objects, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, by differentiating the display layer (display hierarchy) for a specific state from the display layer (display hierarchy) for executing special effects, it becomes possible to perform the drawing process necessary for executing special effects in a specific state in the background while ensuring sufficient processing time, thereby stabilizing the processing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the specific state is released after a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to that state. Alternatively, the player may be able to release the specific state by operating the performance control unit 301. Furthermore, a special performance begins after the specific state is released.

In the example shown in Figure 584, a long jump animation is performed, but other animations, such as a 100-meter dash animation, may also be performed. In this case, the game may suggest that an athletics animation will be performed, but may not explicitly state the specific sport. Furthermore, the expected probability of a big win may vary for each sport, thereby creating anticipation for the player regarding which sport's animation will be performed.

Furthermore, after a reach occurs, the player may be prompted to input an action, allowing them to select the animation to be performed. This enhances the enjoyment of the game by allowing the player to choose their preferred animation. Additionally, if the player does not select any animation, the game may transition to a specific state where an animation is selected by lottery. In this case, the specific state can be released after a predetermined time has elapsed, or by the player operating the animation control unit 301. The lottery for selecting an animation is performed at predetermined timings (for example, between the transition to the specific state and its release, up to the start of the animation).

Figure 584(A) shows the state after the symbol change has finished and the reserve memory is at zero. Then, a game ball enters the starting entry point, and the state transitions to one where the change can begin (Figure 584(B)). Furthermore, the symbol change begins (Figure 584(C)), and a reach occurs (Figure 584(D)).

After a reach occurs, the game transitions to a specific state (blackout screen) (Figure 584(E)). As mentioned earlier, instead of displaying a blackout screen, a screen suggesting the execution of some special effect is also acceptable; any display indicating a change in the effect is sufficient. In this embodiment of the game machine, one of the track and field events is executed, and furthermore, multiple patterns of effects are possible for each event. Figure 584 illustrates the effect patterns when the long jump event is executed.

First, in pattern (1), after a specific state ends, an effect (Figure 580) is executed in which the layer displaying the object is not changed from the time the object is displayed until it is hidden. That is, after the effect starts, the character is not enlarged, and the character (object) continues to be displayed on the character (normal) layer until the effect ends (Figures 584 (F1) to (I1)). While this effect has a lower expectation level compared to the effect that changes the layer displaying character 8300, in Figure 584 (G1), character 8300 changes from its normal state (Figure 574 (A)) to its jackpot-confirmed state (Figure 574 (E)), and the lottery result is announced as a jackpot. By making it possible to change to the jackpot-confirmed state only in the case of the effect that does not change the layer displaying character 8300, it is possible to avoid diminishing the player's sense of anticipation even when executing relatively low-expectation effects.

Next, in pattern (2), after a specific state ends, a character of normal size is displayed on the character (normal) layer (Figure 584 (F2)). Immediately afterward, the display of character 8300 is changed to the character (high expectation) layer, and the long jump animation begins with the enlarged character (Figures 584 (G2) to (I2)). At this point, if pattern (2) has a higher expectation level than pattern (1), it is possible to further increase the expectation level while temporarily disappointing the player, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by changing the character's display mode to a more anticipated mode while the long jump animation is being performed with the enlarged character, it becomes possible to further heighten the player's anticipation during the progression of the animation, thereby continuously capturing the player's attention and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Finally, in pattern (3), after a specific state ends, instead of displaying a normal-sized character, a directly enlarged version of character 8300 is displayed on the character (high expectation) layer (Figure 584 (G3) to (I3)). This allows the player to recognize the high expectation of the symbol change and gives the player a sense of excitement.

As described above, after a reach occurs, the game transitions to a specific state to capture the player's attention, and then a variety of animations are performed to heighten the player's anticipation. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even the same type of animation (for example, a long jump animation) can be performed in different patterns, thus creating an animation that keeps the player's attention from start to finish and prevents boredom.

In particular, the gaming machine of this embodiment allows for the execution of patterns such as displaying character 8300 on the character (normal) layer and continuously executing the performance without changing the layer while allowing the display mode of character 8300 to be changed, or changing the layer on which character 8300 is displayed from the character (normal) layer to the character (high expectation) layer. Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 584, it is possible to execute a performance (first special performance) that allows the layer on which the object (character) is displayed to be changed during the course of a series of performances, and a performance (second special performance) that only allows the performance to continue without changing the layer, based on the game state, etc.

[41-3-3b. Crossing fluctuations]
As the final example of a performance, we will explain the case where the performance continues across multiple symbol changes. Figure 585 is a diagram showing the screen transitions when a performance is executed across multiple symbol changes.

Figure 585(A) shows the state during a symbol change (previous change) with 3 reserved symbols. At this time, the reserved symbol display corresponding to the next symbol change is in a special form. Subsequently, a reach occurs (Figure 585(B)), and the long jump animation begins (Figures 585(C)-(E)). Furthermore, an enlargement animation is performed during the long jump animation, changing the layer on which the character is displayed (Figure 585(F)). However, in this symbol change, character 8300 does not reach the win/loss line 8320 (Figure 585(G)), and the result is a "miss" (Figure 585(H)).

Next, the special reserved symbol moves to the reserved display 8240, and the special effect continues while the next symbol change begins (Figure 585(I)). After that, a reach occurs (Figure 585(J)), and the long jump animation begins (Figure 585(K)). At this point, since the background display continues, the game can proceed while maintaining the player's anticipation without displaying a start indicator like Figure 585(C).

Finally, character 8300 prepares to land and lands beyond the winning/losing line 8320 (Figure 585 (L)), resulting in a "jackpot" (Figure 585 (M)). The game then transitions to the jackpot game state.

As described above, by executing special effects across multiple symbol changes, it becomes possible to increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game by having the special effects continue after a highly anticipated effect is triggered, followed by a "miss," leading to disappointment.

[41-4. Invention relating to a visual effect that allows switching between layers on which objects are displayed]
Finally, here are some representative examples of inventions relating to the ability to switch between layers for displaying objects (characters) as disclosed herein.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
A performance information storage means capable of storing performance information necessary for executing the aforementioned predetermined performance,
A performance display means that displays an image based on the aforementioned performance information,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned image is generated by compositing objects drawn in multiple display layers.
The aforementioned predetermined performance includes a pre-notification performance that can notify the probability of winning the lottery by changing the display mode of an object capable of notifying the probability of winning the lottery from a display mode different from the display mode when it was displayed,
The aforementioned advance notification presentation is,
Regarding an object capable of notifying the probability of winning the aforementioned lottery, there are cases where the display mode is changed to one different from the display mode at the time of display without changing the display hierarchy,
Regarding an object capable of notifying the probability of winning the aforementioned lottery, the change to a display mode different from the one it was initially displayed in is performed after changing to a different display hierarchy than the one it was initially displayed in.
A gaming machine characterized by including the following.

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
A performance information storage means capable of storing performance information necessary for executing the aforementioned predetermined performance,
A performance display means that displays an image based on the aforementioned performance information,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned predetermined performance includes a pre-notification performance that can notify the probability of winning the lottery using an object capable of notifying the probability of winning the lottery,
The aforementioned advance notification presentation is,
With respect to an object capable of indicating the probability of winning the aforementioned lottery, a first special effect is provided which changes the display hierarchy of the object during the performance process from when the object is displayed until when it is hidden.
With respect to an object capable of indicating the probability of winning the aforementioned lottery, a second special effect is provided in which the display hierarchy of the object is not changed during the performance process from when the object is displayed until when it is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by including the following.

Configurations (1) and (2) include cases where the layer displaying the object (character) remains unchanged throughout the animation process, and cases where the layer displaying the object (character) is changed during the animation process. It is possible to select and execute these animations. This allows for a wide variety of animations, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, during the process of switching the character display layer, the image processing for the animation after the switch can be performed in the background, enabling smooth image display.

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
A performance information storage means capable of storing performance information necessary for executing the aforementioned predetermined performance,
A performance display means that displays an image based on the aforementioned performance information,
Equipped with,
As a predetermined effect, it is possible to perform a specific effect in which a predetermined object is displayed in its normal state and then changed to an expected state.
The aforementioned specific performance is characterized in that, when the state in which the predetermined object is displayed in the normal manner is a specific state, it can change to a display hierarchy different from the display hierarchy in which it is displayed in the normal manner, and then change to the expected state.

In configuration (3), if a specific state is present when a predetermined character is displayed in its normal mode, it is possible to change to the expected mode after switching to a different display hierarchy than the one used in the normal mode. For example, when the specific state is a simple display state with few display objects, it becomes possible to proceed with the process of displaying the character in the expected mode at a different display hierarchy while the character is being displayed in the normal mode from the specific state. This distributes the image processing load and enables smooth image display.

[42. Settings for changing the presentation]
The above explains how to control the layers during the execution of the game's effects. Next, we will explain the configuration that allows players to change the content of the game's effects.

In pachinko and other gaming machines, a lottery is conducted when a game token enters the starting prize slot, and the game value is awarded to the player based on the lottery result. At this time, the game progresses with the display of changing symbols based on the lottery result. Various effects are performed during the game to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

However, since the animations performed during gameplay are selected by lottery from a predefined set of animations, there was a risk that animations unsuitable for the player's preferences or that did not align with the player's intentions might be performed, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the enjoyment of the game is suppressed by making it difficult for players to see effects that do not suit their preferences or do not align with their intentions.

[42-1. Direction Overview]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can specify (select) the characters and other elements that appear in the effects performed during gameplay. The character settings (favorite settings) can be made from a settings screen (effect change menu screen) that can be displayed when the game is waiting and no changes are being made, or from a simplified settings unit (effect setting display unit) that can be displayed while the game is in progress (while the symbols are changing).

Specifically, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a zodiac appearance animation featuring animals from the twelve zodiac signs is possible. The player can change the animation by setting (selecting) their preferred zodiac sign (favorite zodiac sign) from the twelve zodiac signs. In addition to the zodiac sign, the season displayed during the animation (spring, summer, autumn, winter) can also be set. The zodiac signs consist of the following animals: Rat, Ox, Tiger, Rabbit, Dragon, Snake, Horse, Sheep, Monkey, Rooster, Dog, and Boar.

In other words, in the zodiac appearance sequence performed during the symbol changes of the gaming machine in this embodiment, characters representing each zodiac animal appear, and players can set their preferred zodiac animal as the character appearing in this sequence. This allows players to customize the zodiac appearance sequence according to their preferences; for example, a player who likes horse racing can set the horse as their preferred zodiac animal, and a player who dislikes snakes can set any zodiac animal other than the snake as their preferred zodiac animal.

Figure 586 illustrates the probability of character appearance when the zodiac appearance animation is performed. In the zodiac appearance animation, characters appear at different rates (probabilities) depending on whether the player has set a favorite zodiac sign or not. Specifically, the appearance rate of the rat character is 7.5% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, but it rises to 35% when the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. It is 5% when any zodiac sign other than the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. In other words, the appearance rate is set to be higher when a favorite zodiac sign is set. On the other hand, for the tiger character, the appearance rate is 2.5% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, but it drops to 1% when a favorite zodiac sign is set, showing that the appearance rate is lower when a favorite zodiac sign is set, unlike other characters. The character appearance ratio will be changed as shown in Figure 586, but this is not the only option. For example, if the Year of the Sheep (未) is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the Year of the Dog (戌) may be omitted.

Furthermore, the timing of the characters appearing during the zodiac appearance sequence varies depending on the character, and setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the timing of the character's appearance. Also, setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the type of sequence performed depending on the selected character. For example, in the zodiac appearance sequences for the rat and boar, the characters appear immediately after the sequence begins. On the other hand, in the zodiac appearance sequence for the ox, the characters appear after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the sequence began (for example, after displaying a pasture scene for a predetermined amount of time). Furthermore, if the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may appear at different timings than when the ox is not set as the favorite zodiac sign, such as appearing immediately after the sequence begins or appearing multiple characters at once. In this case, only when the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may also appear at a timing based on the expected probability of a big win. In this way, setting a favorite zodiac sign increases the anticipation of character appearances and diversifies the sequences, encouraging players to participate more actively in the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, the zodiac sign appearance effect in this embodiment is an effect related to notifying the probability of a big win. For example, in addition to displaying characters, it can also perform vibrations of the control unit (effect buttons and control levers), illumination of light-emitting parts provided in the display device and control unit, lighting of lamps, and sound output.

Furthermore, instead of limiting players to setting only one favorite zodiac sign, it may be possible to set multiple signs, such as a main favorite and a sub-favorite. In this case, when a main and sub-favorite signs are set, the character appearance ratio will differ even further compared to when only one zodiac sign is set. Additionally, when the main and sub-favorite signs are set to a specific combination, the corresponding animations (the animation corresponding to the main zodiac sign and the animation corresponding to the sub-favorite sign) may be played simultaneously, or special animations may be made available.

Furthermore, since the gaming machine of this embodiment allows the player to set the season (spring, summer, autumn, winter) displayed during the game's reel spin, the zodiac sign appearance animation can be configured to run according to the set season. In this case, the player can choose from 12 x 4 = 48 different animations, combining the 12 zodiac signs with the 4 seasons.

When the zodiac appearance animation is performed according to the season, for example, the background of the zodiac appearance animation will change to reflect the season displayed during the animation. In other words, when a character appears in the zodiac appearance animation, the set season will be reflected in the character's appearance. For example, if the player's favorite zodiac sign is the monkey and the season is set to "winter," the animation will feature a monkey in a hot spring with a snowy landscape.

Furthermore, the zodiac appearance sequence includes mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, and sequences in which the character appears in a special manner. In the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, the sequence performed is associated with the character. More specifically, the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301 are executed when one of the following zodiac animals—rat, sheep, or boar—is selected as the character to appear in the zodiac appearance sequence through a performance lottery conducted by the game machine. Additionally, these zodiac appearance sequences may include special variations in the performance content if the player's favorite zodiac animal is set. Specific examples of these sequences will be described later.

Thus, in this embodiment of the zodiac appearance animation, not only are characters modeled after each zodiac sign simply displayed, but special animations (such as mini-game animations or animations in which characters appear in special ways) can be executed for each zodiac sign. Furthermore, by setting multiple favorite zodiac signs, it becomes possible to enable special character displays while also specifying the vibration of the control panel to a particular pattern. By configuring the machine in this embodiment, the variety of animations can be improved, and the player can customize the animations to their liking, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-2. Changes to the Zodiac Animal Appearance Animation]
The above explains the basics of the zodiac animal appearance animation. Next, we will explain how to change the zodiac animal appearance animation.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the changes to the game's presentation (such as the chosen zodiac sign or season) can be made either while the game is in a waiting state, i.e., when the symbols are not yet displayed, or while the symbols are still being displayed. Each of these cases will be explained below.

[42-2-1. Performance Change Menu Screen (Waiting for Gameplay)]
Figure 587 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for displaying the performance change menu screen in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is the state before displaying the performance change menu screen, (B) is the state with the performance change menu screen displayed, (C) is the state after the performance change menu screen has been closed after setting the favorite zodiac sign as a performance setting and the favorite zodiac sign has been set, and (D) is the state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state in (C) and the performance change menu screen can be displayed.

The performance change menu screen is displayed when the performance setting control unit is operated while there is no pending memory and the symbols are not being displayed (waiting for gameplay). In this embodiment, the performance change menu screen is displayed by operating the performance setting control unit. However, it may also be possible to display the performance change menu screen after the symbols have stopped and confirmed, without operating the performance setting control unit. Alternatively, even if the symbols have temporarily stopped, if a loss is confirmed and there is no pending memory, a message such as "Press the performance setting button to display the setting menu" may be displayed to prompt the player for input, and the system may accept the input.

The performance setting control unit includes a performance setting button (third control unit) for confirming the selected setting and a performance selection unit (fourth control unit) for selecting items. The performance selection unit allows for item selection by moving a cursor that points to a candidate for selection. For example, this could be buttons corresponding to up, down, left, and right directions (directional keys), or a lever or trackball that allows the cursor to be moved in any direction. It could also be an interface (+/- buttons) indicating addition (+) and subtraction (-) of setting values for adjusting volume or brightness. Furthermore, the display screen could be a touch panel, allowing the player to select or set items by directly touching it.

When a player operates the effect setting button, an effect change menu screen is displayed (Figure 587(B)). The effect change menu screen includes "Seasonal Setting," "Favorite Zodiac Sign Setting," and "Brightness Adjustment." It may also include other setting items such as "Volume Adjustment" and an item to close the menu screen. Alternatively, instead of an item to close the effect change menu screen, the game machine may be equipped with a cancel button, allowing the effect change menu screen to be closed by pressing the cancel button.

When the effect change menu screen appears, a cursor for selecting a setting item will be displayed. Use the up and down buttons (effect selection area) to move the cursor next to the setting item. Then, by operating the effect setting button, the setting screen corresponding to the setting item selected by the cursor will be displayed.

After changing settings on the displayed settings screen and closing the settings menu, information indicating that the settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 587(C). At this time, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display detailed changes; only information indicating that the settings have been changed is displayed (setting information ambiguity means). Detailed settings can be confirmed when the settings screen is displayed (setting information disclosure means).

Furthermore, since the performance content does not change even when brightness or volume is changed, and the performance content does not change significantly even when the season is changed, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display information indicating that the performance has been changed even if these settings are changed. Therefore, when a preferred zodiac sign is set, information indicating that the performance settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401. In this way, by not always displaying detailed change information, it is possible to reduce the display area required for displaying performance setting information, thus avoiding disruption to the performance's progression. However, if the performance content changes significantly when a season is set, information indicating that the performance has been changed may be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401.

Furthermore, if a preferred zodiac sign is set, the performance setting display unit 8401 will display "Performance Setting in Progress," while if no preferred zodiac sign is set, it will display "Performance Setting." Additionally, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 587(C), the performance setting display unit 8401 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 587(D). This prevents the player from knowing whether the performance settings have been changed, but a message indicating that the performance change menu screen is available is displayed, allowing the player to reconfirm the changes to the performance by displaying the performance change menu screen.

Next, we will explain the settings screens for season settings, zodiac sign settings, and brightness adjustment. Figure 588 shows the season settings screen. In season settings, you set a season for the effects, and when the predetermined conditions are met, the effects based on the season setting can be executed. You can select the target season by using the left and right buttons on one of the "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter" displayed in the season selection unit 8411. The season currently being set is surrounded by a dotted line, and the currently selected season is surrounded by a thick line. In the example shown in Figure 588, "Spring" is currently set, and "Winter" is selected as the target season. The setting is completed by operating the effects setting button after selecting a season, and the season setting is finished. If a background image or BGM based on the season is set, the setting change will be reflected after the setting is completed.

Figure 589 shows the setting screen for the "Favorite Zodiac Sign." On the left side of the screen is the "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selection Section 8421," where the zodiac signs are arranged in a circle. Operating the "Performance Setting" button moves the currently selected zodiac sign clockwise to the target zodiac sign. In the example in Figure 589, the monkey (Saru) is selected, and the selected zodiac sign (Saru) is displayed in the selection area 8422 on the right side of the screen. By operating the left and right buttons while a zodiac sign is selected, the selected zodiac sign is set as the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" in the selection area on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" setting screen closes (the setting state ends) after a predetermined time has elapsed since setting the "Favorite Zodiac Sign," or after a predetermined time has passed without any operation. In this embodiment, the zodiac sign selected using the left and right buttons is set as the "Favorite Zodiac Sign." However, it is also possible to set the zodiac sign by operating the left button and closing the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" setting screen (ending the setting state) by operating the right button. Alternatively, the zodiac sign could be selected using the left and right buttons and set using the "Performance Setting" button.

Figure 590 shows the screen for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1600. The player can adjust the brightness by operating the + and - buttons. A similar configuration may be used for the screen for adjusting the volume (not shown). Alternatively, left/right or up/down buttons may be used instead of the + and - buttons.

The above explains the procedure for changing the settings of the game's effects while the game is in a waiting state. Changes made from the effects change menu screen, including brightness and volume adjustments, are reflected immediately after the change. Therefore, if a change in the seasonal setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display period—for example, if the background or BGM changes—the player can immediately recognize the change in the effects settings. On the other hand, if the setting change only affects effects performed during the symbol change display period (such as the zodiac appearance effect), there is a risk that the player may not recognize the change in the effects settings until after the zodiac appearance effect has been executed. However, this problem is resolved because information indicating that the zodiac setting has been changed is displayed on the effects setting display unit 8401. Furthermore, if a change in the zodiac setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display period, such as the background or BGM, the change in the effects settings can be recognized not only by the display on the effects setting display unit 8401 but also by the change in the effects themselves.

[42-2-2. Settings for the display of changing patterns]
Next, we will explain the configuration for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing. Figure 591 is a diagram illustrating the means for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 591(A), a performance setting display unit 8401 for changing the performance settings is displayed. During the display of changing symbols, the performance setting display unit 8401 displays performance setting buttons to indicate that performance settings can be changed.

When the performance setting display unit 8401 is displayed, operating the performance setting button will display the message "Performance settings using up/down keys" on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 591(B). This allows you to select either the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) by operating the performance selection unit (up/down keys) included in the performance setting operation unit. While the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) is displayed, operating the performance setting button will switch to the respective setting state. The season setting will be explained with reference to Figure 592, and the zodiac sign setting with reference to Figure 593.

(Seasonal setting)
Figure 592 illustrates the procedure for setting a new season while the symbols are changing. In the example shown in Figure 592, the season setting is reflected in the background image, and the background music is changed as needed. Figure 592(A) shows the state in which the season setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "Spring" is set as the currently set season, and an image of "Cherry Blossoms" is displayed in the background.

In the state shown in Figure 592(A), operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) displays the season selection unit 8431. The season selection unit 8431 allows you to set the season using the same operation as the season selection unit 8411 on the season setting screen displayed from the effect change menu screen. You can select the new season by operating the left and right buttons (effect selection unit) to choose from "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter." Also, similar to the example shown in Figure 588, the currently set season ("Spring") is surrounded by a dotted line, and the selected target season ("Winter") is surrounded by a thick line.

Subsequently, with "Winter" selected as the target season, operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) completes the season setting, and the background immediately changes to the winter-appropriate background (snowy landscape), as shown in Figure 592(C). At this time, the background music (BGM) is also changed as needed. Afterward, the season selection unit 8431 is hidden, and information indicating that effect settings are possible ("effect setting") is displayed on the effect setting display unit 8401, rather than information indicating that the effect is being changed ("effect setting in progress").

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the settings for the effects can be changed and immediately reflected even while the symbols are changing. Alternatively, the setting change may not be reflected immediately, but rather in the next symbol change display, or after the display of the currently held symbols has finished. Furthermore, when the zodiac appearance effect is executed, especially when the zodiac appearance effect is executed based on the season setting, the load on the effect control may increase due to the change in the effect content. Therefore, even if immediate reflection is possible, the setting change may be reflected from the next symbol change display. This allows players to freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Favorite zodiac sign setting)
Figure 593 illustrates the procedure for setting a new zodiac sign while the symbols are changing. Figure 593(A) shows the state in which the zodiac sign setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "Monkey" is set as the zodiac sign, but the zodiac sign appearance performance is not being executed.

In the state shown in Figure 593(A), operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) displays the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 for selecting a new recommended zodiac sign (Figure 593(B)). As shown in Figure 593(B), the currently set zodiac sign (recommended zodiac sign: Monkey) is initially displayed in the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441. At this point, the zodiac sign selection state is enabled, and by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit, the display of the zodiac signs to be selected as the new recommended zodiac sign switches sequentially, and the character corresponding to each zodiac sign is displayed (Figure 593(E)). While the display of the selected zodiac sign can be switched bidirectionally, it is also possible to restrict the switching of the zodiac sign display to unidirectional only by making it operable only with the right (or left) button.

If the interface for setting the preferred zodiac sign uses the entire screen to display characters corresponding to all zodiac signs, as seen in the animation change menu screen displayed during the waiting state (Figure 589), there is a risk of interfering with the display of decorative symbols or the animations performed during the symbol variation display. In this embodiment, since animations that attract the player's attention are infrequent during the waiting state, the interface (setting screen) prioritizes ease of setting. However, during the symbol variation display, there is a possibility that animations that attract the player's attention (for example, animations suggesting a jackpot) may be performed while setting the preferred zodiac sign. Therefore, the display of a single zodiac sign for selection is limited, and the interface switches between the displayed zodiac signs sequentially, thereby suppressing the area used for setting the preferred zodiac sign. This prevents interference with the display of decorative symbols or animations performed during the symbol variation display when setting the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 593(C) shows the state where "Rooster" has been selected as the new favorite zodiac sign by operating the right button (performance selection unit) (not set). Subsequently, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit), the currently selected "Rooster" is set as the new favorite zodiac sign (Figure 593(D)). Once the favorite zodiac sign is set, the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Favorite zodiac sign selected" to "Favorite zodiac sign prepared." Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display transitions from the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 to the performance setting display unit 8401 (Figure 591(A)).

Furthermore, even if a new favorite zodiac sign is set, the change will not be reflected until after the symbol variation has finished. This is because, unlike when the favorite zodiac sign is set during the game waiting state, the animation content until the end of the symbol variation display is already determined. Attempting to reflect the zodiac sign setting at this time would require reloading image data and other processing, potentially placing an excessive load on the animation control system. In contrast, during the game waiting state, when the symbol variation display is not yet running, reloading image data is unnecessary, allowing the favorite zodiac sign setting to be reflected immediately.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the settings for the effects can be changed even while the symbols are changing, similar to the seasonal setting. Unlike the seasonal setting, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign takes effect from the next symbol change. Furthermore, if the zodiac sign appearance effect that is supposed to be performed during the current symbol change display has not yet been executed, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign may be immediately applied to replace the zodiac sign appearance effect. As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-3. Specific example of the procedure for changing the animation while the pattern is changing]
The above describes the means of displaying the menu screen and setting the effects while the game is in a waiting state, and the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing. Next, we will explain specific examples of the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing, based on the variation pattern (type of reach) and the result of the symbol change, with reference to the diagrams.

[42-3-1. In the case of no reach]
First, let's explain the case where the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 594 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol change display when the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 595 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 594, illustrating the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 594(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t500), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the favorite zodiac sign has already been set. Furthermore, by performing the procedures shown in Figures 591 and 593 (times t501-t502), the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac sign can be set (Figure 594(B)). In the example shown in Figure 594, as shown in Figure 595, "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign before the change started, but by displaying the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441, the currently set favorite zodiac sign is displayed as the newly selected favorite zodiac sign. At this point, the player can recognize that "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign.

As shown in Figure 594(B), the selected zodiac sign can be switched by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit (selection operation). When the selected zodiac sign is switched from "Monkey" to "Rooster" at time t503, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 also changes from the character representing "Monkey" to the character representing "Rooster" (Figure 594(C)). The Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 displays "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" along with the character representing the currently selected zodiac sign.

Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) in the state shown in Figure 594(C) (the state in which a new favorite zodiac sign has been selected) (time t504), the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Sign" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Sign" (Figure 594(D)). As mentioned above, the setting of the favorite zodiac sign is not immediately reflected even when the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) is operated, but transitions to the setting preparation stage, and the setting of the favorite zodiac sign remains "Monkey" until the ongoing change in the symbols is completed.

Subsequently, at time t505, the display of the decorative pattern temporarily stops (Figure 594(E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. During this time, the display of the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 continues to show "Preparing Favorite Zodiac." When the pattern confirmation period ends (time t506), the pattern stops being confirmed (Figure 594(F)). Once the pattern stops being confirmed, the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 changes to "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. After that, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As shown in Figure 595, setting your preferred zodiac sign during the changing pattern display is possible at any time, even during the preparation phase for setting your preferred zodiac sign, from the start of the pattern change (time t501) until the end of the pattern confirmation period (pattern stop, change ends, time t506). Furthermore, during the confirmed pattern display (time t506-t507), it is not possible to perform performance settings, and therefore, setting your preferred zodiac sign and season is not possible.

[42-3-2. If a normal reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a miss. Figure 596 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the display of the symbol change when a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a miss. Figure 597 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 596, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 596(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t510). Similar to the case where a reach does not occur, the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has already been set. At this time, as shown in Figure 597, "Monkey" is set as the recommended zodiac sign. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 596(B), the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new recommended zodiac sign can be set (time t511-t512).

By operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection section (selection operation), the currently selected zodiac sign is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster", time t513). Then, as shown in Figure 596(C), a reach occurs (time t514). Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation section) (time t515), the display of the favorite zodiac sign setting section 8441 is updated from "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" to "Favorite Zodiac Sign Preparing" (Figure 596(D)). As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac sign setting remains "Monkey".

Subsequently, the display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (Figure 596 (E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. Furthermore, when the pattern confirmation period ends (time t517), the pattern is confirmed and stopped (Figure 596 (F)). Once the pattern is confirmed and stopped, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 becomes "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. Afterward, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As described above, even when a reach (normal reach) occurs, the favorite zodiac sign can be set at all times from the start of the spin (time t511) until the end of the symbol confirmation period (symbols stop, spin ends, time t517), just as when no reach occurs. Furthermore, during the time the symbol confirmation is displayed (time t517 to time t518), the performance settings cannot be executed, and the favorite zodiac sign and season cannot be set.

[42-3-3. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a miss. Figure 598 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the display of the symbol change when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a miss. Figure 599 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 598, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In the example shown in Figure 598, the background is set according to the season setting. Specifically, the season is set to "winter," and the background shows snow falling on a snow-covered mountain. The background may always display an image corresponding to the season setting, even when the symbols are not changing, or it may be set according to the game state (e.g., high probability state) or the performance mode. Furthermore, it may be changed as a pre-announcement effect (pre-read effect) at the start of the symbol change, or it may be changed at a specific timing during the symbol change display.

Figure 598(A) shows the state after the pattern change has begun (time t520), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has been set. As mentioned above, the season setting is set to "Winter," and as shown in Figure 599, the current recommended zodiac sign is set to "Monkey."

Subsequently, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac animal can be set (times t521-t522). Furthermore, by operating the left and right buttons included in the "Performance Selection Unit," the zodiac animal currently selected as the favorite is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster," time t523). By operating the "Performance Setting Button" (Performance Setting Operation Unit), the new favorite zodiac animal is set to "Rooster" (time t524). As a result, the display on the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Animal" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Animal," transitioning to the setting preparation stage. As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac animal remains "Monkey." At time t525, a "reach" occurs (Figure 598 (B)).

After a reach occurs, a predetermined time elapses (time t526), and a screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed (the SP reach development animation is executed). Subsequently, the SP reach animation is executed (time t527, Figure 598(C)). When the screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size, and the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 becomes invisible. This continues until the SP reach animation ends. During the execution of the SP reach animation, the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 remains invisible to allow the player to focus on the animation. Furthermore, if the SP reach animation includes player-participation elements, there is a risk of accidental operation of the animation buttons. To prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game, operation of the animation setting operation unit is suppressed; for example, the animation setting buttons are not accepted.

The SP reach animation shown in Figure 598(C) is a special animation linked to the seasonal setting "Winter" and the chosen zodiac sign "Monkey." Specifically, the animation depicts monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. The number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the likelihood of a big win. For example, three monkeys indicate a high likelihood of a win (or a guaranteed win), while one monkey indicates a low likelihood. The more monkeys there are, the higher the chance of a big win. While the special animation can be performed even without setting the monkey as the chosen zodiac sign, the game's appeal can be enhanced by increasing the likelihood of a big win when the same animation is performed if the monkey is selected, or by changing parts of the animation's composition.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t528), the result of the animation is displayed (Figure 598(D)). In the example shown in Figure 598(D), the result of the symbol change is "miss". Then, as shown in Figure 598(E), the reduced decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols temporarily stop, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t529).

In this embodiment, when an SP Reach animation is performed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is configured not to be displayed during the symbol confirmation period. That is, while it was possible to perform animation settings continuously from the start of symbol variation when no reach occurred or when a normal reach occurred, animation settings cannot be performed when an SP Reach animation is executed. This is to prevent the player from unintentionally performing animation settings due to accidental operation of the animation button during the player-participation animation in the SP Reach animation. Furthermore, if the display of the next symbol variation begins after the symbols are confirmed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is redisplayed after the variation begins. Even if the display of symbol variation does not begin, the animation change menu screen can be displayed while waiting for the game to start, allowing animation settings to be performed after a short time has elapsed.

When the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 is redisplayed, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete" (Figure 598(F)). At this point, the Favorite Zodiac is set to "Rooster". Subsequently, when the next pattern change begins (time t531), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly showing the Favorite Zodiac.

[42-3-4. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a jackpot]
Finally, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a jackpot. Figures 600 and 601 illustrate an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the display of the symbol change when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol change is a jackpot. Figure 602 is a timing chart corresponding to Figures 600 and 601, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In examples such as Figure 600, the background is set according to the season setting, similar to the example shown in Figure 598. The flow leading up to the start of the SP Reach animation is also the same as in the example shown in Figure 598. The period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 599 (time t520 to time t527) is the same as the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 602 (time t540 to time t547), so the explanation is omitted.

The SP Reach演出 (Special Reach演出) begins as shown in Figure 600(D), and will be explained starting from time t547 on the timing chart. Referring to Figure 600(D), similar to the SP Reach演出 shown in Figure 598(C), a special演出 is executed that links the seasonal setting "Winter" with the recommended zodiac sign "Monkey," displaying an image of monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. As mentioned earlier, the number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the expectation of a jackpot. In the example shown in Figure 600(D), there are three monkeys bathing, indicating a high expectation of a jackpot.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t548), the result of the animation is displayed as shown in Figure 600(E), suggesting that it is a "jackpot." Then, as shown in Figure 600(F), the reduced-size decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols are temporarily paused, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t549). At this time, similar to the example shown in Figure 598, the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is not displayed during the symbol confirmation period.

Once the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" reappears, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Complete" (Figure 600(G)). At this point, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal" is set to "Rooster." Afterward, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is hidden again, and the jackpot game begins as shown in Figure 600(H) (time t551). Note that the settings for the game's effects cannot be changed while the jackpot game is in progress.

Furthermore, to prevent an increase in the load on the animation control system, which would otherwise be increased by replacing the animation performed during a jackpot game immediately after a change in the zodiac sign setting with an animation corresponding to the changed zodiac sign, animations reflecting the changed zodiac sign are made available from the next symbol change display after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game ends and the next symbol change begins, the animation setting display unit 8401 is displayed (Figure 600(I)). At this time, the animation setting display unit 8401 displays "Animation setting in progress" without explicitly showing the zodiac sign.

As described above, when an SP (Special) reach with a high probability of a big win occurs, the timing for changing the performance settings is limited by preventing changes from being made from the time the SP development animation ends until the reel stop period ends, as well as until the big win game ends. By controlling the timing so that the performance settings cannot be changed, it is possible to encourage players to pay attention to the animations, enhance the effect of the animations, and suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[42-4. When a warning is displayed during a change in the presentation]
The above explains how to change the display settings while the symbols are changing. Next, we will explain what happens when minor errors occur while you are changing the display settings while the symbols are changing, such as a ball jam error, a full upper tray error, or a ball supply error, and when these errors are resolved, you can continue playing the game.

Figure 603 shows an example where a full-capacity upper tray error is displayed while the game's animation settings are being adjusted during a pattern change display. (A) shows the seasonal setting being executed, and (B) shows the zodiac animal setting being executed. In this case, the error display is positioned so as not to overlap with the animation setting display unit 8401 (zodiac animal setting unit 8441, season selection unit 8431). If the error has little impact on the game's progress, the game can be resumed immediately after the error is cleared, allowing the player to be aware of the progress of the animation settings. Furthermore, since the error display is positioned so as not to interfere with the animation settings, it may be possible to continue the animation settings even while an error is occurring.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if a minor error occurs while setting the effects during the display of changing symbols, the effects settings can be easily continued, and the game can be smoothly resumed once the error is cleared. This suppresses the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by interruptions in the game due to errors.

[42-5. Inventions relating to the setting of changes in performance]
Finally, here are some representative examples of inventions relating to means for making settings to change the effects disclosed herein.

In the configurations (1) to (5) shown below, the machine includes a performance setting means capable of setting the necessary information for executing a predetermined performance, and a setting operation means that enables operations for executing the performance setting means. This allows players to change the performance by setting it according to their preferences. In this embodiment of the game machine, a zodiac appearance performance is performed, featuring characters modeled after the Chinese zodiac. Not only is a variety of performances possible for each zodiac sign, but players can also adjust the frequency of their preferred performance by specifying their favorite zodiac sign.

Furthermore, configurations (1) through (5) can each produce unique effects by including the configurations shown below.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
A setting information disclosure means capable of displaying setting information set for the aforementioned specific performance,
A means for obfuscating setting information that can notify that a specific effect is set without explicitly stating the setting information set for the specific effect,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned setting information disclosure means is characterized in that it displays the setting information set for the specific performance by performing a predetermined operation using the setting operation means when the setting information is not explicitly stated.

In configuration (1), the system includes a means (setting information disclosure means) that allows the player to disclose (display) setting information (e.g., favorite zodiac sign) when they perform a predetermined operation. This means that the setting information cannot be seen by others during gameplay (setting information ambiguity means). For example, by setting their own zodiac sign as their favorite zodiac sign, the player can prevent others from knowing their age (see Figure 587).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
The setting operation means is characterized in that it does not accept operation from the setting operation means from the time the display position of the symbols is changed after the display position of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the display position of the changed symbols returns to the initial display position.

In configuration (2), even if there is an error in the setting operation means during special reach sequences and other effects, the effects can continue without being interrupted, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 599, 602, etc.).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes a first setting information and a second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When setting the first setting information, the setting method during the change of the symbols and the setting method when the symbols are not changing are different,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when setting the second setting information, the setting method during the variation of the symbols and the setting method when the symbols are not varying are the same.

In configuration (3), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac sign setting), the setting area is minimized during symbol changes to avoid hindering the progress of the game's effects. However, when the symbols stop, the setting method is changed to allow players to easily select the setting information (favorite zodiac sign) from a list. Furthermore, when setting the second setting information (season setting), the same setting method is used both during symbol changes and when the symbols stop, making it easier for players to operate. As described above, the system is designed to minimize disruption to the game's effects while making input as easy as possible, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 587-593, etc.).

(4) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes a first setting information and a second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When the first setting information is set, the first setting information is not reflected in the predetermined performance while the pattern variation is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second setting information is set, the second setting information is reflected in the predetermined performance even while the variation of the symbols is being performed.

In configuration (4), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac setting), the change in setting information is not reflected until the symbol change is complete. The effects based on the favorite zodiac setting include a pre-announcement effect that indicates a high expectation level when the character corresponding to the zodiac matches the favorite zodiac. While such pre-announcement effects are often executed during symbol changes, immediately reflecting the change when the favorite zodiac is changed could result in the expected level of the initially planned effect differing from reality. Furthermore, since replacing effects is computationally expensive, the setting information change is reflected after the symbol change. On the other hand, the second setting information (season setting) includes many effects that require less computational effort, such as background changes, allowing for immediate reflection. In this way, by varying the timing of reflecting the settings according to the content of the effects affected by the setting information, it is possible to suppress discrepancies in the expectation level notification and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 592, 597, etc.).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A warning display means that displays a warning when a predetermined error occurs,
Equipped with,
The warning display means is characterized in that, when a setting screen for setting the specific performance is displayed, the warning display is displayed in a position that does not obscure the information necessary to set the specific performance.

In configuration (5), when a warning is displayed while a screen for setting specific effects is shown, the warning and the settings screen are prevented from overlapping. This allows the setting operation to continue immediately once the warning disappears. Furthermore, in the case of minor errors that allow for immediate gameplay continuation after resolving the issue, the setting operation may continue while the warning is displayed. This configuration allows for immediate gameplay resumption after the error is resolved. By configuring the system in this way, the interruption time for setting operations due to errors is minimized, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figure 603, etc.).

[42. Settings for changing the presentation]
The above explains how to control the layers during the execution of the game's effects. Next, we will explain the configuration that allows players to change the content of the game's effects.

In pachinko and other gaming machines, a lottery is conducted when a game token enters the starting prize slot, and the game value is awarded to the player based on the lottery result. At this time, the game progresses with the display of changing symbols based on the lottery result. Various effects are performed during the game to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

However, since the animations performed during gameplay are selected by lottery from a predefined set of animations, there was a risk that animations unsuitable for the player's preferences or that did not align with the player's intentions might be performed, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the enjoyment of the game is suppressed by making it difficult for players to see effects that do not suit their preferences or do not align with their intentions.

[42-1. Direction Overview]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can specify (select) the characters and other elements that appear in the effects performed during gameplay. The character settings (favorite settings) can be made from a settings screen (effect change menu screen) that can be displayed when the game is waiting and no changes are being made, or from a simplified settings unit (effect setting display unit) that can be displayed while the game is in progress (while the symbols are changing).

Specifically, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a zodiac appearance animation featuring animals from the twelve zodiac signs is possible. The player can change the animation by setting (selecting) their preferred zodiac sign (favorite zodiac sign) from the twelve zodiac signs. In addition to the zodiac sign, the season displayed during the animation (spring, summer, autumn, winter) can also be set. The zodiac signs consist of the following animals: Rat, Ox, Tiger, Rabbit, Dragon, Snake, Horse, Sheep, Monkey, Rooster, Dog, and Boar.

In other words, in the zodiac appearance sequence performed during the symbol changes of the gaming machine in this embodiment, characters representing each zodiac animal appear, and players can set their preferred zodiac animal as the character appearing in this sequence. This allows players to customize the zodiac appearance sequence according to their preferences; for example, a player who likes horse racing can set the horse as their preferred zodiac animal, and a player who dislikes snakes can set any zodiac animal other than the snake as their preferred zodiac animal.

Figure 586 illustrates the probability of character appearance when the zodiac appearance animation is performed. In the zodiac appearance animation, characters appear at different rates (probabilities) depending on whether the player has set a favorite zodiac sign or not. Specifically, the appearance rate of the rat character is 5% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, but it rises to 34% when the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. It is 3% when any zodiac sign other than the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. In other words, the appearance rate is set to be higher when a favorite zodiac sign is set. On the other hand, for the tiger character, the appearance rate is 35% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, and the animation is performed frequently, but it drops to 1% when a favorite zodiac sign is set, and unlike other characters, the appearance rate is set to be lower when a favorite zodiac sign is set. The character appearance ratio will be changed as shown in Figure 586, but this is not the only option. For example, if the Year of the Sheep (未) is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the Year of the Dog (戌) may be omitted.

Furthermore, the timing of the characters appearing during the zodiac appearance sequence varies depending on the character, and setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the timing of the character's appearance. Also, setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the type of sequence performed depending on the selected character. For example, in the zodiac appearance sequences for the rat and boar, the characters appear immediately after the sequence begins. On the other hand, in the zodiac appearance sequence for the ox, the characters appear after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the sequence began (for example, after displaying a pasture scene for a predetermined amount of time). Furthermore, if the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may appear at different timings than when the ox is not set as the favorite zodiac sign, such as appearing immediately after the sequence begins or appearing multiple characters at once. In this case, only when the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may also appear at a timing based on the expected probability of a big win. In this way, setting a favorite zodiac sign increases the anticipation of character appearances and diversifies the sequences, encouraging players to participate more actively in the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, the zodiac sign appearance effect in this embodiment is an effect related to notifying the probability of a big win. For example, in addition to displaying characters, it can also perform vibrations of the control unit (effect buttons and control levers), illumination of light-emitting parts provided in the display device and control unit, lighting of lamps, and sound output.

Furthermore, instead of limiting players to setting only one favorite zodiac sign, it may be possible to set multiple signs, such as a main favorite and a sub-favorite. In this case, when a main and sub-favorite signs are set, the character appearance ratio will differ even further compared to when only one zodiac sign is set. Additionally, when the main and sub-favorite signs are set to a specific combination, the corresponding animations (the animation corresponding to the main zodiac sign and the animation corresponding to the sub-favorite sign) may be played simultaneously, or special animations may be made available.

Furthermore, since the gaming machine of this embodiment allows the player to set the season (spring, summer, autumn, winter) displayed during the game's reel spin, the zodiac sign appearance animation can be configured to run according to the set season. In this case, the player can choose from 12 x 4 = 48 different animations, combining the 12 zodiac signs with the 4 seasons.

When the zodiac appearance animation is performed according to the season, for example, the background of the zodiac appearance animation will change to reflect the season displayed during the animation. In other words, when a character appears in the zodiac appearance animation, the set season will be reflected in the character's appearance. For example, if the player's favorite zodiac sign is the monkey and the season is set to "winter," the animation will feature a monkey in a hot spring with a snowy landscape.

Furthermore, the zodiac appearance sequence includes mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, and sequences in which the character appears in a special manner. In the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, the sequence performed is associated with the character. More specifically, the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301 are executed when one of the following zodiac animals—rat, sheep, or boar—is selected as the character to appear in the zodiac appearance sequence through a performance lottery conducted by the game machine. Additionally, these zodiac appearance sequences may include special variations in the performance content if the player's favorite zodiac animal is set. Specific examples of these sequences will be described later.

Thus, in this embodiment of the zodiac appearance animation, not only are characters modeled after each zodiac sign simply displayed, but special animations (such as mini-game animations or animations in which characters appear in special ways) can be executed for each zodiac sign. Furthermore, by setting multiple favorite zodiac signs, it becomes possible to enable special character displays while also specifying the vibration of the control panel to a particular pattern. By configuring the machine in this embodiment, the variety of animations can be improved, and the player can customize the animations to their liking, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-2. Changes to the Zodiac Animal Appearance Animation]
The above explains the overview of the zodiac animal appearance animation. Next, we will explain how to change your favorite zodiac animal.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the changes to the game's presentation (such as the chosen zodiac sign or season) can be made either while the game is in a waiting state, i.e., when the symbols are not yet displayed, or while the symbols are still being displayed. Each of these cases will be explained below.

[42-2-1. Performance Change Menu Screen (Waiting for Gameplay)]
Figure 587 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for displaying the performance change menu screen in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is the state before displaying the performance change menu screen, (B) is the state with the performance change menu screen displayed, (C) is the state after the performance change menu screen has been closed after setting the favorite zodiac sign as a performance setting and the favorite zodiac sign has been set, and (D) is the state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state in (C) and the performance change menu screen can be displayed.

The performance change menu screen is displayed when the performance setting control unit is operated while there is no pending memory and the symbols are not being displayed (waiting for gameplay). In this embodiment, the performance change menu screen is displayed by operating the performance setting control unit. However, it may also be possible to display the performance change menu screen after the symbols have stopped and confirmed, without operating the performance setting control unit. Alternatively, even if the symbols have temporarily stopped, if a loss is confirmed and there is no pending memory, a message such as "Press the performance setting button to display the setting menu" may be displayed to prompt the player for input, and the system may accept input.

The performance setting control unit includes a performance setting button (third control unit) for confirming the selected setting and a performance selection unit (fourth control unit) for selecting items. The performance selection unit allows for item selection by moving a cursor that points to a candidate for selection. For example, this could be buttons corresponding to up, down, left, and right directions (directional keys), or a lever or trackball that allows the cursor to be moved in any direction. It could also be an interface (+/- buttons) indicating addition (+) and subtraction (-) of setting values for adjusting volume or brightness. Furthermore, the display screen could be a touch panel, allowing the player to select or set items by directly touching it.

When a player operates the effect setting button, an effect change menu screen is displayed (Figure 587(B)). The effect change menu screen includes "Seasonal Setting," "Favorite Zodiac Sign Setting," and "Brightness Adjustment." It may also include other setting items such as "Volume Adjustment" and an item to close the menu screen. Alternatively, instead of an item to close the effect change menu screen, the game machine may be equipped with a cancel button, allowing the effect change menu screen to be closed by pressing the cancel button.

In this embodiment, while players can arbitrarily change the "season," "brightness," and "volume," it is also possible for hall staff to fix these settings through game machine settings that players cannot control. For example, if a hall staff member fixes the "brightness" (which has nine levels from "1" to "9") to "6," players will not be able to change it from "6." In this case, the "brightness adjustment" menu that players would normally use to change the brightness will no longer be displayed. Similarly, if the "season" is fixed to "winter" by a hall staff member, players will not be able to change the season from "winter," and the menu for changing the effects that would normally be displayed when the season is changeable will no longer be displayed.

When the effect change menu screen appears, a cursor for selecting a setting item will be displayed. Use the up and down buttons (effect selection area) to move the cursor next to the setting item. Then, by operating the effect setting button, the setting screen corresponding to the setting item selected by the cursor will be displayed.

After changing settings on the displayed settings screen and closing the settings menu, information indicating that the settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 587(C). At this time, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display detailed changes; only information indicating that the settings have been changed is displayed (setting information ambiguity means). Detailed settings can be confirmed when the settings screen is displayed (setting information disclosure means).

Furthermore, since the performance content does not change even when brightness or volume is changed, and the performance content does not change significantly even when the season is changed, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display information indicating that the performance has been changed even if these settings are changed. Therefore, when a preferred zodiac sign is set, information indicating that the performance settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401. In this way, by not always displaying detailed change information, it is possible to reduce the display area required for displaying performance setting information, thus avoiding disruption to the performance's progression. However, if the performance content changes significantly when a season is set, information indicating that the performance has been changed may be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401.

Furthermore, if a preferred zodiac sign is set, the performance setting display unit 8401 will display "Performance Setting in Progress," while if no preferred zodiac sign is set, it will display "Performance Setting." Additionally, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 587(C), the performance setting display unit 8401 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 587(D). This prevents the player from knowing whether the performance settings have been changed, but a message indicating that the performance change menu screen is available is displayed, allowing the player to reconfirm the changes to the performance by displaying the performance change menu screen.

Next, we will explain the settings screens for season settings, zodiac sign settings, and brightness adjustment. Figure 588 shows the season settings screen. In season settings, you set a season for the effects, and when the predetermined conditions are met, the effects based on the season setting can be executed. You can select the target season by using the left and right buttons on one of the "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter" displayed in the season selection unit 8411. The season currently being set is surrounded by a dotted line, and the currently selected season is surrounded by a thick line. In the example shown in Figure 588, "Spring" is currently set, and "Winter" is selected as the target season. The setting is completed by operating the effects setting button after selecting a season, and the season setting is finished. If a background image or BGM based on the season is set, the setting change will be reflected after the setting is completed.

Figure 589 shows the setting screen for the "Favorite Zodiac Sign." On the left side of the screen is the "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selection Section 8421," where the zodiac signs are arranged in a circle. Operating the "Performance Setting" button moves the currently selected zodiac sign clockwise to the target zodiac sign. In the example in Figure 589, the monkey (Saru) is selected, and the selected zodiac sign (Saru) is displayed in the selection area 8422 on the right side of the screen. Operating the left button while a zodiac sign is selected sets the selected zodiac sign as the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" in the selection area on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, operating the right button while the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" is set and displayed in the selection area on the right side of the screen clears the displayed zodiac sign, returning the zodiac sign to an unset state. Additionally, the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" setting screen closes (the setting state ends) after a predetermined time has elapsed since setting the "Favorite Zodiac Sign," or after a predetermined time has passed without any operation.

In this embodiment, the zodiac sign selected using the left and right buttons is set/desetted as the "favorite zodiac sign." However, it is also possible to set the selected zodiac sign by operating the left button, deset the favorite zodiac sign by operating the performance setting button, and close the favorite zodiac sign setting screen (end of setting state) by operating the right button. Alternatively, the zodiac sign could be selected using the left and right buttons, and then set using the performance setting button.

Figure 590 shows the screen for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1600. The player can adjust the brightness by operating the + and - buttons. A similar configuration may be used for the screen for adjusting the volume (not shown). Alternatively, left/right or up/down buttons may be used instead of the + and - buttons.

The above explains the procedure for changing the settings of the game's effects while the game is in a waiting state. Changes made from the effects change menu screen, including brightness and volume adjustments, are reflected immediately after the change. Therefore, if a change in the seasonal setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display, for example, if the background or BGM changes as a result of the seasonal setting change, the player can immediately recognize the change in the effects settings. On the other hand, if the zodiac animal appearing in an effect during the symbol change display (zodiac appearance effect) is changed, there is a risk that the player may not recognize the change in the effects settings until after the zodiac appearance effect has been executed. However, this problem is resolved because information indicating that the favorite zodiac setting has been changed is displayed on the effects setting display unit 8401. Furthermore, if a change in the favorite zodiac setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display, such as the background or BGM, the change in the effects settings can be recognized not only by the display on the effects setting display unit 8401 but also by the change in the effects themselves.

[42-2-2. Settings for the display of changing patterns]
Next, we will explain the configuration for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing. Figure 591 is a diagram illustrating the means for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 591(A), a performance setting display unit 8401 for changing the performance settings is displayed. During the display of changing symbols, the performance setting display unit 8401 displays performance setting buttons to indicate that performance settings can be changed.

When the performance setting display unit 8401 is displayed, operating the performance setting button will display the message "Performance settings using up/down keys" on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 591(B). This allows you to select either the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) by operating the performance selection unit (up/down keys) included in the performance setting operation unit. While the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) is displayed, operating the performance setting button will switch to the respective setting state. The season setting will be explained with reference to Figure 592, and the zodiac sign setting with reference to Figure 593.

(Seasonal setting)
Figure 592 illustrates the procedure for changing the currently set season while the symbols are changing. In the example shown in Figure 592, the set season (season setting) is reflected in the background image, and the background music is also changed as needed. Figure 592(A) shows the state in which the season setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "spring" is set as the currently set season, and an image of "cherry blossoms" is displayed in the background.

In the state shown in Figure 592(A), operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) displays the season selection unit 8431. The season selection unit 8431 allows you to set the season using the same operation as the season selection unit 8411 on the season setting screen displayed from the effect change menu screen. You can select the desired season by operating the left and right buttons (effect selection unit) to choose from "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter." Also, similar to the example shown in Figure 588, the currently set season ("Spring") is surrounded by a dotted line, and the selected target season ("Winter") is surrounded by a thick line.

Subsequently, with "Winter" selected as the target season, operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) completes the season setting, and the background immediately changes to the winter-appropriate background (snowy landscape), as shown in Figure 592(C). At this time, the background music (BGM) is also changed as needed. Furthermore, the effect corresponding to the selected season (a snow-falling effect) may be executed only at the time the season setting is performed. Afterward, the season selection unit 8431 is hidden, and information indicating that effect settings are possible ("effect setting") is displayed on the effect setting display unit 8401, rather than information indicating that the effect is being changed ("effect setting in progress").

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the settings for the effects can be changed and immediately reflected even while the symbols are changing. Alternatively, the setting change may not be reflected immediately, but rather in the next symbol change display, or after the display of the currently held symbols has finished. Furthermore, when the zodiac appearance effect is executed, especially when the zodiac appearance effect is executed based on the season setting, the load on the effect control may increase due to the change in the effect content. Therefore, even if immediate reflection is possible, the setting change may be reflected from the next symbol change display. This allows players to freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Favorite zodiac sign setting)
Figure 593 illustrates the procedure for setting a new zodiac sign while the symbols are changing. Figure 593(A) shows the state in which the zodiac sign setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "Monkey" is set as the zodiac sign, but the zodiac sign appearance performance is not being executed.

In the state shown in Figure 593(A), operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) displays the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 for selecting a new zodiac sign (Figure 593(B)). As shown in Figure 593(B), the currently set zodiac sign (Favorite Zodiac Sign: Monkey) is initially displayed in the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441. At this point, the zodiac sign becomes selectable, and by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit, the display of the zodiac signs to be selected as the new Favorite Zodiac sign switches sequentially, and the character corresponding to each zodiac sign is displayed (Figure 593(E)). While the display of the selected zodiac sign can be switched bidirectionally, it is also possible to restrict the switching of the zodiac sign display to one direction only by making it operable only with the right (or left) button. Furthermore, an item for deselecting the Favorite Zodiac Sign may be added in addition to the characters corresponding to each zodiac sign.

If the interface for setting the preferred zodiac sign uses the entire screen to display characters corresponding to all zodiac signs, as seen in the animation change menu screen displayed during the waiting state (Figure 589), there is a risk of interfering with the display of decorative symbols or the animations performed during the symbol variation display. In this embodiment, since animations that attract the player's attention are infrequent during the waiting state, the interface (setting screen) prioritizes ease of setting. However, during the symbol variation display, there is a possibility that animations that attract the player's attention (for example, animations suggesting a jackpot) may be performed while setting the preferred zodiac sign. Therefore, the display of a single zodiac sign for selection is limited, and the interface switches between the displayed zodiac signs sequentially, thereby suppressing the area used for setting the preferred zodiac sign. This prevents interference with the display of decorative symbols or animations performed during the symbol variation display when setting the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 593(C) shows the state where "Rooster" has been selected as the new favorite zodiac sign by operating the right button (performance selection unit) (not set). Subsequently, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit), the currently selected "Rooster" is set as the new favorite zodiac sign (Figure 593(D)). Once the favorite zodiac sign is set, the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Favorite zodiac sign selected" to "Favorite zodiac sign prepared." Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display transitions from the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 to the performance setting display unit 8401 (Figure 591(A)).

Furthermore, even if a new favorite zodiac sign is set, the change will not be reflected until after the symbol variation has finished. This is because, unlike when the favorite zodiac sign is set during the game waiting state, the animation content until the end of the symbol variation display is already determined. Attempting to reflect the zodiac sign setting at this time would require reloading image data and other processing, potentially placing an excessive load on the animation control system. In contrast, during the game waiting state, when the symbol variation display is not yet running, reloading image data is unnecessary, allowing the favorite zodiac sign setting to be reflected immediately.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the settings for the effects can be changed even while the symbols are changing, similar to the seasonal setting. Unlike the seasonal setting, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign takes effect from the next symbol change. Furthermore, if the zodiac sign appearance effect that is supposed to be performed during the current symbol change display has not yet been executed, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign may be immediately applied to replace the zodiac sign appearance effect. As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-3. Specific example of the procedure for changing the animation while the pattern is changing]
The above describes the means of displaying the menu screen and setting the effects while the game is in a waiting state, and the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing. Next, specific examples of the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing, based on the variation pattern (type of reach) and the result of the symbol change display, will be explained with reference to the diagrams.

[42-3-1. In the case of no reach]
First, let's explain the case where the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 594 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol change display when the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 595 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 594, illustrating the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 594(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t500), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the favorite zodiac sign has already been set. Furthermore, by performing the procedures shown in Figures 591 and 593 (times t501-t502), the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac sign can be set (Figure 594(B)). In the example shown in Figure 594, as shown in Figure 595, "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign before the change started, but by displaying the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441, the currently set favorite zodiac sign is displayed as the newly selected favorite zodiac sign. At this point, the player can recognize that "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign.

As shown in Figure 594(B), the selected zodiac sign can be switched by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit (selection operation). When the selected zodiac sign is switched from "Monkey" to "Rooster" at time t503, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 also changes from the character representing "Monkey" to the character representing "Rooster" (Figure 594(C)). The Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 displays "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" along with the character representing the currently selected zodiac sign.

Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) in the state shown in Figure 594(C) (the state in which a new favorite zodiac sign has been selected) (time t504), the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Sign" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Sign" (Figure 594(D)). As mentioned above, the setting of the favorite zodiac sign is not immediately reflected even when the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) is operated, but transitions to the setting preparation stage, and the setting of the favorite zodiac sign remains "Monkey" until the ongoing change in the symbols is completed.

Subsequently, at time t505, the display of the decorative pattern temporarily stops (Figure 594(E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. During this time, the display of the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 continues to show "Preparing Favorite Zodiac." When the pattern confirmation period ends (time t506), the pattern stops being confirmed (Figure 594(F)). Once the pattern stops being confirmed, the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 changes to "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. After that, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As shown in Figure 595, setting your preferred zodiac sign during the changing pattern display is possible at any time, even during the preparation phase for setting your preferred zodiac sign, from the start of the pattern change (time t501) until the end of the pattern confirmation period (pattern stop, change ends, time t506). Furthermore, during the confirmed pattern display (time t506-t507), it is not possible to perform performance settings, and therefore, setting your preferred zodiac sign and season is not possible.

[42-3-2. If a normal reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a loss. Figure 596 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a loss. Figure 597 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 596, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 596(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t510). Similar to the case where a reach does not occur, the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has already been set. At this time, as shown in Figure 597, "Monkey" is set as the recommended zodiac sign. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 596(B), the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new recommended zodiac sign can be set (time t511-t512).

By operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection section (selection operation), the currently selected zodiac sign is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster", time t513). Then, as shown in Figure 596(C), a reach occurs (time t514). Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation section) (time t515), the display of the favorite zodiac sign setting section 8441 is updated from "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" to "Favorite Zodiac Sign Preparing" (Figure 596(D)). As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac sign setting remains "Monkey".

Subsequently, the display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (Figure 596 (E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. Furthermore, when the pattern confirmation period ends (time t517), the pattern is confirmed and stopped (Figure 596 (F)). Once the pattern is confirmed and stopped, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 becomes "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. Afterward, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As described above, even when a reach (normal reach) occurs, the favorite zodiac sign can be set at all times from the start of the spin (time t511) until the end of the symbol confirmation period (symbols stop, spin ends, time t517), just as when no reach occurs. Furthermore, during the time the symbol confirmation is displayed (time t517 to time t518), the performance settings cannot be executed, and the favorite zodiac sign and season cannot be set.

[42-3-3. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a miss. Figure 598 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a miss. Figure 599 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 598, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In the example shown in Figure 598, the background is set according to the season setting. Specifically, the season is set to "winter," and the background shows snow falling on a snow-covered mountain. The background may always display an image corresponding to the season setting, even when the symbols are not changing, or it may be set according to the game state (e.g., high probability state) or the performance mode. Furthermore, it may be changed as a pre-announcement effect (pre-read effect) at the start of the symbol change, or it may be changed at a specific timing during the symbol change display.

Figure 598(A) shows the state after the pattern change has begun (time t520), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has been set. As mentioned above, the season setting is set to "Winter," and as shown in Figure 599, the current recommended zodiac sign is set to "Monkey."

Subsequently, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac animal can be set (times t521-t522). Furthermore, by operating the left and right buttons included in the "Performance Selection Unit," the zodiac animal currently selected as the favorite is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster," time t523). By operating the "Performance Setting Button" (Performance Setting Operation Unit), the new favorite zodiac animal is set to "Rooster" (time t524). As a result, the display on the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Animal" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Animal," transitioning to the setting preparation stage. As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac animal remains "Monkey." At time t525, a "reach" occurs (Figure 598 (B)).

After a reach occurs, a predetermined time elapses (time t526), and a screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed (the SP reach development animation is executed). Subsequently, the SP reach animation is executed (time t527, Figure 598(C)). When the screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size, and the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 becomes invisible. This continues until the SP reach animation ends. During the execution of the SP reach animation, the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 remains invisible to allow the player to focus on the animation. Furthermore, if the SP reach animation includes player-participation elements, there is a risk of accidental operation of the animation buttons. To prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game, operation of the animation setting operation unit is suppressed; for example, the animation setting buttons are not accepted.

The SP reach animation shown in Figure 598(C) is a special animation linked to the seasonal setting "Winter" and the chosen zodiac sign "Monkey." Specifically, the animation depicts monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. The number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the likelihood of a big win. For example, three monkeys indicate a high likelihood of a win (or a guaranteed win), while one monkey indicates a low likelihood. The more monkeys there are, the higher the chance of a big win. While the special animation can be performed even without setting the monkey as the chosen zodiac sign, the game's appeal can be enhanced by increasing the likelihood of a big win when the same animation is performed if the monkey is selected, or by changing parts of the animation's composition.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t528), the result of the animation is displayed (Figure 598(D)). In the example shown in Figure 598(D), the result of the symbol variation display is "miss". Subsequently, as shown in Figure 598(E), the reduced decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols temporarily stop, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t529).

In this embodiment, when an SP Reach animation is performed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is configured not to be displayed during the symbol confirmation period. That is, while it was possible to perform animation settings continuously from the start of symbol variation when no reach occurred or when a normal reach occurred, animation settings cannot be performed when an SP Reach animation is executed. This is to prevent the player from unintentionally performing animation settings due to accidental operation of the animation button during the player-participation animation in the SP Reach animation. Furthermore, if the display of the next symbol variation begins after the symbols are confirmed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is redisplayed after the variation begins. Even if the display of symbol variation does not begin, the animation change menu screen can be displayed while waiting for the game to start, allowing animation settings to be performed after a short time has elapsed.

When the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 is redisplayed, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete" (Figure 598(F)). At this point, the Favorite Zodiac is set to "Rooster". Subsequently, when the next pattern change begins (time t531), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly showing the Favorite Zodiac.

[42-3-4. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a jackpot]
Finally, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot. Figures 600 and 601 illustrate an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot. Figure 602 is a timing chart corresponding to Figures 600 and 601, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In examples such as Figure 600, the background is set according to the season setting, similar to the example shown in Figure 598. The flow leading up to the start of the SP Reach animation is also the same as in the example shown in Figure 598. The period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 599 (time t520 to time t527) is the same as the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 602 (time t540 to time t547), so the explanation is omitted.

The SP Reach演出 (Special Reach演出) begins as shown in Figure 600(D), and will be explained starting from time t547 on the timing chart. Referring to Figure 600(D), similar to the SP Reach演出 shown in Figure 598(C), a special演出 is executed that links the seasonal setting "Winter" with the recommended zodiac sign "Monkey," displaying an image of monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. As mentioned earlier, the number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the expectation of a jackpot. In the example shown in Figure 600(D), there are three monkeys bathing, indicating a high expectation of a jackpot.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t548), the result of the animation is displayed as shown in Figure 600(E), suggesting that it is a "jackpot." Then, as shown in Figure 600(F), the reduced-size decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols are temporarily paused, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t549). At this time, similar to the example shown in Figure 598, the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is not displayed during the symbol confirmation period.

Once the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" reappears, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Complete" (Figure 600(G)). At this point, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal" is set to "Rooster." Afterward, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is hidden again, and the jackpot game begins as shown in Figure 600(H) (time t551). Note that the settings for the game's effects cannot be changed while the jackpot game is in progress.

Furthermore, to prevent an increase in the load on the animation control system, which would otherwise be increased by replacing the animation performed during a jackpot game immediately after the zodiac sign setting is changed with an animation corresponding to the changed zodiac sign, animations reflecting the changed zodiac sign are made available from the next symbol change display after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game ends and the next symbol change begins, the animation setting display unit 8401 is displayed (Figure 600(I)). At this time, the animation setting display unit 8401 displays "Animation setting in progress" without explicitly showing the zodiac sign. This prevents others from knowing which zodiac sign is set, making it difficult for other players to guess the player's age or to determine whether a high-probability animation is being performed when a zodiac sign appearance animation is executed.

As described above, when an SP (Special) reach with a high probability of a big win occurs, the timing for changing the performance settings is limited by preventing changes from being made from the time the SP development animation ends until the reel stop period ends, as well as until the big win game ends. By controlling the timing so that the performance settings cannot be changed, it is possible to encourage players to pay attention to the animations, enhance the effect of the animations, and suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[42-4. When a warning is displayed during a change in the presentation]
The above explains how to change the display settings while the symbols are changing. Next, we will explain what happens when minor errors occur while you are changing the display settings while the symbols are changing, such as a ball jam error, a full tray error, or a ball supply error, and when these errors are resolved, you can continue playing the game.

Figure 603 shows an example where a full-capacity upper tray error is displayed while the game's animation settings are being adjusted during a pattern change display. (A) shows the seasonal setting being executed, and (B) shows the zodiac animal setting being executed. In this case, the error display is positioned so as not to overlap with the animation setting display unit 8401 (zodiac animal setting unit 8441, season selection unit 8431). If the error has little impact on the game's progress, the game can be resumed immediately after the error is cleared, allowing the player to be aware of the progress of the animation settings. Furthermore, since the error display is positioned so as not to interfere with the animation settings, it may be possible to continue the animation settings even while an error is occurring.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if a minor error occurs while setting the effects during the display of changing symbols, the effects settings can be easily continued, and the game can be smoothly resumed once the error is cleared. This suppresses the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by interruptions in the game due to errors.

[42-5. Inventions relating to the setting of changes in performance]
Finally, representative examples of inventions relating to means for making settings to change the effects disclosed herein are listed.

In the configurations (1) to (5) shown below, the machine includes a performance setting means capable of setting the necessary information for executing a predetermined performance, and a setting operation means that enables operations for executing the performance setting means. This allows players to change the performance by setting it according to their preferences. In this embodiment of the game machine, a zodiac appearance performance is performed, featuring characters modeled after the Chinese zodiac. Not only is a variety of performances possible for each zodiac sign, but players can also adjust the frequency of their preferred performance by specifying their favorite zodiac sign.

Furthermore, configurations (1) through (5) can each produce unique effects by including the configurations shown below.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
A setting information disclosure means capable of displaying setting information set for the aforementioned specific performance,
A means for obfuscating setting information that can notify that a specific effect is set without explicitly stating the setting information set for the specific effect,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned setting information disclosure means is characterized in that it displays the setting information set for the specific performance by performing a predetermined operation using the setting operation means when the setting information is not explicitly stated.

In configuration (1), the system includes a means (setting information disclosure means) that allows the player to disclose (display) setting information (e.g., favorite zodiac sign) when they perform a predetermined operation. This means that the setting information cannot be seen by others during gameplay (setting information ambiguity means). For example, by setting their own zodiac sign as their favorite zodiac sign, the player can prevent others from knowing their age (see Figure 587).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
The setting operation means is characterized in that it does not accept operation from the setting operation means from the time the display position of the symbols is changed after the display position of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the display position of the changed symbols returns to the initial display position.

In configuration (2), even if there is an error in the setting operation means during special reach sequences and other effects, the effects can continue without being interrupted, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 599, 602, etc.).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes first setting information and second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When setting the first setting information, the setting method during the change of the symbols is different from the setting method when the symbols are not changing.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when setting the second setting information, the setting method during the variation of the symbols and the setting method when the symbols are not varying are the same.

In configuration (3), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac sign setting), the setting area is minimized during symbol changes to avoid hindering the progress of the game's effects. However, when the symbols stop, the setting method is changed to allow players to easily select the setting information (favorite zodiac sign) from a list. Furthermore, when setting the second setting information (season setting), the same setting method is used both during symbol changes and when the symbols stop, making it easier for players to operate. As described above, the system is designed to minimize disruption to the game's effects while making input as easy as possible, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 587-593, etc.).

(4) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the predetermined effect,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes first setting information and second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When the first setting information is set, the first setting information is not reflected in the predetermined performance while the pattern variation is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second setting information is set, the second setting information is reflected in the predetermined performance even while the pattern changes are being performed.

In configuration (4), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac setting), the change in setting information is not reflected until the symbol change is complete. The effects based on the favorite zodiac setting include a pre-announcement effect that indicates a high expectation level when the character corresponding to the zodiac matches the favorite zodiac. While such pre-announcement effects are often executed during symbol changes, immediately reflecting the change when the favorite zodiac is changed could result in the expected level of the initially planned effect differing from reality. Furthermore, since replacing effects is computationally expensive, the setting information change is reflected after the symbol change. On the other hand, the second setting information (season setting) includes many effects that require less computational effort, such as background changes, allowing for immediate reflection. In this way, by varying the timing of reflecting the settings according to the content of the effects affected by the setting information, it is possible to suppress discrepancies in the expectation level notification and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 592, 597, etc.).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A warning display means that displays a warning when a predetermined error occurs,
Equipped with,
The warning display means is characterized in that, when a setting screen for setting the specific performance is displayed, the warning display is displayed in a position that does not obscure the information necessary to set the specific performance.

In configuration (5), when a warning is displayed while a screen for setting specific effects is shown, the warning and the settings screen are prevented from overlapping. This allows the setting operation to continue immediately once the warning disappears. Furthermore, in the case of minor errors that allow for immediate gameplay continuation after resolving the issue, the setting operation may continue while the warning is displayed. This configuration allows for immediate gameplay resumption after the error is resolved. By configuring the system in this way, the interruption time for setting operations due to errors is minimized, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figure 603, etc.).

[42. Settings for changing the presentation]
The above explains how to control the layers during the execution of the game's effects. Next, we will explain the configuration that allows players to change the content of the game's effects.

In pachinko and other gaming machines, a lottery is conducted when a game token enters the starting prize slot, and the game value is awarded to the player based on the lottery result. At this time, the game progresses with the display of changing symbols based on the lottery result. Various effects are performed during the game to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

However, since the animations performed during gameplay are selected by lottery from a predefined set of animations, there was a risk that animations unsuitable for the player's preferences or that did not align with the player's intentions might be performed, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the enjoyment of the game is suppressed by making it difficult for players to see effects that do not suit their preferences or do not align with their intentions.

[42-1. Production Overview]
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can specify (select) the characters and other elements that appear in the effects performed during gameplay. The character settings (favorite settings) can be made from a settings screen (effect change menu screen) that can be displayed when the game is waiting and no changes are being made, or from a simplified settings unit (effect setting display unit) that can be displayed while the game is in progress (while the symbols are changing).

Specifically, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, a zodiac appearance animation featuring animals from the twelve zodiac signs is possible. The player can change the animation by setting (selecting) their preferred zodiac sign (favorite zodiac sign) from the twelve zodiac signs. In addition to the zodiac sign, the season displayed during the animation (spring, summer, autumn, winter) can also be set. The zodiac signs consist of the following animals: Rat, Ox, Tiger, Rabbit, Dragon, Snake, Horse, Sheep, Monkey, Rooster, Dog, and Boar.

In other words, in the zodiac appearance sequence performed during the symbol changes of the gaming machine in this embodiment, characters representing each zodiac animal appear, and players can set their preferred zodiac animal as the character appearing in this sequence. This allows players to customize the zodiac appearance sequence according to their preferences; for example, a player who likes horse racing can set the horse as their preferred zodiac animal, and a player who dislikes snakes can set any zodiac animal other than the snake as their preferred zodiac animal.

Figure 586 illustrates the probability of character appearance when the zodiac appearance animation is performed. In the zodiac appearance animation, characters appear at different rates (probabilities) depending on whether the player has set a favorite zodiac sign or not. Specifically, the appearance rate of the rat character is 5% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, but it rises to 34% when the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. It is 3% when any zodiac sign other than the rat is set as the favorite zodiac sign. In other words, the appearance rate is set to be higher when a favorite zodiac sign is set. On the other hand, for the tiger character, the appearance rate is 35% when no favorite zodiac sign is set, and the animation is performed frequently, but it drops to 1% when a favorite zodiac sign is set, and unlike other characters, the appearance rate is set to be lower when a favorite zodiac sign is set. The character appearance ratio will be changed as shown in Figure 586, but this is not the only option. For example, if the Year of the Sheep (未) is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the Year of the Dog (戌) may be omitted.

Furthermore, the timing of the characters appearing during the zodiac appearance sequence varies depending on the character, and setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the timing of the character's appearance. Also, setting a favorite zodiac sign may change the type of sequence performed depending on the selected character. For example, in the zodiac appearance sequences for the rat and boar, the characters appear immediately after the sequence begins. On the other hand, in the zodiac appearance sequence for the ox, the characters appear after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the sequence began (for example, after displaying a pasture scene for a predetermined amount of time). Furthermore, if the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may appear at different timings than when the ox is not set as the favorite zodiac sign, such as appearing immediately after the sequence begins or appearing multiple characters at once. In this case, only when the ox is set as the favorite zodiac sign, the characters may also appear at a timing based on the expected probability of a big win. In this way, setting a favorite zodiac sign increases the anticipation of character appearances and diversifies the sequences, encouraging players to participate more actively in the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, the zodiac sign appearance effect in this embodiment is an effect related to notifying the probability of a big win. For example, in addition to displaying characters, it can also perform vibrations of the control unit (effect buttons and control levers), illumination of light-emitting parts provided in the display device and control unit, lighting of lamps, and sound output.

Furthermore, instead of limiting players to setting only one favorite zodiac sign, it may be possible to set multiple signs, such as a main favorite and a sub-favorite. In this case, when a main and sub-favorite signs are set, the character appearance ratio will differ even further compared to when only one zodiac sign is set. Additionally, when the main and sub-favorite signs are set to a specific combination, the corresponding animations (the animation corresponding to the main zodiac sign and the animation corresponding to the sub-favorite sign) may be played simultaneously, or special animations may be made available.

Furthermore, since the gaming machine of this embodiment allows the player to set the season (spring, summer, autumn, winter) displayed during the game's reel spin, the zodiac sign appearance animation can be configured to run according to the set season. In this case, the player can choose from 12 x 4 = 48 different animations, combining the 12 zodiac signs with the 4 seasons.

When the zodiac appearance animation is performed according to the season, for example, the background of the zodiac appearance animation will change to reflect the season displayed during the animation. In other words, when a character appears in the zodiac appearance animation, the set season will be reflected in the character's appearance. For example, if the player's favorite zodiac sign is the monkey and the season is set to "winter," the animation will feature a monkey in a hot spring with a snowy landscape.

Furthermore, the zodiac appearance sequence includes mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, and sequences in which the character appears in a special manner. In the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301, the sequence performed is associated with the character. More specifically, the mini-game sequences in which the character is controlled by the performance control unit 301 are executed when one of the following zodiac animals—rat, sheep, or boar—is selected as the character to appear in the zodiac appearance sequence through a performance lottery conducted by the game machine. Additionally, these zodiac appearance sequences may include special variations in the performance content if the player's favorite zodiac animal is set. Specific examples of these sequences will be described later.

Thus, in this embodiment of the zodiac appearance animation, not only are characters modeled after each zodiac sign simply displayed, but special animations (such as mini-game animations or animations in which characters appear in special ways) can be executed for each zodiac sign. Furthermore, by setting multiple favorite zodiac signs, it becomes possible to enable special character displays while also specifying the vibration of the control panel to a particular pattern. By configuring the machine in this embodiment, the variety of animations can be improved, and the player can customize the animations to their liking, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-2. Changes to the Zodiac Animal Appearance Animation]
The above explains the overview of the zodiac animal appearance animation. Next, we will explain how to change your favorite zodiac animal.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the changes to the game's presentation (such as the chosen zodiac sign or season) can be made either while the game is in a waiting state, i.e., when the symbols are not yet displayed, or while the symbols are still being displayed. Each of these cases will be explained below.

[42-2-1. Performance Change Menu Screen (Waiting for Gameplay)]
Figure 587 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for displaying the performance change menu screen in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is the state before displaying the performance change menu screen, (B) is the state with the performance change menu screen displayed, (C) is the state after the performance change menu screen has been closed after setting the favorite zodiac sign as a performance setting and the favorite zodiac sign has been set, and (D) is the state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state in (C) and the performance change menu screen can be displayed.

The performance change menu screen is displayed when the performance setting control unit is operated while there is no pending memory and the symbols are not being displayed (waiting for gameplay). In this embodiment, the performance change menu screen is displayed by operating the performance setting control unit. However, it may also be possible to display the performance change menu screen after the symbols have stopped and confirmed, without operating the performance setting control unit. Alternatively, even if the symbols have temporarily stopped, if a loss is confirmed and there is no pending memory, a message such as "Press the performance setting button to display the setting menu" may be displayed to prompt the player for input, and the system may accept input.

The performance setting control unit includes a performance setting button (third control unit) for confirming the selected setting and a performance selection unit (fourth control unit) for selecting items. The performance selection unit allows for item selection by moving a cursor that points to a candidate for selection. For example, this could be buttons corresponding to up, down, left, and right directions (directional keys), or a lever or trackball that allows the cursor to be moved in any direction. It could also be an interface (+/- buttons) indicating addition (+) and subtraction (-) of setting values for adjusting volume or brightness. Furthermore, the display screen could be a touch panel, allowing the player to select or set items by directly touching it.

When a player operates the effect setting button, an effect change menu screen is displayed (Figure 587(B)). The effect change menu screen includes "Seasonal Setting," "Favorite Zodiac Sign Setting," and "Brightness Adjustment." It may also include other setting items such as "Volume Adjustment" and an item to close the menu screen. Alternatively, instead of an item to close the effect change menu screen, the game machine may be equipped with a cancel button, allowing the effect change menu screen to be closed by pressing the cancel button.

In this embodiment, while players can arbitrarily change the "season," "brightness," and "volume," it is also possible for hall staff to fix these settings through game machine settings that players cannot control. For example, if a hall staff member fixes the "brightness" (which has nine levels from "1" to "9") to "6," players will not be able to change it from "6." In this case, the "brightness adjustment" menu that players would normally use to change the brightness will no longer be displayed. Similarly, if the "season" is fixed to "winter" by a hall staff member, players will not be able to change the season from "winter," and the menu for changing the effects that would normally be displayed when the season is changeable will no longer be displayed.

When the effect change menu screen appears, a cursor for selecting a setting item will be displayed. Use the up and down buttons (effect selection area) to move the cursor next to the setting item. Then, by operating the effect setting button, the setting screen corresponding to the setting item selected by the cursor will be displayed.

After changing settings on the displayed settings screen and closing the settings menu, information indicating that the settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 587(C). At this time, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display detailed changes; only information indicating that the settings have been changed is displayed (setting information ambiguity means). Detailed settings can be confirmed when the settings screen is displayed (setting information disclosure means).

Furthermore, since the performance content does not change even when brightness or volume is changed, and the performance content does not change significantly even when the season is changed, the performance setting display unit 8401 does not display information indicating that the performance has been changed even if these settings are changed. Therefore, when a preferred zodiac sign is set, information indicating that the performance settings have been changed will be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401. In this way, by not always displaying detailed change information, it is possible to reduce the display area required for displaying performance setting information, thus avoiding disruption to the performance's progression. However, if the performance content changes significantly when a season is set, information indicating that the performance has been changed may be displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401.

Furthermore, if a preferred zodiac sign is set, the performance setting display unit 8401 will display "Performance Setting in Progress," while if no preferred zodiac sign is set, it will display "Performance Setting." Additionally, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in Figure 587(C), the performance setting display unit 8401 will be hidden, as shown in Figure 587(D). This prevents the player from knowing whether the performance settings have been changed, but a message indicating that the performance change menu screen is available is displayed, allowing the player to reconfirm the changes to the performance by displaying the performance change menu screen.

Next, we will explain the settings screens for season settings, zodiac sign settings, and brightness adjustment. Figure 588 shows the season settings screen. In season settings, you set a season for the effects, and when the predetermined conditions are met, the effects based on the season setting can be executed. You can select the target season by using the left and right buttons on one of the "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter" displayed in the season selection unit 8411. The season currently being set is surrounded by a dotted line, and the currently selected season is surrounded by a thick line. In the example shown in Figure 588, "Spring" is currently set, and "Winter" is selected as the target season. The setting is completed by operating the effects setting button after selecting a season, and the season setting is finished. If a background image or BGM based on the season is set, the setting change will be reflected after the setting is completed.

Figure 589 shows the setting screen for the "Favorite Zodiac Sign." On the left side of the screen is the "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selection Section 8421," where the zodiac signs are arranged in a circle. Operating the "Performance Setting" button moves the currently selected zodiac sign clockwise to the target zodiac sign. In the example in Figure 589, the monkey (Saru) is selected, and the selected zodiac sign (Saru) is displayed in the selection area 8422 on the right side of the screen. Operating the left button while a zodiac sign is selected sets the selected zodiac sign as the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" in the selection area on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, operating the right button while the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" is set and displayed in the selection area on the right side of the screen clears the displayed zodiac sign, returning the zodiac sign to an unset state. Additionally, the "Favorite Zodiac Sign" setting screen closes (the setting state ends) after a predetermined time has elapsed since setting the "Favorite Zodiac Sign," or after a predetermined time has passed without any operation.

In this embodiment, the zodiac sign selected using the left and right buttons is set/desetted as the "favorite zodiac sign." However, it is also possible to set the selected zodiac sign by operating the left button, deset the favorite zodiac sign by operating the performance setting button, and close the favorite zodiac sign setting screen (end of setting state) by operating the right button. Alternatively, the zodiac sign could be selected using the left and right buttons, and then set using the performance setting button.

Figure 590 shows the screen for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1600. The player can adjust the brightness by operating the + and - buttons. A similar configuration may be used for the screen for adjusting the volume (not shown). Alternatively, left/right or up/down buttons may be used instead of the + and - buttons.

The above explains the procedure for changing the settings of the game's effects while the game is in a waiting state. Changes made from the effects change menu screen, including brightness and volume adjustments, are reflected immediately after the change. Therefore, if a change in the seasonal setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display, for example, if the background or BGM changes as a result of the seasonal setting change, the player can immediately recognize the change in the effects settings. On the other hand, if the zodiac animal appearing in an effect during the symbol change display (zodiac appearance effect) is changed, there is a risk that the player may not recognize the change in the effects settings until after the zodiac appearance effect has been executed. However, this problem is resolved because information indicating that the favorite zodiac setting has been changed is displayed on the effects setting display unit 8401. Furthermore, if a change in the favorite zodiac setting affects effects performed outside of the symbol change display, such as the background or BGM, the change in the effects settings can be recognized not only by the display on the effects setting display unit 8401 but also by the change in the effects themselves.

[42-2-2. Settings for the display of changing patterns]
Next, we will explain the configuration for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing. Figure 591 is a diagram illustrating the means for changing the effects settings while the symbols are changing.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 591(A), a performance setting display unit 8401 for changing the performance settings is displayed. During the display of changing symbols, the performance setting display unit 8401 displays performance setting buttons to indicate that performance settings can be changed.

When the performance setting display unit 8401 is displayed, operating the performance setting button will display the message "Performance settings using up/down keys" on the performance setting display unit 8401, as shown in Figure 591(B). This allows you to select either the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) by operating the performance selection unit (up/down keys) included in the performance setting operation unit. While the season setting (Figure 591(C)) or the zodiac sign setting (Figure 591(D)) is displayed, operating the performance setting button will switch to the respective setting state. The season setting will be explained with reference to Figure 592, and the zodiac sign setting with reference to Figure 593.

(Seasonal setting)
Figure 592 illustrates the procedure for changing the currently set season while the symbols are changing. In the example shown in Figure 592, the set season (season setting) is reflected in the background image, and the background music is also changed as needed. Figure 592(A) shows the state in which the season setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "spring" is set as the currently set season, and an image of "cherry blossoms" is displayed in the background.

In the state shown in Figure 592(A), operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) displays the season selection unit 8431. The season selection unit 8431 allows you to set the season using the same operation as the season selection unit 8411 on the season setting screen displayed from the effect change menu screen. You can select the desired season by operating the left and right buttons (effect selection unit) to choose from "Spring," "Summer," "Autumn," or "Winter." Also, similar to the example shown in Figure 588, the currently set season ("Spring") is surrounded by a dotted line, and the selected target season ("Winter") is surrounded by a thick line.

Subsequently, with "Winter" selected as the target season, operating the effect setting button (effect setting operation unit) completes the season setting, and the background immediately changes to the winter-appropriate background (snowy landscape), as shown in Figure 592(C). At this time, the background music (BGM) is also changed as needed. Furthermore, the effect corresponding to the selected season (a snow-falling effect) may be executed only at the time the season setting is performed. Afterward, the season selection unit 8431 is hidden, and information indicating that effect settings are possible ("effect setting") is displayed on the effect setting display unit 8401, rather than information indicating that the effect is being changed ("effect setting in progress").

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the settings for the effects can be changed and immediately reflected even while the symbols are changing. Alternatively, the setting change may not be reflected immediately, but rather in the next symbol change display, or after the display of the currently held symbols has finished. Furthermore, when the zodiac appearance effect is executed, especially when the zodiac appearance effect is executed based on the season setting, the load on the effect control may increase due to the change in the effect content. Therefore, even if immediate reflection is possible, the setting change may be reflected from the next symbol change display. This allows players to freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Favorite zodiac sign setting)
Figure 593 illustrates the procedure for setting a new zodiac sign while the symbols are changing. Figure 593(A) shows the state in which the zodiac sign setting is displayed on the performance setting display unit 8401 by operating the performance setting operation unit while the symbols are changing. At this time, "Monkey" is set as the zodiac sign, but the zodiac sign appearance performance is not being executed.

In the state shown in Figure 593(A), operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) displays the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 for selecting a new zodiac sign (Figure 593(B)). As shown in Figure 593(B), the currently set zodiac sign (Favorite Zodiac Sign: Monkey) is initially displayed in the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441. At this point, the zodiac sign becomes selectable, and by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit, the display of the zodiac signs to be selected as the new Favorite Zodiac sign switches sequentially, and the character corresponding to each zodiac sign is displayed (Figure 593(E)). While the display of the selected zodiac sign can be switched bidirectionally, it is also possible to restrict the switching of the zodiac sign display to one direction only by making it operable only with the right (or left) button. Furthermore, an item for deselecting the Favorite Zodiac Sign may be added in addition to the characters corresponding to each zodiac sign.

If the interface for setting the preferred zodiac sign uses the entire screen to display characters corresponding to all zodiac signs, as seen in the animation change menu screen displayed during the waiting state (Figure 589), there is a risk of interfering with the display of decorative symbols or the animations performed during the symbol variation display. In this embodiment, since animations that attract the player's attention are infrequent during the waiting state, the interface (setting screen) prioritizes ease of setting. However, during the symbol variation display, there is a possibility that animations that attract the player's attention (for example, animations suggesting a jackpot) may be performed while setting the preferred zodiac sign. Therefore, the display of a single zodiac sign for selection is limited, and the interface switches between the displayed zodiac signs sequentially, thereby suppressing the area used for setting the preferred zodiac sign. This prevents interference with the display of decorative symbols or animations performed during the symbol variation display when setting the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 593(C) shows the state where "Rooster" has been selected as the new favorite zodiac sign by operating the right button (performance selection unit) (not set). Subsequently, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit), the currently selected "Rooster" is set as the new favorite zodiac sign (Figure 593(D)). Once the favorite zodiac sign is set, the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Favorite zodiac sign selected" to "Favorite zodiac sign prepared." Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display transitions from the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 to the performance setting display unit 8401 (Figure 591(A)).

Furthermore, even if a new favorite zodiac sign is set, the change will not be reflected until after the symbol variation has finished. This is because, unlike when the favorite zodiac sign is set during the game waiting state, the animation content until the end of the symbol variation display is already determined. Attempting to reflect the zodiac sign setting at this time would require reloading image data and other processing, potentially placing an excessive load on the animation control system. In contrast, during the game waiting state, when the symbol variation display is not yet running, reloading image data is unnecessary, allowing the favorite zodiac sign setting to be reflected immediately.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the settings for the effects can be changed even while the symbols are changing, similar to the seasonal setting. Unlike the seasonal setting, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign takes effect from the next symbol change. Furthermore, if the zodiac sign appearance effect that is supposed to be performed during the current symbol change display has not yet been executed, the setting for the favorite zodiac sign may be immediately applied to replace the zodiac sign appearance effect. As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, players can freely switch between their preferred effects, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[42-3. Specific example of the procedure for changing the animation while the pattern is changing]
The above describes the means of displaying the menu screen and setting the effects while the game is in a waiting state, and the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing. Next, specific examples of the means of setting the effects while the symbols are changing, based on the variation pattern (type of reach) and the result of the symbol change display, will be explained with reference to the diagrams.

[42-3-1. In the case of no reach]
First, let's explain the case where the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 594 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol change display when the symbol change ends without a reach occurring. Figure 595 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 594, illustrating the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 594(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t500), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the favorite zodiac sign has already been set. Furthermore, by performing the procedures shown in Figures 591 and 593 (times t501-t502), the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac sign can be set (Figure 594(B)). In the example shown in Figure 594, as shown in Figure 595, "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign before the change started, but by displaying the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441, the currently set favorite zodiac sign is displayed as the newly selected favorite zodiac sign. At this point, the player can recognize that "Monkey" is set as the favorite zodiac sign.

As shown in Figure 594(B), the selected zodiac sign can be switched by operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection unit (selection operation). When the selected zodiac sign is switched from "Monkey" to "Rooster" at time t503, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 also changes from the character representing "Monkey" to the character representing "Rooster" (Figure 594(C)). The Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 displays "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" along with the character representing the currently selected zodiac sign.

Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) in the state shown in Figure 594(C) (the state in which a new favorite zodiac sign has been selected) (time t504), the display on the favorite zodiac sign setting unit 8441 changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Sign" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Sign" (Figure 594(D)). As mentioned above, the setting of the favorite zodiac sign is not immediately reflected even when the performance setting button (performance setting operation unit) is operated, but transitions to the setting preparation stage, and the setting of the favorite zodiac sign remains "Monkey" until the ongoing change in the symbols is completed.

Subsequently, at time t505, the display of the decorative pattern temporarily stops (Figure 594(E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. During this time, the display of the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 continues to show "Preparing Favorite Zodiac." When the pattern confirmation period ends (time t506), the pattern stops being confirmed (Figure 594(F)). Once the pattern stops being confirmed, the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 changes to "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. After that, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display of the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As shown in Figure 595, setting your preferred zodiac sign during the changing pattern display is possible at any time, even during the preparation phase for setting your preferred zodiac sign, from the start of the pattern change (time t501) until the end of the pattern confirmation period (pattern stop, change ends, time t506). Furthermore, during the confirmed pattern display (time t506-t507), it is not possible to perform performance settings, and therefore, setting your preferred zodiac sign and season is not possible.

[42-3-2. If a normal reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a loss. Figure 596 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when a normal reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a loss. Figure 597 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 596, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

Figure 596(A) shows the state after the symbol change has started (time t510). Similar to the case where a reach does not occur, the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has already been set. At this time, as shown in Figure 597, "Monkey" is set as the recommended zodiac sign. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 596(B), the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new recommended zodiac sign can be set (time t511-t512).

By operating the left and right buttons included in the performance selection section (selection operation), the currently selected zodiac sign is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster", time t513). Then, as shown in Figure 596(C), a reach occurs (time t514). Furthermore, by operating the performance setting button (performance setting operation section) (time t515), the display of the favorite zodiac sign setting section 8441 is updated from "Favorite Zodiac Sign Selected" to "Favorite Zodiac Sign Preparing" (Figure 596(D)). As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac sign setting remains "Monkey".

Subsequently, the display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (Figure 596 (E)), and the pattern confirmation period begins. Furthermore, when the pattern confirmation period ends (time t517), the pattern is confirmed and stopped (Figure 596 (F)). Once the pattern is confirmed and stopped, the display on the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 becomes "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete," and "Rooster" is set as the Favorite Zodiac. Afterward, the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly indicating the Favorite Zodiac.

As described above, even when a reach (normal reach) occurs, the favorite zodiac sign can be set at all times from the start of the spin (time t511) until the end of the symbol confirmation period (symbols stop, spin ends, time t517), just as when no reach occurs. Furthermore, during the time the symbol confirmation is displayed (time t517 to time t518), the performance settings cannot be executed, and the favorite zodiac sign and season cannot be set.

[42-3-3. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a loss]
Next, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a miss. Figure 598 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a miss. Figure 599 is a timing chart corresponding to Figure 598, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In the example shown in Figure 598, the background is set according to the season setting. Specifically, the season is set to "winter," and the background shows snow falling on a snow-covered mountain. The background may always display an image corresponding to the season setting, even when the symbols are not changing, or it may be set according to the game state (e.g., high probability state) or the performance mode. Furthermore, it may be changed as a pre-announcement effect (pre-read effect) at the start of the symbol change, or it may be changed at a specific timing during the symbol change display.

Figure 598(A) shows the state after the pattern change has begun (time t520), and the display content of the performance setting display unit 8401 indicates that the recommended zodiac sign has been set. As mentioned above, the season setting is set to "Winter," and as shown in Figure 599, the current recommended zodiac sign is set to "Monkey."

Subsequently, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is displayed, transitioning to a state where a new favorite zodiac animal can be set (times t521-t522). Furthermore, by operating the left and right buttons included in the "Performance Selection Unit," the zodiac animal currently selected as the favorite is switched ("Monkey" → "Rooster," time t523). By operating the "Performance Setting Button" (Performance Setting Operation Unit), the new favorite zodiac animal is set to "Rooster" (time t524). As a result, the display on the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" changes from "Selecting Favorite Zodiac Animal" to "Preparing Favorite Zodiac Animal," transitioning to the setting preparation stage. As mentioned above, at this point, the favorite zodiac animal remains "Monkey." At time t525, a "reach" occurs (Figure 598 (B)).

After a reach occurs, a predetermined time elapses (time t526), and a screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed (the SP reach development animation is executed). Subsequently, the SP reach animation is executed (time t527, Figure 598(C)). When the screen indicating the development of an SP reach is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size, and the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 becomes invisible. This continues until the SP reach animation ends. During the execution of the SP reach animation, the zodiac sign setting unit 8441 remains invisible to allow the player to focus on the animation. Furthermore, if the SP reach animation includes player-participation elements, there is a risk of accidental operation of the animation buttons. To prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game, operation of the animation setting operation unit is suppressed; for example, the animation setting buttons are not accepted.

The SP reach animation shown in Figure 598(C) is a special animation linked to the seasonal setting "Winter" and the chosen zodiac sign "Monkey." Specifically, the animation depicts monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. The number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the likelihood of a big win. For example, three monkeys indicate a high likelihood of a win (or a guaranteed win), while one monkey indicates a low likelihood. The more monkeys there are, the higher the chance of a big win. While the special animation can be performed even without setting the monkey as the chosen zodiac sign, the game's appeal can be enhanced by increasing the likelihood of a big win when the same animation is performed if the monkey is selected, or by changing parts of the animation's composition.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t528), the result of the animation is displayed (Figure 598(D)). In the example shown in Figure 598(D), the result of the symbol variation display is "miss". Subsequently, as shown in Figure 598(E), the reduced decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols temporarily stop, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t529).

In this embodiment, when an SP Reach animation is performed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is configured not to be displayed during the symbol confirmation period. That is, while it was possible to perform animation settings continuously from the start of symbol variation when no reach occurred or when a normal reach occurred, animation settings cannot be performed when an SP Reach animation is executed. This is to prevent the player from unintentionally performing animation settings due to accidental operation of the animation button during the player-participation animation in the SP Reach animation. Furthermore, if the display of the next symbol variation begins after the symbols are confirmed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is redisplayed after the variation begins. Even if the display of symbol variation does not begin, the animation change menu screen can be displayed while waiting for the game to start, allowing animation settings to be performed after a short time has elapsed.

When the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 is redisplayed, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Setting Complete" (Figure 598(F)). At this point, the Favorite Zodiac is set to "Rooster". Subsequently, when the next pattern change begins (time t531), the Favorite Zodiac Setting Unit 8441 switches to the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401, and the display on the Performance Setting Display Unit 8401 becomes "Performance Setting in Progress," without explicitly showing the Favorite Zodiac.

[42-3-4. If an SP reach occurs and the lottery result is a jackpot]
Finally, we will explain the case where an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot. Figures 600 and 601 illustrate an example of setting a new favorite zodiac sign during the symbol variation display when an SP Reach occurs and the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot. Figure 602 is a timing chart corresponding to Figures 600 and 601, which explains the timing of when the favorite zodiac sign is set.

In examples such as Figure 600, the background is set according to the season setting, similar to the example shown in Figure 598. The flow leading up to the start of the SP Reach animation is also the same as in the example shown in Figure 598. The period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 599 (time t520 to time t527) is the same as the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP Reach animation in the time chart of Figure 602 (time t540 to time t547), so the explanation is omitted.

The SP Reach演出 (Special Reach演出) begins as shown in Figure 600(D), and will be explained starting from time t547 on the timing chart. Referring to Figure 600(D), similar to the SP Reach演出 shown in Figure 598(C), a special演出 is executed that links the seasonal setting "Winter" with the recommended zodiac sign "Monkey," displaying an image of monkeys bathing in a hot spring in a snowy mountain. As mentioned earlier, the number of monkeys bathing increases or decreases depending on the expectation of a jackpot. In the example shown in Figure 600(D), there are three monkeys bathing, indicating a high expectation of a jackpot.

When the SP Reach animation ends (time t548), the result of the animation is displayed as shown in Figure 600(E), suggesting that it is a "jackpot." Then, as shown in Figure 600(F), the reduced-size decorative symbols are enlarged, the symbols are temporarily paused, and the symbol confirmation period begins (time t549). At this time, similar to the example shown in Figure 598, the recommended zodiac sign setting unit 8441 is not displayed during the symbol confirmation period.

Once the pattern confirmation period ends and the pattern confirmation stops (time t530), the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" reappears, displaying "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Complete" (Figure 600(G)). At this point, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal" is set to "Rooster." Afterward, the "Favorite Zodiac Animal Setting Unit 8441" is hidden again, and the jackpot game begins as shown in Figure 600(H) (time t551). Note that the settings for the game's effects cannot be changed while the jackpot game is in progress.

Furthermore, to prevent an increase in the load on the animation control system, which would otherwise be increased by replacing the animation performed during a jackpot game immediately after the zodiac sign setting is changed with an animation corresponding to the changed zodiac sign, animations reflecting the changed zodiac sign are made available from the next symbol change display after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game ends and the next symbol change begins, the animation setting display unit 8401 is displayed (Figure 600(I)). At this time, the animation setting display unit 8401 displays "Animation setting in progress" without explicitly showing the zodiac sign. This prevents others from knowing which zodiac sign is set, making it difficult for other players to guess the player's age or to determine whether a high-probability animation is being performed when a zodiac sign appearance animation is executed.

As described above, when an SP (Special) reach with a high probability of a big win occurs, the timing for changing the performance settings is limited by preventing changes from being made from the time the SP development animation ends until the reel stop period ends, as well as until the big win game ends. By controlling the timing so that the performance settings cannot be changed, it is possible to encourage players to pay attention to the animations, enhance the effect of the animations, and suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[42-4. When a warning is displayed during a change in the presentation]
The above explains how to change the display settings while the symbols are changing. Next, we will explain what happens when minor errors occur while you are changing the display settings while the symbols are changing, such as a ball jam error, a full tray error, or a ball supply error, and when these errors are resolved, you can continue playing the game.

Figure 603 shows an example where a full-capacity upper tray error is displayed while the game's animation settings are being adjusted during a pattern change display. (A) shows the seasonal setting being executed, and (B) shows the zodiac animal setting being executed. In this case, the error display is positioned so as not to overlap with the animation setting display unit 8401 (zodiac animal setting unit 8441, season selection unit 8431). If the error has little impact on the game's progress, the game can be resumed immediately after the error is cleared, allowing the player to be aware of the progress of the animation settings. Furthermore, since the error display is positioned so as not to interfere with the animation settings, it may be possible to continue the animation settings even while an error is occurring.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, even if a minor error occurs while setting the effects during the display of changing symbols, the effects settings can be easily continued, and the game can be smoothly resumed once the error is cleared. This suppresses the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by interruptions in the game due to errors.

[42-5. Inventions relating to the setting of changes in performance]
Finally, here are some representative examples of inventions relating to means for making settings to change the effects disclosed herein.

In the configurations (1) to (5) shown below, the machine includes a performance setting means capable of setting the necessary information for executing a predetermined performance, and a setting operation means that enables operations for executing the performance setting means. This allows players to change the performance by setting it according to their preferences. In this embodiment of the game machine, a zodiac appearance performance is performed, featuring characters modeled after the Chinese zodiac. Not only is a variety of performances possible for each zodiac sign, but players can also adjust the frequency of their preferred performance by specifying their favorite zodiac sign.

Furthermore, configurations (1) through (5) can each produce unique effects by including the configurations shown below.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
A setting information disclosure means capable of displaying setting information set for the aforementioned specific performance,
A means for obfuscating setting information that can notify that a specific effect is set without explicitly stating the setting information set for the specific effect,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned setting information disclosure means is characterized in that it displays the setting information set for the specific performance by performing a predetermined operation using the setting operation means when the setting information is not explicitly stated.

In configuration (1), the system includes a means (setting information disclosure means) that allows the player to disclose (display) setting information (e.g., favorite zodiac sign) when they perform a predetermined operation. This means that the setting information cannot be seen by others during gameplay (setting information ambiguity means). For example, by setting their own zodiac sign as their favorite zodiac sign, the player can prevent others from knowing their age (see Figure 587).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
The setting operation means is characterized in that it does not accept operation from the setting operation means from the time the display position of the symbols is changed after the display position of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the display position of the changed symbols returns to the initial display position.

In configuration (2), even if there is an error in the setting operation means during special reach sequences and other effects, the effects can continue without being interrupted, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 599, 602, etc.).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
A setting operation means that enables operations for setting the aforementioned specific effects,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes first setting information and second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When setting the first setting information, the setting method during the change of the symbols is different from the setting method when the symbols are not changing.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when setting the second setting information, the setting method during the variation of the symbols and the setting method when the symbols are not varying are the same.

In configuration (3), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac sign setting), the setting area is minimized during symbol changes to avoid hindering the progress of the game's effects. However, when the symbols stop, the setting method is changed to allow players to easily select the setting information (favorite zodiac sign) from a list. Furthermore, when setting the second setting information (season setting), the same setting method is used both during symbol changes and when the symbols stop, making it easier for players to operate. As described above, the system is designed to minimize disruption to the game's effects while making input as easy as possible, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 587-593, etc.).

(4) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the aforementioned predetermined effect,
Equipped with,
When executing the configured specific performance in a specific pattern, the setting information for executing in the specific pattern includes first setting information and second setting information that is different from the first setting information.
The aforementioned performance setting means is
When the first setting information is set, the first setting information is not reflected in the predetermined performance while the pattern variation is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second setting information is set, the second setting information is reflected in the predetermined performance even while the pattern changes are being performed.

In configuration (4), when setting the first setting information (favorite zodiac setting), the change in setting information is not reflected until the symbol change is complete. The effects based on the favorite zodiac setting include a pre-announcement effect that indicates a high expectation level when the character corresponding to the zodiac matches the favorite zodiac. While such pre-announcement effects are often executed during symbol changes, immediately reflecting the change when the favorite zodiac is changed could result in the expected level of the initially planned effect differing from reality. Furthermore, since replacing effects is computationally expensive, the setting information change is reflected after the symbol change. On the other hand, the second setting information (season setting) includes many effects that require less computational effort, such as background changes, allowing for immediate reflection. In this way, by varying the timing of reflecting the settings according to the content of the effects affected by the setting information, it is possible to suppress discrepancies in the expectation level notification and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 592, 597, etc.).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
An execution means for performing a predetermined performance,
An effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect that can be executed as the predetermined effect,
A warning display means that displays a warning when a predetermined error occurs,
Equipped with,
The warning display means is characterized in that, when a setting screen for setting the specific performance is displayed, the warning display is displayed in a position that does not obscure the information necessary to set the specific performance.

In configuration (5), when a warning is displayed while a screen for setting specific effects is shown, the warning and the settings screen are prevented from overlapping. This allows the setting operation to continue immediately once the warning disappears. Furthermore, in the case of minor errors that allow for immediate gameplay continuation after resolving the issue, the setting operation may continue while the warning is displayed. This configuration allows for immediate gameplay resumption after the error is resolved. By configuring the system in this way, the interruption time for setting operations due to errors is minimized, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figure 603, etc.).

[43. Changes in the content of the performance due to changes in the performance]
The above describes the screen (interface) and operation for changing the presentation. Next, we will explain specific examples of the zodiac appearance presentation and the changes in presentation resulting from the presentation change. As mentioned above, the gaming machine of this embodiment is capable of executing a zodiac appearance presentation in which animals included in the twelve zodiac signs appear, and it is possible for players to set the character appearing in this zodiac appearance presentation as their favorite zodiac sign according to their preference.

The zodiac appearance sequence includes mini-game sequences in which characters are controlled by the performance control unit 301, and sequences in which characters appear in special ways. In the mini-game sequences, the execution sequence is associated with the character. The following provides supplementary explanations regarding the configuration for executing the zodiac appearance sequence, followed by specific examples of the zodiac appearance sequence and examples of sequences in which characters appear in special ways.

[43-1. Structure]
Figure 604 shows light-emitting elements arranged around the performance screen. Note that this shows the state after the symbol change has finished. In the zodiac appearance performance, not only are the effects performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 executed in conjunction with sound output and effects using light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs, and light-emitting elements 8501 are arranged on both sides of the display screen. The light-emitting elements 8501 can execute not only the effects included in the zodiac appearance performance, but also effects that are independent of the zodiac appearance performance.

Furthermore, it is possible to acquire and stock up on objects used when executing a specific zodiac animal appearance animation before that animation is performed. The stocked objects are displayed on the pre-acquired object display unit 8601, allowing the player to see the number and type of objects acquired.

For example, when performing a zodiac appearance animation that notifies the player of the result of a pattern change display based on the hatching of one or more eggs, the eggs, which are objects, are acquired and stockpiled in advance. In the example shown in Figure 604, two eggs are stockpiled, and the number of eggs stockpiled and the type of each egg are displayed on the pre-acquired object display unit 8601 so that the player can understand them. The zodiac appearance animation that stockpiles eggs shown in Figure 604 corresponds to the Snake and the Dragon, and details will be described later. Furthermore, the object "cheese," which is used when performing the rat zodiac appearance animation described later, may also be acquired in advance and displayed on the pre-acquired object display unit 8601 as a pre-acquired object.

Furthermore, object diagrams used in different zodiac appearance animations may be displayed together. For example, the "egg," a pre-acquired object for the Snake and Dragon zodiac appearance animations, and the "cheese," a pre-acquired object for the Rat zodiac appearance animation, may be displayed together. When a zodiac appearance animation using a currently displayed object appears, the animation is executed with that object as the pre-acquired object. Also, the pre-acquired object display unit 8601 is hidden during the execution of the zodiac appearance animation to avoid interfering with the animation.

[43-2. Mini-game presentation]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the mini-game performance in which the character is operated by the performance operation unit 301 is performed when one of the following animals, the rat, sheep, or boar, is selected as the character to appear in the zodiac appearance performance by the performance lottery performed by the gaming machine. More specifically, as shown in Figure 586, the zodiac appearance performances of the rat, sheep, and boar are each selected with a probability of 5% if none of the favorite zodiac animals are set. Furthermore, if one of the rat, sheep, or boar is set as the favorite zodiac animal, the probability of that zodiac animal being selected in the zodiac appearance performance increases to 34%. On the other hand, if any zodiac animal other than the tiger is set as the favorite zodiac animal, the probability of that zodiac animal being selected in the zodiac appearance performance decreases to 3%. Furthermore, if the Tiger is set as your favorite zodiac sign, the probability of it being selected in the zodiac sign appearance animation becomes 8%, which is higher than when it is not set as your favorite zodiac sign.

In other words, taking the rat (子) as an example, if no zodiac sign is set as the player's favorite sign, the probability of the rat appearing as a character in the zodiac appearance animation is 5%. If the rat is set as the player's favorite sign, the probability of the rat appearing as a character in the zodiac appearance animation increases to 34%. Furthermore, if a zodiac sign other than the rat (including the sheep and boar) is set as the player's favorite sign, the probability of the rat appearing as a character in the zodiac appearance animation is 3%, which is lower than when no zodiac sign is set as the favorite sign. However, if a specific zodiac sign (the tiger) is set as the player's favorite sign, the probability of the rat appearing as a character increases to 8%, which is higher than when no zodiac sign is set. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of a specific animation (zodiac appearance animation) being executed in a specific manner is changed depending on the player's setting (favorite zodiac sign setting). In addition, special changes may be added to the content of these zodiac appearance animations when a specific zodiac sign is set as the player's favorite sign.

In the mini-game sequence of the zodiac appearance sequence of this embodiment, characters modeled after the zodiac animals are controlled by the sequence control unit 301. As described above, the sequence control unit 301 comprises a rotation control unit 302 and a press control unit 303. In the previously described sequence example (bell-ringing sequence), the press control unit 303 could be raised or lowered by operating the rotation control unit 302; however, in the mini-game sequence, they can be operated independently without being linked. Furthermore, in the mini-game sequence, the press control unit 303 may be automatically raised or lowered as needed.

Furthermore, to explain specific examples of operation of the performance control unit 301 in mini-game performances, the rotation control unit 302 changes the direction of movement of the character and changes the speed (intensity) of its movements. On the other hand, the press control unit 303 allows the player to perform predetermined actions (jump, accelerate, stop, etc.) on the character. In addition, both the rotation control unit 302 and the press control unit 303 are equipped with light-emitting elements, which can be illuminated in predetermined ways when the performance is executed.

<Zodiac Animal Appearance Presentation: Rat (First Presentation Pattern)>
Figure 605(A) shows an example of a rat (mouse) zodiac appearance animation (first animation pattern). In the rat (mouse) zodiac appearance animation, the direction of the rat character's movement is changed by operating the rotation operation unit 302 of the animation operation unit 301, and a mini-game is played in which the player collects cheese displayed on the screen. The rat (mouse) character may always move forward until the end of the mini-game, or it may be made to move forward or stop by operating the press operation unit 303.

In the example shown in Figure 605(A), cheese is placed in darkness, and the area around the cheese is illuminated. Furthermore, if cheese is displayed as a pre-acquired object on the pre-acquired object display unit 8601, additional cheese is placed equal to the displayed amount. Additionally, cheese with high point values displayed on the screen glows, making the area around it brighter than that of normal cheese. Furthermore, to help the player easily grasp the position of the child (mouse), the child (mouse) character itself may be made to glow, illuminating the area around the character.

Furthermore, along with the cheese displayed on the screen, the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501 located on the side of the screen and the LEDs provided on the rotating control unit 302 also light up, illuminating the screen according to the lighting pattern. For example, the light-emitting elements located near high-point cheeses may light up brightly or in a special color. In this case, the illumination of the light-emitting elements 8501 is synchronized with the brightness of the screen. Additionally, the light-emitting elements may be made to light up when the child (mouse) character approaches the side of the screen.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 605(B), when the zodiac sign is set to "Rat," the number of high-point cheeses increases, and the amount of light emitted by the light-emitting elements also increases. Therefore, compared to cases where "Rat" is not set as the zodiac sign, the screen can be made brighter, improving visibility. Note that the screen may be made brighter regardless of the cheese placement. In this case, the amount of light emitted by the light-emitting elements may be increased, or the screen may be made brighter regardless of the light-emitting mode of the elements.

<Zodiac Animal Appearance Presentation: Variation of the Rat (Second Presentation Pattern)>
Next, we will explain another pattern (second pattern) of the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) zodiac sign. Figure 606 is a diagram illustrating another example (second pattern) of the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) zodiac sign, where (A) is a list of cheeses collected by the rat (Year of the Rat) character, and (B) and (C) are the execution screens of the mini-game. (B) shows the case when the rat (Year of the Rat) is not set as the favorite zodiac sign, and (C) shows the case when the rat (Year of the Rat) is set as the favorite zodiac sign.

In the second animation pattern for the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) zodiac sign, as shown in Figures 606(B) and (C), multiple cheeses are placed within the area. The player uses the animation control unit 301 (rotation control unit 302) to control the rat character and collect the cheeses. As shown in Figure 606(A), there are three types of cheese: regular cheese, rare cheese, and legendary cheese, each assigned 1 point, 10 points, and 50 points respectively.

Furthermore, while all the cheese images displayed are of regular cheese, when the mouse character collects a piece of cheese, if it was originally regular cheese, it remains unchanged. However, if it was rare cheese or legendary cheese, it changes to the corresponding image. Therefore, the player cannot know which cheese they have collected until it is actually collected. For example, in Figure 606(B), the collected cheese was regular cheese, so the regular cheese image remains that of regular cheese after collection. In Figure 606(C), the collected cheese was legendary cheese, so the regular cheese image changes to legendary cheese after collection.

Furthermore, points assigned to the collected cheese are added to the total points earned, and the points earned are displayed on the point display unit 8502. When the earned points reach a predetermined achievement value (for example, 50 points), a message celebrating reaching 50 points and a change in the pattern display indicate a jackpot are shown as a predetermined effect (Figure 607(A)). Therefore, if the pattern display shows a loss, the predetermined achievement value will not be reached even if all the cheese is collected.

Furthermore, while the predetermined animation is intended to notify the player that the resulting symbol change will result in a jackpot, it could also be a pre-announcement animation that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, or a special animation that is only performed upon achieving the jackpot.

In the second animation pattern for the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) in the Chinese zodiac, the operation acceptance period for the animation control unit 301 continues from the start of the mini-game until a predetermined termination condition is met. The predetermined termination condition may be, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the mini-game, or it may also be when a predetermined achievement value is reached, or when a predetermined number of cheeses are collected.

In the second animation pattern for the appearance of the Rat (Year of the Rat) zodiac sign, the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501 located on the side of the screen can illuminate, similar to the first animation pattern. The light-emitting element 8501 can indicate the placement of high-point cheese. This indication function by the light-emitting element 8501 is configured to activate with 100% probability when the Rat (Year of the Rat) is selected as the chosen zodiac sign.

Figure 606(B) illustrates the second presentation pattern for the appearance of the rat (mouse) zodiac sign, specifically the case where the rat is not selected as the preferred zodiac sign. When the rat is not selected as the preferred zodiac sign, the high-point cheese suggestion function is not guaranteed to activate with 100% probability; instead, it is activated randomly based on a lottery. Alternatively, the suggestion function may be disabled altogether when the rat is not selected as the preferred zodiac sign, or it may only activate if the resulting symbol change indicates a jackpot. However, the frequency of the light-emitting element's illumination is higher when the rat is selected as the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 606(C) illustrates the second presentation pattern for the appearance of the rat (Nezumi) zodiac sign, specifically the case where the rat is selected as the preferred zodiac sign. Because the rat is selected as the preferred zodiac sign, the high-point cheese suggestion function is activated. The details of the suggestion function are explained below.

When high-point cheese (rare cheese, legend cheese) is placed, the light-emitting element corresponding to the placement of that cheese lights up. Referring to Figure 606(C), the light-emitting element 8511 lights up in accordance with the legend cheese 8510 that the child (mouse) character is collecting. At this time, since the legend cheese 8510 is placed on the right side of the screen, the light-emitting element 8511, which is also placed on the right side of the screen, lights up. Also, since the placed cheese is legend cheese, the light-emitting element lights up in rainbow colors. Note that the light-emitting element 8512, which is in the same vertical position as the light-emitting element 8511 but is placed on the left side of the screen, does not light up, but it may be made to light up with reduced light intensity. Furthermore, the light-emitting element is set to stop emitting after the cheese is collected. Note that the rainbow-colored emission of the light-emitting element may continue after the cheese is collected, or it may change to an emission pattern that indicates that the cheese has been collected. In Figure 606(C), the child (mouse) character has already collected the Legend Cheese 8510. However, before collection, it is displayed as a regular cheese, and the light-emitting element 8511 located on the right side of the screen illuminates in rainbow colors corresponding to the Legend Cheese. The system also indicates that the cheese displayed as a regular cheese, which changes to Legend Cheese upon collection, is actually the Legend Cheese.

Furthermore, cheese 8520 is displayed as a normal cheese image because it has not yet been collected, but it will be displayed as a rare cheese once collected. Cheese 8520 is positioned slightly to the left of the center of the screen, and both the light-emitting element 8522 on the left side of the screen and the light-emitting element 8521 on the right side of the screen emit white light. In this case, because cheese 8520 is positioned to the left of the center, light-emitting element 8522 emits brighter light. As a result, the player can recognize the vertical position by the arrangement of the emitting elements, and the horizontal position by the light intensity of the left and right light-emitting elements. In this embodiment, the horizontal position is recognized by the light intensity of the left and right light-emitting elements corresponding to the position where the high-point cheese is located, but if the high-point cheese is to the left of the center of the screen, the light-emitting element on the right side of the screen may be left unlit, and only the light-emitting element on the left side of the screen may be lit to recognize the position.

As described above, in the second presentation pattern for the appearance of the rat (mouse) zodiac sign, the player can collect high-point cheese by operating the machine while understanding the approximate location and type of the illuminated luminous object based on its position, color, and intensity. Furthermore, by setting the rat (mouse) as the recommended zodiac sign, the suggestion function is reliably activated, making it easier to collect high-point cheese. As a result, it becomes easier to reach the predetermined achievement value of 50 points, and it becomes easier to trigger the special presentation that is only executed when this value is achieved. Figure 607(A) is an example of a special presentation that is executed when the acquired points reach the predetermined achievement value. In Figure 607(A), all of the luminous objects 8501 are illuminated in rainbow colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 607(B), the middle symbol stops at "7", and after the symbol is confirmed, the game transitions to the jackpot state. This allows the player to experience a sense of excitement. In other words, by setting the rat (子) as the featured zodiac sign, the light-emitting element 8501 is more likely to illuminate in a special manner when the rat (子) zodiac sign appearance animation is performed, thereby increasing the player's anticipation. In the above embodiment, after the announcement of a jackpot, the middle symbol stops and displays "7," confirming the winning combination. However, after the announcement of a jackpot, a different animation or animation may be performed instead of the zodiac sign appearance animation. If a different animation or animation is performed after the announcement of a jackpot, the light-emitting element 8501 is designed to illuminate in rainbow colors so that the player can recognize that a jackpot has been announced during the zodiac sign appearance animation.

Furthermore, the light-emitting element (LED) provided on the rotating control unit 302 may be configured to adjust its light output based on the player's character operation, such as increasing the light output when the child (mouse) approaches a high-point cheese. This allows the player to recognize when the child (mouse) character approaches a high-point cheese through the LED's illumination pattern. In this case, the illumination pattern of the light-emitting element on the rotating control unit 302 may differ between rare cheese and legendary cheese. Additionally, the light-emitting element may be configured to illuminate in a special pattern (e.g., rainbow colors) based on the progress or results of the mini-game, such as when the child (mouse) collects cheese.

As described above, the second presentation pattern for the appearance of the rat (Year of the Rat) in the Chinese zodiac allows for a variety of presentations through player-controlled character manipulation and player-controlled presentation settings, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the zodiac appearance presentation.

Furthermore, the appearance animation for the rat (Year of the Rat) may be executed using either the first or second animation pattern. The peripheral control board 1510 may select either animation pattern, or it may select one based on a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310.

<Zodiac Sign Appearance: Sheep>
Figure 608 shows an example of the appearance animation for the Year of the Sheep (未). In the appearance animation for the Year of the Sheep (未), similar to the appearance animation for the Year of the Rat (子), the character is not simply displayed, but the Sheep can also be made to move by operating the press operation unit 303 of the animation operation unit 301.

In summary, a character resembling a sheep appears on the right edge of the screen and moves to the left. A fence is placed on the left side of the screen, and the player can make the sheep character jump by operating the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301. If the sheep jumps at the correct timing, it can leap over the fence. As shown in Figure 609, multiple fence heights are set, and points are assigned according to the fence height. The total points for the fences the sheep character jumps over become the mini-game points, and special effects are executed according to the points earned.

The sheep character may move automatically, or its speed may be adjustable using the rotation control unit 302 of the performance control unit 301. The sheep characters may appear one at a time, or multiple characters may appear consecutively as shown in Figure 608. The difficulty of the mini-game can be adjusted by making the character appearance timing irregular, or by increasing or decreasing the points awarded. The difficulty can also be adjusted by gradually increasing the character's movement speed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 609, the higher the fence, the higher the points awarded. This means that the higher the fence, the shorter the optimal timing for operating the pressing mechanism 303 to jump over the fence, thus increasing the difficulty of the mini-game.

Next, we will explain the details of the appearance animation for the Year of the Sheep (未). Figure 610 shows the screen transitions for the appearance animation of the Year of the Sheep. When the appearance animation for the Year of the Sheep begins, the Sheep appears on the far right of the screen and runs towards the fence (to the left) (Figure 610(A)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 610(B), when a sheep approaches the fence, a function to assist the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (operation assistance function) indicates the area where the sheep can jump over the fence (the area indicated by the arrow). The area where the sheep can jump over the fence indicates that if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated when the sheep is within this area, the sheep can jump over the fence. The operation assistance function may, as shown in Figure 610(B), display an arrow in the area where the sheep can jump over, change the background music, output a specific sound, or cause the light-emitting element 8501 to emit light in a specific manner.

In this embodiment's zodiac sign appearance animation (Sheep), to inform the player of the timing for operating the press operation unit 303, the light-emitting part provided on the press operation unit 303a of the press operation unit 303 is illuminated in white in accordance with the timing of the operation, and the light-emitting element 8501 is illuminated in a specific manner (operation support function). At this time, other operation support functions, such as the main sound of a specific tone, may also be used in conjunction.

When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated at the appropriate timing, a animation (success animation) is performed in which a sheep jumps over the fence (Figure 610(C)). At this time, points are added according to the height of the fence, and the acquired points are displayed on the screen.

On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated, or if the operation is performed but the timing is incorrect, the animation showing the sheep failing to jump over the fence (failure animation) will be executed (Figure 610(D)).

Subsequently, the sheep character will appear, and the mini-game (the sheep zodiac appearance sequence) will continue until a predetermined termination condition is met. The termination condition may be, for example, the elapsed time since the start of the mini-game, the point accumulation reaching a predetermined value, or the failure sequence being executed a predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the acquired points reach a predetermined achievement value (for example, 50 points), the mini-game ends at that point and a special animation is performed. For example, a message celebrating reaching 50 points and a display of changing symbols indicate that a jackpot has been won (Figure 611). Because the jackpot announcement is performed with a special animation, if the display of changing symbols indicates a loss, the predetermined achievement value will not be reached even if all the fences are jumped over, or the player will be forced to fail.

Furthermore, the special symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be a notification that the result will be a jackpot. It could also be a pre-notification display that suggests the result of the currently running symbol variation display (even if it's a miss) or the result of the pending symbol variation display. Additionally, the special display may differ depending on whether the player has set the "sheep" as their preferred zodiac sign or not.

Furthermore, if the acquired points reach a predetermined achievement value, the light-emitting parts provided in the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) may be made to emit light in a specific manner (e.g., rainbow-colored light) (specific light emission), or special sounds may be output. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part provided in the press operation unit 303 emits rainbow-colored light. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 611, when executing a special performance, the light-emitting element 8501 is made to emit light in a special manner (e.g., rainbow-colored light).

Furthermore, if the player's favorite zodiac sign is the sheep, unlike when the sheep is not selected, the light-emitting part on the press unit 303a will not light up white in sync with the timing of the character jumping, but will instead constantly light up orange. This will produce the same effect as when the press unit 303a is operated at the predetermined timing indicated by the operation assistance function (the timing when the sheep can jump over the fence). When the sheep is selected as the favorite zodiac sign, even when the predetermined timing arrives, the light-emitting part on the press unit 303a will continue to light up orange instead of white as the game progresses. Therefore, the light-emitting pattern of the press unit 303a allows not only the player but also others observing the game to understand that the sheep is selected as the favorite zodiac sign. In this case, the player's input to the press unit 303a may be disabled, or it may be accepted but ignored.

Furthermore, the mini-game sequence may be continued to the end when the acquired points reach a predetermined achievement value and a special animation is being performed. In this case, if the press operation unit 303 is operated at the timing indicated by the operation assistance function, an animation of the sheep character jumping over a fence will be performed. Also, if the sheep is set as the player's favorite zodiac sign, the same animation as when the press operation unit 303a is operated at the timing indicated by the operation assistance function will be performed. If the sheep is not set as the player's favorite zodiac sign when the mini-game sequence continues to the end while a special animation is being performed, the light-emitting part provided on the press operation unit 303a will be in a specific illumination mode, and the operation assistance function will not be available (the light-emitting part provided on the press operation unit 303a will not emit white light). Also, even if the player has set the sheep as their favorite zodiac sign, neither the player nor others observing the game will be able to ascertain that the sheep is set as their favorite zodiac sign based solely on the illumination mode of the press operation unit 303a. However, if the player has set their preferred zodiac sign to the sheep, the operation assistance function will make it appear as if they have operated the press button 303a at the indicated timing, even if they haven't. This allows others observing the game to perceive the player as skilled in timing, ultimately increasing the player's satisfaction through envious glances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the light-emitting unit provided on the pressing unit 303a can also emit light during effects other than the zodiac sign appearance effect. For example, if the result of the currently running symbol variation display is a jackpot, or if the variation display of the held symbols includes a jackpot, the light-emitting unit provided on the pressing unit 303a will perform an effect in which it emits light in a predetermined manner (jackpot notification effect). In this case, the emission manner will be different from the emission manner in which the operation support function emits white light or the emission manner in which the zodiac sign is set to sheep and emits orange light. In this case, since it is an effect that suggests a jackpot, the emission manner will be such that it attracts the player's attention, for example, by emitting multiple colors in a predetermined order or by increasing the light intensity.

When a jackpot notification animation is performed, the light-emitting part on the press unit 303a will not light up in white due to the operation support function, nor will it light up orange when the zodiac sign is set to Sheep. Instead, it will light up in the manner of the jackpot notification animation. This makes it possible to prioritize notifying the player of more useful information (that a jackpot is confirmed). Similarly, even when the light-emitting part on the press unit 303a is illuminated in animations other than the Sheep zodiac sign appearance animation, the illumination for the jackpot notification animation will take priority.

As described above, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light-emitting part provided on the pressing part 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 is illuminated, and the illumination pattern differs depending on the effect being performed. Figure 612 is a diagram showing an example of the illumination pattern in an effect in which the light-emitting part provided on the pressing part 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 is illuminated.

As mentioned above, in the appearance of the Sheep (Year of the Sheep) zodiac sign, if the Sheep is not selected as the preferred zodiac sign, the light-emitting part on the press-button 303a in the mini-game sequence will light up white at the appropriate timing for operation, but will not light up at other times. Furthermore, if the Sheep is selected as the preferred zodiac sign, the light-emitting part on the press-button 303a is configured to constantly light up orange, allowing the game to proceed in the same way as when the press-button 303 is operated at the predetermined timing (the timing when the Sheep can jump over the fence) in the mini-game sequence. Additionally, since a jackpot announcement sequence is executed when the points earned in the mini-game reach a predetermined achievement value, the light-emitting part on the press-button 303a of the press-button 303 is illuminated in rainbow colors (multiple colors), similar to the jackpot announcement sequence which is independent of the zodiac sign appearance sequence.

Furthermore, the jackpot announcement animation, which is executed independently of the zodiac sign appearance animation, takes priority even while other animations such as the zodiac sign appearance animation are running. The light-emitting part on the pressing section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 illuminates in rainbow colors (multiple colors). In this way, by prioritizing the execution of animations that heighten the player's anticipation, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

<Zodiac Animal Appearance: Boar>
Next, we will explain the appearance animation for the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign. Figure 613(A) shows the appearance animation for the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign when it is not set as the preferred zodiac sign. In this animation, the player controls the boar, which moves in a straight line, using the animation selection unit (fourth operation unit), to avoid obstacles and reach the goal within the time limit. Points are awarded according to the distance the boar has traveled.

In the boar zodiac appearance animation when the boar is not set as the player's preferred zodiac sign, as shown in Figure 613(B), if the boar fails to avoid an obstacle and collides with it, it will fall over, become unconscious, and temporarily become immobile. In other words, in the boar zodiac appearance animation when the boar is not set as the player's preferred zodiac sign, a delay occurs if the boar collides with an obstacle. Furthermore, the rotation control unit 302 is activated at the moment the boar collides with an obstacle, and the player is informed of the collision through the operation (vibration) of the rotation control unit 302.

Then, as shown in Figure 614, when the time limit expires, the results are displayed, and distance points are awarded according to the distance the boar has traveled. In addition, when the boar appears in the zodiac sign animation for players who have not set the boar as their preferred zodiac sign, not only distance points but also operation points are awarded for the player's actions in controlling the boar. The sum of the distance points and operation points is then displayed as the total points earned in the results. At this time, the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501 located on the side of the screen illuminate according to the total points displayed in the results (Figure 614(A)). Furthermore, the color of the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501, which illuminates according to the total points earned, serves to indicate whether the resulting symbol variation display will result in a jackpot. When the total points reach 50, the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501 illuminates in rainbow colors, and a congratulatory message is displayed, indicating that the symbol variation display has resulted in a jackpot (Figure 614 (B)).

Furthermore, if the resulting symbol change display, which triggers the appearance of the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign, results in a jackpot, the total points displayed in the results screen will be 50 points or more. Specifically, if the symbol change display results in a jackpot, even if the player does not manipulate the boar at all, a large amount of manipulation points will be awarded, bringing the total points to 50. To enhance the enjoyment of the boar's manipulation, 50 points are awarded for the distance the boar travels to the goal. However, if the symbol change display does not result in a jackpot, the time limit is shortened, making it impossible to reach the goal even if the boar is manipulated.

Next, we will explain the appearance animation for the boar (Inoshishi) when it is set as the player's preferred zodiac sign. When the boar's appearance animation begins with the boar set as the preferred zodiac sign, the words "Charge Ahead" will appear on the screen, and an animation will be performed in which the boar charges towards the goal while ramming into obstacles (Figure 615). More specifically, the boar will collide with obstacles without avoiding them, and even after colliding, it will not fall over but instead destroy the obstacles and continue straight ahead. Note that, unlike the appearance animation for the boar when it is not set as the preferred zodiac sign, the player does not need to operate the rotation control unit 302 because there is no need to avoid obstacles.

Furthermore, in the appearance animation for the boar zodiac sign when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the boar will collide with the obstacle without avoiding it. Therefore, the rotation control unit 302 will be driven at the moment of collision with the obstacle, just as in the case where the boar is not set as the preferred zodiac sign. In the boar zodiac appearance animation when the boar is not set as the preferred zodiac animal, the boar becomes temporarily immobile after colliding with an obstacle. As a result, the boar does not collide with an obstacle immediately (it does not collide consecutively), and therefore the rotation control unit 302 does not operate consecutively in response to the collision. However, in the boar zodiac appearance animation when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the boar does not become immobile, and may collide with an obstacle immediately. In this case, the rotation control unit 302 operates consecutively in response to the collision. In other words, when the preferred zodiac animal is not set, the rotation control unit 302 is prevented from operating multiple times within a certain period of time, whereas when it is set, the rotation control unit 302 can operate multiple times within a certain period of time. Thus, the ability to operate the rotation control unit 302 multiple times within a certain period of time differs depending on whether the boar (Inoshishi) is set as the preferred zodiac sign or not. However, the operation of the rotation control unit 302 (one drive) when the boar collides with an obstacle is the same for both cases.

Furthermore, if the boar (Inoshishi) is not set as the preferred zodiac animal and collides with an obstacle, causing it to temporarily stop moving, the rotation operation unit 302 may be driven in a different manner than when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, destroys obstacles, and moves straight ahead. For example, when destroying obstacles and moving straight ahead, the operation (vibration) may be made larger, while when it collides with an obstacle and temporarily stops moving, the operation (vibration) may be made smaller than when destroying obstacles and moving straight ahead. This increases the frequency of vibration of the rotation operation unit 302 when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, stimulating the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Alternatively, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated (vibrated) instead of the rotation operation unit 302, and the part that vibrates may differ depending on whether or not the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal. Furthermore, even if the vehicle avoids an obstacle without colliding with it, the rotating operation unit 302 may be vibrated in a different manner, or the light-emitting element provided on the pressing unit 301a may be illuminated.

Next, referring to Figure 616, we will explain how points are awarded and how results are displayed when the boar (Inoshishi) is set as the preferred zodiac animal. When the boar is not set as the preferred zodiac animal, points are awarded as the sum of distance points and operation points, as mentioned above. However, when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, points are awarded based on the number of obstacles destroyed. Specifically, when the boar is not set as the preferred zodiac animal, the boar may not be able to reach the goal depending on the outcome of the pattern change display. However, when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the boar will always reach the goal when the time limit is reached. The points corresponding to the number of obstacles destroyed by the boar before reaching the goal are then displayed in the results screen. Furthermore, when "Charging Ahead" is displayed and the boar is moving straight towards the goal, the number of obstacles destroyed is not clearly displayed. As a result, players become curious about how many times the rotating control unit 302, which is activated when the boar collides with an obstacle, has operated, and they will wish for it to operate more often. In other words, when the setting is not configured, the operation of the rotating control unit 302 results in lost time, which is undesirable for the player, whereas when the setting is configured, it becomes a desirable operation despite being a common operation. Furthermore, even when the boar is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501 located on the side of the screen lights up according to the total points displayed in the result screen, just as when the boar is not set as the preferred zodiac animal. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 616(A), if the result of the symbol variation display is not a jackpot, the total points displayed in the results screen will be less than 50 points. Conversely, as shown in Figure 616(B), if the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot, the total points displayed in the results screen will be 50 points or more. This is the same as when the boar (Inoshishi) is not set as the recommended zodiac sign.

As described above, the appearance of the boar (Inoshishi) in the Chinese zodiac is designed to be performed. In other words, while the operation of the common rotation unit 302 is possible regardless of whether a setting is made, the player is made to expect the rotation unit 302 to operate when a setting is made.

[43-2. Special staging featuring character appearances]
The above describes the zodiac appearance sequence, which is executed as a mini-game sequence in which the characters are controlled by the performance control unit 301, etc. Next, we will explain the zodiac appearance sequence in which characters may appear in a special manner. Of the 12 types of characters that can appear in the zodiac appearance sequence, some characters are designed so that a big win can be expected when they appear (a probability of winning a big win is set). In other words, among the characters that can be set as your favorite zodiac sign, some characters have a role in suggesting a big win.

<Zodiac Sign Appearance: Tiger>
The appearance of the Tiger zodiac sign is a challenge animation in which the Tiger attempts to jump through a ring of fire. If the Tiger succeeds (jumps through the ring of fire), the expected probability of a big win is displayed. Specifically, as will be explained later, the score the Tiger scores when jumping through the ring of fire is displayed as the expected probability, and it differs depending on whether the selected zodiac sign is the Tiger or something else. If the Tiger is selected as the selected zodiac sign, the animation is always successful, the score is displayed as 100 points, and the expected probability of a big win is announced as 100% (big win confirmed). For this reason, if the Tiger is selected as the selected zodiac sign, the appearance of the Tiger zodiac sign will only be performed if the result of the symbol change display is a big win. In contrast, if the tiger is not set as the preferred zodiac sign, the tiger zodiac sign appearance animation will be performed even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss. When the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, the tiger zodiac sign appearance animation will either show a pattern where the tiger fails to jump through the ring of fire, or even if successful, the performance score will be displayed as less than 100 points. Furthermore, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a jackpot, if the tiger is not set as the preferred zodiac sign, the performance score will not be displayed as 100 points, as shown in Figure 617. In other words, when the preferred zodiac sign is set to a specific setting and the corresponding animation for that specific setting is performed, the expected probability of a jackpot result (notification reliability) is higher than when the aforementioned corresponding animation is performed without a specific setting being made.

Based on the above, the appearance animation for the Tiger (寅) zodiac sign is set to have a higher probability of occurring when the Tiger is not set as the preferred zodiac sign, as shown in Figure 586. Specifically, the probability is 35% when no zodiac sign is set as the preferred zodiac sign, and 30% when any other zodiac sign is set as the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 618 shows the state before the start of the challenge sequence in the Tiger zodiac appearance sequence. Figure 619 shows the case where the challenge sequence fails in the Tiger zodiac appearance sequence. Figure 620 shows the case where the challenge sequence succeeds in the Tiger zodiac appearance sequence. In the Tiger zodiac appearance sequence, the challenge sequence is executed at a predetermined timing.

When the challenge sequence begins, as shown in Figure 618, a ring of fire is placed on the screen, and a tiger character appears at a distance from the ring. The tiger character then runs towards the ring of fire and attempts to jump through it. At this time, to signal the start of the challenge sequence, a special sound is emitted, and the light-emitting element 8501 is illuminated in a specific manner, thereby increasing the player's anticipation.

Figures 619(A) and (B) show the state when the challenge sequence fails. In Figure 619(A), the tiger character gets caught on a ring of fire while trying to jump through it, losing its balance. Furthermore, in Figure 619(B), the failure of the challenge sequence is announced, and the tiger character is shown looking dejected. At this time, the light-emitting element 8501 may be illuminated in a mode for when the challenge sequence fails, or it may be illuminated in its normal mode instead of a special mode.

Figure 620 shows the state when the challenge sequence is successful with a score of 100 points. In Figure 620(A), the tiger character passes through the ring of fire without getting caught. Furthermore, in Figure 620(B), the tiger character has a joyous expression as it is announced that the challenge sequence has been successful with a score of 100 points. At this time, the light-emitting element 8501 emits rainbow-colored light, informing the player that the result of the symbol variation display will be a jackpot, and sound output such as a fanfare may also be provided. Although not shown, when the challenge sequence is successful with a score of less than 100 points, unlike when it is successful with a score of 100 points, the possibility of the symbol variation display being a jackpot is suggested to the player with an expectation level corresponding to the score. In this configuration, the light-emitting element 8501 is designed to emit blue light if the performance score is between 1 and 30 points, green light if it is between 31 and 70 points, and red light if it is between 71 and 99 points, thus varying the expected performance level depending on the light emission pattern of the light-emitting element 8501.

<Zodiac Sign Appearance Presentation: Snake and Dragon>
The appearance animation for the Snake and Dragon zodiac animals is an animation in which a Snake or Dragon hatches from an egg displayed on the screen, and the content of the animation changes depending on whether you have set either the Snake or the Dragon as your favorite zodiac animal or neither.

Figure 621 shows the zodiac appearance animation for the Snake and Dragon when neither the Snake nor the Dragon is set as the preferred zodiac sign. As shown in Figure 621(A), multiple eggs are displayed on the screen, and as shown in Figure 621(B), the hatching animation is performed to see if either a Snake or a Dragon hatches from each of the displayed eggs. The number of eggs displayed on the screen at this time is the sum of the eggs acquired before the Snake and Dragon zodiac appearance animation and the initial eggs awarded when the animation begins.

Furthermore, pre-acquired eggs are those obtained before the display of the symbols that will trigger the appearance of the Snake and Dragon zodiac signs begins, and before the appearance of those signs begins. It is also possible to acquire eggs used in the hatching animation through a so-called pre-announcement animation. As shown in Figure 604, the acquisition status and the type of egg (described later) are displayed so that the player can understand them. The eggs acquired at the start are those given when the appearance of the Snake and Dragon zodiac signs begins. The number of eggs given and the type of egg (described later) are determined by lottery, and the number and type of eggs given are made known to the player at the time of distribution. In Figure 621(A), the eggs within the dotted line are pre-acquired eggs. While pre-acquired eggs are placed at the beginning, they may also be placed at the end.

Next, as shown in Figure 621(B), the hatching animation displays what will hatch from each egg (the total of pre-obtained eggs and eggs obtained at the start) displayed on the screen, one by one from the top left. Specifically, for each displayed egg, one of the following will be displayed: "Nothing hatched," "A snake hatched," or "A dragon hatched." After the animation shows what has hatched from all the displayed eggs, the hatching result display in Figure 621(C) is shown, followed by the results display in Figure 621(D). The hatching result display clearly shows the number of snakes and dragons obtained. In addition to the hatching result display, the results display shows the total points earned: 3 points for each snake and 10 points for each dragon.

Then, when the results are displayed, the system refers to the point correspondence table shown in Figure 622, and the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501 located on the side of the screen illuminate according to the total points. In the appearance of the Snake and Dragon zodiac signs, the color of the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501, which illuminate according to the total points, indicates whether the resulting symbol variation display will result in a jackpot. When the total points reach 50, the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501 illuminate in rainbow colors, and a congratulatory message is displayed, indicating that the resulting symbol variation display is a jackpot. While the light-emitting elements (LEDs, lamps) 8501 are designed to illuminate in rainbow colors when the total points reach 50, they may also be made to illuminate in rainbow colors when it becomes clear that the acquired points will reach 50 during the hatching animation before the results are displayed.

Furthermore, the hatching animation displays a "snake hatching" from the egg. The displayed snake may undergo an evolution animation between the time the hatching animation for other eggs is being performed and the hatching result is displayed (from the time the hatching animation for other eggs is being performed until the hatching result is displayed). Figure 623 shows an example of the evolution animation. As shown in Figure 623, the evolution animation involves the displayed snake being enveloped in a smoke effect and transforming into a dragon. When the snake transforms into a dragon, it is considered that a dragon hatched from the egg from the beginning, and the points earned are counted as 10 points instead of 3. This structure encourages players to anticipate the transformation into a dragon even when a snake (which yields fewer points than a dragon) is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, we will explain the types of eggs used in the hatching animation. The eggs that can be obtained as pre-acquired eggs and eggs acquired at the start of the game all come in multiple types: "white eggs," "white and green striped eggs," and "green eggs." Depending on the type of egg, the percentage of "nothing hatches," "a snake hatches," and "a dragon hatches" differs for each type, as shown in Figure 624. Figure 624 is a diagram showing the points corresponding to the egg type when the snake and dragon are not set as the preferred zodiac signs. Specifically, for "white eggs," the percentage of "nothing hatches" is 60%, the percentage of "a snake hatches" is 30%, and the percentage of "a dragon hatches" is 10%. For "white and green striped eggs," the percentage of "nothing hatches" is 30%, the percentage of "a snake hatches" is 50%, and the percentage of "a dragon hatches" is 20%. Furthermore, in the case of a "green egg," there is a 40% chance of a "snake" hatching and a 60% chance of a "dragon" hatching, ensuring that the "nothing" message is never displayed. Because of this structure, players expect the displayed egg to be a "white egg" rather than a "white and green striped egg," and a "green egg" rather than a "white and green striped egg."

Next, we will explain the appearance animations for the Snake and Dragon zodiac animals when the Snake is set as the preferred zodiac animal. The basic animation flow is the same as when neither the Snake nor the Dragon is set as the preferred zodiac animal. Even when the Snake is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the hatching animation showing what hatches from the eggs acquired beforehand and at the start, and the illumination of the LEDs (lamps) 8501 in the result display are the same. However, when the Snake is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the points earned for each Snake will be counted as 20 points instead of 3 points.

Figure 625(A) shows the hatching result display for the appearance of the snake and dragon zodiac animals when the snake is set as the preferred zodiac animal. Figure 621(C), mentioned earlier, shows the hatching result display when neither the snake nor the dragon is set as the preferred zodiac animal, and the hatching result is the same as the example shown in Figure 625(A). However, because the snake is set as the preferred zodiac animal, the points for one snake are 20 points, so although not shown in the figure, the total points displayed in the result screen are 80 points (60 points for the snake alone). In other words, even if the hatching result display image is the same, the result (total points) will differ depending on the player's settings, and the light color of the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501 will also differ depending on the player's settings.

At this time, there is no indication that the player has set the snake as their preferred zodiac sign. Therefore, a player who is aware that they have set the snake as their preferred zodiac sign can understand that 20 points are added each time a snake appears during the hatching animation, but others observing the game cannot understand that 20 points are added for each snake appearance. As a result, even though the animation content being seen is the same, the information that a player who is aware of their preferred zodiac sign and others observing the game who are not aware of their preferred zodiac sign will perceive from the animation content differently from the time the hatching animation is executed until the results are displayed. Specifically, a player who knows their favorite zodiac sign is the snake (巳) will recognize that they have already earned 60 points (more than 50 points, the minimum required for a jackpot) from the snakes alone, and will understand that the resulting symbol change will indicate a jackpot. In contrast, others observing the game will only see that they will earn 9 points, leading to a lower expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, players who know their favorite zodiac sign is the snake (巳) will feel a sense of superiority and accomplishment over others observing, thus increasing their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the snake (巳) is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the frequency of the evolution animation where the snake transforms into a dragon (辰) is reduced compared to when neither the snake nor the dragon is set as the preferred zodiac sign. This is to prevent a decrease in points earned due to the snake's transformation into a dragon, thus maintaining the excitement of the game, while also leaving the possibility of a point decrease. Alternatively, if the sole purpose is to avoid a decrease in gameplay excitement, the evolution animation could be completely disabled when the snake is set as the preferred zodiac sign.

Figure 625(B) shows the state when the performance control unit 301 is operated in the state shown in Figure 625(A) (while the hatching animation is being performed with the snake set as the preferred zodiac animal). The pending display for the currently running symbol change shows the snake character, which is the preferred zodiac animal. Similarly, if the dragon is the preferred zodiac animal, the pending display will change to the dragon character. Since the preferred zodiac animal is not actively displayed during the snake and dragon zodiac appearance animations, the player can understand which zodiac animal is currently set by operating the performance control unit 301 in this way.

Furthermore, in the state shown in Figure 621(C) (while the hatching animation is being performed with the player's chosen zodiac sign not being the snake or dragon), if the player operates the animation control unit 301, the hold display will not change because the snake or dragon is not set as the chosen zodiac sign, and the normal hold display will remain. However, it may be changed to a character corresponding to the chosen zodiac sign (for example, if the chosen zodiac sign is set to the monkey, the hold display will change to the monkey). Also, while the operation to determine the currently set chosen zodiac sign is performed on the animation control unit 301, it may also be performed on an operation unit other than the animation control unit 301 provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In addition, the operation to determine the currently set chosen zodiac sign may be accepted not only in the snake and dragon zodiac sign appearance animations, but also in other zodiac sign appearance animations, allowing the player to determine the currently set chosen zodiac sign even in animations other than the snake and dragon zodiac sign appearance animations.

As described above, if the snake (巳) is set as the preferred zodiac sign, the points earned for one snake are set to 20 points. In addition, in this embodiment, the preferred zodiac sign is not displayed by default, and others other than the player who made the setting cannot know what the player has set. Specifically, others playing at adjacent machines or observing from behind the machine cannot see at a glance what setting the player has made. In other words, the fact that the points earned for one snake (巳) have been changed from 3 points to 20 points is information known only to the player who made the setting, and others who do not have this information have no reason to think that the snake (巳) has been set from among several zodiac signs, and therefore they will not think that the points earned for one snake (巳) are set to 20 points, and will perceive the points earned for one snake (巳) as 3 points, as if neither the snake (巳) nor the dragon (辰) were set. Therefore, even when viewing the same hatching result display, players with access to information and those without will anticipate different total points earned. Consequently, the expected outcomes and subsequent developments will also differ between them.

Traditionally, a certain number of players have found it unpleasant when others peek at their game screens. These players particularly dislike having others see high-probability events, and their enjoyment of the game significantly diminishes when others peek at their screens during these events, preventing them from focusing on them. However, with the above-described configuration, others will not perceive the high-probability events that the player is focusing on as high-probability events. As a result, the opportunities for others to peek at the high-probability events that the player is focusing on are reduced, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain the appearance animations for the Snake and Dragon zodiac animals when the Dragon is set as your favorite zodiac animal. The basic flow of the animation is the same as when neither the Snake nor the Dragon is set as your favorite zodiac animal. Even when the Dragon is set as your favorite zodiac animal, the hatching animations that show what hatches from the eggs obtained in advance and at the start, as well as the illumination of the light-emitting element (LED, lamp) 8501 in the result display, are the same. Furthermore, while the points earned per Snake were changed when the Snake was set as your favorite zodiac animal, the points earned per Dragon are changed when the Dragon is set as your favorite zodiac animal. Specifically, the points earned per Dragon will be counted as 50 points. In other words, players who have set the Dragon (Ryu) as their favorite zodiac sign can understand that the result of the symbol changes being displayed will be a jackpot when one Dragon (Ryu) is shown during the hatching animation or hatching result display. Therefore, players who have set the Dragon (Ryu) as their favorite zodiac sign will strongly wish for a Dragon (Ryu) to hatch from the egg.

Furthermore, when the Dragon (Ryu) is set as the player's favorite zodiac sign, the evolution animation where the Snake (Hebi) transforms into the Dragon (Ryu) is possible, just as when neither the Snake (Hebi) nor the Dragon (Ryu) is set as the player's favorite zodiac sign. Therefore, players not only expect the Dragon (Ryu) to hatch during the hatching animation, but even if a Snake (Hebi) hatches instead of the Dragon (Ryu), they don't give up on the Dragon (Ryu) appearing and continue to hope that the hatched Snake (Hebi) will transform into the Dragon (Ryu). As a result, players maintain a sense of anticipation for the zodiac appearance animation for a long period until the results are displayed. Additionally, players who have set the Dragon (Ryu) as their favorite zodiac sign will have a stronger sense of anticipation for the evolution animation than players who haven't set the Dragon (Ryu) as their favorite zodiac sign or those unaware of the setting.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the type of egg acquired in advance is made known to the player, for example, if a player has set the Dragon (Ryu) as their preferred zodiac sign and a "green egg" is displayed as the acquired egg, there is a 60% chance that a "Dragon (Ryu)" will hatch from the "green egg." In addition, there is at least a chance that a "Snake (Hebi)," which has the potential to transform into a Dragon (Ryu), will hatch. Therefore, players who have set the Dragon (Ryu) as their preferred zodiac sign will have a greater sense of anticipation regarding the "green egg" than players who have not set the Dragon (Ryu) as their preferred zodiac sign and see the "green egg" displayed as the acquired egg. In other words, even with the same display (for example, a green egg), the level of anticipation for the display differs depending on whether or not the zodiac sign is set.

In addition to the configuration described above, since the setting of this embodiment (favorite zodiac sign setting) is not displayed by default, players who have set the Dragon (Ryu) as their favorite zodiac sign will experience a different level of anticipation when viewing the same animations as other players, similar to the case where the Snake (巳) is set as the favorite zodiac sign. Specifically, this embodiment provides information (favorite zodiac sign) that only the player who made the setting can perceive, and the level of anticipation perceived from the executed animations differs depending on whether or not the player has grasped this information. In particular, animations that would have a low level of anticipation if the setting had not been made are configured to have a higher level of anticipation once the setting is made. Therefore, the player who made the setting will grasp the change in anticipation and pay close attention to the animation with the increased level of anticipation, while others who are unaware of the setting will view the animation with the same level of anticipation as if the setting had not been made. As a result, others who are unaware of the setting will not be interested in the animations that the player who made the setting is paying attention to and have a higher level of anticipation, and consequently, the opportunities for them to peek at the animations that the player is paying attention to and have a higher level of anticipation will decrease, thus preventing a decline in the players' enjoyment of the game.

[43-3. Zodiac animal appearance sequence linked to seasonal settings]
<Zodiac Animal Appearance: Monkey>
Furthermore, a second special animation that offers a chance of a big win may be made available by linking the appearance of the zodiac animal with the season setting. As already explained in Figures 598 to 602, a special animation is available when the chosen zodiac animal is the monkey and the season setting is "winter," with the background being a "snowy landscape." However, unlike the aforementioned special animation, this second special animation is designed so that a big win can be expected depending on the set season. Specifically, the amount of snow falling in the "snowy landscape" background, which is set to correspond to the "winter" season setting, indicates the likelihood of a big win. Also, if the season setting is set to "spring" or something other than "winter," the amount of falling cherry blossoms indicates the likelihood of a big win, and if the season setting is "autumn," the amount of falling autumn leaves indicates the likelihood of a big win. Only when the season setting is "summer" does the background become a "sunflower field," but no animation indicating the likelihood of a big win is performed. In this way, the second special animation is executed in a way that links the settings of the chosen zodiac animal and the season.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, as mentioned above, the "season setting" can be changed even while the symbols are changing. For example, if the season setting is changed during the execution of the monkey zodiac appearance animation, the animation corresponding to the changed season setting will be executed. Note that the seasonal setting change in the second special animation is limited to the period from when the zodiac appearance animation starts until the animation indicating the probability of a big win is executed. During this period when the season setting can be changed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is displayed, and after this period of seasonal setting change has passed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is hidden. By making it possible to change the season setting during the execution of the zodiac appearance animation, for example, a player who does not want the probability of a big win to be indicated by the second special animation that can be executed during the monkey zodiac appearance animation can set it to "summer," in which case the animation indicating the probability of a big win will not be executed. In addition, to prevent situations where the animation setting display unit 8401 is not visible when changing the season setting and thus the season setting cannot be properly changed, the animation setting display unit 8401 is positioned so as not to overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols.

Figure 626 illustrates an example of changing the season setting during the execution of the Year of the Monkey (Saru) zodiac sign appearance animation. The example shown in Figure 626 explains the procedure for changing the season setting from "Autumn" to "Spring."

Figure 626(A) shows a scene where the monkey zodiac sign appearance animation is being executed with the season setting set to "Autumn." The animation depicts autumn as autumn leaves flutter down while the monkey character is bathing in a hot spring. At this time, operating the animation setting button displays the season selection section 8431, allowing the user to change to an adjacent season by operating the left and right buttons. Specifically, since the current season setting is "Autumn," operating the left button changes it to "Summer," and operating the right button changes it to "Winter."

When the season setting is changed, the display is immediately updated to reflect the new season. Specifically, changing the season setting from "Autumn" to "Winter" updates the background to a snowy landscape representing winter (Figure 626(B)), and further changing it from "Winter" to "Spring" updates the background to cherry blossoms in full bloom representing spring (Figure 626(C)). By updating the background each time the season setting is changed, players can select their preferred background while viewing it, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by specifying the order in which seasons should be changed, it's possible to prevent the execution of effects that might cause players to feel jarred, such as a sudden transition from "Summer" to "Winter."

Furthermore, when instantly updating the background display in response to a change in the seasonal setting, by separating the layer that renders the monkey character and the hot spring from the layer that renders the seasonal object (autumn leaves), the number of layers that need to be updated can be minimized, thereby minimizing the load caused by rendering when the background changes.
Furthermore, by separating the layer that displays seasonal illustrations, it becomes possible to standardize the procedure for displaying a background that reflects the seasonal setting even in the appearance animations of zodiac animals other than the monkey. This allows for the sharing of animation data across multiple zodiac animal appearance animations, thus enabling a variety of animations while suppressing the increase in memory capacity required to store the animation data.

As described above, the special effects that are available when a specific zodiac sign is set are executed with the settings of the season setting, which is different from the zodiac sign setting, reflected. Furthermore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, the second special effect is available when the monkey is set as the specific zodiac sign, but even in the zodiac appearance effects featuring characters other than the monkey, the settings of the season setting, which is different from the zodiac sign setting, may be made to be reflected. It is preferable not to make it available for all zodiac signs (all twelve zodiac characters), but rather to prevent it from being reflected for some zodiac signs.

Furthermore, while the gaming machine of this embodiment allows the "season setting" to be changed even during the display of changing symbols, it may also be configured to allow the "season setting" to be changed only during a specific period, such as during the execution of the monkey (Saru) zodiac sign appearance animation while the symbols are changing. Additionally, in this gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the season through settings on the machine that the player cannot control. If the player is unable to change the season, the second special animation will be executed, but the season setting cannot be changed during the execution of the zodiac sign appearance animation in which the second special animation is performed.

<Zodiac Sign Appearance: Rooster>
Furthermore, as another example of effects linked to the seasonal setting, it may be possible to implement effects that output special sounds. For example, if the zodiac sign is set to the Rooster, the normal mode would output the sound of a chicken, but if the season setting is "Spring," it could change to the sound of a Japanese bush warbler. In addition, bird characters corresponding to the seasons could be introduced and output sounds corresponding to those characters. When bird sounds corresponding to each season are output, the type of sound could be immediately changed to one corresponding to the new season when the season setting is changed, similar to how the background is updated according to the season.

[43-4. Inventions relating to performances whose content changes due to modifications]
Finally, we will list representative examples of inventions in which the content changes depending on the settings of the presentation, such as the zodiac appearance presentation disclosed herein.

(1) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A means for executing multiple effects,
In the aforementioned performance, a light-emitting body capable of emitting light,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a variation effect that is performed when the variation of the symbols is displayed, and a light-emitting effect that can notify the probability of winning the lottery based on the light-emitting pattern of the light-emitting element.
The first performance, which is performed as a performance during the fluctuation, is characterized in that the light emission performance can be performed in a manner that has a high probability of winning the lottery.

In configuration (1), a lighting effect is possible where light-emitting elements such as LEDs and lamps illuminate when a variation effect is executed during the variation display of the symbols. For example, in the rat (子) zodiac appearance effect executed during the variation display of the symbols, the light-emitting element 8501 is configured to illuminate in a manner that increases the likelihood of winning the lottery when a predetermined number of points are obtained in the mini-game. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation during the variation effect and suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 604 to 607, etc.).

(2) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A means for executing multiple effects,
A light-emitting body capable of emitting light,
A means of controlling the game's presentation that can accept input from the player,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the plurality of effects include an operation effect that is performed based on an operation input from the effect operation means, and a specific light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting body to emit light in a specific manner.

In configuration (2), the system allows for the execution of operational effects using control buttons and other operating means, as well as the execution of light-emitting effects that cause a light-emitting element to illuminate in a specific manner. For example, the appearance of the sheep (Year of the Sheep) zodiac sign, which is performed during the display of changing symbols, is an operational effect that involves operating the performance operation unit 301 at a predetermined timing to control the character. By performing a light-emitting effect that causes a light-emitting element to illuminate in accordance with the timing of the operation, the system becomes easier to operate, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed (see Figures 608 to 612, etc.).

(3) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A means for executing multiple effects,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a notification effect that can notify the results of the lottery at a predetermined timing,
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing of the notification effect can be changed by the player.

In configuration (3), the player can change the timing at which the lottery result is announced. In the embodiment of this specification, the player can specify their favorite zodiac sign for the zodiac appearance animation that is performed during the display of changing symbols. For example, if the player specifies "Tiger" as their favorite zodiac sign, when the Tiger zodiac appearance animation is performed, the player will know that a jackpot is confirmed at the start of the animation. On the other hand, if the player does not specify "Tiger" as their favorite zodiac sign, they will not know the lottery result until the end of the animation. In this way, by configuring the system so that the player can specify the timing at which the lottery result is announced, it is possible to realize animations that suit the player's preferences, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed (see Figures 586, 617-620, etc.).

(4) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A means for executing multiple effects,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a notification effect that can notify the expected probability of a big win based on the display of the results of the aforementioned effects,
The aforementioned notification effect is characterized in that, depending on the starting parameters when the notification effect is executed, it notifies the player of different expectations even if the result display of the effect is the same.

In configuration (4), even if the notification effect display is the same, the expected value will differ depending on the player's selection. For example, the appearance of the snake and dragon zodiac animals during the reel spinning sequence awards points when a snake or dragon hatches from an egg, and the expected value is announced based on the total points earned. However, the points earned differ depending on whether the snake or dragon is selected. This allows the player to accurately recognize the announced expected value, but others cannot accurately recognize the expected value by watching the sequence. As a result, opportunities for others to peek at sequences with high expected value that the player is paying attention to are reduced, thus preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game (see Figures 621-625, etc.).

(5) A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A means for executing multiple effects,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned multiple effects include a drive effect that drives a drive unit,
A gaming machine characterized by allowing the frequency of executing the aforementioned drive effect to be changed.

In configuration (5), the drive mechanism is used to stimulate the player during the performance process. For example, in the boar (Inoshishi) zodiac sign appearance performance, which is performed during the display of changing symbols, the drive mechanism vibrates the performance control unit 301 during the performance. At this time, if the player has made a predetermined setting (setting "Boar (Inoshishi)" as their preferred zodiac sign), the performance control unit 301 vibrates at a different frequency than when no setting is made, enabling a variety of performances and suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game (see Figures 613 to 616, etc.).

[44. Storage means for exchanging information in various control systems]
Control in gaming machines is achieved by combining multiple functions, and the control units that execute each function are composed of software (programs) and hardware (circuit boards). This section describes the configuration for exchanging information such as commands and data between different control units.

Figures 274 to 285 describe the control for exchanging information between the game control unit (main control board 1310, first control unit) and the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit (ball information control board (dispensing control board 951), second control unit). Here, we will describe a configuration in which information is exchanged between the game control unit and the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit by storing (remembering) the information.

In the configuration described in Figures 274 to 285, by transmitting main control recognition information, which is information for recognizing the game control unit (main control board 1310, first control unit), to the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit (ball information control board (payout control board 951), second control unit), the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit (ball information control board) could determine whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310; game control unit, first control unit) installed in the game machine was legitimate. As a result, if the main control MPU 1311 was not determined to be legitimate, the ball information control board could stop the prize ball-related operations, preventing tampering with the main control MPU 1311 and allowing changes to the settings information on the main control board 1310 to be reflected in the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit at an appropriate time.

In the configuration described above, information was exchanged between the game control unit (main control board 1310) and the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit (ball information control board (payout control board 951)) by sending and receiving commands. The gaming machine described below has the game control unit and the prize ball/ball dispensing control unit configured within the main control board 1310. Furthermore, a configuration is described in which information to be exchanged between each control unit is stored in a predetermined memory area, and each control unit can exchange information by reading and writing to the information stored in that memory area. This configuration eliminates the need for communication between boards, thus preventing fraudulent activities such as data tampering by installing unauthorized devices on the wiring between boards.

[44-1. Memory Area Configuration]
First, the storage means in which information used when executing game control is stored in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a ROM 1313 (first storage means) which is for reading data only, and a RAM 1312 (second storage means) which enables reading and writing data. The configuration of the storage area provided by each storage medium (storage means) will be described below.

[44-1-1. ROM area]
Figure 627 shows an example of the configuration of the memory area provided by the ROM 1313 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The starting address of the ROM 1313 is assigned address "8000H". The ROM 1313 is a read-only storage medium and stores programs (modules) and data for executing various processes. The memory area provided by the ROM 1313 is divided into multiple areas according to function. Unused areas 8708 and 8709 are placed between each area as needed to prevent accidental access to programs or data outside of the area.

Furthermore, the area for storing programs and data includes a game control area that stores programs and data for directly controlling the progress of the game, and an area located outside the game control area. It is also not possible to call programs within the game control area from programs outside the game control area.

Next, we will explain the processing corresponding to the programs and data stored in each area. The game control area includes a first game control area (first control unit) 8701, which stores programs and data for executing processing related to the game results, and a second game control area (second control unit) 8702, which stores programs and data for executing processing related to prize ball/ball dispensing control. The processing executed in the first game control area 8701 (processing related to the game results) is referred to as the first game control processing, and the processing executed in the second game control area 8702 (processing related to prize ball/ball dispensing control) is referred to as the second game control processing.

Furthermore, the second game control process, performance display monitor process, error handling process, and complete function process are called and executed during the execution of the first game control process. For example, the first game control process includes a timer interrupt process that controls the progress of the game, and the second game control process, performance display monitor process, error handling process, and complete function process are called from this timer interrupt process. Note that the processes related to the performance display monitor and the complete function may be called not only directly from the first game control process, but also by the second game control process, which is called from the first game control process.

The processing related to the game results involves executing a lottery when a game medium enters the starting slot, and performing symbol changes based on the lottery results. Furthermore, the processing related to prize ball/ball dispensing control involves granting game value (prize balls) to the player based on the lottery results, and performing the necessary controls for granting that game value (prize balls).

Outside the game control area, there are three areas: area 8703, which stores processing related to the performance display monitor; area 8704, which stores error processing; and area 8705, which stores processing related to the complete function. The performance display monitor processing only displays various information related to the game's performance calculated from game results such as base and payout ratios; it does not include processing directly related to game control, and the performance display monitor itself is not something the player intentionally refers to, so it is located outside the game control area. Error processing is for handling errors that occur during gameplay; it is located outside the game control area because it executes processing related to abnormal conditions such as fraud detection and malfunctions without affecting the game's outcome.

The complete function operates on the same principle as the aforementioned excessive prize ball suppression mechanism. It determines whether to stop the game based on the difference between the number of game balls consumed (launched balls, out balls, and safe balls) and the number of prize balls. Since the processing related to the complete function does not directly affect the progress of the game or the assignment of game value until the game is stopped, it is located outside the game control area. Furthermore, program comments are recorded in the ROM comment area 8706, which can be referenced during development and maintenance.

Unused areas 8708 and 8709 are located between each area. Unused area 8708, located within the game control area, is intended to ensure that the game stops reliably if an incorrect address is referenced during program execution within the game control area. On the other hand, when a program located outside the game control area is being executed, it does not necessarily require an unused area, as it does not control the progress of the game. In this case, unused areas 8709 (8709a to 8709c) in Figure 627 may be omitted, and processing related to the performance display monitor, error handling, and completion function may be placed in a continuous area. This reduces the memory capacity.

[44-1-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 1312 will be described. Figure 628 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the storage area provided by the RAM 1312 of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

Referring to Figure 628, RAM 1312 is assigned address "0000H" as its starting address. RAM 1312 is a read-and-write storage medium, capable of temporarily storing data during various processing operations. Furthermore, even if the gaming machine's power is cut off, the RAM 1312's contents are backed up by a backup power supply, preventing them from being erased.

Furthermore, the memory area provided by RAM 1312 is divided into areas corresponding to each process, similar to the memory area provided by ROM 1313. Also, as with ROM 1313, unused areas 8718 and 8719 are placed between each area as needed.

The memory area provided by RAM 1312, like the memory area provided by ROM 1313, is divided into an area within the game control area and an area outside the game control area. Within the game control area, in addition to the first game control area 8711 (8711a, 8711b) and the second game control area 8712 (8712a, 8712b), there is a transmission area (first reference area) 8721 for transmitting information to be transferred to each game control area, and a reception area (second reference area) 8722 for receiving transmitted information. The transmission area 8721 and the reception area 8722 together constitute the reference area 8720.

Furthermore, when a RAM clear operation is performed, the first game control area 8711, the second game control area 8712, and the reference area 8720 are initialized, while areas outside the game control area, such as the area related to the performance display monitor, are not initialized. It is also possible to enable RAM clear operations for each area; for example, the first RAM clear operation may initialize only the first game control area 8711, and the second RAM clear operation may initialize only the second game area 8712, or both the first and second game control areas 8711 and 8712. The reference area may be initialized (erased) whenever at least one of the first or second game control area 8711 is initialized.

Furthermore, the first game control area 8711 is allocated a region related to the game results, and includes a normal area 8711a for storing information to be transmitted externally or used in the game, and a stack area 8711b for storing data to be temporarily used or saved during processing. An unused area 8718 is located between the normal area 8711a and the stack area 8711b. The second game control area 8712 is similarly configured, with a normal area 8712a and a stack area 8712b located on either side of the unused area 8718.

The transmission area (first reference area) 8721 is stored, for example, when the result of processing performed in the first game control area 8711 is passed to processing performed in the second game control area 8712. The reception area (second reference area) 8722 is stored by processing performed in the second game control area 8712 when processing performed in the first game control area 8711 refers to the result of processing performed in the second game control area 8712.

On the other hand, when the result of processing performed in the second game control area 8712 is passed to processing performed in the first game control area 8711, the processing performed in the second game control area 8712 stores the processing result in the receiving area (second reference area) 8722. Furthermore, when processing performed in the second game control area 8712 refers to the result of processing performed in the first game control area 8711, it refers to the information stored in the transmitting area (first reference area) 8721 by the processing performed in the first game control area 8711.

Therefore, for convenience, the transmission area 8721 and reception area 8722 in Figure 628 correspond to transmission and reception from the perspective of the processing performed in the first game control area 8711, while transmission and reception are reversed from the perspective of the processing performed in the second game control area 8712.

This ensures the independence of the processing performed in the first game control area 8711 and the processing performed in the second game control area 8712. This allows for parallel development of programs related to game results and programs related to prize ball/ball dispensing control, thereby increasing the development efficiency of the gaming machine. Further details regarding the transmission area (first reference area) 8721 and the reception area (second reference area) 8722 will be described later in Figure 629.

Furthermore, if there are three or more game control areas, a reference area 8720 may be allocated for each combination, or some game control areas may be consolidated and a reference area allocated to them. For example, if there are first to third game control areas, the processing performed in the first and second game control areas may have their results stored in the transmission area, while the processing performed in the third game control area may have its results stored in the reception area.

Furthermore, the arrangement order of the memory areas located in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 is not limited to the order shown in Figures 627 and 628. For example, the second game control area 8702 may be placed on the first address side, or the reference area 8720 may be placed on the first address side.

Each game control area consists of an area (ROM 1313) where processing (programs) are stored, a normal area (RAM 1312) where processing results, etc., are stored when the processing (program) is executed, and a stack area (RAM 1312) where data is temporarily stored when the processing (program) is executed. Furthermore, the control unit includes the configuration necessary to realize the functions provided by the programs stored in the game control areas. For example, the first control unit corresponding to the first game control area includes the configuration necessary for processing related to the game results, including an area 8701 for storing processing related to the game results, an area 8711a related to the game results, and a stack area 8711b related to the game results. The second control unit corresponding to the second game control area also includes the configuration necessary for processing related to prize ball/ball dispensing control.

Furthermore, outside the game control area, there are areas 8713 related to the performance display monitor, 8714 related to error handling, 8715 related to the complete function, and 8716 related to processing outside the game area. While a separate stack area was allocated for each process within the game control area, a common stack area is allocated outside the game control area. This is because processing outside the game control area does not require a large stack area, and since it does not directly affect the progress of the game, interrupting processing due to insufficient stack area does not directly harm the player. Additionally, it helps to suppress an increase in memory capacity.

[44-2. Transmission Area and Reception Area (Reference Area)]
Next, the transmission area 8721 and the reception area 8722 will be described. Figure 629 is a diagram illustrating access to the transmission area 8721 and the reception area 8722.

The processing related to the game results is executed by a program stored in the first game control area 8701. During the execution of this program, data is temporarily stored in the first game control area (stack area) 8711b, and the processing results are stored in the first game control area (normal area) 8711a. Subsequently, the processing related to prize ball/ball dispensing control is performed based on the processing results related to the game results. At this time, it is necessary to receive information required for the execution of the prize ball/ball dispensing control processing (such as the lottery results, the number of prize balls, or information to specify the number of prize balls).

The transmission area (first reference area) 8721 is used in the prize ball/ball dispensing control process executed in the second game control area 8712. The results obtained from the game result processing executed in the first game control area 8711 are written to this area. The transmission area (first reference area) 8721 allows reading and writing of information from the processing executed in the first game control area 8711 (first game control processing), while the processing executed in the second game control area 8712 (second game control processing) only allows reading of information.

Furthermore, the process related to prize ball/ball dispensing control reads the processing result related to the game result stored in the transmission area (first reference area) 8721 and performs necessary calculations based on that processing result. The process related to prize ball/ball dispensing control is executed by a program stored in the second game control area 8702. When the program executes its processing, data is temporarily stored in the second game control area (stack area) 8712b, and the processing result is stored in the second game control area (normal area) 8712a.

The receiving area (second reference area) 8722 stores the processing results related to prize ball/ball dispensing control, which are based on the processing results written (transmitted) from the first game control area 8711. The receiving area (second reference area) 8722 allows for both reading and writing of information from the processing executed in the second game control area 8712 (second game control processing), while the processing executed in the first game control area 8711 (first game control processing) only allows for reading of information.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, processing performed in one game control area (e.g., the first game control area) allows reading and writing of information to one reference area (transmission area), while only reading information from the other reference area (receiving area). Conversely, processing performed in the other game control area (e.g., the second game control area) allows reading and writing of information to the aforementioned other reference area (receiving area), while only reading information from the aforementioned first reference area (transmission area). This configuration ensures that the processing performed in one game control area does not affect the results of processing performed in the other game control area through the transfer of information between game control areas.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, information exchange between game control areas was handled by timer interrupt processing, etc., to send and receive commands at predetermined intervals. In other words, commands were written to a command transmission area, and the commands were sent at predetermined intervals (for example, 400 milliseconds). Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the command transmission area is designated as a reference area, and in the processing executed in each game control area, commands are written to the reference area (transmission area) when a command is sent, and the commands written to the reference area (receiving area) are read when a command is received. By controlling it in this way, the procedure for sending commands can be simplified while ensuring the independence of each game control area.

Furthermore, by directly writing the data transmitted and received via commands (e.g., jackpot information and switch edge information) to the reference area, rather than using commands themselves, the transmission of commands becomes unnecessary. In the processing executed in each game control area, by reading and writing data to the reference area as needed, timer interrupt processing for sending and receiving commands at predetermined intervals becomes unnecessary. This configuration makes it possible to acquire the necessary information at the timing of control execution, and also suppresses the increased load on the calculation means caused by interrupt processing.

[44-3. Hardware Configuration]
Finally, we will describe the hardware configuration for implementing the memory area configuration described above. Here, we will describe the arithmetic unit including the CPU core, RAM, and ROM, and omit the explanation of other components.

[43-3-1. Basic configuration]
First, let's explain the basic configuration. Figure 630 shows an example of the configuration of a computing device for configuring the memory area in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

In the basic example shown in Figure 630, a single arithmetic unit (CPU) is configured to include a CPU (processor) core 1311a, ROM 1313, and RAM 1312. ROM 1313 provides the storage area shown in Figure 627, and RAM 1312 provides the storage area shown in Figure 628. The reference area 8720 (transmission area 8721, reception area 8722) is also as described above.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the CPU core 1311a sequentially (serially) executes processing in different game control areas provided by the ROM 1313, and reads and writes data to the area provided by the RAM 1312 corresponding to the executed processing. This eliminates the need for processing synchronization, even when processing results from other game control areas are required, because there is only one CPU core and the preceding processing has already finished, thus simplifying game control.

[44-3-2. Alternative Configuration]
Next, an alternative configuration of the computing device will be described. Figure 631 is a diagram showing an alternative configuration of the computing device for configuring the memory area in the gaming machine of this embodiment, where (A) is alternative configuration 1 equipped with multiple storage means, and (B) is alternative configuration 2 equipped with multiple CPU cores and multiple storage means.

In the alternative configuration 1 shown in Figure 631(A), a single arithmetic unit (CPU) is equipped with one CPU (processor) core 1311a, two (or more) types of ROM (first ROM 1313a, second ROM 1313b), and RAM (first RAM 1312a, second RAM 1312b).

In alternative configuration 1, since there are two ROMs and two RAMs, the memory area shown in Figure 627 is partially provided by the first ROM 1313a and the remainder by the second ROM 1313b. For example, the first ROM 1313a provides the first game control area and the area outside the game control area, while the second ROM 1313b provides the area included in the second game control area. This makes it possible to further ensure the independence between game control areas, and since there is only one CPU core, the same effects as the basic example described above can be obtained.

In alternative configuration 2, the configuration of alternative configuration 1 is modified to include two (or more) CPU cores (processing means). Furthermore, the memory areas provided by ROM (first ROM 1313a, second ROM 1313b) and RAM (first RAM 1312a, second RAM 1312b) are configured in the same way as in alternative configuration 1. Specifically, the first ROM 1313a provides the first game control area and the area outside the game control area, while the second ROM 1313b provides the area included in the second game control area. In this configuration, the first CPU core (first processing means) 1311b executes processing in the first game control area and the area outside the game control area, while the second CPU core (second processing means) 1311c executes processing in the second game control area. This makes it possible to execute processing in different game control areas independently and simultaneously. Additionally, it becomes possible to distribute the processing load due to game control, thereby suppressing the concentration of load on the gaming machine.

Data exchange between CPU cores is performed via serial or parallel communication. Alternatively, a memory medium (RAM) providing a reference area accessible to each CPU core may be provided.

Furthermore, in the basic example and alternative configuration 1, communication with the management device outside the gaming machine is performed by the CPU core 1311a, but in alternative configuration 2, it is performed by the second CPU core 1311c.

Furthermore, when multiple CPU cores (processing units) are provided (for example, two), the configuration is not limited to providing ROM and RAM for each CPU core; a single storage medium used in common by multiple CPU cores may also be used. In this case, it is necessary to be able to set access rights (read/write, read-only, inaccessible, etc.) for each storage area corresponding to each game control area. Storage areas may be allocated by physically specifying addresses, or the areas may be set using the functions of the processing unit (CPU). The memory area set at this time includes, within the game control area, a read-only ROM area (8701) for storing the first game control process, a read-only ROM area (8702) for storing the second game control process, a RAM area (8711) readable and writable only for the first game control process, a RAM area (8712) readable and writable only for the second game control process, a RAM area (transmission area 8721) readable and writable from the first game control process and readable only from the second game control process, and a RAM area (receiving area 8722) readable only from the first game control process and readable and writable from the second game control process.

[44-3-3. Others]
While this embodiment of the gaming machine is intended for use with pachinko machines, it can also be applied to revolving-type gaming machines (slot machines). Pachinko machines require the exchange of information not only on the acquisition (prize balls) and consumption (dispensing) of gaming media (game balls), but also on information such as the launch of game balls, fouls, and game results (type of jackpot, probability variation, time reduction, etc.). However, revolving-type gaming machines (slot machines) basically only require the exchange (sending and receiving) of information regarding the acquisition and consumption of gaming media (medals).

[45. Complete Function Execution Means]
Next, we will explain the complete function (specific function) that sets an upper limit on the game value that can be awarded to the player and stops the game when that upper limit is reached. The means for executing the complete function (complete function execution means, specific function activation means) is for the same purpose as the excessive prize ball suppression means described above and is an alternative example of the excessive prize ball suppression means.

The complete function execution means, similar to the excessive prize ball suppression means described above, determines whether or not to stop the game based on a value counted based on the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls, out balls, safe balls) and a value counted based on prize balls. In the complete function of this embodiment, the count value used to determine whether or not to stop the game is the difference between the minimum and maximum difference in the number of balls during the counting period (MY value), and the game is controlled to stop when this count value (MY value) reaches a specific value (for example, 95,000) or more.

[45-1. Configuration of the Complete Function Execution Means]
First, the module configuration of the complete function execution means will be described. Figure 632 is a diagram showing an example of the module configuration of the complete function execution means.

The complete function execution means primarily consists of a complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) and a complete function control means (complete function processing). The complete function initialization means is executed based on initialization conditions for the complete function, such as power-on, setting changes, or RAM clear operations, and performs the initialization processing necessary for the complete function. Whether or not to execute the complete function initialization process may be selectable through specific operations. Furthermore, if gameplay can continue even in cases where an abnormality occurs in the work area of the main control RAM 1312, the complete function may be kept uninitialized. The complete function initialization is executed in conjunction with the release of gameplay stoppage (including that caused by the activation of the complete function) due to a RAM clear. On the other hand, if the complete function is not initialized, the work area within the game area is cleared due to the RAM abnormality, but parameters such as count values are maintained in the complete function work area located outside the game area. By resetting the cleared work area within the game area based on these values, gameplay can be continued.

The complete function control means controls the complete function while the game is progressing normally (during normal gameplay). The complete function stops the game when predetermined counting conditions are met (for example, when a predetermined count reaches a specific value), but it does not directly affect the progress of the game, such as the outcome of a lottery. Therefore, the module constituting the complete function can be located outside the game area. In this embodiment of the game machine, the module constituting the complete function is called from processes that control the progress of the game (power-on processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.).

[45-1-1. Configuration of the Complete Function Initialization Means]
The complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) is called from the game start determination process included in the power-on process, which is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, as shown in Figure 632. The game start determination process is a process that determines whether or not it is possible to start a game, and details will be described later in Figure 634. The game start determination process is also executed when the power-on process or setting change is completed, and in this case it is called from the timer interrupt process. Details of the timing of executing the complete function initialization means will be described later.

Furthermore, the module for executing the game start determination process is located within the game area, while the module for executing the complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) is located outside the game area.

[45-1-2. Configuration of the Complete Function Control Means]
The complete function control means is a process that is periodically called during gameplay. The complete function control means includes a complete function process that is called from a timer interrupt process and sets up the execution of the complete function, and a complete function control process that is called from the complete function process and controls the complete function, such as determining when to stop the game. The complete function control process also calls processes that derive a count value for determining when to stop the game, and processes that transmit information (signals, commands) related to the complete function to an external source.

Furthermore, while the complete function control means (complete function processing) is called from a module (timer interrupt processing) located within the game area, the modules constituting the complete function processing are located outside the game area. Since the aforementioned complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting processing) is also located outside the game area, the main body of the module for executing the complete function is configured to be located outside the game area. Because the complete function execution means does not depend on lottery results, etc., placing it outside the game area allows it to be used commonly across different models, eliminating the need to develop duplicate complete function execution means and reducing the development cost of the gaming machine.

[45-2. Execution timing of the complete function execution means]
Next, the execution timing of the complete function execution means will be explained. The complete function execution means consists of a complete function initialization means and a complete function control means, and the execution timing of the control by each configuration will be explained below.

[45-2-1. Execution timing of the complete function initialization means]
The complete function initialization means initializes the settings necessary to start the complete function. Since the complete function is a function to prevent excessive awarding of prize balls (game value), initializing the complete function includes initializing values such as the number of award balls counted (awarded game value). Therefore, the complete function initialization means is executed at the start of gameplay, specifically when the game machine is powered on or when a setting change is made that alters the expected value of awarding prize balls.

First, let's explain the case where the complete function initialization means is executed when the gaming machine is powered on. Since the power-on process is executed first when the gaming machine is powered on, the complete function initialization means is called from the power-on process.

Figure 633 is a flowchart showing the power-on processing procedure in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The procedure from when the gaming machine's power is turned on until the complete function initialization means is executed will be described below.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 first performs the RAM protect permission setting (step 11TKS0010). An access-restricted area is set in the main control RAM 1312's memory area, and if the program attempts to access this restricted area during gameplay, an error occurs and a reset is performed. Considering the possibility of unstable power supply immediately after power-on, the access restriction on the main control RAM 1312 is lifted until gameplay begins and the gaming machine's initialization is complete. The RAM protect permission setting allows access to any area of the main control RAM 1312. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and the power outage clear signal is set (after being set to ON, it is set to OFF).

Furthermore, the memory area accessed by the main control MPU 1311 includes a memory area (game area) where programs for executing game control that affects game results, such as jackpot抽選 (lottery), are stored, and a memory area (outside the game area) where programs that do not directly affect game results are stored for outputting test signals, outputting game-related information from external output terminals, and displaying game information such as base values.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on startup confirmation process (step 11TKS0020). In this process, first, the power outage warning signal is read to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a predetermined register (power-on pre-wait setting-related switch acquisition process). After that, the system waits for a predetermined time (power-on wait process), and then the power outage warning signal is read again to confirm whether a power outage is occurring (post-power-on pre-wait main power outage warning signal confirmation process). If a power outage is detected, the system waits until the power voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes. Finally, the system checks whether the boards (wiring) connected to the main control board were reconnected before the power was cut off.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear determination process (step 11TKS0030). The RAM clear determination process checks the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power-on and determines whether the contents of the main control RAM 1312 were properly retained at the time of power-out. For example, it determines whether the settings information of the gaming machine and the contents of the main control RAM 1312 before the power outage were properly stored.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a setting operation determination process (step 11 TKS0040). This process detects whether a setting operation was performed and whether a RAM abnormality occurred before and after the gaming machine's power was turned off/on. Based on the detected state, the memory area is initialized as necessary. Note that, as described later, if the gaming machine does not have a setting function such as setting changes, the process in step TKS0040 is not executed, and the process itself may be omitted.

Specifically, if a setting change operation is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, or if the settings were changed before the machine was powered off, the settings will be set to the changed state, and then the memory areas within and outside the gaming area will be initialized. Furthermore, if a RAM error occurs, the memory areas within and outside the gaming area will be initialized. On the other hand, if a RAM error occurred before the machine was powered off, the memory areas within the gaming area will be initialized. Additionally, if the RAM clear switch has been operated, the memory areas within the gaming area will be initialized.

If no setting change operation has been performed, no RAM error has occurred, and the RAM clear switch has not been operated, and if a setting confirmation operation was performed when the gaming machine was powered on, the machine will be set to the setting confirmation state. Additionally, the state of the door at power-on is obtained, and if it is open, the stop reason number (PLAY_STOP_NO) is cleared to restore the game from the stopped state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs initialization processing (step 11TKS0050). This initialization process includes, for example, initial settings for various timers and initialization of settings for random number generation.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game start determination process (step 11TKS0060). The game start setting process determines whether or not the game can be started. If it is determined that the game can be started, it sets commands to be sent when the power is turned on (for example, power-on operation commands) and sets the initial data for power-on. The initial data setting also includes executing the complete function initialization setting process, which initializes the settings for executing the complete function. Details of the game start setting process are explained in Figure 634.

Once the game start determination process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 is set to allow the execution of interrupt processing, such as timer interrupts (step 11TKS0065). Furthermore, once the execution of interrupt processing is permitted, the main control side main processing (steps 11TKS0070, 11TKS0080) is executed. In the main control side main processing, first, a power outage warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power outage has occurred based on whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step 11TKS0070). If the power outage warning signal is not ON, power is being supplied normally, and the random number update process is executed (step 11TKS0080). The random number update process primarily updates random numbers other than those used for determining winning outcomes in special and normal lotteries. Note that if all random numbers are extracted by the hardware random number generator built into the main control MPU 1311, the process in step 11TKS0080 is unnecessary.

Meanwhile, when the main control MPU 1311 detects a power outage warning signal, it executes power outage processing (step 11TKS0090). Power outage processing includes tasks such as backing up data to restore the system to its state before the power outage.

The above describes the power-on process. Next, we will explain the details of the game start setting process, which actually invokes the complete function initialization means. Figure 634 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the game start determination process in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

When the game start determination process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the power-on operation command (step 11TKS0110). The power-on operation command notifies the system of information necessary for power-on processing, including, for example, the state of the gaming machine. Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the power-on initial data (step 11TKS0120). The power-on initial data includes backup information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming machine is playable upon power-on (step 11TKS0130). If it is not playable (the result of step 11TKS0130 is "NO"), the game start determination process ends, and the system returns to the power-on process. If it is not playable, this includes the time when settings are changed or confirmed in gaming machines equipped with setting functions. Note that if the game is stopped due to a magnet malfunction or other issue, the system may determine that it is playable again after the malfunction is resolved by restarting the power.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game can be played (the result of step 11TKS0130 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 specifies the RAM initialization game start data as the game start data (step 11TKS0140). Next, it determines whether the RAM has been cleared or the settings have been changed (step 11TKS0150). If it is not the case that the RAM has been cleared or the settings have been changed (the result of step 11TKS0150 is "NO"), i.e., to return to the state before the power was cut off, it specifies the power restoration game start data as the game start data (step 11TKS0160).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the specified game start data (step 11TKS0170). Furthermore, it sets the post-startup game start command (step 11TKS0180). The post-startup game start command specifies the information necessary to restore the system to its state before the power was cut off when resuming gameplay.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) to initialize the complete function (step 11TKS0180). Details of the complete function initialization setting process will be described later in Figure 639. Once the complete function initialization setting process is complete, the main control MPU 1311 terminates the game start determination process and returns to the calling process.

The above explains the game start determination process. This process is executed not only during power-on processing, but also after setting changes and setting confirmations are complete. Setting changes are executed not only when the game machine is powered on, but also when a predetermined setting change operation is performed after power-on. To execute a setting change after power-on (while gameplay is ongoing), it is called from the setting change/confirmation process, which is executed when a setting operation is detected in the timer interrupt processing.

The following describes the procedure from calling the game start determination process from the timer interrupt process after changing the settings to executing the complete function initialization means. Figure 635 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the timer interrupt process in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 has two types of register groups, Bank 0 and Bank 1. When timer interrupt processing starts, it first sets the register group in Bank 1 (Step 11TKS0210). Next, it reads the various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 and performs switch input processing to store the input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM 1312 (Step 11TKS0220). Furthermore, it performs setting value confirmation processing to determine whether the settings of the gaming machine are correct (Step 11TKS0230).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation has been received, or whether a RAM abnormality has occurred (step 11TKS0240). If a setting change operation or a setting confirmation operation has been received, or if a RAM abnormality has occurred (the result of step 11TKS0240 is "NO"), the setting operation processing is executed (step 11TKS0250).

During the setup operation process, the system performs operations to change or confirm the settings of the gaming machine. Figure 636 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the setup operation process in this embodiment. When the setup operation process begins, the main control MPU 1311 first loads the setup data for the setup operation and sets it to the corresponding output port (step 11TKS0410). Specifically, it outputs an OFF signal for power outage clearing and clears the ACK output port. Furthermore, it outputs OFF for the LED common port and LED cathode port, clears the motor port and solenoid port, and outputs a security signal.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the setting display process (step 11TKS0420). This process displays the set value and any RAM abnormalities on the performance display monitor. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes the setting confirmation/modification process (step 11TKS0430). The setting confirmation/modification process will be explained with reference to Figure 637.

Figure 637 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting confirmation/change processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. When the setting confirmation/change processing begins, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether a RAM abnormality has occurred (step 11TKS0440). If a RAM abnormality has occurred (the result of step 11TKS0440 is "YES"), it sets the power-on command (step 11TKS0450), terminates the setting confirmation/change processing, and returns to the setting operation processing. At this time, if the power-on command has already been sent, it may be omitted from sending the command again.

Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality occurs, it will be difficult to continue playing the game, so it may be necessary to forcibly interrupt subsequent processing by creating an infinite loop or similar mechanism. In this case, it may also be necessary to forcibly initialize the RAM and perform a power outage check.

On the other hand, if no RAM abnormality occurs (the result of step 11TKS0440 is "NO"), that is, if a setting change operation or setting confirmation operation (setting operation) is accepted, it is determined whether the setting key has been switched from "ON" to "OFF" (step 11TKS0460). If the setting key has not been switched from "ON" to "OFF" (the result of step 11TKS0460 is "NO"), the setting operation is in progress, and the setting value update process during setting change is executed (step 11TKS0470). In the setting value update process during setting change, the setting value is updated if the setting change operation is complete. After that, the setting confirmation/change process ends and the process returns to the setting operation process.

Furthermore, if the setting key is switched from "ON" to "OFF" (resulting in step 11TKS0460 as "NO"), the game-ready state is set as the setting state (step 11TKS0480). Then, the game start determination process is executed (step 11TKS0490), and after that, the setting confirmation/change process ends and the process returns to the setting operation process.

Thus, setting operations are accepted while gameplay is in progress, and after the setting operation is completed (after the setting key is switched from "ON" to "OFF"), the game start determination process is executed. As mentioned above, during the game start determination process, if a setting change has occurred, the complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) is executed, and gameplay resumes with the complete function initialized.

The above explains the timing at which the complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) can be executed from the timer interrupt process during gameplay. Note that processes not explained in Figure 635 regarding the timer interrupt process will be explained together when describing the procedure for executing the complete function execution means (complete function process).

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) may be executed when the gaming machine is powered on or when a setting change operation is performed during gameplay. Furthermore, some gaming machines do not have setting-related functions (setting change functions). Here, the timer interrupt processing in a gaming machine without setting-related functions will be explained. Figure 638 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing in a gaming machine without setting-related functions. Unlike the flowchart shown in Figure 635, the processing in step 11TKS0240 is not executed, nor are setting-related processing operations performed. If a RAM abnormality occurs, the game stop processing is executed as if a game stop factor has occurred in the processing of step 11TKS0260 (described later). Therefore, in a gaming machine without setting-related functions, the complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) is executed only when the power is turned on, and the complete function initialization setting process is always executed when a RAM clear is performed and the gaming machine's power is turned on again.

[45-2-2. Execution timing of the complete function control means]
Next, the execution timing of the complete function control means will be explained. The complete function control means controls the execution of the complete function. Specifically, it calculates a count value (MY value) based on the number of prize balls (awarded game value) and the number of balls that are out, etc., to determine whether or not to stop the game. When predetermined counting conditions are met, such as the count value reaching a predetermined specific value, it makes the necessary settings to stop the game. Therefore, the complete function control means is executed continuously while normal gameplay is in progress. Specifically, it is executed in the main loop processing during power-on processing and in the timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically during gameplay. Note that it may be executed in either the main loop processing or the timer interrupt processing, or both.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the complete function control means is configured to be executed by timer interrupt processing. The procedure leading up to the execution of the complete function control means will be explained with reference to the timer interrupt processing flowchart (Figure 635). Since the complete function control means is a function executed while normal gameplay is ongoing, it can be executed when no setting change operation or setting confirmation operation has been received and no RAM abnormality has occurred (the result of step 11TKS0240 is "YES"). Note that the processing up to step 11TKS0240 was explained when indicating the execution timing of the complete function initialization means; therefore, the timing of the execution of the complete function control means (complete function processing) will be shown while explaining the processing not described here.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the complete function is active (step 11TKS0255) if no setting change operation or setting confirmation operation has been received and no RAM abnormality has occurred (result of step 11TKS0240 is "YES"). If the complete function is not active (result of step 11TKS0255 is "NO"), it determines whether there is a game stop factor (step 11TKS0260). Game stop factors include, for example, detection of magnetism by the magnetic sensor (magnetic abnormality) or detection of vibration by the vibration sensor (vibration abnormality). If there is no game stop factor (result of step 11TKS0260 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the game-ready processing to control the progress of the game (step 11TKS0280).

In the game-ready processing, first, switch-related control processing is executed, which handles signals input from various switches and sensors installed in the gaming machine. This is followed by timer update processing, which updates various timers necessary for game progression, and prize ball control processing, which calculates the number of game balls (prize balls) to be dispensed. Next, frame command reception processing is executed, which stores received commands as information for transmission to the payout control board 951 and peripheral control board 1510, and generates commands. Fraud detection processing is also executed to detect fraudulent activity and abnormal conditions such as prize balls. Furthermore, after each start-out gate passage processing is executed, special symbol/special electric mechanism control processing is executed, which calls processing corresponding to the special symbol/electric mechanism operation number, including the big prize gate opening processing. Normal symbol/normal electric mechanism control processing is executed, which performs tasks such as drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to open the second start-out gate 2004. Finally, output data setting processing is executed, which outputs the output information set in each process from the output terminals of various output ports.

On the other hand, if the complete function is activated (the result of step 11TKS0255 is "YES"), or if there is a game stop factor (the result of step 11TKS0260 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the game stop processing (step 11TKS0270). The game stop processing executes the necessary processes to stop the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the game stop determination due to the occurrence of a game stop factor is performed after the game stop determination due to the activation of the complete function; however, the game stop determination due to the occurrence of a game stop factor may be performed first. However, if the game stop determination due to the occurrence of a game stop factor is performed first, the count value (MY value) will be initialized by executing a RAM clear operation by generating a game stop factor immediately before the activation of the complete function. Therefore, it is preferable to prioritize the activation of the complete function.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, since the machine's operation itself is normal when the game stops due to the activation of the complete function, the game stops due to the activation of the complete function and game stops due to fraudulent activity or malfunction are judged separately. This is because, while the game stops immediately in the event of an abnormality or other game stoppage factor, as described later, the game may not stop immediately even if the activation of the complete function is confirmed. This makes it easy to branch the processing based on the conditions under which the gaming machine stops.

Furthermore, the program uses different variables to store data indicating game stoppage due to an anomaly and data indicating game stoppage due to the activation of the complete function. This makes it possible to identify cases where an anomaly occurs due to fraudulent activity or a malfunction while the complete function is active, or where the complete function is activated while the process to stop the game is being executed due to an anomaly caused by fraudulent activity or a malfunction.

Furthermore, the activation of the "Complete" function may be handled in the program in the same way as factors that cause game cessation, such as fraudulent activity or malfunction. This allows for the standardization of the process for determining when to cessate gameplay, simplifying control. It also reduces the number of variables and processes within the program, thus suppressing an increase in program size.

When the game-ready processing or game-stopping processing is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the complete function processing (complete function control means) to control the complete function (step 11TKS0285). In this way, since the complete function processing (complete function control means) is executed after the game-stopping processing is executed, processing related to the complete function can be executed not only while the game is continuing, but also after the game has stopped (while the process of stopping the game is continuing). This makes it possible to execute the processing necessary to continue the complete function after the game has stopped and then resumed due to power-on or the like. The specific procedure for the complete function processing will be described later (Figure 641, etc.). Note that if the game stops due to a game-stopping factor, no prize judgment will be performed thereafter, so if the game balls continue to be launched after the game has stopped, only the detection of game balls by the out switch will be performed, and the count value (MY value) may be reduced by executing the complete function. For this reason, it is also possible to avoid executing the complete function-related processing after the game-stopping processing is executed.

When the complete function processing is complete, the operation status of the complete function, which was stored in the out-of-game complete function operation status area used outside the game area, is stored in the complete function operation status area used within the game area. Both the out-of-game complete function operation status area and the complete function operation status area store a value indicating whether the complete function was activated or not ("0FH" when the complete function is activated, "00H" when it is not activated). The operation status of the complete function is updated by the complete function processing executed outside the game area and is maintained both inside and outside the game area. This allows the operation status of the complete function to be checked by referring to the variable stored outside the game area, even if the variable inside the game area is initialized. Then, in step 11TKS0260, the value stored in the complete function operation status area is referenced, and if "0FH" is set, it is determined that there is a game stop factor and the game is stopped.

Furthermore, the value of the out-of-bounds complete signal output timer area, which is used outside the game area, is stored in the complete signal output timer area, which is used within the game area. The values stored in the out-of-bounds complete signal output timer area and the complete signal output timer area are timers used to determine whether or not to output an external output signal (security signal) when the complete function is activated. When the complete function is activated, a predetermined output time (for example, 30 seconds) is set.

In this way, by storing information using variables used for processing within the game area and processing outside the game area, it becomes possible to execute processing independently. Alternatively, processing may be executed based on the values in the "Out-of-Game Area Complete Function Activation Status Area" and "Out-of-Game Area Complete Signal Output Timer Area" without copying them to the "Complete Function Activation Status Area" and "Complete Signal Output Timer Area." In this case, the independence between processing within the game area and processing outside the game area is reduced, but since copying the values stored in each area becomes unnecessary, processing overhead is reduced and the program can be simplified.

Once the complete function processing is finished, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor process that displays various information (step 11TKS0290). Since the performance display monitor process is not directly related to game control, and the performance display monitor itself is not something the player intentionally refers to, the performance display monitor process is stored outside the game area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs display LED output processing (step 11TKS0300). Furthermore, after the display LED output processing or setting operation processing is completed, it performs test signal output processing to output a test signal to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine (step 11TKS0310).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes the anomaly detection command transmission process (step 10 TKS0820). The anomaly detection command transmission process is the process of sending the command set when an anomaly occurs.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 performs operations such as clearing the watchdog timer by setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step 10 TKS0830), and resetting the register bank to 0, thereby ending the timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, although the system is configured to execute the signal output process (step 11TKS0310) after the setting operation process is completed, it is also possible to execute the complete function process (step 11TKS0285) and subsequent processes even during the setting change, unless a RAM abnormality occurs. This allows the game to resume while the complete function is active, for example, when the setting change operation can be canceled and the game is restored to its state before stopping.

[45-3. Control Details of the Complete Function Execution Means]
The above describes the procedure for executing the complete function processing (complete function control means) from the timer interrupt processing. Next, we will describe the specific control of the complete function execution means. As mentioned above, the complete function execution means consists of a complete function initialization means and a complete function control means.

[45-3-1. Complete Function Initialization Means]
First, the complete function initialization means will be described. The complete function initialization means is executed when the main control MPU 1311 processes the complete function initialization setting process. Figure 639 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the complete function initialization setting process in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Figure 640 is the program code for the complete function initialization setting process in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

Since the complete function initialization setting process is a module located outside the game area, the main control MPU 1311 first saves the register values and stack pointer used during processing within the game area (step 11TKS0510).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a counter initialization process (step 11TKS0520) to initialize variables and various flags that store the count value (MY value) for executing the complete function initialization means. In the counter initialization process, in addition to the count value (MY value), the operation judgment value based on the MY value is cleared, a buffer for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1530 is initialized, and a flag indicating that the count value has reached a specific value that activates the complete function is set to "not reached".

Furthermore, the initialization of variables and flags during the counter initialization process may be performed simultaneously with the initialization of variables and flags unrelated to the complete function. For example, when initializing variables and flags within the game area, variables and flags outside the game area are initialized, but variables and flags related to the complete function are initialized at this time. In this case, the variables and flags outside the game area that are initialized include variables for abnormality detection and variables related to test signals, but do not include variables and flags related to the performance display monitor. In other words, even when initializing variables and flags within the game area, some variables and flags outside the game area are initialized (areas), while others are not (areas). This allows the display content of the performance display monitor to be maintained even after initialization, and makes it possible to check the cause of the shutdown before power-on as needed, even after the game machine is powered back on.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the complete function was activated before the power cut-off (step 11TKS0530). If the complete function was activated (result of step 11TKS0530 is "YES"), the pre-power cut-off complete function activation processing is executed to set an output time (e.g., 30 seconds) in the out-of-bounds complete signal output timer area and output a complete function activation signal (step 11TKS0540).

If the complete function was not activated before the power outage (the result of step 11TKS0530 is "NO"), or if the pre-power outage complete function activation process has finished, the main control MPU 1311 restores the values of registers, etc., that were saved in step 11TKS0510 (step 11TKS0550). After that, the complete function initialization setting process (complete function initialization means) is terminated.

As described above, the complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) initializes variables, etc., necessary for executing the complete function before gameplay begins. Furthermore, the complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) is executed when a setting change is performed or when power is turned on accompanied by a RAM clear. When resuming gameplay from the state before the power outage, the complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process) is not executed, and the count value (MY value) is maintained, allowing the complete function to operate correctly even if the power is illegally cut off.

[45-3-2. Complete Function Control Means]
Next, the specific control procedure of the complete function control means will be explained. As mentioned above, the complete function stops the game when predetermined counting conditions are met, such as when the count value (MY value), which is calculated based on the number of game balls (game media) consumed and the number of prize balls won by the player during normal gameplay, exceeds a specific value. The complete function control means controls the complete function and consists of the complete function processing (timer interrupt processing step 11TKS0285) and the processing called from the complete function processing. The complete function processing is the entry point for executing the complete function and is located outside the game area. Similarly, the processing called from the complete function processing is also located outside the game area. The following describes each of the processes that constitute the complete function control means.

(Complete function processing)
First, let's explain the complete function processing. Figure 641 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the complete function processing. Figure 642 is the program code for the complete function processing. As mentioned above, the complete function processing is executed by a module located outside the game area, and it performs the necessary preparations for executing the complete function and the processing to return to processing within the game area.

The main control MPU 1311 first saves the register values and stack pointer used during processing within the game area (step 11TKS0610). Next, it updates the complete signal output timer (step 11TKS0620). The complete signal output timer is used to measure the output time of the signal output externally during the initialization of the complete function (step 11TKS0540 in Figure 642) and during operation (step 11TKS0810 in Figure 646). While the complete signal is being output, the timer value is decremented by 1 in step 11TKS0620. When the complete signal output timer value reaches 0, the output of the complete signal is stopped.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the complete function is active or not (step 11TKS0630). Whether the complete function is active or not is determined by whether a predetermined variable (EX_CMP_STOP_NO) is set. If the complete function is not active (the result of step 11TKS0630 is "NO"), the complete function control process is executed (step 11TKS0640). The complete function control process is the process that actually controls the complete function, and its details will be described later.

If the complete function is active (the result of step 11TKS0640 is "YES"), or after the completion of the complete function control process, the main control MPU 1311 restores the values of registers, etc., that were saved in step 11TKS0610 (step 11TKS0650). Afterward, the complete function control means (complete function processing) terminates, and the process returns to the caller's processing (timer interrupt processing).

(Complete function control processing)
Next, we will explain the complete function control process, which actually controls the complete function. Figure 643 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the complete function control process. Figure 644 is the program code for the complete function control process.

When the complete function control process is initiated, the main control MPU 1311 first executes an MY value calculation process (step 11TKS0710) to calculate a count value for determining whether or not to activate the complete function. As mentioned above, the count value (MY value) is the difference between the minimum and maximum values of the difference in game balls (launched balls or out balls) consumed during the game and the value counted based on prize balls, within the measurement period (after the complete function initialization means is executed). The procedure for calculating the count value (MY value) will be described later, referring to the flowchart of the MY value calculation process (Figure 645).

The main control MPU 1311, upon calculating the count value (MY value), executes an operation determination value calculation process (step 11TKS0720) to determine whether or not to activate the complete function. The operation determination value is used to determine whether or not to activate the complete function. The operation determination value does not need to be exactly the same as the count value (MY value); a certain degree of error is acceptable. For example, if the complete function is activated when the count value (MY value) exceeds 95000, and an error of 100 is to be allowed, the count value (MY value) is divided by 100, and the decimal part is truncated to determine whether or not to activate the complete function. For example, if the count value (MY value) is 86158, then 86158/100 = 861 is used as the operation determination value.

Furthermore, the activation judgment value may be calculated only when the count value (MY value) exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 75000), rather than calculating the activation judgment value until the count value (MY value) approaches a specific value that triggers the complete function. For example, if the count value (MY value) is 86158, the activation judgment value may be (86158 - 75000) / 100 = 111. If the complete function is activated when the count value (MY value) exceeds 95000, then the complete function is determined to be activated when the activation judgment value exceeds (95000 - 75000) / 100 = 200. This configuration allows the activation judgment value to be stored in a single byte, reducing the number of instructions required for program (assembler) execution and thus speeding up processing. Therefore, the predetermined value that serves as the boundary for the count value (MY value) used to calculate the activation judgment value is not limited to 75000; any value that results in a single-byte activation judgment value is acceptable.

Furthermore, if the count value (MY value) is less than a predetermined value, the activation judgment value may be set to 0, or a separate flag may be set. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the activation judgment value calculation flag is set when the count value (MY value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The procedure for calculating the activation judgment value will be described later, referring to the flowchart of the activation judgment value calculation process (Figure 649).

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the operation determination value calculation flag is set after the operation determination value calculation process is completed (step 11TKS0730). If the operation determination value calculation flag is not set (the result of step 11TKS0730 is "NO"), it determines that the operation determination value has not been calculated correctly, terminates the complete function control process, and returns to the complete function process. The main control MPU 1311 in this embodiment of the gaming machine has a built-in dedicated division function, and if the calculation fails using this function, it is output as a status. The operation determination value calculation flag is set based on the outputted status.

On the other hand, if the operation judgment value calculation flag is set, i.e., if the operation judgment value can be calculated successfully (the result of step 11TKS0730 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the operation judgment value is equal to or greater than the operation threshold that activates the complete function (step 11TKS0740). If the operation judgment value is less than the operation threshold that activates the complete function (the result of step 11TKS0740 is "NO"), the processing from step 11TKS0780 onwards is executed. Note that the operation threshold corresponds to a specific value, and the count value (MY value) reaches the specific value when the operation judgment value reaches the operation threshold.

Furthermore, if the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the complete function activation flag is set (step 11TKS0750) if the activation judgment value is equal to or greater than the threshold for activating the complete function (result of step 11TKS0740 is "YES"). If the complete function activation flag is already set (result of step 11TKS0750 is "YES"), the process from step 11TKS0780 onwards is executed because the activation judgment value has already reached the specific value for activating the complete function.

Furthermore, if the complete function activation flag is not already set (the result of step 11TKS0750 is "NO"), the activation judgment value has reached the activation threshold for activating the complete function for the first time, and the complete function activation flag is set (step 11TKS0760). In addition, the transmission setting for the complete function activation notification command is configured (step 11TKS0770). The transmission setting for the complete function activation notification command involves setting the complete function activation notification command in the command buffer. By transmitting the complete function activation notification command to the peripheral control board 1510, it becomes possible to execute an animation on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 to announce the activation of the complete function, or to output a specific sound to announce the activation of the complete function.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the complete function activation flag is set (step 11TKS0780). If the complete function activation flag is set (result of step 11TKS0780 is "YES"), it further determines whether the complete function is in a state where it can be activated immediately (the conditions for continuing the game are not met) (step 11TKS0790).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the game continues even when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value (for example, 95,000) as long as predetermined continuation conditions are met. For example, if the game were to end immediately when the predetermined counting conditions for activating the complete function were met while a jackpot game was in progress, the player's enjoyment of the game might be significantly diminished. In such cases, the game is stopped at the moment the conditions for continuing the game are no longer met. For example, if a jackpot game is in progress, the complete function is activated and the game is stopped at the moment the jackpot game ends.

If the complete function is not immediately available (the result of step 11 TKS0790 is "NO"), that is, if the conditions for continuing the game are met, the main control MPU 1311 terminates the complete function control process and returns to the complete function process.

If the complete function is immediately ready to operate (the result of step 11TKS0790 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the game to stop by activating the complete function (step 11TKS0800). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a signal indicating that the complete function has been activated for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) (step 11TKS0810). Afterward, the complete function control process ends, and the system returns to the complete function process.

On the other hand, if the complete function activation flag is not set (the result of step 11TKS0780 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the complete function command transmission process, which sends a command according to the count value (MY value), etc. (step 11TKS0820). The complete function command transmission process sends commands according to the situation before and after the activation of the complete function. Here, since the state is before the activation of the complete function, the transmission setting for the complete function remaining ball count command, which notifies the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated, is performed. Details of the complete function command transmission process will be described later in Figure 650. Once the complete function command transmission process is completed, the complete function control process ends and the system returns to the complete function process.

[45-3-3. Means for calculating count values to control the complete function]
The procedure for controlling the complete function has been explained above. Next, the procedure for calculating the parameters for controlling the complete function will be explained. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the operation of the complete function is controlled based on the count value (MY value). Furthermore, the operation determination of the complete function is based on the operation determination value calculated based on the count value (MY value).

[45-3-3a. Count Value (MY Value)]
First, let's explain the count value (MY value). As mentioned above, the count value (MY value) is the difference between the number of game balls consumed in the game (launched balls or out balls) and the number of prize balls, and is calculated by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value of the difference in game balls since the start of the game. Below, we will explain the procedure for calculating the count value (MY value) with reference to the flowchart (Figure 645) and program code (Figure 646) of the MY value calculation process.

(MY value calculation process)
Figure 645 is a flowchart showing the procedure for calculating the MY value. Figure 646 is the program code for calculating the MY value. As mentioned above, the MY value calculation process is executed after the start of the complete function control process (Figure 643) but before various controls are performed.

The main control MPU 1311 first sets the switches that are subject to determination for determining whether or not a game ball has passed through, for switches related to the increase or decrease of game balls (step 11 TKS0910). Specifically, it sets the records in the out-of-bounds switch information data table, where the number of prize balls awarded for each switch is defined.

To further explain the out-of-bounds switch information data table, it is referenced by processes executed outside the game area. Furthermore, it may be used not only for the complete function but also for other processes executed outside the game area, such as base calculation and performance display monitor-related processes.

Figure 647 shows an example of an out-of-bounds switch information data table. The out-of-bounds switch information data table includes switches that pass through the payout gate in addition to the payout gates that award prize balls. Switches that change (add/subtract) the MY value (difference in balls) are commonly defined. Furthermore, the out-of-bounds switch information data table stores a record (data) for each switch.

Each record contains the address of the switch's input information, bit data to identify the detection result of the corresponding switch from the input information, the number of prize balls, and whether or not there are prize balls (effective prize ball mask data). The switch's input information is the edge information of the target switch, and the address where that edge information is stored is set. Figure 648 shows an example of the configuration of the switch's input information, where (A) is when a prize is awarded at the right start slot, and (B) is when an out switch is detected. Also, if the effective prize ball mask data is "FFFFH", it is determined that there are no prize balls.

In step 11, TKS0910, the record included in the out-of-bounds switch information data table is set as the target switch. Then, the data contained in the set record is referenced, and if the switch detects the passage of a game ball, the MY value is increased, decreased (or maintained) based on the set information.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the target switch has detected the passage of a game ball (step 11TKS0920). Specifically, this is determined based on the input information and bit data of the switch included in the set record. For example, when processing the right start gate switch, referring to Figures 647 and 648(A), the input information (INPUT_EDG1) is "00000010" and the bit data is "1". Referring to the value of the first bit of the input information, which is "1", it can be determined that the right start gate switch has detected the passage of a game ball.

The main control MPU 1311, upon detecting (passing) the target switch (resulting in "YES" in step 11TKS0920), determines whether the target switch is one that generates prize balls (step 11TKS0930). If the switch does not change the count value (MY value), the process branches to step 11TKS0960.

The main control MPU 1311 performs an MY value addition process (step 11TKS0940) to add the count value (MY value) if there are prize balls (the result of step 11TKS0930 is "YES"). On the other hand, if there are no prize balls (the result of step 11TKS0930 is "NO"), it performs an MY value subtraction process (step 11TKS0950) to subtract the count value (MY value).

In the MY value subtraction process, 1 is subtracted from the count value (MY value) when the ball passes through the out-out

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there are any remaining switches to be detected (step 11TKS0960). If there are remaining switches to be detected (result of step 11TKS0960 is "YES"), processing is executed from step 11TKS0910 for the next target switch. If there are no more switches to be detected (result of step 11TKS0960 is "NO"), the MY value calculation process ends and the process returns to the complete function control process.

[45-3-3b. Activation Judgment Value]
The procedure for calculating the count value (MY value) has been explained above. Next, the activation judgment value will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the count value (MY value) reaches the upper limit (95000), the complete function is activated and the game is stopped. The count value (MY value) can, in principle, take values from 0 to 95000, but if it reaches the upper limit during a jackpot game, the game will not be stopped until the jackpot game state ends. Therefore, it can take values greater than the upper limit (95000), and a 3-byte area is reserved to store values exceeding the upper limit (95000). On the other hand, the activation judgment value is a value calculated based on the count value (MY value) by the procedure described later, and is stored in a 1-byte area. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the activation of the complete function is determined not by the 3-byte count value (MY value), but by the 1-byte activation judgment value. Alternatively, the operation of the complete function can be determined using the count value (MY value) as is, remaining at 3 bytes. This simplifies control by reducing the number of variables used in the program. However, since there is no instruction to directly compare 3-byte values, numerical conversion and multi-stage comparison are necessary, which increases the program size compared to using an operation determination value.

(Calculation process for activation judgment value)
Next, the procedure for calculating the operation judgment value will be explained with reference to the diagram. Figure 649 is a flowchart showing the procedure for calculating the operation judgment value. First, the main control MPU 1311 temporarily sets the judgment value calculation flag to "NG" (calculation impossible) as the initial value (step 11 TKS 1010).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the count value (MY value) is 65536 or greater (step 11TKS1020). As mentioned above, since the count value (MY value) is 3 bytes, the most significant byte becomes "1" when storing a value of 65536 or greater. If the count value (MY value) is less than 65536 (the result of step 11TKS1020 is "NO"), the complete function clearly will not operate, so the determination value calculation process ends with the determination value calculation flag set to "NG", and the process returns to the complete function control process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the count value (MY value) is equal to or greater than the activation threshold that allows for the prediction of the complete function's activation (step 11TKS1030) if the count value (MY value) is 65536 or greater (resulting in "YES" in step 11TKS1030). The activation threshold is set to a value greater than 65536 and less than the upper limit (95000). In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the activation threshold is set to 75000. Furthermore, when the count value (MY value) reaches the activation threshold, a signal output process (step 11TKS0310) called from the timer interrupt process (Figure 635), as described later, outputs a pre-activation signal for the complete function to the outside. At this time, a command notifying that the complete function is about to activate may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510, making it possible to execute a visual effect that indicates the completion function is about to activate.

If the count value (MY value) is less than the operation judgment threshold (the result of step 11 TKS1030 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates the operation judgment value calculation process with the judgment value calculation flag set to "NG" and returns to the complete function control process.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the operation judgment value (step 11TKS1040) if the count value (MY value) is equal to or greater than the operation judgment threshold (the result of step 11TKS1030 is "YES"). Specifically, the operation judgment value is obtained by subtracting the operation judgment threshold (75000) from the count value (MY value) and dividing by 100. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, since the prize ball value is not added when the count value (MY value) exceeds the upper limit (95000), the operation judgment value will not significantly exceed 200. Therefore, the operation judgment value can be stored in a 1-byte area (255 or less).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the operation judgment value was calculated correctly (step 11TKS1050). If the operation judgment value was not calculated correctly (the result of step 11TKS1050 is "NO"), the operation judgment value calculation process ends with the judgment value calculation flag set to "NG", and the system returns to the complete function control process. As mentioned above, the operation judgment value calculation flag is set based on the status of a dedicated division function built into the main control MPU 1311.

On the other hand, if the operation judgment value is calculated correctly (the result of step 11 TKS 1050 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the judgment value calculation flag to "OK" (calculated correctly) (step 11 TKS 1060), terminates the operation judgment value calculation process, and returns to the complete function control process.

By configuring it as described above, the range of the activation judgment value becomes 1 byte (255 or less), which reduces the storage capacity of the variable that stores the activation judgment value, thereby suppressing increases in program size and memory consumption during program execution.

[45-3-4. Commands related to the complete function]
Next, the commands related to the complete function will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, commands related to the operation of the complete function are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the command performs effects and displays according to the received command. Specifically, a complete function activation command is sent to notify that the complete function has been activated, a complete function activation notification command is sent to give advance notice (notify) that the complete function will be activated, a remaining ball count display specification command is sent to notify the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated, and a remaining ball count display cancellation command is sent to instruct the cancellation of the display of the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated. Note that the aforementioned pre-operation notification command may be sent when the count value exceeds the activation determination threshold.

(Complete function activation command)
The complete function activation command is sent when the complete function is activated. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the complete function activation command, it notifies the player that the complete function has been activated. The display when the complete function is activated will be described later.

(Complete function activation notification command)
As mentioned above, the Complete Function Activation Notification command is sent by the Complete Function Control Processing (Step 11 TKS0770). The condition for sending the Complete Function Activation Notification command is that the count value (MY value) first reaches a specific value that activates the Complete Function. After this, even if the game continues with the count value (MY value) exceeding the threshold due to reasons such as the continuation of a jackpot game state, and the state of exceeding the specific value is maintained, the Complete Function Activation Notification command will not be sent again until the count value (MY value) is initialized.

By configuring the system as described above, it becomes possible to announce the activation of the completion function at the appropriate time. An example of the completion function activation announcement will be described later. Furthermore, since the completion function activation announcement command is not resent after the initial threshold (specific value) is exceeded, excessive execution of the announcement animation can be suppressed, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(Commands to specify and disable the display of remaining balls)
The remaining ball count display specification command and the remaining ball count display cancellation command are commands that are sent when the number of remaining balls before the complete function is activated meets predetermined conditions during the process in which the count value (MY value) is being updated by the complete function. The decision to send the remaining ball count display specification command and the remaining ball count display cancellation command may be based on the count value (MY value) or on the activation determination value.

The remaining ball count display specification command is a command used to transmit the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated to the peripheral control board 1510 when the count value (MY value) exceeds the remaining ball count transmission threshold. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a visual effect based on the notified remaining ball count, such as a countdown effect, to inform the player that the complete function is about to activate. The remaining ball count display specification command is not transmitted if the remaining ball count display has not changed before the complete function is activated. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the specific value at which the complete function activates is set to 95000, while the remaining ball count transmission threshold is set to 90000.

The remaining ball count display cancellation command is a command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 to cancel the display of the remaining ball count until the completion function is activated. This command is sent when the number of game balls consumed exceeds the number of prize balls, and the count value (MY value) becomes greater than the display cancellation value until the completion function is activated. The display cancellation value is set to a value greater than the remaining ball count transmission threshold, preventing frequent switching between displaying and canceling the remaining ball count as the count value changes near the transmission threshold. For example, if the remaining ball count transmission threshold is 90000, the display of the remaining ball count will start when the count value (MY value) exceeds 90000, and will be canceled when the count value (MY value) falls below 89800 (display cancellation value).

(Complete function command transmission process)
The remaining ball count display specification command and the remaining ball count display cancellation command described above are transmitted by the complete function command transmission process. The procedure for the complete function command transmission process will be described below with reference to the diagrams. Figure 650 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the complete function command transmission process. Figure 651 is the program code for the complete function command transmission process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the activation judgment value is greater than the remaining ball count transmission threshold (step 11 TKS 1110). While the determination could also be made using the count value (MY value) itself, since the activation judgment value changes by 1 when the change in the count value (MY value) is 100, this method prevents the transmission frequency from becoming too high when sending commands in response to value changes. Furthermore, although the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to notify the player each time a command is received, the notification of the remaining ball count does not necessarily need to be based on a precise value for determining whether execution is possible. Additionally, since the remaining ball count is displayed in units of 100 in this gaming machine, calculating the remaining ball count from the activation judgment value makes processing easier.

If the activation determination value is greater than the remaining ball count transmission threshold (the result of step 11 TKS 1110 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the activation determination value has reached the activation threshold for the complete function, i.e., whether the complete function is activated (step 11 TKS 1120).

If the complete function is activated (the result of step 11 TKS1120 is "YES"), or if the activation judgment value is less than the remaining ball count transmission threshold (the result of step 11 TKS1110 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates the complete function command transmission process and returns to the complete function control process.

If the complete function is not activated (the result of step 11TKS1120 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether there has been a change in the activation judgment value since the last command transmission (step 11TKS1130). If there has been no change in the activation judgment value (the result of step 11TKS1130 is "NO"), the complete function command transmission process is terminated, and the system returns to the complete function control process. This control method suppresses the duplicate transmission of the same command and reduces the load on the game control system.

If there is a change in the activation judgment value (the result of step 11TKS1130 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 stores the activation judgment value in the transmission command save buffer for comparison during the next command transmission (step 11TKS1140). At this time, it is not necessary to store the activation judgment value itself; for example, the difference between the activation threshold of the complete function and the activation judgment value (the remaining ball value) may be used, or any value corresponding to the activation judgment value. In this case, when determining the change in the activation judgment value in step 11TKS1130, the remaining ball value is calculated, and the change in the activation judgment value can be determined by comparing the calculated remaining ball value with the value stored in the transmission command save buffer (the remaining ball value at the time of the previous command transmission). Furthermore, by multiplying the remaining ball value by 100, an approximate value of the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated can be obtained.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the activation judgment value has decreased (step 11TKS1150). If the activation judgment value (count value (MY value)) has decreased (the result of step 11TKS1150 is "YES"), a command to specify the remaining ball count is generated by adding 1 to the remaining ball value in the command to be transmitted, corresponding to the decrease in the activation judgment value (step 11TKS1160). On the other hand, if the activation judgment value has increased (the result of step 11TKS1150 is "NO"), a command to specify the remaining ball count is generated by using the remaining ball value in the command to be transmitted (step 11TKS1170).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 consist of a command identification information (status) in the upper byte and a specific numerical value (MODE value) corresponding to the identification information in the lower byte. For the remaining ball count display specification command, the upper byte (status) contains the identification information for the remaining ball count display specification command, and the lower byte (MODE value) contains a value corresponding to the remaining ball count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the MODE value of the remaining ball count display specification command exceeds the display cancellation value (step 11 TKS 1180). The display cancellation value is the maximum value of the MODE value when the remaining ball count display specification command is sent. If the number of remaining balls at which the remaining ball count switches from hidden to displayed is set to the same value, the display/hide of the remaining ball count may switch frequently, potentially increasing the load on the display control and making the screen display difficult to see, thus reducing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, for example, when displaying the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated at 5000 balls remaining (sending the remaining ball count display specification command), the display of the remaining ball count continues until 5200 game balls are consumed. This ensures that a certain amount of time is required after the display/hide of the remaining ball count switches, thus resolving the aforementioned problems.

The main control MPU 1311 sets the remaining ball count display cancellation command to a predetermined area (step 11TKS1190) if the MODE value of the remaining ball count display specification command exceeds the display cancellation value (result of step 11TKS1180 is "YES"). On the other hand, if the MODE value of the remaining ball count display specification command does not exceed the display cancellation value (result of step 11TKS1180 is "NO"), it sets the remaining ball count display specification command to a predetermined area (step 11TKS1200). Furthermore, it executes out-of-area command buffer storage processing to transmit the command set in the predetermined area (step 11TKS1210). After that, it terminates the complete function command transmission processing and returns to the complete function control processing.

The above explains the procedure for sending the complete function command. Now, we will explain the control performed by the complete function command transmission process by applying specific numerical values. First, we will explain each variable and threshold.

In step 11, the TKS1110 process compares the activation judgment value with the remaining ball count transmission threshold. If the activation judgment value is greater than the remaining ball count transmission threshold, a command such as a remaining ball count display specification command is sent. The activation judgment value is calculated as (count value (MY value) - activation judgment threshold) / 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number), and in this embodiment, the activation judgment threshold is 75000. Furthermore, if the count value (MY value) is greater than the activation judgment threshold, the judgment value calculation flag is set to "OK," and the activation judgment value is calculated. Conversely, if the count value (MY value) is less than or equal to the activation judgment threshold, the judgment value calculation flag is set to "NG," and the activation judgment value is not calculated.

For example, if the count value (MY value) is 48,000, the judgment value calculation flag is set to "NG," and no activation judgment value is calculated. On the other hand, if the count value (MY value) is 91,000, since it is greater than the activation judgment threshold (75,000), the judgment value calculation flag is set to "OK," and the activation judgment value becomes (91,000 - 75,000) / 100 = 160. Therefore, when the count value (MY value) reaches 75,000, an activation judgment value of 0 is calculated, and when the count value (MY value) reaches the specific value (95,000) that activates the complete function, it becomes (95,000 - 75,000) / 100 = 200 (activation threshold). The calculation of the activation judgment value and the setting of the judgment value calculation flag are performed in the activation judgment value calculation process (Figure 640).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the remaining ball count transmission threshold is set to 140. If the activation judgment value is greater than 140, the processing from step 11TKS1120 onwards is executed. When the activation judgment value is 140, the count value (MY value) becomes 89000.

Furthermore, when determining the activation of the complete function in step 11 (TKS1120), it is also possible to determine whether the activation determination value has reached the activation threshold (200).

In step 11, the TKS1140 process stores the remaining ball value in the command save buffer. The remaining ball value is calculated by subtracting the activation judgment value from the activation threshold (200). For example, if the count value (MY value) is 91000, the activation judgment value is 160, and the remaining ball value is 200 - 160 = 40. At this point, since the number of remaining balls until the complete function activates only needs to be an estimate, multiplying the remaining ball value by 100 gives us 4000 balls.

Furthermore, when the number of remaining balls before the complete function is activated reaches 5000, the remaining number of balls (approximate value) is displayed based on the remaining ball display specification command. At this time, if the number of remaining balls increases due to the consumption of game balls, the display of the remaining number of balls (approximate value) is canceled. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the display of the remaining number of balls (approximate value) is canceled when the number of remaining balls reaches 6000. In the processing of step 11TKS1180, it is determined whether the MODE value exceeds the display cancellation value. In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is displayed when the number of remaining balls is 5000, and the display of the remaining number of balls is canceled when the complete function is activated or when the number of remaining balls reaches 5200 or more. The display cancellation value is set to 52, which corresponds to the remaining ball value when the number of remaining balls is 5200.

(Out-of-bounds command buffer storage process)
Next, we will explain the process of storing commands in the out-of-bounds command buffer. The commands processed in the out-of-bounds command buffer are mainly those sent for error handling and those sent for the complete function.

The commands sent during error handling are transmitted in the event of fraudulent activity or a malfunction. Examples include a hardware error command to notify of a hardware malfunction, a large prize slot malfunction command to notify of a large prize slot malfunction, a door open command to notify of a door opening, and a door closed command to notify of a door closing. Furthermore, if sensors are installed to detect fraudulent activity using magnets or radio waves, commands such as a magnet error command to notify of a magnet malfunction and a radio wave error command to notify of a radio wave malfunction are also included.

Furthermore, the commands sent by the complete function include, as mentioned above, the complete function activation command, the complete function activation notification command, the (complete function) remaining ball count display cancellation command, and the (complete function) remaining ball count display specification command.

In the out-of-bounds command buffer storage process, as described above, commands stored in a predetermined area are stored in the out-of-bounds command buffer. This predetermined area may be a memory area provided by RAM 1312, or it may be a register of the main control MPU 1311. Since accessing registers is faster than accessing RAM 1312, if the out-of-bounds command buffer storage process is executed immediately after command generation, storing the generated command in a register can improve processing speed.

Commands stored in the out-of-bounds command buffer are transmitted via the timer interrupt processing (Figure 635) in the invalid detection command transmission process (step 11 TKS0320). The number of unsent commands is cleared after each command transmission.

Furthermore, there is an upper limit to the number of commands that can be stored in the out-of-bounds command buffer. During the out-of-bounds command buffer storage process, the number of unsent commands is counted, and if the maximum value has been reached when storing a new command, the process terminates without storing the command in the out-of-bounds command buffer. The commands stored in the out-of-bounds command buffer are not directly related to the progress of the game; they are notifications regarding fraudulent activity and the activation of the complete function. Therefore, it is not a problem if commands are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, if fraudulent activity is detected, the game is stopped, and even if it is not announced on the display screen, the player can be notified through lamps or sound output. Also, with commands related to the complete function, even if there is a slight omission in the notification of the remaining number of balls until the complete function is activated, it has little impact on the progress of the game.

Commands created through processing within the game area are stored in the in-area command buffer. Both the in-area command buffer and the out-of-area command buffer are buffers for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510. Commands stored in each command buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the same serial communication means. Furthermore, commands are sent from each command buffer to the serial communication means (FIFO) within the same timer interrupt processing, and serial communication is performed in the order they are received. Therefore, the timing of setting commands in the serial communication means and the timing of actually transmitting them to the peripheral control board 1510 are different.

[45-4. Controlling the presentation when receiving commands related to the complete function]
The above explains the commands output in relation to the complete function. Next, we will explain the control of the effects before and during the operation of the complete function. Below, we will explain the notification methods, including screen displays, when a command is received, and the control when a command is received while an effect involving the movement of a movable body is being executed.

[45-4-1. Execution of notifications based on command reception]
When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command related to the complete function from the main control board 1310, it executes a notification based on the received command. Notifications related to the complete function include a pre-activation notification of the complete function, which is executed before the complete function is activated, and a complete function activation notification, which is executed when the complete function is activated.

The notification before the completion function is activated is performed when the peripheral control board 1510 receives either the "Complete Function Remaining Ball Count" command or the "Complete Function Activation Pre-announcement" command. Note that the notification pattern differs depending on whether the "Complete Function Remaining Ball Count" command is received (remaining ball count notification) or the "Complete Function Activation Pre-announcement" command is received (complete function activation pre-announcement notification). Furthermore, the notification of the completion function activation is performed when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the "Complete Function Activation" command.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine the notification content according to the game state when it receives a command related to the complete function. For example, if the game state is in a jackpot state when the complete function activation command is received, it may be treated as a complete function activation notification command, and a complete function activation notification may be executed. With this configuration, it is only necessary to control the system to send the complete function activation command (complete function activation notification command) regardless of whether the game state is in a jackpot state or not when the activation judgment value reaches the activation threshold (the count value (MY value) is a specific value (95000)), thus unifying the complete function activation notification command and the complete function activation command. Therefore, the main control board 1310 does not need to perform control to send the complete function activation notification command, simplifying game control. If the game state is not a jackpot state (i.e., a game state in which the complete function can be activated), a complete function activation notification should be executed.

Furthermore, if the game is in a winning state, the main control board 1310 may send a complete function activation notification command, and the peripheral control board 1510 may execute a complete function activation notification to inform the player that the complete function is about to activate. Conversely, if the game is not in a winning state, the main control board 1310 may send a complete function activation command, and the peripheral control board 1510 may execute a complete function activation notification. Note that when sending a complete function activation notification command, the complete function activation command is sent when the complete function is activated.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the game is in a jackpot state, the main control board 1310 may transmit a complete function activation command (or a complete function activation notification command) when the activation judgment value reaches the activation threshold (the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value (95000)), and the peripheral control board 1510 may execute a complete function activation notification regardless of the game state. Even in this case, since the jackpot state continues until the termination condition is met, it is desirable to ensure that the player can understand the progress of the jackpot state while the complete function activation notification is being executed.

As described above, the main control board 1310 may send commands according to the game state, and the peripheral control board 1510 may execute notifications in accordance with the received commands. Alternatively, the peripheral control board 1510 may execute notifications based on the game state and received commands while limiting the types of commands sent from the main control board 1310. Specific examples of notifications executed by the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained below with reference to the drawings.

(Remaining ball count announcement)
Figure 652 shows an example of a screen displaying the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command to specify the number of remaining balls to display from the main control board 1310, it displays the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated (remaining balls notification) based on the value set in the MODE value of the command. As mentioned above, the MODE value of the command to specify the number of remaining balls to display for the complete function is set to the value obtained by dividing the number of remaining balls by 100, and the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is calculated and displayed based on this MODE value.

Upon receiving the command to display the remaining ball count, the remaining ball count notification will begin. The remaining ball count can be displayed every 100 balls, but it can also be set to display at other intervals, such as every 200 balls. Furthermore, after receiving the command to display the remaining ball count, no lights will illuminate or sound will be output, other than displaying the remaining ball count on the screen. This is because, in situations such as during a jackpot, the command to display the remaining ball count is sent frequently, which could disrupt the normal gameplay.

Furthermore, since normal gameplay continues while the remaining ball count notification is running (until the completion function is activated), the screen is configured so that the remaining ball count notification does not obstruct decorative symbols or the hold display. Also, even if the game transitions to a waiting state, i.e., a demo, while the remaining ball count notification is running, the notification continues. This allows players to recognize that gameplay may stop immediately when they attempt to start a new game, preventing disappointment such as the game stopping immediately after the first jackpot.

The display of remaining balls is canceled when the count value (MY value) reaches the value (specific value) that activates the complete function, or when the number of remaining balls exceeds a predetermined value due to the consumption of game balls. When the count value (MY value) reaches the value (specific value) that activates the complete function, this may be because the complete function activation command, which is sent when the complete function is activated, has been received, or because the complete function activation notification command, which is sent when gameplay continues after the count value (MY value) reaches the specific value, has been received.

Furthermore, after the completion function's remaining ball count notification is executed, the execution of the pre-announcement may be suppressed for a specific period. This specific period may be the period during which the completion function's remaining ball count notification is displayed, or it may be the period from the display of the completion function's remaining ball count notification until the count value (MY value) or the activation judgment value reaches a predetermined value. This prevents significant disappointment and a drastic decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the game stops due to the activation of the completion function after the player has become aware that there are reserved balls with a high probability of a big win.

At this time, the transmission of pre-announcement-related commands from the main control board 1310 may be suppressed, or the peripheral control board 1510 may, after receiving the complete function activation announcement command, invalidate any pre-announcement-related commands received and suppress the execution of the pre-announcement effect. If the transmission of pre-announcement-related commands from the main control board 1310 is suppressed, the main control board 1310 will need to determine whether or not to transmit the command, but no change in processing on the peripheral control board 1510 will be necessary. On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the pre-announcement-related commands are invalid, the main control board 1310 can simply transmit the pre-announcement-related commands using normal control, thereby suppressing an increase in the load on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if the pre-announcement animation is not executed while the remaining ball count notification for the complete function is displayed, and a command for the remaining ball count of the complete function is received during the execution of the pre-announcement animation, the execution of the pre-announcement animation will be interrupted to prevent player disappointment. Also, if a command for the remaining ball count of the complete function is received during the execution of the pre-announcement animation, and the machine's power is cut off before the complete function activates, the pre-announcement animation will not be executed even after the power is turned back on.

Furthermore, even if it is possible to execute a pre-announcement effect while the remaining ball count is being displayed, the pre-announcement effect will be interrupted if the complete function is activated during its execution. Even if the complete function is subsequently deactivated and gameplay resumes, the interrupted pre-announcement effect will not be resumed or re-executed.

(Complete function activation notification)
As mentioned above, the Complete Function activation notification command is transmitted when the activation judgment value reaches the activation threshold (when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value (95000) that activates the Complete Function). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, if a predetermined continuation condition is met when the threshold for activation of the Complete Function is reached, the game can be continued until that continuation condition is no longer met. For example, if the game is in a jackpot state when the threshold for activation of the Complete Function is reached, the game will continue until the jackpot state ends. This is to prevent disappointing the player by forcibly interrupting the jackpot state and to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 653 shows an example of a screen displaying a notification of the activation of the complete function after receiving a command for activation of the complete function during a jackpot game. In the state shown in Figure 653, the MY value has reached the activation threshold for the complete function during the jackpot game, and the system is notifying that the complete function will activate after the jackpot game ends (complete function activation notification (reservation) notification).

Furthermore, the remaining ball count is displayed until the notification of the completion function activation is issued. Even when the notification switches from the remaining ball count to the completion function activation notification, no notification such as a lamp lighting up or sound output is emitted. This is because normal gameplay continues until the completion function is activated.

Furthermore, even if the count value (MY value) falls below the threshold (specific value) for the activation of the complete function due to the consumption of game balls between the start of the complete function activation notification and the actual activation of the complete function, the complete function activation notification will not be canceled. The complete function will activate when the conditions for continuing the game are no longer met.

Furthermore, after the Complete Function activation notification is issued, the execution of the pre-announcement notification will be suppressed, similar to when the remaining ball count notification is issued. This prevents the game from being interrupted by the activation of the Complete Function when the expectation of a big win is high, thus preventing disappointment and a significant decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Additionally, if the Complete Function activation notification command is received during the execution of a pre-announcement effect, and the game machine's power is cut off before the Complete Function activates, the pre-announcement effect will not be executed even after the power is turned back on.

(Complete function activation notification)
Figure 654 shows an example of the screen when the complete function is activated. In the example shown in Figure 654, after receiving the complete function activation command, all display objects such as characters are hidden, and the activation of the complete function is notified in text (complete function activation notification). The complete function activation notification only indicates that the complete function has been activated and the game has stopped. At this time, the game is forcibly stopped for the player from a state where they have won prize balls, so expressions that would cause the player discomfort are not used to celebrate.

Furthermore, unlike the remaining ball count notification and the completion function activation予告 notification, the completion function activation notification may also use lights or audio output in addition to the screen display to reliably inform the player that the game will not continue due to the completion function. For example, a specific light may be illuminated red, or all other lights may be turned off. Also, at the start of the completion function activation notification, an audio announcement such as "The completion function has been activated. The game is over for today." should be played a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), as displayed on the screen.

The audio notification is performed a predetermined number of times and then ceases, but the screen display and lamp notification continue until the power is cut off or until gameplay can be resumed by a RAM clear, etc. Furthermore, if the game machine is left unattended after the complete function is activated, it transitions to a customer waiting state. This transition to the customer waiting state can be achieved through internal processing by the peripheral control board 1510 (processing not based on commands from the main control board 1310). At this time, light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the operation of the complete function, without reducing brightness to enter energy-saving mode. However, if a light-emitting element does not emit light when the complete function is activated, it will reduce brightness to enter energy-saving mode.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored without performing a RAM clear while the complete function is activated, the complete function will not be deactivated. Therefore, after the game machine's initialization is complete, the complete function activation notification will be executed.

Furthermore, even if the front door or frame is opened while the complete function is active, the complete function activation notification takes precedence over the door opening notification. Because the screen layer displaying the complete function activation notification is located in front of the door opening notification screen, the screen display continues to show the complete function activation notification. This is because, even if there is fraudulent activity such as opening the door, gameplay cannot continue, and priority is given to notifying the player that gameplay has stopped.

[45-4-2. Control of movable bodies based on command reception]
Next, we will explain what happens when a complete function activation notification command or a complete function activation command is received during the initialization operation of the movable body. When these commands are received, there is a very high probability that the complete function will be activated (or the complete function will definitely be activated), so there is a high probability that the game will be stopped without moving the movable body. Therefore, when the command is received, the initialization operation is interrupted and a complete function activation notification or a complete function activation notification is executed. At this time, if the activation of the complete function is canceled or the power of the game machine is turned on again, the initialization operation of the movable body will be executed from the beginning, not from the interrupted position.

Furthermore, the system may execute a complete function activation notification or a complete function activation notification without interrupting the initialization process upon receiving a command. In this case, if the complete function is deactivated or the gaming machine's power is turned back on, the initialization process for the movable parts will be restarted from the beginning. Additionally, the system may complete the initialization process upon receiving a command before executing a complete function activation notification or a complete function activation notification. In this case as well, if the complete function is deactivated or the gaming machine's power is turned back on, the initialization process for the movable parts will be restarted from the beginning.

[45-5. Notifications related to complete functions via the performance display monitor]
Next, we will explain the notification provided by the performance display monitor. First, we will explain general notification provided by the performance display monitor, including functions other than the complete function. The performance display monitor is provided on the main control board 1310 and consists of one or more 7-segment LEDs. In addition, it is possible to display game information such as the base value of the game machine by operating it with the operation of an employee of the amusement facility.

Furthermore, if a malfunction occurs due to fraudulent activity or other reasons causing the game to stop, the performance display monitor may be configured to show a message corresponding to the cause of the game stoppage. In this case, the display may include a message corresponding to the cause of the game stoppage in addition to the base value display, or it may include a message corresponding to the cause of the game stoppage instead of the base value.

Game stoppages can be caused by fraudulent activity, such as magnetic detection by magnetic sensors or vibration detection by vibration sensors, or by the activation of the aforementioned "complete" function. While game stoppages (when the game stoppage process is executed) cease, processes controlling the game's progress are disabled. However, it remains possible to perform processes outside the game area, such as identifying the cause of the stoppage and outputting the game state at the time of stoppage.

The performance display monitor processing (step 11TKS0290 in Figure 635) is executed after the game stop processing (step 11TKS0270). When the game stops due to the activation of the complete function or other reasons, it controls the performance display monitor to display information such as the cause of the game stop after the game has stopped. This makes it possible to identify the behavior and state of the gaming machine leading up to the occurrence of the fraudulent activity or malfunction that caused the game to stop, which can be used to deter fraudulent activity and prevent malfunctions.

The performance display monitor shows the base value, but it may also display information such as the cause of the game stopping if the game stops due to an error or other reason. In this case, the information such as the cause of the game stopping may be displayed when a predetermined operation is performed; for example, it may be displayed only when the RAM clear switch is operated. Furthermore, the display may be switched each time the RAM clear switch is operated, or information other than the base value, such as the cause of the game stopping, may be displayed only while the RAM clear switch is being operated (pressed down).

Furthermore, information such as the cause of game suspension, for example, the error code and error name, may be displayed on the LCD screen. The display of information such as the cause of game suspension on the LCD screen may be limited to when a specific operation is performed. By displaying the information through this operation, it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by showing information such as the cause of game suspension to the player. Even when displaying information on the LCD screen, the information may also be displayed on the performance display monitor.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the performance display monitor basically displays the base value, it may be provided on the ball information control board (payout control board 951) rather than the main control board 1310. Since the base value can be calculated based on the number of game balls launched and the number of prize balls, providing it on the ball information control board (payout control board 951) allows the ball information control board (payout control board 951) to handle the processing necessary for calculating the base value, which would otherwise be handled by the main control board 1310. This division of processing reduces the load on game control. Alternatively, performance display monitors may be provided on both the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board (payout control board 951), displaying the necessary information on each.

Furthermore, error information generated during control on the main control board 1310 may be displayed on a performance display monitor provided on the ball information control board (dispensing control board 951). In this case, similar to the performance display monitor on the main control board 1310, information may be displayed on the performance display monitor on the ball information control board (dispensing control board 951) when a predetermined operation, such as the operation of the RAM clear button, is performed on the main control board 1310. In this case, information may also be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen.

Furthermore, if performance display monitors are provided on both the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board (dispensing control board 951), each board may display errors that occur on that board, or each performance display monitor may be capable of displaying information regarding errors that occurred on any of the boards.

If the main control board 1310 detects an abnormality (e.g., a magnetic error) and stops the game, the main control board 1310 will not execute any error detection-related processing and will not detect any new errors unless the power is restarted. Meanwhile, the ball information control board (payout control board 951) remains in a controllable state and is capable of detecting specific errors that have occurred on the ball information control board (payout control board 951). In this case, the performance display monitor on the ball information control board (payout control board 951) may display a base value instead of error information, or, if a specific operation (such as operating the RAM clear switch) is performed, it may display error information from the main control board 1310 instead of the base value. Furthermore, if a specific error occurs on the ball information control board (payout control board 951), it may display the error information that occurred on the ball information control board (payout control board 951) instead of the base value.

[45-6. Signal outputs related to the complete function]
The above explains the notifications related to the complete function. Next, we will explain the signals output externally in relation to the complete function. The signals output externally in relation to the complete function include the complete function activation signal and the complete function pre-activation signal.

(Signal when the complete function is activated)
The complete function activation signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or while the complete function is active) when the complete function is activated and the game stops. Specifically, it is output in step 11TKS0810 of the complete function control process (Figure 643). Also, if the power is turned on while the complete function is activated before the power is cut off, it is output in step 11TKS0540 of the complete function initialization setting process (Figure 639) when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, after the complete function processing (step 11TKS0285) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 635), the value stored in the out-of-bounds complete signal output timer area is stored in the in-bounds complete signal output timer area. At this time, the value in the out-of-bounds complete function activation state area is also stored in the in-bounds complete function activation state area. This makes it possible to synchronize the values within and outside the game area regarding information related to the complete function, and independence can be ensured by maintaining information separately within and outside the game area.

(Signal before the complete function is activated)
The pre-completion function signal is output (set to ON) at a predetermined timing and for a predetermined period before the completion function is activated. The pre-completion function signal is output by a signal output process (step 11TKS0310) called from a timer interrupt process (Figure 635). The signal output process is located outside the game area and outputs the game status and various information during the ongoing game from the main control board 1310.

The MY value used to determine whether or not to output a signal before the complete function is activated is based on the MY value stored within the game area. Since the signal output processing is located outside the game area, the MY value stored within the game area is written to a storage area for MY values stored outside the game area, and the decision on whether or not to output the signal is based on the MY value stored outside the game area.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the timing for outputting the signal before the complete function is activated is when the MY value exceeds the activation threshold (for example, 75000). However, the timing for outputting the signal before the complete function is activated is not limited to this; it may also be at the timing when the remaining number of balls until the complete function is activated is displayed, or it may be after the timing when the remaining number of balls is displayed.

On the other hand, the timing of stopping the output of the signal before the complete function is activated may coincide with the timing of the complete function's activation. In this case, the signals may be output sequentially so as not to overlap with the output of the signal during the complete function's activation, or the signal before the complete function is activated may not be output at all.

Furthermore, even if the game stops due to an abnormality detected during the output of the pre-activation signal for the complete function, such as fraudulent activity or a malfunction of the gaming machine, the output of the pre-activation signal for the complete function will continue. Since the test signal output process is performed outside the game area, it continues to execute even if the game stops due to processing within the game area. Therefore, it is possible to continue outputting the pre-activation signal for the complete function even after the game has stopped.

Furthermore, the signal before the complete function is activated will continue to output (remain ON) via the backup power supply even if the gaming machine's power is cut off, but the output will stop (be set to OFF) when the MY value is cleared (initialized).

(Abnormal notification during the output of the signal before the complete function is activated)
This section describes how to notify the detected abnormality when an abnormality is detected during the output of the signal before the complete function is activated. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, after the signal before the complete function is activated is output, a predetermined command is received, and a notification before the complete function is activated is displayed on the LCD screen, indicating that the complete function will be activated. As mentioned above, the notification before the complete function is activated includes a notification of the number of balls remaining until the complete function is activated, and a notification before the complete function is activated, which notifies that the complete function will be activated after the jackpot game state ends. The specific forms of the notification of the number of balls remaining and the notification before the complete function is activated are as described above (Figures 652 and 653).

Furthermore, when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value (95000), the pre-completion function notification switches from the remaining ball count notification to the completion function activation warning notification. In this case, if the pre-completion function signal is output until the completion function is activated, the signal output continues even after the switch to the completion function activation warning notification. However, if the pre-completion function signal output stops when the count value (MY value) reaches the specific value, the completion function activation warning notification will not be included in the pre-completion function notification.

If an abnormality such as a magnet malfunction is detected while the pre-activation notification for the complete function is running, the notification for the magnet malfunction will be displayed while the pre-activation notification for the complete function is not visible. This is because game stoppage due to a magnet malfunction is a more serious problem than game stoppage due to the activation of the complete function. In this case, although the pre-activation notification for the complete function is not visible to the player, the output of the pre-activation signal for the complete function is maintained.

Furthermore, the system may continue to provide pre-activation notification for the complete function without displaying a magnet abnormality notification on the LCD screen. Additionally, the system may simultaneously display "Magnet Abnormality" and "Remaining Balls" on the LCD screen, thereby providing both the magnet abnormality notification and the pre-activation notification for the complete function.

Furthermore, pre-completion function activation notifications and error notifications for abnormalities such as magnet malfunctions are displayed on different layers. Each layer has a display priority, with higher-priority layers positioned at the front. To prevent the pre-completion function activation notification from being visible when a magnet malfunction notification is displayed, the priority of the layer displaying the magnet malfunction notification is set higher than that of the layer displaying the pre-completion function activation notification. Also, when both magnet malfunction notifications and pre-completion function activation notifications are displayed simultaneously, the displays for each are positioned so as not to overlap.

In the example mentioned above, the output of the pre-completion function signal begins before the pre-completion function activation notification is executed. If an abnormality is detected in the gaming machine after the pre-completion function activation signal is output but before the pre-completion function activation notification is executed, only the abnormality notification will be executed. However, if the abnormality is minor and the game resumes after it is resolved, the pre-completion function activation notification will be executed after the abnormality notification is canceled. In this case, if the abnormality is resolved without stopping the game, the count value (MY value) is maintained, and the pre-completion function activation notification will be executed according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the output of the pre-completion function activation signal continues even after the game resumes following the occurrence of the abnormality. This allows for the understanding that the completion function was close to activating even when an abnormality occurred.

Furthermore, even if the malfunction is resolved by shutting off the power to the gaming machine, if the MY value is maintained when gameplay resumes, the pre-activation notification for the complete function will be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In this case, since the malfunction has been resolved, the malfunction notification will have ended when gameplay resumes. Even in this case, the pre-activation signal for the complete function will continue to be output from the time the malfunction occurred until gameplay resumes. Note that if the power to the gaming machine is turned back on while performing a RAM clear, the MY value will be cleared, the complete function will be initialized, and the output of the pre-activation signal for the complete function will stop.

Furthermore, when the complete function is activated, a complete function activation signal is output, and control may be made to stop the output of the pre-complete function activation signal. In this case, the pre-complete function activation notification is stopped, and the complete function activation notification is executed.

[45-6. Variant Example]
In the aforementioned gaming machine, the number of gaming balls consumed was counted by detecting the balls that passed through the entry or exit opening using the out switch and the safe switch. However, here, the number of gaming balls launched from the ball launching device 680 is considered the number of gaming balls consumed.

(Calculation of the count value (MY value))
Furthermore, game balls launched from the ball launching device 680 are detected by rail switches located on rails 1001 and 1002. If the rail switches are located before the exits of rails 1001 and 1002, and the balls are discharged before reaching the game area 5a, they are excluded from the count of game balls consumed. Alternatively, game balls that have entered the game area 5a may be detected by a launch ball sensor 1020 located upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of rails 1001 and 1002. In this case, by placing the launch ball sensor 1020 immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007, the count of game balls consumed can be reliably determined.

The initial value of the MY value is set to 0 by the complete function initialization means (complete function initialization setting process). Furthermore, the MY value cannot be set to a value less than 0. Therefore, if a game ball passes through the out-out opening before a game ball enters the prize-winning opening and a prize ball is awarded, the MY value is not deducted. Specifically, the process of deducting the MY value is executed according to the procedure shown in Figure 652.

Figure 655 is a flowchart of the MY value subtraction process when MY value is not subtracted if it is 0. In the procedure shown in Figure 655, the main control unit MPU 1311 determines whether MY value is 0 or not (step 11TKS1310). If MY value is not 0 (i.e., MY value is greater than 0), 1 is subtracted from MY value (step 11TKS1320).

While this configuration simplifies the MY value subtraction process, it results in the MY value not being updated after the completion function initialization (when the MY value becomes 0) until the prize balls are won't be reflected in the MY value. This means the completion function will activate before the MY value reaches its upper limit, due to the amount that wasn't subtracted.

When counting the number of game balls consumed using an out switch or safe switch, the MY value is increased by the number of prize balls when the launched game balls enter the prize slots. Therefore, the period during which the MY value remains below 0 is short. As shown in Figure 655, large errors were less likely to occur because the number of consumed balls was not subtracted when the MY value was 0, and the MY value was only subtracted after the prize balls had increased it.

In contrast, counting the number of balls consumed using a rail switch increases the opportunities to subtract the MY value before winning prize balls, potentially leading to larger errors due to the failure to subtract the MY value. Therefore, to resolve the aforementioned problem, a procedure for separately counting the value to be subtracted from the MY value is described. Figure 656 is a flowchart of the MY value subtraction process when the value to be subtracted from the MY value is counted separately.

The main control MPU 1311 first adds 1 to the subtraction value (step 11TKS1410). The subtraction value is initialized to 0 when the complete function initialization means is executed. Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the MY value is greater than the subtraction value (step 11TKS1420).

If the MY value is not less than the subtraction value (i.e., greater than or equal to the subtraction value) (the result of step 11TKS1420 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 updates the MY value by subtracting the subtraction value from the MY value (step 11TKS1430). Furthermore, it initializes the subtraction value (step 11TKS1440). On the other hand, if the MY value is less than the subtraction value (i.e., less than the subtraction value) (the result of step 11TKS1420 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 terminates the MY value subtraction process.

As configured above, if the subtraction value is greater than the MY value, for example, if the number of game balls consumed by the rail switch is measured after the start of the game but before winning prize balls, the subtraction value changes from 0 to 1 while the MY value is 0, and the MY value becomes smaller than the subtraction value. Therefore, the MY value remains at 0 and the subtraction value is updated to 1, at which point the MY value subtraction process ends. After this, if a game ball enters a prize and 5 prize balls are won, the MY value subtraction process is executed with the MY value updated from 0 to 5. At this time, in step 11TKS1410, the subtraction value is updated from 1 to 2, and since the MY value (5) is greater than the subtraction value (2), the MY value is updated to 3 (= 5 - 2) (step 11TKS1430). Furthermore, the subtraction value is initialized to 0 (step 11TKS1440). Next, when the game ball passes through the exit and the MY value subtraction process is executed, the subtracted value is updated to 1. Since the MY value is 3, the subtracted value is subtracted from the MY value, updating it to 2. By configuring the MY value subtraction process in this way, the MY value can be calculated accurately.

Furthermore, to accurately calculate the MY value, the initial value may be set to a predetermined value (e.g., 1000) instead of 0, and this predetermined value may be added to the upper limit for activating the complete function. In this case, if the upper limit is set to 95000, the value for activating the complete function will be 96000. Also, if the MY value falls below the predetermined value, a specific value should be subtracted by the amount below the predetermined value. For example, if the predetermined value is 1000 and the MY value falls to 300, the specific value should be 95300. The predetermined value should be set to a value that is not exceeded during normal gameplay; for example, it could be the number of shots fired continuously for one hour (6000).

(Rental/settlement of game balls)
In the modified gaming machine described above, the number of gaming balls consumed was not counted when they passed through the outlet, but rather as the number of gaming balls launched from the ball launcher 680. By configuring it in this way, the gaming balls discharged from the outlet are supplied to the ball launcher 680, allowing the gaming balls to circulate within the gaming machine. In this case, since no actual gaming balls are discharged, it is not necessary to match the number of balls held by the player to actual gaming balls. With this configuration, the game can be played by managing only the number of balls held by the player.

In this modified version of the gaming machine, by operating the CR unit or the cash dispenser's dispensing button, the number of balls held by the player is increased according to the operation, making the machine ready to start playing. Furthermore, when the contact detection sensor 509 detects that the player has touched the handle lever 504, the machine becomes ready to dispense game balls.

When a player finishes playing and wants to settle their remaining balls, they operate (press) the counting button. By repeatedly turning the counting button ON and OFF, a number of balls corresponding to the number of operations is settled. The number corresponding to the number of operations can be, for example, one ball being settled with each operation of the counting button, or multiple balls being settled at a time. Furthermore, if the counting button is operated (long-pressed) for a predetermined period, the balls are settled as if a predetermined number of operations (a predetermined number of times) were performed at predetermined intervals. Alternatively, if the counting button is operated (long-pressed) for a predetermined period, a specific number of balls greater than the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) may be settled. In addition, if the counting button is operated (long-pressed) for a specific period longer than a predetermined period, all remaining balls may be settled.

Furthermore, the control during the settlement of the player's balls will be explained. In the modified gaming machine described above, it is possible to launch game balls while the player is in contact with the handle lever 504, but the machine is controlled not to launch game balls during settlement. Since the consumption of the game medium (game balls) is counted immediately after launch, the number of balls held will not decrease due to game balls already present in the game area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the number of balls held and the number of balls settled, which would occur if game balls were consumed after the number of balls held becomes 0 due to settlement.

On the other hand, if the player touches the handle lever 504 during settlement (while the counting button is being operated), settlement is interrupted. This control also prevents the number of balls held from decreasing during settlement. Furthermore, after settlement is interrupted, if the counting button is not operated and the handle lever 504 is being operated, the launch of game balls resumes and the game begins. In this case, since settlement may be interrupted if the player accidentally touches the handle lever 504, the game may be restarted only if the handle lever 504 is operated for a predetermined period of time after settlement is interrupted (cancelled).

Furthermore, if, after a settlement is interrupted, the operation of the handle lever 504 is immediately stopped while continuing to operate the counting button, the interrupted settlement may be resumed. This allows for a quick resumption of settlement after an interruption due to incorrect operation. Even if settlement is interrupted due to operation of the handle lever 504 during the settlement process, the interrupted settlement can be resumed by operating the counting button after stopping the operation of the handle lever 504.

Furthermore, in this modified version of the gaming machine, if the player operates the handle lever 504 while operating the dispensing button, both the dispensing and launching of game balls can continue. Since dispensing game balls adds to the number of balls held, enabling the dispensing operation while game balls are being consumed allows the game to continue without interruption, thus preventing a decrease in enjoyment due to interruptions.

[45-7. Inventions relating to the complete function]
Finally, a representative example of the configuration of the invention relating to the complete function disclosed herein is given.

Gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with storage means for storing programs and data, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2022-189220, etc. Some of these machines store programs that control the progress of the game in separate areas from programs that perform controls not directly related to the game's progress.

In gaming machines configured in this way, there was room for further improvement in the management of programs and data stored in each area. Furthermore, when the program controlling the game's progress executes a process to stop the game, it was sometimes preferable from a management perspective to perform controls that did not directly affect the game's progress, such as outputting to a performance display monitor. However, if these controls had to be completed before the game stopped, it could lead to many constraints in program development.

(1) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and grants gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A computing means capable of executing a program to control a gaming machine,
A storage means for storing a program executed by the aforementioned calculation means,
Equipped with,
The storage means provides a first game control area for storing a first program that executes processes for controlling the progress of the game, and a second game control area for storing a second program that executes processes not directly involved in the progress of the game.
The first program includes a program that is executed periodically during the game,
The second program includes a program that outputs (displays) or updates information related to the game.
The calculation means can execute the second program even after the game has been stopped by the execution of the first program.
A gaming machine that enables the second program to output (display) or update information related to the game even if the game is stopped by the first program.

According to the gaming machine described in (1), even after the game has been stopped by the execution of the first program (a program that executes processes that control the progress of the game), the second program (a program that executes processes that do not directly affect the progress of the game) can be executed. This makes it easier to check information, including the game state at the time the game is stopped, and makes it easier to identify the cause of any abnormalities, thus facilitating the management of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by placing the first and second programs in different memory areas, program management is made easier, and since processing by the second program can be executed even after the game has been stopped, the degree of freedom in game control can be increased, thus preventing a decrease in the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a mechanism to determine if the amount of prize media received by the player has been excessively supplied relative to the amount of gaming media consumed during gameplay, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2023-7364, etc.

In gaming machines configured in this way, if gameplay was stopped due to an excessive distribution of prize tokens, the difference (count value) between the game tokens consumed during the process of stopping the game and the prize tokens received by the player was counted. Based on this count value, an oversupply of prize tokens was determined. However, malfunctions in the gaming machine could prevent proper gameplay from continuing, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and awards gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A computing means capable of executing a program to control a gaming machine,
A storage means for storing data usable by a program executed by the aforementioned calculation means,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
Equipped with,
The program includes a first program that executes a first process that controls the progress of the game, and a second program that executes a second process that does not directly involve the progress of the game.
The storage means provides a first storage area that can be read from and written to from the first process, and a second storage area that can be read from and written to from the second process, but can only be read from from the first process.
A gaming machine characterized in that information indicating whether or not the game has been stopped due to the activation of the specified function is stored in the first memory area and the second memory area, respectively.

(3) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and grants gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A computing means capable of executing a program to control a gaming machine,
A storage means for storing data usable by a program executed by the aforementioned calculation means,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
Equipped with,
The program includes a first program that executes a first process that controls the progress of the game, and a second program that executes a second process that does not directly involve the progress of the game.
The storage means provides a first storage area that can be read from and written to from the first process, and a second storage area that can be read from and written to from the second process, but can only be read from from the first process.
A gaming machine characterized in that information indicating whether or not the game has been stopped due to the activation of the specified function, and information indicating whether or not the game has been stopped due to an abnormality in the gaming machine, are stored in either the first storage area or the second storage area, respectively.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) or (3), the independence of the first and second memory areas can be ensured because the first process, which controls the game's progress, can suppress the updating of data by the second process, which does not directly affect the game's progress. This makes it possible to resume gameplay from a stopped state based on data counted by the second process, or to identify the cause of an anomaly by referring to information stored in the second memory area, thereby facilitating the management of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned gaming machines, the difference (count value) between the gaming media consumed during gameplay and the prize media obtained by the player was counted, and an oversupply of prize media was determined based on this count value. However, if a large number of gaming media were consumed at the start of gameplay, the counting results became inaccurate, potentially leading to a discrepancy between the intended timing of game termination and the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and awards gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A computing means capable of executing a program to control a gaming machine,
A storage means for storing data usable by a program executed by the aforementioned calculation means,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
Equipped with,
The program includes a first program that executes a first process that controls the progress of the game, and a second program that executes a second process that does not directly involve the progress of the game.
The storage means provides a first storage area that can be read from and written to from the first process, and a second storage area that can be read from and written to from the second process, but can only be read from from the first process.
The predetermined counting condition involves subtracting the number of game media consumed in the game from the counted value, while adding the number of prize media corresponding to those acquired if prize media are obtained based on the results of the game to the counted value.
The process of counting the aforementioned count value is performed by the second program.
The aforementioned count values are stored in the first storage area and the second storage area.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific function activating means does not subtract the count value if the count value becomes smaller than the initial value due to the subtraction.

In the gaming machine described in (4), the number of gaming media consumed during the game is subtracted from an initial value (e.g., 0), while the number of prize media acquired is added. The game is stopped when the count reaches a specific value (e.g., 95,000). A key feature of this machine is that it is controlled so that the count does not fall below the initial value. As a modification of this basic example, the initial value of the count may be set to the specific value of the basic example (e.g., 95,000), and the specific value may be set to the initial value of the basic example (e.g., 0). In this case, the number of prize media acquired is subtracted from the count, while the number of gaming media consumed during the game is added to the count. The game is stopped when the count reaches a specific value (0). In this case, the machine is controlled so that the count does not fall below the initial value. In both the basic example and the modification, the range of possible values for the count can be set to a predetermined range, which suppresses the occurrence of overflows and loss of precision, enabling stable game control.

In the aforementioned gaming machine, the difference (count value) between the gaming media consumed during gameplay and the prize media received by the player was counted, and an oversupply of prize media was determined based on this count value. However, if a malfunction occurred in the gaming machine at the time of gameplay suspension due to oversupply, there was a risk of problems arising because the cause of the machine's suspension could not be identified.

(5) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and grants gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
A game information output means capable of outputting information related to the game,
Equipped with,
The game information output means is capable of outputting information related to the specific function based on the predetermined count value,
The information relating to the specified function includes pre-operation information that is transmitted when the count value reaches a predetermined value smaller than the specified value.
The aforementioned game information output means is
When the count value reaches the predetermined value, the output of the pre-operation information is started, while when the predetermined count value reaches the specific value, the output of the pre-operation information is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can maintain the output of the pre-operation information even if an abnormality is detected in the gaming machine while the pre-operation information is being output.

Furthermore, the information relating to the specific function includes arrival information that is transmitted when the count value reaches the specific value.
The arrival information may include operation information indicating that the specific function will be activated immediately, and operation hold information (operation notice information) indicating that the operation of the specific function will be suspended until predetermined operating conditions are met.

According to the gaming machine described in (5), even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, it becomes possible to notify the user that a specific function is about to activate before the game stops, allowing the user to understand the state of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the output of pre-activation information stops when the count value reaches a specific value, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific function became operational after the pre-activation information was output.

In the aforementioned gaming machine, the difference (count value) between the gaming media consumed during gameplay and the prize media obtained by the player was counted, and an oversupply of prize media was determined based on this count value. However, normal game control continued until the game stopped, and if a highly anticipated pre-announcement was made just before the game stopped, the player would be disappointed if they could not confirm the lottery result before the game stopped, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on balls entering the starting gate and awards gaming benefits based on the results of the lottery,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
A pre-operation notification execution means that performs a pre-operation notification to indicate that the specific function has not yet been activated when the count value reaches a predetermined value smaller than the specified value,
A holding means for holding lottery information acquired based on a ball entering the starting opening while the pattern is changing,
A pre-determination means for pre-determining the lottery information held in the holding means,
A pre-performance execution means that performs a pre-performance based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the aforementioned pre-operation notification is performed, the execution mode of the pre-performance can suppress at least some of the performances compared to the normal execution mode.

Furthermore, the gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means capable of executing game performances. When the performance control means is notified that the count value has reached a predetermined value smaller than a specific value, it executes the pre-operation notification, thus constituting the pre-operation notification execution means.

Furthermore, the pre-performance execution means is configured by executing a pre-performance based on the lottery information using the performance control means. This pre-performance includes a pending display based on the pending lottery information and the display of objects such as characters based on that information, and the execution of some or all of these performances is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine described in (6), when the game may be stopped due to the activation of a specific function, it is possible to prevent disappointment among players and suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game by preventing excessive expectations from being raised.

In the aforementioned gaming machine, the difference (count value) between the gaming media consumed during gameplay and the prize media received by the player was counted, and an oversupply of prize media was determined based on this count value. However, since the game did not stop due to a malfunction in the gaming machine, there was no need to control the game after it stopped in the same way as when a malfunction occurred. Furthermore, implementing dedicated control measures could potentially reduce the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(7) In a gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions and awards gaming benefits based on the results of said lottery,
A specific function activation means that activates a specific function that stops the progress of the game, including the lottery, when a predetermined count value that can be counted based on the fulfillment of predetermined counting conditions reaches a specific value,
A means for transitioning to a customer waiting state that allows the system to transition to a customer waiting state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pattern changes stopped,
Equipped with,
When the aforementioned specific function is activated, an operation notification display is executed to notify that the specific function has been activated.
A gaming machine characterized in that it can transition to a customer waiting state even after the aforementioned operation notification display has been executed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine is equipped with a light-emitting element that can emit light in a predetermined manner when the aforementioned specific function is activated.
Even after the aforementioned specific function is activated and the state transitions to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the light-emitting element is maintained in the predetermined mode.
If the system includes a light-emitting element that does not emit light in a predetermined manner when the aforementioned specific function is activated, the light emission of the light-emitting element can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine in (7), the machine transitions to a customer waiting state by leaving it idle after a specific function has been activated. In this case, the internal processing by the performance control board (peripheral control board 1510) (processing not based on commands from the main control board 1310) is performed, and control is possible without executing any special processing. Furthermore, when a specific light-emitting element signals the activation of a specific function by changing to a predetermined state, the activation of the specific function can be confirmed by maintaining the predetermined state, and power consumption can be reduced in conjunction with the transition to the customer waiting state by suppressing the illumination of other light-emitting elements. When the customer waiting state is released, the activation notification display is resumed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-159953, complex game control is required to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Accordingly, a gaming machine has been proposed in which multiple control units each provide corresponding functions, thereby dividing the game control responsibilities. In such a gaming machine, signals are transmitted and received between each control unit (control board), and the control unit performs control corresponding to the received signal. However, there was a risk of difficulty in identifying errors if a malfunction occurred in any of the control units.

(8) A gaming machine having a first control unit for controlling the game and a second control unit capable of performing a different control from the first control unit,
The second control unit includes an information display unit capable of displaying information about the gaming machine,
When the first control unit detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it stops the game until the power to the gaming machine is restored,
The second control unit can continue detecting abnormalities even while the game is stopped.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display unit is capable of displaying abnormal information different from the base value of the gaming machine while the second control unit continues to detect the occurrence of an abnormality.

According to the gaming machine described in (8), while the machine's base value can be displayed during normal operation, abnormal information can be displayed when an abnormality occurs, allowing for the standardization of the display unit and simplifying the machine's configuration. Furthermore, by enabling abnormality detection even when gameplay is stopped, the cause of the abnormality can be easily identified.

[46. Control of the complete function in the event of an anomaly]
The above explains the basic configuration and control of the complete function (specific function). Below, we will explain the problems with gaming machines equipped with the complete function and configurations to resolve them. For example, in the development process of a gaming machine, it is conceivable to conduct a "long-term test firing (actual firing test) mainly focused on verifying the operation of the complete function" to confirm whether or not the complete function works correctly. However, if an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine during such a test firing, causing the game to stop and the control (counting, etc.) related to the complete function to stop, the test firing will be conducted unnecessarily, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of gaming machine development. Furthermore, if it is necessary to restart the power to resolve such abnormalities, the count values related to the complete function will be reset when the power is restarted, requiring another test firing to verify the operation of the complete function, which also reduces the efficiency of gaming machine development. In consideration of these points, the following will explain a control configuration that resolves these problems and improves the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function compared to conventional machines.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is designed to monitor for abnormalities or malfunctions that occur during normal gameplay (for example, during the variation of special symbols). For example, the machine can detect first-class abnormalities (such as the aforementioned ball depletion or jamming, or abnormal playing technique during normal gameplay) and second-class abnormalities (such as magnetic anomalies, vibration anomalies, or fraudulent winning). The second-class abnormality occurs primarily when fraudulent activity is occurring and is unlikely to occur during normal gameplay. If a second-class abnormality is detected during a test play, it may indicate a malfunction (false detection) in the sensors. The relationship between these abnormalities and the complete function will be explained below.

[46-1. Control when the first abnormality (abnormality A) occurs during normal gameplay]
This section describes the control of the complete function when a first abnormality (malfunction/failure) occurs during a normal state in which regular gameplay is possible (such as during the variation of special symbols). Figure 657 is a timing chart for when a first abnormality (hereinafter referred to as abnormality A) occurs while the normal gameplay state is continuing (during the variation of special symbols), and the complete function is activated.

The example shown in Figure 657 is a state where the complete function is about to activate, and the number of remaining balls until the complete function activates is being notified (the count value (MY value) exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 75,000)) (Figure 652; notification of remaining balls before complete function activation). In this state, the occurrence of abnormality A is detected (time t010). As mentioned above, abnormality A refers to things like running out of balls, ball jamming, or abnormalities in normal playing methods (warning to return to left-handed play), and these are minor abnormalities or malfunctions that do not require stopping the game, and the game can continue even while abnormality A is occurring (the progress of special symbols in progress and the start of new special symbol variations are also possible). Abnormality A is mainly managed by the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, abnormalities A, such as ball depletion or ball jamming, are caused by various sensors located in the payout path, etc., determining that the game balls have not been detected for a predetermined period of time. These abnormalities can be resolved by removing the cause of the malfunction (e.g., ball depletion or ball jamming) and resuming normal ball detection. Similarly, abnormalities A, such as incorrect shooting technique, are caused by various sensors located in the left and right areas of the game board (including sensors in the ball entry area) detecting an incorrect shooting technique, for example, when right-handed shooting is performed despite left-handed shooting being recommended, or when left-handed shooting is performed despite right-handed shooting being recommended. Since these abnormalities often occur only temporarily in test firings, they can be resolved after a certain period of time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the occurrence of the incorrect shooting technique. In other words, all abnormalities A can be resolved without requiring a power cycle. Furthermore, it is possible to continue playing after abnormalities A have been resolved (time t020).

While abnormality A is occurring (time t010 to t020), the liquid crystal display screen executes (displays) the notification of the remaining number of balls after the complete function has been activated (Figure 652, corresponding to the "prior notification of the excessive prize ball suppression means" mentioned above), and then executes (displays) abnormality pattern A (a notification image indicating the type of abnormality) which indicates that abnormality A has occurred. In this embodiment, the notification of the remaining number of balls after the complete function has been activated and the display of abnormality pattern A are performed in parallel, and are displayed in positions (display areas) on the liquid crystal display screen that do not overlap with each other. In addition, in this embodiment, the notification of the remaining number of balls after the complete function has been activated and the display of abnormality pattern A are performed in parallel, but it is also possible to display only one of them. For example, if the display of abnormality pattern A is prioritized, the display of abnormality pattern A may be superimposed on the notification of the remaining number of balls after the complete function has been activated so that only abnormality pattern A is visible, or the notification of the remaining number of balls after the complete function has been activated may be hidden and abnormality pattern A may be displayed. Furthermore, since Anomaly A is a minor error, the LCD display may prioritize the notification of the remaining ball count after the completion function has been activated. For example, Anomaly A may be executed on a layer behind the notification of the remaining ball count after the completion function has been activated, or the occurrence of Anomaly A may be notified externally through sound or light, as described later.

Furthermore, while Anomaly A is occurring, an audio message indicating that Anomaly A is occurring (an alert indicating the type of anomaly) is output (Anomaly Type A). The outputted audio message may be a specific alarm sound, or it may be a message such as "A ball has run out" or "Please switch back to left-handed hitting."

Furthermore, while abnormality A occurs, the light-emitting elements provided on the game board and door frame illuminate in a specific manner (abnormality mode A). In this embodiment, the game board is equipped with at least two types of light-emitting elements (first board light-emitting element, second board light-emitting element), and the door frame is also equipped with at least two types of light-emitting elements (first frame light-emitting element, second frame light-emitting element). These light-emitting elements are composed of full-color LEDs and are controllable in the manner shown in Figure 665 depending on the state of the game machine. Figure 665 shows the specific control details for abnormality mode A, abnormality mode B (details described later), complete mode (details described later), door frame open mode (details described later), main body frame open mode (details described later), first detachment mode (details described later), and second detachment mode (details described later) for each of the first board light-emitting element, second board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second frame light-emitting element, respectively.

The first light-emitting element consists of multiple LEDs primarily used for visual effects and can emit light in different patterns depending on the game state. When no abnormalities occur and normal gameplay can continue (special symbols can change) (normal game state), it emits light in a normal pattern corresponding to the visual effects. When an abnormality occurs, it emits light in an abnormal pattern corresponding to that abnormality. When the complete function is activated, it emits light in a complete pattern corresponding to the activation of the complete function. Note that if abnormality A occurs, it will emit light in "abnormal pattern A".

The second light-emitting unit, like the first light-emitting unit, is composed of multiple LEDs primarily used for visual effects. However, the second light-emitting unit is configured to continue normal control even if abnormality A occurs. Furthermore, like the first light-emitting unit, it has a complete mode corresponding to the activation of the complete function.

The first frame light-emitting element, like the first and second panel light-emitting elements, is composed of multiple LEDs primarily used for visual effects and is arranged vertically on the left and right sides of the glass unit 560. Furthermore, while it is controlled in abnormality mode A when a minor abnormality such as abnormality A occurs, similar to the first panel light-emitting element, the complete mode corresponding to the activation of the complete function is controlled in a different manner than the first and second panel light-emitting elements.

Unlike the first and second disc lighters and the first frame lighter, the second frame lighter is composed of multiple LEDs not used for special effects and is positioned in a location that is difficult for the player to see (for example, near both ends of the tray unit 200). Similar to the first and second disc lighters and the first frame lighter, it is controlled in different ways depending on the state of the game machine. However, it does not emit light in accordance with special effects. When no abnormality has occurred and normal gameplay can continue (special symbols can change) (normal gameplay state), it emits a normal light corresponding to the normal state. When an abnormality occurs, it emits an abnormal light corresponding to that abnormality. Furthermore, even when the complete function is activated, it does not emit light in a complete light corresponding to the activation of the complete function, as the first frame lighter does. Instead, it is controlled in either the normal or abnormal light. In other words, the second frame lighter is controlled to provide status information of the game machine, excluding the activation state of the complete function.

Furthermore, the number of luminaires in the first panel, second panel, first frame, and second frame do not need to be the same, nor do they need to have the same control configuration in abnormal mode A; they may have different configurations. For example, the number of second frame luminaires may be fewer than that of the first panel, second panel, and first frame luminaires, as they are not used in the performance, thereby suppressing the amount of notification from the second frame luminaires and emphasizing decorative aspects. Also, regarding the control content, for example, the second frame luminaire may be set to flash red, while the first panel, second panel, and first frame luminaires are set to flash red and blue alternately to improve their appeal to the surroundings.

Furthermore, even while Anomaly A is occurring, the counting of the MY value continues. For example, if a game ball launched into the game area enters a prize slot and a prize ball is awarded while Anomaly A is occurring, the MY value will be increased even while Anomaly A is occurring. On the other hand, if an out switch or rail switch detects the passage of a game ball while Anomaly A is occurring, the MY value will be decreased even while Anomaly A is occurring.

Furthermore, the detection of abnormality A and the control of the operation of the complete function are mainly managed by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Abnormalities identified by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 receives notifications of abnormalities detected by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 via commands and provides abnormality notifications, as well as receiving commands related to the complete function and providing notifications regarding the complete function. Commands related to the complete function include, as mentioned above, commands that indicate the completion function is about to activate and notify the number of remaining balls until the completion function activates (complete function remaining balls command), and commands that indicate the completion function has been activated (complete function activation command).

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information (including abnormality occurrence information and completion-related information) based on commands received from the main control board 1310, and stores this game information using storage means such as peripheral control RAM. Since the information stored on the peripheral control board 1510 is stored independently of the main control board 1310, it can be retained without being erased even in the event of abnormalities, malfunctions, or the activation of the completion function. As shown in Figure 657, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to continuously retain game information even if abnormality A occurs or the completion function is activated. Furthermore, if an initialization command such as a power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 due to a power-on restart or other reasons, the stored game information is initialized.

Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 retains game information even when an abnormality occurs or after the completion function is activated. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to output game information to the LCD screen independently of the game control on the main control board 1310. For example, it can display information about errors that occurred before the completion function was activated, making it possible to check the contents of game information during gameplay even after the game has stopped. This facilitates debugging and improves the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Once Anomaly A is resolved, the abnormal behavior corresponding to the anomaly ends, and the system returns to a normal state (normal behavior) where no abnormalities occur. However, let's assume that Anomaly A occurs again at time t030. At this time, the display on the LCD screen, the sound output, and the illumination patterns of various light-emitting elements will be the same as when Anomaly A occurred at time t010. Then, at time t040, the count value (MY value) will reach a specific value. In this example, the complete function is designed to operate even if Anomaly A has not been resolved. As mentioned above, in this example, even if the first abnormality such as Anomaly A occurs, processes related to prize balls and the counting of the count value (MY value) are executed as usual, and the complete function operates as in normal conditions even while an abnormality is occurring.

In this embodiment, if the complete function is activated in a normal state where no abnormalities have occurred (the special symbols are changing or are capable of changing), the game is immediately stopped. Similarly, if the complete function is activated while abnormality A is occurring, the game is immediately stopped. Furthermore, if the complete function is activated while abnormality A is occurring, the system is forced to prioritize notifications related to the complete function over the majority of notifications that were reporting the first abnormality. For example, on the LCD screen, abnormality notification A is either canceled (hidden), or the activation notification of the complete function (complete mode) is executed on a layer prior to the layer where abnormality notification A is being executed, so that notifications related to abnormality notification A cannot be recognized on the LCD screen.

Furthermore, when the complete function is activated, the audio output mode from the speaker, etc., ends the output in abnormal mode A and switches to complete mode 1, which outputs an audio message indicating that the complete function has been activated. After a predetermined change time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed, the audio output mode changes from complete mode 1 to complete mode 2 (time t050). Complete mode 2 can be a different mode from complete mode 1, and may output a different audio message, or, if power saving is prioritized, complete mode 2 may be set to a silent state with no audio output. Also, even if abnormal mode A occurs again while the complete function is activated (time t070), the audio output mode from the speaker, etc., will remain in complete mode 2, and output in abnormal mode A will not occur. Although not shown in the diagram, even if an anomaly A occurs again while the audio is being output in Complete Mode 1, the audio output mode from the speaker, etc., will not restart from Complete Mode 1 from the beginning. Instead, the output of Complete Mode 1 will continue (the timing of the change will continue), and after the change time has elapsed, it will change to Complete Mode 2.

The first light-emitting element enters abnormal mode A when abnormality A occurs (time t030). However, if the complete function is activated while abnormality A is occurring (time t040), it transitions from abnormal mode A to complete mode. The complete mode is not limited to the mode of this embodiment; it may also continuously emit light in a specific single color or multiple colors until the power is cut off without turning off. Considering that no gameplay takes place after the complete function is activated, controlling the light to turn off as much as possible, as in this embodiment, can also achieve power saving effects.

As described above, the second panel light emitter continues to emit light in its normal mode even when abnormality A occurs. However, when the complete function is activated, it transitions to the complete mode regardless of whether abnormality A is occurring or not. In this embodiment, the complete mode of the second panel light emitter is controlled in the same manner as the first panel light emitter, but it may be controlled in a different manner than the first panel light emitter.

The first frame light-emitting element, when the complete function is activated, is controlled in a complete mode, which involves initially lighting up to attract external attention, and then changing to an off state. If external attention is not required, the element may be controlled to turn off in the same manner as the first panel light-emitting element without lighting up.

As described above, the second frame light-emitting element is controlled to prioritize the notification of the game machine's status, excluding the activation of the complete function, and does not have a set complete mode. Specifically, when abnormality A occurs, it transitions from the normal mode (e.g., blue light) to abnormal mode A (e.g., red light), while abnormal mode A continues even if the complete function is activated. Furthermore, if abnormality A is resolved while the complete function is activated, it transitions to the normal mode (time t060). Subsequently, if abnormality A occurs again while the complete function is activated (time t070), the second frame light-emitting element transitions to abnormal mode A. Subsequently, if abnormality A is resolved while the complete function is activated, it transitions from abnormal mode A to the normal mode (time t080). In this way, unlike the other light-emitting elements, the second frame light-emitting element can function to indicate whether or not abnormality A has been resolved, even when the complete function is activated. Furthermore, regarding Anomaly A occurring at time t070, this is an anomaly that newly occurred after the completion function was activated. The control may be modified depending on whether or not external recognition of anomalies occurring after the completion function's activation is necessary. For example, if there is a high need for external recognition of both the resolution of anomalies after the completion function's activation and the occurrence of anomalies, the control may be set to Anomaly Mode A in response to Anomaly A occurring at time t070. Conversely, if external recognition is only required for the resolution of anomalies after the completion function's activation, Anomaly A occurring at time t070 may be maintained in the normal mode without being controlled to Anomaly Mode A.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, in this embodiment, before the complete function is activated, the notification of the remaining number of balls before the complete function is activated is performed. However, when abnormality A occurs, as described above, the notification of the remaining number of balls before the complete function is activated and the display of abnormality type A are performed in parallel.

Furthermore, even while Anomaly A is occurring, the counting of the count value (MY value) continues. For example, if a game ball launched into the game area while Anomaly A is occurring enters a prize slot and a prize ball is awarded, the count value (MY value) is added, and the remaining ball count notification for the complete function is updated accordingly, as the count approaches the number of balls required to activate the complete function (95,000 balls). On the other hand, if the out switch or rail switch detects the passage of a game ball while Anomaly A is occurring, the count value (MY value) is subtracted, and the remaining ball count notification for the complete function is updated accordingly, as the count moves further away from the number of balls required to activate the complete function (95,000 balls).

Furthermore, the following describes what happens when the gaming machine's power is turned off and then on again after the complete function has been activated. If the RAM clear switch is operated while the gaming machine's power is turned on again with the complete function activated, the complete function activation flag (a flag that is turned ON when the count value reaches 95,000) is set to OFF, deactivating the complete function, and the gaming machine restarts in its initial state (time t800). At this point, after the initialization process is complete, the gaming machine's game state returns to a game standby state, making it ready to start playing. Also, the LCD display screen, audio output, and various light-emitting elements return to their normal state, and the count value (MY value) changes from an uncountable state to a countable state. Additionally, the memory means of the peripheral control board 1510 is initialized.

On the other hand, if the game machine is powered back on without operating the RAM clear switch while the complete function is activated, the complete function activation flag remains ON, the complete function is not deactivated, and the game machine restarts while maintaining the game stop state (time t801). At this time, the LCD display screen maintains the complete mode, and the sound output, similar to when the complete function is activated, continues in complete mode 1 for a predetermined period before transitioning to complete mode 2. Furthermore, the first board light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second board light-emitting element transition to the complete mode. In addition, the counting of the count value (MY value) remains in a state where counting is impossible, and the memory means of the peripheral control board 1510 is initialized. Note that if abnormality A occurs when the game machine is powered back on without operating the RAM clear switch while the complete function is activated, the same control as performed at time t010 is performed.

[46-2. Control when the first abnormality (abnormality A) occurs during a jackpot game]
The above explains the control of the complete function when abnormality A occurs in a normal game state that is not a jackpot game state. Next, we will explain the control of the complete function when the first abnormality (abnormality/failure) occurs while the jackpot game state is continuing. Figure 658 is a timing chart for when abnormality A occurs in a jackpot game state and the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value that activates the complete function.

The example shown in Figure 658 is a state where the game transitions to a jackpot state when the completion function is about to activate, and the number of remaining balls until the completion function activates is being displayed (Figure 652). At this point, anomaly A occurs (time t110). Anomaly A is the first anomaly explained in Figure 657, and once anomaly A is resolved, the game can be continued (time t120).

While Anomaly A is occurring (times t110-t120), the LCD display screen will show the completion function activation and remaining ball count notification in the manner of a normal jackpot game state, and furthermore, Anomaly Pattern A, indicating that Anomaly A has occurred, will be displayed. At this time, as explained in the description of the normal game state, even if Anomaly A occurs during a jackpot game state, the completion function activation and remaining ball count notification and the display of Anomaly Pattern A will be performed in parallel.

Furthermore, while Anomaly A is occurring, an audio message indicating that Anomaly A is occurring will be output, similar to the normal game state (Anomaly Mode A). In addition, the light-emitting elements on the game board and door frame will illuminate in a specific mode (Anomaly Mode A). The illumination mode of each light-emitting element is the same as in the normal game state. That is, even in a jackpot game state, if Anomaly A occurs, the first board light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element will enter Anomaly Mode A, and will return to the normal state when Anomaly A is resolved. The second board light-emitting element will maintain its normal mode even if Anomaly A occurs.

Furthermore, just as in normal gameplay, the counting of the ball count (MY value) continues even while abnormality A is occurring. Therefore, just as in normal gameplay, for example, if a game ball launched within the game area enters the large prize slot while abnormality A is occurring and a prize ball is awarded, the ball count (MY value) is added even while abnormality A is occurring, and the remaining ball count notification for the complete function is updated accordingly as it approaches the number of balls required to activate the complete function (95,000 balls). On the other hand, if the out switch or rail switch detects the passage of a game ball while abnormality A is occurring, the ball count (MY value) is subtracted even while abnormality A is occurring, and the remaining ball count notification for the complete function is updated accordingly as it moves further away from the number of balls required to activate the complete function (95,000 balls). Also, the information stored on the peripheral control board 1510 can be retained without being erased even in the event of abnormalities, malfunctions, or the activation of the complete function, just as in normal gameplay.

After Anomaly A is resolved, Anomaly A reappears at time t130. In this case, the control is the same as when Anomaly A occurred at time t110, including the display on the LCD screen, audio output, and the illumination patterns of various light-emitting elements. Then, at time t140, the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value, and the complete function activates without Anomaly A being resolved.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game, the game continues even after the complete function is activated until the jackpot state ends. At this time, on the LCD screen, while abnormal mode A is being executed, the notification of the remaining ball count for the complete function activation is cleared, and a notification of the complete function activation (corresponding to the "excess prize ball suppression means activation reservation notification" mentioned above) is displayed (Figure 653). By switching the notification content regarding the activation of the complete function in this way, it becomes possible to understand that the count value (MY value) has reached a specific value.

Furthermore, the count value (MY value) is controlled to be uncountable when it reaches a specific value (95,000 in this embodiment). This prevents overflows and other malfunctions in game control that could occur due to a large increase in the count value (MY value).

Furthermore, if the operation of the complete function is extended until the end of the jackpot game state, the audio output, the first panel light-emitting element, and the first frame light-emitting element will continue to notify abnormality A (abnormality pattern A), and these abnormality notifications (error notifications) will also be extended. In this case, during the jackpot game state, the complete function activation notification display and the abnormality pattern A display are displayed in parallel, and these are displayed on the LCD screen in positions (display areas) where they do not overlap. After the jackpot game state ends (time t145), the complete function is activated. After the complete function is activated, as in the normal game state, the LCD screen transitions from the complete function activation notification display to the complete pattern, and the audio output executes complete pattern 1, transitioning to complete pattern 2 after a predetermined time has elapsed (time t150). Furthermore, the first panel light emitter and the first frame light emitter prioritize notifications related to the completion function over notifications of abnormality A. The second panel light emitter maintains its normal mode even when abnormality A occurs, but switches to the completion mode when the completion function is activated. On the other hand, the second frame light emitter maintains abnormality mode A.

Subsequently, the second frame light emitter returns to its normal state once abnormality A is resolved (time t160). If abnormality A occurs again while the game is stopped due to the activation of the complete function (time t170), the second frame light emitter returns to abnormal state A, and after abnormality A is resolved, returns to its normal state (time t180). Since the game is stopped at time t170 due to the activation of the complete function, even if abnormality A is not resolved, it may be configured to maintain abnormal state A for a predetermined period before returning to the normal state. Furthermore, even if abnormality A occurs again while the game is stopped due to the activation of the complete function, the LCD display screen, audio output, first board light emitter, first frame light emitter, and second board light emitter will maintain their complete state.

If the game machine's power is turned off and then on again after the completion function has been activated, it will be controlled in the same way as during normal gameplay.

[46-3. Control when a second abnormality (abnormality B) occurs during normal gameplay]
The above explains what happens when the first abnormality occurs. Next, we will explain the control for the second abnormality, which differs from the first abnormality and requires the game to be stopped while normal gameplay is continuing (during the special symbol change). Figure 659 is a timing chart for when abnormality B occurs when the complete function is activated.

The example shown in Figure 659 is a state where the complete function is about to be activated, and the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is being notified (Figure 652; notification of remaining balls before complete function activation). In this state, abnormality B occurs (time t010). Abnormality B is an abnormality related to fraudulent activity, such as magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, or fraudulent winning. If a second abnormality occurs, the game will be stopped until the abnormality is resolved. If a first abnormality occurs, normal gameplay (such as the display of special symbols and the launching of game balls) continues, but if a second abnormality occurs, the game will be temporarily stopped, including the display of special symbols and the launching of game balls (temporary game stop). This is because if a second abnormality occurs, there is a possibility that fraud has occurred, and it may not be possible to continue playing normally. Abnormality B can be resolved after a predetermined period of time has passed (30 minutes in this embodiment), or by restarting the power. Once abnormality B is resolved, the game will resume (time t020). Furthermore, while Anomaly B is occurring, the game is stopped, and the count value (MY value) is not updated. Specifically, if a game ball launched into the game area enters a prize slot while Anomaly B is occurring, the ball entry is detected, but no prize balls are awarded, and the count value (MY value) is not increased. Similarly, if an out switch or rail switch is passed by a game ball while Anomaly B is occurring, the passage is detected, but the count value (MY value) is not decreased. Therefore, while Anomaly B is occurring, the count cannot be updated, and the complete function is controlled to prevent it from activating while Anomaly B is occurring.

While Anomaly B is occurring (time t010-t020), the LCD screen displays the completion function activation and remaining ball count notification (Figure 652), and then displays Anomaly Pattern B, indicating that Anomaly B has occurred. Since Anomaly B is a second type of anomaly, the execution of Anomaly Pattern B may take precedence over the completion function activation and remaining ball count notification. For example, the layer executing Anomaly Pattern B may be placed in front of the layer executing the completion function activation and remaining ball count notification.

Furthermore, while Anomaly B is occurring, an audio message indicating that Anomaly B is occurring is output, similar to the case of the first Anomaly (Anomaly A), but the audio output is different from that of the first Anomaly (an audio message indicating the type of Anomaly B) (Anomaly Mode B). In addition, the light-emitting elements provided on the game board and door frame are controlled to indicate that Anomaly B is occurring, similar to the case of the first Anomaly (Anomaly A), but they emit light in a different manner than that of the first Anomaly (Anomaly Mode B). Also, in the case of the first Anomaly, the light-emitting elements on the second board emitted light in the normal manner, but since Anomaly B is the second Anomaly, the light-emitting elements on the second board also emit light in Anomaly Mode B, and anomaly is notified to the outside by more light-emitting elements than when Anomaly A occurred. As a result, since anomaly notification is performed by both the first and second board light-emitting elements, and anomaly notification is performed by light-emitting elements located in different places, it becomes easier for players and employees of the game hall to recognize that a more severe anomaly has occurred. Furthermore, the information stored in the peripheral control board 1510 can be retained without being erased even when an anomaly or failure occurs or when the complete function is activated, similar to when anomaly A occurs. This means that even if a RAM anomaly occurs in the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 may be able to display the anomaly details based on commands received from the main control board 1310 before the anomaly occurred. This can be useful for debugging during development and identifying the cause of anomalies during operation.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the complete function is activated in a normal state (where the special symbols are changing or are capable of changing), the game is immediately stopped. However, the complete function is not activated when abnormality B is present. If the power is not restarted and abnormality B is resolved (resolved after 30 minutes in this embodiment), and the game is resumed, the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value, and the complete function is activated (time t040). At this time, since the state is normal (the special symbols are changing or are capable of changing), the game is immediately stopped by the activation of the complete function. After the complete function is activated, the control of each component is as described above: the liquid crystal display screen, sound output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element transition to the complete mode, while the second frame light-emitting element maintains the normal mode.

Furthermore, if abnormality B occurs again after the complete function has been activated (time t070), the LCD display screen, audio output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element will maintain the complete mode. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element is controlled to prioritize the notification of the game machine's status excluding the activation of the complete function, as described above, and will transition from the normal mode to abnormal mode B when abnormality B occurs, just as it does in the case of abnormality A. Although not shown in the diagram, if abnormality B is resolved while the complete function is activated, it will transition to the normal mode. Thus, unlike the other light-emitting elements, the second frame light-emitting element can function to indicate whether or not abnormality B has been resolved, even when the complete function is activated. Furthermore, regarding the abnormality B that occurs at time t070, although it is an abnormality B that newly occurred after the completion function was activated, in this embodiment, severe abnormalities B should be reliably recognized externally, and abnormalities occurring while the completion function is active are also controlled to always be abnormality type B. Under no circumstances will the second frame light-emitting element remain in its normal state when abnormality B occurs.

If the game machine's power is turned off and then on again after the completion function has been activated, the control will be the same as in the case of the first malfunction.

As configured above, in this embodiment, for example, when conducting a test firing to verify the operation of the complete function during the development process of a gaming machine, even if a first abnormality occurs before the complete function is activated, it becomes possible to verify the operation of the complete function without stopping the counting related to the complete function during the test firing. Furthermore, even if the first abnormality is resolved after the complete function is activated, the state change during the operation of the complete function can be recognized externally, allowing for appropriate understanding of events that occurred during the test firing, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of gaming machine development. In addition, if a second abnormality occurs before the complete function is activated, the counting related to the complete function is stopped, preventing the complete function from activating in a state with a serious malfunction. Furthermore, the state change of the second abnormality that occurs during the operation of the complete function can be recognized externally, allowing for appropriate understanding of events that occurred during the test firing, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of gaming machine development. Furthermore, regarding the second abnormality, the complete function can be appropriately controlled even under the conditions of installation in a gaming hall, improving the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function compared to conventional models.

Furthermore, the configurations of the first panel light-emitting element, the second panel light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element are not limited to those described above; other configurations are also possible. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the first panel light-emitting element, the second panel light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element were full-color LEDs, but all or part of them may be single-color LEDs. When single-color LEDs are used, it is preferable to require the arrangement of multiple LEDs and to represent the differences between each mode by combining the light-emitting modes of the multiple LEDs. As an example, if multiple single-color LEDs (LED1, LED2) are used as the second frame light-emitting element, abnormal mode A could be defined as "LED1: illuminated, LED2: off," and abnormal mode B as "LED1: off, LED2: illuminated," thereby simplifying control by distinguishing each mode by combining the light-emitting modes of the multiple LEDs.

In the above-described embodiment, the first board light-emitting element, the second board light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element were all positioned so that they could be seen by the player. Alternatively, the second frame light-emitting element could be positioned on the back side of the main body frame instead of the door frame, so that it is not visible to the player when installed in a gaming hall. Specifically, the second frame light-emitting element is controlled to prioritize the notification of the gaming machine's status excluding the activation of the complete function, as described above. It can be controlled to correspond to either abnormality A or B when the complete function is activated. In particular, since it can also notify of abnormality B when the complete function is activated, positioning the second frame light-emitting element on a predetermined circuit board on the back side of the main body frame so that it is visible from the back of the gaming machine allows hall managers to detect any fraudulent activity while the complete function is activated through inspections of the island equipment, without the fraudster knowing, thus further improving the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function.

Furthermore, considering the risk of light leakage to the back of the gaming machine while the first and second panel light-emitting elements are illuminated (for example, leakage from around the liquid crystal display or from gaps in the assembly of the gaming board), it is preferable to control the first and second panel light-emitting elements, which are prone to light leakage, to be turned off while the complete function is operating, when positioning the second frame light-emitting element on the back of the main frame. This prevents other lights on the back of the gaming machine from obstructing the visibility of the second frame light-emitting element's illumination status, making it easier for hall managers to inspect the inside of the island equipment (checking the illumination status of the second frame light-emitting element).

Furthermore, when positioning the second frame light-emitting element on the back side of the main frame rather than the door frame, it is possible that the interior of the island equipment may be a harsh environment (such as one with a lot of dust). Therefore, a predetermined cover member may be provided to cover the substrate on the back side of the main frame where the second frame light-emitting element is positioned. It is preferable that the cover member be colorless and transparent, thereby effectively protecting the second frame light-emitting element even in a harsh environment (such as one with a lot of dust) inside the island equipment.

[46-4. Control when the main frame of the gaming machine is opened during normal gameplay]
The following explains the problems with gaming machines equipped with a complete function and the relationship between the opening and closing of the main frame and door frame by the hall manager and the complete function, as well as possible solutions to these problems.

Regarding gaming machines with the "Complete" function activated, it is conceivable that the gaming hall may open the main frame, which is designed to be openable relative to the outer frame, and operate the power switch on the back in order to turn off the power during business hours for energy-saving purposes. In such cases, if excessive notification (such as a loud notification) occurs due to the opening of the main frame, as in the past, it may cause discomfort to surrounding players. Furthermore, in cases where the gaming hall has activated the "Complete" function, it may also be necessary to open the door frame during business hours to place paper notices such as "This gaming machine is not playable" on the inside of the glass unit. In such cases as well, if excessive notification (such as a loud notification) occurs due to the opening of the door frame, as in the past, it may cause discomfort to surrounding players. Therefore, the following describes an example that can resolve the above problems.

First, we will explain the control of the complete function when the main frame of the gaming machine (for example, main frame 4) is opened while the machine is in a normal state where normal gameplay is possible (e.g., during the variation of special symbols). Figure 660 is a timing chart for when the main frame is opened while the machine is in a normal state where normal gameplay is possible (e.g., during the variation of special symbols), and the complete function is activated while the main frame is open.

The example shown in Figure 660 depicts a state where the complete function is about to activate, and the remaining number of balls until the complete function activates is being notified (Figure 652; notification of remaining balls before complete function activation). In this state, the main frame is opened (time t010). In this embodiment, when the main frame is opened, the launch of game balls stops, but control such as the display of special symbols continues. Therefore, while the main frame is open, no new game balls are launched, but the count of balls entering various prize and payout slots (MY value) is still possible. When the main frame is closed, the launch of game balls resumes (time t020).

While the main unit frame is open (time t010 to t020), the LCD screen displays the remaining ball count notification for the complete function activation (Figure 652), and then displays a main unit frame open indication (such as the message "Main unit frame is open"). In this embodiment, the notification of the remaining ball count for the complete function activation and the display of the main unit frame open indication are performed in parallel, and are displayed in positions (display areas) on the LCD screen that do not overlap. However, it is also possible to display only one of the two, rather than performing them in parallel.

Furthermore, while the main unit frame is open, an audio message indicating that the main unit frame is open is output at a predetermined maximum volume (main unit frame open mode). This audio message may be a specific alarm sound or a message such as "Please close the main unit frame." Additionally, light-emitting elements other than the second panel light-emitting element (including the first panel light-emitting element) on the game board and door frame illuminate in a specific mode (main unit frame open mode). Meanwhile, the second panel light-emitting element continues to illuminate in its normal mode. Also, as with the case where abnormality A occurs, the counting of the count value (MY value) continues. Similarly, the information stored on the peripheral control board 1510 can be retained without being erased even when the main unit frame is open.

After the main unit frame closes and gameplay resumes, the main unit frame opens again at time t030. At this time, the display on the LCD screen, the sound output, and the illumination patterns of the various light-emitting elements are the same as when the main unit frame was opened at time t010. Then, when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value while the main unit frame is open, the complete function is activated, and gameplay is immediately stopped (time t040). As mentioned above, even when the main unit frame is open, the counting of the count value (MY value) continues, so the complete function may be activated.

When the complete function is activated, all light-emitting elements except the second frame light-emitting element transition from the main frame open mode to the complete mode, and control is implemented so that the complete mode takes precedence over the main frame open notification. Meanwhile, the second frame light-emitting element maintains the main frame open mode. This allows for the recognition that the main frame is open via the second frame light-emitting element, while suppressing external notifications during the activation of the complete function. Subsequently, when the main frame is closed, the light-emitting elements other than the second frame light-emitting element maintain the complete mode, and the second frame light-emitting element transitions to the normal mode (time t060).

Furthermore, if the main unit frame is opened again after the complete function has been activated (at time t070), the LCD display screen, audio output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element will maintain the complete mode, and the main unit frame open mode will not be executed. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element will transition to the main unit frame open mode. If the main unit frame is closed after this, the second frame light-emitting element may be returned to the normal mode, or the main unit frame open mode may be maintained. Also, since the game has stopped due to the activation of the complete function, it is acceptable to maintain the normal mode without transitioning to the main unit frame open mode.

If the game machine's power is turned off and then on again after the completion function has been activated, it will be controlled in the same way as if an abnormality occurred during normal gameplay.

By configuring the system as described above, the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function can be improved compared to conventional machines. For example, even when a gaming hall opens the main frame to operate the back of a gaming machine with the complete function activated, for the purpose of saving energy, the notification of the main frame opening can be suppressed, avoiding causing discomfort to those around. Furthermore, to address concerns that some kind of fraudulent activity might be performed on the back of a gaming machine with the complete function activated by opening the main frame, the system monitors the opening status of the main frame only using the second frame light-emitting element. This allows for the suppression of discomfort to those around while also deterring fraudulent activity such as opening the main frame of a gaming machine with the complete function activated.

[46-5. Control when the door frame of the gaming machine is opened during normal gameplay]
Next, we will explain the case where, in a normal state where regular gameplay is possible (such as during the variation of special symbols), the door frame that can be opened and closed relative to the main frame is opened, and the complete function is activated before it is closed. Figure 661 is a timing chart for the case where, in a normal state where regular gameplay is possible (such as during the variation of special symbols), the door frame is opened, and the complete function is activated while the door frame is open.

In the example shown in Figure 661, the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is announced (Figure 652; announcement of remaining balls before complete function activation). At this point, the door frame, which can be opened and closed relative to the main frame, is opened (time t010). When the door frame is opened, the launch of game balls stops, similar to when the main frame is opened, but control of special symbol variations and other functions continues. Therefore, while the door frame is open, no new game balls are launched, but the count of balls entering various prize and payout slots (MY value) is still possible. When the door frame is closed, the launch of game balls resumes (time t020).

While the door frame is open (time t010 to t020), the LCD screen displays the remaining ball count notification for the complete function activation (Figure 652), and then displays a door frame open indication (such as the message "Door frame is open"). In this embodiment, the notification of the remaining ball count for the complete function activation and the display of the door frame open indication are performed in parallel, and are displayed in positions (display areas) on the LCD screen that do not overlap. However, it is also possible to display only one of the two, rather than performing them in parallel.

Furthermore, while the door frame is open, an audio message indicating that the door frame is open is output at a predetermined maximum volume (door frame open mode). This audio message may be a specific alarm sound or a message such as "Please close the door frame." Additionally, light-emitting elements other than the second panel light-emitting element (including the first panel light-emitting element) on the game board and door frame illuminate in a specific mode (door frame open mode). Meanwhile, the second panel light-emitting element continues to illuminate in its normal mode. Also, as with the main frame open, the counting of the count value (MY value) continues. Similarly, information stored on the peripheral control board 1510 can be retained without being erased even when the door frame is open.

After the door frame closes and gameplay resumes, the door frame opens again at time t030. At this time, the display on the LCD screen, the sound output, and the illumination patterns of the various light-emitting elements are the same as when the door frame was opened at time t010. Then, when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value while the door frame is open, the complete function is activated, and gameplay is immediately stopped (time t040). As mentioned above, even when the door frame is open, the counting of the count value (MY value) and other processes continue, so the complete function may be activated.

When the complete function is activated, the audio output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element transition from the door frame open mode to the complete mode, and control is implemented so that the complete mode takes precedence over the door frame open notification. However, for the LCD display screen, the door frame open mode is executed in parallel with the complete mode without terminating the door frame open mode. This clearly notifies the user that the door frame is open when the complete function is activated, thereby preventing fraudulent activities such as opening the door frame and touching the pins on the game board. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element maintains the door frame open mode without transitioning to the complete mode.

Subsequently, when the door frame is closed, the second frame light emitter returns to its normal state (time t060). Also, the LCD display screen, which had been continuously showing the door frame open state, ceases to display only the complete state.

Then, when the door frame opens again (time t070), the audio output, first panel light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second panel light-emitting element maintain their complete state, while the LCD display screen simultaneously executes both the complete state and the door frame open state. The second frame light-emitting element also transitions from the normal state to the door frame open state. If the door frame closes after this (time t080), the second frame light-emitting element may return to the normal state, or it may maintain the door frame open state. Furthermore, since the game has stopped due to the activation of the complete function, it may maintain the normal state without transitioning to the door frame open state.

If the game machine's power is turned off and then on again after the completion function has been activated, it will be controlled in the same way as when an abnormality occurs during normal gameplay or when the main unit frame is opened.

By configuring the system as described above, the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function can be improved compared to conventional machines. For example, if a hall administrator attempts to open the door frame of a gaming machine with the complete function activated in order to perform some kind of fraudulent act against the game board, the LCD display and the second frame light-emitting element can notify the administrator that the door frame is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activity from occurring inside the gaming machine.

By configuring the system as described above, the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function can be improved compared to conventional machines. For example, even when a gaming hall staff opens the door frame to place paper notices such as "This gaming machine is not playable" on the inside of the glass unit during business hours, the system can suppress the notification of the door frame being open, thus avoiding causing discomfort to those around. Furthermore, to allow staff to recognize if the door frame has been left open from the front of the gaming machine, the LCD display can be controlled to show only the door frame open even when the complete function is activated, thereby reducing the likelihood of errors during such work. Additionally, to address concerns that someone might open the door frame of a gaming machine with the complete function activated and attempt some kind of fraudulent activity against the game board, the system monitors the door frame's open status only using the second frame light-emitting element. This allows for deterrence of fraudulent activity while minimizing discomfort to those around.

Furthermore, when the completion function is activated, the opening of the main frame and the opening of the door frame may be performed sequentially. In some cases, the aforementioned opening of the main frame and the opening of the door frame may occur in parallel after the completion function is activated. Considering such cases, as a modification, the opening of the main frame and the opening of the door frame may be performed as follows.

For example, if the door frame is opened while the complete function is activated on a gaming machine, and then the main frame is opened while the door frame is open, both the door frame and the main frame will be open after the complete function has been activated. In this situation, the audio output, the first panel light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second panel light-emitting element are controlled in a common complete mode. The LCD display screen is controlled to prioritize the door frame open mode (maintaining the door frame open mode) even after the main frame is opened, rather than transitioning to the main frame open mode. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element is controlled to execute a special mode that alternates between the main frame open mode and the door frame open mode. This allows both states to be understood from either the front or back of the game machine, while comparing them with the actual work situation, further improving convenience.

Furthermore, since the main frame opening mode and the door frame opening mode are relatively similar, and there is little need for the gaming hall to distinguish between them, at least the second frame light-emitting element may be controlled in the same manner without any difference between the main frame opening mode and the door frame opening mode. This avoids the increased control complexity that occurs when the main frame opening mode and the door frame opening mode are executed in parallel.

Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, similar to the embodiments A and B described above, the second frame light-emitting element may be positioned on the back side of the main frame. In particular, considering the operation of opening the main frame, positioning the second frame light-emitting element on the back side of the main frame makes it easier to see during the operation, thus improving convenience.

[46-5. Control when door frame components are attached or detached during normal gameplay]
The above describes the control of the complete function when an abnormality occurs during gameplay or when the main frame or door frame is opened. Next, we will explain the relationship between other work performed by the hall manager on the door frame and the complete function. Specifically, in this embodiment, some components provided on the door frame of the gaming machine are detachable, and we will explain the relationship between the detachment work (mainly removal work) of these components and the complete function.

In recent years, many gaming machines have featured special door frame decorations (door frame components) that match the motif of the game board, designed to attract customers and make the machine visible to players from a distance. However, such door frame decorations, intended to attract customers, are meaningless for gaming machines that have become unplayable due to the activation of the "complete" function. In fact, they may even cause discomfort to players who approach the machine after noticing the decoration (for example, they try to play but are unable to because the "complete" function has activated). While it might be possible for the gaming hall to detach the door frame decoration in such cases, generally, as a measure against vandalism, detaching the door frame decoration from the door frame (severing the connection between the door frame and the decoration) triggers a loud sound or flashing light. Therefore, using the same configuration as before could cause discomfort to surrounding players when performing such detachment work. The following describes an example that can resolve these problems.

First, we will explain the case where the door frame components attached to the main frame of the gaming machine are attached and detached. The door frame components are, for example, decorative components (door frame ornaments) that adorn the door frame of the gaming machine. They are electrically connected to the game board side (such as the peripheral control board 1510) via a relay board provided on the back of the door frame, and are equipped with light-emitting elements that can emit light based on control from the game board side. Furthermore, the door frame components include a first door frame component that can be attached and detached using thumbscrews or a simple locking mechanism without the use of tools such as a screwdriver, and a second door frame component that requires the use of tools such as a screwdriver for attachment and detachment and cannot be easily attached and detached. The first and second door frame components will be illustrated with reference to the drawings.

(composition)
Figure 662 is a diagram illustrating the door frame components in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and a through-hole that penetrates from front to back, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls, a top unit (first door frame component) 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a performance operation unit (second door frame component) including a performance operation section attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and positioned above the tray unit 200. The unit comprises a molded member 220, a left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, a handle unit 500 that is attached to the lower right front of the door frame base unit 100, passing through the tray unit 200, and which can be operated by the player to launch the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 into the game area of the game board 5, and a glass unit 560 attached to the rear of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through-hole.

The top unit (first door frame component) 350 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 3 with thumbscrews and a simple locking mechanism (not shown), and can be easily attached and detached by the gaming hall without the use of tools such as screwdrivers. This allows the gaming hall to easily install a top unit (first door frame component) 350 with decorations matching the new game board, even when the game board is changed to a new one with a different motif, thereby reducing the installation cost of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, unlike the top unit (first door frame component) 350, the performance control unit (second door frame component) 220 is fixed in place to withstand sufficient strength when receiving input from the player. Considering the player's safety, it is firmly secured to the back of the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) with multiple fastening screws using a screwdriver or similar tool, to the extent that it cannot be easily detached during gameplay.

Furthermore, each door frame component (first door frame component 350, second door frame component 220) is assigned identification information (ID) to identify its correspondence with the gaming machine (game board). Therefore, if a door frame component that does not correspond to the gaming machine (game board) is installed in the gaming machine, the peripheral control board 1510 or similar device will detect the mismatch in identification information (ID) and notify the system accordingly (ID mismatch mode). In addition, each door frame component (first door frame component 350, second door frame component 220) is also monitored for connection to the gaming machine (game board), and if neither door frame component is connected to the gaming machine (game board), the peripheral control board 1510 or similar device will detect the disconnection and notify the system accordingly (first disconnection mode, second disconnection mode). Furthermore, door frame components that are intended to be replaced at some point, such as the first door frame component 350, are configured to allow the game to continue, including the display of special symbols and the launch of game balls, even if a mismatch in identification information (ID) is detected (however, the illumination operation of the first door frame component 350 with a different identification information (ID) is prohibited). In this embodiment, since the detachment of door frame components (first door frame component 350, second door frame component 220) is the main issue, the following explanation will focus on the disconnection of door frame components.

(Control when the first door frame component is attached or detached)
Next, we will explain the cases in which the door frame components are attached or detached while the game is in a normal state where normal gameplay is possible (such as during the variation of special symbols), and in which the door frame components are attached or detached while the complete function is in operation. Figure 663 is a timing chart for when the first door frame component 350 is detached while the game is in a normal state where normal gameplay is possible (such as during the variation of special symbols) and while the complete function is in operation.

In the example shown in Figure 663, the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is announced (Figure 652; announcement of remaining balls before complete function activation). If the first door frame component 350 detaches in this state, it is determined to be disconnected and enters a disconnected state (time t010). Even when the first door frame component 350 detaches and enters a disconnected state, control such as the display of special symbol variations continues. Therefore, the counting of the count value (MY value) is possible even while the first door frame component 350 is detached (disconnected state). After the first door frame component 350 is reattached and the connection state is restored, gameplay can continue (time t020).

While the first door frame component 350 is detached and disconnected (time t010-t020), the liquid crystal display screen displays the remaining ball count notification (Figure 652) indicating the completion function has been activated. Furthermore, it displays the first detachment mode indicating the disconnection of the first door frame component 350 (first door frame component detachment notification). In this embodiment, the notification of the remaining ball count and the display of the first detachment mode are performed in parallel, and are displayed in positions (display areas) on the liquid crystal display screen that do not overlap.

Furthermore, while the first door frame component 350 is detached and disconnected, an audio output is given in a first detachment mode indicating that the first door frame component 350 is disconnected (first door frame component detachment notification). This audio may be a specific alarm sound, or it may be an audio prompting the player to attach the first main frame component, such as "Please attach the first main frame component." In addition, the first panel light-emitting body and the first frame light-emitting body illuminate in a first detachment mode indicating that the first door frame component 350 is disconnected (first door frame component detachment notification). On the other hand, the second panel light-emitting body and the second frame light-emitting body continue in their normal mode. In particular, the second panel light-emitting body continues in its normal mode out of concern that the detachment of the first door frame component 350 may be merely a malfunction, and in such a case, the player would be unable to confirm the performance, leading to a decrease in enjoyment. Similarly, the second frame light-emitting body continues in its normal mode out of concern that if the detachment of the first door frame component 350 is merely a malfunction, the player might mistake it for part of the performance, leading to a decrease in enjoyment. Furthermore, the information stored on the peripheral control board 1510 is retained and not erased even when the first door frame component 350 is not connected.

After the first door frame component 350 is attached and the connection state is restored, the complete function is activated when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value, and the game is immediately stopped (time t040). When the complete function is activated, the first board light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second board light-emitting element transition to the complete mode, while the second frame light-emitting element continues in the normal mode. Then, after the complete function is activated, when the first door frame component 350 detaches again and becomes disconnected (time t060), the liquid crystal display screen, sound output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element are controlled to maintain the complete mode without executing the first detachment mode. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element is controlled to continue in the normal mode without executing the first detachment mode. In other words, after the complete function is activated, even if the first door frame component 350 detaches and becomes disconnected, the liquid crystal display screen, audio output, first panel light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, second panel light-emitting element, and second frame light-emitting element all maintain their complete mode without changing their configuration. Furthermore, even after the first door frame component 350 is reattached and connected, the complete mode is maintained without any change in the configuration of the liquid crystal display screen, audio output, first panel light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, second panel light-emitting element, and second frame light-emitting element. Note that the count value (MY value) becomes uncountable when the complete function is activated, and the storage means of the peripheral control board 1510 retains its stored contents as they are.

Furthermore, even if the first door frame component 350 detaches and becomes disconnected, the counting of the count value (MY value) continues to be processed, which may trigger the complete function. When the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value while the first door frame component 350 is detached and disconnected, the complete function is activated, and gameplay is immediately stopped. When the complete function is activated, the first detachment mode, which was being performed by the LCD display screen, audio output, first board light-emitting element, and first frame light-emitting element, is forcibly terminated, and the system transitions to the complete mode. Also, the second board light-emitting element transitions from the normal mode to the complete mode, while the second frame light-emitting element maintains the normal mode.

Furthermore, if the first door frame component 350 detaches and becomes disconnected after the complete function is activated, and then a first door frame component 350 with a different identification information (ID) is installed, resulting in a connected state (ID mismatch), the first ID mismatch behavior (notification indicating that the wrong first door frame component 350 is installed) indicating the difference in identification information (ID) may be avoided. This is because, in gaming machines scheduled for replacement with a new game board, if the complete function is activated and gameplay has stopped, it is possible to replace only the first door frame component in advance. This avoids causing discomfort to surrounding players by executing the first detachment behavior during such replacement work. Even with this configuration, the convenience of work related to the first door frame component can be improved.

If the game machine's power is cut off and then restarted after the complete function has been activated, the system will be controlled in the same way as if an abnormality occurred during normal gameplay. If the power is restarted while operating the RAM clear switch, the complete function will be deactivated, and the game machine will restart in its initial state (time t800). On the other hand, if the power is restarted without operating the RAM clear switch, the complete function will not be deactivated, and the game machine will restart while maintaining the game stop state (time t801).

Furthermore, if the first door frame component 350 is detached and disconnected when the gaming machine is powered on, or if a first door frame component 350 with a different identification information (ID) is installed and connected (ID mismatch), if the RAM clear switch is operated while the power is turned on again and the complete function is deactivated, the system will perform normal control (the first panel light emitter and the first frame light emitter will execute the first detachment mode). On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated and the complete function continues to operate, the system will not perform normal control, but will instead perform control similar to when the complete function is activated (none of the light emitters will execute the second detachment mode). This will suppress the execution of unnecessary notifications when the first door frame component 350 is replaced, etc.

(Control when the second door frame component is attached or detached)
The above describes the case when the first door frame component 350 is attached or detached. Next, we will describe the case when the second door frame component 220 is attached or detached. Figure 664 is a timing chart of when the second door frame component 220 is detached during a normal state in which normal gameplay can be performed (such as during the variation of special symbols) and during the operation of the complete function.

In the example shown in Figure 664, the number of remaining balls until the complete function is activated is announced (Figure 652; announcement of remaining balls before complete function activation). If the second door frame component 220 detaches in this state, it is determined to be disconnected and enters a disconnected state (time t010). When the second door frame component 220 detaches and enters a disconnected state, control such as the launch of game balls and the display of special symbols continues, similar to when the first door frame component 350 detaches. Therefore, the count value (MY value) can still be counted even while the second door frame component 220 is detached (disconnected state). After the second door frame component 220 is reattached and the connection state is restored, gameplay can continue (time t020).

While the second door frame component 220 is detached and in an unconnected state (time t010 to t020), the liquid crystal display screen executes (displays) the notification of the remaining number of balls with the complete function activated (Figure 652), and then executes (displays) a second detachment mode indicating that the second door frame component 220 is unconnected (second door frame component detachment notification). In this embodiment, the notification of the remaining number of balls with the complete function activated and the display of the second detachment mode are performed in parallel and are displayed in positions (display areas) on the liquid crystal display screen that do not overlap with each other. Furthermore, while the second door frame component 220 is detached and in an unconnected state, the first door frame component 350 may also detach and become unconnected, or conversely, while the first door frame component 350 is detached and in an unconnected state, the second door frame component 220 may also detach and become unconnected. In such cases, the display of the first detachment mode and the display of the second detachment mode can be executed in parallel, and these are also displayed on the liquid crystal display screen in positions (display areas) that do not overlap with each other.

Furthermore, while the second door frame component 220 is detached, an audio signal is output in a second detachment mode indicating that the second door frame component 220 is not connected (second door frame component detachment notification). This audio signal may be a specific alarm sound, or it may be an audio prompting attachment, such as "Please attach the second main frame component." In addition, the first panel light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element illuminate in the second detachment mode (second door frame component detachment notification). The second frame light-emitting element maintained its normal mode when the first door frame component 350 was detached and disconnected, but when the second door frame component 220, which cannot be easily attached or detached, is detached and disconnected, there is a risk of malicious mischief or fraud, so the second frame light-emitting element is made to illuminate in the second detachment mode to ensure that the gaming hall is reliably aware of this. At this time, a signal indicating that the second door frame component 220 is detached and disconnected may be output to an external device such as a hall computer. Furthermore, regarding the second light-emitting element, while it is unlikely that the detachment of the second door frame component 220 is simply a malfunction, there is still considerable concern that it may be a malfunction. Therefore, similar to the detachment of the first door frame component 350, there is a concern that the player will be unable to confirm the effects, leading to a decrease in enjoyment. To this end, the normal mode is maintained. The information stored in the peripheral control board 1510 is retained even while the second door frame component 220 is detached and disconnected, allowing for the control of various light-emitting elements and the execution of the second detachment mode on the LCD display screen.

After the second door frame component 220 is attached and the connection is restored, the complete function is activated when the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value, and the game is immediately stopped (time t040). When the complete function is activated, the first board light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second board light-emitting element transition to the complete mode, while the second frame light-emitting element continues in the normal mode. Then, after the complete function is activated, when the second door frame component 220 detaches again and becomes disconnected (time t060), the LCD display screen, sound output, first board light-emitting element, first frame light-emitting element, and second board light-emitting element maintain the complete mode without executing the second detachment mode. On the other hand, the second frame light-emitting element executes the second detachment mode, as before the complete function was activated.

Furthermore, even if the second door frame component 220 detaches and becomes disconnected, the counting of the count value (MY value) and other processes continue, which may trigger the complete function. When the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value while the second door frame component 20 is detached and disconnected, the complete function activates, and gameplay is immediately stopped. When the complete function activates, the second detachment mode, which was being performed by the LCD display screen, audio output, first board light-emitting element, and first frame light-emitting element, is forcibly terminated, and the system transitions to the complete mode. The second board light-emitting element also transitions from the normal mode to the complete mode, while the second frame light-emitting element maintains the second detachment mode.

If the power to the gaming machine is cut off and then turned back on after the complete function has been activated, the control is the same as in the case of the first door frame component 350. If the power is turned back on while operating the RAM clear switch, the complete function is deactivated, and the gaming machine restarts in its initial state (time t800). On the other hand, if the power is turned back on without operating the RAM clear switch, the complete function is not deactivated, and the gaming machine restarts while maintaining the game stop state (time t801).

Furthermore, if the second door frame component 220 is detached and disconnected when the gaming machine is powered on, or if a second door frame component 220 with a different identification information (ID) is installed and it is connected (ID mismatch), if the complete function is deactivated by restarting the power while operating the RAM clear switch, the system will perform normal control (the first panel light-emitting element, the first frame light-emitting element, and the second frame light-emitting element will perform the second detachment mode). On the other hand, if the complete function continues to operate after restarting the power without operating the RAM clear switch, the system will not perform normal control, but will instead perform control similar to when the complete function is activated (only the second frame light-emitting element will perform the second detachment mode). This will suppress the execution of unnecessary notifications when the second door frame component 220 is replaced, etc.

By configuring the system as described above, the convenience of gaming machines equipped with the complete function can be improved compared to conventional machines. For example, when removing decorative door frame components (door frame parts) intended to attract customers from a gaming machine with the complete function activated, there is a risk of causing discomfort to those nearby if an alert regarding the removal of the door frame components is issued. This situation can be prevented. Furthermore, by issuing an alert when components that are not easily detachable are removed, fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a variation, if the first door frame component 350 detaches and becomes disconnected within a special period immediately before the count value (MY value) reaches a specific value that activates the complete function, the first detachment mode may be exceptionally not be performed for the liquid crystal display screen, sound output, first panel light emitter, and first frame light emitter. This is because, if there is a gaming machine left unattended immediately before the activation of the complete function, it is unlikely that any new players will start playing on that machine. In such cases, there is no problem in deliberately detaching the first door frame component 350 to save power related to the control of the first door frame component 350, and this avoids causing discomfort to surrounding players by performing the first detachment mode during such detachment work. By configuring it in this way, the convenience of work related to the first door frame component can be improved. Furthermore, the "special period" immediately preceding the reaching of a specific value may refer to the time between the count value (MY value) reaching a predetermined value (for example, 94500 if the specific value is 95000) and reaching the specific value, or it may refer to the time during a jackpot game when the count value (MY value) reaches the specific value but the game continues until the end of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, similar to the embodiments of abnormal behaviors A and B described above, the second frame light-emitting element may be positioned on the back side of the main frame. In particular, since the second door frame component 220 is firmly attached so that it cannot be removed by a player, there is a possibility that a player intentionally destroyed the second door frame component 220 when the complete function was activated. Therefore, while refraining from external notification to encourage the player to remain at the location as much as possible, the situation can be recognized only by the game hall through the second frame light-emitting element, ensuring that the game hall has an opportunity to warn the player. As a result, acts of destruction against game machines with the complete function activated can be deterred, and consequently, the convenience of game machines equipped with the complete function can be improved.

[47. Control of the Complete Function in Managed Gaming Machines]
The above describes various controls under the conditions when the complete function (specific function) is activated. Below, we will describe the controls in a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) like the modified example described above, which calculates a count value (MY value) as the number of game balls consumed as the number of game media (game balls), when the complete function is activated in a state other than normal gameplay.

[47-1. Configuration of a controlled gaming machine]
Figure 666 is a front perspective view of the modified pachinko machine 1 described above. The modified pachinko machine 1 described above is used in the island facilities of amusement halls. This pachinko machine 1 is a so-called sealed-type amusement machine or managed amusement machine in which a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are sealed inside without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside, and circulate within the machine so that players do not come into contact with the game balls B. In this pachinko machine 1, the number of balls a player has is recorded as ball data (game data) and stored in a memory means such as RAM.

The modified pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed to close the front of the outer frame 2, a main body frame 4 that can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and has a game area 5a that is visible to the player through the door frame 3 and into which the player puts the game balls B.

In this modified pachinko machine 1, the door frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4, allowing it to be opened and closed from the front, similar to conventional machines. While it shares features with conventional machines, such as a handle (unit) 500 operated by the player to launch game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, the main difference lies in the absence of upper and lower trays for storing game balls. Instead, it features a ball count display unit 9140 and a player-operable counting button switch 9180, both located on a forward-protruding bulge 9200.

The ball count display unit 9140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. The ball count display unit 9140 is located on the upper surface of the protruding section 9200, to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and to the left of the counting button switch 9180.

The counting button switch 9180 is located on the upper surface of the protruding portion 9200, to the right of the center in the left-right direction. As will be described in detail later, pressing the counting button switch 9180 while a player has balls in their possession sends data about the balls to an external device (such as a game ball dispensing device installed outside the game machine) for settlement.

The handle (unit) 500, like conventional machines, is equipped with a handle lever 504 that can be operated by the player, a launch stop switch 501 that can be pressed by the player, a handle touch sensor 509 that detects changes in the electrostatic capacitance of the handle lever 504, and a handle operation (rotation) sensor 507 that detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504.

The main frame 4 of this modified example includes a ball launching unit 550 for launching game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a foul unit 570 for recovering game balls B that were launched by the ball launching unit 550 but did not enter the game area 5a, and a ball circulation path unit 600 for sending game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and game balls B recovered by the foul unit 570 back to the ball launching unit 550.

Next, the control configuration of the modified pachinko machine 1 will be described. Figure 667 is a block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of the modified pachinko machine 1. The control unit of the pachinko machine 1 mainly consists of a main control board 1310 provided on the game board, a peripheral control board 1510, and a frame control board 740 provided on the main frame 4. The functions of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are as described in Figure 17, etc.

The frame control board 740, although not shown in the diagram, includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, a CPU for executing processing programs and commands, and other components.

The frame control board 740 includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, a ball removal switch used to remove the enclosed game balls B from the ball removal opening of the ball circulation path unit 9600 to the outside (ball receiving tray), and a ball count memory/display clear switch (also called a ball count clear switch) for clearing the number of balls the player has stored in the RAM, etc., and clearing the display on the ball count display unit 9140 of the door frame 3.

The frame control board 740 is connected via bidirectional communication to the main control board 1310, which will be described later and is located on the game board 5, and also via bidirectional communication to the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 9765. The frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball dispensing device 8 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 9765.

The frame control board 740 is connected to the ball count display unit 9140, the launch stop switch 161, the handle touch (contact detection) sensor 509, the handle rotation (operation) sensor 507, and the counting button switch 9180 of the door frame 3. As will be described in detail later, the frame control board 740 performs controls such as displaying the number of balls held in the ball count display unit 9140, settlement processing via operation of the counting button switch 9180, control of the ball launching unit, ball lifting unit 650, ball delivery unit 700, etc., and management (monitoring) of the game balls B in the circulating ball path unit.

Furthermore, the frame control board 740 is connected to the following: the door opening switch 9507 for the main frame 4, the frame opening switch 9508, the launch solenoid 9553, the launch subtraction sensor 9554, the out ball sensor 9605, the safe ball sensor 9606, the foul ball sensor 9607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 9621, the circulating ball excess sensor 9622, the lifting inlet sensor 9653, the lifting outlet sensor 9654, the lifting motor 9664, the lifting motor index sensor 9666, the ball motor 9688, the launch pre-sensor 9704, and the ball feeding solenoid 9706.

The power supply board 750 is for supplying power at a predetermined voltage to the frame control board 740, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. A power switch is located near the right edge of the rear surface of the power supply board 750. This power switch is exposed from the rear of the power supply board box for easy operation.

The interface board 760 is used to relay connections between the frame control board 740 and various relay boards located on the door frame 3 side and the game board 5 side.

The gaming ball dispensing device connection terminal board 765 is for relaying the connection between the frame control board 740 and the gaming ball dispensing device 8.

[47-2. Command control when the complete function is deactivated]
The configuration of the modified pachinko machine 1 has been described above. Next, the countermeasures against new fraudulent acts that may be committed after the game has stopped due to the activation of the complete function will be described in the modified pachinko machine 1. In the modified pachinko machine 1, the complete function can be activated in the same manner as in the embodiments described above, and in the modified pachinko machine 1, the game stoppage due to the activation of the complete function (specific function) is released by turning on the power to the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch (specific operation) (operation release means). Figure 668 is a diagram illustrating the control when the power is turned on after the complete function has been activated in the modified pachinko machine 1.

In this modified pachinko machine 1, after the complete function is activated and gameplay is stopped, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch to release the gameplay stop, the main control board 1310 performs a process to initialize the complete function in the same manner as the complete function initialization means described above, and a complete function release command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 and the peripheral control board 1510. The complete function release command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the complete function release command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 are different types of commands. In the following, the complete function release command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be referred to as "complete function release command A," and the complete function release command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 will be referred to as "complete function release command B."

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the complete function release command A, it executes a complete function release notification indicating that the complete function has been deactivated. This notification either displays the deactivation of the complete function on the LCD screen or outputs an audio signal indicating that the complete function has been deactivated. This makes it possible to inform those nearby that the complete function has been deactivated after power-on, thus deterring fraudulent activities such as illegally restarting the power to a gaming machine with the activated complete function to allow for further gameplay.

Furthermore, upon receiving the complete function release command B, the frame control board 740 continuously outputs a complete function release signal (specific information) to an external device for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (specific information output means). As mentioned above, the external device is a game ball dispensing device installed outside the game machine, and may also be, for example, a management computer for the game hall, to notify that the complete function has been deactivated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall via the external device that the complete function has been deactivated after power-on, thus deterring fraudulent activities such as illegally restarting the power to a game machine with the complete function activated to allow for further gameplay.

Furthermore, in situations where the game stop function does not need to be released (i.e., when the complete function is not activated), there is no need to perform a complete function release notification when the power is turned on (in fact, it is better not to perform it in terms of avoiding inconvenience). Therefore, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch (i.e., when a normal power-on is performed), the main control board 1310 starts the game machine without sending complete function release commands A and B to the frame control board 740 or the peripheral control board 1510.

However, with the control configuration described above, it is conceivable that a new fraudulent act could be committed: the power could be cut off by some means while the game is stopped due to the activation of the complete function; then, to release the game stoppage, the power could be turned on while operating the RAM clear switch; then, the power could be immediately cut off again; and then, without operating the RAM clear switch, the power could be turned on again. If such fraudulent activity occurs, there is a risk that the game stoppage caused by the activation of the complete function could be released, and the notification of the complete function release could not be executed within a sufficient period, causing the gaming machine to return to a playable state.

Therefore, in the modified pachinko machine 1, the frame control board 740 is controlled in a new manner to deter the aforementioned fraudulent activities. Specifically, as shown in Figure 668, when the frame control board 740 receives the complete function release command B and starts outputting the complete function release signal to an external device, a configuration is added to store incomplete output information indicating that the signal is being output in the RAM of the frame control board 740. As mentioned above, the complete function release signal continues to be output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the output of the complete function release signal is completed after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the incomplete output information remains stored at least until the predetermined time has elapsed. Once the output of the complete function release signal is completed (after the predetermined time has elapsed), the incomplete output information indicating that the signal is being output is deleted. Furthermore, the incomplete output information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 can be backed up even when the power to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while the complete function release signal is being output, the incomplete output information indicating the signal output state remains stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740.

In this modified example, the frame control board 740 can determine whether or not incomplete output information indicating a signal output state is stored in the RAM when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch (i.e., when a normal power-on is performed). If it is determined that incomplete output information is stored in the RAM, it will re-output a complete function release signal to the external device, even though it is a normal power-on without operating the RAM clear switch. In other words, if incomplete output information is stored in the RAM when the power is turned on, even though the complete function release command B has not been sent from the main control board 1310, it is possible to output a complete function release signal to the external device as if the complete function release command B had been sent from the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in this modified version, when re-outputting the complete function release signal based on the fact that incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the output period is reset to a predetermined time (30 seconds) rather than the remaining output time before power cut-off. This allows the complete function release signal to be output completely again for a predetermined time (30 seconds) after power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, ensuring sufficient time for external devices to receive the complete function release signal.

Furthermore, when the complete function release signal is re-output based on the fact that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, it is assumed that the power has been turned on without the RAM clear switch being operated (normal power-on). Therefore, neither the complete function release command B nor the complete function release command A is transmitted from the main control board 1310. In other words, under conditions where the complete function release signal is re-output based on the fact that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the peripheral control board 1510 does not notify the user of the complete function release based on the reception of the complete function release command A. As a result, it appears as if the game has become playable without any notification, which can lead the cheater to mistakenly believe that their fraudulent activity has been successful, thus allowing them to remain in the area.

By configuring the system as described above, even if someone attempts to commit fraud by immediately restoring power after cutting it off to cancel the game stoppage caused by the activation of the complete function, the complete function activation signal will be re-output externally upon power restoration. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be detected through external devices. Furthermore, because the deactivation of the complete function is not reported, if the fraudster attempts to resume playing, it becomes easier for arcade staff to identify the fraudster, thus helping to prevent recurrence of fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the above modification, when re-outputting the complete function release signal based on the fact that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the output period is reset to a predetermined time (30 seconds) rather than the remaining output time before power cut-off. However, the following configuration is also possible. For example, along with the storage of the incomplete output information, remaining time information indicating the remaining output time before power cut-off is also stored. When power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch (normal power-on), if it is determined that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the remaining time information is referenced. If the remaining time based on the remaining time information is greater than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, a time sufficient for the external device to receive the complete function release signal; for example, 20 seconds or more), the complete function release signal is re-output based on that remaining time. If the remaining time based on the remaining time information is less than the predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds or more but less than 20 seconds), the complete function release signal is re-output based on a newly predetermined time (30 seconds). Such a configuration can also achieve the same anti-tampering effect as described above.

Furthermore, in the above-described modification, when the complete function release signal is re-output based on the fact that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the peripheral control board 1510 does not provide notification of the complete function release. However, notification may be provided separately through a location that is not visible to the player. For example, a specific notification element (e.g., a light-emitting part or an information display part) may be provided on the frame control board 740, which is difficult for the player to see. When the complete function release signal is re-output based on the fact that the incomplete output information is stored in RAM, the frame control board 740 may independently control the specific notification element to operate in a specific manner (e.g., flashing of the light-emitting part or display on the information display part) indicating the re-output of the complete function release signal. In such a configuration, external notification regarding the re-output becomes possible only on the back side of the gaming machine, allowing the gaming hall to become aware of the possibility of fraudulent activity through the island equipment, etc., further enhancing the effectiveness of the above-mentioned anti-fraud measures.

[47-3. Lending/Settlement of Balls]
In the modified pachinko machine 1 described above, the number of game balls consumed is not counted when they pass through the out-out port, but rather as the number of game balls launched from the ball launcher 680. By configuring it in this way, the game balls can be circulated within the game machine by supplying the game balls discharged from the out-out port to the ball launcher 680. In this case, since no actual game balls are discharged, it is not necessary to match the number of balls held by the player to actual game balls. With this configuration, the game can be played by managing only the number of balls held by the player.

In this modified pachinko machine 1, operating the dispensing button on the game ball dispensing device 8 (CR unit or cash dispenser) adds a number corresponding to the operation to the player's number of balls, making the machine ready to play. Furthermore, when the contact detection sensor 509 detects that the player has touched the handle lever 504, the machine becomes ready to launch game balls.

Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and wants to settle their remaining balls, they operate (press) the counting button switch 9180. The counting button switch 9180, when pressed while there are balls remaining on the frame control board 740 (number of balls > 0), allows the balls to be sent to an external device for settlement. Depending on the press time, the counting button switch 9180 can send balls one at a time or in predetermined quantities (for example, every 250 balls). The number of balls sent to the external device is transmitted to the management server 9 via the communication network, and an IC card storing that number of balls is ejected from the game ball dispensing device 8.

To briefly explain the external equipment (a game ball dispensing device installed outside the game machine), it is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island setup of the game hall (also referred to as a "sand"). While the illustration of the external equipment is omitted, it includes an input slot for cash or prepaid cards, a card slot for inserting/removing IC cards, a ball dispensing button switch, a return button switch, a display unit showing the amount inserted and the number of balls counted, etc. When cash or other payment is inserted into the input slot and the ball dispensing button switch is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed within the range of the inserted amount. In this embodiment, the number of dispensed game balls B is transmitted as digital data to the frame control board and also transmitted to the management server 9 via the communication network for management.

Furthermore, regarding the counting button switch 9180, if a player has balls and "short-presses" the counting button switch 9180 (for example, a single press duration of less than 500 ms), one game ball B is counted from the player's balls. If the counting button switch 9180 is "long-pressed" (for example, a single press duration of 500 ms or more), 250 game balls B are counted at predetermined time intervals (for example, 300 ms) while the button is long-pressed until the number of balls falls below 250. Once the number of balls falls below 250 while the button is long-pressed, game balls B are counted one at a time. Alternatively, if the counting button switch 9180 is "long-pressed" (for example, a single press duration of 500 ms or more), the entire number of balls held may be counted unconditionally, even if the button is not continuously pressed.

When the counting button switch 9180 is pressed, the number of balls displayed on the ball count display unit 9140 is subtracted and displayed. In this modified example, when the number of balls is subtracted and displayed, a count notification consisting of an audio output through a speaker is performed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The count notification is provided as a short count notification (such as a "beep" sound effect) corresponding to a short press of the counting button switch 9180, and a long count notification (such as special background music for counting) corresponding to a long press of the counting button switch 9180. Here, the long count notification (such as special background music for counting) is an audio output that continues for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this modified example), and when settling a large number of balls that cannot be settled in 20 seconds, the playback time of one long count notification, "20 seconds", is repeated multiple times until the counting is finished (the special background music for counting is played repeatedly). Furthermore, if the counting button switch 9180 is briefly pressed while game-related background music (BGM) is being played, the BGM takes precedence over the short count notification (a "beep" sound). If the counting button switch 9180 is long-pressed while game-related BGM is being played, the long count notification (such as special BGM for counting) takes precedence over the BGM (ending the BGM) and is then played.

[47-4. Game control during counting (settlement) of balls held]
In this modified version, a unique control mechanism is implemented regarding the counting (settlement) of the player's balls, thereby improving the convenience of gaming machines with ball counting (settlement) capabilities compared to conventional machines. This point will be explained below. Figure 669 is a diagram illustrating whether other operations can be performed when each operation—launching, counting (settlement), and dispensing—is executed.

In this modified pachinko machine 1, the machine can launch game balls while the handle touch (contact detection) sensor 509 detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504. However, during the settlement of the player's remaining balls via the counting button switch 9180, the machine is controlled to prohibit the launch of game balls. In this modified pachinko machine 1, the consumption of game balls is counted immediately after launch; therefore, the number of remaining balls does not decrease due to balls already present in the game area. Consequently, by prohibiting the launch of game balls during the settlement of remaining balls, it is possible to prevent discrepancies between the number of remaining balls and the number of balls settled, which would occur if game balls were consumed after the remaining balls had reached zero due to settlement.

Furthermore, if a player touches the handle lever 504 while the player is settling their ball balance (while operating the counting button switch 9180), not only is the launch of game balls prohibited, but the ongoing settlement process is also interrupted based on the detection of contact with the handle lever 504. This control method also prevents the player's ball balance from decreasing during settlement. Additionally, in situations where both the counting button switch 9180 and the handle lever 504 are being operated, the player's intentions (whether they want to settle or launch balls) may be unclear. Therefore, regardless of the player's intention, the system avoids causing discomfort by refraining from any control actions that contradict their wishes.

Furthermore, if the counting button switch 9180 is released while the settlement of the player's balls is interrupted, and only the handle lever 504 is being operated, the game will resume launching and the game will start without the need to re-operate the handle lever 504 (by temporarily de-contacting and then re-contacting it). This control allows for a quick restart of the game based on the continued operation of the handle lever 504, even if the player accidentally touches the counting button switch 9180 during ball launch, thereby prohibiting ball launching.

Furthermore, if the operation of the handle lever 504 is stopped while the counting button switch 9180 is being operated during the interruption of the ball settlement process (i.e., the handle lever 504 is made non-contact), the interrupted settlement may be resumed without having to re-operate the counting button switch 9180 (by depressing and then re-pressing it). This control allows for a quick resumption of the settlement process based on the continued operation of the counting button switch 9180, even if the player accidentally touches the handle lever 504 during the settlement process.

As described above, with this modified pachinko machine 1, even in cases of incorrect operation of the counting button switch 9180 and the handle lever 504, the convenience of the game machine, which has a ball counting (settlement) function, can be improved compared to conventional machines.

Furthermore, in the modified pachinko machine 1 described above, the counting notification is given during the settlement of the player's balls. However, if, for example, the player touches the handle lever 504 while a long counting notification (such as special background music for counting) is being output, the output of the long counting notification (such as special background music for counting) will also stop. Then, if the player stops operating the handle lever 504 while continuing to operate the counting button switch 9180 (i.e., the handle lever 504 is no longer touched), the interrupted settlement will resume without the player having to re-operate the counting button switch 9180 (by depressing and then re-pressing it). However, when the settlement resumes, the output of the long counting notification (such as special background music for counting) will continue from the point where it was interrupted. This prevents the long counting notification (such as special background music for counting) from being played again from the beginning, thus avoiding causing discomfort or unpleasantness to the player.

Furthermore, depending on the content of the special background music for counting (for example, music that includes message sounds), it is possible that the player may feel uncomfortable if the output continues from the point where the long counting notification (special background music for counting) was interrupted when settlement resumes. (For example, a message such as "You've won a lot, and it's getting late!" might be interrupted by "...die!", potentially causing discomfort to the player.) Considering these points, a further modification would be to restart the output from the beginning of the playback time when settlement resumes after stopping the operation of the handle lever 504 while continuing to operate the counting button switch 9180 (i.e., when the handle lever 504 is made non-contact), rather than starting from the point where the long counting notification (special background music for counting) was interrupted. This would avoid causing discomfort or unease to the player due to the interruption of the long counting notification (special background music for counting).

Furthermore, in this modified pachinko machine 1, if the player operates the handle lever 504 while operating the dispensing button, both the dispensing and launching of game balls can continue. Since dispensing game balls adds to the number of balls held, enabling the dispensing operation while game balls are being consumed allows the game to continue without interruption, thus preventing a decrease in enjoyment due to interruptions.

As described above, in this modified version, operation of the counting button switch 9180 is a condition that prohibits the launch of game balls. Furthermore, contact with the launch handle (handle lever 504) is a condition that prohibits (interrupts) the counting (settlement) operation. On the other hand, while the dispensing operation is possible during both the counting and launching operations, the counting operation is prohibited during the dispensing operation. Since the launching operation is prohibited while the counting operation is being performed, it is not possible to continue playing, thus minimizing the likelihood of reducing the enjoyment of the game.

The above explains the interrelationship between contact with the launch handle (handle lever 504), operation of the counting button switch 9180, and operation of the dispensing button. Now, we will further explain the relationship between contact with the launch handle (handle lever 504) and operation of the counting button switch 9180. Figure 678 illustrates the relationship between the launch operation and the counting operation in the pachinko machine 1 of this modified example.

In Figure 670(A), the player touches the launch handle (handle lever 504) from a state where the player is not in contact with the launch handle (handle lever 504) and the counting button switch 9180 is not operated (T01), which disables counting (settlement) (T02). If the player stops contacting the launch handle (handle lever 504) and operates the counting button switch 9180 in this state, the counting (settlement) of the player's balls will be performed (T03).

Subsequently, when the operation of the counting button switch 9180 is stopped, the launching device becomes ready to launch game balls, and operating the counting button switch 9180 again makes it possible to count (settle) the player's remaining balls (T04). If the player then attempts to operate the counting button switch 9180 while touching the launching handle (handle lever 504), both launching game balls and counting (settling) the player's remaining balls are prohibited (T05). If the player then stops touching the launching handle (handle lever 504) and operating the counting button switch 9180, the device transitions to a state where both game balls can be launched and the player's remaining balls can be counted (settled) (T06).

Next, in Figure 670(B), the player is initially attempting to operate the counting button switch 9180 while touching the launch handle (handle lever 504), thus prohibiting the launch of game balls and the counting (settlement) of the player's remaining balls (T11). Afterward, when the player stops operating the counting button switch 9180, the launch of game balls begins (T12). Furthermore, when the player stops touching the launch handle (releases their hand from the launch handle), the game transitions to a state where game balls can be launched and the player can count (settlement) their remaining balls (T13).

Furthermore, if the player attempts to operate the counting button switch 9180 while touching the launching handle (handle lever 504), the launching of game balls and the counting (settlement) of held balls become prohibited (T14). Subsequently, if the player ceases contact with the launching handle (handle lever 504) (releases their hand from the launching handle), the counting (settlement) of held balls is performed, and the launching of game balls becomes prohibited again (T15). Then, if the player stops operating the counting button switch 9180 while still ceasing contact with the launching handle (handle lever 504) (releases their hand from the launching handle), the system transitions to a state where game balls can be launched and held balls can be counted (settlement) (T16).

In Figure 670(C), the counting button switch 9180 is in operation, and the launch of game balls is prohibited (T21). If the player touches the launching handle (handle lever 504) in this state, the launching of game balls and the counting (settlement) of the player's remaining balls are prohibited (T22). Then, when the player stops touching the launching handle (handle lever 504) and stops operating the counting button switch 9180, the game transitions to a state where game balls can be launched and the counting (settlement) of the player's remaining balls is possible (T23). Subsequently, if the player operates the launching handle (handle lever 504), the launching of game balls begins, and the counting (settlement) of the player's remaining balls is prohibited (T24). Furthermore, if the player attempts to operate the counting button switch 9180, the launching of game balls and the counting (settlement) of the player's remaining balls are prohibited again (T25).

Finally, in this modified pachinko machine 1, the relationship between contact (operation) with the launch handle (handle lever 504) and operation of the counting button switch 9180 when the complete function is activated will be explained. Figure 671 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the launch operation and the counting operation when the complete function is activated in this modified pachinko machine 1.

First, at time t000, the launch handle (handle lever 504) is not in contact, and the counting button switch 9180 is not operated. The game balls are ready to be launched, and the number of balls held can be counted (settled) (T01). Subsequently, as shown in Figure 670(A), if the player touches the launch handle (handle lever 504), counting (settling) is prohibited (T02). Furthermore, the player stops touching the launch handle (handle lever 504), and the counting operation is performed (T03). After the counting operation is completed, the game balls are ready to be launched, and the counting operation can be performed (T04). After that, if the player touches the launch handle (handle lever 504) and attempts to operate the counting button switch 9180, the launch of game balls is prohibited, and the counting (settling) of the number of balls held is also prohibited (T05). Subsequently, when contact with the launch handle (handle lever 504) and operation of the counting button switch 9180 are stopped, the game balls become ready to be launched and the counting operation becomes possible (T06).

Then, with the launch of game balls prohibited and the counting (settlement) of held balls prohibited (T07), when the complete function is activated (time t040), the game stops. At this time, regardless of whether the counting operation is being performed or not, the launching operation of game balls is invalid (prohibited). On the other hand, the counting (settlement) operation of held balls can be performed regardless of whether the player is in contact with the launching handle (handle lever 504). This makes it possible to quickly settle the held balls when the complete function is activated while the player is in contact with (operating) the launching handle (handle lever 504) and operating the counting button switch 9180. Furthermore, it is possible to have the player wait while still in contact with (operating) the launching handle (handle lever 504) and operating the counting button switch 9180 immediately before the complete function is activated, thus avoiding wasting the player's time and preventing them from feeling annoyed.

Furthermore, while the above primarily described how counting (settlement) is prohibited when the player touches the launch handle (handle lever 504), other conditions may also be set for prohibiting the counting (settlement) of the player's balls. For example, the conditions for prohibiting the counting (settlement) of the player's balls do not have to be caused by player operation. For instance, counting (settlement) of the balls may be prohibited when the player operates a setting adjustment function (e.g., volume adjustment buttons or brightness adjustment buttons provided on the door frame 3 that allow adjustment of volume and brightness), or when the player operates a staff call function (e.g., a call button provided on the door frame 3 that allows calling a staff member).

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. Various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention, as described below.

In other words, while the embodiment primarily shows the application to a pachinko machine 1, it is not limited to this. It can also be applied to other gaming machines, such as those combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and similar effects can be achieved in these cases as well.

1. Pachinko machine (amusement machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 220 Second door frame component 300 Performance operation unit 301 Performance operation section 302 Rotation operation section (first operation section)
303 Pressing operation section (second operation section)
303a Pressing part (operation receiving part)
350 First door frame component 500 Handle (unit)
931 Power supply board 932 Power switch (setting change mode confirmation means, setting change mode start means)
951 Dispensing control board (ball information control means)
954 RAM Clear Switch (Means for confirming setting change mode, means for starting setting change mode)
971 Setting key (means for confirming setting change mode, means for starting setting change mode)
974 Setting display 1310 Main control board (game control means)
1311 Main control MPU (CPU, arithmetic means, arithmetic device, control means, master)
1312 Main control RAM (setting value information storage means)
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Special feature ratio display (base display, performance display monitor)
1341 Parallel-to-Serial Conversion Circuit (Slave)
1342, 1343, 1345, 1346 Serial-to-Parallel Conversion Circuit (Slave)
1400 Function display unit 1510 Peripheral control board (performance control means, performance control board)
1511 Peripheral control unit 1512 Performance display control unit 1600 Main liquid crystal display device (display device, performance display device, performance display means)
2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 2007 Counting ball entry unit 2007b Counting ball entry port 4000 Slot machine (amusement machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol change display device 4301 Reel 4600 Main board (game control device, game control means)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Performance control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I/O area 4940 Parameter information setting area 6100 First area 6101 Unmounted area 6102 Component mounting area 6200 Second area 6300 Test component mounting area 8210 Decorative pattern 8220 Mini pattern (Fourth pattern)
8230 Display of held symbols 8240 Current held symbol (current held symbol)
8250 Pending number display 8260 Operation promotion display 8270 Special display 8401 Production setting display section (setting information disclosure means, setting information ambiguity means)
8411 Season Selection Unit (Performance Setting Means)
8421 Favorite Zodiac Sign Selection Section (Performance Setting Method)
8431 Season Selection Unit (Performance Setting Means)
8441 Favorite Zodiac Sign Setting Section (Method for Setting the Performance)
8501 Light-emitting element 8502 Point display unit 8601 Pre-acquired object display unit 9200 Bulging unit 9140 Ball count display unit 9180 Counting button switch 04TKK0010 Peripheral control IC (performance control means)
04TKK0011 CPU
04TKK0012 RAM
04TKK0030 Sound source IC
04TKK0040 Sound ROM
04TKK0060 VDP (Image display control means, video control means)
04TKK0061 CG Data Decoder (Image Information Conversion Means)
04TKK0063 Pixel Shader (Image Processing Means)
04TKK0090 Image RAM (VRAM, temporary image storage means)
04TKK0091 Frame buffer 04TKK0092 Off-screen buffer 05TKK0013 Boot ROM
05TKK0020 External RAM (temporary storage means)
05TKK0070 Performance Data ROM (Image ROM, CGROM, Image Information Storage Means) 05TKK0071 SATA Controller (Data Management Means)
05TKK0072 Cache memory (second storage medium)
05TKK0073 Storage device (first storage medium)
05TKK0101 Decode buffer (temporary storage means, common decode buffer, common buffer area, individual decode buffer)
06TKK0010 Memory Controller 06TKK0020 RAM Diagnostic Circuit 06TKK0016, 06TKK0017 Termination Resistors 06TKK0018, 06TKK0021 Terminal 06TKK0022 Memory Device (Memory Element)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that enables the awarding of benefits based on the results of a lottery,
A pattern display means that displays a changing pattern based on the results of the aforementioned lottery,
A means for executing a performance that can perform a first specific performance and a second specific performance,
An effect setting means that can change and set the ratio at which the first specific effect is executed and the ratio at which the second specific effect is executed by the effect execution means,
A setting operation means that allows operations to be performed to execute the change settings by the aforementioned performance setting means,
In a situation where the rate at which the first specific performance is executed is changed by the performance setting means, a setting information disclosure means provides a display that makes it possible to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is executed has been changed,
In a situation where the execution rate of the first specific performance is changed by the performance setting means, the setting information ambiguity means displays an ambiguous indication that allows the user to understand that there is a performance whose execution rate has been changed by the performance setting means, without explicitly indicating which performance the execution rate of has been changed by the performance setting means.
A warning display means that displays a warning when a predetermined abnormality occurs,
Equipped with,
The setting information ambiguation means enables the display of the ambiguous display in an area that does not overlap with the pattern.
The display that allows us to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is performed has been changed is provided on a display device that displays the changing symbols by the symbol display means during the symbol change in which the symbols are changing, and the symbols displayed on the display device during the symbol change are displayed in a visible state.
The warning display means displays the warning display in a position that does not overlap with a display that allows the user to understand that the rate at which the first specific performance is executed during the pattern change when the pattern is changing has been changed.
When the rate at which the second specific performance is executed is changed by the performance setting means, the motion performance in which the movable body moves is more likely to be executed, and when a specific condition is met in the state in which the rate at which the second specific performance is executed is changed, the motion performance is executed.
It has a special setting operation means that allows for setting changes different from the settings changed by the aforementioned performance setting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the change settings made by the special setting operation means can be performed both during the symbol change when the symbols are changing and during the symbol change standby when the symbols are not changing.